CFR 2013 Title29 Vol5 Part1910 PDF

Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt.
1910
(d) Location of sample Cooperative Subpart B—Adoption and Extension of
Agreement. A sample Agreement is Established Federal Standards
available for inspection at all Regional
1910.11 Scope and purpose.
Offices of the Occupational Safety and 1910.12 Construction work.
Health Administration of the U.S. De- 1910.15 Shipyard employment.
partment of Labor. 1910.16 Longshoring and marine terminals.
(e) Action upon requests. The State 1910.17 Effective dates.
will be notified within a reasonable pe- 1910.18 Changes in established Federal
standards.
riod of time of any decision concerning 1910.19 Special provisions for air contami-
its request for a Cooperative Agree- nants.
ment. If a request is denied, the State
will be informed in writing of the rea- Subpart C [Reserved]
sons supporting the decision. If a Coop-
erative Agreement is negotiated, the Subpart D—Walking-Working Surfaces
initial finding will specify the period 1910.21 Definitions.
for the Agreement. Additional funds 1910.22 General requirements.
may be added at a later time provided 1910.23 Guarding floor and wall openings
the activity is satisfactorily carried and holes.
out and appropriations are available. 1910.24 Fixed industrial stairs.
1910.25 Portable wood ladders.
The State may also be required to
1910.26 Portable metal ladders.
amend the Agreement for continued 1910.27 Fixed ladders.
support. 1910.28 Safety requirements for scaffolding.
(f) Termination. Either party may ter- 1910.29 Manually propelled mobile ladder
minate a Cooperative Agreement under stands and scaffolds (towers).
this part upon 30 days’ written notice 1910.30 Other working surfaces.
to the other party. Subpart E—Exit Routes and Emergency
(Approved by the Office of Management and Planning
Budget under control number 1218–0110)
1910.33 Table of contents.
[49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, as amended at 54 1910.34 Coverage and definitions.
FR 24333, June 7, 1989] 1910.35 Compliance with alternate exit-
route codes.
§ 1908.11 Exclusions. 1910.36 Design and construction require-
ments for exit routes.
A Cooperative Agreement under this 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and oper-
part will not restrict in any manner ational features for exit routes.
the authority and responsibility of the 1910.38 Emergency action plans.
Assistant Secretary under sections 8, 9, 1910.39 Fire prevention plans.
10, 13, and 17 of the Act, or any cor- APPENDIX TO SUBPART E—EXIT ROUTES,
responding State authority. EMERGENCY ACTION PLANS, AND FIRE PRE-
VENTION PLANS
PART 1910—OCCUPATIONAL Subpart F—Powered Platforms, Manlifts,

SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS and Vehicle-Mounted Work Platforms
1910.66 Powered platforms for building
Subpart A—General maintenance.
1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating and ro-
Sec.
tating work platforms.
1910.1 Purpose and scope. 1910.68 Manlifts.
1910.2 Definitions.
1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, amend- Subpart G—Occupational Health and
ment, or repeal of a standard. Environmental Control
1910.4 Amendments to this part.
1910.5 Applicability of standards. 1910.94 Ventilation.
1910.6 Incorporation by reference. 1910.95 Occupational noise exposure.
1910.97 Nonionizing radiation.
1910.7 Definition and requirements for a na-
1910.98 Effective dates.
tionally recognized testing laboratory.
1910.8 OMB control numbers under the Pa- Subpart H—Hazardous Materials
perwork Reduction Act.
1910.9 Compliance duties owed to each em- 1910.101 Compressed gases (general require-
ployee. ments).
87
VerDate Mar<15>2010 18:18 Jul 22, 2013 Jkt 229116 PO 00000 Frm 00097 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V5.TXT ofr150 PsN: PC150
Pt. 1910 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
1910.102 Acetylene. Subpart L—Fire Protection
1910.103 Hydrogen.
1910.104 Oxygen. 1910.155 Scope, application and definitions
1910.105 Nitrous oxide. applicable to this subpart.
1910.106 Flammable liquids. 1910.156 Fire brigades.
1910.107 Spray finishing using flammable
and combustible materials. PORTABLE FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
1910.108 [Reserved] 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
1910.109 Explosives and blasting agents. 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
1910.110 Storage and handling of liquified
petroleum gases. FIXED FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
1910.111 Storage and handling of anhydrous 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
ammonia. 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, gen-
1910.112–1910.113 [Reserved] eral.
1910.119 Process safety management of high- 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry
ly hazardous chemicals. chemical.
1910.120 Hazardous waste operations and 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gas-
emergency response. eous agent.
1910.121 [Reserved] 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water
DIPPING AND COATING OPERATIONS spray and foam.
1910.122 Table of contents. OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

1910.123 Dipping and coating operations:
1910.164 Fire detection systems.
Coverage and definitions.
1910.165 Employee alarm systems.
1910.124 General requirements for dipping
and coating operations. APPENDICES TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910—
1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping NOTE
and coating operations that use flam- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L—FIRE PROTECTION
mable liquids or liquids with flashpoints APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L—NATIONAL CON-
greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C). SENSUS STANDARDS
1910.126 Additional requirements for special APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L—FIRE PROTECTION
dipping and coating operations. REFERENCES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L—AVAILABILITY OF
Subpart I—Personal Protective Equipment PUBLICATIONS INCORPORATED BY REF-
ERENCE IN SECTION 1910.156 FIRE BRIGADES
1910.132 General requirements. APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L—TEST METHODS
1910.133 Eye and face protection. FOR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
1910.134 Respiratory protection.
1910.135 Head protection. Subpart M—Compressed Gas and
1910.136 Foot protection. Compressed Air Equipment
1910.137 Electrical protective equipment.
1910.138 Hand protection. 1910.166–1910.168 [Reserved]
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART I—REFERENCES FOR 1910.169 Air receivers.
FURTHER INFORMATION (NON-MANDATORY)
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART I—NON-MANDATORY Subpart N—Materials Handling and
COMPLIANCE GUIDELINES FOR HAZARD AS- Storage
SESSMENT AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT SELECTION 1910.176 Handling materials—general.
1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and single
Subpart J—General Environmental Controls piece rim wheels.
1910.178 Powered industrial trucks.
1910.141 Sanitation. 1910.179 Overhead and gantry cranes.
1910.142 Temporary labor camps. 1910.180 Crawler locomotive and truck
1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal sys- cranes.
tems. [Reserved] 1910.181 Derricks.
1910.144 Safety color code for marking phys- 1910.183 Helicopters.
ical hazards. 1910.184 Slings.
1910.145 Specifications for accident preven-
tion signs and tags. Subpart O—Machinery and Machine
1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces. Guarding
1910.147 The control of hazardous energy
(lockout/tagout). 1910.211 Definitions.
1910.212 General requirements for all ma-
Subpart K—Medical and First Aid chines.
1910.213 Woodworking machinery require-
1910.151 Medical services and first aid. ments.
1910.152 [Reserved] 1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Reserved]
88
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910
1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery. SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE
1910.216 Mills and calenders in the rubber REQUIREMENTS
and plastics industries.
1910.217 Mechanical power presses. 1910.361–1910.380 [Reserved]
1910.218 Forging machines. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL
1910.219 Mechanical power-transmission ap- EQUIPMENT
paratus.
1910.381–1910.398 [Reserved]
Subpart P—Hand and Portable Powered
Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment DEFINITIONS
1910.399 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1910.241 Definitions.
part.
1910.242 Hand and portable powered tools
and equipment, general. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S—REFERENCE DOC-
1910.243 Guarding of portable powered tools. UMENTS
1910.244 Other portable tools and equip- APPENDIX B TO SUBPART S—EXPLANATORY
ment. DATA [RESERVED]
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART S—TABLES, NOTES,
Subpart Q—Welding, Cutting and Brazing AND CHARTS [RESERVED]
1910.251 Definitions. Subpart T—Commercial Diving Operations

1910.252 General requirements.
1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding and cut- GENERAL
ting.
1910.254 Arc welding and cutting. 1910.401 Scope and application.
1910.255 Resistance welding. 1910.402 Definitions.
Subpart R—Special Industries PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS

1910.410 Qualifications of dive team.
1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.
1910.262 Textiles. GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
1910.263 Bakery equipment.
1910.264 Laundry machinery and operations. 1910.420 Safe practices manual.
1910.265 Sawmills. 1910.421 Pre-dive procedures.
1910.266 Logging operations. 1910.422 Procedures during dive.
1910.268 Telecommunications. 1910.423 Post-dive procedures.
1910.269 Electric power generation, trans-
mission, and distribution. SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
1910.272 Grain handling facilities.
1910.424 SCUBA diving.
Subpart S—Electrical 1910.425 Surface-supplied air diving.
1910.426 Mixed-gas diving.
GENERAL 1910.427 Liveboating.
1910.301 Introduction.
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS
DESIGN SAFETY STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL 1910.430 Equipment.
SYSTEMS
1910.302 Electric utilization systems. RECORDKEEPING
1910.303 General. 1910.440 Recordkeeping requirements.
1910.304 Wiring design and protection.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART T—EXAMPLES OF
1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and
CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR
equipment for general use.
LIMIT EXPOSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDI-
1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and in-
TIONS
stallations.
1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART T—GUIDELINES FOR
1910.308 Special systems. SCIENTIFIC DIVING
1910.309–1910.330 [Reserved] APPENDIX C TO SUBPART T—ALTERNATIVE
CONDITIONS UNDER § 1910.401(a)(3) FOR
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES RECREATIONAL DIVING INSTRUCTORS AND
DIVING GUIDES (MANDATORY)
1910.331 Scope.
1910.332 Training.
1910.333 Selection and use of work practices. Subparts U–Y [Reserved]
1910.334 Use of equipment. 1910.901–1910.999 [Reserved]
1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protec-
tion. SOURCE: 39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, unless
1910.336–1910.360 [Reserved] otherwise noted.
89
§ 1910.1 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
Subpart A—General § 1910.2 Definitions.

As used in this part, unless the con-
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec- text clearly requires otherwise:
retary of Labor’s Order Numbers 12–71 (36 FR (a) Act means the Williams-Steiger
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1– Occupational Safety and Health Act of
90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 1970 (84 Stat. 1590).
50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR (b) Assistant Secretary of Labor means
31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR the Assistant Secretary of Labor for
3912), as applicable. Occupational Safety and Health;
Sections 1910.6, 1910.7, 1910.8 and 1910.9 also (c) Employer means a person engaged
issued under 29 CFR 1911. Section 1910.7(f) in a business affecting commerce who
also issued under 31 U.S.C. 9701, 29 U.S.C. 9a,
has employees, but does not include
5 U.S.C. 553; Public Law 106–113 (113 Stat.
the United States or any State or po-
1501A–222); Pub. L. 11–8 and 111–317; and OMB
Circular A–25 (dated July 8, 1993) (58 FR
litical subdivision of a State;
38142, July 15, 1993). (d) Employee means an employee of an
employer who is employed in a busi-
§ 1910.1 Purpose and scope. ness of his employer which affects com-
merce;
(a) Section 6(a) of the Williams- (e) Commerce means trade, traffic,
Steiger Occupational Safety and commerce, transportation, or commu-
Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1593) pro- nication among the several States, or
vides that ‘‘without regard to chapter 5 between a State and any place outside
of title 5, United States Code, or to the thereof, or within the District of Co-
other subsections of this section, the lumbia, or a possession of the United
Secretary shall, as soon as practicable States (other than the Trust Territory
during the period beginning with the of the Pacific Islands), or between
effective date of this Act and ending 2 points in the same State but through a
years after such date, by rule promul- point outside thereof;
gate as an occupational safety or (f) Standard means a standard which
health standard any national requires conditions, or the adoption or
concensus standard, and any estab- use of one or more practices, means,
lished Federal standard, unless he de- methods, operations, or processes, rea-
termines that the promulgation of such sonably necessary or appropriate to
a standard would not result in im- provide safe or healthful employment
proved safety or health for specifically and places of employment;
designated employees.’’ The legislative (g) National consensus standard means
purpose of this provision is to estab- any standard or modification thereof
which (1) has been adopted and promul-
lish, as rapidly as possible and without
gated by a nationally recognized stand-
regard to the rule-making provisions of
ards-producing organization under pro-
the Administrative Procedure Act,
cedures whereby it can be determined
standards with which industries are
by the Secretary of Labor or by the As-
generally familiar, and on whose adop-
sistant Secretary of Labor that persons
tion interested and affected persons interested and affected by the scope or
have already had an opportunity to ex- provisions of the standard have reached
press their views. Such standards are substantial agreement on its adoption,
either (1) national concensus standards (2) was formulated in a manner which
on whose adoption affected persons afforded an opportunity for diverse
have reached substantial agreement, or views to be considered, and (3) has been
(2) Federal standards already estab- designated as such a standard by the
lished by Federal statutes or regula- Secretary or the Assistant Secretary,
tions. after consultation with other appro-
(b) This part carries out the directive priate Federal agencies; and
to the Secretary of Labor under section (h) Established Federal standard means
6(a) of the Act. It contains occupa- any operative standard established by
tional safety and health standards any agency of the United States and in
which have been found to be national effect on April 28, 1971, or contained in
consensus standards or established any Act of Congress in force on the
Federal standards. date of enactment of the Williams-
90
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.5
Steiger Occupational Safety and sensus standard and any established
Health Act. Federal standard, pursuant to and in
accordance with section 6(a) of the Act,
§ 1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, and, in addition, may modify or revoke
amendment, or repeal of a stand- any standard in this part 1910. In the
ard.
event of conflict among any such
(a) Any interested person may peti- standards, the Assistant Secretary of
tion in writing the Assistant Secretary Labor shall take the action necessary
of Labor to promulgate, modify, or re- to eliminate the conflict, including the
voke a standard. The petition should revocation or modification of a stand-
set forth the terms or the substance of ard in this part, so as to assure the
the rule desired, the effects thereof if greatest protection of the safety or
promulgated, and the reasons therefor. health of the affected employees.
(b)(1) The relevant legislative history
of the Act indicates congressional rec- § 1910.5 Applicability of standards.
ognition of the American National
(a) Except as provided in paragraph
Standards Institute and the National
(b) of this section, the standards con-
Fire Protection Association as the
major sources of national consensus tained in this part shall apply with re-
standards. National consensus stand- spect to employments performed in a
ards adopted on May 29, 1971, pursuant workplace in a State, the District of
to section 6(a) of the Act are from Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puer-
those two sources. However, any orga- to Rico, the Virgin Islands, American
nization which deems itself a producer Samoa, Guam, Trust Territory of the
of national consensus standards, within Pacific Islands, Wake Island, Outer
the meaning of section 3(9) of the Act, Continental Shelf lands defined in the
is invited to submit in writing to the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act,
Assistant Secretary of Labor at any Johnston Island, and the Canal Zone.
time prior to February 1, 1973, all rel- (b) None of the standards in this part
evant information which may enable shall apply to working conditions of
the Assistant Secretary to determine employees with respect to which Fed-
whether any of its standards satisfy eral agencies other than the Depart-
the requirements of the definition of ment of Labor, or State agencies act-
‘‘national consensus standard’’ in sec- ing under section 274 of the Atomic En-
tion 3(9) of the Act. ergy Act of 1954, as amended (42 U.S.C.
(2) Within a reasonable time after the 2021), exercise statutory authority to
receipt of a submission pursuant to prescribe or enforce standards or regu-
paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the As- lations affecting occupational safety or
sistant Secretary of Labor shall pub- health.
lish or cause to be published in the (c)(1) If a particular standard is spe-
FEDERAL REGISTER a notice of such cifically applicable to a condition,
submission, and shall afford interested practice, means, method, operation, or
persons a reasonable opportunity to process, it shall prevail over any dif-
present written data, views, or argu- ferent general standard which might
ments with regard to the question otherwise be applicable to the same
whether any standards of the organiza- condition, practice, means, method, op-
tion making the submission are na- eration, or process. For example,
tional consensus standards. § 1915.23(c)(3) of this title prescribes
personal protective equipment for cer-
§ 1910.4 Amendments to this part. tain ship repairmen working in speci-
(a) The Assistant Secretary of Labor fied areas. Such a standard shall apply,
shall have all of the authority of the and shall not be deemed modified nor
Secretary of Labor under sections 3(9) superseded by any different general
and 6(a) of the Act. standard whose provisions might other-
(b) The Assistant Secretary of Labor wise be applicable, to the ship repair-
may at any time before April 28, 1973, men working in the areas specified in
on his own motion or upon the written § 1915.23(c)(3).
petition of any person, by rule promul- (2) On the other hand, any standard
gate as a standard any national con- shall apply according to its terms to
91
any employment and place of employ- will be published in the FEDERAL REG-
ment in any industry, even though par- ISTER. These incorporations by ref-
ticular standards are also prescribed erence were approved by the Director
for the industry, as in subpart B or sub- of the Federal Register in accordance
part R of this part, to the extent that with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
none of such particular standards ap- (4) Copies of standards listed in this
plies. To illustrate, the general stand- section and issued by private standards
ard regarding noise exposure in § 1910.95 organizations are available for pur-
applies to employments and places of chase from the issuing organizations at
employment in pulp, paper, and paper- the addresses or through the other con-
board mills covered by § 1910.261. tact information listed below for these
(d) In the event a standard protects private standards organizations. In ad-
on its face a class of persons larger dition, these standards are available
than employees, the standard shall be for inspection at any Regional Office of
applicable under this part only to em- the Occupational Safety and Health
ployees and their employment and Administration (OSHA), or at the
places of employment. OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department
(e) [Reserved] of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW.,
(f) An employer who is in compliance Room N–2625, Washington, DC 20210;
with any standard in this part shall be telephone: 202–693–2350 (TTY number:
deemed to be in compliance with the 877–889–5627). They are also available
requirement of section 5(a)(1) of the for inspection at the National Archives
Act, but only to the extent of the con- and Records Administration (NARA).
dition, practice, means, method, oper- For information on the availability of
ation, or process covered by the stand- these standards at NARA, telephone:
ard. 202–741–6030, or go to http://
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 58 www.archives.gov/federallregister/
FR 35308, June 30, 1993] codeloflfederallregulations/
ibrllocations.html.
§ 1910.6 Incorporation by reference. (b) The following material is avail-
(a)(1) The standards of agencies of able for purchase from the American
the U.S. Government, and organiza- Conference of Governmental Industrial
tions which are not agencies of the Hygienists (ACGIH), 1014 Broadway,
U.S. Government which are incor- Cincinnati OH 45202:
porated by reference in this part, have (1) ‘‘Industrial Ventilation: A Manual
the same force and effect as other of Recommended Practice’’ (22nd ed.,
standards in this part. Only the manda- 1995), incorporation by reference (IBR)
tory provisions (i.e., provisions con- approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iii).
taining the word ‘‘shall’’ or other man- (2) Threshold Limit Values and Bio-
datory language) of standards incor- logical Exposure Indices for 1986–87
porated by reference are adopted as (1986), IBR approved for § 1910.120, PEL
standards under the Occupational Safe- definition.
ty and Health Act. (c) The following material is avail-
(2) Any changes in the standards in- able for purchase from the American
corporated by reference in this part Society of Agricultural Engineers
and an official historic file of such (ASAE), 2950 Niles Road, Post Office
changes are available for inspection in Box 229, St. Joseph, MI 49085:
the Docket Office at the national office (1) ASAE Emblem for Identifying
of the Occupational Safety and Health Slow Moving Vehicles, ASAE S276.2
Administration, U.S. Department of (1968), IBR approved for § 1910.145(d)(10).
Labor, Washington, DC 20910; tele- (2) [Reserved]
phone: 202–693–2350 (TTY number: 877– (d) The following material is avail-
889–5627). able for purchase from the Agriculture
(3) The materials listed in paragraphs Ammonia Institute-Rubber Manufac-
(b) through (w) of this section are in- turers (AAI-RMA) Association, 1400 K
corporated by reference in the cor- St. NW, Washington DC 20005:
responding sections noted as they exist (1) AAI-RMA Specifications for An-
on the date of the approval, and a no- hydrous Ammonia Hose, IBR approved
tice of any change in these materials for § 1910.111(b)(8)(i).
92
(2) [Reserved] Wheels, IBR approved for
(e) Except as noted, copies of the §§ 1910.215(b)(12) and 1910.218(j).
standards listed below in this para- (16) ANSI B15.1–53 (R 58) Safety Code
graph are available for purchase from for Mechanical Power Transmission
the American National Standards In- Apparatus, IBR approved for
stitute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, 4th §§ 1910.68(b)(4) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(ix),
Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (b)(1), (e)(3), (e)(9), (f)(4), (j)(5)(iv),
212–642–4900; fax: 212–398–0023; Web site: (k)(12), and (l)(3).
http://www.ansi.org. (17) ANSI B20.1–57 Safety Code for
(1)–(2) [Reserved] Conveyors, Cableways, and Related
(3) ANSI A11.1–65 (R 70) Practice for Equipment, IBR approved for
Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for §§ 1910.218(j)(3); 1910.261 (a)(3)(x), (b)(1),
§§ 1910.219(c)(5)(iii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(i), (c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2);
(c)(10), and (k)(21); and 1910.265(c)(2). 1910.265(c)(18)(i).
(4) ANSI A11.1–65 Practice for Indus- (18) ANSI B30.2–43 (R 52) Safety Code
trial Lighting, IBR approved for for Cranes, Derricks, and Hoists, IBR
§§ 1910.262(c)(6) and 1910.265(d)(2)(i)(a). approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xi),
(5) [Reserved] (c)(2)(vi), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv).
(6) ANSI A13.1–56 Scheme for the (19) ANSI B30.2.0–67 Safety Code for
Identification of Piping Systems, IBR Overhead and Gantry Cranes, IBR ap-
approved for §§ 1910.253(d)(4)(ii); proved for §§ 1910.179(b)(2); 1910.261
1910.261(a)(3)(iii); 1910.262(c)(7). (a)(3)(xii), (c)(2)(v), and (c)(8) (i) and
(iv).
(7) ANSI A14.1–68 Safety Code for
(20) ANSI B30.5–68 Safety Code for
Portable Wood Ladders, Supplemented
Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck
by ANSI A14.1a–77, IBR approved for
Cranes, IBR approved for
§ 1910.261 (a)(3)(iv) and (c)(3)(i).
§§ 1910.180(b)(2) and 1910.261(a)(3)(xiii).
(8) ANSI A14.2–56 Safety Code for
(21) ANSI B30.6–69 Safety Code for
Portable Metal Ladders, Supplemented
Derricks, IBR approved for
by ANSI A14.2a–77, IBR approved for
§§ 1910.181(b)(2) and 1910.268(j)(4)(iv) (E)
§ 1910.261 (a)(3)(v) and (c)(3)(i).
and (H).
(9) ANSI A14.3–56 Safety Code for (22) ANSI B31.1–55 Code for Pressure
Fixed Ladders, IBR approved for Piping, IBR approved for
§§ 1910.68(b) (4) and (12); 1910.179(c)(2); § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
and 1910.261 (a)(3)(vi) and (c)(3)(i). (23) ANSI B31.1–67, IBR approved for
(10) ANSI A17.1–65 Safety Code for § 1910.253(d)(1)(i)(A)
Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving (24) ANSI B31.1a–63 Addenda to ANSI
Walks, Including Supplements, A17.1a B31.1 (1955), IBR approved for
(1967); A17.1b (1968); A17.1c (1969); A17.1d § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
(1970), IBR approved for § 1910.261 (25) ANSI B31.1–67 and Addenda B31.1
(a)(3)(vii), (g)(11)(i), and (l)(4). (1969) Code for Pressure Piping, IBR ap-
(11) ANSI A17.2–60 Practice for the proved for §§ 1910.103(b)(1)(iii)(b);
Inspection of Elevators, Including Sup- 1910.104(b)(5)(ii); 1910.218 (d)(4) and
plements, A17.2a (1965), A17.2b (1967), (e)(1)(iv); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xiv) and
IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(viii). (g)(18)(iii).
(12) ANSI A90.1–69 Safety Standard (26) ANSI B31.2–68 Fuel Gas Piping,
for Manlifts, IBR approved for IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
§ 1910.68(b)(3). (27) ANSI B31.3–66 Petroleum Refin-
(13) ANSI A92.2–69 Standard for Vehi- ery Piping, IBR approved for
cle Mounted Elevating and Rotating § 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b).
Work Platforms, IBR approved for (28) ANSI B31.5–66 Addenda B31.5a
§ 1910.67 (b)(1), (2), (c)(3), and (4) and (1968) Refrigeration Piping, IB ap-
1910.268(s)(1)(v). proved for §§ 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b) and
(14) ANSI A120.1–70 Safety Code for 1910.111(b)(7)(iii).
Powered Platforms for Exterior Build- (29) ANSI B56.1–69 Safety Standard
ing Maintenance, IBR approved for for Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR ap-
§ 1910.66 app. D (b) through (d). proved for §§ 1910.178(a) (2) and (3) and
(15) ANSI B7.1–70 Safety Code for the 1910.261 (a)(3)(xv), (b)(6), (m)(2), and
Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive (m)(5)(iii).
93
(30) ANSI B57.1–65 Compressed Gas (49) ANSI Z9.1–51 Safety Code for
Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Con- Ventilation and Operation of Open Sur-
nections, IBR approved for face Tanks, IBR approved for
§ 1910.253(b)(1)(iii). 1910.261(a)(3)(xix), (g)(18)(v), and
(31) [Reserved] (h)(2)(i).
(32) ANSI B175.1–1991, Safety Require- (50) ANSI Z9.1–71 Practices for Ven-
ments for Gasoline-Powered Chain tilation and Operation of Open-Surface
Saws 1910.266(e)(2)(i). Tanks, IBR approved for
(33) [Reserved] § 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).
(34) ANSI C33.2–56 Safety Standard (51) ANSI Z9.2–60 Fundamentals Gov-
for Transformer-Type Arc Welding Ma- erning the Design and Operation of
chines, IBR approved for § 1910.254(b)(1). Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved
(35) [Reserved] for §§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i) introductory text,
(36) ANSI H23.1–70 Seamless Copper (a)(6) introductory text, (b)(3)(ix),
Water Tube Specification, IBR ap- (b)(4)(i) and (ii), (c)(3)(i) introductory
proved for § 1910.110(b) (8)(ii) and text, (c)(5)(iii)(b), and (c)(7)(iv)(a);
(13)(ii)(b)(1). 1910.261(a)(3)(xx), (g)(1)(i) and (iii), and
(37) ANSI H38.7–69 Specification for (h)(2)(ii).
Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe and (52) ANSI Z9.2–79 Fundamentals Gov-
Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved erning the Design and Operation of
for § 1910.110(b)(8)(i). Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved
(38) ANSI J6.4–71 Standard Specifica- for § 1910.124(b)(4)(i).
tion for Rubber Insulating Blankets, (53) ANSI Z12.12–68 Standard for the
IBR approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explo-
(n)(11)(v). sions, IBR approved for § 1910.261
(39) ANSI J6.6–71 Standard Specifica- (a)(3)(xxi), (d)(1)(i), (f)(2)(iv), and
tion for Rubber Insulating Gloves, IBR (g)(1)(i).
approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and (54) ANSI Z12.20–62 (R 69) Code for the
(n)(11)(iv). Prevention of Dust Explosions in
(40) ANSI K13.1–67 Identification of Woodworking and Wood Flour Manu-
Gas Mask Canisters, IBR approved for facturing Plants, IBR approved for
§ 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvi) and (h)(2)(iii). § 1910.265(c)(20)(i).
(41) ANSI K61.1–60 Safety Require- (55) ANSI Z21.30–64 Requirements for
ments for the Storage and Handling of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Instal-
Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for lations, IBR approved for
§ 1910.111(b)(11)(i). § 1910.265(c)(15).
(42) ANSI K61.1–66 Safety Require- (56) ANSI Z24.22–57 Method of Meas-
ments for the Storage and Handling of urement of Real-Ear Attenuation of
Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for Ear Protectors at Threshold, IBR ap-
§ 1910.111(b)(11)(i). proved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxii).
(43) ANSI O1.1–54 (R 61) Safety Code (57) ANSI Z33.1–61 Installation of
for Woodworking Machinery, IBR ap- Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust,
proved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvii), (e)(7), Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con-
and (i)(2). veying, IBR approved for
(44) ANSI S1.4–71 (R 76) Specification §§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiii)
for Sound Level Meters, IBR approved and (f)(5); and 1910.265(c)(20)(i).
for § 1910.95 appendixes D and I. (58) ANSI Z33.1–66 Installation of
(45) ANSI S1.11–71 (R 76) Specification Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust,
for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Oc- Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con-
tave Band Filter Sets, IBR approved veying, IBR approved for
for § 1910.95 appendix D. § 1910.94(a)(2)(ii).
(46) ANSI S3.6–69 Specifications for (59) ANSI Z35.1–68 Specifications for
Audiometers, IBR approved for Accident Prevention Signs, IBR ap-
§ 1910.95(h)(2) and (5)(ii) and appendix D. proved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiv) and
(47) ANSI Z4.1–68 Requirements for (c)(16).
Sanitation in Places of Employment, (60) ANSI Z41–1999, American Na-
IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii) tional Standard for Personal Protec-
and (g)(15)(vi). tion—Protective Footwear; IBR ap-
(48) [Reserved] proved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(ii). Copies of
94
ANSI Z41–1999 are available for pur- only from the American Society of
chase only from the National Safety Safety Engineers, 1800 East Oakton
Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143– Street, Des Plaines, IL 60018–2187; tele-
0558; telephone: 1–800–621–7619; fax: 708– phone: 847–699–2929.
285–0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org. (70) ANSI Z88.2–1969, Practices for
(61) ANSI Z41–1991, American Na- Respiratory Protection; IBR approved
tional Standard for Personal Protec- for §§ 1910.94(c)(6)(iii)(a), 1910.134(c); and
tion—Protective Footwear; IBR ap- 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvi), (b)(2), (f)(5),
proved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(iii). Copies of (g)(15)(v), (h)(2)(iii), (h)(2)(iv), and (i)(4).
ANSI Z41–1991 are available for pur-
(71) American National Standards In-
chase only from the National Safety
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, American Na-
Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143–
0558; telephone: 1–800–621–7619; fax: 708– tional Standard for Industrial Head
285–0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org. Protection, approved January 26, 2009;
(62)–(63) [Reserved] IBR approved for § 1910.135(b)(1)(i). Cop-
(64) ANSI Z49.1–67 Safety in Welding ies of ANSI Z89.1–2009 are available for
and Cutting, IBR approved for purchase only from the International
§ 1910.252(c)(1)(iv) (A) and (B). Safety Equipment Association, 1901
(65) ANSI Z53.1–67 Safety Color Code North Moore Street, Arlington, VA
for Marking Physical Hazards and the 22209–1762; telephone: 703–525–1695; fax:
Identification of Certain Equipment, 703–528–2148; Web site:
IBR approved for §§ 1910.97(a)(3)(ii); www.safetyequipment.org.
1910.145(d) (2), (4), and (6). (72) American National Standards In-
(66) ANSI Z54.1–63 Safety Standard stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, American Na-
for Non-Medical X-Ray and Sealed tional Standard for Industrial Head
Gamma Ray Sources, IBR approved for Protection; IBR approved for
§ 1910.252(d) (1)(vii) and (2)(ii). § 1910.135(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1–
(67) ANSI Z87.1–2003, American Na- 2003 are available for purchase only
tional Standard Practice for Occupa- from the International Safety Equip-
tional and Educational Eye and Face ment Association, 1901 North Moore
Protection; IBR approved for Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; tele-
§§ 1910.133(b)(1)(i) and
phone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148;
1910.252(b)(2)(ii)(I)(1). Copies of ANSI
Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
Z87.1–2003 are available for purchase
only from the American Society of (73) American National Standards In-
Safety Engineers, 1800 East Oakton stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, American Na-
Street, Des Plaines, IL 60018–2187; tele- tional Standard for Personnel Protec-
phone: 847–699–2929; or from the Inter- tion—Protective Headwear for Indus-
national Safety Equipment Association trial Workers—Requirements; IBR ap-
(ISEA), 1901 North Moore Street, Ar- proved for § 1910.135(b)(1)(iii). Copies of
lington, VA 22209–1762; telephone: 703– ANSI Z89.1–1997 are available for pur-
525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148; Web site: chase only from the International Safe-
http://www.safetyequipment.org. ty Equipment Association, 1901 North
(68) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), Amer- Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762;
ican National Standard Practice for telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–
Occupational and Educational Eye and 2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
Face Protection; IBR approved for (74) ANSI Z41.1–1967 Men’s Safety Toe
§ 1910.133(b) (1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Footwear; IBR approved for
Z87.1–1989 (R–1998) are available for § 1910.261(i)(4).
purchase only from the American Soci- (75) ANSI Z87.1–1968 Practice of Occu-
ety of Safety Engineers, 1800 East pational and Educational Eye and Face
Oakton Street, Des Plaines, IL 60018– Protection; IBR approved for
2187; telephone: 847–699–2929.
§ 1910.261(a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5),
(69) ANSI Z87.1–1989, American Na-
(g)(1), (g)(15)(v), (g)(18)(ii), and (i)(4).
tional Standard Practice for Occupa-
tional and Educational Eye and Face (76) ANSI Z89.1–1969 Safety Require-
Protection; IBR approved for ments for Industrial Head Protection;
§ 1910.133(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvii),
Z87.1–1989 are available for purchase (b)(2), (g)(15)(v), and (i)(4).
95
(77) ANSI Z89.2–1971 Safety Require- (3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
ments for Industrial Protective Hel- Code, Sec. VIII, 1968, IBR approved for
mets for Electrical Workers, Class B; §§ 1910.103; 1910.104(b)(4)(ii); 1910.106
IBR approved for § 1910.268(i)(1). (b)(1)(iv)(b)(2) and (i)(3)(ii); 1910.107;
(f) The following material is avail- 1910.110(b)(11) (i)(b) and (iii)(a)(1);
able for purchase from the American 1910.111(b)(2) (i), (ii), and (iv); and
Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L 1910.169(a)(2) (i) and (ii);
Street NW, Washington DC 20005: (4) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
(1) [Reserved] Code, Sec. VIII, Paragraph UG–84, 1968,
(2) API 12B (May 1958) Specification IBR approved for § 1910.104 (b)(4)(ii) and
for Bolted Production Tanks, 11th Ed., (b)(5)(iii);
With Supplement No. 1, Mar. 1962, IBR (5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). Code, Sec. VIII, Unfired Pressure Ves-
(3) API 12D (Aug. 1957) Specification sels, Including Addenda (1969), IBR ap-
for Large Welded Production Tanks, proved for §§ 1910.261; 1910.262;
7th Ed., IBR approved for 1910.263(i)(24)(ii);
§ 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). (6) Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels
(4) API 12F (Mar. 1961) Specification for Petroleum Liquids and Gases of the
for Small Welded Production Tanks, API and the ASME, 1951 Ed., IBR ap-
5th Ed., IBR approved for proved for § 1910.110(b)(3)(iii); and
§ 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). (7) ASME B56.6–1992 (with addenda),
(5) API 620, Fourth Ed. (1970) Includ- Safety Standard for Rough Terrain
ing appendix R, Recommended Rules Forklift Trucks, IBR approved for
for Design and Construction of Large § 1910.266(f)(4).
Welded Low Pressure Storage Tanks, (h) Copies of the standards listed
IBR approved for §§ 1910.103(c)(1)(i)(a); below in this paragraph (h) are avail-
1910.106(b)(1)(iv)(b)(1); and 1910.111(d)(1) able for purchase from ASTM Inter-
(ii) and (iii). national, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O.
(6) API 650 (1966) Welded Steel Tanks Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA
for Oil Storage, 3rd Ed., IBR approved 19428–2959; Telephone: 610–832–9585; Fax:
for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(2). 610–832–9555; Email: seviceastm.org; Web
(7) API 1104 (1968) Standard for Weld- site: http://www.astm.org. Copies of his-
ing Pipelines and Related Facilities, torical standards or standards that
IBR approved for § 1910.252(d)(1)(v). ASTM does not have may be purchased
(8) API 2000 (1968) Venting Atmos- from Information Handling Services,
pheric and Low Pressure Storage Global Engineering Documents, 15 In-
Tanks, IBR approved for verness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112;
§ 1910.106(b)(2)(iv)(b)(1). Telephone: 1–800–854–7179; Email:
(9) API 2201 (1963) Welding or Hot global@ihs.com; Web sites: http://glob-
Tapping on Equipment Containing al.ihs.com or http://www.store.ihs.com.
Flammables, IBR approved for
(1) ASTM A 47–68, Malleable Iron
§ 1910.252(d)(1)(vi).
Castings, IBR approved for § 1910.111.
(g) The following material is avail-
able for purchase from the American (2) ASTM A 53–69, Welded and Seam-
Society of Mechanical Engineers less Steel Pipe, IBR approved for
(ASME), United Engineering Center, §§ 1910.110 and 1910.111.
345 East 47th Street, New York, NY (3) ASTM A 126–66, Gray Iron Casting
10017: for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fitting,
(1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel IBR approved for § 1910.111.
Code, Sec. VIII, 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, (4) ASTM A 391–65 (ANSI G61.1–1968),
1959, and 1962 Ed., IBR approved for Alloy Steel Chain, IBR approved for
§§ 1910.110 (b)(10)(iii) (Table H–26), (d)(2) § 1910.184.
(Table H–31); (e)(3)(i) (Table H–32), (5) ASTM A 395–68, Ductile Iron for
(h)(2) (Table H–34); and Use at Elevated Temperatures, IBR ap-
1910.111(b)(2)(vi); proved for § 1910.111.
(2) ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, (6) ASTM B 88–66A, Seamless Copper
1968 Ed., IBR approved for Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.252.
§§ 1910.106(i)(3)(i); 1910.110(g)(2)(iii)(b)(2); (7) ASTM B 88–69, Seamless Copper
and 1910.217(b)(12); Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110.
96
(8) ASTM B 117–64, Salt Spray (Fog) (24) ASTM D 2161–66, Conversion Ta-
Test, IBR approved for § 1910.268. bles for SUS, IBR approved for
(9) ASTM B 210–68, Aluminum-Alloy § 1910.106.
Drawn Seamless Tubes, IBR approved (25) ASTM D 3278–96 (Reapproved
for § 1910.110. 2004) E1, Standard Test Methods for
(10) ASTM B 241–69, Standard Speci- Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale
fications for Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Closed-Cup Apparatus, Approved No-
Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR vember 1, 2004, IBR approved for Ap-
approved for § 1910.110. pendix B to § 1910.1200.
(11) ASTM D 5–65, Test for Penetra- (26) ASTM D 3828–07a, Standard Test
tion by Bituminous Materials, IBR ap- Methods for Flash Point by Small
proved for § 1910.106. Scale Closed Cup Tester, Approved
(12) ASTM D 56–70, Test for Flash July 15, 2007, IBR approved for Appen-
Point by Tag Closed Tester, IBR ap- dix B to § 1910.1200.
proved for § 1910.106. (27) ASTM F–2412–2005, Standard Test
(13) ASTM D 56–05, Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection, IBR ap-
Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed proved for § 1910.136.
Cup Tester, Approved May 1, 2005, IBR (28) ASTM F–2413–2005, Standard
approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. Specification for Performance Require-
(14) ASTM D 86–62, Test for Distilla- ments for Protective Footwear, IBR
tion of Petroleum Products, IBR ap- approved for § 1910.136.
proved for §§ 1910.106 and 1910.119. (i) The following material is avail-
(15) ASTM D 86–07a, Standard Test able for purchase from the American
Method for Distillation of Petroleum Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW,
Products at Atmospheric Pressure, Ap- LeJeune Road, P.O. Box 351040, Miami
proved April 1, 2007, IBR approved for FL 33135:
Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (1)–(2) [Reserved]
(16) ASTM D 88–56, Test for Saybolt
(3) AWS B3.0–41 Standard Qualifica-
Viscosity, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
tion Procedure, IBR approved for
(17) ASTM D 93–71, Test for Flash
§ 1910.67(c)(5)(i).
Point by Pensky Martens, IBR ap-
(4) AWS D1.0–1966 Code for Welding in
proved for § 1910.106.
Building Construction, IBR approved
(18) ASTM D 93–08, Standard Test
for § 1910.27(b)(6).
Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-
Martens Closed Cup Tester, Approved (5) AWS D2.0–69 Specifications for
Oct. 15, 2008, IBR approved for Appen- Welding Highway and Railway Bridges,
dix B to § 1910.1200. IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iv).
(19) ASTM D 240–02 (Reapproved 2007), (6) AWS D8.4–61 Recommended Prac-
Standard Test Method for Heat of Com- tices for Automotive Welding Design,
bustion of Liquid Hydrocarbon Fuels IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(ii).
by Bomb Calorimeter, Approved May 1, (7) AWS D10.9–69 Standard Qualifica-
2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to tion of Welding Procedures and Weld-
§ 1910.1200. ers for Piping and Tubing, IBR ap-
(20) ASTM D 323–68, Standard Test proved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iii).
Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of (j) The following material is avail-
Petroleum Products (Reid Method), able for purchase from the Department
IBR approved for § 1910.106. of Commerce:
(21) ASTM D 445–65, Test for Vis- (1) Commercial Standard, CS 202–56
cosity of Transparent and Opaque Liq- (1961) ‘‘Industrial Lifts and Hinged
uids, IBR approved for § 1910.106. Loading Ramps,’’ IBR approved for
(22) ASTM D 1078–05, Standard Test § 1910.30(a)(3).
Method for Distillation Range of Vola- (2) Publication ‘‘Model Performance
tile Organic Liquids, Approved May 15, Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters’
2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to Helmets,’’ IBR approved for
§ 1910.1200. § 1910.156(e)(5)(i).
(23) ASTM D 1692–68, Test for Flam- (k) The following material is avail-
mability of Plastic Sheeting and Cel- able for purchase from the Compressed
lular Plastics, IBR approved for Gas Association (CGA), 1235 Jefferson
§ 1910.103. Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202:
97
(1) CGA C–6 (1968) Standards for Vis- Inc. (CMAA), 1 Thomas Circle NW,
ual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cyl- Washington DC 20005:
inders, IBR approved for § 1910.101(a). (1) CMAA Specification 1B61, Speci-
(2) CGA C–8 (1962) Standard for Re- fications for Electric Overhead Trav-
qualification of ICC–3HT Cylinders, eling Cranes, IBR approved for
IBR approved for § 1910.101(a). § 1910.179(b)(6)(i).
(3) CGA G–1–2009 Acetylene, Twelfth (2) [Reserved]
Edition, IBR approved for § 1910.102(a). (m) The following material is avail-
Copies of CGA Pamphlet G–1–2009 are able for purchase from the General
available for purchase from the: Com- Services Administration:
pressed Gas Association, Inc., 4221 (1) GSA Pub. GG-B–0067b, Air Com-
Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly, VA pressed for Breathing Purposes, or In-
20151; telephone: (703) 788–2700; fax: (703) terim Federal Specifications, Apr. 1965,
961–1831; email: cga@cganet.com. IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(4).
(4) CGA G–7.1 (1966) Commodity Spec- (2) [Reserved]
ification, IBR approved for (n) The following material is avail-
§ 1910.134(d)(1). able for purchase from the Department
(5) CGA G–8.1 (1964) Standard for the of Health and Human Services:
Installation of Nitrous Oxide Systems (1) Publication No. 76–120 (1975), List
at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for of Personal Hearing Protectors and At-
§ 1910.105. tenuation Data, IBR approved for
(6) CGA P–1 (1965) Safe Handling of § 1910.95 App. B.
Compressed Gases, IBR approved for (2) [Reserved]
§ 1910.101(b). (o) The following material is avail-
(7) CGA P–3 (1963) Specifications, able for purchase from the Institute of
Properties, and Recommendations for Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lex-
Packaging, Transportation, Storage ington Avenue, New York, NY 10017:
and Use of Ammonium Nitrate, IBR ap- (1) IME Pamphlet No. 17, 1960, Safety
proved for § 1910.109(i)(1)(ii)(b). in the Handling and Use of Explosives,
(8) CGA S–1.1 (1963) and 1965 Addenda. IBR approved for §§ 1910.261 (a)(4)(iii)
Safety Release Device Standards—Cyl- and (c)(14)(ii).
inders for Compressed Gases, IBR ap- (2) [Reserved]
proved for §§ 1910.101(c); (p) The following material is avail-
1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2). able for purchase from the National
(9) CGA S–1.2 (1963) Safety Release Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
Device Standards, Cargo and Portable (NEMA):
Tanks for Compressed Gases, IBR ap- (1) NEMA EW–1 (1962) Requirements
proved for §§ 1910.101(c); for Electric Arc Welding Apparatus,
1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2). IBR approved for §§ 1910.254(b)(1).
(10) CGA S–1.3 (1959) Safety Release (2) [Reserved]
Device Standards-Compressed Gas (q) The following material is avail-
Storage Containers, IBR approved for able for purchase from the National
§§ 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2); Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1
1910.104(b)(6)(iii); and Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269;
1910.111(d)(4)(ii)(b). Telephone: 800–344–3555 or 617–770–3000;
(11) CGA 1957 Standard Hose Connec- Fax: 1–800–593–6372 or 1–508–895–8301;
tion Standard, IBR approved for Email: custserv@nfpa.org; Web site:
§ 1910.253(e) (4)(v) and (5)(iii). http://www.nfpa.org.
(12) CGA and RMA (Rubber Manufac- (1) NFPA 30 (1969) Flammable and
turer’s Association) Specification for Combustible Liquids Code, IBR ap-
Rubber Welding Hose (1958), IBR approved for § 1910.178(f)(1).
proved for § 1910.253(e)(5)(i). (2) NFPA 32–1970 Standard for Dry
(13) CGA 1958 Regulator Connection Cleaning Plants, IBR approved for
Standard, IBR approved for § 1910.253(e) § 1910.106(j)(6)(i).
(4)(iv) and (6). (3) NFPA 33–1969 Standard for Spray
(l) The following material is avail- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
able for purchase from the Crane Man- bustible Material, IBR approved for
ufacturer’s Association of America, § 1910.94(c)(2).
98
(4) NFPA 34–1966 Standard for Dip dows, IBR approved for
Tanks Containing Flammable or Com- § 1910.253(f)(6)(i)(I).
bustible Liquids, IBR approved for (20) NFPA 86A–1969 Standard for Oven
§ 1910.124(b)(4)(iv). and Furnaces Design, Location and
(5) NFPA 34–1995 Standard for Dip Equipment, IBR approved for §§ 1910.107
Tanks Containing Flammable or Com- (j)(1) and (l)(3) and 1910.108 (b)(2) and
bustible Liquids, IBR approved for (d)(2).
§ 1910.124(b)(4)(ii). (21) NFPA 91–1961 Standard for the
(6) NFPA 35–1970 Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust
Manufacture of Organic Coatings, IBR Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor
approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(ii). Removal or Conveying (ANSI Z33.1–61),
(7) NFPA 36–1967 Standard for Sol- IBR approved for § 1910.107(d)(1).
vent Extraction Plants, IBR approved (22) NFPA 91–1969 Standards for
for § 1910.106(j)(6)(iii). Blower and Exhaust Systems, IBR ap-
(8) NFPA 37–1970 Standard for the In- proved for § 1910.108(b)(1).
stallation and Use of Stationary Com- (23) NFPA 96–1970 Standard for the
bustion Engines and Gas Turbines, IBR Installation of Equipment for the Re-
approved for §§ 1910.106(j)(6)(iv) and moval of Smoke and Grease Laden Va-
1910.110 (b)(20)(iv)(c) and (e)(11). pors from Commercial Cooking Equip-
(9) NFPA 51B–1962 Standard for Fire ment, IBR approved for
Protection in Use of Cutting and Weld- § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(d).
ing Processes, IBR approved for (24) NFPA 101–1970 Code for Life Safe-
§ 1910.252(a)(1) introductory text. ty From Fire in Buildings and Struc-
(10) NFPA 54–1969 Standard for the tures, IBR approved for
Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas § 1910.261(a)(4)(ii).
Piping, IBR approved for (25) NFPA 101–2009, Life Safety Code,
§ 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(a). 2009 edition, IBR approved for §§ 1910.34,
(11) NFPA 54A–1969 Standard for the 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37.
Installation of Gas Piping and Gas (26) NFPA 203M–1970 Manual on Roof
Equipment on Industrial Premises and Coverings, IBR approved for
Certain Other Premises, IBR approved § 1910.109(i)(1)(iii)(c).
for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(b). (27) NFPA 251–1969 Standard Methods
(12) NFPA 58–1969 Standard for the of Fire Tests of Building Construction
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Pe- and Materials, IBR approved for
troleum Gases (ANSI Z106.1–1970), IBR §§ 1910.106 (d)(3)(ii) introductory text
approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and and (d)(4)(i).
(i)(3) (i) and (ii); and 1910.178(f)(2). (28) NFPA 302–1968 Fire Protection
(13) NFPA 59–1968 Standard for the Standard for Motor-Craft (Pleasure and
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Pe- Commercial), IBR approved for
troleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, § 1910.265(d)(2)(iv) introductory text.
IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) (29) NFPA 385–1966 Recommended
and (i)(2)(iv). Regulatory Standard for Tank Vehicles
(14) NFPA 62–1967 Standard for the for Flammable and Combustible Liq-
Prevention of Dust Explosions in the uids, IBR approved for
Production, Packaging, and Handling § 1910.106(g)(1)(i)(e)(1).
of Pulverized Sugar and Cocoa, IBR ap- (30) NFPA 496–1967 Standard for
proved for § 1910.263(k)(2)(i). Purged Enclosures for Electrical
(15) NFPA 68–1954 Guide for Explosion Equipment in Hazardous Locations,
Venting, IBR approved for IBR approved for
§ 1910.94(a)(2)(iii). § 1910.103(c)(1)(ix)(e)(1).
(16) [Reserved] (31) NFPA 505–1969 Standard for Type
(17) NFPA 78–1968 Lightning Protec- Designations, Areas of Use, Mainte-
tion Code, IBR approved for nance, and Operation of Powered Indus-
§ 1910.109(i)(6)(ii). trial Trucks, IBR approved for
(18) NFPA 80–1968 Standard for Fire § 1910.110(e)(2)(iv).
Doors and Windows, IBR approved for (32) NFPA 566–1965 Standard for the
§ 1910.106(d)(4)(i). Installation of Bulk Oxygen Systems
(19) NFPA 80–1970 Standard for the at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for
Installation of Fire Doors and Win- §§ 1910.253 (b)(4)(iv) and (c)(2)(v).
99
(33) NFPA 656–1959 Code for the Pre- (1) U.S. Pharmacopeia, IBR approved
vention of Dust Ignition in Spice for § 1910.134(d)(1).
Grinding Plants, IBR approved for (2) Publication No. 934 (1962), Food
§ 1910.263(k)(2)(i). Service Sanitation Ordinance and
(34) NFPA 1971–1975 Protective Cloth- Code, part V of the Food Service Sani-
ing for Structural Fire Fighting, IBR tation Manual, IBR approved for
approved for § 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) introduc- § 1910.142(i)(1).
tory text. (u) The following material is avail-
(35) NFPA 51A (2001) Standard for able for purchase from the Society of
Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants, Automotive Engineers (SAE), 485 Lex-
IBR approved for § 1910.102(b) and (c). ington Avenue, New York, NY 10017:
Copies of NFPA 51A–2001 are available (1) SAE J185, June 1988, Rec-
for purchase from the: National Fire ommended Practice for Access Systems
Protection Association, 1 for Off-Road Machines, IBR approved
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169– for § 1910.266(f)(5)(i).
7471; telephone: 1–800–344–35557; e-mail: (2) SAE J231, January 1981, Minimum
custserv@nfpa.org. Performance Criteria for Falling Ob-
(36) NFPA 51A (2006) Standard for ject Protective Structure (FOPS), IBR
Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants, approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).
IBR approved for § 1910.102(b) and (c). (3) SAE J386, June 1985, Operator Re-
Copies of NFPA 51A–2006 are available straint Systems for Off-Road Work Ma-
for purchase from the: National Fire chines, IBR approved for
Protection Association, 1 § 1910.266(d)(3)(iv).
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169– (4) SAE J397, April 1988, Deflection
7471; telephone: 1–800–344–35557; e-mail: Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Labora-
custserv@nfpa.org. tory Evaluation, IBR approved for
(37) NFPA 30B, Code for the Manufac- § 1910.266(f)(3)(iv).
ture and Storage of Aerosol Products, (5) SAE 765 (1961) SAE Recommended
2007 Edition, Approved August 17, 2006, Practice: Crane Loading Stability Test
IBR approved for Appendix B to Code, IBR approved for § 1910.180
§ 1910.1200. (c)(1)(iii) and (e)(2)(iii)(a).
(r) The following material is avail- (6) SAE J1040, April 1988, Perform-
able for purchase from the National ance Criteria for Rollover Protective
Food Plant Institute, 1700 K St. NW., Structures (ROPS) for Construction,
Washington, DC 20006: Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Ma-
chines, IBR approved for
(1) Definition and Test Procedures for
§ 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).
Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer (Nov.
(v) The following material is avail-
1964), IBR approved for § 1910.109 Table
able for purchase from the Fertilizer
H–22, ftn. 3.
Institute, 1015 18th Street NW, Wash-
(2) [Reserved] ington, DC 20036:
(s) The following material is avail- (1) Standard M–1 (1953, 1955, 1957, 1960,
able for purchase from the National In- 1961, 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968), Super-
stitute for Occupational Safety and seded by ANSI K61.1–1972, IBR approved
Health (NIOSH): for § 1910.111(b)(1) (i) and (iii).
(1) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chem- (2) [Reserved]
ical Substances, 1978, IBR approved for (w) The following material is avail-
§ 1910.20(c)(13)(i) and appendix B. able for purchase from Underwriters
(2) Development of Criteria for Fire Laboratories (UL), 207 East Ohio
Fighters Gloves; Vol. II, part II; Test Street, Chicago, IL 60611:
Methods, 1976, IBR approved for (1) UL 58–61 Steel Underground Tanks
§ 1910.156(e)(4)(i) introductory text. for Flammable and Combustible Liq-
(3) NIOSH Recommendations for Oc- uids, 5th Ed., IBR approved for
cupational Safety and Health Stand- § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
ards (Sept. 1987), IBR approved for (2) UL 80–63 Steel Inside Tanks for
§ 1910.120 PEL definition. Oil-Burner Fuel, IBR approved for
(t) The following material is avail- § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
able for purchase from the Public (3) UL 142–68 Steel Above Ground
Health Service: Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
100
Liquids, IBR approved for 2: Determination of Oxidizing Ability
§ 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1). of Toxic and Corrosive Gases and Gas
(x) The following material is avail- Mixtures, First Edition, Aug. 1, 2005,
able for purchase from the: Inter- IBR approved for Appendix B to
national Code Council, Chicago Dis- § 1910.1200.
trict Office, 4051 W. Flossmoor Rd., (5) ISO 13943:2000 (E/F), Fire Safety—
Country Club Hills, IL 60478; telephone: Vocabulary, First Edition, April, 15,
708–799–2300, x3–3801; facsimile: 001–708– 2000, IBR approved for Appendix B to
799–4981; e-mail: order@iccsafe.org. § 1910.1200.
(1) IFC–2009, International Fire Code, (z)(1) The following document is
copyright 2009, IBR approved for available for purchase from United Na-
§§ 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37. tions Publications, Customer Service,
(2) [Reserved] c/o National Book Network, 15200 NBN
(y)(1) The following materials are Way, PO Box 190, Blue Ridge Summit,
available for purchase from the Inter- PA 17214; telephone: 1–888–254–4286; fax:
national Standards Organization (ISO) 1–800–338–4550; email:
through ANSI, 25 West 43rd Street, unpublications@nbnbooks.com. Other
Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036–7417; distributors of United Nations Publica-
Telephone: 212–642–4980; Fax: 212–302– tions include:
1286; Email: info@ansi.org; Web site: (i) Bernan, 15200 NBN Way, Blue
http://www.ansi.org. Ridge Summit, PA 17214; telephone: 1–
(2) Documents not available in the 800–865–3457; fax: 1–800–865–3450; email:
ANSI store may be purchased from: customercare@bernan; Web site: http://
(i) Document Center Inc., 111 Indus- www.bernan.com; and
trial Road, Suite 9, Belmont, 94002; (ii) Renouf Publishing Co. Ltd., 812
Telephone: 650–591–7600; Fax: 650–591– Proctor Avenue, Ogdensburg, NY 13669–
7617; Email: info@document-center.com; 2205; telephone: 1–888–551–7470; Fax: 1–
Web site: www.document-center.com. 888–551–7471; email:
(ii) DECO—Document Engineering orders@renoufbooks.com; Web site: http://
Co., Inc., 15210 Stagg Street, Van Nuys, www.renoufbooks.com.
CA 91405; Telephone: 800–645–7732 or 818– (2) UN ST/SG/AC.10/Rev.4, The UN
782–1010; Fax: 818–782–2374; Email: Recommendations on the Transport of
doceng@doceng.com; Web site: Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and
www.doceng.com Criteria, Fourth Revised Edition, 2003,
(iii) Global Engineering Documents, IBR approved for Appendix B to
15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO § 1910.1200.
80112; Telephone: 1–800–854–7179 or 303– [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49
397–7956; Fax: 303–397–2740; Email: FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9231, Mar. 7, 1996;
global@ihs.com; Web sites: http://glob- 64 FR 13908, Mar. 23, 1999; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9,
al.ihs.com or http://www.store.ihs.com; 2004; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 72 FR 7190,
(iv) ILI Infodisk, Inc., 610 Winters Av- Feb. 14, 2007; 72 FR 71068, Dec. 14, 2007; 74 FR
enue, Paramus, NJ 07652; Telephone: 46355, Sept. 9, 2009; 74 FR 40447, Aug. 11, 2009;
201–986–1131; Fax: 201–986–7886; Email: 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 75786, Dec. 5,
sales@ili-info.com; Web site: www.ili- 2011; 77 FR 17764, Mar. 26, 2012; 77 FR 37598,
June 22, 2012]
info.com.
(v) Techstreet, a business of Thomson EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35565, June
Reuters, 3916 Ranchero Drive, Ann 13, 2013, § 1910.6 was amended by revising
Arbor, MI 48108; Telephone: 800–699–9277 paragraphs (e)(59) and (e)(65); redesignating
paragraphs (e)(66) through (e)(77) as para-
or 734–780–8000; Fax: 734–780–2046; Email:
graphs (e)(68) through (e)(79); and adding
techstreet.service@thomsonreuters.com; paragraphs (e)(66) and (e)(67), effective Sept.
Web site: www.Techstreet.com. 11, 2013. For the convenience of the user, the
(3) ISO 10156:1996 (E), Gases and Gas added and revised text is set forth as follows:
Mixtures—Determination of Fire Po-
tential and Oxidizing Ability for the § 1910.6 Incorporation by reference.
Selection of Cylinder Valve Outlets,
Second Edition, Feb. 15, 1996, IBR ap- * * * * *
proved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200. (e) * * *
(4) ISO 10156–2:2005 (E), Gas cyl- (59) ANSI Z35.1–1968, Specifications for Ac-
inders—Gases and Gas Mixtures—Part cident Prevention Signs; IBR approved for
101
§ 1910.261(c). Copies available for purchase (ii) Experimental testing and exam-
from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness ining of equipment and materials for
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1– workplace safety purposes to deter-
877–413–5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com.
mine conformance with appropriate
test standards or performance in a
* * * * * specified manner.
(65) USAS Z53.1–1967 (also referred to as (2) The NRTL shall provide, to the
ANSI Z53.1–1967), Safety Color Code for extent needed for the particular equip-
Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI approved ment or materials listed, labeled, or
October 9, 1967; IBR approved for § 1910.97(a)
accepted, the following controls or
and 1910.145(d). Copies available for purchase
from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness services:
Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1– (i) Implements control procedures for
877–413–5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com. identifying the listed and labeled
(66) ANSI Z535.1–2006(R2011), Safety Colors, equipment or materials;
reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR approved for (ii) Inspects the run of production of
§§ 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies available
such items at factories for product
for purchase from the International Safety
Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore evaluation purposes to assure conform-
Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; telephone: ance with the test standards; and
703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148; Web site: (iii) Conducts field inspections to
www.safetyequipment.org. monitor and to assure the proper use of
(67) ANSI Z535.2–2011, Environmental and its identifying mark or labels on prod-
Facility Safety Signs, published September ucts;
15, 2011; IBR approved for § 1910.261(c). Copies
available for purchase from the Inter- (3) The NRTL is completely inde-
national Safety Equipment Association, 1901 pendent of employers subject to the
North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209– tested equipment requirements, and of
1762; telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148; any manufacturers or vendors of equip-
Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. ment or materials being tested for
these purposes; and,
* * * * * (4) The NRTL maintains effective
procedures for:
§ 1910.7 Definition and requirements (i) Producing creditable findings or
for a nationally recognized testing
laboratory. reports that are objective and without
bias; and
(a) Application. This section shall (ii) Handling complaints and disputes
apply only when the term nationally under a fair and reasonable system.
recognized testing laboratory is used in
(c) Test standards. An appropriate test
other sections of this part.
standard referred to in § 1910.7(b)(1) (i)
(b) Laboratory requirements. The term
and (ii) is a document which specifies
nationally recognized testing laboratory
the safety requirements for specific
(NRTL) means an organization which
equipment or class of equipment and is:
is recognized by OSHA in accordance
with appendix A of this section and (1) Recognized in the United States
which tests for safety, and lists or la- as a safety standard providing an ade-
bels or accepts, equipment or materials quate level of safety, and
and which meets all of the following (2) Compatible with and maintained
criteria: current with periodic revisions of ap-
(1) For each specified item of equip- plicable national codes and installation
ment or material to be listed, labeled standards, and
or accepted, the NRTL has the capa- (3) Developed by a standards devel-
bility (including proper testing equip- oping organization under a method pro-
ment and facilities, trained staff, writ- viding for input and consideration of
ten testing procedures, and calibration views of industry groups, experts,
and quality control programs) to per- users, consumers, governmental au-
form: thorities, and others having broad ex-
(i) Testing and examining of equip- perience in the safety field involved, or
ment and materials for workplace safe- (4) In lieu of paragraphs (c) (1), (2),
ty purposes to determine conformance and (3), the standard is currently des-
with appropriate test standards; or ignated as an American National
102
Standards Institute (ANSI) safety-des- view, OSHA will apply the formula es-
ignated product standard or an Amer- tablished in paragraph (f)(2) of this sec-
ican Society for Testing and Materials tion to the current estimated full costs
(ASTM) test standard used for evalua- for the NRTL Program. If a change is
tion of products or materials. warranted, OSHA will follow the imple-
(d) Alternative test standard. If a test- mentation shown in paragraph (f)(4) of
ing laboratory desires to use a test this section.
standard other than one allowed under (ii) OSHA will publish all fee sched-
paragraph (c) of this section, then the ules in the FEDERAL REGISTER. Once
Assistant Secretary of Labor shall published, a fee schedule remains in ef-
evaluate the proposed standard to de-
fect until it is superseded by a new fee
termine that it provides an adequate
schedule. Any member of the public
level of safety before it is used.
may request a change to the fees in-
(e) Implementation. A testing organi-
zation desiring recognition by OSHA as cluded in the current fee schedule.
an NRTL shall request that OSHA Such a request must include appro-
evaluate its testing and control propriate documentation in support of the
grams against the requirements in this suggested change. OSHA will consider
section for any equipment or material such requests during its annual review
it may specify. The recognition proce- of the fee schedule.
dure shall be conducted in accordance (4) OSHA will implement periodic re-
with appendix A to this section. view, and fee assessment, collection,
(f) Fees. (1) Each applicant for NRTL and payment, as follows:
recognition and each NRTL must pay
Milestones/
fees for services provided by OSHA in Dates Action required
advance of the provision of those serv-
ices. OSHA will assess fees for the fol- I. Periodic Review of Fee Schedule
lowing services:
When review OSHA will publish any proposed new fee
(i) Processing of applications for ini- completed. schedule in the FEDERAL REGISTER if
tial recognition, expansion of recogni- OSHA determines that costs warrant
tion, or renewal of recognition, includ- changes in the fee schedule.
Fifteen days Comments due on the proposed new fee
ing on-site reviews; review and evalua-
after publica- schedule.
tion of the applications; and preparation.
tion of reports, evaluations and FED- When OSHA OSHA will publish the final fee schedule in
ERAL REGISTER notices; and approves the the FEDERAL REGISTER, making the fee
fee schedule. schedule effective on a specific date.
(ii) Audits of sites.
(2) The fee schedule established by II. Application Processing Fees
OSHA reflects the full cost of per-
forming the activities for each service Time of appli- Applicant must pay the applicable fees in
cation. the fee schedule that are due when sub-
listed in paragraph (f)(1) of this sec- mitting an application; OSHA will not
tion. OSHA calculates the fees based on begin processing the application until it
either the average or actual time re- receives the fees.
quired to perform the work necessary; Before assess- Applicant must pay the estimated staff time
ment per- and travel costs for its assessment based
the staff costs per hour (which include formed. on the fees in effect at the time of the as-
wages, fringe benefits, and expenses sessment. Applicant also must pay the
other than travel for personnel that fees for the final report and FEDERAL
perform or administer the activities REGISTER notice, and other applicable
fees, as specified in the fee schedule.
covered by the fees); and the average or OSHA may cancel an application if the
actual costs for travel when on-site re- applicant does not pay these fees, or any
views are involved. The formula for the balance of these fees, when due.
fee calculation is as follows: III. Audit Fees
Activity Fee = [Average (or Actual)
Before audit NRTL must pay the estimated staff time
Hours to Complete the Activity × performed. and travel costs for its audit based on the
Staff Costs per Hour] + Average (or fees in effect at the time of the audit.
Actual) Travel Costs NRTL also must pay other applicable
fees, as specified in the fee schedule.
(3)(i) OSHA will review the full costs After the audit, OSHA adjusts the audit
periodically and will propose a revised fees to account for the actual costs for
travel and staff time.
fee schedule, if warranted. In its re-
103
Milestones/ b. However, in determining eligibility for a

Dates Action required
foreign-based testing agency or organization,
OSHA shall take into consideration the pol-
On due date ... NRTL must pay the estimated audit fees, or
any balance due, by the due date estab-
icy of the foreign government regarding both
lished by OSHA; OSHA will assess a late the acceptance in that country of testing
fee if NRTL does not pay audit fees (or data, equipment acceptances, and listings,
any balance of fees due) by the due date. and labeling, which are provided through na-
OSHA may still perform the audit when tionally recognized testing laboratories rec-
an NRTL does not pay the fees or does ognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the
not pay them on time.
Thirty days OSHA will begin processing a notice for
accessibility to government recognition or a
after due publication in the FEDERAL REGISTER an- similar system in that country by U.S.-based
date or, if nouncing its plan to revoke recognition for safety-related testing agencies, whether rec-
earlier, date NRTLs that do not pay the estimated ognized by the Assistant Secretary or not, if
NRTL re- audit fees and any balance of audit fees such recognition or a similar system is re-
fuses to pay. due. quired by that country.
Note: For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.7(f)(4), ‘‘days’’ 2. Content of application. a. The applicant
means ‘‘calendar days,’’ and ‘‘applicant’’ means ‘‘the NRTL’’ shall provide sufficient information and de-
or ‘‘an applicant for NRTL recognition.’’
tail demonstrating that it meets the require-
(5) OSHA will provide details about ments set forth in § 1910.7, in order for an in-
how to pay the fees through appro- formed decision concerning recognition to be
priate OSHA Program Directives, made by the Assistant Secretary.
which will be available on the OSHA b. The applicant also shall identify the
web site. scope of the NRTL-related activity for which
the applicant wishes to be recognized. This
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.7—OSHA RECOGNITION will include identifying the testing methods
PROCESS FOR NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED it will use to test or judge the specific equip-
TESTING LABORATORIES ment and materials for which recognition is
being requested, unless such test methods
INTRODUCTION are already specified in the test standard. If
This appendix provides requirements and requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant
criteria which OSHA will use to evaluate and shall provide documentation of the efficacy
recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing of these testing methods.
Laboratory (NRTL). This process will in- c. The applicant may include whatever en-
clude the evaluation of the product evalua- closures, attachments, or exhibits the appli-
tion and control programs being operated by cant deems appropriate. The application
the NRTL, as well as the NRTL’s testing fa- need not be submitted on a Federal form.
cilities being used in its program. In the 3. Filing office location. The application
evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use ei- shall be filed with: NRTL Recognition Pro-
ther consensus-based standards currently in gram, Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
use nationally, or other standards or criteria ministration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200
which may be considered appropriate. This Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC
appendix implements the definition of NRTL 20210.
in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria 4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An appli-
that a laboratory must meet to be recog- cation may be revised by an applicant at any
nized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing time prior to the completion of activity
basis). The appendix is broader in scope, pro- under paragraph I.B.4. of this appendix.
viding procedures for renewal, expansion and b. An application may be withdrawn by an
revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as applicant, without prejudice, at any time
otherwise provided, the burden is on the ap- prior to the final decision by the Assistant
plicant to establish by a preponderance of
Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appen-
the evidence that it is entitled to recogni-
dix.
tion as an NRTL. If further detailing of these
requirements and criteria will assist the B. Review and Decision Process; Issuance or
NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detail- Renewal.
ing will be done through appropriate OSHA
Program Directives. 1. Acceptance and on-site review. a. Applica-
tions submitted by eligible testing agencies
I. Procedures for Initial OSHA Recognition will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt
acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an
A. Applications. application, OSHA may request additional
1. Eligibility. a. Any testing agency or orga- information if it believes information rel-
nization considering itself to meet the defi- evant to the requirements for recognition
nition of nationally recognized testing lab- has been omitted.
oratory as specified in § 1910.7 may apply for b. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an
OSHA recognition as an NRTL. on-site review of the testing facilities of the
104
applicant, as well as the applicant’s adminis- ant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer
trative and technical practices, and, if nec- any change in status or any interim or tem-
essary, review any additional documentation porary recognition for the applicant.
underlying the application. 5. Public review and comment period—a. The
c. These on-site reviews will be conducted FEDERAL REGISTER notice of preliminary
by qualified individuals technically expert in finding will provide a period of not less than
these matters, including, as appropriate, 30 calendar days for written comments on
non-Federal consultants/contractors accept- the applicant’s fulfillment of the require-
able to OSHA. The protocol for each review
ments for recognition. The application, sup-
will be based on appropriate national con-
porting documents, staff recommendation,
sensus standards or international guides,
with such additions, changes, or deletions as statement of applicant’s reasons, and any
may be considered necessary and appropriate comments received, will be available for pub-
in each case by OSHA. A written report shall lic inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.
be made of each on-site review and a copy b. Any member of the public, including the
shall be provided to the applicant. applicant, may supply detailed reasons and
2. Positive finding by staff. If, after review of evidence supporting or challenging the suffi-
the application, and additional information, ciency of the applicant’s having met the re-
and the on-site review report, the applicant quirements of the definition in 29 CFR
appears to have met the requirements for § 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of per-
recognition, a written recommendation shall tinent documents and exhibits shall be made
be submitted by the responsible OSHA per- in writing by the close of the comment pe-
sonnel to the Assistant Secretary that the riod.
application be approved, accompanied by a 6. Action after public comment—a. Final deci-
supporting explanation. sion by Assistant Secretary. Where the public
3. Negative finding by staff.—a. Notification review and comment record supports the As-
to applicant. If, after review of the applica- sistant Secretary’s preliminary finding con-
tion, any additional information and the on-
cerning the application, i.e., absent any seri-
site review report, the applicant does not ap-
ous objections or substantive claims con-
pear to have met the requirements for rec-
trary to the preliminary finding having been
ognition, the responsible OSHA personnel
shall notify the applicant in writing, listing received in writing from the public during
the specific requirements of § 1910.7 and this the comment period, the Assistant Secretary
appendix which the applicant has not met, will proceed to final written decision on the
and allow a reasonable period for response. application. The reasons supporting this de-
b. Revision of application. (i) After receipt of cision shall be derived from the evidence
a notification of negative finding (i.e., for in- available as a result of the full application,
tended disapproval of the application), and the supporting documentation, the staff find-
within the response period provided, the ap- ing, and the written comments and evidence
plicant may: presented during the public review and com-
(a) Submit a revised application for further ment period.
review, which could result in a positive find- b. Public announcement. A copy of the As-
ing by the responsible OSHA personnel pur- sistant Secretary’s final decision will be pro-
suant to subsection I.B.2. of this appendix; or vided to the applicant. Subsequently, a noti-
(b) Request that the original application be fication of the final decision shall be pub-
submitted to the Assistant Secretary with lished in the FEDERAL REGISTER. The publi-
an attached statement of reasons, supplied cation date will be the effective date of the
by the applicant of why the application recognition.
should be approved. c. Review of final decision. There will be no
(ii) This procedure for applicant notifica- further review activity available within the
tion and potential revision shall be used only Department of Labor from the final decision
once during each recognition process. of the Assistant Secretary.
4. Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary.
7. Action after public objection—a. Review of
a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special des-
negative information. At the discretion of the
ignee for this purpose, will make a prelimi-
Assistant Secretary or his designee, OSHA
nary finding as to whether the applicant has
may authorize Federal or contract personnel
or has not met the requirements for recogni-
tion, based on the completed application file, to initiate a special review of any informa-
the written staff recommendation, and the tion provided in the public comment record
statement of reasons supplied by the appli- which appears to require resolution, before a
cant if there remains a staff recommenda- final decision can be made.
tion of disapproval. b. Supplementation of record. The contents
b. Notification of this preliminary finding and results of special reviews will be made
will be sent to the applicant and subse- part of this record by the Assistant Sec-
quently published in the FEDERAL REGISTER. retary by either:
c. This preliminary finding shall not be (i) Reopening the written comment period
considered an official decision by the Assist- for public comments on these reviews; or
105
(ii) Convening an informal hearing to ac- b. At the end of the five-year period, the
cept public comments on these reviews, con- two temporarily recognized laboratories
ducted under applicable OSHA procedures for shall apply for renewal of OSHA recognition
similar hearings. utilizing the following procedures estab-
c. Final decision by the Assistant Secretary. lished for renewal of OSHA recognition.
The Assistant Secretary shall issue a deci-
sion as to whether it has been demonstrated, II. Supplementary Procedures.
based on a preponderance of the evidence, A. Test standard changes.
that the applicant meets the requirements
for recognition. The reasons supporting this A recognized NRTL may change a testing
decision shall be derived from the evidence standard or elements incorporated in the
available as a result of the full application, standard such as testing methods or pass-fail
the supporting documentation, the staff find- criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary
ing, the comments and evidence presented of the change, certifying that the revised
during the public review and comment pe- standard will be at least as effective as the
riod, and written to transcribed evidence re- prior standard, and providing the supporting
ceived during any subsequent reopening of data upon which its conclusions are based.
the written comment period or informal pub- The NRTL need not inform the Assistant
lic hearing held. Secretary of minor deviations from a test
d. Public announcement. A copy of the As- standard such as the use of new instrumenta-
sistant Secretary’s final decision will be pro- tion that is more accurate or sensitive than
vided to the applicant, and a notification originally called for in the standard. The
will be published in the FEDERAL REGISTER NRTL also need not inform the Assistant
subsequently announcing the decision. Secretary of its adoption of revisions to
e. Review of final decision. There will be no third-party testing standards meeting the re-
further review activity available within the quirements of § 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions
have been developed by the standards devel-
Department of Labor from the final decision
oping organization, or of its adoption of revi-
of the Assistant Secretary.
sions to other third-party test standards
c. Terms and conditions of recognition. The
which the developing organization has sub-
following terms and conditions shall be part
mitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assist-
of every recognition:
ant Secretary or his designee determines
1. Letter of recognition. The recognition by that the proposed revised standard is not
OSHA of any NRTL will be evidenced by a ‘‘substantially equivalent’’ to the previous
letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter version with regard to the level of safety ob-
will provide the specific details of the scope tained, OSHA will not accept the proposed
of the OSHA recognition, including the spe- testing standard by the recognized NRTL,
cific equipment or materials for which OSHA and will initiate discontinuance of that as-
recognition has been granted, as well as any pect of OSHA-recognized activity by the
specific conditions imposed by OSHA. NRTL by modification of the official letter
2. Period of recognition. The recognition by of recognition. OSHA will publicly announce
OSHA of each NRTL will be valid for five this action and the NRTL will be required to
years, unless terminated before the expira- communicate this OSHA decision directly to
tion of the period. The dates of the period of affected manufacturers.
recognition will be stated in the recognition
letter. B. Expansion of current recognition
3. Constancy in operations. The recognized 1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may apply
NRTL shall continue to satisfy all the re- to OSHA for an expansion of its current rec-
quirements or limitations in the letter of ognition to cover other categories of NRTL
recognition during the period of recognition. testing in addition to those included in the
4. Accurate publicity. The OSHA-recognized current recognition.
NRTL shall not engage in or permit others 2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and
to engage in misrepresentation of the scope process the application for expansion in ac-
or conditions of its recognition. cordance with subsection I.B. of this appen-
5. Temporary Recognition of Certain NRTLs. dix, except that the period for written com-
a. Notwithstanding all other requirements ments, specified in paragraph 5.a of sub-
and provisions of § 1910.7 and this appendix, section I.B. of this appendix, will be not less
the following two organizations are recog- than 15 calendar days.
nized temporarily as nationally recognized b. In that process, OSHA may decide not to
testing laboratories by the Assistant Sec- conduct an on-site review, where the sub-
retary for a period of five years beginning stantive scope of the request to expand rec-
June 13, 1988 and ending on July 13, 1993: ognition is closely related to the current
(i) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 333 area of recognition.
Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, Illinois 60062. c. The expiration date for each expansion
(ii) Factory Mutual Research Corporation, of recognition shall coincide with the expira-
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, tion date of the current basic recognition pe-
Massachusetts 02062. riod.
106
C. Renewal of OSHA recognition basis of information provided by any inter-
ested person.
1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may
2. Procedure. a. Before proposing to revoke
renew its recognition by filing a renewal re-
recognition, the Agency will notify the rec-
quest at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of
ognized NRTL in writing, giving it the op-
this appendix not less than nine months, nor
portunity to rebut or correct the alleged de-
more than one year, before the expiration
ficiencies which would form the basis of the
date of its current recognition.
proposed revocation, within a reasonable pe-
2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the re-
riod.
newal request in accordance with subsection
b. If the alleged deficiencies are not cor-
I.B. of this appendix, except that the period
rected or reconciled within a reasonable pe-
for written comments, specified in paragraph
riod, OSHA will propose, in writing to the
5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be
recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If
not less than 15 calendar days.
deemed appropriate, no other announcement
b. In that process, OSHA may determine
need be made by OSHA.
not to conduct the on-site reviews in I.B.1.a.
c. The revocation shall be effective in 60
where appropriate.
days unless within that period the recog-
c. When a recognized NRTL has filed a
nized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or re-
timely and sufficient renewal request, its
quests a hearing in writing.
current recognition will not expire until a
d. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held
final decision has been made by OSHA on the
before an administrative law judge of the De-
request.
partment of Labor pursuant to the rules
d. After the first renewal has been granted
specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
to the NRTL, the NRTL shall apply for a
e. The parties shall be OSHA and the rec-
continuation of its recognition status every
ognized NRTL. The Assistant Secretary may
five years by submitting a renewal request.
allow other interested persons to participate
In lieu of submitting a renewal request after
in these hearings if such participation would
the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify
contribute to the resolution of issues ger-
its continuing compliance with the terms of
mane to the proceeding and not cause undue
its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.
delay.
3. Alternative procedure. After the initial
f. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to
recognition and before the expiration there-
demonstrate by a preponderance of the evi-
of, OSHA may (for good cause) determine
dence that the recognition should be revoked
that there is a sufficient basis to dispense
because the NRTL is not meeting the re-
with the renewal requirement for a given
quirements for recognition, has not been rea-
laboratory and will so notify the laboratory
sonably performing the product testing func-
of such a determination in writing. In lieu of
tions as required by § 1910.7, this appendix A,
submitting a renewal request, any labora-
or the letter of recognition, or has materi-
tory so notified shall certify its continuing
ally misrepresented itself in its applications
compliance with the terms of its letter of
or publicity.
recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.
3. Final decision. a. After the hearing, the
D. Voluntary termination of recognition. Administrative Law Judge shall issue a deci-
sion stating the reasons based on the record
At any time, a recognized NRTL may vol- as to whether it has been demonstrated,
untarily terminate its recognition, either in based on a preponderance of evidence, that
its entirety or with respect to any area cov- the applicant does not continue to meet the
ered in its recognition, by giving written no- requirements for its current recognition.
tice to OSHA. The written notice shall state b. Upon issuance of the decision, any party
the date as of which the termination is to to the hearing may file exceptions within 20
take effect. The Assistant Secretary shall in- days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no excep-
form the public of any voluntary termi- tions are filed, this decision is the final deci-
nation by FEDERAL REGISTER notice. sion of the Assistant Secretary. If objections
are filed, the Administrative Law Judge
E. Revocation of recognition by OSHA.
shall forward the decision, exceptions and
1. Potential causes. If an NRTL either has record to the Assistant Secretary for the
failed to continue to substantially satisfy final decision on the proposed revocation.
the requirements of § 1910.7 or this appendix, c. The Assistant Secretary will review the
or has not been reasonably performing the record, the decision by the Administrative
NRTL testing requirements encompassed Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based
within its letter of recognition, or has mate- on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue
rially misrepresented itself in its applica- the final decision as to whether it has been
tions or misrepresented the scope or condi- demonstrated, by a preponderance of evi-
tions of its recognition, the Assistant Sec- dence, that the recognized NRTL has not
retary may revoke the recognition of a rec- continued to meet the requirements for
ognized NRTL, in whole or in part. OSHA OSHA recognition. If the Assistant Sec-
may initiate revocation procedures on the retary finds that the NRTL does not meet
107
the NRTL recognition requirements, the rec- OMB con-
29 CFR citation trol No.
ognition will be revoked.
4. Public announcement. A copy of the As-
1910.305 .............................................................. 1218–0256
sistant Secretary’s final decision will be pro-
1910.306 .............................................................. 1218–0256
vided to the applicant, and a notification 1910.307 .............................................................. 1218–0256
will be published in the FEDERAL REGISTER 1910.308 .............................................................. 1218–0256
announcing the decision, and the availability 1910.420 .............................................................. 1218–0069
of the complete record of this proceeding at 1910.421 .............................................................. 1218–0069
OSHA. The effective date of any revocation 1910.423 .............................................................. 1218–0069
will be the date the final decision copy is 1910.430 .............................................................. 1218–0069
sent to the NRTL. 1910.440 .............................................................. 1218–0069
1910.1001 ............................................................ 1218–0133
5. Review of final decision. There will be no
1910.1003 ............................................................ 1218–0085
further review activity available within the 1910.1004 ............................................................ 1218–0084
Department of Labor from the final decision 1910.1006 ............................................................ 1218–0086
of the Assistant Secretary. 1910.1007 ............................................................ 1218–0083
1910.1008 ............................................................ 1218–0087
[53 FR 12120, Apr. 12, 1988; 53 FR 16838, May 1910.1009 ............................................................ 1218–0089
11, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1910.1010 ............................................................ 1218–0082
1989; 65 FR 46818, 46819, July 31, 2000; 76 FR 1910.1011 ............................................................ 1218–0090
10515, Feb. 25, 2011] 1910.1012 ............................................................ 1218–0080
1910.1013 ............................................................ 1218–0079
§ 1910.8 OMB control numbers under 1910.1014 ............................................................ 1218–0088
the Paperwork Reduction Act. 1910.1015 ............................................................ 1218–0044
1910.1016 ............................................................ 1218–0081
The following sections or paragraphs 1910.1017 ............................................................ 1218–0010
each contain a collection of informa- 1910.1018 ............................................................ 1218–0104
1910.1020 ............................................................ 1218–0065
tion requirement which has been ap- 1910.1025 ............................................................ 1218–0092
proved by the Office of Management 1910.1026 ............................................................ 1218–0252
and Budget under the control number 1910.1027 ............................................................ 1218–0185
listed. 1910.1028 ............................................................ 1218–0129
1910.1029 ............................................................ 1218–0128
OMB con- 1910.1030 ............................................................ 1218–0180
29 CFR citation 1910.1043 ............................................................ 1218–0061
trol No.
1910.1044 ............................................................ 1218–0101
1910.7 .................................................................. 1218–0147 1910.1045 ............................................................ 1218–0126
1910.23 ................................................................ 1218–0199 1910.1047 ............................................................ 1218–0108
1910.66 ................................................................ 1218–0121 1910.1048 ............................................................ 1218–0145
1910.67(b) ........................................................... 1218–0230 1910.1050 ............................................................ 1218–0184
1910.68 ................................................................ 1218–0226 1910.1051 ............................................................ 1218–0170
1910.95 ................................................................ 1218–0048 1910.1052 ............................................................ 1218–0179
1910.111 .............................................................. 1218–0208 1910.1096 ............................................................ 1218–0103
1910.119 .............................................................. 1218–0200 1910.1200 ............................................................ 1218–0072
1910.120 .............................................................. 1218–0202 1910.1450 ............................................................ 1218–0131
1910.132 .............................................................. 1218–0205
1910.134 .............................................................. 1218–0099
1910.137 .............................................................. 1218–0190 [61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62
1910.142 .............................................................. 1218–0096
FR 29668, June 2, 1997; 62 FR 42666, Aug. 8,
1910.145 .............................................................. 1218–0132
1910.146 .............................................................. 1218–0203 1997; 62 FR 43581, Aug. 14, 1997; 62 FR 65203,
1910.147 .............................................................. 1218–0150 Dec. 11, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR
1910.156 .............................................................. 1218–0075 17093, Apr. 8, 1998; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 72
1910.157(e)(3) ..................................................... 1218–0210 FR 40075, July 23, 2007]
1910.157(f)(16) .................................................... 1218–0218
1910.177(d)(3)(iv) ................................................ 1218–0219
1910.179(j)(2)(iii) and (iv) .................................... 1218–0224
§ 1910.9 Compliance duties owed to
1910.179(m)(1) and (m)(2) .................................. 1218–0224 each employee.
1910.180(d)(6) ..................................................... 1218–0221 (a) Personal protective equipment.
1910.180(g)(1) and (g)(2)(ii) ................................ 1218–0221
1910.181(g)(1) and (g)(3) .................................... 1218–0222 Standards in this part requiring the
1910.184(e)(4), (f)(4) and (i)(8)(ii) ....................... 1218–0223 employer to provide personal protec-
1910.217(e)(1)(i) and (ii) ..................................... 1218–0229 tive equipment (PPE), including res-
1910.217(g) ......................................................... 1218–0070
1910.217(h) ......................................................... 1218–0143
pirators and other types of PPE, be-
1910.218(a)(2)(i) and (ii) ..................................... 1218–0228 cause of hazards to employees impose a
1910.252(a)(2)(xiii)(c) .......................................... 1218–0207 separate compliance duty with respect
1910.255(e) ......................................................... 1218–0207
1910.266 .............................................................. 1218–0198
to each employee covered by the re-
1910.268 .............................................................. 1218–0225 quirement. The employer must provide
1910.269 .............................................................. 1218–0190 PPE to each employee required to use
1910.272 .............................................................. 1218–0206 the PPE, and each failure to provide
1910.302 .............................................................. 1218–0256
1910.303 .............................................................. 1218–0256 PPE to an employee may be considered
1910.304 .............................................................. 1218–0256 a separate violation.
108
(b) Training. Standards in this part poration by reference of part 1926 in
requiring training on hazards and re- § 1910.12 is not intended to include ref-
lated matters, such as standards re- erences to interpretative rules having
quiring that employees receive train- relevance to the application of the
ing or that the employer train employ- Construction Safety Act, but having no
ees, provide training to employees, or relevance to the application to the Oc-
institute or implement a training pro- cupational Safety and Health Act.
gram, impose a separate compliance
duty with respect to each employee § 1910.12 Construction work.
covered by the requirement. The em- (a) Standards. The standards pre-
ployer must train each affected em- scribed in part 1926 of this chapter are
ployee in the manner required by the adopted as occupational safety and
standard, and each failure to train an health standards under section 6 of the
employee may be considered a separate Act and shall apply, according to the
violation. provisions thereof, to every employ-
[73 FR 75583, Dec. 12, 2008]
ment and place of employment of every
employee engaged in construction
work. Each employer shall protect the
Subpart B—Adoption and Exten- employment and places of employment
sion of Established Federal of each of his employees engaged in
Standards construction work by complying with
the appropriate standards prescribed in
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa- this paragraph.
tional Safety and Health Act, 29 U.S.C. 653, (b) Definition. For purposes of this
655, 657; Walsh-Healey Act, 41 U.S.C. 35 et section, Construction work means work
seq.; Service Contract Act of 1965, 41 U.S.C. for construction, alteration, and/or re-
351 et seq.; Sec.107, Contract Work Hours and pair, including painting and deco-
Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety
rating. See discussion of these terms in
Act), 40 U.S.C. 333; Sec. 41, Longshore and
Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, 33 § 1926.13 of this title.
U.S.C. 941; National Foundation of Arts and (c) Construction Safety Act distin-
Humanities Act, 20 U.S.C. 951 et seq.; Sec- guished. This section adopts as occupa-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), tional safety and health standards
8–76 (41 FR 1911), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 under section 6 of the Act the stand-
FR 9033), or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable. ards which are prescribed in part 1926
of this chapter. Thus, the standards
§ 1910.11 Scope and purpose. (substantive rules) published in subpart
(a) The provisions of this subpart B C and the following subparts of part
adopt and extend the applicability of, 1926 of this chapter are applied. This
established Federal standards in effect section does not incorporate subparts
on April 28, 1971, with respect to every A and B of part 1926 of this chapter.
employer, employee, and employment Subparts A and B have pertinence only
covered by the Act. to the application of section 107 of the
(b) It bears emphasis that only stand- Contract Work Hours and Safety
ards (i.e., substantive rules) relating to Standards Act (the Construction Safe-
safety or health are adopted by any ty Act). For example, the interpreta-
incorporations by reference of stand- tion of the term ‘‘subcontractor’’ in
ards prescribed elsewhere in this chap- paragraph (c) of § 1926.13 of this chapter
ter or this title. Other materials con- is significant in discerning the cov-
tained in the referenced parties are not erage of the Construction Safety Act
adopted. Illustrations of the types of and duties thereunder. However, the
materials which are not adopted are term ‘‘subcontractor’’ has no signifi-
these. The incorporations by reference cance in the application of the Act,
of parts 1915, 1916, 1917, 1918 in §§ 1910.13, which was enacted under the Com-
1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16 are not in- merce Clause and which establishes du-
tended to include the discussion in ties for ‘‘employers’’ which are not de-
those parts of the coverage of the pendent for their application upon any
Longshoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ contractual relationship with the Fed-
Compensation Act or the penalty pro- eral Government or upon any form of
visions of the Act. Similarly, the incor- Federal financial assistance.
109
(d) For the purposes of this part, to or used as a means of, transportation
the extent that it may not already be on water.
included in paragraph (b) of this sec- [58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993]
tion, ‘‘construction work’’ includes the
erection of new electric transmission § 1910.16 Longshoring and marine ter-
and distribution lines and equipment, minals.
and the alteration, conversion, and im- (a) Safety and health standards for
provement of the existing transmission longshoring. (1) Part 1918 of this chapter
and distribution lines and equipment. shall apply exclusively, according to
§ 1910.15 Shipyard employment. the provisions thereof, to all employ-
ment of every employee engaged in
(a) Adoption and extension of estab- longshoring operations or related em-
lished safety and health standards for ployment aboard any vessel. All cargo
shipyard employment. The standards transfer accomplished with the use of
prescribed by part 1915 (formerly parts shore-based material handling devices
1501–1503) of this title and in effect on shall be governed by part 1917 of this
April 28, 1971 (as revised), are adopted chapter.
as occupational safety or health stand- (2) Part 1910 does not apply to
ards under section 6(a) of the Act and longshoring operations except for the
shall apply, according to the provisions following provisions:
thereof, to every employment and (i) Access to employee exposure and
place of employment of every employee medical records. Subpart Z, § 1910.1020;
engaged in ship repair, shipbreaking, (ii) Commercial diving operations. Sub-
and shipbuilding, or a related employ- part T;
ment. Each employer shall protect the (iii) Electrical. Subpart S when shore-
employment and places of employment based electrical installations provide
of each of his employees engaged in power for use aboard vessels;
ship repair, shipbreaking, and ship- (iv) Hazard communication. Subpart Z,
building, or a related employment, by § 1910.1200;
complying with the appropriate stand- (v) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z,
ards prescribed by this paragraph. § 1910.1096;
(b) Definitions. For purposes of this (vi) Noise. Subpart G, § 1910.95;
section: (vii) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G,
(1) Ship repair means any repair of a § 1910.97;
vessel, including, but not restricted to, NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2)(vii): Exposures
alterations, conversions, installations, to nonionizing radiation emissions from
cleaning, painting, and maintenance commercial vessel transmitters are consid-
work; ered hazardous under the following condi-
(2) Shipbreaking means any breaking tions: (1) where the radar is transmitting,
down of a vessel’s structure for the the scanner is stationary, and the exposure
purpose of scrapping the vessel, includ- distance is 18.7 feet (6 m.) or less; or (2)
where the radar is transmitting, the scanner
ing the removal of gear, equipment, or is rotating, and the exposure distance is 5.2
any component of a vessel; feet (1.8 m.) or less.
(3) Shipbuilding means the construc- (viii) Respiratory protection. Subpart
tion of a vessel, including the installa- I, § 1910.134;
tion of machinery and equipment; (ix) Toxic and hazardous substances.
(4) Related employment means any em- Subpart Z applies to marine cargo han-
ployment performed as an incident to, dling activities except for the fol-
or in conjunction with, ship repair, lowing:
shipbreaking, and shipbuilding work, (A) When a substance or cargo is con-
including, but not restricted to, inspec- tained within a sealed, intact means of
tion, testing, and employment as a packaging or containment complying
watchman; and with Department of Transportation or
(5) Vessel includes every description International Maritime Organization
of watercraft or other artificial con- requirements;1
trivance used, or capable of being used,
as a means of transportation on water, 1 The International Maritime Organization
including special purpose floating publishes the International Maritime Dan-
structures not primarily designed for, gerous Goods Code to aid compliance with
110
(B) Bloodborne pathogens, § 1910.1030; dling activities except for the fol-
(C) Carbon monoxide, § 1910.1000 (See lowing:
§ 1918.94 (a)); and (A) When a substance or cargo is con-
(D) Hydrogen sulfide, § 1910.1000 (See tained within a sealed, intact means of
§ 1918.94 (f)). packaging or containment complying
(x) Powered industrial truck operator with Department of Transportation or
training, Subpart N, § 1910.178(l). International Maritime Organization
(b) Safety and health standards for ma- requirements; 2
rine terminals. Part 1917 of this chapter (B) Bloodborne pathogens, § 1910.1030;
shall apply exclusively, according to (C) Carbon monoxide, § 1910.1000 (See
the provisions thereof, to employment § 1917.24(a)); and
within a marine terminal, except as (D) Hydrogen sulfide, § 1910.1000 (See
follows: § 1917.73(a)(2)); and
(1) The provisions of part 1917 of this (xiv) Powered industrial truck oper-
chapter do not apply to the following: ator training, subpart N, § 1910.178(l).
(i) Facilities used solely for the bulk (c) Definitions. For purposes of this
storage, handling, and transfer of flam- section:
mable and combustible liquids and (1) Longshoring operation means the
gases. loading, unloading, moving, or han-
(ii) Facilities subject to the regula- dling of, cargo, ship’s stores, gear, etc.,
tions of the Office of Pipeline Safety of into, in, on, or out of any vessel;
the Research and Special Programs Ad- (2) Related employment means any em-
ministration, Department of Transpor- ployment performed as an incident to
tation (49 CFR chapter I, subchapter or in conjunction with, longshoring op-
D), to the extent such regulations erations including, but not restricted
apply to specific working conditions. to, securing cargo, rigging, and em-
(iii) Fully automated bulk coal han- ployment as a porter, checker, or
dling facilities contiguous to electrical watchman; and
power generating plants. (3) Vessel includes every description
(2) Part 1910 does not apply to marine of watercraft or other artificial con-
terminals except for the following: trivance used, or capable of being used,
(i) Abrasive blasting. Subpart G, as a means of transportation on water,
§ 1910.94(a); including special purpose floating
(ii) Access to employee exposure and structures not primarily designed for,
medical records. Subpart Z, § 1910.1020; or used as a means of, transportation
(iii) Commercial diving operations. Sub- on water.
part T; (4) Marine terminal means wharves,
(iv) Electrical. Subpart S; bulkheads, quays, piers, docks and
(v) Grain handling facilities. Subpart other berthing locations and adjacent
R, § 1910.272; storage or adjacent areas and struc-
(vi) Hazard communication. Subpart Z, tures associated with the primary
§ 1910.1200; movement of cargo or materials from
(vii) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z, vessel to shore or shore to vessel in-
§ 1910.1096; cluding structures which are devoted
(viii) Noise. Subpart G, § 1910.95; to receiving, handling, holding, con-
(ix) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G, solidation and loading or delivery of
§ 1910.97. waterborne shipments or passengers,
(x) Respiratory protection. Subpart I, including areas devoted to the mainte-
§ 1910.134. nance of the terminal or equipment.
(xi) Safety requirements for scaffolding. The term does not include production
Subpart D, § 1910.28; or manufacturing areas having their
(xii) Servicing multi-piece and single own docking facilities and located at a
piece rim wheels. Subpart N, § 1910.177;
(xiii) Toxic and hazardous substances. 2 The International Maritime Organization
Subpart Z applies to marine cargo han- publishes the International Maritime Dan-
gerous Goods Code to aid compliance with
the international legal requirements of the the international legal requirements of the
International Convention for the Safety of International Convention for the Safety of
Life at Sea, 1960. Life at Sea, 1960.
111
marine terminal nor does the term in- be applicable by virtue of any of those
clude storage facilities directly associ- sections.
ated with those production or manufac- (b) Vinyl chloride. Section 1910.1017
turing areas. shall apply to the exposure of every
employee to vinyl chloride in every
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 48
FR 30908, July 5, 1983; 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, employment and place of employment
1987; 62 FR 40195, July 25, 1997; 63 FR 66270, covered by §§ 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14,
Dec. 1, 1998] 1910.15, or 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
ferent standard on exposure to vinyl
§ 1910.17 Effective dates. chloride which would otherwise be ap-
(a)–(b) [Reserved] plicable by virtue of any of those sec-
(c) Except whenever any employment tions.
or place of employment is, or becomes, (c) Acrylonitrile. Section 1910.1045
subject to any safety and health stand- shall apply to the exposure of every
ard prescribed in part 1915, 1916, 1917, employee to acrylonitrile in every em-
1918, or 1926 of this title on a date be- ployment and place of employment
fore August 27, 1971, by virtue of the covered by §§ 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14,
Construction Safety Act or the Long- 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
shoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ Com- ferent standard on exposure to acrylo-
pensation Act, that occupational safe- nitrile which would otherwise be appli-
ty and health standard as incorporated cable by virtue of any of those sec-
by reference in this subpart shall also tions.
become effective under the Williams- (d) [Reserved]
Steiger Occupational Safety and (e) Inorganic arsenic. Section 1910.1018
Health Act of 1970 on that date. shall apply to the exposure of every
employee to inorganic arsenic in every
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 employment covered by §§ 1910.12,
FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996] 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in
lieu of any different standard on expo-
§ 1910.18 Changes in established Fed- sure to inorganic arsenic which would
eral standards.
otherwise be applicable by virtue of
Whenever an occupational safety and any of those sections.
health standard adopted and incor- (f) [Reserved]
porated by reference in this subpart B (g) Lead. Section 1910.1025 shall apply
is changed pursuant to section 6(b) of to the exposure of every employee to
the Act and the statute under which lead in every employment and place of
the standard was originally promul- employment covered by §§ 1910.13,
gated, and in accordance with part 1911 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16, in lieu of
of this chapter, the standard shall be any different standard on exposure to
deemed changed for purposes of that lead which would otherwise be applica-
statute and this subpart B, and shall ble by virtue of those sections.
apply under this subpart B. For the (h) Ethylene oxide. Section 1910.1047
purposes of this section, a change in a shall apply to the exposure of every
standard includes any amendment, ad- employee to ethylene oxide in every
dition, or repeal, in whole or in part, of employment and place of employment
any standard. covered by §§ 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14,
1910.15, or 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
§ 1910.19 Special provisions for air ferent standard on exposure to ethyl-
contaminants. ene oxide which would otherwise be ap-
(a) Asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, plicable by virtue of those sections.
and actinolite dust. Section 1910.1001 (i) 4,4′-Methylenedianiline (MDA). Sec-
shall apply to the exposure of every tion 1910.1050 shall apply to the expo-
employee to asbestos, tremolite, sure of every employee to MDA in
anthophyllite, and actinolite dust in every employment and place of em-
every employment and place of employment covered by §§ 1910.13, 1910.14,
ployment covered by § 1910.16, in lieu of 1910.15, or 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
any different standard on exposure to ferent standard on exposure to MDA
asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and which would otherwise be applicable by
actinolite dust which would otherwise virtue of those sections.
112
(j) Formaldehyde. Section 1910.1048 opening, railing and toe board terms
shall apply to the exposure of every shall have the meanings ascribed in
employee to formaldehyde in every em- this paragraph.
ployment and place of employment (1) Floor hole. An opening measuring
covered by § 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, less than 12 inches but more than 1
1910.15 or 1910.16 in lieu of any different inch in its least dimension, in any
standard on exposure to formaldehyde floor, platform, pavement, or yard,
which would otherwise be applicable by through which materials but not per-
virtue of those sections. sons may fall; such as a belt hole, pipe
(k) Cadmium. Section 1910.1027 shall opening, or slot opening.
apply to the exposure of every em- (2) Floor opening. An opening meas-
ployee to cadmium in every employ- uring 12 inches or more in its least di-
ment and place of employment covered mension, in any floor, platform, pave-
by § 1910.16 in lieu of any different ment, or yard through which persons
standard on exposures to cadmium that may fall; such as a hatchway, stair or
would otherwise be applicable by virtue ladder opening, pit, or large manhole.
of those sections. Floor openings occupied by elevators,
(l) 1,3-Butadiene (BD). Section dumb waiters, conveyors, machinery,
1910.1051 shall apply to the exposure of or containers are excluded from this
every employee to BD in every employ- subpart.
ment and place of employment covered (3) Handrail. A single bar or pipe sup-
by §§ 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or ported on brackets from a wall or par-
1910.16, in lieu of any different standard tition, as on a stairway or ramp, to fur-
on exposure to BD which would other- nish persons with a handhold in case of
wise be applicable by virtue of those tripping.
sections. (4) Platform. A working space for per-
(m) Methylene chloride (MC). Section sons, elevated above the surrounding
1910.1052 shall apply to the exposure of floor or ground; such as a balcony or
every employee to MC in every employ- platform for the operation of machin-
ment and place of employment covered ery and equipment.
by § 1910.16 in lieu of any different (5) Runway. A passageway for per-
standard on exposure to MC which sons, elevated above the surrounding
would otherwise be applicable by virtue floor or ground level, such as a
of that section when it is not present footwalk along shafting or a walkway
in sealed, intact containers. between buildings.
(6) Standard railing. A vertical barrier
FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978; 43 FR 53007, Nov. 14, erected along exposed edges of a floor
1978; 44 FR 5447, Jan. 26, 1979; 46 FR 32022, opening, wall opening, ramp, platform,
June 19, 1981; 49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984; 50 FR or runway to prevent falls of persons.
51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 52 FR 46291, Dec. 4, 1987; (7) Standard strength and construction.
57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992; 57 FR 42388, Sept. Any construction of railings, covers, or
14, 1992; 59 FR 41057, Aug. 10, 1994; 61 FR 56831, other guards that meets the require-
Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600, Jan. 10, 1997] ments of § 1910.23.
(8) Stair railing. A vertical barrier
Subpart C [Reserved] erected along exposed sides of a stair-
way to prevent falls of persons.
Subpart D—Walking-Working (9) Toeboard. A vertical barrier at
Surfaces floor level erected along exposed edges
of a floor opening, wall opening, plat-
form, runway, or ramp to prevent falls
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa-
tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 of materials.
U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor’s (10) Wall hole. An opening less than 30
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR inches but more than 1 inch high, of
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), unrestricted width, in any wall or par-
as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. tition; such as a ventilation hole or
drainage scupper.
§ 1910.21 Definitions. (11) Wall opening. An opening at least
(a) As used in § 1910.23, unless the con- 30 inches high and 18 inches wide, in
text requires otherwise, floor and wall any wall or partition, through which
113
persons may fall; such as a yard-arm which a person may step in ascending
doorway or chute opening. or descending.
(b) As used in § 1910.24, unless the con- (2) Stepladder. A stepladder is a
text requires otherwise, fixed indus- selfsupporting portable ladder, non-
trial stair terms shall have the mean- adjustable in length, having flat steps
ing ascribed in this paragraph. and a hinged back. Its size is des-
(1) Handrail. A single bar or pipe sup- ignated by the overall length of the
ported on brackets from a wall or par- ladder measured along the front edge of
tition to provide a continuous hand- the side rails.
hold for persons using a stair. (3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a
(2) Nose, nosing. That portion of a non-self-supporting portable ladder,
tread projecting beyond the face of the nonadjustable in length, consisting of
riser immediately below. but one section. Its size is designated
(3) Open riser. The air space between by the overall length of the side rail.
the treads of stairways without upright (4) Extension ladder. An extension lad-
members (risers). der is a non-self-supporting portable
(4) Platform. An extended step or ladder adjustable in length. It consists
landing breaking a continuous run of of two or more sections traveling in
stairs. guides or brackets so arranged as to
(5) Railing. A vertical barrier erected
permit length adjustment. Its size is
along exposed sides of stairways and
designated by the sum of the lengths of
platforms to prevent falls of persons.
the sections measured along the side
The top member of railing usually
rails.
serves as a handrail.
(6) Rise. The vertical distance from (5) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder
the top of a tread to the top of the next is a non-self-supporting portable lad-
higher tread. der, nonadjustable in length, consisting
(7) Riser. The upright member of a of two or more sections of ladder so
step situated at the back of a lower constructed that the sections may be
tread and near the leading edge of the combined to function as a single lad-
next higher tread. der. Its size is designated by the overall
(8) Stairs, stairway. A series of steps length of the assembled sections.
leading from one level or floor to an- (6) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a
other, or leading to platforms, pits, self-supporting portable ladder, non-
boiler rooms, crossovers, or around ma- adjustable in length, consisting of two
chinery, tanks, and other equipment sections hinged at the top to form
that are used more or less continuously equal angles with the base. The size is
or routinely by employees, or only oc- designated by the length of the side
casionally by specific individuals. A se- rails measured along the front edge.
ries of steps and landings having three (7) Extension trestle ladder. An exten-
or more risers constitutes stairs or sion trestle ladder is a self-supporting
stairway. portable ladder, adjustable in length,
(9) Tread. The horizontal member of a consisting of a trestle ladder base and
step. a vertically adjustable single ladder,
(10) Tread run. The horizontal dis- with suitable means for locking the
tance from the leading edge of a tread ladders together. The size is designated
to the leading edge of an adjacent by the length of the trestle ladder base.
tread. (8) Special-purpose ladder. A special-
(11) Tread width. The horizontal dis- purpose ladder is a portable ladder
tance from front to back of tread in- which represents either a modification
cluding nosing when used. or a combination of design or construc-
(c) As used in § 1910.25, unless the con- tion features in one of the general-pur-
text requires otherwise, portable wood pose types of ladders previously de-
ladders terms shall have the meanings fined, in order to adapt the ladder to
ascribed in this paragraph. special or specific uses.
(1) Ladders. A ladder is an appliance (9) Trolley ladder. A trolley ladder is a
usually consisting of two side rails semifixed ladder, nonadjustable in
joined at regular intervals by cross- length, supported by attachments to an
pieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on overhead track, the plane of the ladder
114
being at right angles to the plane of somewhat lower stiffness and tensile
motion. strength for its weight in addition to
(10) Side-rolling ladder. A side-rolling high longitudinal shrinkage.
ladder is a semifixed ladder, nonadjust- (22) Low density. Low-density wood is
able in length, supported by attach- that which is exceptionally light in
ments to a guide rail, which is gen- weight and usually deficient in
erally fastened to shelving, the plane of strength properties for the species.
the ladder being also its plane of mo- (d) As used in § 1910.26, unless the con-
tion. text requires otherwise, portable metal
(11) Wood characteristics. Wood char- ladder terms shall have the meanings
acteristics are distinguishing features ascribed in this paragraph.
which by their extent and number de- (1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance
termine the quality of a piece of wood. usually consisting of two side rails
(12) Wood irregularities. Wood irreg- joined at regular intervals by cross-
ularities are natural characteristics in pieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on
or on wood that may lower its dura- which a person may step in ascending
bility, strength, or utility. or descending.
(13) Cross grain. Cross grain (slope of (2) Step ladder. A step ladder is a self-
grain) is a deviation of the fiber direc- supporting portable ladder, nonadjust-
tion from a line parallel to the sides of able in length, having flat steps and a
the piece. hinged back. Its size is designated by
(14) Knot. A knot is a branch or limb, the overall length of the ladder meas-
imbedded in the tree and cut through ured along the front edge of the side
in the process of lumber manufacture, rails.
classified according to size, quality, (3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a
and occurrence. The size of the knot is non-self-supporting portable ladder,
determined as the average diameter on nonadjustable in length, consisting of
the surface of the piece. but one section. Its size is designated
(15) Pitch and bark pockets. A pitch by the overall length of the side rail.
pocket is an opening extending parallel (4) Extension ladder. An extension lad-
to the annual growth rings containing, der is a non-self-supporting portable
or that has contained, pitch, either ladder adjustable in length. It consists
solid or liquid. A bark pocket is an of two or more sections traveling in
opening between annual growth rings guides or brackets so arranged as to
that contains bark. permit length adjustment. Its size is
(16) Shake. A shake is a separation designated by the sum of the lengths of
along the grain, most of which occurs the sections measured along the side
between the rings of annual growth. rails.
(17) Check. A check is a lengthwise (5) Platform ladder. A self-supporting
separation of the wood, most of which ladder of fixed size with a platform pro-
occurs across the rings of annual vided at the working level. The size is
growth. determined by the distance along the
(18) Wane. Wane is bark, or the lack front rail from the platform to the base
of wood from any cause, on the corner of the ladder.
of a piece. (6) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder
(19) Decay. Decay is disintegration of is a non-self-supporting portable lad-
wood substance due to action of wood- der, non-adjustable in length, con-
destroying fungi. It is also known as sisting of two or more sections so con-
dote and rot. structed that the sections may be com-
(20) Compression failure. A compres- bined to function as a single ladder. Its
sion failure is a deformation (buckling) size is designated by the overall length
of the fibers due to excessive compres- of the assembled sections.
sion along the grain. (7) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a
(21) Compression wood. Compression self-supporting portable ladder, non-ad-
wood is an aberrant (abnormal) and justable in length, consisting of two
highly variable type of wood structure sections, hinged at the top to form
occurring in softwood species. The equal angles with the base. The size is
wood commonly has density somewhat designated by the length of the side
higher than does normal wood, but rails measured along the front edge.
115
(8) Extension trestle ladder. An exten- (9) Cleats. Cleats are ladder cross-
sion trestle ladder is a self-supporting pieces of rectangular cross-section
portable ladder, adjustable in length, placed on edge on which a person may
consisting of a trestle ladder base and step in ascending or descending.
a vertically adjustable single ladder, (10) Steps. Steps are the flat cross-
with suitable means for locking the pieces of a ladder on which a person
ladders together. The size is designated may step in ascending or descending.
by the length of the trestle ladder base. (11) Cage. A cage is a guard that may
(9) Special-purpose ladder. A special- be referred to as a cage or basket guard
purpose ladder is a portable ladder which is an enclosure that is fastened
which represents either a modification to the side rails of the fixed ladder or
or a combination of design or construc- to the structure to encircle the climb-
tion features in one of the general-pur- ing space of the ladder for the safety of
pose types of ladders previously de- the person who must climb the ladder.
fined, in order to adapt the ladder to (12) Well. A well is a permanent com-
special or specific uses. plete enclosure around a fixed ladder,
(e) As used in § 1910.27, unless the con- which is attached to the walls of the
text requires otherwise, fixed ladder well. Proper clearances for a well will
terms shall have the meanings ascribed give the person who must climb the
in this paragraph. ladder the same protection as a cage.
(1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance (13) Ladder safety device. A ladder
usually consisting of two side rails safety device is any device, other than
joined at regular intervals by cross- a cage or well, designed to eliminate or
pieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on reduce the possibility of accidental
which a person may step in ascending falls and which may incorporate such
or descending. features as life belts, friction brakes,
and sliding attachments.
(2) Fixed ladder. A fixed ladder is a
(14) Grab bars. Grab bars are indi-
ladder permanently attached to a
vidual handholds placed adjacent to or
structure, building, or equipment.
as an extension above ladders for the
(3) Individual-rung ladder. An indi- purpose of providing access beyond the
vidual-rung ladder is a fixed ladder limits of the ladder.
each rung of which is individually at- (15) Through ladder. A through ladder
tached to a structure, building, or is one from which a man getting off at
equipment. the top must step through the ladder in
(4) Rail ladder. A rail ladder is a fixed order to reach the landing.
ladder consisting of side rails joined at (16) Side-step ladder. A side-step lad-
regular intervals by rungs or cleats and der is one from which a man getting off
fastened in full length or in sections to at the top must step sideways from the
a building, structure, or equipment. ladder in order to reach the landing.
(5) Railings. A railing is any one or a (f) As used in § 1910.28, unless the con-
combination of those railings context requires otherwise, scaffolding
structed in accordance with § 1910.23. A terms shall have the meaning ascribed
standard railing is a vertical barrier in this paragraph.
erected along exposed edges of floor (1) Bearer. A horizontal member of a
openings, wall openings, ramps, plat- scaffold upon which the platform rests
forms, and runways to prevent falls of and which may be supported by ledg-
persons. ers.
(6) Pitch. Pitch is the included angle (2) Boatswain’s chair. A seat sup-
between the horizontal and the ladder, ported by slings attached to a sus-
measured on the opposite side of the pended rope, designed to accommodate
ladder from the climbing side. one workman in a sitting position.
(7) Fastenings. A fastening is a device (3) Brace. A tie that holds one scaf-
to attach a ladder to a structure, build- fold member in a fixed position with
ing, or equipment. respect to another member.
(8) Rungs. Rungs are ladder cross- (4) Bricklayers’ square scaffold. A scaf-
pieces of circular or oval cross-section fold composed of framed wood squares
on which a person may step in ascend- which support a platform limited to
ing or descending. light and medium duty.
116
(5) Carpenters’ bracket scaffold. A scaf- (18) Masons’ adjustable multiple-point
fold consisting of wood or metal brack- suspension scaffold. A scaffold having a
ets supporting a platform. continuous platform supported by bear-
(6) Coupler. A device for locking to- ers suspended by wire rope from over-
gether the component parts of a tubu- head supports, so arranged and oper-
lar metal scaffold. The material used ated as to permit the raising or low-
for the couplers shall be of a structural ering of the platform to desired work-
type, such as a drop-forged steel, mal- ing positions.
leable iron, or structural grade alu- (19) Maximum intended load. The total
minum. The use of gray cast iron is of all loads including the working load,
prohibited. the weight of the scaffold, and such
(7) Crawling board or chicken ladder. A other loads as may be reasonably an-
plank with cleats spaced and secured at ticipated.
equal intervals, for use by a worker on (20) Medium duty scaffold. A scaffold
roofs, not designed to carry any mate- designed and constructed to carry a
rial. working load not to exceed 50 pounds
(8) Double pole or independent pole per square foot.
scaffold. A scaffold supported from the (21) Mid-rail. A rail approximately
base by a double row of uprights, inde- midway between the guardrail and
pendent of support from the walls and platform, used when required, and se-
constructed of uprights, ledgers, hori- cured to the uprights erected along the
zontal platform bearers, and diagonal exposed sides and ends of platforms.
bracing. (22) Needle beam scaffold. A light duty
(9) Float or ship scaffold. A scaffold scaffold consisting of needle beams
hung from overhead supports by means supporting a platform.
of ropes and consisting of a substantial (23) Outrigger scaffold. A scaffold sup-
platform having diagonal bracing un- ported by outriggers or thrustouts pro-
derneath, resting upon and securely jecting beyond the wall or face of the
fastened to two parallel plank bearers building or structure, the inboard ends
at right angles to the span. of which are secured inside of such a
(10) Guardrail. A rail secured to building or structure.
uprights and erected along the exposed (24) Putlog. A scaffold member upon
sides and ends of platforms. which the platform rests.
(25) Roofing bracket. A bracket used in
(11) Heavy duty scaffold. A scaffold de-
sloped roof construction, having provi-
signed and constructed to carry a
sions for fastening to the roof or sup-
working load not to exceed 75 pounds
ported by ropes fastened over the ridge
per square foot.
and secured to some suitable object.
(12) Horse scaffold. A scaffold for light (26) Runner. The lengthwise hori-
or medium duty, composed of horses zontal bracing or bearing members or
supporting a work platform. both.
(13) Interior hung scaffold. A scaffold (27) Scaffold. Any temporary elevated
suspended from the ceiling or roof platform and its supporting structure
structure. used for supporting workmen or mate-
(14) Ladder jack scaffold. A light duty rials or both.
scaffold supported by brackets at- (28) Single-point adjustable suspension
tached to ladders. scaffold. A manually or power-operated
(15) Ledger (stringer). A horizontal unit designed for light duty use, sup-
scaffold member which extends from ported by a single wire rope from an
post to post and which supports the overhead support so arranged and oper-
putlogs or bearer forming a tie between ated as to permit the raising or low-
the posts. ering of the platform to desired work-
(16) Light duty scaffold. A scaffold de- ing positions.
signed and constructed to carry a (29) Single pole scaffold. Platforms
working load not to exceed 25 pounds resting on putlogs or crossbeams, the
per square foot. outside ends of which are supported on
(17) Manually propelled mobile scaffold. ledgers secured to a single row of posts
A portable rolling scaffold supported or uprights and the inner ends of which
by casters. are supported on or in a wall.
117
(30) Stone setters’ adjustable multiple- and used to safely support the max-
point suspension scaffold. A swinging- imum intended loads.
type scaffold having a platform sup- (5) Design working load. The max-
ported by hangers suspended at four imum intended load, being the total of
points so as to permit the raising or all loads including the weight of the
lowering of the platform to the desired men, materials, equipment, and plat-
working position by the use of hoisting form.
machines. (6) Equivalent. Alternative design or
(31) Toeboard. A barrier secured along features, which will provide an equal
the sides and ends of a platform, to degree or factor of safety.
guard against the falling of material. (7) Guardrail. A barrier secured to
(32) Tube and coupler scaffold. An as- uprights and erected along the exposed
sembly consisting of tubing which sides and ends of platforms to prevent
serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties, falls of persons.
and runners, a base supporting the (8) Handrail. A rail connected to a
posts, and special couplers which serve ladder stand running parallel to the
to connect the uprights and to join the slope and/or top step.
various members. (9) Ladder stand. A mobile fixed size
(33) Tubular welded frame scaffold. A self-supporting ladder consisting of a
sectional, panel, or frame metal scaf- wide flat tread ladder in the form of
fold substantially built up of prefab- stairs. The assembly may include hand-
ricated welded sections which consist rails.
of posts and horizontal bearer with in- (10) Ledger (stringer). A horizontal
termediate members. Panels or frames scaffold member which extends from
shall be braced with diagonal or cross post to post and which supports the
braces. bearer forming a tie between the posts.
(34) Two-point suspension scaffold (11) Mobile scaffold (tower). A light,
(swinging scaffold). A scaffold, the plat- medium, or heavy duty scaffold mount-
form of which is supported by hangers ed on casters or wheels.
(stirrups) at two points, suspended (12) Mobile. ‘‘Manually propelled.’’
from overhead supports so as to permit (13) Mobile work platform. Generally a
the raising or lowering of the platform fixed work level one frame high on
to the desired working position by casters or wheels, with bracing diago-
tackle or hoisting machines. nally from platform to vertical frame.
(35) Window jack scaffold. A scaffold, (14) Runner. The lengthwise hori-
the platform of which is supported by a zontal bracing and/or bearing members.
bracket or jack which projects through (15) Scaffold. Any temporary elevated
a window opening. platform and its necessary vertical, di-
(36) Working load. Load imposed by agonal, and horizontal members used
men, materials, and equipment. for supporting workmen and materials.
(g) As used in § 1910.29, unless the con- (Also known as a scaffold tower.)
text requires otherwise, manually pro- (16) Toeboard. A barrier at platform
pelled mobile ladder stand and scaffold level erected along the exposed sides
(tower) terms shall have the meaning and ends of a scaffold platform to pre-
ascribed in this paragraph. vent falls of materials.
(1) Bearer. A horizontal member of a (17) Tube and coupler scaffold. An as-
scaffold upon which the platform rests sembly consisting of tubing which
and which may be supported by ledg- serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties,
ers. and runners, a base supporting the
(2) Brace. A tie that holds one scaf- posts, and uprights, and serves to join
fold member in a fixed position with the various members, usually used in
respect to another member. fixed locations.
(3) Climbing ladder. A separate ladder (18) Tubular welded frame scaffold. A
with equally spaced rungs usually at- sectional, panel, or frame metal scaf-
tached to the scaffold structure for fold substantially built up of prefab-
climbing and descending. ricated welded sections, which consist
(4) Coupler. A device for locking to- of posts and bearers with intermediate
gether the components of a tubular connecting members and braced with
metal scaffold which shall be designed diagonal or cross braces.
118
(19) Tubular welded sectional folding (d) Floor loading protection. (1) In
scaffold. A sectional, folding metal every building or other structure, or
scaffold either of ladder frame or inside part thereof, used for mercantile, busi-
stairway design, substantially built of ness, industrial, or storage purposes,
prefabricated welded sections, which the loads approved by the building offi-
consist of end frames, platform frame, cial shall be marked on plates of ap-
inside inclined stairway frame and proved design which shall be supplied
braces, or hinged connected diagonal and securely affixed by the owner of
and horizontal braces, capable of being the building, or his duly authorized
folded into a flat package when the agent, in a conspicuous place in each
scaffold is not in use. space to which they relate. Such plates
(20) Work level. The elevated plat- shall not be removed or defaced but, if
form, used for supporting workmen and lost, removed, or defaced, shall be re-
their materials, comprising the nec- placed by the owner or his agent.
essary vertical, horizontal, and diago- (2) It shall be unlawful to place, or
nal braces, guardrails, and ladder for cause, or permit to be placed, on any
access to the work platform. floor or roof of a building or other
structure a load greater than that for
§ 1910.22 General requirements. which such floor or roof is approved by
This section applies to all permanent the building official.
places of employment, except where
domestic, mining, or agricultural work § 1910.23 Guarding floor and wall
only is performed. Measures for the openings and holes.
control of toxic materials are consid- (a) Protection for floor openings. (1)
ered to be outside the scope of this sec- Every stairway floor opening shall be
tion. guarded by a standard railing con-
(a) Housekeeping. (1) All places of em- structed in accordance with paragraph
ployment, passageways, storerooms, (e) of this section. The railing shall be
and service rooms shall be kept clean provided on all exposed sides (except at
and orderly and in a sanitary condi- entrance to stairway). For infrequently
tion. used stairways where traffic across the
(2) The floor of every workroom shall opening prevents the use of fixed stand-
be maintained in a clean and, so far as ard railing (as when located in aisle
possible, a dry condition. Where wet spaces, etc.), the guard shall consist of
processes are used, drainage shall be a hinged floor opening cover of stand-
maintained, and false floors, platforms, ard strength and construction and re-
mats, or other dry standing places movable standard railings on all ex-
should be provided where practicable. posed sides (except at entrance to
(3) To facilitate cleaning, every floor, stairway).
working place, and passageway shall be (2) Every ladderway floor opening or
kept free from protruding nails, splin- platform shall be guarded by a stand-
ters, holes, or loose boards. ard railing with standard toeboard on
(b) Aisles and passageways. (1) Where all exposed sides (except at entrance to
mechanical handling equipment is opening), with the passage through the
used, sufficient safe clearances shall be railing either provided with a swinging
allowed for aisles, at loading docks, gate or so offset that a person cannot
through doorways and wherever turns walk directly into the opening.
or passage must be made. Aisles and (3) Every hatchway and chute floor
passageways shall be kept clear and in opening shall be guarded by one of the
good repairs, with no obstruction following:
across or in aisles that could create a (i) Hinged floor opening cover of
hazard. standard strength and construction
(2) Permanent aisles and passageways equipped with standard railings or per-
shall be appropriately marked. manently attached thereto so as to
(c) Covers and guardrails. Covers and/ leave only one exposed side. When the
or guardrails shall be provided to pro- opening is not in use, the cover shall be
tect personnel from the hazards of open closed or the exposed side shall be
pits, tanks, vats, ditches, etc. guarded at both top and intermediate
119
positions by removable standard rail- be provided, and the swing of the door
ings. shall not reduce the effective width to
(ii) A removable railing with less than 20 inches.
toeboard on not more than two sides of (b) Protection for wall openings and
the opening and fixed standard railings holes. (1) Every wall opening from
with toeboards on all other exposed which there is a drop of more than 4
sides. The removable railings shall be feet shall be guarded by one of the fol-
kept in place when the opening is not lowing:
in use. (i) Rail, roller, picket fence, half
door, or equivalent barrier. Where
Where operating conditions necessitate
there is exposure below to falling ma-
the feeding of material into any hatch-
terials, a removable toe board or the
way or chute opening, protection shall
equivalent shall also be provided. When
be provided to prevent a person from
the opening is not in use for handling
falling through the opening.
(4) Every skylight floor opening and materials, the guard shall be kept in
hole shall be guarded by a standard position regardless of a door on the
skylight screen or a fixed standard opening. In addition, a grab handle
railing on all exposed sides. shall be provided on each side of the
(5) Every pit and trapdoor floor open- opening with its center approximately
ing, infrequently used, shall be guarded 4 feet above floor level and of standard
by a floor opening cover of standard strength and mounting.
strength and construction. While the (ii) Extension platform onto which
cover is not in place, the pit or trap materials can be hoisted for handling,
opening shall be constantly attended and which shall have side rails or
equivalent guards of standard speci-
by someone or shall be protected on all
fications.
exposed sides by removable standard
(2) Every chute wall opening from
railings.
which there is a drop of more than 4
(6) Every manhole floor opening shall
feet shall be guarded by one or more of
be guarded by a standard manhole
the barriers specified in paragraph
cover which need not be hinged in
(b)(1) of this section or as required by
place. While the cover is not in place,
the conditions.
the manhole opening shall be con-
(3) Every window wall opening at a
stantly attended by someone or shall
stairway landing, floor, platform, or
be protected by removable standard
balcony, from which there is a drop of
railings.
more than 4 feet, and where the bottom
(7) Every temporary floor opening
of the opening is less than 3 feet above
shall have standard railings, or shall be
the platform or landing, shall be guard-
constantly attended by someone.
(8) Every floor hole into which pered by standard slats, standard grill
sons can accidentally walk shall be work (as specified in paragraph (e)(11)
guarded by either: of this section), or standard railing.
(i) A standard railing with standard Where the window opening is below the
toeboard on all exposed sides, or landing, or platform, a standard toe
(ii) A floor hole cover of standard board shall be provided.
strength and construction. While the (4) Every temporary wall opening
cover is not in place, the floor hole shall have adequate guards but these
shall be constantly attended by some- need not be of standard construction.
one or shall be protected by a remov- (5) Where there is a hazard of mate-
able standard railing. rials falling through a wall hole, and
(9) Every floor hole into which per- the lower edge of the near side of the
sons cannot accidentally walk (on ac- hole is less than 4 inches above the
count of fixed machinery, equipment, floor, and the far side of the hole more
or walls) shall be protected by a cover than 5 feet above the next lower level,
that leaves no openings more than 1 the hole shall be protected by a stand-
inch wide. The cover shall be securely ard toeboard, or an enclosing screen ei-
held in place to prevent tools or mate- ther of solid construction, or as speci-
rials from falling through. fied in paragraph (e)(11) of this section.
(10) Where doors or gates open di- (c) Protection of open-sided floors, plat-
rectly on a stairway, a platform shall forms, and runways. (1) Every open-
120
sided floor or platform 4 feet or more (iii) On stairways less than 44 inches
above adjacent floor or ground level wide having both sides open, one stair
shall be guarded by a standard railing railing on each side.
(or the equivalent as specified in para- (iv) On stairways more than 44 inches
graph (e)(3) of this section) on all open wide but less than 88 inches wide, one
sides except where there is entrance to handrail on each enclosed side and one
a ramp, stairway, or fixed ladder. The stair railing on each open side.
railing shall be provided with a (v) On stairways 88 or more inches
toeboard wherever, beneath the open wide, one handrail on each enclosed
sides, side, one stair railing on each open
(i) Persons can pass, side, and one intermediate stair railing
(ii) There is moving machinery, or located approximately midway of the
(iii) There is equipment with which width.
falling materials could create a hazard.
(2) Winding stairs shall be equipped
(2) Every runway shall be guarded by
with a handrail offset to prevent walk-
a standard railing (or the equivalent as
ing on all portions of the treads having
specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this sec-
width less than 6 inches.
tion) on all open sides 4 feet or more
above floor or ground level. Wherever (e) Railing, toe boards, and cover speci-
tools, machine parts, or materials are fications. (1) A standard railing shall
likely to be used on the runway, a consist of top rail, intermediate rail,
toeboard shall also be provided on each and posts, and shall have a vertical
exposed side. height of 42 inches nominal from upper
surface of top rail to floor, platform,
Runways used exclusively for special
runway, or ramp level. The top rail
purposes (such as oiling, shafting, or
shall be smooth-surfaced throughout
filling tank cars) may have the railing
the length of the railing. The inter-
on one side omitted where operating
mediate rail shall be approximately
conditions necessitate such omission,
halfway between the top rail and the
providing the falling hazard is mini-
floor, platform, runway, or ramp. The
mized by using a runway of not less
ends of the rails shall not overhang the
than 18 inches wide. Where persons en-
terminal posts except where such over-
tering upon runways become thereby
hang does not constitute a projection
exposed to machinery, electrical equip-
hazard.
ment, or other danger not a falling haz-
(2) A stair railing shall be of con-
ard, additional guarding than is here
struction similar to a standard railing
specified may be essential for protec-
but the vertical height shall be not
tion.
(3) Regardless of height, open-sided more than 34 inches nor less than 30
floors, walkways, platforms, or run- inches from upper surface of top rail to
ways above or adjacent to dangerous surface of tread in line with face of
equipment, pickling or galvanizing riser at forward edge of tread.
tanks, degreasing units, and similar (3) [Reserved]
hazards shall be guarded with a stand- (i) For wood railings, the posts shall
ard railing and toe board. be of at least 2-inch by 4-inch stock
(d) Stairway railings and guards. (1) spaced not to exceed 6 feet; the top and
Every flight of stairs having four or intermediate rails shall be of at least 2-
more risers shall be equipped with inch by 4-inch stock. If top rail is made
standard stair railings or standard of two right-angle pieces of 1-inch by 4-
handrails as specified in paragraphs inch stock, posts may be spaced on 8-
(d)(1) (i) through (v) of this section, the foot centers, with 2-inch by 4-inch in-
width of the stair to be measured clear termediate rail.
of all obstructions except handrails: (ii) For pipe railings, posts and top
(i) On stairways less than 44 inches and intermediate railings shall be at
wide having both sides enclosed, at least 11⁄2 inches nominal diameter with
least one handrail, preferably on the posts spaced not more than 8 feet on
right side descending. centers.
(ii) On stairways less than 44 inches (iii) For structural steel railings,
wide having one side open, at least one posts and top and intermediate rails
stair railing on open side. shall be of 2-inch by 2-inch by 3⁄8-inch
121
angles or other metal shapes of equiva- (iii) The size of handrails shall be:
lent bending strength with posts When of hardwood, at least 2 inches in
spaced not more than 8 feet on centers. diameter; when of metal pipe, at least
(iv) The anchoring of posts and fram- 11⁄2 inches in diameter. The length of
ing of members for railings of all types brackets shall be such as will give a
shall be of such construction that the clearance between handrail and wall or
completed structure shall be capable of any projection thereon of at least 3
withstanding a load of at least 200 inches. The spacing of brackets shall
pounds applied in any direction at any not exceed 8 feet.
point on the top rail. (iv) The mounting of handrails shall
(v) Other types, sizes, and arrange- be such that the completed structure is
ments of railing construction are ac- capable of withstanding a load of at
ceptable provided they meet the fol- least 200 pounds applied in any direc-
lowing conditions: tion at any point on the rail.
(a) A smooth-surfaced top rail at a (6) All handrails and railings shall be
height above floor, platform, runway, provided with a clearance of not less
or ramp level of 42 inches nominal; than 3 inches between the handrail or
(b) A strength to withstand at least railing and any other object.
the minimum requirement of 200 (7) Floor opening covers may be of
pounds top rail pressure; any material that meets the following
(c) Protection between top rail and strength requirements:
floor, platform, runway, ramp, or stair (i) Trench or conduit covers and their
treads, equivalent at least to that af- supports, when located in plant road-
forded by a standard intermediate rail; ways, shall be designed to carry a
(4) A standard toeboard shall be 4 truck rear-axle load of at least 20,000
inches nominal in vertical height from pounds.
its top edge to the level of the floor, (ii) Manhole covers and their sup-
platform, runway, or ramp. It shall be ports, when located in plant roadways,
securely fastened in place and with not shall comply with local standard high-
more than 1⁄4-inch clearance above way requirements if any; otherwise,
floor level. It may be made of any sub- they shall be designed to carry a truck
stantial material either solid or with rear-axle load of at least 20,000 pounds.
openings not over 1 inch in greatest di- (iii) The construction of floor open-
mension. ing covers may be of any material that
meets the strength requirements. Cov-
Where material is piled to such height ers projecting not more than 1 inch
that a standard toeboard does not pro- above the floor level may be used pro-
vide protection, paneling from floor to viding all edges are chamfered to an
intermediate rail, or to top rail shall angle with the horizontal of not over 30
be provided. degrees. All hinges, handles, bolts, or
(5)(i) A handrail shall consist of a other parts shall set flush with the
lengthwise member mounted directly floor or cover surface.
on a wall or partition by means of (8) Skylight screens shall be of such
brackets attached to the lower side of construction and mounting that they
the handrail so as to offer no obstruc- are capable of withstanding a load of at
tion to a smooth surface along the top least 200 pounds applied perpendicu-
and both sides of the handrail. The larly at any one area on the screen.
handrail shall be of rounded or other They shall also be of such construction
section that will furnish an adequate and mounting that under ordinary
handhold for anyone grasping it to loads or impacts, they will not deflect
avoid falling. The ends of the handrail downward sufficiently to break the
should be turned in to the supporting glass below them. The construction
wall or otherwise arranged so as not to shall be of grillwork with openings not
constitute a projection hazard. more than 4 inches long or of slatwork
(ii) The height of handrails shall be with openings not more than 2 inches
not more than 34 inches nor less than wide with length unrestricted.
30 inches from upper surface of hand- (9) Wall opening barriers (rails, roll-
rail to surface of tread in line with face ers, picket fences, and half doors) shall
of riser or to surface of ramp. be of such construction and mounting
122
that, when in place at the opening, the where such work may expose employ-
barrier is capable of withstanding a ees to acids, caustics, gases, or other
load of at least 200 pounds applied in harmful substances, or for which pur-
any direction (except upward) at any poses the carrying of tools or equip-
point on the top rail or corresponding ment by hand is normally required. (It
member. is not the intent of this section to pre-
(10) Wall opening grab handles shall clude the use of fixed ladders for access
be not less than 12 inches in length and to elevated tanks, towers, and similar
shall be so mounted as to give 3 inches structures, overhead traveling cranes,
clearance from the side framing of the etc., where the use of fixed ladders is
wall opening. The size, material, and common practice.) Spiral stairways
anchoring of the grab handle shall be shall not be permitted except for spe-
such that the completed structure is cial limited usage and secondary access
capable of withstanding a load of at situations where it is not practical to
least 200 pounds applied in any direc- provide a conventional stairway. Wind-
tion at any point of the handle. ing stairways may be installed on
(11) Wall opening screens shall be of tanks and similar round structures
such construction and mounting that where the diameter of the structure is
they are capable of withstanding a load not less than five (5) feet.
of at least 200 pounds applied hori- (c) Stair strength. Fixed stairways
zontally at any point on the near side shall be designed and constructed to
of the screen. They may be of solid con- carry a load of five times the normal
struction, of grillwork with openings live load anticipated but never of less
not more than 8 inches long, or of strength than to carry safely a moving
slatwork with openings not more than concentrated load of 1,000 pounds.
4 inches wide with length unrestricted. (d) Stair width. Fixed stairways shall
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 have a minimum width of 22 inches.
FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, (e) Angle of stairway rise. Fixed stairs
1984] shall be installed at angles to the hori-
zontal of between 30° and 50°. Any uni-
§ 1910.24 Fixed industrial stairs. form combination of rise/tread dimen-
(a) Application of requirements. This sions may be used that will result in a
section contains specifications for the stairway at an angle to the horizontal
safe design and construction of fixed within the permissible range. Table D–
general industrial stairs. This classi- 1 gives rise/tread dimensions which will
fication includes interior and exterior produce a stairway within the permis-
stairs around machinery, tanks, and sible range, stating the angle to the
other equipment, and stairs leading to horizontal produced by each combina-
or from floors, platforms, or pits. This tion. However, the rise/tread combina-
section does not apply to stairs used tions are not limited to those given in
for fire exit purposes, to construction Table D–1.
operations to private residences, or to
articulated stairs, such as may be in- TABLE D–1
stalled on floating roof tanks or on Tread
Rise (in
dock facilities, the angle of which Angle to horizontal
inches)
run (in
inches)
changes with the rise and fall of the
base support. 30°35′ .................................................... 61⁄2 11
(b) Where fixed stairs are required. 32°08′ .................................................... 63⁄4 103⁄4
33°41′ .................................................... 7 101⁄2
Fixed stairs shall be provided for ac- 35°16′ .................................................... 71⁄4 101⁄4
cess from one structure level to an- 36°52′ .................................................... 7 ⁄2
1 10
other where operations necessitate reg- 38°29′ .................................................... 73⁄4 93⁄4
40°08′ .................................................... 8 91⁄2
ular travel between levels, and for ac- 41°44′ .................................................... 81⁄4 91⁄4
cess to operating platforms at any 43°22′ .................................................... 8 ⁄2
1 9
equipment which requires attention 45°00′ .................................................... 83⁄4 83⁄4
46°38′ .................................................... 9 81⁄2
routinely during operations. Fixed 48°16′ .................................................... 91⁄4 81⁄4
stairs shall also be provided where ac- 49°54′ .................................................... 91⁄2 8
cess to elevations is daily or at each
shift for such purposes as gauging, in- (f) Stair treads. All treads shall be rea-
spection, regular maintenance, etc., sonably slip-resistant and the nosings
123
shall be of nonslip finish. Welded bar (c) Construction requirements. (1) [Re-
grating treads without nosings are ac- served]
ceptable providing the leading edge can (2) Portable stepladders. Stepladders
be readily identified by personnel de- longer than 20 feet shall not be sup-
scending the stairway and provided the plied. Stepladders as hereinafter speci-
tread is serrated or is of definite non- fied shall be of three types:
slip design. Rise height and tread width
Type I—Industrial stepladder, 3 to 20 feet for
shall be uniform throughout any flight
heavy duty, such as utilities, contractors,
of stairs including any foundation and industrial use.
structure used as one or more treads of Type II—Commercial stepladder, 3 to 12 feet
the stairs. for medium duty, such as painters, offices,
(g) Stairway platforms. Stairway plat- and light industrial use.
forms shall be no less than the width of Type III—Household stepladder, 3 to 6 feet
a stairway and a minimum of 30 inches for light duty, such as light household use.
in length measured in the direction of (i) General requirements.
travel. (a) [Reserved]
(h) Railings and handrails. Standard (b) A uniform step spacing shall be
railings shall be provided on the open employed which shall be not more than
sides of all exposed stairways and stair 12 inches. Steps shall be parallel and
platforms. Handrails shall be provided level when the ladder is in position for
on at least one side of closed stairways use.
preferably on the right side descending. (c) The minimum width between side
Stair railings and handrails shall be in- rails at the top, inside to inside, shall
stalled in accordance with the provi- be not less than 111⁄2 inches. From top
sions of § 1910.23. to bottom, the side rails shall spread at
(i) Vertical clearance. Vertical clear- least 1 inch for each foot of length of
ance above any stair tread to an over- stepladder.
head obstruction shall be at least 7 feet (d)–(e) [Reserved]
measured from the leading edge of the (f) A metal spreader or locking device
tread. of sufficient size and strength to se-
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 curely hold the front and back sections
FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, in open positions shall be a component
1984] of each stepladder. The spreader shall
have all sharp points covered or re-
§ 1910.25 Portable wood ladders. moved to protect the user. For Type III
(a) Application of requirements. This ladder, the pail shelf and spreader may
section is intended to prescribe rules be combined in one unit (the so-called
and establish minimum requirements shelf-lock ladder).
for the construction, care, and use of (3) Portable rung ladders.
the common types of portable wood (i) [Reserved]
ladders, in order to insure safety under (ii) Single ladder. (a) Single ladders
normal conditions of usage. Other longer than 30 feet shall not be sup-
types of special ladders, fruitpicker’s plied.
ladders, combination step and exten- (b) [Reserved]
sion ladders, stockroom step ladders, (iii) Two-section ladder. (a) Two-sec-
aisle-way step ladders, shelf ladders, tion extension ladders longer than 60
and library ladders are not specifically feet shall not be supplied. All ladders of
covered by this section. this type shall consist of two sections,
(b) Materials—(1) Requirements appli- one to fit within the side rails of the
cable to all wood parts. (i) All wood other, and arranged in such a manner
parts shall be free from sharp edges and that the upper section can be raised
splinters; sound and free from accepted and lowered.
visual inspection from shake, wane, (b) [Reserved]
compression failures, decay, or other (iv) Sectional ladder. (a) Assembled
irregularities. Low density wood shall combinations of sectional ladders
not be used. longer than lengths specified in this
(ii) [Reserved] subdivision shall not be used.
(2) [Reserved] (b) [Reserved]
124
(v) Trestle and extension trestle ladder. der is one-quarter of the working
(a) Trestle ladders, or extension sec- length of the ladder (the length along
tions or base sections of extension tres- the ladder between the foot and the top
tle ladders longer than 20 feet shall not support). The ladder shall be so placed
be supplied. as to prevent slipping, or it shall be
(b) [Reserved] lashed, or held in position. Ladders
(4) Special-purpose ladders. shall not be used in a horizontal posi-
(i) [Reserved] tion as platforms, runways, or scaf-
(ii) Painter’s stepladder. (a) Painter’s folds;
stepladders longer than 12 feet shall (ii) Ladders for which dimensions are
not be supplied. specified should not be used by more
(b) [Reserved] than one man at a time nor with ladder
(iii) Mason’s ladder. A mason’s ladder jacks and scaffold planks where use by
is a special type of single ladder in- more than one man is anticipated. In
tended for use in heavy construction such cases, specially designed ladders
work. with larger dimensions of the parts
(a) Mason’s ladders longer than 40 should be procured;
feet shall not be supplied. (iii) Portable ladders shall be so
(b) [Reserved] placed that the side rails have a secure
(5) Trolley and side-rolling ladders—(i) footing. The top rest for portable rung
Length. Trolley ladders and side-rolling and cleat ladders shall be reasonably
ladders longer than 20 feet should not rigid and shall have ample strength to
be supplied. support the applied load;
(ii) [Reserved] (iv) Ladders shall not be placed in
(d) Care and use of ladders—(1) Care. front of doors opening toward the lad-
To insure safety and serviceability the der unless the door is blocked upon,
following precautions on the care of locked, or guarded;
ladders shall be observed: (v) Ladders shall not be placed on
(i) Ladders shall be maintained in boxes, barrels, or other unstable bases
good condition at all times, the joint to obtain additional height;
between the steps and side rails shall (vi)–(vii) [Reserved]
be tight, all hardware and fittings se- (viii) Ladders with broken or missing
curely attached, and the movable parts steps, rungs, or cleats, broken side
shall operate freely without binding or rails, or other faulty equipment shall
undue play. not be used; improvised repairs shall
(ii) Metal bearings of locks, wheels, not be made;
pulleys, etc., shall be frequently lubri- (ix) Short ladders shall not be spliced
cated. together to provide long sections;
(iii) Frayed or badly worn rope shall (x) Ladders made by fastening cleats
be replaced. across a single rail shall not be used;
(iv) Safety feet and other auxiliary (xi) Ladders shall not be used as
equipment shall be kept in good condi- guys, braces, or skids, or for other than
tion to insure proper performance. their intended purposes;
(v)–(ix) [Reserved] (xii) Tops of the ordinary types of
(x) Ladders shall be inspected fre- stepladders shall not be used as steps;
quently and those which have devel- (xiii) On two-section extension lad-
oped defects shall be withdrawn from ders the minimum overlap for the two
service for repair or destruction and sections in use shall be as follows:
tagged or marked as ‘‘Dangerous, Do Overlap
Not Use.’’ Size of ladder (feet) (feet)
(xi) Rungs should be kept free of
Up to and including 36 ........................................ 3
grease and oil. Over 36 up to and including 48 ........................... 4
(2) Use. The following safety pre- Over 48 up to and including 60 ........................... 5
cautions shall be observed in connec-
tion with the use of ladders: (xiv) Portable rung ladders with rein-
(i) Portable rung and cleat ladders forced rails (see paragraphs (c)(3) (ii)(c)
shall, where possible, be used at such a and (iii)(d) this section) shall be used
pitch that the horizontal distance from only with the metal reinforcement on
the top support to the foot of the lad- the under side;
125
(xv) No ladder should be used to gain over two-section ladders shall not ex-
access to a roof unless the top of the ceed 60 feet in length.
ladder shall extend at least 3 feet above (iii) Based on the nominal length of
the point of support, at eave, gutter, or the ladder, each section of a multisec-
roofline; tion ladder shall overlap the adjacent
(xvi) [Reserved] section by at least the number of feet
(xvii) Middle and top sections of sec- stated in the following:
tional or window cleaner’s ladders
should not be used for bottom section Normal length of ladder (feet) Overlap
(feet)
unless the user equips them with safety
shoes; Up to and including 36 ........................................ 3
(xviii) [Reserved] Over 36, up to and including 48 .......................... 4
Over 48, up to 60 ................................................ 5
(xix) The user should equip all port-
able rung ladders with nonslip bases
when there is a hazard of slipping. Non- (iv) Extension ladders shall be
slip bases are not intended as a sub- equipped with positive stops which will
stitute for care in safely placing, lash- insure the overlap specified in the
ing, or holding a ladder that is being table above.
used upon oily, metal, concrete, or slip- (3) General specifications—step ladders.
pery surfaces; (i)–(ii) [Reserved]
(xx) The bracing on the back legs of (iii) The length of a stepladder is
step ladders is designed solely for in- measured by the length of the front
creasing stability and not for climbing. rail. To be classified as a standard
length ladder, the measured length
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 shall be within plus or minus one-half
FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10,
inch of the specified length. Step-
1984]
ladders shall not exceed 20 feet in
§ 1910.26 Portable metal ladders. length.
(iv)–(vi) [Reserved]
(a) Requirements—(1) General. Specific
(vii) The bottoms of the four rails are
design and construction requirements
to be supplied with insulating nonslip
are not part of this section because of
material for the safety of the user.
the wide variety of metals and design
possibilities. However, the design shall (viii) A metal spreader or locking de-
be such as to produce a ladder without vice of sufficient size and strength to
structural defects or accident hazards securely hold the front and back sec-
such as sharp edges, burrs, etc. The tions in the open position shall be a
metal selected shall be of sufficient component of each stepladder. The
strength to meet the test require- spreader shall have all sharp points or
ments, and shall be protected against edges covered or removed to protect
corrosion unless inherently corrosion- the user.
resistant. (4) General specifications—trestles and
(i)–(ii) [Reserved] extension trestle ladders. (i) Trestle lad-
(iii) The spacing of rungs or steps ders or extension sections or base sec-
shall be on 12-inch centers. tions of extension trestle ladders shall
(iv) [Reserved] be not more than 20 feet in length.
(v) Rungs and steps shall be cor- (ii) [Reserved]
rugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with (5) General specifications—platform lad-
skid-resistant material, or otherwise ders. (i) The length of a platform ladder
treated to minimize the possibility of shall not exceed 20 feet. The length of
slipping. a platform ladder shall be measured
(2) General specifications—straight and along the front rail from the floor to
extension ladders. (i) The minimum the platform.
width between side rails of a straight (ii) [Reserved]
ladder or any section of an extension (b) [Reserved]
ladder shall be 12 inches. (c) Care and maintenance of ladders—
(ii) The length of single ladders or in- (1) General. To get maximum service-
dividual sections of ladders shall not ability, safety, and to eliminate unnec-
exceed 30 feet. Two-section ladders essary damage of equipment, good safe
shall not exceed 48 feet in length and practices in the use and care of ladder
126
equipment must be employed by the (viii) See § 1910.333(c) for work prac-
users. tices to be used when work is per-
The following rules and regulations formed on or near electric circuits.
are essential to the life of the equip- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
ment and the safety of the user. FR 49745, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10,
(2) Care of ladders. 1984; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990]
(i)–(iii) [Reserved]
§ 1910.27 Fixed ladders.
(iv) Ladders must be maintained in
good usable condition at all times. (a) Design requirements—(1) Design
(v) [Reserved] considerations. All ladders, appur-
tenances, and fastenings shall be de-
(vi) If a ladder is involved in any of
signed to meet the following load re-
the following, immediate inspection is quirements:
necessary: (i) The minimum design live load
(a) If ladders tip over, inspect ladder shall be a single concentrated load of
for side rails dents or bends, or exces- 200 pounds.
sively dented rungs; check all rung-to- (ii) The number and position of addi-
side-rail connections; check hardware tional concentrated live-load units of
connections; check rivets for shear. 200 pounds each as determined from an-
(b)–(c) [Reserved] ticipated usage of the ladder shall be
(d) If ladders are exposed to oil and considered in the design.
grease, equipment should be cleaned of (iii) The live loads imposed by per-
oil, grease, or slippery materials. This sons occupying the ladder shall be con-
can easily be done with a solvent or sidered to be concentrated at such
steam cleaning. points as will cause the maximum
stress in the structural member being
(vii) Ladders having defects are to be
considered.
marked and taken out of service until (iv) The weight of the ladder and at-
repaired by either maintenance depart- tached appurtenances together with
ment or the manufacturer. the live load shall be considered in the
(3) Use of ladders. (i). A simple rule design of rails and fastenings.
for setting up a ladder at the proper (2) Design stresses. Design stresses for
angle is to place the base a distance wood components of ladders shall not
from the vertical wall equal to one- exceed those specified in § 1910.25. All
fourth the working length of the lad- wood parts of fixed ladders shall meet
der. the requirements of § 1910.25(b).
(ii) Portable ladders are designed as a For fixed ladders consisting of wood
one-man working ladder based on a 200- side rails and wood rungs or cleats,
pound load. used at a pitch in the range 75 degrees
(iii) The ladder base section must be to 90 degrees, and intended for use by
placed with a secure footing. no more than one person per section,
(iv) The top of the ladder must be single ladders as described in
placed with the two rails supported, § 1910.25(c)(3)(ii) are acceptable.
unless equipped with a single support (b) Specific features—(1) Rungs and
attachment. cleats. (i) All rungs shall have a min-
(v) When ascending or descending, imum diameter of three-fourths inch
for metal ladders, except as covered in
the climber must face the ladder.
paragraph (b)(7)(i) of this section and a
(vi) Ladders must not be tied or fas-
minimum diameter of 11⁄8 inches for
tened together to provide longer sec- wood ladders.
tions. They must be equipped with the (ii) The distance between rungs,
hardware fittings necessary if the man- cleats, and steps shall not exceed 12
ufacturer endorses extended uses. inches and shall be uniform throughout
(vii) Ladders should not be used as a the length of the ladder.
brace, skid, guy or gin pole, gangway, (iii) The minimum clear length of
or for other uses than that for which rungs or cleats shall be 16 inches.
they were intended, unless specifically (iv) Rungs, cleats, and steps shall be
recommended for use by the manufac- free of splinters, sharp edges, burrs, or
turer. projections which may be a hazard.
127
(v) The rungs of an individual-rung painted or otherwise treated to resist
ladder shall be so designed that the corrosion and rusting.
foot cannot slide off the end. A sug- (ii) Wood ladders, when used under
gested design is shown in figure D–1. conditions where decay may occur,
shall be treated with a nonirritating
preservative, and the details shall be
such as to prevent or minimize the ac-
cumulation of water on wood parts.
(iii) When different types of mate-
rials are used in the construction of a
ladder, the materials used shall be so
treated as to have no deleterious effect
one upon the other.
FIGURE D–1—SUGGESTED DESIGN FOR RUNGS

ON INDIVIDUAL-RUNG LADDERS.
(2) Side rails. Side rails which might
be used as a climbing aid shall be of
such cross sections as to afford ade-
quate gripping surface without sharp
edges, splinters, or burrs.
(3) Fastenings. Fastenings shall be an
integral part of fixed ladder design.
(4) Splices. All splices made by what-
ever means shall meet design require-
ments as noted in paragraph (a) of this
section. All splices and connections
shall have smooth transition with
original members and with no sharp or
extensive projections.
(5) Electrolytic action. Adequate means
shall be employed to protect dissimilar FIGURE D–2—RAIL LADDER WITH BAR STEEL
metals from electrolytic action when RAILS AND ROUND STEEL RUNGS
such metals are joined. (c) Clearance—(1) Climbing side. On
(6) Welding. All welding shall be in fixed ladders, the perpendicular dis-
accordance with the ‘‘Code for Welding tance from the centerline of the rungs
in Building Construction’’ (AWSD1.0–
to the nearest permanent object on the
1966).
climbing side of the ladder shall be 36
(7) Protection from deterioration. (i)
Metal ladders and appurtenances shall inches for a pitch of 76 degrees, and 30
be painted or otherwise treated to re- inches for a pitch of 90 degrees (fig. D–
sist corrosion and rusting when loca- 2 of this section), with minimum clear-
tion demands. Ladders formed by indi- ances for intermediate pitches varying
vidual metal rungs imbedded in con- between these two limits in proportion
crete, which serve as access to pits and to the slope, except as provided in sub-
to other areas under floors, are fre- paragraphs (3) and (5) of this para-
quently located in an atmosphere that graph.
causes corrosion and rusting. To in- (2) Ladders without cages or wells. A
crease rung life in such atmosphere, in- clear width of at least 15 inches shall
dividual metal rungs shall have a min- be provided each way from the center-
imum diameter of 1 inch or shall be line of the ladder in the climbing
EC27OC91.002
128
EC27OC91.001
space, except when cages or wells are than 12 inches, or less than 21⁄2 inches
necessary. (fig. D–4).
(3) Ladders with cages or baskets. Lad-
ders equipped with cage or basket are
excepted from the provisions of sub-
paragraphs (1) and (2) of this para-
graph, but shall conform to the provi-
sions of paragraph (d)(1)(v) of this sec-
tion. Fixed ladders in smooth-walled
wells are excepted from the provisions
of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph,
but shall conform to the provisions of
paragraph (d)(1)(vi) of this section.
(4) Clearance in back of ladder. The
distance from the centerline of rungs,
cleats, or steps to the nearest perma-
nent object in back of the ladder shall
be not less than 7 inches, except that
when unavoidable obstructions are en-
countered, minimum clearances as
shown in figure D–3 shall be provided.
MINIMUM LADDER CLEARANCES
FIGURE D–4—LADDER FAR FROM WALL

(7) Hatch cover. Counterweighted
hatch covers shall open a minimum of
60 degrees from the horizontal. The dis-
tance from the centerline of rungs or
cleats to the edge of the hatch opening
on the climbing side shall be not less
than 24 inches for offset wells or 30
inches for straight wells. There shall be
not protruding potential hazards with-
in 24 inches of the centerline of rungs
or cleats; any such hazards within 30
inches of the centerline of the rungs or
cleats shall be fitted with deflector
plates placed at an angle of 60 degrees
from the horizontal as indicated in fig-
ure D–5. The relationship of a fixed lad-
FIGURE D–3—CLEARANCE FOR UNAVOIDABLE der to an acceptable counterweighted
OBSTRUCTION AT REAR OF FIXED LADDER hatch cover is illustrated in figure D–6.
(5) Clearance in back of grab bar. The (d) Special requirements—(1) Cages or
distance from the centerline of the wells. (i) Cages or wells (except on
grab bar to the nearest permanent ob- chimney ladders) shall be built, as
ject in back of the grab bars shall be shown on the applicable drawings, cov-
not less than 4 inches. Grab bars shall ered in detail in figures D–7, D–8, and
not protrude on the climbing side be- D–9, or of equivalent construction.
yond the rungs of the ladder which (ii) Cages or wells (except as provided
they serve. in subparagraph (5) of this paragraph)
(6) Step-across distance. The step- conforming to the dimensions shown in
across distance from the nearest edge figures D–7, D–8, and D–9 shall be pro-
of ladder to the nearest edge of equip- vided on ladders of more than 20 feet to
ment or structure shall be not more a maximum unbroken length of 30 feet.
EC27OC91.004
129
EC27OC91.003
than 4 inches, or portion of cage oppo-

site ladder shall be carried to the base.
(v) Cages shall not extend less than
27 nor more than 28 inches from the
centerline of the rungs of the ladder.
Cage shall not be less than 27 inches in
width. The inside shall be clear of pro-
jections. Vertical bars shall be located
at a maximum spacing of 40 degrees
around the circumference of the cage;
this will give a maximum spacing of
approximately 91⁄2 inches, center to
center.
(vi) Ladder wells shall have a clear
width of at least 15 inches measured
FIGURE D–5—DEFLECTOR PLATES FOR HEAD each way from the centerline of the
HAZARDS ladder. Smooth-walled wells shall be a
minimum of 27 inches from the center-
line of rungs to the well wall on the
climbing side of the ladder. Where
other obstructions on the climbing side
of the ladder exist, there shall be a
minimum of 30 inches from the center-
line of the rungs.
FIGURE D–6—RELATIONSHIP OF FIXED LADDER

TO A SAFE ACCESS HATCH
(iii) Cages shall extend a minimum of
42 inches above the top of landing, un-
less other acceptable protection is pro-
vided.
(iv) Cages shall extend down the lad-
der to a point not less than 7 feet nor
more than 8 feet above the base of the FIGURE D–7—CAGES FOR LADDERS MORE THAN
ladder, with bottom flared not less 20 FEET HIGH
EC27OC91.007
EC27OC91.006
130
EC27OC91.005
FIGURE D–8—CLEARANCE DIAGRAM FOR FIXED LADDER IN WELL
131
EC27OC91.008
(3) Ladder extensions. The side rails of

through or side-step ladder extensions
shall extend 31⁄2 feet above parapets and
landings. For through ladder exten-
sions, the rungs shall be omitted from
the extension and shall have not less
than 18 nor more than 24 inches clear-
ance between rails. For side-step or off-
set fixed ladder sections, at landings,
the side rails and rungs shall be carried
to the next regular rung beyond or
above the 31⁄2 feet minimum (fig. D–10).
FIGURE D–9—CAGES—SPECIAL APPLICATIONS.

(2) Landing platforms. When ladders
are used to ascend to heights exceeding
20 feet (except on chimneys), landing
platforms shall be provided for each 30
feet of height or fraction thereof, ex-
cept that, where no cage, well, or lad-
der safety device is provided, landing
platforms shall be provided for each 20
feet of height or fraction thereof. Each
ladder section shall be offset from adja-
cent sections. Where installation con-
ditions (even for a short, unbroken
length) require that adjacent sections
be offset, landing platforms shall be
provided at each offset.
(i) Where a man has to step a dis-
tance greater than 12 inches from the
centerline of the rung of a ladder to the
nearest edge of structure or equipment,
a landing platform shall be provided. FIGURE D–10—OFFSET FIXED LADDER
The minimum step-across distance SECTIONS
shall be 21⁄2 inches. (4) Grab bars. Grab bars shall be
(ii) All landing platforms shall be spaced by a continuation of the rung
equipped with standard railings and spacing when they are located in the
toeboards, so arranged as to give safe horizontal position. Vertical grab bars
access to the ladder. Platforms shall be shall have the same spacing as the lad-
not less than 24 inches in width and 30 der side rails. Grab-bar diameters shall
inches in length. be the equivalent of the round-rung di-
(iii) One rung of any section of ladder ameters.
shall be located at the level of the (5) Ladder safety devices. Ladder safe-
landing laterally served by the ladder. ty devices may be used on tower, water
Where access to the landing is through tank, and chimney ladders over 20 feet
the ladder, the same rung spacing as in unbroken length in lieu of cage pro-
used on the ladder shall be used from tection. No landing platform is re-
the landing platform to the first rung quired in these cases. All ladder safety
below the landing. devices such as those that incorporate
EC27OC91.010
132
EC27OC91.009
lifebelts, friction brakes, and sliding § 1910.28 Safety requirements for scaf-
attachments shall meet the design re- folding.
quirements of the ladders which they (a) General requirements for all scaf-
serve. folds. (1) Scaffolds shall be furnished
(e) Pitch—(1) Preferred pitch. The pre- and erected in accordance with this
ferred pitch of fixed ladders shall be standard for persons engaged in work
considered to come in the range of 75 that cannot be done safely from the
degrees and 90 degrees with the hori- ground or from solid construction, ex-
zontal (fig. D–11). cept that ladders used for such work
shall conform to § 1910.25 and § 1910.26.
(2) The footing or anchorage for scaf-
folds shall be sound, rigid, and capable
of carrying the maximum intended
load without settling or displacement.
Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes,
loose brick, or concrete blocks shall
not be used to support scaffolds or
planks.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Scaffolds and their components
shall be capable of supporting without
failure at least four times the max-
imum intended load.
(5) Scaffolds and other devices men-
tioned or described in this section shall
be maintained in safe condition. Scaf-
folds shall not be altered or moved
horizontally while they are in use or
occupied.
(6) Any scaffold damaged or weak-
ened from any cause shall be imme-
diately repaired and shall not be used
FIGURE D–11—PITCH OF FIXED LADDERS until repairs have been completed.
(2) Substandard pitch. Fixed ladders (7) Scaffolds shall not be loaded in
shall be considered as substandard if excess of the working load for which
they are installed within the sub- they are intended.
standard pitch range of 60 and 75 de- (8) All load-carrying timber members
grees with the horizontal. Substandard of scaffold framing shall be a minimum
fixed ladders are permitted only where of 1,500 f. (Stress Grade) construction
it is found necessary to meet condi- grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi-
tions of installation. This substandard nal sizes as provided in the American
pitch range shall be considered as a Lumber Standards, except that where
critical range to be avoided, if possible. rough sizes are noted, only rough or
(3) Scope of coverage in this section. undressed lumber of the size specified
will satisfy minimum requirements.
This section covers only fixed ladders
(NOTE: Where nominal sizes of lumber
within the pitch range of 60 degrees
are used in place of rough sizes, the
and 90 degrees with the horizontal.
nominal size lumber shall be such as to
(4) Pitch greater than 90 degrees. Lad- provide equivalent strength to that
ders having a pitch in excess of 90 de- specified in tables D–7 through D–12
grees with the horizontal are prohib- and D–16.)
ited. (9) All planking shall be Scaffold
(f) Maintenance. All ladders shall be Grade as recognized by grading rules
maintained in a safe condition. All lad- for the species of wood used. The max-
ders shall be inspected regularly, with imum permissible spans for 2- × 9-inch
the intervals between inspections being or wider planks are shown in the fol-
determined by use and exposure. lowing table:
133
EC27OC91.011
Material involving the use of corrosive sub-

Nominal
stances or chemicals.
Full thickness un- thickness (22) Wire or fiber rope used for scaf-
dressed lumber lumber fold suspension shall be capable of sup-
porting at least six times the intended
load.
Working load
(p.s.f.) ............... 25 50 75 25 50
(23) When acid solutions are used for
Permissible span cleaning buildings over 50 feet in
(ft.) ................... 10 8 6 8 9 height, wire rope supported scaffolds
shall be used.
The maximum permissible span for (24) The use of shore scaffolds or
11⁄4×9-inch or wider plank of full thick- lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
ness is 4 feet with medium loading of 50 (25) Lumber sizes, when used in this
p.s.f. section, refer to nominal sizes except
(10) Nails or bolts used in the con- where otherwise stated.
struction of scaffolds shall be of ade- (26) Scaffolds shall be secured to per-
quate size and in sufficient numbers at manent structures, through use of an-
each connection to develop the de- chor bolts, reveal bolts, or other equiv-
signed strength of the scaffold. Nails alent means. Window cleaners’ anchor
shall not be subjected to a straight pull bolts shall not be used.
and shall be driven full length. (27) Special precautions shall be
(11) All planking or platforms shall taken to protect scaffold members, in-
be overlapped (minimum 12 inches) or cluding any wire or fiber ropes, when
secured from movement. using a heat-producing process.
(12) An access ladder or equivalent (b) General requirements for wood pole
safe access shall be provided. scaffolds. (1) Scaffold poles shall bear
(13) Scaffold planks shall extend over on a foundation of sufficient size and
their end supports not less than 6 strength to spread the load from the
inches nor more than 18 inches. poles over a sufficient area to prevent
settlement. All poles shall be set
(14) The poles, legs, or uprights of
plumb.
scaffolds shall be plumb, and securely
(2) Where wood poles are spliced, the
and rigidly braced to prevent swaying
ends shall be squared and the upper
and displacement.
section shall rest squarely on the lower
(15) Materials being hoisted onto a section. Wood splice plates shall be
scaffold shall have a tag line. provided on at least two adjacent sides
(16) Overhead protection shall be pro- and shall not be less than 4 feet 0
vided for men on a scaffold exposed to inches in length, overlapping the abut-
overhead hazards. ted ends equally, and have the same
(17) Scaffolds shall be provided with a width and not less than the cross-sec-
screen between the toeboard and the tional area of the pole. Splice plates of
guardrail, extending along the entire other materials of equivalent strength
opening, consisting of No. 18 gauge U.S. may be used.
Standard Wire one-half-inch mesh or (3) Independent pole scaffolds shall be
the equivalent, where persons are reset as near to the wall of the building
quired to work or pass under the scaf- as practicable.
folds. (4) All pole scaffolds shall be securely
(18) Employees shall not work on guyed or tied to the building or struc-
scaffolds during storms or high winds. ture. Where the height or length ex-
(19) Employees shall not work on ceeds 25 feet, the scaffold shall be se-
scaffolds which are covered with ice or cured at intervals not greater than 25
snow, unless all ice or snow is removed feet vertically and horizontally.
and planking sanded to prevent slip- (5) Putlogs or bearers shall be set
ping. with their greater dimensions vertical,
(20) Tools, materials, and debris shall long enough to project over the ledgers
not be allowed to accumulate in quan- of the inner and outer rows of poles at
tities to cause a hazard. least 3 inches for proper support.
(21) Only treated or protected fiber (6) Every wooden putlog on single
rope shall be used for or near any work pole scaffolds shall be reinforced with a
134
3⁄16×2-inch steel strip or equivalent se- prevent tipping. The planks that meet
cured to its lower edge throughout its the corner putlog at an angle shall be
entire length. laid first, extending over the diago-
(7) Ledgers shall be long enough to nally placed putlog far enough to have
extend over two pole spaces. Ledgers a good safe bearing, but not far enough
shall not be spliced between the poles. to involve any danger from tipping.
Ledgers shall be reinforced by bearing The planking running in the opposite
blocks securely nailed to the side of direction at right angles shall be laid
the pole to form a support for the ledg- so as to extend over and rest on the
er. first layer of planking.
(8) Diagonal bracing shall be provided (14) When moving platforms to the
to prevent the poles from moving in a next level, the old platform shall be
direction parallel with the wall of the left undisturbed until the new putlogs
building, or from buckling. or bearers have been set in place, ready
(9) Cross bracing shall be provided be- to receive the platform planks.
tween the inner and outer sets of poles
(15) Guardrails not less than 2 × 4
in independent pole scaffolds. The free
inches or the equivalent and not less
ends of pole scaffolds shall be cross
braced. than 36 inches or more than 42 inches
(10) Full diagonal face bracing shall high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
be erected across the entire face of pole 1 × 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
scaffolds in both directions. The braces toeboards, shall be installed at all open
shall be spliced at the poles. sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
(11) Platform planks shall be laid above the ground or floor. Toeboards
with their edges close together so the shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
platform will be tight with no spaces height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
through which tools or fragments of accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
material can fall. this section.
(12) Where planking is lapped, each (16) All wood pole scaffolds 60 feet or
plank shall lap its end supports at least less in height shall be constructed and
12 inches. Where the ends of planks erected in accordance with tables D–7
abut each other to form a flush floor, through D–12 of this section. If they are
the butt joint shall be at the centerline over 60 feet in height they shall be de-
of a pole. The abutted ends shall rest signed by a registered professional en-
on separate bearers. Intermediate gineer and constructed and erected in
beams shall be provided where nec- accordance with such design. A copy of
essary to prevent dislodgment of the typical drawings and specifications
planks due to deflection, and the ends shall be made available to the em-
shall be nailed or cleated to prevent ployer and for inspection purposes.
their dislodgment. (17) Wood-pole scaffolds shall not be
(13) When a scaffold turns a corner, erected beyond the reach of effective
the platform planks shall be laid to firefighting apparatus.
TABLE D–7—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE
SCAFFOLDS—LIGHT DUTY
Maximum height of scaffold
20 feet 60 feet
Uniformly distributed load ................................................ Not to exceed 25 pounds per

square foot..
Poles or uprights .............................................................. 2 by 4 in ....................................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ............................................... 6 ft. 0 in ........................................ 10 ft. 0 in.
Maximum width of scaffold .............................................. 5 ft. 0 in ........................................ 5 ft. 0 in.
Bearers or putlogs to 3 ft. 0 in. width .............................. 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
Bearers or putlogs to 5 ft. 0 in. width .............................. 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 4 in .................. 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 4 in. (rough).
Ledgers ............................................................................ 1 by 4 in ....................................... 11⁄4 by 9 in.
Planking ........................................................................... 11⁄4 by 9 in. (rough) ...................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members .......................... 7 ft. 0 in ........................................ 7 ft. 0 in.
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal ..................................... 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Tie-ins .............................................................................. 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Toeboards ........................................................................ 4 in. high (minimum) .................... 4 in. high (minimum).
135
TABLE D–7—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE
SCAFFOLDS—LIGHT DUTY—Continued
20 feet 60 feet
Guardrail .......................................................................... 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.

All members except planking are used on edge.
TABLE D–8—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAX- TABLE D–9—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAX-
IMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE IMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE
SCAFFOLDS—MEDIUM DUTY SCAFFOLDS—HEAVY DUTY
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 50 pounds Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 75 pounds
per square foot. per square foot.
Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft. Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft.
Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in. Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 8 ft. 0 in. Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 6 ft. 0 in.
Maximum width of scaffold ........... 5 ft. 0 in. Maximum width of scaffold ........... 5 ft. 0 in.
Bearers or putlogs ........................ 2 by 9 in. or 3 by 4 in. Bearers or putlogs ........................ 2 by 9 in. or 3 by 5 in.
Spacing of bearers or putlogs ...... 8 ft. 0 in. (rough).
Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. Spacing of bearers or putlogs ...... 6 ft. 0 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal 9 ft. 0 in. Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in.
members. Vertical spacing of horizontal 6 ft. 6 in.
Bracing, horizontal ........................ 1 by 6 in. or 11⁄4 by 4 in. members.
Bracing, diagonal .......................... 1 by 4 in. Bracing, horizontal and diagonal .. 2 by 4 in.
Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in. Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in.
Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in. Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in.
Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum). Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in. Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
All members except planking are used on edge. All members except planking are used on edge.
TABLE D–10—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDEPENDENT POLE
SCAFFOLDS—LIGHT DUTY
20 feet 60 feet
Uniformly distributed load ................................................ Not to exceed 25 pounds per

square foot..
Poles or uprights .............................................................. 2 by 4 in ....................................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ............................................... 6 ft. 0 in ........................................ 10 ft. 0 in.
Pole spacing (transverse) ................................................ 6 ft. 0 in ........................................ 10 ft. 0 in.
Ledgers ............................................................................ 11⁄4 by 4 in ................................... 11⁄4 by 9 in.
Bearers to 3 ft. 0 in. span ................................................ 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
Bearers to 10 ft. 0 in. span .............................................. 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 4 in .................. 2 by 9 (rough) or 3 by 8 in.
Planking ........................................................................... 11⁄4 by 9 in ................................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members .......................... 7 ft. 0 in ........................................ 7 ft. 0 in.
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal ..................................... 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Tie-ins .............................................................................. 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Toeboards ........................................................................ 4 in. high ...................................... 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail .......................................................................... 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
TABLE D–11—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND TABLE D–11—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND
MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDE- MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDE-
PENDENT POLE SCAFFOLDS—MEDIUM DUTY PENDENT POLE SCAFFOLDS—MEDIUM DUTY—
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 50 pounds
Continued
per square foot. Bracing, diagonal .......................... 1 by 4 in.
Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft. Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in.
Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in.
Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 8 ft. 0 in.
Pole spacing (transverse) ............. 8 ft. 0 in. Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum).
Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal 6 ft. 0 in. All members except planking are used on edge.
members.
Spacing of bearers ....................... 8 ft. 0 in.
Bearers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. (rough) or 2 by
10 in.
Bracing, horizontal ........................ 1 by 6 in. or 11⁄4 by 4 in.
136
TABLE D–12—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND (2) A medium-duty tube and coupler
MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDE- scaffold shall have all posts, runners,
PENDENT POLE SCAFFOLDS—HEAVY DUTY and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D.
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 75 pounds steel tubing. Posts spaced not more
per square foot. than 6 feet apart by 8 feet along the
Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft. length of the scaffold shall have bear-
Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 6 ft. 0 in. ers of nominal 21⁄2-inch O.D. steel tub-
Pole spacing (transverse) ............. 8 ft. 0 in. ing. Posts spaced not more than 5 feet
Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. apart by 8 feet along the length of the
Vertical spacing of horizontal 4 ft. 6 in.
members. scaffold shall have bearers of nominal
Bearers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. (rough). 2-inch O.D. steel tubing. Other struc-
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal .. 2 by 4 in.
Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in.
tural metals when used must be de-
Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in. signed to carry an equivalent load.
Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum). (3) A heavy-duty tube and coupler
Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
scaffold shall have all posts, runners,
and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D.
TABLE D–13—TUBE AND COUPLER steel tubing, with the posts spaced not
SCAFFOLDS—LIGHT DUTY more than 6 feet apart by 6 feet 6
inches along the length of the scaffold.
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 25 p.s.f. Other structural metals when used
post spacing (longitudinal) ............ 10 ft. 0 in.
Post spacing (transverse) ............. 6 ft. 0 in. must be designed to carry an equiva-
lent load.
Working levels
Additional planked
Maximum height
(4) Tube and coupler scaffolds shall
levels be limited in heights and working lev-
1 8 125 ft. els to those permitted in tables D–13,
2 4 125 ft. 14, and 15, of this section. Drawings and
3 0 91 ft. 0 in.
specifications of all tube and coupler
scaffolds above the limitations in ta-
TABLE D–14—TUBE AND COUPLER bles D–13, 14, and 15 of this section
SCAFFOLDS—MEDIUM DUTY shall be designed by a registered pro-
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 50 p.s.f. fessional engineer and copies made
Post spacing (longitudinal) ........... 8 ft. 0 in. available to the employer and for in-
Post spacing (transverse) ............. 6 ft. 0 in.
spection purposes.
Additional planked
(5) All tube and coupler scaffolds
Working levels Maximum height shall be constructed and erected to
levels
support four times the maximum in-
1 6 125 ft.
2 0 78 ft. 0 in. tended loads as set forth in tables D–13,
14, and 15 of this section, or as set forth
TABLE D–15—TUBE AND COUPLER in the specifications by a registered
SCAFFOLDS—HEAVY DUTY professional engineer, copies which
shall be made available to the em-
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 75 p.s.f. ployer and for inspection purposes.
Post spacing (longitudinal) ........... 6 ft. 6 in.
Post spacing (transverse) ............. 6 ft. 0 in. (6) All tube and coupler scaffolds
shall be erected by competent and ex-
Additional planked perienced personnel.
Working levels levels Maximum height
(7) Posts shall be accurately spaced,
1 6 125 ft. erected on suitable bases, and main-
tained plumb.
(c) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) A (8) Runners shall be erected along the
light-duty tube and coupler scaffold length of the scaffold located on both
shall have all posts, bearers, runners, the inside and the outside posts at even
and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D. height. Runners shall be interlocked to
steel tubing. The posts shall be spaced form continuous lengths and coupled to
no more than 6 feet apart by 10 feet each post. The bottom runners shall be
along the length of the scaffold. Other located as close to the base as possible.
structural metals when used must be Runners shall be placed not more than
designed to carry an equivalent load. 6 feet 6 inches on centers.
137
(9) Bearers shall be installed trans- (2) Spacing of panels or frames shall
versely between posts and shall be se- be consistent with the loads imposed.
curely coupled to the posts bearing on (3) Scaffolds shall be properly braced
the runner coupler. When coupled di- by cross bracing or diagonal braces, or
rectly to the runners, the coupler must both, for securing vertical members to-
be kept as close to the posts as pos- gether laterally, and the cross braces
sible. shall be of such length as will auto-
(10) Bearers shall be at least 4 inches matically square and aline vertical
but not more than 12 inches longer members so that the erected scaffold is
than the post spacing or runner spac- always plumb, square, and rigid. All
ing. Bearers may be cantilevered for brace connections shall be made se-
use as brackets to carry not more than cure.
two planks. (4) Scaffold legs shall be set on ad-
(11) Cross bracing shall be installed justable bases or plain bases placed on
across the width of the scaffold at least mud sills or other foundations ade-
every third set of posts horizontally quate to support the maximum in-
and every fourth runner vertically. tended load.
Such bracing shall extend diagonally (5) The frames shall be placed one on
from the inner and outer runners up- top of the other with coupling or stack-
ward to the next outer and inner run- ing pins to provide proper vertical
ners. alinement of the legs.
(12) Longitudinal diagonal bracing
(6) Where uplift may occur, panels
shall be installed at approximately a
shall be locked together vertically by
45-degree angle from near the base of
pins or other equivalent suitable
the first outer post upward to the ex-
means.
treme top of the scaffold. Where the
longitudinal length of the scaffold per- (7) Guardrails not less than 2 × 4
mits, such bracing shall be duplicated inches or the equivalent and not less
beginning at every fifth post. In a simi- than 36 inches or more than 42 inches
lar manner, longitudinal diagonal brac- high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
ing shall also be installed from the last 1- × 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
post extending back and upward to- toeboards, shall be installed at all open
ward the first post. Where conditions sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
preclude the attachment of this brac- above the ground or floor. Toeboards
ing to the posts, it may be attached to shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
the runners. height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
(13) The entire scaffold shall be tied accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
to and securely braced against the this section.
building at intervals not to exceed 30 (8) All tubular metal scaffolds shall
feet horizontally and 26 feet vertically. be constructed and erected to support
(14) Guardrails not less than 2×4 four times the maximum intended
inches or the equivalent and not less loads.
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches (9) To prevent movement, the scaf-
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of fold shall be secured to the building or
1×4-inch lumber or equivalent, and structure at intervals not to exceed 30
toeboards, shall be installed at all open feet horizontally and 26 feet vertically.
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet (10) Maximum permissible spans of
above the ground or floor. Toeboards planking shall be in conformity with
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in paragraph (a)(9) of this section.
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in (11) Drawings and specifications for
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of all frame scaffolds over 125 feet in
this section. height above the base plates shall be
(d) Tubular welded frame scaffolds. (1) designed by a registered professional
Metal tubular frame scaffolds, includ- engineer and copies made available to
ing accessories such as braces, brack- the employer and for inspection pur-
ets, trusses, screw legs, ladders, etc., poses.
shall be designed and proved to safely (12) All tubular welded frame scaf-
support four times the maximum in- folds shall be erected by competent and
tended load. experienced personnel.
138
(13) Frames and accessories for scaf- building wall. Planking shall be nailed
folds shall be maintained in good re- or bolted to outriggers.
pair and every defect, unsafe condition, (5) Where there is danger of material
or noncompliance with this section falling from the scaffold, a wire mesh
shall be immediately corrected before or other enclosure shall be provided be-
further use of the scaffold. Any broken, tween the guardrail and the toeboard.
bent, excessively rusted, altered, or (6) Where additional working levels
otherwise structurally damaged frames are required to be supported by the
or accessories shall not be used. outrigger method, the plans and speci-
(14) Periodic inspections shall be fications of the outrigger and scaf-
made of all welded frames and acces- folding structure shall be designed by a
sories, and any maintenance, including registered professional engineer.
painting, or minor corrections author- (f) Masons’ adjustable multiple-point
ized by the manufacturer, shall be suspension scaffolds. (1) The scaffold
made before further use. shall be capable of sustaining a work-
(e) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) Outrigger ing load of 50 pounds per square foot
beams shall extend not more than 6 and shall not be loaded in excess of
feet beyond the face of the building. that figure.
The inboard end of outrigger beams, (2) The scaffold shall be provided
measured from the fulcrum point to with hoisting machines that meet the
the extreme point of support, shall be requirements of a nationally recog-
not less than one and one-half times nized testing laboratory. Refer to
the outboard end in length. The beams § 1910.7 for definition of nationally rec-
shall rest on edge, the sides shall be ognized testing laboratory.
plumb, and the edges shall be hori-
zontal. The fulcrum point of the beam TABLE D–16—MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND
shall rest on a secure bearing at least MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF OUT-
RIGGER SCAFFOLDS
6 inches in each horizontal dimension.
The beam shall be secured in place Medium
Light duty
against movement and shall be se- duty
curely braced at the fulcrum point Maximum scaffold load ............... 25 p.s.f. ..... 50 p.s.f.
against tipping. Outrigger size ............................. 2×10 in ...... 3×10 in.
(2) The inboard ends of outrigger Maximum outrigger spacing ....... 10 ft 0 in .... 6 ft 0 in.
beams shall be securely supported ei- Planking ...................................... 2×9 in ........ 2×9 in.
Guardrail ..................................... 2×4 in ........ 2×4 in.
ther by means of struts bearing against Guardrail uprights ....................... 2×4 in ........ 2×4 in.
sills in contact with the overhead Toeboards (minimum) ................ 4 in ............ 4 in.
beams or ceiling, or by means of ten-
sion members secured to the floor (3) The platform shall be supported
joists underfoot, or by both if nec- by wire ropes in conformity with para-
essary. The inboard ends of outrigger graph (a)(22) of this section, suspended
beams shall be secured against tipping from overhead outrigger beams.
and the entire supporting structure (4) The scaffold outrigger beams shall
shall be securely braced in both direc- consist of structural metal securely
tions to prevent any horizontal move- fastened or anchored to the frame or
ment. floor system of the building or struc-
(3) Unless outrigger scaffolds are de- ture.
signed by a licensed professional engi- (5) Each outrigger beam shall be
neer, they shall be constructed and equivalent in strength to at least a
erected in accordance with table D–16. standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound steel I-
Outrigger scaffolds designed by a reg- beam, be at least 15 feet long, and shall
istered professional engineer shall be not project more than 6 feet 6 inches
constructed and erected in accordance beyond the bearing point.
with such design. A copy of the de- (6) Where the overhang exceeds 6 feet
tailed drawings and specifications 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com-
showing the sizes and spacing of mem- posed of stronger beams or multiple
bers shall be kept on the job. beams and be installed in accordance
(4) Planking shall be laid tight and with approved designs and instruc-
shall extend to within 3 inches of the tions.
139
(7) If channel iron outrigger beams sional engineer, and supervised by a
are used in place of I-beams, they shall competent, designated person.
be securely fastened together with the (g) Two-point suspension scaffolds
flanges turned out. (swinging scaffolds). (1) Two-point sus-
(8) All outrigger beams shall be set pension scaffold platforms shall be not
and maintained with their webs into less than 20 inches no more than 36
vertical position. inches wide overall. The platform shall
(9) A stop bolt shall be placed at each be securely fastened to the hangers by
end of every outrigger beam. U-bolts or by other equivalent means.
(10) The outrigger beam shall rest on (2) The hangers of two-point suspen-
suitable wood-bearing blocks. sion scaffolds shall be made of wrought
(11) All parts of the scaffold such as iron, mild steel, or other equivalent
bolts, nuts, fittings, clamps, wire rope, material having a cross-sectional area
and outrigger beams and their fas- capable of sustaining four times the
tenings, shall be maintained in sound maximum intended load, and shall be
and good working condition and shall designed with a support for guardrail,
be inspected before each installation intermediate rail, and toeboard.
and periodically thereafter. (3) When hoisting machines are used
(12) The free end of the suspension on two-point suspension scaffolds, such
wire ropes shall be equipped with prop- machines shall be of a design tested
er size thimbles and be secured by and approved by a nationally recog-
splicing or other equivalent means. nized testing laboratory. Refer to
The running ends shall be securely at- § 1910.7 for definition of nationally rec-
tached to the hoisting drum and at ognized testing laboratory.
least four turns of rope shall at all
(4) The roof irons or hooks shall be of
times remain on the drum.
wrought iron, mild steel, or other
(13) Where a single outrigger beam is equivalent material of proper size and
used, the steel shackles or clevises
design, securely installed and an-
with which the wire ropes are attached
chored. Tie-backs of three-fourth inch
to the outrigger beams shall be placed
manila rope or the equivalent shall
directly over the hoisting drums.
serve as a secondary means of anchor-
(14) The scaffold platform shall be
age, installed at right angles to the
equivalent in strength to at least 2-
face of the building whenever possible
inch planking. (For maximum planking
spans see paragraph (a)(9) of this sec- and secured to a structurally sound
tion.) portion of the building.
(15) Guardrails not less than 2 × 4 (5) Guardrails not less than 2 × 4
inches or the equivalent and not less inches or the equivalent and not less
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches than 36 inches or more than 42 inches
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
1 × 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and 1- × 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
toeboards, shall be installed at all open toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
above the ground or floor. Toeboards above the ground or floor. Toeboards
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section. this section.
(16) Overhead protection shall be pro- (6) Two-point suspension scaffolds
vided on the scaffold, not more than 9 shall be suspended by wire or fiber
feet above the platform, consisting of ropes. Wire and fiber ropes shall con-
2-inch planking or material of equiva- form to paragraph (a)(22) of this sec-
lent strength laid tight, when men are tion.
at work on the scaffold and an over- (7) The blocks for fiber ropes shall be
head hazard exists. of standard 6-inch size, consisting of at
(17) Each scaffold shall be installed least one double and one single block.
or relocated in accordance with designs The sheaves of all blocks shall fit the
and instructions, of a registered profes- size of rope used.
140
(8) All wire ropes, fiber ropes, slings, eighth inch. The stringers shall be tied
hangers, platforms, and other sup- together with the tie rods not less than
porting parts shall be inspected before one-quarter inch in diameter, passing
every installation. Periodic inspections through the stringers and riveted up
shall be made while the scaffold is in tight against washers on both ends.
use. The flooring strips shall be spaced not
(9) On suspension scaffolds designed more than five-eighth inch apart ex-
for a working load of 500 pounds no cept at the side rails where the space
more than two men shall be permitted may be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms
to work at one time. On suspension shall be constructed in accordance with
scaffolds with a working load of 750 table D–17.
pounds, no more than three men shall (ii) Plank-type platforms shall be
be permitted to work at one time. Each composed of not less than nominal 2×8-
workman shall be protected by a safety inch unspliced planks, properly cleated
lifebelt attached to a lifeline. The life- together on the underside starting 6
line shall be securely attached to sub-
inches from each end; intervals in be-
stantial members of the structure (not
tween shall not exceed 4 feet. The
scaffold), or to securely rigged lines,
plank-type platform shall not extend
which will safely suspend the workman
beyond the hangers more than 18
in case of a fall.
(10) Where acid solutions are used, inches. A bar or other effective means
fiber ropes are not permitted unless shall be securely fastened to the plat-
acid-proof. form at each end to prevent its slipping
(11) Two-point suspension scaffolds off the hanger. The span between hang-
shall be securely lashed to the building ers for plank-type platforms shall not
or structure to prevent them from exceed 10 feet.
swaying. Window cleaners’ anchors (iii) Beam platforms shall have side
shall not be used for this purpose. stringers of lumber not less than 2×6
(12) The platform of every two-point inches set on edge. The span between
suspension scaffold shall be one of the hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when
following types: beam platforms are used. The flooring
(i) The side stringer of ladder-type shall be supported on 2- and 6-inch
platforms shall be clear straight- crossbeams, laid flat and set into the
grained spruce or materials of equiva- upper edge of the stringers with a snug
lent strength and durability. The rungs fit, at intervals of not more than 4 feet,
shall be of straight-grained oak, ash, or securely nailed in place. The flooring
hickory, at least 11⁄8 inch in diameter, shall be of 1×6inch material properly
with seven-eighth inch tenons mortised nailed. Floorboards shall not be spaced
into the side stringers at least seven- more than one-half inch apart.
TABLE D–17—SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of platform (feet)
12 14 & 16 18 & 20 22 & 24 28 & 30
Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):

At ends (in.) ...................................................................... 13⁄4×23⁄4 13⁄4×23⁄4 13⁄4×3 13⁄4×3 13⁄4×31⁄2
At middle (in.) ................................................................... 13⁄4×33⁄4 13⁄4×33⁄4 13⁄4×4 13⁄4×41⁄4 13⁄4×5
Reinforcing strip (minimum) 1 ................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
Rungs 2 ..................................................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
Tie rods:
Number (minimum) ........................................................... 3 4 4 5 6
Diameter (minimum) ......................................................... 1⁄4 in 1⁄4 in 1⁄4 in 14 ⁄ in 1⁄4 in.
Flooring, minimum finished size (in.) ....................................... 12⁄ ×23⁄4 12⁄ ×23⁄4 12⁄ ×23⁄4 ⁄ × ⁄
12 34 12⁄ ×23⁄4
1 A 1⁄8x7⁄8-in. steel reinforcing strip or its equivalent shall be attached to the side or underside full length.
2 Rungs shall be 11⁄8-in. minimum, diameter with at least 7⁄8-in. diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 in. cen-
ter to center.
(h) Stone setters’ adjustable multiple- working load of 25 pounds per square
point suspension scaffolds. (1) The scaf-
fold shall be capable of sustaining a
141
foot and shall not be overloaded. Scaf- power units or manually operated
folds shall not be used for storage of winches, shall be a type tested and list-
stone or other heavy materials. ed by a nationally recognized testing
(2) The hoisting machine and its sup- laboratory. Refer to § 1910.399(a)(77) for
ports shall be of a type tested and list- definition of listed, and § 1910.7 for na-
ed by a nationally recognized testing tionally recognized testing laboratory.
laboratory. Refer to § 1910.399(a)(77) for (2) [Reserved]
definition of listed, and § 1910.7 for na- (3) All power-operated gears and
tionally recognized testing laboratory. brakes shall be enclosed.
(3) The platform shall be securely fas-
(4) In addition to the normal oper-
tened to the hangers by U-bolts or
other equivalent means. ating brake, all-power driven units
(4) The scaffold unit shall be sus- must have an emergency brake which
pended from metal outriggers, iron engages automatically when the nor-
brackets, wire rope slings, or iron mal speed of descent is exceeded.
hooks which will safely support the (5) Guards, mid-rails, and toeboards
maximum intended load. shall completely enclose the cage or
(5) Outriggers when used shall be set basket. Guardrails shall be no less than
with their webs in a vertical position, 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent in-
securely anchored to the building or stalled no less than 36 inches nor more
structure and provided with stop bolts than 42 inches above the platform. Mid-
at each end. rails shall be 1 by 6 inches or the equiv-
(6) The scaffold shall be supported by alent, installed equidistant between
wire rope conforming with paragraph the guardrail and the platform.
(a)(22) of this section, suspended from Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4
overhead supports. inches in height.
(7) The free ends of the suspension (6) The hoisting machines, cables,
wire ropes shall be equipped with prop- and equipment shall be regularly serv-
er size thimbles, secured by splicing or iced and inspected after each installa-
other equivalent means. The running
tion and every 30 days thereafter.
ends shall be securely attached to the
hoisting drum and at least four turns (7) The units may be combined to
of rope shall remain on the drum at all form a two-point suspension scaffold.
times. Such scaffold shall comply with para-
(8) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 graph (g) of this section.
inches or the equivalent and not less (8) The supporting cable shall be
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches straight for its entire length, and the
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of operator shall not sway the basket and
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and fix the cable to any intermediate
toeboards, shall be installed at all open points to change his original path of
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet travel.
above the ground or floor. Toeboards (9) Equipment shall be maintained
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in and used in accordance with the manu-
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in facturers’ instructions.
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of (10) Suspension methods shall con-
this section. form to applicable provisions of para-
(9) When two or more scaffolds are graphs (f) and (g) of this section.
used on a building or structure they
(j) Boatswain’s chairs. (1) The chair
shall not be bridged one to the other
seat shall be not less than 12 by 24
but shall be maintained at even height
inches, and of 1-inch thickness. The
with platforms butting closely.
(10) Each scaffold shall be installed seat shall be reinforced on the under-
or relocated in accordance with designs side to prevent the board from split-
and instructions of a registered profes- ting.
sional engineer, and such installation (2) The two fiber rope seat slings
or relocation shall be supervised by a shall be of 5⁄8-inch diameter, reeved
competent designated person. through the four seat holes so as to
(i) Single-point adjustable suspension cross each other on the underside of
scaffolds. (1) The scaffolding, including the seat.
142
(3) Seat slings shall be of at least 3⁄8- height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
inch wire rope when a workman is con- accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
ducting a heat producing process such this section.
as gas or arc welding. (l) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. (1) The
(4) The workman shall be protected squares shall not exceed 5 feet in width
by a safety life belt attached to a life- and 5 feet in height.
line. The lifeline shall be securely at- (2) Members shall be not less than
tached to substantial members of the those specified in Table D–18.
structure (not scaffold), or to securely (3) The squares shall be reinforced on
rigged lines, which will safely suspend both sides of each corner with 1- by 6-
the worker in case of a fall. inch gusset pieces. They shall also have
(5) The tackle shall consist of correct braces 1 by 8 inches on both sides run-
size ball bearing or bushed blocks and ning from center to center of each
properly spliced 5⁄8-inch diameter first- member, or other means to secure
grade manila rope. equivalent strength and rigidity.
(6) The roof irons, hooks, or the ob- (4) The squares shall be set not more
ject to which the tackle is anchored than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf-
shall be securely installed. Tiebacks folds, and not more than 8 feet apart
when used shall be installed at right for light duty scaffolds. Bracing 1×8
angles to the face of the building and inches, extending from the bottom of
securely fastened to a chimney. each square to the top of the next
(k) Carpenters’ bracket scaffolds. (1) square, shall be provided on both front
The brackets shall consist of a tri- and rear sides of the scaffold.
angular wood frame not less than 2 by
3 inches in cross section, or of metal of TABLE D–18—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR
equivalent strength. Each member BRICKLAYERS’ SQUARE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS
shall be properly fitted and securely Members
Dimensions
joined. (inches)
(2) Each bracket shall be attached to Bearers or horizontal members ....................... 2 by 6.
the structure by means of one of the Legs ................................................................. 2 by 6.
following: Braces at corners ............................................. 1 by 6.
Braces diagonally from center frame ............... 1 by 8.
(i) A bolt no less than five-eighths
inch in diameter which shall extend (5) Platform planks shall be at least
through the inside of the building wall. 2- by 9-inch nominal size. The ends of
(ii) A metal stud attachment device. the planks shall overlap the bearers of
(iii) Welding to steel tanks. the squares and each plank shall be
(iv) Hooking over a well-secured and supported by not less than three
adequately strong supporting member. squares.
The brackets shall be spaced no more (6) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds shall
than 10 feet apart. not exceed three tiers in height and
(3) No more than two persons shall shall be so constructed and arranged
occupy any given 10 feet of a bracket that one square shall rest directly
scaffold at any one time. Tools and ma- above the other. The upper tiers shall
terials shall not exceed 75 pounds in ad- stand on a continuous row of planks
dition to the occupancy. laid across the next lower tier and be
(4) The platform shall consist of not nailed down or otherwise secured to
less than two 2- by 9-inch nominal size prevent displacement.
planks extending not more than 18 (7) Scaffolds shall be level and set
inches or less than 6 inches beyond upon a firm foundation.
each end support. (m) Horse scaffolds. (1) Horse scaffolds
(5) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 shall not be constructed or arranged
inches or the equivalent and not less more than two tiers or 10 feet in
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches height.
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of (2) The members of the horses shall
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and be not less than those specified in
toeboards, shall be installed at all open Table D–19.
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet (3) Horses shall be spaced not more
above the ground or floor. Toeboards than 5 feet for medium duty and not
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in more than 8 feet for light duty.
143
(4) When arranged in tiers, each horse shall be designed based on design re-
shall be placed directly over the horse quirements for the special span. The
in the tier below. overhang of each end of the platform
(5) On all scaffolds arranged in tiers, planks shall be not less than 1 foot and
the legs shall be nailed down to the not more than 18 inches.
planks to prevent displacement or (5) When one needle beam is higher
thrust and each tier shall be substan- than the other or when the platform is
tially cross braced. not level the platform shall be secured
against slipping.
TABLE D–19—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR
HORSE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS (6) All unattached tools, bolts, and
nuts used on needle beam scaffolds
Members
Dimensions shall be kept in suitable containers.
(inches)
(7) One end of a needle beam scaffold
Horizontal members or bearers ....................... 3 by 4. may be supported by a permanent
Legs ................................................................. 11⁄4 by 41⁄2. structural member conforming to para-
Longitudinal brace between legs ..................... 1 by 6.
Gusset brace at top of legs ............................. 1 by 8. graphs (a) (4) and (8) of this section.
Half diagonal braces ........................................ 11⁄4 by 41⁄2. (8) Each man working on a needle
beam scaffold 20 feet or more above the
(6) Horses or parts which have be- ground or floor and working with both
come weak or defective shall not be hands, shall be protected by a safety
used. life belt attached to a lifeline. The life-
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 line shall be securely attached to sub-
inches or the equivalent and not less stantial members of the structure (not
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches scaffold), or to securely rigged lines,
high with a mid-rail, when required, of which will safely suspend the workman
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent and in case of a fall.
toeboards, shall be installed at all open (o) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet area scaffolds. (1) Plasterers’, decora-
above the ground or floor. Toeboards tors’, lathers’, and ceiling workers’ in-
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in side scaffolds shall be constructed in
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
accordance with the general require-
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
ments set forth for independent wood
this section.
pole scaffolds.
(n) Needle beam scaffold. (1) Wood nee-
dle beams shall be in accordance with (2) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4
paragraph (a) (5) and (9) of this section, inches or the equivalent and not less
and shall be not less than 4 by 6 inches than 36 inches or more than 42 inches
in size, with the greater dimension high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
placed in a vertical direction. Metal 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
beams or the equivalent conforming to toeboards, shall be installed at all open
paragraph (a) (4) and (8) of this section sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
may be used. above the ground or floor. Toeboards
(2) Ropes or hangers shall be provided shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
for supports. The span between sup- height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
ports on the needle beam shall not ex- accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
ceed 10 feet for 4- by 6-inch timbers. this section.
Rope supports shall be equivalent in (3) All platform planks shall be laid
strength to 1-inch diameter first-grade with the edges close together.
manila rope. (4) When independent pole scaffold
(3) The ropes shall be attached to the platforms are erected in sections, such
needle beams by a scaffold hitch or a sections shall be provided with con-
properly made eye splice. The loose end necting runways equipped with sub-
of the rope shall be tied by a bowline stantial guardrails.
knot or by a round turn and one-half (p) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) [Re-
hitch. served]
(4) The platform span between the (2) The suspended steel wire rope
needle beams shall not exceed 8 feet shall conform to paragraph (a)(22) of
when using 2-inch scaffold plank. For this section. Wire may be used pro-
spans greater than 8 feet, platforms viding the strength requirements of
144
paragraph (a)(22) of this section are tened, held, or equipped with devices so
met. as to prevent slipping.
(3) For hanging wood scaffolds, the (5) The wood platform planks shall be
following minimum nominal size mate- not less than 2 inches nominal in
rial is recommended: thickness. Both metal and wood plat-
(i) Supporting bearers 2 by 9 inches form planks shall overlap the bearing
on edge. surface not less than 12 inches. The
(ii) Planking 2 by 9 inches or 2 by 10 span between supports for wood shall
inches, with maximum span 7 feet for not exceed 8 feet. Platform width shall
heavy duty and 10 feet for light duty or be not less than 18 inches.
medium duty. (6) Not more than two persons shall
(4) Steel tube and coupler members occupy any given 8 feet of any ladder-
may be used for hanging scaffolds with jack scaffold at any one time.
both types of scaffold designed to sus- (r) Window-jack scaffolds. (1) Window-
tain a uniform distributed working jack scaffolds shall be used only for the
load up to heavy duty scaffold loads purpose of working at the window
with a safety factor of four. opening through which the jack is
placed.
(5) When a hanging scaffold is sup-
(2) Window jacks shall not be used to
ported by means of wire rope, such wire
support planks placed between one win-
rope shall be wrapped at least twice
dow jack and another or for other ele-
around the supporting members and
ments of scaffolding.
twice around the bearers of the scaf-
(3) Window-jack scaffolds shall be
fold, with each end of the wire rope se-
provided with suitable guardrails un-
cured by at least three standard wire-
less safety belts with lifelines are at-
rope clips.
tached and provided for the workman.
(6) All overhead supporting members Window-jack scaffolds shall be used by
shall be inspected and checked for one man only.
strength before the scaffold is erected. (s) Roofing brackets. (1) Roofing
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 brackets shall be constructed to fit the
inches or the equivalent and not less pitch of the roof.
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches (2) Brackets shall be secured in place
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of by nailing in addition to the pointed
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and metal projections. The nails shall be
toeboards, shall be installed at all open driven full length into the roof. When
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet rope supports are used, they shall con-
above the ground or floor. Toeboards sist of first-grade manila of at least
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in three-quarter-inch diameter, or equiva-
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in lent.
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of (3) A substantial catch platform shall
this section. be installed below the working area of
(q) Ladder-jack scaffolds. (1) All lad- roofs more than 20 feet from the
der-jack scaffolds shall be limited to ground to eaves with a slope greater
light duty and shall not exceed a than 3 inches in 12 inches without a
height of 20 feet above the floor or parapet. In width the platform shall ex-
ground. tend 2 feet beyond the projection of the
(2) All ladders used in connection eaves and shall be provided with a safe-
with ladder-jack scaffolds shall be ty rail, mid-rail, and toeboard. This
heavy-duty ladders and shall be de- provision shall not apply where em-
signed and constructed in accordance ployees engaged in work upon such
with § 1910.25 and § 1910.26. roofs are protected by a safety belt at-
(3) The ladder jack shall be so detached to a lifeline.
signed and constructed that it will bear (t) Crawling boards or chicken ladders.
on the side rails in addition to the lad- (1) Crawling boards shall be not less
der rungs, or if bearing on rungs only, than 10 inches wide and 1 inch thick,
the bearing area shall be at least 10 having cleats 1×11⁄2 inches. The cleats
inches on each rung. shall be equal in length to the width of
(4) Ladders used in conjunction with the board and spaced at equal intervals
ladder jacks shall be so placed, fas- not to exceed 24 inches. Nails shall be
145
driven through and clinched on the un- rigged lines, which will safely suspend
derside. The crawling board shall ex- the workman in case of a fall.
tend from the ridge pole to the eaves (v) Scope. This section establishes
when used in connection with roof con- safety requirements for the construc-
struction, repair, or maintenance. tion, operation, maintenance, and use
(2) A firmly fastened lifeline of at of scaffolds used in the maintenance of
least three-quarter-inch rope shall be buildings and structures.
strung beside each crawling board for a [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
handhold. FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10,
(3) Crawling boards shall be secured 1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988]
to the roof by means of adequate ridge
hooks or equivalent effective means. § 1910.29 Manually propelled mobile
(u) Float or ship scaffolds. (1) Float or ladder stands and scaffolds (tow-
ship scaffolds shall support not more ers).
than three men and a few light tools, (a) General requirements—(1) Applica-
such as those needed for riveting, bolt- tion. This section is intended to pre-
ing, and welding. They shall be con- scribe rules and requirements for the
structed in accordance with paragraphs design, construction, and use of mobile
(u) (2) through (6) of this section, un- work platforms (including ladder
less substitute designs and materials stands but not including aerial ladders)
provide equivalent strength, stability, and rolling (mobile) scaffolds (towers).
and safety. This standard is promulgated to aid in
(2) The platform shall be not less providing for the safety of life, limb,
than 3 feet wide and 6 feet long, made and property, by establishing minimum
of three-quarter-inch plywood, equiva- standards for structural design require-
lent to American Plywood Association ments and for the use of mobile work
Grade B-B, Group I, Exterior. platforms and towers.
(3) Under the platform, there shall be (2) Working loads. (i) Work platforms
two supporting bearers made from 2×4- and scaffolds shall be capable of car-
inch, or 1×10-inch rough, selected lum- rying the design load under varying
ber, or better. They shall be free of circumstances depending upon the con-
knots or other flaws and project 6 ditions of use. Therefore, all parts and
inches beyond the platform on both appurtenances necessary for their safe
sides. The ends of the platform shall and efficient utilization must be inte-
extend about 6 inches beyond the outer gral parts of the design.
edges of the bearers. Each bearer shall (ii) Specific design and construction
be securely fastened to the platform. requirements are not a part of this sec-
(4) An edging of wood not less than tion because of the wide variety of ma-
3⁄4×11⁄2 inches, or equivalent, shall be
terials and design possibilities. How-
placed around all sides of the platform ever, the design shall be such as to
to prevent tools from rolling off. produce a mobile ladder stand or scaf-
(5) Supporting ropes shall be 1-inch fold that will safely sustain the speci-
diameter manila rope or equivalent, fied loads. The material selected shall
free from deterioration, chemical dam- be of sufficient strength to meet the
age, flaws, or other imperfections. test requirements and shall be pro-
Rope connections shall be such that tected against corrosion or deteriora-
the platform cannot shift or slip. If two tion.
ropes are used with each float, each of (a) The design working load of ladder
the two supporting ropes shall be stands shall be calculated on the basis
hitched around one end of a bearer and of one or more 200-pound persons to-
pass under the platforms to the other gether with 50 pounds of equipment
end of the bearer where it is hitched each.
again, leaving sufficient rope at each (b) The design load of all scaffolds
end for the supporting ties. shall be calculated on the basis of:
(6) Each workman shall be protected
Light—Designed and constructed to carry a
by a safety lifebelt attached to a life- working load of 25 pounds per square foot.
line. The lifeline shall be securely at- Medium—Designed and constructed to carry
tached to substantial members of the a working load of 50 pounds per square
structure (not scaffold), or to securely foot.
146
Heavy—Designed and constructed to carry a have a standard (4-inch nominal)
working load of 75 pounds per square foot. toeboard.
All ladder stands and scaffolds shall be (vii) All work levels 10 feet or higher
capable of supporting at least four above the ground or floor shall have a
times the design working load. guardrail of 2- by 4-inch nominal or the
(iii) The materials used in mobile equivalent installed no less than 36
ladder stands and scaffolds shall be of inches or more than 42 inches high,
standard manufacture and conform to with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by
standard specifications of strength, di- 4-inch nominal lumber or equivalent.
mensions, and weights, and shall be se- (viii) A climbing ladder or stairway
lected to safely support the design shall be provided for proper access and
working load. egress, and shall be affixed or built into
(iv) Nails, bolts, or other fasteners the scaffold and so located that its use
used in the construction of ladders, will not have a tendency to tip the
scaffolds, and towers shall be of ade- scaffold. A landing platform shall be
quate size and in sufficient numbers at provided at intervals not to exceed 30
each connection to develop the de- feet.
signed strength of the unit. Nails shall (4) Wheels or casters. (i) Wheels or
be driven full length. (All nails should casters shall be properly designed for
be immediately withdrawn from dis- strength and dimensions to support
mantled lumber.) four (4) times the design working load.
(v) All exposed surfaces shall be free (ii) All scaffold casters shall be pro-
from sharp edges, burrs or other safety
vided with a positive wheel and/or
hazards.
swivel lock to prevent movement. Lad-
(3) Work levels. (i) The maximum
der stands shall have at least two (2) of
work level height shall not exceed four
(4) times the minimum or least base di- the four (4) casters and shall be of the
mensions of any mobile ladder stand or swivel type.
scaffold. Where the basic mobile unit (iii) Where leveling of the elevated
does not meet this requirement, suit- work platform is required, screw jacks
able outrigger frames shall be em- or other suitable means for adjusting
ployed to achieve this least base di- the height shall be provided in the base
mension, or provisions shall be made to section of each mobile unit.
guy or brace the unit against tipping. (b) Mobile tubular welded frame scaf-
(ii) The minimum platform width for folds—(1) General. Units shall be de-
any work level shall not be less than 20 signed to comply with the require-
inches for mobile scaffolds (towers). ments of paragraph (a) of this section.
Ladder stands shall have a minimum (2) Bracing. Scaffolds shall be prop-
step width of 16 inches. erly braced by cross braces and/or di-
(iii) The supporting structure for the agonal braces for securing vertical
work level shall be rigidly braced, members together laterally. The cross
using adequate cross bracing or diago- braces shall be of a length that will
nal bracing with rigid platforms at automatically square and align
each work level. vertical members so the erected scaf-
(iv) The steps of ladder stands shall fold is always plumb, square, and rigid.
be fabricated from slip resistant treads. (3) Spacing. Spacing of panels or
(v) The work level platform of scaf- frames shall be consistent with the
folds (towers) shall be of wood, alu-
loads imposed. The frames shall be
minum, or plywood planking, steel or
placed one on top of the other with
expanded metal, for the full width of
coupling or stacking pins to provide
the scaffold, except for necessary open-
ings. Work platforms shall be secured proper vertical alignment of the legs.
in place. All planking shall be 2-inch (4) Locking. Where uplift may occur,
(nominal) scaffold grade minimum 1,500 panels shall be locked together
f. (stress grade) construction grade vertically by pins or other equivalent
lumber or equivalent. means.
(vi) All scaffold work levels 10 feet or (5) Erection. Only the manufacturer of
higher above the ground or floor shall a scaffold or his qualified designated
147
agent shall be permitted to erect or su- shall be designed so that the horizontal
pervise the erection of scaffolds exceed- bearers provide supports for multiple
ing 50 feet in height above the base, un- planking levels.
less such structure is approved in writ- (7) Erection. Only the manufacturer of
ing by a registered professional engi- the scaffold or his qualified designated
neer, or erected in accordance with in- agent shall be permitted to erect or su-
structions furnished by the manufac- pervise the erection of scaffolds exceed-
turer. ing 50 feet in height above the base, un-
(c) Mobile tubular welded sectional less such structure is approved in writ-
folding scaffolds—(1) General. Units ining by a licensed professional engineer,
cluding sectional stairway and sec- or erected in accordance with instruc-
tional ladder scaffolds shall be de- tions furnished by the manufacturer.
signed to comply with the require- (d) Mobile tube and coupler scaffolds—
ments of paragraph (a) of this section. (1) Design. Units shall be designed to
(2) Stairway. An integral stairway comply with the applicable require-
and work platform shall be incor- ments of paragraph (a) of this section.
porated into the structure of each sec- (2) Material. The material used for
tional folding stairway scaffold. the couplers shall be of a structural
(3) Bracing. An integral set of piv- type, such as a drop-forged steel, mal-
oting and hinged folding diagonal and leable iron or structural grade alu-
horizontal braces and a detachable minum. The use of gray cast iron is
work platform shall be incorporated prohibited.
into the structure of each sectional (3) Erection. Only the manufacturer of
folding ladder scaffold. the scaffold or his qualified designated
(4) Sectional folding stairway scaffolds. agent shall be permitted to erect or su-
Sectional folding stairway scaffolds pervise the erection of scaffolds exceed-
shall be designed as medium duty scaf- ing 50 feet in height above the base, un-
folds except for high clearance. These less such structure is approved in writ-
special base sections shall be designed ing by a licensed professional engineer,
as light duty scaffolds. When upper sec- or erected in accordance with instruc-
tional folding stairway scaffolds are tions furnished by the manufacturer.
used with a special high clearance base, (e) Mobile work platforms—(1) Design.
the load capacity of the entire scaffold Units shall be designed for the use in-
shall be reduced accordingly. The tended and shall comply with the re-
width of a sectional folding stairway quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec-
scaffold shall not exceed 41⁄2 feet. The tion.
maximum length of a sectional folding (2) Base width. The minimum width of
stairway scaffold shall not exceed 6 the base of mobile work platforms shall
feet. not be less than 20 inches.
(5) Sectional folding ladder scaffolds. (3) Bracing. Adequate rigid diagonal
Sectional folding ladder scaffolds shall bracing to vertical members shall be
be designed as light duty scaffolds in- provided.
cluding special base (open end) sections (f) Mobile ladder stands—(1) Design.
which are designed for high clearance. Units shall comply with applicable re-
For certain special applications the quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec-
six-foot (6′) folding ladder scaffolds, ex- tion.
cept for special high clearance base (2) Base width. The minimum base
sections, shall be designed for use as width shall conform to paragraph
medium duty scaffolds. The width of a (a)(3)(i) of this section. The maximum
sectional folding ladder scaffold shall length of the base section shall be the
not exceed 41⁄2 feet. The maximum total length of combined steps and top
length of a sectional folding ladder assembly, measured horizontally, plus
scaffold shall not exceed 6 feet 6 inches five-eighths inch per step of rise.
for a six-foot (6′) long unit, 8 feet 6 (3) Steps. Steps shall be uniformly
inches for an eight-foot (8′) unit or 10 spaced, and sloped, with a rise of not
feet 6 inches for a ten-foot (10′) long less than nine (9) inches, nor more than
unit. ten (10) inches, and a depth of not less
(6) End frames. The end frames of sec- seven (7) inches. The slope of the steps
tional ladder and stairway scaffolds section shall be a minimum of fifty-
148
five (55) degrees and a maximum of (3) Wood platforms used on the floor
sixty (60) degrees measured from the in front of machines shall be substan-
horizontal. tially constructed.
(4) Handrails. (i) Units having more (c) Veneer machinery. (1) Sides of
than five (5) steps or 60 inches vertical steam vats shall extend to a height of
height to the top step shall be equipped not less than 36 inches above the floor,
with handrails. working platform, or ground.
(ii) Handrails shall be a minimum of (2) Large steam vats divided into sec-
29 inches high. Measurements shall be tions shall be provided with substantial
taken vertically from the center of the walkways between sections. Each
step. walkway shall be provided with a
(5) Loading. The load (see paragraph standard handrail on each exposed side.
(a)(2)(ii)(a) of this section) shall be ap- These handrails may be removable, if
plied uniformly to a 31⁄2 inches wide necessary.
area front to back at the center of the (3) Covers shall be removed only from
width span with a safety factor of four that portion of steaming vats on which
(4). men are working and a portable railing
shall be placed at this point to protect
§ 1910.30 Other working surfaces. the operators.
(4) Workmen shall not ride or step on
(a) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port- logs in steam vats.
able and powered dockboards shall be
strong enough to carry the load im- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49
posed on them. FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
(2) Portable dockboards shall be se-
cured in position, either by being an- Subpart E—Exit Routes and
chored or equipped with devices which Emergency Planning
will prevent their slipping.
(3) Powered dockboards shall be de- AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec-
signed and constructed in accordance retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754),
with Commercial Standard CS202–56 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
(1961) ‘‘Industrial Lifts and Hinged FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017),
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), or 4–
Loading Ramps published by the U.S.
2010 (75 FR 55355), as applicable; and 29 CFR
Department of Commerce, which is in- 1911.
corporated by reference as specified in
§ 1910.6. § 1910.33 Table of contents.
(4) Handholds, or other effective This section lists the sections and
means, shall be provided on portable paragraph headings contained in
dockboards to permit safe handling. §§ 1910.34 through 1910.39.
(5) Positive protection shall be pro-
vided to prevent railroad cars from § 1910.34 Coverage and definitions.
being moved while dockboards or
(a) Every employer is covered.
bridge plates are in position. (b) Exit routes are covered.
(b) Forging machine area. (1) Machines (c) Definitions.
shall be so located as to give (i) enough
clearance between machines so that § 1910.35 Compliance with Alternate Exit Route
the movement of one operator will not Codes.
interfere with the work of another, (ii) § 1910.36 Design and construction requirements
ample room for cleaning machines and for exit routes.
handling the work, including material (a) Basic requirements.
and scrap. The arrangement of ma- (b) The number of exit routes must be ade-
chines shall be such that operators will quate.
not stand in aisles. (c) Exit discharge.
(2) Aisles shall be provided of suffi- (d) An exit door must be unlocked.
cient width to permit the free move- (e) A side-hinged exit door must be used.
(f) The capacity of an exit route must be ade-
ment of employees bringing and remov- quate.
ing material. This aisle space is to be (g) An exit route must meet minimum height
independent of working and storage and width requirements.
space. (h) An outdoor exit route is permitted.
149
§ 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and leads from the fifth floor of an office
operational features for exit routes. building to the outside of the building.
(a) The danger to employees must be mini- Exit access means that portion of an
mized. exit route that leads to an exit. An ex-
(b) Lighting and marking must be adequate ample of an exit access is a corridor on
and appropriate. the fifth floor of an office building that
(c) The fire retardant properties of paints or leads to a two-hour fire resistance-
solutions must be maintained.
(d) Exit routes must be maintained during
rated enclosed stairway (the Exit).
construction, repairs, or alterations. Exit discharge means the part of the
(e) An employee alarm system must be oper- exit route that leads directly outside
able. or to a street, walkway, refuge area,
public way, or open space with access
§ 1910.38 Emergency action plans.
to the outside. An example of an exit
(a) Application. discharge is a door at the bottom of a
(b) Written and oral emergency action plans. two-hour fire resistance-rated enclosed
(c) Minimum elements of an emergency ac- stairway that discharges to a place of
tion plan.
safety outside the building.
(d) Employee alarm system.
(e) Training. Exit route means a continuous and
(f) Review of emergency action plan. unobstructed path of exit travel from
any point within a workplace to a
§ 1910.39 Fire prevention plans. place of safety (including refuge areas).
(a) Application. An exit route consists of three parts:
(b) Written and oral fire prevention plans. The exit access; the exit; and, the exit
(c) Minimum elements of a fire prevention discharge. (An exit route includes all
plan. vertical and horizontal areas along the
(d) Employee information. route.)
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 High hazard area means an area in-
FR 33606, June 8, 2011] side a workplace in which operations
include high hazard materials, proc-
§ 1910.34 Coverage and definitions. esses, or contents.
(a) Every employer is covered. Sections Occupant load means the total num-
1910.34 through 1910.39 apply to work- ber of persons that may occupy a work-
places in general industry except mo- place or portion of a workplace at any
bile workplaces such as vehicles or ves- one time. The occupant load of a work-
sels. place is calculated by dividing the
(b) Exits routes are covered. The rules gross floor area of the workplace or
in §§ 1910.34 through 1910.39 cover the portion of the workplace by the occu-
minimum requirements for exit routes pant load factor for that particular
that employers must provide in their type of workplace occupancy. Informa-
workplace so that employees may tion regarding the ‘‘Occupant load’’ is
evacuate the workplace safely during located in NFPA 101–2009, Life Safety
an emergency. Sections 1910.34 through Code, and in IFC–2009, International
1910.39 also cover the minimum re- Fire Code (incorporated by reference,
quirements for emergency action plans see § 1910.6).
and fire prevention plans. Refuge area means either:
(c) Definitions. (1) A space along an exit route that is
Electroluminescent means a light- protected from the effects of fire by
emitting capacitor. Alternating cur- separation from other spaces within
rent excites phosphor atoms when the building by a barrier with at least
placed between the electrically conduc- a one-hour fire resistance-rating; or
tive surfaces to produce light. This (2) A floor with at least two spaces,
light source is typically contained in- separated from each other by smoke-
side the device. resistant partitions, in a building pro-
Exit means that portion of an exit tected throughout by an automatic
route that is generally separated from sprinkler system that complies with
other areas to provide a protected way § 1910.159 of this part.
of travel to the exit discharge. An ex- Self-luminous means a light source
ample of an exit is a two-hour fire re- that is illuminated by a self-contained
sistance-rated enclosed stairway that power source (e.g., tritium) and that
150
operates independently from external workplace to permit prompt evacu-
power sources. Batteries are not ac- ation of employees and other building
ceptable self-contained power sources. occupants during an emergency, except
The light source is typically contained as allowed in paragraph (b)(3) of this
inside the device. section. The exit routes must be lo-
cated as far away as practical from
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76
FR 33606, June 8, 2011]
each other so that if one exit route is
blocked by fire or smoke, employees
§ 1910.35 Compliance with alternate can evacuate using the second exit
exit-route codes. route.
(2) More than two exit routes. More
OSHA will deem an employer dem-
than two exit routes must be available
onstrating compliance with the exit-
in a workplace if the number of em-
route provisions of NFPA 101, Life
ployees, the size of the building, its oc-
Safety Code, 2009 edition, or the exit- cupancy, or the arrangement of the
route provisions of the International workplace is such that all employees
Fire Code, 2009 edition, to be in compli- would not be able to evacuate safely
ance with the corresponding require- during an emergency.
ments in §§ 1910.34, 1910.36, and 1910.37 (3) A single exit route. A single exit
(incorporated by reference, see section route is permitted where the number of
§ 1910.6). employees, the size of the building, its
[76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011] occupancy, or the arrangement of the
workplace is such that all employees
§ 1910.36 Design and construction re- would be able to evacuate safely during
quirements for exit routes. an emergency.
(a) Basic requirements. Exit routes NOTE TO PARAGRAPH 1910.36(b): For assist-
must meet the following design and ance in determining the number of exit
construction requirements: routes necessary for your workplace, consult
(1) An exit route must be permanent. NFPA 101–2000, Life Safety Code.
Each exit route must be a permanent (c) Exit discharge. (1) Each exit dis-
part of the workplace. charge must lead directly outside or to
(2) An exit must be separated by fire re- a street, walkway, refuge area, public
sistant materials. Construction mate- way, or open space with access to the
rials used to separate an exit from outside.
other parts of the workplace must have (2) The street, walkway, refuge area,
a one-hour fire resistance-rating if the public way, or open space to which an
exit connects three or fewer stories and exit discharge leads must be large
a two-hour fire resistance-rating if the enough to accommodate the building
exit connects four or more stories. occupants likely to use the exit route.
(3) Openings into an exit must be lim- (3) Exit stairs that continue beyond
ited. An exit is permitted to have only the level on which the exit discharge is
those openings necessary to allow ac- located must be interrupted at that
cess to the exit from occupied areas of level by doors, partitions, or other ef-
the workplace, or to the exit discharge. fective means that clearly indicate the
An opening into an exit must be pro- direction of travel leading to the exit
tected by a self-closing fire door that discharge.
remains closed or automatically closes (d) An exit door must be unlocked. (1)
in an emergency upon the sounding of Employees must be able to open an exit
a fire alarm or employee alarm system. route door from the inside at all times
Each fire door, including its frame and without keys, tools, or special knowl-
hardware, must be listed or approved edge. A device such as a panic bar that
by a nationally recognized testing lab- locks only from the outside is per-
oratory. Section 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) of mitted on exit discharge doors.
this part defines ‘‘listed’’ and § 1910.7 of (2) Exit route doors must be free of
this part defines a ‘‘nationally recog- any device or alarm that could restrict
nized testing laboratory.’’ emergency use of the exit route if the
(b) The number of exit routes must be device or alarm fails.
adequate—(1) Two exit routes. At least (3) An exit route door may be locked
two exit routes must be available in a from the inside only in mental, penal,
151
or correctional facilities and then only mulate along the route, unless the em-
if supervisory personnel are continu- ployer can demonstrate that any snow
ously on duty and the employer has a or ice accumulation will be removed
plan to remove occupants from the fa- before it presents a slipping hazard;
cility during an emergency. (3) The outdoor exit route must be
(e) A side-hinged exit door must be reasonably straight and have smooth,
used. (1) A side-hinged door must be solid, substantially level walkways;
used to connect any room to an exit and
route. (4) The outdoor exit route must not
(2) The door that connects any room have a dead-end that is longer than 20
to an exit route must swing out in the feet (6.2 m).
direction of exit travel if the room is
designed to be occupied by more than [67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76
50 people or if the room is a high haz- FR 33606, June 8, 2011]
ard area (i.e., contains contents that
§ 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and
are likely to burn with extreme rapid- operational features for exit routes.
ity or explode).
(f) The capacity of an exit route must be (a) The danger to employees must be
adequate. (1) Exit routes must support minimized. (1) Exit routes must be kept
the maximum permitted occupant load free of explosive or highly flammable
for each floor served. furnishings or other decorations.
(2) The capacity of an exit route may (2) Exit routes must be arranged so
not decrease in the direction of exit that employees will not have to travel
route travel to the exit discharge. toward a high hazard area, unless the
path of travel is effectively shielded
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH 1910.36(f): Information
regarding ‘‘Occupant load’’ is located in from the high hazard area by suitable
NFPA 101–2000, Life Safety Code. partitions or other physical barriers.
(3) Exit routes must be free and unob-
(g) An exit route must meet minimum structed. No materials or equipment
height and width requirements. (1) The may be placed, either permanently or
ceiling of an exit route must be at least
temporarily, within the exit route. The
seven feet six inches (2.3 m) high. Any
exit access must not go through a room
projection from the ceiling must not
that can be locked, such as a bath-
reach a point less than six feet eight
room, to reach an exit or exit dis-
inches (2.0 m) from the floor.
charge, nor may it lead into a dead-end
(2) An exit access must be at least 28
corridor. Stairs or a ramp must be pro-
inches (71.1 cm) wide at all points.
vided where the exit route is not sub-
Where there is only one exit access
stantially level.
leading to an exit or exit discharge, the
width of the exit and exit discharge (4) Safeguards designed to protect
must be at least equal to the width of employees during an emergency (e.g.,
the exit access. sprinkler systems, alarm systems, fire
(3) The width of an exit route must doors, exit lighting) must be in proper
be sufficient to accommodate the max- working order at all times.
imum permitted occupant load of each (b) Lighting and marking must be ade-
floor served by the exit route. quate and appropriate. (1) Each exit
(4) Objects that project into the exit route must be adequately lighted so
route must not reduce the width of the that an employee with normal vision
exit route to less than the minimum can see along the exit route.
width requirements for exit routes. (2) Each exit must be clearly visible
(h) An outdoor exit route is permitted. and marked by a sign reading ‘‘Exit.’’
Each outdoor exit route must meet the (3) Each exit route door must be free
minimum height and width require- of decorations or signs that obscure the
ments for indoor exit routes and must visibility of the exit route door.
also meet the following requirements: (4) If the direction of travel to the
(1) The outdoor exit route must have exit or exit discharge is not imme-
guardrails to protect unenclosed sides diately apparent, signs must be posted
if a fall hazard exists; along the exit access indicating the di-
(2) The outdoor exit route must be rection of travel to the nearest exit
covered if snow or ice is likely to accu- and exit discharge. Additionally, the
152
line-of-sight to an exit sign must clear- them. The employee alarm system
ly be visible at all times. must comply with § 1910.165.
(5) Each doorway or passage along an
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002]
exit access that could be mistaken for
an exit must be marked ‘‘Not an Exit’’ § 1910.38 Emergency action plans.
or similar designation, or be identified
by a sign indicating its actual use (e.g., (a) Application. An employer must
closet). have an emergency action plan when-
(6) Each exit sign must be illumi- ever an OSHA standard in this part re-
nated to a surface value of at least five quires one. The requirements in this
foot-candles (54 lux) by a reliable light section apply to each such emergency
source and be distinctive in color. Self- action plan.
luminous or electroluminescent signs (b) Written and oral emergency action
that have a minimum luminance sur- plans. An emergency action plan must
face value of at least .06 footlamberts be in writing, kept in the workplace,
(0.21 cd/m2) are permitted. and available to employees for review.
(7) Each exit sign must have the word However, an employer with 10 or fewer
‘‘Exit’’ in plainly legible letters not employees may communicate the plan
less than six inches (15.2 cm) high, with orally to employees.
the principal strokes of the letters in (c) Minimum elements of an emergency
the word ‘‘Exit’’ not less than three- action plan. An emergency action plan
fourths of an inch (1.9 cm) wide. must include at a minimum:
(c) The fire retardant properties of (1) Procedures for reporting a fire or
paints or solutions must be maintained. other emergency;
Fire retardant paints or solutions must (2) Procedures for emergency evacu-
be renewed as often as necessary to ation, including type of evacuation and
maintain their fire retardant prop- exit route assignments;
erties. (3) Procedures to be followed by em-
(d) Exit routes must be maintained dur- ployees who remain to operate critical
ing construction, repairs, or alterations. plant operations before they evacuate;
(1) During new construction, employees (4) Procedures to account for all em-
must not occupy a workplace until the ployees after evacuation;
exit routes required by this subpart are
(5) Procedures to be followed by em-
completed and ready for employee use
ployees performing rescue or medical
for the portion of the workplace they
duties; and
occupy.
(2) During repairs or alterations, em- (6) The name or job title of every em-
ployees must not occupy a workplace ployee who may be contacted by em-
unless the exit routes required by this ployees who need more information
subpart are available and existing fire about the plan or an explanation of
protections are maintained, or until al- their duties under the plan.
ternate fire protection is furnished (d) Employee alarm system. An em-
that provides an equivalent level of ployer must have and maintain an em-
safety. ployee alarm system. The employee
(3) Employees must not be exposed to alarm system must use a distinctive
hazards of flammable or explosive sub- signal for each purpose and comply
stances or equipment used during con- with the requirements in § 1910.165.
struction, repairs, or alterations, that (e) Training. An employer must des-
are beyond the normal permissible con- ignate and train employees to assist in
ditions in the workplace, or that would a safe and orderly evacuation of other
impede exiting the workplace. employees.
(e) An employee alarm system must be (f) Review of emergency action plan. An
operable. Employers must install and employer must review the emergency
maintain an operable employee alarm action plan with each employee cov-
system that has a distinctive signal to ered by the plan:
warn employees of fire or other emer- (1) When the plan is developed or the
gencies, unless employees can prompt- employee is assigned initially to a job;
ly see or smell a fire or other hazard in (2) When the employee’s responsibil-
time to provide adequate warning to ities under the plan change; and
153
(3) When the plan is changed. § 1910.38 Employee emergency plans.
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] 1. Emergency action plan elements. The

emergency action plan should address emer-
§ 1910.39 Fire prevention plans. gencies that the employer may reasonably
expect in the workplace. Examples are: fire;
(a) Application. An employer must toxic chemical releases; hurricanes; torna-
have a fire prevention plan when an does; blizzards; floods; and others. The ele-
OSHA standard in this part requires ments of the emergency action plan pre-
one. The requirements in this section sented in paragraph 1910.38(c) can be supple-
apply to each such fire prevention plan. mented by the following to more effectively
achieve employee safety and health in an
(b) Written and oral fire prevention emergency. The employer should list in de-
plans. A fire prevention plan must be in tail the procedures to be taken by those em-
writing, be kept in the workplace, and ployees who have been selected to remain be-
be made available to employees for re- hind to care for essential plant operations
view. However, an employer with 10 or until their evacuation becomes absolutely
fewer employees may communicate the necessary. Essential plant operations may
plan orally to employees. include the monitoring of plant power sup-
(c) Minimum elements of a fire preven- plies, water supplies, and other essential
services which cannot be shut down for every
tion plan. A fire prevention plan must
emergency alarm. Essential plant operations
include: may also include chemical or manufacturing
(1) A list of all major fire hazards, processes which must be shut down in stages
proper handling and storage procedures or steps where certain employees must be
for hazardous materials, potential igni- present to assure that safe shut down proce-
tion sources and their control, and the dures are completed.
type of fire protection equipment nec- The use of floor plans or workplace maps
essary to control each major hazard; which clearly show the emergency escape
routes should be included in the emergency
(2) Procedures to control accumula-
action plan. Color coding will aid employees
tions of flammable and combustible in determining their route assignments.
waste materials; The employer should also develop and ex-
(3) Procedures for regular mainte- plain in detail what rescue and medical first
nance of safeguards installed on heat- aid duties are to be performed and by whom.
producing equipment to prevent the ac- All employees are to be told what actions
cidental ignition of combustible mate- they are to take in these emergency situa-
rials; tions that the employer anticipates may
occur in the workplace.
(4) The name or job title of employ-
2. Emergency evacuation. At the time of an
ees responsible for maintaining equip-
emergency, employees should know what
ment to prevent or control sources of type of evacuation is necessary and what
ignition or fires; and their role is in carrying out the plan. In
(5) The name or job title of employ- some cases where the emergency is very
ees responsible for the control of fuel grave, total and immediate evacuation of all
source hazards. employees is necessary. In other emer-
(d) Employee information. An employer gencies, a partial evacuation of nonessential
employees with a delayed evacuation of oth-
must inform employees upon initial as- ers may be necessary for continued plant op-
signment to a job of the fire hazards to eration. In some cases, only those employees
which they are exposed. An employer in the immediate area of the fire may be ex-
must also review with each employee pected to evacuate or move to a safe area
those parts of the fire prevention plan such as when a local application fire suppres-
necessary for self-protection. sion system discharge employee alarm is
sounded. Employees must be sure that they
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] know what is expected of them in all such
emergency possibilities which have been
APPENDIX TO SUBPART E OF PART 1910— planned in order to provide assurance of
EXIT ROUTES, EMERGENCY ACTION their safety from fire or other emergency.
PLANS, AND FIRE PREVENTION The designation of refuge or safe areas for
PLANS evacuation should be determined and identi-
fied in the plan. In a building divided into
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory fire zones by fire walls, the refuge area may
guideline to assist employers in complying still be within the same building but in a dif-
with the appropriate requirements of subpart ferent zone from where the emergency oc-
E. curs.
154
Exterior refuge or safe areas may include has to be swept each day. Employers and em-
parking lots, open fields or streets which are ployees should be aware of the hazardous
located away from the site of the emergency properties of materials in their workplaces,
and which provide sufficient space to accom- and the degree of hazard each poses. Cer-
modate the employees. Employees should be tainly oil soaked rags have to be treated dif-
instructed to move away from the exit dis- ferently than general paper trash in office
charge doors of the building, and to avoid areas. However, large accumulations of
congregating close to the building where waste paper or corrugated boxes, etc., can
they may hamper emergency operations. pose a significant fire hazard. Accumulations
3. Emergency action plan training. The em- of materials which can cause large fires or
ployer should assure that an adequate num- generate dense smoke that are easily ignited
ber of employees are available at all times or may start from spontaneous combustion,
during working hours to act as evacuation are the types of materials with which this
wardens so that employees can be swiftly standard is concerned. Such combustible ma-
moved from the danger location to the safe terials may be easily ignited by matches,
areas. Generally, one warden for each twenty welder’s sparks, cigarettes and similar low
employees in the workplace should be able to level energy ignition sources.
provide adequate guidance and instruction at 5. Maintenance of equipment under the fire
the time of a fire emergency. The employees prevention plan. Certain equipment is often
selected or who volunteer to serve as war- installed in workplaces to control heat
dens should be trained in the complete work- sources or to detect fuel leaks. An example is
place layout and the various alternative es- a temperature limit switch often found on
cape routes from the workplace. All wardens deep-fat food fryers found in restaurants.
and fellow employees should be made aware There may be similar switches for high tem-
of handicapped employees who may need perature dip tanks, or flame failure and
extra assistance, such as using the buddy flashback arrester devices on furnaces and
system, and of hazardous areas to be avoided similar heat producing equipment. If these
during emergencies. Before leaving, wardens devices are not properly maintained or if
should check rooms and other enclosed they become inoperative, a definite fire haz-
spaces in the workplace for employees who ard exists. Again employees and supervisors
may be trapped or otherwise unable to evac- should be aware of the specific type of con-
uate the area. trol devices on equipment involved with
After the desired degree of evacuation is combustible materials in the workplace and
completed, the wardens should be able to ac- should make sure, through periodic inspec-
count for or otherwise verify that all em- tion or testing, that these controls are oper-
ployees are in the safe areas.
able. Manufacturers’ recommendations
In buildings with several places of employ-
should be followed to assure proper mainte-
ment, employers are encouraged to coordi-
nance procedures.
nate their plans with the other employers in
the building. A building-wide or standardized [45 FR 60714, Sept. 12, 1980]
plan for the whole building is acceptable pro-
vided that the employers inform their re-
spective employees of their duties and re-
Subpart F—Powered Platforms,
sponsibilities under the plan. The standard- Manlifts, and Vehicle-Mount-
ized plan need not be kept by each employer ed Work Platforms
in the multi-employer building, provided
there is an accessible location within the
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
building where the plan can be reviewed by
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
affected employees. When multi-employer
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
building-wide plans are not feasible, employ-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
ers should coordinate their plans with the
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or
other employers within the building to as-
5–2007 (72 FR 31159), as applicable; and 29 CFR
sure that conflicts and confusion are avoided
part 1911.
during times of emergencies. In multi-story
buildings where more than one employer is
§ 1910.66 Powered platforms for build-
on a single floor, it is essential that these
ing maintenance.
employers coordinate their plans with each
other to avoid conflicts and confusion. (a) Scope. This section covers powered
4. Fire prevention housekeeping. The stand- platform installations permanently
ard calls for the control of accumulations of dedicated to interior or exterior build-
flammable and combustible waste materials. ing maintenance of a specific structure
It is the intent of this standard to assure
or group of structures. This section
that hazardous accumulations of combus-
tible waste materials are controlled so that does not apply to suspended scaffolds
a fast developing fire, rapid spread of toxic (swinging scaffolds) used to service
smoke, or an explosion will not occur. This buildings on a temporary basis and
does not necessarily mean that each room covered under subpart D of this part,
155
nor to suspended scaffolds used for con- stallation has been inspected, tested
struction work and covered under sub- and maintained in compliance with the
part L of 29 CFR part 1926. Building requirements of paragraphs (g) and (h)
maintenance includes, but is not lim- of this section and that all protection
ited to, such tasks as window cleaning, anchorages meet the requirements of
caulking, metal polishing and re- paragraph (I)(c)(10) of appendix C.
glazing. (4) The employer shall not permit
(b) Application—(1) New installations. employees to use the installation prior
This section applies to all permanent to receiving assurance from the build-
installations completed after July 23, ing owner that the installation meets
1990. Major modifications to existing the requirements contained in para-
installations completed after that date graphs (c)(1) and (c)(3) of this section.
are also considered new installations (d) Definitions.
under this section. Anemometer means an instrument for
(2) Existing installations. (i) Perma- measuring wind velocity.
nent installations in existence and/or Angulated roping means a suspension
completed before July 23, 1990 shall method where the upper point of sus-
comply with paragraphs (g), (h), (i), (j) pension is inboard from the attach-
and appendix C of this section. ments on the suspended unit, thus
(ii) In addition, permanent installa- causing the suspended unit to bear
tions completed after August 27, 1971, against the face of the building.
and in existence and/or completed be-
Building face roller means a rotating
fore July 23, 1990, shall comply with ap-
cylindrical member designed to ride on
pendix D of this section.
the face of the building wall to prevent
(c) Assurance. (1) Building owners of
the platform from abrading the face of
new installations shall inform the em-
the building and to assist in stabilizing
ployer before each use in writing that
the platform.
the installation meets the require-
ments of paragraphs (e)(1) and (f)(1) of Building maintenance means oper-
this section and the additional design ations such as window cleaning, caulk-
criteria contained in other provisions ing, metal polishing, reglazing, and
of paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section general maintenance on building sur-
relating to: required load sustaining faces.
capabilities of platforms, building com- Cable means a conductor, or group of
ponents, hoisting and supporting equip- conductors, enclosed in a weatherproof
ment; stability factors for carriages, sheath, that may be used to supply
platforms and supporting equipment; electrical power and/or control current
maximum horizontal force for move- for equipment or to provide voice com-
ment of carriages and davits; design of munication circuits.
carriages, hoisting machines, wire rope Carriage means a wheeled vehicle
and stabilization systems; and design used for the horizontal movement and
criteria for electrical wiring and equip- support of other equipment.
ment. Certification means a written, signed
(2) Building owners shall base the in- and dated statement confirming the
formation required in paragraph (c)(1) performance of a requirement of this
of this section on the results of a field section.
test of the installation before being Combination cable means a cable hav-
placed into service and following any ing both steel structural members ca-
major alteration to an existing instal- pable of supporting the platform, and
lation, as required in paragraph (g)(1) copper or other electrical conductors
of this section. The assurance shall insulated from each other and the
also be based on all other relevant structural members by nonconductive
available information, including, but barriers.
not limited to, test data, equipment Competent person means a person who,
specifications and verification by a because of training and experience, is
registered professional engineer. capable of identifying hazardous or
(3) Building owners of all installa- dangerous conditions in powered plat-
tions, new and existing, shall inform form installations and of training em-
the employer in writing that the in- ployees to identify such conditions.
156
Continuous pressure means the need Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,
for constant manual actuation for a wire rope or strap which is used to se-
control to function. cure the body belt or body harness to a
Control means a mechanism used to deceleration device, lifeline or anchor-
regulate or guide the operation of the age.
equipment. Lifeline means a component con-
Davit means a device, used singly or sisting of a flexible line for connection
in pairs, for suspending a powered plat- to an anchorage at one end to hang
form from work, storage and rigging vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
locations on the building being serv- nection to anchorages at both ends to
iced. Unlike outriggers, a davit reacts stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
its operating load into a single roof line), and which serves as a means for
socket or carriage attachment. connecting other components of a per-
Equivalent means alternative designs, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
materials or methods which the em- age.
ployer can demonstrate will provide an Live load means the total static
equal or greater degree of safety for weight of workers, tools, parts, and
employees than the methods, materials supplies that the equipment is designed
or designs specified in the standard. to support.
Ground rigging means a method of Obstruction detector means a control
suspending a working platform start- that will stop the suspended or sup-
ing from a safe surface to a point of ported unit in the direction of travel if
suspension above the safe surface. an obstruction is encountered, and will
Ground rigged davit means a davit allow the unit to move only in a direc-
which cannot be used to raise a sus- tion away from the obstruction.
pended working platform above the Operating control means a mechanism
building face being serviced. regulating or guiding the operation of
Guide button means a building face equipment that ensures a specific oper-
anchor designed to engage a guide ating mode.
track mounted on a platform. Operating device means a device actu-
Guide roller means a rotating cylin- ated manually to activate a control.
drical member, operating separately or Outrigger means a device, used singly
as part of a guide assembly, designed to or in pairs, for suspending a working
provide continuous engagement be- platform from work, storage, and rig-
tween the platform and the building ging locations on the building being
guides or guideways. serviced. Unlike davits, an outrigger
Guide shoe means a device attached reacts its operating moment load as at
to the platform designed to provide a least two opposing vertical components
sliding contact between the platform acting into two or more distinct roof
and the building guides. points and/or attachments.
Hoisting machine means a device in- Platform rated load means the com-
tended to raise and lower a suspended bined weight of workers, tools, equip-
or supported unit. ment and other material which is per-
Hoist rated load means the hoist man- mitted to be carried by the working
ufacturer’s maximum allowable oper- platform at the installation, as stated
ating load. on the load rating plate.
Installation means all the equipment Poured socket means the method of
and all affected parts of a building providing wire rope terminations in
which are associated with the perform- which the ends of the rope are held in
ance of building maintenance using a tapered socket by means of poured
powered platforms. spelter or resins.
Interlock means a device designed to Primary brake means a brake designed
ensure that operations or motions to be applied automatically whenever
occur in proper sequence. power to the prime mover is inter-
Intermittent stabilization means a rupted or discontinued.
method of platform stabilization in Prime mover means the source of me-
which the angulated suspension wire chanical power for a machine.
rope(s) are secured to regularly spaced Rated load means the manufacturer’s
building anchors. recommended maximum load.
157
Rated strength means the strength of working position by means of ropes or
wire rope, as designated by its manu- combination cables attached to some
facturer or vendor, based on standard anchorage above the equipment.
testing procedures or acceptable engi- Suspended scaffold (swinging scaffold)
neering design practices. means a scaffold supported on wire or
Rated working load means the com- other ropes, used for work on, or for
bined static weight of men, materials, providing access to, vertical sides of
and suspended or supported equipment. structures on a temporary basis. Such
Registered professional engineer means scaffold is not designed for use on a
a person who has been duly and cur- specific structure or group of struc-
rently registered and licensed by an au- tures.
thority within the United States or its Tail line means the nonsupporting
territories to practice the profession of end of the wire rope used to suspend
engineering. the platform.
Roof powered platform means a work- Tie-in guides means the portion of a
ing platform where the hoist(s) used to building that provides continuous posi-
raise or lower the platform is located tive engagement between the building
on the roof. and a suspended or supported unit dur-
Roof rigged davit means a davit used ing its vertical travel on the face of the
to raise the suspended working plat- building.
form above the building face being Traction hoist means a type of hoist-
serviced. This type of davit can also be ing machine that does not accumulate
used to raise a suspended working plat- the suspension wire rope on the hoist-
form which has been ground-rigged. ing drum or sheave, and is designed to
Rope means the equipment used to raise and lower a suspended load by the
suspend a component of an equipment application of friction forces between
installation, i.e., wire rope. the suspension wire rope and the drum
Safe surface means a horizontal sur- or sheave.
face intended to be occupied by per- Transportable outriggers means out-
sonnel, which is so protected by a fall riggers designed to be moved from one
protection system that it can be rea- work location to another.
sonably assured that said occupants
Trolley carriage means a carriage sus-
will be protected against falls.
pended from an overhead track struc-
Secondary brake means a brake de-
ture.
signed to arrest the descent of the sus-
pended or supported equipment in the Verified means accepted by design,
event of an overspeed condition. evaluation, or inspection by a reg-
Self powered platform means a work- istered professional engineer.
ing platform where the hoist(s) used to Weatherproof means so constructed
raise or lower the platform is mounted that exposure to adverse weather con-
on the platform. ditions will not affect or interfere with
Speed reducer means a positive type the proper use or functions of the
speed reducing machine. equipment or component.
Stability factor means the ratio of the Winding drum hoist means a type of
stabilizing moment to the overturning hoisting machine that accumulates the
moment. suspension wire rope on the hoisting
Stabilizer tie means a flexible line drum.
connecting the building anchor and the Working platform means suspended or
suspension wire rope supporting the supported equipment intended to pro-
platform. vide access to the face of a building and
Supported equipment means building manned by persons engaged in building
maintenance equipment that is held or maintenance.
moved to its working position by Wrap means one complete turn of the
means of attachment directly to the suspension wire rope around the sur-
building or extensions of the building face of a hoist drum.
being maintained. (e) Powered platform installations—Af-
Suspended equipment means building fected parts of buildings—(1) General re-
maintenance equipment that is sus- quirements. The following requirements
pended and raised or lowered to its apply to affected parts of buildings
158
which utilize working platforms for same building, provided the require-
building maintenance. ments for each system are met.
(i) Structural supports, tie-downs, (1) The maximum vertical interval
tie-in guides, anchoring devices and between building anchors shall be three
any affected parts of the building in- floors or 50 feet (15.3 m), whichever is
cluded in the installation shall be de- less.
signed by or under the direction of a (2) Building anchors shall be located
registered professional engineer experi- vertically so that attachment of the
enced in such design; stabilizer ties will not cause the plat-
(ii) Exterior installations shall be ca- form suspension ropes to angulate the
pable of withstanding prevailing cli- platform horizontally across the face of
matic conditions; the building. The anchors shall be posi-
(iii) The building installation shall tioned horizontally on the building
provide safe access to, and egress from, face so as to be symmetrical about the
the equipment and sufficient space to platform suspension ropes.
conduct necessary maintenance of the (3) Building anchors shall be easily
equipment; visible to employees and shall allow a
(iv) The affected parts of the building stabilizer tie attachment for each of
shall have the capability of sustaining the platform suspension ropes at each
all the loads imposed by the equip- vertical interval. If more than two sus-
ment; and, pension ropes are used on a platform,
(v) The affected parts of the building only the two building-side suspension
shall be designed so as to allow the ropes at the platform ends shall require
equipment to be used without exposing a stabilizer attachment.
employees to a hazardous condition. (4) Building anchors which extend be-
(2) Tie-in guides. (i) The exterior of yond the face of the building shall be
each building shall be provided with free of sharp edges or points. Where ca-
tie-in guides unless the conditions in bles, suspension wire ropes and lifelines
paragraph (e)(2)(ii) or (e)(2)(iii) of this may be in contact with the building
section are met. face, external building anchors shall
NOTE: See Figure 1 in appendix B of this not interfere with their handling or op-
section for a description of a typical contin- eration.
uous stabilization system utilizing tie-in (5) The intermittent stabilization
guides. system building anchors and compo-
(ii) If angulated roping is employed, nents shall be capable of sustaining
tie-in guides required in paragraph without failure at least four times the
(e)(2)(i) of this section may be elimi- maximum anticipated load applied or
nated for not more than 75 feet (22.9 m) transmitted to the components and an-
of the uppermost elevation of the chors. The minimum design wind load
building, if infeasible due to exterior for each anchor shall be 300 (1334 n)
building design, provided an angulation pounds, if two anchors share the wind
force of at least 10 pounds (44.4 n) is load.
maintained under all conditions of (6) The building anchors and sta-
loading. bilizer ties shall be capable of sus-
(iii) Tie-in guides required in para- taining anticipated horizontal and
graph (e)(2)(i) of this section may be vertical loads from winds specified for
eliminated if one of the guide systems roof storage design which may act on
in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A), (e)(2)(iii)(B) the platform and wire ropes if the plat-
or (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is pro- form is stranded on a building face. If
vided, or an equivalent. the building anchors have different
(A) Intermittent stabilization sys- spacing than the suspension wire rope
tem. The system shall keep the equip- or if the building requires different sus-
ment in continuous contact with the pension spacings on one platform, one
building facade, and shall prevent sud- building anchor and stabilizer tie shall
den horizontal movement of the plat- be capable of sustaining the wind loads.
form. The system may be used together NOTE: See Figure 2 in appendix B of this
with continuous positive building guide section for a description of a typical inter-
systems using tie-in guides on the mittent stabilization system.
159
(B) Button guide stabilization sys- paragraphs (e)(2)(iii) (A), (B) and (C), or
tem. a platform tie-off at each work station
(1) Guide buttons shall be coordi- will provide equivalent safety.
nated with platform mounted equip- (3) Roof guarding. (i) Employees
ment of paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this sec- working on roofs while performing
tion. building maintenance shall be pro-
(2) Guide buttons shall be located tected by a perimeter guarding system
horizontally on the building face so as which meets the requirements of para-
to allow engagement of each of the graph (c)(1) of § 1910.23 of this part.
guide tracks mounted on the platform.
(3) Guide buttons shall be located in (ii) The perimeter guard shall not be
vertical rows on the building face for more than six inches (152 mm) inboard
proper engagement of the guide tracks of the inside face of a barrier, i.e. the
mounted on the platform. parapet wall, or roof edge curb of the
(4) Two guide buttons shall engage building being serviced; however, the
each guide track at all times except for perimeter guard location shall not ex-
the initial engagement. ceed an 18 inch (457 mm) setback from
(5) Guide buttons which extend be- the exterior building face.
yond the face of the building shall be (4) Equipment stops. Operational areas
free of sharp edges or points. Where ca- for trackless type equipment shall be
bles, ropes and lifelines may be in con- provided with structural stops, such as
tact with the building face, guide but- curbs, to prevent equipment from trav-
tons shall not interfere with their han- eling outside its intended travel areas
dling or operation. and to prevent a crushing or shearing
(6) Guide buttons, connections and hazard.
seals shall be capable of sustaining (5) Maintenance access. Means shall be
without damage at least the weight of provided to traverse all carriages and
the platform, or provision shall be their suspended equipment to a safe
made in the guide tracks or guide area for maintenance and storage.
track connectors to prevent the plat-
(6) Elevated track. (i) An elevated
form and its attachments from trans-
track system which is located four feet
mitting the weight of the platform to
(1.2 m) or more above a safe surface,
the guide buttons, connections and
and traversed by carriage supported
seals. In either case, the minimum de-
sign load shall be 300 pounds (1334 n) equipment, shall be provided with a
per building anchor. walkway and guardrail system; or
(ii) The working platform shall be ca-
NOTE: See paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this sec- pable of being lowered, as part of its
tion for relevant equipment provisions.
normal operation, to the lower safe
NOTE: See Figure 3 in appendix B of this
section for a description of a typical button surface for access and egress of the per-
guide stabilization system. sonnel and shall be provided with a safe
means of access and egress to the lower
(C) System utilizing angulated roping safe surface.
and building face rollers. The system
(7) Tie-down anchors. Imbedded tie-
shall keep the equipment in continuous
down anchors, fasteners, and affected
contact with the building facade, and
structures shall be resistant to corro-
shall prevent sudden horizontal move-
ment of the platform. This system is sion.
acceptable only where the suspended (8) Cable stabilization. (i) Hanging life-
portion of the equipment in use does lines and all cables not in tension shall
not exceed 130 feet (39.6 m) above a safe be stabilized at each 200 foot (61 m) in-
surface or ground level, and where the terval of vertical travel of the working
platform maintains no less than 10 platform beyond an initial 200 foot (61
pounds (44.4 n) angulation force on the m) distance.
building facade. (ii) Hanging cables, other than sus-
(iv) Tie-in guides for building inte- pended wire ropes, which are in con-
riors (atriums) may be eliminated stant tension shall be stabilized when
when a registered professional engineer the vertical travel exceeds an initial
determines that an alternative sta- 600 foot (183 m) distance, and at further
bilization system, including systems in intervals of 600 feet (183 m) or less.
160
(9) Emergency planning. A written to allow the operators of the equip-
emergency action plan shall be devel- ment access to the switch;
oped and implemented for each kind of (v) The disconnect switch for the
working platform operation. This plan power circuit shall be locked in the
shall explain the emergency procedures ‘‘ON’’ position when the equipment is
which are to be followed in the event of in use; and
a power failure, equipment failure or (vi) An effective two-way voice com-
other emergencies which may be en- munication system shall be provided
countered. The plan shall also explain between the equipment operators and
that employees inform themselves
persons stationed within the building
about the building emergency escape
being serviced. The communications
routes, procedures and alarm systems
before operating a platform. Upon ini- facility shall be operable and shall be
tial assignment and whenever the plan manned at all times by persons sta-
is changed the employer shall review tioned within the building whenever
with each employee those parts of the the platform is being used.
plan which the employee must know to (f) Powered platform installations—
protect himself or herself in the event Equipment—(1) General requirements.
of an emergency. The following requirements apply to
(10) Building maintenance. Repairs or equipment which are part of a powered
major maintenance of those building platform installation, such as plat-
portions that provide primary support forms, stabilizing components, car-
for the suspended equipment shall not riages, outriggers, davits, hoisting ma-
affect the capability of the building to chines, wire ropes and electrical com-
meet the requirements of this stand- ponents.
ard. (i) Equipment installations shall be
(11) Electrical requirements. The fol- designed by or under the direction of a
lowing electrical requirements apply to registered professional engineer experi-
buildings which utilize working plat- enced in such design;
forms for building maintenance.
(ii) The design shall provide for a
(i) General building electrical instal-
minimum live load of 250 pounds (113.6
lations shall comply with §§ 1910.302
kg) for each occupant of a suspended or
through 1910.308 of this part, unless
otherwise specified in this section; supported platform;
(ii) Building electrical wiring shall be (iii) Equipment that is exposed to
of such capacity that when full load is wind when not in service shall be de-
applied to the equipment power circuit signed to withstand forces generated
not more than a five percent drop from by winds of at least 100 miles per hour
building service-vault voltage shall (44.7 m/s) at 30 feet (9.2 m) above grade;
occur at any power circuit outlet used and
by equipment regulated by this sec- (iv) Equipment that is exposed to
tion; wind when in service shall be designed
(iii) The equipment power circuit to withstand forces generated by winds
shall be an independent electrical cir- of at least 50 miles per hour (22.4 m/s)
cuit that shall remain separate from for all elevations.
all other equipment within or on the (2) Construction requirements. Bolted
building, other than power circuits connections shall be self-locking or
used for hand tools that will be used in shall otherwise be secured to prevent
conjunction with the equipment. If the loss of the connections by vibration.
building is provided with an emergency
(3) Suspension methods. Elevated
power system, the equipment power
building maintenance equipment shall
circuit may also be connected to this
system; be suspended by a carriage, outriggers,
(iv) The power circuit shall be pro- davits or an equivalent method.
vided with a disconnect switch that (i) Carriages. Carriages used for sus-
can be locked in the ‘‘OFF’’ and ‘‘ON’’ pension of elevated building mainte-
positions. The switch shall be conven- nance equipment shall comply with the
iently located with respect to the pri- following:
mary operating area of the equipment
161
(A) The horizontal movement of a parts of the installation shall be capa-
carriage shall be controlled so as to en- ble of withstanding without damage to
sure its safe movement and allow accu- any part of the installation the forces
rate positioning of the platform for resulting from the stall load of the
vertical travel or storage; hoist and one half the wind load.
(B) Powered carriages shall not ex- (3) Roof carriages which rely on hav-
ceed a traversing speed of 50 feet per ing tie-down devices secured to the
minute (0.3 m/s); building to develop the required sta-
(C) The initiation of a traversing bility against overturning shall be pro-
movement for a manually propelled vided with an interlock which will pre-
carriage on a smooth level surface vent vertical platform movement un-
shall not require a person to exert a less the tie-down is engaged;
horizontal force greater than 40 pounds (H) An automatically applied braking
(444.8 n); or locking system, or equivalent, shall
(D) Structural stops and curbs shall be provided that will prevent uninten-
be provided to prevent the traversing tional traversing of power traversed or
of the carriage beyond its designed lim- power assisted carriages;
its of travel; (I) A manual or automatic braking or
(E) Traversing controls for a powered locking system or equivalent, shall be
carriage shall be of a continuous pres- provided that will prevent uninten-
sure weatherproof type. Multiple con- tional traversing of manually propelled
trols when provided shall be arranged carriages;
to permit operation from only one con-
(J) A means to lock out the power
trol station at a time. An emergency
supply for the carriage shall be pro-
stop device shall be provided on each
vided;
end of a powered carriage for inter-
rupting power to the carriage drive mo- (K) Safe access to and egress from
tors; the carriage shall be provided from a
(F) The operating controls(s) shall be safe surface. If the carriage traverses
so connected that in the case of sus- an elevated area, any operating area on
pended equipment, traversing of a car- the carriage shall be protected by a
riage is not possible until the sus- guardrail system in compliance with
pended portion of the equipment is lo- the provisions of paragraph (f)(5)(i)(F)
cated at its uppermost designed posi- of this section. Any access gate shall
tion for traversing; and is free of con- be self-closing and self-latching, or pro-
tact with the face of the building or vided with an interlock;
building guides. In addition, all protec- (L) Each carriage work station posi-
tive devices and interlocks are to be in tion shall be identified by location
the proper position to allow traversing markings and/or position indicators;
of the carriage; and
(G) Stability for underfoot supported (M) The motors shall stall if the load
carriages shall be obtained by gravity, on the hoist motors is at any time in
by an attachment to a structural sup- excess of three times that necessary for
port, or by a combination of gravity lifting the working platform with its
and a structural support. The use of rated load.
flowing counterweights to achieve sta- (ii) Transportable outriggers. (A)
bility is prohibited. Transportable outriggers may be used
(1) The stability factor against over- as a method of suspension for ground
turning shall not be less than two for rigged working platforms where the
horizontal traversing of the carriage, point of suspension does not exceed 300
including the effects of impact and feet (91.5 m) above a safe surface. Tie-
wind. in guide system(s) shall be provided
(2) The carriages and their anchor- which meet the requirements of para-
ages shall be capable of resisting acci- graph (e)(2) of this section.
dental over-tensioning of the wire (B) Transportable outriggers shall be
ropes suspending the working platform, used only with self-powered, ground
and this calculated value shall include rigged working platforms.
the effect of one and one-half times the (C) Each transportable outrigger
stall capacity of the hoist motor. All shall be secured with a tie-down to a
162
verified anchorage on the building dur- safe surface below the point of suspen-
ing the entire period of its use. The an- sion.
chorage shall be designed to have a sta- (D) A rotating davit shall not require
bility factor of not less than four a horizontal force in excess of 40
against overturning or upsetting of the pounds (177.9 n) per person to initiate a
outrigger. rotating movement.
(D) Access to and egress from the (E) The following requirements shall
working platform shall be from and to apply to transportable davits:
a safe surface below the point of sus- (1) A davit or part of a davit weighing
pension. more than 80 pounds (36 kg) shall be
(E) Each transportable outrigger provided with a means for its trans-
shall be designed for lateral stability port, which shall keep the center of
to prevent roll-over in the event an ac- gravity of the davit at or below 36
cidental lateral load is applied to the inches (914 mm) above the safe surface
outrigger. The accidental lateral load during transport;
to be considered in this design shall be (2) A davit shall be provided with a
not less than 70 percent of the rated pivoting socket or with a base that will
load of the hoist. allow the insertion or removal of a
(F) Each transportable outrigger davit at a position of not more than 35
shall be designed to support an ulti- degrees above the horizontal, with the
mate load of not less than four times complete davit inboard of the building
the rated load of the hoist. face being serviced; and
(G) Each transportable outrigger (3) Means shall be provided to lock
shall be so located that the suspension the davit to its socket or base before it
wire ropes for two point suspended is used to suspend the platform.
working platforms are hung parallel. (4) Hoisting machines. (i) Raising and
(H) A transportable outrigger shall lowering of suspended or supported
be tied-back to a verified anchorage on equipment shall be performed only by a
the building with a rope equivalent in hoisting machine.
strength to the suspension rope. (ii) Each hoisting machine shall be
capable of arresting any overspeed de-
(I) The tie-back rope shall be in-
scent of the load.
stalled parallel to the centerline of the
(iii) Each hoisting machine shall be
outrigger.
powered only by air, electric or hy-
(iii) Davits. (A) Every davit installa-
draulic sources.
tion, fixed or transportable, rotatable
(iv) Flammable liquids shall not be
or non-rotatable shall be designed and
carried on the working platform.
installed to insure that it has a sta-
(v) Each hoisting machine shall be
bility factor against overturning of not
capable of raising or lowering 125 per-
less than four.
cent of the rated load of the hoist.
(B) The following requirements apply (vi) Moving parts of a hoisting ma-
to roof rigged davit systems: chine shall be enclosed or guarded in
(1) Access to and egress from the compliance with paragraphs (a)(1) and
working platform shall be from a safe (2) of § 1910.212 of this part.
surface. Access or egress shall not re- (vii) Winding drums, traction drums
quire persons to climb over a building’s and sheaves and directional sheaves
parapet or guard railing; and used in conjunction with hoisting ma-
(2) The working platform shall be chines shall be compatible with, and
provided with wheels, casters or a car- sized for, the wire rope used.
riage for traversing horizontally. (viii) Each winding drum shall be
(C) The following requirements apply provided with a positive means of at-
to ground rigged davit systems: taching the wire rope to the drum. The
(1) The point of suspension shall not attachment shall be capable of devel-
exceed 300 feet (91.5 m) above a safe oping at least four times the rated load
surface. Guide system(s) shall be proof the hoist.
vided which meet the requirements of (ix) Each hoisting machine shall be
paragraph (e)(2) of this section; provided with a primary brake and at
(2) Access and egress to and from the least one independent secondary brake,
working platform shall only be from a each capable of stopping and holding
163
not less than 125 percent of the lifting following methods, or by an equivalent
capacity of the hoist. method:
(A) The primary brake shall be di- (1) Continuous engagement to build-
rectly connected to the drive train of ing anchors as provided in paragraph
the hoisting machine, and shall not be (e)(2)(i) of this section;
connected through belts, chains, (2) Intermittent engagement to build-
clutches, or set screw type devices. The ing anchors as provided in paragraph
brake shall automatically set when (e)(2)(iii)(A) of this section;
power to the prime mover is inter- (3) Button guide engagement as pro-
rupted. vided in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(B) of this
(B)(1) The secondary brake shall be section; or
an automatic emergency type of brake (4) Angulated roping and building
that, if actuated during each stopping face rollers as provided in paragraph
cycle, shall not engage before the hoist (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section.
is stopped by the primary brake. (G) Each working platform of a sus-
(2) When a secondary brake is actu- pended unit shall be provided with a
ated, it shall stop and hold the plat- guardrail system on all sides which
form within a vertical distance of 24 shall meet the following requirements:
inches (609.6 mm). (1) The system shall consist of a top
(x) Any component of a hoisting ma- guardrail, midrail, and a toeboard;
chine which requires lubrication for its (2) The top guardrail shall not be less
protection and proper functioning shall than 36 inches (914 mm) high and shall
be provided with a means for that lu- be able to withstand at least a 100-
brication to be applied. pound (444 n) force in any downward or
(5) Suspended equipment—(i) General outward direction;
requirements. (A) Each suspended unit (3) The midrail shall be able to with-
component, except suspension ropes stand at least a 75-pound (333 n) force
and guardrail systems, shall be capable in any downward or outward direction;
of supporting, without failure, at least and
four times the maximum intended live (4) The areas between the guardrail
load applied or transmitted to that and toeboard on the ends and outboard
component. side, and the area between the midrail
(B) Each suspended unit component and toeboard on the inboard side, shall
shall be constructed of materials that be closed with a material that is capa-
will withstand anticipated weather ble of withstanding a load of 100 pounds
conditions. (45.4 KG.) applied horizontally over any
(C) Each suspended unit shall be pro- area of one square foot (.09 m2). The
vided with a load rating plate, con- material shall have all openings small
spicuously located, stating the unit enough to reject passage of life lines
weight and rated load of the suspended and potential falling objects which
unit. may be hazardous to persons below.
(D) When the suspension points on a (5) Toeboards shall be capable of
suspended unit are not at the unit withstanding, without failure, a force
ends, the unit shall be capable of re- of at least 50 pounds (222 n) applied in
maining continuously stable under all any downward or horizontal direction
conditions of use and position of the at any point along the toeboard.
live load, and shall maintain at least a (6) Toeboards shall be three and one-
1.5 to 1 stability factor against unit half inches (9 cm) minimum in length
upset. from their top edge to the level of the
(E) Guide rollers, guide shoes or platform floor.
building face rollers shall be provided, (7) Toeboards shall be securely fas-
and shall compensate for variations in tened in place at the outermost edge of
building dimensions and for minor hor- the platform and have no more than
izontal out-of-level variations of each one-half inch (1.3 cm) clearance above
suspended unit. the platform floor.
(F) Each working platform of a sus- (8) Toeboards shall be solid or with
pended unit shall be secured to the an opening not over one inch (2.5 cm)
building facade by one or more of the in the greatest dimension.
164
(ii) Two and four-point suspended of subpart D of this part. Access gates
working platforms. (A) The working shall be self-closing and self-latching.
platform shall be not less than 24 (K) Means of access to or egress from
inches (610 mm) wide and shall be pro- a working platform which is 48 inches
vided with a minimum of a 12 inch (305 (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface
mm) wide passage at or past any ob- shall be provided with a guardrail sys-
struction on the platform. tem or ladder handrails that conform
(B) The flooring shall be of a slip-re- to the provisions of subpart D of this
sistant type and shall contain no open- part.
ing that would allow the passage of life (L) The platform shall be provided
lines, cables and other potential falling with a secondary wire rope suspension
objects. If a larger opening is provided, system if the platform contains over-
it shall be protected by placing a mate- head structures which restrict the
rial under the opening which shall pre- emergency egress of employees. A hori-
vent the passage of life lines, cables zontal lifeline or a direct connection
and potential falling objects. anchorage shall be provided, as part of
(C) The working platfrom shall be a fall arrest system which meets the
provided with a means of suspension requirements of appendix C, for each
that will restrict the platform’s in- employee on such a platform.
board to outboard roll about its longi- (M) A vertical lifeline shall be pro-
tudinal axis to a maximum of 15 de- vided as part of a fall arrest system
grees from a horizontal plane when which meets the requirements of ap-
moving the live load from the inboard pendix C, for each employee on a work-
to the outboard side of the platform. ing platform suspended by two or more
(D) Any cable suspended from above wire ropes, if the failure of one wire
the platform shall be provided with a rope or suspension attachment will
means for storage to prevent accumu- cause the platform to upset. If a sec-
lation of the cable on the floor of the ondary wire rope suspension is used,
platform. vertical lifelines are not required for
(E) All operating controls for the the fall arrest system, provided that
vertical travel of the platform shall be each employee is attached to a hori-
of the continuous-pressure type, and zontal lifeline anchored to the plat-
shall be located on the platform. form.
(F) Each operating station of every (N) An emergency electric operating
working platform shall be provided device shall be provided on roof pow-
with a means of interrupting the power ered platforms near the hoisting ma-
supply to all hoist motors to stop any chine for use in the event of failure of
further powered ascent or descent of the normal operating device located on
the platform. the working platform, or failure of the
(G) The maximum rated speed of the cable connected to the platform. The
platform shall not exceed 50 feet per emergency electric operating device
minute (0.3 ms) with single speed shall be mounted in a secured compart-
hoists, nor 75 feet per minute (0.4 ms) ment, and the compartment shall be la-
with multi-speed hoists. beled with instructions for use. A
(H) Provisions shall be made for se- means for opening the compartment
curing all tools, water tanks, and other shall be mounted in a break-glass
accessories to prevent their movement receptable located near the emergency
or accumulation on the floor of the electric operating device or in an
platform. equivalent secure and accessible loca-
(I) Portable fire extinguishers con- tion.
forming to the provisions of § 1910.155 (iii) Single point suspended working
and § 1910.157 of this part shall be pro- platforms. (A) The requirements of
vided and securely attached on all paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (K) of
working platforms. this section shall also apply to a single
(J) Access to and egress from a work- point working platform.
ing platfrom, except for those that land (B) Each single point suspended
directly on a safe surface, shall be pro- working platform shall be provided
vided by stairs, ladders, platforms and with a secondary wire rope suspension
runways conforming to the provisions system, which will prevent the working
165
platform from falling should there be a ed equipment and wire ropes shall be
failure of the primary means of sup- able to withstand a load that is at least
port, or if the platform contains over- twice the ultimate strength of the sta-
head structures which restrict the bilizer tie.
egress of the employees. A horizontal NOTE: See Figure II in appendix B of this
life line or a direct connection anchor- section for a description of a typical inter-
age shall be provided, as part of a fall mittent stabilization system.
arrest system which meets the require-
ments of appendix C, for each employee (vi) Button-guide stabilized platforms.
on the platform. (A) The platform shall comply with
paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of
(iv) Ground-rigged working platforms.
this section.
(A) Groundrigged working platforms
(B) Each guide track on the platform
shall comply with all the requirements
shall engage a minimum of two guide
of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M)
buttons during any vertical travel of
of this section.
the platform following the initial but-
(B) After each day’s use, the power
ton engagement.
supply within the building shall be dis-
(C) Each guide track on a platform
connected from a ground-rigged work-
that is part of a roof rigged system
ing platform, and the platform shall be
shall be provided with a storage posi-
either disengaged from its suspension
tion on the platform.
points or secured and stored at grade.
(D) Each guide track on the platform
(v) Intermittently stabilized platforms.
shall be sufficiently maneuverable by
(A) The platform shall comply with
platform occupants to permit easy en-
paragraphs (F)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of
gagement of the guide buttons, and
this section.
easy movement into and out of its stor-
(B) Each stabilizer tie shall be
age position on the platform.
equipped with a ‘‘quick connect-quick (E) Two guide tracks shall be mount-
disconnect’’ device which cannot be ed on the platform and shall provide
accidently disengaged, for attachment continuous contact with the building
to the building anchor, and shall be re- face.
sistant to adverse environmental con- (F) The load carrying components of
ditions. the button guide stabilization system
(C) The platform shall be provided which transmit the load into the plat-
with a stopping device that will inter- form shall be capable of supporting the
rupt the hoist power supply in the weight of the platform, or provision
event the platform contacts a sta- shall be made in the guide track con-
bilizer tie during its ascent. nectors or platform attachments to
(D) Building face rollers shall not be prevent the weight of the platform
placed at the anchor setting if exterior from being transmitted to the platform
anchors are used on the building face. attachments.
(E) Stabilizer ties used on intermit-
tently stabilized platforms shall allow NOTE: See Figure III in appendix B of this
for the specific attachment length section for a description of a typical button
needed to effect the predetermined an- guide stabilization system.
gulation of the suspended wire rope. (6) Supported equipment. (i) Supported
The specific attachment length shall equipment shall maintain a vertical
be maintained at all building anchor position in respect to the face of the
locations. building by means other than friction.
(F) The platform shall be in contin- (ii) Cog wheels or equivalent means
uous contact with the face of the build- shall be incorporated to provide climb-
ing during ascent and descent. ing traction between the supported
(G) The attachment and removal of equipment and the building guides. Ad-
stabilizer ties shall not require the hor- ditional guide wheels or shoes shall be
izontal movement of the platform. incorporated as may be necessary to
(H) The platform-mounted equipment ensure that the drive wheels are con-
and its suspension wire ropes shall not tinuously held in positive engagement
be physically damaged by the loads with the building guides.
from the stabilizer tie or its building (iii) Launch guide mullions indexed
anchor. The platform, platform mount- to the building guides and retained in
166
alignment with the building guides (E) The manufacturer’s rated
shall be used to align drive wheels en- strength;
tering the building guides. (F) The manufacturer’s name;
(iv) Manned platforms used on sup- (G) The month and year the ropes
ported equipment shall comply with were installed; and
the requirements of paragraphs (H) The name of the person or com-
(f)(5)(ii)(A), (f)(5)(ii)(B), and (f)(5)(ii) (D) pany which installed the ropes.
through (K) of this section covering (vii) A new tag shall be installed at
suspended equipment. each rope renewal.
(7) Suspension wire ropes and rope con- (viii) The original tag shall be
nections. (i) Each specific installation stamped with the date of the
shall use suspension wire ropes or com- resocketing, or the original tag shall
bination cable and connections meet- be retained and a supplemental tag
ing the specification recommended by shall be provided when ropes are
the manufacturer of the hoisting ma- resocketed. The supplemental tag shall
chine used. Connections shall be capa- show the date of resocketing and the
ble of developing at least 80 percent of name of the person or company that
the rated breaking strength of the wire resocketed the rope.
rope. (ix) Winding drum type hoists shall
(ii) Each suspension rope shall have a contain at least three wraps of the sus-
‘‘Design Factor’’ of at least 10. The pension wire rope on the drum when
‘‘Design Factor’’ is the ratio of the the suspended unit has reached the
rated strength of the suspension wire lowest possible point of its vertical
rope to the rated working load, and travel.
shall be calculated using the following (x) Traction drum and sheave type
formula: hoists shall be provided with a wire
rope of sufficient length to reach the
lowest possible point of vertical travel
of the suspended unit, and an addi-
tional length of the wire rope of at
least four feet (1.2 m).
Where:
(xi) The lengthening or repairing of
F = Design factor suspension wire ropes is prohibited.
S = Manufacturer’s rated strength of one
(xii) Babbitted fastenings for suspen-
suspension rope
N = Number of suspension ropes under load sion wire rope are prohibited.
W = Rated working load on all ropes at any (8) Control circuits, power circuits and
point of travel their components. (i) Electrical wiring
and equipment shall comply with sub-
(iii) Suspension wire rope grade shall part S of this part, except as otherwise
be at least improved plow steel or required by this section.
equivalent. (ii) Electrical runway conductor sys-
(iv) Suspension wire ropes shall be tems shall be of a type designed for use
sized to conform with the required de- in exterior locations, and shall be lo-
sign factor, but shall not be less than cated so that they do not come into
5⁄16 inch (7.94 mm) in diameter.
contact with accumulated snow or
(v) No more than one reverse bend in water.
six wire rope lays shall be permitted. (iii) Cables shall be protected against
(vi) A corrosion-resistant tag shall be damage resulting from overtensioning
securely attached to one of the wire or from other causes.
rope fastenings when a suspension wire (iv) Devices shall be included in the
rope is to be used at a specific location control system for the equipment
and will remain in that location. This which will provide protection against
tag shall bear the following wire rope electrical overloads, three phase rever-
data: sal and phase failure. The control sys-
(A) The diameter (inches and/or mm); tem shall have a separate method,
(B) Construction classification; independent of the direction control
(C) Whether non-preformed or circuit, for breaking the power circuit
preformed; in case of an emergency or malfunc-
(D) The grade of material; tion.
167
ER25SE06.005</MATH>
(v) Suspended or supported equip- stallations shall be inspected and test-
ment shall have a control system ed in the field before being placed in
which will require the operator of the initial service to determine that all
equipment to follow predetermined parts of the installation conform to ap-
procedures. plicable requirements of this standard,
(vi) The following requirements shall and that all safety and operating
apply to electrical protection devices: equipment is functioning as required. A
(A) On installations where the car- similar inspection and test shall be
riage does not have a stability factor of made following any major alteration to
at least four against overturning, elec- an existing installation. No hoist in an
trical contact(s) shall be provided and installation shall be subjected to a load
so connected that the operating devices in excess of 125 percent of its rated
for the suspended or supported equip- load.
ment shall be operative only when the (2) Periodic inspections and tests. (i)
carriage is located and mechanically Related building supporting structures
retained at an established operating shall undergo periodic inspection by a
point. competent person at intervals not ex-
(B) Overload protection shall be proceeding 12 months.
vided in the hoisting or suspension sys- (ii) All parts of the equipment includ-
tem to protect against the equipment ing control systems shall be inspected,
operating in the ‘‘up’’ direction with a and, where necessary, tested by a com-
load in excess of 125 percent of the petent person at intervals specified by
rated load of the platform; and the manufacturer/supplier, but not to
(C) An automatic detector shall be exceed 12 months, to determine that
provided for each suspension point that they are in safe operating condition.
will interrupt power to all hoisting mo- Parts subject to wear, such as wire
tors for travel in the ‘‘down’’ direction, ropes, bearings, gears, and governors
and apply the primary brakes if any shall be inspected and/or tested to de-
suspension wire rope becomes slack. A termine that they have not worn to
continuous-pressure rigging-bypass such an extent as to affect the safe op-
switch designed for use during rigging eration of the installation.
is permitted. This switch shall only be (iii) The building owner shall keep a
used during rigging. certification record of each inspection
(vii) Upper and lower directional and test required under paragraphs
switches designed to prevent the travel (g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. The cer-
of suspended units beyond safe upward tification record shall include the date
and downward levels shall be provided. of the inspection, the signature of the
(viii) Emergency stop switches shall person who performed the inspection,
be provided on remote controlled, roof- and the number, or other identifier, of
powered manned platforms adjacent to the building support structure and
each control station on the platform. equipment which was inspected. This
(ix) Cables which are in constant ten- certification record shall be kept read-
sion shall have overload devices which ily available for review by the Assist-
will prevent the tension in the cable ant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant
from interfering with the load limiting Secretary’s representative and by the
device required in paragraph employer.
(f)(8)(vi)(B) of this section, or with the (iv) Working platforms and their
platform roll limiting device required components shall be inspected by the
in paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(C) of this section. employer for visible defects before
The setting of these devices shall be co- every use and after each occurrence
ordinated with other overload settings which could affect the platform’s struc-
at the time of design of the system, tural integrity.
and shall be clearly indicated on or (3) Maintenance inspections and tests.
near the device. The device shall inter- (i) A maintenance inspection and,
rupt the equipment travel in the where necessary, a test shall be made
‘‘down’’ direction. of each platform installation every 30
(g) Inspection and tests—(1) Installa- days, or where the work cycle is less
tions and alterations. All completed than 30 days such inspection and/or
building maintenance equipment in- test shall be made prior to each work
168
cycle. This inspection and test shall (iii) A thorough inspection of suspen-
follow procedures recommended by the sion wire ropes in service shall be made
manufacturer, and shall be made by a once a month. Suspension wire ropes
competent person. that have been inactive for 30 days or
(ii) The building owner shall keep a longer shall have a thorough inspection
certification record of each inspection before they are placed into service.
and test performed under paragraph These thorough inspections of suspen-
(g)(3)(i) of this section. The certifi- sion wire ropes shall be performed by a
cation record shall include the date of competent person.
the inspection and test, the signature (iv) The need for replacement of a
of the person who performed the in- suspension wire rope shall be deter-
spection and/or test, and an identifier mined by inspection and shall be based
for the platform installation which was on the condition of the wire rope. Any
inspected. The certification record of the following conditions or combina-
shall be kept readily available for re- tion of conditions will be cause for re-
view by the Assistant Secretary of moval of the wire rope:
Labor or the Assistant Secretary’s rep- (A) Broken wires exceeding three
resentative and by the employer. wires in one strand or six wires in one
(4) Special inspection of governors and rope lay;
secondary brakes. (i) Governors and sec- (B) Distortion of rope structure such
ondary brakes shall be inspected and as would result from crushing or
tested at intervals specified by the kinking;
manufacturer/supplier but not to ex- (C) Evidence of heat damage;
ceed every 12 months. (D) Evidence of rope deterioration
(ii) The results of the inspection and from corrosion;
test shall confirm that the initiating (E) A broken wire within 18 inches
device for the secondary braking sys- (460.8 mm) of the end attachments;
tem operates at the proper overspeed. (F) Noticeable rusting and pitting;
(iii) The results of the inspection and (G) Evidence of core failure (a length-
test shall confirm that the secondary ening of rope lay, protrusion of the
brake is functioning properly. rope core and a reduction in rope di-
(iv) If any hoisting machine or initi- ameter suggests core failure); or
ating device for the secondary brake (H) More than one valley break (bro-
system is removed from the equipment ken wire).
for testing, all reinstalled and directly (I) Outer wire wear exceeds one-third
related components shall be rein- of the original outer wire diameter.
spected prior to returning the equip- (J) Any other condition which the
ment installation to service. competent person determines has sig-
(v) Inspection of governors and sec- nificantly affected the integrity of the
ondary brakes shall be performed by a rope.
competent person. (v) The building owner shall keep a
(vi) The secondary brake governor certification record of each monthly
and actuation device shall be tested be- inspection of a suspension wire rope as
fore each day’s use. Where testing is required in paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this
not feasible, a visual inspection of the section. The record shall include the
brake shall be made instead to ensure date of the inspection, the signature of
that it is free to operate. the person who performed the inspec-
(5) Suspension wire rope maintenance, tion, and a number, or other identifier,
inspection and replacement. (i) Suspen- of the wire rope which was inspected.
sion wire rope shall be maintained and This record of inspection shall be made
used in accordance with procedures available for review by the Assistant
recommended by the wire rope manu- Secretary of Labor or the Assistant
facturer. Secretary’s representative and by the
(ii) Suspension wire rope shall be in- employer.
spected by a competent person for visi- (6) Hoist inspection. Before lowering
ble defects and gross damage to the personnel below the top elevation of
rope before every use and after each oc- the building, the hoist shall be tested
currence which might affect the wire each day in the lifting direction with
rope’s integrity. the intended load to make certain it
169
has sufficient capacity to raise the per- Immediately upon completion of such
sonnel back to the boarding level. tests, inspections and maintenance, the
(h) Maintenance—(1) General mainte- device shall be restored to its normal
nance. All parts of the equipment af- operating condition.
fecting safe operation shall be main- (i) Operations—(1) Training. (i) Work-
tained in proper working order so that ing platforms shall be operated only by
they may perform the functions for persons who are proficient in the oper-
which they were intended. The equip- ation, safe use and inspection of the
ment shall be taken out of service particular working platform to be oper-
when it is not in proper working order. ated.
(2) Cleaning. (i) Control or power (ii) All employees who operate work-
contactors and relays shall be kept ing platforms shall be trained in the
clean. following:
(ii) All other parts shall be kept (A) Recognition of, and preventive
clean if their proper functioning would measures for, the safety hazards associ-
be affected by the presence of dirt or ated with their individual work tasks.
other contaminants. (B) General recognition and preven-
(3) Periodic resocketing of wire rope fas- tion of safety hazards associated with
tenings. (i) Hoisting ropes utilizing the use of working platforms, including
poured socket fastenings shall be the provisions in the section relating
resocketed at the non-drum ends at in- to the particular working platform to
tervals not exceeding 24 months. In be operated.
resocketing the ropes, a sufficient (C) Emergency action plan proce-
length shall be cut from the end of the dures required in paragraph (e)(9) of
rope to remove damaged or fatigued this section.
portions. (D) Work procedures required in
(ii) Resocketed ropes shall conform paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section.
to the requirements of paragraph (f)(7) (E) Personal fall arrest system in-
of this section. spection, care, use and system perform-
(iii) Limit switches affected by the ance.
resocketed ropes shall be reset, if nec- (iii) Training of employees in the op-
essary. eration and inspection of working plat-
(4) Periodic reshackling of suspension forms shall be done by a competent
wire ropes. The hoisting ropes shall be person.
reshackled at the nondrum ends at in- (iv) Written work procedures for the
tervals not exceeding 24 months. When operation, safe use and inspection of
reshackling the ropes, a sufficient working platforms shall be provided for
length shall be cut from the end of the employee training. Pictorial methods
rope to remove damaged or fatigued of instruction, may be used, in lieu of
portions. written work procedures, if employee
(5) Roof systems. Roof track systems, communication is improved using this
tie-downs, or similar equipment shall method. The operating manuals sup-
be maintained in proper working order plied by manufacturers for platform
so that they perform the function for system components can serve as the
which they were intended. basis for these procedures.
(6) Building face guiding members. T- (v) The employer shall certify that
rails, indented mullions, or equivalent employees have been trained in oper-
guides located in the face of a building ating and inspecting a working plat-
shall be maintained in proper working form by preparing a certification
order so that they perform the func- record which includes the identity of
tions for which they were intended. the person trained, the signature of the
Brackets for cable stabilizers shall employer or the person who conducted
similarly be maintained in proper the training and the date that training
working order. was completed. The certification
(7) Inoperative safety devices. No per- record shall be prepared at the comple-
son shall render a required safety de- tion of the training required in para-
vice or electrical protective device in- graph (i)(1)(ii) of this section, and shall
operative, except as necessary for be maintained in a file for the duration
tests, inspections, and maintenance. of the employee’s employment. The
170
certification record shall be kept read- become entangled in rollers, hoists or
ily available for review by the Assist- other machinery.
ant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant (j) Personal fall protection. Employees
Secretary’s representative. on working platforms shall be pro-
(2) Use. (i) Working platforms shall tected by a personal fall arrest system
not be loaded in excess of the rated meeting the requirements of appendix
load, as stated on the platform load C, section I, of this standard, and as
rating plate. otherwise provided by this standard.
(ii) Employees shall be prohibited
from working on snow, ice, or other APPENDIX A TO § 1910.66, GUIDELINES
(ADVISORY)
slippery material covering platforms,
except for the removal of such mate- 1. Use of the Appendix. Appendix A provides
rials. examples of equipment and methods to assist
(iii) Adequate precautions shall be the employer in meeting the requirements of
the indicated provision of the standard. Em-
taken to protect the platform, wire
ployers may use other equipment or proce-
ropes and life lines from damage due to dures which conform to the requirements of
acids or other corrosive substances, in the standard. This appendix neither adds to
accordance with the recommendations nor detracts from the mandatory require-
of the corrosive substance producer, ments set forth in § 1910.66.
supplier, platform manufacturer or 2. Assurance. Paragraph (c) of the standard
other equivalent information sources. requires the building owner to inform the
Platform members which have been ex- employer in writing that the powered plat-
posed to acids or other corrosive sub- form installation complies with certain re-
quirements of the standard, since the em-
stances shall be washed down with a ployer may not have the necessary informa-
neutralizing solution, at a frequency tion to make these determinations. The em-
recommended by the corrosive sub- ployer, however, remains responsible for
stance producer or supplier. meeting these requirements which have not
(iv) Platform members, wire ropes been set off in paragraph (c)(1).
and life lines shall be protected when 3. Design Requirements. The design require-
using a heat producing process. Wire ments for each installation should be based
ropes and life lines which have been on the limitations (stresses, deflections,
etc.), established by nationally recognized
contacted by the heat producing proc-
standards as promulgated by the following
ess shall be considered to be perma- organizations, or to equivalent standards:
nently damaged and shall not be used.
AA—The Aluminum Association, 818 Con-
(v) The platform shall not be oper- necticut Avenue, NW., Washington, DC,
ated in winds in excess of 25 miles per 20006
hour (40.2 km/hr) except to move it Aluminum Construction Manual
from an operating to a storage posi- Specifications For Aluminum Structures
tion. Wind speed shall be determined Aluminum Standards and Data
based on the best available informa- AGMA—American Gear Manufacturers Asso-
tion, which includes on-site anemom- ciation, 101 North Fort Meyer Dr., Suite
eter readings and local weather fore- 1000, Arlington, VA 22209
casts which predict wind velocities for AISC—American Institute of Steel Construc-
the area. tion, 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago,
IL 60611
(vi) On exterior installations, an ane-
ANSI—American National Standards Insti-
mometer shall be mounted on the plat- tute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY
form to provide information of on-site 10018
wind velocities prior to and during the ASCE—American Society of Civil Engineers,
use of the platform. The anemometer 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017
may be a portable (hand held) unit ASME—American Society of Mechanical En-
which is temporarily mounted during gineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York,
platform use. NY 10017
(vii) Tools, materials and debris not ASTM—American Society for Testing and
Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia,
related to the work in progress shall
PA 19103
not be allowed to accumulate on plat- AWS—American Welding Society, Inc., Box
forms. Stabilizer ties shall be located 351040, 550 NW. LeJeunne Road, Miami, FL
so as to allow unencumbered passage 33126
along the full length of the platform JIC—Joint Industrial Council, 2139 Wisconsin
and shall be of such length so as not to Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20007
171
NEMA—National Electric Manufacturers As- platform with respect to the face of the
sociation, 2101 L Street, NW., Washington, building. One acceptable method employs
DC 20037 corrosion-resistant building anchors secured
4. Tie-in-guides. Indented mullions, T-rails in the face of the building in vertical rows
or other equivalent guides are acceptable as every third floor or 50 feet (15.3 m), which-
tie-in guides in a building face for a contin- ever is less. The anchors are spaced hori-
uous stabilization system. Internal guides zontally to allow a stabilization attachment
are embedded in other building members (stabilizer tie) for each of the two platform
with only the opening exposed (see Figure 1 suspension wire ropes. The stabilizer tie con-
of appendix B). External guides, however, are sists of two parts. One part is a quick con-
installed external to the other building nect-quick disconnect device which utilizes a
members and so are fully exposed. The min- corrosion-resistant yoke and retainer spring
imum opening for tie-in guides is three-quar- that is designed to fit over the building an-
ters of an inch (19 mm), and the minimum in- chors. The second part of the stabilizer tie is
side dimensions are one-inch (25 mm) deep a lanyard which is used to maintain a fixed
and two inches (50 mm) wide. distance between the suspension wire rope
Employers should be aware of the hazards and the face of the building.
associated with tie-in guides in a continuous In this method, as the suspended powered
stabilization system which was not designed platform descends past the elevation of each
properly. For example, joints in these track anchor, the descent is halted and each of the
systems may become extended or discontin- platform occupants secures a stabilizer tie
uous due to installation or building settle- between a suspension wire rope and a build-
ment. If this alignment problem is not cor- ing anchor. The procedure is repeated as
rected, the system could jam when a guide each elevation of a building anchor is
roller or guide shoe strikes a joint and this reached during the descent of the powered
would cause a hazardous situation for em- platform.
ployees. In another instance, faulty design As the platform ascends, the procedure is
will result in guide rollers being mounted in reversed; that is, the stabilizer ties are re-
a line so they will jam in the track at the moved as each elevation of a building anchor
slightest misalignment. is reached. The removal of each stabilizer tie
5. Building anchors (intermittent stabilization is assured since the platform is provided
system). In the selection of the vertical dis- with stopping devices which will interrupt
tance between building anchors, certain fac- power to its hoist(s) in the event either stop-
tors should be given consideration. These ping device contacts a stabilizer during the
factors include building height and architec- ascent of the platform.
tural design, platform length and weight, Figure 2 of appendix B illustrates another
wire rope angulation, and the wind velocities type of acceptable intermittent stabilization
in the building area. Another factor to con- system which utilizes retaining pins as the
sider is the material of the building face,
quick connect-quick disconnect device in the
since this material may be adversely af-
stabilizer tie.
fected by the building rollers.
8. Wire Rope Inspection. The inspection of
External or indented type building anchors
the suspension wire rope is important since
are acceptable. Receptacles in the building
facade used for the indented type should be the rope gradually loses strength during its
kept clear of extraneous materials which useful life. The purpose of the inspection is
will hinder their use. During the inspection to determine whether the wire rope has suffi-
of the platform installation, evidence of a cient integrity to support a platform with
failure or abuse of the anchors should be the required design factor.
brought to the attention of the employer. If there is any doubt concerning the condi-
6. Stabilizer tie length. A stabilizer tie tion of a wire rope or its ability to perform
should be long enough to provide for the the required work, the rope should be re-
planned angulation of the suspension cables. placed. The cost of wire rope replacement is
However, the length of the tie should not be quite small if compared to the cost in terms
excessive and become a problem by possibly of human injuries, equipment down time and
becoming entangled in the building face roll- replacement.
ers or parts of the platform machinery. No listing of critical inspection factors,
The attachment length may vary due to which serve as a basis for wire rope replace-
material elongation and this should be con- ment in the standard, can be a substitute for
sidered when selecting the material to be an experienced inspector of wire rope. The
used. Consideration should also be given to listing serves as a user’s guide to the accept-
the use of ties which are easily installed by ed standards by which ropes must be judged.
employees, since this will encourage their Rope life can be prolonged if preventive
use. maintenance is performed regularly. Cutting
7. Intermittent stabilization system. Intermit- off an appropriate length of rope at the end
tent stabilization systems may use different termination before the core degrades and
equipment, tie-in devices and methods to re- valley breaks appear minimizes degradation
strict the horizontal movement of a powered at these sections.
172
9. General Maintenance. In meeting the gen- gencies,’’ details the basic steps needed to
eral maintenance requirement in paragraph prepare to handle emergencies in the work-
(h)(1) of the standard, the employer should place.
undertake the prompt replacement of bro- Following the completion of a training
ken, worn and damaged parts, switch con- program, the employee should be required to
tacts, brushes, and short flexible conductors demonstrate competency in operating the
of electrical devices. The components of the equipment safely. Supplemental training of
electrical service system and traveling ca- the employee should be provided by the em-
bles should be replaced when damaged or sig- ployer, as necessary, if the equipment used
nificantly abraded. In addition, gears, shafts, or other working conditions should change.
bearings, brakes and hoisting drums should An employee who is required to work with
be kept in proper alignment. chemical products on a platform should re-
10. Training. In meeting the training receive training in proper cleaning procedures,
quirement of paragraph (i)(1) of the standard, and in the hazards, care and handling of
employers should use both on the job train- these products. In addition, the employee
ing and formal classroom training. The writ- should be supplied with the appropriate per-
ten work procedures used for this training sonal protective equipment, such as gloves
should be obtained from the manufacturer, if and eye and face protection.
possible, or prepared as necessary for the em-
11. Suspension and Securing of Powered Plat-
ployee’s information and use.
forms (Equivalency). One acceptable method
Employees who will operate powered plat-
of demonstrating the equivalency of a meth-
forms with intermittent stabilization sys-
od of suspending or securing a powered plat-
tems should receive instruction in the spe-
form, as required in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii),
cific ascent and descent procedures involving
(f)(3) and (f)(5)(i)(F), is to provide an engi-
the assembly and disassembly of the sta-
neering analysis by a registered professional
bilizer ties.
An acceptable training program should engineer. The analysis should demonstrate
also include employee instruction in basic that the proposed method will provide an
inspection procedures for the purpose of de- equal or greater degree of safety for employ-
termining the need for repair and replace- ees than any one of the methods specified in
ment of platform equipment. In addition, the the standard.
program should cover the inspection, care APPENDIX B TO § 1910.66—EXHIBITS (ADVISORY)
and use of the personal fall protection equip-
ment required in paragraph (j)(1) of the The three drawings in appendix B illus-
standard. trate typical platform stabilization systems
In addition, the training program should which are addressed in the standard. The
also include emergency action plan ele- drawings are to be used for reference pur-
ments. OSHA brochure #1B3088 (Rev.) 1985, poses only, and do not illustrate all the man-
‘‘How to Prepare for Workplace Emer- datory requirements for each system.
173
174
EC27OC91.012</GPH>
175
EC27OC91.013</GPH>
EC27OC91.014</GPH></EXTRACT>
176
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.66—PERSONAL FALL AR- ate. It is measured as the distance between
REST SYSTEM (SECTION I—MANDATORY; SEC- the location of an employee’s body belt or
TIONS II AND III—NON-MANDATORY) body harness attachment point at the mo-
ment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest
Use of the Appendix forces) of the deceleration device during a
Section I of appendix C sets out the man- fall, and the location of that attachment
datory criteria for personal fall arrest sys- point after the employee comes to a full
tems used by all employees using powered stop.
platforms, as required by paragraph (j)(1) of Equivalent means alternative designs, ma-
this standard. Section II sets out nonmanda- terials or methods which the employer can
tory test procedures which may be used to demonstrate will provide an equal or greater
determine compliance with applicable re- degree of safety for employees than the
quirements contained in section I of this ap- methods, materials or designs specified in
pendix. Section III provides nonmandatory the standard.
guidelines which are intended to assist em- Free fall means the act of falling before the
ployers in complying with these provisions. personal fall arrest system begins to apply
I. Personal fall arrest systems—(a) Scope and force to arrest the fall.
application. This section establishes the ap- Free fall distance means the vertical dis-
plication of and performance criteria for per- placement of the fall arrest attachment
sonal fall arrest systems which are required point on the employee’s body belt or body
for use by all employees using powered plat- harness between onset of the fall and just be-
forms under paragraph 1910.66(j). fore the system begins to apply force to ar-
(b) Definitions. Anchorage means a secure rest the fall. This distance excludes decelera-
point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or tion distance, lifeline and lanyard elongation
deceleration devices, and which is inde- but includes any deceleration device slide
pendent of the means of supporting or sus- distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard
pending the employee. extension before they operate and fall arrest
Body belt means a strap with means both forces occur.
for securing it about the waist and for at- Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire
taching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or decelera- rope, or strap which is used to secure the
tion device. body belt or body harness to a deceleration
Body harness means a design of straps device, lifeline, or anchorage.
which may be secured about the employee in
Lifeline means a component consisting of a
a manner to distribute the fall arrest forces
flexible line for connection to an anchorage
over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest
at one end to hang vertically (vertical life-
and shoulders with means for attaching it to
line), or for connection to anchorages at
other components of a personal fall arrest
both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal
system.
lifeline), and which serves as a means for
Buckle means any device for holding the
connecting other components of a personal
body belt or body harness closed around the
fall arrest system to the anchorage.
employee’s body.
Competent person means a person who is ca- Personal fall arrest system means a system
pable of identifying hazardous or dangerous used to arrest an employee in a fall from a
conditions in the personal fall arrest system working level. It consists of an anchorage,
or any component thereof, as well as in their connectors, a body belt or body harness and
application and use with related equipment. may include a lanyard, deceleration device,
Connector means a device which is used to lifeline, or suitable combinations of these.
couple (connect) parts of the system to- Qualified person means one with a recog-
gether. It may be an independent component nized degree or professional certificate and
of the system (such as a carabiner), or an in- extensive knowledge and experience in the
tegral component of part of the system (such subject field who is capable of design, anal-
as a buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt ysis, evaluation and specifications in the
or body harness, or a snap-hook spliced or subject work, project, or product.
sewn to a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard). Rope grab means a deceleration device
Deceleration device means any mechanism, which travels on a lifeline and automatically
such as a rope grab, ripstitch lanyard, spe- frictionally engages the lifeline and locks so
cially woven lanyard, tearing or deforming as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope
lanyard, or automatic self retracting-life- grab usually employs the principle of iner-
line/lanyard, which serves to dissipate a sub- tial locking, cam/lever locking, or both.
stantial amount of energy during a fall ar- Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a de-
rest, or otherwise limits the energy imposed celeration device which contains a drum-
on an employee during fall arrest. wound line which may be slowly extracted
Deceleration distance means the additional from, or retracted onto, the drum under
vertical distance a falling employee travels, slight tension during normal employee
excluding lifeline elongation and free fall movement, and which, after onset of a fall,
distance, before stopping, from the point at automatically locks the drum and arrests
which the deceleration device begins to oper- the fall.
177
Snap-hook means a connector comprised of (10) Anchorages to which personal fall ar-
a hookshaped member with a normally rest equipment is attached shall be capable
closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN)
may be opened to permit the hook to receive per employee attached, or shall be designed,
an object and, when released, automatically installed, and used as part of a complete per-
closes to retain the object. Snap-hooks are sonal fall arrest system which maintains a
generally one of two types: safety factor of at least two, under the su-
1. The locking type with a self-closing, pervision of a qualified person.
self-locking keeper which remains closed and (11) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lan-
locked until unlocked and pressed open for yards, lifelines, and strength components of
connection or disconnection, or body belts and body harnesses, shall be made
2. The non-locking type with a self-closing from synthetic fibers or wire rope.
keeper which remains closed until pressed (d) System performance criteria. (1) Personal
open for connection or disconnection. fall arrest systems shall, when stopping a
Tie-off means the act of an employee, wear- fall:
ing personal fall protection equipment, con- (i) Limit maximum arresting force on an
necting directly or indirectly to an anchor- employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used
age. It also means the condition of an em- with a body belt;
ployee being connected to an anchorage. (ii) Limit maximum arresting force on an
(c) Design for system components. (1) Connec- employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used
tors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed with a body harness;
steel, or made of equivalent materials. (iii) Bring an employee to a complete stop
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- and limit maximum deceleration distance an
sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and
shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- (iv) Shall have sufficient strength to with-
facing parts of the system. stand twice the potential impact energy of
(3) Lanyards and vertical lifelines which an employee free falling a distance of six feet
tie-off one employee shall have a minimum (1.8 m), or the free fall distance permitted by
breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). the system, whichever is less.
(4) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards (2)(i) When used by employees having a
which automatically limit free fall distance combined person and tool weight of less than
to two feet (0.61 m) or less shall have compo- 310 pounds (140 kg), personal fall arrest sys-
nents capable of sustaining a minimum stat- tems which meet the criteria and protocols
ic tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN) ap- contained in paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) in
plied to the device with the lifeline or lan- section II of this appendix shall be consid-
yard in the fully extended position. ered as complying with the provisions of
(5) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iv) above.
which do not limit free fall distance to two (ii) When used by employees having a com-
feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140
tearing and deforming lanyards shall be ca- kg) or more, personal fall arrest systems
pable of sustaining a minimum tensile load which meet the criteria and protocols con-
of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device tained in paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) in sec-
with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully ex- tion II may be considered as complying with
tended position. the provisions of paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through
(6) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be capa- (d)(1)(iv) provided that the criteria and pro-
ble of sustaining a minimum tensile load of tocols are modified appropriately to provide
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). proper protection for such heavier weights.
(7) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be 100 (e) Care and use. (1) Snap-hooks, unless of
percent proof-tested to a minimum tensile a locking type designed and used to prevent
load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- disengagement from the following connec-
ing, breaking, or taking permanent deformations, shall not be engaged:
tion. (i) Directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
(8) Snap-hooks shall be sized to be compat- (ii) To each other;
ible with the member to which they are con- (iii) To a dee-ring to which another snap-
nected so as to prevent unintentional dis- hook or other connector is attached;
engagement of the snap-hook by depression (iv) To a horizontal lifeline; or
of the snap-hook keeper by the connected (v) To any object which is incompatibly
member, or shall be a locking type snap- shaped or dimensioned in relation to the
hook designed and used to prevent dis- snap-hook such that the connected object
engagement of the snap-hook by the contact could depress the snap-hook keeper a suffi-
of the snaphook keeper by the connected cient amount to release itself.
member. (2) Devices used to connect to a horizontal
(9) Horizontal lifelines, where used, shall lifeline which may become a vertical lifeline
be designed, and installed as part of a com- shall be capable of locking in either direc-
plete personal fall arrest system, which tion on the lifeline.
maintains a safety factor of at least two, (3) Personal fall arrest systems shall be
under the supervision of a qualified person. rigged such that an employee can neither
178
free fall more than six feet (1.8 m), nor con- quickly released without having any appre-
tact any lower level. ciable motion imparted to it.
(4) The attachment point of the body belt (7) The system’s performance should be
shall be located in the center of the wearer’s evaluated taking into account the range of
back. The attachment point of the body har- environmental conditions for which it is de-
ness shall be located in the center of the signed to be used.
wearer’s back near shoulder level, or above (8) Following the test, the system need not
the wearer’s head. be capable of further operation.
(5) When vertical lifelines are used, each (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of
employee shall be provided with a separate all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus
lifeline. or minus five pounds (135 kg plus or minus
(6) Personal fall arrest systems or compo- 2.5 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4),
nents shall be used only for employee fall above.)
protection. (2) The test consists of dropping the test
(7) Personal fall arrest systems or compo- weight once. A new unused system should be
nents subjected to impact loading shall be used for each test.
immediately removed from service and shall (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
not be used again for employee protection length should be six feet plus or minus two
unless inspected and determined by a com- inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as meas-
petent person to be undamaged and suitable ured from the fixed anchorage to the attach-
for reuse. ment on the body belt or body harness.
(8) The employer shall provide for prompt (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
rescue of employees in the event of a fall or tems, the length of the lifeline above the
shall assure the self-rescue capability of em- centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
ployees. lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed
(9) Before using a personal fall arrest sys- two feet (0.61 m).
tem, and after any component or system is (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with
changed, employees shall be trained in ac- deceleration devices which do not automati-
cordance with the requirements of paragraph cally limit free fall distance to two feet (0.61
1910.66(i)(1), in the safe use of the system. m) or less, and for systems with deceleration
(f) Inspections. Personal fall arrest systems devices which have a connection distance in
shall be inspected prior to each use for mil- excess of one foot (0.3 m) (measured between
dew, wear, damage and other deterioration, the centerline of the lifeline and the attach-
and defective components shall be removed ment point to the body belt or harness), the
from service if their strength or function test weight should be rigged to free fall a dis-
may be adversely affected. tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is
II. Test methods for personal fall arrest sys- 1.5 feet (46 cm) above the anchorage point, to
tems (non-mandatory)—(a) General. Para- its hanging location (six feet below the an-
graphs (b), (c), (d) and (e), of this section II chorage). The test weight should fall without
set forth test procedures which may be used interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor
to determine compliance with the require- or ground during the test. In some cases a
ments in paragraph (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iv) non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length
of section I of this appendix. may need to be added to the system (for test
(b) General conditions for all tests in section purposes) to create the necessary free fall
II. (1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration distance.
devices should be attached to an anchorage (6) For deceleration device systems with
and connected to the body-belt or body har- integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
ness in the same manner as they would be matically limit free fall distance to two feet
when used to protect employees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of four feet (1.22
should not have a deflection greater than .04 m).
inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (7) Any weight which detaches from the
(10 kN) is applied. belt or harness should constitute failure for
(3) The frequency response of the load the strength test.
measuring instrumentation should be 120 Hz. (d) Force test—(1) General. The test consists
(4) The test weight used in the strength of dropping the respective test weight speci-
and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- fied in (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) once. A new, un-
lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth used system should be used for each test.
of 38 inches plus or minus four inches (96 cm (2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of
plus or minus 10 cm). 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds (100
(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See
the free fall distance should be supplied with paragraph (b)(4), above.)
the system, or in its absence, the least elas- (ii) Lanyard length should be six feet plus
tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used or minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5
with the system. cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to
(6) The test weight for each test should be the attachment on the body belt or body har-
hoisted to the required level and should be ness.
179
(iii) The test weight should fall free from for use in complying with requirements for a
the anchorage level to its hanging location personal fall arrest system.
(a total of six feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) (a) Selection and use considerations. The
without interference, obstruction, or hitting kind of personal fall arrest system selected
the floor or ground during the test. should match the particular work situation,
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of and any possible free fall distance should be
220 pounds plus or minus three pounds (100 kept to a minimum. Consideration should be
kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See given to the particular work environment.
paragraph (b)(4), above.) For example, the presence of acids, dirt,
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on
test should be the maximum fall distance the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
physically permitted by the system during environments may also have an adverse af-
normal use conditions, up to a maximum fect on the system. Wire rope should not be
free fall distance for the test weight of six used where an electrical hazard is antici-
feet (1.83 m), except as follows: pated. As required by the standard, the em-
(A) For deceleration systems which have a ployer must plan to have means available to
connection link or lanyard, the test weight promptly rescue an employee should a fall
should free fall a distance equal to the con- occur, since the suspended employee may not
nection distance (measured between the cen- be able to reach a work level independently.
terline of the lifeline and the attachment Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines
point to the body belt or harness). are subject to damage by work operations
(B) For deceleration device systems with such as welding, chemical cleaning, and
sandblasting, the component should be pro-
integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
tected, or other securing systems should be
matically limit free fall distance to two feet
used. The employer should fully evaluate the
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free
work conditions and environment (including
fall a distance equal to that permitted by the
seasonal weather changes) before selecting
system in normal use. (For example, to test
the appropriate personal fall protection sys-
a system with a self-retracting lifeline or
tem. Once in use, the system’s effectiveness
lanyard, the test weight should be supported
should be monitored. In some cases, a pro-
and the system allowed to retract the life-
gram for cleaning and maintenance of the
line or lanyard as it would in normal use.
system may be necessary.
The test weight would then be released and (b) Testing considerations. Before pur-
the force and deceleration distance meas- chasing or putting into use a personal fall
ured). arrest system, an employer should obtain
(4) A system fails the force test if the re- from the supplier information about the sys-
corded maximum arresting force exceeds tem based on its performance during testing
1,260 pounds (15.6 kN) when using a body belt, so that the employer can know if the system
and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when meets this standard. Testing should be done
using a body harness. using recognized test methods. Section II of
(5) The maximum elongation and decelera- this appendix C contains test methods recog-
tion distance should be recorded during the nized for evaluating the performance of fall
force test. arrest systems. Not all systems may need to
(e) Deceleration device tests—(1) General. The be individually tested; the performance of
device should be evaluated or tested under some systems may be based on data and cal-
the environmental conditions, (such as rain, culations derived from testing of similar sys-
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for tems, provided that enough information is
which the device is designed. available to demonstrate similarity of func-
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) tion and design.
Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 (c) Component compatibility considerations.
times over the same length of line a distance Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de-
of not less than one foot (30.5 cm), and the signed, tested, and supplied as a complete
mechanism should lock each time. system. However, it is common practice for
(ii) Unless the device is permanently lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration
marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline devices, body belts and body harnesses to be
which must be used, several types (different interchanged since some components wear
diameters and different materials), of life- out before others. The employer and em-
lines should be used to test the device. ployee should realize that not all compo-
(3) Other self-activatinq-type deceleration de- nents are interchangeable. For instance, a
vices. The locking mechanisms of other self- lanyard should not be connected between a
activating-type deceleration devices de- body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de-
signed for more than one arrest should lock vice of the self-retracting type since this can
each of 1,000 times as they would in normal result in additional free fall for which the
service. system was not designed. Any substitution
III. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for or change to a personal fall arrest system
personal fall arrest systems. The following in- should be fully evaluated or tested by a com-
formation constitutes additional guidelines petent person to determine that it meets the
180
standard, before the modified system is put ropes must be withdrawn from service imme-
in use. diately, and should be tagged or marked as
(d) Employee training considerations. Thor- unusable, or destroyed.
ough employee training in the selection and (g) Rescue considerations. As required by the
use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- standard (section I, Paragraph (e)(8)), when
tive. As stated in the standard, before the personal fall arrest systems are used, the
equipment is used, employees must be employer must assure that employees can be
trained in the safe use of the system. This promptly rescued or can rescue themselves
should include the following: Application should a fall occur. The availability of res-
limits; proper anchoring and tie-off tech- cue personnel, ladders or other rescue equip-
niques; estimation of free fall distance, in- ment should be evaluated. In some situa-
cluding determination of deceleration dis- tions, equipment which allows employees to
tance, and total fall distance to prevent rescue themselves after the fall has been ar-
striking a lower level; methods of use; and rested may be desirable, such as devices
inspection and storage of the system. Care- which have descent capability.
less or improper use of the equipment can re- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the
sult in serious injury or death. Employers most important aspects of personal fall pro-
and employees should become familiar with tection systems is fully planning the system
the material in this appendix, as well as before it is put into use. Probably the most
manufacturer’s recommendations, before a overlooked component is planning for suit-
system is used. Of uppermost importance is able anchorage points. Such planning should
the reduction in strength caused by certain ideally be done before the structure or build-
tie-offs (such as using knots, tying around ing is constructed so that anchorage points
sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted can be incorporated during construction for
free fall distance. Also, to be stressed are the use later for window cleaning or other build-
importance of inspections prior to use, the ing maintenance. If properly planned, these
limitations of the equipment, and unique anchorage points may be used during con-
conditions at the worksite which may be im- struction, as well as afterwards.
portant in determining the type of system to (2) Employers and employees should at all
use. times be aware that the strength of a per-
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers sonal fall arrest system is based on its being
should obtain comprehensive instructions attached to an anchoring system which does
from the supplier as to the system’s proper not significantly reduce the strength of the
use and application, including, where appli- system (such as a properly dimensioned eye-
cable: bolt/snap-hook anchorage). Therefore, if a
(1) The force measured during the sample means of attachment is used that will reduce
force test; the strength of the system, that component
(2) The maximum elongation measured for should be replaced by a stronger one, but one
lanyards during the force test; that will also maintain the appropriate max-
(3) The deceleration distance measured for imum arrest force characteristics.
deceleration devices during the force test; (3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or
(4) Caution statements on critical use limi- lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life-
tations; line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or
(5) Application limits; more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life-
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off line should be used to compensate for the
techniques, including the proper dee-ring or weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard
other attachment point to use on the body length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca-
belt and harness for fall arrest; tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or
(7) Proper climbing techniques; the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, one which has an appropriately incorporated
and storage; and connector to eliminate the need for a knot.
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. (4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline
This information should be provided to em- around an ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘I’’ beam or similar sup-
ployees during training. port can reduce its strength as much as 70
(f) Inspection considerations. As stated in percent due to the cutting action of the
the standard (section I, Paragraph (f)), per- beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of
sonal fall arrest systems must be regularly a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline
inspected. Any component with any signifi- around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline
cant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, should be protected from the edge; or free
mold, or undue stretching; alterations or ad- fall distance should be greatly minimized.
ditions which might affect its efficiency; (5) Tie-off where the line passes over or
damage due to deterioration; contact with around rough or sharp surfaces reduces
fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be
hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging
unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or should be used. Such alternatives may in-
damaged mountings; non-functioning parts; clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection,
or wearing or internal deterioration in the wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the
181
surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap locking type. Locking snap-hooks incor-
around or over the problem surface. porate a positive locking mechanism in addi-
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on tion to the spring loaded keeper, which will
their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected not allow the keeper to open under moderate
to greater loads than the impact load im- pressure without someone first releasing the
posed by an attached component. When the mechanism. Such a feature, properly de-
angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 signed, effectively prevents roll-out from oc-
degrees, the impact force imparted to the curring.
lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly As required by the standard (section I,
amplified. For example, with a sag angle of paragraph (e)(1)) the following connections
15 degrees, the force amplification is about must be avoided (unless properly designed
2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- locking snap-hooks are used) because they
pending on the angle of sag, and the line’s are conditions which can result in roll-out
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- when a nonlocking snap-hook is used:
line and the anchorages to which it is at- • Direct connection of a snap-hook to a
tached should be increased a number of horizontal lifeline.
times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care • Two (or more) snap-hooks connected to
should be taken in considering a horizontal one dee-ring.
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for • Two snap-hooks connected to each other.
this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- • A snap-hook connected back on its inte-
zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the gral lanyard.
movement of the falling employee and the • A snap-hook connected to a webbing loop
horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall or webbing lanyard.
may cause other employees to also fall. Hori- • Improper dimensions of the dee-ring,
zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should rebar, or other connection point in relation
be increased for each additional employee to to the snap-hook dimensions which would
be tied-off. For these and other reasons, the allow the snap-hook keeper to be depressed
design of systems using horizontal lifelines by a turning motion of the snap-hook.
must only be done by qualified persons. Test- (k) Free fall considerations. The employer
ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to and employee should at all times be aware
use is recommended. that a system’s maximum arresting force is
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated evaluated under normal use conditions es-
along the axis of the bolt and its strength is tablished by the manufacturer, and in no
greatly reduced if the force is applied at an case using a free fall distance in excess of six
angle to this axis (in the direction of shear). feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can
Also, care should be exercised in selecting significantly increase the arresting force on
the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci- the employee, possibly to the point of caus-
dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de- ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis-
signed to be compatible for the connection. tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as
(8) Due to the significant reduction in the required by the standard, in no case greater
strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some than six feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the
cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an-
sliding hitch knot should not be used for life- chor should be located at or above the con-
line/lanyard connections except in emer- nection point of the fall arrest equipment to
gency situations where no other available belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional
system is practical. The ‘‘one-and-one’’ slid- free fall distance is added to the length of
ing hitch knot should never be used because the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach-
it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The ‘‘two- ing to the working surface will often result
and-two,’’ or ‘‘three-and-three’’ knot (pref- in a free fall greater than six feet (1.8 m). For
erable), may be used in emergency situa- instance, if a six foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used,
tions; however, care should be taken to limit the total free fall distance will be the dis-
free fall distance to a minimum because of tance from the working level to the body
reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. belt (or harness) attachment point plus the
(i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re- six feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another
quired by the standard, each employee must important consideration is that the arrest-
have a separate lifeline when the lifeline is ing force which the fall system must with-
vertical. The reason for this is that in mul- stand also goes up with greater distances of
tiple tie-offs to a single lifeline, if one em- free fall, possibly exceeding the strength of
ployee falls, the movement of the lifeline the system.
during the arrest of the fall may pull other (l) Elongation and deceleration distance con-
employees’ lanyards, causing them to fall as siderations. Other factors involved in a proper
well. tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis-
(j) Snap-hook considerations. Although not tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan-
required by this standard for all connections, yard will experience a length of stretching or
locking snap-hooks designed for connection elongation, whereas activation of a decelera-
to suitable objects (of sufficient strength) tion device will result in a certain stopping
are highly recommended in lieu of the non- distance. These distances should be available
182
with the lanyard or device’s instructions and (b), (c) and (d) and which were effective on
must be added to the free fall distance to ar- August 27, 1971.
rive at the total fall distance before an em-
ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop- NOTE: All existing installations subject to
ping distance may be very significant if the this appendix shall also comply with para-
lanyard or deceleration device is attached graphs (g), (h), (i), (j) and appendix C of the
near or at the end of a long lifeline, which standard 29 CFR 1910.66.
may itself add considerable distance due to (a) Definitions applicable to this appendix—
its own elongation. As required by the stand- (1) Angulated roping. A system of platform
ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of suspension in which the upper wire rope
these factors must also be maintained be- sheaves or suspension points are closer to
tween the employee and obstructions below, the plane of the building face than the cor-
to prevent an injury due to impact before the
responding attachment points on the plat-
system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a
form, thus causing the platform to press
minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should
against the face of the building during its
be allowed below the securing point of a rope
vertical travel.
grab type deceleration device, and the end
terminated to prevent the device from slid- (2) ANSI. American National Standards In-
ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline stitute.
should extend to the ground or the next (3) Babbitted fastenings. The method of pro-
working level below. These measures are viding wire rope attachments in which the
suggested to prevent the worker from inad- ends of the wire strands are bent back and
vertently moving past the end of the lifeline are held in a tapered socket by means of
and having the rope grab become disengaged poured molten babbitt metal.
from the lifeline. (4) Brake—disc type. A brake in which the
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location holding effect is obtained by frictional re-
of the tie-off should also consider the hazard sistance between one or more faces of discs
of obstructions in the potential fall path of keyed to the rotating member to be held and
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the fixed discs keyed to the stationary or hous-
possibilities of exaggerated swinging should ing member (pressure between the discs
be considered. In addition, when a body belt being applied axially).
is used, the employee’s body will go through (5) Brake—self-energizing band type. An es-
a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi- sentially undirectional brake in which the
tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob- holding effect is obtained by the snubbing
structions which might interfere with this action of a flexible band wrapped about a cy-
motion should be avoided or a severe injury lindrical wheel or drum affixed to the rotat-
could occur. ing member to be held, the connections and
(n) Other considerations. Because of the de- linkages being so arranged that the motion
sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad- of the brake wheel or drum will act to in-
ditional considerations may be required for crease the tension or holding force of the
proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera- band.
tion devices of the self-retracting type
(6) Brake—shoe type. A brake in which the
should be secured overhead in order to avoid
holding effect is obtained by applying the di-
the weight of the device having to be sup-
rect pressure of two or more segmental fric-
ported by the employee. Also, if
tion elements held to a stationary member
selfretracting equipment is connected to a
against a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed
horizontal lifeline, the sag in the lifeline
to the rotating member to be held.
should be minimized to prevent the device
from sliding down the lifeline to a position (7) Building face rollers. A specialized form
which creates a swing hazard during fall ar- of guide roller designed to contact a portion
rest. In all cases, manufacturer’s instruc- of the outer face or wall structure of the
tions should be followed. building, and to assist in stabilizing the op-
erators’ platform during vertical travel.
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.66—EXISTING (8) Continuous pressure. Operation by means
INSTALLATIONS (MANDATORY) of buttons or switches, any one of which may
be used to control the movement of the
Use of the Appendix working platform or roof car, only as long as
Appendix D sets out the mandatory build- the button or switch is manually maintained
ing and equipment requirements for applica- in the actuating position.
ble permanent installations completed after (9) Control. A system governing starting,
August 27, 1971, and no later than July 23, stopping, direction, acceleration, speed, and
1990 which are exempt from the paragraphs retardation of moving members.
(a), (b)(1), (b)(2), (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this (10) Controller. A device or group of devices,
standard. The requirements in appendix D usually contained in a single enclosure,
are essentially the same as unrevised build- which serves to control in some predeter-
ing and equipment provisions which pre- mined manner the apparatus to which it is
viously were designated as 29 CFR 1910.66 (a), connected.
183
(11) Electrical ground. A conducting connec- vides access to the exterior of the building or
tion between an electrical circuit or equip- structure.
ment and the earth, or some conducting (26) Yield point. The stress at which the ma-
body which serves in place of the earth. terial exhibits a permanent set of 0.2 per-
(12) Guide roller. A rotating, bearing- cent.
mounted, generally cylindrical member, op- (27) Zinced fastenings. The method of pro-
erating separately or as part of a guide shoe viding wire rope attachments in which the
assembly, attached to the platform, and pro- splayed or fanned wire ends are held in a ta-
viding rolling contact with building guide- pered socket by means of poured molten
ways, or other building contact members. zinc.
(13) Guide shoe. An assembly of rollers, (b) General requirements. (1) Design require-
slide members, or the equivalent, attached ments. All powered platform installations
as a unit to the operators’ platform, and de- for exterior building maintenance completed
signed to engage with the building members as of August 27, 1971, but no later than [in-
provided for the vertical guidance of the op- sert date, 180 days after the effective date],
erators’ platform. shall meet all of the design, construction and
(14) Interlock. A device actuated by the op- installation requirements of part II and III of
eration of some other device with which it is the ‘‘American National Standard Safety Re-
directly associated, to govern succeeding op- quirements for Powered Platforms for Exte-
erations of the same or allied devices. rior Building Maintenance ANSI A120.1–1970’’
(15) Operating device. A pushbutton, lever, and of this appendix. References shall be
or other manual device used to actuate a made to appropriate parts of ANSI A120.1–
control. 1970 for detail specifications for equipment
(16) Powered platform. Equipment to provide and special installations.
access to the exterior of a building for main- (2) Limitation. The requirements of this ap-
tenance, consisting of a suspended power-op- pendix apply only to electric powered plat-
erated working platform, a roof car, or other forms. It is not the intent of this appendix to
suspension means, and the requisite oper- prohibit the use of other types of power. In-
ating and control devices. stallation of powered platforms using other
(17) Rated load. The combined weight of types of power is permitted, provided such
employees, tools, equipment, and other ma- platforms have adequate protective devices
terial which the working platform is de- for the type of power used, and otherwise
signed and installed to lift. provide for reasonable safety of life and limb
(18) Relay, direction. An electrically ener- to users of equipment and to others who may
gized contactor responsive to an initiating be exposed.
control circuit, which in turn causes a mov- (3) Types of powered platforms. (i) For the
ing member to travel in a particular direc- purpose of applying this appendix, powered
tion. platforms are divided into two basic types,
(19) Relay, potential for vertical travel. An Type F and Type T.
electrically energized contactor responsive (ii) Powered platforms designated as Type
to initiating control circuit, which in turn F shall meet all the requirements in part II
controls the operation of a moving member of ANSI A 120.1–1970, American National
in both directions. This relay usually oper- Standard Safety Requirements for Powered
ates in conjunction with direction relays, as Platforms for Exterior Building Mainte-
covered under the definition, ‘‘relay, direc- nance. A basic requirement of Type F equip-
tion.’’ ment is that the work platform is suspended
(20) Roof car. A structure for the suspen- by at least four wire ropes and designed so
sion of a working platform, providing for its that failure of any one wire rope will not
horizontal movement to working positions. substantially alter the normal position of
(21) Roof-powered platform. A powered plat- the working platform. Another basic require-
form having the raising and lowering mecha- ment of Type F equipment is that only one
nism located on a roof car. layer of hoisting rope is permitted on wind-
(22) Self-powered platform. A powered plating drums. Type F powered platforms may be
form having the raising and lowering mecha- either roof-powered or self-powered.
nism located on the working platform. (iii) Powered platforms designated as Type
(23) Traveling cable. A cable made up of T shall meet all the requirements in part III
electrical or communication conductors or of ANSI A120.1–1970 American National
both, and providing electrical connection be- Standard Safety Requirements for Powered
tween the working platform and the roof car Platforms for Exterior Building Mainte-
or other fixed point. nance, except for section 28, Safety Belts and
(24) Weatherproof. Equipment so con- Life Lines. A basic requirement of Type T
structed or protected that exposure to the equipment is that the working platform is
weather will not interfere with its proper op- suspended by at least two wire ropes. Failure
eration. of one wire rope would not permit the work-
(25) Working platform. The suspended struc- ing platform to fall to the ground, but would
ture arranged for vertical travel which pro- upset its normal position. Type T powered
184
platforms may be either roof-powered or self- (c)(3) (i) or (ii) of this appendix, whichever is
powered. greater.
(iv) The requirements of this section apply (i) The roof car shall be continuously sta-
to powered platforms with winding drum ble, considering overturning moment as de-
type hoisting machines. It is not the intent termined by 125 percent rated load, plus
of this section to prohibit powered platforms maximum dead load and the prescribed wind
using other types of hoisting machines such loading.
as, but not limited to, traction drum hoist- (ii) The roof car and its anchorages shall be
ing machines, air powered machines, hydrau- capable of resisting accidental over-ten-
lic powered machines, and internal combus- sioning of the wire ropes suspending the
tion machines. Installation of powered plat- working platform and this calculated value
forms with other types of hoisting machines shall include the effect of one and one-half
is permitted, provided adequate protective times the value. For this calculation, the si-
devices are used, and provided reasonable multaneous effect of one-half wind load shall
safety of life and limb to users of the equip- be included, and the design stresses shall not
ment and to others who may be exposed is exceed those referred to in paragraph (b)(1)
assured. of this appendix.
(v) Both Type F and Type T powered plat- (iii) If the load on the motors is at any
forms shall comply with the requirements of time in excess of three times that required
appendix C of this standard. for lifting the working platform with its
(c) Type F powered platforms—(1) Roof car, rated load the motor shall stall.
general. (i) A roof car shall be provided when- (4) Access to the roof car. Safe access to the
ever it is necessary to move the working roof car and from the roof car to the working
platform horizontally to working or storage platform shall be provided. If the access to
positions. the roof car at any point of its travel is not
(ii) The maximum rated speed at which a over the roof area or where otherwise nec-
power traversed roof car may be moved in a essary for safety, self-closing, self-locking
horizontal direction shall be 50 feet per gates shall be provided. Applicable provi-
minute. sions of the American National Standard
(2) Movement and positioning of roof car. (i) Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall
Provision shall be made to protect against Openings, Railings and Toeboard, A12.1–1967,
having the roof car leave the roof or enter shall apply.
roof areas not designed for travel. (5) Means for maintenance, repair, and stor-
(ii) The horizontal motion of the roof cars age. Means shall be provided to run the roof
shall be positively controlled so as to insure car away from the roof perimeter, where nec-
proper movement and positioning of the roof essary, and to provide a safe area for mainte-
car. nance, repairs, and storage. Provisions shall
(iii) Roof car positioning devices shall be be made to secure the machine in the stored
provided to insure that the working platform position. For stored machines subject to
is placed and retained in proper position for wind forces, see special design and anchorage
vertical travel and during storage. requirements for ‘‘wind forces’’ in part II,
(iv) Mechanical stops shall be provided to section 10.5.1.1 of ANSI A120.1–1970 American
prevent the traversing of the roof car beyond National Standard Safety Requirements for
its normal limits of travel. Such stops shall Powered Platforms for Exterior Building
be capable of withstanding a force equal to Maintenance.
100 percent of the inertial effect of the roof (6) General requirements for working plat-
car in motion with traversing power applied. forms. The working platform shall be of gird-
(v)(a) The operating device of a power-oper or truss construction and shall be ade-
erated roof car for traversing shall be lo- quate to support its rated load under any po-
cated on the roof car, the working platform, sition of loading, and comply with the provi-
or both, and shall be of the continuous pres- sions set forth in section 10 of ANSI A120.1–
sure weather-proof electric type. If more 1970, American National Standard Safety Re-
than one operating device is provided, they quirements for Powered Platforms for Exte-
shall be so arranged that traversing is pos- rior Building Maintenance.
sible only from one operating device at a (7) Load rating plate. Each working plat-
time. form shall bear a manufacturer’s load rating
(b) The operating device shall be so con- plate, conspicuously posted; stating the max-
nected that it is not operable until: imum permissible rated load. Load rating
(1) The working platform is located at its plates shall be made of noncorrosive mate-
uppermost position of travel and is not in rial and shall have letters and figures
contact with the building face or fixed stamped, etched, or cast on the surface. The
vertical guides in the face of the building; minimum height of the letters and figures
and shall be one-fourth inch.
(2) All protective devices and interlocks (8) Minimum size. The working platform
are in a position for traversing. shall have a minimum net width of 24 inches.
(3) Roof car stability. Roof car stability (9) Guardrails. Working platforms shall be
shall be determined by either paragraph furnished with permanent guard rails not
185
less than 36 inches high, and not more than manual cranking. This provision for manual
42 inches high at the front (building side). At operation shall be designed so that not more
the rear, and on the sides, the rail shall not than two persons will be required to perform
be less than 42 inches high. An intermediate this operation. The access to this provision
guardrail shall be provided around the entire shall include a means to automatically make
platform between the top guardrail and the the machine inoperative electrically while
toeboard. under the emergency manual operation. The
(10) Toeboards. A four-inch toeboard shall design shall be such that the emergency
be provided along all sides of the working brake is operative at or below governor trip-
platform. ping speed during manual operation.
(11) Open spaces between guardrails and (17) Arrangement and guarding of hoisting
toeboards. The spaces between the inter- equipment. (i) Hoisting equipment shall con-
mediate guardrail and platform toeboard on sist of a power-driven drum or drum con-
the building side of the working platform, tained in the roof car (roof-powered plat-
and between the top guardrail and the forms) or contained on the working platform
toeboard on other sides of the platform, shall (self-powered platform).
be filled with metalic mesh or similar mate- (ii) The hoisting equipment shall be power-
rial that will reject a ball one inch in diame- operated in both up and down directions.
ter. The installed mesh shall be capable of (iii) Guard or other protective devices shall
withstanding a load of 100 pounds applied be installed wherever rotating shafts or
horizontally over any area of 144 square other mechanisms or gears may expose per-
inches. If the space between the platform and sonnel to a hazard.
the building face does not exceed eight
(iv) Friction devices or clutches shall not
inches, and the platform is restrained by
be used for connecting the main driving
guides, the mesh may be omitted on the
mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt or
front side.
chain-driven machines are prohibited.
(12) Flooring. The platform flooring shall be
of the nonskid type, and if of open construc- (18) Hoisting motors. (i) Hoisting motors
tion, shall reject a 9⁄16-inch diameter ball, or shall be electric and of weather-proof con-
be provided with a screen below the floor to struction.
reject a 9⁄16-inch diameter ball. (ii) Hoisting motors shall be in conform-
(13) Access gates. Where access gates are ance with applicable provisions of paragraph
provided, they shall be self-closing and self- (c)(22) of this appendix, Electric Wiring and
locking. Equipment.
(14) Operating device for vertical movement of (iii) Hoisting motors shall be directly con-
the working platform. (i) The normal oper- nected to the hoisting machinery. Motor
ating device for the working platform shall couplings, if used, shall be of steel construc-
be located on the working platform and shall tion.
be of the continuous pressure weatherproof (19) Brakes. The hoisting machine(s) shall
electric type. have two independent braking means, each
(ii) The operating device shall be operable designed to stop and hold the working plat-
only when all electrical protective devices form with 125 percent of rated load.
and interlocks on the working platform are (20) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i)
in position for normal service and, the roof Working platforms shall be suspended by
car, if provided, is at an established oper- wire ropes of either 6×19 or 6×37 classifica-
ating point. tion, preformed or nonpreformed.
(15) Emergency electric operative device. (i) In (ii) [Reserved]
addition, on roof-powered platforms, an (iii) The minimum factor of safety shall be
emergency electric operating device shall be 10, and shall be calculated by the following
provided near the hoisting machine for use formula:
in the event of failure of the normal oper- F = S×N/W
ating device for the working platform, or
failure of the traveling cable system. The Where
emergency operating device shall be mount- S = Manufacturer’s rated breaking strength
ed in a locked compartment and shall have a of one rope.
legend mounted thereon reading: ‘‘For Emer- N = Number of ropes under load.
gency Operation Only. Establish Commu- W = Maximum static load on all ropes with
nication With Personnel on Working Plat- the platform and its rated load at any
form Before Use.’’ point of its travel.
(ii) A key for unlocking the compartment (iv) Hoisting ropes shall be sized to con-
housing the emergency operating device form with the required factor of safety, but
shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle in no case shall the size be less than 5⁄16 inch
located near the emergency operating de- diameter.
vice. (v) Winding drums shall have at least three
(16) Manual cranking for emergency oper- turns of rope remaining when the platform
ation. Emergency operation of the main has landed at the lowest possible point of its
drive machine may be provided to allow travel.
186
(vi) The lengthening or repairing of wire grounded and the electric cable shall include
rope by the joining of two or more lengths is a grounding conductor. The receptacle and
prohibited. plug shall be a type designed to avoid hazard
(vii) The nondrum ends of the hoisting to persons inserting or withdrawing the plug.
ropes shall be provided with individual Provision shall be made to prevent applica-
shackle rods which will permit individual ad- tion of cable strain directly to the plug and
justment of rope lengths, if required. receptacle.
(viii) More than two reverse bends in each (vii) Electric runway conductor systems
rope is prohibited. shall be of the type designed for use in exte-
(21) Rope tag data. (i) A metal data tag rior locations and shall be located so as not
shall be securely attached to one of the wire to be subject to contact with water or accu-
rope fastenings. This data tag shall bear the mulated snow. The conductors, collectors,
following wire rope data: and disconnecting means shall conform to
(a) The diameter in inches. the same requirements as those for cranes
(b) Construction classification. and hoists in subpart S of this Part. A
(c) Whether nonpreformed or preformed. grounded conductor shall parallel the power
(d) The grade of material used. conductors and be so connected that it can-
(e) The manufacturer’s rated breaking not be opened by the disconnecting means.
strength. The system shall be designed to avoid hazard
(f) Name of the manufacturer of the rope. to persons in the area.
(g) The month and year the ropes were in- (viii) Electrical protective devices and
stalled. interlocks of the weatherproof type shall be
(22) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) All provided.
electrical equipment and wiring shall con- (ix) Where the installation includes a roof
form to the requirements of subpart S of this car, electric contact(s) shall be provided and
Part, except as modified by ANSI A120.1— so connected that the operating devices for
1970 ‘‘American National Standard Safety the working platform shall be operative only
Requirements for Powered Platforms for Ex- when the roof car is located and mechani-
terior Building Maintenance’’ (see § 1910.6). cally retained at an established operating
For detail design specifications for electrical point.
equipment, see part 2, ANSI A120.1–1970. (x) Where the powered platform includes a
(ii) All motors and operation and control powered-operated roof car, the operating de-
equipment shall be supplied from a single vice for the roof car shall be inoperative
power source. when the roof car is mechanically retained
(iii) The power supply for the powered plat- at an established operating point.
form shall be an independent circuit supplied (xi) An electric contact shall be provided
through a fused disconnect switch. and so connected that it will cause the down
(iv) Electrical conductor parts of the power direction relay for vertical travel to open if
supply system shall be protected against ac- the tension in the traveling cable exceeds
cidental contact. safe limits.
(v) Electrical grounding shall be provided. (xii) An automatic overload device shall be
(a) Provisions for electrical grounding provided to cut off the electrical power to
shall be included with the power-supply sys- the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel
tem. in the up direction, should the load applied
(b) Controller cabinets, motor frames, to the hoisting ropes at either end of the
hoisting machines, the working platform, working platform exceed 125 percent of its
roof car and roof car track system, and non- normal tension with rated load, as shown on
current carrying parts of electrical equip- the manufacturer’s data plate on the work-
ment, where provided, shall be grounded. ing platform.
(c) The controller, where used, shall be so (xiii) An automatic device shall be pro-
designed and installed that a single ground vided for each hoisting rope which will cut
or short circuit will not prevent both the off the electrical power to the hoisting
normal and final stopping device from stop- motor or motors in the down direction and
ping the working platform. apply the brakes if any hoisting rope be-
(d) Means shall be provided on the roof car comes slack.
and working platform for grounding portable (xiv) Upper and lower directional limit de-
electric tools. vices shall be provided to prevent the travel
(e) The working platform shall be grounded of the working platform beyond the normal
through a grounding connection in a trav- upper and lower limits of travel.
eling cable. Electrically powered tools uti- (xv) Operation of a directional limit device
lized on the working platform shall be shall prevent further motion in the appro-
grounded. priate direction, if the normal limit of travel
(vi) Electrical receptacles located on the has been reached.
roof or other exterior location shall be of a (xvi) Directional limit devices, if driven
weatherproof type and shall be located so as from the hoisting machine by chains, tapes,
not to be subject to contact with water or or cables, shall incorporate a device to dis-
accumulated snow. The receptacles shall be connect the electric power from the hoisting
187
machine and apply both the primary and sec- (b) Designated personnel on roof-powered
ondary brakes in the event of failure of the platforms, undertaking emergency operation
driving means. of the working platform by means of the
(xvii) Final terminal stopping devices of emergency operating device located near the
the working platform: hoisting machine.
(a) Final terminal stopping devices for the (iv) The emergency communication equip-
working platform shall be provided as a sec- ment shall be one of the following types:
ondary means of preventing the working (a) Telephone connected to the central
platform from over-traveling at the termi-
telephone exchange system; or
nals.
(b) Telephones on a limited system or an
(b) The device shall be set to function as
close to each terminal landing as practical, approved two-way radio system, provided
but in such a way that under normal oper- designated personnel are available to receive
ating conditions it will not function when a message during the time the powered plat-
the working platform is stopped by the nor- form is in use.
mal terminal stopping device. (d) Type T powered platforms—(1) Roof car.
(c) Operation of the final terminal stopping The requirements of paragraphs (c)(1)
device shall open the potential relay for through (c)(5) of this appendix shall apply to
vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the Type T powered platforms.
electric power from the hoisting machine, (2) Working platform. The requirements of
and applying both the primary and sec- paragraphs (c)(6) through (c)(16) of this ap-
ondary brakes. pendix apply to Type T powered platforms.
(d) The final terminal stopping device for (i) The working platform shall be sus-
the upper limit of travel shall be mounted so pended by at least two wire ropes.
that it is operated directly by the motion of (ii) The maximum rated speed at which the
the working platform itself. working platform of self-powered platforms
(xviii) Emergency stop switches shall be
may be moved in a vertical direction shall
provided in or adjacent to each operating de-
not exceed 35 feet per minute.
vice.
(xix) Emergency stop switches shall: (3) Hoisting equipment. The requirements of
(a) Have red operating buttons or handles. paragraphs (c) (17) and (18) of this appendix
(b) Be conspicuously and permanently shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
marked ‘‘Stop.’’ (4) Brakes. Brakes requirements of para-
(c) Be the manually opened and manually graph (c)(19) of this appendix shall apply.
closed type. (5) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i)
(d) Be positively opened with the opening Paragraphs (c)(20) (i) through (vi) and (viii)
not solely dependent on springs. of this appendix shall apply to Type T pow-
(xx) The manual operation of an emer- ered platforms.
gency stop switch associated with an oper- (ii) Adjustable shackle rods in subpara-
ating device for the working platform shall graph (c)(20)(vii) of this appendix shall apply
open the potential relay for vertical travel, to Type T powered platforms, if the working
thereby disconnecting the electric power platform is suspended by more than two wire
from the hoisting machine and applying both ropes.
the primary and secondary brakes. (6) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) The
(xxi) The manual operation of the emer- requirements of paragraphs (c)(22) (i)
gency stop switch associated with the oper- through (vi) of this appendix shall apply to
ating device for a power-driven roof car shall
Type T powered platforms. ‘‘Circuit protec-
cause the electrical power to the traverse
tion limitation,’’ ‘‘powered platform elec-
machine to be interrupted, and the traverse
machine brake to apply. trical service system,’’ all operating services
(23) Requirements for emergency communica- and control equipment shall comply with the
tions. (i) Communication equipment shall be specifications contained in part 2, section 26,
provided for each powered platform for use in ANSI A120.1–1970.
an emergency. (ii) For electrical protective devices the re-
(ii) Two-way communication shall be es- quirements of paragraphs (c)(22) (i) through
tablished between personnel on the roof and (viii) of this appendix shall apply to Type T
personnel on the stalled working platform powered platforms. Requirements for the
before any emergency operation of the work- ‘‘circuit potential limitation’’ shall be in ac-
ing platform is undertaken by personnel on cordance with specifications contained in
the roof. part 2, section 26, of ANSI A120.1–1970.
(iii) The equipment shall permit two-way (7) Emergency communications. All the re-
voice communication between the working quirements of paragraph (c)(23) of this appen-
platform and dix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
(a) Designated personnel continuously
available while the powered platform is in [54 FR 31456, July 28, 1989, as amended at 61
use; and FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 7190, Feb. 14, 2007]
188
§ 1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating above. Aerial equipment may be made

and rotating work platforms. of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- plastic (FRP), or other material; may
tion—(1) Aerial device. Any vehicle— be powered or manually operated; and
mounted device, telescoping or articu- are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or
lating, or both, which is used to posi- not they are capable of rotating about
tion personnel. a substantially vertical axis.
(2) Aerial ladder. An aerial device con- (2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi-
sisting of a single- or multiple-section fied’’ for uses other than those in-
extensible ladder. tended by the manufacturer, provided
(3) Articulating boom platform. An aer- the modification has been certified in
ial device with two or more hinged writing by the manufacturer or by any
boom sections. other equivalent entity, such as a na-
(4) Extensible boom platform. An aerial tionally recognized testing laboratory,
device (except ladders) with a tele- to be in conformity with all applicable
scopic or extensible boom. Telescopic provisions of ANSI A92.2—1969 and this
derricks with personnel platform at- section, and to be at least as safe as
tachments shall be considered to be ex- the equipment was before modification.
tensible boom platforms when used (3) The requirements of this section
with a personnel platform. do not apply to firefighting equipment
(5) Insulated aerial device. An aerial or to the vehicles upon which aerial de-
device designed for work on energized vices are mounted, except with respect
lines and apparatus. to the requirement that a vehicle be a
(6) Mobile unit. A combination of an stable support for the aerial device.
aerial device, its vehicle, and related (4) For operations near overhead elec-
equipment. tric lines, see § 1910.333(c)(3).
(7) Platform. Any personnel-carrying (c) Specific requirements—(1) Ladder
device (basket or bucket) which is a trucks and tower trucks. Before the
component of an aerial device. truck is moved for highway travel, aer-
(8) Vehicle. Any carrier that is not ial ladders shall be secured in the lower
manually propelled. traveling position by the locking de-
(9) Vertical tower. An aerial device device above the truck cab, and the
signed to elevate a platform in a sub- manually operated device at the base
stantially vertical axis. of the ladder, or by other equally effec-
(b) General requirements. (1) Unless tive means (e.g., cradles which prevent
otherwise provided in this section, aer- rotation of the ladder in combination
ial devices (aerial lifts) acquired on or with positive acting linear actuators).
after July 1, 1975, shall be designed and (2) Extensible and articulating boom
constructed in conformance with the platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test-
applicable requirements of the Amer- ed each day prior to use to determine
ican National Standard for ‘‘Vehicle that such controls are in safe working
Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work condition.
Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2—1969, includ- (ii) Only trained persons shall oper-
ing appendix, which is incorporated by ate an aerial lift.
reference as specified in § 1910.6. Aerial (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole,
lifts acquired for use before July 1, 1975 structure, or equipment while working
which do not meet the requirements of from an aerial lift shall not be per-
ANSI A92.2—1969, may not be used after mitted.
July 1, 1976, unless they shall have been (iv) Employees shall always stand
modified so as to conform with the ap- firmly on the floor of the basket, and
plicable design and construction re- shall not sit or climb on the edge of the
quirements of ANSI A92.2—1969. Aerial basket or use planks, ladders, or other
devices include the following types of devices for a work position.
vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to (v) A body belt shall be worn and a
elevate personnel to jobsites above lanyard attached to the boom or bas-
ground: (i) Extensible boom platforms, ket when working from an aerial lift.
(ii) aerial ladders, (iii) articulating (vi) Boom and basket load limits
boom platforms, (iv) vertical towers, specified by the manufacturer shall not
and (v) a combination of any of the be exceeded.
189
(vii) The brakes shall be set and out- (5) Welding standards. All welding
riggers, when used, shall be positioned shall conform to the following Auto-
on pads or a solid surface. Wheel motive Welding Society (AWS) Stand-
chocks shall be installed before using ards, which are incorporated by ref-
an aerial lift on an incline. erence as specified in § 1910.6, as appli-
(viii) An aerial lift truck may not be cable:
moved when the boom is elevated in a (i) Standard Qualification Procedure,
working position with men in the bas- AWS B3.0—41.
ket, except for equipment which is spe- (ii) Recommended Practices for
cifically designed for this type of oper- Automotive Welding Design, AWS
ation in accordance with the provisions D8.4–61.
of paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this (iii) Standard Qualification of Weld-
section. ing Procedures and Welders for Piping
(ix) Articulating boom and extensible and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69.
boom platforms, primarily designed as (iv) Specifications for Welding High-
personnel carriers, shall have both way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69.
platform (upper) and lower controls.
Upper controls shall be in or beside the [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
platform within easy reach of the oper- FR 13439, Mar. 26, 1975; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6,
1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
ator. Lower controls shall provide for
overriding the upper controls. Controls § 1910.68 Manlifts.
shall be plainly marked as to their
function. Lower level controls shall not (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
be operated unless permission has been tion—(1) Handhold (Handgrip). A hand-
obtained from the employee in the lift, hold is a device attached to the belt
except in case of emergency. which can be grasped by the passenger
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while to provide a means of maintaining bal-
performing work from an aerial lift. ance.
(xi) The insulated portion of an aerial (2) Open type. One which has a hand-
lift shall not be altered in any manner grip surface fully exposed and capable
that might reduce its insulating value. of being encircled by the passenger’s
(xii) Before moving an aerial lift for fingers.
travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected (3) Closed type. A cup-shaped device,
to see that it is properly cradled and open at the top in the direction of trav-
outriggers are in stowed position, ex- el of the step for which it is to be used,
cept as provided in paragraph and closed at the bottom, into which
(c)(2)(viii) of this section. the passenger may place his fingers.
(3) Electrical tests. Electrical tests (4) Limit switch. A device, the purpose
shall be made in conformance with the of which is to cut off the power to the
requirements of ANSI A92.2—1969, Sec- motor and apply the brake to stop the
tion 5. However, equivalent DC voltage carrier in the event that a loaded step
tests may be used in lieu of the AC passes the terminal landing.
voltage test specified in A92.2—1969. DC (5) Manlift. A device consisting of a
voltage tests which are approved by power-driven endless belt moving in
the equipment manufacturer or equiva- one direction only, and provided with
lent entity shall be considered an steps or platforms and handholds at-
equivalent test for the purpose of this tached to it for the transportation of
paragraph (c)(3). personnel from floor to floor.
(4) Bursting safety factor. All critical (6) Rated speed. Rated speed is the
hydraulic and pneumatic components speed for which the device is designed
shall comply with the provisions of the and installed.
American National Standards Institute (7) Split-rail switch. An electric limit
standard, ANSI A92.2—1969, Section 4.9 switch operated mechanically by the
Bursting Safety Factor. Critical com- rollers on the manlift steps. It consists
ponents are those in which a failure of an additional hinged or ‘‘split’’ rail,
would result in a free fall or free rota- mounted on the regular guide rail, over
tion of the boom. All noncritical com- which the step rollers pass. It is
ponents shall have a bursting safety springloaded in the ‘‘split’’ position. If
factor of at least two to one. the step supports no load, the rollers
190
will ‘‘bump’’ over the switch; if a load- 34 inches nor more than 38 inches for a
ed step should pass over the section, 14-inch belt; and not less than 36 inches
the split rail will be forced straight, nor more than 40 inches for a 16-inch
tripping the switch and opening the belt and shall extend not less than 24
electrical circuit. inches, nor more than 28 inches from
(8) Step (platform). A step is a pas- the face of the belt.
senger carrying unit. (ii) Uniformity. All floor openings for
(9) Travel. The travel is the distance a given manlift shall be uniform in size
between the centers of the top and bot- and shall be approximately circular,
tom pulleys. and each shall be located vertically
(b) General requirements—(1) Applica- above the opening below it.
tion. This section applies to the con- (6) Landing—(i) Vertical clearance. The
struction, maintenance, inspection, clearanace between the floor or mount-
and operation of manlifts in relation to ing platform and the lower edge for the
accident hazards. Manlifts covered by conical guard above it required by sub-
this section consist of platforms or paragraph (7) of this paragraph shall
brackets and accompanying handholds not be less than 7 feet 6 inches. Where
mounted on, or attached to an endless this clearance cannot be obtained no
belt, operating vertically in one direc- access to the manlift shall be provided
tion only and being supported by, and and the manlift runway shall be en-
driven through pulleys, at the top and closed where it passes through such
bottom. These manlifts are intended floor.
for conveyance of persons only. It is (ii) Clear landing space. The landing
not intended that this section cover space adjacent to the floor openings
moving stairways, elevators with en- shall be free from obstruction and kept
closed platforms (‘‘Paternoster’’ ele- clear at all times. This landing space
vators), gravity lifts, nor conveyors shall be at least 2 feet in width from
used only for conveying material. This the edge of the floor opening used for
section applies to manlifts used to mounting and dismounting.
carry only personnel trained and au- (iii) Lighting and landing. Adequate
thorized by the employer in their use. lighting, not less than 5-foot candles,
(2) Purpose. The purpose of this sec- shall be provided at each floor landing
tion is to provide reasonable safety for at all times when the lift is in oper-
life and limb. ation.
(3) Design requirements. All new (iv) Landing surface. The landing sur-
manlift installations and equipment faces at the entrances and exits to the
installed after the effective date of manlift shall be constructed and main-
these regulations shall meet the design tained as to provide safe footing at all
requirements of the ‘‘American Na- times.
tional Safety Standard for Manlifts (v) Emergency landings. Where there is
ANSI A90.1–1969’’, which is incor- a travel of 50 feet or more between
porated by reference as specified in floor landings, one or more emergency
§ 1910.6, and the requirements of this landings shall be provided so that there
section. will be a landing (either floor or emer-
(4) Reference to other codes and sub- gency) for every 25 feet or less of
parts. The following codes and subparts manlift travel.
of this part are applicable to this sec- (a) Emergency landings shall be ac-
tion: Safety Code for Mechanical cessible from both the ‘‘up’’ and
Power Transmission Apparatus, ANSI ‘‘down’’ rungs of the manlift and shall
B15.1–1953 (R 1958); Safety Code for give access to the ladder required in
Fixed Ladders, ANSI A14.3–1956; and subparagraph (12) of this paragraph.
subparts D, O, and S. The preceding (b) Emergency landings shall be com-
ANSI standards are incorporated by pletely enclosed with a standard rail-
reference as specified in § 1910.6. ing and toeboard.
(5) Floor openings—(i) Allowable size. (c) Platforms constructed to give ac-
Floor openings for both the ‘‘up’’ and cess to bucket elevators or other equip-
‘‘down’’ runs shall be not less than 28 ment for the purpose of inspection, lu-
inches nor more than 36 inches in brication, and repair may also serve as
width for a 12-inch belt; not less than emergency landings under this rule. All
191
such platforms will then be considered shall be guarded on sides not used for
part of the emergency landing and entrance or exit by a wall, a railing
shall be provided with standard rail- and toeboard or by panels of wire mesh
ings and toeboards. of suitable strength.
(7) Guards on underside of floor open- (ii) Height and location. Such rails or
ings—(i) Fixed type. On the ascending guards shall be at least 42 inches in
side of the manlift floor openings shall height on the up-running side and 66
be provided with a bevel guard or cone inches on the down-running side.
meeting the following requirements: (10) Bottom arrangement—(i) Bottom
(a) The cone shall make an angle of landing. At the bottom landing the
not less than 45° with the horizontal. clear area shall be not smaller than the
An angle of 60° or greater shall be used area enclosed by the guardrails on the
where ceiling heights permit. floors above, and any wall in front of
(b) The lower edge of this guard shall the down-running side of the belt shall
extend at least 42 inches outward from be not less than 48 inches from the face
any handhold on the belt. It shall not of the belt. This space shall not be en-
extend beyond the upper surface of the croached upon by stairs or ladders.
floor above. (ii) Location of lower pulley. The lower
(c) The cone shall be made of not less (boot) pulley shall be installed so that
than No. 18 U.S. gauge sheet steel or it is supported by the lowest landing
material of equivalent strength or served. The sides of the pulley support
stiffness. The lower edge shall be rolled shall be guarded to prevent contact
to a minimum diameter of one-half with the pulley or the steps.
inch and the interior shall be smooth (iii) Mounting platform. A mounting
with no rivets, bolts or screws pro- platform shall be provided in front or
truding. to one side of the uprun at the lowest
(ii) Floating type. In lieu of the fixed landing, unless the floor level is such
guards specified in subdivision (i) of that the following requirement can be
this subparagraph a floating type safe- met: The floor or platform shall be at
ty cone may be used, such floating or above the point at which the upper
cones to be mounted on hinges at least surface of the ascending step completes
6 inches below the underside of the its turn and assumes a horizontal posi-
floor and so constructed as to actuate tion.
a limit switch should a force of 2 (iv) Guardrails. To guard against per-
pounds be applied on the edge of the sons walking under a descending step,
cone closest to the hinge. The depth of the area on the downside of the manlift
this floating cone need not exceed 12 shall be guarded in accordance with
inches. subparagraph (8) of this paragraph. To
(8) Protection of entrances and exits— guard against a person getting between
(i) Guard rail requirement. The en- the mounting platform and an ascend-
trances and exits at all floor landings ing step, the area between the belt and
affording access to the manlift shall be the platform shall be protected by a
guarded by a maze (staggered railing) guardrail.
or a handrail equipped with self-closing (11) Top arrangements—(i) Clearance
gates. from floor. A top clearance shall be pro-
(ii) Construction. The rails shall be vided of at least 11 feet above the top
standard guardrails with toeboards terminal landing. This clearance shall
meeting the provisions of § 1910.23. be maintained from a plane through
(iii) Gates. Gates, if used, shall open each face of the belt to a vertical cylin-
outward and shall be self-closing. Cor- drical plane having a diameter 2 feet
ners of gates shall be rounded. greater than the diameter of the floor
(iv) Maze. Maze or staggered openings opening, extending upward from the
shall offer no direct passage between top floor to the ceiling on the up-run-
enclosure and outer floor space. ning side of the belt. No encroachment
(v) Except where building layout pre- of structural or machine supporting
vents, entrances at all landings shall members within this space will be per-
be in the same relative position. mitted.
(9) Guards for openings—(i) Construc- (ii) Pulley clearance. (a) There shall be
tion. The floor opening at each landing a clearance of at least 5 feet between
192
the center of the head pulley shaft and the descending side is loaded with 250
any ceiling obstruction. lb on each step.
(b) The center of the head pulley (ii) Belt. (a) The belts shall be of
shaft shall be not less than 6 feet above hard-woven canvas, rubber-coated can-
the top terminal landing. vas, leather, or other material meeting
(iii) Emergency grab rail. An emer- the strength requirements of paragraph
gency grab bar or rail and platform (b)(3) of this section and having a coef-
shall be provided at the head pulley ficient of friction such that when used
when the distance to the head pulley is in conjunction with an adequate ten-
over 6 feet above the top landing, oth- sion device it will meet the brake test
erwise only a grab bar or rail is to be specified in subdivision (i) of this sub-
provided to permit the rider to swing paragraph.
free should the emergency stops be- (b) The width of the belt shall be not
come inoperative. less than 12 inches for a travel not ex-
(12) Emergency exit ladder. A fixed ceeding 100 feet, not less than 14 inches
metal ladder accessible from both the for a travel greater than 100 feet but
‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run of the manlift not exceeding 150 feet and 16 inches for
shall be provided for the entire travel a travel exceeding 150 feet.
of the manlift. Such ladder shall be in (c) A belt that has become torn while
accordance with the existing ANSI in use on a manlift shall not be spliced
A14.3–1956 Safety Code for Fixed Lad- and put back in service.
ders and § 1910.27. (2) Speed—(i) Maximum speed. No
(13) Superstructure bracing. Manlift manlift designed for a speed in excess
rails shall be secured in such a manner of 80 feet per minute shall be installed.
as to avoid spreading, vibration, and
(ii) [Reserved]
misalinement.
(14) Illumination—(i) General. Both (3) Platforms or steps—(i) Minimum
runs of the manlift shall be illumi- depth. Steps or platforms shall be not
nated at all times when the lift is in less than 12 inches nor more than 14
operation. An intensity of not less than inches deep, measured from the belt to
1-foot candle shall be maintained at all the edge of the step or platform.
points. (However, see subparagraph (ii) Width. The width of the step or
(6)(iii) of this paragraph for illumina- platform shall be not less than the
tion requirements at landings.) width of the belt to which it is at-
(ii) Control of illumination. Lighting of tached.
manlift runways shall be by means of (iii) Distance between steps. The dis-
circuits permanently tied in to the tance between steps shall be equally
building circuits (no switches), or shall spaced and not less than 16 feet meas-
be controlled by switches at each land- ured from the upper surface of one step
ing. Where separate switches are pro- to the upper surface of the next step
vided at each landing, any switch shall above it.
turn on all lights necessary to illu- (iv) Angle of step. The surface of the
minate the entire runway. step shall make approximately a right
(15) Weather protection. The entire angle with the ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run of
manlift and its driving mechanism the belt, and shall travel in the approx-
shall be protected from the weather at imate horizontal position with the
all times. ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run of the belt.
(c) Mechanical requirements—(1) Ma- (v) Surfaces. The upper or working
chines, general—(i) Brakes. Brakes pro- surfaces of the step shall be of a mate-
vided for stopping and holding a rial having inherent nonslip character-
manlift shall be inherently self-engag- istics (coefficient of friction not less
ing, by requiring power or force from than 0.5) or shall be covered completely
an external source to cause disengage- by a nonslip tread securely fastened to
ment. The brake shall be electrically it.
released, and shall be applied to the (vi) Strength of step supports. When
motor shaft for direct-connected units subjected to a load of 400 pounds ap-
or to the input shaft for belt-driven plied at the approximate center of the
units. The brake shall be capable of step, step frames, or supports and their
stopping and holding the manlift when guides shall be of adequate strength to:
193
(a) Prevent the disengagement of any (b) An electronic device.
step roller. (c) A switch actuated by a lever, rod,
(b) Prevent any appreciable or plate, the latter to be placed on the
misalinement. ‘‘up’’ side of the head pulley so as to
(c) Prevent any visible deformation just clear a passing step.
of the steps or its support. (ii) Manual reset location. After the
(vii) Prohibition of steps without manlift has been stopped by a stop de-
handholds. No steps shall be provided vice it shall be necessary to reset the
unless there is a corresponding hand- automatic stop manually. The device
hold above or below it meeting the re- shall be so located that a person reset-
quirements of paragraph (c)(4) of this ting it shall have a clear view of both
section. If a step is removed for repairs the ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ runs of the
or permanently, the handholds imme- manlift. It shall not be possible to
diately above and below it shall be re- reset the device from any step or plat-
moved before the lift is again placed in form.
service. (iii) Cut-off point. The initial limit
(4) Handholds—(i) Location. stop device shall function so that the
Handholds attached to the belt shall be manlift will be stopped before the load-
provided and installed so that they are ed step has reached a point 24 inches
not less than 4 feet nor more than 4 above the top terminal landing.
feet 8 inches above the step tread. (iv) Electrical requirements. (a) Where
These shall be so located as to be avail- such switches open the main motor cir-
able on the both ‘‘up’’ and ‘‘down’’ run cuit directly they shall be of the
of the belt. multipole type.
(ii) Size. The grab surface of the (b) Where electronic devices are used
handhold shall be not less than 41⁄2 they shall be so designed and installed
inches in width, not less than 3 inches that failure will result in shutting off
in depth, and shall provide 2 inches of the power to the driving motor.
clearance from the belt. Fastenings for
(c) Where flammable vapors or com-
handholds shall be located not less
bustible dusts may be present, elec-
than 1 inch from the edge of the belt.
trical installations shall be in accord-
(iii) Strength. The handhold shall be
ance with the requirements of subpart
capable of withstanding, without dam-
S of this part for such locations.
age, a load of 300 pounds applied par-
allel to the run of the belt. (d) Unless of the oil-immersed type
(iv) Prohibition of handhold without controller contacts carrying the main
steps. No handhold shall be provided motor current shall be copper to car-
without a corresponding step. If a bon or equal, except where the circuit
handhold is removed permanently or is broken at two or more points simul-
temporarily, the corresponding step taneously.
and handhold for the opposite direction (6) Emergency stop—(i) General. An
of travel shall also be removed before emergency stop means shall be pro-
the lift is again placed in service. vided.
(v) Type. All handholds shall be of the (ii) Location. This stop means shall be
closed type. within easy reach of the ascending and
(5) Up limit stops—(i) Requirements. descending runs of the belt.
Two separate automatic stop devices (iii) Operation. This stop means shall
shall be provided to cut off the power be so connected with the control lever
and apply the brake when a loaded step or operating mechanism that it will
passes the upper terminal landing. One cut off the power and apply the brake
of these shall consist of a split-rail when pulled in the direction of travel.
switch mechanically operated by the (iv) Rope. If rope is used, it shall be
step roller and located not more than 6 not less than three-eights inch in di-
inches above the top terminal landing. ameter. Wire rope, unless marlin-cov-
The second automatic stop device may ered, shall not be used.
consist of any of the following: (7) Instruction and warning signs—(i)
(a) Any split-rail switch placed 6 Instruction signs at landings or belts.
inches above and on the side opposite Signs of conspicuous and easily read
the first limit switch. style giving instructions for the use of
194
the manlift shall be posted at each Bottom (boot) Pulley and Clearance.
landing or stenciled on the belt. Pulley Supports.
(a) [Reserved] Motor.
(b) The instructions shall read ap- Driving Mechanism.
proximately as follows: Brake.
Electrical Switches.
Face the Belt. Vibration and Misalignment.
Use the Handholds. ‘‘Skip’’ on up or down run when mounting
To Stop—Pull Rope. step (indicating worn gears).
(ii) Top floor warning sign and light. (3) Inspection record. A certification
(a) At the top floor an illuminated sign record shall be kept of each inspection
shall be displayed bearing the fol- which includes the date of the inspec-
lowing wording: tion, the signature of the person who
‘‘TOP FLOOR—GET OFF’’ performed the inspection and the serial
number, or other identifier, of the
Signs shall be in block letters not less manlift which was inspected. This
than 2 inches in height. This sign shall record of inspection shall be made
be located within easy view of an as- available to the Assistant Secretary of
cending passenger and not more than 2 Labor or a duly authorized representa-
feet above the top terminal landing. tive.
(b) In addition to the sign required by
paragraph (c)(7)(ii)(a) of this section, a [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
red warning light of not less than 40- FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29,
1986; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 32014,
watt rating shall be provided imme- Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR
diately below the upper landing ter- 71068, Dec. 14, 2007]
minal and so located as to shine in the
passenger’s face.
(iii) Visitor warning. A conspicuous Subpart G—Occupational Health
sign having the following legend—AU- and Environmental Control
THORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY—shall
be displayed at each landing. AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa-
(d) Operating rules—(1) Proper use of tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
manlifts. No freight, packaged goods, U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
pipe, lumber, or construction materials Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
of any kind shall be handled on any
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67
manlift. FR 50017), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31159) as applica-
(2) [Reserved] ble; and 29 CFR part 1911.
(e) Periodic inspection—(1) Frequency.
All manlifts shall be inspected by a EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35566, June
13, 2013, the authority citation; was revised,
competent designated person at inter- effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the convenience
vals of not more than 30 days. Limit of the user, the revised text is set forth as
switches shall be checked weekly. follows:
Manlifts found to be unsafe shall not be AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec-
operated until properly repaired. retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754),
(2) Items covered. This periodic inspec- 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
tion shall cover but is not limited to FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017),
the following items: 5–2002 (67 FR 50017), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–
2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as
Steps. applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Step Fastenings.
Rails. § 1910.94 Ventilation.
Rail Supports and Fastenings.
Rollers and Slides. (a) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions
Belt and Belt Tension. applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra-
Handholds and Fastenings. sive. A solid substance used in an abra-
Floor Landings. sive blasting operation.
Guardrails. (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res-
Lubrication.
Limit Switches.
pirator constructed so that it covers
Warning Signs and Lights. the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders
Illumination. to protect the wearer from rebounding
Drive Pulley. abrasive.
195
(iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete making an evaluation of the potential
enclosure which rotates on an axis, or health hazards.
which has an internal moving tread to (ii) The concentration of respirable
tumble the parts, in order to expose dust or fume in the breathing zone of
various surfaces of the parts to the ac- the abrasive-blasting operator or any
tion of an automatic blast spray. other worker shall be kept below the
(iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete levels specified in § 1910.1000.
enclosure in which blasting operations (iii) Organic abrasives which are
are performed and where the operator combustible shall be used only in auto-
works inside of the room to operate the matic systems. Where flammable or ex-
blasting nozzle and direct the flow of plosive dust mixtures may be present,
the abrasive material. the construction of the equipment, in-
(v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure cluding the exhaust system and all
where the operator stands outside and electric wiring, shall conform to the
operates the blasting nozzle through an requirements of American National
opening or openings in the enclosure. Standard Installation of Blower and
(vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and
it will not cause harm or discomfort to Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1–
an individual if it is inhaled for ex- 1961 (NFPA 91–1961), which is incor-
tended periods of time. porated by reference as specified in
(vii) Dust collector. A device or com- § 1910.6, and subpart S of this part. The
bination of devices for separating dust blast nozzle shall be bonded and
from the air handled by an exhaust grounded to prevent the build up of
ventilation system. static charges. Where flammable or ex-
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A plosive dust mixtures may be present,
system for removing contaminated air the abrasive blasting enclosure, the
from a space, comprising two or more ducts, and the dust collector shall be
of the following elements (a) enclosure constructed with loose panels or explo-
or hood, (b) duct work, (c) dust col- sion venting areas, located on sides
lecting equipment, (d) exhauster, and away from any occupied area, to pro-
(e) discharge stack. vide for pressure relief in case of explo-
(ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air sion, following the principles set forth
purifying respirator, commonly rein the National Fire Protection Asso-
ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator, ciation Explosion Venting Guide,
which removes most of the dust or NFPA 68–1954, which is incorporated by
fume from the air passing through the reference as specified in § 1910.6.
device. (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast-
(x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust
sizes capable of passing through the ventilated in such a way that a contin-
upper respiratory system to reach the uous inward flow of air will be main-
lower lung passages. tained at all openings in the enclosure
(xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en- during the blasting operation.
closure where the pieces to be cleaned (a) All air inlets and access openings
are positioned on a rotating table and shall be baffled or so arranged that by
are passed automatically through a se- the combination of inward air flow and
ries of blast sprays. baffling the escape of abrasive or dust
(xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible particules into an adjacent work area
application of an abrasive to a surface will be minimized and visible spurts of
by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres- dust will not be observed.
sure, or centrifugal force. (b) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi-
(2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. cient to provide prompt clearance of
(i) Abrasives and the surface coatings the dust-laden air within the enclosure
on the materials blasted are shattered after the cessation of blasting.
and pulverized during blasting oper- (c) Before the enclosure is opened,
ations and the dust formed will contain the blast shall be turned off and the ex-
particles of respirable size. The com- haust system shall be run for a suffi-
position and toxicity of the dust from cient period of time to remove the
these sources shall be considered in dusty air within the enclosure.
196
(d) Safety glass protected by screen- (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 to pro-
ing shall be used in observation win- tect employees from dusts produced
dows, where hard deep-cutting abra- during abrasive-blasting operations.
sives are used. (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators
(e) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting
shall be installed in multiple sets at all operators:
small access openings where dust (a) When working inside of blast-
might escape, and shall be inspected cleaning rooms, or
regularly and replaced when needed. (b) When using silica sand in manual
(1) Doors shall be flanged and tight blasting operations where the nozzle
when closed. and blast are not physically separated
(2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms from the operator in an exhaust venti-
shall be operable from both inside and lated enclosure, or
outside, except that where there is a (c) Where concentrations of toxic
small operator access door, the large dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting
work access door may be closed or may exceed the limits set in § 1910.1000
opened from the outside only. and the nozzle and blast are not phys-
(ii) [Reserved] ically separated from the operator in
(4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.
construction, installation, inspection, (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter
and maintenance of exhaust systems respirators, commonly referred to as
shall conform to the principles and re- dust-filter respirators, may be used for
quirements set forth in American Na- short, intermittent, or occasional dust
tional Standard Fundamentals Gov- exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
erning the Design and Operation of dust collectors, or unloading shipments
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and of sand at a receiving point when it is
ANSI Z33.1–1961, which is incorporated not feasible to control the dust by en-
by reference as specified in § 1910.6. closure, exhaust ventilation, or other
(a) When dust leaks are noted, re- means. The respirators used must be
pairs shall be made as soon as possible. approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
(b) The static pressure drop at the ex- 84 for protection against the specific
haust ducts leading from the equip- type of dust encountered.
ment shall be checked when the instal- (a) Dust-filter respirators may be
lation is completed and periodically used to protect the operator of outside
thereafter to assure continued satisfac- abrasive-blasting operations where
tory operation. Whenever an appre- nonsilica abrasives are used on mate-
ciable change in the pressure drop indi- rials having low toxicities.
cates a partial blockage, the system (b) Dust-filter respirators shall not be
shall be cleaned and returned to nor- used for continuous protection where
mal operating condition. silica sand is used as the blasting abra-
(ii) In installations where the abrasive, or toxic materials are blasted.
sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven- (iv) For employees who use res-
tilation system for the blasting enclo- pirators required by this section, the
sure shall not be relied upon for the re- employer must implement a res-
moval of fines from the spent abrasive piratory protection program in accord-
instead of an abrasive separator. An ance with 29 CFR 1910.134.
abrasive separator shall be provided for (v) Operators shall be equipped with
the purpose. heavy canvas or leather gloves and
(iii) The air exhausted from blast- aprons or equivalent protection to pro-
cleaning equipment shall be discharged tect them from the impact of abra-
through dust collecting equipment. sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to
Dust collectors shall be set up so that protect against foot injury where
the accumulated dust can be emptied heavy pieces of work are handled.
and removed without contaminating (a) Protective footwear must comply
other working areas. with the requirements specified by 29
(5) Personal protective equipment. (i) CFR 1910.136(b)(1).
Employers must use only respirators (b) Equipment for protection of the
approved by the National Institute for eyes and face shall be supplied to the
Occupational Safety and Health operator when the respirator design
197
does not provide such protection and to (iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon
any other personnel working in the vi- which the part to be ground or polished
cinity of abrasive blasting operations. is placed.
This equipment shall conform to the (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro-
requirements of § 1910.133. tatable discs faced with abrasive mate-
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air rials, artificial or natural, and used for
for abrasive-blasting respirators must grinding or polishing on the side of the
be free of harmful quantities of dusts, assembled disc.
mists, or noxious gases, and must meet (vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres-
the requirements for supplied-air qual- sure caused by air flowing into a duct
ity and use specified in 29 CFR or hood. It is usually expressed in
1910.134(i). inches of water gauge.
(7) Operational procedures and general (vii) Exhaust system. A system con-
safety. Dust shall not be permitted to sisting of branch pipes connected to
accumulate on the floor or on ledges hoods or enclosures, one or more head-
outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo- er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep-
sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up arating solid contaminants from the
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be air flowing in the system, and a dis-
kept clear of steel shot or similar abra- charge stack to outside.
sive which may create a slipping haz-
(viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv-
ard.
en rotatable grinding or abrasive
(8) Scope. This paragraph (a) applies
wheels, except disc wheels as defined in
to all operations where an abrasive is
this standard, consisting of abrasive
forcibly applied to a surface by pneu-
particles held together by artificial or
matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen-
natural bonds and used for peripheral
trifugal force. It does not apply to
grinding.
steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or
(ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe
hydraulic cleaning methods where
into which one or more branch pipes
work is done without the aid of abra-
enter and which connects such branch
sives.
pipes to the remainder of the exhaust
(b) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op-
system.
erations—(1) Definitions applicable to this
paragraph—(i) Abrasive cutting-off (x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial
wheels. Organic-bonded wheels, the or complete enclosure around the
thickness of which is not more than wheel or disc through which air enters
one forty-eighth of their diameter for an exhaust system during operation.
those up to, and including, 20 inches in (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc
diameter, and not more than one-six- grinder. A grinding machine carrying
tieth of their diameter for those larger two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial,
than 20 inches in diameter, used for a horizontal spindles upon the inside
multitude of operations variously ends of which are mounted abrasive
known as cutting, cutting off, disc wheels used for grinding two sur-
grooving, slotting, coping, and joint- faces simultaneously.
ing, and the like. The wheels may be (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc
‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded grinder. A grinding machine carrying
abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel an abrasive disc wheel upon one or
centered’’ consisting of a steel disc both ends of a power-driven, rotatable
with a rim of organic-bonded material single horizontal spindle.
moulded around the periphery, or of (xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All
the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of power-driven rotatable wheels com-
a steel disc with organic-bonded abra- posed all or in part of textile fabrics,
sive teeth or inserts mechanically se- wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be
cured around the periphery. coated with abrasives on the periphery
(ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible, of the wheel for purposes of polishing,
coated bands used for grinding, buffing, and light grinding.
polishing, or buffing purposes. (xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv-
(iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex- en rotatable grinding, polishing, or
haust system piping that is connected buffing wheel mounted in such manner
directly to the hood or enclosure. that it may be manually manipulated.
198
(xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power- TABLE G–4—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE CUTTING-
driven rotatable wheels made from OFF WHEELS
wire or bristles, and used for scratch
Minimum
cleaning and brushing purposes. Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter (inches) width volume
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- (inches)
(feet3/min.)
driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or
buffing wheel mounted in such a man- To 9 ............................................... 11⁄2 220
Over 9 to 16 .................................. 2 390
ner that the wheel with its supporting Over 16 to 19 ................................ 3 500
framework can be manipulated over Over 19 to 24 ................................ 4 610
stationary objects. Over 24 to 30 ................................ 5 880
Over 30 to 36 ................................ 6 1,200
(xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki-
netic pressure in the direction of flow
For any wheel wider than wheel diame-
necessary to cause a fluid at rest to
ters shown in Table G–4, increase the
flow at a given velocity. It is usually exhaust volume by the ratio of the new
expressed in inches of water gauge. width to the width shown.
(xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A
Example: If wheel width=41⁄2 inches, then
grinding machine having a vertical, ro-
tatable power-driven spindle carrying a 4.5÷4×610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
horizontal abrasive disc wheel. (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all
(2) Application. Wherever dry grind- buffing and polishing wheels mounted
ing, dry polishing or buffing is per- on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or
formed, and employee exposure, with- special-purpose machines shall have
out regard to the use of respirators, ex- not less than the minimum exhaust
ceeds the permissible exposure limits volume shown in Table G–5.
prescribed in § 1910.1000 or other sec-
tions of this part, a local exhaust ven- TABLE G–5—BUFFING AND POLISHING WHEELS
tilation system shall be provided and Minimum
Wheel
used to maintain employee exposures Wheel diameter (inches) width
exhaust
volume
within the prescribed limits. (inches)
(feet3/min.)
(3) Hood and branch pipe requirements.
To 9 ............................................... 2 300
(i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems Over 9 to 16 .................................. 3 500
shall be used, and such hoods shall be Over 16 to 19 ................................ 4 610
designed, located, and placed so that Over 19 to 24 ................................ 5 740
Over 24 to 30 ................................ 6 1,040
the dust or dirt particles shall fall or Over 30 to 36 ................................ 6 1,200
be projected into the hoods in the di-
rection of the air flow. No wheels, (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori-
discs, straps, or belts shall be operated zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall
in such manner and in such direction be hooded to collect the dust or dirt
as to cause the dust and dirt particles generated by the grinding operation
to be thrown into the operator’s and the hoods shall be connected to
breathing zone. branch pipes having exhaust volumes
(ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, as shown in Table G–6.
pedestals, benches, and special-purpose
grinding machines and abrasive cut- TABLE G–6—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE DISC
ting-off wheels shall have not less than GRINDER
the minimum exhaust volumes shown Exhaust
in Table G–4 with a recommended min- Disc diameter (inches) volume
(ft.3/min.)
imum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per
minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per Up to 12 ............................................................... 220
Over 12 to 19 ...................................................... 390
minute in the main. The entry losses Over 19 to 30 ...................................................... 610
from all hoods except the vertical-spin- Over 30 to 36 ...................................................... 880
dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65
velocity pressure for a straight takeoff (v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori-
and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered zontal double-spindle disc grinders
takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical- shall have a hood enclosing the grind-
spindle disc grinder hood is shown in ing chamber and the hood shall be con-
figure G–1 (following § 1910.94(b)). nected to one or more branch pipes
199
having exhaust volumes as shown in be exhausted in the same manner as
Table G–7. provided for cradles. (See fig. G–3)
(ix) Where the work is outside the
TABLE G–7—HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE hood, air volumes must be increased as
DISC GRINDER shown in American Standard Fun-
Exhaust damentals Governing the Design and
Disc diameter (inches) volume Operation of Local Exhaust Systems,
(ft.3/min.)
Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods).
Up to 19 ............................................................... 610 (4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys-
Over 19 to 25 ...................................................... 880
Over 25 to 30 ...................................................... 1,200 tems for grinding, polishing, and buff-
Over 30 to 53 ...................................................... 1,770 ing operations should be designed in
Over 53 to 72 ...................................................... 6,280 accordance with American Standard
Fundamentals Governing the Design
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys-
vertical single-spindle disc grinders tems, Z9.2–1960.
shall be encircled with hoods to remove (ii) Exhaust systems for grinding,
the dust generated in the operation.
polishing, and buffing operations shall
The hoods shall be connected to one or
be tested in the manner described in
more branch pipes having exhaust vol-
American Standard Fundamentals
umes as shown in Table G–8.
Governing the Design and Operation of
TABLE G–8—VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC GRINDER Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960.
(iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro-
One-half or more Disc not cov- vided with suitable dust collectors.
of disc covered ered
(5) Hood and enclosure design. (i)(a) It
Disc diameter (inches) Ex- Ex-
Num- haust Num- haust is the dual function of grinding and ab-
ber 1 foot3/ ber 1 foot3/ rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro-
min.) min.
tect the operator from the hazards of
Up to 20 ..................... 1 500 2 780 bursting wheels, as well as to provide a
Over 20 to 30 ............ 2 780 2 1,480 means for the removal of dust and dirt
Over 30 to 53 ............ 2 1,770 4 3,530
Over 53 to 72 ............ 2 3,140 5 6,010 generated. All hoods shall be not less
1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or
in structural strength than specified in
equal distribution provided by other means. Tables O–1 and O–9 of § 1910.215.
(b) Due to the variety of work and
(vii) Grinding and polishing belts
types of grinding machines employed,
shall be provided with hoods to remove
it is necessary to develop hoods adapt-
dust and dirt generated in the oper-
able to the particular machine in ques-
ations and the hoods shall be connected
tion, and such hoods shall be located as
to branch pipes having exhaust vol-
close as possible to the operation.
umes as shown in Table G–9.
(ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands,
TABLE G–9—GRINDING AND POLISHING BELTS pedestals, and bench grinders shall be
designed in accordance with figure G–2.
Exhaust The adjustable tongue shown in the fig-
Belts width (inches) volume
(ft.3/min.) ure shall be kept in working order and
shall be adjusted within one-fourth
Up to 3 ................................................................. 220
Over 3 to 5 .......................................................... 300 inch of the wheel periphery at all
Over 5 to 7 .......................................................... 390 times.
Over 7 to 9 .......................................................... 500
Over 9 to 11 ........................................................ 610
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be
Over 11 to 13 ...................................................... 740 provided with exhaust booths as indi-
cated in figure G–3.
(viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind- (iv) Portable grinding operations,
ers. Where cradles are used for han- whenever the nature of the work per-
dling the parts to be ground, polished, mits, shall be conducted within a par-
or buffed, requiring large partial enclo- tial enclosure. The opening in the en-
sures to house the complete operation, closure shall be no larger than is actu-
a minimum average air velocity of 150 ally required in the operation and an
feet per minute shall be maintained average face air velocity of not less
over the entire opening of the enclo- than 200 feet per minute shall be main-
sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also tained.
200
(v) Hoods for polishing and buffing side of the disc shall be no larger than
and scratch-brush wheels shall be con- is required for the grinding operation,
structed to conform as closely to figure but must never be less than twice the
G–4 as the nature of the work will per- area of the branch outlet.
mit. (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc
(vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op- grinders shall have a hood encircling
erations shall be performed within a the wheels and grinding chamber simi-
partial enclosure similar to figure G–5. lar to that illustrated in figure G–7.
The operator shall be positioned out- The openings for passing the work into
side the working face of the opening of the grinding chamber should be kept as
the enclosure. The face opening of the small as possible, but must never be
enclosure should not be any greater in less than twice the area of the branch
area than that actually required for outlets.
the performance of the operation and (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders
the average air velocity into the work- shall be encircled with a hood so con-
ing face of the enclosure shall not be structed that the heavy dust is drawn
less than 150 feet per minute. off a surface of the disc and the lighter
(vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin- dust exhausted through a continuous
dle disc grinders shall be constructed slot at the top of the hood as shown in
to conform as closely as possible to the figure G–1.
hood shown in figure G–6. It is essen- (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods
tial that there be a space between the shall be constructed as close to the op-
back of the wheel and the hood, and a eration as possible. The hood should
space around the periphery of the extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch
wheel of at least 1 inch in order to per- wide openings should be provided on ei-
mit the suction to act around the ther side. Figure G–8 shows a typical
wheel periphery. The opening on the hood for a belt operation.
201
Dia D. inches Exhaust E Volume

Exhausted
No at 4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. Pipes Dia. min ft3/min
........................................................ 20 1 41⁄4 500 When one-half or more of the disc can be hood-
ed, use exhaust ducts as shown at the left.
Over 20 ......................................... 30 2 4 780
Over 30 ......................................... 72 2 6 1,770
Over 53 ......................................... 72 2 8 3,140
........................................................ 20 2 4 780 When no hood can be used over disc, use ex-
haust ducts as shown at left.
Over 20 ......................................... 20 2 4 780
Over 30 ......................................... 30 2 51⁄2 1,480
Over 53 ......................................... 53 4 6 3,530
72 5 7 6,010
Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/min—1⁄2-inch slot width.
202
EC27OC91.015</GPH>
Wheel dimension, inches

Exhaust Volume of
air at
Diameter outlet,
Width, Max inches E 4,500 ft/
Min=d Max=D min
9 11⁄2 3 220
Over 9 ........................................................................................................... 16 2 4 390
Over 16 ......................................................................................................... 19 3 41⁄2 500
Over 19 ......................................................................................................... 24 4 5 610
Over 24 ......................................................................................................... 30 5 6 880
Over 30 ......................................................................................................... 36 6 7 1,200
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
203
EC27OC91.016</GPH>
204
EC27OC91.017</GPH>
Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood
Wheel dimension, inches Volume of

Exhaust air at
Diameter outlet, 4,500 ft/
Width, Max inches E min
Min=d Max=D
9 2 31⁄2 300
Over 9 ........................................................................................................... 16 3 4 500
Over 16 ......................................................................................................... 19 4 5 610
Over 19 ......................................................................................................... 24 5 5 ⁄2
1 740
Over 24 ......................................................................................................... 30 6 6 ⁄2
1 1.040
Over 30 ......................................................................................................... 36 6 7 1.200
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
205
EC27OC91.018</GPH>
206
EC27OC91.019</GPH>
Dia D, inches Volume ex-

Exhaust E, hausted at
dia. inches 4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. ft3/min
12 3 220
Over 12 .............................................................................................................................. 19 4 390
Over 19 .............................................................................................................................. 30 5 610
Over 30 .............................................................................................................................. 36 6 880
NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as de-
scribed in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
207
EC27OC91.020</GPH>
Disc dia. inches Exhaust E Volume

exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/
min
19 1 5 610
Over 19 .................................. 25 1 6 880 When width ‘‘W’’ permits, exhaust ducts
should be as near heaviest grinding as
possible.
Over 25 .................................. 30 1 7 1,200
Over 30 .................................. 53 2 6 1,770
Over 53 .................................. 72 4 8 6,280
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
208
EC27OC91.021</GPH>
Exhaust (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-

Belt width W. Inches volume. imum maintained velocity is the veloc-
ft.1/min
ity of air movement which must be
Up to 3 ................................................................. 220 maintained in order to meet minimum
3 to 5 ................................................................... 300 specified requirements for health and
5 to 7 ................................................................... 390
7 to 9 ................................................................... 500
safety.
9 to 11 ................................................................. 610 (2) Location and application. Spray
11 to 13 ............................................................... 740 booths or spray rooms are to be used to
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min enclose or confine all operations.
main. Spray-finishing operations shall be lo-
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 cated as provided in sections 201
velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
through 206 of the Standard for Spray
(6) Scope. This paragraph (b), pre- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.
sures and systems in removing dust, (3) Design and construction of spray
dirt, fumes, and gases generated booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de-
through the grinding, polishing, or signed and constructed in accordance
buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- with § 1910.107(b)(1) through (b)(4) and
als. (b)(6) through (b)(10). For a more de-
(c) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- tailed discussion of fundamentals re-
nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) lating to this subject, see ANSI Z9.2–
Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- 1960, which is incorporated by reference
ishing operations are employment of as specified in § 1910.6.
methods wherein organic or inorganic (a) Lights, motors, electrical equip-
materials are utilized in dispersed form ment, and other sources of ignition
for deposit on surfaces to be coated, shall conform to the requirements of
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of § 1910.107(b)(10) and (c).
deposit may involve either automatic, (b) In no case shall combustible ma-
manual, or electrostatic deposition but terial be used in the construction of a
do not include metal spraying or met- spray booth and supply or exhaust duct
allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller connected to it.
coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or (ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not
spray washing and degreasing as con- be less than 61⁄2 feet high and shall be
ducted in self-contained washing and maintained clear of obstruction from
degreasing machines or systems. any work location in the booth to a
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- booth exit or open booth front. In
fined and described in § 1910.107(a). booths where the open front is the only
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a exit, such exits shall be not less than 3
room in which spray-finishing oper- feet wide. In booths having multiple
ations not conducted in a spray booth exits, such exits shall not be less than
are performed separately from other 2 feet wide, provided that the max-
areas. imum distance from the work location
209
EC27OC91.022</GPH>
to the exit is 25 feet or less. Where (4) Design and construction of spray
booth exits are provided with doors, rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including
such doors shall open outward from the floors, shall be constructed of masonry,
booth. concrete, or other noncombustible ma-
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and terial.
dry-type overspray collectors shall (ii) Spray rooms shall have non-
conform to the requirements of combustible fire doors and shutters.
§ 1910.107(b)(4) and (b)(5). (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately
(a) Overspray filters shall be in- ventilated so that the atmosphere in
stalled and maintained in accordance the breathing zone of the operator
with the requirements of § 1910.107(b)(5), shall be maintained in accordance with
and shall only be in a location easily the requirements of paragraph (c)(6)(ii)
accessible for inspection, cleaning, or of this section.
replacement. (iv) Spray rooms used for production
(b) Where effective means, inde- spray-finishing operations shall con-
pendent of the overspray filters, are inform to the requirements for spray
stalled which will result in design air booths.
distribution across the booth cross sec- (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be
tion, it is permissible to operate the provided in accordance with provisions
booth without the filters in place. of § 1910.107(d), and in accordance with
the following:
(iv) (a) For wet or water-wash spray
(a) Where a fan plenum is used to
booths, the water-chamber enclosure,
equalize or control the distribution of
within which intimate contact of con-
exhaust air movement through the
taminated air and cleaning water or
booth, it shall be of sufficient strength
other cleaning medium is maintained,
or rigidity to withstand the differential
if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or
air pressure or other superficially im-
heavier and adequately protected
posed loads for which the equipment is
against corrosion.
designed and also to facilitate clean-
(b) Chambers may include scrubber ing. Construction specifications shall
spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or be at least equivalent to those of para-
other devices. Chambers shall be pro- graph (c)(5)(iii) of this section.
vided with adequate means for creating (b) [Reserved]
and maintaining scrubbing action for (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to
removal of particulate matter from the transport makeup air to spray booths
exhaust air stream. or surrounding areas shall be con-
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- structed of noncombustible materials.
ed steel construction or other suitable (a) If negative pressure exists within
non-combustible material. If pits are inlet ductwork, all seams and joints
used as collecting tanks, they shall be shall be sealed if there is a possibility
concrete, masonry, or other material of infiltration of harmful quantities of
having similar properties. noxious gases, fumes, or mists from
(a) Tanks shall be provided with areas through which ductwork passes.
weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to (b) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in
prevent sludge and floating paint from accordance with volume flow require-
entering the pump suction box. Means ments and provide design air require-
for automatically maintaining the ments at the spray booth.
proper water level shall also be pro- (c) Inlet ductwork shall be ade-
vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be quately supported throughout its
submerged. They shall terminate at length to sustain at least its own
least one pipe diameter above the safe- weight plus any negative pressure
ty overflow level of the tank. which is exerted upon it under normal
(b) Tanks shall be so constructed as operating conditions.
to discourage accumulation of haz- (iii)(a) Exhaust ductwork shall be
ardous deposits. adequately supported throughout its
(vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and length to sustain its weight plus any
headers shall be adequately sized to in- normal accumulation in interior dur-
sure sufficient water flow to provide ef- ing normal operating conditions and
ficient operation of the water chamber. any negative pressure exerted upon it.
210
(b) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized wall shall be protected at the point of
in accordance with good design prac- penetration by open space or fire-resis-
tice which shall include consideration tive material between the duct and the
of fan capacity, length of duct, number roof or wall. When ducts pass through
of turns and elbows, variation in size, firewalls, they shall be provided with
volume, and character of materials automatic fire dampers on both sides of
being exhausted. See American Na- the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further steel plates may be used in lieu of
details and explanation concerning ele-
automatic fire dampers for ducts not
ments of design.
exceeding 18 inches in diameter.
(c) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel
ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, (g) Ductwork used for ventilating any
riveted, or welded. For other than steel process covered in this standard shall
construction, equivalent securing of not be connected to ducts ventilating
joints shall be provided. any other process or any chimney or
(d) Circumferential joints in duct- flue used for conveying any products of
work shall be substantially fastened combustion.
together and lapped in the direction of (6) Velocity and air flow requirements.
airflow. At least every fourth joint (i) Except where a spray booth has an
shall be provided with connecting adequate air replacement system, the
flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- velocity of air into all openings of a
lent fastening security. spray booth shall be not less than that
(e) Inspection or clean-out doors shall specified in Table G–10 for the oper-
be provided for every 9 to 12 feet of run- ating conditions specified. An adequate
ning length for ducts up to 12 inches in air replacement system is one which
diameter, but the distance between
introduces replacement air upstream
cleanout doors may be greater for larg-
or above the object being sprayed and
er pipes. A clean-out door or doors
is so designed that the velocity of air
shall be provided for servicing the fan,
and where necessary, a drain shall be in the booth cross section is not less
provided. than that specified in Table G–10 when
(f) Where ductwork passes through a measured upstream or above the object
combustible roof or wall, the roof or being sprayed.
TABLE G–10—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS

Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Crossdraft,
Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth
f.p.m. Design Range
Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...................... 50–75
without operator.
100 small booth .................... 75–125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth .................... 75–125
150 small booth .................... 125–175

Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 100 .... 150 large booth .................... 125–175
200 small booth .................... 150–250

NOTES:
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of
the booth to its height and width.
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of
100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may
carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Design.’’ However, booths operating with veloci-
ties shown in the column headed ‘‘Range’’ are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements the lower explosive limit of the solvent
in paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section the being sprayed. An example of the meth-
total air volume exhausted through a od of calculating this volume is given
spray booth shall be such as to dilute below.
solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of
211
Example: To determine the lower explosive TABLE G–11—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF
limits of the most common solvents used in SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS—Continued
spray finishing, see Table G–11. Column 1
gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per Cubic feet
Lower ex-
gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the plosive
per gallon limit in per-
lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by Solvent of vapor of
liquid at 70 cent by
volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- °F.
volume of
vent will be diminished by the quantity of air at 70 °F
solids and nonflammables contained in the Propyl Alcohol (iso) ....................... 44.0 2.0
finish. Toluene .......................................... 30.4 1.4
To determine the volume of air in cubic Turpentine ..................................... 20.8 0.8
feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Xylene (o) ...................................... 26.4 1.0
lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- 1 At 212 °F.
plosive limit, apply the following formula:
(iii)(a) When an operator is in a booth
Dilution volume required per gallon of sol-
vent = 4 (100¥LEL) (cubic feet of vapor
downstream from the object being
per gallon)÷ LEL sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or
other type of respirator must be used
Using toluene as the solvent. by employees that has been approved
(1) LEL of toluene from Table G–11, column by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the
2, is 1.4 percent. material being sprayed.
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from
(b) Where downdraft booths are pro-
Table G–11, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per
gallon. vided with doors, such doors shall be
(3) Dilution volume required= closed when spray painting.
(7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air,
4 (100¥1.4) 30.4÷ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet.
free of contamination from adjacent
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of industrial exhaust systems, chimneys,
required ventilation, multiply the dilution stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a
volume required per gallon of solvent by the spray booth or room in quantities
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per equal to the volume of air exhausted
minute.
through the spray booth.
TABLE G–11—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF (ii) Where a spray booth or room re-
SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS ceives make-up air through self-closing
doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall
Cubic feet
Lower ex- be fully open at all times when the
plosive
per gallon
limit in per- booth or room is in use for spraying.
Solvent of vapor of
liquid at 70
cent by The velocity of air through such doors,
volume of
°F. air at 70 °F dampers, or louvers shall not exceed
200 feet per minute. If the fan charac-
Column 1 Column 2 teristics are such that the required air
Acetone ......................................... 44.0 2.6 flow through the booth will be pro-
Amyl Acetate (iso) ......................... 21.6 1 1.0
Amyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 29.6 1.2 vided, higher velocities through the
Amyl Alcohol (iso) ......................... 29.6 1.2 doors, dampers, or louvers may be
Benzene ........................................ 36.8 1 1.4
used.
Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7
Butyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 35.2 1.4
(iii)(a) Where the air supply to a
Butyl Cellosolve ............................. 24.8 1.1 spray booth or room is filtered, the fan
Cellosolve ...................................... 33.6 1.8 static pressure shall be calculated on
Cellosolve Acetate ......................... 23.2 1.7 the assumption that the filters are
Cyclohexanone .............................. 31.2 1 1.1
1,1 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 5.9 dirty to the extent that they require
1,2 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 9.7 cleaning or replacement.
Ethyl Acetate ................................. 32.8 2.5 (b) The rating of filters shall be gov-
Ethyl Alcohol .................................. 55.2 4.3
Ethyl Lactate .................................. 28.0 1 1.5
erned by test data supplied by the man-
Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1 ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage
Methyl Alcohol ............................... 80.8 7.3 shall be installed to show the pressure
Methyl Cellosolve .......................... 40.8 2.5 drop across the filters. This gage shall
Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...................... 36.0 1.8
Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ................. 30.4 1.5 be marked to show the pressure drop at
Naphtha (VM&P) (76° Naphtha) ... 22.4 0.9 which the filters require cleaning or re-
Naphtha (100 °Flash) Safety Sol- placement. Filters shall be replaced or
vent—Stoddard Solvent ............. 23.2 1.0
Propyl Acetate (n) ......................... 27.2 2.8
cleaned whenever the pressure drop
Propyl Acetate (iso) ....................... 28.0 1.1 across them becomes excessive or
Propyl Alcohol (n) .......................... 44.8 2.1 whenever the air flow through the face
212
of the booth falls below that specified (1) The gas must have a distinctive
in Table G–10. and strong enough odor to warn work-
(iv)(a) Means for heating make-up air men in a spray booth or room of its
to any spray booth or room, before or presence if in an unburned state in the
at the time spraying is normally per- make-up air.
formed, shall be provided in all places (2) The maximum rate of gas supply
where the outdoor temperature may be to the make-up air heater burners
expected to remain below 55 °F. for ap- must not exceed that which would
preciable periods of time during the op- yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per
eration of the booth except where ade-
million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000
quate and safe means of radiant heat-
p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the
ing for all operating personnel affected
mixture if the unburned gas upon the
is provided. The replacement air during
the heating seasons shall be main- occurrence of flame failure were mixed
tained at not less than 65 °F. at the with all of the make-up air supplied.
point of entry into the spray booth or (3) A fan must be provided to deliver
spray room. When otherwise unheated the mixture of heated air and products
make-up air would be at a temperature of combustion from the plenum cham-
of more than 10 °F. below room tember housing the gas burners to the
perature, its temperature shall be regu- spray booth or room.
lated as provided in section 3.6.3 of (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray
ANSI Z9.2–1960. rooms are to be used to enclose or con-
(b) As an alternative to an air re- fine all spray finishing operations cov-
placement system complying with the ered by this paragraph (c). This para-
preceding section, general heating of graph does not apply to the spraying of
the building in which the spray room the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks,
or booth is located may be employed or similar structures, nor to small
provided that all occupied parts of the portable spraying apparatus not used
building are maintained at not less repeatedly in the same location.
than 65 °F. when the exhaust system is
in operation or the general heating sys- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
tem supplemented by other sources of FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 40 FR 24522, June 9,
heat may be employed to meet this re- 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322,
quirement. Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR
35308, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996;
(c) No means of heating make-up air
63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23,
shall be located in a spray booth.
1999; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 74 FR 46356,
(d) Where make-up air is heated by Sept. 9, 2009]
coal or oil, the products of combustion
shall not be allowed to mix with the § 1910.95 Occupational noise exposure.
make-up air, and the products of com-
bustion shall be conducted outside the (a) Protection against the effects of
building through a flue terminating at noise exposure shall be provided when
a point remote from all points where the sound levels exceed those shown in
make-up air enters the building. Table G–16 when measured on the A
(e) Where make-up air is heated by scale of a standard sound level meter
gas, and the products of combustion at slow response. When noise levels are
are not mixed with the make-up air but determined by octave band analysis,
are conducted through an independent the equivalent A-weighted sound level
flue to a point outside the building re- may be determined as follows:
mote from all points where make-up
air enters the building, it is not nec-
essary to comply with paragraph
(c)(7)(iv)(f) of this section.
(f) Where make-up air to any manu-
ally operated spray booth or room is
heated by gas and the products of com-
bustion are allowed to mix with the
supply air, the following precautions
must be taken:
213
TABLE G–16—PERMISSIBLE NOISE
EXPOSURES 1—Continued
Sound
Duration per day, hours level dBA
slow re-
sponse
14 ⁄ or less ............................................................. 115
1 When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or
more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their com-
bined effect should be considered, rather than the individual
effect of each. If the sum of the following fractions: C1/T1+C2/
T2Cn/Tn exceeds unity, then, the mixed exposure should be
considered to exceed the limit value. Cn indicates the total
time of exposure at a specified noise level, and Tn indicates
the total time of exposure permitted at that level.
Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed
140 dB peak sound pressure level.
(c) Hearing conservation program. (1)

The employer shall administer a con-
tinuing, effective hearing conservation
program, as described in paragraphs (c)
through (o) of this section, whenever
FIGURE G–9 employee noise exposures equal or ex-
Equivalent sound level contours. Octave ceed an 8-hour time-weighted average
band sound pressure levels may be converted sound level (TWA) of 85 decibels meas-
to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by ured on the A scale (slow response) or,
plotting them on this graph and noting the
equivalently, a dose of fifty percent.
A-weighted sound level corresponding to the
For purposes of the hearing conserva-
point of highest penetration into the sound
level contours. This equivalent A-weighted tion program, employee noise expo-
sound level, which may differ from the ac- sures shall be computed in accordance
tual A-weighted sound level of the noise, is with appendix A and Table G–16a, and
used to determine exposure limits from without regard to any attenuation pro-
Table 1.G–16. vided by the use of personal protective
equipment.
(b)(1) When employees are subjected (2) For purposes of paragraphs (c)
to sound exceeding those listed in through (n) of this section, an 8-hour
Table G–16, feasible administrative or time-weighted average of 85 decibels or
engineering controls shall be utilized. a dose of fifty percent shall also be re-
If such controls fail to reduce sound ferred to as the action level.
levels within the levels of Table G–16, (d) Monitoring. (1) When information
personal protective equipment shall be indicates that any employee’s exposure
provided and used to reduce sound lev- may equal or exceed an 8-hour time-
els within the levels of the table. weighted average of 85 decibels, the
(2) If the variations in noise level in- employer shall develop and implement
volve maxima at intervals of 1 second a monitoring program.
or less, it is to be considered contin- (i) The sampling strategy shall be de-
uous. signed to identify employees for inclu-
sion in the hearing conservation pro-
TABLE G–16—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES 1 gram and to enable the proper selec-
tion of hearing protectors.
Sound
level dBA (ii) Where circumstances such as high
Duration per day, hours slow re- worker mobility, significant variations
sponse
in sound level, or a significant compo-
8 ........................................................................... 90 nent of impulse noise make area moni-
6 ........................................................................... 92 toring generally inappropriate, the em-
4 ........................................................................... 95 ployer shall use representative per-
3 ........................................................................... 97 sonal sampling to comply with the
2 ........................................................................... 100 monitoring requirements of this para-
11⁄2 ....................................................................... 102
1 ........................................................................... 105
graph unless the employer can show
1⁄2 ......................................................................... 110 that area sampling produces equivalent
results.
214
EC27OC91.023
(2)(i) All continuous, intermittent (4) All audiograms obtained pursuant
and impulsive sound levels from 80 to this section shall meet the require-
decibels to 130 decibels shall be inte- ments of appendix C: Audiometric Meas-
grated into the noise measurements. uring Instruments.
(ii) Instruments used to measure em- (5) Baseline audiogram. (i) Within 6
ployee noise exposure shall be cali- months of an employee’s first exposure
brated to ensure measurement accu- at or above the action level, the em-
racy. ployer shall establish a valid baseline
(3) Monitoring shall be repeated audiogram against which subsequent
whenever a change in production, proc- audiograms can be compared.
ess, equipment or controls increases (ii) Mobile test van exception. Where
noise exposures to the extent that: mobile test vans are used to meet the
(i) Additional employees may be ex- audiometric testing obligation, the em-
posed at or above the action level; or ployer shall obtain a valid baseline
(ii) The attenuation provided by audiogram within 1 year of an employ-
hearing protectors being used by em- ee’s first exposure at or above the ac-
ployees may be rendered inadequate to tion level. Where baseline audiograms
meet the requirements of paragraph (j) are obtained more than 6 months after
of this section. the employee’s first exposure at or
(e) Employee notification. The em- above the action level, employees shall
ployer shall notify each employee ex- wearing hearing protectors for any pe-
posed at or above an 8-hour time- riod exceeding six months after first
weighted average of 85 decibels of the exposure until the baseline audiogram
results of the monitoring. is obtained.
(f) Observation of monitoring. The em- (iii) Testing to establish a baseline
ployer shall provide affected employees audiogram shall be preceded by at least
or their representatives with an oppor- 14 hours without exposure to workplace
tunity to observe any noise measure- noise. Hearing protectors may be used
ments conducted pursuant to this sec- as a substitute for the requirement
tion. that baseline audiograms be preceded
(g) Audiometric testing program. (1) by 14 hours without exposure to work-
The employer shall establish and main- place noise.
tain an audiometric testing program as (iv) The employer shall notify em-
provided in this paragraph by making ployees of the need to avoid high levels
audiometric testing available to all of non-occupational noise exposure
employees whose exposures equal or ex- during the 14-hour period immediately
ceed an 8-hour time-weighted average preceding the audiometric examina-
of 85 decibels. tion.
(2) The program shall be provided at (6) Annual audiogram. At least annu-
no cost to employees. ally after obtaining the baseline audio-
(3) Audiometric tests shall be per- gram, the employer shall obtain a new
formed by a licensed or certified audi- audiogram for each employee exposed
ologist, otolaryngologist, or other phy- at or above an 8-hour time-weighted
sician, or by a technician who is cer- average of 85 decibels.
tified by the Council of Accreditation (7) Evaluation of audiogram. (i) Each
in Occupational Hearing Conservation, employee’s annual audiogram shall be
or who has satisfactorily demonstrated compared to that employee’s baseline
competence in administering audiogram to determine if the audio-
audiometric examinations, obtaining gram is valid and if a standard thresh-
valid audiograms, and properly using, old shift as defined in paragraph (g)(10)
maintaining and checking calibration of this section has occurred. This com-
and proper functioning of the audiom- parison may be done by a technician.
eters being used. A technician who op- (ii) If the annual audiogram shows
erates microprocessor audiometers that an employee has suffered a stand-
does not need to be certified. A techni- ard threshold shift, the employer may
cian who performs audiometric tests obtain a retest within 30 days and con-
must be responsible to an audiologist, sider the results of the retest as the an-
otolaryngologist or physician. nual audiogram.
215
(iii) The audiologist, (iii) If subsequent audiometric test-
otolaryngologist, or physician shall re- ing of an employee whose exposure to
view problem audiograms and shall de- noise is less than an 8-hour TWA of 90
termine whether there is a need for fur- decibels indicates that a standard
ther evaluation. The employer shall threshold shift is not persistent, the
provide to the person performing this employer:
evaluation the following information: (A) Shall inform the employee of the
(A) A copy of the requirements for new audiometric interpretation; and
hearing conservation as set forth in
(B) May discontinue the required use
paragraphs (c) through (n) of this sec-
of hearing protectors for that em-
tion;
ployee.
(B) The baseline audiogram and most
recent audiogram of the employee to (9) Revised baseline. An annual audio-
be evaluated; gram may be substituted for the base-
(C) Measurements of background line audiogram when, in the judgment
sound pressure levels in the of the audiologist, otolaryngologist or
audiometric test room as required in physician who is evaluating the audio-
appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms. gram:
(D) Records of audiometer calibra- (i) The standard threshold shift re-
tions required by paragraph (h)(5) of vealed by the audiogram is persistent;
this section. or
(8) Follow-up procedures. (i) If a com- (ii) The hearing threshold shown in
parison of the annual audiogram to the the annual audiogram indicates signifi-
baseline audiogram indicates a stand- cant improvement over the baseline
ard threshold shift as defined in para- audiogram.
graph (g)(10) of this section has oc- (10) Standard threshold shift. (i) As
curred, the employee shall be informed used in this section, a standard thresh-
of this fact in writing, within 21 days of old shift is a change in hearing thresh-
the determination.
old relative to the baseline audiogram
(ii) Unless a physician determines
of an average of 10 dB or more at 2000,
that the standard threshold shift is not
work related or aggravated by occupa- 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear.
tional noise exposure, the employer (ii) In determining whether a stand-
shall ensure that the following steps ard threshold shift has occurred, allow-
are taken when a standard threshold ance may be made for the contribution
shift occurs: of aging (presbycusis) to the change in
(A) Employees not using hearing pro- hearing level by correcting the annual
tectors shall be fitted with hearing pro- audiogram according to the procedure
tectors, trained in their use and care, described in appendix F: Calculation
and required to use them. and Application of Age Correction to
(B) Employees already using hearing Audiograms.
protectors shall be refitted and re- (h) Audiometric test requirements. (1)
trained in the use of hearing protectors Audiometric tests shall be pure tone,
and provided with hearing protectors air conduction, hearing threshold ex-
offering greater attenuation if nec- aminations, with test frequencies in-
essary. cluding as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000,
(C) The employee shall be referred for 3000, 4000, and 6000 Hz. Tests at each
a clinical audiological evaluation or an frequency shall be taken separately for
otological examination, as appropriate, each ear.
if additional testing is necessary or if
(2) Audiometric tests shall be con-
the employer suspects that a medical
ducted with audiometers (including
pathology of the ear is caused or aggra-
vated by the wearing of hearing protec- microprocessor audiometers) that meet
tors. the specifications of, and are main-
(D) The employee is informed of the tained and used in accordance with,
need for an otological examination if a American National Standard Specifica-
medical pathology of the ear that is tion for Audiometers, S3.6–1969, which
unrelated to the use of hearing protec- is incorporated by reference as speci-
tors is suspected. fied in § 1910.6.
216
(3) Pulsed-tone and self-recording ing protectors provided by the em-
audiometers, if used, shall meet the re- ployer.
quirements specified in appendix C: (4) The employer shall provide train-
Audiometric Measuring Instruments. ing in the use and care of all hearing
(4) Audiometric examinations shall protectors provided to employees.
be administered in a room meeting the (5) The employer shall ensure proper
requirements listed in appendix D: initial fitting and supervise the correct
Audiometric Test Rooms. use of all hearing protectors.
(5) Audiometer calibration. (i) The (j) Hearing protector attenuation. (1)
functional operation of the audiometer The employer shall evaluate hearing
shall be checked before each day’s use protector attenuation for the specific
by testing a person with known, stable noise environments in which the pro-
hearing thresholds, and by listening to tector will be used. The employer shall
the audiometer’s output to make sure use one of the evaluation methods de-
that the output is free from distorted scribed in appendix B: Methods for Esti-
or unwanted sounds. Deviations of 10 mating the Adequacy of Hearing Protec-
decibels or greater require an acoustic tion Attenuation.
calibration. (2) Hearing protectors must attenu-
(ii) Audiometer calibration shall be ate employee exposure at least to an 8-
checked acoustically at least annually hour time-weighted average of 90 deci-
in accordance with appendix E: Acoustic bels as required by paragraph (b) of
Calibration of Audiometers. Test fre- this section.
quencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz (3) For employees who have experi-
may be omitted from this check. Devi- enced a standard threshold shift, hear-
ations of 15 decibels or greater require ing protectors must attenuate em-
an exhaustive calibration. ployee exposure to an 8-hour time-
(iii) An exhaustive calibration shall weighted average of 85 decibels or
be performed at least every two years below.
in accordance with sections 4.1.2; 4.1.3.; (4) The adequacy of hearing protector
4.1.4.3; 4.2; 4.4.1; 4.4.2; 4.4.3; and 4.5 of attenuation shall be re-evaluated
the American National Standard Speci- whenever employee noise exposures in-
fication for Audiometers, S3.6–1969. crease to the extent that the hearing
Test frequencies below 500 Hz and protectors provided may no longer pro-
above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this vide adequate attenuation. The em-
calibration. ployer shall provide more effective
(i) Hearing protectors. (1) Employers hearing protectors where necessary.
shall make hearing protectors avail- (k) Training program. (1) The em-
able to all employees exposed to an 8- ployer shall train each employee who is
hour time-weighted average of 85 deci- exposed to noise at or above an 8-hour
bels or greater at no cost to the em- time weighted average of 85 decibels in
ployees. Hearing protectors shall be re- accordance with the requirements of
placed as necessary. this section. The employer shall insti-
(2) Employers shall ensure that hear- tute a training program and ensure em-
ing protectors are worn: ployee participation in the program.
(i) By an employee who is required by (2) The training program shall be re-
paragraph (b)(1) of this section to wear peated annually for each employee in-
personal protective equipment; and cluded in the hearing conservation pro-
(ii) By any employee who is exposed gram. Information provided in the
to an 8-hour time-weighted average of training program shall be updated to
85 decibels or greater, and who: be consistent with changes in protec-
(A) Has not yet had a baseline audio- tive equipment and work processes.
gram established pursuant to para- (3) The employer shall ensure that
graph (g)(5)(ii); or each employee is informed of the fol-
(B) Has experienced a standard lowing:
threshold shift. (i) The effects of noise on hearing;
(3) Employees shall be given the op- (ii) The purpose of hearing protec-
portunity to select their hearing pro- tors, the advantages, disadvantages,
tectors from a variety of suitable hear- and attenuation of various types, and
217
instructions on selection, fitting, use, CFR 1910.1020 (a)–(e) and (g)–(i) apply to
and care; and access to records under this section.
(iii) The purpose of audiometric test- (5) Transfer of records. If the employer
ing, and an explanation of the test pro- ceases to do business, the employer
cedures. shall transfer to the successor em-
(l) Access to information and training ployer all records required to be main-
materials. (1) The employer shall make tained by this section, and the suc-
available to affected employees or cessor employer shall retain them for
their representatives copies of this the remainder of the period prescribed
standard and shall also post a copy in in paragraph (m)(3) of this section.
the workplace. (n) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, B, C,
(2) The employer shall provide to af- D, and E to this section are incor-
fected employees any informational porated as part of this section and the
materials pertaining to the standard contents of these appendices are man-
that are supplied to the employer by datory.
the Assistant Secretary. (2) Appendices F and G to this sec-
(3) The employer shall provide, upon tion are informational and are not in-
request, all materials related to the tended to create any additional obliga-
employer’s training and education pro- tions not otherwise imposed or to de-
gram pertaining to this standard to the
tract from any existing obligations.
Assistant Secretary and the Director.
(o) Exemptions. Paragraphs (c)
(m) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure meas-
through (n) of this section shall not
urements. The employer shall maintain
an accurate record of all employee ex- apply to employers engaged in oil and
posure measurements required by para- gas well drilling and servicing oper-
graph (d) of this section. ations.
(2) Audiometric tests. (i) The employer APPENDIX A TO § 1910.95—NOISE EXPOSURE
shall retain all employee audiometric COMPUTATION
test records obtained pursuant to para-
graph (g) of this section: This appendix is Mandatory
(ii) This record shall include: I. COMPUTATION OF EMPLOYEE NOISE
(A) Name and job classification of EXPOSURE
the employee;
(B) Date of the audiogram; (1) Noise dose is computed using Table G–
(C) The examiner’s name; 16a as follows:
(D) Date of the last acoustic or ex- (i) When the sound level, L, is constant
over the entire work shift, the noise dose, D,
haustive calibration of the audiometer; in percent, is given by: D=100 C/T where C is
and the total length of the work day, in hours,
(E) Employee’s most recent noise ex- and T is the reference duration cor-
posure assessment. responding to the measured sound level, L,
(F) The employer shall maintain ac- as given in Table G–16a or by the formula
curate records of the measurements of shown as a footnote to that table.
the background sound pressure levels (ii) When the workshift noise exposure is
in audiometric test rooms. composed of two or more periods of noise at
(3) Record retention. The employer different levels, the total noise dose over the
work day is given by:
shall retain records required in this
paragraph (m) for at least the following D=100(C1/T1+C2/T2+Cn/Tn),
periods. where Cn indicates the total time of exposure
(i) Noise exposure measurement at a specific noise level, and Tn indicates the
records shall be retained for two years. reference duration for that level as given by
Table G–16a.
(ii) Audiometric test records shall be
retained for the duration of the af- (2) The eight-hour time-weighted average
fected employee’s employment. sound level (TWA), in decibels, may be com-
puted from the dose, in percent, by means of
(4) Access to records. All records re-
the formula: TWA=16.61 log10 (D/100)+90. For
quired by this section shall be provided an eight-hour workshift with the noise level
upon request to employees, former em- constant over the entire shift, the TWA is
ployees, representatives designated by equal to the measured sound level.
the individual employee, and the As- (3) A table relating dose and TWA is given
sistant Secretary. The provisions of 29 in Section II.
218
TABLE G–16A amount of such exposure is usually measured
with an audiodosimeter which gives a read-
Ref- out in terms of ‘‘dose.’’ In order to better un-
erence
A-weighted sound level, L (decibel)
duration, derstand the requirements of the amend-
T (hour) ment, dosimeter readings can be converted
to an ‘‘8-hour time-weighted average sound
80 ........................................................................... 32 level.’’ (TWA).
81 ........................................................................... 27.9
In order to convert the reading of a dosim-
82 ........................................................................... 24.3
83 ........................................................................... 21.1 eter into TWA, see Table A–1, below. This
84 ........................................................................... 18.4 table applies to dosimeters that are set by
85 ........................................................................... 16 the manufacturer to calculate dose or per-
86 ........................................................................... 13.9 cent exposure according to the relationships
87 ........................................................................... 12.1 in Table G–16a. So, for example, a dose of 91
88 ........................................................................... 10.6
89 ........................................................................... 9.2
percent over an eight hour day results in a
90 ........................................................................... 8 TWA of 89.3 dB, and, a dose of 50 percent cor-
91 ........................................................................... 7.0 responds to a TWA of 85 dB.
92 ........................................................................... 6.1 If the dose as read on the dosimeter is less
93 ........................................................................... 5.3 than or greater than the values found in
94 ........................................................................... 4.6 Table A–1, the TWA may be calculated by
95 ........................................................................... 4
96 ........................................................................... 3.5
using the formula: TWA=16.61 log10 (D/100)+90
97 ........................................................................... 3.0 where TWA=8-hour time-weighted average
98 ........................................................................... 2.6 sound level and D=accumulated dose in per-
99 ........................................................................... 2.3 cent exposure.
100 ......................................................................... 2
101 ......................................................................... 1.7 TABLE A–1—CONVERSION FROM ‘‘PERCENT
102 ......................................................................... 1.5
103 ......................................................................... 1.3 NOISE EXPOSURE’’ OR ‘‘DOSE’’ TO ‘‘8-HOUR
104 ......................................................................... 1.1 TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL’’
105 ......................................................................... 1 (TWA)
106 ......................................................................... 0.87
107 ......................................................................... 0.76 Dose or percent noise exposure TWA
108 ......................................................................... 0.66
109 ......................................................................... 0.57 10 ........................................................................... 73.4
110 ......................................................................... 0.5 15 ........................................................................... 76.3
111 ......................................................................... 0.44 20 ........................................................................... 78.4
112 ......................................................................... 0.38 25 ........................................................................... 80.0
113 ......................................................................... 0.33 30 ........................................................................... 81.3
114 ......................................................................... 0.29 35 ........................................................................... 82.4
115 ......................................................................... 0.25 40 ........................................................................... 83.4
116 ......................................................................... 0.22 45 ........................................................................... 84.2
117 ......................................................................... 0.19 50 ........................................................................... 85.0
118 ......................................................................... 0.16 55 ........................................................................... 85.7
119 ......................................................................... 0.14 60 ........................................................................... 86.3
120 ......................................................................... 0.125 65 ........................................................................... 86.9
121 ......................................................................... 0.11 70 ........................................................................... 87.4
122 ......................................................................... 0.095 75 ........................................................................... 87.9
123 ......................................................................... 0.082 80 ........................................................................... 88.4
124 ......................................................................... 0.072 81 ........................................................................... 88.5
125 ......................................................................... 0.063 82 ........................................................................... 88.6
126 ......................................................................... 0.054 83 ........................................................................... 88.7
127 ......................................................................... 0.047 84 ........................................................................... 88.7
128 ......................................................................... 0.041 85 ........................................................................... 88.8
129 ......................................................................... 0.036 86 ........................................................................... 88.9
130 ......................................................................... 0.031 87 ........................................................................... 89.0
88 ........................................................................... 89.1
In the above table the reference duration, 89 ........................................................................... 89.2
T, is computed by 90 ........................................................................... 89.2
91 ........................................................................... 89.3
92 ........................................................................... 89.4
93 ........................................................................... 89.5
94 ........................................................................... 89.6
95 ........................................................................... 89.6
96 ........................................................................... 89.7
where L is the measured A-weighted sound 97 ........................................................................... 89.8
level. 98 ........................................................................... 89.9
99 ........................................................................... 89.9
II. CONVERSION BETWEEN ‘‘DOSE’’ AND ‘‘8- 100 ......................................................................... 90.0
HOUR TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE’’ SOUND 101 ......................................................................... 90.1
LEVEL 102 ......................................................................... 90.1
103 ......................................................................... 90.2
Compliance with paragraphs (c)–(r) of this 104 ......................................................................... 90.3
regulation is determined by the amount of 105 ......................................................................... 90.4
exposure to noise in the workplace. The 106 ......................................................................... 90.4
219
ER25SE06.008</MATH>
TABLE A–1—CONVERSION FROM ‘‘PERCENT TABLE A–1—CONVERSION FROM ‘‘PERCENT
NOISE EXPOSURE’’ OR ‘‘DOSE’’ TO ‘‘8-HOUR NOISE EXPOSURE’’ OR ‘‘DOSE’’ TO ‘‘8-HOUR
TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL’’ TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL’’
(TWA)—Continued (TWA)—Continued
Dose or percent noise exposure TWA Dose or percent noise exposure TWA
107 ......................................................................... 90.5 590 ......................................................................... 102.8

108 ......................................................................... 90.6 600 ......................................................................... 102.9
109 ......................................................................... 90.6 610 ......................................................................... 103.0
110 ......................................................................... 90.7 620 ......................................................................... 103.2
111 ......................................................................... 90.8 630 ......................................................................... 103.3
112 ......................................................................... 90.8 640 ......................................................................... 103.4
113 ......................................................................... 90.9 650 ......................................................................... 103.5
114 ......................................................................... 90.9 660 ......................................................................... 103.6
115 ......................................................................... 91.1 670 ......................................................................... 103.7
116 ......................................................................... 91.1
680 ......................................................................... 103.8
117 ......................................................................... 91.1
690 ......................................................................... 103.9
118 ......................................................................... 91.2
700 ......................................................................... 104.0
119 ......................................................................... 91.3
120 ......................................................................... 91.3 710 ......................................................................... 104.1
125 ......................................................................... 91.6 720 ......................................................................... 104.2
130 ......................................................................... 91.9 730 ......................................................................... 104.3
135 ......................................................................... 92.2 740 ......................................................................... 104.4
140 ......................................................................... 92.4 750 ......................................................................... 104.5
145 ......................................................................... 92.7 760 ......................................................................... 104.6
150 ......................................................................... 92.9 770 ......................................................................... 104.7
155 ......................................................................... 93.2 780 ......................................................................... 104.8
160 ......................................................................... 93.4 790 ......................................................................... 104.9
165 ......................................................................... 93.6 800 ......................................................................... 105.0
170 ......................................................................... 93.8 810 ......................................................................... 105.1
175 ......................................................................... 94.0 820 ......................................................................... 105.2
180 ......................................................................... 94.2 830 ......................................................................... 105.3
185 ......................................................................... 94.4 840 ......................................................................... 105.4
190 ......................................................................... 94.6 850 ......................................................................... 105.4
195 ......................................................................... 94.8 860 ......................................................................... 105.5
200 ......................................................................... 95.0 870 ......................................................................... 105.6
210 ......................................................................... 95.4 880 ......................................................................... 105.7
220 ......................................................................... 95.7 890 ......................................................................... 105.8
230 ......................................................................... 96.0 900 ......................................................................... 105.8
240 ......................................................................... 96.3 910 ......................................................................... 105.9
250 ......................................................................... 96.6 920 ......................................................................... 106.0
260 ......................................................................... 96.9 930 ......................................................................... 106.1
270 ......................................................................... 97.2 940 ......................................................................... 106.2
280 ......................................................................... 97.4 950 ......................................................................... 106.2
290 ......................................................................... 97.7 960 ......................................................................... 106.3
300 ......................................................................... 97.9 970 ......................................................................... 106.4
310 ......................................................................... 98.2 980 ......................................................................... 106.5
320 ......................................................................... 98.4 990 ......................................................................... 106.5
330 ......................................................................... 98.6 999 ......................................................................... 106.6
340 ......................................................................... 98.8
350 ......................................................................... 99.0
360 ......................................................................... 99.2 APPENDIX B TO § 1910.95—METHODS FOR ESTI-
370 ......................................................................... 99.4 MATING THE ADEQUACY OF HEARING PRO-
380 ......................................................................... 99.6 TECTOR ATTENUATION
390 ......................................................................... 99.8
400 ......................................................................... 100.0 This appendix is Mandatory
410 ......................................................................... 100.2
420 ......................................................................... 100.4 For employees who have experienced a sig-
430 ......................................................................... 100.5 nificant threshold shift, hearing protector
440 ......................................................................... 100.7 attenuation must be sufficient to reduce em-
450 ......................................................................... 100.8 ployee exposure to a TWA of 85 dB. Employ-
460 ......................................................................... 101.0
470 ......................................................................... 101.2
ers must select one of the following methods
480 ......................................................................... 101.3 by which to estimate the adequacy of hear-
490 ......................................................................... 101.5 ing protector attenuation.
500 ......................................................................... 101.6 The most convenient method is the Noise
510 ......................................................................... 101.8 Reduction Rating (NRR) developed by the
520 ......................................................................... 101.9 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
530 ......................................................................... 102.0 According to EPA regulation, the NRR must
540 ......................................................................... 102.2
550 ......................................................................... 102.3
be shown on the hearing protector package.
560 ......................................................................... 102.4 The NRR is then related to an individual
570 ......................................................................... 102.6 worker’s noise environment in order to as-
580 ......................................................................... 102.7 sess the adequacy of the attenuation of a
220
given hearing protector. This appendix de- (A) Obtain a representative sample of the
scribes four methods of using the NRR to de- C-weighted sound levels in the employee’s
termine whether a particular hearing pro- environment.
tector provides adequate protection within a (B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted
given exposure environment. Selection average sound level to obtain the estimated
among the four procedures is dependent upon A-weighted TWA under the ear protector.
the employer’s noise measuring instruments. (v) When using area monitoring procedures
Instead of using the NRR, employers may and a sound level meter set to the A-weigh-
evaluate the adequacy of hearing protector ing network.
attenuation by using one of the three meth- (A) Obtain a representative sound level for
ods developed by the National Institute for the area in question.
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), (B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR and sub-
which are described in the ‘‘List of Personal tract the remainder from the A-weighted
Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,’’ sound level for that area.
HEW Publication No. 76–120, 1975, pages 21–37. (vi) When using area monitoring proce-
These methods are known as NIOSH methods dures and a sound level meter set to the C-
#1B1, #1B2 and #1B3. The NRR described weighting network:
below is a simplification of NIOSH method
(A) Obtain a representative sound level for
#1B2. The most complex method is NIOSH
the area in question.
method #1B1, which is probably the most ac-
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted
curate method since it uses the largest
sound level for that area.
amount of spectral information from the in-
dividual employee’s noise environment. As APPENDIX C TO § 1910.95—AUDIOMETRIC
in the case of the NRR method described MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
below, if one of the NIOSH methods is used,
the selected method must be applied to an This appendix is Mandatory
individual’s noise environment to assess the
adequacy of the attenuation. Employers 1. In the event that pulsed-tone audiom-
should be careful to take a sufficient number eters are used, they shall have a tone on-
of measurements in order to achieve a rep- time of at least 200 milliseconds.
resentative sample for each time segment. 2. Self-recording audiometers shall comply
NOTE: The employer must remember that with the following requirements:
calculated attenuation values reflect real- (A) The chart upon which the audiogram is
istic values only to the extent that the pro- traced shall have lines at positions cor-
tectors are properly fitted and worn. responding to all multiples of 10 dB hearing
level within the intensity range spanned by
When using the NRR to assess hearing pro- the audiometer. The lines shall be equally
tector adequacy, one of the following meth- spaced and shall be separated by at least 1⁄4
ods must be used: inch. Additional increments are optional.
(i) When using a dosimeter that is capable The audiogram pen tracings shall not exceed
of C-weighted measurements: 2 dB in width.
(A) Obtain the employee’s C-weighted dose (B) It shall be possible to set the stylus
for the entire workshift, and convert to TWA manually at the 10-dB increment lines for
(see appendix A, II). calibration purposes.
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted (C) The slewing rate for the audiometer at-
TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted tenuator shall not be more than 6 dB/sec ex-
TWA under the ear protector. cept that an initial slewing rate greater than
(ii) When using a dosimeter that is not ca- 6 dB/sec is permitted at the beginning of
pable of C-weighted measurements, the fol- each new test frequency, but only until the
lowing method may be used: second subject response.
(A) Convert the A-weighted dose to TWA (D) The audiometer shall remain at each
(see appendix A). required test frequency for 30 seconds (±3 sec-
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR. onds). The audiogram shall be clearly
(C) Subtract the remainder from the A- marked at each change of frequency and the
weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A- actual frequency change of the audiometer
weighted TWA under the ear protector. shall not deviate from the frequency bound-
(iii) When using a sound level meter set to aries marked on the audiogram by more than
the A-weighting network: ±3 seconds.
(A) Obtain the employee’s A-weighted (E) It must be possible at each test fre-
TWA. quency to place a horizontal line segment
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR, and sub- parallel to the time axis on the audiogram,
tract the remainder from the A-weighted such that the audiometric tracing crosses
TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted the line segment at least six times at that
TWA under the ear protector. test frequency. At each test frequency the
(iv) When using a sound level meter set on threshold shall be the average of the
the C-weighting network: midpoints of the tracing excursions.
221
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.95—AUDIOMETRIC TEST D. This measurement may be made elec-
ROOMS trically with a voltmeter connected to the
earphone terminals.
This appendix is Mandatory (3) Tolerances
Rooms used for audiometric testing shall When any of the measured sound levels de-
not have background sound pressure levels viate from the levels in Table E–1 or Table
exceeding those in Table D–1 when measured E–2 by ±3 dB at any test frequency between
by equipment conforming at least to the 500 and 3000 Hz, 4 dB at 4000 Hz, or 5 dB at
Type 2 requirements of American National 6000 Hz, an exhaustive calibration is advised.
Standard Specification for Sound Level Me- An exhaustive calibration is required if the
ters, S1.4–1971 (R1976), and to the Class II re- deviations are greater than 15 dB or greater
quirements of American National Standard at any test frequency.
Specification for Octave, Half-Octave, and
Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, S1.11–1971 TABLE E–1—REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS
(R1976). FOR TELEPHONICS—TDH–39 EARPHONES
TABLE D–1—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OCTAVE- Reference

threshold Sound
BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS FOR Frequency, Hz level for level meter
AUDIOMETRIC TEST ROOMS TDH–39 reading,
earphones, dB
dB
Octave-band center fre-
quency (Hz) ................ 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
500 ................................................. 11.5 81.5
Sound pressure level
1000 ............................................... 7 77
(dB) ............................. 40 40 47 57 62
2000 ............................................... 9 79
3000 ............................................... 10 80
APPENDIX E TO § 1910.95—ACOUSTIC 4000 ............................................... 9.5 79.5
CALIBRATION OF AUDIOMETERS 6000 ............................................... 15.5 85.5
This appendix is Mandatory

TABLE E–2—REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS
Audiometer calibration shall be checked FOR TELEPHONICS—TDH–49 EARPHONES
acoustically, at least annually, according to
the procedures described in this appendix. Ref-
The equipment necessary to perform these erence
threshold Sound
measurements is a sound level meter, oc- level
level for
Frequency, Hz meter
tave-band filter set, and a National Bureau TDH–49
reading,
of Standards 9A coupler. In making these ear-
phones, dB
measurements, the accuracy of the cali- dB
brating equipment shall be sufficient to de-
termine that the audiometer is within the 500 ..................................................... 13.5 83.5
tolerances permitted by American Standard 1000 ................................................... 7.5 77.5
Specification for Audiometers, S3.6–1969. 2000 ................................................... 11 81.0
3000 ................................................... 9.5 79.5
(1) Sound Pressure Output Check
4000 ................................................... 10.5 80.5
A. Place the earphone coupler over the 6000 ................................................... 13.5 83.5
microphone of the sound level meter and
place the earphone on the coupler.
B. Set the audiometer’s hearing threshold APPENDIX F TO § 1910.95—CALCULATIONS AND
level (HTL) dial to 70 dB. APPLICATION OF AGE CORRECTIONS TO
C. Measure the sound pressure level of the AUDIOGRAMS
tones at each test frequency from 500 Hz This appendix Is Non-Mandatory
through 6000 Hz for each earphone.
D. At each frequency the readout on the In determining whether a standard thresh-
sound level meter should correspond to the old shift has occurred, allowance may be
levels in Table E–1 or Table E–2, as appro- made for the contribution of aging to the
priate, for the type of earphone, in the col- change in hearing level by adjusting the
umn entitled ‘‘sound level meter reading.’’ most recent audiogram. If the employer
(2) Linearity Check chooses to adjust the audiogram, the em-
A. With the earphone in place, set the fre- ployer shall follow the procedure described
quency to 1000 Hz and the HTL dial on the below. This procedure and the age correction
audiometer to 70 dB. tables were developed by the National Insti-
B. Measure the sound levels in the coupler tute for Occupational Safety and Health in
at each 10-dB decrement from 70 dB to 10 dB, the criteria document entitled ‘‘Criteria for
noting the sound level meter reading at each a Recommended Standard . . . Occupational
setting. Exposure to Noise,’’ ((HSM)–11001).
C. For each 10-dB decrement on the audi- For each audiometric test frequency;
ometer the sound level meter should indicate (i) Determine from Tables F–1 or F–2 the
a corresponding 10 dB decrease. age correction values for the employee by:
222
(A) Finding the age at which the most re- TABLE F–1—AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN
cent audiogram was taken and recording the DECIBELS FOR MALES
corresponding values of age corrections at
1000 Hz through 6000 Hz; Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)
(B) Finding the age at which the baseline Years
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
audiogram was taken and recording the cor-
responding values of age corrections at 1000 20 or younger ....... 5 3 4 5 8
Hz through 6000 Hz. 21 ......................... 5 3 4 5 8
(ii) Subtract the values found in step (i)(B) 22 ......................... 5 3 4 5 8
from the value found in step (i)(A). 23 ......................... 5 3 4 6 9
(iii) The differences calculated in step (ii) 24 ......................... 5 3 5 6 9
25 ......................... 5 3 5 7 10
represented that portion of the change in 26 ......................... 5 4 5 7 10
hearing that may be due to aging. 27 ......................... 5 4 6 7 11
Example: Employee is a 32-year-old male. 28 ......................... 6 4 6 8 11
The audiometric history for his right ear is 29 ......................... 6 4 6 8 12
shown in decibels below. 30 ......................... 6 4 6 9 12
31 ......................... 6 4 7 9 13
Audiometric test frequency (Hz) 32 ......................... 6 5 7 10 14
Employee’s age 33 ......................... 6 5 7 10 14
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 34 ......................... 6 5 8 11 15
35 ......................... 7 5 8 11 15
26 ......................... 10 5 5 10 5 36 ......................... 7 5 9 12 16
*27 ........................ 0 0 0 5 5 37 ......................... 7 6 9 12 17
28 ......................... 0 0 0 10 5 38 ......................... 7 6 9 13 17
29 ......................... 5 0 5 15 5 39 ......................... 7 6 10 14 18
30 ......................... 0 5 10 20 10 40 ......................... 7 6 10 14 19
31 ......................... 5 10 20 15 15 41 ......................... 7 6 10 14 20
*32 ........................ 5 10 10 25 20 42 ......................... 8 7 11 16 20
43 ......................... 8 7 12 16 21
The audiogram at age 27 is considered the 44 ......................... 8 7 12 17 22
baseline since it shows the best hearing 45 ......................... 8 7 13 18 23
threshold levels. Asterisks have been used to 46 ......................... 8 8 13 19 24
identify the baseline and most recent audio- 47 ......................... 8 8 14 19 24
48 ......................... 9 8 14 20 25
gram. A threshold shift of 20 dB exists at 4000
49 ......................... 9 9 15 21 26
Hz between the audiograms taken at ages 27 50 ......................... 9 9 16 22 27
and 32. 51 ......................... 9 9 16 23 28
(The threshold shift is computed by sub- 52 ......................... 9 10 17 24 29
tracting the hearing threshold at age 27, 53 ......................... 9 10 18 25 30
which was 5, from the hearing threshold at 54 ......................... 10 10 18 26 31
age 32, which is 25). A retest audiogram has 55 ......................... 10 11 19 27 32
56 ......................... 10 11 20 28 34
confirmed this shift. The contribution of
57 ......................... 10 11 21 29 35
aging to this change in hearing may be esti- 58 ......................... 10 12 22 31 36
mated in the following manner: 59 ......................... 11 12 22 32 37
Go to Table F–1 and find the age correction 60 or older ............ 11 13 23 33 38
values (in dB) for 4000 Hz at age 27 and age 32.
Frequency (Hz) TABLE F–2—AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
DECIBELS FOR FEMALES
Age 32 .................. 6 5 7 10 14 Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)

Years
Age 27 .................. 5 4 6 7 11 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
Difference ...... 1 1 1 3 3 20 or younger ....... 7 4 3 3 6
21 ......................... 7 4 4 3 6
The difference represents the amount of 22 ......................... 7 4 4 4 6
hearing loss that may be attributed to aging 23 ......................... 7 5 4 4 7
in the time period between the baseline 24 ......................... 7 5 4 4 7
audiogram and the most recent audiogram. 25 ......................... 8 5 4 4 7
26 ......................... 8 5 5 4 8
In this example, the difference at 4000 Hz is 27 ......................... 8 5 5 5 8
3 dB. This value is subtracted from the hear- 28 ......................... 8 5 5 5 8
ing level at 4000 Hz, which in the most recent 29 ......................... 8 5 5 5 9
audiogram is 25, yielding 22 after adjust- 30 ......................... 8 6 5 5 9
ment. Then the hearing threshold in the 31 ......................... 8 6 6 5 9
baseline audiogram at 4000 Hz (5) is sub- 32 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10
tracted from the adjusted annual audiogram 33 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10
34 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10
hearing threshold at 4000 Hz (22). Thus the 35 ......................... 9 6 7 7 11
age-corrected threshold shift would be 17 dB 36 ......................... 9 7 7 7 11
(as opposed to a threshold shift of 20 dB 37 ......................... 9 7 7 7 12
without age correction). 38 ......................... 10 7 7 7 12
223
TABLE F–2—AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN level meter and the dosimeter. A sound level
DECIBELS FOR FEMALES—Continued meter is a device that measures the inten-
sity of sound at a given moment. Since
Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz) sound level meters provide a measure of
Years sound intensity at only one point in time, it
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
is generally necessary to take a number of
39 ......................... 10 7 8 8 12 measurements at different times during the
40 ......................... 10 7 8 8 13 day to estimate noise exposure over a work-
41 ......................... 10 8 8 8 13 day. If noise levels fluctuate, the amount of
42 ......................... 10 8 9 9 13
time noise remains at each of the various
43 ......................... 11 8 9 9 14
44 ......................... 11 8 9 9 14 measured levels must be determined.
45 ......................... 11 8 10 10 15 To estimate employee noise exposures with
46 ......................... 11 9 10 10 15 a sound level meter it is also generally nec-
47 ......................... 11 9 10 11 16 essary to take several measurements at dif-
48 ......................... 12 9 11 11 16 ferent locations within the workplace. After
49 ......................... 12 9 11 11 16
50 ......................... 12 10 11 12 17
appropriate sound level meter readings are
51 ......................... 12 10 12 12 17 obtained, people sometimes draw ‘‘maps’’ of
52 ......................... 12 10 12 13 18 the sound levels within different areas of the
53 ......................... 13 10 13 13 18 workplace. By using a sound level ‘‘map’’
54 ......................... 13 11 13 14 19 and information on employee locations
55 ......................... 13 11 14 14 19 throughout the day, estimates of individual
56 ......................... 13 11 14 15 20
exposure levels can be developed. This meas-
57 ......................... 13 11 15 15 20
58 ......................... 14 12 15 16 21 urement method is generally referred to as
59 ......................... 14 12 16 16 21 area noise monitoring.
60 or older ............ 14 12 16 17 22 A dosimeter is like a sound level meter ex-
cept that it stores sound level measurements
APPENDIX G TO § 1910.95—MONITORING NOISE and integrates these measurements over
LEVELS NON-MANDATORY INFORMATIONAL time, providing an average noise exposure
APPENDIX reading for a given period of time, such as an
8-hour workday. With a dosimeter, a micro-
This appendix provides information to help phone is attached to the employee’s clothing
employers comply with the noise monitoring and the exposure measurement is simply
obligations that are part of the hearing con- read at the end of the desired time period. A
servation amendment. reader may be used to read-out the
WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF NOISE MONITORING? dosimeter’s measurements. Since the dosim-
This revised amendment requires that em- eter is worn by the employee, it measures
ployees be placed in a hearing conservation noise levels in those locations in which the
program if they are exposed to average noise employee travels. A sound level meter can
levels of 85 dB or greater during an 8 hour
also be positioned within the immediate vi-
workday. In order to determine if exposures
cinity of the exposed worker to obtain an in-
are at or above this level, it may be nec-
dividual exposure estimate. Such procedures
essary to measure or monitor the actual
are generally referred to as personal noise
noise levels in the workplace and to estimate
monitoring.
the noise exposure or ‘‘dose’’ received by em-
ployees during the workday. Area monitoring can be used to estimate
WHEN IS IT NECESSARY TO IMPLEMENT A noise exposure when the noise levels are rel-
NOISE MONITORING PROGRAM?
atively constant and employees are not mo-
It is not necessary for every employer to bile. In workplaces where employees move
measure workplace noise. Noise monitoring about in different areas or where the noise
or measuring must be conducted only when intensity tends to fluctuate over time, noise
exposures are at or above 85 dB. Factors exposure is generally more accurately esti-
which suggest that noise exposures in the mated by the personal monitoring approach.
workplace may be at this level include em- In situations where personal monitoring is
ployee complaints about the loudness of appropriate, proper positioning of the micro-
noise, indications that employees are losing phone is necessary to obtain accurate meas-
their hearing, or noisy conditions which urements. With a dosimeter, the microphone
make normal conversation difficult. The em- is generally located on the shoulder and re-
ployer should also consider any information mains in that position for the entire work-
available regarding noise emitted from spe- day. With a sound level meter, the micro-
cific machines. In addition, actual workplace phone is stationed near the employee’s head,
noise measurements can suggest whether or and the instrument is usually held by an in-
not a monitoring program should be initi- dividual who follows the employee as he or
ated. she moves about.
HOW IS NOISE MEASURED? Manufacturer’s instructions, contained in
Basically, there are two different instru- dosimeter and sound level meter operating
ments to measure noise exposures: the sound manuals, should be followed for calibration
224
and maintenance. To ensure accurate re- firms and industrial hygiene firms also pro-
sults, it is considered good professional prac- vide noise monitoring services. Universities
tice to calibrate instruments before and with audiology, industrial hygiene, or acous-
after each use. tical engineering departments may also pro-
HOW OFTEN IS IT NECESSARY TO MONITOR vide information or may be able to help em-
NOISE LEVELS? ployers meet their obligations under this
The amendment requires that when there amendment.
are significant changes in machinery or pro- Free, on-site assistance may be obtained
duction processes that may result in in- from OSHA-supported state and private con-
creased noise levels, remonitoring must be sultation organizations. These safety and
conducted to determine whether additional health consultative entities generally give
employees need to be included in the hearing priority to the needs of small businesses.
conservation program. Many companies
choose to remonitor periodically (once every APPENDIX H TO § 1910.95—AVAILABILITY OF
year or two) to ensure that all exposed em- REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
ployees are included in their hearing con- Paragraphs (c) through (o) of 29 CFR 1910.95
servation programs. and the accompanying appendices contain
WHERE CAN EQUIPMENT AND TECHNICAL AD- provisions which incorporate publications by
VICE BE OBTAINED? reference. Generally, the publications pro-
Noise monitoring equipment may be either vide criteria for instruments to be used in
purchased or rented. Sound level meters cost monitoring and audiometric testing. These
about $500 to $1,000, while dosimeters range criteria are intended to be mandatory when
in price from about $750 to $1,500. Smaller so indicated in the applicable paragraphs of
companies may find it more economical to § 1910.95 and appendices.
rent equipment rather than to purchase it. It should be noted that OSHA does not re-
Names of equipment suppliers may be found quire that employers purchase a copy of the
in the telephone book (Yellow Pages) under referenced publications. Employers, how-
headings such as: ‘‘Safety Equipment,’’ ‘‘In- ever, may desire to obtain a copy of the ref-
dustrial Hygiene,’’ or ‘‘Engineers-Acous- erenced publications for their own informa-
tical.’’ In addition to providing information tion.
on obtaining noise monitoring equipment, The designation of the paragraph of the
many companies and individuals included standard in which the referenced publica-
under such listings can provide professional tions appear, the titles of the publications,
advice on how to conduct a valid noise moni- and the availability of the publications are
toring program. Some audiological testing as follows:
Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from—
Appendix B ......................... ‘‘List of Personal Hearing Protectors and National Technical Information Service, Port Royal
Attenuation Data,’’ HEW Pub. No. 76– Road, Springfield, VA 22161.
120, 1975. NTIS-PB267461.
Appendix D ......................... ‘‘Specification for Sound Level Meters,’’ American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430
S1.4–1971 (R1976). Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
§ 1910.95(k)(2), appendix E ‘‘Specifications for Audiometers,’’ S3.6– American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430
1969. Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
Appendix D ......................... ‘‘Specification for Octave, Half-Octave Back Numbers Department, Dept. STD, American In-
and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets,’’ stitute of Physics, 333 E. 45th St., New York, NY
S1.11–1971 (R1976). 10017; American National Standards Institute, Inc.,
1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
The referenced publications (or a micro- Action level—An 8-hour time-weighted aver-
fiche of the publications) are available for age of 85 decibels measured on the A-scale,
review at many universities and public li- slow response, or equivalently, a dose of
braries throughout the country. These publi- fifty percent.
cations may also be examined at the OSHA Audiogram—A chart, graph, or table result-
Technical Data Center, Room N2439, United ing from an audiometric test showing an
States Department of Labor, 200 Constitu- individual’s hearing threshold levels as a
tion Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210, function of frequency.
(202) 219–7500 or at any OSHA Regional Office
Audiologist—A professional, specializing in
(see telephone directories under United
the study and rehabilitation of hearing,
States Government—Labor Department).
who is certified by the American Speech-
APPENDIX I TO § 1910.95—DEFINITIONS Language-Hearing Association or licensed
by a state board of examiners.
These definitions apply to the following
Baseline audiogram—The audiogram against
terms as used in paragraphs (c) through (n)
of 29 CFR 1910.95. which future audiograms are compared.
225
Criterion sound level—A sound level of 90 exposed to the incident electro-
decibels. magnetic energy.
Decibel (dB)—Unit of measurement of sound (iii) Radiation protection guide. Radi-
level.
Hertz (Hz)—Unit of measurement of fre-
ation level which should not be exceed-
quency, numerically equal to cycles per ed without careful consideration of the
second. reasons for doing so.
Medical pathology—A disorder or disease. (iv) The word ‘‘symbol’’ as used in
For purposes of this regulation, a condi- this specification refers to the overall
tion or disease affecting the ear, which design, shape, and coloring of the rf ra-
should be treated by a physician specialist. diation sign shown in figure G–11.
Noise dose—The ratio, expressed as a per- (v) Whole body irradiation. Pertains to
centage, of (1) the time integral, over a
stated time or event, of the 0.6 power of the
the case in which the entire body is ex-
measured SLOW exponential time-aver- posed to the incident electromagnetic
aged, squared A-weighted sound pressure energy or in which the cross section of
and (2) the product of the criterion dura- the body is smaller than the cross sec-
tion (8 hours) and the 0.6 power of the tion of the incident radiation beam.
squared sound pressure corresponding to (2) Radiation protection guide. (i) For
the criterion sound level (90 dB). normal environmental conditions and
Noise dosimeter—An instrument that inte- for incident electromagnetic energy of
grates a function of sound pressure over a
period of time in such a manner that it di-
frequencies from 10 MHz to 100 GHz,
rectly indicates a noise dose. the radiation protection guide is 10
Otolaryngologist—A physician specializing mW/cm.2 (milliwatt per square centi-
in diagnosis and treatment of disorders of meter) as averaged over any possible
the ear, nose and throat. 0.1-hour period. This means the fol-
Representative exposure—Measurements of lowing:
an employee’s noise dose or 8-hour time-
weighted average sound level that the em- Power density: 10 mW./cm.2 for periods of 0.1-
ployers deem to be representative of the hour or more.
exposures of other employees in the work- Energy density: 1 mW.-hr./cm.2 (milliwatt
place. hour per square centimeter) during any 0.1-
Sound level—Ten times the common loga- hour period.
rithm of the ratio of the square of the
measured A-weighted sound pressure to the This guide applies whether the radi-
square of the standard reference pressure ation is continuous or intermittent.
of 20 micropascals. Unit: decibels (dB). For (ii) These formulated recommenda-
use with this regulation, SLOW time re- tions pertain to both whole body irra-
sponse, in accordance with ANSI S1.4–1971 diation and partial body irradiation.
(R1976), is required. Partial body irradiation must be in-
Sound level meter—An instrument for the
cluded since it has been shown that
measurement of sound level.
Time-weighted average sound level—That some parts of the human body (e.g.,
sound level, which if constant over an 8- eyes, testicles) may be harmed if ex-
hour exposure, would result in the same posed to incident radiation levels sig-
noise dose as is measured. nificantly in excess of the rec-
ommended levels.
FR 4161, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 62845, Dec. 29, (3) Warning symbol. (i) The warning
1981; 48 FR 9776, Mar. 8, 1983; 48 FR 29687, symbol for radio frequency radiation
June 28, 1983; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR hazards shall consist of a red isosceles
9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 73 triangle above an inverted black isos-
FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008] celes triangle, separated and outlined
by an aluminum color border. The
§ 1910.97 Nonionizing radiation. words ‘‘Warning—Radio-Frequency Ra-
(a) Electromagnetic radiation—(1) Defi- diation Hazard’’ shall appear in the
nitions applicable to this paragraph. (i) upper triangle. See figure G–11.
The term electromagnetic radiation is re- (ii) American National Standard
stricted to that portion of the spec- Safety Color Code for Marking Phys-
trum commonly defined as the radio ical Hazards and the Identification of
frequency region, which for the purpose Certain Equipment, Z53.1–1953, which is
of this specification shall include the incorporated by reference as specified
microwave frequency region. in § 1910.6, shall be used for color speci-
(ii) Partial body irradiation. Pertains fication. All lettering and the border
to the case in which part of the body is shall be of aluminum color.
226
(iii) The inclusion and choice of user. If such information is included it
warning information or precautionary shall appear in the lower triangle of
instructions is at the discretion of the the warning symbol.
FIGURE G–11—RADIO-FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD WARNING SYMBOL
227
EC27OC91.024
(4) Scope. This section applies to all Service Contract Act of 1965, or the Na-
radiations originating from radio sta- tional Foundation on Arts and Human-
tions, radar equipment, and other pos- ities Act of 1965, any corresponding es-
sible sources of electromagnetic radi- tablished Federal standard in this sub-
ation such as used for communication, part G which is derived from 41 CFR
radio navigation, and industrial and part 50–204 shall also become effective,
scientific purposes. This section does and shall be applicable to such employ-
not apply to the deliberate exposure of ment and place of employment, on the
patients by, or under the direction of, same date.
practitioners of the healing arts.
(b) [Reserved] Subpart H—Hazardous Materials
FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996] AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35566, June pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
13, 2013, § 1910.97 was amended by revising U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
paragraph (a)(3)(ii), effective Sept. 11, 2013. Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
For the convenience of the user, the revised 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
text is set forth as follows: 96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5–2007
(72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355) or 1–2012 (77
§ 1910.97 Nonionizing radiation. FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sections 1910.103, 1910.106 through 1910.111,
and 1910.119, 1910.120, and 1910.122 through
* * * * * 1910.126 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
(a) * * * Section 1910.119 also issued under Section
(3) * * * 304, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (Pub.
(ii) ANSI Z53.1–1967 or ANSI Z535.1– L. 101–549), reprinted at 29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note.
2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in Section 1910.120 also issued under Section
§ 1910.6, is for use for color specification. All 126, Superfund Amendments and Reauthor-
lettering and the border shall be of alu- ization Act of 1986 as amended (29 U.S.C.A.
minum color. 655 Note), and 5 U.S.C. 553.
§ 1910.101 Compressed gases (general

* * * * * requirements).
§ 1910.98 Effective dates. (a) Inspection of compressed gas cyl-
(a) The provisions of this subpart G inders. Each employer shall determine
shall become effective on August 27, that compressed gas cylinders under
1971, except as provided in the remain- his control are in a safe condition to
ing paragraphs of this section. the extent that this can be determined
(b) The following provisions shall be- by visual inspection. Visual and other
come effective on February 15, 1972: inspections shall be conducted as pre-
scribed in the Hazardous Materials
§ 1910.94 (a)(2)(iii), (a)(3), (a)(4), (b), (c)(2), Regulations of the Department of
(c)(3), (c)(4), (c)(5), (c)(6)(i), (c)(6)(ii), Transportation (49 CFR parts 171–179
(d)(1)(ii), (d)(3), (d)(4), (d)(5), and (d)(7). and 14 CFR part 103). Where those regu-
(c) Notwithstanding anything in lations are not applicable, visual and
paragraph (a), (b), or (d) of this section, other inspections shall be conducted in
any provision in any other section of accordance with Compressed Gas Asso-
this subpart which contains in itself a ciation Pamphlets C–6–1968 and C–8–
specific effective date or time limita- 1962, which is incorporated by reference
tion shall become effective on such as specified in § 1910.6.
date or shall apply in accordance with (b) Compressed gases. The in-plant
such limitation. handling, storage, and utilization of all
(d) Notwithstanding anything in compressed gases in cylinders, portable
paragraph (a) of this section, if any tanks, rail tankcars, or motor vehicle
standard in 41 CFR part 50–204, other cargo tanks shall be in accordance with
than a national consensus standard in- Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet
corporated by reference in § 50– P–1–1965, which is incorporated by ref-
204.2(a)(1), is or becomes applicable at erence as specified in § 1910.6.
any time to any employment and place (c) Safety relief devices for compressed
of employment, by virtue of the Walsh- gas containers. Compressed gas cyl-
Healey Public Contracts Act, or the inders, portable tanks, and cargo tanks
228
shall have pressure relief devices in- lene cylinders were constructed or in-
stalled and maintained in accordance stalled prior to February 16, 2006, these
with Compressed Gas Association Pam- employers may comply with the provi-
phlets S–1.1–1963 and 1965 addenda and sions of NFPA 51A–2001 (‘‘Standard for
S–1.2–1963, which is incorporated by ref- Acetylene Charging Plants’’) (National
erence as specified in § 1910.6. Fire Protection Association, 2001 ed.,
2001).
FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996] (3) The provisions of § 1910.102(c)(2)
also apply when the facilities, equip-
§ 1910.102 Acetylene. ment, structures, or installations were
(a) Cylinders. Employers must ensure approved for construction or installa-
that the in-plant transfer, handling, tion prior to February 16, 2006, but con-
storage, and use of acetylene in cyl- structed and installed on or after that
inders comply with the provisions of date.
CGA Pamphlet G–1–2009 (‘‘Acetylene’’) [74 FR 40447, Aug. 11, 2009, as amended at 76
(incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6). FR 75786, Dec. 5, 2011]
(b) Piped systems. (1) Employers must
comply with Chapter 9 (‘‘Acetylene § 1910.103 Hydrogen.
Piping’’) of NFPA 51A–2006 (‘‘Standard (a) General—(1) Definitions. As used in
for Acetylene Charging Plants’’) (Na- this section (i) Gaseous hydrogen sys-
tional Fire Protection Association, 2006 tem is one in which the hydrogen is de-
ed., 2006). livered, stored and discharged in the
(2) When employers can demonstrate gaseous form to consumer’s piping. The
that the facilities, equipment, struc- system includes stationary or movable
tures, or installations used to generate containers, pressure regulators, safety
acetylene or to charge (fill) acetylene relief devices, manifolds, inter-
cylinders were installed prior to Feb- connecting piping and controls. The
ruary 16, 2006, these employers may system terminates at the point where
comply with the provisions of Chapter hydrogen at service pressure first en-
7 (‘‘Acetylene Piping’’) of NFPA 51A– ters the consumer’s distribution pip-
2001 (‘‘Standard for Acetylene Charging ing.
Plants’’) (National Fire Protection As- (ii) Approved—Means, unless other-
sociation, 2001 ed., 2001). wise indicated, listed or approved by a
(3) The provisions of § 1910.102(b)(2) nationally recognized testing labora-
also apply when the facilities, equip- tory. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of
ment, structures, or installations used nationally recognized testing labora-
to generate acetylene or to charge (fill) tory.
acetylene cylinders were approved for (iii) Listed—See ‘‘approved’’.
construction or installation prior to (iv) ASME—American Society of Me-
February 16, 2006, but constructed and chanical Engineers.
installed on or after that date. (v) DOT Specifications—Regulations
(4) For additional information on of the Department of Transportation
acetylene piping systems, see CGA G– published in 49 CFR Chapter I.
1.2–2006, part 3 (‘‘Acetylene piping’’) (vi) DOT regulations—See § 1910.103
(Compressed Gas Association, Inc., 3rd (a)(1)(v).
ed., 2006). (2) Scope—(i) Gaseous hydrogen sys-
(c) Generators and filling cylinders. (1) tems. (a) Paragraph (b) of this section
Employers must ensure that facilities, applies to the installation of gaseous
equipment, structures, or installations hydrogen systems on consumer prem-
used to generate acetylene or to charge ises where the hydrogen supply to the
(fill) acetylene cylinders comply with consumer premises originates outside
the provisions of NFPA 51A–2006 the consumer premises and is delivered
(‘‘Standard for Acetylene Charging by mobile equipment.
Plants’’) (National Fire Protection As- (b) Paragraph (b) of this section does
sociation, 2006 ed., 2006). not apply to gaseous hydrogen systems
(2) When employers can demonstrate having a total hydrogen content of less
that the facilities, equipment, struc- than 400 cubic feet, nor to hydrogen
tures, or installations used to generate manufacturing plants or other estab-
acetylene or to charge (fill) of acety- lishments operated by the hydrogen
229
supplier or his agent for the purpose of escaping gas upon the container, adja-
storing hydrogen and refilling portable cent structure or personnel. This re-
containers, trailers, mobile supply quirement does not apply to DOT Spec-
trucks, or tank cars. ification containers having an internal
(ii) Liquefied hydrogen systems. (a) volume of 2 cubic feet or less.
Paragraph (c) of this section applies to (c) Safety relief devices or vent pip-
the installation of liquefied hydrogen ing shall be designed or located so that
systems on consumer premises. moisture cannot collect and freeze in a
(b) Paragraph (c) of this section does manner which would interfere with
not apply to liquefied hydrogen port- proper operation of the device.
able containers of less than 150 liters (iii) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a)
(39.63 gallons) capacity; nor to liquefied Piping, tubing, and fittings shall be
hydrogen manufacturing plants or suitable for hydrogen service and for
other establishments operated by the the pressures and temperatures in-
hydrogen supplier or his agent for the volved. Cast iron pipe and fittings shall
sole purpose of storing liquefied hydro- not be used.
gen and refilling portable containers, (b) Piping and tubing shall conform
trailers, mobile supply trucks, or tank to section 2—‘‘Industrial Gas and Air
cars. Piping’’—Code for Pressure Piping,
(b) Gaseous hydrogen systems—(1) De- ANSI B31.1–1967 with addenda B31.1–
sign—(i) Containers. (a) Hydrogen con- 1969, which is incorporated by reference
tainers shall comply with one of the as specified in § 1910.6.
following: (c) Joints in piping and tubing may
(1) Designed, constructed, and tested be made by welding or brazing or by
in accordance with appropriate require- use of flanged, threaded, socket, or
ments of ASME Boiler and Pressure compression fittings. Gaskets and
Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired thread sealants shall be suitable for
Pressure Vessels—1968, which is incor- hydrogen service.
porated by reference as specified in (iv) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves,
§ 1910.6. gauges, regulators, and other acces-
(2) Designed, constructed, tested and sories shall be suitable for hydrogen
maintained in accordance with U.S. service.
Department of Transportation Speci-
(b) Installation of hydrogen systems
fications and Regulations.
shall be supervised by personnel famil-
(b) Permanently installed containers
iar with proper practices with ref-
shall be provided with substantial non-
erence to their construction and use.
combustible supports on firm non-
combustible foundations. (c) Storage containers, piping, valves,
(c) Each portable container shall be regulating equipment, and other acces-
legibly marked with the name ‘‘Hydro- sories shall be readily accessible, and
gen’’ in accordance with the marking shall be protected against physical
requirements set forth in damage and against tampering.
§ 1910.253(b)(1)(ii). Each manifolded hy- (d) Cabinets or housings containing
drogen supply unit shall be legibly hydrogen control or operating equip-
marked with the name ‘‘Hydrogen’’ or ment shall be adequately ventilated.
a legend such as ‘‘This unit contains (e) Each mobile hydrogen supply unit
hydrogen.’’ used as part of a hydrogen system shall
(ii) Safety relief devices. (a) Hydrogen be adequately secured to prevent move-
containers shall be equipped with safe- ment.
ty relief devices as required by the (f) Mobile hydrogen supply units
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, shall be electrically bonded to the sys-
section VIII Unfired Pressure Vessels, tem before discharging hydrogen.
1968 or the DOT Specifications and (v) Marking. The hydrogen storage lo-
Regulations under which the container cation shall be permanently placarded
is fabricated. as follows: ‘‘HYDROGEN—FLAM-
(b) Safety relief devices shall be ar- MABLE GAS—NO SMOKING—NO
ranged to discharge upward and unob- OPEN FLAMES,’’ or equivalent.
structed to the open air in such a man- (vi) Testing. After installations, all
ner as to prevent any impingement of piping, tubing, and fittings shall be
230
tested and proved hydrogen gas tight TABLE H–1
at maximum operating pressure.
(2) Location—(i) General. (a) The sys- Size of hydrogen system
tem shall be located so that it is read- Nature of location Less than 3,000 CF In excess
ily accessible to delivery equipment to 15,000 of 15,000
3,000 CF CF CF
and to authorized personnel.
(b) Systems shall be located above Outdoors .................... I ............... IDI..
ground. In a separate building II .............. II .............. II.
(c) Systems shall not be located be- In a special room ...... III ............. III ............. Not per-
mitted.
neath electric power lines. Inside buildings not in IV ............. Not per- Not per-
(d) Systems shall not be located close a special room and mitted. mitted.
to flammable liquid piping or piping of exposed to other
other flammable gases. occupancies.
(e) Systems near aboveground flam-
mable liquid storage shall be located (b) The minimum distance in feet
on ground higher than the flammable from a hydrogen system of indicated
liquid storage except when dikes, di- capacity located outdoors, in separate
version curbs, grading, or separating buildings or in special rooms to any
solid walls are used to prevent accumu- specified outdoor exposure shall be in
lation of flammable liquids under the accordance with Table H–2.
system. (c) The distances in Table H–2 Items
(ii) Specific requirements. (a) The loca- 1 and 3 to 10 inclusive do not apply
tion of a system, as determined by the where protective structures such as
maximum total contained volume of adequate fire walls are located between
hydrogen, shall be in the order of pref- the system and the exposure.
erence as indicated by Roman numer-
als in Table H–1.
TABLE H–2
Type of outdoor exposure Size of hydrogen system
Less than 3,000 CF In excess

to 15,000 of 15,000
3,000 CF
CF CF
1. Building or structure ............................... Wood frame construction 1 ........................ 10 25 50

Heavy timber, noncombustible or ordinary 0 10 2 25
construction 1.
Fire-resistive construction 1 ........................ 0 0 0
2. Wall openings ......................................... Not above any part of a system ................ 10 10 10
Above any part of a system ...................... 25 25 25
3. Flammable liquids above ground. .......... 0 to 1,000 gallons ...................................... 10 25 25
In excess of 1,000 gallons ......................... 25 50 50
4. Flammable liquids below ground—0 to Tank ........................................................... 10 10 10
1,000 gallons. Vent or fill opening of tank ........................ 25 25 25
5. Flammable liquids below ground—in ex- Tank ........................................................... 20 20 20
cess of 1,000 gallons.. Vent or fill opening of tank ........................ 25 25 25
6. Flammable gas storage, either high 0 to 15,000 CF capacity ............................ 10 25 25
pressure or low pressure.. In excess of 15,000 CF capacity ............... 25 50 50
7. Oxygen storage ...................................... 12,000 CF or less 4 .................................... .................. .................. ..................
More than 12,000 CF 5 .............................. .................. .................. ..................
8. Fast burning solids such as ordinary lumber, excelsior or paper .................................. 50 50 50
9. Slow burning solids such as heavy timber or coal ......................................................... 25 25 25
10. Open flames and other sources of ignition ................................................................... 25 25 25
11. Air compressor intakes or inlets to ventilating or air-conditioning equipment .............. 50 50 50
12. Concentration of people 3 .............................................................................................. 25 50 50
1 Refer to NFPA No. 220 Standard Types of Building Construction for definitions of various types of construction. (1969 Ed.)
2 But not less than one-half the height of adjacent side wall of the structure.
3 Incongested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock areas.
4 Refer to NFPA No. 51, gas systems for welding and cutting (1969).
5 Refer to NFPA No. 566, bulk oxygen systems at consumer sites (1969).
(d) Hydrogen systems of less than be situated in the building so that the
3,000 CF when located inside buildings system will be as follows:
and exposed to other occupancies shall
231
(1) In an adequately ventilated area one or any combination of the fol-
as in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(b) of this sec- lowing: Walls of light, noncombustible
tion. material, preferably single thickness,
(2) Twenty feet from stored flam- single strength glass; lightly fastened
mable materials or oxidizing gases. hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging
(3) Twenty-five feet from open doors in exterior walls opening out-
flames, ordinary electrical equipment ward; lightly fastened walls or roof de-
or other sources of ignition. signed to relieve at a maximum pres-
(4) Twenty-five feet from concentra- sure of 25 pounds per square foot.
tions of people. (d) There shall be no sources of igni-
(5) Fifty feet from intakes of ventilation from open flames, electrical equip-
tion or air-conditioning equipment and ment, or heating equipment.
air compressors. (e) Electrical equipment shall be in
(6) Fifty feet from other flammable accordance with subpart S of this part
gas storage. for Class I, Division 2 locations.
(7) Protected against damage or in- (f) Heating, if provided, shall be by
jury due to falling objects or working steam, hot water, or other indirect
activity in the area. means.
(8) More than one system of 3,000 CF (iii) Special rooms. (a) Floor, walls,
or less may be installed in the same and ceiling shall have a fire-resistance
room, provided the systems are separating of at least 2 hours. Walls or par-
rated by at least 50 feet. Each such sys- titions shall be continuous from floor
tem shall meet all of the requirements to ceiling and shall be securely an-
of this paragraph. chored. At least one wall shall be an
(3) Design consideration at specific loca- exterior wall. Openings to other parts
tions—(i) Outdoor locations. (a) Where of the building shall not be permitted.
protective walls or roofs are provided, Windows and doors shall be in exterior
they shall be constructed of non- walls and shall be located so as to be
combustible materials. readily accessible in case of emer-
(b) Where the enclosing sides adjoin gency. Windows shall be of glass or
each other, the area shall be properly plastic in metal frames.
ventilated. (b) Ventilation shall be as provided in
(c) Electrical equipment within 15 paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(b) of this section.
feet shall be in accordance with sub- (c) Explosion venting shall be as pro-
part S of this part. vided in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(c) of this
(ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate section.
buildings shall be built of at least non- (d) There shall be no sources of igni-
combustible construction. Windows tion from open flames, electrical equip-
and doors shall be located so as to be ment, or heating equipment.
readily accessible in case of emer- (e) Electric equipment shall be in ac-
gency. Windows shall be of glass or cordance with the requirements of sub-
plastic in metal frames. part S of this part for Class I, Division
(b) Adequate ventilation to the out- 2 locations.
doors shall be provided. Inlet openings (f) Heating, if provided, shall be by
shall be located near the floor in exte- steam, hot water, or indirect means.
rior walls only. Outlet openings shall (4) Operating instructions. For instal-
be located at the high point of the lations which require any operation of
room in exterior walls or roof. Inlet equipment by the user, legible instruc-
and outlet openings shall each have tions shall be maintained at operating
minimum total area of one (1) square locations.
foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room vol- (5) Maintenance. The equipment and
ume. Discharge from outlet openings functioning of each charged gaseous
shall be directed or conducted to a safe hydrogen system shall be maintained
location. in a safe operating condition in accord-
(c) Explosion venting shall be pro- ance with the requirements of this sec-
vided in exterior walls or roof only. tion. The area within 15 feet of any hy-
The venting area shall be equal to not drogen container shall be kept free of
less than 1 square foot per 30 cubic feet dry vegetation and combustible mate-
of room volume and may consist of any rial.
232
(c) Liquefied hydrogen systems—(1) De- graph (c)(2)(i)(f) of this section for
sign—(i) Containers. (a) Hydrogen con- venting of safety relief devices in spe-
tainers shall comply with the fol- cial locations.
lowing: Storage containers shall be de- (c) Safety relief devices or vent pip-
signed, constructed, and tested in ac- ing shall be designed or located so that
cordance with appropriate require- moisture cannot collect and freeze in a
ments of the ASME Boiler and Pres- manner which would interfere with
sure Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired proper operation of the device.
Pressure Vessels (1968) or applicable (d) Safety relief devices shall be pro-
provisions of API Standard 620, Rec- vided in piping wherever liquefied hy-
ommended Rules for Design and Con- drogen could be trapped between clo-
struction of Large, Welded, Low-Pres- sures.
sure Storage Tanks, Second Edition (v) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a) Pip-
(June 1963) and appendix R (April 1965), ing, tubing, and fittings and gasket and
which is incorporated by reference as thread sealants shall be suitable for
specified in § 1910.6. hydrogen service at the pressures and
(b) Portable containers shall be de- temperatures involved. Consideration
signed, constructed and tested in ac- shall be given to the thermal expansion
cordance with DOT Specifications and and contraction of piping systems
Regulations. when exposed to temperature fluctua-
(ii) Supports. Permanently installed
tions of ambient to liquefied hydrogen
containers shall be provided with sub-
temperatures.
stantial noncombustible supports se-
(b) Gaseous hydrogen piping and tub-
curely anchored on firm noncombus-
tible foundations. Steel supports in ex- ing (above ¥20 °F.) shall conform to
cess of 18 inches in height shall be pro- the applicable sections of Pressure Pip-
tected with a protective coating having ing section 2—Industrial Gas and Air
a 2-hour fire-resistance rating. Piping, ANSI B31.1–1967 with addenda
(iii) Marking. Each container shall be B31.1–1969. Design of liquefied hydrogen
legibly marked to indicate ‘‘LIQUE- or cold (¥20 °F. or below) gas piping
FIED HYDROGEN—FLAMMABLE shall use Petroleum Refinery Piping
GAS.’’ ANSI B31.3–1966 or Refrigeration Pip-
(iv) Safety relief devices. (a)(1) Sta- ing ANSI B31.5–1966 with addenda
tionary liquefied hydrogen containers B31.5a–1968 as a guide, which are incor-
shall be equipped with safety relief de- porated by reference as specified in
vices sized in accordance with CGA § 1910.6.
Pamphlet S–1, part 3, Safety Relief De- (c) Joints in piping and tubing shall
vice Standards for Compressed Gas preferably be made by welding or braz-
Storage Containers, which is incor- ing; flanged, threaded, socket, or suit-
porated by reference as specified in able compression fittings may be used.
§ 1910.6. (d) Means shall be provided to mini-
(2) Portable liquefied hydrogen con- mize exposure of personnel to piping
tainers complying with the U.S. De- operating at low temperatures and to
partment of Transportation Regula- prevent air condensate from contacting
tions shall be equipped with safety re- piping, structural members, and sur-
lief devices as required in the U.S. De- faces not suitable for cryogenic tem-
partment of Transportation Specifica- peratures. Only those insulating mate-
tions and Regulations. Safety relief de- rials which are rated nonburning in ac-
vices shall be sized in accordance with cordance with ASTM Procedures D1692–
the requirements of CGA Pamphlet S– 68, which is incorporated by reference
1, Safety Relief Device Standards, part as specified in § 1910.6, may be used.
1, Compressed Gas Cylinders and part 2, Other protective means may be used to
Cargo and Portable Tank Containers. protect personnel. The insulation shall
(b) Safety relief devices shall be ar- be designed to have a vapor-tight seal
ranged to discharge unobstructed to in the outer covering to prevent the
the outdoors and in such a manner as condensation of air and subsequent ox-
to prevent impingement of escaping ygen enrichment within the insulation.
liquid or gas upon the container, adja- The insulation material and outside
cent structures or personnel. See para- shield shall also be of adequate design
233
to prevent attrition of the insulation (b) The vaporizer and its piping shall
due to normal operating conditions. be adequately protected on the hydro-
(e) Uninsulated piping and equipment gen and heating media sections with
which operate at liquefied-hydrogen safety relief devices.
temperature shall not be installed (c) Heat used in a liquefied hydrogen
above asphalt surfaces or other com- vaporizer shall be indirectly supplied
bustible materials in order to prevent utilizing media such as air, steam,
contact of liquid air with such mate- water, or water solutions.
rials. Drip pans may be installed under (d) A low temperature shutoff switch
uninsulated piping and equipment to shall be provided in the vaporizer dis-
retain and vaporize condensed liquid charge piping to prevent flow of lique-
air. fied hydrogen in the event of the loss of
(vi) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves, the heat source.
gauges, regulators, and other acces- (ix) Electrical systems. (a) Electrical
sories shall be suitable for liquefied hy- wiring and equipment located within 3
drogen service and for the pressures feet of a point where connections are
and temperatures involved. regularly made and disconnected, shall
(b) Installation of liquefied hydrogen be in accordance with subpart S of this
systems shall be supervised by per- part, for Class I, Group B, Division 1 lo-
sonnel familiar with proper practices cations.
(b) Except as provided in (a) of this
and with reference to their construc-
subdivision, electrical wiring, and
tion and use.
equipment located within 25 feet of a
(c) Storage containers, piping, valves,
point where connections are regularly
regulating equipment, and other acces- made and disconnected or within 25
sories shall be readily accessible and feet of a liquid hydrogen storage con-
shall be protected against physical tainer, shall be in accordance with sub-
damage and against tampering. A shut- part S of this part, for Class I, Group B,
off valve shall be located in liquid Division 2 locations. When equipment
product withdrawal lines as close to approved for class I, group B
the container as practical. On con- atmospheres is not commercially avail-
tainers of over 2,000 gallons capacity, able, the equipment may be—
this shutoff valve shall be of the re- (1) Purged or ventilated in accord-
mote control type with no connections, ance with NFPA No. 496–1967, Standard
flanges, or other appurtenances (other for Purged Enclosures for Electrical
than a welded manual shutoff valve) al- Equipment in Hazardous Locations,
lowed in the piping between the shutoff (2) Intrinsically safe, or
valve and its connection to the inner (3) Approved for Class I, Group C
container. atmospheres. This requirement does
(d) Cabinets or housings containing not apply to electrical equipment
hydrogen control equipment shall be which is installed on mobile supply
ventilated to prevent any accumula- trucks or tank cars from which the
tion of hydrogen gas. storage container is filled.
(vii) Testing. (a) After installation, (x) Bonding and grounding. The lique-
all field-erected piping shall be tested fied hydrogen container and associated
and proved hydrogen gas-tight at oper- piping shall be electrically bonded and
ating pressure and temperature. grounded.
(b) Containers if out of service in ex- (2) Location of liquefied hydrogen stor-
cess of 1 year shall be inspected and age—(i) General requirements. (a) The
tested as outlined in (a) of this subdivi- storage containers shall be located so
sion. The safety relief devices shall be that they are readily accessible to mo-
checked to determine if they are oper- bile supply equipment at ground level
able and properly set. and to authorized personnel.
(viii) Liquefied hydrogen vaporizers. (a) (b) The containers shall not be ex-
The vaporizer shall be anchored and its posed by electric power lines, flam-
connecting piping shall be sufficiently mable liquid lines, flammable gas lines,
flexible to provide for the effect of ex- or lines carrying oxidizing materials.
pansion and contraction due to tem- (c) When locating liquified hydrogen
perature changes. storage containers near above-ground
234
flammable liquid storage or liquid oxygen—Flammable Gas—No Smoking—
gen storage, it is advisable to locate No Open Flames.’’
the liquefied hydrogen container on (f) If liquified hydrogen is located in
ground higher than flammable liquid (as specified in Table H–3) a separate
storage or liquid oxygen storage. building, in a special room, or inside
(d) Where it is necessary to locate buildings when not in a special room
the liquefied hydrogen container on and exposed to other occupancies, con-
ground that is level with or lower than tainers shall have the safety relief de-
adjacent flammable liquid storage or
vices vented unobstructed to the out-
liquid oxygen storage, suitable protec-
doors at a minimum elevation of 25 feet
tive means shall be taken (such as by
diking, diversion curbs, grading), with above grade to a safe location as re-
respect to the adjacent flammable liq- quired in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(b) of this
uid storage or liquid oxygen storage, to section.
prevent accumulation of liquids within (ii) Specific requirements. (a) The loca-
50 feet of the liquefied hydrogen con- tion of liquefied hydrogen storage, as
tainer. determined by the maximum total
(e) Storage sites shall be fenced and quantity of liquified hydrogen, shall be
posted to prevent entrance by unau- in the order of preference as indicated
thorized personnel. Sites shall also be by Roman numerals in the following
placarded as follows: ‘‘Liquefied Hydro- Table H–3.
TABLE H–3—MAXIMUM TOTAL QUANTITY OF LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN STORAGE PERMITTED
Size of hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons)
Nature of location
39.63 (150 liters)
to 50 51 to 300 301 to 600 In excess of 600
Outdoors ................................................................. I ......................... I ......................... I ......................... I.

In a separate building ............................................. II ........................ II ........................ II ........................ Not permitted.
In a special room .................................................... III ....................... III ....................... Not permitted .... Do.
Inside buildings not in a special room and ex- IV ....................... Not permitted .... ......do ................ Do.
posed to other occupancies.
NOTE: This table does not apply to the storage in dewars of the type generally used in laboratories for experimental purposes.
(b) The minimum distance in feet TABLE H–4—MINIMUM DISTANCE (FEET) FROM
from liquefied hydrogen systems of in- LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN SYSTEMS TO EXPO-
dicated storage capacity located out- SURE 1,2—Continued
doors, in a separate building, or in a
Liquefied hydrogen storage
special room to any specified exposure (capacity in gallons)
shall be in accordance with Table H–4.
Type of exposure 39.63 15,001
(150 li- 3,501 to
TABLE H–4—MINIMUM DISTANCE (FEET) FROM ters) to 15,000
to
30,000
LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN SYSTEMS TO EXPO- 3,500
SURE 1,2
6. Between stationary lique-
fied hydrogen containers 5 5 5
Liquefied hydrogen storage
(capacity in gallons) 7. Flammable gas storage .. 50 75 100
8. Liquid oxygen storage
Type of exposure 39.63 and other oxidizers (see
(150 li- 3,501 to 15,001
to 513 and 514) ................... 100 100 100
ters) to 15,000
3,500 30,000 9. Combustible solids .......... 50 75 100
10. Open flames, smoking
1. Fire-resistive building and and welding ...................... 50 50 50
fire walls 3 ......................... 5 5 5 11. Concentrations of peo-
2. Noncombustible building 3 25 50 75 ple .................................... 75 75 75
3. Other buildings 3 .............. 50 75 100
1 The distance in Nos. 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 12 in Table H–4
4. Wall openings, air-com-
pressor intakes, inlets for may be reduced where protective structures, such as firewalls
equal to height of top of the container, to safeguard the lique-
air-conditioning or ven- fied hydrogen storage system, are located between the lique-
tilating equipment ............. 75 75 75 fied hydrogen storage installation and the exposure.
5. Flammable liquids (above 2 Where protective structures are provided, ventilation and
ground and vent or fill confinement of product should be considered. The 5-foot dis-
openings if below ground) tance in Nos. 1 and 6 facilitates maintenance and enhances
(see 513 and 514) ........... 50 75 100 ventilation.
235
3 Refer to Standard Types of Building Construction, NFPA
No. 220–1969 for definitions of various types of construction.
(c) If protective walls are provided,
In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker they shall be constructed of non-
rooms, time-clock areas. combustible materials and in accord-
(iii) Handling of liquefied hydrogen in- ance with the provisions of paragraph
side buildings other than separate build- (c)(3)(i)(a) of this section.
ings and special rooms. Portable lique- (d) Electrical wiring and equipment
fied hydrogen containers of 50 gallons shall comply with paragraph (c)(1)(ix)
or less capacity as permitted in Table (a) and (b) of this section.
H–3 and in compliance with subdivision (e) Adequate lighting shall be pro-
(i)(f) of this subparagraph when housed vided for nighttime transfer operation.
inside buildings not located in a special (ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate
room and exposed to other occupancies buildings shall be of light noncombus-
shall comply with the following min- tible construction on a substantial
imum requirements: frame. Walls and roofs shall be lightly
(a) Be located 20 feet from flammable fastened and designed to relieve at a
liquids and readily combustible mate- maximum internal pressure of 25
rials such as excelsior or paper. pounds per square foot. Windows shall
(b) Be located 25 feet from ordinary be of shatterproof glass or plastic in
electrical equipment and other sources metal frames. Doors shall be located in
of ignition including process or analyt- such a manner that they will be readily
ical equipment. accessible to personnel in an emer-
(c) Be located 25 feet from concentra- gency.
tions of people. (b) Adequate ventilation to the out-
(d) Be located 50 feet from intakes of doors shall be provided. Inlet openings
ventilation and air-conditioning equip- shall be located near the floor level in
ment or intakes of compressors. exterior walls only. Outlet openings
(e) Be located 50 feet from storage of shall be located at the high point of the
other flammable-gases or storage of room in exterior walls or roof. Both the
oxidizing gases. inlet and outlet vent openings shall
(f) Containers shall be protected have a minimum total area of 1 square
against damage or injury due to falling foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room vol-
objects or work activity in the area. ume. Discharge from outlet openings
(g) Containers shall be firmly secured shall be directed or conducted to a safe
and stored in an upright position. location.
(h) Welding or cutting operations, (c) There shall be no sources of igni-
and smoking shall be prohibited while tion.
hydrogen is in the room. (d) Electrical wiring and equipment
(i) The area shall be adequately ven- shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1)(ix)
tilated. Safety relief devices on the (a) and (b) of this section except that
containers shall be vented directly out- the provisions of paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b)
doors or to a suitable hood. See para- of this section shall apply to all elec-
graphs (c)(1)(iv)(b) and (c)(2)(i)(f) of trical wiring and equipment in the sep-
this section. arate building.
(3) Design considerations at specific lo- (e) Heating, if provided, shall be by
cations—(i) Outdoor locations. (a) Out- steam, hot water, or other indirect
door location shall mean outside of any means.
building or structure, and includes lo- (iii) Special rooms. (a) Floors, walls,
cations under a weather shelter or can- and ceilings shall have a fire resistance
opy provided such locations are not en- rating of at least 2 hours. Walls or par-
closed by more than two walls set at titions shall be continuous from floor
right angles and are provided with to ceiling and shall be securely an-
vent-space between the walls and vent- chored. At least one wall shall be an
ed roof or canopy. exterior wall. Openings to other parts
(b) Roadways and yard surfaces lo- of the building shall not be permitted.
cated below liquefied hydrogen piping, Windows and doors shall be in exterior
from which liquid air may drip, shall walls and doors shall be located in such
be constructed of noncombustible ma- a manner that they will be accessible
terials. in an emergency. Windows shall be of
236
shatterproof glass or plastic in metal § 1910.104 Oxygen.
frames.
(a) Scope. This section applies to the
(b) Ventilation shall be as provided in
installation of bulk oxygen systems on
paragraph (c)(3)(ii)(b) of this section.
industrial and institutional consumer
(c) Explosion venting shall be pro-
vided in exterior walls or roof only. premises. This section does not apply
The venting area shall be equal to not to oxygen manufacturing plants or
less than 1 square foot per 30 cubic feet other establishments operated by the
of room volume and may consist of any oxygen supplier or his agent for the
one or any combination of the fol- purpose of storing oxygen and refilling
lowing: Walls of light noncombustible portable containers, trailers, mobile
material; lightly fastened hatch covers; supply trucks, or tank cars, nor to sys-
lightly fastened swinging doors open- tems having capacities less than those
ing outward in exterior walls; lightly stated in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
fastened walls or roofs designed to re- tion.
lieve at a maximum pressure of 25 (b) Bulk oxygen systems—(1) Definition.
pounds per square foot. As used in this section: A bulk oxygen
(d) There shall be no sources of igni- system is an assembly of equipment,
tion. such as oxygen storage containers,
(e) Electrical wiring and equipment pressure regulators, safety devices, va-
shall comply with paragraph (c)(1)(ix) porizers, manifolds, and inter-
(a) and (b) of this section except that connecting piping, which has storage
the provision of paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b) capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet
of this section shall apply to all elec- of oxygen, Normal Temperature and
trical wiring and equipment in the spe- Pressure (NTP), connected in service or
cial room. ready for service, or more than 25,000
(f) Heating, if provided, shall be cubic feet of oxygen (NTP) including
steam, hot water, or by other indirect unconnected reserves on hand at the
means. site. The bulk oxygen system termi-
(4) Operating instructions—(i) Written nates at the point where oxygen at
instructions. For installation which re- service pressure first enters the supply
quire any operation of equipment by line. The oxygen containers may be
the user, legible instructions shall be stationary or movable, and the oxygen
maintained at operating locations. may be stored as gas or liquid.
(ii) Attendant. A qualified person (2) Location—(i) General. Bulk oxygen
shall be in attendance at all times storage systems shall be located above
while the mobile hydrogen supply unit ground out of doors, or shall be in-
is being unloaded. stalled in a building of noncombustible
(iii) Security. Each mobile liquefied construction, adequately vented, and
hydrogen supply unit used as part of a used for that purpose exclusively. The
hydrogen system shall be adequately location selected shall be such that
secured to prevent movement. containers and associated equipment
(iv) Grounding. The mobile liquefied
shall not be exposed by electric power
hydrogen supply unit shall be grounded
lines, flammable or combustible liquid
for static electricity.
lines, or flammable gas lines.
(5) Maintenance. The equipment and
functioning of each charged liquefied (ii) Accessibility. The system shall be
hydrogen system shall be maintained located so that it is readily accessible
in a safe operating condition in accord- to mobile supply equipment at ground
ance with the requirements of this sec- level and to authorized personnel.
tion. Weeds or similar combustibles (iii) Leakage. Where oxygen is stored
shall not be permitted within 25 feet of as a liquid, noncombustible surfacing
any liquefied hydrogen equipment. shall be provided in an area in which
any leakage of liquid oxygen might fall
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 during operation of the system and fill-
FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12,
1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, ing of a storage container. For pur-
June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 poses of this paragraph, asphaltic or bi-
FR 31881, June 8, 2004; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, tuminous paving is considered to be
2007] combustible.
237
(iv) Elevation. When locating bulk ox- Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons)
ygen systems near above-ground flam-
25 .................................................. 0 to 1000.
mable or combustible liquid storage
50 .................................................. 1001 or more.
which may be either indoors or out-
doors, it is advisable to locate the sys-
(viii) Combustible liquid storage below-
tem on ground higher than the flam-
ground.
mable or combustible liquid storage.
(v) Dikes. Where it is necessary to lo- Distance from oxygen stor-
Distance measured hori-
cate a bulk oxygen system on ground zontally from oxygen storage age container to filling and
vent connections or openings
lower than adjacent flammable or com- container to combustible liq- to combustible liquid tank
uid tank (feet)
bustible liquid storage suitable means (feet)
shall be taken (such as by diking, di-
15 ........................................... 40.
version curbs, or grading) with respect
to the adjacent flammable or combus-
(ix) Flammable gas storage. (Such as
tible liquid storage to prevent accumu-
compressed flammable gases, liquefied
lation of liquids under the bulk oxygen
flammable gases and flammable gases
system.
(3) Distance between systems and expo- in low pressure gas holders):
sures—(i) General. The minimum dis- Distance (feet) Capacity (cu. ft. NTP)
tance from any bulk oxygen storage
container to exposures, measured in 50 .................................................. Less than 5000.
the most direct line except as indicated 90 .................................................. 5000 or more.
in paragraphs (b)(3) (vi) and (viii) of
this section, shall be as indicated in (x) Highly combustible materials. Fifty
paragraphs (b)(3) (ii) to (xviii) of this feet from solid materials which burn
section inclusive. rapidly, such as excelsior or paper.
(ii) Combustible structures. Fifty feet (xi) Slow-burning materials. Twenty-
from any combustible structures. five feet from solid materials which
(iii) Fire resistive structures. Twenty- burn slowly, such as coal and heavy
five feet from any structures with fire- timber.
resistive exterior walls or sprinklered (xii) Ventilation. Seventy-five feet in
buildings of other construction, but one direction and 35 feet in approxi-
not less than one-half the height of ad- mately 90° direction from confining
jacent side wall of the structure. walls (not including firewalls less than
(iv) Openings. At least 10 feet from 20 feet high) to provide adequate ven-
any opening in adjacent walls of fire tilation in courtyards and similar con-
resistive structures. Spacing from such fining areas.
structures shall be adequate to permit (xiii) Congested areas. Twenty-five
maintenance, but shall not be less than feet from congested areas such as of-
1 foot. fices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time
(v) Flammable liquid storage above- clock areas, and similar locations
ground. where people may congregate.
Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons) (xiv)–(xvii) [Reserved]
(xviii) Exceptions. The distances in
50 .................................................. 0 to 1000. paragraphs (b)(3) (ii), (iii), (v) to (xi) in-
90 .................................................. 1001 or more.
clusive, of this section do not apply
(vi) Flammable liquid storage below- where protective structures such as
ground. firewalls of adequate height to safe-
guard the oxygen storage systems are
Distance measured Distance from oxygen located between the bulk oxygen stor-
storage container to
horizontally from oxy- filling and vent con- Capacity gal- age installation and the exposure. In
gen storage container
to flammable liquid nections or openings lons such cases, the bulk oxygen storage in-
to flammable liquid
tank (feet)
tank (feet) stallation may be a minimum distance
of 1 foot from the firewall.
15 .............................. 50 .............................. 0 to 1000.
30 .............................. 50 .............................. 1001 or
(4) Storage containers—(i) Foundations
more. and supports. Permanently installed
containers shall be provided with sub-
(vii) Combustible liquid storage above- stantial noncombustible supports on
ground. firm noncombustible foundations.
238
(ii) Construction—liquid. Liquid oxy- fication shall be equipped with safety
gen storage containers shall be fab- relief devices as required thereby.
ricated from materials meeting the im- (iii) ASME containers. Bulk oxygen
pact test requirements of paragraph storage containers designed and con-
UG–84 of ASME Boiler and Pressure structed in accordance with the ASME
Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, sec-
Pressure Vessels—1968, which is incor- tion VIII—Unfired Pressure Vessel—
porated by reference as specified in 1968 shall be equipped with safety relief
§ 1910.6. Containers operating at pres- devices meeting the provisions of the
sures above 15 pounds per square inch Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet
gage (p.s.i.g.) shall be designed, con- ‘‘Safety Relief Device Standards for
structed, and tested in accordance with Compressed Gas Storage Containers,’’
appropriate requirements of ASME S–1, part 3, which is incorporated by
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, sec- reference as specified in § 1910.6.
tion VII—Unfired Pressure Vessels— (iv) Insulation. Insulation casings on
1968. Insulation surrounding the liquid liquid oxygen containers shall be
oxygen container shall be noncombus- equipped with suitable safety relief de-
tible. vices.
(iii) Construction—gaseous. High- pres- (v) Reliability. All safety relief de-
sure gaseous oxygen containers shall vices shall be so designed or located
comply with one of the following: that moisture cannot collect and freeze
(a) Designed, constructed, and tested in a manner which would interfere with
in accordance with appropriate require- proper operation of the device.
ments of ASME Boiler and Pressure (7) Liquid oxygen vaporizers—(i)
Vessel Code, Section VIII—Unfired Mounts and couplings. The vaporizer
Pressure Vessels—1968. shall be anchored and its connecting
(b) Designed, constructed, tested, and piping be sufficiently flexible to pro-
maintained in accordance with DOT vide for the effect of expansion and
Specifications and Regulations. contraction due to temperature
(5) Piping, tubing, and fittings—(i) Se- changes.
lection. Piping, tubing, and fittings (ii) Relief devices. The vaporizer and
shall be suitable for oxygen service and its piping shall be adequately protected
for the pressures and temperatures in- on the oxygen and heating medium sec-
volved. tions with safety relief devices.
(ii) Specification. Piping and tubing (iii) Heating. Heat used in an oxygen
shall conform to section 2—Gas and Air vaporizer shall be indirectly supplied
Piping Systems of Code for Pressure only through media such as steam, air,
Piping, ANSI, B31.1–1967 with addenda water, or water solutions which do not
B31.10a–1969, which is incorporated by react with oxygen.
reference as specified in § 1910.6. (iv) Grounding. If electric heaters are
(iii) Fabrication. Piping or tubing for used to provide the primary source of
operating temperatures below ¥20 °F. heat, the vaporizing system shall be
shall be fabricated from materials electrically grounded.
meeting the impact test requirements (8) Equipment assembly and installa-
of paragraph UG–84 of ASME Boiler tion—(i) Cleaning. Equipment making
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section up a bulk oxygen system shall be
VIII—Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, cleaned in order to remove oil, grease
when tested at the minimum operating or other readily oxidizable materials
temperature to which the piping may before placing the system in service.
be subjected in service. (ii) Joints. Joints in piping and tubing
(6) Safety relief devices—(i) General. may be made by welding or by use of
Bulk oxygen storage containers, re- flanged, threaded, slip, or compression
gardless of design pressure shall be fittings. Gaskets or thread sealants
equipped with safety relief devices as shall be suitable for oxygen service.
required by the ASME code or the DOT (iii) Accessories. Valves, gages, regu-
specifications and regulations. lators, and other accessories shall be
(ii) DOT containers. Bulk oxygen stor- suitable for oxygen service.
age containers designed and con- (iv) Installation. Installation of bulk
structed in accordance with DOT speci- oxygen systems shall be supervised by
239
personnel familiar with proper prac- porated by reference as specified in
tices with reference to their construc- § 1910.6.
tion and use. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61
(v) Testing. After installation all field FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
erected piping shall be tested and
proved gas tight at maximum oper- § 1910.106 Flammable liquids.
ating pressure. Any medium used for (a) Definitions. As used in this sec-
testing shall be oil free and nonflam- tion:
mable. (1) Aerosol shall mean a material
(vi) Security. Storage containers, pip- which is dispensed from its container
ing, valves, regulating equipment, and as a mist, spray, or foam by a propel-
other accessories shall be protected lant under pressure.
against physical damage and against (2) Atmospheric tank shall mean a
tampering. storage tank which has been designed
(vii) Venting. Any enclosure con- to operate at pressures from atmos-
taining oxygen control or operating pheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g.
equipment shall be adequately vented. (3) Automotive service station shall
(viii) Placarding. The bulk oxygen mean that portion of property where
flammable liquids used as motor fuels
storage location shall be permanently
are stored and dispensed from fixed
placarded to indicate: ‘‘OXYGEN—NO
equipment into the fuel tanks of motor
SMOKING—NO OPEN FLAMES’’, or an
vehicles and shall include any facilities
equivalent warning. available for the sale and service of
(ix) Electrical wiring. Bulk oxygen in- tires, batteries, and accessories, and
stallations are not hazardous locations for minor automotive maintenance
as defined and covered in subpart S of work. Major automotive repairs, paint-
this part. Therefore, general purpose or ing, body and fender work are excluded.
weatherproof types of electrical wiring (4) Basement shall mean a story of a
and equipment are acceptable depend- building or structure having one-half
ing upon whether the installation is in- or more of its height below ground
doors or outdoors. Such equipment level and to which access for fire fight-
shall be installed in accordance with ing purposes is unduly restricted.
the applicable provisions of subpart S (5) Boiling point shall mean the boil-
of this part. ing point of a liquid at a pressure of
(9) Operating instructions. For instal- 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute
lations which require any operation of (p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.). Where an accurate
equipment by the user, legible instruc- boiling point is unavailable for the ma-
tions shall be maintained at operating terial in question, or for mixtures
locations. which do not have a constant boiling
(10) Maintenance. The equipment and point, for purposes of this section the
functioning of each charged bulk oxy- 10 percent point of a distillation per-
gen system shall be maintained in a formed in accordance with the Stand-
safe operating condition in accordance ard Method of Test for Distillation of
with the requirements of this section. Petroleum Products, ASTM D–86–62,
Wood and long dry grass shall be cut which is incorporated by reference as
back within 15 feet of any bulk oxygen specified in § 1910.6, may be used as the
storage container. boiling point of the liquid.
(6) Boilover shall mean the expulsion
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 of crude oil (or certain other liquids)
FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, from a burning tank. The light frac-
1996] tions of the crude oil burnoff producing
a heat wave in the residue, which on
§ 1910.105 Nitrous oxide.
reaching a water strata may result in
The piped systems for the in-plant the expulsion of a portion of the con-
transfer and distribution of nitrous tents of the tank in the form of froth.
oxide shall be designed, installed, (7) Bulk plant shall mean that por-
maintained, and operated in accord- tion of a property where flammable liq-
ance with Compressed Gas Association uids are received by tank vessel, pipe-
Pamphlet G–8.1–1964, which is incor- lines, tank car, or tank vehicle, and are
240
stored or blended in bulk for the pur- Closed Tester (ASTM D–93–71) or an
pose of distributing such liquids by equivalent method as defined by Ap-
tank vessel, pipeline, tank car, tank pendix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard
vehicle, or container. Criteria, shall be used except that the
(8) Chemical plant shall mean a large methods specified in Note 1 to section
integrated plant or that portion of 1.1 of ASTM D–93–71 may be used for
such a plant other than a refinery or the respective materials specified in
distillery where flammable liquids are the Note. The preceding ASTM stand-
produced by chemical reactions or used ard is incorporated by reference as
in chemical reactions. specified in § 1910.6.
(9) Closed container shall mean a (iii) For a liquid that is a mixture of
container as herein defined, so sealed compounds that have different
by means of a lid or other device that volatilities and flashpoints, its
neither liquid nor vapor will escape flashpoint shall be determined by using
from it at ordinary temperatures. the procedure specified in paragraph
(10) Crude petroleum shall mean hy- (a)(14)(i) or (ii) of this section on the
drocarbon mixtures that have a flash liquid in the form it is shipped.
point below 150 °F. and which have not (iv) Organic peroxides, which undergo
been processed in a refinery. autoaccelerating thermal decomposi-
(11) Distillery shall mean a plant or tion, are excluded from any of the
that portion of a plant where flam- flashpoint determination methods
mable liquids produced by fermenta- specified in this subparagraph.
tion are concentrated, and where the
(15) Hotel shall mean buildings or
concentrated products may also be
groups of buildings under the same
mixed, stored, or packaged.
management in which there are sleep-
(12) Fire area shall mean an area of a
ing accommodations for hire, primarily
building separated from the remainder
used by transients who are lodged with
of the building by construction having
or without meals including but not
a fire resistance of at least 1 hour and
limited to inns, clubs, motels, and
having all communicating openings
apartment hotels.
properly protected by an assembly hav-
ing a fire resistance rating of at least 1 (16) Institutional occupancy shall
hour. mean the occupancy or use of a build-
(13) Flammable aerosol shall mean a ing or structure or any portion thereof
flammable aerosol as defined by Appen- by persons harbored or detained to re-
dix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard ceive medical, charitable or other care
Criteria. For the purposes of paragraph or treatment, or by persons involun-
(d) of this section, such aerosols are tarily detained.
considered Category 1 flammable liq- (17) Liquid shall mean, for the pur-
uids. pose of this section, any material
(14) * * * which has a fluidity greater than that
(i) For a liquid which has a viscosity of 300 penetration asphalt when tested
of less than 45 SUS at 100 °F (37.8 °C), in accordance with ASTM Test for Pen-
does not contain suspended solids, and etration for Bituminous Materials, D–
does not have a tendency to form a sur- 5–65, which is incorporated by reference
face film while under test, the proce- as specified in § 1910.6.
dure specified in the Standard Method (18) [Reserved]
of Test for Flashpoint by Tag Closed (19) Flammable liquid means any liq-
Tester (ASTM D–56–70), which is incor- uid having a flashpoint at or below
porated by reference as specified in 199.4 °F (93 °C). Flammable liquids are
§ 1910.6, or an equivalent test method as divided into four categories as follows:
defined in Appendix B to § 1910.1200— (i) Category 1 shall include liquids
Physical Hazard Criteria, shall be used. having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C)
(ii) For a liquid which has a viscosity and having a boiling point at or below
of 45 SUS or more at 100 °F (37.8 °C), or 95 °F (35 °C).
contains suspended solids, or has a (ii) Category 2 shall include liquids
tendency to form a surface film while having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C)
under test, the Standard Method of and having a boiling point above 95 °F
Test for Flashpoint by Pensky-Martens (35 °C).
241
(iii) Category 3 shall include liquids (26) Pressure vessel shall mean a
having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F storage tank or vessel which has been
(23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C). designed to operate at pressures above
When a Category 3 liquid with a 15 p.s.i.g.
flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) is (27) Protection for exposure shall
heated for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) mean adequate fire protection for
of its flashpoint, it shall be handled in structures on property adjacent to
accordance with the requirements for a tanks, where there are employees of
Category 3 liquid with a flashpoint the establishment.
below 100 °F (37.8 °C). (28) Refinery shall mean a plant in
(iv) Category 4 shall include liquids which flammable liquids are produced
having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) on a commercial scale from crude pe-
and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). When a troleum, natural gasoline, or other hy-
Category 4 flammable liquid is heated drocarbon sources.
for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) of its (29) Safety can shall mean an ap-
flashpoint, it shall be handled in ac- proved container, of not more than 5
cordance with the requirements for a gallons capacity, having a spring-clos-
Category 3 liquid with a flashpoint at ing lid and spout cover and so designed
or above 100 °F (37.8 °C). that it will safely relieve internal pres-
(v) When liquid with a flashpoint sure when subjected to fire exposure.
greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) is heated (30) Vapor pressure shall mean the
for use to within 30 °F (16.7 °C) of its pressure, measured in pounds per
flashpoint, it shall be handled in ac- square inch (absolute) exerted by a
cordance with the requirements for a volatile liquid as determined by the
Category 4 flammable liquid. ‘‘Standard Method of Test for Vapor
(20) Unstable (reactive) liquid shall Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid
mean a liquid which in the pure state Method),’’ American Society for Test-
or as commercially produced or trans- ing and Materials ASTM D323–68, which
ported will vigorously polymerize, de- is incorporated by reference as speci-
compose, condense, or will become self- fied in § 1910.6.
reactive under conditions of shocks, (31) Ventilation as specified in this
pressure, or temperature. section is for the prevention of fire and
(21) Low-pressure tank shall mean a explosion. It is considered adequate if
storage tank which has been designed it is sufficient to prevent accumulation
to operate at pressures above 0.5 p.s.i.g. of significant quantities of vapor-air
but not more than 15 p.s.i.g. mixtures in concentration over one-
(22) Marine service station shall fourth of the lower flammable limit.
mean that portion of a property where (32) Storage: Flammable liquids shall
flammable liquids used as fuels are be stored in a tank or in a container
stored and dispensed from fixed equip- that complies with paragraph (d)(2) of
ment on shore, piers, wharves, or float- this section.
ing docks into the fuel tanks of self- (33) Barrel shall mean a volume of 42
propelled craft, and shall include all fa- U.S. gallons.
cilities used in connection therewith. (34) Container shall mean any can,
(23) Mercantile occupancy shall mean barrel, or drum.
the occupancy or use of a building or (35) Approved unless otherwise indi-
structure or any portion thereof for the cated, approved, or listed by a nation-
displaying, selling, or buying of goods, ally recognized testing laboratory.
wares, or merchandise. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nation-
(24) Office occupancy shall mean the ally recognized testing laboratory.
occupancy or use of a building or struc- (36) Listed see ‘‘approved’’ in
ture or any portion thereof for the § 1910.106(a)(35).
transaction of business, or the ren- (37) SUS means Saybolt Universal
dering or receiving of professional serv- Seconds as determined by the Standard
ices. Method of Test for Saybolt Viscosity
(25) Portable tank shall mean a (ASTM D–88–56), and may be deter-
closed container having a liquid capac- mined by use of the SUS conversion ta-
ity over 60 U.S. gallons and not in- bles specified in ASTM Method D2161–
tended for fixed installation. 66 following determination of viscosity
242
in accordance with the procedures No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks
specified in the Standard Method of for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.
Test for Viscosity of Transparent and (2) American Petroleum Institute
Opaque Liquids (ASTM D445–65). Standards No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks
(38) Viscous means a viscosity of 45 for Oil Storage, Third Edition, 1966.
SUS or more. (3) American Petroleum Institute
(b) Tank storage—(1) Design and con- Standards No. 12B, Specification for
struction of tanks—(i) Materials. (a) Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh
Tanks shall be built of steel except as Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1,
provided in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) (b) March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for
through (e) of this section. Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev-
(b) Tanks may be built of materials enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F,
other than steel for installation under- Specification for Small Welded Produc-
ground or if required by the properties tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961.
of the liquid stored. Tanks located Tanks built in accordance with these
above ground or inside buildings shall standards shall be used only as produc-
be of noncombustible construction. tion tanks for storage of crude petro-
(c) Tanks built of materials other leum in oil-producing areas.
than steel shall be designed to speci- (b) Tanks designed for underground
fications embodying principles recog- service not exceeding 2,500 gallons ca-
nized as good engineering design for pacity may be used aboveground.
the material used. (c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure
(d) Unlined concrete tanks may be vessels may be used as atmospheric
used for storing flammable liquids hav- tanks.
ing a gravity of 40° API or heavier. (d) Atmospheric tanks shall not be
Concrete tanks with special lining may used for the storage of a flammable liq-
be used for other services provided the uid at a temperature at or above its
design is in accordance with sound en- boiling point.
gineering practice. (iv) Low pressure tanks. (a) The nor-
(e) [Reserved] mal operating pressure of the tank
(f) Special engineering consideration shall not exceed the design pressure of
shall be required if the specific gravity the tank.
of the liquid to be stored exceeds that (b) Low-pressure tanks shall be built
of water or if the tanks are designed to in accordance with acceptable stand-
contain flammable liquids at a liquid ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may
temperature below 0 °F. be built in accordance with the fol-
(ii) Fabrication. (a) [Reserved] lowing consensus standards that are in-
(b) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv- corporated by reference as specified in
eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or § 1910.6:
constructed by use of a combination of (1) American Petroleum Institute
these methods. Filler metal used in Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules
brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an for the Design and Construction of
alloy having a melting point above 1000 Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage
°F. and below that of the metal joined. Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.
(iii) Atmospheric tanks. (a) Atmos- (2) The principles of the Code for
pheric tanks shall be built in accord- Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII
ance with acceptable good standards of of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves-
design. Atmospheric tanks may be sels Code, 1968.
built in accordance with the following (c) Atmospheric tanks built accord-
consensus standards that are incor- ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.,
porated by reference as specified in requirements in subdivision (iii)(a) of
§ 1910.6: and shall be limited to 2.5 p.s.i.g. under
(1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., emergency venting conditions.
Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel This paragraph may be used for oper-
Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g.
Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58, (d) Pressure vessels may be used as
Standard for Steel Underground Tanks low-pressure tanks.
for Flammable and Combustible Liq- (v) Pressure vessels. (a) The normal op-
uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or erating pressure of the vessel shall not
243
exceed the design pressure of the ves- equipped with emergency venting
sel. which will permit pressures to exceed
(b) Pressure vessels shall be built in 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions
accordance with the Code for Unfired of subdivisions (a) and (b) of this sub-
Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the division shall apply. Suitable means
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code shall be taken to prevent the accumu-
1968. lation of flammable liquids under adja-
(vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. cent liquefied petroleum gas containers
When tanks are not designed in accord- such as by diversion curbs or grading.
ance with the American Petroleum In- When flammable liquid storage tanks
stitute, American Society of Mechan- are within a diked area, the liquefied
ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’ petroleum gas containers shall be out-
Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if side the diked area and at least 10 feet
corrosion is anticipated beyond that away from the centerline of the wall of
provided for in the design formulas the diked area. The foregoing provi-
used, additional metal thickness or sions shall not apply when liquefied pe-
suitable protective coatings or linings troleum gas containers of 125 gallons or
shall be provided to compensate for the less capacity are installed adjacent to
corrosion loss expected during the de- fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons or
sign life of the tank. less capacity.
(2) Installation of outside aboveground (iii) [Reserved]
tanks. (iv) Normal venting for aboveground
(i) [Reserved] tanks. (a) Atmospheric storage tanks
(ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between shall be adequately vented to prevent
aboveground tanks. (a) The distance be- the development of vacuum or pressure
tween any two flammable liquid stor- sufficient to distort the roof of a cone
age tanks shall not be less than 3 feet. roof tank or exceeding the design pres-
(b) Except as provided in paragraph sure in the case of other atmospheric
(b)(2)(ii)(c) of this section, the distance tanks, as a result of filling or
between any two adjacent tanks shall emptying, and atmospheric tempera-
not be less than one-sixth the sum of ture changes.
their diameters. When the diameter of (b) Normal vents shall be sized either
one tank is less than one-half the di- in accordance with: (1) The American
ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis- Petroleum Institute Standard 2000
tance between the two tanks shall not (1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low-
be less than one-half the diameter of Pressure Storage Tanks, which is in-
the smaller tank. corporated by reference as specified in
(c) Where crude petroleum in con- § 1910.6; or (2) other accepted standard;
junction with production facilities are or (3) shall be at least as large as the
located in noncongested areas and have filling or withdrawal connection,
capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons whichever is larger but in no case less
(3,000 barrels), the distance between than 11⁄4 inch nominal inside diameter.
such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet. (c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure
(d) Where unstable flammable liquids vessels shall be adequately vented to
are stored, the distance between such prevent development of pressure or
tanks shall not be less than one-half vacuum, as a result of filling or
the sum of their diameters. emptying and atmospheric tempera-
(e) When tanks are compacted in ture changes, from exceeding the de-
three or more rows or in an irregular sign pressure of the tank or vessel.
pattern, greater spacing or other Protection shall also be provided to
means shall be provided so that inside prevent overpressure from any pump
tanks are accessible for firefighting discharging into the tank or vessel
purposes. when the pump discharge pressure can
(f) The minimum separation between exceed the design pressure of the tank
a liquefied petroleum gas container or vessel.
and a flammable liquid storage tank (d) If any tank or pressure vessel has
shall be 20 feet, except in the case of more than one fill or withdrawal con-
flammable liquid tanks operating at nection and simultaneous filling or
pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or withdrawal can be made, the vent size
244
shall be based on the maximum antici- (v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex-
pated simultaneous flow. posure for aboveground tanks. (a) Every
(e) Unless the vent is designed to aboveground storage tank shall have
limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or some form of construction or device
less, the outlet of vents and vent drains that will relieve excessive internal
shall be arranged to discharge in such pressure caused by exposure fires.
a manner as to prevent localized over- (b) In a vertical tank the construc-
heating of any part of the tank in the tion referred to in subdivision (a) of
event vapors from such vents are ig- this subdivision may take the form of a
nited. floating roof, lifter roof, a weak roof-
(f)(1) Tanks and pressure vessels stor- to-shell seam, or other approved pres-
ing Category 1 flammable liquids shall sure relieving construction. The weak
be equipped with venting devices which roof-to-shell seam shall be constructed
shall be normally closed except when to fail preferential to any other seam.
venting to pressure or vacuum condi- (c) Where entire dependence for emer-
tions. Tanks and pressure vessels stor- gency relief is placed upon pressure re-
ing Category 2 flammable liquids and lieving devices, the total venting ca-
Category 3 flammable liquids with a pacity of both normal and emergency
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) shall be vents shall be enough to prevent rup-
equipped with venting devices which ture of the shell or bottom of the tank
shall be normally closed except when if vertical, or of the shell or heads if
venting under pressure or vacuum con- horizontal. If unstable liquids are
ditions, or with approved flame arrest- stored, the effects of heat or gas result-
ers. ing from polymerization, decomposi-
(2) Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls tion, condensation, or self-reactivity
(barrels). capacity or less containing shall be taken into account. The total
crude petroleum in crude-producing capacity of both normal and emergency
areas and outside aboveground atmos- venting devices shall be not less than
pheric tanks under 1,000 gallons capac- that derived from Table H–10 except as
ity containing other than Category 1 provided in subdivision (e) or (f) of this
flammable liquids may have open subdivision. Such device may be a self-
vents. (See paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(b) of closing manhole cover, or one using
this section.) long bolts that permit the cover to lift
(g) Flame arresters or venting de- under internal pressure, or an addi-
vices required in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(f) tional or larger relief valve or valves.
of this section may be omitted for Cat- The wetted area of the tank shall be
egory 2 flammable liquids and Cat- calculated on the basis of 55 percent of
egory 3 flammable liquids with a the total exposed area of a sphere or
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) where spheroid, 75 percent of the total ex-
conditions are such that their use may, posed area of a horizontal tank and the
in case of obstruction, result in tank first 30 feet above grade of the exposed
damage. shell area of a vertical tank.
TABLE H–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET FREE AIR PER HOUR
[14.7 psia and 60 °F.]
Square feet CFH Square feet CFH Square feet CFH
20 21,100 200 211,000 1,000 524,000

30 31,600 250 239,000 1,200 557,000
40 42,100 300 265,000 1,400 587,000
50 52,700 350 288,000 1,600 614,000
60 63,200 400 312,000 1,800 639,000
70 73,700 500 354,000 2,000 662,000
80 84,200 600 392,000 2,400 704,000
90 94,800 700 428,000 2,800 742,000
100 105,000 800 462,000 and
120 126,000 900 493,000 over
140 147,000 1,000 524,000
160 168,000
180 190,000
200 211,000
245
(d) For tanks and storage vessels de- (i) The flow capacity of tank venting
signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the devices 12 inches and smaller in nomi-
total rate of venting shall be deter- nal pipe size shall be determined by ac-
mined in accordance with Table H–10, tual test of each type and size of vent.
except that when the exposed wetted These flow tests may be conducted by
area of the surface is greater than 2,800 the manufacturer if certified by a
square feet, the total rate of venting qualified impartial observer, or may be
shall be calculated by the following conducted by an outside agency. The
formula: flow capacity of tank venting devices
CFH = 1,107A 0.82 larger than 12 inches nominal pipe size,
including manhole covers with long
Where; bolts or equivalent, may be calculated
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet of provided that the opening pressure is
free air per hour. actually measured, the rating pressure
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet. and corresponding free orifice area are
NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on stated, the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears
Q=21,000A0.82. on the nameplate, and the computation
(e) The total emergency relief vent- is based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap-
ing capacity for any specific stable liq- plied to the rated orifice area.
uid may be determined by the fol- (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks.
lowing formula: (a) Vent piping shall be constructed in
accordance with paragraph (c) of this
V = 1337 ÷ L√M
section.
V = Cubic feet of free air per hour from Table (b) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks
H–10. storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
liquid in B.t.u. per pound.
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
are adjacent to buildings or public
(f) The required airflow rate of sub- ways, they shall be located so that the
division (c) or (e) of this subdivision vapors are released at a safe point out-
may be multiplied by the appropriate side of buildings and not less than 12
factor listed in the following schedule feet above the adjacent ground level. In
when protection is provided as indi- order to aid their dispersion, vapors
cated. Only one factor may be used for shall be discharged upward or hori-
any one tank. zontally away from closely adjacent
0.5 for drainage in accordance with subdivi-
walls. Vent outlets shall be located so
sion (vii)(b) of this subparagraph for tanks that flammable vapors will not be
over 200 square feet of wetted area. trapped by eaves or other obstructions
0.3 for approved water spray. and shall be at least five feet from
0.3 for approved insulation. building openings.
0.15 for approved water spray with ap- (c) When tank vent piping is
proved insulation. manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
(g) The outlet of all vents and vent to discharge, within the pressure limi-
drains on tanks equipped with emer- tations of the system, the vapors they
gency venting to permit pressures ex- may be required to handle when
ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to manifolded tanks are subject to the
discharge in such a way as to prevent same fire exposure.
localized overheating of any part of the (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for
tank, in the event vapors from such aboveground tanks—(a) Drainage and
vents are ignited. diked areas. The area surrounding a
(h) Each commercial tank venting tank or a group of tanks shall be pro-
device shall have stamped on it the vided with drainage as in subdivision
opening pressure, the pressure at which (b) of this subdivision, or shall be diked
the valve reaches the full open posi- as provided in subdivision (c) of this
tion, and the flow capacity at the lat- subdivision, to prevent accidental dis-
ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet per charge of liquid from endangering ad-
hour of air at 60 °F. and at a pressure joining property or reaching water-
of 14.7 p.s.i.a. ways.
246
(b) Drainage. Where protection of ad- (5) [Reserved]
joining property or waterways is by (6) No loose combustible material,
means of a natural or manmade drain- empty or full drum or barrel, shall be
age system, such systems shall comply permitted within the diked area.
with the following: (viii) Tank openings other than vents
(1) [Reserved] for aboveground tanks.
(2) The drainage system shall termi- (a)–(c) [Reserved]
nate in vacant land or other area or in (d) Openings for gaging shall be pro-
an impounding basin having a capacity vided with a vaportight cap or cover.
not smaller than that of the largest (e) For Category 2 flammable liquids
tank served. This termination area and and Category 3 flammable liquids with
the route of the drainage system shall a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other
be so located that, if the flammable than crude oils, gasolines, and as-
liquids in the drainage system are ig- phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed
nited, the fire will not seriously expose and installed as to minimize the possi-
tanks or adjoining property. bility of generating static electricity.
(c) Diked areas. Where protection of A fill pipe entering the top of a tank
adjoining property or waterways is ac- shall terminate within 6 inches of the
complished by retaining the liquid bottom of the tank and shall be in-
around the tank by means of a dike, stalled to avoid excessive vibration.
the volume of the diked area shall (f) Filling and emptying connections
comply with the following require- which are made and broken shall be lo-
ments: cated outside of buildings at a location
(1) Except as provided in subdivision free from any source of ignition and
(2) of this subdivision, the volumetric not less than 5 feet away from any
capacity of the diked area shall not be building opening. Such connection
less than the greatest amount of liquid shall be closed and liquidtight when
that can be released from the largest not in use. The connection shall be
tank within the diked area, assuming a properly identified.
full tank. The capacity of the diked (3) Installation of underground tanks—
area enclosing more than one tank (i) Location. Excavation for under-
shall be calculated by deducting the ground storage tanks shall be made
volume of the tanks other than the with due care to avoid undermining of
largest tank below the height of the foundations of existing structures. Un-
dike. derground tanks or tanks under build-
(2) For a tank or group of tanks with ings shall be so located with respect to
fixed roofs containing crude petroleum existing building foundations and sup-
with boilover characteristics, the volu- ports that the loads carried by the lat-
metric capacity of the diked area shall ter cannot be transmitted to the tank.
be not less than the capacity of the The distance from any part of a tank
largest tank served by the enclosure, storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
assuming a full tank. The capacity of uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
the diked enclosure shall be calculated with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
by deducting the volume below the to the nearest wall of any basement or
height of the dike of all tanks within pit shall be not less than 1 foot, and to
the enclosure. any property line that may be built
(3) Walls of the diked area shall be of upon, not less than 3 feet. The distance
earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry from any part of a tank storing Cat-
designed to be liquidtight and to with- egory 3 flammable liquids with a
stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or
walls 3 feet or more in height shall Category 4 flammable liquids to the
have a flat section at the top not less nearest wall of any basement, pit or
than 2 feet wide. The slope of an earth- property line shall be not less than 1
en wall shall be consistent with the foot.
angle of repose of the material of which (ii) Depth and cover. Underground
the wall is constructed. tanks shall be set on firm foundations
(4) The walls of the diked area shall and surrounded with at least 6 inches
be restricted to an average height of 6 of noncorrosive, inert materials such
feet above interior grade. as clean sand, earth, or gravel well
247
tamped in place. The tank shall be the vent line at the outlet or within
placed in the hole with care since drop- the approved distance from the outlet.
ping or rolling the tank into the hole (b) Size of vents. Each tank shall be
can break a weld, puncture or damage vented through piping adequate in size
the tank, or scrape off the protective to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid
coating of coated tanks. Tanks shall be at the fill opening while the tank is
covered with a minimum of 2 feet of being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less
earth, or shall be covered with not less than 11⁄4 inch nominal inside diameter.
than 1 foot of earth, on top of which
shall be placed a slab of reinforced con- TABLE H–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS
crete not less than 4 inches thick.
Pipe length 1
When underground tanks are, or are Maximum flow GPM
likely to be, subject to traffic, they 50 feet 100 feet 200 feet
shall be protected against damage from Inches Inches Inches
vehicles passing over them by at least
100 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4
3 feet of earth cover, or 18 inches of 200 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4
well-tamped earth, plus 6 inches of re- 300 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄2
inforced concrete or 8 inches of asphal- 400 ....................................... 11⁄4 11⁄2 2
tic concrete. When asphaltic or rein- 500 ....................................... 11⁄2 11⁄2 2
forced concrete paving is used as part 600 ....................................... 11⁄2 2 2
700 ....................................... 2 2 2
of the protection, it shall extend at 800 ....................................... 2 2 3
least 1 foot horizontally beyond the 900 ....................................... 2 2 3
outline of the tank in all directions. 1,000 .................................... 2 2 3
(iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion 1 Vent lines of 50 ft., 100 ft., and 200 ft. of pipe plus 7 ells.
protection for the tank and its piping
shall be provided by one or more of the (c) Location and arrangement of
following methods: vents for Category 3 flammable liquids
(a) Use of protective coatings or with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F
wrappings; (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liq-
(b) Cathodic protection; or, uids. Vent pipes from tanks storing
(c) Corrosion resistant materials of Category 3 flammable liquids with a
construction. flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or
(iv) Vents.–(a) Location and arrange- Category 4 flammable liquids shall ter-
ment of vents for Category 1 or 2 flam- minate outside of the building and
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F outlets shall be above normal snow
(37.8 °C). Vent pipes from tanks storing level. They may be fitted with return
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or bends, coarse screens or other devices
Category 3 flammable liquids with a to minimize ingress of foreign mate-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall rial.
be so located that the discharge point (d) Vent piping shall be constructed
is outside of buildings, higher than the in accordance with paragraph (c) of
fill pipe opening, and not less than 12 this section. Vent pipes shall be so laid
feet above the adjacent ground level. as to drain toward the tank without
Vent pipes shall discharge only upward sags or traps in which liquid can col-
in order to disperse vapors. Vent pipes lect. They shall be located so that they
2 inches or less in nominal inside di- will not be subjected to physical dam-
ameter shall not be obstructed by de- age. The tank end of the vent pipe shall
vices that will cause excessive back enter the tank through the top.
pressure. Vent pipe outlets shall be so (e) When tank vent piping is
located that flammable vapors will not manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
enter building openings, or be trapped to discharge, within the pressure limi-
under eaves or other obstructions. If tations of the system, the vapors they
the vent pipe is less than 10 feet in may be required to handle when
length, or greater than 2 inches in manifolded tanks are filled simulta-
nominal inside diameter, the outlet neously.
shall be provided with a vacuum and (v) Tank openings other than vents. (a)
pressure relief device or there shall be Connections for all tank openings shall
an approved flame arrester located in be vapor or liquid tight.
248
(b) Openings for manual gaging, if are incompatible with steel. When ma-
independent of the fill pipe, shall be terials other than steel are necessary,
provided with a liquid-tight cap or they shall be suitable for the pressures,
cover. If inside a building, each such structural stresses, and temperatures
opening shall be protected against liq- involved, including fire exposures.
uid overflow and possible vapor release (c) Flammable liquid tanks located
by means of a spring loaded check inside of buildings, except in one-story
valve or other approved device. buildings designed and protected for
(c) Fill and discharge lines shall flammable liquid storage, shall be pro-
enter tanks only through the top. Fill vided with an automatic-closing heat-
lines shall be sloped toward the tank. actuated valve on each withdrawal con-
(d) For Category 2 flammable liquids nection below the liquid level, except
and Category 3 flammable liquids with for connections used for emergency dis-
a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other posal, to prevent continued flow in the
than crude oils, gasolines, and as- event of fire in the vicinity of the tank.
phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed This function may be incorporated in
and installed as to minimize the possi- the valve required in (b) of this subdivi-
bility of generating static electricity sion, and if a separate valve, shall be
by terminating within 6 inches of the located adjacent to the valve required
bottom of the tank. in (b) of this subdivision.
(e) Filling and emptying connections (d) Openings for manual gaging, if
which are made and broken shall be lo- independent of the fill pipe (see (f) of
cated outside of buildings at a location this subdivision), shall be provided
free from any source of ignition and with a vaportight cap or cover. Each
not less than 5 feet away from any such opening shall be protected against
building opening. Such connection liquid overflow and possible vapor re-
shall be closed and liquidtight when lease by means of a spring loaded check
not in use. The connection shall be valve or other approved device.
properly identified. (e) For Category 2 flammable liquids
(4) Installation of tanks inside of build- and Category 3 flammable liquids with
ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other
permitted inside of buildings except as than crude oils, gasoline, and asphalts,
provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or the fill pipe shall be so designed and in-
(i) of this section. stalled as to minimize the possibility
(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of of generating static electricity by ter-
buildings shall be as provided in sub- minating within 6 inches of the bottom
paragraphs (2) (iv), (v), (vi)(b), and of the tank.
(3)(iv) of this paragraph, except that (f) The fill pipe inside of the tank
emergency venting by the use of weak shall be installed to avoid excessive vi-
roof seams on tanks shall not be per- bration of the pipe.
mitted. Vents shall discharge vapors (g) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be
outside the buildings. located outside of buildings at a loca-
(iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be tion free from any source of ignition
constructed in accordance with para- and not less than 5 feet away from any
graph (c) of this section. building opening. The inlet of the fill
(iv) Tank openings other than vents. (a) pipe shall be closed and liquidtight
Connections for all tank openings shall when not in use. The fill connection
be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are cov- shall be properly identified.
ered in subdivision (ii) of this subpara- (h) Tanks inside buildings shall be
graph. equipped with a device, or other means
(b) Each connection to a tank inside shall be provided, to prevent overflow
of buildings through which liquid can into the building.
normally flow shall be provided with (5) Supports, foundations, and anchor-
an internal or an external valve lo- age for all tank locations—(i) General.
cated as close as practical to the shell Tank supports shall be installed on
of the tank. Such valves, when exter- firm foundations. Tank supports shall
nal, and their connections to the tank be of concrete, masonry, or protected
shall be of steel except when the chem- steel. Single wood timber supports (not
ical characteristics of the liquid stored cribbing) laid horizontally may be used
249
for outside aboveground tanks if not That the submerged part of the tank
more than 12 inches high at their low- shall not exceed two and one-half times
est point. the diameter. Or, as an alternative to
(ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or the foregoing, adequate noncombus-
exposed piling shall be protected by tible structural guides, designed to per-
materials having a fire resistance rat- mit the tank to float vertically with-
ing of not less than 2 hours, except that out loss of product, shall be provided.
steel saddles need not be protected if (d) Each horizontal tank so located
less than 12 inches high at their lowest that more than 70 percent of its stor-
point. Water spray protection or its age capacity will be submerged at the
equivalent may be used in lieu of fire- established flood stage, shall be an-
resistive materials to protect supports. chored, attached to a foundation of
(iii) Spheres. The design of the sup- concrete or of steel and concrete, of
porting structure for tanks such as sufficient weight to provide adequate
spheres shall receive special engineer- load for the tank when filled with flam-
ing consideration. mable liquid and submerged by flood
(iv) Load distribution. Every tank waters to the established flood stage,
shall be so supported as to prevent the or adequately secured by other means.
excessive concentration of loads on the (e) [Reserved]
supporting portion of the shell. (f) At locations where there is no
(v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on ample and dependable water supply, or
the ground or on foundations made of where filling of underground tanks
concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. with liquids is impracticable because of
Tank foundations shall be designed to the character of their contents, their
minimize the possibility of uneven set- use, or for other reasons, each tank
tling of the tank and to minimize cor- shall be safeguarded against movement
rosion in any part of the tank resting when empty and submerged by high
on the foundation. ground water or flood waters by an-
(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo- choring, weighting with concrete or
cated in an area that may be subjected other approved solid loading material,
to flooding, the applicable precautions or securing by other means. Each such
outlined in this subdivision shall be ob- tank shall be so constructed and in-
served. stalled that it will safely resist exter-
(a) No aboveground vertical storage nal pressures due to high ground water
tank containing a flammable liquid or flood waters.
shall be located so that the allowable (g) At locations where there is an
liquid level within the tank is below ample and dependable water supply
the established maximum flood stage, available, underground tanks con-
unless the tank is provided with a guid- taining flammable liquids, so installed
ing structure such as described in (m), that more than 70 percent of their stor-
(n), and (o) of this subdivision. age capacity will be submerged at the
(b) Independent water supply facili- maximum flood stage, shall be so an-
ties shall be provided at locations chored, weighted, or secured by other
where there is no ample and dependable means, as to prevent movement of such
public water supply available for load- tanks when filled with flammable liq-
ing partially empty tanks with water. uids, and submerged by flood waters to
(c) In addition to the preceding re- the established flood stage.
quirements, each tank so located that (h) Pipe connections below the allow-
more than 70 percent, but less than 100 able liquid level in a tank shall be pro-
percent, of its allowable liquid storage vided with valves or cocks located as
capacity will be submerged at the es- closely as practicable to the tank shell.
tablished maximum flood stage, shall Such valves and their connections to
be safeguarded by one of the following tanks shall be of steel or other mate-
methods: Tank shall be raised, or its rial suitable for use with the liquid
height shall be increased, until its top being stored. Cast iron shall not be per-
extends above the maximum flood mitted.
stage a distance equivalent to 30 per- (i) At locations where an independent
cent or more of its allowable liquid water supply is required, it shall be en-
storage capacity: Provided, however, tirely independent of public power and
250
water supply. Independent source of tanks and pipelines shall be discon-
water shall be available when flood wa- nected and blanked off or blinded be-
ters reach a level not less than 10 feet fore the floodwaters reach the bottom
below the bottom of the lowest tank on of the tank, unless control valves and
a property. their connections to the tank are of a
(j) The self-contained power and type designed to prevent breakage be-
pumping unit shall be so located or so tween the valve and the tank shell.
designed that pumping into tanks may (t) All valves attached to tanks other
be carried on continuously throughout than those used in connection with
the rise in flood waters from a level 10 water loading operations shall be
feet below the lowest tank to the level closed and locked.
of the potential flood stage. (u) If a tank is equipped with a swing
(k) Capacity of the pumping unit line, the swing pipe shall be raised to
shall be such that the rate of rise of and secured at its highest position.
water in all tanks shall be equivalent (v) Inspections. The Assistant Sec-
to the established potential average retary or his designated representative
rate of rise of flood waters at any shall make periodic inspections of all
stage. plants where the storage of flammable
(l) Each independent pumping unit liquids is such as to require compliance
shall be tested periodically to insure with the foregoing requirements, in
that it is in satisfactory operating con- order to assure the following:
dition. (1) That all flammable liquid storage
(m) Structural guides for holding tanks are in compliance with these re-
floating tanks above their foundations quirements and so maintained.
shall be so designed that there will be (2) That detailed printed instructions
no resistance to the free rise of a tank, of what to do in flood emergencies are
and shall be constructed of noncombus- properly posted.
tible material. (3) That station operators and other
(n) The strength of the structure employees depended upon to carry out
shall be adequate to resist lateral such instructions are thoroughly in-
movement of a tank subject to a hori- formed as to the location and operation
zontal force in any direction equivalent of such valves and other equipment
to not less than 25 pounds per square necessary to effect these requirements.
foot acting on the projected vertical (vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub-
cross-sectional area of the tank. ject to earthquakes, the tank supports
(o) Where tanks are situated on ex- and connections shall be designed to
posed points or bends in a shoreline resist damage as a result of such
where swift currents in flood waters shocks.
will be present, the structures shall be (6) Sources of ignition. In locations
designed to withstand a unit force of where flammable vapors may be
not less than 50 pounds per square foot. present, precautions shall be taken to
(p) The filling of a tank to be pro- prevent ignition by eliminating or con-
tected by water loading shall be start- trolling sources of ignition. Sources of
ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan- ignition may include open flames,
gerous flood stage. The rate of filling lightning, smoking, cutting and weld-
shall be at least equal to the rate of ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat,
rise of the floodwaters (or the estab- sparks (static, electrical, and mechan-
lished average potential rate of rise). ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical
(q) Sufficient fuel to operate the and physical-chemical reactions, and
water pumps shall be available at all radiant heat.
times to insure adequate power to fill (7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks,
all tankage with water. whether shop built or field erected,
(r) All valves on connecting pipelines shall be strength tested before they are
shall be closed and locked in closed po- placed in service in accordance with
sition when water loading has been the applicable paragraphs of the code
completed. under which they were built. The
(s) Where structural guides are pro- American Society of Mechanical Engi-
vided for the protection of floating neers (ASME) code stamp, American
tanks, all rigid connections between Petroleum Institute (API) monogram,
251
or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab- sions of Pressure Piping, ANSI B31 se-
oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi- ries and the provisions of this para-
dence of compliance with this strength graph, shall be considered prima facie
test. Tanks not marked in accordance evidence of compliance with the fore-
with the above codes shall be strength going provisions.
tested before they are placed in service (ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does
in accordance with good engineering not apply to any of the following:
principles and reference shall be made (a) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas
to the sections on testing in the codes wells and any piping connected directly
listed in subparagraphs (1) (iii)(a), thereto.
(iv)(b), or (v)(b) of this paragraph. (b) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or
(ii) Strength. When the vertical portable or stationary engines.
length of the fill and vent pipes is such (c) Piping within the scope of any ap-
that when filled with liquid the static plicable boiler and pressures vessel
head imposed upon the bottom of the code.
tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch, (iii) Definitions. As used in this para-
the tank and related piping shall be graph, piping systems consist of pipe,
tested hydrostatically to a pressure tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets,
equal to the static head thus imposed. valves, fittings, the pressure con-
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the taining parts of other components such
strength test called for in subdivisions as expansion joints and strainers, and
(i) and (ii) of this subparagraph, all devices which serve such purposes as
tanks and connections shall be tested mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib-
for tightness. Except for underground uting, metering, or controlling flow.
tanks, this tightness test shall be made (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit-
at operating pressure with air, inert tings—(i) Required materials. Materials
gas, or water prior to placing the tank for piping, valves, or fittings shall be
in service. In the case of field-erected steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron,
tanks the strength test may be consid- except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)
ered to be the test for tank tightness. (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
Underground tanks and piping, before (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than
being covered, enclosed, or placed in steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron
use, shall be tested for tightness may be used underground, or if re-
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at quired by the properties of the flam-
not less than 3 pounds per square inch mable liquid handled. Material other
and not more than 5 pounds per square than steel, nodular iron, or malleable
inch. iron shall be designed to specifications
(iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma- embodying principles recognized as
tions shall be corrected in an accept- good engineering practices for the ma-
able manner before the tank is placed terial used.
in service. Mechanical caulking is not (iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit-
permitted for correcting leaks in weld- tings may have combustible or non-
ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the combustible linings.
roof. (iv) Low-melting materials. When low-
(v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op- melting point materials such as alu-
erated at pressures below their design minum and brass or materials that
pressure may be tested by the applica- soften on fire exposure such as plastics,
ble provisions of subdivision (i) or (ii) or non-ductile materials such as cast
of this subparagraph, based upon the iron, are necessary, special consider-
pressure developed under full emer- ation shall be given to their behavior
gency venting of the tank. on fire exposure. If such materials are
(c) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen- used in above ground piping systems or
eral—(i) Design. The design (including inside buildings, they shall be suitably
selection of materials) fabrication, as- protected against fire exposure or so
sembly, test, and inspection of piping located that any spill resulting from
systems containing flammable liquids the failure of these materials could not
shall be suitable for the expected work- unduly expose persons, important
ing pressures and structural stresses. buildings or structures or can be read-
Conformity with the applicable provi- ily controlled by remote valves.
252
(3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made (d) Container and portable tank stor-
liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints age—(1) Scope—(i) General. This para-
or approved connectors shall be used. graph shall apply only to the storage of
Threaded joints and connections shall flammable liquids in drums or other
be made up tight with a suitable lubri- containers (including flammable
cant or piping compound. Pipe joints aerosols) not exceeding 60 gallons indi-
dependent upon the friction character- vidual capacity and those portable
istics of combustible materials for me- tanks not exceeding 660 gallons indi-
chanical continuity of piping shall not vidual capacity.
be used inside buildings. They may be (ii) Exceptions. This paragraph shall
used outside of buildings above or not apply to the following:
below ground. If used above ground, the (a) Storage of containers in bulk
piping shall either be secured to pre- plants, service stations, refineries,
vent disengagement at the fitting or chemical plants, and distilleries;
the piping system shall be so designed (b) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liq-
that any spill resulting from such dis- uids in the fuel tanks of a motor vehi-
engagement could not unduly expose cle, aircraft, boat, or portable or sta-
persons, important buildings or struc- tionary engine;
tures, and could be readily controlled (c) Flammable paints, oils, varnishes,
by remote valves. and similar mixtures used for painting
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be or maintenance when not kept for a pe-
substantially supported and protected riod in excess of 30 days;
against physical damage and excessive (d) Beverages when packaged in indi-
stresses arising from settlement, vibra- vidual containers not exceeding 1 gal-
tion, expansion, or contraction. lon in size.
(5) Protection against corrosion. All (2) Design, construction, and capacity
piping for flammable liquids, both of containers—(i) General. Only ap-
aboveground and underground, where proved containers and portable tanks
subject to external corrosion, shall be shall be used. Metal containers and
painted or otherwise protected. portable tanks meeting the require-
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall con- ments of and containing products au-
tain a sufficient number of valves to thorized by chapter I, title 49 of the
operate the system properly and to Code of Federal Regulations (regula-
protect the plant. Piping systems in tions issued by the Hazardous Mate-
connection with pumps shall contain a rials Regulations Board, Department of
sufficient number of valves to control Transportation), shall be deemed to be
properly the flow of liquid in normal acceptable.
operation and in the event of physical (ii) Emergency venting. Each portable
damage. Each connection to pipelines, tank shall be provided with one or
by which equipments such as tankcars more devices installed in the top with
or tank vehicles discharge liquids by sufficient emergency venting capacity
means of pumps into storage tanks, to limit internal pressure under fire ex-
shall be provided with a check valve for posure conditions to 10 p.s.i.g., or 30
automatic protection against backflow percent of the bursting pressure of the
if the piping arrangement is such that tank, whichever is greater. The total
backflow from the system is possible. venting capacity shall be not less than
(7) Testing. All piping before being that specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(v) (c)
covered, enclosed, or placed in use or (e) of this section. At least one pres-
shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 sure-activated vent having a minimum
percent of the maximum anticipated capacity of 6,000 cubic feet of free air
pressure of the system, or pneumati- (14.7 p.s.i.a. and 60 °F.) shall be used. It
cally tested to 110 percent of the max- shall be set to open at not less than 5
imum anticipated pressure of the sys- p.s.i.g. If fusible vents are used, they
tem, but not less than 5 pounds per shall be actuated by elements that op-
square inch gage at the highest point erate at a temperature not exceeding
of the system. This test shall be main- 300 °F.
tained for a sufficient time to complete (iii) Size. Flammable and combustible
visual inspection of all joints and con- liquid containers shall be in accord-
nections, but for at least 10 minutes. ance with Table H-12, except that glass
253
or plastic containers of no more than 1- or would require the maintenance of an
gallon capacity may be used for a Cat- analytical standard liquid of a quality
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquid if: which is not met by the specified
(a)(1) Such liquid either would be standards of liquids available, and the
rendered unfit for its intended use by quantity of the analytical standard liq-
contact with metal or would exces- uid required to be used in any one con-
sively corrode a metal container so as trol process exceeds one-sixteenth the
to create a leakage hazard; and capacity of the container allowed
(2) The user’s process either would re- under Table H–12 for the category of
quire more than 1 pint of a Category 1 liquid; or
flammable liquid or more than 1 quart (b) The containers are intended for
of a Category 2 flammable liquid of a direct export outside the United
single assay lot to be used at one time, States.
TABLE H–12—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SIZE OF CONTAINERS AND PORTABLE TANKS FOR FLAMMABLE
LIQUIDS
Container type Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4
Glass or approved plastic ..................................................... 1 pt ................ 1 qt ................ 1 gal ............... 1 gal.

Metal (other than DOT drums) .............................................. 1 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal.
Safety cans ............................................................................ 2 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal ............... 5 gal.
Metal drums (DOT specifications) ......................................... 60 gal ............. 60 gal ............. 60 gal ............. 60 gal.
Approved portable tanks ....................................................... 660 gal ........... 660 gal ........... 660 gal ........... 660 gal.
Note: Container exemptions: (a) Medicines, beverages, foodstuffs, cosmetics, and other common consumer items, when pack-
aged according to commonly accepted practices, shall be exempt from the requirements of 1910.106(d)(2)(i) and (ii).
(3) Design, construction, and capacity raised at least 2 inches above the bot-
of storage cabinets—(i) Maximum capac- tom of the cabinet.
ity. Not more than 60 gallons of Cat- (b) Wooden cabinets constructed in
egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, nor the following manner shall be deemed
more than 120 gallons of Category 4 in compliance. The bottom, sides, and
flammable liquids may be stored in a top shall be constructed of an approved
storage cabinet. grade of plywood at least 1 inch in
(ii) Fire resistance. Storage cabinets thickness, which shall not break down
shall be designed and constructed to or delaminate under fire conditions.
limit the internal temperature to not All joints shall be rabbetted and shall
more than 325 °F. when subjected to a be fastened in two directions with flat-
10-minute fire test using the standard head woodscrews. When more than one
time-temperature curve as set forth in door is used, there shall be a rabbetted
Standard Methods of Fire Tests of overlap of not less than 1 inch. Hinges
Building Construction and Materials, shall be mounted in such a manner as
not to lose their holding capacity due
NFPA 251–1969, which is incorporated
to loosening or burning out of the
by reference as specified in § 1910.6. All
screws when subjected to the fire test.
joints and seams shall remain tight
(4) Design and construction of inside
and the door shall remain securely
storage rooms—(i) Construction. Inside
closed during the fire test. Cabinets
storage rooms shall be constructed to
shall be labeled in conspicuous let-
meet the required fire-resistive rating
tering, ‘‘Flammable—Keep Fire Away.’’ for their use. Such construction shall
(a) Metal cabinets constructed in the comply with the test specifications set
following manner shall be deemed to be forth in Standard Methods of Fire
in compliance. The bottom, top, door, Tests of Building Construction and Ma-
and sides of cabinet shall be at least terials, NFPA 251–1969. Where an auto-
No. 18 gage sheet iron and double matic sprinkler system is provided, the
walled with 11⁄2-inch air space. Joints system shall be designed and installed
shall be riveted, welded or made tight in an acceptable manner. Openings to
by some equally effective means. The other rooms or buildings shall be pro-
door shall be provided with a three- vided with noncombustible liquid-tight
point lock, and the door sill shall be raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in
254
height, or the floor in the storage area trolled by a switch located outside of
shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- the door. The ventilating equipment
rounding floor. Openings shall be pro- and any lighting fixtures shall be oper-
vided with approved self-closing fire ated by the same switch. A pilot light
doors. The room shall be liquid-tight shall be installed adjacent to the
where the walls join the floor. A per- switch if Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
missible alternate to the sill or ramp is uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
an open-grated trench inside of the with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
room which drains to a safe location. are dispensed within the room. Where
Where other portions of the building or gravity ventilation is provided, the
other properties are exposed, windows fresh air intake, as well as the exhaust
shall be protected as set forth in the outlet from the room, shall be on the
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, exterior of the building in which the
NFPA No. 80–1968, which is incor- room is located.
porated by reference as specified in (v) Storage in inside storage rooms. In
§ 1910.6, for Class E or F openings. Wood every inside storage room there shall
at least 1 inch nominal thickness may be maintained one clear aisle at least 3
be used for shelving, racks, dunnage, feet wide. Containers over 30 gallons
scuffboards, floor overlay, and similar capacity shall not be stacked one upon
installations. the other. Dispensing shall be by ap-
(ii) Rating and capacity. Storage in in- proved pump or self-closing faucet
side storage rooms shall comply with only.
Table H–13. (5) Storage inside building—(i) Egress.
Flammable liquids, including stock for
TABLE H–13—STORAGE IN INSIDE ROOMS sale, shall not be stored so as to limit
Total al- use of exits, stairways, or areas nor-
lowable mally used for the safe egress of people.
quan-
Fire protec-
Fire resist- tities (ii) Containers. The storage of flam-
tion 1 pro- Maximum size
vided
ance (gals./ mable liquids in containers or portable
sq. ft./
floor tanks shall comply with subdivisions
area) (iii) through (v) of this subparagraph.
Yes ........... 2 hours .... 500 sq. ft ...................... 10
(iii) Office occupancies. Storage shall
No ............ 2 hours .... 500 sq. ft ...................... 5 be prohibited except that which is re-
Yes ........... 1 hour ...... 150 sq. ft ...................... 4 quired for maintenance and operation
No ............ 1 hour ...... 150 sq. ft ...................... 2
of building and operation of equipment.
1 Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, car-
Such storage shall be kept in closed
bon dioxide, or other system.
metal containers stored in a storage
(iii) Wiring. Electrical wiring and cabinet or in safety cans or in an inside
equipment located in inside storage storage room not having a door that
rooms used for Category 1 or 2 flam- opens into that portion of the building
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable used by the public.
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (iv) Mercantile occupancies and other
(37.8 °C), shall be approved under sub- retail stores.
part S of this part for Class I, Division (a)–(d) [Reserved]
2 Hazardous Locations; for Category 3 (e) Leaking containers shall be re-
flammable liquids with a flashpoint at moved to a storage room or taken to a
or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 safe location outside the building and
flammable liquids, shall be approved the contents transferred to an
for general use. undamaged container.
(iv) Ventilation. Every inside storage (v) General purpose public warehouses.
room shall be provided with either a Storage shall be in accordance with
gravity or a mechanical exhaust ven- Table H–14 or H–15 and in buildings or
tilation system. Such system shall be in portions of such buildings cut off by
designed to provide for a complete standard firewalls. Material creating
change of air within the room at least no fire exposure hazard to the flam-
six times per hour. If a mechanical ex- mable liquids may be stored in the
haust system is used, it shall be con- same area.
255
256
ER26MR12.054</GPH>
(vi) Flammable liquid warehouses or materials handing equipment shall be

storage buildings. (a) If the storage available to handle tanks safely at the
building is located 50 feet or less from upper tier level.
a building or line of adjoining property (e) No pile shall be closer than 3 feet
that may be built upon, the exposing to the nearest beam, chord, girder, or
wall shall be a blank wall having a fire- other obstruction, and shall be 3 feet
resistance rating of at least 2 hours. below sprinkler deflectors or discharge
(b) The total quantity of liquids with- orifices of water spray, or other over-
in a building shall not be restricted,
head fire protection systems.
but the arrangement of storage shall
comply with Table H–14 or H–15. (f) Aisles of at least 3 feet wide shall
(c) Containers in piles shall be sepa- be provided where necessary for rea-
rated by pallets or dunnage where nec- sons of access to doors, windows or
essary to provide stability and to pre- standpipe connections.
vent excessive stress on container (6) Storage outside buildings—(i) Gen-
walls. eral. Storage outside buildings shall be
(d) Portable tanks stored over one in accordance with Table H–16 or H–17,
tier high shall be designed to nest se- and subdivisions (ii) and (iv) of this
curely, without dunnage, and adequate subparagraph.
257
ER26MR12.055</GPH>
(ii) Maximum storage. A maximum of rounded by a curb at least 6 inches

1,100 gallons of flammable liquids may high. When curbs are used, provisions
be located adjacent to buildings lo- shall be made for draining of accumu-
cated on the same premises and under lations of ground or rain water or spills
the same management provided the of flammable liquids. Drains shall ter-
provisions of subdivisions (a) and (b) of minate at a safe location and shall be
this subdivision are complied with. accessible to operation under fire con-
(a) [Reserved] ditions.
(b) Where quantity stored exceeds (iv) Security. The storage area shall
1,100 gallons, or provisions of subdivi- be protected against tampering or tres-
sion (a) of this subdivision cannot be passers where necessary and shall be
met, a minimum distance of 10 feet be- kept free of weeds, debris and other
tween buildings and nearest container combustible material not necessary to
of flammable liquid shall be main- the storage.
tained. (7) Fire control—(i) Extinguishers.
(iii) Spill containment. The storage Suitable fire control devices, such as
area shall be graded in a manner to di- small hose or portable fire extin-
vert possible spills away from buildings guishers, shall be available at locations
or other exposures or shall be sur- where flammable liquids are stored.
258
ER26MR12.056</GPH>
(a) At least one portable fire extin- be stored in the same room with flam-
guisher having a rating of not less than mable liquids.
12–B units shall be located outside of, (e) Industrial plants—(1) Scope—(i) Ap-
but not more than 10 feet from, the plication. This paragraph shall apply to
door opening into any room used for those industrial plants where:
storage. (a) The use of flammable liquids is
(b) At least one portable fire extin- incidental to the principal business, or
guisher having a rating of not less than (b) Where flammable liquids are han-
12–B units must be located not less dled or used only in unit physical oper-
than 10 feet, nor more than 25 feet, ations such as mixing, drying,
from any Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable evaporating, filtering, distillation, and
liquid storage area located outside of a similar operations which do not in-
storage room but inside a building.
volve chemical reaction. This para-
(ii) Sprinklers. When sprinklers are graph shall not apply to chemical
provided, they shall be installed in ac-
plants, refineries or distilleries.
cordance with § 1910.159.
(ii) Exceptions. Where portions of such
(iii) Open flames and smoking. Open
plants involve chemical reactions such
flames and smoking shall not be per-
mitted in flammable liquid storage as oxidation, reduction, halogenation,
areas. hydrogenation, alkylation, polymeriza-
(iv) Water reactive materials. Materials tion, and other chemical processes,
which will react with water shall not those portions of the plant shall be in
259
ER26MR12.057</GPH>
accordance with paragraph (h) of this (c) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids,
section. or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
(2) Incidental storage or use of flam- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), may be
mable liquids—(i) Application. This sub- used only where there are no open
paragraph shall be applicable to those flames or other sources of ignition
portions of an industrial plant where within the possible path of vapor trav-
the use and handling of flammable liq- el.
uids is only incidental to the principal (d) Flammable liquids shall be drawn
business, such as automobile assembly, from or transferred into vessels, con-
construction of electronic equipment, tainers, or portable tanks within a
furniture manufacturing, or other building only through a closed piping
similar activities. system, from safety cans, by means of
(ii) Containers. Flammable liquids a device drawing through the top, or
shall be stored in tanks or closed con- from a container or portable tanks by
tainers. gravity through an approved self-clos-
(a) Except as provided in subdivisions ing valve. Transferring by means of air
(b) and (c) of this subdivision, all stor- pressure on the container or portable
age shall comply with paragraph (d) (3) tanks shall be prohibited.
or (4) of this section. (3) Unit physical operations—(i) Appli-
(b) The quantity of liquid that may cation. This subparagraph shall be ap-
be located outside of an inside storage plicable in those portions of industrial
room or storage cabinet in a building plants where flammable liquids are
or in any one fire area of a building
handled or used in unit physical oper-
shall not exceed:
ations such as mixing, drying,
(1) 25 gallons of Category 1 flammable
evaporating, filtering, distillation, and
liquids in containers
similar operations which do not in-
(2) 120 gallons of Category 2, 3, or 4 volve chemical change. Examples are
flammable liquids in containers
plants compounding cosmetics, phar-
(3) 660 gallons of Category 2, 3, or 4 maceuticals, solvents, cleaning fluids,
flammable liquids in a single portable insecticides, and similar types of ac-
tank.
tivities.
(c) Where large quantities of flam-
(ii) Location. Industrial plants shall
mable liquids are necessary, storage
be located so that each building or unit
may be in tanks which shall comply
of equipment is accessible from at least
with the applicable requirements of
paragraph (b) of this section. one side for firefighting and fire con-
trol purposes. Buildings shall be lo-
(iii) Separation and protection. Areas
cated with respect to lines of adjoining
in which flammable liquids are trans-
ferred from one tank or container to property which may be built upon as
another container shall be separated set forth in paragraph (h)(2) (i) and (ii)
from other operations in the building of this section except that the blank
by adequate distance or by construc- wall referred to in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)
tion having adequate fire resistance. of this section shall have a fire resist-
Drainage or other means shall be pro- ance rating of at least 2 hours.
vided to control spills. Adequate nat- (iii) Chemical processes. Areas where
ural or mechanical ventilation shall be unstable liquids are handled or small
provided. scale unit chemical processes are car-
(iv) Handling liquids at point of final ried on shall be separated from the re-
use.–(a) Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- mainder of the plant by a fire wall of 2-
uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids hour minimum fire resistance rating.
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), (iv) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage
shall be kept in covered containers systems shall be provided to direct
when not actually in use. flammable liquid leakage and fire pro-
(b) Where flammable liquids are used tection water to a safe location. This
or handled, except in closed containers, may require curbs, scuppers, or special
means shall be provided to dispose drainage systems to control the spread
promptly and safely of leakage or of fire; see paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(b) of
spills. this section.
260
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if (ii) [Reserved]
connected to public sewers or dis- (5) Fire control—(i) Portable and special
charged into public waterways, shall be equipment. Portable fire extinguish-
equipped with traps or separator. ment and control equipment shall be
(v) Ventilation.–(a) Areas as defined in provided in such quantities and types
paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section using as are needed for the special hazards of
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or operation and storage.
Category 3 flammable liquids with a (ii) Water supply. Water shall be
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall available in volume and at adequate
be ventilated at a rate of not less than pressure to supply water hose streams,
1 cubic foot per minute per square foot foam-producing equipment, automatic
of solid floor area. This shall be accom- sprinklers, or water spray systems as
plished by natural or mechanical ven- the need is indicated by the special
tilation with discharge or exhaust to a hazards of operation, dispensing and
safe location outside of the building. storage.
Provision shall be made for introduc- (iii) Special extinguishers. Special ex-
tion of makeup air in such a manner as tinguishing equipment such as that
not to short circuit the ventilation. utilizing foam, inert gas, or dry chem-
Ventilation shall be arranged to in- ical shall be provided as the need is in-
clude all floor areas or pits where flam- dicated by the special hazards of oper-
mable vapors may collect. ation dispensing and storage.
(b) Equipment used in a building and (iv) Special hazards. Where the need is
the ventilation of the building shall be indicated by special hazards of oper-
designed so as to limit flammable ation, flammable liquid processing
vapor-air mixtures under normal oper- equipment, major piping, and sup-
ating conditions to the interior of porting steel shall be protected by ap-
equipment, and to not more than 5 feet proved water spray systems, deluge
from equipment which exposes Cat- systems, approved fire-resistant coat-
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- ings, insulation, or any combination of
egory 3 flammable liquids with a these.
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), to the (v) Maintenance. All plant fire protec-
air. Examples of such equipment are tion facilities shall be adequately
dispensing stations, open centrifuges, maintained and periodically inspected
plate and frame filters, open vacuum and tested to make sure they are al-
filters, and surfaces of open equipment. ways in satisfactory operating condi-
(vi) Storage and handling. The stor- tion, and they will serve their purpose
age, transfer, and handling of liquid in time of emergency.
shall comply with paragraph (h)(4) of (6) Sources of ignition—(i) General.
this section. Adequate precautions shall be taken to
(4) Tank vehicle and tank car loading prevent the ignition of flammable va-
and unloading. (i) Tank vehicle and pors. Sources of ignition include but
tank car loading or unloading facilities are not limited to open flames; light-
shall be separated from aboveground ning; smoking; cutting and welding;
tanks, warehouses, other plant build- hot surfaces; frictional heat; static,
ings or nearest line of adjoining prop- electrical, and mechanical sparks;
erty which may be built upon by a dis- spontaneous ignition, including heat-
tance of 25 feet for Category 1 or 2 producing chemical reactions; and ra-
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- diant heat.
mable liquids with a flashpoint below (ii) Grounding. Category 1 or 2 flam-
100 °F (37.8 °C), and 15 feet for Category mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Cat- (37.8 °C), shall not be dispensed into
egory 4 flammable liquids, measured containers unless the nozzle and con-
from the nearest position of any fill tainer are electrically interconnected.
stem. Buildings for pumps or shelters Where the metallic floorplate on which
for personnel may be a part of the fa- the container stands while filling is
cility. Operations of the facility shall electrically connected to the fill stem
comply with the appropriate portions or where the fill stem is bonded to the
of paragraph (f)(3) of this section. container during filling operations by
261
means of a bond wire, the provisions of air shall be uncontaminated by flam-
this section shall be deemed to have mable vapors.
been complied with. (8) Repairs to equipment. Hot work,
(7) Electrical—(i) Equipment. (a) All such as welding or cutting operations,
electrical wiring and equipment shall use of spark-producing power tools, and
be installed according to the require- chipping operations shall be permitted
ments of subpart S of this part. only under supervision of an individual
(b) Locations where flammable in responsible charge. The individual in
vapor-air mixtures may exist under responsible charge shall make an in-
normal operations shall be classified spection of the area to be sure that it
Class I, Division 1 according to the re- is safe for the work to be done and that
quirements of subpart S of this part. safe procedures will be followed for the
For those pieces of equipment installed work specified.
in accordance with subparagraph (9) Housekeeping—(i) General. Mainte-
(3)(v)(b) of this paragraph, the Division nance and operating practices shall be
1 area shall extend 5 feet in all direc- in accordance with established proce-
tions from all points of vapor libera- dures which will tend to control leak-
tion. All areas within pits shall be clas- age and prevent the accidental escape
sified Division 1 if any part of the pit is of flammable liquids. Spills shall be
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area, cleaned up promptly.
unless the pit is provided with mechan-
(ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be
ical ventilation.
maintained for unobstructed move-
(c) Locations where flammable vapor-
ment of personnel and so that fire pro-
air mixtures may exist under abnormal
tection equipment can be brought to
conditions and for a distance beyond
bear on any part of flammable liquid
Division 1 locations shall be classified
storage, use, or any unit physical oper-
Division 2 according to the require-
ation.
ments of subpart S of this part. These
locations include an area within 20 feet (iii) Waste and residue. Combustible
horizontally, 3 feet vertically beyond a waste material and residues in a build-
Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above ing or unit operating area shall be kept
floor or grade level within 25 feet, if in- to a minimum, stored in covered metal
doors, or 10 feet if outdoors, from any receptacles and disposed of daily.
pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting, (iv) Clear zone. Ground area around
meter, or similar device handling Cat- buildings and unit operating areas
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- shall be kept free of weeds, trash, or
egory 3 flammable liquids with a other unnecessary combustible mate-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C). Pits rials.
provided with adequate mechanical (f) Bulk plants—(1) (i) Category 1 or 2
ventilation within a Division 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
area shall be classified Division 2. If mable liquids with a flashpoint below 100
only Category 3 flammable liquids with °F (37.8 °C). Category 1 or 2 flammable
a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq-
or Category 4 flammable liquids are uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8
handled, then ordinary electrical °C), shall be stored in closed con-
equipment is satisfactory though care tainers, or in storage tanks above
shall be used in locating electrical ap- ground outside of buildings, or under-
paratus to prevent hot metal from fall- ground in accordance with paragraph
ing into open equipment. (b) of this section.
(d) Where the provisions of subdivi- (ii) Category 3 flammable liquids with a
sions (a), (b), and (c), of this subdivision flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and
require the installation of electrical Category 4 flammable liquids. Category 3
equipment suitable for Class I, Division flammable liquids with a flashpoint at
1 or Division 2 locations, ordinary elec- or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4
trical equipment including switchgear flammable liquids shall be stored in
may be used if installed in a room or containers, or in tanks within build-
enclosure which is maintained under ings or above ground outside of build-
positive pressure with respect to the ings, or underground in accordance
hazardous area. Ventilation makeup with paragraph (b) of this section.
262
(iii) Piling containers. Containers of a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) are
flammable liquids when piled one upon being handled.
the other shall be separated by (3) Loading and unloading facilities—
dunnage sufficient to provide stability (i) Separation. Tank vehicle and tank
and to prevent excessive stress on con- car loading or unloading facilities shall
tainer walls. The height of the pile be separated from aboveground tanks,
shall be consistent with the stability warehouses, other plant buildings or
and strength of containers. nearest line of adjoining property that
(2) Buildings—(i) Exits. Rooms in may be built upon by a distance of 25
which flammable liquids are stored or feet for Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
handled by pumps shall have exit fa- uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
cilities arranged to prevent occupants with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
from being trapped in the event of fire. and 15 feet for Category 3 flammable
(ii) Heating. Rooms in which Cat- liquids with a flashpoint at or above
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 flam-
egory 3 flammable liquids with a mable liquids measured from the near-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are est position of any fill spout. Buildings
stored or handled shall be heated only for pumps or shelters for personnel
by means not constituting a source of may be a part of the facility.
ignition, such as steam or hot water. (ii) Category restriction. Equipment
Rooms containing heating appliances such as piping, pumps, and meters used
involving sources of ignition shall be for the transfer of Category 1 or 2 flam-
located and arranged to prevent entry mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
of flammable vapors. liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Ventilation shall (37.8 °C), between storage tanks and the
be provided for all rooms, buildings, or fill stem of the loading rack shall not
enclosures in which Category 1 or 2 be used for the transfer of Category 3
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- flammable liquids with a flashpoint at
mable liquids with a flashpoint below or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4
100 °F (37.8 °C), are pumped or dis- flammable liquids.
pensed. Design of ventilation systems (iii) Valves. Valves used for the final
shall take into account the relatively control for filling tank vehicles shall
high specific gravity of the vapors. be of the self-closing type and manu-
Ventilation may be provided by ade- ally held open except where automatic
quate openings in outside walls at floor means are provided for shutting off the
level unobstructed except by louvers or flow when the vehicle is full or after
coarse screens. Where natural ventila- filling of a preset amount.
tion is inadequate, mechanical ventila- (iv) Static protection. (a) Bonding fa-
tion shall be provided. cilities for protection against static
(b) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, sparks during the loading of tank vehi-
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a cles through open domes shall be pro-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall vided:
not be stored or handled within a build- (1) Where Category 1 or 2 flammable
ing having a basement or pit into liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq-
which flammable vapors may travel, uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8
unless such area is provided with ven- °C), are loaded, or
tilation designed to prevent the accu- (2) Where Category 3 flammable liq-
mulation of flammable vapors therein. uids with a flashpoint at or above 100
(c) Containers of Category 1 or 2 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- liquids are loaded into vehicles which
mable liquids with a flashpoint below may contain vapors from previous car-
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall not be drawn from goes of Category 1 or 2 flammable liq-
or filled within buildings unless provi- uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
sion is made to prevent the accumula- with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C).
tion of flammable vapors in hazardous (b) Protection as required in (a) of
concentrations. Where mechanical ven- this subdivision (iv) shall consist of a
tilation is required, it shall be kept in metallic bond wire permanently elec-
operation while flammable liquids with trically connected to the fill stem or to
263
some part of the rack structure in elec- between the tank car and the rack or
trical contact with the fill stem. The piping is required during either loading
free end of such wire shall be provided or unloading of Category 3 flammable
with a clamp or equivalent device for liquids with a flashpoint at or above
convenient attachment to some metal- 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
lic part in electrical contact with the liquids.
cargo tank of the tank vehicle. (vi) Container filling facilities. Cat-
(c) Such bonding connection shall be egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat-
made fast to the vehicle or tank before egory 3 flammable liquids with a
dome covers are raised and shall re- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
main in place until filling is completed not be dispensed into containers unless
and all dome covers have been closed the nozzle and container are elec-
and secured. trically interconnected. Where the me-
(d) Bonding as specified in (a), (b), tallic floorplate on which the container
and (c) of this subdivision is not re- stands while filling is electrically con-
quired: nected to the fill stem or where the fill
(1) Where vehicles are loaded exclu- stem is bonded to the container during
sively with products not having a stat- filling operations by means of a bond
ic accumulating tendency, such as as- wire, the provisions of this section
phalt, most crude oils, residual oils, shall be deemed to have been complied
and water soluble liquids; with.
(2) Where no Category 1 or 2 flam- (4) Wharves—(i) Definition, application.
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable The term wharf shall mean any wharf,
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F pier, bulkhead, or other structure over
(37.8 °C), are handled at the loading fa- or contiguous to navigable water used
cility and the tank vehicles loaded are in conjunction with a bulk plant, the
used exclusively for Category 3 flam- primary function of which is the trans-
mable liquids with a flashpoint at or fer of flammable liquid cargo in bulk
above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 between the bulk plant and any tank
flammable liquids; and vessel, ship, barge, lighter boat, or
(3) Where vehicles are loaded or un- other mobile floating craft; and this
loaded through closed bottom or top subparagraph shall apply to all such in-
connections. stallations except Marine Service Sta-
(e) Filling through open domes into tions as covered in paragraph (g) of
the tanks of tank vehicles or tank cars, this section.
that contain vapor-air mixtures within (ii)–(iii) [Reserved]
the flammable range or where the liq- (iv) Design and construction. Sub-
uid being filled can form such a mix- structure and deck shall be substan-
ture, shall be by means of a downspout tially designed for the use intended.
which extends near the bottom of the Deck may employ any material which
tank. This precaution is not required will afford the desired combination of
when loading liquids which are non- flexibility, resistance to shock, dura-
accumulators of static charges. bility, strength, and fire resistance.
(v) Stray currents. Tank car loading Heavy timber construction is accept-
facilities where Category 1 or 2 flam- able.
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable (v) [Reserved]
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (vi) Pumps. Loading pumps capable of
(37.8 °C), are loaded through open building up pressures in excess of the
domes shall be protected against stray safe working pressure of cargo hose or
currents by bonding the pipe to at least loading arms shall be provided with by-
one rail and to the rack structure if of passes, relief valves, or other arrange-
metal. Multiple lines entering the rack ment to protect the loading facilities
area shall be electrically bonded to- against excessive pressure. Relief de-
gether. In addition, in areas where ex- vices shall be tested at not more than
cessive stray currents are known to yearly intervals to determine that they
exist, all pipe entering the rack area function satisfactorily at the pressure
shall be provided with insulating sec- at which they are set.
tions to electrically isolate the rack (vii) Hoses and couplings. All pressure
piping from the pipelines. No bonding hoses and couplings shall be inspected
264
at intervals appropriate to the service. joints shall be installed. Bonding and
The hose and couplings shall be tested grounding connections on all pipelines
with the hose extended and using the shall be located on wharfside of hose-
‘‘inservice maximum operating pres- riser insulating flanges, if used, and
sures.’’ Any hose showing material de- shall be accessible for inspection.
teriorations, signs of leakage, or weak- (h) Hose or articulated swivel-joint
ness in its carcass or at the couplings pipe connections used for cargo trans-
shall be withdrawn from service and refer shall be capable of accommodating
paired or discarded. the combined effects of change in draft
(viii) Piping and fittings. Piping, and maximum tidal range, and mooring
valves, and fittings shall be in accord- lines shall be kept adjusted to prevent
ance with paragraph (c) of this section, the surge of the vessel from placing
with the following exceptions and addi- stress on the cargo transfer system.
tions: (i) Hose shall be supported so as to
(a) Flexibility of piping shall be as- avoid kinking and damage from chaf-
sured by appropriate layout and ar- ing.
rangement of piping supports so that (ix) Fire protection. Suitable portable
motion of the wharf structure resulting fire extinguishers with a rating of not
from wave action, currents, tides, or less than 12–BC shall be located within
the mooring of vessels will not subject 75 feet of those portions of the facility
the pipe to repeated strain beyond the where fires are likely to occur, such as
elastic limit. hose connections, pumps, and separator
(b) Pipe joints depending upon the tanks.
friction characteristics of combustible (a) Where piped water is available,
materials or grooving of pipe ends for ready-connected fire hose in size appro-
mechanical continuity of piping shall priate for the water supply shall be
not be used. provided so that manifolds where con-
(c) Swivel joints may be used in pip- nections are made and broken can be
ing to which hoses are connected, and reached by at least one hose stream.
for articulated swivel-joint transfer (b) Material shall not be placed on
systems, provided that the design is wharves in such a manner as to ob-
such that the mechanical strength of struct access to firefighting equipment,
the joint will not be impaired if the or important pipeline control valves.
packing material should fail, as by ex- (c) Where the wharf is accessible to
posure to fire. vehicle traffic, an unobstructed road-
(d) Piping systems shall contain a way to the shore end of the wharf shall
sufficient number of valves to operate be maintained for access of firefighting
the system properly and to control the apparatus.
flow of liquid in normal operation and (x) Operations control. Loading or dis-
in the event of physical damage. charging shall not commence until the
(e) In addition to the requirements of wharf superintendent and officer in
paragraph (f)(4)(viii)(d) of this section, charge of the tank vessel agree that
each line conveying Category 1 or 2 the tank vessel is properly moored and
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- all connections are properly made. Me-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below chanical work shall not be performed
100 °F (37.8 °C), leading to a wharf shall on the wharf during cargo transfer, ex-
be provided with a readily accessible cept under special authorization based
block valve located on shore near the on a review of the area involved, meth-
approach to the wharf and outside of ods to be employed, and precautions
any diked area. Where more than one necessary.
line is involved, the valves shall be (5) Electrical equipment—(i) Applica-
grouped in one location. tion. This paragraph (f)(5)(i) shall apply
(f) Means of easy access shall be pro- to areas where Category 1 or 2 flam-
vided for cargo line valves located mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
below the wharf deck. liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
(g) Pipelines on flammable liquids (37.8 °C), are stored or handled. For
wharves shall be adequately bonded areas where only Category 3 flammable
and grounded. If excessive stray cur- liquids with a flashpoint at or above
rents are encountered, insulating 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
265
liquids are stored or handled, the elec- (37.8 °C), and where an unusual expo-
trical equipment may be installed in sure hazard exists from surrounding
accordance with the provisions of Sub- property. Such additional fire-control
part S of this part, for ordinary loca- equipment shall be sufficient to extin-
tions. guish a fire in the largest tank. The de-
(ii) Conformance. All electrical equip- sign and amount of such equipment
ment and wiring shall be of a type shall be in accordance with approved
specified by and shall be installed in engineering standards.
accordance with subpart S of this part. (g) Service stations—(1) Storage and
(iii) Classification. So far as it applies handling—(i) General provisions. (a) Liq-
Table H–18 shall be used to delineate uids shall be stored in approved closed
and classify hazardous areas for the containers not exceeding 60 gallons ca-
purpose of installation of electrical pacity, in tanks located underground,
equipment under normal cir- in tanks in special enclosures as de-
cumstances. In Table H–18 a classified scribed in paragraph (g)(i) of this sec-
area shall not extend beyond an tion, or in aboveground tanks as pro-
unpierced wall, roof, or other solid par- vided for in paragraphs (g)(4)(ii), (b), (c)
tition. The area classifications listed and (d) of this section.
shall be based on the premise that the (b) Aboveground tanks, located in an
installation meets the applicable re- adjoining bulk plant, may be connected
quirements of this section in all re- by piping to service station under-
spects. ground tanks if, in addition to valves
(6) Sources of ignition. Category 1 or 2 at aboveground tanks, a valve is also
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- installed within control of service sta-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below tion personnel.
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall not be handled, (c) Apparatus dispensing Category 1
drawn, or dispensed where flammable or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3
vapors may reach a source of ignition. flammable liquids with a flashpoint
Smoking shall be prohibited except in below 100 °F (37.8 °C), into the fuel
designated localities. ‘‘No Smoking’’ tanks of motor vehicles of the public
signs shall be conspicuously posted shall not be located at a bulk plant un-
where hazard from flammable liquid less separated by a fence or similar
vapors is normally present. barrier from the area in which bulk op-
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provi- erations are conducted.
sion shall be made to prevent flam- (d) [Reserved]
mable liquids which may be spilled at (e) The provisions of paragraph
loading or unloading points from enter- (g)(1)(i)(a) of this section shall not pro-
ing public sewers and drainage sys- hibit the dispensing of flammable liq-
tems, or natural waterways. Connec- uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8
tion to such sewers, drains, or water- °C) in the open from a tank vehicle to
ways by which flammable liquids a motor vehicle. Such dispensing shall
might enter shall be provided with sep- be permitted provided:
arator boxes or other approved means (1) The tank vehicle complies with
whereby such entry is precluded. the requirements covered in the Stand-
Crankcase drainings and flammable ard on Tank Vehicles for Flammable
liquids shall not be dumped into sew- Liquids, NFPA 385–1966.
ers, but shall be stored in tanks or (2) The dispensing is done on prem-
tight drums outside of any building ises not open to the public.
until removed from the premises. (3) [Reserved]
(8) Fire control. Suitable fire-control (4) The dispensing hose does not ex-
devices, such as small hose or portable ceed 50 feet in length.
fire extinguishers, shall be available to (5) The dispensing nozzle is a listed
locations where fires are likely to automatic-closing type without a
occur. Additional fire-control equip- latchopen device.
ment may be required where a tank of (f) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids,
more than 50,000 gallons individual ca- or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
pacity contains Category 1 or 2 flam- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable not be stored or handled within a build-
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F ing having a basement or pit into
266
which flammable vapors may travel, tilation designed to prevent the accu-
unless such area is provided with ven- mulation of flammable vapors therein.
(g) [Reserved]
TABLE H–18—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—BULK PLANTS
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Tank vehicle and tank car: 1

Loading through open dome ........................... 1 Within 3 feet of edge of dome, extending in all directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from edge of dome, extending
in all directions.
Loading through bottom connections with at- 1 Within 3 feet of point of venting to atmosphere extending in all
mospheric venting. directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from point of venting to at-
mosphere, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches
above grade within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from point
of loading connection.
Loading through closed dome with atmos- 1 Within 3 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
pheric venting. 2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from open end of vent, ex-
tending in all directions. Also within 3 feet of edge of dome,
extending in all directions.
Loading through closed dome with vapor re- 2 Within 3 feet of point of connection of both fill and vapor lines,
covery. extending in all directions.
Bottom loading with vapor recovery or any 2 Within 3 feet of point of connections extending in all direc-
bottom unloading. tions. Also up to 18 inches above grade with in a horizontal
radius of 10 feet from point of connection.
Drum and container filling:
Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all direc-
tions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, ex-
tending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or
grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or
fill opening.
Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all direc-
tions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, ex-
tending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or
grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or
fill opening.
Tank—Aboveground:
Shell, ends, or roof and dike area .................. 2 Within 10 feet from shell, ends, or roof of tank, Area inside
dikes to level of top of dike.
Vent ................................................................. 1 Within 5 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
2 Area between 5 feet and 10 feet from open end of vent, ex-
tending in all directions.
Floating roof .................................................... 1 Area above the roof and within the shell.
Pits:
Without mechanical ventilation ........................ 1 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area.
With mechanical ventilation ............................. 2 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area.
Containing valves, fittings or piping, and not 2 Entire pit.
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area.
Pumps, bleeders, withdrawal fittings, meters and
similar devices:
Indoors ............................................................. 2 Within 5 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all di-
rections. Also up to 3 feet above floor or grade level within
25 feet horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Outdoors .......................................................... 2 Within 3 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all di-
rections. Also up to 18 inches above grade level within 10
feet horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Storage and repair garage for tank vehicles .. 1 All pits or spaces below floor level.
2 Area up to 18 inches above floor or grade level for entire stor-
age or repair garage.
Drainage ditches, separators, impounding ba- 2 Area up to 18 inches above ditch, separator or basin. Also up
sins. to 18 inches above grade within 15 feet horizontally from
any edge.
Garages for other than tank vehicles .............. (2 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an
outdoor classified area, the entire room shall be classified
the same as the area classification at the point of the open-
ing.
Outdoor drum storage ..................................... (2 )
267
TABLE H–18—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—BULK PLANTS—Continued
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Indoor warehousing where there is no flam- (2 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an
mable liquid transfer. indoor classified are, the room shall be classified the same
as if the wall, curb or partition did not exist.
Office and rest rooms ...................................... (2 )
1 When classifying the extent of the area, consideration shall be given to the fact that tank cars or tank vehicles may be spot-
ted at varying points. Therefore, the extremities of the loading or unloading positions shall be used.
2 Ordinary.
(ii) Special enclosures. (a) When instal- station buildings from tanks of not
lation of tanks in accordance with more than 120 gallons capacity each.
paragraph (b)(3) of this section is im- (iv) [Reserved]
practical because of property or build- (v) Dispensing into portable containers.
ing limitations, tanks for flammable No delivery of any Category 1 or 2
liquids may be installed in buildings if flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
properly enclosed. mable liquids with a flashpoint below
(b) The enclosure shall be substan- 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be made into port-
tially liquid and vaportight without able containers unless the container is
backfill. Sides, top, and bottom of the constructed of metal, has a tight clo-
enclosure shall be of reinforced con- sure with screwed or spring cover, and
crete at least 6 inches thick, with open- is fitted with a spout or so designed so
ings for inspection through the top the contents can be poured without
only. Tank connections shall be so spilling.
piped or closed that neither vapors nor (2) [Reserved]
liquid can escape into the enclosed (3) Dispensing systems—(i) Location.
space. Means shall be provided whereby Dispensing devices at automotive serv-
portable equipment may be employed ice stations shall be so located that all
to discharge to the outside any liquid parts of the vehicle being served will be
or vapors which might accumulate on the premises of the service station.
should leakage occur. (ii) Inside location. Approved dis-
(iii) Inside buildings. (a) Except where pensing units may be located inside of
stored in tanks as provided in para- buildings. The dispensing area shall be
graph (g)(1)(ii) of this section, no Cat- separated from other areas in an ap-
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- proved manner. The dispensing unit
egory 3 flammable liquids with a and its piping shall be mounted either
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall on a concrete island or protected
be stored within any service station against collision damage by suitable
building except in closed containers of means and shall be located in a posi-
aggregate capacity not exceeding 60 tion where it cannot be struck by a ve-
gallons. One container not exceeding 60 hicle descending a ramp or other slope
gallons capacity equipped with an ap- out of control. The dispensing area
proved pump is permitted. shall be provided with an approved me-
(b) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, chanical or gravity ventilation system.
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a When dispensing units are located
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), may be below grade, only approved mechanical
transferred from one container to an- ventilation shall be used and the entire
other in lubrication or service rooms of dispensing area shall be protected by
a service station building provided the an approved automatic sprinkler sys-
electrical installation complies with tem. Ventilating systems shall be elec-
Table H–19 and provided that any heat- trically interlocked with gasoline dis-
ing equipment complies with paragraph pensing units so that the dispensing
(g)(6) of this section. units cannot be operated unless the
(c) Category 3 flammable liquids with ventilating fan motors are energized.
a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) (iii) Emergency power cutoff. A clearly
and Category 4 flammable liquids may identified and easily accessible
be stored and dispensed inside service switch(es) or a circuit breaker(s) shall
268
be provided at a location remote from ings, shall be located not less than 10
dispensing devices, including remote feet from lines of adjoining property
pumping systems, to shut off the power which may be built upon, and not less
to all dispensing devices in the event of than 5 feet from any building opening.
an emergency. When an outside pump location is im-
(iv) Dispensing units. (a) Category 1 or practical, pumps may be installed in-
2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 side of buildings, as provided for dis-
flammable liquids with a flashpoint pensers in subdivision (ii) of this sub-
below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be trans- paragraph, or in pits as provided in
ferred from tanks by means of fixed subdivision (c) of this subdivision.
pumps so designed and equipped as to Pumps shall be substantially anchored
allow control of the flow and to pre- and protected against physical damage
vent leakage or accidental discharge. by vehicles.
(b)(1) Only listed devices may be used (c) Pits for subsurface pumps or pip-
for dispensing Category 1 or 2 flaming manifolds of submersible pumps
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable shall withstand the external forces to
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F which they may be subjected without
(37.8 °C). No such device may be used if damage to the pump, tank, or piping.
it shows evidence of having been dis- The pit shall be no larger than nec-
mantled. essary for inspection and maintenance
(2) Every dispensing device for Cat- and shall be provided with a fitted
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- cover.
egory 3 flammable liquids with a (d) A control shall be provided that
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), in- will permit the pump to operate only
stalled after December 31, 1978, shall when a dispensing nozzle is removed
contain evidence of listing so placed from its bracket on the dispensing unit
that any attempt to dismantle the de- and the switch on this dispensing unit
vice will result in damage to such evi- is manually actuated. This control
dence, visible without disassembly or shall also stop the pump when all noz-
dismounting of the nozzle. zles have been returned to their brack-
(c) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, ets.
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a (e) An approved impact valve, incor-
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall porating a fusible link, designed to
not be dispensed by pressure from close automatically in the event of se-
drums, barrels, and similar containers. vere impact or fire exposure shall be
Approved pumps taking suction properly installed in the dispensing
through the top of the container or ap- supply line at the base of each indi-
proved self-closing faucets shall be vidual dispensing device.
used. (f) Testing. After the completion of
(d) The dispensing units, except those the installation, including any paving,
attached to containers, shall be mount- that section of the pressure piping sys-
ed either on a concrete island or pro- tem between the pump discharge and
tected against collision damage by the connection for the dispensing facil-
suitable means. ity shall be tested for at least 30 min-
(v) Remote pumping systems. (a) This utes at the maximum operating pres-
paragraph (g)(3)(v) shall apply to sys- sure of the system. Such tests shall be
tems for dispensing Category 1 or 2 repeated at 5-year intervals thereafter.
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam- (vi) Delivery nozzles. (a) A listed man-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below ual or automatic-closing type hose noz-
100 °F (37.8 °C), where such liquids are zle valve shall be provided on dis-
transferred from storage to individual pensers used for the dispensing of Cat-
or multiple dispensing units by pumps egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat-
located elsewhere than at the dis- egory 3 flammable liquids with a
pensing units. flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C).
(b) Pumps shall be designed or (b) Manual-closing type valves shall
equipped so that no part of the system be held open manually during dis-
will be subjected to pressures above its pensing. Automatic-closing type valves
allowable working pressure. Pumps in- may be used in conjunction with an ap-
stalled above grade, outside of build- proved latch-open device.
269
(4) Marine service stations—(i) Dis- plied with and the quantity so stored
pensing. (a) The dispensing area shall does not exceed 1,100 gallons aggregate
be located away from other structures capacity.
so as to provide room for safe ingress (c) Shore tanks supplying marine
and egress of craft to be fueled. Dis- service stations may be located above
pensing units shall in all cases be at ground, where rock ledges or high
least 20 feet from any activity involv- water table make underground tanks
ing fixed sources of ignition. impractical.
(b) Dispensing shall be by approved (d) Where tanks are at an elevation
dispensing units with or without inte- which would produce gravity head on
gral pumps and may be located on open the dispensing unit, the tank outlet
piers, wharves, or floating docks or on shall be equipped with a pressure con-
shore or on piers of the solid fill type. trol valve positioned adjacent to and
(c) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto- outside the tank block valve specified
matic-closing without a hold-open in paragraph (b)(2)(ix)(b) of this sec-
latch. tion, so adjusted that liquid cannot
(ii) Tanks and pumps. (a) Tanks, and flow by gravity from the tank in case
pumps not integral with the dispensing of piping or hose failure.
unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of (iii) Piping. (a) Piping between shore
the solid fill type, except as provided in tanks and dispensing units shall be as
paragraphs (g)(4)(ii) (b) and (c) of this described in paragraph (c) of this sec-
section. tion, except that, where dispensing is
(b) Where shore location would re- from a floating structure, suitable
quire excessively long supply lines to lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose
dispensers, tanks may be installed on a may be employed between the shore
pier provided that applicable portions piping and the piping on the floating
of paragraph (b) of this section relative structure as made necessary by change
to spacing, diking, and piping are com- in water level or shoreline.
270
271
ER26MR12.058</GPH>
(b) A readily accessible valve to shut liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
off the supply from shore shall be pro- (37.8 °C), are stored or handled. For
vided in each pipeline at or near the areas where Category 3 flammable liq-
approach to the pier and at the shore uids with a flashpoint at or above 100
end of each pipeline adjacent to the °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
point where flexible hose is attached. liquids are stored or handled the elec-
(c) Piping shall be located so as to be trical equipment may be installed in
protected from physical damage. accordance with the provisions of sub-
(d) Piping handling Category 1 or 2 part S of this part, for ordinary loca-
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
tions.
mable liquids with a flashpoint below
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be grounded to (ii) All electrical equipment and wir-
control stray currents. ing shall be of a type specified by and
(5) Electrical equipment—(i) Applica- shall be installed in accordance with
tion. This paragraph (g)(5) shall apply subpart S of this part.
to areas where Category 1 or 2 flam- (iii) So far as it applies. Table H–19
mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable shall be used to delineate and classify
272
ER26MR12.059</GPH>
hazardous areas for the purpose of in- dispensed to prevent spilled liquids
stallation of electrical equipment from flowing into the interior of serv-
under normal circumstances. A classi- ice station buildings. Such provision
fied area shall not extend beyond an may be by grading driveways, raising
unpierced wall, roof, or other solid par- door sills, or other equally effective
tition. means. Crankcase drainings and flam-
(iv) The area classifications listed mable liquids shall not be dumped into
shall be based on the assumption that sewers but shall be stored in tanks or
the installation meets the applicable drums outside of any building until re-
requirements of this section in all removed from the premises.
spects. (8) Sources of ignition. In addition to
(6) Heating equipment—(i) Conform- the previous restrictions of this para-
ance. Heating equipment shall be in- graph, the following shall apply: There
stalled as provided in paragraphs (g)(6) shall be no smoking or open flames in
(ii) through (v) of this section. the areas used for fueling, servicing
(ii) Application. Heating equipment fuel systems for internal combustion
may be installed in the conventional engines, receiving or dispensing of
manner in an area except as provided flammable liquids. Conspicuous and
in paragraph (g)(6) (iii), (iv), or (v) of legible signs prohibiting smoking shall
this section. be posted within sight of the customer
(iii) Special room. Heating equipment being served. The motors of all equip-
may be installed in a special room sep- ment being fueled shall be shut off dur-
arated from an area classified by Table ing the fueling operation.
H–19 by walls having a fire resistance (9) Fire control. Each service station
rating of at least 1 hour and without shall be provided with at least one fire
any openings in the walls within 8 feet extinguisher having a minimum ap-
of the floor into an area classified in proved classification of 6 B, C, located
Table H–19. This room shall not be used so that an extinguisher, will be within
for combustible storage and all air for 75 feet of each pump, dispenser, under-
combustion purposes shall come from ground fill pipe opening, and lubrica-
outside the building. tion or service room.
(iv) Work areas. Heating equipment (h) Processing plants—(1) Scope. This
using gas or oil fuel may be installed in paragraph shall apply to those plants
the lubrication, sales, or service room or buildings which contain chemical
where there is no dispensing or trans- operations such as oxidation, reduc-
ferring of Category 1 or 2 flammable tion, halogenation, hydrogenation,
liquids or 3 flammable liquids with a alkylation, polymerization, and other
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), pro- chemical processes but shall not apply
vided the bottom of the combustion to chemical plants, refineries or distill-
chamber is at least 18 inches above the eries.
floor and the heating equipment is pro- (2) Location—(i) Classification. The lo-
tected from physical damage by vehi- cation of each processing vessel shall
cles. Heating equipment using gas or be based upon its flammable liquid ca-
oil fuel listed for use in garages may be pacity.
installed in the lubrication or service (ii) [Reserved]
room where Category 1 or 2 flammable (3) Processing building—(i) Construc-
liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq- tion. (a) Processing buildings shall be of
uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 fire-resistance or noncombustible con-
°C), are dispensed provided the equip- struction, except heavy timber con-
ment is installed at least 8 feet above struction with load-bearing walls may
the floor. be permitted for plants utilizing only
(v) Electric heat. Electrical heating stable Category 3 flammable liquids
equipment shall conform to paragraph with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F
(g)(5) of this section. (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liq-
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provi- uids. Except as provided in paragraph
sion shall be made in the area where (h)(2)(ii) of this section or in the case
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or of explosion resistant walls used in
Category 3 flammable liquids with a conjunction with explosion relieving
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are facilities, see paragraph (h)(3)(iv) of
273
this section, load-bearing walls are pro- (d) Windows of explosion venting
hibited. Buildings shall be without type.
basements or covered pits. (4) Liquid handling—(i) Storage. (a)
(b) Areas shall have adequate exit fa- The storage of flammable liquids in
cilities arranged to prevent occupants tanks shall be in accordance with the
from being trapped in the event of fire. applicable provisions of paragraph (b)
Exits shall not be exposed by the drain- of this section.
age facilities described in paragraph (b) If the storage of flammable liq-
(h)(ii) of this section. uids in outside aboveground or under-
(ii) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage ground tanks is not practical because
systems shall be provided to direct of temperature or production consider-
flammable liquid leakage and fire pro- ations, tanks may be permitted inside
tection water to a safe location. This of buildings or structures in accord-
may require curbs, scuppers, or special ance with the applicable provisions of
drainage systems to control the spread paragraph (b) of this section.
of fire, see paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(b) of (c) Storage tanks inside of buildings
this section. shall be permitted only in areas at or
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if above grade which have adequate
connected to public sewers or dis- drainage and are separated from the
charged into public waterways, shall be processing area by construction having
equipped with traps or separators. a fire resistance rating of at least 2
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Enclosed proc- hours.
essing buildings shall be ventilated at a (d) The storage of flammable liquids
rate of not less than 1 cubic foot per in containers shall be in accordance
minute per square foot of solid floor with the applicable provisions of para-
area. This shall be accomplished by graph (d) of this section.
natural or mechanical ventilation with (ii) Piping, valves, and fittings. (a) Pip-
discharge or exhaust to a safe location ing, valves, and fittings shall be in ac-
outside of the building. Provisions cordance with paragraph (c) of this sec-
shall be made for introduction of tion.
makeup air in such a manner as not to (b) Approved flexible connectors may
short circuit the ventilation. Ventila- be used where vibration exists or where
tion shall be arranged to include all frequent movement is necessary. Ap-
floor areas or pits where flammable va- proved hose may be used at transfer
pors may collect. stations.
(b) Equipment used in a building and (c) Piping containing flammable liq-
the ventilation of the building shall be uids shall be identified.
designed so as to limit flammable (iii) Transfer. (a) The transfer of large
vapor-air mixtures under normal oper- quantities of flammable liquids shall
ating conditions to the interior of be through piping by means of pumps
equipment, and to not more than 5 feet or water displacement. Except as re-
from equipment which exposes Cat- quired in process equipment, gravity
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- flow shall not be used. The use of com-
egory 3 flammable liquids with a pressed air as a transferring medium is
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), to the prohibited.
air. Examples of such equipment are (b) Positive displacement pumps
dispensing stations, open centrifuges, shall be provided with pressure relief
plate and frame filters, open vacuum discharging back to the tank or to
filters, and surfaces of open equipment. pump suction.
(iv) Explosion relief. Areas where Cat- (iv) Equipment. (a) Equipment shall
egory 1 or unstable liquids are proc- be designed and arranged to prevent
essed shall have explosion venting the unintentional escape of liquids and
through one or more of the following vapors and to minimize the quantity
methods: escaping in the event of accidental re-
(a) Open air construction. lease.
(b) Lightweight walls and roof. (b) Where the vapor space of equip-
(c) Lightweight wall panels and roof ment is usually within the flammable
hatches. range, the probability of explosion
274
damage to the equipment can be lim- vided, approved equipment shall be
ited by inerting, by providing an explo- used and installed in an approved man-
sion suppression system, or by design- ner.
ing the equipment to contain the peak (iii) Alarm systems. An approved
explosion pressure which may be modi- means for prompt notification of fire
fied by explosion relief. Where the spe- to those within the plant and any pub-
cial hazards of operation, sources of ig- lic fire department available shall be
nition, or exposures indicate a need, provided. It may be advisable to con-
consideration shall be given to pro- nect the plant system with the public
viding protection by one or more of the system where public fire alarm system
above means. is available.
(5) Tank vehicle and tank car loading
(iv) Maintenance. All plant fire pro-
and unloading. Tank vehicle and tank
tection facilities shall be adequately
car loading or unloading facilities shall
maintained and periodically inspected
be separated from aboveground tanks,
warehouses, other plant buildings, or and tested to make sure they are al-
nearest line of adjoining property ways in satisfactory operating condi-
which may be built upon by a distance tion and that they will serve their pur-
of 25 feet for Category 1 or 2 flammable pose in time of emergency.
liquids, or Category 3 flammable liq- (7) Sources of ignition—(i) General. (a)
uids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 Precautions shall be taken to prevent
°C), and 15 feet for Category 3 flam- the ignition of flammable vapors.
mable liquids with a flashpoint at or Sources of ignition include but are not
above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 limited to open flames; lightning;
flammable liquids measured from the smoking; cutting and welding; hot sur-
nearest position of any fill stem. Build- faces; frictional heat; static, electrical,
ings for pumps or shelters for personnel and mechanical sparks; spontaneous ig-
may be a part of the facility. Oper- nition, including heat-producing chem-
ations of the facility shall comply with ical reactions; and radiant heat.
the appropriate portions of paragraph (b) Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids,
(f)(3) of this section. or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
(6) Fire control—(i) Portable extin- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
guishers. Approved portable fire extin- not be dispensed into containers unless
guishers of appropriate size, type, and the nozzle and container are elec-
number shall be provided. trically interconnected. Where the me-
(ii) Other controls. Where the special tallic floorplate on which the container
hazards of operation or exposure indi- stands while filling is electrically con-
cate a need, the following fire control nected to the fill stem or where the fill
provision shall be provided.
stem is bonded to the container during
(a) A reliable water supply shall be
filling operations by means of a bond
available in pressure and quantity ade-
wire, the provisions of this section
quate to meet the probable fire de-
shall be deemed to have been complied
mands.
with.
(b) Hydrants shall be provided in ac-
cordance with accepted good practice. (ii) Maintenance and repair. (a) When
(c) Hose connected to a source of necessary to do maintenance work in a
water shall be installed so that all ves- flammable liquid processing area, the
sels, pumps, and other equipment con- work shall be authorized by a respon-
taining flammable liquids can be sible representative of the employer.
reached with at least one hose stream. (b) Hot work, such as welding or cut-
Nozzles that are capable of discharging ting operations, use of spark-producing
a water spray shall be provided. power tools, and chipping operations
(d) Processing plants shall be pro- shall be permitted only under super-
tected by an approved automatic sprin- vision of an individual in responsible
kler system or equivalent extin- charge who shall make an inspection of
guishing system. If special extin- the area to be sure that it is safe for
guishing systems including but not the work to be done and that safe pro-
limited to those employing foam, car- cedures will be followed for the work
bon dioxide, or dry chemical are pro- specified.
275
(iii) Electrical. (a) All electric wiring dures which will tend to control leak-
and equipment shall be installed in ac- age and prevent the accidental escape
cordance with subpart S of this part. of flammable liquids. Spills shall be
(b) Locations where flammable cleaned up promptly.
vapor-air mixtures may exist under (ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be
normal operations shall be classified maintained for unobstructed move-
Class I, Division 1 according to the re- ment of personnel and so that fire pro-
quirements of subpart S of this part. tection equipment can be brought to
For those pieces of equipment installed bear on any part of the processing
in accordance with paragraph equipment.
(h)(3)(iii)(b) of this section, the Divi- (iii) Waste and residues. Combustible
sion 1 area shall extend 5 feet in all di- waste material and residues in a build-
rections from all points of vapor libera- ing or operating area shall be kept to a
tion. All areas within pits shall be clas- minimum, stored in closed metal waste
sified Division 1 if any part of the pit is cans, and disposed of daily.
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area, (iv) Clear zone. Ground area around
unless the pit is provided with mechan- buildings and operating areas shall be
ical ventilation. kept free of tall grass, weeds, trash, or
(c) Locations where flammable vapor- other combustible materials.
air mixtures may exist under abnormal (i) Refineries, chemical plants, and dis-
conditions and for a distance beyond tilleries—(1) Storage tanks. Flammable
Division 1 locations shall be classified liquids shall be stored in tanks, in con-
Division 2 according to the require- tainers, or in portable tanks. Tanks
ments of subpart S of this part. These shall be installed in accordance with
locations include an area within 20 feet paragraph (b) of this section. Tanks for
horizontally, 3 feet vertically beyond a the storage of flammable liquids in
Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above tank farms and in locations other than
floor or grade level within 25 feet, if in- process areas shall be located in ac-
doors, or 10 feet if outdoors, from any cordance with paragraph (b)(2) (i) and
pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting, (ii) of this section.
meter, or similar device handling Cat- (2) Wharves. Wharves handling flam-
egory 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Cat- mable liquids shall be in accordance
egory 3 flammable liquids with a with paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C). Pits (3) Fired and unfired pressure vessels—
provided with adequate mechanical (i) Fired vessels. Fired pressure vessels
ventilation within a Division 1 or 2 shall be constructed in accordance with
area shall be classified Division 2. If the Code for Fired Pressure Vessels,
Category 3 flammable liquids with a Section I of the ASME Boiler and Pres-
flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or sure Vessel Code—1968.
Category 4 flammable liquids only are (ii) Unfired vessels shall be con-
handled, then ordinary electrical structed in accordance with the Code
equipment is satisfactory though care for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section
shall be used in locating electrical ap- VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
paratus to prevent hot metal from fall- Vessel Code—1968.
ing into open equipment. (4) Location of process units. Process
(d) Where the provisions of para- units shall be located so that they are
graphs (h)(7)(iii) (a), (b), and (c) of this accessible from at least one side for the
section require the installation of ex- purpose of fire control.
plosion-proof equipment, ordinary elec- (5) Fire control—(i) Portable equipment.
trical equipment including switchgear Portable fire extinguishment and con-
may be used if installed in a room or trol equipment shall be provided in
enclosure which is maintained under such quantities and types as are needed
positive pressure with respect to the for the special hazards of operation and
hazardous area. Ventilation makeup storage.
air shall be uncontaminated by flam- (ii) Water supply. Water shall be
mable vapors. available in volume and at adequate
(8) Housekeeping—(i) General. Mainte- pressure to supply water hose streams,
nance and operating practices shall be foam producing equipment, automatic
in accordance with established proce- sprinklers, or water spray systems as
276
the need is indicated by the special terial used as a coating material which
hazards of operation and storage. shall be fluidized within a container by
(iii) Special equipment. Special extin- passing air uniformly from below. It is
guishing equipment such as that uti- common practice to fluidize such mate-
lizing foam, inert gas, or dry chemical rials to form a fluidized powder bed and
shall be provided as the need is indi- then dip the part to be coated into the
cated by the special hazards of oper- bed in a manner similar to that used in
ation and storage. liquid dipping. Such beds are also used
(j) Scope. This section applies to the as sources for powder spray operations.
handling, storage, and use of flam- (2) Spraying area. Any area in which
mable liquids with a flashpoint at or dangerous quantities of flammable va-
below 199.4 °F (93 °C) unless otherwise pors or mists, or combustible residues,
noted. This section does not apply to: dusts, or deposits are present due to
(1) Bulk transportation of flammable the operation of spraying processes.
liquids;
(3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated
(2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel
structure provided to enclose or accom-
oil tanks and containers connected
with oil burning equipment; modate a spraying operation to confine
(3) Storage of flammable liquids on and limit the escape of spray, vapor,
farms; and residue, and to safely conduct or
(4) Liquids without flashpoints that direct them to an exhaust system.
may be flammable under some condi- (4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray
tions, such as certain halogenated hy- booth equipped with a water washing
drocarbons and mixtures containing system designed to minimize dusts or
halogenated hydrocarbons; residues entering exhaust ducts and to
(5) Mists, sprays, or foams, except permit the recovery of overspray fin-
flammable aerosols covered in para- ishing material.
graph (d) of this section; or (5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not
(6) Installations made in accordance equipped with a water washing system
with requirements of the following as described in subparagraph (4) of this
standards that are incorporated by ref- paragraph. A dry spray booth may be
erence as specified in § 1910.6: equipped with (i) distribution or baffle
(i) National Fire Protection Associa- plates to promote an even flow of air
tion Standard for Drycleaning Plants, through the booth or cause the deposit
NFPA No. 32–1970; of overspray before it enters the ex-
(ii) National Fire Protection Associa- haust duct; or (ii) overspray dry filters
tion Standard for the Manufacture of to minimize dusts; or (iii) overspray
Organic Coatings, NFPA No. 35–1970; dry filters to minimize dusts or resi-
(iii) National Fire Protection Asso- dues entering exhaust ducts; or (iv)
ciation Standard for Solvent Extrac- overspray dry filter rolls designed to
tion Plants, NFPA No. 36–1967; or minimize dusts or residues entering ex-
(iv) National Fire Protection Asso- haust ducts; or (v) where dry powders
ciation Standard for the Installation are being sprayed, with powder collec-
and Use of Stationary Combustion En- tion systems so arranged in the ex-
gines and Gas Turbines, NFPA No. 37– haust to capture oversprayed material.
1970.
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 powder coating material which is aer-
FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 40 FR 23743, June 2, ated from below so as to form an air-
1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, supported expanded cloud of such ma-
Nov. 7, 1978; 47 FR 39164, Sept. 7, 1982; 51 FR
terial through which the preheated ob-
34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988;
55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, ject to be coated is immersed and
1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 77 FR 17765, transported.
Mar. 26, 2012] (7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con-
tainer holding powder coating material
§ 1910.107 Spray finishing using flam- which is aerated from below so as to
mable and combustible materials. form an air-supported expanded cloud
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- of such material which is electrically
tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated charged with a charge opposite to the
powders shall mean any powdered ma- charge of the object to be coated; such
277
object is transported, through the con- feet per minute, or more, depending on
tainer immediately above the charged the volume of the finishing material
and aerated materials in order to be being applied and its flammability and
coated. explosion characteristics. Visible
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac-
and listed by a nationally recognized tivated devices shall be installed to in-
testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for dicate or insure that the required air
definition of nationally recognized velocity is maintained. Filter rolls
testing laboratory. shall be inspected to insure proper re-
(9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in placement of filter media.
§ 1910.107(a)(8). (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter
(b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. rolls shall be immediately removed to
Spray booths shall be substantially a safe, well-detached location or placed
constructed of steel, securely and rig- in a water-filled metal container and
idly supported, or of concrete or ma- disposed of at the close of the day’s op-
sonry except that aluminum or other eration unless maintained completely
substantial noncombustible material in water.
may be used for intermittent or low (iii) The location of filters in a spray
volume spraying. Spray booths shall be booth shall be so as to not reduce the
designed to sweep air currents toward effective booth enclosure of the arti-
the exhaust outlet. cles being sprayed.
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of
(iv) Space within the spray booth on
spray booths shall be smooth and con-
the downstream and upstream sides of
tinuous without edges and otherwise
filters shall be protected with approved
designed to prevent pocketing of resi-
automatic sprinklers.
dues and facilitate cleaning and wash-
ing without injury. (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray used when applying a spray material
booth and operator’s working area, if known to be highly susceptible to spon-
combustible, shall be covered with non- taneous heating and ignition.
combustible material of such character (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall
as to facilitate the safe cleaning and be noncombustible or of a type having
removal of residues. a combustibility not in excess of class
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab-
tribution or baffle plates, if installed oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls
to promote an even flow of air through shall not be alternately used for dif-
the booth or cause the deposit of ferent types of coating materials,
overspray before it enters the exhaust where the combination of materials
duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- may be conducive to spontaneous igni-
rial and readily removable or acces- tion. See also paragraph (g)(6) of this
sible on both sides for cleaning. Such section.
plates shall not be located in exhaust (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth
ducts. having a frontal area larger than 9
(5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex- square feet shall have a metal deflector
haust air filters). In conventional dry or curtain not less than 21⁄2 inches deep
type spray booths, overspray dry filters installed at the upper outer edge of the
or filter rolls, if installed, shall con- booth over the opening.
form to the following: (7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are
(i) The spraying operations except arranged to carry work into or out of
electrostatic spraying operations shall spray booths, the openings therefor
be so designed, installed and main- shall be as small as practical.
tained that the average air velocity (8) Separation of operations. Each
over the open face of the booth (or spray booth shall be separated from
booth cross section during spraying op- other operations by not less than 3
erations) shall be not less than 100 lin- feet, or by a greater distance, or by
ear feet per minute. Electrostatic such partition or wall as to reduce the
spraying operations may be conducted danger from juxtaposition of hazardous
with an air velocity over the open face operations. See also paragraph (c)(1) of
of the booth of not less than 60 linear this section.
278
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so able residue and explosive vapors, there
installed that all portions are readily shall be no electrical equipment in any
accessible for cleaning. A clear space of spraying area, whereon deposits of
not less than 3 feet on all sides shall be combustible residues may readily accu-
kept free from storage or combustible mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit
construction. or in boxes or fittings containing no
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas taps, splices, or terminal connections.
are illuminated through glass panels or (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical
other transparent materials, only fixed wiring and equipment not subject to
lighting units shall be used as a source deposits of combustible residues but lo-
of illumination. Panels shall effec- cated in a spraying area as herein de-
tively isolate the spraying area from fined shall be of explosion-proof type
the area in which the lighting unit is
approved for Class I, group D locations
located, and shall be of a noncombus-
and shall otherwise conform to the pro-
tible material of such a nature or so
visions of subpart S of this part, for
protected that breakage will be un-
likely. Panels shall be so arranged that Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
normal accumulations of residue on tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and
the exposed surface of the panel will other equipment outside of but within
not be raised to a dangerous tempera- twenty (20) feet of any spraying area,
ture by radiation or conduction from and not separated therefrom by parti-
the source of illumination. tions, shall not produce sparks under
(c) Electrical and other sources of igni- normal operating conditions and shall
tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical otherwise conform to the provisions of
equipment, open flames and other subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi-
sources of ignition shall conform to the sion 2 Hazardous Locations.
requirements of this paragraph, except (7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of,
as follows: but within twenty (20) feet of any
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- spraying area, and not separated there-
form to the requirements of paragraphs from by a partition, shall be totally en-
(h) and (i) of this section; closed to prevent the falling of hot par-
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- ticles and shall be protected from me-
ratus shall conform to the require- chanical injury by suitable guards or
ments of paragraph (j) of this section; by location.
(iii) Automobile undercoating spray (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric
operations in garages shall conform to lamps shall not be used in any spraying
the requirements of paragraph (k) of area during spraying operations. Port-
this section; able electric lamps, if used during
(iv) Powder-coating equipment shall cleaning or repairing operations, shall
conform to the requirements of para- be of the type approved for hazardous
graph (l)(1) of this section. Class I locations.
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be
(9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of
no open flame or spark producing
spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping
equipment in any spraying area nor
within 20 feet thereof, unless separated systems conveying flammable liquids
by a partition. or liquids with a flashpoint greater
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- than 199.4 °F (93 °C) or aerated solids
ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall shall be properly electrically grounded
not be located in a spraying area where in an effective and permanent manner.
deposits of combustible residues may (ii) [Reserved]
readily accumulate. (d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven-
(4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir- tilating and exhaust systems shall be
ing and equipment shall conform to the in accordance with the Standard for
provisions of this paragraph and shall Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor
otherwise be in accordance with sub- Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, which is
part S of this part. incorporated by reference as specified
(5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless in § 1910.6, where applicable and shall
specifically approved for locations con- also conform to the provisions of this
taining both deposits of readily ignit- section.
279
(2) General. All spraying areas shall be in a full open position at all times
be provided with mechanical ventila- the ventilating system is in operation.
tion adequate to remove flammable va- (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected
pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- against mechanical damage and have a
tion and to confine and control com- clearance from unprotected combus-
bustible residues so that life is not en- tible construction or other combustible
dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall material of not less than 18 inches.
be kept in operation at all times while (ii) If combustible construction is
spraying operations are being con- provided with the following protection
ducted and for a sufficient time there- applied to all surfaces within 18 inches,
after to allow vapors from drying coat- clearances may be reduced to the dis-
ed articles and drying finishing mate- tances indicated:
rial residue to be exhausted. (a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1⁄4-inch asbestos 12 inches.
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray mill board.
booth shall have an independent ex- (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1⁄8-inch asbestos 9 inches.
haust duct system discharging to the mill board spaced out 1 inch on non-
combustible spacers.
exterior of the building, except that (c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch rockwool 3 inches.
multiple cabinet spray booths in which batts reinforced with wire mesh or the
identical spray finishing material is equivalent.
used with a combined frontal area of (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap-
proved automatic sprinkler system, properly
not more than 18 square feet may have maintained, the clearance required in sub-
a common exhaust. If more than one division (i) of this subparagraph may be re-
fan serves one booth, all fans shall be duced to 6 inches.
so interconnected that one fan cannot
(8) Discharge clearance. Unless the
operate without all fans being oper-
spray booth exhaust duct terminal is
ated.
from a water-wash spray booth, the
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro-
terminal discharge point shall be not
tating element shall be nonferrous or
less than 6 feet from any combustible
nonsparking or the casing shall consist
exterior wall or roof nor discharge in
of or be lined with such material.
the direction of any combustible con-
There shall be ample clearance be-
struction or unprotected opening in
tween the fan-rotating element and the
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, any noncombustible exterior wall with-
necessary allowance being made for or- in 25 feet.
dinary expansion and loading to pre- (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from
vent contact between moving parts and spray operations shall not be directed
the duct or fan housing. Fan blades so that it will contaminate makeup air
shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- being introduced into the spraying area
ciently heavy to maintain perfect or other ventilating intakes, nor di-
alignment even when the blades of the rected so as to create a nuisance. Air
fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- exhausted from spray operations shall
erably to have bearings outside the not be recirculated.
duct and booth. All bearings shall be of (10) Access doors. When necessary to
the self-lubricating type, or lubricated facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall
from the outside duct. be provided with an ample number of
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors access doors.
driving exhaust fans shall not be placed (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings
inside booths or ducts. See also para- to rooms containing spray finishing op-
graph (c) of this section. erations shall be adequate for the effi-
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the cient operation of exhaust fans and
duct or booth unless the belt and pul- shall be so located as to minimize the
ley within the duct or booth are thor- creation of dead air pockets.
oughly enclosed. (12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed
(7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall articles shall be dried only in spaces
be constructed of steel and shall be provided with adequate ventilation to
substantially supported. Exhaust ducts prevent the formation of explosive va-
without dampers are preferred; how- pors. In the event adequate and reliable
ever, if dampers are installed, they ventilation is not provided such drying
shall be maintained so that they will spaces shall be considered a spraying
280
area. See also paragraph (j) of this sec- be subject to air pressure for supplying
tion. spray nozzles. Containers under air
(e) Flammable liquids and liquids with pressure supplying spray nozzles shall
a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 be of limited capacity, not exceeding
°C)—(1) Conformance. The storage of that necessary for 1 day’s operation;
flammable liquids or liquids with a shall be designed and approved for such
flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) use; shall be provided with a visible
in connection with spraying operations pressure gage; and shall be provided
shall conform to the requirements of with a relief valve set to operate in
§ 1910.106, where applicable. conformance with the requirements of
(2) Quantity. The quantity of flam- the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels,
mable liquids or liquids with a Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and
flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) Pressure Vessel Code—1968, which is in-
kept in the vicinity of spraying oper- corporated by reference as specified in
ations shall be the minimum required
§ 1910.6. Containers under air pressure
for operations and should ordinarily
supplying spray nozzles, air-storage
not exceed a supply for 1 day or one
tanks and coolers shall conform to the
shift. Bulk storage of portable con-
tainers of flammable liquids or liquids standards of the Code for Unfired Pres-
with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F sure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME
(93 °C) shall be in a separate, con- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code—1968
structed building detached from other for construction, tests, and mainte-
important buildings or cut off in a nance.
standard manner. (6) Pipes and hoses. (i) All containers
(3) Containers. Original closed con- or piping to which is attached a hose or
tainers, approved portable tanks, ap- flexible connection shall be provided
proved safety cans or a properly ar- with a shutoff valve at the connection.
ranged system of piping shall be used Such valves shall be kept shut when
for bringing flammable liquids or liq- spraying operations are not being con-
uids with a flashpoint greater than ducted.
199.4 °F (93 °C) into spray finishing (ii) When a pump is used to deliver
room. Open or glass containers shall products, automatic means shall be
not be used. provided to prevent pressure in excess
(4) Transferring liquids. Except as proof the design working pressure of ac-
vided in paragraph (e)(5) of this section cessories, piping, and hose.
the withdrawal of flammable liquids (iii) All pressure hose and couplings
and liquids with a flashpoint greater shall be inspected at regular intervals
than 199.4 °F (93 °C) from containers appropriate to this service. The hose
having a capacity of greater than 60 and couplings shall be tested with the
gallons shall be by approved pumps. hose extended, and using the ‘‘inservice
The withdrawal of flammable liquids or
maximum operating pressures.’’ Any
liquids with a flashpoint greater than
hose showing material deteriorations,
199.4 °F (93 °C) from containers and the
signs of leakage, or weakness in its
filling of containers, including portable
carcass or at the couplings, shall be
mixing tanks, shall be done only in a
suitable mixing room or in a spraying withdrawn from service and repaired or
area when the ventilating system is in discarded.
operation. Adequate precautions shall (iv) Piping systems conveying flam-
be taken to protect against liquid spill- mable liquids or liquids with a
age and sources of ignition. flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C)
(5) Spraying containers. Containers shall be of steel or other material hav-
supplying spray nozzles shall be of ing comparable properties of resistance
closed type or provided with metal cov- to heat and physical damage. Piping
ers kept closed. Containers not resting systems shall be properly bonded and
on floors shall be on metal supports or grounded.
suspended by wire cables. Containers (7) Spray liquid heaters. Electrically
supplying spray nozzles by gravity flow powered spray liquid heaters shall be
shall not exceed 10 gallons capacity. approved and listed for the specific lo-
Original shipping containers shall not cation in which used (see paragraph (c)
281
of this section). Heaters shall not be lo- practical, with cleaning conducted
cated in spray booths nor other loca- daily if necessary. Scrapers, spuds, or
tions subject to the accumulation of other such tools used for cleaning pur-
deposits or combustible residue. If an poses shall be of nonsparking material.
electric motor is used, see paragraph (3) Residue disposal. Residue scrapings
(c) of this section. and debris contaminated with residue
(8) Pump relief. If flammable liquids shall be immediately removed from the
or liquids with a flashpoint greater premises and properly disposed of. Ap-
than 199.4 °F (93 °C) are supplied to proved metal waste cans shall be pro-
spray nozzles by positive displacement vided wherever rags or waste are im-
pumps, the pump discharge line shall pregnated with finishing material and
be provided with an approved relief all such rags or waste deposited therein
valve discharging to a pump suction or immediately after use. The contents of
a safe detached location, or a device waste cans shall be properly disposed of
provided to stop the prime mover if the at least once daily or at the end of each
discharge pressure exceeds the safe op- shift.
erating pressure of the system. (4) Clothing storage. Spray finishing
(9) Grounding. Whenever flammable employees’ clothing shall not be left on
liquids or liquids with a flashpoint the premises overnight unless kept in
greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) are trans- metal lockers.
ferred from one container to another, (5) Cleaning solvents. The use of sol-
both containers shall be effectively vents for cleaning operations shall be
bonded and grounded to prevent dis- restricted to those having flashpoints
charge sparks of static electricity. not less than 100 °F.; however, for
(f) Protection—(1) Conformance. In cleaning spray nozzles and auxiliary
sprinklered buildings, the automatic equipment, solvents having flashpoints
sprinkler system in rooms containing not less than those normally used in
spray finishing operations shall con- spray operations may be used. Such
form to the requirements of § 1910.159. cleaning shall be conducted inside
In unsprinklered buildings where sprin- spray booths and ventilating equip-
klers are installed only to protect ment operated during cleaning.
spraying areas, the installation shall (6) Hazardous materials combinations.
conform to such standards insofar as Spray booths shall not be alternately
they are applicable. Sprinkler heads used for different types of coating ma-
shall be located so as to provide water terials, where the combination of the
distribution throughout the entire materials may be conducive to sponta-
booth. neous ignition, unless all deposits of
(2) Valve access. Automatic sprinklers the first used material are removed
protecting each spray booth (together from the booth and exhaust ducts prior
with its connecting exhaust) shall be to spraying with the second used mate-
under an accessibly located separate rial.
outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) subcon- (7) ‘‘No Smoking’’ signs. ‘‘No smoking’’
trol valve. signs in large letters on contrasting
(3) Cleaning of heads. Sprinklers pro- color background shall be conspicu-
tecting spraying areas shall be kept as ously posted at all spraying areas and
free from deposits as practical by paint storage rooms.
cleaning daily if necessary. (See also (h) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1)
paragraph (g) of this section.) Conformance. Where installation and
(4) Portable extinguishers. An adequate use of electrostatic spraying equip-
supply of suitable portable fire extin- ment is used, such installation and use
guishers shall be installed near all shall conform to all other paragraphs
spraying areas. of this section, and shall also conform
(g) Operations and maintenance—(1) to the requirements of this paragraph.
Spraying. Spraying shall not be con- (2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa-
ducted outside of predetermined spray- ratus and devices used in connection
ing areas. with coating operations shall be of ap-
(2) Cleaning. All spraying areas shall proved types.
be kept as free from the accumulation (3) Location. Transformers, power
of deposits of combustible residues as packs, control apparatus, and all other
282
electrical portions of the equipment, equipment which is manipulated by
with the exception of high-voltage hand, see paragraph (i) of this section
grids, electrodes, and electrostatic for applicable requirements.
atomizing heads and their connections, (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap-
shall be located outside of the spraying paratus shall be equipped with auto-
area, or shall otherwise conform to the matic controls which will operate with-
requirements of paragraph (c) of this out time delay to disconnect the power
section. supply to the high voltage transformer
(4) Support. Electrodes and electro- and to signal the operator under any of
static atomizing heads shall be ade- the following conditions:
quately supported in permanent loca- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or
tions and shall be effectively insulated
failure of ventilating equipment from
from the ground. Electrodes and elec-
any cause.
trostatic atomizing heads which are
permanently attached to their bases, (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car-
supports, or reciprocators, shall be rying goods through the high voltage
deemed to comply with this section. field.
Insulators shall be nonporous and non- (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an
combustible. imminent ground at any point on the
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage high voltage system.
leads to electrodes shall be properly in- (iv) Reduction of clearance below
sulated and protected from mechanical that specified in paragraph (h)(6) of
injury or exposure to destructive this section.
chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc-
heads shall be effectively and perma- ing, railings, or guards shall be so
nently supported on suitable insulators placed about the equipment that they,
and shall be effectively guarded either by their location or character or
against accidental contact or ground- both, assure that a safe isolation of the
ing. An automatic means shall be pro- process is maintained from plant stor-
vided for grounding the electrode sys- age or personnel. Such railings, fenc-
tem when it is electrically deenergized ing, and guards shall be of conducting
for any reason. All insulators shall be material, adequately grounded.
kept clean and dry. (11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic
(6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall atomization is used the spraying area
be maintained between goods being shall be so ventilated as to insure safe
painted and electrodes or electrostatic conditions from a fire and health
atomizing heads or conductors of at standpoint.
least twice the sparking distance. A (12) Fire protection. All areas used for
suitable sign indicating this safe dis-
spraying, including the interior of the
tance shall be conspicuously posted
booth, shall be protected by automatic
near the assembly.
sprinklers where this protection is
(7) Conveyors required. Goods being
available. Where this protection is not
painted using this process are to be
available, other approved automatic
supported on conveyors. The conveyors
shall be so arranged as to maintain extinguishing equipment shall be pro-
safe distances between the goods and vided.
the electrodes or electrostatic atom- (i) Electrostatic hand spraying equip-
izing heads at all times. Any irregu- ment—(1) Application. This paragraph
larly shaped or other goods subject to shall apply to any equipment using
possible swinging or movement shall be electrostatically charged elements for
rigidly supported to prevent such the atomization and/or, precipitation
swinging or movement which would re- of materials for coatings on articles, or
duce the clearance to less than that for other similar purposes in which the
specified in paragraph (h)(6) of this sec- atomizing device is hand held and ma-
tion. nipulated during the spraying oper-
(8) Prohibition. This process is not ac- ation.
ceptable where goods being coated are (2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand
manipulated by hand. When finishing spraying equipment shall conform with
materials are applied by electrostatic the other provisions of this section.
283
(3) Equipment approval and specifica- ventilation of the spraying area that
tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- the equipment cannot be operated un-
ratus and devices used in connection less the ventilation fans are in oper-
with coating operations shall be of ap- ation.
proved types. The high voltage circuits (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper-
shall be designed so as to not produce ation shall take place within a spray
a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite area which is adequately ventilated to
any vapor-air mixtures nor result in remove solvent vapors released from
appreciable shock hazard upon coming the operation.
in contact with a grounded object (j) Drying, curing, or fusion appa-
under all normal operating conditions. ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing,
The electrostatically charged exposed
or fusion apparatus in connection with
elements of the handgun shall be capa-
spray application of flammable and
ble of being energized only by a switch
combustible finishes shall conform to
which also controls the coating mate-
rial supply. the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces,
(4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- NFPA 86A–1969, which is incorporated
formers, powerpacks, control appa- by reference as specified in § 1910.6,
ratus, and all other electrical portions where applicable and shall also con-
of the equipment, with the exception of form with the following requirements
the handgun itself and its connections of this paragraph.
to the power supply shall be located (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray
outside of the spraying area or shall booths, rooms, or other enclosures used
otherwise conform to the requirements for spraying operations shall not alter-
of paragraph (c) of this section. nately be used for the purpose of dry-
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of ing by any arrangement which will
the spraying gun shall be electrically cause a material increase in the sur-
connected to ground by a metallic con- face temperature of the spray booth,
nection and to be so constructed that room, or enclosure.
the operator in normal operating posi- (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except
tion is in intimate electrical contact as specifically provided in paragraph
with the grounded handle. (j)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or
(6) Grounding—general. All elec- fusion units utilizing a heating system
trically conductive objects in the having open flames or which may
spraying area shall be adequately produce sparks shall not be installed in
grounded. This requirement shall apply a spraying area, but may be installed
to paint containers, wash cans, and any adjacent thereto when equipped with
other objects or devices in the area. an interlocked ventilating system ar-
The equipment shall carry a prominent ranged to:
permanently installed warning regard- (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying
ing the necessity for this grounding space before the heating system can be
feature. started;
(7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects
(ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at
being painted or coated shall be main-
any source of ignition;
tained in metallic contact with the
conveyor or other grounded support. (iii) Automatically shut down the
Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in- heating system in the event of failure
sure this contact and areas of contact of the ventilating system.
shall be sharp points or knife edges (4) Alternate use permitted. Auto-
where possible. Points of support of the mobile refinishing spray booths or en-
object shall be concealed from random closures, otherwise installed and main-
spray where feasible and where the obtained in full conformity with this sec-
jects being sprayed are supported from tion, may alternately be used for dry-
a conveyor, the point of attachment to ing with portable electrical infrared
the conveyor shall be so located as to drying apparatus when conforming
not collect spray material during nor- with the following:
mal operation. (i) Interior (especially floors) of
(8) Interlocks. The electrical equip- spray enclosures shall be kept free of
ment shall be so interlocked with the overspray deposits.
284
(ii) During spray operations, the dry- (l) Powder coating—(1) Electrical and
ing apparatus and electrical connec- other sources of ignition. Electrical
tions and wiring thereto shall not be equipment and other sources of igni-
located within spray enclosure nor in tion shall conform to the requirements
any other location where spray resi- of paragraphs (c)(1) (i)–(iv), (8) and (9)(i)
dues may be deposited thereon. of this section and subpart S of this
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- part.
ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys- (2) Ventilation. (i) In addition to the
tem of the spray enclosure shall be provisions of paragraph (d) of this sec-
equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- tion, where applicable, exhaust ventila-
ranged that: tion shall be sufficient to maintain the
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be atmosphere below the lowest explosive
operated while the drying apparatus is limits for the materials being applied.
inside the spray enclosure. All nondeposited air-suspended powders
(b) The spray enclosure will be shall be safely removed via exhaust
purged of spray vapors for a period of ducts to the powder recovery cyclone
not less than 3 minutes before the dry- or receptacle. Each installation shall
ing apparatus can be energized. be designed and operated to meet the
(c) The ventilating system will main- foregoing performance specification.
tain a safe atmosphere within the en- (ii) Powders shall not be released to
closure during the drying process and the outside atmosphere.
the drying apparatus will automati- (3) Drying, curing, or fusion equipment.
cally shut off in the event of failure of The provisions of the Standard for
the ventilating system. ovens and furnaces, NFPA No. 86A–1969
(iv) All electrical wiring and equip- shall apply where applicable.
ment of the drying apparatus shall con- (4) Operation and maintenance. (i) All
form with the applicable sections of areas shall be kept free of the accumu-
subpart S of this part. Only equipment lation of powder coating dusts, particu-
of a type approved for Class I, Division larly such horizontal surfaces as
2 hazardous locations shall be located ledges, beams, pipes, hoods, booths, and
within 18 inches of floor level. All me- floors.
tallic parts of the drying apparatus (ii) Surfaces shall be cleaned in such
shall be properly electrically bonded manner as to avoid scattering dust to
and grounded. other places or creating dust clouds.
(v) The drying apparatus shall con- (iii) ‘‘No Smoking’’ signs in large let-
tain a prominently located, perma- ters on contrasting color background
nently attached warning sign indi- shall be conspicuously posted at all
cating that ventilation should be main- powder coating areas and powder stor-
tained during the drying period and age rooms.
that spraying should not be conducted (5) Fixed electrostatic spraying equip-
in the vicinity that spray will deposit ment. The provisions of paragraph (h) of
on apparatus. this section and other subparagraphs of
(k) Automobile undercoating in garages. this paragraph shall apply to fixed
Automobile undercoating spray oper- electrostatic equipment, except that
ations in garages, conducted in areas electrical equipment not covered there-
having adequate natural or mechanical in shall conform to paragraph (l)(1) of
ventilation, are exempt from the re- this section.
quirements pertaining to spray fin- (6) Electrostatic hand spraying equip-
ishing operations, when using under- ment. The provisions of paragraph (i) of
coating materials not more hazardous this section and other subparagraphs of
than kerosene (as listed by Under- this paragraph, shall apply to electro-
writers’ Laboratories in respect to fire static handguns when used in powder
hazard rating 30–40) or undercoating coating, except that electrical equip-
materials using only solvents listed as ment not covered therein shall conform
having a flash point in excess of 100 °F. to paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
Undercoating spray operations not con- (7) Electrostatic fluidized beds. (i) Elec-
forming to these provisions are subject trostatic fluidized beds and associated
to all requirements of this section per- equipment shall be of approved types.
taining to spray finishing operations. The maximum surface temperature of
285
this equipment in the coating area section also covers the application of
shall not exceed 150 °F. The high volt- combustible powders by powder spray
age circuits shall be so designed as to guns, electrostatic powder spray guns,
not produce a spark of sufficient inten- fluidized beds, or electrostatic fluidized
sity to ignite any powder-air mixtures beds. The section does not apply to
nor result in appreciable shock hazard outdoor spray application of buildings,
upon coming in contact with a ground- tanks, or other similar structures, nor
ed object under normal operating con- to small portable spraying apparatus
ditions. not used repeatedly in the same loca-
(ii) Transformers, powerpacks, con- tion.
trol apparatus, and all other electrical
portions of the equipment, with the ex- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45
ception of the charging electrodes and FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9237,
their connections to the power supply
Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 77 FR
shall be located outside of the powder 17776, Mar. 26, 2012]
coating area or shall otherwise con-
form to the requirements of paragraph § 1910.108 [Reserved]
(l)(1) of this section.
(iii) All electrically conductive ob- § 1910.109 Explosives and blasting
jects within the charging influence of agents.
the electrodes shall be adequately (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
grounded. The powder coating equip-
tion—(1) Blasting agent. Blasting
ment shall carry a prominent, perma-
agent—any material or mixture, con-
nently installed warning regarding the
sisting of a fuel and oxidizer, intended
necessity for grounding these objects.
for blasting, not otherwise classified as
(iv) Objects being coated shall be
an explosive and in which none of the
maintained in contact with the con-
ingredients are classified as an explo-
veyor or other support in order to in-
sive, provided that the finished prod-
sure proper grounding. Hangers shall
uct, as mixed and packaged for use or
be regularly cleaned to insure effective
shipment, cannot be detonated by
contact and areas of contact shall be
means of a No. 8 test blasting cap when
sharp points or knife edges where pos-
unconfined.
sible.
(v) The electrical equipment shall be (2) Explosive-actuated power devices.
so interlocked with the ventilation sys- Explosive-actuated power device—any
tem that the equipment cannot be op- tool or special mechanized device
erated unless the ventilation fans are which is actuated by explosives, but
in operation. not including propellant-actuated
(m) Organic peroxides and dual compo- power devices. Examples of explosive-
nent coatings—(1) Conformance. All actuated power devices are jet tappers
spraying operations involving the use and jet perforators.
of organic peroxides and other dual (3) Explosive. Explosive—any chem-
component coatings shall be conducted ical compound, mixture, or device, the
in approved sprinklered spray booths primary or common purpose of which is
meeting the requirements of this sec- to function by explosion, i.e., with sub-
tion. stantially instantaneous release of gas
(2) Smoking. Smoking shall be prohib- and heat, unless such compound, mix-
ited and ‘‘No Smoking’’ signs shall be ture, or device is otherwise specifically
prominently displayed and only non- classified by the U.S. Department of
sparking tools shall be used in any area Transportation; see 49 CFR chapter I.
where organic peroxides are stored, The term ‘‘explosives’’ shall include all
mixed or applied. material which is classified as Class A,
(n) Scope. This section applies to Class B, and Class C explosives by the
flammable and combustible finishing U.S. Department of Transportation,
materials when applied as a spray by and includes, but is not limited to dy-
compressed air, ‘‘airless’’ or ‘‘hydraulic namite, black powder, pellet powders,
atomization,’’ steam, electrostatic initiating explosives, blasting caps,
methods, or by any other means in con- electric blasting caps, safety fuse, fuse
tinuous or intermittent processes. The lighters, fuse igniters, squibs, cordeau
286
detonant fuse, instantaneous fuse, ig- audible or visible effects which are
niter cord, igniters, small arms ammu- commonly referred to as fireworks.
nition, small arms ammunition prim- (11) [Reserved]
ers, smokeless propellant, cartridges (12) Semiconductive hose.
for propellant-actuated power devices, Semiconductive hose—a hose with an
and cartridges for industrial guns. electrical resistance high enough to
Commercial explosives are those explo- limit flow of stray electric currents to
sives which are intended to be used in safe levels, yet not so high as to pre-
commercial or industrial operations. vent drainage of static electric charges
NOTE 1: Classification of explosives is de- to ground; hose of not more than 2
scribed by the U.S. Department of Transpor- megohms resistance over its entire
tation as follows (see 49 CFR chapter I): length and of not less than 5,000 ohms
(i) Class A explosives. Possessing, det- per foot meets the requirement.
onating, or otherwise maximum haz- (13) Small arms ammunition. Small
ard; such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, arms ammunition—any shotgun, rifle,
picric acid, lead azide, fulminate of pistol, or revolver cartridge, and car-
mercury, black powder, blasting caps, tridges for propellant-actuated power
and detonating primers. devices and industrial guns. Military-
(ii) Class B explosives. Possessing
type ammunition containing explosive-
flammable hazard, such as propellant
bursting charges, incendiary, tracer,
explosives (including some smokeless
spotting, or pyrotechnic projectiles is
propellants), photographic flash pow-
excluded from this definition.
ders, and some special fireworks.
(14) Small arms ammunition primers.
(iii) Class C explosives. Includes cer-
Small arms ammunition primers—
tain types of manufactured articles
small percussion-sensitive explosive
which contain Class A or Class B explo-
sives, or both, as components but in re- charges, encased in a cup, used to ig-
stricted quantities. nite propellant powder.
(iv) Forbidden or not acceptable explo- (15) Smokeless propellants. Smokeless
sives. Explosives which are forbidden or propellants—solid propellants, com-
not acceptable for transportation by monly called smokeless powders in the
common carriers by rail freight, rail trade, used in small arms ammunition,
express, highway, or water in accord- cannon, rockets, propellant-actuated
ance with the regulations of the U.S. power devices, etc.
Department of Transportation, 49 CFR (16) Special industrial explosives de-
chapter I. vices. Special industrial explosives de-
(4) Highway. Highway—any public vices—explosive-actuated power de-
street, public alley, or public road. vices and propellant-actuated power
(5) [Reserved] devices.
(6) Magazine. Magazine—any building (17) Special industrial explosives mate-
or structure, other than an explosives rials. Special industrial explosives ma-
manufacturing building, used for the terials—shaped materials and sheet
storage of explosives. forms and various other extrusions,
(7) Motor vehicle. Motor vehicle—any pellets, and packages of high explo-
self-propelled vehicle, truck, tractor, sives, which include dynamite, tri-
semitrailer, or truck-full trailers used nitrotoluene (TNT), pentaerythritol
for the transportation of freight over tetranitrate (PETN), hexahydro-1,3,5-
public highways. trinitro-s-triazine (RDX), and other
(8) Propellant-actuated power devices. similar compounds used for high-en-
Propellant-actuated power devices— ergy-rate forming, expanding, and
any tool or special mechanized device shaping in metal fabrication, and for
or gas generator system which is actu- dismemberment and quick reduction of
ated by a smokeless propellant or scrap metal.
which releases and directs work (18) Water gels or slurry explosives.
through a smokeless propellant charge. These comprise a wide variety of mate-
(9) [Reserved] rials used for blasting. They all contain
(10) Pyrotechnics. Pyrotechnics—any substantial proportions of water and
combustible or explosive compositions high proportions of ammonium nitrate,
or manufactured articles designed and some of which is in solution in the
prepared for the purpose of producing water. Two broad classes of water gels
287
are (i) those which are sensitized by a TABLE H–21—AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES
material classed as an explosive, such FOR STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES 1 5
as TNT or smokeless powder, (ii) those [As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of
Explosives, June 5, 1964]
which contain no ingredient classified
as an explosive; these are sensitized Explosives Distances in feet
with metals such as aluminum or with when storage is
barricaded: Sepa-
other fuels. Water gels may be Pounds over Pounds not over ration of maga-
zines
premixed at an explosives plant or
mixed at the site immediately before 2 5 6
delivery into the borehole. 5 10 8
10 20 10
(19) DOT specifications. Regulations of 20 30 11
the Department of Transportation pub- 30 40 12
40 50 14
lished in 49 CFR chapter I. 50 75 15
(b) Miscellaneous provisions—(1) Gen- 75 100 16
eral hazard. No person shall store, han- 100 125 18
125 150 19
dle, or transport explosives or blasting 150 200 21
agents when such storage, handling, 200 250 23
and transportation of explosives or 250 300 24
300 400 27
blasting agents constitutes an undue 400 500 29
hazard to life. 500 600 31
600 700 32
(2) [Reserved] 700 800 33
(c) Storage of explosives—(1) General 800 900 35
provisions. (i) All Class A, Class B, Class 900 1,000 36
1,000 1,200 39
C explosives, and special industrial ex- 1,200 1,400 41
plosives, and any newly developed and 1,400 1,600 43
unclassified explosives, shall be kept in 1,600 1,800 44
1,800 2,000 45
magazines which meet the require- 2,000 2,500 49
ments of this paragraph. 2,500 3,000 52
(ii) Blasting caps, electric blasting 3,000 4,000 58
4,000 5,000 61
caps, detonating primers, and primed 5,000 6,000 65
cartridges shall not be stored in the 6,000 7,000 68
same magazine with other explosives. 7,000 8,000 72
8,000 9,000 75
(iii) Ground around magazines shall 9,000 10,000 78
slope away for drainage. The land sur- 10,000 12,000 82
12,000 14,000 87
rounding magazines shall be kept clear 14,000 16,000 90
of brush, dried grass, leaves, and other 16,000 18,000 94
materials for a distance of at least 25 18,000 20,000 98
20,000 25,000 105
feet. 25,000 30,000 112
(iv) Magazines as required by this 30,000 35,000 119
paragraph shall be of two classes; 35,000 40,000 124
40,000 45,000 129
namely, Class I magazines, and Class II 45,000 50,000 135
magazines. 50,000 55,000 140
(v) Class I magazines shall be re- 55,000 60,000 145
60,000 65,000 150
quired where the quantity of explosives 65,000 70,000 155
stored is more than 50 pounds. Class II 70,000 75,000 160
magazines may be used where the 75,000 80,000 165
80,000 85,000 170
quantity of explosives stored is 50 85,000 90,000 175
pounds or less. 90,000 95,000 180
95,000 100,000 185
(vi) Class I magazines shall be lo- 100,000 110,000 195
cated away from other magazines in 110,000 120,000 205
conformity with Table H–21. 120,000 130,000 215
130,000 140,000 225
140,000 150,000 235
150,000 160,000 245
160,000 170,000 255
170,000 180,000 265
180,000 190,000 275
190,000 200,000 285
288
TABLE H–21—AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES feet shall be maintained between class
FOR STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES 1 5—Contin- II magazines and the work in progress
ued when the quantity of explosives kept
[As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of therein is in excess of 25 pounds, and at
Explosives, June 5, 1964]
least 50 feet when the quantity of ex-
Explosives Distances in feet plosives is 25 pounds, or less.
when storage is (ix) This paragraph (c) does not apply
barricaded: Sepa-
Pounds over Pounds not over ration of maga- to:
zines
(a) Stocks of small arms ammuni-
200,000 210,000 295 tion, propellant-actuated power car-
210,000 230,000 315 tridges, small arms ammunition prim-
230,000 250,000 335
ers in quantities of less than 750,000, or
250,000 275,000 360
275,000 300,000 385 of smokeless propellants in quantities
1 ‘‘Natural barricade’’ means natural features of the ground,
less than 750 pounds;
such as hills, or timber of sufficient density that the sur- (b) Explosive-actuated power devices
rounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen when in quantities less than 50 pounds
from the magazine when the trees are bare of leaves.
2 ‘‘Artificial barricade’’ means an artificial mound or revetted net weight of explosives;
wall of earth of a minimum thickness of three feet. (c) Fuse lighters and fuse igniters;
3 ‘‘Barricaded’’ means that a building containing explosives
is effectually screened from a magazine, building, railway, or (d) Safety fuses other than cordeau
highway, either by a natural barricade, or by an artificial barri-
cade of such height that a straight line from the top of any detonant fuses.
sidewall of the building containing explosives to the eave line (2) Construction of magazines—general.
of any magazine, or building, or to a point 12 feet above the
center of a railway or highway, will pass through such inter- (i) Magazines shall be constructed in
vening natural or artificial barricade. conformity with the provisions of this
4 When two or more storage magazines are located on the
same property, each magazine must comply with the min- paragraph.
imum distances specified from inhabited buildings, railways, (ii) Magazines for the storage of ex-
and highways, and in addition, they should be separated from
each other by not less than the distances shown for ‘‘Separa- plosives, other than black powder,
tion of Magazines,’’ except that the quantity of explosives con- Class B and Class C explosives shall be
tained in cap magazines shall govern in regard to the spacing
of said cap magazines from magazines containing other ex- bullet resistant, weather resistant, fire
plosives. If any two or more magazines are separated from
each other by less than the specified ‘‘Separation of Maga- resistant, and ventilated sufficiently to
zines’’ distances, then such two or more magazines, as a protect the explosive in the specific lo-
group, must be considered as one magazine, and the total
quantity of explosives stored in such group must be treated as cality. Magazines used only for storage
if stored in a single magazine located on the site of any mag- of black powder, Class B and Class C
azine of the group, and must comply with the minimum of dis-
tances specified from other magazines, inhabited buildings, explosives shall be weather resistant,
railways, and highways.
5 This table applies only to the permanent storage of com-
fire-resistant, and have ventilation.
mercial explosives. It is not applicable to transportation of ex- Magazines for storage of blasting and
plosives, or any handling or temporary storage necessary or electric blasting caps shall be weather
incident thereto. It is not intended to apply to bombs, projec-
tiles, or other heavily encased explosives. resistant, fire-resistant, and venti-
lated.
(vii) Except as provided in subdivi-
(iii) Property upon which Class I
sion (viii) of this subparagraph, class II
magazines are located and property
magazines shall be located in con-
where Class II magazines are located
formity with Table H–21, but may be
outside of buildings shall be posted
permitted in warehouses and in whole-
sale and retail establishments when lo- with signs reading ‘‘Explosives—Keep
cated on a floor which has an entrance Off.’’
at outside grade level and the magazine (iv) Magazines requiring heat shall be
is located not more than 10 feet from heated by either hot-water radiant
such an entrance. Two class II maga- heating with the magazine building; or
zines may be located in the same build- air directed into the magazine building
ing when one is used only for blasting over either hot water or low pressure
caps in quantities not in excess of 5,000 steam (15 p.s.i.g.) coils located outside
caps and a distance of 10 feet is main- the magazine building.
tained between magazines. (v) The magazine heating systems
(viii) When used for temporary stor- shall meet the following requirements:
age at a site for blasting operations, (a) The radiant heating coils within
class II magazines shall be located the building shall be installed in such a
away from other magazines. A distance manner that the explosives or explo-
of at least one hundred and fifty (150) sives containers cannot contact the
289
coils and air is free to circulate be- shall be lined with brick at least 4
tween the coils and the explosives or inches in thickness or shall have at
explosives containers. least a 6-inch sandfill between interior
(b) The heating ducts shall be in- and exterior walls.
stalled in such a manner that the hot- (ii) Floors and roofs of masonry mag-
air discharge from the duct is not di- azines may be of wood construction.
rected against the explosives or explo- Wood floors shall be tongue and
sives containers. grooved lumber having a nominal
(c) The heating device used in con- thickness of 1 inch.
nection with a magazine shall have (iii) Roofs required to be bullet re-
controls which prevent the ambient sistant shall be protected by a sand
building temperature from exceeding tray located at the line of eaves and
130 °F. covering the entire area except that
(d) The electric fan or pump used in necessary for ventilation. Sand in the
the heating system for a magazine sand tray shall be maintained at a
shall be mounted outside and separate depth of not less than 4 inches.
from the wall of the magazine and shall (iv) All wood at the exterior of maga-
be grounded. zines, including eaves, shall be pro-
(e) The electric fan motor and the tected by being covered with black or
controls for electrical heating devices galvanized steel or aluminum metal of
used in heating water or steam shall thickness of not less than No. 26 gage.
have overloads and disconnects, which All nails exposed to the interior of
comply with subpart S of this part. All magazines shall be well countersunk.
electrical switch gear shall be located (v) Foundations for magazines shall
a minimum distance of 25 feet from the be of substantial construction and ar-
magazine. ranged to provide good cross ventila-
(f) The heating source for water or tion.
steam shall be separated from the mag- (vi) Magazines shall be ventilated
azine by a distance of not less than 25 sufficiently to prevent dampness and
feet when electrical and 50 feet when heating of stored explosives. Ven-
fuel fired. The area between the heat- tilating openings shall be screened to
ing unit and the magazine shall be prevent the entrance of sparks.
cleared of all combustible materials. (vii) Openings to magazines shall be
(g) The storage of explosives and ex- restricted to that necessary for the
plosives containers in the magazine placement and removal of stocks of ex-
shall allow uniform air circulation so plosives. Doors for openings in maga-
product temperature uniformity can be zines for Class A explosives shall be
maintained. bullet resistant. Doors for magazines
(vi) When lights are necessary inside not required to be bullet resistant shall
the magazine, electric safety flash- be designed to prevent unauthorized
light, or electric safety lanterns shall entrance to the magazine.
be used. (viii) [Reserved]
(3) Construction of Class I magazines. (ix) Provisions shall be made to pre-
(i) Class I magazines shall be of ma- vent the piling of stocks of explosives
sonry construction or of wood or of directly against masonry walls, brick-
metal construction, or a combination lined or sand-filled metal walls and sin-
of these types. Thickness of masonry gle-thickness metal walls; such protec-
units shall not be less than 8 inches. tion, however, shall not interfere with
Hollow masonry units used in con- proper ventilation at the interior of
struction required to be bullet resist- side and end walls.
ant shall have all hollow spaces filled (4) Construction of Class II magazines.
with weak cement or well-tamped sand. (i) Class II magazines shall be of wood
Wood constructed walls, required to be or metal construction, or a combina-
bullet resistant, shall have at least a 6- tion thereof.
inch space between interior and exte- (ii) Wood magazines of this class
rior sheathing and the space between shall have sides, bottom, and cover
sheathing shall be filled with well- constructed of 2-inch hardwood boards
tamped sand. Metal wall construction, well braced at corners and protected by
when required to be bullet resistant, being entirely covered with sheet
290
metal of not less than No. 20 gage. All commodity except explosives, but this
nails exposed to the interior of the restriction shall not apply to the stor-
magazine shall be well countersunk. age of blasting agents and blasting sup-
All metal magazines of this class shall plies.
have sides, bottom, and cover con- (iv) Magazine floors shall be regu-
structed of sheet metal, and shall be larly swept, kept clean, dry, free of
lined with three-eighths-inch plywood grit, paper, empty used packages, and
or equivalent. Edges of metal covers rubbish. Brooms and other cleaning
shall overlap sides at least 1 inch. utensils shall not have any spark-pro-
(iii) Covers for both wood- and metal- ducing metal parts. Sweepings from
constructed magazines of this class
floors of magazines shall be properly
shall be provided with substantial
disposed of. Magazine floors stained
strap hinges and shall be provided with
substantial means for locking. with nitroglycerin shall be cleaned ac-
(iv) Magazines of this class shall be cording to instructions by the manu-
painted red and shall bear lettering in facturer.
white, on all sides and top, at least 3 (v) When any explosive has deterio-
inches high, ‘‘Explosives—Keep Fire rated to an extent that it is in an un-
Away.’’ Class II magazines when lo- stable or dangerous condition, or if ni-
cated in warehouses, and in wholesale troglycerin leaks from any explosives,
and retail establishments shall be pro- then the person in possession of such
vided with substantial wheels or cast- explosive shall immediately proceed to
ers to facilitate easy removal in the destroy such explosive in accordance
case of fire. Where necessary due to cli- with the instructions of the manufac-
matic conditions, Class II magazines turer. Only experienced persons shall
shall be ventilated. be allowed to do the work of destroying
(5) Storage within magazines. (i) Pack- explosives.
ages of explosives shall be laid flat (vi) When magazines need inside re-
with top side up. Black powder when pairs, all explosives shall be removed
stored in magazines with other explo- therefrom and the floors cleaned. In
sives shall be stored separately. Black making outside repairs, if there is a
powder stored in kegs shall be stored
possibility of causing sparks or fire the
on ends, bungs down, or on side, seams
explosives shall be removed from the
down. Corresponding grades and brands
magazine. Explosives removed from a
shall be stored together in such a man-
ner that brands and grade marks show. magazine under repair shall either be
All stocks shall be stored so as to be placed in another magazine or placed a
easily counted and checked. Packages safe distance from the magazine where
of explosives shall be piled in a stable they shall be properly guarded and pro-
manner. When any kind of explosive is tected until repairs have been com-
removed from a magazine for use, the pleted, when they shall be returned to
oldest explosive of that particular kind the magazine.
shall always be taken first. (vii) Smoking, matches, open flames,
(ii) Packages of explosives shall not spark-producing devices, and firearms
be unpacked or repacked in a magazine (except firearms carried by guards)
nor within 50 feet of a magazine or in shall not be permitted inside of or
close proximity to other explosives. within 50 feet of magazines. The land
Tools used for opening packages of ex- surrounding a magazine shall be kept
plosives shall be constructed of non- clear of all combustible materials for a
sparking materials, except that metal distance of at least 25 feet. Combus-
slitters may be used for opening fiber- tible materials shall not be stored
board boxes. A wood wedge and a fiber, within 50 feet of magazines.
rubber, or wood mallet shall be used for (viii) Magazines shall be in the
opening or closing wood packages of
charge of a competent person at all
explosives. Opened packages of explo-
times and who shall be held responsible
sives shall be securely closed before
being returned to a magazine. for the enforcement of all safety pre-
(iii) Magazines shall not be used for cautions.
the storage of any metal tools nor any
291
(ix) Explosives recovered from blast- (ii) Every vehicle used for trans-
ing misfires shall be placed in a sepa- porting explosives and oxidizing mate-
rate magazine until competent per- rials listed in paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(a) of
sonnel has determined from the manu- this section shall be marked as follows:
facturer the method of disposal. Caps (a) Exterior markings or placards re-
recovered from blasting misfires shall quired on applicable vehicles shall be
not be reused. Such explosives and caps as follows for the various classes of
shall then be disposed of in the manner commodities:
recommended by the manufacturer.
Type of marking or
(d) Transportation of explosives—(1) Commodity
placard
General provisions. (i) No employee
shall be allowed to smoke, carry Explosives, Class A, any quantity Explosives A (Red letters
or a combination of Class A on white background).
matches or any other flame-producing and Class B explosives.
device, or carry any firearms or loaded Explosives, Class B, and quantity Explosives B (Red letters
cartridges while in or near a motor ve- on white background).
hicle transporting explosives; or drive, Oxidizing material (blasting Oxidizers (Yellow letters
agents, ammonium nitrate, on black background).
load, or unload such vehicle in a care- etc.), 1,000 pounds or more
less or reckless manner. gross weight.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Explosives shall not be trans- (b) [Reserved]
ferred from one vehicle to another (c) Such markings or placards shall
within the confines of any jurisdiction be displayed at the front, rear, and on
(city, county, State, or other area) each side of the motor vehicle or trail-
without informing the fire and police er, or other cargo carrying body while
departments thereof. In the event of it contains explosives or other dan-
breakdown or collision the local fire gerous articles of such type and in such
and police departments shall be quantity as specified in paragraph
promptly notified to help safeguard (d)(1)(ii)(a) of this subdivision. The
such emergencies. Explosives shall be front marking or placard may be dis-
transferred from the disabled vehicle played on the front of either the truck,
to another only, when proper and truck body, truck tractor or the trail-
qualified supervision is provided. er.
(iv) Blasting caps or electric blasting (d) Any motor vehicle, trailer, or
caps shall not be transported over the other cargo-carrying body containing
highways on the same vehicles with more than one kind of explosive as well
other explosives, unless packaged, seg- as an oxidizing material requiring a
regated, and transported in accordance placard under the provisions of para-
with the Department of Transpor- graph (d)(2)(ii)(a), the aggregate gross
tation’s Hazardous Materials Regula- weight of which totals 1,000 pounds or
tions (49 CFR parts 177–180). more, shall be marked or placarded
(2) Transportation vehicles. (i) Vehicles ‘‘Dangerous’’ as well as ‘‘Explosive A’’
used for transporting explosives shall or ‘‘Explosive B’’ as appropriate. If ex-
be strong enough to carry the load plosives Class A and explosives Class B
without difficulty and be in good me- are loaded on the same vehicle, the
chanical condition. If vehicles do not ‘‘Explosives B’’ marking need not be
have a closed body, the body shall be displayed.
covered with a flameproof and mois- (e) In any combination of two or
tureproof tarpaulin or other effective more vehicles containing explosives or
protection against moisture and other dangerous articles each vehicle
sparks. All vehicles used for the trans- shall be marked or placarded as to its
portation of explosives shall have tight contents and in accordance with para-
floors and any exposed spark-producing graphs (d)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this sub-
metal on the inside of the body shall be division.
covered with wood or other non- (iii) Each motor vehicle used for
sparking materials to prevent contact transporting explosives shall be
with packages of explosives. Packages equipped with a minimum of two extin-
of explosives shall not be loaded above guishers, each having a rating of at
the sides of an open-body vehicle. least 10–BC.
292
(a) Only extinguishers listed or ap- those dangers. He shall have been made
proved by a nationally recognized test- familiar with the vehicle he is as-
ing laboratory shall be deemed suitable signed, and shall be trained, supplied
for use on explosives-carrying vehicles. with the necessary means, and author-
Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for defini- ized to move the vehicle when required.
tion of listed, and § 1910.7 for nationally (a) For the purpose of this subdivi-
recognized testing laboratory. sion, a motor vehicle shall be deemed
(b) Extinguishers shall be filled and ‘‘attended’’ only when the driver or
ready for immediate use and located other attendant is physically on or in
near the driver’s seat. Extinguishers the vehicle, or has the vehicle within
shall be examined periodically by a his field of vision and can reach it
competent person. quickly and without any kind of inter-
(iv) A motor vehicle used for trans- ference ‘‘attended’’ also means that the
porting explosives shall be given the driver or attendant is awake, alert, and
following inspection to determine that not engaged in other duties or activi-
it is in proper condition for safe trans- ties which may divert his attention
portation of explosives: from the vehicle, except for necessary
(a) Fire extinguishers shall be filled communication with public officers, or
and in working order. representatives of the carrier shipper,
(b) All electrical wiring shall be com- or consignee, or except for necessary
pletely protected and securely fastened absence from the vehicle to obtain food
to prevent short-circuiting. or to provide for his physical comfort.
(c) Chassis, motor, pan, and underside (b) However, an explosive-laden vehi-
of body shall be reasonably clean and cle may be left unattended if parked
free of excess oil and grease. within a securely fenced or walled area
(d) Fuel tank and feedline shall be se- with all gates or entrances locked
cure and have no leaks.
where parking of such vehicle is other-
(e) Brakes, lights, horn, windshield
wise permissible, or at a magazine site
wipers, and steering apparatus shall
established solely for the purpose of
function properly.
storing explosives.
(f) Tires shall be checked for proper
inflation and defects. (iv) No spark-producing metal, spark-
(g) The vehicle shall be in proper con- producing metal tools, oils, matches,
dition in every other respect and ac- firearms, electric storage batteries,
ceptable for handling explosives. flammable substances, acids, oxidizing
(3) Operation of transportation vehicles. materials, or corrosive compounds
(i) Vehicles transporting explosives shall be carried in the body of any
shall only be driven by and be in the motor truck and/or vehicle trans-
charge of a driver who is familiar with porting explosives, unless the loading
the traffic regulations, State laws, and of such dangerous articles and the ex-
the provisions of this section. plosives comply with U.S. Department
(ii) Except under emergency condi- of Transportation regulations.
tions, no vehicle transporting explo- (v) Vehicles transporting explosives
sives shall be parked before reaching shall avoid congested areas and heavy
its destination, even though attended, traffic. Where routes through con-
on any public street adjacent to or in gested areas have been designated by
proximity to any place where people local authorities such routes shall be
work. followed.
(iii) Every motor vehicle trans- (vi) Delivery shall only be made to
porting any quantity of Class A or authorized persons and into authorized
Class B explosives shall, at all times, magazines or authorized temporary
be attended by a driver or other at- storage or handling areas.
tendant of the motor carrier. This at- (e) Use of explosives and blasting
tendant shall have been made aware of agents—(1) General provisions. (i) While
the class of the explosive material in explosives are being handled or used,
the vehicle and of its inherent dangers, smoking shall not be permitted and no
and shall have been instructed in the one near the explosives shall possess
measures and procedures to be followed matches, open light or other fire or
in order to protect the public from flame. No person shall be allowed to
293
handle explosives while under the in- or wooden cases, no sparking metal
fluence of intoxicating liquors, nar- tools shall be used; wooden wedges and
cotics, or other dangerous drugs. either wood, fiber or rubber mallets
(ii) Original containers or Class II shall be used. Nonsparking metallic
magazines shall be used for taking det- slitters may be used for opening fiber-
onators and other explosives from stor- board cases.
age magazines to the blasting area. (iii) Explosives or blasting equipment
(iii) When blasting is done in con- that are obviously deteriorated or dam-
gested areas or in close proximity to a aged shall not be used.
structure, or any other installation (iv) No explosives shall be abandoned.
that may be damaged, the blast shall (3) Loading of explosives in blast holes.
be covered before firing with a mat (i) All drill holes shall be sufficiently
constructed so that it is capable of pre- large to admit freely the insertion of
venting fragments from being thrown. the cartridges of explosives.
(iv) Persons authorized to prepare ex- (ii) Tamping shall be done only with
plosive charges or conduct blasting op- wood rods without exposed metal parts,
erations shall use every reasonable pre- but nonsparking metal connectors may
caution, including but not limited to be used for jointed poles. Violent tamp-
warning signals, flags, barricades, or ing shall be avoided. Primed cartridges
woven wire mats to insure the safety of shall not be tamped.
the general public and workmen. (iii) When loading blasting agents
(v) Blasting operations shall be con- pneumatically over electric blasting
ducted during daylight hours. caps, semiconductive delivery hose
(vi) Whenever blasting is being con- shall be used and the equipment shall
ducted in the vicinity of gas, electric, be bonded and grounded.
water, fire alarm, telephone, telegraph, (iv) No holes shall be loaded except
and steam utilities, the blaster shall those to be fired in the next round of
notify the appropriate representatives blasting. After loading, all remaining
of such utilities at least 24 hours in ad- explosives shall be immediately re-
vance of blasting, specifying the loca- turned to an authorized magazine.
tion and intended time of such blast- (v) Drilling shall not be started until
ing. Verbal notice shall be confirmed all remaining butts of old holes are ex-
with written notice. amined with a wooden stick for
(vii) Due precautions shall be taken unexploded charges, and if any are
to prevent accidental discharge of elec- found, they shall be refired before work
tric blasting caps from current induced proceeds.
by radar, radio transmitters, lightning, (vi) No person shall be allowed to
adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or deepen drill holes which have con-
other sources of extraneous electricity. tained explosives.
These precautions shall include: (vii) After loading for a blast is com-
(a) The suspension of all blasting op- pleted, all excess blasting caps or elec-
erations and removal of persons from tric blasting caps and other explosives
the blasting area during the approach shall immediately be returned to their
and progress of an electric storm. separate storage magazines.
(b) The posting of signs warning (4) Initiation of explosive charges.
against the use of mobile radio trans- (i) [Reserved]
mitters on all roads within 350 feet of (ii) When fuse is used, the blasting
the blasting operations. cap shall be securely attached to the
(2) Storage at use sites. (i) Empty con- safety fuse with a standard-ring type
tainers and paper and fiber packing cap crimper. All primers shall be as-
materials which have previously con- sembled at least 50 feet from any maga-
tained explosive materials shall be dis- zine.
posed of in a safe manner, or reused in (iii) Primers shall be made up only as
accordance with the Department of required for each round of blasting.
Transportation’s Hazardous Materials (iv) No blasting cap shall be inserted
Regulations (49 CFR parts 177–180). in the explosives without first making
(ii) Containers of explosives shall not a hole in the cartridge for the cap with
be opened in any magazine or within 50 a wooden punch of proper size or stand-
feet of any magazine. In opening kegs ard cap crimper.
294
(v) Explosives shall not be extracted state commerce, shall have attached to
from a hole that has once been charged both sides and ends of the car, cards
or has misfired unless it is impossible with the words ‘‘Explosives—Handle
to detonate the unexploded charge by Carefully—Keep Fire Away’’ in red let-
insertion of a fresh additional primer. ters at least 11⁄2 inches high on a white
(vi) If there are any misfires while background.
using cap and fuse, all persons shall be (4) Storage. Any explosives at a rail-
required to remain away from the way facility, truck terminal, pier,
charge for at least 1 hour. If electric wharf harbor facility, or airport ter-
blasting caps are used and a misfire oc- minal whether for delivery to a con-
curs, this waiting period may be re- signee, or forwarded to some other des-
duced to 30 minutes. Misfires shall be tination shall be kept in a safe place,
handled under the direction of the per- isolated as far as practicable and in
son in charge of the blasting and all such manner that they can be easily
wires shall be carefully traced and and quickly removed.
search made for unexploded charges. (5) Hours of transfer. Explosives shall
(vii) Blasters, when testing circuits not be delivered to or received from
to charged holes, shall use only blast- any railway station, truck terminal,
ing galvanometers designed for this pier, wharf, harbor facility, or airport
purpose. terminal between the hours of sunset
(viii) Only the employee making and sunrise.
leading wire connections in electrical (g) Blasting agents—(1) General. Unless
firing shall be allowed to fire the shot. otherwise set forth in this paragraph,
Leading wires shall remain shorted and blasting agents, excluding water gels,
not be connected to the blasting ma- shall be transported, stored, and used
chine or other source of current until in the same manner as explosives.
the charge is to be fired. Water gels are covered in paragraph (h)
(5) Warning required. Before a blast is of this section.
fired, the employer shall require that a (2) Fixed location mixing. (i) [Re-
loud warning signal be given by the served]
person in charge, who has made certain (ii) Buildings used for the mixing of
that all surplus explosives are in a safe blasting agents shall conform to the re-
place, all persons and vehicles are at a quirements of this section.
safe distance or under sufficient cover, (a) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
and that an adequate warning has been tible construction or sheet metal on
given. wood studs.
(f) Explosives at piers, railway stations, (b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
and cars or vessels not otherwise specified of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
in this standard—(1) Railway cars. Ex- materials.
cept in an emergency and with permis- (c) All fuel oil storage facilities shall
sion of the local authority, no person be separated from the mixing plant and
shall have or keep explosives in a rail- located in such a manner that in case
way car unless said car and contents of tank rupture, the oil will drain away
and methods of loading are in accord- from the mixing plant building.
ance with the U.S. Department of (d) The building shall be well venti-
Transportation Regulations for the lated.
Transportation of Explosives, 49 CFR (e) Heating units which do not depend
chapter I. on combustion processes, when prop-
(2) Packing and marking. No person erly designed and located, may be used
shall deliver any explosive to any car- in the building. All direct sources of
rier unless such explosive conforms in heat shall be provided exclusively from
all respects, including marking and units located outside the mixing build-
packing, to the U.S. Department of ing.
Transportation Regulations for the (f) All internal-combustion engines
Transportation of Explosives. used for electric power generation shall
(3) Marking cars. Every railway car be located outside the mixing plant
containing explosives which has building, or shall be properly venti-
reached its designation, or is stopped lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
in transit so as no longer to be in inter- haust systems on all such engines shall
295
be located so any spark emission can- shall be electrically bonded and be pro-
not be a hazard to any materials in or vided with a continuous path to the
adjacent to the plant. ground.
(iii) Equipment used for mixing (vi) Safety precautions at mixing
blasting agents shall conform to the re- plants shall include the requirements
quirements of this subdivision. of this subdivision.
(a) The design of the mixer shall min- (a) Floors shall be constructed so as
imize the possibility of frictional heat- to eliminate floor drains and piping
ing, compaction, and especially con- into which molten materials could flow
finement. All bearings and drive as- and be confined in case of fire.
semblies shall be mounted outside the (b) The floors and equipment of the
mixer and protected against the accu- mixing and packaging room shall be
mulation of dust. All surfaces shall be cleaned regularly and thoroughly to
accessible for cleaning. prevent accumulation of oxidizers or
(b) Mixing and packaging equipment fuels and other sensitizers.
shall be constructed of materials com- (c) The entire mixing and packaging
patible with the fuel-ammonium ni- plant shall be cleaned regularly and
trate composition. thoroughly to prevent excessive accu-
(c) Suitable means shall be provided mulation of dust.
to prevent the flow of fuel oil to the (d) Smoking, matches, open flames,
mixer in case of fire. In gravity flow spark-producing devices, and firearms
systems an automatic spring-loaded (except firearms carried by guards)
shutoff valve with fusible link shall be shall not be permitted inside of or
installed. within 50 feet of any building or facil-
(iv) The provisions of this subdivision ity used for the mixing of blasting
shall be considered when determining agents.
blasting agent compositions.
(e) The land surrounding the mixing
(a) The sensitivity of the blasting
plant shall be kept clear of brush, dried
agent shall be determined by means of
grass, leaves, and other materials for a
a No. 8 test blasting cap at regular in-
distance of at least 25 feet.
tervals and after every change in for-
mulation. (f) Empty ammonium nitrate bags
(b) Oxidizers of small particle size, shall be disposed of daily in a safe man-
such as crushed ammonium nitrate ner.
prills or fines, may be more sensitive (g) No welding shall be permitted or
than coarser products and shall, there- open flames used in or around the mix-
fore, be handled with greater care. ing or storage area of the plant unless
(c) No hydrocarbon liquid fuel with the equipment or area has been com-
flashpoint lower than that of No. 2 die- pletely washed down and all oxidizer
sel fuel oil 125 °F. minimum shall be material removed.
used. (h) Before welding or repairs to hol-
(d) Crude oil and crankcase oil shall low shafts, all oxidizer material shall
not be used. be removed from the outside and inside
(e) Metal powders such as aluminum of the shaft and the shaft vented with
shall be kept dry and shall be stored in a minimum one-half inch diameter
containers or bins which are moisture- opening.
resistant or weathertight. Solid fuels (i) Explosives shall not be permitted
shall be used in such manner as to min- inside of or within 50 feet of any build-
imize dust explosion hazards. ing or facility used for the mixing of
(f) Peroxides and chlorates shall not blasting agents.
be used. (3) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles.
(v) All electrical switches, controls, (i) The provisions of this paragraph
motors, and lights located in the mix- shall apply to off-highway private oper-
ing room shall conform to the require- ations as well as to all public highway
ments in subpart S of this part for movements.
Class II, Division 2 locations; otherwise (ii) A bulk vehicle body for delivering
they shall be located outside the mix- and mixing blasting agents shall con-
ing room. The frame of the mixer and form with the requirements of this
all other equipment that may be used paragraph (ii).
296
(a) The body shall be constructed of (iv) Pneumatic loading from bulk de-
noncombustible materials. livery vehicles into blastholes primed
(b) Vehicles used to transport bulk with electric blasting caps or other
premixed blasting agents on public static-sensitive systems shall conform
highways shall have closed bodies. to the requirements of this subdivision.
(c) All moving parts of the mixing (a) A positive grounding device shall
system shall be designed as to prevent be used to prevent the accumulation of
a heat buildup. Shafts or axles which static electricity.
contact the product shall have out- (b) A discharge hose shall be used
board bearings with 1-inch minimum that has a resistance range that will
clearance between the bearings and the prevent conducting stray currents, but
outside of the product container. Par- that is conductive enough to bleed off
ticular attention shall be given to the static buildup.
clearances on all moving parts. (c) A qualified person shall evaluate
(d) A bulk delivery vehicle shall be all systems to determine if they will
strong enough to carry the load with- adequately dissipate static under po-
out difficulty and be in good mechan- tential field conditions.
ical condition. (v) Repairs to bulk delivery vehicles
shall conform to the requirements of
(iii) Operation of bulk delivery vehi-
this section.
cles shall conform to the requirements
(a) No welding or open flames shall
of this subdivision. These include the
be used on or around any part of the
placarding requirements as specified by
delivery equipment unless it has been
Department of Transportation.
completely washed down and all oxi-
(a) The operator shall be trained in dizer material removed.
the safe operation of the vehicle to- (b) Before welding or making repairs
gether with its mixing, conveying, and to hollow shafts, the shaft shall be
related equipment. The employer shall thoroughly cleaned inside and out and
assure that the operator is familiar vented with a minimum one-half-inch
with the commodities being delivered diameter opening.
and the general procedure for handling (4) Bulk storage bins. (i) The bin, in-
emergency situations. cluding supports, shall be constructed
(b) The hauling of either blasting of compatible materials, waterproof,
caps or other explosives but not both, and adequately supported and braced
shall be permitted on bulk trucks pro- to withstand the combination of all
vided that a special wood or non- loads including impact forces arising
ferrous-lined container is installed for from product movement within the bin
the explosives. Such blasting caps or and accidental vehicle contact with the
other explosives shall be in DOT-speci- support legs.
fied shipping containers: see 49 CFR (ii) The bin discharge gate shall be
chapter I. designed to provide a closure tight
(c) No person shall smoke, carry enough to prevent leakage of the
matches or any flame-producing de- stored product. Provision shall also be
vice, or carry any firearms while in or made so that the gate can be locked.
about bulk vehicles effecting the mix- (iii) Bin loading manways or access
ing transfer or down-the-hole loading hatches shall be hinged or otherwise
of blasting agents at or near the blast- attached to the bin and be designed to
ing site. permit locking.
(d) Caution shall be exercised in the (iv) Any electrically driven con-
movement of the vehicle in the blast- veyors for loading or unloading bins
ing area to avoid driving the vehicle shall conform to the requirements of
over or dragging hoses over firing lines, subpart S of this part. They shall be
cap wires, or explosive materials. The designed to minimize damage from cor-
employer shall assure that the driver, rosion.
in moving the vehicle, has assistance of (v) Bins containing blasting agent
a second person to guide his move- shall be located, with respect to inhab-
ments. ited buildings, passenger railroads, and
(e) No intransit mixing of materials public highways, in accordance with
shall be performed. Table-21 and separation from other
297
3 The distances in the table apply to ammonium nitrate that
blasting agent storage and explosives
passes the insensitivity test prescribed in the definition of am-
storage shall be in conformity with monium nitrate fertilizer promulgated by the National Plant
Table H–22. Food Institute*; and ammonium nitrate failing to pass said test
shall be stored at separation distances determined by com-
(vi) Bins containing ammonium ni- petent persons. (*Definition and Test Procedures for Ammo-
nium Nitrate Fertilizer, National Plant Food Institute, Novem-
trate shall be separated from blasting ber 1964.)
agent storage and explosives storage in 4 These distances apply to nitro-carbo-nitrates and blasting
agents which pass the insensitivity test prescribed in the U.S.
conformity with Table H–22. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations.
5 Earth, or sand dikes, or enclosures filled with the pre-
TABLE H–22—TABLE OF RECOMMENDED SEPA- scribed minimum thickness of earth or sand are acceptable
artificial barricades. Natural barricades, such as hills or timber
RATION DISTANCES OF AMMONIUM NITRATE of sufficient density that the surrounding exposures which re-
AND BLASTING AGENTS FROM EXPLOSIVES OR quire protection cannot be seen from the ‘‘donor’’ when the
trees are bare of leaves, are also acceptable.
BLASTING AGENTS 1 6 6 When the ammonium nitrate must be counted in deter-
mining the distances to be maintained from inhabited build-
Donor weight Minimum separation ings, passenger railways and public highways, it may be
distance of receptor Minimum counted at one-half its actual weight because its blast effect is
thickness lower.
when barricaded 2 (ft.)
of artificial NOTE 7: Guide to use of table of recommended separation
Pounds Pounds barri- distances of ammonium nitrate and blasting agents from ex-
Ammo-
over not over nium ni- Blasting cades 5 plosives or blasting agents.
agent 4 (in.)
trate 3 (a) Sketch location of all potential donor and acceptor mate-
rials together with the maximum mass of material to be al-
100 3 11 12 lowed in that vicinity. (Potential donors are high explosives,
blasting agents, and combination of masses of detonating ma-
100 300 4 14 12 terials. Potential acceptors are high explosives, blasting
300 600 5 18 12 agents, and ammonium nitrate.)
600 1,000 6 22 12 (b) Consider separately each donor mass in combination
1,000 1,600 7 25 12 with each acceptor mass. If the masses are closer than table
allowance (distances measured between nearest edges), the
1,600 2,000 8 29 12 combination of masses becomes a new potential donor of
2,000 3,000 9 32 15 weight equal to the total mass. When individual masses are
3,000 4,000 10 36 15 considered as donors, distances to potential acceptors shall
be measured between edges. When combined masses within
4,000 6,000 11 40 15 propagating distance of each other are considered as a
6,000 8,000 12 43 20 donor, the appropriate distance to the edge of potential ac-
8,000 10,000 13 47 20 ceptors shall be computed as a weighted distance from the
combined masses.
10,000 12,000 14 50 20
Calculation of weighted distance from combined masses:
12,000 16,000 15 54 25 Let M2, M3 . . . Mn be donor masses to be combined.
16,000 20,000 16 58 25 M1 is a potential acceptor mass.
20,000 25,000 18 65 25 D12 is distance from M1 to M2 (edge to edge).
25,000 30,000 19 68 30 D13 is distance from M1 to M3 (edge to edge), etc.
30,000 35,000 20 72 30 To find weighted distance [D1(2,3 . . . n)] from combined
35,000 40,000 21 76 30 masses to M1, add the products of the individual masses and
distances and divide the total by the sum of the masses thus:
40,000 45,000 22 79 35
45,000 50,000 23 83 35 D1(2, 3 . . . n)=M2×D12+M3×D12 . . . +Mn×D12M2+M3 . . .
+Mn
50,000 55,000 24 86 35
Propagation is possible if either an individual donor mass is
55,000 60,000 25 90 35 less than the tabulated distance from an acceptor or a com-
60,000 70,000 26 94 40 bined mass is less than the weighted distance from an accep-
70,000 80,000 28 101 40 tor.
80,000 90,000 30 108 40 (c) In determining the distances separating highways, rail-
roads, and inhabited buildings from potential explosions (as
90,000 100,000 32 115 40 prescribed in Table H–21), the sum of all masses which may
100,000 120,000 34 122 50 propagate (i.e., lie at distances less than prescribed in the
120,000 140,000 37 133 50 Table) from either individual or combined donor masses are
included. However, when the ammonium nitrate must be in-
140,000 160,000 40 144 50 cluded, only 50 percent of its weight shall be used because of
160,000 180,000 44 158 50 its reduced blast effects. In applying Table H–21 to distances
180,000 200,000 48 173 50 from highways, railroads, and inhabited buildings, distances
200,000 220,000 52 187 60 are measured from the nearest edge of potentially explodable
material as prescribed in Table H–21, Note 5.
220,000 250,000 56 202 60 (d) When all or part of a potential acceptor comprises Ex-
250,000 275,000 60 216 60 plosives Class A as defined in DOT regulations, storage in
275,000 300,000 64 230 60 bullet-resistant magazines is required. Safe distances to
stores in bullet-resistant magazines may be obtained from the
1 These distances apply to the separation of stores only. intermagazine distances prescribed in Table H–21.
Table H–21 shall be used in determining separation distances (e) Barricades must not have line-of-sight openings be-
from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public high- tween potential donors and acceptors which permit blast or
ways. missiles to move directly between masses.
2 When the ammonium nitrate and/or blasting agent is not (f) Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained
barricaded, the distances shown in the table shall be multi- around any bin containing ammonium nitrate or blasting
plied by six. These distances allow for the possibility of high agent. This includes keeping weeds and other combustible
velocity metal fragments from mixers, hoppers, truck bodies, materials cleared within 25 feet of such bin. Accumulation of
sheet metal structures, metal container, and the like which spilled product on the ground shall be prevented.
may enclose the ‘‘donor’’. Where storage is in bullet-resistant
magazines recommended for explosives or where the storage (5) Storage of blasting agents and sup-
is protected by a bullet-resistant wall, distances, and barricade
thicknesses in excess of those prescribed in Table H–21 are plies. (i) Blasting agents and oxidizers
not required. used for mixing of blasting agents shall
298
be stored in the manner set forth in are prohibited inside of or within 50
this subdivision. feet of any warehouse used for the stor-
(a) Blasting agents or ammonium ni- age of blasting agents. Combustible
trate, when stored in conjunction with materials shall not be stored within 50
explosives, shall be stored in the man- feet of warehouses used for the storage
ner set forth in paragraph (c) of this of blasting agents.
section for explosives. The mass of (iv) The interior of warehouses used
blasting agents and one-half the mass for the storage of blasting agents shall
of ammonium nitrate shall be included be kept clean and free from debris and
when computing the total quantity of empty containers. Spilled materials
explosives for determining distance re- shall be cleaned up promptly and safely
quirements. removed. Combustible materials, flam-
(b) Blasting agents, when stored en- mable liquids, corrosive acids, chlor-
tirely separate from explosives, may be ates, or nitrates shall not be stored in
stored in the manner set forth in para- any warehouse used for blasting agents
graph (c) of this section or in one-story unless separated therefrom by a fire re-
warehouses (without basements) which sistive separation of not less than 1
shall be: hour resistance. The provisions of this
(1) Noncombustible or fire resistive; subdivision shall not prohibit the stor-
(2) Constructed so as to eliminate age of blasting agents together with
open floor drains and piping into which nonexplosive blasting supplies.
molten materials could flow and be (v) Piles of ammonium nitrate and
confined in case of fire; warehouses containing ammonium ni-
(3) Weather resistant; trate shall be adequately separated
(4) Well ventilated; and from readily combustible fuels.
(5) Equipped with a strong door kept (vi) Caked oxidizers, either in bags or
securely locked except when open for in bulk, shall not be loosened by blast-
business. ing.
(c) Semitrailer or full-trailer vans (vii) Every warehouse used for the
used for highway or onsite transpor- storage of blasting agents shall be
tation of the blasting agents are satis- under the supervision of a competent
factory for temporarily storing these person.
materials, provided they are located in (6) Transportation of packaged blasting
accordance with Table H–22 with re- agents. (i) When blasting agents are
spect to one another. Trailers shall be transported in the same vehicle with
provided with substantial means for explosives, all of the requirements of
locking, and the trailer doors shall be paragraph (d) of this section shall be
kept locked, except during the time of complied with.
placement and removal of stocks of (ii) Vehicles transporting blasting
blasting agents. agents shall only be driven by and be in
(ii) Warehouses used for the storage charge of a driver in possession of a
of blasting agents separate from explo- valid motor vehicle operator’s license.
sives shall be located as set forth in Such a person shall also be familiar
this subdivision. with the State’s vehicle and traffic
(a) Warehouses used for the storage laws.
of blasting agents shall be located in (iii) No matches, firearms, acids, or
Table H–22 with respect to one another. other corrosive liquids shall be carried
(b) If both blasting agents and ammo- in the bed or body of any vehicle con-
nium nitrate are handled or stored taining blasting agents.
within the distance limitations pre- (iv) No person shall be permitted to
scribed through paragraph (g)(2) of this ride upon, drive, load, or unload a vehi-
section, one-half the mass of the am- cle containing blasting agents while
monium nitrate shall be added to the smoking or under the influence of in-
mass of the blasting agent when com- toxicants, narcotics, or other dan-
puting the total quantity of explosives gerous drugs.
for determining the proper distance for (v) [Reserved]
compliance with Table H–21. (vi) Vehicles transporting blasting
(iii) Smoking, matches, open flames, agents shall be in safe operating condi-
spark producing devices, and firearms tion at all times.
299
(7) Use of blasting agents. Persons ture, the oil will drain away from the
using blasting agents shall comply mixing plant building.
with all of the applicable provisions of (d) The building shall be well venti-
paragraph (e) of this section. lated.
(h) Water gel (Slurry) explosives and (e) Heating units that do not depend
blasting agents—(1) General provisions. on combustion processes, when prop-
Unless otherwise set forth in this para- erly designed and located, may be used
graph, water gels shall be transported, in the building. All direct sources of
stored and used in the same manner as heat shall be provided exclusively from
explosives or blasting agents in accord- units located outside of the mixing
ance with the classification of the building.
product. (f) All internal-combustion engines
(2) Types and classifications. (i) Water used for electric power generation shall
gels containing a substance in itself be located outside the mixing plant
classified as an explosive shall be clas- building, or shall be properly venti-
sified as an explosive and manufac- lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
tured, transported, stored, and used as haust systems on all such engines shall
specified for ‘‘explosives’’ in this sec- be located so any spark emission can-
tion, except as noted in subdivision (iv) not be a hazard to any materials in or
of this subparagraph. adjacent to the plant.
(ii) Water gels containing no sub- (iii) Ingredients of water gels shall
stance in itself classified as an explo- conform to the requirements of this
sive and which are cap-sensitive as de- subdivision.
fined in paragraph (a) of this section (a) Ingredients in themselves classi-
under Blasting Agent shall be classified fied as Class A or Class B explosives
as an explosive and manufactured, shall be stored in conformity with
transported, stored and used as speci- paragraph (c) of this section.
fied for ‘‘explosives’’ in this section. (b) Nitrate-water solutions may be
(iii) Water gels containing no sub- stored in tank cars, tank trucks, or
stance in itself classified as an explo- fixed tanks without quantity or dis-
sive and which are not cap-sensitive as tance limitations. Spills or leaks which
defined in paragraph (a) of this section may contaminate combustible mate-
under Blasting Agent shall be classified rials shall be cleaned up immediately.
as blasting agents and manufactured, (c) Metal powders such as aluminum
transported, stored, and used as speci- shall be kept dry and shall be stored in
fied for ‘‘blasting agents’’ in this sec- containers or bins which are moisture-
tion. resistant or weathertight. Solid fuels
(iv) When tests on specific formula- shall be used in such manner as to min-
tions of water gels result in Depart- imize dust explosion hazards.
ment of Transportation classification (d) Ingredients shall not be stored
as a Class B explosive, bullet-resistant with incompatible materials.
magazines are not required, see para- (e) Peroxides and chlorates shall not
graph (c)(2)(ii) of this section. be used.
(3) Fixed location mixing. (iv) Mixing equipment shall comply
(i) [Reserved] with the requirements of this subdivi-
(ii) Buildings used for the mixing of sion.
water gels shall conform to the re- (a) The design of the processing
quirements of this subdivision. equipment, including mixing and con-
(a) Buildings shall be of noncombus- veying equipment, shall be compatible
tible construction or sheet metal on with the relative sensitivity of the ma-
wood studs. terials being handled. Equipment shall
(b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be be designed to minimize the possibility
of concrete or of other nonabsorbent of frictional heating, compaction, over-
materials. loading, and confinement.
(c) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil (b) Both equipment and handling pro-
storage facilities shall be separated cedures shall be designed to prevent
from the mixing plant and located in the introduction of foreign objects or
such a manner that in case of tank rup- materials.
300
(c) Mixers, pumps, valves, and related shall be at a point separate from where
equipment shall be designed to permit the water gel is discharged.
regular and periodic flushing, cleaning, (c) The design of processing equip-
dismantling, and inspection. ment and general requirements shall
(d) All electrical equipment including conform to subparagraphs (3) (iii) and
wiring, switches, controls, motors, and (iv) of this paragraph.
lights, shall conform to the require- (d) A positive action parking brake,
ments of subpart S of this part. which will set the wheel brakes on at
(e) All electric motors and generators least one axle shall be provided on ve-
shall be provided with suitable over- hicles when equipped with air brakes
load protection devices. Electrical gen- and shall be used during bulk delivery
erators, motors, proportioning devices, operations. Wheel chocks shall supple-
and all other electrical enclosures shall ment parking brakes whenever condi-
be electrically bonded. The grounding tions may require.
conductor to all such electrical equip- (ii) Operation of bulk delivery and
ment shall be effectively bonded to the mixing vehicles shall comply with the
service-entrance ground connection requirements of this subdivision.
and to all equipment ground connec-
(a) The placarding requirements con-
tions in a manner so as to provide a
tained in DOT regulations apply to ve-
continuous path to ground.
hicles carrying water gel explosives or
(v) Mixing facilities shall comply
blasting agents.
with the fire prevention requirements
of this subdivision. (b) The operator shall be trained in
(a) The mixing, loading, and ingre- the safe operation of the vehicle to-
dient transfer areas where residues or gether with its mixing, conveying, and
spilled materials may accumulate shall related equipment. He shall be familiar
be cleaned periodically. A cleaning and with the commodities being delivered
collection system for dangerous resi- and the general procedure for handling
dues shall be provided. , emergency situations.
(b) A daily visual inspection shall be (c) The hauling of either blasting
made of mixing, conveying, and elec- caps or other explosives, but not both,
trical equipment to establish that such shall be permitted on bulk trucks pro-
equipment is in good operating condi- vided that a special wood or non-
tion. A program of systematic mainte- ferrous-lined container is installed for
nance shall be conducted on regular the explosives. Such blasting caps or
schedule. other explosives shall be in DOT-speci-
(c) Heaters which are not dependent fied shipping containers; see 49 CFR
on the combustion process within the chapter I.
heating unit may be used within the (d) No person shall be allowed to
confines of processing buildings, or smoke, carry matches or any flame-
compartments, if provided with tem- producing device, or carry any firearms
perature and safety controls and lo- while in or about bulk vehicles effect-
cated away from combustible materials ing the mixing, transfer, or down-the-
and the finished product. hole loading of water gels at or near
(4) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles. the blasting site.
(i) The design of vehicles shall comply (e) Caution shall be exercised in the
with the requirements of this subdivi- movement of the vehicle in the blast-
sion. ing area to avoid driving the vehicle
(a) Vehicles used over public high- over or dragging hoses over firing lines,
ways for the bulk transportation of cap wires, or explosive materials. The
water gels or of ingredients classified employer shall furnish the driver the
as dangerous commodities, shall meet assistance of a second person to guide
the requirements of the Department of the driver’s movements.
Transportation and shall meet the re- (f) No intransit mixing of materials
quirements of paragraphs (d) and (g)(6) shall be performed.
of this section. (g) The location chosen for water gel
(b) When electric power is supplied by or ingredient transfer from a support
a self-contained motor generator lo- vehicle into the borehole loading vehi-
cated on the vehicle the generator cle shall be away from the blasthole
301
site when the boreholes are loaded or (c) The wall on the exposed side of a
in the process of being loaded. storage building within 50 feet of a
(i) Storage of ammonium nitrate—(1) combustible building, forest, piles of
Scope and definitions. (i)(a) Except as combustible materials and similar ex-
provided in paragraph (i)(1)(i)(d) of this posure hazards shall be of fire-resistive
paragraph applies to the storage of am- construction. In lieu of the fire-resis-
monium nitrate in the form of crystals, tive wall, other suitable means of expo-
flakes, grains, or prills including fer- sure protection such as a free standing
tilizer grade, dynamite grade, nitrous wall may be used. The roof coverings
oxide grade, technical grade, and other shall be Class C or better, as defined in
mixtures containing 60 percent or more the Manual on Roof Coverings, NFPA
ammonium nitrate by weight but does 203M–1970, which is incorporated by ref-
not apply to blasting agents. erence as specified in § 1910.6.
(b) This paragraph does not apply to (d) All flooring in storage and han-
the transportation of ammonium ni- dling areas, shall be of noncombustible
trate. material or protected against impreg-
(c) This paragraph does not apply to nation by ammonium nitrate and shall
storage under the jurisdiction of and in be without open drains, traps, tunnels,
compliance with the regulations of the pits, or pockets into which any molten
U.S. Coast Guard (see 46 CFR parts 146– ammonium nitrate could flow and be
149). confined in the event of fire.
(d) The storage of ammonium nitrate (e) The continued use of an existing
and ammonium nitrate mixtures that storage building or structure not in
are more sensitive than allowed by the strict conformity with this paragraph
‘‘Definition of Test Procedures for Am- may be approved in cases where such
monium Nitrate Fertilizer’’ is prohib- continued use will not constitute a
ited. hazard to life.
(ii)(a) [Reserved]
(f) Buildings and structures shall be
(b) The standards for ammonium ni-
dry and free from water seepage
trate (nitrous oxide grade) are those
through the roof, walls, and floors.
found in the ‘‘Specifications, Prop-
erties, and Recommendations for Pack- (3) Storage of ammonium nitrate in
aging, Transportation, Storage, and bags, drums, or other containers. (i)(a)
Use of Ammonium Nitrate’’, available Bags and containers used for ammo-
from the Compressed Gas Association, nium nitrate must comply with speci-
Inc., which is incorporated by reference fications and standards required for use
as specified in § 1910.6. in interstate commerce (see 49 CFR
(2) General provisions. (i) This para- chapter I).
graph applies to all persons storing, (b) Containers used on the premises
having, or keeping ammonium nitrate, in the actual manufacturing or proc-
and to the owner or lessee of any build- essing need not comply with provisions
ing, premises, or structure in which of paragraph (i)(3)(i)(a) of this para-
ammonium nitrate is stored in quan- graph.
tities of 1,000 pounds or more. (ii)(a) Containers of ammonium ni-
(ii) Approval of large quantity stor- trate shall not be accepted for storage
age shall be subject to due consider- when the temperature of the ammo-
ation of the fire and explosion hazards, nium nitrate exceeds 130 °F.
including exposure to toxic vapors (b) Bags of ammonium nitrate shall
from burning or decomposing ammo- not be stored within 30 inches of the
nium nitrate. storage building walls and partitions.
(iii)(a) Storage buildings shall not (c) The height of piles shall not ex-
have basements unless the basements ceed 20 feet. The width of piles shall
are open on at least one side. Storage not exceed 20 feet and the length 50 feet
buildings shall not be over one story in except that where the building is of
height. noncombustible construction or is pro-
(b) Storage buildings shall have ade- tected by automatic sprinklers the
quate ventilation or be of a construc- length of piles shall not be limited. In
tion that will be self-ventilating in the no case shall the ammonium nitrate be
event of fire. stacked closer than 36 inches below the
302
roof or supporting and spreader beams sistance rating from storage of organic
overhead. chemicals, acids, or other corrosive
(d) Aisles shall be provided to sepa- materials, materials that may require
rate piles by a clear space of not less blasting during processing or handling,
than 3 feet in width. At least one serv- compressed flammable gases, flam-
ice or main aisle in the storage area mable and combustible materials or
shall be not less than 4 feet in width. other contaminating substances, in-
(4) Storage of bulk ammonium nitrate. cluding but not limited to animal fats,
(i)(a) Warehouses shall have adequate baled cotton, baled rags, baled scrap
ventilation or be capable of adequate paper, bleaching powder, burlap or cot-
ventilation in case of fire. ton bags, caustic soda, coal, coke, char-
(b) Unless constructed of noncombus- coal, cork, camphor, excelsior, fibers of
tible material or unless adequate fa- any kind, fish oils, fish meal, foam rub-
cilities for fighting a roof fire are ber, hay, lubricating oil, linseed oil, or
available, bulk storage structures shall other oxidizable or drying oils, naph-
not exceed a height of 40 feet. thalene, oakum, oiled clothing, oiled
(ii)(a) Bins shall be clean and free of paper, oiled textiles, paint, straw, saw-
materials which may contaminate am- dust, wood shavings, or vegetable oils.
monium nitrate. Walls referred to in this subdivision
(b) Due to the corrosive and reactive need extend only to the underside of
properties of ammonium nitrate, and the roof.
to avoid contamination, galvanized (b) In lieu of separation walls, ammo-
iron, copper, lead, and zinc shall not be nium nitrate may be separated from
used in a bin construction unless suit- the materials referred to in paragraph
ably protected. Aluminum bins and (a) of this section by a space of at least
wooden bins protected against impreg- 30 feet.
nation by ammonium nitrate are per-
(c) Flammable liquids such as gaso-
missible. The partitions dividing the
line, kerosene, solvents, and light fuel
ammonium nitrate storage from other
oils shall not be stored on the premises
products which would contaminate the
except when such storage conforms to
ammonium nitrate shall be of tight
§ 1910.106, and when walls and sills or
construction.
curbs are provided in accordance with
(c) The ammonium nitrate storage
paragraphs (i)(5)(i) (a) or (b) of this sec-
bins or piles shall be clearly identified
tion.
by signs reading ‘‘Ammonium Nitrate’’
with letters at least 2 inches high. (d) LP-Gas shall not be stored on the
(iii)(a) Piles or bins shall be so sized premises except when such storage con-
and arranged that all material in the forms to § 1910.110.
pile is moved out periodically in order (ii)(a) Sulfur and finely divided met-
to minimize possible caking of the als shall not be stored in the same
stored ammonium nitrate. building with ammonium nitrate ex-
(b) Height or depth of piles shall be cept when such storage conforms to
limited by the pressure-setting tend- paragraphs (a) through (h) of this sec-
ency of the product. However, in no tion.
case shall the ammonium nitrate be (b) Explosives and blasting agents
piled higher at any point than 36 inches shall not be stored in the same building
below the roof or supporting and with ammonium nitrate except on the
spreader beams overhead. premises of makers, distributors, and
(c) Ammonium nitrate shall not be user-compounders of explosives or
accepted for storage when the tempera- blasting agents.
ture of the product exceeds 130 °F. (c) Where explosives or blasting
(d) Dynamite, other explosives, and agents are stored in separate buildings,
blasting agents shall not be used to other than on the premises of makers,
break up or loosen caked ammonium distributors, and user-compounders of
nitrate. explosives or blasting agents, they
(5) Contaminants. (i)(a) Ammonium shall be separated from the ammonium
nitrate shall be in a separate building nitrate by the distances and/or barri-
or shall be separated by approved type cades specified in Table H–22 of this
firewalls of not less than 1 hour fire-re- subpart, but by not less than 50 feet.
303
(d) Storage and/or operations on the rials, by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour
premises of makers, distributors, and rating or by a distance of 25 feet.
user-compounders of explosives or (iii) Small arms ammunition shall
blasting agents shall be in conformity not be stored together with Class A or
with paragraphs (a) through (h) of this Class B explosives unless the storage
section. facility is adequate for this latter stor-
(6) General precautions. (i) Electrical age.
installations shall conform to the re- (3) Smokeless propellants. (i) All
quirements of subpart S of this part, smokeless propellants shall be stored
for ordinary locations. They shall be in shipping containers specified in 49
designed to minimize damage from cor- CFR 173.93 for smokeless propellants.
rosion. (ii) [Reserved]
(ii) In areas where lightning storms (iii) Commercial stocks of smokeless
are prevalent, lightning protection propellants over 20 pounds and not
shall be provided. (See the Lightning more than 100 pounds shall be stored in
Protection Code, NFPA 78–1968, which portable wooden boxes having walls of
is incorporated by reference as speci- at least 1 inch nominal thickness.
fied in § 1910.6.) (iv) Commercial stocks in quantities
(iii) Provisions shall be made to pre- not to exceed 750 pounds shall be stored
vent unauthorized personnel from en- in nonportable storage cabinets having
tering the ammonium nitrate storage wooden walls of at least 1 inch nominal
area. thickness. Not more than 400 pounds
(7) Fire protection. (i) Not more than shall be permitted in any one cabinet.
2,500 tons (2270 tonnes) of bagged am- (v) Quantities in excess of 750 pounds
monium nitrate shall be stored in a shall be stored in magazines in accord-
building or structure not equipped with ance with paragraph (c) of this section.
an automatic sprinkler system. Sprin- (4) Small arms ammunition primers. (i)
kler systems shall be of the approved Small arms ammunition primers shall
type and installed in accordance with not be stored except in the original
§ 1910.159. shipping container in accordance with
(ii)(a) Suitable fire control devices the requirements of 49 CFR 173.107 for
such as small hose or portable fire ex- small arms ammunition primers.
tinguishers shall be provided through- (ii) [Reserved]
out the warehouse and in the loading (iii) Small arms ammunition primers
and unloading areas. Suitable fire con- shall be separated from flammable liq-
trol devices shall comply with the re- uids, flammable solids as classified in
quirements of §§ 1910.157 and 1910.158. 49 CFR part 172, and oxidizing mate-
(b) Water supplies and fire hydrants rials by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour
shall be available in accordance with rating or by a distance of 25 feet.
recognized good practices. (iv) Not more than 750,000 small arms
(j) Small arms ammunition, small arms ammunition primers shall be stored in
primers, and small arms propellants—(1) any one building, except as provided in
Scope. This paragraph does not apply to paragraph (j)(4)(v) of this paragraph.
in-process storage and intraplant Not more than 100,000 shall be stored in
transportation during manufacture of any one pile. Piles shall be at least 15
small arms ammunition, small arms feet apart.
primers, and smokeless propellants. (v) Quantities of small arms ammuni-
(2) Small arms ammunition. (i) No tion primers in excess of 750,000 shall
quantity limitations are imposed on be stored in magazines in accordance
the storage of small arms ammunition with paragraph (c) of this section.
in warehouses, retail stores, and other (k) Scope. (1) This section applies to
general occupancy facilities, except the manufacture, keeping, having,
those imposed by limitations of storage storage, sale, transportation, and use
facilities. of explosives, blasting agents, and py-
(ii) Small arms ammunition shall be rotechnics. The section does not apply
separated from flammable liquids, to the sale and use (public display) of
flammable solids as classified in 49 pyrotechnics, commonly known as fire-
CFR part 172, and from oxidizing mate- works, nor the use of explosives in the
304
form prescribed by the official U.S. supply for farm tractors, construction
Pharmacopeia. machinery and similar equipment.
(2) The manufacture of explosives as (9) P.S.I.G.—pounds per square inch
defined in paragraph (a)(3) of this sec- gauge.
tion shall also meet the requirements (10) P.S.I.A.—pounds per square inch
contained in § 1910.119. absolute.
(3) The manufacture of pyrotechnics (11) Systems—an assembly of equip-
as defined in paragraph (a)(10) of this ment consisting essentially of the con-
section shall also meet the require- tainer or containers, major devices
ments contained in § 1910.119. such as vaporizers, safety relief valves,
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 excess flow valves, regulators, and pip-
FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, ing connecting such parts.
1980; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 57 FR 6403, (12) Vaporizer-burner—an integral va-
Feb. 24, 1992; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR porizer-burner unit, dependent upon
9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998] the heat generated by the burner as the
§ 1910.110 Storage and handling of liq- source of heat to vaporize the liquid
uefied petroleum gases. used for dehydrators or dryers.
(13) Ventilation, adequate—when
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- specified for the prevention of fire dur-
tion. As used in this section: ing normal operation, ventilation shall
(1) API-ASME container—A con- be considered adequate when the con-
tainer constructed in accordance with centration of the gas in a gas-air mix-
the requirements of paragraph ture does not exceed 25 percent of the
(b)(3)(iii) of this section. lower flammable limit.
(2) ASME container—A container
(14) Approved—unless otherwise indi-
constructed in accordance with the re-
cated, listing or approval by a nation-
quirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this
ally recognized testing laboratory.
section.
Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nation-
(3) Container assembly—An assembly
ally recognized testing laboratory.
consisting essentially of the container
and fittings for all container openings, (15) Listed—see ‘‘approved’’ in
including shutoff valves, excess flow § 1910.110(14).
valves, liquid-level gaging devices, (16) DOT Specifications—regulations
safety relief devices, and protective of the Department of Transportation
housing. published in 49 CFR chapter I.
(4) Containers—All vessels, such as (17)–(18) [Reserved]
tanks, cylinders, or drums, used for (19) DOT cylinders—cylinders meet-
transportation or storing liquefied pe- ing the requirements of 49 CFR chapter
troleum gases. I.
(5) DOT—Department of Transpor- (b) Basic rules—(1) Odorizing gases. (i)
tation. All liquefied petroleum gases shall be
(6) DOT container—A container con- effectively odorized by an approved
structed in accordance with the appli- agent of such character as to indicate
cable requirements of 49 CFR chapter 1. positively, by distinct odor, the pres-
(7) ‘‘Liquified petroleum gases’’— ence of gas down to concentration in
‘‘LPG’’ and ‘‘LP-Gas’’—Any material air of not over one-fifth the lower limit
which is composed predominantly of of flammability. Odorization, however,
any of the following hydrocarbons, or is not required if harmful in the use of
mixtures of them; propane, propylene, further processing of the liquefied pe-
butanes (normal butane or iso-butane), troleum gas, or if odorization will serve
and butylenes. no useful purpose as a warning agent in
(8) Movable fuel storage tenders or such use or further processing.
farm carts—Containers not in excess of (ii) The odorization requirement of
1,200 gallons water capacity, equipped paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section shall
with wheels to be towed from one loca- be considered to be met by the use of
tion of usage to another. They are basi- 1.0 pounds of ethyl mercaptan, 1.0
cally nonhighway vehicles, but may oc- pounds of thiophane or 1.4 pounds of
casionally be moved over public roads amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallons of
or highways. They are used as a fuel LP-Gas. However, this listing of
305
odorants and quantities shall not ex- denda, of the American Petroleum In-
clude the use of other odorants that stitute and the American Society of
meet the odorization requirements of Mechanical Engineers, which is incor-
paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section. porated by reference as specified in
(2) Approval of equipment and systems. § 1910.6, shall be considered in conform-
(i) Each system utilizing DOT con- ance. Containers constructed according
tainers in accordance with 49 CFR part to API-ASME Code do not have to com-
178 shall have its container valves, con- ply with section I or with appendix to
nectors, manifold valve assemblies, and section I. Paragraphs W–601 to W–606
regulators approved. inclusive in the 1943 and earlier edi-
(ii) Each system for domestic or com- tions do not apply.
mercial use utilizing containers of 2,000 (iv) The provisions of paragraph
gallons or less water capacity, other (b)(3)(i) of this section shall not be con-
than those constructed in accordance strued as prohibiting the continued use
with 49 CFR part 178, shall consist of a or reinstallation of containers con-
container assembly and one or more structed and maintained in accordance
regulators, and may include other with the standard for the Storage and
parts. The system as a unit or the con- Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases
tainer assembly as a unit, and the reg- NFPA No. 58 in effect at the time of
ulator or regulators, shall be individ- fabrication.
ually listed. (v) Containers used with systems em-
(iii) In systems utilizing containers bodied in paragraph (b), (d)(3)(iii), and
of over 2,000 gallons water capacity, (f) of this section, shall be constructed,
each regulator, container valve, excess tested, and stamped in accordance with
flow valve, gaging device, and relief DOT specifications effective at the
valve installed on or at the container, date of their manufacture.
shall have its correctness as to design, (4) Welding of containers. (i) Welding
construction, and performance deter- to the shell, head, or any other part of
mined by listing by a nationally recog- the container subject to internal pres-
nized testing laboratory. Refer to sure, shall be done in compliance with
§ 1910.7 for definition of nationally rec- the code under which the tank was fab-
ognized testing laboratory. ricated. Other welding is permitted
(3) Requirements for construction and only on saddle plates, lugs, or brackets
original test of containers. (i) Containers attached to the container by the tank
used with systems embodied in para- manufacturer.
graphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this sec- (ii) Where repair or modification in-
tion, except as provided in paragraphs volving welding of DOT containers is
(e)(3)(iii) and (g)(2)(i) of this section, required, the container shall be re-
shall be designed, constructed, and turned to a qualified manufacturer
tested in accordance with the Rules for making containers of the same type,
Construction of Unfired Pressure Ves- and the repair or modification made in
sels, section VIII, Division 1, American compliance with DOT regulations.
Society of Mechanical Engineers (5) Markings on containers. (i) Each
(ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel container covered in paragraph (b)(3)(i)
Code, 1968 edition, which is incor- of this section, except as provided in
porated by reference as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section shall
§ 1910.6. be marked as specified in the following:
(ii) Containers constructed according (a) With a marking identifying com-
to the 1949 and earlier editions of the pliance with, and other markings re-
ASME Code do not have to comply quired by, the rules of the reference
with paragraphs U–2 through U–10 and under which the container is con-
U–19 thereof. Containers constructed structed; or with the stamp and other
according to paragraph U–70 in the 1949 markings required by the National
and earlier editions are not authorized. Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel In-
(iii) Containers designed, con- spectors.
structed, and tested prior to July 1, (b) With notation as to whether the
1961, according to the Code for Unfired container is designed for underground
Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids or aboveground installation or both. If
and Gases, 1951 edition with 1954 Ad- intended for both and different style
306
hoods are provided, the marking shall (c) LP-Gas fueled stationary or port-
indicate the proper hood for each type able engines in accordance with para-
of installation. graph (e) (11) or (12) of this section.
(c) With the name and address of the (d) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks
supplier of the container, or with the used in accordance with paragraph
trade name of the container. (e)(13) of this section.
(d) With the water capacity of the (e) LP-Gas fueled vehicles garaged in
container in pounds or gallons, U.S. accordance with paragraph (e)(14) of
Standard. this section.
(e) With the pressure in p.s.i.g., for (f) Containers awaiting use or resale
which the container is designed. when stored in accordance with para-
(f) With the wording ‘‘This container graph (f) of this section.
shall not contain a product having a (ii) Each individual container shall
vapor pressure in excess of ll p.s.i.g. be located with respect to the nearest
at 100 °F.,’’ see subparagraph (14)(viii) important building or group of build-
of this paragraph. ings in accordance with Table H–23.
(g) With the tare weight in pounds or TABLE H–23
other identified unit of weight for con-
tainers with a water capacity of 300 Minimum distances
pounds or less. Water capacity per Containers Between
(h) With marking indicating the container above-
Under- Above- ground
maximum level to which the container ground ground containers
may be filled with liquid at tempera-
Less than 125 gals. 1 .. 10 feet .... None ....... None.
tures between 20 °F. and 130 °F., except
125 to 250 gals ........... 10 feet .... 10 feet .... None.
on containers provided with fixed max- 251 to 500 gals ........... 10 feet .... 10 feet .... 3 feet.
imum level indicators or which are 501 to 2,000 gals ........ 25 feet 2 .. 25 feet 2 .. 3 feet.
filled by weighing. Markings shall be 2,001 to 30,000 gals ... 50 feet .... 50 feet .... 5 feet.
increments of not more than 20 °F. 30,001 to 70,000 gals 50 feet .... 75 feet. 3.
70,001 to 90,000 gals 50 feet .... 100 feet. 3.
This marking may be located on the
1 If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-container instal-
liquid level gaging device.
lation at a consumer site is 501 gallons or greater, the min-
(i) With the outside surface area in imum distance shall comply with the appropriate portion of
square feet. this table, applying the aggregate capacity rather than the ca-
pacity per container. If more than one installation is made,
(ii) Markings specified shall be on a each installation shall be separated from another installation
by at least 25 feet. Do not apply the MINIMUM DISTANCES
metal nameplate attached to the con- BETWEEN ABOVE-GROUND CONTAINERS to such installa-
tainer and located in such a manner as tions.
2 The above distance requirements may be reduced to not
to remain visible after the container is less than 10 feet for a single container of 1,200 gallons water
installed. capacity or less, providing such a container is at least 25 feet
from any other LP-Gas container of more than 125 gallons
(iii) When LP-Gas and one or more water capacity.
other gases are stored or used in the 3 1⁄4 of sum of diameters of adjacent containers.
same area, the containers shall be (iii) Containers installed for use shall
marked to identify their content. not be stacked one above the other.
Marking shall conform to the marking (iv) [Reserved]
requirements set forth in (v) In the case of buildings devoted
§ 1910.253(b)(1)(ii). exclusively to gas manufacturing and
(6) Location of containers and regu- distributing operations, the distances
lating equipment. (i) Containers, and required by Table H–23 may be reduced
first stage regulating equipment if provided that in no case shall con-
used, shall be located outside of build- tainers of water capacity exceeding 500
ings, except under one or more of the gallons be located closer than 10 feet to
following: such gas manufacturing and distrib-
(a) In buildings used exclusively for uting buildings.
container charging, vaporization pres- (vi) Readily ignitible material such
sure reduction, gas mixing, gas manu- as weeds and long dry grass shall be re-
facturing, or distribution. moved within 10 feet of any container.
(b) When portable use is necessary (vii) The minimum separation be-
and in accordance with paragraph (c)(5) tween liquefied petroleum gas con-
of this section. tainers and flammable liquid tanks
307
shall be 20 feet, and the minimum sepa- required by this section shall be lo-
ration between a container and the cated inside of the container or at a
centerline of the dike shall be 10 feet. point outside where the line enters the
The foregoing provision shall not apply container; in the latter case, installa-
when LP-Gas containers of 125 gallons tion shall be made in such manner that
or less capacity are installed adjacent any undue strain beyond the excess
to Class III flammable liquid tanks of flow or back pressure check valve will
275 gallons or less capacity. not cause breakage between the con-
(viii) Suitable means shall be taken tainer and such valve.
to prevent the accumulation of flam- (vii) Excess flow valves shall be de-
mable liquids under adjacent liquified signed with a bypass, not to exceed a
petroleum gas containers, such as by No. 60 drill size opening to allow
diking, diversion curbs, or grading. equalization of pressures.
(ix) When dikes are used with flam- (viii) Containers of more than 30 gal-
mable liquid tanks, no liquefied petro- lons water capacity and less than 2,000
leum gas containers shall be located gallons water capacity, filled on a vol-
within the diked area. umetric basis, and manufactured after
(7) Container valves and container ac- December 1, 1963, shall be equipped for
cessories. (i) Valves, fittings, and acces- filling into the vapor space.
sories connected directly to the con- (8) Piping—including pipe, tubing, and
tainer including primary shutoff fittings. (i) Pipe, except as provided in
valves, shall have a rated working pres- paragraphs (e)(6)(i) and (g)(10)(iii), of
sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be this section shall be wrought iron or
of material and design suitable for LP- steel (black or galvanized), brass, cop-
Gas service. Cast iron shall not be used per, or aluminum alloy. Aluminum
for container valves, fittings, and ac- alloy pipe shall be at least Schedule 40
cessories. This does not prohibit the in accordance with the specifications
use of container valves made of malle- for Aluminum Alloy Pipe, American
able or nodular iron. National Standards Institute (ANSI)
(ii) Connections to containers, except H38.7–1969 (ASTM, B241–69), which is in-
safety relief connections, liquid level corporated by reference as specified in
gaging devices, and plugged openings, § 1910.6, except that the use of alloy 5456
shall have shutoff valves located as is prohibited and shall be suitably
close to the container as practicable. marked at each end of each length in-
(iii) Excess flow valves, where re- dicating compliance with American
quired shall close automatically at the National Standard Institute Specifica-
rated flows of vapor or liquid as speci- tions. Aluminum Alloy pipe shall be
fied by the manufacturer. The connec- protected against external corrosion
tions or line including valves, fittings, when it is in contact with dissimilar
etc., being protected by an excess flow metals other than galvanized steel, or
valve shall have a greater capacity its location is subject to repeated wet-
than the rated flow of the excess flow ting by such liquids as water (except
valve. rain water), detergents, sewage, or
(iv) Liquid level gaging devices which leaking from other piping, or it passes
are so constructed that outward flow of through flooring, plaster, masonry, or
container contents shall not exceed insulation. Galvanized sheet steel or
that passed by a No. 54 drill size open- pipe, galvanized inside and out, may be
ing, need not be equipped with excess considered suitable protection. The
flow valves. maximum nominal pipe size for alu-
(v) Openings from container or minum pipe shall be three-fourths inch
through fittings attached directly on and shall not be used for pressures ex-
container to which pressure gage con- ceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy pipe
nection is made, need not be equipped shall not be installed within 6 inches of
with shutoff or excess flow valves if the ground.
such openings are restricted to not (a) Vapor piping with operating pres-
larger than No. 54 drill size opening. sures not exceeding 125 p.s.i.g. shall be
(vi) Except as provided in paragraph suitable for a working pressure of at
(c)(5)(i)(b) of this section, excess flow least 125 p.s.i.g. Pipe shall be at least
and back pressure check valves where Schedule 40 (ASTM A–53–69, Grade B
308
Electric Resistance Welded and Elec- TABLE H–24—WALL THICKNESS OF COPPER
tric Flash Welded Pipe, which is incor- TUBING 1—Continued
porated by reference as specified in
Nominal wall thickness
§ 1910.6, or equal). Standard size Nominal out- (inches)
side diameter
(b) Vapor piping with operating pres- (inches) (inches)
Type K Type L
sures over 125 p.s.i.g. and all liquid pip-
ing shall be suitable for a working ⁄
38 0.500 0.049 0.035
1⁄2 0.625 0.049 0.040
pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe 5⁄8 0.750 0.049 0.042
shall be at least Schedule 80 if joints 3⁄4 0.875 0.065 0.045
are threaded or threaded and back 1 1.125 0.065 0.050
welded. At least Schedule 40 (ASTM A– 1 ⁄4
1 1.375 0.065 0.055
11⁄2 1.625 0.072 0.060
53–69 Grade B Electric Resistance Weld- 2 2.125 0.083 0.070
ed and Electric Flash Welded Pipe or 1 Based on data in Specification for Seamless Copper
equal) shall be used if joints are weld- Water Tube, ANSI H23.1–1970 (ASTM B–88–69).
ed, or welded and flanged. NOTE: The standard size by which tube is designated is 1⁄8
(ii) Tubing shall be seamless and of inch smaller than its nominal outside diameter.
copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy.
TABLE H–25—WALL THICKNESS OF ALUMINUM
Copper tubing shall be of type K or L
ALLOY TUBING 1
or equivalent as covered in the Speci-
fication for Seamless Copper Water Outside diameter
Nominal wall thickness (inches)
Tube, ANSI H23.1–1970 (ASTM B88–69), (inches)
Type A Type B
which is incorporated by reference as
specified in § 1910.6. Aluminum alloy ⁄
38 0.035 0.049
⁄
12 0.035 0.049
tubing shall be of Type A or B or equiv- ⁄
58 0.042 0.049
alent as covered in Specification ASTM 3⁄4 0.049 0.058
B210–68 (which is incorporated by ref- 1 Based on data in Standard Specification for Aluminum-
erence as specified in § 1910.6) and shall Alloy Drawn Seamless Coiled Tubes for Special Purpose Ap-
plications, ASTM B210–68.
be suitably marked every 18 inches in-
dicating compliance with ASTM Speci- (iii) In systems where the gas in liq-
fications. The minimum nominal wall uid form without pressure reduction
thickness of copper tubing and alu- enters the building, only heavy walled
minum alloy tubing shall be as speci- seamless brass or copper tubing with
fied in Table H–24 and Table H–25. an internal diameter not greater than
Aluminum alloy tubing shall be pro- three thirty-seconds inch, and a wall
tected against external corrosion when thickness of not less than three sixty-
it is in contact with dissimilar metals fourths inch shall be used. This re-
other than galvanized steel, or its loca- quirement shall not apply to research
tion is subject to repeated wetting by and experimental laboratories, build-
liquids such as water (except rain- ings, or separate fire divisions of build-
water), detergents, sewage, or leakage ings used exclusively for housing inter-
from other piping, or it passes through nal combustion engines, and to com-
flooring, plaster, masonry, or insula- mercial gas plants or bulk stations
tion. Galvanized sheet steel or pipe, where containers are charged, nor to
galvanized inside and out, may be con- industrial vaporizer buildings, nor to
sidered suitable protection. The max- buildings, structures, or equipment
imum outside diameter for aluminum under construction or undergoing
alloy tubing shall be three-fourths inch major renovation.
and shall not be used for pressures ex- (iv) Pipe joints may be screwed,
ceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy tub- flanged, welded, soldered, or brazed
ing shall not be installed within 6 with a material having a melting point
inches of the ground. exceeding 1,000 °F. Joints on seamless
copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy
TABLE H–24—WALL THICKNESS OF COPPER gas tubing shall be made by means of
TUBING 1 approved gas tubing fittings, or sol-
dered or brazed with a material having
Nominal wall thickness
Standard size
Nominal out-
(inches) a melting point exceeding 1,000 °F.
side diameter
(inches) (inches) (v) For operating pressures of 125
Type K Type L
p.s.i.g. or less, fittings shall be de-
⁄
14 0.375 0.035 0.030 signed for a pressure of at least 125
309
p.s.i.g. For operating pressures above (iii) Hose subject to container pres-
125 p.s.i.g., fittings shall be designed sure shall be designed for a bursting
for a minimum of 250 p.s.i.g. pressure of not less than 1,250 p.s.i.g.
(vi) The use of threaded cast iron (iv) Hose subject to container pres-
pipe fittings such as ells, tees, crosses, sure shall have its correctness as to de-
couplings, and unions is prohibited. sign construction and performance de-
Aluminum alloy fittings shall be used termined by being listed (see
with aluminum alloy pipe and tubing. § 1910.110(a)(15)).
Insulated fittings shall be used where (v) Hose connections subject to con-
aluminum alloy pipe or tubing container pressure shall be capable of
nects with a dissimilar metal. withstanding, without leakage, a test
(vii) Strainers, regulators, meters, pressure of not less than 500 p.s.i.g.
compressors, pumps, etc., are not to be (vi) Hose and hose connections on the
considered as pipe fittings. This does low-pressure side of the regulator or re-
not prohibit the use of malleable, nod- ducing valve shall be designed for a
ular, or higher strength gray iron for bursting pressure of not less than 125
such equipment. p.s.i.g. or five times the set pressure of
(viii) All materials such as valve the relief devices protecting that por-
seats, packing, gaskets, diaphragms, tion of the system, whichever is higher.
etc., shall be of such quality as to be (vii) Hose may be used on the low-
resistant to the action of liquefied pe- pressure side of regulators to connect
troleum gas under the service condi- to other than domestic and commercial
tions to which they are subjected. gas appliances under the following con-
(ix) All piping, tubing, or hose shall ditions:
be tested after assembly and proved (a) The appliances connected with
free from leaks at not less than normal hose shall be portable and need a flexi-
operating pressures. After installation, ble connection.
piping and tubing of all domestic and (b) For use inside buildings the hose
commercial systems shall be tested shall be of minimum practical length,
and proved free of leaks using a ma- but shall not exceed 6 feet except as
nometer or equivalent device that will provided in paragraph (c)(5)(i)(g) of this
indicate a drop in pressure. Test shall section and shall not extend from one
not be made with a flame. room to another, nor pass through any
(x) Provision shall be made to com- walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors.
pensate for expansion, contraction, jar- Such hose shall not be concealed from
ring, and vibration, and for settling. view or used in a concealed location.
This may be accomplished by flexible For use outside of buildings, the hose
connections. may exceed this length but shall be
(xi) Piping outside buildings may be kept as short as practical.
buried, above ground, or both, but shall (c) The hose shall be approved and
be well supported and protected shall not be used where it is likely to
against physical damage. Where soil be subjected to temperatures above 125
conditions warrant, all piping shall be °F. The hose shall be securely con-
protected against corrosion. Where nected to the appliance and the use of
condensation may occur, the piping rubber slip ends shall not be permitted.
shall be pitched back to the container, (d) The shutoff valve for an appliance
or suitable means shall be provided for connected by hose shall be in the metal
revaporization of the condensate. pipe or tubing and not at the appliance
(9) Hose specifications. (i) Hose shall end of the hose. When shutoff valves
be fabricated of materials that are re- are installed close to each other, pre-
sistant to the action of LP-Gas in the cautions shall be taken to prevent op-
liquid and vapor phases. If wire braid is eration of the wrong valve.
used for reinforcing the hose, it shall (e) Hose used for connecting to wall
be of corrosion-resistant material such outlets shall be protected from phys-
as stainless steel. ical damage.
(ii) Hose subject to container pres- (10) Safety devices. (i) Every container
sure shall be marked ‘‘LP-Gas’’ or except those constructed in accordance
‘‘LPG’’ at not greater than 10-foot in- with DOT specifications and every va-
tervals. porizer (except motor fuel vaporizers
310
and except vaporizers described in Surface area (sq. ft.) Flow rate
paragraph (b)(11)(ii)(c) of this section CFM air
and paragraph (d)(4)(v)(a) of this sec- 260 ....................................................................... 5,130
tion) whether heated by artificial 270 ....................................................................... 5,290
means or not, shall be provided with 280 ....................................................................... 5,450
290 ....................................................................... 5,610
one or more safety relief valves of 300 ....................................................................... 5,760
spring-loaded or equivalent type. These 310 ....................................................................... 5,920
valves shall be arranged to afford free 320 ....................................................................... 6,080
330 ....................................................................... 6,230
vent to the outer air with discharge 340 ....................................................................... 6,390
not less than 5 feet horizontally away 350 ....................................................................... 6,540
from any opening into the building 360 ....................................................................... 6,690
370 ....................................................................... 6,840
which is below such discharge. The rate 380 ....................................................................... 7,000
of discharge shall be in accordance 390 ....................................................................... 7,150
with the requirements of paragraph 400 ....................................................................... 7,300
450 ....................................................................... 8,040
(b)(10)(ii) or (b)(10)(iii) of this section in 500 ....................................................................... 8,760
the case of vaporizers. 550 ....................................................................... 9,470
(ii) Minimum required rate of dis- 600 ....................................................................... 10,170
charge in cubic feet per minute of air 650 ....................................................................... 10,860
700 ....................................................................... 11,550
at 120 percent of the maximum per- 750 ....................................................................... 12,220
mitted start to discharge pressure for 800 ....................................................................... 12,880
safety relief valves to be used on con- 850 ....................................................................... 13,540
900 ....................................................................... 14,190
tainers other than those constructed in 950 ....................................................................... 14,830
accordance with DOT specification 1,000 .................................................................... 15,470
shall be as follows: 1,050 .................................................................... 16,100
1,100 .................................................................... 16,720
Flow rate 1,150 .................................................................... 17,350
Surface area (sq. ft.)
CFM air 1,200 .................................................................... 17,960
1,250 .................................................................... 18,570
20 or less ............................................................. 626 1,300 .................................................................... 19,180
25 ......................................................................... 751 1,350 .................................................................... 19,780
30 ......................................................................... 872 1,400 .................................................................... 20,380
35 ......................................................................... 990 1,450 .................................................................... 20,980
40 ......................................................................... 1,100 1,500 .................................................................... 21,570
45 ......................................................................... 1,220 1,550 .................................................................... 22,160
50 ......................................................................... 1,330 1,600 .................................................................... 22,740
55 ......................................................................... 1,430
1,650 .................................................................... 23,320
60 ......................................................................... 1,540
1,700 .................................................................... 23,900
65 ......................................................................... 1,640
1,750 .................................................................... 24,470
70 ......................................................................... 1,750
1,800 .................................................................... 25,050
75 ......................................................................... 1,850
1,850 .................................................................... 25,620
80 ......................................................................... 1,950
1,900 .................................................................... 26,180
85 ......................................................................... 2,050
90 ......................................................................... 2,150 1,950 .................................................................... 26,750
95 ......................................................................... 2,240 2,000 .................................................................... 27,310
100 ....................................................................... 2,340
105 ....................................................................... 2,440
110 ....................................................................... 2,530
Surface area=total outside surface area of
115 ....................................................................... 2,630 container in square feet.
120 ....................................................................... 2,720 When the surface area is not stamped on
125 ....................................................................... 2,810 the nameplate or when the marking is not
130 ....................................................................... 2,900
legible, the area can be calculated by using
135 ....................................................................... 2,990
140 ....................................................................... 3,080 one of the following formulas:
145 ....................................................................... 3,170 (1) Cylindrical container with hemi-
150 ....................................................................... 3,260 spherical heads:
155 ....................................................................... 3,350 Area=Overall length×outside diameter×
160 ....................................................................... 3,440
165 ....................................................................... 3,530
3.1416.
170 ....................................................................... 3,620 (2) Cylindrical container with other than
175 ....................................................................... 3,700 hemispherical heads:
180 ....................................................................... 3,790
185 ....................................................................... 3,880 Area=(Overall length+0.3 outside diameter)
190 ....................................................................... 3,960 ×outside diameter×3.1416.
195 ....................................................................... 4,050 NOTE: This formula is not exact, but will
200 ....................................................................... 4,130 give results within the limits of practical ac-
210 ....................................................................... 4,300 curacy for the sole purpose of sizing relief
220 ....................................................................... 4,470 valves.
230 ....................................................................... 4,630
240 ....................................................................... 4,800
(3) Spherical container:
250 ....................................................................... 4,960 Area=Outside diameter squared×3.1416.
311
Flow Rate-CFM Air=Required flow capacity of this section) permitted start to dis-
in cubic feet per minute of air at stand- charge pressure setting of the device.
ard conditions, 60 F. and atmospheric
pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.). TABLE H–26
The rate of discharge may be interpolated
for intermediate values of surface area. For Minimum Maximum
Containers (percent) (percent)
containers with total outside surface area
greater than 2,000 square feet, the required ASME Code; Par. U–68, U–69—
flow rate can be calculated using the for- 1949 and earlier editions ........... 110 1 25
mula, Flow Rate-CFM Air=53.632 A0.82. ASME Code; Par. U–200, U–

201—1949 edition ...................... 88 1 100
A=total outside surface area of the con-
ASME Code—1950, 1952, 1956,
tainer in square feet. 1959, 1962, 1965 and 1968 (Di-
Valves not marked ‘‘Air’’ have flow rate vision I) editions ......................... 88 1 100
marking in cubic feet per minute of liquefied API—ASME Code—all editions .... 88 1 100
petroleum gas. These can be converted to DOT—As prescribed in 49 CFR

ratings in cubic feet per minute of air by Chapter I.
multiplying the liquefied petroleum gas rat- 1 Manufacturers of safety relief valves are allowed a plus
ings by factors listed below. Air flow ratings tolerance not exceeding 10 percent of the set pressure
can be converted to ratings in cubic feet per marked on the valve.
minute of liquefied petroleum gas by divid- (vi) In certain locations sufficiently
ing the air ratings by the factors listed sustained high temperatures prevail
below.
which require the use of a lower vapor
AIR CONVERSION FACTORS pressure product to be stored or the use
Container type ...... 100 125 150 175 200
of a higher designed pressure vessel in
Air conversion fac- order to prevent the safety valves
tor ...................... 1.162 1.142 1.113 1.078 1.010 opening as the result of these tempera-
tures. As an alternative the tanks may
(iii) Minimum Required Rate of Dis-
be protected by cooling devices such as
charge for Safety Relief Valves for Liq-
by spraying, by shading, or other effec-
uefied Petroleum Gas Vaporizers
tive means.
(Steam Heated, Water Heated, and Di-
(vii) Safety relief valves shall be ar-
rect Fired).
ranged so that the possibility of tam-
The minimum required rate of dis- pering will be minimized. If pressure
charge for safety relief valves shall be setting or adjustment is external, the
determined as follows: relief valves shall be provided with ap-
(a) Obtain the total surface area by proved means for sealing adjustment.
adding the surface area of vaporizer (viii) Shutoff valves shall not be in-
shell in square feet directly in contact stalled between the safety relief de-
with LP-Gas and the heat exchanged vices and the container, or the equip-
surface area in square feet directly in ment or piping to which the safety re-
contact with LP-Gas. lief device is connected except that a
(b) Obtain the minimum required shutoff valve may be used where the
rate of discharge in cubic feet of air per arrangement of this valve is such that
minute, at 60 °F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a. from full required capacity flow through the
paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section, for safety relief device is always afforded.
this total surface area. (ix) Safety relief valves shall have di-
(iv) Container and vaporizer safety rect communication with the vapor
relief valves shall be set to start-to-dis- space of the container at all times.
charge, with relation to the design (x) Each container safety relief valve
pressure of the container, in accord- used with systems covered by para-
ance with Table H–26. graphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this sec-
(v) Safety relief devices used with tion, except as provided in paragraph
systems employing containers other (e)(3)(iii) of this section shall be plainly
than those constructed according to and permanently marked with the fol-
DOT specifications shall be so con- lowing: ‘‘Container Type’’ of the pres-
structed as to discharge at not less sure vessel on which the valve is de-
than the rates shown in paragraph signed to be installed; the pressure in
(b)(10)(ii) of this section, before the p.s.i.g. at which the valve is set to dis-
pressure is in excess of 120 percent of charge; the actual rate of discharge of
the maximum (not including the 10 per- the valve in cubic feet per minute of
cent referred to in paragraph (b)(10)(iv) air at 60 °F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a.; and the
312
manufacturer’s name and catalog num- (2) With the allowable working pres-
ber, for example: T200–250–4050 AIR—insure and temperature for which the va-
dicating that the valve is suitable for porizer is designed.
use on a Type 200 container, that it is (3) With the sum of the outside sur-
set to start to discharge at 250 p.s.i.g.; face area and the inside heat exchange
and that its rate of discharge is 4,050 surface area expressed in square feet.
cubic feet per minute of air as deter- (4) With the name or symbol of the
mined in subdivision (ii) of this sub- manufacturer.
paragraph. (b) Vaporizers having an inside di-
(xi) Safety relief valve assemblies, in- ameter of 6 inches or less exempted by
the ASME Unfired Pressure Vessel
cluding their connections, shall be of
Code, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler
sufficient size so as to provide the rate
and Pressure Vessel Code—1968 shall
of flow required for the container on
have a design pressure not less than 250
which they are installed. p.s.i.g. and need not be permanently
(xii) A hydrostatic relief valve shall marked.
be installed between each pair of shut- (c) Heating or cooling coils shall not
off valves on liquefied petroleum gas be installed inside a storage container.
liquid piping so as to relieve into a safe (d) Vaporizers may be installed in
atmosphere. The start-to-discharge buildings, rooms, sheds, or lean-tos
pressure setting of such relief valves used exclusively for gas manufacturing
shall not be in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. The or distribution, or in other structures
minimum setting on relief valves in- of light, noncombustible construction
stalled in piping connected to other or equivalent, well ventilated near the
than DOT containers shall not be lower floor line and roof.
than 140 percent of the container relief When vaporizing and/or mixing equip-
valve setting and in piping connected ment is located in a structure or build-
to DOT containers not lower than 400 ing not used exclusively for gas manu-
p.s.i.g. The start-to-discharge pressure facturing or distribution, either at-
setting of such a relief valve, if in- tached to or within such a building,
stalled on the discharge side of a pump, such structure or room shall be sepa-
shall be greater than the maximum rated from the remainder of the build-
pressure permitted by the recirculation ing by a wall designed to withstand a
device in the system. static pressure of at least 100 pounds
(xiii) The discharge from any safety per square foot. This wall shall have no
relief device shall not terminate in or openings or pipe or conduit passing
beneath any building, except relief de- through it. Such structure or room
vices covered by paragraphs (b)(6)(i) (a) shall be provided with adequate ven-
through (e) of this section, or para- tilation and shall have a roof or at
graphs (c) (4)(i) or (5) of this section. least one exterior wall of lightweight
(xiv) Container safety relief devices construction.
and regulator relief vents shall be lo- (e) Vaporizers shall have, at or near
cated not less than five (5) feet in any the discharge, a safety relief valve pro-
direction from air openings into sealed viding an effective rate of discharge in
accordance with paragraph (b)(10)(iii)
combustion system appliances or me-
of this section, except as provided in
chanical ventilation air intakes.
paragraph (d)(4)(v)(a), of this section.
(11) Vaporizer and housing. (i) Indirect (f) The heating medium lines into
fired vaporizers utilizing steam, water, and leaving the vaporizer shall be pro-
or other heating medium shall be con- vided with suitable means for pre-
structed and installed as follows: venting the flow of gas into the heat
(a) Vaporizers shall be constructed in systems in the event of tube rupture in
accordance with the requirements of the vaporizer. Vaporizers shall be pro-
paragraph (b)(3) (i)–(iii) of this section vided with suitable automatic means
and shall be permanently marked as to prevent liquid passing through the
follows: vaporizers to the gas discharge piping.
(1) With the code marking signifying (g) The device that supplies the nec-
the specifications to which the vapor- essary heat for producing steam, hot
izer is constructed. water, or other heating medium may
313
be installed in a building, compart- in square feet; the outside surface of
ment, room, or lean-to which shall be the vaporizer in square feet; and the
ventilated near the floorline and roof maximum vaporizing capacity in gal-
to the outside. The device location lons per hour.
shall be separated from all compart- (b)(1) Vaporizers may be connected to
ments or rooms containing liquefied the liquid section or the gas section of
petroleum gas vaporizers, pumps, and the storage container, or both; but in
central gas mixing devices by a wall any case there shall be at the container
designed to withstand a static pressure a manually operated valve in each con-
of at least 100 pounds per square foot. nection to permit completely shutting
This wall shall have no openings or off when desired, of all flow of gas or
pipes or conduit passing through it. liquid from container to vaporizer.
This requirement does not apply to the (2) Vaporizers with capacity not ex-
domestic water heaters which may sup- ceeding 35 gallons per hour shall be lo-
ply heat for a vaporizer in a domestic cated at least 5 feet from container
system. shutoff valves. Vaporizers having ca-
(h) Gas-fired heating systems sup- pacity of more than 35 gallons but not
plying heat exclusively for vaporiza- exceeding 100 gallons per hour shall be
tion purposes shall be equipped with located at least 10 feet from the con-
automatic safety devices to shut off tainer shutoff valves. Vaporizers hav-
the flow of gas to main burners, if the ing a capacity greater than 100 gallons
pilot light should fail. per hour shall be located at least 15
(i) Vaporizers may be an integral part feet from container shutoff valves.
of a fuel storage container directly
(c) Vaporizers may be installed in
connected to the liquid section or gas
buildings, rooms, housings, sheds, or
section or both.
lean-tos used exclusively for vaporizing
(j) Vaporizers shall not be equipped
or mixing of liquefied petroleum gas.
with fusible plugs.
Vaporizing housing structures shall be
(k) Vaporizer houses shall not have
of noncombustible construction, well
unprotected drains to sewers or sump
pits. ventilated near the floorline and the
(ii) Atmospheric vaporizers employ- highest point of the roof. When vapor-
ing heat from the ground or sur- izer and/or mixing equipment is located
rounding air shall be installed as fol- in a structure or room attached to or
lows: within a building, such structure or
(a) Buried underground, or room shall be separated from the re-
(b) Located inside the building close mainder of the building by a wall de-
to a point at which pipe enters the signed to withstand a static pressure of
building provided the capacity of the at least 100 pounds per square foot.
unit does not exceed 1 quart. This wall shall have no openings or
(c) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart ca- pipes or conduit passing through it.
pacity heated by the ground or sur- Such structure or room shall be pro-
rounding air, need not be equipped with vided with adequate ventilation, and
safety relief valves provided that ade- shall have a roof or at least one exte-
quate tests demonstrate that the as- rior wall of lightweight construction.
sembly is safe without safety relief (d) Vaporizers shall have at or near
valves. the discharge, a safety relief valve pro-
(iii) Direct gas-fired vaporizers shall viding an effective rate of discharge in
be constructed, marked, and installed accordance with paragraph (b)(10)(iii)
as follows: of this section. The relief valve shall be
(a)(1) In accordance with the require- so located as not to be subjected to
ments of the American Society of Me- temperatures in excess of 140 °F.
chanical Engineers Boiler and Pressure (e) Vaporizers shall be provided with
Vessel Code—1968 that are applicable to suitable automatic means to prevent
the maximum working conditions for liquid passing from the vaporizer to the
which the vaporizer is designed. gas discharge piping of the vaporizer.
(2) With the name of the manufac- (f) Vaporizers shall be provided with
turer; rated BTU input to the burner; means for manually turning off the gas
the area of the heat exchange surface to the main burner and pilot.
314
(g) Vaporizers shall be equipped with (e) Tank heaters shall be equipped
automatic safety devices to shut off with an automatic safety device to
the flow of gas to main burners if the shut off the flow of gas to main burn-
pilot light should fail. When the flow ers, if the pilot light should fail. When
through the pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u. flow through pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u.
per hour, the pilot also shall be per hour, the pilot also shall be
equipped with an automatic safety de- equipped with an automatic safety de-
vice to shut off the flow of gas to the vice to shut off the flow of gas to the
pilot should the pilot flame be extin- pilot should the pilot flame be extin-
guished. guished.
(h) Pressure regulating and pressure (f) Pressure regulating and pressure
reducing equipment if located within 10 reducing equipment if located within 10
feet of a direct fire vaporizer shall be feet of a direct fired tank heater shall
separated from the open flame by a be separated from the open flame by a
substantially airtight noncombustible substantially airtight noncombustible
partition or partitions. partition.
(i) Except as provided in (c) of this (g) The following minimum distances
subdivision, the following minimum shall be maintained between a storage
distances shall be maintained between tank heated by a direct fired tank
direct fired vaporizers and the nearest heater and the nearest important
important building or group of build- building or group of buildings:
ings: Ten feet for storage containers of less than
Ten feet for vaporizers having a capacity of 500 gallons water capacity.
15 gallons per hour or less vaporizing ca- Twenty-five feet for storage containers of 500
pacity. to 1,200 gallons water capacity.
Twenty-five feet for vaporizers having a va- Fifty feet for storage containers of over 1,200
porizing capacity of 16 to 100 gallons per gallons water capacity.
hour. (h) No direct fired tank heater shall
Fifty feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing
capacity exceeding 100 gallons per hour.
raise the product pressure within the
storage container over 75 percent of the
(j) Direct fired vaporizers shall not pressure set out in the second column
raise the product pressure above the of Table H–31.
design pressure of the vaporizer equip- (v) The vaporizer section of vapor-
ment nor shall they raise the product izer-burners used for dehydrators or
pressure within the storage container dryers shall be located outside of build-
above the pressure shown in the second ings; they shall be constructed and in-
column of Table H–31. stalled as follows:
(k) Vaporizers shall not be provided (a) Vaporizer-burners shall have a
with fusible plugs. minimum design pressure of 250 p.s.i.g.
(l) Vaporizers shall not have unpro- with a factor of safety of five.
tected drains to sewers or sump pits. (b) Manually operated positive shut-
(iv) Direct gas-fired tank heaters off valves shall be located at the con-
shall be constructed and installed as tainers to shut off all flow to the va-
follows: porizer-burners.
(a) Direct gas-fired tank heaters, and (c) Minimum distances between stor-
tanks to which they are applied, shall age containers and vaporizer-burners
only be installed above ground. shall be as follows:
(b) Tank heaters shall be perma-
nently marked with the name of the Minimum
Water capacity per container (gallons) distances
manufacturer, the rated B.t.u. input to (feet)
the burner, and the maximum vapor-
Less than 501 ...................................................... 10
izing capacity in gallons per hour. 501 to 2,000 ........................................................ 25
(c) Tank heaters may be an integral Over 2,000 ........................................................... 50
part of a fuel storage container di-
rectly connected to the container liq- (d) The vaporizer section of vapor-
uid section, or vapor section, or both. izer-burners shall be protected by a hy-
(d) Tank heaters shall be provided drostatic relief valve. The relief valve
with a means for manually turning off shall be located so as not to be sub-
the gas to the main burner and pilot. jected to temperatures in excess of 140
315
°F. The start-to-discharge pressure set- TABLE H–27—MAXIMUM PERMITTED FILLING
ting shall be such as to protect the DENSITY—Continued
components involved, but not less than
Above ground containers
250 p.s.i.g. The discharge shall be di-
rected upward and away from compo- Specific gravity
0 to 1,200 Over 1,200 Under
U.S. gals. U.S. gals. ground con-
nent parts of the equipment and away at 60 °F. (15.6 (1,000 imp. (1,000 imp. tainers, all
°C.)
from operating personnel. gal., 4,550 gal., 4,550 capacities
liters) total liters) total
(e) Vaporizer-burners shall be pro- water cap. water cap.
vided with means for manually turning
off the gas to the main burner and 0 .496–0 .503 41 44 45
.504– .510 42 45 46
pilot. .511– .519 43 46 47
(f) Vaporizer-burners shall be .520– .527 44 47 48
equipped with automatic safety devices .528– .536 45 48 49
to shut off the flow of gas to the main .537– .544 46 49 50
.545– .552 47 50 51
burner and pilot in the event the pilot .553– .560 48 51 52
is extinguished. .561– .568 49 52 53
(g) Pressure regulating and control .569– .576 50 53 54
equipment shall be located or pro- .577– .584 51 54 55
.585– .592 52 55 56
tected so that the temperatures sur- .593– .600 53 56 57
rounding this equipment shall not ex-
ceed 140 °F. except that equipment (ii) Except as provided in paragraph
components may be used at higher (b)(12)(iii) of this section, any con-
temperatures if designed to withstand tainer including mobile cargo tanks
such temperatures. and portable tank containers regard-
(h) Pressure regulating and control less of size or construction, shipped
equipment when located downstream of under DOT jurisdiction or constructed
the vaporizer shall be designed to within accordance with 49 CFR chapter I
stand the maximum discharge tem- Specifications shall be charged accord-
perature of the vapor. ing to 49 CFR chapter I requirements.
(i) The vaporizer section of vaporizer- (iii) Portable containers not subject
burners shall not be provided with fusi- to DOT jurisdiction (such as, but not
ble plugs. limited to, motor fuel containers on in-
(j) Vaporizer coils or jackets shall be dustrial and lift trucks, and farm trac-
made of ferrous metal or high tempera- tors covered in paragraph (e) of this
ture alloys. section, or containers recharged at the
(k) Equipment utilizing vaporizer- installation) may be filled either by
burners shall be equipped with auto- weight, or by volume using a fixed
matic shutoff devices upstream and length dip tube gaging device.
downstream of the vaporizer section (13) LP-Gas in buildings. (i) Vapor
connected so as to operate in the event shall be piped into buildings at pres-
of excessive temperature, flame failure, sures in excess of 20 p.s.i.g. only if the
and, if applicable, insufficient airflow. buildings or separate areas thereof, (a)
(12) Filling densities. (i) The ‘‘filling are constructed in accordance with this
density’’ is defined as the percent ratio section; (b) are used excusively to
of the weight of the gas in a container house equipment for vaporization, pres-
to the weight of water the container sure reduction, gas mixing, gas manu-
will hold at 60 °F. All containers shall facturing, or distribution, or to house
be filled according to the filling den- internal combustion engines, industrial
sities shown in Table H–27. processes, research and experimental
TABLE H–27—MAXIMUM PERMITTED FILLING laboratories, or equipment and proc-
DENSITY esses using such gas and having similar
hazard; (c) buildings, structures, or
Above ground containers equipment under construction or un-
0 to 1,200 Over 1,200 Under dergoing major renovation.
Specific gravity
at 60 °F. (15.6
U.S. gals. U.S. gals. ground con- (ii) Liquid may be permitted in build-
°C.) (1,000 imp. (1,000 imp. tainers, all
gal., 4,550 gal., 4,550 capacities ings as follows:
liters) total liters) total (a) Buildings, or separate areas of
water cap. water cap.
buildings, used exclusively to house
Percent Percent Percent equipment for vaporization, pressure
316
reduction, gas mixing, gas manufac- (6) Where flexible connectors are nec-
turing, or distribution, or to house in- essary for appliance installation, such
ternal combustion engines, industrial connectors shall be as short as prac-
processes, research and experimental ticable and shall comply with para-
laboratories, or equipment and proc- graph (b)(8)(ii) or (9) of this section.
esses using such gas and having similar (7) Release of fuel when any section
hazard; and when such buildings, or of piping or appliances is disconnected
separate areas thereof are constructed shall be minimized by either of the fol-
in accordance with this section. lowing methods:
(b) Buildings, structures, or equip- (i) Using an approved automatic
ment under construction or undergoing quick-closing coupling (a type closing
major renovation provided the tem- in both directions when coupled in the
porary piping meets the following con- fuel line), or
ditions: (ii) Closing the valve nearest to the
(1) Liquid piping inside the building appliance and allowing the appliance
shall conform to the requirements of to operate until the fuel in the line is
paragraph (b)(8) of this section, and consumed.
shall not exceed three-fourths iron pipe (iii) Portable containers shall not be
size. Copper tubing with an outside di- taken into buildings except as provided
ameter of three-fourths inch or less in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section.
may be used provided it conforms to (14) Transfer of liquids. The employer
Type K of Specifications for Seamless shall assure that (i) at least one at-
Water Tube, ANSI H23.1–1970 (ASTM tendant shall remain close to the
B88–69) (see Table H–24). All such pip- transfer connection from the time the
ing shall be protected against construc- connections are first made until they
tion hazards. Liquid piping inside are finally disconnected, during the
buildings shall be kept to a minimum. transfer of the product.
Such piping shall be securely fastened (ii) Containers shall be filled or used
to walls or other surfaces so as to pro- only upon authorization of the owner.
vide adequate protection from break- (iii) Containers manufactured in ac-
age and so located as to subject the liq- cordance with specifications of 49 CFR
uid line to lowest ambient tempera- part 178 and authorized by 49 CFR
tures. chapter 1 as a ‘‘single trip’’ or ‘‘non-
(2) A shutoff valve shall be installed refillable container’’ shall not be re-
in each intermediate branch line where filled or reused in LP-Gas service.
it takes off the main line and shall be (iv) Gas or liquid shall not be vented
readily accessible. A shutoff valve shall to the atmosphere to assist in transfer-
also be placed at the appliance end of ring contents of one container to an-
the intermediate branch line. Such other, except as provided in paragraph
shutoff valve shall be upstream of any (e)(5)(iv) of this section and except that
flexible connector used with the appli- this shall not preclude the use of listed
ance. pump utilizing LP-Gas in the vapor
(3) Suitable excess flow valves shall phase as a source of energy and venting
be installed in the container outlet line such gas to the atmosphere at a rate
supplying liquid LP-Gas to the build- not to exceed that from a No. 31 drill
ing. A suitable excess flow valve shall size opening and provided that such
be installed immediately downstream venting and liquid transfer shall be lo-
of each shutoff valve. Suitable excess cated not less than 50 feet from the
flow valves shall be installed where nearest important building.
piping size is reduced and shall be sized (v) Filling of fuel containers for in-
for the reduced size piping. dustrial trucks or motor vehicles from
(4) Hydrostatic relief valves shall be industrial bulk storage containers
installed in accordance with paragraph shall be performed not less than 10 feet
(b)(10)(xii) of this section. from the nearest important masonry-
(5) The use of hose to carry liquid be- walled building or not less than 25 feet
tween the container and the building from the nearest important building or
or at any point in the liquid line, ex- other construction and, in any event,
cept at the appliance connector, shall not less than 25 feet from any building
be prohibited. opening.
317
(vi) Filling of portable containers, (xiii) When necessary, unloading pip-
containers mounted on skids, fuel con- ing or hoses shall be provided with
tainers on farm tractors, or similar ap- suitable bleeder valves for relieving
plications, from storage containers pressure before disconnection.
used in domestic or commercial serv- (xiv) Agricultural air moving equip-
ice, shall be performed not less than 50 ment, including crop dryers, shall be
feet from the nearest important build- shut down when supply containers are
ing. being filled unless the air intakes and
(vii) The filling connection and the sources of ignition on the equipment
vent from the liquid level gages in con- are located 50 feet or more from the
tainers, filled at point of installation, container.
shall not be less than 10 feet in any di- (xv) Agricultural equipment employ-
rection from air openings into sealed ing open flames or equipment with in-
combustion system appliances or me- tegral containers, such as flame cul-
chanical ventilation air intakes. tivators, weed burners, and, in addi-
(viii) Fuel supply containers shall be tion, tractors, shall be shut down dur-
gaged and charged only in the open air ing refueling.
or in buildings especially provided for (15) Tank car or transport truck loading
that purpose. or unloading points and operations. (i)
(ix) The maximum vapor pressure of The track of tank car siding shall be
the product at 100 °F. which may be relatively level.
transferred into a container shall be in (ii) A ‘‘Tank Car Connected’’ sign, as
accordance with paragraphs (d)(2) and covered by DOT rules, shall be in-
(e)(3) of this section. (For DOT con- stalled at the active end or ends of the
tainers use DOT requirements.) siding while the tank car is connected.
(x) Marketers and users shall exercise (iii) While cars are on sidetrack for
precaution to assure that only those loading or unloading, the wheels at
gases for which the system is designed, both ends shall be blocked on the rails.
examined, and listed, are employed in
(iv) The employer shall insure that
its operation, particularly with regard
an employee is in attendance at all
to pressures.
times while the tank car, cars, or
(xi) Pumps or compressors shall be trucks are being loaded or unloaded.
designed for use with LP-Gas. When
(v) A backflow check valve, excess-
compressors are used they shall nor-
flow valve, or a shutoff valve with
mally take suction from the vapor
means of remote closing, to protect
space of the container being filled and
against uncontrolled discharge of LP-
discharge to the vapor space of the con-
Gas from storage tank piping shall be
tainer being emptied.
installed close to the point where the
(xii) Pumping systems, when
liquid piping and hose or swing joint
equipped with a positive displacement
pipe is connected.
pump, shall include a recirculating de-
vice which shall limit the differential (vi) Where practical, the distance of
pressure on the pump under normal op- the unloading or loading point shall
erating conditions to the maximum conform to the distances in subpara-
differential pressure rating of the graph (6)(ii) of this paragraph.
pump. The discharge of the pumping (16) Instructions. Personnel per-
system shall be protected so that pres- forming installation, removal, oper-
sure does not exceed 350 p.s.i.g. If a re- ation, and maintenance work shall be
circulation system discharges into the properly trained in such function.
supply tank and contains a manual (17) Electrical equipment and other
shutoff valve, an adequate secondary sources of ignition. (i) Electrical equip-
safety recirculation system shall be in- ment and wiring shall be of a type
corporated which shall have no means specified by and shall be installed in
of rendering it inoperative. Manual accordance with subpart S of this part,
shutoff valves in recirculation systems for ordinary locations except that fixed
shall be kept open except during an electrical equipment in classified areas
emergency or when repairs are being shall comply with subparagraph (18) of
made to the system. this paragraph.
318
(ii) Open flames or other sources of electrically conductive or electrically
ignition shall not be permitted in va- bonded for protection against static
porizer rooms (except those housing di- electricity.
rect-fired vaporizers), pumphouses, (v) Open flames (except as provided
container charging rooms or other for in paragraph (b)(11) of this section),
similar locations. Direct-fired vapor- cutting or welding, portable electric
izers shall not be permitted in pump- tools, and extension lights capable of
houses or container charging rooms. igniting LP-Gas, shall not be permitted
(iii) Liquefied petroleum gas storage
within classified areas specified in
containers do not require lightning
Table H–28 unless the LP-Gas facilities
protection.
(iv) Since liquefied petroleum gas is have been freed of all liquid and vapor,
contained in a closed system of piping or special precautions observed under
and equipment, the system need not be carefully controlled conditions.
TABLE H–28
Equipment shall be
Part Location Extent of classified area 1 suitable for Class 1,
Group D 2
A ..... Storage containers other than Within 15 feet in all directions from connections, except con- Division 2.
DOT cylinders. nections otherwise covered in Table H–28.
B ..... Tank vehicle and tank car Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
loading and unloading 3. or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point Division 2.
where connections are regularly made or disconnected and
within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator
of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H–1).
C ..... Gage vent openings other than Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge ............... Division 1.
those on DOT cylinders. Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of
discharge.
Division 2.
D ..... Relief valve discharge other Within direct path of discharge .................................................. Division 1.
than those on DOT cylinders.
Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge ............... Division 1.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of Division 2.
discharge except within the direct path of discharge.
E ..... Pumps, compressors, gas-air .
mixers and vaporizers other
than direct fired.
Indoors without ventilation ....... Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 1.
tight partition.
Within 15 feet of the exterior side of any exterior wall or roof Division 2.
that is not vaportight or within 15 feet of any exterior open-
ing.
Indoors with adequate ventila- Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 2.
4
tion . tight partition.
Outdoors in open air at or Within 15 feet in all directions from this equipment and within Division 2.
abovegrade. the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the
sphere and grade. See Figure H–1.
F ..... Service Station Dispensing Entire space within dispenser enclosure, and 18 inches hori- Division 1.
Units. zontally from enclosure exterior up to an elevation 4 ft.
above dispenser base. Entire pit or open space beneath
dispenser.
Up to 18 inches abovegrade within 20 ft. horizontally from any Division 2.
edge of enclosure.
NOTE: For pits within this area, see part F of this table..
G ..... Pits or trenches containing or .
located beneath LP-Gas
valves, pumps, compressors,
regulators, and similar equip-
ment.
Without mechanical ventilation Entire pit or trench ..................................................................... Division 1.
Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 1.
tight partition.
Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located Division 2.
outdoors.
With adequate mechanical Entire pit or trench ..................................................................... Division 2.
ventilation.
Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 2.
tight partition.
319
TABLE H–28—Continued
Equipment shall be
Part Location Extent of classified area 1 suitable for Class 1,
Group D 2
Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located Division 2.
outdoors.
H ..... Special buildings or rooms for Entire room ................................................................................. Division 2.
storage of portable con-
tainers.
Pipelines and connections con- Within 5 ft. in all directions from point of discharge .................. Division 1.
taining operational bleeds, Beyond 5 ft. from point of discharge, same as part E of this
drips, vents or drains. table.
J ...... Container filling:.
Indoors without ventilation ....... Entire room ................................................................................. Division 1.
Indoors with adequate ventila- Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
tion 4. or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet and entire room .................................................. Division 2.
Outdoors in open air ................ Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point Division 2.
where connections are regularly made or disconnected and
within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator
of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H–1).
1 The classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or solid vaportight partition.
2 See subpart S of this part.
3 When classifying extent of hazardous area, consideration shall be given to possible variations in the spotting of tank cars and
tank vehicles at the unloading points and the effect these variations of actual spotting point may have on the point of connection.
4 Ventilation, either natural or mechanical, is considered adequate when the concentration of the gas in a gas-air mixture does
not exceed 25 percent of the lower flammable limit under normal operating conditions.
vided in paragraph (b)(19)(v) of this sec-

tion. Each container manufactured
after December 31, 1969, shall have per-
manently attached to the container ad-
jacent to the fixed level gage a mark-
ing showing the percentage full that
will be shown by that gage. When a
variable liquid-level gage is also pro-
vided, the fixed liquid-level gage will
also serve as a means for checking the
variable gage. These gages shall be
used in charging containers as required
in paragraph (b)(12) of this section.
(ii) All variable gaging devices shall
FIGURE H–1 be arranged so that the maximum liq-
(18) Fixed electrical equipment in classi- uid level for butane, for a 50–50 mixture
fied areas. Fixed electrical equipment of butane and propane, and for propane,
and wiring installed within classified to which the container may be charged
areas specified in Table H–28 shall com- is readily determinable. The markings
ply with Table H–28 and shall be in- indicating the various liquid levels
stalled in accordance with subpart S of from empty to full shall be on the sys-
this part. This provision does not apply tem nameplate or gaging device or part
to fixed electrical equipment at resi- may be on the system nameplate and
dential or commercial installations of part on the gaging device. Dials of
LP-Gas systems or to systems covered magnetic or rotary gages shall show
by paragraph (e) or (g) of this section. whether they are for cylindrical or
(19) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each spherical containers and whether for
container manufactured after Decem- aboveground or underground service.
ber 31, 1965, and filled on a volumetric The dials of gages intended for use only
basis shall be equipped with a fixed liq- on aboveground containers of over 1,200
uid-level gage to indicate the max- gallons water capacity shall be so
imum permitted filling level as pro- marked.
320
EC27OC91.025
(iii) Gaging devices that require TABLE H–29—VOLUME CORRECTION FACTORS
bleeding of the product to the atmos-
Specific gravity Aboveground Underground
phere, such as the rotary tube, fixed
tube, and slip tube, shall be designed so 0.500 1.033 1.017
that the bleed valve maximum opening .510 1.031 1.016
.520 1.029 1.015
is not larger than a No. 54 drill size, un- .530 1.028 1.014
less provided with excess flow valve. .540 1.026 1.013
(iv) Gaging devices shall have a de- .550 1.025 1.013
.560 1.024 1.012
sign working pressure of at least 250 .570 1.023 1.011
p.s.i.g. .580 1.021 1.011
(v) Length of tube or position of fixed .590 1.020 1.010
liquid-level gage shall be designed to
indicate the maximum level to which (c) The maximum volume of LP-Gas
the container may be filled for the which can be placed in a container
product contained. This level shall be when determining the length of the dip
based on the volume of the product at tube expressed as a percentage of total
40 °F. at its maximum permitted filling water content of the container is cal-
density for aboveground containers and culated by the following formula.
at 50 °F. for underground containers. (d) The maximum weight of LP-Gas
The employer shall calculate the fill- which may be placed in a container for
ing point for which the fixed liquid determining the length of a fixed dip tube
level gage shall be designed according is determined by multiplying the max-
to the method in this subdivision. imum volume of liquefied petroleum
(a) It is impossible to set out in a gas obtained by the formula in para-
table the length of a fixed dip tube for graph (b)(19)(b) of this section by the
various capacity tanks because of the pounds of liquefied petroleum gas in a
varying tank diameters and lengths gallon at 40 °F. for abovegound and at
and because the tank may be installed 50 °F. for underground containers. For
either in a vertical or horizontal posi- example, typical pounds per gallon are
tion. Knowing the maximum permitted specified below:
filling volume in gallons, however, the Example: Assume a 100-gallon total water
length of the fixed tube can be deter- capacity tank for aboveground storage of
mined by the use of a strapping table propane having a specific gravity of 0.510 of
obtained from the container manufac- 60 °F.
turer. The length of the fixed tube [(100 (gals.)×42 (filling density from subpara-
should be such that when its lower end graph (12) of this paragraph))÷(0.510×1.031
(correction factor from Table H–
touches the surface of the liquid in the 29)×100)]=(4200÷52.6)
container, the contents of the con-
(4200÷52.6)=79.8 gallons propane, the max-
tainer will be the maximum permitted imum amount permitted to be placed in
volume as determined by the following a 100-gallon total water capacity above-
formula: ground container equipped with a fixed
dip tube.
[(Water capacity (gals.) of
container*×filling [(Maximum volume of LP-Gas (from formula
in subdivision (b) of this subdivi-
density**)÷(Specific gravity of LP- sion)×100)÷Total water content of con-
Gas*×volume correction factor × tainer in gallons]=Maximum percent of
100)]=Maximum volume of LP-Gas LP-Gas
*Measured at 60 °F. Above- Under-
**From subparagraph (12) of this paragraph ground, ground,
‘‘Filling Densities.’’ pounds per pounds per
For aboveground containers the liquid gallon gallon
temperature is assumed to be 40 °F. and for Propane ......................................... 4.37 4.31
underground containers the liquid tempera- N Butane ....................................... 4.97 4.92
ture is assumed to be 50 °F. To correct the
liquid volumes at these temperatures to 60 (vi) Fixed liquid-level gages used on
°F. the following factors shall be used. containers other than DOT containers
(b) Formula for determining max- shall be stamped on the exterior of the
imum volume of liquefied petroleum gage with the letters ‘‘DT’’ followed by
gas for which a fixed length of dip tube the vertical distance (expressed in
shall be set: inches and carried out to one decimal
321
place) from the top of container to the (iii) Unattended heaters used inside
end of the dip tube or to the centerline buildings for the purpose of animal or
of the gage when it is located at the poultry production or care shall be
maximum permitted filling level. For equipped with an approved automatic
portable containers that may be filled device designed to shut off the flow of
in the horizontal and/or vertical posi- gas to the main burners, and pilot if
tion the letters ‘‘DT’’ shall be followed used, in the event of flame extinguish-
by ‘‘V’’ with the vertical distance from ment.
the top of the container to the end of (iv) All commercial, industrial, and
the dip tube for vertical filling and agricultural appliances or equipment
with ‘‘H’’ followed by the proper dis- shall be installed in accordance with
tance for horizontal filling. For DOT the requirements of this section and in
containers the stamping shall be placed accordance with the following NFPA
both on the exterior of the gage and on consensus standards, which are incor-
the container. On above-ground or porated by reference as specified in
cargo containers where the gages are § 1910.6:
positioned at specific levels, the mark- (a) Domestic and commercial appli-
ing may be specified in percent of total ances—NFPA 54–1969, Standard for the
tank contents and the marking shall be Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas
stamped on the container. Piping.
(vii) Gage glasses of the columnar (b) Industrial appliances—NFPA 54A–
type shall be restricted to charging 1969, Standard for the Installation of
plants where the fuel is withdrawn in Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on In-
the liquid phase only. They shall be dustrial Premises and Certain Other
equipped with valves having metallic Premises.
handwheels, with excess flow valves, (c) Standard for the Installation and
and with extra-heavy glass adequately Use of Stationary Combustion Engines
protected with a metal housing applied and Gas Turbines—NFPA 37–1970.
by the gage manufacturer. They shall (d) Standard for the Installation of
be shielded against the direct rays of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke
the sun. Gage glasses of the columnar and Grease-Laden Vapors from Com-
type are prohibited on tank trucks, and mercial Cooking Equipment, NFPA 96–
on motor fuel tanks, and on containers 1970.
used in domestic, commercial, and in- (c) Cylinder systems—(1) Application.
dustrial installations. This paragraph applies specifically to
(viii) Gaging devices of the float, or systems utilizing containers con-
equivalent type which do not require structed in accordance with DOT Spec-
flow for their operation and having ifications. All requirements of para-
connections extending to a point out- graph (b) of this section apply to this
side the container do not have to be paragraph unless otherwise noted in
equipped with excess flow valves pro- paragraph (b) of this section.
vided the piping and fittings are ade- (2) Marking of containers. Containers
quately designed to withstand the con- shall be marked in accordance with
tainer pressure and are properly pro- DOT regulations. Additional markings
tected against physical damage and not in conflict with DOT regulations
breakage. may be used.
(20) Requirements for appliances. (i) (3) Description of a system. A system
Except as provided in paragraph shall include the container base or
(b)(20)(ii) of this section, new commer- bracket, containers, container valves,
cial and industrial gas consuming ap- connectors, manifold valve assembly,
pliances shall be approved. regulators, and relief valves.
(ii) Any appliance that was originally (4) Containers and regulating equip-
manufactured for operation with a gas- ment installed outside of buildings or
eous fuel other than LP-Gas and is in structures. (i) Containers shall not be
good condition may be used with LP- buried below ground. However, this
Gas only after it is properly converted, shall not prohibit the installation in a
adapted, and tested for performance compartment or recess below grade
with LP-Gas before the appliance is level such as a niche in a slope or ter-
placed in use. race wall which is used for no other
322
purpose, providing that the container be suitable for use with LP-Gas. Mani-
and regulating equipment are not in folds and fittings connecting con-
contact with the ground and the com- tainers to pressure regulator inlets
partment or recess is drained and ven- shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g.
tilated horizontally to the outside air service pressure.
from its lowest level, with the outlet at (d) Valves on containers having a
least 3 feet away from any building water capacity greater than 50 pounds
opening which is below the level of (nominal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity)
such outlet. shall be protected while in use.
Except as provided in paragraph (e) Containers shall be marked in ac-
(b)(10)(xiii) of this section, the dis- cordance with paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of
charge from safety relief devices shall this section and paragraph (c)(2) of this
be located not less than 3 feet hori- section.
zontally away from any building open- (f) Pipe or tubing shall conform to
ing which is below the level of such dis- paragraph (b)(8) of this section except
charge and shall not terminate beneath that aluminum pipe or tubing shall not
any building unless such space is well
be used.
ventilated to the outside and is not en-
(g)(1) Hose shall be designed for a
closed on more than two sides.
(ii) Containers shall be set upon firm working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g.
foundation or otherwise firmly secured; Hose and hose connections shall have
the possible effect on the outlet piping their correctness as to design, con-
of settling shall be guarded against by struction and performance determined
a flexible connection or special fitting. by listing by a nationally recognized
(5) Containers and equipment used in- testing laboratory. The hose length
side of buildings or structures. (i) When may exceed the length specified in
operational requirements make port- paragraph (b)(9)(vii)(b) of this section,
able use of containers necessary and but shall be as short as practicable.
their location outside of buildings or Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nation-
structure is impracticable, containers ally recognized testing laboratory.
and equipment are permitted to be (2) Hose shall be long enough to per-
used inside of buildings or structures in mit compliance with spacing provi-
accordance with (a) through (l) of this sions of this subparagraph without
subdivision, and, in addition, such kinking or straining or causing hose to
other provisions of this subparagraph be so close to a burner as to be dam-
as are applicable to the particular use aged by heat.
or occupancy. (h) Portable heaters, including sala-
(a) Containers in use shall mean con- manders, shall be equipped with an ap-
nected for use. proved automatic device to shut off the
(b) Systems utilizing containers hav- flow of gas to the main burner, and
ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2 pilot if used, in the event of flame ex-
pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca- tinguishment. Such heaters having in-
pacity) shall be equipped with excess puts above 50,000 B.t.u. manufactured
flow valves. Such excess flow valves on or after May 17, 1967, and such heat-
shall be either integral with the con- ers having inputs above 100,000 B.t.u.
tainer valves or in the connections to manufactured before May 17, 1967, shall
the container valve outlets. In either be equipped with either.
case, an excess flow valve shall be in-
(1) A pilot which must be lighted and
stalled in such a manner that any
proved before the main burner can be
undue strain beyond the excess flow
turned on; or
valve will not cause breakage between
the container and the excess flow (2) An electric ignition system.
valve. The installation of excess flow The provisions of this paragraph (h) do
valves shall take into account the type not apply to tar kettle burners, torch-
of valve protection provided. es, melting pots, nor do they apply to
(c) Regulators, if used, shall be either portable heaters under 7,500 B.t.u.h.
directly connected to the container input when used with containers hav-
valves or to manifolds connected to the ing a maximum water capacity of 21⁄2
container values. The regulator shall pounds. Container valves, connectors,
323
regulators, manifolds, piping, and tub- or to a supporting standard, provided
ing shall not be used as structural sup- they are designed and installed so as to
ports for heaters. prevent direct or radiant heat applica-
(i) Containers, regulating equipment, tion from the heater onto the con-
manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose shall tainer. Blower and radiant type heaters
be located so as to minimize exposure shall not be directed toward any LP-
to abnormally high temperatures (such Gas container within 20 feet.
as may result from exposure to convec- (c) If two or more heater-container
tion or radiation from heating equip- units, of either the integral or non-
ment or installation in confined integral type, are located in an
spaces), physical damage, or tampering unpartitioned area on the same floor,
by unauthorized persons. the container or containers of each
(j) Heat producing equipment shall be unit shall be separated from the con-
located and used so as to minimize the tainer or containers of any other unit
possibility of ignition of combustibles. by at least 20 feet.
(k) Containers having a water capac- (d) When heaters are connected to
ity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 containers for use in an unpartitioned
pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for area on the same floor, the total water
use, shall stand on a firm and substan- capacity of containers manifolded to-
tially level surface and, when nec- gether for connection to a heater or
essary, shall be secured in an upright heaters shall not be greater than 735
position. pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca-
(l) Containers, including the valve pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa-
protective devices, shall be installed so rated by at least 20 feet.
as to minimize the probability of im-
(e) On floors on which heaters are not
pingement of discharge of safety relief
connected for use, containers are per-
devices upon containers.
mitted to be manifolded together for
(ii) Containers having a maximum
connection to a heater or heaters on
water capacity of 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1
another floor, Provided:
pound LP-Gas capacity) are permitted
to be used inside of buildings as part of (1) The total water capacity of con-
approved self-contained hand torch as- tainers connected to any one manifold
semblies or similar appliances. is not greater than 2,450 pounds (nomi-
(iii) Containers having a maximum nal 1,000 pounds LP-Gas capacity) and;
water capacity of 12 pounds (nominal 5 (2) Where more than one manifold
pounds LP-Gas capacity) are permitted having a total water capacity greater
to be used temporarily inside of build- than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds
ings for public exhibition or dem- LP-Gas capacity) are located in the
onstration purposes, including use for same unpartitioned area, they shall be
classroom demonstrations. separated by at least 50 feet.
(iv) [Reserved] (f) Storage of containers awaiting use
(v) Containers are permitted to be shall be in accordance with paragraph
used in buildings or structures under (f) of this section.
construction or undergoing major ren- (vi) Containers are permitted to be
ovation when such buildings or struc- used in industrial occupancies for proc-
tures are not occupied by the public, as essing, research, or experimental pur-
follows: poses as follows:
(a) The maximum water capacity of (a) The maximum water capacity of
individual containers shall be 245 individual containers shall be 245
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca-
pacity). pacity).
(b) For temporary heating such as (b) Containers connected to a mani-
curing concrete, drying plaster and fold shall have a total water capacity
similar applications, heaters (other not greater than 735 pounds (nominal
than integral heater-container units) 300 pounds LP-Gas capacity) and not
shall be located at least 6 feet from any more than one such manifold may be
LP-Gas container. This shall not pro- located in the same room unless sepa-
hibit the use of heaters specifically derated at least 20 feet from a similar
signed for attachment to the container unit.
324
(c) The amount of LP-Gas in con- transit, in storage, and while being
tainers for research and experimental moved into final utilization, as follows:
use shall be limited to the smallest (a) By setting into the recess of the
practical quantity. container to prevent the possibility of
(vii)(a) Containers are permitted to their being struck if the container is
be used in industrial occupancies with dropped upon a flat surface, or
essentially noncombustible contents (b) By ventilated cap or collar, fas-
where portable equipment for space tened to the container capable of with-
heating is essential and where a perma- standing a blow from any direction
nent heating installation is not prac- equivalent to that of a 30-pound weight
tical, as follows: dropped 4 feet. Construction must be
(b) Containers and heaters shall com- such that a blow will not be trans-
ply with and be used in accordance mitted to the valve or other connec-
with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section. tion.
(viii) Containers are permitted to be (iv) When containers are not con-
used in buildings for temporary emer- nected to the system, the outlet valves
gency heating purposes, if necessary to shall be kept tightly closed or plugged,
prevent damage to the buildings or even though containers are considered
contents, when the permanent heating empty.
system is temporarily out of service, as (v) Containers having a water capac-
follows:
ity in excess of 50 pounds (approxi-
(a) Containers and heaters shall com-
mately 21 pounds LP-Gas capacity), re-
ply with and be used in accordance
charged at the installation, shall be
with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section.
provided with excess flow or backflow
(b) The temporary heating equipment
check valves to prevent the discharge
shall not be left unattended.
of container contents in case of failure
(ix) Containers are permitted to be
used temporarily in buildings for train- of the filling or equalizing connection.
ing purposes related in installation and (7) Safety devices. (i) Containers shall
use of LP-Gas systems, as follows: be provided with safety devices as re-
(a) The maximum water capacity of quired by DOT regulations.
individual containers shall be 245 (ii) A final stage regulator of an LP-
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- Gas system (excluding any appliance
pacity), but the maximum quantity of regulator) shall be equipped on the low-
LP-Gas that may be placed in each pressure side with a relief valve which
container shall be 20 pounds. is set to start to discharge within the
(b) If more than one such container is limits specified in Table H–30.
located in the same room, the con-
tainers shall be separated by at least 20 TABLE H–30
feet. Relief valve start-to-dis-
(6) Container valves and accessories. (i) charge pressure setting
(percent of regulator
Valves in the assembly of multiple con- Regulator delivery pressure
delivery pressure)
tainer systems shall be arranged so
Minimum Maximum
that replacement of containers can be
made without shutting off the flow of 1 p.s.i.g. or less ............................. 200 300
gas in the system. Above 1 p.s.i.g. but not over 3
p.s.i.g ......................................... 140 200
NOTE: This provision is not to be construed Above 3 p.s.i.g .............................. 125 200
as requiring an automatic changeover de-
vice. (iii) When a regulator or pressure re-
(ii) Regulators and low-pressure relief valve is used inside a building for
lief devices shall be rigidly attached to other than purposes specified in para-
the cylinder valves, cylinders, sup- graphs (b)(6)(i) (a)–(g) of this section,
porting standards, the building walls or the relief valve and the space above the
otherwise rigidly secured and shall be regulator and relief valve diaphragms
so installed or protected that the ele- shall be vented to the outside air with
ments (sleet, snow, or ice) will not af- the discharge outlet located not less
fect their operation. than 3 feet horizontally away from any
(iii) Valves and connections to the building opening which is below such
containers shall be protected while in discharge. These provisions do not
325
apply to individual appliance regu- located inside a building. For con-
lators when protection is otherwise tainers with a water capacity of 125
provided nor to paragraph (c)(5) of this gallons or more, such terminals shall
section and paragraph (b)(10)(xiii) of be located not less than 10 feet from
this section. In buildings devoted ex- any building (see paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of
clusively to gas distribution purposes, this section), and preferably not less
the space above the diaphragm need than 5 feet from any driveway, and
not be vented to the outside. shall be located in a protective housing
(8) Reinstallation of containers. Con- built for the purpose.
tainers shall not be reinstalled unless (ii) The filling connection shall be
they are requalified in accordance with fitted with one of the following:
DOT regulations. (a) Combination back-pressure check
(9) Permissible product. A product valve and excess flow valve.
shall not be placed in a container (b) One double or two single back-
marked with a service pressure less pressure check valves.
than four-fifths of the maximum vapor (c) A positive shutoff valve, in con-
pressure of product at 130 °F. junction with either:
(d) Systems utilizing containers other (1) An internal back-pressure valve,
than DOT containers—(1) Application. or
This paragraph applies specifically to (2) An internal excess flow valve.
systems utilizing storage containers (iii) All openings in a container shall
other than those constructed in accord- be equipped with approved automatic
ance with DOT specifications. Para- excess flow valves except in the fol-
graph (b) of this section applies to this lowing: Filling connections as provided
paragraph unless otherwise noted in in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section;
paragraph (b) of this section. safety relief connections, liquid-level
(2) Design pressure and classification of gaging devices as provided in para-
storage containers. Storage containers graphs (b)(7)(iv), (19)(iii), and (19)(viii)
shall be designed and classified in ac- of this section; pressure gage connec-
cordance with Table H–31. tions as provided in paragraph (b)(7)(v)
of this section, as provided in para-
TABLE H–31 graphs (d) (iv), (vi), and (vii) of this
Minimum design pressure of con- section.
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage (iv) An excess flow valve is not re-
For gases
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME quired in the withdrawal service line
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200, providing the following are complied
Con-
to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952,
tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, with:
type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi- (a) Such systems’ total water capac-
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- ity does not exceed 2,000 U.S. gallons.
69) tions of API-ASME (b) The discharge from the service
Code 3
outlet is controlled by a suitable
1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100
manually operated shutoff valve which
100 100 100 125 is:
125 125 125 156
150 150 150 187 (1) Threaded directly into the service
175 175 175 219 outlet of the container; or
2 200 215 200 250 (2) Is an integral part of a substantial
1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au-
fitting threaded into or on the service
thorized since Dec. 31, 1947.
2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. outlet of the container; or
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of (3) Threaded directly into a substan-
the container type designation when constructed under 1949
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69). tial fitting threaded into or on the
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of service outlet of the container.
the container type designation when constructed under: (1)
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950, (c) The shutoff valve is equipped with
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions an attached handwheel or the equiva-
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME
Code. lent.
3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is
(d) The controlling orifice between
not authorized after July 1, 1961.
the contents of the container and the
(3) Container valves and accessories, outlet of the shutoff valve does not ex-
filler pipes, and discharge pipes. (i) The ceed five-sixteenths inch in diameter
filling pipe inlet terminal shall not be for vapor withdrawal systems and one-
326
eighth inch in diameter for liquid with- protection against physical damage
drawal systems. and such discharge pipes shall be fitted
(e) An approved pressure-reducing with loose raincaps. Return bends and
regulator is directly attached to the restrictive pipefittings shall not be
outlet of the shutoff valve and is rig- permitted.
idly supported, or that an approved (d) If desired, discharge lines from
pressure-reducing regulator is attached two or more safety relief devices lo-
to the outlet of the shutoff valve by cated on the same unit, or similar lines
means of a suitable flexible connection, from two or more different units, may
provided the regulator is adequately be run into a common discharge head-
supported and properly protected on or
er, provided that the cross-sectional
at the tank.
area of such header be at least equal to
(v) All inlet and outlet connections
except safety relief valves, liquid level the sum of the cross-sectional area of
gaging devices and pressure gages on the individual discharge lines, and that
containers of 2,000 gallons water capac- the setting of safety relief valves are
ity, or more, and on any container used the same.
to supply fuel directly to an internal (e) Each storage container of over
combustion engine, shall be labeled to 2,000 gallons water capacity shall be
designate whether they communicate provided with a suitable pressure gage.
with vapor or liquid space. Labels may (f) A final stage regulator of an LP-
be on valves. Gas system (excluding any appliance
(vi) In lieu of an excess flow valve regulator) shall be equipped on the low-
openings may be fitted with a quick- pressure side with a relief valve which
closing internal valve which, except is set to start to discharge within the
during operating periods shall remain limits specified in Table H–30.
closed. The internal mechanism for (g) When a regulator or pressure re-
such valves may be provided with a lief valve is installed inside a building,
secondary control which shall be the relief valve and the space above the
equipped with a fusible plug (not over regulator and relief valve diaphragms
220 °F. melting point) which will cause
shall be vented to the outside air with
the internal valve to close automati-
the discharge outlet located not less
cally in case of fire.
than 3 feet horizontally away from any
(vii) Not more than two plugged
openings shall be permitted on a con- opening into the building which is
tainer of 2,000 gallons or less water ca- below such discharge. (These provisions
pacity. do not apply to individual appliance
(viii) Containers of 125 gallons water regulators when protection is other-
capacity or more manufactured after wise provided. In buildings devoted ex-
July 1, 1961, shall be provided with an clusively to gas distribution purposes,
approved device for liquid evacuation, the space above the diaphragm need
the size of which shall be three-fourths not be vented to the outside.)
inch National Pipe Thread minimum. A (ii) Safety devices for aboveground
plugged opening will not satisfy this containers shall be provided as follows:
requirement. (a) Containers of 1,200 gallons water
(4) Safety devices. (i) All safety de- capacity or less which may contain liq-
vices shall comply with the following: uid fuel when installed above ground
(a) All container safety relief devices shall have the rate of discharge re-
shall be located on the containers and quired by paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this
shall have direct communication with section provided by a spring-loaded re-
the vapor of space of the container. lief valve or valves. In addition to the
(b) In industrial and gas manufac- required spring-loaded relief valve(s),
turing plants, discharge pipe from safe-
suitable fuse plug(s) may be used pro-
ty relief valves on pipe lines within a
vided the total discharge area of the
building shall discharge vertically up-
ward and shall be piped to a point out- fuse plug(s) for each container does not
side a building. exceed 0.25 square inch.
(c) Safety relief device discharge ter- (b) The fusible metal of the fuse plugs
minals shall be so located as to provide shall have a yield temperature of 208
327
°F. minimum and 220 °F. maximum. Re- containers when determining the rate
lief valves and fuse plugs shall have di- of discharge requirement of the relief
rect communication with the vapor valves.
space of the container. (iv) On underground containers of
(c) On a container having a water ca- more than 2,000 gallons water capacity,
pacity greater than 125 gallons, but not the discharge from safety relief devices
over 2,000 gallons, the discharge from shall be piped vertically and directly
the safety relief valves shall be vented upward to a point at least 7 feet above
away from the container vertically up- the ground.
wards and unobstructed to the open air Where there is a probability of the
in such a manner as to prevent any im- manhole or housing becoming flooded,
pingement of escaping gas upon the the discharge from regulator vent lines
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall shall be above the highest probable
be used. Suitable provision shall be water level. All manholes or housings
made for draining condensate which shall be provided with ventilated
may accumulate in the relief valve or louvers or their equivalent, the area of
its discharge pipe. such openings equaling or exceeding
(d) On containers of 125 gallons water the combined discharge areas of the
capacity or less, the discharge from safety relief valves and other vent lines
safety relief devices shall be located which discharge their content into the
not less than 5 feet horizontally away manhole housing.
from any opening into the building (v) Safety devices for vaporizers shall
below the level of such discharge. be provided as follows:
(e) On a container having a water ca- (a) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart
pacity greater than 2,000 gallons, the total capacity, heated by the ground or
discharge from the safety relief valves the surrounding air, need not be
shall be vented away from the con- equipped with safety relief valves pro-
tainer vertically upwards to a point at vided that adequate tests certified by
least 7 feet above the container, and any of the authorities referred to in
unobstructed to the open air in such a paragraph (b)(2) of this section, dem-
manner as to prevent any impingement onstrate that the assembly is safe
of escaping gas upon the container; without safety relief valves.
loose-fitting rain caps shall be used. (b) No vaporizer shall be equipped
Suitable provision shall be made so with fusible plugs.
that any liquid or condensate that may (c) In industrial and gas manufac-
accumulate inside of the safety relief turing plants, safety relief valves on
valve or its discharge pipe will not vaporizers within a building shall be
render the valve inoperative. If a drain piped to a point outside the building
is used, a means shall be provided to and be discharged upward.
protect the container, adjacent con- (5) Reinstallation of containers. Con-
tainers, piping, or equipment against tainers may be reinstalled if they do
impingement of flame resulting from not show any evidence of harmful ex-
ignition of product escaping from the ternal corrosion or other damage.
drain. Where containers are reinstalled un-
(iii) On all containers which are in- derground, the corrosion resistant
stalled underground and which contain coating shall be put in good condition
no liquid fuel until buried and covered, (see paragraph (c)(7)(vi) of this sec-
the rate of discharge of the spring-load- tion). Where containers are reinstalled
ed relief valve installed thereon may be above ground, the safety devices and
reduced to a minimum of 30 percent of gaging devices shall comply with para-
the rate of discharge specified in paragraph (c)(4) of this section and para-
graph (b)(10)(ii) of this section. Con- graph (b)(19) of this section respec-
tainers so protected shall not be uncov- tively for aboveground containers.
ered after installation until the liquid (6) Capacity of containers. A storage
fuel has been removed therefrom. Con- container shall not exceed 90,000 gal-
tainers which may contain liquid fuel lons water capacity.
before being installed under ground and (7) Installation of storage containers. (i)
before being completely covered with Containers installed above ground, ex-
earth are to be considered aboveground cept as provided in paragraph (c)(7)(vii)
328
of this section, shall be provided with hicular traffic or other causes, then it
substantial masonry or noncombus- shall be:
tible structural supports on firm ma- (a) Placed not less than 2 feet below
sonry foundation. grade, or
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be (b) Otherwise protected against such
supported as follows: physical damage.
(a) Horizontal containers shall be It will not be necessary to cover the
mounted on saddles in such a manner portion of the container to which man-
as to permit expansion and contrac- hole and other connections are affixed;
tion. Structural metal supports may be however, where necessary, protection
employed when they are protected shall be provided against vehicular
against fire in an approved manner. damage. When necessary to prevent
Suitable means of preventing corrosion floating, containers shall be securely
shall be provided on that portion of the anchored or weighted.
container in contact with the founda- (vi)(a) Containers shall be given a
tions or saddles. protective coating before being placed
(b) Containers of 2,000 gallons water under ground. This coating shall be
capacity or less may be installed with equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing or to
nonfireproofed ferrous metal supports two coatings of red lead followed by a
if mounted on concrete pads or foot- heavy coating of coal tar or asphalt. In
ings, and if the distance from the out- lowering the container into place, care
side bottom of the container shell to shall be exercised to prevent damage to
the concrete pad, footing, or the the coating. Any damage to the coat-
ground does not exceed 24 inches. ing shall be repaired before backfilling.
(iii) Any container may be installed (b) Containers shall be set on a firm
with nonfireproofed ferrous metal sup- foundation (firm earth may be used)
ports if mounted on concrete pads or and surrounded with earth or sand
footings, and if the distance from the firmly tamped in place.
outside bottom of the container to the (vii) Containers with foundations at-
ground does not exceed 5 feet, provided tached (portable or semiportable con-
the container is in an isolated location. tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’
(iv) Containers may be partially bur- or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the
ied providing the following require- industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be de-
ments are met: signed, installed, and used in accord-
(a) The portion of the container ance with these rules subject to the fol-
below the surface and for a vertical dis- lowing provisions:
tance not less than 3 inches above the (a) If they are to be used at a given
surface of the ground is protected to general location for a temporary period
resist corrosion, and the container is not to exceed 6 months they need not
protected against settling and corro- have fire-resisting foundations or sad-
sion as required for fully buried con- dles but shall have adequate ferrous
tainers. metal supports.
(b) Spacing requirements shall be as (b) They shall not be located with the
specified for underground tanks in outside bottom of the container shell
paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section. more than 5 feet above the surface of
(c) Relief valve capacity shall be as the ground unless fire-resisting sup-
required for aboveground containers. ports are provided.
(d) Container is located so as not to (c) The bottom of the skids shall not
be subject to vehicular damage, or is be less than 2 inches or more than 12
adequately protected against such inches below the outside bottom of the
damage. container shell.
(e) Filling densities shall be as re- (d) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings,
quired for above-ground containers. and the like, having communication
(v) Containers buried underground with the interior of the container, shall
shall be placed so that the top of the be protected against physical damage.
container is not less than 6 inches (e) When not permanently located on
below grade. Where an underground fire-resisting foundations, piping con-
container might be subject to abrasive nections shall be sufficiently flexible
action or physical damage due to ve- to minimize the possibility of breakage
329
or leakage of connections if the con- opening through which there can be a
tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise flow from safety relief valves shall be
displaced. at least 4 inches above the container
(f) Skids, or lugs for attachment of and this opening shall be located in the
skids, shall be secured to the container dome or housing. Underground systems
in accordance with the code or rules shall be so installed that all the above
under which the container is designed openings, including the regulator vent,
and built (with a minimum factor of are located above the normal max-
safety of four) to withstand loading in imum water table.
any direction equal to four times the (iii) All connections to underground
weight of the container and attach- containers shall be located within a
ments when filled to the maximum per- substantial dome, housing, or manhole
missible loaded weight. and with access thereto protected by a
(viii) Field welding where necessary substantial cover.
shall be made only on saddle plates or (9) Drips for condensed gas. Where va-
brackets which were applied by the porized gas on the low-pressure side of
manufacturer of the tank. the system may condense to a liquid at
(ix) For aboveground containers, se- normal operating temperatures and
cure anchorage or adequate pier height pressures, suitable means shall be pro-
shall be provided against possible con- vided for revaporization of the conden-
tainer flotation wherever sufficiently sate.
high floodwater might occur.
(10) Damage from vehicles. When dam-
(x) When permanently installed con-
age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular
tainers are interconnected, provision
traffic is a possibility, precautions
shall be made to compensate for expan-
against such damage shall be taken.
sion, contraction, vibration, and set-
tling of containers, and inter- (11) Drains. No drains or blowoff lines
connecting piping. Where flexible con- shall be directed into or in proximity
nections are used, they shall be of an to sewer systems used for other pur-
approved type and shall be designed for poses.
a bursting pressure of not less than five (12) General provisions applicable to
times the vapor pressure of the product systems in industrial plants (of 2,000 gal-
at 100 °F. The use of nonmetallic hose lons water capacity and more) and to bulk
is prohibited for permanently inter- filling plants. (i) When standard watch
connecting such containers. service is provided, it shall be extended
(xi) Container assemblies listed for to the LP-Gas installation and per-
interchangeable installation above sonnel properly trained.
ground or under ground shall conform (ii) If loading and unloading are nor-
to the requirements for aboveground mally done during other than daylight
installations with respect to safety re- hours, adequate lights shall be pro-
lief capacity and filling density. For vided to illuminate storage containers,
installation above ground all other re- control valves, and other equipment.
quirements for aboveground installa- (iii) Suitable roadways or means of
tions shall apply. For installation access for extinguishing equipment
under ground all other requirements such as wheeled extinguishers or fire
for underground installations shall department apparatus shall be pro-
apply. vided.
(8) Protection of container accessories. (iv) To minimize trespassing or tam-
(i) Valves, regulating, gaging, and pering, the area which includes con-
other container accessory equipment tainer appurtenances, pumping equip-
shall be protected against tampering ment, loading and unloading facilities,
and physical damage. Such accessories and cylinder-filling facilities shall be
shall also be so protected during the enclosed with at least a 6-foot-high in-
transit of containers intended for industrial type fence unless otherwise
stallation underground. adequately protected. There shall be at
(ii) On underground or combination least two means of emergency access.
aboveground-underground containers, (13) Container-charging plants. (i) The
the service valve handwheel, the ter- container-charging room shall be lo-
minal for connecting the hose, and the cated not less than:
330
(a) Ten feet from bulk storage con- hose line with a combination fog noz-
tainers. zle. A shelter shall be provided to pro-
(b) [Reserved] tect the hose and its conveyor from the
(ii) Tank truck filling station outlets weather.
shall be located not less than: (15) [Reserved]
(a) [Reserved] (16) Lighting. Electrical equipment
(b) Ten feet from pumps and compres- and installations shall conform to
sors if housed in one or more separate paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this sec-
buildings. tion.
(iii) The pumps or compressors may (17) Vaporizers for internal combustion
be located in the container-charging engines. The provisions of paragraph
room or building, in a separate build- (e)(8) of this section shall apply.
ing, or outside of buildings. When (18) Gas regulating and mixing equip-
housed in a separate building, such ment for internal combustion engines. The
building (a small noncombustible provisions of paragraph (e)(9) of this
weather cover is not to be construed as section shall apply.
a building) shall be located not less (e) Liquefied petroleum gas as a motor
than: fuel—(1) Application. (i) This paragraph
(a) Ten feet from bulk storage tanks. applies to internal combustion engines,
(b) [Reserved] fuel containers, and pertinent equip-
(c) Twenty-five feet from sources of ment for the use of liquefied petroleum
ignition. gases as a motor fuel on easily mov-
(iv) When a part of the container- able, readily portable units including
charging building is to be used for a self-propelled vehicles.
boiler room or where open flames or (ii) Fuel containers and pertinent
similar sources of ignition exist or are equipment for internal combustion en-
employed, the space to be so occupied gines using liquefied petroleum gas
shall be separated from container where installation is of the stationary
charging room by a partition wall or type are covered by paragraph (d) of
walls of fire-resistant construction this section. This paragraph does not
continuous from floor to roof or ceil- apply to containers for transportation
ing. Such separation walls shall be of liquefied petroleum gases nor to ma-
without openings and shall be joined to rine fuel use. All requirements of para-
the floor, other walls, and ceiling or graph (b) of this section apply to this
roof in a manner to effect a permanent paragraph, unless otherwise noted in
gas-tight joint. paragraph (b) of this section.
(v) Electrical equipment and installa- (2) General. (i) Fuel may be used from
tions shall conform with paragraphs (b) the cargo tank of a truck while in tran-
(17) and (18) of this section. sit, but not from cargo tanks on trail-
(14) Fire protection. (i) Each bulk ers or semitrailers. The use of fuel
plant shall be provided with at least from the cargo tanks to operate sta-
one approved portable fire extinguisher tionary engines is permitted providing
having a minimum rating of 12–B, C. wheels are securely blocked.
(ii) In industrial installations involv- (ii) Passenger-carrying vehicles shall
ing containers of 150,000 gallons aggre- not be fueled while passengers are on
gate water capacity or more, provision board.
shall be made for an adequate supply of (iii) Industrial trucks (including lift
water at the container site for fire pro- trucks) equipped with permanently
tection in the container area, unless mounted fuel containers shall be
other adequate means for fire control charged outdoors. Charging equipment
are provided. Water hydrants shall be shall comply with the provisions of
readily accessible and so spaced as to paragraph (h) of this section.
provide water protection for all con- (iv) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks
tainers. Sufficient lengths of firehose shall comply with the Standard for
shall be provided at each hydrant loca- Type Designations, Areas of Use, Main-
tion on a hose cart, or other means tenance and Operation of Powered In-
provided to facilitate easy movement dustrial Trucks, NFPA 505–1969, which
of the hose in the container area. It is is incorporated by reference as speci-
desirable to equip the outlet of each fied in § 1910.6.
331
(v) Engines on vehicles shall be shut containers on passenger-carrying vehi-
down while fueling if the fueling oper- cles shall be installed as far from the
ation involves venting to the atmos- engine as is practicable, and the pas-
phere. senger space and any space containing
(3) Design pressure and classification of radio equipment shall be sealed from
fuel containers. (i) Except as covered in the container space to prevent direct
paragraphs (e)(3) (ii) and (iii) of this seepage of gas to these spaces. The con-
section, containers shall be in accord- tainer compartment shall be vented to
ance with Table H–32. the outside. In case the fuel container
(ii) Fuel containers for use in indus- is mounted near the engine or the ex-
trial trucks (including lift trucks) haust system, the container shall be
shall be either DOT containers author- shielded against direct heat radiation.
ized for LP-Gas service having a min- (ii) Containers shall be installed with
imum service pressure of 240 p.s.i.g. or as much clearance as practicable but
minimum Container Type 250. Under never less than the minimum road
1950 and later ASME codes, this means clearance of the vehicle under max-
a 312.5–p.s.i.g. design pressure con- imum spring deflection. This minimum
tainer. clearance shall be to the bottom of the
TABLE H–32 container or to the lowest fitting on
the container or housing, whichever is
Minimum design pressure of con- lower.
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
For gases (iii) Permanent and removable fuel
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME containers shall be securely mounted
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200,
Con- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952, to prevent jarring loose, slipping, or ro-
tainer
type
lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, tating, and the fastenings shall be de-
in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of signed and constructed to withstand
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- static loading in any direction equal to
69) tions of API-ASME
Code 2 twice the weight of the tank and at-
1 200
tachments when filled with fuel using a
215Z 200 250
safety factor of not less than four
1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of
based on the ultimate strength of the
the container type designation when constructed under 1949 material to be used. Field welding,
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69). when necessary, shall be made only on
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of
the container type designation when constructed under: (1) saddle plates, lugs or brackets, origi-
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950, nally attached to the container by the
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME tank manufacturer.
Code.
2 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is (iv) Fuel containers on buses shall be
not authorized after July 1, 1961. permanently installed.
(iii) Containers manufactured and (v) Containers from which vapor only
maintained under DOT specifications is to be withdrawn shall be installed
and regulations may be used as fuel and equipped with suitable connections
containers. When so used they shall to minimize the accidental withdrawal
conform to all requirements of this of liquid.
paragraph. (5) Valves and accessories. (i) Con-
(iv) All container inlets and outlets tainer valves and accessories shall have
except safety relief valves and gaging a rated working pressure of at least 250
devices shall be labeled to designate p.s.i.g., and shall be of a type suitable
whether they communicate with vapor for liquefied petroleum gas service.
or liquid space. Labels may be on (ii) The filling connection shall be
valves. fitted with an approved double back-
(4) Installation of fuel containers. (i) pressure check valve, or a positive
Containers shall be located in a place shutoff in conjunction with an internal
and in a manner to minimize the possi- back-pressure check valve. On a remov-
bility of damage to the container. Con- able container the filler valve may be a
tainers located in the rear of trucks hand operated shutoff valve with an in-
and buses, when protected by substan- ternal excess flow valve. Main shutoff
tial bumpers, will be considered in con- valves on the container on liquid and
formance with this requirement. Fuel vapor lines must be readily accessible.
332
(iii) With the exceptions of paragraph the fuel system to minimize the escape
(e)(5)(iv)(c) of this section, filling con- of fuel when the containers are ex-
nections equipped with approved auto- changed. This may be accomplished by
matic back-pressure check valves, and either of the following methods:
safety relief valves, all connections to (1) Using an approved automatic
containers having openings for the flow quick-closing coupling (a type closing
of gas in excess of a No. 54 drill size in both directions when uncoupled) in
shall be equipped with approved auto- the fuel line, or
matic excess flow valves to prevent dis- (2) Closing the valve at the fuel con-
charge of content in case connections tainer and allowing the engine to run
are broken. until the fuel in the line is consumed.
(iv) Liquid-level gaging devices: (6) Piping—including pipe, tubing, and
(a) Variable liquid-level gages which fittings. (i) Pipe from fuel container to
require the venting of fuel to the at- first-stage regulator shall be not less
mosphere shall not be used on fuel con- than schedule 80 wrought iron or steel
tainers of industrial trucks (including (black or galvanized), brass or copper;
lift trucks). or seamless copper, brass, or steel tub-
(b) On portable containers that may ing. Steel tubing shall have a min-
be filled in the vertical and/or hori- imum wall thickness of 0.049 inch.
zontal position, the fixed liquid-level Steel pipe or tubing shall be ade-
gage must indicate maximum per- quately protected against exterior cor-
mitted filling level for both vertical rosion. Copper tubing shall be types K
and horizontal filling with the con- or L or equivalent having a minimum
tainer oriented to place the safety re- wall thickness of 0.032 inch. Approved
lief valve in communication with the flexible connections may be used be-
vapor space. tween container and regulator or be-
(c) In the case of containers used tween regulator and gas-air mixer
solely in farm tractor service, and within the limits of approval. The use
charged at a point at least 50 feet from of aluminum pipe or tubing is prohib-
any important building, the fixed liq- ited. In the case of removable con-
uid-level gaging device may be so containers an approved flexible connection
structed that the outward flow of con- shall be used between the container
tainer content exceeds that passed by a and the fuel line.
No. 54 drill size opening, but in no case (ii) All piping shall be installed,
shall the flow exceed that passed by a braced, and supported so as to reduce
No. 31 drill-size opening. An excess flow to a minimum the possibility of vibra-
valve is not required. Fittings equipped tion strains or wear.
with such restricted drill size opening (7) Safety devices. (i) Spring-loaded in-
and container on which they are used ternal type safety relief valves shall be
shall be marked to indicate the size of used on all motor fuel containers.
the opening. (ii) The discharge outlet from safety
(d) All valves and connections on relief valves shall be located on the
containers shall be adequately pro- outside of enclosed spaces and as far as
tected to prevent damage due to acci- practicable from possible sources of ig-
dental contact with stationary objects nition, and vented upward within 45 de-
or from loose objects thrown up from grees of the vertical in such a manner
the road, and all valves shall be safe- as to prevent impingement of escaping
guarded against damage due to colli- gas upon containers, or parts of vehi-
sion, overturning or other accident. cles, or on vehicles in adjacent lines of
For farm tractors where parts of the traffic. A rain cap or other protector
vehicle provide such protection to shall be used to keep water and dirt
valves and fittings, the foregoing re- from collecting in the valve.
quirements shall be considered ful- (iii) When a discharge line from the
filled. However, on removable type con- container safety relief valve is used,
tainers the protection for the fittings the line shall be metallic, other than
shall be permanently attached to the aluminum, and shall be sized, located,
container. and maintained so as not to restrict
(e) When removable fuel containers the required flow of gas from the safety
are used, means shall be provided in relief valve. Such discharge line shall
333
be able to withstand the pressure re- reducing equipment shall be installed
sulting from the discharge of vapor in a secure manner between the fuel
when the safety relief valve is in the supply container and gas-air mixer for
full open position. When flexibility is the purpose of reducing the pressure of
necessary, flexible metal hose or tub- the fuel delivered to the gas-air mixer.
ing shall be used. (ii) An approved automatic shutoff
(iv) Portable containers equipped for valve shall be provided in the fuel sys-
volumetric filling may be filled in ei- tem at some point ahead of the inlet of
ther the vertical or horizontal position the gas-air mixer, designed to prevent
only when oriented to place the safety flow of fuel to the mixer when the igni-
relief valve in communication with the tion is off and the engine is not run-
vapor space. ning. In the case of industrial trucks
(v) Paragraph (b)(10)(xii) of this sec- and engines operating in buildings
tion for hydrostatic relief valves shall other than those used exclusively to
apply. house engines, the automatic shutoff
(8) Vaporizers. (i) Vaporizers and any valve shall be designed to operate if the
part thereof and other devices that engine should stop. Atmospheric type
may be subjected to container pressure regulators (zero governors) shall be
shall have a design pressure of at least considered adequate as an automatic
250 p.s.i.g. shutoff valve only in cases of outdoor
(ii) Each vaporizer shall have a valve operation such as farm tractors, con-
or suitable plug which will permit sub- struction equipment, irrigation pump
stantially complete draining of the va- engines, and other outdoor stationary
porizer. It shall be located at or near engine installations.
the lowest portion of the section occu- (iii) The source of the air for combus-
pied by the water or other heating me- tion shall be completely isolated from
dium.
the passenger compartment, ven-
(iii) Vaporizers shall be securely fas-
tilating system, or air-conditioning
tened so as to minimize the possibility
system.
of becoming loosened.
(iv) Each vaporizer shall be perma- (10) [Reserved]
nently marked at a visible point as fol- (11) Stationary engines in buildings.
lows: Stationary engines and gas turbines in-
(a) With the design pressure of the stalled in buildings, including portable
fuel-containing portion in p.s.i.g. engines used instead of or to supple-
(b) With the water capacity of the ment stationary engines, shall comply
fuel-containing portion of the vapor- with the Standard for the Institution
izer in pounds. and Use of Stationary Combustion En-
(v) Devices to supply heat directly to gines and Gas Turbines, NFPA 37–1970,
a fuel container shall be equipped with and the appropriate provisions of para-
an automatic device to cut off the sup- graphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
ply of heat before the pressure inside (12) Portable engines in buildings. (i)
the fuel container reaches 80 percent of Portable engines may be used in build-
the start to discharge pressure setting ings only for emergency use, except as
of the safety relief device on the fuel provided by subparagraph (11) of this
container. paragraph.
(vi) Engine exhaust gases may be (ii) Exhaust gases shall be discharged
used as a direct source of heat supply to outside the building or to an area
for the vaporization of fuel if the mate- where they will not constitute a haz-
rials of construction of those parts of ard.
the vaporizer in contact with exhaust (iii) Provision shall be made to sup-
gases are resistant to the corrosive ac- ply sufficient air for combustion and
tion of exhaust gases and the vaporizer cooling.
system is designed to prevent excessive (iv) An approved automatic shutoff
pressures. valve shall be provided in the fuel sys-
(vii) Vaporizers shall not be equipped tem ahead of the engine, designed to
with fusible plugs. prevent flow of fuel to the engine when
(9) Gas regulating and mixing equip- the ignition is off or if the engine
ment. (i) Approved automatic pressure should stop.
334
(v) The capacity of LP-Gas con- (a) By setting into recess of con-
tainers used with such engines shall tainer to prevent the possibility of
comply with the applicable occupancy their being struck if the container is
provision of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- dropped upon a flat surface, or
tion. (b) By ventilated cap or collar, fas-
(13) Industrial trucks inside buildings. tened to container capable of with-
(i) LP-Gas-fueled industrial trucks are standing blow from any direction
permitted to be used in buildings and equivalent to that of a 30-pound weight
structures. dropped 4 feet. Construction must be
(ii) No more than two LP-Gas con- such that a blow will not be trans-
tainers shall be used on an industrial mitted to a valve or other connection.
truck for motor fuel purposes. (iv) The outlet valves of containers in
(iii)–(iv) [Reserved] storage shall be closed.
(v) Industrial trucks shall not be (v) Empty containers which have
parked and left unattended in areas of been in LP-Gas service when stored in-
possible excessive heat or sources of ig- side, shall be considered as full con-
nition. tainers for the purpose of determining
the maximum quantity of LP-Gas per-
(14) Garaging LP-Gas-fueled vehicles.
mitted by this paragraph.
(i) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles may be
(3) [Reserved]
stored or serviced inside garages pro-
(4) Storage within buildings not fre-
vided there are no leaks in the fuel sys-
quented by the public (such as industrial
tem and the fuel tanks are not filled
buildings). (i) The quantity of LP-Gas
beyond the maximum filling capacity
stored shall not exceed 300 pounds (ap-
specified in paragraph (b)(12)(i) of this
proximately 2,550 cubic feet in vapor
section.
form) except as provided in subpara-
(ii) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles being re- graph (5) of this paragraph.
paired in garages shall have the con- (ii) Containers carried as a part of
tainer shutoff valve closed except when service equipment on highway mobile
fuel is required for engine operation. vehicles are not to be considered in the
(iii) Such vehicles shall not be total storage capacity in subdivision (i)
parked near sources of heat, open of this subparagraph provided such ve-
flames, or similar sources of ignition hicles are stored in private garages,
or near open pits unless such pits are and are limited to one container per
adequately ventilated. vehicle with an LP-Gas capacity of not
(f) Storage of containers awaiting use or more than 100 pounds. All container
resale—(1) Application. This paragraph valves shall be closed.
shall apply to the storage of portable (5) Storage within special buildings or
containers not in excess of 1,000 pounds rooms. (i) The quantity of LP-Gas
water capacity, filled or partially stored in special buildings or rooms
filled, at user location but not con- shall not exceed 10,000 pounds.
nected for use, or in storage for resale (ii) The walls, floors, and ceilings of
by dealers or resellers. This paragraph container storage rooms that are with-
shall not apply to containers stored at in or adjacent to other parts of the
charging plants or at plants devoted building shall be constructed of mate-
primarily to the storage and distribu- rial having at least a 2-hour fire resist-
tion of LP-Gas or other petroleum ance rating.
products. (iii) A portion of the exterior walls or
(2) General. (i) Containers in storage roof having an area not less than 10
shall be located so as to minimize ex- percent of that of the combined area of
posure to excessive temperature rise, the enclosing walls and roof shall be of
physical damage, or tampering by un- explosion relieving construction.
authorized persons. (iv) Each opening from such storage
(ii) Containers when stored inside rooms to other parts of the building
shall not be located near exits, stair- shall be protected by a 11⁄2 hour (B) fire
ways, or in areas normally used or indoor listed by a nationally recognized
tended for the safe exit of people. testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for
(iii) Container valves shall be pro- definition of nationally recognized
tected while in storage as follows: testing laboratory.
335
(v) Such rooms shall have no open requirements of paragraph (b) of this
flames for heating or lighting. section apply to this paragraph unless
(vi) Such rooms shall be adequately otherwise noted.
ventilated both top and bottom to the (2) Design pressure and classification of
outside only. The openings from such storage containers. Storage containers
vents shall be at least 5 feet away from shall be designed and classified in ac-
any other opening into any building. cordance with Table H–34.
(vii) The floors of such rooms shall
not be below ground level. Any space TABLE H–34
below the floor shall be of solid fill or Minimum design pressure of con-
properly ventilated to the open air. tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
(viii) Such storage rooms shall not be For gases
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME
located adjoining the line of property Con-
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200,
occupied by schools, churches, hos- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952,
tainer
lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962,
pitals, athletic fields or other points of type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
public gathering. 100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi-
(ix) Fixed electrical equipment shall 69) tions of API-ASME
be installed in accordance with para- Code 2
graph (b)(18) of this section. 1 200 215 200 250
(6) Storage outside of buildings. (i) 1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
Storage outside of buildings, for con- The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100 per-
tainers awaiting use or resale, shall be cent of the container type designation when constructed
under 1949 or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68
located in accordance with Table H–33 and U–69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall
with respect to: be 125 percent of the container type designation when con-
structed under: (1) The 1949 ASME Code (Paragraphs U–200
(a) The nearest important building or and U–201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and
group of buildings; 1968 (Division 1) editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all edi-
tions of the API-ASME Code.
(b) [Reserved] 2 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is
(c) Busy thoroughfares; not authorized after July 1, 1961.
TABLE H–33 (3) Container valves and accessories. (i)

A filling connection on the container
Quantity of LP-Gas Stored Distance shall be fitted with one of the fol-
500 pounds or less .............................................. 0
lowing:
501 to 2,500 pounds ........................................... 10 (a) A combination back-pressure
2,501 to 6,000 pounds ........................................ 10 feet check and excess flow valve.
6,001 to 10,000 pounds ...................................... 20 feet (b) One double or two single back-
Over 10,000 pounds ............................................ 25 feet
pressure valves.
1 Container or containers shall be at least 10 feet from any
building on adjoining property, any sidewalk, or any of the ex-
(c) A positive shutoff valve, in con-
posures described in § 1910.110(f)(6)(i) (c) or (d) of this junction with either,
paragraph. (1) An internal back-pressure valve,
(ii) Containers shall be in a suitable or
enclosure or otherwise protected (2) On internal excess flow valve.
against tampering. In lieu of an excess flow valve, filling
(7) Fire protection. Storage locations connections may be fitted with a
other than supply depots separated and quick-closing internal valve, which
located apart from dealer, reseller, or shall remain closed except during oper-
user establishments shall be provided ating periods. The mechanism for such
with at least one approved portable fire valves may be provided with a sec-
extinguisher having a minimum rating ondary control which will cause it to
of 8–B, C. close automatically in case of fire.
(g) [Reserved] When a fusible plug is used its melting
(h) Liquefied petroleum gas service sta- point shall not exceed 220 °F.
tions—(1) Application. This paragraph (ii) A filling pipe inlet terminal not
applies to storage containers, and dis- on the container shall be fitted with a
pensing devices, and pertinent equip- positive shutoff valve in conjunction
ment in service stations where LP-Gas with either;
is stored and is dispensed into fuel (a) A black pressure check valve, or
tanks of motor vehicles. See paragraph (b) An excess flow check valve.
(e) of this section for requirements cov- (iii) All openings in the container ex-
ering use of LP-Gas as a motor fuel. All cept those listed below shall be
336
equipped with approved excess flow capacity greater than 2,000 gallons, the
check valves: discharge from the safety relief valves
(a) Filling connections as provided in shall be vented away from the con-
subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. tainer vertically upwards to a point at
(b) Safety relief connections as pro- least 7 feet above the container. Suit-
vided in paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this sec- able provisions shall be made so that
tion. any liquid or condensate that may ac-
(c) Liquid-level gaging devices as pro- cumulate inside of the relief valve or
vided in paragraphs (b)(7)(iv) and its discharge pipe will not render the
(19)(iv) of this section. valve inoperative. If a drain is used, a
(d) Pressure gage connections as pro- means shall be provided to protect the
vided in paragraph (b)(7)(v) of this sec-
container, adjacent containers, piping,
tion.
or equipment against impingement of
(iv) All container inlets and outlets
except those listed below shall be la- flame resulting from ignition of the
beled to designate whether they con- product escaping from the drain.
nect with vapor or liquid (labels may (iii) Underground containers shall be
be on valves): provided with safety relief valves as
(a) Safety relief valves. follows:
(b) Liquid-level gaging devices. (a) The discharge from safety-relief
(c) Pressure gages. valves shall be piped vertically upward
(v) Each storage container shall be to a point at least 10 feet above the
provided with a suitable pressure gage. ground. The discharge lines or pipes
(4) Safety-relief valves. (i) All safety- shall be adequately supported and pro-
relief devices shall be installed as fol- tected against physical damage.
lows: (b) [Reserved]
(a) On the container and directly con- (c) If no liquid is put into a container
nected with the vapor space. until after it is buried and covered, the
(b) Safety-relief valves and discharge rate of discharge of the relief valves
piping shall be protected against phys- may be reduced to not less than 30 per-
ical damage. The outlet shall be pro-
cent of the rate shown in paragraph
vided with loose-fitting rain caps.
(b)(10)(ii) of this section. If liquid fuel
There shall be no return bends or re-
is present during installation of con-
strictions in the discharge piping.
(c) The discharge from two or more tainers, the rate of discharge shall be
safety relief valves having the same the same as for aboveground con-
pressure settings may be run into a tainers. Such containers shall not be
common discharge header. The cross- uncovered until emptied of liquid fuel.
sectional area of such header shall be (5) Capacity of liquid containers. Indi-
at least equal to the sum of the cross- vidual liquid storage containers shall
sectional areas of the individual dis- not exceed 30,000 gallons water capac-
charges. ity.
(d) Discharge from any safety relief (6) Installation of storage containers.
device shall not terminate in any (i)(a) Each storage container used ex-
building nor beneath any building. clusively in service station operation
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be shall comply with the following table
provided with safety relief valves as which specifies minimum distances to
follows: a building and groups of buildings.
(a) The rate of discharge, which may
be provided by one or more valves, Minimum distances
shall be not less than that specified in Above- Between
Water capacity per container (gal-
paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section. lons) ground above-
and underground
(b) The discharge from safety relief ground containers
valves shall be vented to the open air (feet) (feet)
unobstructed and vertically upwards in Up to 2,000 .................................... 25 3
such a manner as to prevent any im- Over 2,000 ..................................... 50 5
pingement of escaping gas upon the
NOTE: The above distances may be reduced to not less
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall than 10 feet for service station buildings of other than wood
be used. On a container having a water frame construction.
337
(b) Readily ignitible material includ- quired on prefabricated storage and
ing weeds and long dry grass, shall be pump assemblies, mounted on a com-
removed within 10 feet of containers. mon base, with container bottom not
(c) The minimum separation between more than 24 inches above ground and
LP-Gas containers and flammable liq- whose water capacity is 2,000 gallons or
uid tanks shall be 20 feet and the min- less if the piping connected to the stor-
imum separation between a container age and pump assembly is sufficiently
and the centerline of the dike shall be flexible to minimize the possibility of
10 feet. breakage or leakage in the event of
(d) LP-Gas containers located near failure of the container supports.
flammable liquid containers shall be (iii) Underground containers shall be
protected against the flow or accumu- installed in accordance with this sub-
lation of flammable liquids by diking, division.
diversion curbs, or grading. (a) Containers shall be given a pro-
(e) LP-Gas containers shall not be lo- tective coating before being placed
cated within diked areas for flammable under ground. This coating shall be
liquid containers. equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing or to
(f) Field welding is permitted only on two coatings of red lead followed by a
saddle plates or brackets which were heavy coating of coal tar or asphalt. In
applied by the container manufacturer. lowering the container into place, care
(g) When permanently installed con- shall be exercised to minimize abrasion
tainers are interconnected, provision or other damage to the coating. Dam-
shall be made to compensate for expan- age to the coating shall be repaired be-
sion, contraction, vibration, and set- fore back-filling.
tling of containers and interconnecting (b) Containers shall be set on a firm
piping. Where flexible connections are foundation (firm earth may be used)
used, they shall be of an approved type and surrounded with earth or sand
and shall be designed for a bursting firmly tamped in place. Backfill should
pressure of not less than five times the be free of rocks or other abrasive mate-
vapor pressure of the product at 100 °F. rials.
The use of nonmetallic hose is prohib- (c) A minimum of 2 feet of earth
ited for interconnecting such con- cover shall be provided. Where ground
tainers. conditions make compliance with this
(h) Where high water table or flood requirement impractical, equivalent
conditions may be encountered protec- protection against physical damage
tion against container flotation shall shall be provided. The portion of the
be provided. container to which manhole and other
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be connections are attached need not be
installed in accordance with this sub- covered. If the location is subjected to
division. vehicular traffic, containers shall be
(a) Containers may be installed hori- protected by a concrete slab or other
zontally or vertically. cover adequate to prevent the weight
(b) Containers shall be protected by of a loaded vehicle imposing con-
crash rails or guards to prevent phys- centrated direct loads on the container
ical damage unless they are so pro- shell.
tected by virtue of their location. Vehi- (7) Protection of container fittings.
cles shall not be serviced within 10 feet Valves, regulators, gages, and other
of containers. container fittings shall be protected
(c) Container foundations shall be of against tampering and physical dam-
substantial masonry or other non- age.
combustible material. Containers shall (8) Transport truck unloading point. (i)
be mounted on saddles which shall per- During unloading, the transport truck
mit expansion and contraction, and shall not be parked on public thorough-
shall provide against the excessive con- fares and shall be at least 5 feet from
centration of stresses. Corrosion pro- storage containers, and shall be posi-
tection shall be provided for tank- tioned so that shutoff valves are read-
mounting areas. Structural metal con- ily accessible.
tainer supports shall be protected (ii) The filling pipe inlet terminal
against fire. This protection is not re- shall not be located within a building
338
nor within 10 feet of any building or LP-Gas service and shall be designed
driveway. It shall be protected against for a minimum working pressure of 250
physical damage. p.s.i.g.
(9) Piping, valves, and fittings. (i) Pip- (ii) Provisions shall be made for vent-
ing may be underground, above ground, ing LP-Gas contained in a dispensing
or a combination of both. It shall be device to a safe location.
well supported and protected against (iii) Pumps used to transfer LP-Gas
physical damage and corrosion. shall be equipped to allow control of
(ii) Piping laid beneath driveways the flow and to prevent leakage or ac-
shall be installed to prevent physical cidental discharge. Means shall be pro-
damage by vehicles. vided outside the dispensing device to
(iii) Piping shall be wrought iron or
readily shut off the power in the event
steel (black or galvanized), brass or
of fire or accident.
copper pipe; or seamless copper, brass,
or steel tubing and shall be suitable for (iv) A manual shutoff valve and an
a minimum pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe excess flow check valve shall be in-
joints may be screwed, flanged, brazed, stalled downstream of the pump and
or welded. The use of aluminum alloy ahead of the dispenser inlet.
piping or tubing is prohibited. (v)(a) Dispensing hose shall be resist-
(iv) All shutoff valves (liquid or gas) ant to the action of LP-Gas in the liq-
shall be suitable for liquefied petro- uid phase and designed for a minimum
leum gas service and designed for not bursting pressure of 1,250 p.s.i.g.
less than the maximum pressure to (b) An excess flow check valve or
which they may be subjected. Valves automatic shutoff valve shall be in-
which may be subjected to container stalled at the terminus of the liquid
pressure shall have a rated working line at the point of attachment of the
pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. dispensing hose.
(v) All materials used for valve seats, (vi)(a) LP-Gas dispensing devices
packing, gaskets, diaphragms, etc., shall be located not less than 10 feet
shall be resistant to the action of LP- from aboveground storage containers
Gas. greater than 2,000 gallons water capac-
(vi) Fittings shall be steel, malleable ity. The dispensing devices shall not be
iron, or brass having a minimum work- less than 20 feet from any building (not
ing pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Cast iron including canopies), basement, cellar,
pipe fittings, such as ells, tees, and pit, or line of adjoining property which
unions shall not be used. may be built upon and not less than 10
(vii) All piping shall be tested after feet from sidewalks, streets, or thor-
assembly and proved free from leaks at oughfares. No drains or blowoff lines
not less than normal operating pres- shall be directed into or in proximity
sures. to the sewer systems used for other
(viii) Provision shall be made for ex- purposes.
pansion, contraction, jarring, and vi-
(b) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall
bration, and for settling. This may be
be installed on a concrete foundation
accomplished by flexible connections.
or as part of a complete storage and
(10) Pumps and accessories. All pumps
and accessory equipment shall be suit- dispensing assembly mounted on a
able for LP-Gas service, and designed common base, and shall be adequately
for not less than the maximum pres- protected from physical damage.
sure to which they may be subjected. (c) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall
Accessories shall have a minimum not be installed within a building ex-
rated working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. cept that they may be located under a
Positive displacement pumps shall be weather shelter or canopy provided
equipped with suitable pressure actu- this area is not enclosed on more than
ated bypass valves permitting flow two sides. If the enclosing sides are ad-
from pump discharge to storage con- jacent to each other, the area shall be
tainer or pump suction. properly ventilated.
(11) Dispensing devices. (i) Meters, (vii) The dispensing of LP-Gas into
vapor separators, valves, and fittings the fuel container of a vehicle shall be
in the dispenser shall be suitable for performed by a competent attendant
339
who shall remain at the LP-Gas dis- (3) Retroactivity. Unless otherwise
penser during the entire transfer oper- stated, it is not intended that the pro-
ation. visions of this section be retroactive.
(12) Additional rules. There shall be no (i) Existing plants, appliances, equip-
smoking on the driveway of service ment, buildings, structures, and instal-
stations in the dispensing areas or lations for the storage, handling or use
transport truck unloading areas. Con- of LP-Gas, which were in compliance
spicuous signs prohibiting smoking with the current provisions of the Na-
shall be posted within sight of the cus- tional Fire Protection Association
tomer being served. Letters on such Standard for the Storage and Handling
signs shall be not less than 4 inches of Liquefied Petroleum Gases NFPA
high. The motors of all vehicles being No. 58, at the time of manufacture or
fueled shall be shut off during the fuel- installation may be continued in use, if
ing operations. such continued use does not constitute
(13) Electrical. Electrical equipment a recognized hazard that is causing or
and installations shall conform to is likely to cause death or serious
paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this sec- physical harm to employees.
tion. (ii) Stocks of equipment and appli-
(14) Fire protection. Each service sta- ances on hand in such locations as
tion shall be provided with at least one manufacturers’ storage, distribution
approved portable fire extinguisher warehouses, and dealers’ storage and
having at least an 8–B, C, rating. showrooms, which were in compliance
(i) Scope—(1) Application. (i) Para- with the current provisions of the Na-
graph (b) of this section applies to in- tional Fire Protection Association
stallations made in accordance with Standard for the Storage and Handling
the requirements of paragraphs (c), (d), of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, NFPA
(e), (g), and (h) of this section, except No. 58, at the time of manufacture,
as noted in each of those paragraphs.
may be placed in service, if such use
(ii) Paragraphs (c) through (h) of this
does not constitute a recognized hazard
section apply as provided in each of
that is causing or is likely to cause
those paragraphs.
death or serious physical harm to em-
(2) Inapplicability. This section does
ployees.
not apply to:
(i) Marine and pipeline terminals, [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
natural gas processing plants, refin- FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
eries, or tank farms other than those 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 25094,
at industrial sites. June 20, 1990; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR
35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, 9238, Mar. 7,
(ii) LP-Gas refrigerated storage sys-
1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069,
tems; Dec. 14, 2007]
(iii) LP-Gas when used with oxygen.
The requirements of § 1910.253 shall § 1910.111 Storage and handling of an-
apply to such use; hydrous ammonia.
(iv) LP-Gas when used in utility gas
(a) General—(1) Scope. (i) This stand-
plants. The National Fire Protection
ard is intended to apply to the design,
Association Standard for the Storage
construction, location, installation,
and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
and operation of anhydrous ammonia
Gases at Utility Gas Plants, NFPA No.
systems including refrigerated ammo-
59–1968, shall apply to such use;
nia storage systems.
(v) Low-pressure (not in excess of
one-half pound per square inch or 14 (ii) This standard does not apply to:
inches water column) LP-Gas piping (a) Ammonia manufacturing plants.
systems, and the installation and oper- (b) Refrigeration plants where ammo-
ation of residential and commercial ap- nia is used solely as a refrigerant.
pliances including their inlet connec- (2) Definitions. As used in this sec-
tions, supplied through such systems. tion.
For such systems, the National Fire (i) Appurtenances. All devices such as
Protection Association Standard for pumps, compressors, safety relief de-
the Installation of Gas Appliances and vices, liquid-level gaging devices,
Gas Piping, NFPA 54–1969 shall apply. valves and pressure gages.
340
(ii) Cylinder. A container of 1,000 to be safe by a nationally recognized
pounds of water capacity or less con- testing laboratory; or
structed in accordance with Depart- (iii) It is a type which no nationally
ment of Transportation specifications. recognized testing laboratory does, or
(iii) Code. The Boiler and Pressure will undertake to, accept, certify, list,
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired label, or determine to be safe; and such
Pressure Vessels of the American Soci- equipment is inspected or tested by
ety of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)— any Federal, State, municipal, or other
1968. local authority responsible for enforc-
(iv) Container. Includes all vessels, ing occupational safety provisions of a
tanks, cylinders, or spheres used for Federal, State, municipal or other
transportation, storage, or application local law, code, or regulation per-
of anhydrous ammonia. taining to the storage, handling, trans-
(v) DOT. U.S. Department of Trans- port, and use of anhydrous ammonia,
portation. and found to be in compliance with ei-
(vi) Design pressure is identical to the ther the provisions of the American
term Maximum Allowable Working Pres- National Standard for the Storage and
sure used in the Code. Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia,
(vii) Farm vehicle (implement of hus- K61.1, or the Fertilizer Institute Stand-
bandry). A vehicle for use on a farm on ards for the Storage and Handling of
which is mounted a container of not Agricultural Anhydrous Ammonia, M–
over 1,200 gallons water capacity.
1, in effect at the time of installation;
(viii) Filling density. the percent ratio
or
of the weight of the gas in a container
(iv) It is a custom-designed and cus-
to the weight of water at 60 °F. that
the container will hold. tom-built unit, which no nationally
(ix) Gas. Anhydrous ammonia in ei- recognized testing laboratory, or Fed-
ther the gaseous or liquefied state. eral, State, municipal or local author-
(x) Gas masks. Gas masks must be ap- ity responsible for the enforcement of a
proved by the National Institute for Federal, State, municipal, or local law,
Occupational Safety and Health code or regulation pertaining to the
(NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 for use storage, transportation and use of an-
with anhydrous ammonia. hydrous ammonia is willing to under-
(xi) Capacity. Total volume of the take to accept, certify, list, label or de-
container in standard U.S. gallons. termine to be safe, and the employer
(xii) DOT specifications—Regulations has on file a document attesting to its
of the Department of Transportation safe condition following the conduct of
published in 49 CFR Chapter I. appropriate tests. The document shall
(b) Basic rules. This paragraph applies be signed by a registered professional
to all paragraphs of this section unless engineer or other person having special
otherwise noted. training or experience sufficient to per-
(1) Approval of equipment and systems. mit him to form an opinion as to safety
Each appurtenance shall be approved in of the unit involved. The document
accordance with paragraph (b)(1) (i), shall set forth the test bases, test data
(ii), (iii), or (iv) of this section. and results, and also the qualifications
(i) It was installed before February 8, of the certifying person.
1973, and was approved, tested, and in- (v) For the purposes of this para-
stalled in accordance with either the graph (b)(1), the word listed means that
provisions of the American National equipment is of a kind mentioned in a
Standard for the Storage and Handling list which is published by a nationally
of Anhydrous Ammonia, K61.1, or the recognized laboratory which makes
Fertilizer Institute Standards for the periodic inspection of the production of
Storage and Handling of Agricultural such equipment, and states such equip-
Anhydrous Ammonia, M–1, (both of ment meets nationally recognized
which are incorporated by reference as standards or has been tested and found
specified in § 1910.6) in effect at the safe for use in a specified manner. La-
time of installation; or beled means there is attached to it a
(ii) It is accepted, or certified, or list- label, symbol, or other identifying
ed, or labeled, or otherwise determined mark of a nationally recognized testing
341
laboratory which, makes periodic instructed and maintained in accordance
spections of the production of such with the 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and
equipment, and whose labeling indi- 1962 editions of the Code or any revi-
cates compliance with nationally rec- sions thereof in effect at the time of
ognized standards or tests to determine fabrication.
safe use in a specified manner. Certified (3) Marking nonrefrigerated containers.
means it has been tested and found by (i) System nameplates, when required,
a nationally recognized testing labora- shall be permanently attached to the
tory to meet nationally recognized system so as to be readily accessible
standards or to be safe for use in a for inspection and shall include mark-
specified manner, or is of a kind whose ings as prescribed in subdivision (ii) of
production is periodically inspected by this subparagraph.
a nationally recognized testing labora- (ii) Each container or system covered
tory, and it bears a label, tag, or other in paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this
record of certification. section shall be marked as specified in
(vi) For the purposes of this para- the following:
graph (b)(1), refer to § 1910.7 for defini- (a) With a notation ‘‘Anhydrous Am-
tion of nationally recognized testing monia.’’
laboratory. (b) With a marking identifying com-
(2) Requirements for construction, origi- pliance with the rules of the Code
nal test and requalification of nonrefrig- under which the container is con-
erated containers. (i) Containers used structed.
with systems covered in paragraphs (c), Under ground: Container and system name-
(f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be plate.
constructed and tested in accordance Above ground: Container.
with the Code except that construction
(c) With a notation whether the sys-
under Table UW12 at a basic joint effi-
tem is designed for underground or
ciency of under 80 percent is not au-
aboveground installation or both.
thorized.
(d) With the name and address of the
(ii) Containers built according to the
supplier of the system or the trade
Code do not have to comply with Para-
name of the system and with the date
graphs UG125 to UG128 inclusive, and
of fabrication.
Paragraphs UG132 and UG133 of the
Code. Under ground and above ground: System
(iii) Containers exceeding 36 inches in nameplate.
diameter or 250 gallons water capacity (e) With the water capacity of the
shall be constructed to comply with container in pounds at 60 °F. or gal-
one or more of the following: lons, U.S. Standard.
(a) Containers shall be stress relieved
after fabrication in accordance with Under ground: Container and system name-
plate.
the Code, or Above ground: Container.
(b) Cold-form heads when used, shall
be stress relieved, or (f) With the design pressure in pounds
(c) Hot-formed heads shall be used. per square inch.
(iv) Welding to the shell, head, or any Under ground: Container and system name-
other part of the container subject to plate.
internal pressure shall be done in com- Above ground: Container.
pliance with the Code. Other welding is (g) With the wall thickness of the
permitted only on saddle plates, lugs, shell and heads.
or brackets attached to the container
by the container manufacturer. Under ground: Container and system name-
(v) Containers used with systems cov- plate.
Above ground: Container.
ered in paragraph (e) of this section
shall be constructed and tested in ac- (h) With marking indicating the
cordance with the DOT specifications. maximum level to which the container
(vi) The provisions of subdivision (i) may be filled with liquid anhydrous
of this subparagraph shall not be con- ammonia at temperatures between 20
strued as prohibiting the continued use °F. and 130 °F. except on containers
or reinstallation of containers con- provided with fixed level indicators,
342
such as fixed length dip tubes, or con- less than the maximum working pres-
tainers that are filled with weight. sure of that portion of the system on
Markings shall be in increments of not which they are installed. All appur-
more than 20 °F. tenances shall be fabricated from ma-
Above ground and under ground: System terials proved suitable for anhydrous
nameplate or on liquid-level gaging device. ammonia service.
(ii) All connections to containers ex-
(i) With the total outside surface area
cept safety relief devices, gaging de-
of the container in square feet.
vices, or those fitted with No. 54 drill-
Under ground: System nameplate. size orifice shall have shutoff valves lo-
Above ground: No requirement. cated as close to the container as prac-
(j) Marking specified on the con- ticable.
tainer shall be on the container itself (iii) Excess flow valves where re-
or on a nameplate permanently at- quired by these standards shall close
tached to it. automatically at the rated flows of
(4) Marking refrigerated containers. vapor or liquid as specified by the man-
Each refrigerated container shall be ufacturer. The connections and line in-
marked with nameplate on the outer cluding valves and fittings being pro-
covering in an accessible place as spec- tected by an excess flow valve shall
ified in the following: have a greater capacity than the rated
(i) With the notation, ‘‘Anhydrous flow of the excess flow valve so that
Ammonia.’’ the valve will close in case of failure of
(ii) With the name and address of the the line or fittings.
builder and the date of fabrication. (iv) Liquid-level gaging devices that
(iii) With the water capacity of the require bleeding of the product to the
container in gallons, U.S. Standard. atmosphere and which are so con-
(iv) With the design pressure. structed that outward flow will not ex-
(v) With the minimum temperature ceed that passed by a No. 54 drill-size
in degrees Fahrenheit for which the opening need not be equipped with ex-
container was designed. cess flow valves.
(vi) The maximum allowable water
(v) Openings from the container or
level to which the container may be
through fittings attached directly on
filled for test purposes.
the container to which pressure gage
(vii) With the density of the product
connections are made need not be
in pounds per cubic foot for which the
container was designed. equipped with excess flow valves if
(viii) With the maximum level to such openings are not larger than No.
which the container may be filled with 54 drill size.
liquid anhydrous ammonia. (vi) Excess flow and back pressure
(5) Location of containers. (i) Consider- check valves where required by the
ation shall be given to the physio- standards in this section shall be lo-
logical effects of ammonia as well as to cated inside of the container or at a
adjacent fire hazards in selecting the point outside as close as practicable to
location for a storage container. Con- where the line enters the container. In
tainers shall be located outside of the latter case installation shall be
buildings or in buildings or sections made in such manner that any undue
thereof especially provided for this strain beyond the excess flow or back
purpose. pressure check valve will not cause
(ii) Permanent storage containers breakage between the container and
shall be located at least 50 feet from a the valve.
dug well or other sources of potable (vii) Excess flow valves shall be de-
water supply, unless the container is a signed with a bypass, not to exceed a
part of a water-treatment installation. No. 60 drill-size opening to allow
(iii)–(iv) [Reserved] equalization of pressures.
(v) Storage areas shall be kept free of (viii) All excess flow valves shall be
readily ignitible materials such as plainly and permanently marked with
waste, weeds, and long dry grass. the name or trademark of the manufac-
(6) Container appurtenances. (i) All ap- turer, the catalog number, and the
purtenances shall be designed for not rated capacity.
343
(7) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (i) All control of pressure-reducing valves
piping, tubing, and fittings shall be shall be designed for a bursting pres-
made of material suitable for anhy- sure of not less than 5 times the pres-
drous ammonia service. sure setting of the safety relief devices
(ii) All piping, tubing, and fittings protecting that portion of the system
shall be designed for a pressure not less but not less than 125 p.s.i.g. All connec-
than the maximum pressure to which tions shall be so designed and con-
they may be subjected in service. structed that there will be no leakage
(iii) All refrigerated piping shall con- when connected.
form to the Refrigeration Piping Code, (iv) Where hose is to be used for
American National Standards Insti- transferring liquid from one container
tute, B31.5–1966 with addenda B31.1a– to another, ‘‘wet’’ hose is rec-
1968, which is incorporated by reference ommended. Such hose shall be
as specified in § 1910.6, as it applies to equipped with approved shutoff valves
ammonia. at the discharge end. Provision shall be
(iv) Piping used on non-refrigerated made to prevent excessive pressure in
systems shall be at least American So- the hose.
ciety for Testing and Materials (v) On all hose one-half inch outside
(ASTM) A–53–69 Grade B Electric Re- diameter and larger, used for the trans-
sistance Welded and Electric Flash fer of anhydrous ammonia liquid or
Welded Pipe, which is incorporated by vapor, there shall be etched, cast, or
reference as specified in § 1910.6, or impressed at 5-foot intervals the fol-
equal. Such pipe shall be at least lowing information.
schedule 40 when joints are welded, or ‘‘Anhydrous Ammonia’’ xxx p.s.i.g. (max-
welded and flanged. Such pipe shall be imum working pressure), manufacturer’s
at least schedule 80 when joints are name or trademark, year of manufac-
threaded. Threaded connections shall ture.
not be back-welded. Brass, copper, or
galvanized steel pipe shall not be used. In lieu of this requirement the same in-
(v) Tubing made of brass, copper, or formation may be contained on a
other material subject to attack by nameplate permanently attached to
ammonia shall not be used. the hose.
(vi) Cast iron fittings shall not be
TABLE H–36
used but this shall not prohibit the use
[Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute
of fittings made specifically for ammo- of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis-
nia service of malleable, nodular, or charge pressure of safety relief valves]
high strength gray iron meeting Amer- Flow rate
ican Society for Testing and Materials Surface area (sq. ft.)
CFM air
(ASTM) A47–68, ASTM 395–68, or ASTM
20 ......................................................................... 258
A126–66 Class B or C all of which are in- 25 ......................................................................... 310
corporated by reference as specified in 30 ......................................................................... 360
§ 1910.6. 35 ......................................................................... 408
40 ......................................................................... 455
(vii) Joint compounds shall be resist- 45 ......................................................................... 501
ant to ammonia. 50 ......................................................................... 547
(8) Hose specifications. (i) Hose used in 55 ......................................................................... 591
ammonia service shall conform to the 60 ......................................................................... 635
65 ......................................................................... 678
joint Agricultural Ammonia Insti- 70 ......................................................................... 720
tute—Rubber Manufacturers Associa- 75 ......................................................................... 762
tion Specifications for Anhydrous Am- 80 ......................................................................... 804
85 ......................................................................... 845
monia Hose. 90 ......................................................................... 885
(ii) Hose subject to container pres- 95 ......................................................................... 925
sure shall be designed for a minimum 100 ....................................................................... 965
working pressure of 350 p.s.i.g. and a 105 ....................................................................... 1,010
110 ....................................................................... 1,050
minimum burst pressure of 1,750 p.s.i.g. 115 ....................................................................... 1,090
Hose assemblies, when made up, shall 120 ....................................................................... 1,120
be capable of withstanding a test pres- 125 ....................................................................... 1,160
130 ....................................................................... 1,200
sure of 500 p.s.i.g. 135 ....................................................................... 1,240
(iii) Hose and hose connections lo- 140 ....................................................................... 1,280
cated on the low-pressure side of flow 145 ....................................................................... 1,310
344
TABLE H–36—Continued TABLE H–36—Continued
[Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute [Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute
of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis- of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis-
charge pressure of safety relief valves] charge pressure of safety relief valves]
Flow rate Flow rate

Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air Surface area (sq. ft.)
CFM air
150 ....................................................................... 1,350 2,300 .................................................................... 12,630

155 ....................................................................... 1,390 2,350 .................................................................... 12,850
160 ....................................................................... 1,420 2,400 .................................................................... 13,080
165 ....................................................................... 1,460
2,450 .................................................................... 13,300
170 ....................................................................... 1,500
175 ....................................................................... 1,530 2,500 .................................................................... 13,520
180 ....................................................................... 1,570
185 ....................................................................... 1,600
190 ....................................................................... 1,640 Surface Area=total outside surface area of
195 ....................................................................... 1,670 container in square feet. When the surface
200 ....................................................................... 1,710 area is not stamped on the nameplate or
210 ....................................................................... 1,780 when the marking is not legible the area can
220 ....................................................................... 1,850
230 ....................................................................... 1,920 be calculated by using one of the following
240 ....................................................................... 1,980 formulas:
250 ....................................................................... 2,050 (1) Cylindrical container with hemi-
260 ....................................................................... 2,120 spherical heads:
270 ....................................................................... 2,180
280 ....................................................................... 2,250 Area=overall length in feet times outside di-
290 ....................................................................... 2,320 ameter in feet times 3.1416.
300 ....................................................................... 2,380
310 ....................................................................... 2,450 (2) Cylindrical container with other than
320 ....................................................................... 2,510 hemispherical heads:
330 ....................................................................... 2,570 Area=(overall length in feet plus 0.3 outside
340 ....................................................................... 2,640
350 ....................................................................... 2,700
diameter in feet) times outside diameter
360 ....................................................................... 2,760 in feet times 3.1416.
370 ....................................................................... 2,830 (3) Spherical container:
380 ....................................................................... 2,890
390 ....................................................................... 2,950 Area=outside diameter in feet squared times
400 ....................................................................... 3,010 3.1416.
450 ....................................................................... 3,320
500 ....................................................................... 3,620
Flow Rate—CFM Air=cubic feet per minute
550 ....................................................................... 3,910 of air required at standard conditions, 60 °F.
600 ....................................................................... 4,200 and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.).
650 ....................................................................... 4,480 The rate of discharge may be interpolated
700 ....................................................................... 4,760 for intermediate values of surface area. For
750 ....................................................................... 5,040
800 ....................................................................... 5,300 containers with total outside surface area
850 ....................................................................... 5,590 greater than 2,500 square feet, the required
900 ....................................................................... 5,850 flow rate can be calculated using the for-
950 ....................................................................... 6,120 mula: Flow Rate CFM Air=22.11 A0 82, where
1,000 .................................................................... 6,380 A=outside surface area of the container in
1,050 .................................................................... 6,640
1,100 .................................................................... 6,900 square feet.
1,150 .................................................................... 7,160
1,200 .................................................................... 7,410 (9) Safety relief devices. (i) Every con-
1,250 .................................................................... 7,660 tainer used in systems covered by para-
1,300 .................................................................... 7,910 graphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this sec-
1,350 .................................................................... 8,160
1,400 .................................................................... 8,410 tion shall be provided with one or more
1,450 .................................................................... 8,650 safety relief valves of the spring-loaded
1,500 .................................................................... 8,900 or equivalent type. The discharge from
1,550 .................................................................... 9,140
1,600 .................................................................... 9,380 safety-relief valves shall be vented
1,650 .................................................................... 9,620 away from the container upward and
1,700 .................................................................... 9,860 unobstructed to the atmosphere. All
1,750 .................................................................... 10,090
1,800 .................................................................... 10,330 relief-valve discharge openings shall
1,850 .................................................................... 10,560 have suitable rain caps that will allow
1,900 .................................................................... 10,800 free discharge of the vapor and prevent
1,950 .................................................................... 11,030
2,000 .................................................................... 11,260 entrance of water. Provision shall be
2,050 .................................................................... 11,490 made for draining condensate which
2,100 .................................................................... 11,720 may accumulate. The rate of the dis-
2,150 .................................................................... 11,950
2,200 .................................................................... 12,180 charge shall be in accordance with the
2,250 .................................................................... 12,400 provisions of Table H–36.
345
(ii) Container safety-relief valves sions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph)
shall be set to start-to-discharge as fol- is 4,050 cubic feet per minute of air.
lows, with relation to the design pres- (viii) The flow capacity of the relief
sure of the container: valve shall not be restricted by any
Minimum Maximum
connection to it on either the upstream
Containers (percent) (percent) or downstream side.
(ix) A hydrostatic relief valve shall
ASME-U–68, U–69 ........................ 110 125
ASME-U–200, U–201 .................... 95 100 be installed between each pair of valves
ASME 1959, 1956, 1952, or 1962 95 100 in the liquid ammonia piping or hose
API-ASME ..................................... 95 100 where liquid may be trapped so as to
U.S. Coast Guard .......................... 95 100
relieve into the atmosphere at a safe
location.
As required by DOT Regulations. (10) General.
(iii) Safety relief devices used in sys-
(i) [Reserved]
tems covered by paragraphs (c), (f), (g),
and (h) of this section shall be con- (ii) Stationary storage installations
structed to discharge at not less than must have at least two suitable gas
the rates required in paragraph (b)(9)(i) masks in readily-accessible locations.
of this section before the pressure is in Full-face masks with ammonia can-
excess of 120 percent (not including the isters that have been approved by
10 percent tolerance referred to in NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 are suit-
paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section) of able for emergency action involving
the maximum permitted start-to-dis- most anhydrous ammonia leaks, par-
charge pressure setting of the device. ticularly leaks that occur outdoors.
(iv) Safety-relief valves shall be so For respiratory protection in con-
arranged that the possibility of tam- centrated ammonia atmospheres, a
pering will be minimized. If the pres- self-contained breathing apparatus is
sure setting adjustment is external, required.
the relief valves shall be provided with (iii) Stationary storage installations
means for sealing the adjustment. shall have an easily accessible shower
(v) Shutoff valves shall not be in- or a 50-gallon drum of water.
stalled between the safety-relief valves (iv) Each vehicle transporting ammo-
and the container; except, that a shut- nia in bulk except farm applicator ve-
off valve may be used where the ar- hicles shall carry a container of at
rangement of this valve is such as al- least 5 gallons of water and shall be
ways to afford full required capacity equipped with a full face mask.
flow through the relief valves. (11) Charging of containers. (i) The fill-
(vi) Safety-relief valves shall have di- ing densities for containers that are
rect communication with the vapor not refrigerated shall not exceed the
space of the container. following:
(vii) Each container safety-relief
Percent by Percent by
valve used with systems covered by Type of container
weight volume
paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this
section shall be plainly and perma- Aboveground-Uninsulated ............. 56 82
Aboveground-Uninsulated ............. .................. 87.5
nently marked with the symbol ‘‘NH3’’
Aboveground-Insulated ................. 57 83.5
or ‘‘AA’’; with the pressure in pounds- Underground-Uninsulated ............. 58 85
per-square-inch gage at which the DOT—In accord with DOT regula-
valve is set to start-to-discharge; with tions..
the actual rate of discharge of the
valve at its full open position in cubic (ii) Aboveground uninsulated con-
feet per minute of air at 60 °F. and at- tainers may be charged 87.5 percent by
mospheric pressure; and with the man- volume provided the temperature of
ufacturer’s name and catalog number. the anhydrous ammonia being charged
Example: ‘‘NH3 250–4050 Air’’ indicates is determined to be not lower than 30
that the valve is suitable for use on an °F. or provided the charging of the con-
anhydrous ammonia container, is set tainer is stopped at the first indication
to start-to-discharge at a pressure of of frost or ice formation on its outside
250 p.s.i.g., and that its rate of dis- surface and is not resumed until such
charge at full open position (subdivi- frost or ice has disappeared.
346
(12) Transfer of liquids. (i) Anhydrous the compressor suction to minimize
ammonia shall always be at a tempera- the entry of liquid into the compressor.
ture suitable for the material of con- (vii) Loading and unloading systems
struction and the design of the receiv- shall be protected by suitable devices
ing container. to prevent emptying of the storage
(ii) The employer shall require the container or the container being loaded
continuous presence of an attendant in or unloaded in the event of severance
the vicinity of the operation during of the hose. Backflow check valves or
such time as ammonia is being trans- properly sized excess flow valves shall
ferred. be installed where necessary to provide
(iii) Containers shall be charged or such protection. In the event that such
used only upon authorization of the valves are not practical, remotely op-
owner. erated shutoff valves may be installed.
(iv) Containers shall be gaged and (13) Tank car unloading points and op-
charged only in the open atmosphere or erations. (i) Provisions for unloading
in buildings or areas thereof provided tank cars shall conform to the applica-
for that purpose. ble recommendations contained in the
(v) Pumps used for transferring am- DOT regulations.
monia shall be those manufactured for (ii) The employer shall insure that
that purpose. unloading operations are performed by
(a) Pumps shall be designed for at reliable persons properly instructed
least 250 p.s.i.g. working pressure. and given the authority to monitor
(b) Positive displacement pumps careful compliance with all applicable
shall have, installed off the discharged procedures.
port, a constant differential relief (iii) Caution signs shall be so placed
valve discharging into the suction port on the track or car as to give necessary
of the pump through a line of sufficient warning to persons approaching the car
size to carry the full capacity of the from open end or ends of siding and
pump at relief valve setting, which set- shall be left up until after the car is
ting and installation shall be according unloaded and disconnected from dis-
to the pump manufacturer’s rec- charge connections. Signs shall be of
ommendations. metal or other suitable material, at
(c) On the discharge side of the pump, least 12 by 15 inches in size and bear
before the relief valve line, there shall the words ‘‘STOP—Tank Car Con-
be installed a pressure gage graduated nected’’ or ‘‘STOP—Men at Work’’ the
from 0 to 400 p.s.i. word, ‘‘STOP,’’ being in letters at least
(d) Plant piping shall contain shutoff 4 inches high and the other words in
valves located as close as practical to letters at least 2 inches high.
pump connections. (iv) The track of a tank car siding
(vi) Compressors used for transfer- shall be substantially level.
ring or refrigerating ammonia shall be (v) Brakes shall be set and wheels
recommended for ammonia service by blocked on all cars being unloaded.
the manufacturer. (14) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each
(a) Compressors shall be designed for container except those filled by weight
at least 250 p.s.i.g. working pressure. shall be equipped with an approved liq-
(b) Plant piping shall contain shutoff uid-level gaging device. A thermometer
valves located as close as practical to well shall be provided in all containers
compressor connections. not utilizing a fixed liquid-level gaging
(c) A relief valve large enough to dis- device.
charge the full capacity of the com- (ii) All gaging devices shall be ar-
pressor shall be connected to the dis- ranged so that the maximum liquid
charge before any shutoff valve. level to which the container is filled is
(d) Compressors shall have pressure readily determined.
gages at suction and discharge grad- (iii) Gaging devices that require
uated to at least one and one-half bleeding of the product to the atmos-
times the maximum pressure that can phere such as the rotary tube, fixed
be developed. tube, and slip tube devices shall be de-
(e) Adequate means, such as drain- signed so that the maximum opening of
able liquid trap, shall be provided on the bleed valve is not larger than No.
347
54 drill size unless provided with an ex- provided with orifices not larger than
cess flow valve. (This requirement does No. 54 drill size as required in para-
not apply to farm vehicles used for the graphs (b)(6) (iv) and (v) of this section
application of ammonia as covered in shall be equipped with excess-flow
paragraph (h) of this section.) valves.
(iv) Gaging devices shall have a de- (iii) Each storage container shall be
sign pressure equal to or greater than provided with a pressure gage grad-
the design pressure of the container on uated from 0 to 400 p.s.i. Gages shall be
which they are installed. designated for use in ammonia service.
(v) Fixed tube liquid-level gages shall (iv) All containers shall be equipped
be designed and installed to indicate with vapor return valves.
that level at which the container is (3) Safety-relief devices. (i) Every con-
filled to 85 percent of its water capac- tainer shall be provided with one or
ity in gallons. more safety-relief valves of the spring-
(vi) Gage glasses of the columnar loaded or equivalent type in accord-
type shall be restricted to stationary ance with paragraph (b)(9) of this sec-
storage installations. They shall be tion.
equipped with shutoff valves having (ii) The rate of discharge of spring-
metallic handwheels, with excess-flow loaded safety relief valves installed on
valves, and with extra heavy glass ade- underground containers may be re-
quately protected with a metal housing duced to a minimum of 30 percent of
applied by the gage manufacturer. the rate of discharge specified in Table
They shall be shielded against the di- H–36. Containers so protected shall not
rect rays of the sun. be uncovered after installation until
(15) [Reserved] the liquid ammonia has been removed.
(16) Electrical equipment and wiring. (i) Containers which may contain liquid
Electrical equipment and wiring for ammonia before being installed under-
use in ammonia installations shall be ground and before being completely
general purpose or weather resistant as covered with earth are to be considered
appropriate. aboveground containers when deter-
(ii) Electrical systems shall be in- mining the rate of discharge require-
stalled and maintained in accordance ments of the safety-relief valves.
with subpart S of this part. (iii) On underground installations
(c) Systems utilizing stationary, non- where there is a probability of the
refrigerated storage containers. This manhole or housing becoming flooded,
paragraph applies to stationary, non- the discharge from vent lines shall be
refrigerated storage installations uti- located above the high water level. All
lizing containers other than those cov- manholes or housings shall be provided
ered in paragraph (e) of this section. with ventilated louvers or their equiva-
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to lent, the area of such openings equal-
this paragraph unless otherwise noted. ling or exceeding combined discharge
(1) Design pressure and construction of areas of safety-relief valves and vent
containers. The minimum design pres- lines which discharge their content
sure for nonrefrigerated containers into the manhole housing.
shall be 250 p.s.i.g. (iv) Vent pipes, when used, shall not
(2) Container valves and accessories, be restricted or of smaller diameter
filling and discharge connections. (i) than the relief-valve outlet connection.
Each filling connection shall be pro- (v) If desired, vent pipes from two or
vided with combination back-pressure more safety-relief devices located on
check valve and excess-flow valve; one the same unit, or similar lines from
double or two single back-pressure two or more different units may be run
check valves; or a positive shutoff into a common discharge header, pro-
valve in conjunction with either an in- vided the capacity of such header is at
ternal back-pressure check valve or an least equal to the sum of the capacities
internal excess flow valve. of the individual discharge lines.
(ii) All liquid and vapor connections (4) Reinstallation of containers. (i) Con-
to containers except filling pipes, safe- tainers once installed under ground
ty relief connections, and liquid-level shall not later be reinstalled above
gaging and pressure gage connections ground or under ground, unless they
348
successfully withstand hydrostatic in the industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall
pressure retests at the pressure speci- be designed and constructed in accord-
fied for the original hydrostatic test as ance with paragraph (c)(1) of this sec-
required by the code under which con- tion.
structed and show no evidence of seri- (vi) Secure anchorage or adequate
ous corrosion. pier height shall be provided against
(ii) Where containers are reinstalled container flotation wherever suffi-
above ground, safety devices or gaging ciently high flood water might occur.
devices shall comply with paragraph (vii) The distance between under-
(b)(9) of this section and this paragraph ground containers of over 2,000 gallons
respectively for aboveground con- capacity shall be at least 5 feet.
tainers. (6) Protection of appurtenances. (i)
(5) Installation of storage containers. (i) Valves, regulating, gaging, and other
Containers installed above ground, ex- appurtenances shall be protected
cept as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(v) against tampering and physical dam-
of this section shall be provided with age. Such appurtenances shall also be
substantial concrete or masonry sup- protected during transit of containers.
ports, or structural steel supports on
(ii) All connections to underground
firm concrete or masonry foundations.
containers shall be located within a
All foundations shall extend below the
dome, housing, or manhole and with
frost line.
access thereto by means of a substan-
(ii) Horizontal aboveground con-
tial cover.
tainers shall be so mounted on founda-
tions as to permit expansion and con- (7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution
traction. Every container shall be sup- shall be taken against damage to am-
ported to prevent the concentration of monia systems from vehicles.
excessive loads on the supporting por- (d) Refrigerated storage systems. This
tion of the shell. That portion of the paragraph applies to systems utilizing
container in contact with foundations containers with the storage of anhy-
or saddles shall be protected against drous ammonia under refrigerated con-
corrosion. ditions. All applicable rules of para-
(iii) Containers installed under graph (b) of this section apply to this
ground shall be so placed that the top paragraph unless otherwise noted.
of the container is below the frost line (1) Design of containers. (i) The design
and in no case less than 2 feet below temperature shall be the minimum
the surface of the ground. Should temperature to which the container
ground conditions make compliance will be refrigerated.
with these requirements impracticable, (ii) Containers with a design pressure
installation shall be made otherwise to exceeding 15 p.s.i.g. shall be con-
prevent physical damage. It will not be structed in accordance with paragraph
necessary to cover the portion of the (b)(2) of this section, and the materials
container to which manhole and other shall be selected from those listed in
connections are affixed. When nec- API Standard 620, Recommended Rules
essary to prevent floating, containers for Design and Construction of Large,
shall be securely anchored or weighted. Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks,
(iv) Underground containers shall be Fourth Edition, 1970, Tables 2.02, R2.2,
set on a firm foundation (firm earth R2.2(A), R2.2.1, or R2.3 which are incor-
may be used) and surrounded with porated by reference as specified in
earth or sand well tamped in place. The § 1910.6.
container, prior to being placed under (iii) Containers with a design pres-
ground, shall be given a corrosion re- sure of 15 p.s.i.g. and less shall be con-
sisting protective coating. The constructed in accordance with the appli-
tainer thus coated shall be so lowered cable requirements of API Standard 620
into place as to prevent abrasion or including its appendix R.
other damage to the coating. (iv) When austenitic steels or non-
(v) Containers with foundations at- ferrous materials are used, the Code
tached (portable or semiportable tank shall be used as a guide in the selection
containers with suitable steel ‘‘run- of materials for use at the design tem-
ners’’ or ‘‘skids’’ and commonly known perature.
349
(v) The filling density for refrig- posure is greater than that required by
erated storage containers shall be such (a) of this subdivision, the additional
that the container will not be liquid capacity may be provided by weak roof
full at a liquid temperature cor- to shell seams in containers operating
responding to the vapor pressure at the at essentially atmospheric pressure
start-to-discharge pressure setting of and having an inherently weak roof-to-
the safety-relief valve. shell seam. The weak roof-to-shell
(2) Installation of refrigerated storage seam is not to be considered as pro-
containers. (i) Containers shall be sup- viding any of the capacity required in
ported on suitable noncombustible (a) of this subdivision.
foundations designed to accommodate (iii) If vent lines are installed to con-
the type of container being used. duct the vapors from the relief valve,
(ii) Adequate protection against flo- the back pressure under full relieving
tation or other water damage shall be conditions shall not exceed 50 percent
provided wherever high flood water of the start-to-discharge pressure for
might occur. pressure balanced valves or 10 percent
(iii) Containers for product storage at of the start-to-discharge pressure for
less than 32 °F. shall be supported in conventional valves. The vent lines
such a way, or heat shall be supplied, shall be installed to prevent accumula-
to prevent the effects of freezing and tion of liquid in the lines.
consequent frost heaving. (iv) The valve or valve installation
(3) Shutoff valves. When operating shall provide weather protection.
conditions make it advisable, a check (v) Atmospheric storage shall be pro-
valve shall be installed on the fill con- vided with vacuum breakers. Ammonia
nection and a remotely operated shut- gas, nitrogen, methane, or other inert
off valve on other connections located gases can be used to provide a pad.
below the maximum liquid level.
(5) Protection of container appur-
(4) Safety relief devices. (i) Safety re-
tenances. Appurtenances shall be pro-
lief valves shall be set to start-to-dis-
tected against tampering and physical
charge at a pressure not in excess of
damage.
the design pressure of the container
and shall have a total relieving capac- (6) Reinstallation of refrigerated storage
ity sufficient to prevent a maximum containers. Containers of such size as to
pressure in the container of more than require field fabrication shall, when
120 percent of the design pressure. Re- moved and reinstalled, be recon-
lief valves for refrigerated storage constructed and reinspected in complete
tainers shall be self-contained spring- accordance with the requirements
loaded, weight-loaded, or self-con- under which they were constructed.
tained pilot-operated type. The containers shall be subjected to a
(ii) The total relieving capacity shall pressure retest and if rerating is nec-
be the larger of: essary, rerating shall be in accordance
(a) Possible refrigeration system with applicable requirements.
upset such as (1) cooling water failure, (7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution
(2) power failure, (3) instrument air or shall be taken against damage from ve-
instrument failure, (4) mechanical fail- hicles.
ure of any equipment, (5) excessive (8) Refrigeration load and equipment.
pumping rates. (i) The total refrigeration load shall be
(b) Fire exposure determined in ac- computed as the sum of the following:
cordance with Compressed Gas Associa- (a) Load imposed by heat flow into
tion (CGA) S–1, part 3, Safety Relief the container caused by the tempera-
Device Standards for Compressed Gas ture differential between design ambi-
Storage Containers, 1959, which is in- ent temperature and storage tempera-
corporated by reference as specified in ture.
§ 1910.6, except that ‘‘A’’ shall be the (b) Load imposed by heat flow into
total exposed surface area in square the container caused by maximum sun
feet up to 25 foot above grade or to the radiation.
equator of the storage container if it is (c) Maximum load imposed by filling
a sphere, whichever is greater. If the the container with ammonia warmer
relieving capacity required for fire ex- than the design storage temperature.
350
(ii) More than one storage container be equipped with a drain and gaging de-
may be handled by the same refrigera- vice.
tion system. (ii) [Reserved]
(9) Compressors. (i) A minimum of two (13) Condensers. The condenser sys-
compressors shall be provided either of tem may be cooled by air or water or
which shall be of sufficient size to han- both. The condenser shall be designed
dle the loads listed in paragraphs for at least 250 p.s.i.g. Provision shall
(d)(8)(i) (a) and (b) of this section. be made for purging noncondensibles
Where more than two compressors are either manually or automatically.
provided minimum standby equipment (14) Receiver and liquid drain. A re-
equal to the largest normally operating ceiver shall be provided with a liquid-
equipment shall be installed. Filling level control to discharge the liquid
compressors may be used as standby ammonia to storage. The receiver shall
equipment for holding compressors. be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. and
(ii) Compressors shall be sized to op- be equipped with the necessary connec-
erate with a suction pressure at least tions, safety valves, and gaging device.
10 percent below the minimum setting (15) Insulation. Refrigerated con-
of the safety valve(s) on the storage tainers and pipelines which are insu-
container and shall withstand a suc- lated shall be covered with a material
tion pressure at least equal to 120 per- of suitable quality and thickness for
cent of the design pressure of the con- the temperatures encountered. Insula-
tainer. tion shall be suitably supported and
protected against the weather. Weath-
(10) Compressor drives. (i) Each com-
erproofing shall be of a type which will
pressor shall have its individual driv-
not support flame propagation.
ing unit.
(e) Systems utilizing portable DOT con-
(ii) An emergency source of power of
tainers—(1) Conformance. Cylinders
sufficient capacity to handle the loads
shall comply with DOT specifications
listed in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) (a) and (b)
and shall be maintained, filled, pack-
of this section shall be provided unless
aged, marked, labeled, and shipped to
facilities are available to safely dispose
comply with 49 CFR chapter I and the
of vented vapors while the refrigera-
marking requirements set forth in
tion system is not operating.
§ 1910.253(b)(1)(ii).
(11) Automatic control equipment. (i) (2) Storage. Cylinders shall be stored
The refrigeration system shall be ar- in an area free from ignitable debris
ranged with suitable controls to govern and in such manner as to prevent ex-
the compressor operation in accord- ternal corrosion. Storage may be in-
ance with the load as evidenced by the doors or outdoors.
pressure in the container(s). (3) Heat protection. Cylinders filled in
(ii) An emergency alarm system shall accordance with DOT regulations will
be installed to function in the event become liquid full at 145 °F. Cylinders
the pressure in the container(s) rises to shall be protected from heat sources
the maximum allowable operating such as radiant flame and steampipes.
pressure. Heat shall not be applied directly to
(iii) An emergency alarm and shutoff cylinders to raise the pressure.
shall be located in the condenser sys- (4) Protection. Cylinders shall be
tem to respond to excess discharge stored in such manner as to protect
pressure caused by failure of the cool- them from moving vehicles or external
ing medium. damage.
(iv) All automatic controls shall be (5) Valve cap. Any cylinder which is
installed in a manner to preclude oper- designed to have a valve protection cap
ation of alternate compressors unless shall have the cap securely in place
the controls will function with the al- when the cylinder is not in service.
ternate compressors. (f) Tank motor vehicles for the transpor-
(12) Separators for compressors. (i) An tation of ammonia. (1) This paragraph
entrainment separator of suitable size applies to containers and pertinent
and design pressure shall be installed equipment mounted on tank motor ve-
in the compressor suction line of lubri- hicles including semitrailers and full
cated compression. The separator shall trailers used for the transportation of
351
ammonia. This paragraph does not space) or with an approved vapor re-
apply to farm vehicles. For require- turn valve of adequate capacity.
ments covering farm vehicles, refer to (4) Piping and fittings. (i) All piping,
paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section. tubing, and fittings shall be securely
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to mounted and protected against dam-
this paragraph unless otherwise noted. age. Means shall be provided to protect
Containers and pertinent equipment hoses while the vehicle is in motion.
for tank motor vehicles for the trans- (ii) Fittings shall comply with para-
portation of anhydrous ammonia, in graph (b)(6) of this section. Pipe shall
addition to complying with the re- be Schedule 80.
quirements of this section, shall also (5) Safety relief devices. (i) The dis-
comply with the requirements of DOT. charge from safety relief valves shall
be vented away from the container up-
(2) Design pressure and construction of
ward and unobstructed to the open air
containers. (i) The minimum design
in such a manner as to prevent any im-
pressure for containers shall be that
pingement of escaping gas upon the
specified in the regulations of the DOT.
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall
(ii) The shell or head thickness of be used. Size of discharge lines from
any container shall not be less than safety valves shall not be smaller than
three-sixteenth inch. the nominal size of the safety-relief
(iii) All container openings, except valve outlet connection. Suitable pro-
safety relief valves, liquid-level gaging vision shall be made for draining con-
devices, and pressure gages, shall be la- densate which may accumulate in the
beled to designate whether they com- discharge pipe.
municate with liquid or vapor space. (ii) Any portion of liquid ammonia
(3) Container appurtenances. (i) All ap- piping which at any time may be closed
purtenances shall be protected against at both ends shall be provided with a
physical damage. hydrostatic relief valve.
(ii) All connections to containers, ex- (6) Transfer of liquids. (i) The content
cept filling connections, safety relief of tank motor vehicle containers shall
devices, and liquid-level and pressure be determined by weight, by a suitable
gage connections, shall be provided liquid-level gaging device, or other ap-
with suitable automatic excess flow proved methods. If the content of a
valves, or in lieu thereof, may be fitted container is to be determined by liq-
with quick-closing internal valves, uid-level measurement, the container
which shall remain closed except dur- shall have a thermometer well so that
ing delivery operations. The control the internal liquid temperature can be
mechanism for such valves may be pro- easily determined. This volume when
vided with a secondary control remote converted to weight shall not exceed
from the delivery connections and such the filling density specified by the
control mechanism shall be provided DOT.
with a fusible section (melting point (ii) Any pump, except a constant
208 °F. to 220 °F.) which will permit the speed centrifugal pump, shall be
internal valve to close automatically equipped with a suitable pressure actu-
in case of fire. ated bypass valve permitting flow from
(iii) Filling connections shall be pro- discharge to suction when the dis-
vided with automatic back-pressure charge pressure rises above a predeter-
check valves, excess-flow valves, or mined point. Pump discharge shall also
quick-closing internal valves, to pre- be equipped with a spring-loaded safety
vent back-flow in case the filling con- relief valve set at a pressure not more
nection is broken. Where the filling than 135 percent of the setting of the
and discharge connect to a common bypass valve or more than 400 p.s.i.g.,
opening in the container shell and that whichever is larger.
opening is fitted with a quick-closing (iii) Compressors shall be equipped
internal valve as specified in paragraph with manually operated shutoff valves
(f)(3)(ii) of this section, the automatic on both suction and discharge connec-
valve shall not be required. tions. Pressure gages of bourdon-tube
(iv) All containers shall be equipped type shall be installed on the suction
for spray loading (filling in the vapor and discharge of the compressor before
352
the shutoff valves. The compressor (iii) When containers are mounted on
shall not be operated if either pressure four-wheel trailers, care shall be taken
gage is removed or is inoperative. A to insure that the weight is distributed
spring-loaded, safety-relief valve capa- evenly over both axles.
ble of discharging to atmosphere the (iv) When the cradle and the tank are
full flow of gas from the compressor at not welded together suitable material
a pressure not exceeding 300 p.s.i.g. shall be used between them to elimi-
shall be connected between the com- nate metal-to-metal friction.
pressor discharge and the discharge (4) Container appurtenances. (i) All
shutoff valve. containers shall be equipped with a
(iv) Valve functions shall be clearly fixed liquid-level gage.
and legibly identified by metal tags or (ii) All containers with a capacity ex-
nameplates permanently affixed to ceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped
each valve. with a pressure gage having a dial
(7)–(8) [Reserved] graduated from 0–400 p.s.i.
(9) Chock blocks. At least two chock
(iii) The filling connection shall be
blocks shall be provided. These blocks
fitted with combination back-pressure
shall be placed to prevent rolling of the
check valve and excess-flow valve; one
vehicle whenever it is parked during
double or two single back-pressure
loading and unloading operations.
check valves; or a positive shutoff
(10) Portable tank containers (skid
valve in conjunction with either an in-
tanks). Where portable tank containers
ternal back-pressure check valve or an
are used for farm storage they shall
internal excess flow valve.
comply with paragraph (c)(1) of this
(iv) All containers with a capacity
section. When portable tank containers
exceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped
are used in lieu of cargo tanks and are
for spray loading or with an approved
permanently mounted on tank motor
vapor return valve.
vehicles for the transportation of am-
monia, they shall comply with the re- (v) All vapor and liquid connections
quirements of this paragraph. except safety-relief valves and those
(g) Systems mounted on farm vehicles specifically exempted by paragraph
other than for the application of ammo- (b)(6)(v) of this section shall be
nia—(1) Application. This paragraph ap- equipped with approved excess-flow
plies to containers of 1,200 gallons ca- valves or may be fitted with quick-
pacity or less and pertinent equipment closing internal valves which, except
mounted on farm vehicles (implements during operating periods, shall remain
of husbandry) and used other than for closed.
the application of ammonia to the soil. (vi) Fittings shall be adequately pro-
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to tected from damage by a metal box or
this paragraph unless otherwise noted. cylinder with open top securely fas-
(2) Design pressure and classification of tened to the container or by rigid
containers. (i) The minimum design guards, well braced, welded to the con-
pressure for containers shall be 250 tainer on both sides of the fittings or
p.s.i.g. by a metal dome. If a metal dome is
(ii) The shell or head thickness of used, the relief valve shall be properly
any container shall be not less than vented through the dome.
three-sixteenths of an inch. (vii) If a liquid withdrawal line is in-
(3) Mounting containers. (i) A suitable stalled in the bottom of a container,
‘‘stop’’ or ‘‘stops’’ shall be mounted on the connections thereto, including
the vehicle or on the container in such hose, shall not be lower than the low-
a way that the container shall not be est horizontal edge of the vehicle axle.
dislodged from its mounting due to the (viii) Provision shall be made to se-
vehicle coming to a sudden stop. Back cure both ends of the hose while in
slippage shall also be prevented by transit.
proper methods. (5) Marking the container. There shall
(ii) A suitable ‘‘hold down’’ device appear on each side and on the rear end
shall be provided which will anchor the of the container in letters at least 4
container to the vehicle at one or more inches high, the words, ‘‘Caution—Am-
places on each side of the container. monia’’ or the container shall be
353
§§ 1910.112–1910.113 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
marked in accordance with DOT regu- shall be flexibly connected to the con-
lations. tainer shutoff valve.
(6) Farm vehicles. (i) Farm vehicles (v) No excess flow valve is required in
shall conform with State regulations. the liquid withdrawal line provided the
(ii) All trailers shall be securely at- controlling orifice between the con-
tached to the vehicle drawing them by tents of the container and the outlet of
means of drawbars supplemented by the shutoff valve does not exceed
suitable safety chains. seven-sixteenths inch in diameter.
(iii) A trailer shall be constructed so [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
that it will follow substantially in the FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
path of the towing vehicle and will not 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9238,
whip or swerve dangerously from side Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR
to side. 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007]
(iv) All vehicles shall carry a can
containing 5 gallons or more of water. §§ 1910.112–1910.113 [Reserved]
(h) Systems mounted on farm vehicles § 1910.119 Process safety management
for the application of ammonia. (1) This of highly hazardous chemicals.
paragraph applies to systems utilizing
Purpose. This section contains re-
containers of 250 gallons capacity or
quirements for preventing or mini-
less which are mounted on farm vehi-
mizing the consequences of cata-
cles (implement of husbandry) and used
strophic releases of toxic, reactive,
for the application of ammonia to the
flammable, or explosive chemicals.
soil. Paragraph (b) of this section ap-
These releases may result in toxic, fire
plies to this paragraph unless other-
or explosion hazards.
wise noted. Where larger containers are
(a) Application. (1) This section ap-
used, they shall comply with paragraph
plies to the following:
(g) of this section. (i) A process which involves a chem-
(2) Design pressure and classification of ical at or above the specified threshold
containers. (i) The minimum design quantities listed in appendix A to this
pressure for containers shall be 250 section;
p.s.i.g. (ii) A process which involves a Cat-
(ii) The shell or head thickness of egory 1 flammable gas (as defined in
any container shall not be less than 1910.1200(c)) or a flammable liquid with
three-sixteenths inch. a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) on
(3) Mounting of containers. All con- site in one location, in a quantity of
tainers and flow-control devices shall 10,000 pounds (4535.9 kg) or more except
be securely mounted. for:
(4) Container valves and accessories. (i) (A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for
Each container shall have a fixed liq- workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g.,
uid-level gage. propane used for comfort heating, gaso-
(ii) The filling connection shall be line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels
fitted with a combination back-pres- are not a part of a process containing
sure check valve and an excess-flow another highly hazardous chemical
valve; one double or two single back- covered by this standard;
pressure check valves: or a positive (B) Flammable liquids with a
shutoff valve in conjunction with an flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) stored
internal back-pressure check valve or in atmospheric tanks or transferred
an internal excess-flow valve. which are kept below their normal
(iii) The applicator tank may be boiling point without benefit of
filled by venting to open air provided chilling or refrigeration.
the bleeder valve orifice does not ex- (2) This section does not apply to:
ceed seven-sixteenths inch in diameter. (i) Retail facilities;
(iv) Regulation equipment may be (ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv-
connected directly to the tank cou- icing operations; or,
pling or flange, in which case a flexible (iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa-
connection shall be used between such cilities.
regulating equipment and the remain- (b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank
der of the liquid withdrawal system. means a storage tank which has been
Regulating equipment not so installed designed to operate at pressures from
354
atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds Replacement in kind means a replace-
per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa). ment which satisfies the design speci-
Boiling point means the boiling point fication.
of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds Trade secret means any confidential
per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 formula, pattern, process, device, infor-
mm.). For the purposes of this section, mation or compilation of information
where an accurate boiling point is un- that is used in an employer’s business,
available for the material in question, and that gives the employer an oppor-
or for mixtures which do not have a tunity to obtain an advantage over
constant boiling point, the 10 percent competitors who do not know or use it.
point of a distillation performed in ac- See Appendix E to § 1910.1200—Defini-
cordance with the Standard Method of tion of a Trade Secret (which sets out
Test for Distillation of Petroleum the criteria to be used in evaluating
Products, ASTM D–86–62, which is in- trade secrets).
corporated by reference as specified in (c) Employee participation. (1) Employ-
§ 1910.6, may be used as the boiling ers shall develop a written plan of ac-
point of the liquid. tion regarding the implementation of
Catastrophic release means a major the employee participation required by
uncontrolled emission, fire, or explo- this paragraph.
sion, involving one or more highly haz- (2) Employers shall consult with em-
ardous chemicals, that presents serious ployees and their representatives on
danger to employees in the workplace. the conduct and development of proc-
ess hazards analyses and on the devel-
Facility means the buildings, con-
opment of the other elements of proc-
tainers or equipment which contain a
ess safety management in this stand-
process.
ard.
Highly hazardous chemical means a (3) Employers shall provide to em-
substance possessing toxic, reactive, ployees and their representatives ac-
flammable, or explosive properties and cess to process hazard analyses and to
specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this all other information required to be de-
section. veloped under this standard.
Hot work means work involving elec- (d) Process safety information. In ac-
tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or cordance with the schedule set forth in
similar flame or spark-producing oper- paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em-
ations. ployer shall complete a compilation of
Normally unoccupied remote facility written process safety information be-
means a facility which is operated, fore conducting any process hazard
maintained or serviced by employees analysis required by the standard. The
who visit the facility only periodically compilation of written process safety
to check its operation and to perform information is to enable the employer
necessary operating or maintenance and the employees involved in oper-
tasks. No employees are permanently ating the process to identify and under-
stationed at the facility. stand the hazards posed by those proc-
Facilities meeting this definition are esses involving highly hazardous
not contiguous with, and must be geo- chemicals. This process safety informa-
graphically remote from all other tion shall include information per-
buildings, processes or persons. taining to the hazards of the highly
Process means any activity involving hazardous chemicals used or produced
a highly hazardous chemical including by the process, information pertaining
any use, storage, manufacturing, han- to the technology of the process, and
dling, or the on-site movement of such information pertaining to the equip-
chemicals, or combination of these ac- ment in the process.
tivities. For purposes of this definition, (1) Information pertaining to the haz-
any group of vessels which are inter- ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in
connected and separate vessels which the process. This information shall con-
are located such that a highly haz- sist of at least the following:
ardous chemical could be involved in a (i) Toxicity information;
potential release shall be considered a (ii) Permissible exposure limits;
single process. (iii) Physical data;
355
(iv) Reactivity data: shall determine and document that the
(v) Corrosivity data; equipment is designed, maintained, in-
(vi) Thermal and chemical stability spected, tested, and operating in a safe
data; and manner.
(vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent (e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The
mixing of different materials that employer shall perform an initial proc-
could foreseeably occur. ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation)
NOTE: Safety data sheets meeting the re- on processes covered by this standard.
quirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200(g) may be The process hazard analysis shall be
used to comply with this requirement to the appropriate to the complexity of the
extent they contain the information required process and shall identify, evaluate,
by this subparagraph. and control the hazards involved in the
(2) Information pertaining to the tech- process. Employers shall determine and
nology of the process. (i) Information document the priority order for con-
concerning the technology of the proc- ducting process hazard analyses based
ess shall include at least the following: on a rationale which includes such con-
(A) A block flow diagram or sim- siderations as extent of the process
plified process flow diagram (see appen- hazards, number of potentially affected
dix B to this section); employees, age of the process, and op-
(B) Process chemistry; erating history of the process. The
(C) Maximum intended inventory; process hazard analysis shall be con-
(D) Safe upper and lower limits for ducted as soon as possible, but not
such items as temperatures, pressures, later than the following schedule:
flows or compositions; and, (i) No less than 25 percent of the ini-
(E) An evaluation of the con- tial process hazards analyses shall be
sequences of deviations, including completed by May 26, 1994;
those affecting the safety and health of (ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini-
employees. tial process hazards analyses shall be
(ii) Where the original technical in- completed by May 26, 1995;
formation no longer exists, such infor- (iii) No less than 75 percent of the
mation may be developed in conjunc- initial process hazards analyses shall
tion with the process hazard analysis be completed by May 26, 1996;
in sufficient detail to support the anal- (iv) All initial process hazards anal-
ysis. yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997.
(3) Information pertaining to the equip- (v) Process hazards analyses com-
ment in the process. (i) Information per- pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet
taining to the equipment in the process the requirements of this paragraph are
shall include: acceptable as initial process hazards
(A) Materials of construction; analyses. These process hazard anal-
(B) Piping and instrument diagrams yses shall be updated and revalidated,
(P&ID’s); based on their completion date, in ac-
(C) Electrical classification; cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this
(D) Relief system design and design section.
basis;
(2) The employer shall use one or
(E) Ventilation system design;
more of the following methodologies
(F) Design codes and standards em-
that are appropriate to determine and
ployed;
evaluate the hazards of the process
(G) Material and energy balances for
being analyzed.
processes built after May 26, 1992; and,
(H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, (i) What-If;
detection or suppression systems). (ii) Checklist;
(ii) The employer shall document (iii) What-If/Checklist;
that equipment complies with recog- (iv) Hazard and Operability Study
nized and generally accepted good engi- (HAZOP):
neering practices. (v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
(iii) For existing equipment designed (FMEA);
and constructed in accordance with (vi) Fault Tree Analysis; or
codes, standards, or practices that are (vii) An appropriate equivalent meth-
no longer in general use, the employer odology.
356
(3) The process hazard analysis shall (7) Employers shall retain process
address: hazards analyses and updates or re-
(i) The hazards of the process; validations for each process covered by
(ii) The identification of any previous this section, as well as the documented
incident which had a likely potential resolution of recommendations de-
for catastrophic consequences in the scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec-
workplace; tion for the life of the process.
(iii) Engineering and administrative (f) Operating procedures (1) The em-
controls applicable to the hazards and ployer shall develop and implement
their interrelationships such as appro- written operating procedures that pro-
priate application of detection meth- vide clear instructions for safely con-
odologies to provide early warning of ducting activities involved in each cov-
releases. (Acceptable detection meth- ered process consistent with the proc-
ods might include process monitoring ess safety information and shall ad-
and control instrumentation with dress at least the following elements.
alarms, and detection hardware such as (i) Steps for each operating phase:
hydrocarbon sensors.); (A) Initial startup;
(iv) Consequences of failure of engi- (B) Normal operations;
neering and administrative controls; (C) Temporary operations;
(v) Facility siting; (D) Emergency shutdown including
(vi) Human factors; and the conditions under which emergency
(vii) A qualitative evaluation of a shutdown is required, and the assign-
range of the possible safety and health ment of shutdown responsibility to
effects of failure of controls on employ- qualified operators to ensure that
ees in the workplace. emergency shutdown is executed in a
(4) The process hazard analysis shall safe and timely manner.
be performed by a team with expertise (E) Emergency Operations;
in engineering and process operations, (F) Normal shutdown; and,
and the team shall include at least one (G) Startup following a turnaround,
employee who has experience and or after an emergency shutdown.
knowledge specific to the process being (ii) Operating limits:
evaluated. Also, one member of the (A) Consequences of deviation; and
team must be knowledgeable in the (B) Steps required to correct or avoid
specific process hazard analysis meth- deviation.
odology being used. (iii) Safety and health considerations:
(5) The employer shall establish a (A) Properties of, and hazards pre-
system to promptly address the team’s sented by, the chemicals used in the
findings and recommendations; assure process;
that the recommendations are resolved (B) Precautions necessary to prevent
in a timely manner and that the reso- exposure, including engineering con-
lution is documented; document what trols, administrative controls, and per-
actions are to be taken; complete ac- sonal protective equipment;
tions as soon as possible; develop a (C) Control measures to be taken if
written schedule of when these actions physical contact or airborne exposure
are to be completed; communicate the occurs;
actions to operating, maintenance and (D) Quality control for raw materials
other employees whose work assign- and control of hazardous chemical in-
ments are in the process and who may ventory levels; and,
be affected by the recommendations or (E) Any special or unique hazards.
actions. (iv) Safety systems and their functions.
(6) At least every five (5) years after (2) Operating procedures shall be
the completion of the initial process readily accessible to employees who
hazard analysis, the process hazard work in or maintain a process.
analysis shall be updated and revali- (3) The operating procedures shall be
dated by a team meeting the require- reviewed as often as necessary to as-
ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec- sure that they reflect current oper-
tion, to assure that the process hazard ating practice, including changes that
analysis is consistent with the current result from changes in process chemi-
process. cals, technology, and equipment, and
357
changes to facilities. The employer (h) Contractors—(1) Application. This
shall certify annually that these oper- paragraph applies to contractors per-
ating procedures are current and accu- forming maintenance or repair, turn-
rate. around, major renovation, or specialty
(4) The employer shall develop and work on or adjacent to a covered proc-
implement safe work practices to pro- ess. It does not apply to contractors
vide for the control of hazards during providing incidental services which do
operations such as lockout/tagout; con- not influence process safety, such as
fined space entry; opening process janitorial work, food and drink serv-
equipment or piping; and control over ices, laundry, delivery or other supply
entrance into a facility by mainte- services.
nance, contractor, laboratory, or other (2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The
support personnel. These safe work employer, when selecting a contractor,
practices shall apply to employees and shall obtain and evaluate information
contractor employees. regarding the contract employer’s safe-
(g) Training—(1) Initial training. (i) ty performance and programs.
Each employee presently involved in (ii) The employer shall inform con-
operating a process, and each employee tract employers of the known potential
before being involved in operating a fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards
newly assigned process, shall be related to the contractor’s work and
trained in an overview of the process the process.
and in the operating procedures as (iii) The employer shall explain to
specified in paragraph (f) of this sec- contract employers the applicable pro-
tion. The training shall include empha- visions of the emergency action plan
sis on the specific safety and health required by paragraph (n) of this sec-
hazards, emergency operations includ- tion.
ing shutdown, and safe work practices (iv) The employer shall develop and
applicable to the employee’s job tasks. implement safe work practices con-
(ii) In lieu of initial training for sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec-
those employees already involved in tion, to control the entrance, presence
operating a process on May 26, 1992, an and exit of contract employers and
employer may certify in writing that contract employees in covered process
the employee has the required knowl- areas.
edge, skills, and abilities to safely (v) The employer shall periodically
carry out the duties and responsibil- evaluate the performance of contract
ities as specified in the operating pro- employers in fulfilling their obliga-
cedures. tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of
(2) Refresher training. Refresher train- this section.
ing shall be provided at least every (vi) The employer shall maintain a
three years, and more often if nec- contract employee injury and illness
essary, to each employee involved in log related to the contractor’s work in
operating a process to assure that the process areas.
employee understands and adheres to (3) Contract employer responsibilities.
the current operating procedures of the (i) The contract employer shall assure
process. The employer, in consultation that each contract employee is trained
with the employees involved in oper- in the work practices necessary to safe-
ating the process, shall determine the ly perform his/her job.
appropriate frequency of refresher (ii) The contract employer shall as-
training. sure that each contract employee is in-
(3) Training documentation. The em- structed in the known potential fire,
ployer shall ascertain that each em- explosion, or toxic release hazards re-
ployee involved in operating a process lated to his/her job and the process,
has received and understood the train- and the applicable provisions of the
ing required by this paragraph. The emergency action plan.
employer shall prepare a record which (iii) The contract employer shall doc-
contains the identity of the employee, ument that each contract employee
the date of training, and the means has received and understood the train-
used to verify that the employee under- ing required by this paragraph. The
stood the training. contract employer shall prepare a
358
record which contains the identity of procedures to maintain the on-going
the contract employee, the date of integrity of process equipment.
training, and the means used to verify (3) Training for process maintenance
that the employee understood the activities. The employer shall train each
training. employee involved in maintaining the
(iv) The contract employer shall as- on-going integrity of process equip-
sure that each contract employee fol- ment in an overview of that process
lows the safety rules of the facility in- and its hazards and in the procedures
cluding the safe work practices re- applicable to the employee’s job tasks
quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- to assure that the employee can per-
tion. form the job tasks in a safe manner.
(v) The contract employer shall ad- (4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec-
vise the employer of any unique haz- tions and tests shall be performed on
ards presented by the contract employ- process equipment.
er’s work, or of any hazards found by (ii) Inspection and testing procedures
the contract employer’s work. shall follow recognized and generally
(i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The accepted good engineering practices.
employer shall perform a pre-startup (iii) The frequency of inspections and
safety review for new facilities and for tests of process equipment shall be con-
modified facilities when the modifica- sistent with applicable manufacturers’
tion is significant enough to require a recommendations and good engineering
change in the process safety informa- practices, and more frequently if deter-
tion. mined to be necessary by prior oper-
(2) The pre-startup safety review ating experience.
shall confirm that prior to the intro- (iv) The employer shall document
duction of highly hazardous chemicals each inspection and test that has been
to a process: performed on process equipment. The
(i) Construction and equipment is in documentation shall identify the date
accordance with design specifications; of the inspection or test, the name of
(ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, the person who performed the inspec-
and emergency procedures are in place tion or test, the serial number or other
and are adequate; identifier of the equipment on which
(iii) For new facilities, a process haz- the inspection or test was performed, a
ard analysis has been performed and description of the inspection or test
recommendations have been resolved performed, and the results of the in-
or implemented before startup; and spection or test.
modified facilities meet the require- (5) Equipment deficiencies. The em-
ments contained in management of ployer shall correct deficiencies in
change, paragraph (l). equipment that are outside acceptable
(iv) Training of each employee in- limits (defined by the process safety in-
volved in operating a process has been formation in paragraph (d) of this sec-
completed. tion) before further use or in a safe and
(j) Mechanical integrity—(1) Applica- timely manner when necessary means
tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of are taken to assure safe operation.
this section apply to the following (6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con-
process equipment: struction of new plants and equipment,
(i) Pressure vessels and storage the employer shall assure that equip-
tanks; ment as it is fabricated is suitable for
(ii) Piping systems (including piping the process application for which they
components such as valves); will be used.
(iii) Relief and vent systems and de- (ii) Appropriate checks and inspec-
vices; tions shall be performed to assure that
(iv) Emergency shutdown systems; equipment is installed properly and
(v) Controls (including monitoring consistent with design specifications
devices and sensors, alarms, and inter- and the manufacturer’s instructions.
locks) and, (iii) The employer shall assure that
(vi) Pumps. maintenance materials, spare parts and
(2) Written procedures. The employer equipment are suitable for the process
shall establish and implement written application for which they will be used.
359
(k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer (2) An incident investigation shall be
shall issue a hot work permit for hot initiated as promptly as possible, but
work operations conducted on or near a not later than 48 hours following the
covered process. incident.
(2) The permit shall document that (3) An incident investigation team
the fire prevention and protection re- shall be established and consist of at
quirements in 29 CFR 1910.252(a) have least one person knowledgeable in the
been implemented prior to beginning process involved, including a contract
the hot work operations; it shall indi- employee if the incident involved work
cate the date(s) authorized for hot of the contractor, and other persons
work; and identify the object on which with appropriate knowledge and experi-
hot work is to be performed. The per- ence to thoroughly investigate and
mit shall be kept on file until comple- analyze the incident.
tion of the hot work operations. (4) A report shall be prepared at the
(l) Management of change. (1) The em- conclusion of the investigation which
ployer shall establish and implement includes at a minimum:
written procedures to manage changes (i) Date of incident;
(except for ‘‘replacements in kind’’) to (ii) Date investigation began;
process chemicals, technology, equip- (iii) A description of the incident;
ment, and procedures; and, changes to (iv) The factors that contributed to
facilities that affect a covered process. the incident; and,
(2) The procedures shall assure that (v) Any recommendations resulting
the following considerations are ad- from the investigation.
dressed prior to any change: (5) The employer shall establish a
(i) The technical basis for the pro- system to promptly address and resolve
posed change; the incident report findings and rec-
(ii) Impact of change on safety and ommendations. Resolutions and correc-
health; tive actions shall be documented.
(6) The report shall be reviewed with
(iii) Modifications to operating pro-
all affected personnel whose job tasks
cedures;
are relevant to the incident findings in-
(iv) Necessary time period for the cluding contract employees where ap-
change; and, plicable.
(v) Authorization requirements for (7) Incident investigation reports
the proposed change. shall be retained for five years.
(3) Employees involved in operating a (n) Emergency planning and response.
process and maintenance and contract The employer shall establish and im-
employees whose job tasks will be af- plement an emergency action plan for
fected by a change in the process shall the entire plant in accordance with the
be informed of, and trained in, the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.38. In addi-
change prior to start-up of the process tion, the emergency action plan shall
or affected part of the process. include procedures for handling small
(4) If a change covered by this para- releases. Employers covered under this
graph results in a change in the process standard may also be subject to the
safety information required by para- hazardous waste and emergency re-
graph (d) of this section, such informa- sponse provisions contained in 29 CFR
tion shall be updated accordingly. 1910.120 (a), (p) and (q).
(5) If a change covered by this para- (o) Compliance Audits. (1) Employers
graph results in a change in the oper- shall certify that they have evaluated
ating procedures or practices required compliance with the provisions of this
by paragraph (f) of this section, such section at least every three years to
procedures or practices shall be up- verify that the procedures and prac-
dated accordingly. tices developed under the standard are
(m) Incident investigation. (1) The em- adequate and are being followed.
ployer shall investigate each incident (2) The compliance audit shall be
which resulted in, or could reasonably conducted by at least one person
have resulted in a catastrophic release knowledgeable in the process.
of highly hazardous chemical in the (3) A report of the findings of the
workplace. audit shall be developed.
360
(4) The employer shall promptly de- CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**
termine and document an appropriate
Ammonium Perchlorate ....................... 7790–98–9 7500
response to each of the findings of the Ammonium Permanganate .................. 7787–36–2 7500
compliance audit, and document that Arsine (also called Arsenic Hydride) ... 7784–42–1 100
deficiencies have been corrected. Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ...................... 542–88–1 100
Boron Trichloride ................................. 10294–34–5 2500
(5) Employers shall retain the two (2) Boron Trifluoride .................................. 7637–07–2 250
most recent compliance audit reports. Bromine ............................................... 7726–95–6 1500
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall Bromine Chloride ................................. 13863–41–7 1500
make all information necessary to Bromine Pentafluoride ......................... 7789–30–2 2500
Bromine Trifluoride .............................. 7787–71–5 15000
comply with the section available to 3–Bromopropyne (also called Pro-
those persons responsible for compiling pargyl Bromide) ............................... 106–96–7 100
the process safety information (re- Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary) ............ 75–91–2 5000
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) ............... 614–45–9 7500
quired by paragraph (d) of this section), Carbonyl Chloride (see Phosgene) ..... 75–44–5 100
those assisting in the development of Carbonyl Fluoride ................................ 353–50–4 2500
the process hazard analysis (required Cellulose Nitrate (concentration
by paragraph (e) of this section), those >12.6% nitrogen ............................... 9004–70–0 2500
Chlorine ............................................... 7782–50–5 1500
responsible for developing the oper- Chlorine Dioxide .................................. 10049–04–4 1000
ating procedures (required by para- Chlorine Pentrafluoride ........................ 13637–63–3 1000
graph (f) of this section), and those in- Chlorine Trifluoride .............................. 7790–91–2 1000
Chlorodiethylaluminum (also called
volved in incident investigations (re- Diethylaluminum Chloride) ............... 96–10–6 5000
quired by paragraph (m) of this sec- 1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene ............... 97–00–7 5000
tion), emergency planning and response Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .................. 107–30–2 500
(paragraph (n) of this section) and com- Chloropicrin ......................................... 76–06–2 500
Chloropicrin and Methyl Bromide mix-
pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this ture ................................................... None 1500
section) without regard to possible Chloropicrin and Methyl Chloride mix-
trade secret status of such informa- ture ................................................... None 1500
Cumene Hydroperoxide ...................... 80–15–9 5000
tion. Cyanogen ............................................ 460–19–5 2500
(2) Nothing in this paragraph shall Cyanogen Chloride .............................. 506–77–4 500
preclude the employer from requiring Cyanuric Fluoride ................................ 675–14–9 100
the persons to whom the information is Diacetyl Peroxide (Concentration
>70%) ............................................... 110–22–5 5000
made available under paragraph (p)(1) Diazomethane ..................................... 334–88–3 500
of this section to enter into confiden- Dibenzoyl Peroxide ............................. 94–36–0 7500
tiality agreements not to disclose the Diborane .............................................. 19287–45–7 100
Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) .................. 110–05–4 5000
information as set forth in 29 CFR Dichloro Acetylene .............................. 7572–29–4 250
1910.1200. Dichlorosilane ...................................... 4109–96–0 2500
(3) Subject to the rules and proce- Diethylzinc ........................................... 557–20–0 10000
dures set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1200(i)(1) Diisopropyl Peroxydicarbonate ............ 105–64–6 7500
Dilaluroyl Peroxide .............................. 105–74–8 7500
through 1910.1200(i)(12), employees and Dimethyldichlorosilane ......................... 75–78–5 1000
their designated representatives shall Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ....................... 57–14–7 1000
have access to trade secret information Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ................. 124–40–3 2500
contained within the process hazard 2,4-Dinitroaniline .................................. 97–02–9 5000
Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide (also
analysis and other documents required Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide; con-
to be developed by this standard. centration >60%) .............................. 1338–23–4 5000
Ethyl Nitrite .......................................... 109–95–5 5000
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.119—LIST OF HIGHLY Ethylamine ........................................... 75–04–7 7500
HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS AND Ethylene Fluorohydrin ......................... 371–62–0 100
REACTIVES (MANDATORY) Ethylene Oxide .................................... 75–21–8 5000
Ethyleneimine ...................................... 151–56–4 1000
This appendix contains a listing of toxic Fluorine ................................................ 7782–41–4 1000
and reactive highly hazardous chemicals Formaldehyde (Formalin) .................... 50–00–0 1000
which present a potential for a catastrophic Furan ................................................... 110–00–9 500
event at or above the threshold quantity. Hexafluoroacetone .............................. 684–16–2 5000
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous ............. 7647–01–0 5000
CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ** Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous .............. 7664–39–3 1000
Hydrogen Bromide .............................. 10035–10–6 5000
Acetaldehyde ....................................... 75–07–0 2500 Hydrogen Chloride .............................. 7647–01–0 5000
Acrolein (2-Propenal) .......................... 107–02–8 150 Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhydrous ........... 74–90–8 1000
Acrylyl Chloride ................................... 814–68–6 250 Hydrogen Fluoride ............................... 7664–39–3 1000
Allyl Chloride ....................................... 107–05–1 1000 Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by weight or
Allylamine ............................................ 107–11–9 1000 greater) ............................................ 7722–84–1 7500
Alkylaluminums .................................... Varies 5000 Hydrogen Selenide .............................. 7783–07–5 150
Ammonia, Anhydrous .......................... 7664–41–7 10000 Hydrogen Sulfide ................................. 7783–06–4 1500
Ammonia solutions (>44% ammonia Hydroxylamine ..................................... 7803–49–8 2500
by weight) ........................................ 7664–41–7 15000 Iron, Pentacarbonyl ............................. 13463–40–6 250
361
CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ** CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**
Isopropylamine .................................... 75–31–0 5000 Perchloric Acid (concentration >60%

Ketene ................................................. 463–51–4 100 by weight) ........................................ 7601–90–3 5000
Methacrylaldehyde .............................. 78–85–3 1000 Perchloromethyl Mercaptan ................ 594–42–3 150
Methacryloyl Chloride .......................... 920–46–7 150 Perchloryl Fluoride .............................. 7616–94–6 5000
Methacryloyloxyethyl Isocyanate ......... 30674–80–7 100 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentration
Methyl Acrylonitrile .............................. 126–98–7 250 >60% Acetic Acid; also called Per-
Methylamine, Anhydrous ..................... 74–89–5 1000 acetic Acid) ...................................... 79–21–0 1000
Methyl Bromide ................................... 74–83–9 2500 Phosgene (also called Carbonyl Chlo-
Methyl Chloride ................................... 74–87–3 15000 ride) .................................................. 75–44–5 100
Methyl Chloroformate .......................... 79–22–1 500 Phosphine (Hydrogen Phosphide) ...... 7803–51–2 100
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide (con-
Phosphorus Oxychloride (also called
centration >60%) .............................. 1338–23–4 5000
Phosphoryl Chloride) ....................... 10025–87–3 1000
Methyl Fluoroacetate ........................... 453–18–9 100
Phosphorus Trichloride ....................... 7719–12–2 1000
Methyl Fluorosulfate ............................ 421–20–5 100
Methyl Hydrazine ................................. 60–34–4 100 Phosphoryl Chloride (also called
Methyl Iodide ....................................... 74–88–4 7500 Phosphorus Oxychloride) ................ 10025–87–3 1000
Methyl Isocyanate ............................... 624–83–9 250 Propargyl Bromide ............................... 106–96–7 100
Methyl Mercaptan ................................ 74–93–1 5000 Propyl Nitrate ....................................... 627–3–4 2500
Methyl Vinyl Ketone ............................ 79–84–4 100 Sarin .................................................... 107–44–8 100
Methyltrichlorosilane ............................ 75–79–6 500 Selenium Hexafluoride ........................ 7783–79–1 1000
Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Tetracarbonyl) 13463–39–3 150 Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ................. 7803–52–3 500
Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight or great- Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) .......................... 7446–09–5 1000
er) ..................................................... 7697–37–2 500 Sulfur Pentafluoride ............................. 5714–22–7 250
Nitric Oxide .......................................... 10102–43–9 250 Sulfur Tetrafluoride .............................. 7783–60–0 250
Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline .............. 100–01–6 5000 Sulfur Trioxide (also called Sulfuric
Nitromethane ....................................... 75–52–5 2500 Anhydride) ........................................ 7446–11–9 1000
Nitrogen Dioxide .................................. 10102–44–0 250 Sulfuric Anhydride (also called Sulfur
Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO2; N204; Trioxide) ........................................... 7446–11–9 1000
N203) ............................................... 10102–44–0 250 Tellurium Hexafluoride ........................ 7783–80–4 250
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also called Nitro- Tetrafluoroethylene .............................. 116–14–3 5000
gen Peroxide) .................................. 10544–72–6 250 Tetrafluorohydrazine ............................ 10036–47–2 5000
Nitrogen Trifluoride .............................. 7783–54–2 5000 Tetramethyl Lead ................................ 75–74–1 1000
Nitrogen Trioxide ................................. 10544–73–7 250
Thionyl Chloride .................................. 7719–09–7 250
Oleum (65% to 80% by weight; also
Trichloro (chloromethyl) Silane ........... 1558–25–4 100
called Fuming Sulfuric Acid) ............ 8014–95–7 1,000
Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Silane ......... 27137–85–5 2500
Osmium Tetroxide ............................... 20816–12–0 100
Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Monoxide) 7783–41–7 100 Trichlorosilane ..................................... 10025–78–2 5000
Ozone .................................................. 10028–15–6 100 Trifluorochloroethylene ........................ 79–38–9 10000
Pentaborane ........................................ 19624–22–7 100 Trimethyoxysilane ................................ 2487–90–3 1500
Peracetic Acid (concentration >60% *Chemical Abstract Service Number.
Acetic Acid; also called Peroxy- **Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be
acetic Acid) ...................................... 79–21–0 1000 covered by this standard).
362
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.119—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

FLOW DIAGRAM (NONMANDATORY)
363
EC27OC91.026</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.119—COMPLIANCE GUIDE- ment program requires a systematic ap-

LINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROCESS proach to evaluating the whole process.
SAFETY MANAGEMENT (NONMANDATORY) Using this approach the process design, proc-
ess technology, operational and maintenance
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory activities and procedures, nonroutine activi-
guideline to assist employers and employees ties and procedures, emergency preparedness
in complying with the requirements of this plans and procedures, training programs, and
section, as well as provides other helpful rec- other elements which impact the process are
ommendations and information. Examples all considered in the evaluation. The various
presented in this appendix are not the only lines of defense that have been incorporated
means of achieving the performance goals in into the design and operation of the process
the standard. This appendix neither adds nor to prevent or mitigate the release of haz-
detracts from the requirements of the stand- ardous chemicals need to be evaluated and
ard. strengthened to assure their effectiveness at
1. Introduction to Process Safety Manage- each level. Process safety management is the
ment. The major objective of process safety proactive identification, evaluation and
management of highly hazardous chemicals mitigation or prevention of chemical re-
is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous leases that could occur as a result of failures
chemicals especially into locations which in process, procedures or equipment.
could expose employees and others to serious The process safety management standard
hazards. An effective process safety manage- targets highly hazardous chemicals that
364
EC27OC91.027</GPH>
have the potential to cause a catastrophic formed about relevant safety and health
incident. This standard as a whole is to aid issues and employers may be able to adapt
employers in their efforts to prevent or miti- these practices and procedures to meet their
gate episodic chemical releases that could obligations under this standard. Employers
lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and who have not implemented an occupational
possibly to the surrounding community. To safety and health program may wish to form
control these types of hazards, employers a safety and health committee of employees
need to develop the necessary expertise, ex- and management representatives to help the
periences, judgement and proactive initia- employer meet the obligations specified by
tive within their workforce to properly im- this standard. These committees can become
plement and maintain an effective process a significant ally in helping the employer to
safety management program as envisioned in implement and maintain an effective process
the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is safety management program for all employ-
required by the Clean Air Act Amendments ees.
as is the Environmental Protection Agency’s 3. Process Safety Information. Complete and
Risk Management Plan. Employers, who accurate written information concerning
merge the two sets of requirements into process chemicals, process technology, and
their process safety management program, process equipment is essential to an effective
will better assure full compliance with each process safety management program and to a
as well as enhancing their relationship with process hazards analysis. The compiled infor-
the local community. mation will be a necessary resource to a va-
While OSHA believes process safety man- riety of users including the team that will
agement will have a positive effect on the perform the process hazards analysis as re-
safety of employees in workplaces and also quired under paragraph (e); those developing
offers other potential benefits to employers the training programs and the operating pro-
(increased productivity), smaller businesses cedures; contractors whose employees will be
which may have limited resources available working with the process; those conducting
to them at this time, might consider alter- the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
native avenues of decreasing the risks asso-
preparedness planners; and insurance and en-
ciated with highly hazardous chemicals at
forcement officials.
their workplaces. One method which might
The information to be compiled about the
be considered is the reduction in the inven-
tory of the highly hazardous chemical. This chemicals, including process intermediates,
reduction in inventory will result in a reduc- needs to be comprehensive enough for an ac-
tion of the risk or potential for a cata- curate assessment of the fire and explosion
strophic incident. Also, employers including characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safe-
small employers may be able to establish ty and health hazards to workers, and the
more efficient inventory control by reducing corrosion and erosion effects on the process
the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals equipment and monitoring tools. Current
on site below the established threshold quan- safety data sheet (SDS) information can be
tities. This reduction can be accomplished used to help meet this requirement which
by ordering smaller shipments and maintain- must be supplemented with process chem-
ing the minimum inventory necessary for ef- istry information including runaway reac-
ficient and safe operation. When reduced in- tion and over pressure hazards if applicable.
ventory is not feasible, then the employer Process technology information will be a
might consider dispersing inventory to sev- part of the process safety information pack-
eral locations on site. Dispersing storage age and it is expected that it will include
into locations where a release in one loca- diagrams of the type shown in appendix B of
tion will not cause a release in another loca- this section as well as employer established
tion is a practical method to also reduce the criteria for maximum inventory levels for
risk or portential for catastrophic incidents. process chemicals; limits beyond which
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety would be considered upset conditions; and a
Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act qualitative estimate of the consequences or
Amendments states that employers are to results of deviation that could occur if oper-
consult with their employees and their rep- ating beyond the established process limits.
resentatives regarding the employers efforts Employers are encouraged to use diagrams
in the development and implementation of which will help users understand the process.
the process safety management program ele- A block flow diagram is used to show the
ments and hazard assessments. Section 304 major process equipment and inter-
also requires employers to train and educate connecting process flow lines and show flow
their employees and to inform affected em- rates, stream composition, temperatures,
ployees of the findings from incident inves- and pressures when necessary for clarity.
tigations required by the process safety man- The block flow diagram is a simplified dia-
agement program. Many employers, under gram.
their safety and health programs, have al- Process flow diagrams are more complex
ready established means and methods to and will show all main flow streams includ-
keep employees and their representatives ining valves to enhance the understanding of
365
the process, as well as pressures and tem- significance of potential hazards associated
peratures on all feed and product lines with- with the processing or handling of highly
in all major vessels, in and out of headers hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides infor-
and heat exchangers, and points of pressure mation which will assist employers and em-
and temperature control. Also, materials of ployees in making decisions for improving
construction information, pump capacities safety and reducing the consequences of un-
and pressure heads, compressor horsepower wanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
and vessel design pressures and temperatures chemicals. A PHA is directed toward ana-
are shown when necessary for clarity. In ad- lyzing potential causes and consequences of
dition, major components of control loops fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flam-
are usually shown along with key utilities mable chemicals and major spills of haz-
on process flow diagrams. ardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equip-
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&IDs) ment, instrumentation, utilities, human ac-
may be the more appropriate type of dia- tions (routine and nonroutine), and external
grams to show some of the above details and factors that might impact the process. These
to display the information for the piping de- considerations assist in determining the haz-
signer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are ards and potential failure points or failure
to be used to describe the relationships be- modes in a process.
tween equipment and instrumentation as
The selection of a PHA methodology or
well as other relevant information that will
technique will be influenced by many factors
enhance clarity. Computer software pro-
including the amount of existing knowledge
grams which do P&IDs or other diagrams
useful to the information package, may be about the process. Is it a process that has
used to help meet this requirement. been operated for a long period of time with
The information pertaining to process little or no innovation and extensive experi-
equipment design must be documented. In ence has been generated with its use? Or, is
other words, what were the codes and stand- it a new process or one which has been
ards relied on to establish good engineering changed frequently by the inclusion of inno-
practice. These codes and standards are pub- vative features? Also, the size and com-
lished by such organizations as the American plexity of the process will influence the deci-
Society of Mechanical Engineers, American sion as to the appropriate PHA methodology
Petroleum Institute, American National to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
Standards Institute, National Fire Protec- certain limitations. For example, the check-
tion Association, American Society for Test- list methodology works well when the proc-
ing and Materials, National Board of Boiler ess is very stable and no changes are made,
and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National As- but it is not as effective when the process
sociation of Corrosion Engineers, American has undergone extensive change. The check-
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Associa- list may miss the most recent changes and
tion, and model building code groups. consequently the changes would not be eval-
In addition, various engineering societies uated. Another limitation to be considered
issue technical reports which impact process concerns the assumptions made by the team
design. For example, the American Institute or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
of Chemical Engineers has published tech- judgement and the assumptions made during
nical reports on topics such as two phase the study need to be documented and under-
flow for venting devices. This type of tech- stood by the team and reviewer and kept for
nically recognized report would constitute a future PHA.
good engineering practice. The team conducting the PHA need to un-
For existing equipment designed and con- derstand the methodology that is going to be
structed many years ago in accordance with used. A PHA team can vary in size from two
the codes and standards available at that people to a number of people with varied
time and no longer in general use today, the operational and technical backgrounds.
employer must document which codes and Some team members may only be a part of
standards were used and that the design and the team for a limited time. The team leader
construction along with the testing, inspec- needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper
tion and operation are still suitable for the implementation of the PHA methodology
intended use. Where the process technology that is to be used and should be impartial in
requires a design which departs from the ap- the evaluation. The other full or part time
plicable codes and standards, the employer team members need to provide the team with
must document that the design and con- expertise in areas such as process tech-
struction is suitable for the intended pur- nology, process design, operating procedures
pose. and practices, including how the work is ac-
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard tually performed, alarms, emergency proce-
analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process dures, instrumentation, maintenance proce-
hazard evaluation, is one of the most impor- dures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in-
tant elements of the process safety manage- cluding how the tasks are authorized, pro-
ment program. A PHA is an organized and curement of parts and supplies, safety and
systematic effort to identify and analyze the health, and any other relevant subject as the
366
need dictates. At least one team member evolved from a checklist or what-if ques-
must be familiar with the process. tions, could be developed and used by each
The ideal team will have an intimate employer effectively to reflect his/her par-
knowledge of the standards, codes, specifica- ticular process; this would simplify compli-
tions and regulations applicable to the proc- ance for them.
ess being studied. The selected team mem- When the employer has a number of proc-
bers need to be compatible and the team esses which require a PHA, the employer
leader needs to be able to manage the team, must set up a priority system of which PHAs
and the PHA study. The team needs to be to conduct first. A preliminary or gross haz-
able to work together while benefiting from ard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
the expertise of others on the team or out- processes that the employer has determined
side the team, to resolve issues, and to forge are subject to coverage by the process safety
a consensus on the findings of the study and management standard. Consideration should
recommendations. first be given to those processes with the po-
The application of a PHA to a process may tential of adversely affecting the largest
involve the use of different methodologies number of employees. This prioritizing
for various parts of the process. For example, should consider the potential severity of a
a process involving a series of unit operation chemical release, the number of potentially
of varying sizes, complexities, and ages may affected employees, the operating history of
use different methodologies and team mem- the process such as the frequency of chem-
bers for each operation. Then the conclu- ical releases, the age of the process and any
sions can be integrated into one final study other relevant factors. These factors would
and evaluation. A more specific example is suggest a ranking order and would suggest
the use of a checklist PHA for a standard either using a weighing factor system or a
boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a systematic ranking method. The use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
process. Also, for batch type processes like employer in determining which process
custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a should be of the highest priority and thereby
representative batch may be used where the employer would obtain the greatest im-
there are only small changes of monomer or provement in safety at the facility.
other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is Detailed guidance on the content and ap-
documented for the full range and ratio of plication of process hazard analysis meth-
batch ingredients. Another process that odologies is available from the American In-
might consider using a generic type of PHA stitute of Chemical Engineers’ Center for
is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
moved from site to site and therefore, a ge- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Oper-
neric PHA may be used for these movable ating procedures describe tasks to be per-
plants. Also, when an employer has several formed, data to be recorded, operating condi-
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is tions to be maintained, samples to be col-
being processed at the site, then a generic lected, and safety and health precautions to
PHA is feasible as long as the variations of be taken. The procedures need to be tech-
the individual sites are accounted for in the nically accurate, understandable to employ-
PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large ees, and revised periodically to ensure that
continuous process which has several control they reflect current operations. The process
rooms for different portions of the process safety information package is to be used as
such as for a distillation tower and a blend- a resource to better assure that the oper-
ing operation, the employer may wish to do ating procedures and practices are consistent
each segment separately and then integrate with the known hazards of the chemicals in
the final results. the process and that the operating param-
Additionally, small businesses which are eters are accurate. Operating procedures
covered by this rule, will often have proc- should be reviewed by engineering staff and
esses that have less storage volume, less ca- operating personnel to ensure that they are
pacity, and less complicated than processes accurate and provide practical instructions
at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would on how to actually carry out job duties safe-
anticipate that the less complex methodolo- ly.
gies would be used to meet the process haz- Operating procedures will include specific
ard analysis criteria in the standard. These instructions or details on what steps are to
process hazard analyses can be done in less be taken or followed in carrying out the
time and with a few people being involved. A stated procedures. These operating instruc-
less complex process generally means that tions for each procedure should include the
less data, P&IDs, and process information is applicable safety precautions and should
needed to perform a process hazard analysis. contain appropriate information on safety
Many small businesses have processes that implications. For example, the operating
are not unique, such as cold storage lockers procedures addressing operating parameters
or water treatment facilities. Where em- will contain operating instructions about
ployer associations have a number of mem- pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow
bers with such facilities, a generic PHA, rates, what to do when an upset condition
367
occurs, what alarms and instruments are erating personnel should be informed to pro-
pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and vide closure on the job.
other subjects. Another example of using op- 6. Employee Training. All employees, includ-
erating instructions to properly implement ing maintenance and contractor employees,
operating procedures is in starting up or involved with highly hazardous chemicals
shutting down the process. In these cases, need to fully understand the safety and
different parameters will be required from health hazards of the chemicals and proc-
those of normal operation. These operating esses they work with for the protection of
instructions need to clearly indicate the dis- themselves, their fellow employees and the
tinctions between startup and normal oper- citizens of nearby communities. Training
ations such as the appropriate allowances for conducted in compliance with § 1910.1200, the
heating up a unit to reach the normal oper- Hazard Communication standard, will help
ating parameters. Also the operating in- employees to be more knowledgeable about
structions need to describe the proper meth- the chemicals they work with as well as fa-
od for increasing the temperature of the unit miliarize them with reading and under-
until the normal operating temperature pa- standing SDSs. However, additional training
rameters are achieved. in subjects such as operating procedures and
Computerized process control systems add safety work practices, emergency evacuation
complexity to operating instructions. These and response, safety procedures, routine and
operating instructions need to describe the nonroutine work authorization activities,
logic of the software as well as the relation- and other areas pertinent to process safety
and health will need to be covered by an em-
ship between the equipment and the control
ployer’s training program.
system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to
In establishing their training programs,
the operator.
employers must clearly define the employees
Operating procedures and instructions are to be trained and what subjects are to be
important for training operating personnel. covered in their training. Employers in set-
The operating procedures are often viewed as ting up their training program will need to
the standard operating practices (SOPs) for clearly establish the goals and objectives
operations. Control room personnel and oper- they wish to achieve with the training that
ating staff, in general, need to have a full un- they provide to their employees. The learn-
derstanding of operating procedures. If working goals or objectives should be written in
ers are not fluent in English then procedures clear measurable terms before the training
and instructions need to be prepared in a sec- begins. These goals and objectives need to be
ond language understood by the workers. In tailored to each of the specific training mod-
addition, operating procedures need to be ules or segments. Employers should describe
changed when there is a change in the proc- the important actions and conditions under
ess as a result of the management of change which the employee will demonstrate com-
procedures. The consequences of operating petence or knowledge as well as what is ac-
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated ceptable performance.
and the information conveyed to the per- Hands-on-training where employees are
sonnel. For example, mechanical changes to able to use their senses beyond listening,
the process made by the maintenance depart- will enhance learning. For example, oper-
ment (like changing a valve from steel to ating personnel, who will work in a control
brass or other subtle changes) need to be room or at control panels, would benefit by
evaluated to determine if operating proce- being trained at a simulated control panel or
dures and practices also need to be changed. panels. Upset conditions of various types
All management of change actions must be could be displayed on the simulator, and
coordinated and integrated with current op- then the employee could go through the
erating procedures and operating personnel proper operating procedures to bring the
must be oriented to the changes in proce- simulator panel back to the normal oper-
dures before the change is made. When the ating parameters. A training environment
process is shut down in order to make a could be created to help the trainee feel the
change, then the operating procedures must full reality of the situation but, of course,
be updated before startup of the process. under controlled conditions. This realistic
Training in how to handle upset conditions type of training can be very effective in
must be accomplished as well as what oper- teaching employees correct procedures while
ating personnel are to do in emergencies allowing them to also see the consequences
such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline of what might happen if they do not follow
ruptures. Communication between operating established operating procedures. Other
personnel and workers performing work training techniques using videos or on-the-
within the process area, such as nonroutine job training can also be very effective for
tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards teaching other job tasks, duties, or other im-
of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating portant information. An effective training
personnel in accordance with established program will allow the employee to fully
procedures and to those performing the ac- participate in the training process and to
tual tasks. When the work is completed, op- practice their skill or knowledge.
368
Employers need to periodically evaluate rience. This log will also contain informa-
their training programs to see if the nection which will be of use to those auditing
essary skills, knowledge, and routines are process safety management compliance and
being properly understood and implemented those involved in incident investigations.
by their trained employees. The means or Contract employees must perform their
methods for evaluating the training should work safely. Considering that contractors
be developed along with the training pro- often perform very specialized and poten-
gram goals and objectives. Training program tially hazardous tasks such as confined space
evaluation will help employers to determine entry activities and nonroutine repair activi-
the amount of training their employees un- ties it is quite important that their activi-
derstood, and whether the desired results ties be controlled while they are working on
were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- or near a covered process. A permit system
pears that the trained employees are not at or work authorization system for these ac-
the level of knowledge and skill that was ex- tivities would also be helpful to all affected
pected, the employer will need to revise the employers. The use of a work authorization
training program, provide retraining, or pro- system keeps an employer informed of con-
vide more frequent refresher training ses- tract employee activities, and as a benefit
sions until the deficiency is resolved. Those the employer will have better coordination
who conducted the training and those who and more management control over the work
received the training should also be con- being performed in the process area. A well
sulted as to how best to improve the training run and well maintained process where em-
process. If there is a language barrier, the ployee safety is fully recognized will benefit
language known to the trainees should be all of those who work in the facility whether
used to reinforce the training messages and they be contract employees or employees of
information. the owner.
Careful consideration must be given to as- 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes,
sure that employees including maintenance the employer will find a PHA helpful in im-
and contract employees receive current and proving the design and construction of the
updated training. For example, if changes process from a reliability and quality point
are made to a process, impacted employees of view. The safe operation of the new proc-
must be trained in the changes and under- ess will be enhanced by making use of the
stand the effects of the changes on their job PHA recommendations before final installa-
tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures tions are completed. P&IDs are to be com-
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as al- pleted along with having the operating pro-
ready discussed the evaluation of the em- cedures in place and the operating staff
ployee’s absorption of training will certainly trained to run the process before startup.
influence the need for training. The initial startup procedures and normal
7. Contractors. Employers who use contrac- operating procedures need to be fully evalu-
tors to perform work in and around processes ated as part of the pre-startup review to as-
that involve highly hazardous chemicals, sure a safe transfer into the normal oper-
will need to establish a screening process so ating mode for meeting the process param-
that they hire and use contractors who ac- eters.
complish the desired job tasks without com- For existing processes that have been shut-
promising the safety and health of employ- down for turnaround, or modification, etc.,
ees at a facility. For contractors, whose safe- the employer must assure that any changes
ty performance on the job is not known to other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’ made to
the hiring employer, the employer will need the process during shutdown go through the
to obtain information on injury and illness management of change procedures. P&IDs
rates and experience and should obtain con- will need to be updated as necessary, as well
tractor references. Additionally, the em- as operating procedures and instructions. If
ployer must assure that the contractor has the changes made to the process during shut-
the appropriate job skills, knowledge and down are significant and impact the training
certifications (such as for pressure vessel program, then operating personnel as well as
welders). Contractor work methods and expe- employees engaged in routine and nonrou-
riences should be evaluated. For example, tine work in the process area may need some
does the contractor conducting demolition refresher or additional training in light of
work swing loads over operating processes or the changes. Any incident investigation rec-
does the contractor avoid such hazards? ommendations, compliance audits or PHA
Maintaining a site injury and illness log recommendations need to be reviewed as
for contractors is another method employers well to see what impacts they may have on
must use to track and maintain current the process before beginning the startup.
knowledge of work activities involving con- 9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need
tract employees working on or adjacent to to review their maintenance programs and
covered processes. Injury and illness logs of schedules to see if there are areas where
both the employer’s employees and contract ‘‘breakdown’’ maintenance is used rather
employees allow an employer to have full than an on-going mechanical integrity pro-
knowledge of process injury and illness expe- gram. Equipment used to process, store, or
369
handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to and inspection frequency, as well as appro-
be designed, constructed, installed and main- priate methodologies.
tained to minimize the risk of releases of The applicable codes and standards provide
such chemicals. This requires that a mechan- criteria for external inspections for such
ical integrity program be in place to assure items as foundation and supports, anchor
the continued integrity of process equip- bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires,
ment. Elements of a mechanical integrity nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, ground-
program include the identification and cating connections, protective coatings and in-
egorization of equipment and instrumenta- sulation, and external metal surfaces of pip-
tion, inspections and tests, testing and ining and vessels, etc. These codes and stand-
spection frequencies, development of mainte- ards also provide information on methodolo-
nance procedures, training of maintenance gies for internal inspection, and a frequency
personnel, the establishment of criteria for formula based on the corrosion rate of the
acceptable test results, documentation of materials of construction. Also, erosion both
test and inspection results, and documenta- internal and external needs to be considered
tion of manufacturer recommendations as to along with corrosion effects for piping and
meantime to failure for equipment and in- valves. Where the corrosion rate is not
strumentation. known, a maximum inspection frequency is
The first line of defense an employer has recommended, and methods of developing
available is to operate and maintain the the corrosion rate are available in the codes.
process as designed, and to keep the chemi- Internal inspections need to cover items
cals contained. This line of defense is backed such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metal-
up by the next line of defense which is the lic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness
controlled release of chemicals through measurements for vessels and piping; inspec-
venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or tion for erosion, corrosion, cracking and
overflow tanks which are designed to receive bulges; internal equipment like trays, baf-
such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense fles, sensors and screens for erosion, corro-
are the primary lines of defense or means to sion or cracking and other deficiencies.
prevent unwanted releases. The secondary Some of these inspections may be performed
lines of defense would include fixed fire pro- by state of local government inspectors
tection systems like sprinklers, water spray, under state and local statutes. However,
or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, each employer needs to develop procedures
designed drainage systems, and other sys- to ensure that tests and inspections are con-
tems which would control or mitigate haz- ducted properly and that consistency is
ardous chemicals once an unwanted release maintained even where different employees
occurs. These primary and secondary lines of may be involved. Appropriate training is to
defense are what the mechanical integrity be provided to maintenance personnel to en-
program needs to protect and strengthen sure that they understand the preventive
these primary and secondary lines of de- maintenance program procedures, safe prac-
fenses where appropriate. tices, and the proper use amd application of
The first step of an effective mechanical special equipment or unique tools that may
integrity program is to compile and cat- be required. This training is part of the over-
egorize a list of process equipment and in- all training program called for in the stand-
strumentation for inclusion in the program. ard.
This list would include pressure vessels, stor- A quality assurance system is needed to
age tanks, process piping, relief and vent help ensure that the proper materials of con-
systems, fire protection system components, struction are used, that fabrication and in-
emergency shutdown systems and alarms spection procedures are proper, and that in-
and interlocks and pumps. For the cat- stallation procedures recognize field instal-
egorization of instrumentation and the listed lation concerns. The quality assurance pro-
equipment the employer would prioritize gram is an essential part of the mechanical
which pieces of equipment require closer integrity program and will help to maintain
scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of the primary and secondary lines of defense
various instrumentation and equipment that have been designed into the process to
parts would be known from the manufactur- prevent unwanted chemical releases or those
ers data or the employer’s experience with which control or mitigate a release. ‘‘As
the parts, which would then influence the in- built’’ drawings, together with certifications
spection and testing frequency and associ- of coded vessels and other equipment, and
ated procedures. Also, applicable codes and materials of construction need to be verified
standards such as the National Board Inspec- and retained in the quality assurance docu-
tion Code, or those from the American Soci- mentation. Equipment installation jobs need
ety for Testing and Material, American Pe- to be properly inspected in the field for use
troleum Institute, National Fire Protection of proper materials and procedures and to as-
Association, American National Standards sure that qualified craftsmen are used to do
Institute, American Society of Mechanical the job. The use of appropriate gaskets,
Engineers, and other groups, provide infor- packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and weld-
mation to help establish an effective testing ing rods need to be verified in the field. Also
370
procedures for installation of safety devices change in materials of construction, equip-
need to be verified, such as the torque on the ment specifications, piping pre-arrange-
bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform ments, experimental equipment, computer
torque on flange bolts, proper installation of program revisions and changes in alarms and
pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a interlocks. Employers need to establish
problem, it may be appropriate to conduct means and methods to detect both technical
audits of the equipment supplier’s facilities changes and mechanical changes.
to better assure proper purchases of required Temporary changes have caused a number
equipment which is suitable for its intended of catastrophes over the years, and employ-
service. Any changes in equipment that may ers need to establish ways to detect tem-
become necessary will need to go through porary changes as well as those that are per-
the management of change procedures. manent. It is important that a time limit for
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonrou- temporary changes be established and mon-
tine work which is conducted in process itored since, without control, these changes
areas needs to be controlled by the employer may tend to become permanent. Temporary
in a consistent manner. The hazards identi- changes are subject to the management of
fied involving the work that is to be accom- change provisions. In addition, the manage-
plished must be communicated to those ment of change procedures are used to insure
doing the work, but also to those operating that the equipment and procedures are re-
personnel whose work could affect the safety turned to their original or designed condi-
of the process. A work authorization notice
tions at the end of the temporary change.
or permit must have a procedure that de-
Proper documentation and review of these
scribes the steps the maintenance super-
changes is invaluable in assuring that the
visor, contractor representative or other per-
safety and health considerations are being
son needs to follow to obtain the necessary
incorporated into the operating procedures
clearance to get the job started. The work
and the process.
authorization procedures need to reference
and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout Employers may wish to develop a form or
procedures, line breaking procedures, con- clearance sheet to facilitate the processing
fined space entry procedures and hot work of changes through the management of
authorizations. This procedure also needs to change procedures. A typical change form
provide clear steps to follow once the job is may include a description and the purpose of
completed in order to provide closure for the change, the technical basis for the
those that need to know the job is now com- change, safety and health considerations,
pleted and equipment can be returned to nor- documentation of changes for the operating
mal. procedures, maintenance procedures, inspec-
11. Managing Change. To properly manage tion and testing, P&IDs, electrical classifica-
changes to process chemicals, technology, tion, training and communications, pre-
equipment and facilities, one must define startup inspection, duration if a temporary
what is meant by change. In this process change, approvals and authorization. Where
safety management standard, change in- the impact of the change is minor and well
cludes all modifications to equipment, proce- understood, a check list reviewed by an au-
dures, raw materials and processing condi- thorized person with proper communication
tions other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’. to others who are affected may be sufficient.
These changes need to be properly managed However, for a more complex or significant
by identifying and reviewing them prior to design change, a hazard evaluation procedure
implementation of the change. For example, with approvals by operations, maintenance,
the operating procedures contain the oper- and safety departments may be appropriate.
ating parameters (pressure limits, tempera- Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw
ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the impor- materials, operating procedures, mechanical
tance of operating within these limits. While integrity programs, electrical classifica-
the operator must have the flexibility to tions, etc., need to be noted so that these re-
maintain safe operation within the estab- visions can be made permanent when the
lished parameters, any operation outside of drawings and procedure manuals are up-
these parameters requires review and ap- dated. Copies of process changes need to be
proval by a written management of change kept in an accessible location to ensure that
procedure. design changes are available to operating
Management of change covers such as personnel as well as to PHA team members
changes in process technology and changes when a PHA is being done or one is being up-
to equipment and instrumentation. Changes dated.
in process technology can result from 12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident inves-
changes in production rates, raw materials, tigation is the process of identifying the un-
experimentation, equipment unavailability, derlying causes of incidents and imple-
new equipment, new product development, menting steps to prevent similar events from
change in catalyst and changes in operating occurring. The intent of an incident inves-
conditions to improve yield or quality. tigation is for employers to learn from past
Equipment changes include among others experiences and thus avoid repeating past
371
mistakes. The incidents for whicn OSHA ex- Employers at a minimum must have an
pects employers to become aware and to in- emergency action plan which will facilitate
vestigate are the types of events which re- the prompt evacuation of employees due to
sult in or could reasonably have resulted in an unwanted release of a highly hazardous
a catastrophic release. Some of the events chemical. This means that the employer will
are sometimes referred to as ‘‘near misses,’’ have a plan that will be activated by an
meaning that a serious consequence did not alarm system to alert employees when to
occur, but could have. evacuate and, that employees who are phys-
Employers need to develop in-house capa- ically impaired, will have the necessary sup-
bility to investigate incidents that occur in port and assistance to get them to the safe
their facilities. A team needs to be assem- zone as well. The intent of these require-
bled by the employer and trained in the tech- ments is to alert and move employees to a
niques of investigation including how to con- safe zone quickly. Delaying alarms or con-
duct interviews of witnesses, needed docu- fusing alarms are to be avoided. The use of
mentation and report writing. A multi-dis- process control centers or similar process
ciplinary team is better able to gather the buildings in the process area as safe areas is
facts of the event and to analyze them and discouraged. Recent catastrophes have
develop plausible scenarios as to what hap- shown that a large life loss has occurred in
pened, and why. Team members should be se- these structures because of where they have
lected on the basis of their training, knowl- been sited and because they are not nec-
edge and ability to contribute to a team ef- essarily designed to withstand over-pressures
fort to fully investigate the incident. Em- from shockwaves resulting from explosions
ployees in the process area where the inci- in the process area.
dent occurred should be consulted, inter- Unwanted incidental releases of highly
viewed or made a member of the team. Their hazardous chemicals in the process area
knowledge of the events form a significant must be addressed by the employer as to
set of facts about the incident which oc- what actions employees are to take. If the
curred. The report, its findings and rec- employer wants employees to evacuate the
ommendations are to be shared with those area, then the emergency action plan will be
who can benefit from the information. The activated. For outdoor processes where wind
cooperation of employees is essential to an direction is important for selecting the safe
effective incident investigation. The focus of route to a refuge area, the employer should
the investigation should be to obtain facts, place a wind direction indicator such as a
and not to place blame. The team and the in- wind sock or pennant at the highest point
vestigation process should clearly deal with that can be seen throughout the process
all involved individuals in a fair, open and area. Employees can move in the direction of
consistent manner. cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer the refuge area by knowing the wind direc-
must address what actions employees are to tion.
take when there is an unwanted release of If the employer wants specific employees
highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency pre- in the release area to control or stop the
paredness or the employer’s tertiary (third) minor emergency or incidental release, these
lines of defense are those that will be relied actions must be planned for in advance and
on along with the secondary lines of defense procedures developed and implemented.
when the primary lines of defense which are Preplanning for handling incidental releases
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to for minor emergencies in the process area
stop the release. Employers will need to de- needs to be done, appropriate equipment for
cide if they want employees to handle and the hazards must be provided, and training
stop small or minor incidental releases. conducted for those employees who will per-
Whether they wish to mobilize the available form the emergency work before they re-
resources at the plant and have them spond to handle an actual release. The em-
brought to bear on a more significant re- ployer’s training program, including the
lease. Or whether employers want their em- Hazard Communication standard training is
ployees to evacuate the danger area and to address the training needs for employees
promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone who are expected to handle incidental or
area, and allow the local community emer- minor releases.
gency response organizations to handle the Preplanning for releases that are more se-
release. Or whether the employer wants to rious than incidental releases is another im-
use some combination of these actions. Em- portant line of defense to be used by the em-
ployers will need to select how many dif- ployer. When a serious release of a highly
ferent emergency preparedness or tertiary hazardous chemical occurs, the employer
lines of defense they plan to have and then through preplanning will have determined in
develop the necessary plans and procedures, advance what actions employees are to take.
and appropriately train employees in their The evacuation of the immediate release
emergency duties and responsibilities and area and other areas as necessary would be
then implement these lines of defense. accomplished under the emergency action
372
plan. If the employer wishes to use plant per- 14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to
sonnel such as a fire brigade, spill control select a trained individual or assemble a
team, a hazardous materials team, or use trained team of people to audit the process
employees to render aid to those in the im- safety management system and program. A
mediate release area and control or mitigate small process or plant may need only one
the incident, these actions are covered by knowledgeable person to conduct an audit.
§ 1910.120, the Hazardous Waste Operations The audit is to include an evaluation of the
and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) design and effectiveness of the process safety
standard. If outside assistance is necessary, management system and a field inspection of
such as through mutual aid agreements be- the safety and health conditions and prac-
tween employers or local government emer- tices to verify that the employer’s systems
gency response organizations, these emer- are effectively implemented. The audit
gency responders are also covered by should be conducted or lead by a person
HAZWOPER. The safety and health protec- knowledgeable in audit techniques and who
tions required for emergency responders are is impartial towards the facility or area
the responsibility of their employers and of being audited. The essential elements of an
the on-scene incident commander. audit program include planning, staffing,
conduting the audit, evaluation and correc-
Responders may be working under very
tive action, follow-up and documentation.
hazardous conditions and therefore the ob-
Planning in advance is essential to the suc-
jective is to have them competently led by
cess of the auditing process. Each employer
an on-scene incident commander and the
needs to establish the format, staffing,
commander’s staff, properly equipped to do
scheduling and verification methods prior to
their assigned work safely, and fully trained conducting the audit. The format should be
to carry out their duties safely before they designed to provide the lead auditor with a
respond to an emergency. Drills, training ex- procedure or checklist which details the re-
ercises, or simulations with the local com- quirements of each section of the standard.
munity emergency response planners and re- The names of the audit team members
sponder organizations is one means to obtain should be listed as part of the format as well.
better preparedness. This close cooperation The checklist, if properly designed, could
and coordination between plant and local serve as the verification sheet which pro-
community emergency preparedness man- vides the auditor with the necessary infor-
agers will also aid the employer in com- mation to expedite the review and assure
plying with the Environmental Protection that no requirements of the standard are
Agency’s Risk Management Plan criteria. omitted. This verification sheet format
One effective way for medium to large fa- could also identify those elements that will
cilities to enhance coordination and commu- require evaluation or a response to correct
nication during emergencies for on plant op- deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for
erations and with local community organiza- developing the follow-up and documentation
tions is for employers to establish and equip requirements.
an emergency control center. The emergency The selection of effective audit team mem-
control center would be sited in a safe zone bers is critical to the success of the program.
area so that it could be occupied throughout Team members should be chosen for their ex-
the duration of an emergency. The center perience, knowledge, and training and should
would serve as the major ccommunication be familiar with the processes and with au-
link between the on-scene incident com- diting techniques, practices and procedures.
mander and plant or corporate management The size of the team will vary depending on
as well as with the local community offi- the size and complexity of the process under
cials. The communication equipment in the consideration. For a large, complex, highly
emergency control center should include a instrumented plant, it may be desirable to
network to receive and transmit information have team members with expertise in proc-
by telephone, radio or other means. It is im- ess engineering and design, process chem-
portant to have a backup communication istry, instrumentation and computer con-
network in case of power failure or one com- trols, electrical hazards and classifications,
munication means fails. The center should safety and health disciplines, maintenance,
also be equipped with the plant layout and emergency preparedness, warehousing or
community maps, utility drawings including shipping, and process safety auditing. The
fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate team may use part-time members to provide
reference materials such as a government for the depth of expertise required as well as
agency notification list, company personnel for what is actually done or followed, com-
phone list, SARA Title III reports and safety pared to what is written.
data sheets, emergency plans and procedures An effective audit includes a review of the
manual, a listing with the location of emer- relevant documentation and process safety
gency response equipment, mutual aid infor- information, inspection of the physical fa-
mation, and access to meteorological or cilities, and interviews with all levels of
weather condition data and any dispersion plant personnel. Utilizing the audit proce-
modeling data. dure and checklist developed in the
373
preplanning stage, the audit team can sys- It is important to assure that each defi-
tematically analyze compliance with the ciency identified is addressed, the corrective
provisions of the standard and any other cor- action to be taken noted, and the audit per-
porate policies that are relevant. For exam- son or team responsible be properly docu-
ple, the audit team will review all aspects of mented by the employer. To control the cor-
the training program as part of the overall rective action process, the employer should
audit. The team will review the written consider the use of a tracking system. This
training program for adequacy of content, tracking system might include periodic sta-
frequency of training, effectiveness of train- tus reports shared with affected levels of
ing in terms of its goals and objectives as management, specific reports such as com-
well as to how it fits into meeting the stand- pletion of an engineering study, and a final
ard’s requirements, documentation, etc. implementation report to provide closure for
Through interviews, the team can determine audit findings that have been through man-
the employee’s knowledge and awareness of agement of change, if appropriate, and then
the safety procedures, duties, rules, emer- shared with affected employees and manage-
gency response assignments, etc. During the ment. This type of tracking system provides
inspection, the team can observe actual the employer with the status of the correc-
practices such as safety and health policies, tive action. It also provides the documenta-
procedures, and work authorization prac- tion required to verify that appropriate cor-
tices. This approach enables the team to rective actions were taken on deficiencies
identify deficiencies and determine where identified in the audit.
corrective actions or improvements are nec- APPENDIX D TO § 1910.119—SOURCES OF
essary. FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDATORY)
An audit is a technique used to gather suf-
ficient facts and information, including sta- 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety,
tistical information, to verify compliance American Institute of Chemical Engineers,
with standards. Auditors should select as 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017,
part of their preplanning a sample size suffi- (212) 705–7319.
cient to give a degree of confidence that the 2. ‘‘Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Pro-
audit reflects the level of compliance with cedures,’’ American Institute of Chemical
the standard. The audit team, through this Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York,
NY 10017.
systematic analysis, should document areas
3. ‘‘Guidelines for Technical Management
which require corrective action as well as
of Chemical Process Safety,’’ Center for
those areas where the process safety man-
Chemical Process Safety of the American In-
agement system is effective and working in
stitute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th
an effective manner. This provides a record
Street, New York, NY 10017.
of the audit procedures and findings, and
4. ‘‘Evaluating Process Safety in the Chem-
serves as a baseline of operation data for fu-
ical Industry,’’ Chemical Manufacturers As-
ture audits. It will assist future auditors in sociation; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC
determining changes or trends from previous 20037.
audits. 5. ‘‘Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,’’
Corrective action is one of the most impor- Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M
tant parts of the audit. It includes not only Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
addressing the identified deficiencies, but 6. ‘‘Management of Process Hazards,’’
also planning, followup, and documentation. American Petroleum Institute (API Rec-
The corrective action process normally be- ommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W.,
gins with a management review of the audit Washington, D.C. 20005.
findings. The purpose of this review is to de- 7. ‘‘Improving Owner and Contractor Safe-
termine what actions are appropriate, and to ty Performance,’’ American Petroleum Insti-
establish priorities, timetables, resource al- tute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API,
locations and requirements and responsibil- 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.
ities. In some cases, corrective action may 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association
involve a simple change in procedure or (CMA’s Manager Guide), First Edition, Sep-
minor maintenance effort to remedy the con- tember 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W.,
cern. Management of change procedures need Washington, D.C. 20037.
to be used, as appropriate, even for what 9. ‘‘Improving Construction Safety Per-
may seem to be a minor change. Many of the formance,’’ Report A–3, The Business Round-
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while table; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Av-
some may require engineering studies or in- enue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes
depth review of actual procedures and prac- criteria to evaluate contractor safety per-
tices. There may be instances where no ac- formance and criteria to enhance contractor
tion is necessary and this is a valid response safety performance).
to an audit finding. All actions taken, in- 10. ‘‘Recommended Guidelines for Con-
cluding an explanation where no action is tractor Safety and Health,’’ Texas Chemical
taken on a finding, needs to be documented Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402
as to what was done and why. Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701–1534.
374
11. ‘‘Loss Prevention in the Process Indus- (ii) Corrective actions involving
tries,’’ Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees, clean-up operations at sites covered by
Butterworth; London 1983. the Resource Conservation and Recov-
12. ‘‘Safety and Health Program Manage-
ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42
ment Guidelines,’’ 1989; U.S. Department of
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
ministration. (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at
13. ‘‘Safety and Health Guide for the Chem- sites recognized by Federal, state, local
ical Industry,’’ 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. De- or other governmental bodies as uncon-
partment of Labor, Occupational Safety and trolled hazardous waste sites;
Health Administration; 200 Constitution Av-
(iv) Operations involving hazardous
enue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210.
14. ‘‘Review of Emergency Systems,’’ June
wastes that are conducted at treat-
1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa-
(EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264
Response, Washington, DC 20460. and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen-
15. ‘‘Technical Guidance for Hazards Anal- cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A.
ysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely to implement RCRA regulations; and
Hazardous Substances,’’ December 1987; U.S. (v) Emergency response operations
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
Federal Emergency Management Adminis-
for releases of, or substantial threats of
tration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of releases of, hazardous substances with-
Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. out regard to the location of the haz-
16. ‘‘Accident Investigation * * * A New ard.
Approach,’’ 1983, National Safety Council; 444 (2) Application. (i) All requirements of
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611– part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the
3991. Code of Federal Regulations apply pur-
17. ‘‘Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classi-
suant to their terms to hazardous
fication Guide,’’ 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow
Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. waste and emergency response oper-
18. ‘‘Chemical Exposure Index,’’ May 1988, ations whether covered by this section
Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan or not. If there is a conflict or overlap,
48674. the provision more protective of em-
[57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 57 FR 7847, Mar. 4,
ployee safety and health shall apply
1992, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; without regard to 29 CFR 1910.5(c)(1).
67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op-
2011; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, erations within the scope of paragraphs
Feb. 8, 2013] (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec-
tion must comply with all paragraphs
§ 1910.120 Hazardous waste operations of this section except paragraphs (p)
and emergency response. and (q).
(a) Scope, application, and definitions— (iii) Operations within the scope of
(1) Scope. This section covers the fol- paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section
lowing operations, unless the employer must comply only with the require-
can demonstrate that the operation ments of paragraph (p) of this section.
does not involve employee exposure or
the reasonable possibility for employee NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions
of paragraph (p) of this section cover any
exposure to safety or health hazards:
treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper-
(i) Clean-up operations required by a ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265
governmental body, whether Federal, or by state law authorized under RCRA, and
state, local or other involving haz- required to have a permit or interim status
ardous substances that are conducted from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from
at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
(including, but not limited to, the (B) Employers who are not required to
EPA’s National Priority Site List have a permit or interim status because they
(NPL), state priority site lists, sites are conditionally exempt small quantity
generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera-
recommended for the EPA NPL, and
tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex-
initial investigations of government emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts
identified sites which are conducted be- 264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are
fore the presence or absence of haz- not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through
ardous substances has been (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers
ascertained); who are required by the EPA or state agency
375
to have their employees engage in emer- substance. Responses to incidental re-
gency response or who direct their employ- leases of hazardous substances where
ees to engage in emergency response are cov- the substance can be absorbed, neutral-
ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and
ized, or otherwise controlled at the
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec-
tion. Excepted employers who are not re- time of release by employees in the im-
quired to have employees engage in emer- mediate release area, or by mainte-
gency response, who direct their employees nance personnel are not considered to
to evacuate in the case of such emergencies be emergency responses within the
and who meet the requirements of paragraph scope of this standard. Responses to re-
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the leases of hazardous substances where
balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. there is no potential safety or health
(C) If an area is used primarily for treat-
hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re-
sponse operations in that area shall comply exposure) are not considered to be
with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other emergency responses.
areas not used primarily for treatment, stor- Facility means (A) any building,
age, or disposal, any emergency response op- structure, installation, equipment, pipe
erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of or pipeline (including any pipe into a
this section. Compliance with the require- sewer or publicly owned treatment
ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im-
be deemed to be in compliance with the re-
poundment, ditch, storage container,
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec-
tion. motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air-
craft, or (B) any site or area where a
(iv) Emergency response operations hazardous substance has been depos-
for releases of, or substantial threats of ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
releases of, hazardous substances which otherwise come to be located; but does
are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) not include any consumer product in
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must consumer use or any water-borne ves-
only comply with the requirements of sel.
paragraph (q) of this section. Hazardous materials response
(3) Definitions—Buddy system means a (HAZMAT) team means an organized
system of organizing employees into group of employees, designated by the
work groups in such a manner that employer, who are expected to perform
each employee of the work group is work to handle and control actual or
designated to be observed by at least potential leaks or spills of hazardous
one other employee in the work group. substances requiring possible close ap-
The purpose of the buddy system is to proach to the substance. The team
provide rapid assistance to employees members perform responses to releases
in the event of an emergency. or potential releases of hazardous sub-
Clean-up operation means an oper- stances for the purpose of control or
ation where hazardous substances are stabilization of the incident. A
removed, contained, incinerated, neu- HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor
tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT
any other manner processed or handled team. A HAZMAT team, however, may
with the ultimate goal of making the be a separate component of a fire bri-
site safer for people or the environ- gade or fire department.
ment. Hazardous substance means any sub-
Decontamination means the removal stance designated or listed under para-
of hazardous substances from employ- graphs (A) through (D) of this defini-
ees and their equipment to the extent tion, exposure to which results or may
necessary to preclude the occurrence of result in adverse affects on the health
foreseeable adverse health affects. or safety of employees:
Emergency response or responding to (A) Any substance defined under sec-
emergencies means a response effort by tion 103(14) of the Comprehensive Envi-
employees from outside the immediate ronmental Response Compensation and
release area or by other designated re- Liability Act (CERCLA) (42 U.S.C.
sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local 9601).
fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence (B) Any biological agent and other
which results, or is likely to result, in disease-causing agent which after re-
an uncontrolled release of a hazardous lease into the environment and upon
376
exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- vidual’s ability to escape from a dan-
similation into any person, either di- gerous atmosphere.
rectly from the environment or indi- Oxygen deficiency means that con-
rectly by ingestion through food centration of oxygen by volume below
chains, will or may reasonably be an- which atmosphere supplying res-
ticipated to cause death, disease, be- piratory protection must be provided.
havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic It exists in atmospheres where the per-
mutation, physiological malfunctions centage of oxygen by volume is less
(including malfunctions in reproduc- than 19.5 percent oxygen.
tion) or physical deformations in such Permissible exposure limit means the
persons or their offspring; exposure, inhalation or dermal permis-
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. sible exposure limit specified in 29 CFR
Department of Transportation as haz- part 1910, subparts G and Z.
ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 Published exposure level means the ex-
and appendices; and posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH
(D) Hazardous waste as herein de- Recommendations for Occupational
fined. Health Standards’’ dated 1986, which is
Hazardous waste means— incorporated by reference as specified
in § 1910.6 or if none is specified, the ex-
(A) A waste or combination of wastes
posure limits published in the stand-
as defined in 40 CFR 261.3, or
ards specified by the American Con-
(B) Those substances defined as haz- ference of Governmental Industrial Hy-
ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. gienists in their publication ‘‘Thresh-
Hazardous waste operation means any old Limit Values and Biological Expo-
operation conducted within the scope sure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated 1987,
of this standard. which is incorporated by reference as
Hazardous waste site or Site means specified in § 1910.6.
any facility or location within the Post emergency response means that
scope of this standard at which haz- portion of an emergency response per-
ardous waste operations take place. formed after the immediate threat of a
Health hazard means a chemical or a release has been stabilized or elimi-
pathogen where acute or chronic nated and clean-up of the site has
health effects may occur in exposed begun. If post emergency response is
employees. It also includes stress due performed by an employer’s own em-
to temperature extremes. The term ployees who were part of the initial
health hazard includes chemicals that emergency response, it is considered to
are classified in accordance with the be part of the initial response and not
Hazard Communication Standard, 29 post emergency response. However, if a
CFR 1910.1200, as posing one of the fol- group of an employer’s own employees,
lowing hazardous effects: Acute tox- separate from the group providing ini-
icity (any route of exposure); skin cor- tial response, performs the clean-up op-
rosion or irritation; serious eye dam- eration, then the separate group of em-
age or eye irritation; respiratory or ployees would be considered to be per-
skin sensitization; germ cell mutage- forming post-emergency response and
nicity; carcinogenicity; reproductive subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec-
toxicity; specific target organ toxicity tion.
(single or repeated exposure); aspira- Qualified person means a person with
tion toxicity or simple asphyxiant. (See specific training, knowledge and expe-
Appendix A to § 1910.1200—Health Haz- rience in the area for which the person
ard Criteria (Mandatory) for the cri- has the responsibility and the author-
teria for determining whether a chem- ity to control.
ical is classified as a health hazard.) Site safety and health supervisor (or of-
IDLH orImmediately dangerous to life ficial) means the individual located on
or health means an atmospheric con- a hazardous waste site who is respon-
centration of any toxic, corrosive or sible to the employer and has the au-
asphyxiant substance that poses an im- thority and knowledge necessary to
mediate threat to life or would cause implement the site safety and health
irreversible or delayed adverse health plan and verify compliance with appli-
effects or would interfere with an indi- cable safety and health requirements.
377
Small quantity qenerator means a gen- (F) The employer’s standard oper-
erator of hazardous wastes who in any ating procedures for safety and health;
calendar month generates no more and
than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of (G) Any necessary interface between
hazardous waste in that month. general program and site specific ac-
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, tivities.
means an area identified as an uncon- (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations
trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- created during initial site preparation
ernmental body, whether Federal, or during hazardous waste operations
state, local or other where an accumu- shall be shored or sloped as appropriate
lation of hazardous substances creates to prevent accidental collapse in ac-
a threat to the health and safety of in- cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part
dividuals or the environment or both. 1926.
Some sites are found on public lands (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors.
such as those created by former munic- An employer who retains contractor or
ipal, county or state landfills where il- sub-contractor services for work in
legal or poorly managed waste disposal hazardous waste operations shall in-
has taken place. Other sites are found form those contractors, sub-contrac-
on private property, often belonging to tors, or their representatives of the
generators or former generators of haz- site emergency response procedures
ardous substance wastes. Examples of and any potential fire, explosion,
such sites include, but are not limited health, safety or other hazards of the
to, surface impoundments, landfills, hazardous waste operation that have
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- been identified by the employer, in-
mal operations at TSD sites are not cluding those identified in the employ-
covered by this definition. er’s information program.
(b) Safety and health program. (v) Program availability. The written
safety and health program shall be
NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs made available to any contractor or
developed and implemented to meet other
subcontractor or their representative
Federal, state, or local regulations are con-
sidered acceptable in meeting this require- who will be involved with the haz-
ment if they cover or are modified to cover ardous waste operation; to employees;
the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- to employee designated representa-
ditional or separate safety and health pro- tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per-
gram is not required by this paragraph. sonnel of other Federal, state, or local
agencies with regulatory authority
(1) General. (i) Employers shall de-
over the site.
velop and implement a written safety
(2) Organizational structure part of the
and health program for their employ-
site program—(i) The organizationa1
ees involved in hazardous waste oper-
structure part of the program shall es-
ations. The program shall be designed
tablish the specific chain of command
to identify, evaluate, and control safe-
and specify the overall responsibilities
ty and health hazards, and provide for
of supervisors and employees. It shall
emergency response for hazardous
include, at a minimum, the following
waste operations.
elements:
(ii) The written safety and health
(A) A general supervisor who has the
program shall incorporate the fol-
responsibility and authority to direct
lowing:
all hazardous waste operations.
(A) An organizational structure; (B) A site safety and health super-
(B) A comprehensive workplan; visor who has the responsibility and
(C) A site-specific safety and health authority to develop and implement
plan which need not repeat the employ- the site safety and health plan and
er’s standard operating procedures re- verify compliance.
quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this (C) All other personnel needed for
section; hazardous waste site operations and
(D) The safety and health training emergency response and their general
program; functions and responsibilities.
(E) The medical surveillance pro- (D) The lines of authority, responsi-
gram; bility, and communication.
378
(ii) The organizational structure (D) Medical surveillance require-
shall be reviewed and updated as nec- ments in accordance with the program
essary to reflect the current status of in paragraph (f) of this section.
waste site operations. (E) Frequency and types of air moni-
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the toring, personnel monitoring, and envi-
site program. The comprehensive ronmental sampling techniques and in-
workplan part of the program shall ad- strumentation to be used, including
dress the tasks and objectives of the methods of maintenance and calibra-
site operations and the logistics and re- tion of monitoring and sampling equip-
sources required to reach those tasks ment to be used.
and objectives. (F) Site control measures in accord-
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall ance with the site control program re-
address anticipated clean-up activities quired in paragraph (d) of this section.
as well as normal operating procedures (G) Decontamination procedures in
which need not repeat the employer’s accordance with paragraph (k) of this
procedures available elsewhere. section.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan
(H) An emergency response plan
shall define work tasks and objectives
meeting the requirements of paragraph
and identify the methods for accom-
(l) of this section for safe and effective
plishing those tasks and objectives.
responses to emergencies, including
(iii) The comprehensive workplan
the necessary PPE and other equip-
shall establish personnel requirements
ment.
for implementing the plan.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan (I) Confined space entry procedures.
shall provide for the implementation of (J) A spill containment program
the training required in paragraph (e) meeting the requirements of paragraph
of this section. (j) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe-
shall provide for the implementation of cific safety and health plan shall pro-
the required informational programs vide for pre-entry briefings to be held
required in paragraph (i) of this sec- prior to initiating any site activity,
tion. and at such other times as necessary to
(vi) The comprehensive workplan ensure that employees are apprised of
shall provide for the implementation of the site safety and health plan and
the medical surveillance program de- that this plan is being followed. The in-
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. formation and data obtained from site
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan characterization and analysis work re-
part of the program—(i) General. The site quired in paragraph (c) of this section
safety and health plan, which must be shall be used to prepare and update the
kept on site, shall address the safety site safety and health plan.
and health hazards of each phase of site (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and
operation and include the requirements health plan. Inspections shall be con-
and procedures for employee protec- ducted by the site safety and health su-
tion. pervisor or, in the absence of that indi-
(ii) Elements. The site safety and vidual, another individual who is
health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- knowledgeable in occupational safety
dress the following: and health, acting on behalf of the em-
(A) A safety and health risk or haz- ployer as necessary to determine the
ard analysis for each site task and op- effectiveness of the site safety and
eration found in the workplan. health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef-
(B) Employee training assignments fectiveness of the site safety and
to assure compliance with paragraph health plan shall be corrected by the
(e) of this section. employer.
(C) Personal protective equipment to (c) Site characterization and analysis—
be used by employees for each of the (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall
site tasks and operations being con- be evaluated in accordance with this
ducted as required by the personal pro- paragraph to identify specific site haz-
tective equipment program in para- ards and to determine the appropriate
graph (g)(5) of this section. safety and health control procedures
379
needed to protect employees from the (5) Personal protective equipment. Per-
identified hazards. sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- be provided and used during initial site
nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- entry in accordance with the following
tics shall be performed prior to site requirements:
entry by a qualified person in order to (i) Based upon the results of the pre-
aid in the selection of appropriate em- liminary site evaluation, an ensemble
ployee protection methods prior to site of PPE shall be selected and used dur-
entry. Immediately after initial site ing initial site entry which will provide
entry, a more detailed evaluation of protection to a level of exposure below
the site’s specific characteristics shall permissible exposure limits and pub-
be performed by a qualified person in lished exposure levels for known or sus-
order to further identify existing site pected hazardous substances and
hazards and to further aid in the selec- health hazards, and which will provide
tion of the appropriate engineering protection against other known and
controls and personal protective equip-
suspected hazards identified during the
ment for the tasks to be performed.
preliminary site evaluation. If there is
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected no permissible exposure limit or pub-
conditions that may pose inhalation or
lished exposure level, the employer
skin absorption hazards that are imme-
may use other published studies and in-
diately dangerous to life or health
formation as a guide to appropriate
(IDLH), or other conditions that may
cause death or serious harm, shall be personal protective equipment.
identified during the preliminary sur- (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained
vey and evaluated during the detailed breathing apparatus is not used as part
survey. Examples of such hazards in- of the entry ensemble, and if res-
clude, but are not limited to, confined piratory protection is warranted by the
space entry, potentially explosive or potential hazards identified during the
flammable situations, visible vapor preliminary site evaluation, an escape
clouds, or areas where biological indi- self-contained breathing apparatus of
cators such as dead animals or vegeta- at least five minute’s duration shall be
tion are located. carried by employees during initial site
(4) Required information. The fol- entry.
lowing information to the extent avail- (iii) If the preliminary site evalua-
able shall be obtained by the employer tion does not produce sufficient infor-
prior to allowing employees to enter a mation to identify the hazards or sus-
site: pected hazards of the site, an ensemble
(i) Location and approximate size of providing protection equivalent to
the site. Level B PPE shall be provided as min-
(ii) Description of the response activ- imum protection, and direct reading
ity and/or the job task to be performed. instruments shall be used as appro-
(iii) Duration of the planned em- priate for identifying IDLH conditions.
ployee activity. (See appendix B for a description of
(iv) Site topography and accessibility Level B hazards and the recommenda-
by air and roads. tions for Level B protective equip-
(v) Safety and health hazards ex- ment.)
pected at the site. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have
(vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- been identified, the appropriate PPE
stance dispersion. shall be selected and used in accord-
(vii) Present status and capabilities ance with paragraph (g) of this section.
of emergency response teams that (6) Monitoring. The following moni-
would provide assistance to hazardous toring shall be conducted during initial
waste clean-up site employees at the site entry when the site evaluation
time of an emergency. produces information that shows the
(viii) Hazardous substances and potential for ionizing radiation or
health hazards involved or expected at IDLH conditions, or when the site in-
the site, and their chemical and phys- formation is not sufficient reasonably
ical properties. to eliminate these possible conditions:
380
(i) Monitoring with direct reading in- (2) Site control program. A site control
struments for hazardous levels of ion- program for protecting employees
izing radiation. which is part of the employer’s site
(ii) Monitoring the air with appro- safety and health program required in
priate direct reading test equipment paragraph (b) of this section shall be
(i.e., combustible gas meters, detector developed during the planning stages of
tubes) for IDLH and other conditions a hazardous waste clean-up operation
that may cause death or serious harm and modified as necessary as new infor-
(combustible or explosive atmospheres, mation becomes available.
oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (3) Elements of the site control program.
(iii) Visually observing for signs of The site control program shall, as a
actual or potential IDLH or other dan- minimum, include: A site map; site
gerous conditions. work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys-
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem’’; site communications including
gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the
of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe
after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of
mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where
of operations. these requirements are covered else-
(7) Risk identification. Once the pres-
where they need not be repeated.
ence and concentrations of specific
hazardous substances and health haz- (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em-
ards have been established, the risks ployees working on site (such as but
associated with these substances shall not limited to equipment operators,
be identified. Employees who will be general laborers and others) exposed to
working on the site shall be informed hazardous substances, health hazards,
of any risks that have been identified. or safety hazards and their supervisors
In situations covered by the Hazard and management responsible for the
Communication Standard, 29 CFR site shall receive training meeting the
1910.1200, training required by that requirements of this paragraph before
standard need not be duplicated. they are permitted to engage in haz-
ardous waste operations that could ex-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(7): Risks to con- pose them to hazardous substances,
sider include, but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex-
posure limits and published exposure levels. shall receive review training as speci-
(b) IDLH concentrations. fied in this paragraph.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted
sources. to participate in or supervise field ac-
(d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function
ranges.
(f) Oxygen deficiency. and responsibility.
(2) Elements to be covered. The train-
(8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol-
mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing:
ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates
substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health;
present on site that is available to the
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards
employer and relevant to the duties an
present on the site;
employee is expected to perform shall
be made available to the affected em- (iii) Use of personal protective equip-
ployees prior to the commencement of ment;
their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em-
may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz-
the hazard communication standard for ards;
this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls
(d) Site control—(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site;
priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require-
implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp-
sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate
clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and
381
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) sponsibility is employees covered by
through (J) of the site safety and paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and
health plan set forth in paragraph at least eight additional hours of spe-
(b)(4)(ii) of this section. cialized training at the time of job as-
(3) Initial training. (i) General site signment on such topics as, but not
workers (such as equipment operators, limited to, the employer’s safety and
general laborers and supervisory per- health program and the associated em-
sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance ployee training program, personal pro-
removal or other activities which ex- tective equipment program, spill con-
pose or potentially expose workers to tainment program, and health hazard
hazardous substances and health haz- monitoring procedure and techniques.
ards shall receive a minimum of 40 (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers
hours of instruction off the site, and a shall be qualified to instruct employees
minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being
perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers
a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub-
for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or
not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden-
toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec-
surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In-
exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent
its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of
receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter.
struction off the site, and the min-
(6) Training certification. Employees
imum of one day actual field experi-
and supervisors that have received and
ence under the direct supervision of a
successfully completed the training
trained, experienced supervisor.
and field experience specified in para-
(iii) Workers regularly on site who
graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec-
work in areas which have been mon-
tion shall be certified by their instruc-
itored and fully characterized indi-
tor or the head instructor and trained
cating that exposures are under per-
missible exposure limits and published supervisor as having successfully com-
exposure limits where respirators are pleted the necessary training. A writ-
not necessary, and the characterization ten certificate shall be given to each
indicates that there are no health haz- person so certified. Any person who has
ards or the possibility of an emergency not been so certified or who does not
developing, shall receive a minimum of meet the requirements of paragraph
24 hours of instruction off the site and (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
the minimum of one day actual field from engaging in hazardous waste oper-
experience under the direct supervision ations.
of a trained, experienced supervisor. (7) Emergency response. Employees
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are engaged in responding to haz-
who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous emergency situations at haz-
and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who ardous waste clean-up sites that may
become general site workers or who are expose them to hazardous substances
required to wear respirators, shall have shall be trained in how to respond to
the additional 16 hours and two days of such expected emergencies.
training necessary to total the training (8) Refresher training. Employees spec-
specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section,
(4) Management and supervisor train- and managers and supervisors specified
ing. On-site management and super- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall
visors directly responsible for, or who receive eight hours of refresher train-
supervise employees engaged in, haz- ing annually on the items specified in
ardous waste operations shall receive paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this
40 hours initial training, and three section, any critique of incidents that
days of supervised field experience (the have occurred in the past year that can
training may be reduced to 24 hours serve as training examples of related
and one day if the only area of their re- work, and other relevant topics.
382
(9) Equivalent training. Employers ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of
who can show by documentation or cer- this section on the following schedules:
tification that an employee’s work ex- (i) For employees covered under
perience and/or training has resulted in paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and
training equivalent to that training re- (f)(2)(iv):
quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through (A) Prior to assignment;
(e)(4) of this section shall not be re- (B) At least once every twelve
quired to provide the initial training months for each employee covered un-
requirements of those paragraphs to less the attending physician believes a
such employees and shall provide a longer interval (not greater than bien-
copy of the certification or documenta- nially) is appropriate;
tion to the employee upon request. (C) At termination of employment or
However, certified employees or em- reassignment to an area where the em-
ployees with equivalent training new ployee would not be covered if the em-
to a site shall receive appropriate, site ployee has not had an examination
specific training before site entry and within the last six months;
have appropriate supervised field expe- (D) As soon as possible upon notifica-
rience at the new site. Equivalent tion by an employee that the employee
training includes any academic train- has developed signs or symptoms indi-
ing or the training that existing em- cating possible overexposure to haz-
ployees might have already received ardous substances or health hazards, or
from actual hazardous waste site work that the employee has been injured or
experience. exposed above the permissible exposure
(f) Medical surveillance—(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in
Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation;
fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an
ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is
ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary.
graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under
surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ-
with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov-
ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may
(2) Employees covered. The medical
have been injured, received a health
surveillance program shall be insti-
impairment, developed signs or symp-
tuted by the employer for the following
toms which may have resulted from ex-
employees:
posure to hazardous substances result-
(i) All employees who are or may be ing from an emergency incident, or ex-
exposed to hazardous substances or posed during an emergency incident to
health hazards at or above the permis- hazardous substances at concentra-
sible exposure limits or, if there is no tions above the permissible exposure
permissible exposure limit, above the limits or the published exposure levels
published exposure levels for these sub- without the necessary personal protec-
stances, without regard to the use of tive equipment being used:
respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (A) As soon as possible following the
(ii) All employees who wear a res- emergency incident or development of
pirator for 30 days or more a year or as signs or symptoms;
required by § 1910.134; (B) At additional times, if the exam-
(iii) All employees who are injured, ining physician determines that follow-
become ill or develop signs or symp- up examinations or consultations are
toms due to possible overexposure in- medically necessary.
volving hazardous substances or health (4) Content of medical examinations and
hazards from an emergency response or consultations. (i) Medical examinations
hazardous waste operation; and required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. tion shall include a medical and work
(3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in
and consultations. Medical examina- the employee’s file) with special em-
tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han-
available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and
383
health hazards, and to fitness for duty (C) The results of the medical exam-
including the ability to wear any re- ination and tests if requested by the
quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- employee.
perature extremes) that may be ex- (D) A statement that the employee
pected at the work site. has been informed by the physician of
(ii) The content of medical examina- the results of the medical examination
tions or consultations made available and any medical conditions which re-
to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) quire further examination or treat-
shall be determined by the attending ment.
physician. The guidelines in the Occu- (ii) The written opinion obtained by
pational Safety and Health Guidance the employer shall not reveal specific
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) cupational exposures.
should be consulted. (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate
(5) Examination by a physician and record of the medical surveillance re-
costs. All medical examinations and quired by paragraph (f) of this section
procedures shall be performed by or shall be retained. This record shall be
under the supervision of a licensed phy- retained for the period specified and
sician, preferably one knowledgeable in meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1910.1020.
occupational medicine, and shall be (ii) The record required in paragraph
provided without cost to the employee, (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at
without loss of pay, and at a reason- least the following information:
able time and place. (A) The name and social security
(6) Information provided to the physi- number of the employee;
cian. The employer shall provide one (B) Physician’s written opinions, rec-
copy of this standard and its appen- ommended limitations, and results of
dices to the attending physician, and in examinations and tests;
addition the following for each em- (C) Any employee medical com-
ployee: plaints related to exposure to haz-
(i) A description of the employee’s ardous substances;
duties as they relate to the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro-
exposures. vided to the examining physician by
(ii) The employee’s exposure levels or the employer, with the exception of the
anticipated exposure levels. standard and its appendices.
(iii) A description of any personal (g) Engineering controls, work prac-
protective equipment used or to be tices, and personal protective equipment
used. for employee protection. Engineering
(iv) Information from previous med- controls, work practices, personal pro-
ical examinations of the employee tective equipment, or a combination of
which is not readily available to the these shall be implemented in accord-
examining physician. ance with this paragraph to protect
(v) Information required by § 1910.134. employees from exposure to hazardous
(7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The substances and safety and health haz-
employer shall obtain and furnish the ards.
employee with a copy of a written (1) Engineering controls, work practices
opinion from the attending physician and PPE for substances regulated in sub-
containing the following: parts G and Z. (i) Engineering controls
(A) The physician’s opinion as to and work practices shall be instituted
whether the employee has any detected to reduce and maintain employee expo-
medical conditions which would place sure to or below the permissible expo-
the employee at increased risk of ma- sure limits for substances regulated by
terial impairment of the employee’s 29 CFR part 1910, to the extent required
health from work in hazardous waste by subpart Z, except to the extent that
operations or emergency response, or such controls and practices are not fea-
from respirator use. sible.
(B) The physician’s recommended NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1)(i): Engineering
limitations upon the employee’s as- controls which may be feasible include the
signed work. use of pressurized cabs or control booths on
384
equipment, and/or the use of remotely oper- and the hazards and potential hazards
ated material handling equipment. Work identified at the site.
practices which may be feasible are remov- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained
ing all non-essential employees from poten-
breathing apparatus, or positive pres-
tial exposure during opening of drums, wet-
ting down dusty operations and locating em-
sure air-line respirators equipped with
ployees upwind of possible hazards. an escape air supply, shall be used
when chemical exposure levels present
(ii) Whenever engineering controls will create a substantial possibility of
and work practices are not feasible or immediate death, immediate serious
not required, any reasonable combina- illness or injury, or impair the ability
tion of engineering controls, work to escape.
practices and PPE shall be used to re- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical
duce and maintain employee exposures protective suits (protection equivalent
to or below the permissible exposure to Level A protection as recommended
limits or dose limits for substances in appendix B) shall be used in condi-
regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, subpart tions where skin absorption of a haz-
Z. ardous substance may result in a sub-
(iii) The employer shall not imple- stantial possibility of immediate
ment a schedule of employee rotation death, immediate serious illness or in-
as a means of compliance with permis- jury, or impair the ability to escape.
sible exposure limits or dose limits ex- (v) The level of protection provided
cept when there is no other feasible by PPE selection shall be increased
way of complying with the airborne or when additional information on site
dermal dose limits for ionizing radi- conditions indicates that increased
ation. protection is necessary to reduce em-
(iv) The provisions of 29 CFR, subpart ployee exposures below permissible ex-
G, shall be followed. posure limits and published exposure
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, levels for hazardous substances and
and PPE for substances not regulated in health hazards. (See appendix B for
subparts G and Z. An appropriate com- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.)
bination of engineering controls, work NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(3): The level of em-
practices and personal protective ployee protection provided may be decreased
equipment shall be used to reduce and when additional information or site condi-
maintain employee exposure to or tions show that decreased protection will not
below published exposure levels for result in hazardous exposures to employees.
hazardous substances and health haz- (vi) Personal protective equipment
ards not regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, shall be selected and used to meet the
subparts G and Z. The employer may requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, sub-
use the published literature and SDS as part I, and additional requirements
a guide in making the employer’s de- specified in this section.
termination as to what level of protec- (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro-
tion the employer believes is appro- tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating
priate for hazardous substances and suits shall protect employees from the
health hazards for which there is no particular hazards which are identified
permissible exposure limit or published during site characterization and anal-
exposure limit. ysis.
(3) Personal protective equipment selec- (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
tion. (i) Personal protective equipment be capable of maintaining positive air
(PPE) shall be selected and used which pressure. (See appendix A for a test
will protect employees from the haz- method which may be used to evaluate
ards and potential hazards they are this requirement.)
likely to encounter as identified during (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
the site characterization and analysis. be capable of preventing inward test
(ii) Personal protective equipment gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent.
selection shall be based on an evalua- (See appendix A for a test method
tion of the performance characteristics which may be used to evaluate this re-
of the PPE relative to the require- quirement.)
ments and limitations of the site, the (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE)
task-specific conditions and duration, program. A written personal protective
385
equipment program, which is part of rial’s dose limits or other dangerous
the employer’s safety and health pro- condition such as the presence of flam-
gram required in paragraph (b) of this mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
section or required in paragraph (p)(1) environments.
of this section and which is also a part (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni-
of the site-specific safety and health toring shall be conducted when the pos-
plan shall be established. The PPE pro- sibility of an IDLH condition or flam-
gram shall address the elements listed mable atmosphere has developed or
below. When elements, such as donning when there is indication that exposures
and doffing procedures, are provided by may have risen over permissible expo-
the manufacturer of a piece of equip- sure limits or published exposure levels
ment and are attached to the plan, since prior monitoring. Situations
they need not be rewritten into the where it shall be considered whether
plan as long as they adequately address the possibility that exposures have
the procedure or element. risen are as follows:
(i) PPE selection based upon site haz- (i) When work begins on a different
ards, portion of the site.
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the (ii) When contaminants other than
equipment, those previously identified are being
(iii) Work mission duration, handled.
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (iii) When a different type of oper-
(v) PPE decontamination and dis- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as
posal, opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (iv) When employees are handling
(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- leaking drums or containers or work-
dures, ing in areas with obvious liquid con-
(viii) PPE inspection procedures tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon).
prior to, during, and after use, (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees.
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of After the actual clean-up phase of any
the PPE program, and hazardous waste operation commences;
(x) Limitations during temperature for example, when soil, surface water
extremes, heat stress, and other appro- or containers are moved or disturbed;
priate medical considerations. the employer shall monitor those em-
(h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- ployees likely to have the highest ex-
toring shall be performed in accord- posures to hazardous substances and
health hazards likely to be present
ance with this paragraph where there
above permissible exposure limits or
may be a question of employee expo-
published exposure levels by using per-
sure to hazardous concentrations of
sonal sampling frequently enough to
hazardous substances in order to assure
characterize employee exposures. If the
proper selection of engineering con-
employees likely to have the highest
trols, work practices and personal pro-
exposure are over permissible exposure
tective equipment so that employees
limits or published exposure limits,
are not exposed to levels which exceed
then monitoring shall continue to de-
permissible exposure limits, or pub-
termine all employees likely to be
lished exposure levels if there are no
above those limits. The employer may
permissible exposure limits, for haz-
utilize a representative sampling ap-
ardous substances.
proach by documenting that the em-
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to
ployees and chemicals chosen for moni-
identify and quantify airborne levels of
toring are based on the criteria stated
hazardous substances and safety and
above.
health hazards in order to determine
the appropriate level of employee pro- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h): It is not required
tection needed on site. to monitor employees engaged in site char-
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, acterization operations covered by paragraph
(c) of this section.
representative air monitoring shall be
conducted to identify any IDLH condi- (i) Informational programs. Employers
tion, exposure over permissible expo- shall develop and implement a pro-
sure limits or published exposure lev- gram, which is part of the employer’s
els, exposure over a radioactive mate- safety and health program required in
386
paragraph (b) of this section, to inform tire volume of the hazardous substance
employees, contractors, and sub- being transferred.
contractors (or their representative) (ix) Drums and containers that can-
actually engaged in hazardous waste not be moved without rupture, leakage,
operations of the nature, level and de- or spillage shall be emptied into a
gree of exposure likely as a result of sound container using a device classi-
participation in such hazardous waste fied for the material being transferred.
operations. Employees, contractors and (x) A ground-penetrating system or
subcontractors working outside of the other type of detection system or de-
operations part of a site are not cov- vice shall be used to estimate the loca-
ered by this standard. tion and depth of buried drums or con-
(j) Handling drums and containers—(1) tainers.
General. (i) Hazardous substances and (xi) Soil or covering material shall be
contaminated soils, liquids, and other removed with caution to prevent drum
residues shall be handled, transported, or container rupture.
labeled, and disposed of in accordance (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment
with this paragraph. meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
(ii) Drums and containers used dur- part 1910, subpart L, shall be on hand
ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- and ready for use to control incipient
priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- fires.
tions for the wastes that they contain. (2) Opening drums and containers. The
following procedures shall be followed
(iii) When practical, drums and con-
in areas where drums or containers are
tainers shall be inspected and their in-
being opened:
tegrity shall be assured prior to being
(i) Where an airline respirator system
moved. Drums or containers that can-
is used, connections to the source of air
not be inspected before being moved
supply shall be protected from con-
because of storage conditions (i.e., bur-
tamination and the entire system shall
ied beneath the earth, stacked behind
be protected from physical damage.
other drums, stacked several tiers high
(ii) Employees not actually involved
in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac-
in opening drums or containers shall be
cessible location and inspected prior to
kept a safe distance from the drums or
further handling.
containers being opened.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or
shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being
ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not
ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall
identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and
(v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened
to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci-
container movement. dental explosion.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container
containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip-
the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment
of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion-
with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier.
tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi-
(vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being
tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment
tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to
er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition.
and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be
ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re-
spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved
part of the employer’s safety and from a remote location, appropriate
health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the
(b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers
mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury.
387
(vii) Employees shall not stand upon CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive
or work from drums or containers. wastes may be prohibited under U.S. Depart-
(3) Material handling equipment. Mate- ment of Transportation regulations. Employ-
ers and their shippers should refer to 49 CFR
rial handiing equipment used to trans-
173.21 and 173.50.
fer drums and containers shall be se-
lected, positioned and operated to min- (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition
imize sources of ignition related to the to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5)
equipment from igniting vapors re- of this section, the following pre-
leased from ruptured drums or con- cautions shall be taken, as a minimum,
tainers. in handling laboratory waste packs
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con- (lab packs):
tainers containing radioactive wastes (i) Lab packs shall be opened only
shall not be handled until such time as when necessary and then only by an in-
their hazard to employees is properly dividual knowledgeable in the inspec-
assessed. tion, classification, and segregation of
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- the containers within the pack accord-
imum, the following special pre- ing to the hazards of the wastes.
cautions shall be taken when drums (ii) If crystalline material is noted on
and containers containing or suspected any container, the contents shall be
of containing shock-sensitive wastes handled as a shock-sensitive waste
are handled: until the contents are identified.
(i) All non-essential employees shall (7) Sampling of drum and container
be evacuated from the area of transfer. contents. Sampling of containers and
(ii) Material handling equipment drums shall be done in accordance with
shall be provided with explosive con- a sampling procedure which is part of
tainment devices or protective shields the site safety and health plan devel-
to protect equipment operators from oped for and available to employees
exploding containers. and others at the specific worksite.
(iii) An employee alarm system capa- (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums
ble of being perceived above sur- and containers shall be identified and
rounding light and noise conditions classified prior to packaging for ship-
shall be used to signal the commencement.
ment and completion of explosive (ii) Drum or container staging areas
waste handling activities. shall be kept to the minimum number
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e., necessary to identify and classify ma-
portable radios, hand signals, tele- terials safely and prepare them for
phones, as appropriate) shall be main- transport.
tained between the employee-in-charge (iii) Staging areas shall be provided
of the immediate handling area and with adequate access and egress routes.
both the site safety and health super- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes
visor and the command post until such shall be permitted only after a thor-
time as the handling operation is com- ough characterization of the materials
pleted. Communication equipment or has been completed.
methods that could cause shock sen- (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i)
sitive materials to explode shall not be Tanks and vaults containing hazardous
used. substances shall be handled in a man-
(v) Drums and containers under pres- ner similar to that for drums and con-
sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- tainers, taking into consideration the
ing, shall not be moved until such time size of the tank or vault.
as the cause for excess pressure is de- (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry
termined and appropriate containment procedures as described in the employ-
procedures have been implemented to er’s safety and health plan shall be fol-
protect employees from explosive relief lowed whenever employees must enter
of the drum. a tank or vault.
(vi) Drums and containers containing (k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro-
packaged laboratory wastes shall be cedures for all phases of decontamina-
considered to contain shock-sensitive tion shall be developed and imple-
or explosive materials until they have mented in accordance with this para-
been characterized. graph.
388
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A (8) Showers and change rooms. Where
decontamination procedure shall be de- the decontamination procedure indi-
veloped, communicated to employees cates a need for regular showers and
and implemented before any employees change rooms outside of a contami-
or equipment may enter areas on site nated area, they shall be provided and
where potential for exposure to haz- meet the requirements of 29 CFR
ardous substances exists. 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre-
(ii) Standard operating procedures vent the effective use of water, then
shall be developed to minimize em- other effective means for cleansing
ployee contact with hazardous sub- shall be provided and used.
stances or with equipment that has (l) Emergency response by employees at
contacted hazardous substances. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1)
(iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer-
nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed
contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers
ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)
nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici-
posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com-
(iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper-
shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and
and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by
their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives,
dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern-
propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon-
rect any deficiencies. sibilities.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate
be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area
that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do
uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to
ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are
equipment. exempt from the requirements of this
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer-
ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with 29
tamination shall be decontaminated or CFR 1910.38.
disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response
(5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an
equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer-
equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min-
cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following:
placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning.
fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication.
meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
hazardous substances shall imme- vention.
diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge.
disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control.
is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures.
ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures
tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe-
change rooms. ty and health plan.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid.
cleaning establishments that decon- (ix) Emergency alerting and response
taminate protective clothing or equip- procedures.
ment shall be informed of the poten- (x) Critique of response and follow-
tially harmful effects of exposures to up.
hazardous substances. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
389
(3) Procedures for handling emergency TABLE H–120.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION
incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES—Continued
ments for the emergency response plan
Foot-
required in paragraph (l)(2) of this sec- can- Area or operations
tion, the following elements shall be dles
included for emergency response plans: 5 ........ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work
(A) Site topography, layout, and pre- areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is
vailing weather conditions. required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling
mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad-
(B) Procedures for reporting inci- ministration approved cap lights shall be accept-
dents to local, state, and federal gov- able for use in the tunnel heading.)
ernmental agencies. 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or
(ii) The emergency response plan living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining
shall be a separate section of the Site areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.)
Safety and Health Plan. 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices.
(iii) The emergency response plan
shall be compatible and integrated (n) Sanitation at temporary work-
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade-
gency response plans of local, state, quate supply of potable water shall be
and federal agencies. provided on the site.
(iv) The emergency response plan (ii) Portable containers used to dis-
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of pense drinking water shall be capable
the overall training program for site of being tightly closed, and equipped
operations. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
(v) The site emergency response plan from containers.
shall be reviewed periodically and, as (iii) Any container used to distribute
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- drinking water shall be clearly marked
rent with new or changing site condi- as to the nature of its contents and not
tions or information. used for any other purpose.
(vi) An employee alarm system shall (iv) Where single service cups (to be
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR used but once) are supplied, both a san-
1910.165 to notify employees of an emer- itary container for the unused cups and
gency situation; to stop work activities a receptacle for disposing of the used
if necessary; to lower background noise cups shall be provided.
in order to speed communication; and (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for
to begin emergency procedures. nonpotable water, such as water for
firefighting purposes, shall be identi-
(vii) Based upon the information
fied to indicate clearly that the water
available at time of the emergency, the
is unsafe and is not to be used for
employer shall evaluate the incident
drinking, washing, or cooking pur-
and the site response capabilities and
poses.
proceed with the appropriate steps to
(ii) There shall be no cross-connec-
implement the site emergency response
tion, open or potential, between a sys-
plan.
tem furnishing potable water and a
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to
system furnishing nonpotable water.
employees shall be lighted to not less
(3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be
than the minimum illumination inten-
provided for employees according to
sities listed in the following Table H–
the following Table H–120.2.
120.1 while any work is in progress:
TABLE H–120.2—TOILET FACILITIES
TABLE H–120.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION
INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
Foot- 20 or fewer ............................. One.

can- Area or operations More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri-
dles nal per 40 employees.
More than 200 ........................ One toilet seat and one uri-
5 ........ General site areas. nal per 50 employees.
3 ........ Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active
storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and
field maintenance areas.
(ii) Under temporary field conditions,
5 ........ Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and provisions shall be made to assure that
exitways. at least one toilet facility is available.
390
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- off the worksite, shall provide employ-
vided with a sanitary sewer shall be ees with a clean area where they can
provided with the following toilet fa- remove, store, and put on street cloth-
cilities unless prohibited by local ing. The second area, with an exit to
codes: the worksite, shall provide employees
(A) Chemical toilets; with an area where they can put on, re-
(B) Recirculating toilets; move and store work clothing and per-
(C) Combustion toilets; or sonal protective equipment.
(D) Flush toilets. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall
(iv) The requirements of this para- be located in areas where exposures are
graph for sanitation facilities shall not below the permissible exposure limits
apply to mobile crews having transpor- and published exposure levels. If this
tation readily available to nearby toi- cannot be accomplished, then a ven-
let facilities. tilation system shall be provided that
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities will supply air that is below the per-
shall be provided with entrance locks missible exposure limits and published
controlled from inside the facility. exposure levels.
(4) Food handling. All food service fa- (iv) Employers shall assure that em-
cilities and operations for employees ployees shower at the end of their work
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- shift and when leaving the hazardous
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- waste site.
tions in which they are located. (o) New technology programs. (1) The
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When employer shall develop and implement
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- procedures for the introduction of ef-
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, fective new technologies and equip-
and lighted. ment developed for the improved pro-
(6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz-
shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and
ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part
ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program
may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is
cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained.
the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or
are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in-
and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams,
which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or
ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air
enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site
substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated
(7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives.
hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de-
operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new
duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be-
months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large
the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec-
change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu-
posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as
health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employer’s evaluation ef-
waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made
(i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request.
shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain Operations Conducted
1910.141(d)(3). Under the Resource Conservation and Re-
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided covery Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers
and shall meet the requirements of 29 conducting operations at treatment,
CFR 1910.141(e). Change rooms shall storage and disposal (TSD) facilities
consist of two separate change areas specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this
separated by the shower area required section shall provide and implement
in paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. the programs specified in this para-
One change area, with an exit leading graph. See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’
391
to paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section stances at TSD operations to enable
for employers not covered.)’’. the employees to perform their as-
(1) Safety and health program. The em- signed duties and functions in a safe
ployer shall develop and implement a and healthful manner so as not endan-
written safety and health program for ger themselves or other employees. The
employees involved in hazardous waste initial training shall be for 24 hours
operations that shall be available for and refresher training shall be for eight
inspection by employees, their rep- hours annually. Employees who have
resentatives and OSHA personnel. The received the initial training required
program shall be designed to identify, by this paragraph shall be given a writ-
evaluate and control safety and health ten certificate attesting that they have
hazards in their facilities for the pur- successfully completed the necessary
pose of employee protection, to provide training.
for emergency response meeting the re- (ii) Current employees. Employers who
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this can show by an employee’s previous
section and to address as appropriate work experience and/or training that
site analysis, engineering controls, the employee has had training equiva-
maximum exposure limits, hazardous lent to the initial training required by
waste handling procedures and uses of this paragraph, shall be considered as
new technologies. meeting the initial training require-
(2) Hazard communication program. ments of this paragraph as to that em-
The employer shall implement a haz- ployee. Equivalent training includes
ard communication program meeting the training that existing employees
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200 as might have already received from ac-
part of the employer’s safety and pro- tual site work experience. Current em-
gram. ployees shall receive eight hours of re-
NOTE TO § 1910.120: The exemption for haz- fresher training annually.
ardous waste provided in § 1910.1200 is appli- (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini-
cable to this section. tial training shall have satisfactorily
(3) Medical surveillance program. The completed a training course for teach-
employer shall develop and implement ing the subjects they are expected to
a medical surveillance program meet- teach or they shall have the academic
ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of credentials and instruction experience
this section. necessary to demonstrate a good com-
(4) Decontamination program. The em- mand of the subject matter of the
ployer shall develop and implement a courses and competent instructional
decontamination procedure meeting skills.
the requirements of paragraph (k) of (8) Emergency response program—(i)
this section. Emergency response plan. An emergency
(5) New technology program. The em- response plan shall be developed and
ployer shall develop and implement implemented by all employers. Such
procedures meeting the requirements plans need not duplicate any of the
of paragraph (o) of this section for in- subjects fully addressed in the employ-
troducing new and innovative equip- er’s contingency planning required by
ment into the workplace. permits, such as those issued by the
(6) Material handling program. Where U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
employees will be handling drums or cy, provided that the contingency plan
containers, the employer shall develop is made part of the emergency response
and implement procedures meeting the plan. The emergency response plan
requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) shall be a written portion of the em-
through (viii) and (xi) of this section, ployer’s safety and health program re-
as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec-
prior to starting such work. tion. Employers who will evacuate
(7) Training program—(i) New employ- their employees from the worksite lo-
ees. The employer shall develop and im- cation when an emergency occurs and
plement a training program, which is who do not permit any of their employ-
part of the employer’s safety and ees to assist in handling the emergency
health program, for employees exposed are exempt from the requirements of
to health hazards or hazardous subparagraph (p)(8) if they provide an
392
emergency action plan complying with recognize that an emergency response situa-
29 CFR 1910.38. tion exists and they have been instructed to
(ii) Elements of an emergency response call the designated outside fully-trained
plan. The employer shall develop an emergency response team for assistance.
emergency response plan for emer- (B) Employee members of TSD facil-
gencies which shall address, as a min- ity emergency response organizations
imum, the following areas to the ex- shall be trained to a level of com-
tent that they are not addressed in any petence in the recognition of health
specific program required in this para- and safety hazards to protect them-
graph: selves and other employees. This would
(A) Pre-emergency planning and co- include training in the methods used to
ordination with outside parties. minimize the risk from safety and
(B) Personnel roles, lines of author- health hazards; in the safe use of con-
ity, and communication. trol equipment; in the selection and
(C) Emergency recognition and pre- use of appropriate personal protective
vention. equipment; in the safe operating proce-
(D) Safe distances and places of ref- dures to be used at the incident scene;
uge. in the techniques of coordination with
(E) Site security and control. other employees to minimize risks; in
(F) Evacuation routes and proce- the appropriate response to over expo-
dures. sure from health hazards or injury to
(G) Decontamination procedures.
themselves and other employees; and
(H) Emergency medical treatment
in the recognition of subsequent symp-
and first aid.
toms which may result from over expo-
(I) Emergency alerting and response
sures.
procedures.
(J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that
up. each covered employee has attended
(K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train-
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of
gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em-
completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly.
to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com-
training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training
the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by
operating procedures the employer has the employer.
established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency
protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele-
procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan
cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this
section, the following elements shall be
Exception #1: An employer need not train
included for emergency response plans
all employees to the degree specified if the
employer divides the work force in a manner to the extent that they do not repeat
such that a sufficient number of employees any information already contained in
who have responsibility to control emer- the emergency response plan:
gencies have the training specified, and all (1) Site topography, layout, and pre-
other employees, who may first respond to vailing weather conditions.
an emergency incident, have sufficient (2) Procedures for reporting incidents
awareness training to recognize that an
emergency response situation exists and that
to local, state, and federal govern-
they are instructed in that case to summon mental agencies.
the fully trained employees and not attempt (B) The emergency response plan
control activities for which they are not shall be compatible and integrated
trained. with the disaster, fire and/or emer-
Exception #2: An employer need not train gency response plans of local, state,
all employees to the degree specified if ar- and federal agencies.
rangements have been made in advance for
an outside fully-trained emergency response (C) The emergency response plan
team to respond in a reasonable period and shall be rehearsed regularly as part of
all employees, who may come to the incident the overall training program for site
first, have sufficient awareness training to operations.
393
(D) The site emergency response plan imum, the following to the extent that
shall be reviewed periodically and, as they are not addressed elsewhere:
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co-
rent with new or changing site condi- ordination with outside parties.
tions or information. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(E) An employee alarm system shall ity, training, and communication.
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
1910.165 to notify employees of an emer- vention.
gency situation; to stop work activities
(iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
if necessary; to lower background noise
in order to speed communication; and uge.
to begin emergency procedures. (v) Site security and control.
(F) Based upon the information avail- (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
able at time of the emergency, the em- dures.
ployer shall evaluate the incident and (vii) Decontamination.
the site response capabilities and pro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
ceed with the appropriate steps to im- and first aid.
plement the site emergency response (ix) Emergency alerting and response
plan. procedures.
(q) Emergency response to hazardous (x) Critique of response and follow-
substance releases. This paragraph cov- up.
ers employers whose employees are en- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
gaged in emergency response no matter
(xii) Emergency response organiza-
where it occurs except that it does not
tions may use the local emergency re-
cover employees engaged in operations
specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through sponse plan or the state emergency re-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- sponse plan or both, as part of their
gency response organizations who have emergency response plan to avoid du-
developed and implemented programs plication. Those items of the emer-
equivalent to this paragraph for han- gency response plan that are being
dling releases of hazardous substances properly addressed by the SARA Title
pursuant to section 303 of the Super- III plans may be substituted into their
fund Amendments and Reauthorization emergency plan or otherwise kept to-
Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and gether for the employer and employee’s
Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, use.
42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have (3) Procedures for handling emergency
met the requirements of this para- response. (i) The senior emergency re-
graph. sponse official responding to an emer-
(1) Emergency response plan. An emergency shall become the individual in
gency response plan shall be developed charge of a site-specific Incident Com-
and implemented to handle anticipated mand System (ICS). All emergency re-
emergencies prior to the commence- sponders and their communications
ment of emergency response oper- shall be coordinated and controlled
ations. The plan shall be in writing and through the individual in charge of the
available for inspection and copying by
ICS assisted by the senior official
employees, their representatives and
present for each employer.
OSHA personnel. Employers who will
evacuate their employees from the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (q)(3)(i): The ‘‘senior
danger area when an emergency occurs, official’’ at an emergency response is the
and who do not permit any of their em- most senior official on the site who has the
ployees to assist in handling the emer- responsibility for controlling the operations
gency, are exempt from the require- at the site. Initially it is the senior officer
ments of this paragraph if they provide on the first-due piece of responding emer-
an emergency action plan in accord- gency apparatus to arrive on the incident
scene. As more senior officers arrive (i.e.,
ance with 29 CFR 1910.38.
battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforce-
(2) Elements of an emergency response ment official, site coordinator, etc.) the posi-
plan. The employer shall develop an tion is passed up the line of authority which
emergency response plan for emer- has been previously established.
gencies which shall address, as a min-
394
(ii) The individual in charge of the (viii) When activities are judged by
ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- the safety official to be an IDLH condi-
sible, all hazardous substances or con- tion and/or to involve an imminent
ditions present and shall address as ap- danger condition, the safety official
propriate site analysis, use of engineer- shall have the authority to alter, sus-
ing controls, maximum exposure lim- pend, or terminate those activities.
its, hazardous substance handling pro- The safety official shall immediately
cedures, and use of any new tech- inform the individual in charge of the
nologies. ICS of any actions needed to be taken
(iii) Based on the hazardous sub- to correct these hazards at the emer-
stances and/or conditions present, the gency scene.
individual in charge of the ICS shall (ix) After emergency operations have
implement appropriate emergency op- terminated, the individual in charge of
erations, and assure that the personal the ICS shall implement appropriate
protective equipment worn is appro- decontamination procedures.
priate for the hazards to be encoun-
(x) When deemed necessary for meet-
tered. However, personal protective
ing the tasks at hand, approved self-
equipment shall meet, at a minimum,
contained compressed air breathing ap-
the criteria contained in 29 CFR
paratus may be used with approved cyl-
1910.156(e) when worn while performing
inders from other approved self-con-
fire fighting operations beyond the in-
tained compressed air breathing appa-
cipient stage for any incident.
ratus provided that such cylinders are
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency
of the same capacity and pressure rat-
response and exposed to hazardous sub-
ing. All compressed air cylinders used
stances presenting an inhalation haz-
with self-contained breathing appa-
ard or potential inhalation hazard shall
wear positive pressure self-contained ratus shall meet U.S. Department of
breathing apparatus while engaged in Transportation and National Institute
emergency response, until such time for Occupational Safety and Health cri-
that the individual in charge of the ICS teria.
determines through the use of air mon- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per-
itoring that a decreased level of res- sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s
piratory protection will not result in own employees, who are skilled in the
hazardous exposures to employees. operation of certain equipment, such as
(v) The individual in charge of the mechanized earth moving or digging
ICS shall limit the number of emer- equipment or crane and hoisting equip-
gency response personnel at the emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily
gency site, in those areas of potential to perform immediate emergency sup-
or actual exposure to incident or site port work that cannot reasonably be
hazards, to those who are actively per- performed in a timely fashion by an
forming emergency operations. How- employer’s own employees, and who
ever, operations in hazardous areas will be or may be exposed to the haz-
shall be performed using the buddy sys- ards at an emergency response scene,
tem in groups of two or more. are not required to meet the training
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by required in this paragraph for the em-
with equipment ready to provide as- ployer’s regular employees. However,
sistance or rescue. Advance first aid these personnel shall be given an ini-
support personnel, as a minimum, shall tial briefing at the site prior to their
also stand by with medical equipment participation in any emergency re-
and transportation capability. sponse. The initial briefing shall in-
(vii) The individual in charge of the clude instruction in the wearing of ap-
ICS shall designate a safety official, propriate personal protective equip-
who is knowledgable in the operations ment, what chemical hazards are in-
being implemented at the emergency volved, and what duties are to be per-
response site, with specific responsi- formed. All other appropriate safety
bility to identify and evaluate hazards and health precautions provided to the
and to provide direction with respect employer’s own employees shall be
to the safety of operations for the used to assure the safety and health of
emergency at hand. these personnel.
395
(5) Specialist employees. Employees Transportation’s Emergency Response
who, in the course of their regular job Guidebook.
duties, work with and are trained in (F) The ability to realize the need for
the hazards of specific hazardous sub- additional resources, and to make ap-
stances, and who will be called upon to propriate notifications to the commu-
provide technical advice or assistance nication center.
at a hazardous substance release inci- (ii) First responder operations level.
dent to the individual in charge, shall First responders at the operations level
receive training or demonstrate com- are individuals who respond to releases
petency in the area of their specializa- or potential releases of hazardous sub-
tion annually. stances as part of the initial response
(6) Training. Training shall be based to the site for the purpose of protecting
on the duties and function to be per- nearby persons, property, or the envi-
formed by each responder of an emer- ronment from the effects of the re-
gency response organization. The skill lease. They are trained to respond in a
and knowledge levels required for all defensive fashion without actually try-
new responders, those hired after the ing to stop the release. Their function
effective date of this standard, shall be is to contain the release from a safe
conveyed to them through training be- distance, keep it from spreading, and
fore they are permitted to take part in prevent exposures. First responders at
actual emergency operations on an in- the operational level shall have re-
cident. Employees who participate, or ceived at least eight hours of training
are expected to participate, in emer-
or have had sufficient experience to ob-
gency response, shall be given training
jectively demonstrate competency in
in accordance with the following para-
the following areas in addition to those
graphs:
listed for the awareness level and the
(i) First responder awareness level. employer shall so certify:
First responders at the awareness level
(A) Knowledge of the basic hazard
are individuals who are likely to wit-
and risk assessment techniques.
ness or discover a hazardous substance
release and who have been trained to (B) Know how to select and use prop-
initiate an emergency response se- er personal protective equipment pro-
quence by notifying the proper authori- vided to the first responder operational
ties of the release. They would take no level.
further action beyond notifying the au- (C) An understanding of basic haz-
thorities of the release. First respond- ardous materials terms.
ers at the awareness level shall have (D) Know how to perform basic con-
sufficient training or have had suffi- trol, containment and/or confinement
cient experience to objectively dem- operations within the capabilities of
onstrate competency in the following the resources and personal protective
areas: equipment available with their unit.
(A) An understanding of what haz- (E) Know how to implement basic de-
ardous substances are, and the risks as- contamination procedures.
sociated with them in an incident. (F) An understanding of the relevant
(B) An understanding of the potential standard operating procedures and ter-
outcomes associated with an emer- mination procedures.
gency created when hazardous sub- (iii) Hazardous materials technician.
stances are present. Hazardous materials technicians are
(C) The ability to recognize the pres- individuals who respond to releases or
ence of hazardous substances in an potential releases for the purpose of
emergency. stopping the release. They assume a
(D) The ability to identify the haz- more aggressive role than a first re-
ardous substances, if possible. sponder at the operations level in that
(E) An understanding of the role of they will approach the point of release
the first responder awareness indi- in order to plug, patch or otherwise
vidual in the employer’s emergency re- stop the release of a hazardous sub-
sponse plan including site security and stance. Hazardous materials techni-
control and the U.S. Department of cians shall have received at least 24
396
hours of training equal to the first re- (D) Be able to select and use proper
sponder operations level and in addi- specialized chemical personal protec-
tion have competency in the following tive equipment provided to the haz-
areas and the employer shall so certify: ardous materials specialist.
(A) Know how to implement the em- (E) Understand in-depth hazard and
ployer’s emergency response plan. risk techniques.
(B) Know the classification, identi- (F) Be able to perform specialized
fication and verification of known and control, containment, and/or confine-
unknown materials by using field sur- ment operations within the capabili-
vey instruments and equipment. ties of the resources and personal pro-
(C) Be able to function within an as- tective equipment available.
signed role in the Incident Command (G) Be able to determine and imple-
System. ment decontamination procedures.
(D) Know how to select and use prop- (H) Have the ability to develop a site
er specialized chemical personal pro- safety and control plan.
tective equipment provided to the haz- (I) Understand chemical, radiological
ardous materials technician. and toxicological terminology and be-
(E) Understand hazard and risk as- havior.
sessment techniques. (v) On scene incident commander. Inci-
(F) Be able to perform advance con- dent commanders, who will assume
trol, containment, and/or confinement control of the incident scene beyond
operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level,
the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train-
equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper-
(G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com-
contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the
(H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify:
dures. (A) Know and be able to implement
(I) Understand basic chemical and the employer’s incident command sys-
toxicological terminology and behav- tem.
ior. (B) Know how to implement the em-
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployer’s emergency response plan.
Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards
dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees
support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth-
cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing.
hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local
ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan.
rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re-
ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re-
upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team.
rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor-
site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures.
and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any
regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall
materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train-
ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects
equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the
dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National
lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the
certify: training and/or academic credentials
(A) Know how to implement the local and instructional experience necessary
emergency response plan. to demonstrate competent instruc-
(B) Understand classification, identi- tional skills and a good command of
fication and verification of known and the subject matter of the courses they
unknown materials by using advanced are to teach.
survey instruments and equipment. (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em-
(C) Know of the state emergency re- ployees who are trained in accordance
sponse plan. with paragraph (q)(6) of this section
397
shall receive annual refresher training tective equipment and decontamina-
of sufficient content and duration to tion procedures. All equipment to be
maintain their competencies, or shall used in the performance of the clean-up
demonstrate competency in those areas work shall be in serviceable condition
at least yearly. and shall have been inspected prior to
(ii) A statement shall be made of the use.
training or competency, and if a state-
APPENDICES TO § 1910.120—HAZARDOUS WASTE
ment of competency is made, the em-
OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE
ployer shall keep a record of the meth-
odology used to demonstrate com- NOTE: The following appendices serve as
petency. non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ-
(9) Medical surveillance and consulta- ees and employers in complying with the ap-
propriate requirements of this section. How-
tion. (i) Members of an organized and
ever paragraph 1910.120(g) makes mandatory
designated HAZMAT team and haz- in certain circumstances the use of Level A
ardous materials specialists shall re- and Level B PPE protection.
ceive a baseline physical examination
and be provided with medical surveil- APPENDIX A TO § 1910.120—PERSONAL
lance as required in paragraph (f) of PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS
this section. This appendix sets forth the non-manda-
(ii) Any emergency response employ- tory examples of tests which may be used to
ees who exhibits signs or symptoms evaluate compliance with § 1910.120 (g)(4) (ii)
which may have resulted from exposure and (iii). Other tests and other challenge
to hazardous substances during the agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
course of an emergency incident, either A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
immediately or subsequently, shall be suit pressure test
provided with medical consultation as
1.0—Scope
required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a
section. gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
(10) Chemical protective clothing. protective suit material, seams, and closures
Chemical protective clothing and to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re-
equipment to be used by organized and sults of this practice allow the gas tight in-
designated HAZMAT team members, or tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical
to be used by hazardous materials spe- protective suit to be evaluated.
cialists, shall meet the requirements of 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to
paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this permeation, penetration, and degradation by
specific hazardous substances is not deter-
section.
mined by this test method.
(11) Post-emergency response oper- 2.0—Definition of terms
ations. Upon completion of the emer- 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
gency response, if it is determined that suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
it is necessary to remove hazardous which is constructed of protective clothing
substances, health hazards, and mate- materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head,
rials contaminated with them (such as arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
contaminated soil or other elements of wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at-
the natural environment) from the site tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
of the incident, the employer con-
bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots.
ducting the clean-up shall comply with 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
one of the following: material or combination of materials used in
(i) Meet all of the requirements of an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- lating parts of the body from direct contact
tion; or with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas-
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on eous chemicals.
plant property using plant or work- 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this
place employees, such employees shall test method, the limited flow of a gas under
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
have completed the training require-
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and
ments of the following: 29 CFR 1910.38, time interval.
1910.134, 1910.1200, and other appro- 3.0—Summary of test method
priate safety and health training made 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and
necessary by the tasks they are ex- modified for the test. The test apparatus is
pected to perform such as personal pro- attached to the suit to permit inflation to
398
the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure.
moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes,
sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the
itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop ending suit pressure. The difference between
is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and the suit test pressure and the ending suit
is removed from service. The test is repeated test pressure (B-C) shall be defined as the
after leak location and repair. suit pressure drop.
4.0—Required Supplies 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than
4.1 Source of compressed air. 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ- the three-minute test period, the suit fails
ing a pressure measurement device with a the test and shall be removed from service.
sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge. 7.0—Retest Procedure
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks
tape. by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. brushing or wiping the entire suit (including
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de-
seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve
vice.
joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu-
5.0—Safety Precautions
tion. Observe the suit for the formation of
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor-
soap bubbles, which is an indication of a
rect pressure safety devices required for the
leak. Repair all identified leaks.
source of compressed air used.
6.0—Test Procedure 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- Test procedure 6.0.
form a visual inspection of the suit. Check 8.0—Report
the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice
ining the seams and gently pulling on the shall have the following information re-
seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- corded:
tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi-
and show no signs of deterioration. fying brand name, date of purchase, material
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
any other normal inlet or exhaust points special breathing apparatus.
(such as umbilical air line fittings or face 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures
piece opening) with tape or other appropriate (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with
means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should the specific observation times. If the ending
be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test
damage any of the suit components. pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. failing the test. When possible, the specific
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- leak location shall be identified in the test
viding an improvised connection point on the records. Retest pressure data shall be re-
suit for connecting an airline. Attach the corded as an additional test.
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used
suit inflation from a compressed air source shall be identified and the sensitivity of the
equipped with a pressure indicating regu- pressure gauge shall be recorded.
lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres-
apparatus should be tested before and after sure test even if repairs are being made at
each test by closing off the end of the tubing the test location.
attached to the suit and assuring a pressure
of three inches water gauge for three min- CAUTION
utes can be maintained. If a component is re-
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be
moved for the test, that component shall be
sure they are positioned correctly and se-
replaced and a second test conducted with
cured tightly before putting the suit back
another component removed to permit a
into service. Special care should be taken to
complete test of the ensemble.
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A)
is not blocked.
and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup-
plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no Care should also be exercised to assure
case shall they be less than: (A)=three inches that the inside and outside of the suit is
water gauge; and (B)=two inches water completely dry before it is put into storage.
gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
no less than 80 percent of the test pressure suit qualitative leak test
(B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20
percent of the test pressure (B). 1.0—Scope
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests
side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one protective suit integrity by detecting inward
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi-
Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- fications are made to the suit to carry out
399
this test, the results from this practice pro- the test room and his stand-by person meas-
vide a realistic test for the integrity of the ures the ammonia concentration inside the
entire suit. suit using a low range ammonia length of
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- stain detector tube or other more sensitive
meation, penetration, and degradation is not ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re-
determined by this test method. ASTM test quired to observe the test individual during
methods are available to test suit materials the test procedure; aid the person in donning
for these characteristics and the tests are and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the
usually conducted by the manufacturers of suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the
the suits. suit can be calculated by dividing the aver-
2.0—Definition of terms age test area concentration by the interior
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia
suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv-
which is constructed of protective clothing alent is placed on the inside of the suit face
materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, piece lens so that the suited individual is
arms, legs and respirator; may cover the able to detect a color change and know if the
wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- suit has a significant leak. If a color change
tached gloves and boots; completely encloses is observed the individual shall leave the test
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- room immediately.
bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 4.0—Required supplies
2.2 Protective clothing material means any 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am-
material or combination of materials used in monium hydroxide (58% by weight).
an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi-
lating parts of the body from direct contact cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute
eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)]
test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding
time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de-
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range
pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice.
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container
lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu-
The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli-
dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least
methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient ±1 milliliters.
the greater the protection provided by the 5.0—Safety precautions
TECP suit. 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy-
3.0—Summary of recommended practice droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq-
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro-
ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 tection. The person conducting the test shall
OH) required to generate the test atmos- review the SDS for aqueous ammonia.
phere is determined using the directions out- 5.2 Since the established permissible ex-
lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15
wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi-
ment (either a positive pressure self-con- tive pressure self-contained breathing appa-
tained breathing apparatus or a positive ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res-
pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally
side the enclosed test room. The con- only the person wearing the totally-encap-
centrated aqueous ammonia solution is sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A
taken by the suited individual into the test stand-by person shall have a positive pres-
room and poured into an open plastic pan. A sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
two-minute evaporation period is observed positive pressure supplied air respirator
before the test room concentration is meas- available to enter the test area should the
ured, using a high range ammonia length of suited individual need assistance.
stain detector tube. When the ammonia 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi-
vapor reaches a concentration of between vidual must be used during this test. Visual
1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual contact is the simplest but other methods
starts a standardized exercise protocol to using communication devices are acceptable.
stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to
completed, the test room concentration is allow the exercise protocol to be carried out
measured again. The suited individual exits and then to be ventilated to allow for easy
400
exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere shall be generated before the exercises are
after the test(s) are completed. started.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the
screened for the use of respiratory protection following four minute exercise protocol
and checked for allergies to ammonia before should be followed:
participating in this test procedure. 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head
6.0—Test procedure with at least 15 raising motions completed in
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest one minute.
foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with
Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a
liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- one-minute period.
lution per cubic foot of test area volume to 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10
determine the approximate volume of con- complete motions of the arms from above
centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- the head to touching of the toes in a one-
erate 1000 ppm in the test area. minute period.
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete
of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place standing and squatting motions in a one-
it into a closed plastic container. minute period.
6.1.3 Place the container, several high 6.8 If at any time during the test the col-
range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump orimetric indicating paper should change
in the clean test pan and locate it near the colors, the test should be stopped and section
test area entry door so that the suited indi- 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2).
vidual has easy access to these supplies. 6.9 After completion of the test exercise,
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, the test area concentration should be meas-
open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip ured again using the high range colorimetric
and fasten one end of the strip to the inside detector tube.
of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.10 Exit the test area.
seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip-
strip with distilled water. Care shall be per or other appropriate suit penetration
taken not to contaminate the detector part should be used to determine the ammonia
of the indicator paper by touching it. A concentration in the suit with the low range
small piece of masking tape or equivalent length of stain detector tube or other ammo-
should be used to attach the indicator strip nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air
to the interior of the suit face shield. should be sampled far enough from the en-
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with closed test area to prevent a false ammonia
this method of attachment, the indicator reading.
strip can be attached to the outside of the 6.12 After completion of the measurement
respirator face piece lens being used during of the suit interior ammonia concentration
the test. the test is concluded and the suit is doffed
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device and the respirator removed.
normally used with the suit, and then don 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room
the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure should be turned on and allowed to run for
all openings which are intended to be sealed enough time to remove the ammonia gas.
(zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. The fan shall be vented to the outside of the
DO NOT, however, plug off any venting building.
valves. 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more
as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, for the length of stain detector tube) indi-
equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should cates that the suit has failed the test. When
be exhausted from the chamber during the other ammonia detectors are used a lower
test because this will dilute the ammonia level of detection is possible, and it should be
challenge concentrations. specified as the pass/fail criteria.
6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- 6.15 By following this test method, an in-
ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or
nia within the enclosed test room, and pour more can be measured with the suit in a
the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. completely operational condition. If the in-
Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the
tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- suit is suitable for emergency response and
monia. A small mixing fan can be used near field use.
the evaporation pan to increase the evapo- 7.0—Retest procedures
ration rate of the ammonia solution. 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for
6.6 After two minutes a determination of leaks by following the pressure test in test A
the ammonia concentration within the above.
chamber should be made using the high 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
range colorimetric detector tube. A con- the test procedure 6.0.
centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater 8.0—Report
401
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar-
chemical protective suit tested by this prac- rier to these hazards. The amount of protec-
tice shall have the following information re- tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe-
corded. cific. That is, protective equipment mate-
8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- rials will protect well against some haz-
tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- ardous substances and poorly, or not at all,
rial of construction, and unique suit fea- against others. In many instances, protec-
tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. tive equipment materials cannot be found
8.1.2 General description of test room which will provide continuous protection
used for test. from the particular hazardous substance. In
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of these cases the breakthrough time of the
ammonia detector strips and color change protective material should exceed the work
data. durations.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- Other factors in this selection process to
piration date of the length of stain ammonia be considered are matching the PPE to the
detector tubes. The brand name and model of employee’s work requirements and task-spe-
the sampling pump should also be recorded. cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate-
If another type of ammonia detector is used, rials, such as tear strength and seam
it should be identified along with its min- strength, should be considered in relation to
imum detection limit for ammonia. the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two relation to heat stress and task duration are
test area concentrations, their average, the a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some
interior suit concentration, and the cal- cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro-
culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex-
shall be recorded as an additional test. pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip-
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be ment.
specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’ The more that is known about the hazards
and the date of the test. Any detectable am- at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec-
monia (five ppm or greater for the length of tion becomes. As more information about
stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- the hazards and conditions at the site be-
cates the suit has failed this test. When comes available, the site supervisor can
other ammonia detectors are used, a lower make decisions to up-grade or down-grade
level of detection is possible and it should be the level of PPE protection to match the
specified as the pass fail criteria. tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an em-
CAUTION ployer can use to begin the selection of the
appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in-
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be formation may suggest the use of combina-
sure they are positioned correctly and se- tions of PPE selected from the different pro-
cured tightly before putting the suit back tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being
into service. Special care should be taken to more suitable to the hazards of the work. It
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it should be cautioned that the listing below
is not blocked. does not fully address the performance of the
Care should also be exercised to assure specific PPE material in relation to the spe-
that the inside and outside of the suit is cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
completely dry before it is put into storage. selection, evaluation and re-selection is an
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.120—GENERAL DESCRIP- ongoing process until sufficient information
TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF
about the hazards and PPE performance is
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR obtained.
Part A. Personal protective equipment is
This appendix sets forth information about divided into four categories based on the de-
personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- gree of protection afforded. (See part B of
tion levels which may be used to assist em- this appendix for further explanation of Lev-
ployers in complying with the PPE require- els A, B, C, and D hazards.)
ments of this section. I. Level A—To be selected when the great-
As required by the standard, PPE must be est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec-
selected which will protect employees from tion is required.
the specific hazards which they are likely to The following constitute Level A equip-
encounter during their work on-site. ment; it may be used as appropriate;
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-
plex process which should take into consider- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or
ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- positive pressure supplied air respirator with
volved in this process are identification of escape SCBA, approved by the National In-
the hazards, or suspected hazards; their stitute for Occupational Safety and Health
routes of potential hazard to employees (in- (NIOSH).
halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye 2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec-
or skin contact); and the performance of the tive suit.
402
3. Coveralls. 1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash
4. Long underwear. 1 goggles*.
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 6. Hard hat. 1
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 7. Escape mask. 1
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and 8. Face shield. 1
shank. Part B. The types of hazards for which lev-
8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and are described below:
boots (depending on suit construction, may I. Level A—Level A protection should be
be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). used when:
II. Level B—The highest level of res- 1. The hazardous substance has been iden-
piratory protection is necessary but a lesser tified and requires the highest level of pro-
level of skin protection is needed. tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory
The following constitute Level B equip- system based on either the measured (or po-
ment; it may be used as appropriate. tential for) high concentration of atmos-
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con-
pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi-
site operations and work functions involve a
tive pressure supplied air respirator with es-
high potential for splash, immersion, or ex-
cape SCBA (NIOSH approved).
posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing
ticulates of materials that are harmful to
(overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls;
skin or capable of being absorbed through
one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis-
the skin;
posable chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls. 1 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. to the skin are known or suspected to be
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. present, and skin contact is possible; or
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel 3. Operations are being conducted in con-
toe and shank. fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab-
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant sence of conditions requiring Level A have
(disposable). 1 not yet been determined.
8. Hard hat. 1 II. Level B—Level B protection should be
9. [Reserved] used when:
10. Face shield. 1 1. The type and atmospheric concentration
III. Level C—The concentration(s) and of substances have been identified and re-
type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and quire a high level of respiratory protection,
the criteria for using air purifying res- but less skin protection;
pirators are met. 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5
The following constitute Level C equip- percent oxygen; or
ment; it may be used as appropriate. 3. The presence of incompletely identified
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read-
pirators (NIOSH approved). ing organic vapor detection instrument, but
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing vapors and gases are not suspected of con-
(overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; taining high levels of chemicals harmful to
disposable chemical-resistant overalls). skin or capable of being absorbed through
3. Coveralls. 1 the skin.
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and
toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard;
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of
(disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators.
8. Hard hat. 1 III. Level C—Level C protection should be
9. Escape mask. 1 used when:
10. Face shield. 1 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid
IV. Level D—A work uniform affording splashes, or other direct contact will not ad-
minimal protection, used for nuisance con- versely affect or be absorbed through any ex-
tamination only. posed skin;
The following constitute Level D equip- 2. The types of air contaminants have been
ment; it may be used as appropriate: identified, concentrations measured, and an
1. Coveralls. air-purifying respirator is available that can
2. Gloves. 1 remove the contaminants; and
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe 3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying
and shank. respirators are met.
4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos- IV. Level D—Level D protection should be
able). 1 used when:
1. The atmosphere contains no known haz-
1 Optional, as applicable. ard; and
403
2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- and health responsibilities are for their em-
mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- ployees on the site. Each contractor on the
halation of or contact with hazardous levels site needs to have its own safety and health
of any chemicals. program so structured that it will smoothly
NOTE: As stated before, combinations of interface with the program of the site coor-
personal protective equipment other than dinator or principal contractor.
those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro- Also those employers involved with treat-
tection may be more appropriate and may be ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as
used to provide the proper level of protec- covered in paragraph (p) must have imple-
tion. mented a safety and health program for their
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical employees. This program is to include the
protective clothing, it should be noted that hazard communication program required in
the National Fire Protection Association paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in
(NFPA) has developed standards on chemical paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the
protective clothing. The standards that have employers comprehensive overall safety and
been adopted by include: health program. This program is to be in
NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective writing.
Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies Each site or workplace safety and health
(EPA Level A Protective Clothing). program will need to include the following:
NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash- (1) Policy statements of the line of authority
Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical and accountability for implementing the
Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth- program, the objectives of the program and
ing). the role of the site safety and health super-
NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash- visor or manager and staff; (2) means or
Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non- methods for the development of procedures
flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations for identifying and controlling workplace
(EPA Level B Protective Clothing). hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for
These standards apply documentation and the development and communication to em-
performance requirements to the manufac- ployees of the various plans, work rules,
ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical standard operating procedures and practices
protective suits meeting these requirements that pertain to individual employees and su-
are labelled as compliant with the appro- pervisors; (4) means for the training of super-
priate standard. It is recommended that visors and employees to develop the needed
chemical protective suits that meet these skills and knowledge to perform their work
standards be used. in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to
anticipate and prepare for emergency situa-
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.120—COMPLIANCE tions; and (6) means for obtaining informa-
GUIDELINES tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro-
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. gram and for improving the effectiveness of
Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort the program. The management and employ-
will require an occupational safety and ees should be trying continually to improve
health program headed by the site coordi- the effectiveness of the program thereby en-
nator or the employer’s representative. The hancing the protection being afforded those
purpose of the program will be the protec- working on the site.
tion of employees at the site and will be an Accidents on the site or workplace should
extension of the employer’s overall safety be investigated to provide information on
and health program. The program will need how such occurrences can be avoided in the
to be developed before work begins on the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on
site and implemented as work proceeds as the site or workplace, they will need to be
stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- investigated to determine what needs to be
cilitate coordination and communication of done to prevent this incident from occurring
safety and health issues among personnel re- again. Such information will need to be used
sponsible for the various activities which as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro-
will take place at the site. It will provide the gram and the information turned into posi-
overall means for planning and imple- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re-
menting the needed safety and health train- ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints
ing and job orientation of employees who relating to safety and health issues involved
will be working at the site. The program will with site or workplace activities is also a
provide the means for identifying and con- feedback mechanism that can be used effec-
trolling worksite hazards and the means for tively to improve the program and may serve
monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- in part as an evaluative tool(s).
gram will need to cover the responsibilities For the development and implementation
and authority of the site coordinator or the of the program to be the most effective, pro-
employer’s manager on the site for the safe- fessional safety and health personnel should
ty and health of employees at the site, and be used. Certified Safety Professionals,
the relationships with contractors or support Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg-
services as to what each employer’s safety istered Professional Safety Engineers are
404
good examples of professional stature for team including the use of plugging and
safety and health managers who will admin- patching equipment and other subject areas.
ister the employer’s program. Officers and leaders who may be expected
2. Training. The training programs for em- to be in charge at an incident should be fully
ployees subject to the requirements of para- knowledgeable of their company’s incident
graph (e) of this standard should address: the command system. They should know where
safety and health hazards employees should and how to obtain additional assistance and
expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up be familiar with the local district’s emer-
sites; what control measures or techniques gency response plan and the state emergency
are effective for those hazards; what moni- response plan.
toring procedures are effective in character- Specialist employees such as technical ex-
izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- perts, medical experts or environmental ex-
tive employer’s safety and health program; perts that work with hazardous materials in
what a site safety and health plan should in- their regular jobs, who may be sent to the
clude; hands on training with personal pro- incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer
tective equipment and clothing they may be or governmental agency to advise and assist
expected to use; the contents of the OSHA the person in charge of the incident should
standard relevant to the employee’s duties have training on an annual basis. Their
and function; and, employee’s responsibil- training should include the care and use of
ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su- personal protective equipment including res-
pervisors will need training in their respon- pirators; knowledge of the incident com-
sibilities under the safety and health pro- mand system and how they are to relate to
gram and its subject areas such as the spill it; and those areas needed to keep them cur-
containment program, the personal protec- rent in their respective field as it relates to
tive equipment program, the medical sur- safety and health involving specific haz-
veillance program, the emergency response ardous substances.
Those skilled support personnel, such as
plan and other areas.
employees who work for public works depart-
The training programs for employees sub- ments or equipment operators who operate
ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who
this standard should address: the employers may be called to the incident scene to pro-
safety and health program elements impact- vide emergency support assistance, should
ing employees; the hazard communication have at least a safety and health briefing be-
program; the medical surveillance program; fore entering the area of potential or actual
the hazards and the controls for such hazards exposure. These skilled support personnel,
that employees need to know for their job who have not been a part of the emergency
duties and functions. All require annual re- response plan and do not meet the training
fresher training. requirements, should be made aware of the
The training programs for employees cov- hazards they face and should be provided all
ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of necessary protective clothing and equipment
this standard should address those com- required for their tasks.
petencies required for the various levels of There are two National Fire Protection As-
response such as: the hazards associated with sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard
hazardous substances; hazard identification for Professional Competence of Responders
and awareness; notification of appropriate to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA
persons; the need for and use of personal pro- 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding
tective equipment including respirators; the to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are
decontamination procedures to be used; excellent resource documents to aid fire de-
preplanning activities for hazardous sub- partments and other emergency response or-
stance incidents including the emergency ganizations in developing their training pro-
reponse plan; company standard operating gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance
procedures for hazardous substance emer- on the skills and knowledge needed for first
gency responses; the use of the incident com- responder awareness level, first responder
mand system and other subjects. Hands-on operations level, hazmat technicians, and
training should be stressed whenever pos- hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for
sible. Critiques done after an incident which the officer corp who will be in charge of haz-
include an evaluation of what worked and ardous substance incidents.
what did not and how could the incident be 3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro-
better handled the next time may be counted cedures should be tailored to the specific
as training time. hazards of the site, and may vary in com-
For hazardous materials specialists (usu- plexity and number of steps, depending on
ally members of hazardous materials teams), the level of hazard and the employee’s expo-
the training should address the care, use and/ sure to the hazard. Decontamination proce-
or testing of chemical protective clothing in- dures and PPE decontamination methods
cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- will vary depending upon the specific sub-
ical surveillance program, the standard oper- stance, since one procedure or method may
ating procedures for the hazardous materials not work for all substances. Evaluation of
405
decontamination methods and procedures include hazard identification, medical moni-
should be performed, as necessary, to assure toring, environmental surveillance, selec-
that employees are not exposed to hazards tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination
by re-using PPE. References in appendix D of PPE and its associated training.
may be used for guidance in establishing an The written PPE program should include
effective decontamination program. In addi- policy statements, procedures, and guide-
tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy lines. Copies should be made available to all
Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- employees, and a reference copy should be
ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- made available at the worksite. Technical
tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST data on equipment, maintenance manuals,
M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing relevant regulations, and other essential in-
an effective decontamination program. formation should also be collected and main-
4. Emergency response plans. States, along
tained.
with designated districts within the states,
will be developing or have developed local 6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph
emergency response plans. These state and 1910.120(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation
district plans should be utilized in the emer- of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
gency response plans called for in the stand- to effectively control and manage operations
ard. Each employer should assure that its at an emergency incident. The individual in
emergency response plan is compatible with charge of the ICS is the senior official re-
the local plan. The major reference being sponding to the incident. The ICS is not
used to aid in developing the state and local much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap-
district plans is the Hazardous Materials proach used for many years by the fire serv-
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur- ice. During large complex fires involving sev-
rent Emergency Response Guidebook from eral companies and many pieces of appa-
the U.S. Department of Transportation, ratus, a command post would be established.
CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service This enabled one individual to be in charge of
Emergency Management Handbook may also managing the incident, rather than having
be used as resources. several officers from different companies
Employers involved with treatment, stor- making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
age, and disposal facilities for hazardous decisions. The individual in charge of the
waste, which have the required contingency command post would delegate responsibility
plan called for by their permit, would not for performing various tasks to subordinate
need to duplicate the same planning ele- officers. Additionally, all communications
ments. Those items of the emergency re- were routed through the command post to
sponse plan that are properly addressed in reduce the number of radio transmissions
the contingency plan may be substituted and eliminate confusion. However, strategy,
into the emergency response plan required in tactics, and all decisions were made by one
1910.120 or otherwise kept together for em- individual.
ployer and employee use. The ICS is a very similar system, except it
5. Personal protective equipment programs. is implemented for emergency response to
The purpose of personal protective clothing all incidents, both large and small, that in-
and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate volve hazardous substances.
individuals from the chemical, physical, and
For a small incident, the individual in
biologic hazards that may be encountered at
charge of the ICS may perform many tasks
a hazardous substance site.
of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
As discussed in appendix B, no single com-
delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex-
bination of protective equipment and cloth-
ample, in response to a small incident, the
ing is capable of protecting against all haz-
individual in charge of the ICS, in addition
ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc-
tion with other protective methods and its to normal command activities, may become
effectiveness evaluated periodically. the safety officer and may designate only
The use of PPE can itself create significant one employee (with proper equipment) as a
worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical back-up to provide assistance if needed.
and psychological stress, and impaired vi- OSHA does recommend, however, that at
sion, mobility, and communication. For any least two employees be designated as back-
given situation, equipment and clothing up personnel since the assistance needed
should be selected that provide an adequate may include rescue.
level of protection. However, over-protec- To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the
tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- following scenario might develop during a
ardous and should be avoided where possible. small incident, such as an overturned tank
Two basic objectives of any PPE program truck with a small leak of flammable liquid.
should be to protect the wearer from safety The first responding senior officer would
and health hazards, and to prevent injury to implement and take command of the ICS.
the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal- That person would size-up the incident and
function of the PPE. To accomplish these determine if additional personnel and appa-
goals, a comprehensive PPE program should ratus were necessary; would determine what
406
actions to take to control the leak; and, de- triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con-
termine the proper level of personal protec- taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination
tive equipment. If additional assistance is procedures and area; and other relevant
not needed, the individual in charge of the areas. This plan should be a part of the em-
ICS would implement actions to stop and ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex-
control the leak using the fewest number of tension of it to the specific site.
personnel that can effectively accomplish 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers
the tasks. The individual in charge of the handling hazardous substances may be ex-
ICS then would designate himself as the safe- posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio-
ty officer and two other employees as a logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a
back-up in case rescue may become nec- medical surveillance program is essential to
essary. In this scenario, decontamination assess and monitor workers’ health and fit-
procedures would not be necessary. ness for employment in hazardous waste op-
A large complex incident may require erations and during the course of work; to
many employees and difficult, time-con- provide emergency and other treatment as
suming efforts to control. In these situa- needed; and to keep accurate records for fu-
tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will ture reference.
want to delegate different tasks to subordi- The Occupational Safety and Health Guid-
nates in order to maintain a span of control ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi-
that will keep the number of subordinates, ties developed by the National Institute for
that are reporting, to a manageable level. Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
Delegation of task at large incidents may the Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
be by location, where the incident scene is istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard
divided into sectors, and subordinate officers (USCG), and the Environmental Protection
coordinate activities within the sector that Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex-
they have been assigned. cellent example of the types of medical test-
Delegation of tasks can also be by func- ing that should be done as part of a medical
tion. Some of the functions that the indi- surveillance program.
vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment
egate at a large incident are: medical serv- Programs. Where hazardous substances may
ices; evacuation; water supply; resources be released by spilling from a container that
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; will expose employees to the hazards of the
safety; and, site control (integrate activities materials, the employer will need to imple-
with police for crowd and traffic control). ment a program to contain and control the
Also for a large incident, the individual in spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well
charge of the ICS will designate several em- as use of absorbents like diatomaceous
ployees as back-up personnel; and a number earth, are traditional techniques which have
of safety officers to monitor conditions and proven to be effective over the years. How-
recommend safety precautions. ever, in recent years new products have come
Therefore, no matter what size or com- into the marketplace, the use of which com-
plexity an incident may be, by implementing plement and increase the effectiveness of
an ICS there will be one individual in charge these traditional methods. These new prod-
who makes the decisions and gives direc- ucts also provide emergency responders and
tions; and, all actions, and communications others with additional tools or agents to use
are coordinated through one central point of to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
command. Such a system should reduce con- These agents can be rapidly applied over a
fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- large area and can be uniformly applied or
nate actions, and should facilitate effective otherwise can be used to build a small dam,
management of the incident. thus improving the workers’ ability to con-
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety trol spilled material. These application tech-
and security of response personnel and oth- niques enhance the intimate contact be-
ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- tween the agent and the spilled material al-
dent site should be of primary concern to the lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or
incident commander. The use of a site safety quickest control of the spilled material.
and control plan could greatly assist those in Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled
charge of assuring the safety and health of materials, to suppress vapor generation from
employees on the site. spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe-
A comprehensive site safety and control cial agents, which when applied as rec-
plan should include the following: summary ommended by the manufacturer, will react
analysis of hazards on the site and a risk in a controlled manner with the spilled ma-
analysis of those hazards; site map or terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or
sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi- greatly reduce the level of hazard of the
tion or decontamination zone, work or hot spilled material.
zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- There are several modern methods and de-
nications; command post or command cen- vices for use by emergency response per-
ter; standard operating procedures and safe sonnel or others involved with spill control
work practices; medical assistance and efforts to safely apply spill control agents to
407
control spilled material hazards. These in- and care of spill control equipment; and in
clude portable pressurized applicators simi- the associated hazards and control of such
lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing hazards of spill containment work.
devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar These new tools and agents are the things
to portable fire fighting foam systems which that employers will want to evaluate as part
allow the operator to apply the agent with- of their new technology program. The treat-
out having to come into contact with the ment of spills of hazardous substances or
spilled material. The operator is able to wastes at an emergency incident as part of
apply the agent to the spilled material from the immediate spill containment and control
a remote position. efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a
The solidification of liquids provides for permit exception is described in 40 CFR
rapid containment and isolation of haz- 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
ardous substance spills. By directing the
agent at run-off points or at the edges of the APPENDIX D TO § 1910.120—REFERENCES
spill, the reactant solid will automatically The following references may be consulted
create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of for further information on the subject of this
the material. Clean-up of hazardous substandard:
stances is greatly improved when solidifying 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu-
agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz-
vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly ardous Waste Sites.
applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A—
uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and
sorb them, which results in materials which Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous
are less hazardous and easier to handle, Waste Site Activities.
transport, and dispose of. The concept of 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu-
spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form,
stances, will improve the safety and level of OSHA 175.
protection of employees working at spill 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference
clean-up operations or emergency response Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa-
operations to spills of hazardous substances. tional Safety and Health Administration,
The use of vapor suppression agents for 1986.
volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among
mable liquids and those substances which the National Institute for Occupational Safe-
present an inhalation hazard, is important ty and Health, the Occupational Safety and
for protecting workers. The rapid and uni- Health Administration, the United States
form distribution of the agent over the sur- Coast Guard, and the United States Environ-
face of the spilled material can provide quick mental Protection Agency, Guidance for
vapor knockdown. There are temporary and Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site
long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous
tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
bon adsorption agents which are effective for 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo-
vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection
The proper use of hose lines or hand-held Agency, Revised periodically.
portable pressurized applicators provides 7. The Decontamination of Response Per-
good mobility and permits the worker to de- sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures
liver the agent from a safe distance without (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection
having to step into the untreated spilled ma- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial
terial. Some of these systems can be re- Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi-
charged in the field to provide coverage of sion, December 1984.
larger spill areas than the design limits of a 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field
single charged applicator unit. Some of the Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9;
more effective agents can solidify the liquid U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
flammable hazardous substances and at the fice of Emergency and Remedial Response,
same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 Hazardous Response Support Division, April
°F so the resulting substance may be handled 1985.
as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S.
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz-
larly § 261.21). ardous Response Support Division, Environ-
All workers performing hazardous sub- mental Response Team; November 1984.
stance spill control work are expected to 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance
wear the proper protective clothing and Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities,
equipment for the materials present and to National Institute for Occupational Safety
follow the employer’s established standard and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety
operating procedures for spill control. All in- and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S.
volved workers need to be trained in the es- Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental
tablished operating procedures; in the use Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985.
408
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz- riculum for any specific employer. Site-spe-
ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi- cific training programs must be developed on
ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ the basis of a needs assessment of the haz-
006; September 1985. ardous waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emer-
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous gency response operation in accordance with
Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul- 29 CFR 1910.120.
letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human It is noted that the legal requirements are
Services, Public Health Service, Centers for set forth in the regulatory text of § 1910.120.
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- The guidance set forth here presents a highly
pational Safety and Health; December 1982. effective program that in the areas covered
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- would meet or exceed the regulatory require-
ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; ments. In addition, other approaches could
U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- meet the regulatory requirements.
ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis-
ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- Suggested General Criteria
tional Safety and Health; October 1984.
Definitions:
14. Fire Service Emergency Management
‘‘Competent’’ means possessing the skills,
Handbook, International Association of Fire
knowledge, experience, and judgment to per-
Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue,
form assigned tasks or activities satisfac-
Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985.
torily as determined by the employer.
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De-
‘‘Demonstration’’ means the showing by
partment of Transportation, Washington,
actual use of equipment or procedures.
DC, 1987.
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- ‘‘Hands-on training’’ means training in a
terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, simulated work environment that permits
Federal Emergency Management Agency, each student to have experience performing
Washington, DC, July 1986. tasks, making decisions, or using equipment
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. appropriate to the job assignment for which
Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National the training is being conducted.
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch ‘‘Initial training’’ means training required
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. prior to beginning work.
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na- ‘‘Lecture’’ means an interactive discourse
tional Fire Protection Association, with a class lead by an instructor.
Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. ‘‘Proficient’’ means meeting a stated level
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec- of achievement.
tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- ‘‘Site-specific’’ means individual training
sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. directed to the operations of a specific job
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- site.
ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, ‘‘Training hours’’ means the number of
DC 20037, 1986. hours devoted to lecture, learning activities,
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning small group work sessions, demonstration,
Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection evaluations, or hands-on experience.
Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. Suggested core criteria:
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together
1. Training facility. The training facility
to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation
should have available sufficient resources,
Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation,
equipment, and site locations to perform di-
Washington, DC, May 1983.
dactic and hands-on training when appro-
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and
priate. Training facilities should have suffi-
Industry, Federal Emergency Management
cient organization, support staff, and serv-
Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August
ices to conduct training in each of the
1987.
courses offered.
(The Office of Management and Budget has 2. Training Director. Each training program
approved the information collection require- should be under the direction of a training
ments in this section under control number director who is responsible for the program.
1218–0139) The Training Director should have a min-
imum of two years of employee education ex-
APPENDIX E TO § 1910.120—TRAINING perience.
CURRICULUM GUIDELINES
3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem
The following non-mandatory general cri- competent on the basis of previous docu-
teria may be used for assistance in devel- mented experience in their area of instruc-
oping site-specific training curriculum used tion, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the-
to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR trainer’’ program specific to the topics they
1910.120(e); 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); will teach, and an evaluation of instruc-
and 29 CFR 1910.120(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). tional competence by the Training Director.
These are generic guidelines and they are Instructors should be required to maintain
not presented as a complete training cur- professional competency by participating in
409
continuing education or professional devel- The content of the written test or of the
opment programs or by completing success- skill demonstration shall be relevant to the
fully an annual refresher course and having objectives of the course. The written test
an annual review by the Training Director. and skill demonstration should be updated as
The annual review by the Training Direc- necessary to reflect changes in the cur-
tor should include observation of an instruc- riculum and any update should be approved
tor’s delivery, a review of those observations by the Training Director.
with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- The proficiency assessment methods, re-
structor or class evaluations completed by gardless of the approach or combination of
the students during the previous year. approaches used, should be justified, docu-
4. Course materials. The Training Director mented and approved by the Training Direc-
should approve all course materials to be tor.
used by the training provider. Course mate- The proficiency of those taking the addi-
rials should be reviewed and updated at least tional courses for supervisors should be eval-
annually. Materials and equipment should be uated and documented by using proficiency
in good working order and maintained prop- assessment methods acceptable to the Train-
erly. ing Director. These proficiency assessment
All written and audio-visual materials in methods must reflect the additional respon-
training curricula should be peer reviewed by sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in
technically competent outside reviewers or hazardous waste operations or emergency re-
by a standing advisory committee. sponse.
Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- 8. Course certificate. Written documentation
lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- should be provided to each student who sat-
tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, isfactorily completes the training course.
chemical/environmental engineering, em- The documentation should include:
ployee education, or emergency response. a. Student’s name.
One or more of the peer reviewers should be b. Course title.
an employee experienced in the work activi- c. Course date.
ties to which the training is directed. d. Statement that the student has success-
5. Students. The program for accepting stu- fully completed the course.
dents should include: e. Name and address of the training pro-
a. Assurance that the student is or will be vider.
involved in work where chemical exposures f. An individual identification number for
are likely and that the student possesses the the certificate.
skills necessary to perform the work. g. List of the levels of personal protective
b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- equipment used by the student to complete
ance. the course.
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should This documentation may include a certifi-
not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami-
on activity requiring the use of personal pro- nated card with a photograph of the student
tective equipment should have the following and the above information. When such
student-instructor ratios. For Level C or course certificate cards are used, the indi-
Level D personal protective equipment the vidual identification number for the training
ratio should be 10 students per instructor. certificate should be shown on the card.
For Level A or Level B personal protective 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should
equipment the ratio should be 5 students per maintain records listing the dates courses
instructor. were presented, the names of the individual
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should course attenders, the names of those stu-
be evaluated and documented by the use of a dents successfully completing each course,
written assessment and a skill demonstra- and the number of training certificates
tion selected and developed by the Training issued to each successful student. These
Director and training staff. The assessment records should be maintained for a minimum
and demonstration should evaluate the of five years after the date an individual par-
knowledge and individual skills developed in ticipated in a training program offered by
the course of training. The level of minimum the training provider. These records should
achievement necessary for proficiency shall be available and provided upon the student’s
be specified in writing by the Training Direc- request or as mandated by law.
tor. 10. Program quality control. The Training
If a written test is used, there should be a Director should conduct or direct an annual
minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is written audit of the training program. Pro-
used in combination with a skills demonstra- gram modifications to address deficiencies, if
tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be any, should be documented, approved, and
used. If a skills demonstration is used, the implemented by the training provider. The
tasks chosen and the means to rate success- audit and the program modification docu-
ful completion should be fully documented ments should be maintained at the training
by the Training Director. facility.
410
Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria 11. Adequacy of the organization and ap-
propriate resources assigned to assure appro-
Factors listed here are suggested criteria
priate training.
for determining the quality and appropriate-
12. In the case of multiple-site training
ness of employee health and safety training
programs, adequacy of satellite centers man-
for hazardous waste operations and emer-
agement.
gency response.
C. Training facilities and resources.
A. Training Plan.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili-
Adequacy and appropriateness of the train-
ties and resources for supporting the train-
ing program’s curriculum development, in-
ing program should be considered, including,
structor training, distribution of course ma-
1. Space and equipment to conduct the
terials, and direct student training should be
training.
considered, including
2. Facilities for representative hands-on
1. The duration of training, course content,
training.
and course schedules/agendas;
3. In the case of multiple-site programs,
2. The different training requirements of
equipment and facilities at the satellite cen-
the various target populations, as specified
ters.
in the appropriate generic training cur-
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
riculum;
quality control and evaluations program to
3. The process for the development of cur-
account for instructor performance.
riculum, which includes appropriate tech-
nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro-
quality control and evaluation program to
gram pretesting.
ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion
back, updating, and corrective action.
of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
methods;
ciplines and expertise being used within the
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety,
quality control and evaluation program.
progress, and performance during the train-
ing.
role of student evaluations to provide feed-
B. Program management, Training Director, back for training program improvement.
staff, and consultants.
D. Quality control and evaluation.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per-
Adequacy and appropriateness of quality
formance and delivering an effective training
control and evaluation plans for training
program should be considered, including
programs should be considered, including:
1. Demonstration of the training director’s
1. A balanced advisory committee and/or
leadership in assuring quality of health and
competent outside reviewers to give overall
safety training.
policy guidance;
2. Demonstration of the competency of the
2. Clear and adequate definition of the
staff to meet the demands of delivering high
composition and active programmatic role of
quality hazardous waste employee health
the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
and safety training.
3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of
3. Organization charts establishing clear
the advisory committee or outside reviewers’
lines of authority.
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the meetings or written communication.
relationship of the training staff to the over- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
all program. quality control and evaluations program to
5. Evidence that the training organiza- account for instructor performance.
tional structure suits the needs of the train- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
ing program. quality control and evaluation program to
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
training methods used by the instructors. back, updating, and corrective action.
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
the training director and staff to the train- ciplines and expertise being used within the
ing program. quality control and evaluation program.
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
students. role of student evaluations to provide feed-
9. Availability and commitment of the back for training program improvement.
training program of adequate human and E. Students
equipment resources in the areas of Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro-
a. Health effects, gram for accepting students should be con-
b. Safety, sidered, including
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), 1. Assurance that the student already pos-
d. Operational procedures, sess the necessary skills for their job, includ-
e. Employee protection practices/proce- ing necessary documentation.
dures. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program
10. Appropriateness of management con- uses to ensure that recruits are capable of
trols. satisfactorily completing training.
411
3. Review and compliance with any medical (2) The content of a medical surveillance
clearance policy. program as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.120(f).
F. Institutional Environment and Administra- (3) The content of an effective site safety
tive Support and health plan consistent with the require-
The adequacy and appropriateness of the ments of 29 CFR 1910.120(b)(4)(ii).
institutional environment and administra- (4) Emergency response plan and proce-
tive support system for the training program dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29
should be considered, including CFR 1910.120(l).
1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- (5) Adequate illumination.
ment to the employee training program. (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip-
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- ment.
ministrative structure and administrative (7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz-
support. ard-communication standard (29 CFR
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29
Key questions for evaluating the quality CFR 1910.147).
and appropriateness of an overall training (8) Review of other applicable standards in-
program should include the following: cluding but not limited to those in the con-
1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- struction standards (29 CFR part 1926).
ed? (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers
2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- and employees under applicable OSHA and
tives? EPA laws.
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- b. Technical knowledge.
able? (1) Type of potential exposures to chem-
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, ical, biological, and radiological hazards;
demonstration, and hands-on training? types of human responses to these hazards
5. Is the program providing quality em-
and recognition of those responses; prin-
ployee health and safety training that fully
ciples of toxicology and information about
meets the intent of regulatory requirements?
acute and chronic hazards; health and safety
6. What are the program’s main strengths?
considerations of new technology.
7. What are the program’s main weak-
nesses? (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in-
8. What is recommended to improve the cluding but not limited to vapor pressure,
program? boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys-
9. Are instructors instructing according to ical and chemical properties.
their training outlines? (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi-
10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap- cals.
propriate for the program content? (4) General safety hazards such as but not
11. Is the course material current and rel- limited to electrical hazards, powered equip-
evant to the target group? ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk-
ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz-
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines ards, and hazards associated with working in
The following training curriculum guide- hot and cold temperature extremes.
lines are for those operations specifically (5) Review and knowledge of confined space
identified in 29 CFR 1910.120 as requiring entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146.
training. Issues such as qualifications of in- (6) Work practices to minimize employee
structors, training certification, and similar risk from site hazards.
criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip-
ations addressed in 1910.120 have been cov- ment, and any new relevant safety tech-
ered in the preceding section and are not re- nology or safety procedures.
addressed in each of the generic guidelines. (8) Review and demonstration of com-
Basic core requirements for training pro- petency with air sampling and monitoring
grams that are addressed include equipment that may be used in a site moni-
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations toring program.
2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, (9) Container sampling procedures and
and disposal facilities. safeguarding; general drum and container
3. Emergency Response. handling procedures including special re-
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and quirement for laboratory waste packs,
Site-specific Training shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive
1. Off-site training.Training course content wastes.
for hazardous waste operations, required by (10) The elements of a spill control pro-
29 CFR 1910.120(e), should include the fol- gram.
lowing topics or procedures: (11) Proper use and limitations of material
a. Regulatory knowledge. handling equipment.
(1) An review of 29 CFR 1910.120 and the (12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep-
core elements of an occupational safety and aration of containers for shipping and trans-
health program. port.
412
(13) Methods of communication including (f) Review of newly developed air and con-
those used while wearing respiratory protec- taminant monitoring equipment.
tion. 3. On-site training.
c. Technical skills. a. The employer should provide employees
(1) Selection, use maintenance, and limita- engaged in hazardous waste site activities
tions of personal protective equipment in- with information and training prior to ini-
cluding the components and procedures for tial assignment into their work area, as fol-
carrying out a respirator program to comply lows:
with 29 CFR 1910.134. (1) The requirements of the hazard commu-
(2) Instruction in decontamination pro- nication program including the location and
grams including personnel, equipment, and availability of the written program, required
hardware; hands-on training including level lists of hazardous chemicals, and safety data
A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- sheets.
contamination lines; field activities includ- (2) Activities and locations in their work
ing the donning and doffing of protective area where hazardous substance may be
equipment to a level commensurate with the present.
employee’s anticipated job function and re- (3) Methods and observations that may be
sponsibility and to the degree required by used to detect the present or release of a haz-
potential hazards. ardous chemical in the work area (such as
(3) Sources for additional hazard informa- monitoring conducted by the employer, con-
tion; exercises using relevant manuals and tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear-
hazard coding systems. ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or
smell) of hazardous chemicals being released,
d. Additional suggested items.
and applicable alarms from monitoring de-
(1) A laminated, dated card or certificate
vices that record chemical releases.
with photo, denoting limitations and level of
(4) The physical and health hazards of sub-
protection for which the employee is trained
stances known or potentially present in the
should be issued to those students success-
work area.
fully completing a course.
(5) The measures employees can take to
(2) Attendance should be required at all
help protect themselves from work-site haz-
training modules, with successful comple-
ards, including specific procedures the em-
tion of exercises and a final written or oral
ployer has implemented.
examination with at least 50 questions. (6) An explanation of the labeling system
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program
and safety data sheets and how employees
should be devoted to hands-on exercises. can obtain and use appropriate hazard infor-
(4) A curriculum should be established for
mation.
the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 (7) The elements of the confined space pro-
CFR 1910.120(e)(8), with delivery of such gram including special PPE, permits, moni-
courses directed toward those areas of pre- toring requirements, communication proce-
vious training that need improvement or re- dures, emergency response, and applicable
emphasis. lock-out procedures.
(5) A curriculum should be established for b. The employer should provide hazardous
the required 8-hour training for supervisors. waste employees information and training
Demonstrated competency in the skills and and should provide a review and access to
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course the site safety and plan as follows:
should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- (1) Names of personnel and alternate re-
ing. sponsible for site safety and health.
2. Refresher training. (2) Safety and health hazards present on
The 8-hour annual refresher training re- the site.
quired in 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(8) should be con- (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi-
ducted by qualified training providers. Re- tations of personal protective equipment
fresher training should include at a min- specific to the site.
imum the following topics and procedures: (4) Work practices by which the employee
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant can minimize risks from hazards.
topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- (5) Safe use of engineering controls and
propriate, using reports by the students on equipment available on site.
their work experiences. (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab-
(b) Update on developments with respect to lished to minimize employee contact with
material covered in the 40-hour course. hazardous substances, including:
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- (A) Employee decontamination,
sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (B) Clothing decontamination, and
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas (C) Equipment decontamination.
as appropriate. (7) Elements of the site emergency re-
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE sponse plan, including:
or decontamination equipment or proce- (A) Pre-emergency planning.
dures. Review of new developments in per- (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority
sonal protective equipment. and communication.
413
(C) Emergency recognition and prevention. (c) General safety hazards including those
(D) Safe distances and places of refuge. associated with electrical hazards, powered
(E) Site security and control. equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce-
(F) Evacuation routes and procedures. dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-
(G) Decontamination procedures not cov- working surface hazards.
ered by the site safety and health plan. (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first (e) Work practices to minimize employee
aid. risk from workplace hazards.
(I) Emergency equipment and procedures (f) Emergency response plan and proce-
for handling emergency incidents. dures including first aid meeting the require-
c. The employer should provide hazardous ments of paragraph (p)(8).
waste employees information and training (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex-
on personal protective equipment used at the posure to hazardous waste and various type
site, such as the following: of waste streams, including the materials
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- handling program and spill containment pro-
ticipated site hazards. gram.
(2) PPE limitations of materials and con- (h) A review of hazard communication pro-
struction; limitations during temperature grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate 1910.1200.
medical considerations; use and limitations (i) A review of medical surveillance pro-
of respirator equipment as well as docu- grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(3) including the recognition of
1910.134. signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz-
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, ardous substance including known syner-
during, and after use. gistic interactions.
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. (j) A review of decontamination programs
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- and procedures meeting the requirements of
cedures. 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(4).
(6) PPE maintenance and storage. (k) A review of an employer’s requirements
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- to implement a training program and its ele-
tions. ments.
d. The employer should instruct the em- (l) A review of the criteria and programs
ployee about the site medical surveillance for proper selection and use of personal pro-
program relative to the particular site, in- tective equipment, including respirators.
cluding (m) A review of the applicable appendices
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs to 29 CFR 1910.120.
that have been adapted for the site. (n) Principles of toxicology and biological
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to monitoring as they pertain to occupational
exposure to hazardous materials on the site. health.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic (o) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
medical examinations that will be used on ees and employers under applicable OSHA
the site. and EPA laws.
(4) Maintenance and availability of (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations
records. of competency with equipment to illustrate
(5) Personnel to be contacted and proce- the basic equipment principles that may be
dures to be followed when signs and symp- used during the performance of work duties,
toms of exposures are recognized. including the donning and doffing of PPE.
e. The employees will review and discuss (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of
the site safety plan as part of the training relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard
program. The location of the site safety plan coding systems to include information con-
and all written programs should be discussed tained in hazardous waste manifests.
with employees including a discussion of the (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (s) Training in the job skills required for
erences described. an employee’s job function and responsi-
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici-
Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities.
1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide
quired in 29 CFR 1910.120 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information
the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of assignment into a work area. The training
29 CFR 1910.120 and the elements of the em- and information should cover the following
ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. topics:
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but (a) The Emergency response plan and pro-
not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- cedures including first aid.
diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- (b) A review of the employer’s hazardous
ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- waste handling procedures including the ma-
ards. terials handling program and elements of the
414
spill containment program, location of spill or potential release of hazardous substances
response kits or equipment, and the names of in the community.
those trained to respond to releases. a. General considerations.
(c) The hazardous communication program Emergency response organizations are re-
meeting the requirements of 29 CFR quired to consider the topics listed in
1910.1200. § 1910.120(q)(6). Emergency response organiza-
(d) A review of the employer’s medical sur- tions may use some or all of the following
veillance program including the recognition topics to supplement those mandatory topics
of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel- when developing their response training pro-
evant hazardous substance including known grams. Many of the topics would require an
synergistic interactions. interaction between the response provider
(e) A review of the employer’s decon- and the individuals responsible for the site
tamination program and procedures. where the response would be expected.
(f) An review of the employer’s training (1) Hazard recognition, including:
program and the parties responsible for that (A) Nature of hazardous substances
program. present,
(g) A review of the employer’s personal (B) Practical applications of hazard rec-
protective equipment program including the ognition, including presentations on biology,
proper selection and use of PPE based upon chemistry, and physics.
specific site hazards. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- monitoring, and risk assessment.
dressing potential safety and health hazards. (3) Safe work practices and general site
This may include, as appropriate, biological safety.
and radiological exposures, fire and explo- (4) Engineering controls and hazardous
sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical waste operations.
hazards such as electrical hazards, powered (5) Site safety plans and standard oper-
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- ating procedures.
ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- (6) Decontamination procedures and prac-
working surface hazards. tices.
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and
ment on site. self-rescue.
(j) Names of personnel and alternates re- (8) Safe use of field equipment.
sponsible for safety and health. (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor-
C. Emergency response training. tation of hazardous substances.
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal
1910.120(q) are directed toward private sector protective equipment.
emergency responders. Therefore, the guide- (11) Safe sampling techniques.
lines provided in this portion of the appendix (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
are directed toward that employee popu- ees under OSHA and other related laws con-
lation. However, they also impact indirectly cerning right-to-know, safety and health,
through State OSHA or USEPA regulations compensations and liability.
some public sector emergency responders. (13) Medical monitoring requirements.
Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (14) Community relations.
portion of the appendix may be applied to b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
both employee populations. (1) First responder awareness level.
States with OSHA state plans must cover (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
their employees with regulations at least as petency in performing the applicable skills
effective as the Federal OSHA standards. of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
Public employees in states without approved (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
state OSHA programs covering hazardous partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re-
waste operations and emergency response sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization
are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
311, a regulation virtually identical to (C) Review of the principles and practices
§ 1910.120. for analyzing an incident to determine both
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix the hazardous substances present and the
and therefore not an enforceable standard, basic hazard and response information for
OSHA recommends that those employers, each hazardous substance present.
employees or volunteers in public sector (D) Review of procedures for implementing
emergency response organizations outside actions consistent with the local emergency
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- response plan, the organization’s standard
lowing criteria in developing their own operating procedures, and the current edi-
training programs. A unified approach to tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no-
training at the community level between tification procedures and follow-up commu-
emergency response organizations covered nications.
by Federal OSHA and those not covered di- (E) Review of the expected hazards includ-
rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
effective community response to the release space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
415
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, (C) Review of the principles and practices
and walking-working surface hazards. for analyzing an incident to determine the
(F) Awareness and knowledge of the com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petencies for the First Responder at the and chemical properties, the likely behavior
Awareness Level covered in the National of the hazardous substance and its container,
Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. the types of hazardous substance transpor-
472, Professional Competence of Responders to tation containers and vehicles involved in
Hazardous Materials Incidents. the release, the appropriate strategy for ap-
(2) First responder operations level. proaching release sites and containing the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- release.
petency in performing the applicable skills (D) Review of procedures for implementing
of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). continuing response actions consistent with
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- the local emergency response plan, the orga-
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- nization’s standard operating procedures,
sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safe- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in-
ty data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, ship- cluding extended emergency notification
per or manufacturer contacts, and other rel- procedures and follow-up communications.
evant sources of information addressing haz- (E) Review of the principles and practice
ardous substance releases. Familiarization for proper selection and use of personal pro-
with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201. tective equipment.
(C) Review of the principles and practices (F) Review of the principles and practices
for analyzing an incident to determine the
of establishing exposure zones, proper decon-
hazardous substances present, the likely be-
tamination and medical surveillance sta-
havior of the hazardous substance and its
tions and procedures.
container, the types of hazardous substance
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ-
transportation containers and vehicles, the
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
types and selection of the appropriate defen-
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
sive strategy for containing the release.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
continuing response actions consistent with and walking-working surface hazards.
the local emergency response plan, the orga- (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
nization’s standard operating procedures, petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech-
and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- nician covered in the National Fire Protec-
cluding extended emergency notification tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes-
procedures and follow-up communications. sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
(E) Review of the principles and practice Materials Incidents.
for proper selection and use of personal pro- (4) Hazardous materials specialist.
tective equipment. (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
(F) Review of the principles and practice of petency in performing the applicable skills
personnel and equipment decontamination. of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ- (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined use of written and electronic information
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered relative to response decision making includ-
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, ing but not limited to the U.S. Department
and walking-working surface hazards. of Transportation’s Emergency Response
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data
petencies for the First Responder at the Op- sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or
erations Level covered in the National Fire manufacturer contacts, computer data bases
Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, and response models, and other relevant
Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- sources of information addressing hazardous
ardous Materials Incidents. substance releases. Familiarization with
(3) Hazardous materials technician. OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- (C) Review of the principles and practices
petency in performing the applicable skills for analyzing an incident to determine the
of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). hazardous substances present, their physical
(B) Hands-on experience with written and and chemical properties, and the likely be-
electronic information relative to response havior of the hazardous substance and its
decision making including but not limited to container, vessel, or vehicle.
the U.S. Department of Transportation’s (D) Review of the principles and practices
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- for identification of the types of hazardous
facturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ substance transportation containers, vessels
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer con- and vehicles involved in the release; select-
tacts, computer data bases and response ing and using the various types of equipment
models, and other relevant sources of infor- available for plugging or patching transpor-
mation addressing hazardous substance re- tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga-
leases. Familiarization with OSHA standard nizing and directing the use of multiple
29 CFR 1910.1201. teams of hazardous material technicians and
416
selecting the appropriate strategy for ap- (D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the
proaching release sites and containing or emergency response to ensure that the re-
stopping the release. sponse objectives are being met safely, effec-
(E) Review of procedures for implementing tively, and efficiently.
continuing response actions consistent with (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to
the local emergency response plan, the orga- the conditions of the response and to notify
nization’s standard operating procedures, in- higher levels of response when required by
cluding knowledge of the available public the changes to the response plan.
and private response resources, establish-
[54 FR 9317, Mar. 6, 1989, as amended at 55 FR
ment of an incident command post, direction
14073, Apr. 13, 1990; 56 FR 15832, Apr. 18, 1991;
of hazardous material technician teams, and
59 FR 43270, Aug. 22, 1994; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7,
extended emergency notification procedures
1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 71 FR 16672,
and follow-up communications.
Apr. 3, 2006; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR
(F) Review of the principles and practice
17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013]
for proper selection and use of personal pro-
tective equipment.
§ 1910.121 [Reserved]
(G) Review of the principles and practices
of establishing exposure zones and proper de- DIPPING AND COATING OPERATIONS
contamination, monitoring and medical sur-
veillance stations and procedures.
(H) Review of the expected hazards includ- SOURCE: 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, unless
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined otherwise noted.
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, § 1910.122 Table of contents.
and walking-working surface hazards. This section lists the paragraph
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the com- headings contained in §§ 1910.123
petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em- through 1910.126.
ployee covered in the National Fire Protec-
tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- § 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations:
sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Coverage and definitions.
Materials Incidents.
(5) Incident commander. (a) Does this rule apply to me?
The incident commander is the individual (b) What operations are covered?
who, at any one time, is responsible for and (c) What operations are not covered?
in control of the response effort. This indi- (d) How are terms used in §§ 1910.123
vidual is the person responsible for the direc- through 1910.126 defined?
tion and coordination of the response effort. § 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and
An incident commander’s position should be coating operations.
occupied by the most senior, appropriately
trained individual present at the response (a) What construction requirements apply
site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by to dip tanks?
the level of response provided, the position (b) What ventilation requirements apply to
may be occupied by many individuals during vapor areas?
a particular response as the need for greater (c) What requirements must I follow to re-
authority, responsibility, or training in- circulate exhaust air into the workplace?
creases. It is possible for the first responder (d) What must I do when I use an exhaust
at the awareness level to assume the duties hood?
of incident commander until a more senior (e) What requirements must I follow when
and appropriately trained individual arrives an employee enters a dip tank?
at the response site. (f) What first-aid procedures must my em-
Therefore, any emergency responder ex- ployees know?
pected to perform as an incident commander (g) What hygiene facilities must I provide?
should be trained to fulfill the obligations of (h) What treatment and first aid must I
the position at the level of response they will provide?
be providing including the following: (i) What must I do before an employee
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- cleans a dip tank?
stance incident to determine the magnitude (j) What must I do to inspect and maintain
of the response problem. my dipping or coating operation?
(B) Ability to plan and implement an ap-
§ 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping
propriate response plan within the capabili-
and coating operations that use flammable or
ties of available personnel and equipment.
combustible liquids.
(C) Ability to implement a response to fa-
vorably change the outcome of the incident (a) What type of construction material
in a manner consistent with the local emer- must be used in making my dip tank?
gency response plan and the organization’s (b) When must I provide overflow piping?
standard operating procedures. (c) When must I provide a bottom drain?
417
(d) When must my conveyer system shut nationally recognized testing labora-
down automatically? tory, as defined by § 1910.7.
(e) What ignition and fuel sources must be Autoignition temperature means the
controlled?
minimum temperature required to
(f) What fire protection must I provide?
(g) To what temperature may I heat a liq- cause self-sustained combustion, inde-
uid in a dip tank? pendent of any other source of heat.
Dip tank means a container holding a
§ 1910.126 Additional requirements for special liquid other than water and that is
dipping and coating operations. used for dipping or coating. An object
(a) What additional requirements apply to may be immersed (or partially im-
hardening or tempering tanks? mersed) in a dip tank or it may be sus-
(b) What additional requirements apply to pended in a vapor coming from the
flow coating? tank.
(c) What additional requirements apply to
roll coating, roll spreading, or roll impreg-
Flammable liquid means any liquid
nating? having a flashpoint at or below 199.4
(d) What additional requirements apply to °F (93 °C).
vapor degreasing tanks? Flashpoint means the minimum tem-
(e) What additional requirements apply to perature at which a liquid gives off a
cyanide tanks? vapor in sufficient concentration to ig-
(f) What additional requirements apply to nite if tested in accordance with the
spray cleaning tanks and spray degreasing test methods in Appendix B to
tanks?
(g) What additional requirements apply to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard Criteria.
electrostatic paint detearing? Lower flammable limit (LFL) means
the lowest concentration of a material
§ 1910.123 Dipping and coating oper- that will propagate a flame. The LFL
ations: Coverage and definitions. is usually expressed as a percent by
(a) Does this rule apply to me? (1) volume of the material in air (or other
This rule (§§ 1910.123 through 1910.126) oxidant).
applies when you use a dip tank con- Vapor area means any space con-
taining a liquid other than water. It taining a dip tank, including its drain
applies when you use the liquid in the boards, associated drying or conveying
tank or its vapor to: equipment, and any surrounding area
(i) Clean an object; where the vapor concentration exceeds
(ii) Coat an object; 25% of the LFL of the liquid in the
(iii) Alter the surface of an object; or tank.
(iv) Change the character of an ob- You means the employer, as defined
ject. by the Occupational Safety and Health
(2) This rule also applies to the drain- Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.).
ing or drying of an object you have [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77
dipped or coated. FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
(b) What operations are covered? Ex-
amples of covered operations are paint § 1910.124 General requirements for
dipping, electroplating, pickling, dipping and coating operations.
quenching, tanning, degreasing, strip- (a) What construction requirements
ping, cleaning, roll coating, flow coat- apply to dip tanks? Any container that
ing, and curtain coating. you use as a dip tank must be strong
(c) What operations are not covered? enough to withstand any expected load.
You are not covered by this rule if your (b) What ventilation requirements
dip-tank operation only uses a molten apply to vapor areas? (1) The ventila-
material (a molten metal, alloy, or tion that you provide to a vapor area
salt, for example). must keep the airborne concentration
(d) How are terms used in §§ 1910.123 of any substance below 25% of its LFL.
through 1910.126 defined? (2) When a liquid in a dip tank cre-
Adjacent area means any area within ates an exposure hazard covered by a
20 feet (6.1 m) of a vapor area that is standard listed in subpart Z of this
not separated from the vapor area by part, you must control worker expo-
tight partitions. sure as required by that standard.
Approved means that the equipment (3) You may use a tank cover or ma-
so designated is listed or approved by a terial that floats on the surface of the
418
liquid in a dip tank to replace or sup- (d) What must I do when I use an ex-
plement ventilation. The method or haust hood? You must:
combination of methods you choose (1) Provide each room having exhaust
must maintain the airborne concentra- hoods with a volume of outside air that
tion of the hazardous material and the is at least 90 percent of the volume of
worker’s exposure within the limits the exhaust air; and
specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) (2) Ensure that the outside air supply
of this section. does not damage exhaust hoods.
(4) When you use mechanical ventila- (e) What requirements must I follow
tion, it must conform to the following when an employee enters a dip tank?
standards that are incorporated by ref- When an employee enters a dip tank,
erence as specified in § 1910.6: you must meet the entry requirements
(i) ANSI Z9.2–1979, Fundamentals of § 1910.146, OSHA’s standard for Per-
Governing the Design and Operation of mit-Required Confined Spaces, as ap-
Local Exhaust Systems; plicable.
(ii) NFPA 34–1995, Standard for Dip (f) What first-aid procedures must my
Tanks Containing Flammable or Com- employees know? Your employees must
bustible Liquids; know the first-aid procedures that are
(iii) ACGIH’s ‘‘Industrial Ventilation: appropriate to the dipping or coating
A Manual of Recommended Practice’’ hazards to which they are exposed.
(22nd ed., 1995); or (g) What hygiene facilities must I
(iv) ANSI Z9.1–1971, Practices for provide? When your employees work
Ventilation and Operation of Open-Sur- with liquids that may burn, irritate, or
face Tanks, and NFPA 34–1966, Stand- otherwise harm their skin, you must
ard for Dip Tanks Containing Flam- provide:
mable or Combustible Liquids.
(1) Locker space or other storage
(5) When you use mechanical ventila-
space to prevent contamination of the
tion, it must draw the flow of air into
employee’s street clothes;
a hood or exhaust duct.
(2) An emergency shower and eye-
(6) When you use mechanical ventila-
wash station close to the dipping or
tion, each dip tank must have an inde-
coating operation. In place of this
pendent exhaust system unless the
equipment, you may use a water hose
combination of substances being re-
that is at least 4 feet (1.22 m) long and
moved will not cause a:
at least 3⁄4 of an inch (18 mm) thick
(i) Fire;
with a quick-opening valve and car-
(ii) Explosion; or
rying a pressure of 25 pounds per
(iii) Chemical reaction.
square inch (1.62 k/cm2) or less; and
(c) What requirements must I follow
to recirculate exhaust air into the (3) At least one basin with a hot-
workplace? (1) You may not recirculate water faucet for every 10 employees
exhaust air when any substance in that who work with such liquids. (See para-
air poses a health hazard to employees graph (d) of § 1910.141.)
or exceeds 25% of its LFL. (h) What treatment and first aid
(2) You must ensure that any exhaust must I provide? When your employees
air re-circulated from a dipping or work with liquids that may burn, irri-
coating operation using flammable liq- tate, or otherwise harm their skin, you
uids or liquids with flashpoints greater must provide:
than 199.4 °F (93 °C) is: (1) A physician’s approval before an
(i) Free of any solid particulate that employee with a sore, burn, or other
poses a health or safety hazard for em- skin lesion that requires medical treat-
ployees; and ment works in a vapor area;
(ii) Monitored by approved equip- (2) Treatment by a properly des-
ment. ignated person of any small skin abra-
(3) You must have a system that sion, cut, rash, or open sore;
sounds an alarm and automatically (3) Appropriate first-aid supplies that
shuts down the operation when the are located near the dipping or coating
vapor concentration for any substance operation; and
in the exhaust airstream exceeds 25% (4) For employees who work with
of its LFL. chromic acid, periodic examinations of
419
their exposed body parts, especially ers, drains, overflow piping, and elec-
their nostrils. trical and fire-extinguishing systems,
(i) What must I do before an em- and promptly correct any deficiencies;
ployee cleans a dip tank? Before per- (4) Provide mechanical ventilation or
mitting an employee to clean the inte- respirators (selected and used as speci-
rior of a dip tank, you must: fied in § 1910.134, OSHA’s Respiratory
(1) Drain the contents of the tank Protection standard) to protect em-
and open the cleanout doors; and ployees in the vapor area from expo-
(2) Ventilate and clear any pockets sure to toxic substances released dur-
where hazardous vapors may have ac- ing welding, burning, or open-flame
cumulated. work; and
(j) What must I do to inspect and
(5) Have dip tanks thoroughly
maintain my dipping or coating oper-
cleaned of solvents and vapors before
ation? You must:
permitting welding, burning, or open-
(1) Inspect the hoods and ductwork of
flame work on them.
the ventilation system for corrosion or
damage: [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77
(i) At least quarterly during oper- FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
ation; and
(ii) Prior to operation after a pro- § 1910.125 Additional requirements for
longed shutdown. dipping and coating operations that
(2) Ensure that the airflow is ade- use flammable liquids or liquids
quate: with flashpoints greater than 199.4
≥F (93 ≥C).
(i) At least quarterly during oper-
ation; and If you use flammable liquids, you
(ii) Prior to operation after a pro- must comply with the requirements of
longed shutdown. this section as well as the require-
(3) Periodically inspect all dipping ments of §§ 1910.123, 1910.124, and
and coating equipment, including cov- 1910.126, as applicable.
You must also comply with this section if: And:
• The flashpoint of the liquid is 199.4 °F (93 °C) or • The liquid is heated as part of the operation; or
above. • A heated object is placed in the liquid.
(a) What type of construction mate- (iii) The bottom of the overflow con-
rial must be used in making my dip nection is at least 6 inches (15.2 cm)
tank? Your dip tank must be made of below the top of the dip tank.
noncombustible material. (c) When must I provide a bottom
(b) When must I provide overflow pip- drain? (1) You must provide a bottom
ing? (1) You must provide properly drain for dip tanks that contain more
trapped overflow piping that discharges than 500 gallons (1893 L) of liquid, un-
to a safe location for any dip tank hav- less:
ing: (i) The dip tank is equipped with an
(i) A capacity greater than 150 gal- automatic closing cover meeting the
requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this
lons (568 L); or
section; or
(ii) A liquid surface area greater than (ii) The viscosity of the liquid at nor-
10 feet 2 (0.95 m2). mal atmospheric temperature does not
(2) You must also ensure that: allow the liquid to flow or be pumped
(i) Any overflow piping is at least 3 easily.
inches (7.6 cm) in diameter and has suf- (2) You must ensure that the bottom
ficient capacity to prevent the dip tank drain required by this section:
from overflowing; (i) Will empty the dip tank during a
(ii) Piping connections on drains and fire;
overflow pipes allow ready access to (ii) Is properly trapped;
the interior of the pipe for inspection (iii) Has pipes that permit the dip
and cleaning; and tank’s contents to be removed within
five minutes after a fire begins; and
420
(iv) Discharges to a safe location. (iii) Waste can contents are properly
(3) Any bottom drain you provide disposed of at the end of each shift.
must be capable of manual and auto- (5) You must prohibit smoking in a
matic operation, and manual operation vapor area and must post a readily
must be from a safe and accessible lo- visible ‘‘No Smoking’’ sign near each
cation. dip tank.
(4) You must ensure that automatic (f) What fire protection must I pro-
pumps are used when gravity flow from vide? (1) You must provide the fire pro-
the bottom drain is impractical. tection required by this paragraph (f)
(d) When must my conveyor system for:
shut down automatically? If your con- (i) Any dip tank having a capacity of
veyor system is used with a dip tank, at least 150 gallons (568 L) or a liquid
the system must shut down automati- surface area of at least 4 feet 2 (0.38
cally: m 1); and
(1) If there is a fire; or (ii) Any hardening or tempering tank
(2) If the ventilation rate drops below having a capacity of at least 500 gal-
what is required by paragraph (b) of lons (1893 L) or a liquid surface area of
§ 1910.124. at least 25 feet 2 (2.37 m 2).
(e) What ignition and fuel sources (2) For every vapor area, you must
must be controlled? (1) In each vapor provide:
area and any adjacent area, you must (i) Manual fire extinguishers that are
ensure that: suitable for flammable and combus-
(i) All electrical wiring and equip- tible liquid fires and that conform to
ment conform to the applicable haz- the requirements of § 1910.157; and
ardous (classified)-area requirements of (ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing
subpart S of this part (except as spe- system that conforms to the require-
cifically permitted in paragraph (g) of ments of subpart L of this part.
§ 1910.126); and (3) You may substitute a cover that
(ii) There are no flames, spark-pro- is closed by an approved automatic de-
ducing devices, or other surfaces that vice for the automatic fire-extin-
are hot enough to ignite vapors. guishing system if the cover:
(2) You must ensure that any port- (i) Can also be activated manually;
able container used to add liquid to the (ii) Is noncombustible or tin-clad,
tank is electrically bonded to the dip with the enclosing metal applied with
tank and positively grounded to pre- locked joints; and
vent static electrical sparks or arcs. (iii) Is kept closed when the dip tank
(3) You must ensure that a heating is not in use.
system that is used in a drying oper- (g) To what temperature may I heat
ation and could cause ignition: a liquid in a dip tank? You must main-
(i) Is installed in accordance with tain the temperature of the liquid in a
NFPA 86A–1969, Standard for Ovens and dip tank:
Furnaces (which is incorporated by ref- (1) Below the liquid’s boiling point;
erence in § 1910.6 of this part); and
(ii) Has adequate mechanical ventila- (2) At least 100 °F (37.8 °C) below the
tion that operates before and during liquid’s autoignition temperature.
the drying operation; and [64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77
(iii) Shuts down automatically if any FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
ventilating fan fails to maintain ade-
quate ventilation. § 1910.126 Additional requirements for
(4) You also must ensure that: special dipping and coating oper-
(i) All vapor areas are free of combus- ations.
tible debris and as free as practicable In addition to the requirements in
of combustible stock; §§ 1910.123 through 1910.125, you must
(ii) Rags and other material contami- comply with any requirement in this
nated with liquids from dipping or section that applies to your operation.
coating operations are placed in ap- (a) What additional requirements
proved waste cans immediately after apply to hardening or tempering
use; and tanks?
421
(1) You must ensure that hardening half the tank width, whichever is less,
or tempering tanks: below the top of the vapor degreasing
(i) Are located as far as practicable tank.
from furnaces; (2) When you use gas as a fuel to heat
(ii) Are on noncombustible flooring; the tank liquid, you must prevent sol-
and vent vapors from entering the air-fuel
(iii) Have noncombustible hoods and mixture. To do this, you must make
vents (or equivalent devices) for vent- the combustion chamber airtight (ex-
ing to the outside. For this purpose, cept for the flue opening).
vent ducts must be treated as flues and (3) The flue must be made of corro-
kept away from combustible materials, sion-resistant material, and it must ex-
particularly roofs. tend to the outside. You must install a
(2) You must equip each tank with an draft diverter if mechanical exhaust is
alarm that will sound if the tempera- used on the flue.
ture of the liquid comes within 50 °F (10 (4) You must not allow the tempera-
°C) of its flashpoint (the alarm set ture of the heating element to cause a
point). solvent or mixture to decompose or to
(3) When practicable, you must also generate an excessive amount of vapor.
provide each tank with a limit switch (e) What additional requirements
to shut down the conveyor supplying apply to cyanide tanks? You must en-
work to the tank. sure that cyanide tanks have a dike or
(4) If the temperature of the liquid other safeguard to prevent cyanide
can exceed the alarm set point, you from mixing with an acid if a dip tank
must equip the tank with a circulating fails.
cooling system. (f) What additional requirements
(5) If the tank has a bottom drain, apply to spray cleaning tanks and
the bottom drain may be combined spray degreasing tanks? If you spray a
with the oil-circulating system. liquid in the air over an open-surface
(6) You must not use air under pres- cleaning or degreasing tank, you must
sure when you fill the dip tank or agi- control the spraying to the extent fea-
tate the liquid in the dip tank. sible by:
(b) What additional requirements (1) Enclosing the spraying operation;
apply to flow coating? (1) You must use and
a direct low-pressure pumping system (2) Using mechanical ventilation to
or a 10-gallon (38 L) or smaller gravity provide enough inward air velocity to
tank to supply the paint for flow coat- prevent the spray from leaving the
ing. In case of fire, an approved heat- vapor area.
actuated device must shut down the (g) What additional requirements
pumping system. apply to electrostatic paint detearing?
(2) You must ensure that the piping (1) You must use only approved electro-
is substantial and rigidly supported. static equipment in paint-detearing op-
(c) What additional requirements erations. Electrodes in such equipment
apply to roll coating, roll spreading, or must be substantial, rigidly supported,
roll impregnating? When these oper- permanently located, and effectively
ations use a flammable liquid that has insulated from ground by nonporous,
a flashpoint below 140 °F (60 °C), you noncombustible, clean, dry insulators.
must prevent sparking of static elec- (2) You must use conveyors to sup-
tricity by: port any goods being paint deteared.
(1) Bonding and grounding all metal- (3) You must ensure that goods being
lic parts (including rotating parts) and electrostatically deteared are not
installing static collectors; or manually handled.
(2) Maintaining a conductive atmos- (4) Between goods being electro-
phere (for example, one with a high rel- statically deteared and the electrodes
ative humidity) in the vapor area. or conductors of the electrostatic
(d) What additional requirements equipment, you must maintain a min-
apply to vapor degreasing tanks? (1) imum distance of twice the sparking
You must ensure that the condenser or distance. This minimum distance must
vapor-level thermostat keeps the vapor be displayed conspicuously on a sign
level at least 36 inches (91 cm) or one- located near the equipment.
422
(5) You must ensure that the electro- reason of hazards of processes or envi-
static equipment has automatic con- ronment, chemical hazards, radio-
trols that immediately disconnect the logical hazards, or mechanical irri-
power supply to the high-voltage trans- tants encountered in a manner capable
former and signal the operator if: of causing injury or impairment in the
(i) Ventilation or the conveyors fail function of any part of the body
to operate; through absorption, inhalation or
(ii) A ground (or imminent ground) physical contact.
occurs anywhere in the high-voltage (b) Employee-owned equipment. Where
system; or employees provide their own protective
(iii) Goods being electrostatically equipment, the employer shall be re-
deteared come within twice the spark- sponsible to assure its adequacy, in-
ing distance of the electrodes or concluding proper maintenance, and sani-
ductors of the equipment. tation of such equipment.
(6) You must use fences, rails, or (c) Design. All personal protective
guards, made of conducting material equipment shall be of safe design and
and adequately grounded, to separate construction for the work to be per-
paint-detearing operations from stor- formed.
age areas and from personnel. (d) Hazard assessment and equipment
(7) To protect paint-detearing oper- selection. (1) The employer shall assess
ations from fire, you must have in the workplace to determine if hazards
place: are present, or are likely to be present,
(i) Automatic sprinklers; or which necessitate the use of personal
(ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing protective equipment (PPE). If such
system conforming to the requirements hazards are present, or likely to be
of subpart L of this part. present, the employer shall:
(8) To collect paint deposits, you (i) Select, and have each affected em-
must: ployee use, the types of PPE that will
(i) Provide drip plates and screens; protect the affected employee from the
and hazards identified in the hazard assess-
(ii) Clean these plates and screens in ment;
a safe location. (ii) Communicate selection decisions
[64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 to each affected employee; and,
FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012] (iii) Select PPE that properly fits
each affected employee.
Subpart I—Personal Protective NOTE: Non-mandatory appendix B contains
Equipment an example of procedures that would comply
with the requirement for a hazard assess-
ment.
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), (2) The employer shall verify that the
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 required workplace hazard assessment
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), has been performed through a written
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), 4– certification that identifies the work-
2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as place evaluated; the person certifying
applicable; and 29 CFR 1911.
Sections 1910.132, 1910.134, and 1910.138 of 29
that the evaluation has been per-
CFR also issued under 29 CFR 1911. formed; the date(s) of the hazard as-
Sections 1910.133, 1910.135, and 1910.136 of 29 sessment; and, which identifies the
CFR also issued under 29 CFR 1911 and 5 document as a certification of hazard
U.S.C. 553. assessment.
(e) Defective and damaged equipment.
§ 1910.132 General requirements. Defective or damaged personal protec-
(a) Application. Protective equipment, tive equipment shall not be used.
including personal protective equip- (f) Training. (1) The employer shall
ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem- provide training to each employee who
ities, protective clothing, respiratory is required by this section to use PPE.
devices, and protective shields and bar- Each such employee shall be trained to
riers, shall be provided, used, and know at least the following:
maintained in a sanitary and reliable (i) When PPE is necessary;
condition wherever it is necessary by (ii) What PPE is necessary;
423
(iii) How to properly don, doff, ad- (i) The logging boots required by 29
just, and wear PPE; CFR 1910.266(d)(1)(v);
(iv) The limitations of the PPE; and, (ii) Everyday clothing, such as long-
(v) The proper care, maintenance, sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes,
useful life and disposal of the PPE. and normal work boots; or
(2) Each affected employee shall dem- (iii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams,
onstrate an understanding of the train- or other items, used solely for protec-
ing specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this tion from weather, such as winter
section, and the ability to use PPE coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber
properly, before being allowed to per- boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sun-
form work requiring the use of PPE. glasses, and sunscreen.
(3) When the employer has reason to (5) The employer must pay for re-
believe that any affected employee who placement PPE, except when the em-
has already been trained does not have ployee has lost or intentionally dam-
the understanding and skill required by aged the PPE.
paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the em- (6) Where an employee provides ade-
ployer shall retrain each such em- quate protective equipment he or she
ployee. Circumstances where retrain- owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this
ing is required include, but are not lim- section, the employer may allow the
ited to, situations where: employee to use it and is not required
(i) Changes in the workplace render to reimburse the employee for that
previous training obsolete; or equipment. The employer shall not re-
(ii) Changes in the types of PPE to be quire an employee to provide or pay for
used render previous training obsolete; his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is
or excepted by paragraphs (h)(2) through
(iii) Inadequacies in an affected em- (h)(5) of this section.
ployee’s knowledge or use of assigned (7) This paragraph (h) shall become
PPE indicate that the employee has effective on February 13, 2008. Employ-
not retained the requisite under- ers must implement the PPE payment
standing or skill. requirements no later than May 15,
(g) Paragraphs (d) and (f) of this sec- 2008.
tion apply only to §§ 1910.133, 1910.135,
1919.136, and 1910.138. Parpagraphs (d) NOTE TO § 1910.132(h): When the provisions
and (f) of this section do not apply to of another OSHA standard specify whether
§§ 1910.134 and 1910.137. or not the employer must pay for specific
(h) Payment for protective equipment. equipment, the payment provisions of that
standard shall prevail.
(1) Except as provided by paragraphs
(h)(2) through (h)(6) of this section, the [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 59
protective equipment, including per- FR 16334, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33910, July 1,
sonal protective equipment (PPE), used 1994; 72 FR 64428, Nov. 15, 2007; 76 FR 33606,
to comply with this part, shall be pro- June 8, 2011]
vided by the employer at no cost to
§ 1910.133 Eye and face protection.
employees.
(2) The employer is not required to (a) General requirements. (1) The em-
pay for non-specialty safety-toe protec- ployer shall ensure that each affected
tive footwear (including steel-toe shoes employee uses appropriate eye or face
or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty protection when exposed to eye or face
prescription safety eyewear, provided hazards from flying particles, molten
that the employer permits such items metal, liquid chemicals, acids or caus-
to be worn off the job-site. tic liquids, chemical gases or vapors, or
(3) When the employer provides potentially injurious light radiation.
metatarsal guards and allows the em- (2) The employer shall ensure that
ployee, at his or her request, to use each affected employee uses eye pro-
shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal tection that provides side protection
protection, the employer is not re- when there is a hazard from flying ob-
quired to reimburse the employee for jects. Detachable side protectors (e.g.
the shoes or boots. clip-on or slide-on side shields) meeting
(4) The employer is not required to the pertinent requirements of this sec-
pay for: tion are acceptable.
424
(3) The employer shall ensure that (4) Eye and face PPE shall be dis-
each affected employee who wears pre- tinctly marked to facilitate identifica-
scription lenses while engaged in oper- tion of the manufacturer.
ations that involve eye hazards wears (5) The employer shall ensure that
eye protection that incorporates the each affected employee uses equipment
prescription in its design, or wears eye with filter lenses that have a shade
protection that can be worn over the number appropriate for the work being
prescription lenses without disturbing performed for protection from inju-
the proper position of the prescription rious light radiation. The following is a
lenses or the protective lenses. listing of appropriate shade numbers
for various operations.
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy

Minimum* Pro-
Operations Electrode Size 1⁄32 in. Arc Current tective Shade
Shielded metal arc welding Less than 3 ............... Less than 60 ............. 7
3-5 ............................. 60-160 ....................... 8
5-8 ............................. 160-250 ..................... 10
More than 8 ............... 250-550 ..................... 11
Gas metal arc welding and less than 60 ............... 7

flux cored arc welding
60-160 ....................... 10
160-250 ..................... 10
250-500 ..................... 10
Gas Tungsten arc welding less than 50 ............... 8

50-150 ....................... 8
150-500 ..................... 10
Air carbon (Light) ........................ less than 500 ............. 10

Arc cutting (Heavy) ...................... 500-1000 ................... 11
Plasma arc welding less than 20 ............... 6

20-100 ....................... 8
100-400 ..................... 10
400-800 ..................... 11
Plasma arc cutting (light)** ....................... less than 300 ............. 8

(medium)** ................ 300-400 ..................... 9
(heavy)** .................... 400-800 ..................... 10
Torch brazing .................................... 3

Torch soldering .................................... 2
Carbon arc welding .................................... 14
425
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Operations Plate thickness— Plate thickness—mm Minimum* Pro-

inches tective Shade
Gas Welding:
Light Under 1/8 .................. Under 3.2 .................. 4
Medium 1/8 to 1/2 ................... 3.2 to 12.7 ................. 5
Heavy Over 1/2 .................... Over 12.7 .................. 6
Oxygen cutting:
Light Under 1 ..................... Under 25 ................... 3
Medium 1 to 6 ......................... 25 to 150 ................... 4
Heavy Over 6 ....................... Over 150 ................... 5
* As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a
lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In
oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use
a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter
filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece.
(b) Criteria for protective eye and face 1915), Marine Terminals (part 1917),
protection. (1) Protective eye and face Longshoring (part 1918), and Construc-
protection devices must comply with tion (part 1926).
any of the following consensus stand- (a) Permissible practice. (1) In the con-
ards: trol of those occupational diseases
(i) ANSI Z87.1–2003, ‘‘American Na- caused by breathing air contaminated
tional Standard Practice for Occupa- with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists,
tional and Educational Eye and Face gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the
Protection,’’ which is incorporated by primary objective shall be to prevent
reference in § 1910.6; atmospheric contamination. This shall
(ii) ANSI Z87.1–1989 (R–1998), ‘‘Amer- be accomplished as far as feasible by
ican National Standard Practice for accepted engineering control measures
Occupational and Educational Eye and
(for example, enclosure or confinement
Face Protection,’’ which is incor-
of the operation, general and local ven-
porated by reference in § 1910.6; or
tilation, and substitution of less toxic
(iii) ANSI Z87.1–1989, ‘‘American Na-
tional Standard Practice for Occupa- materials). When effective engineering
tional and Educational Eye and Face controls are not feasible, or while they
Protection,’’ which is incorporated by are being instituted, appropriate res-
reference in § 1910.6. pirators shall be used pursuant to this
(2) Protective eye and face protection section.
devices that the employer dem- (2) A respirator shall be provided to
onstrates are at least as effective as each employee when such equipment is
protective eye and face protection de- necessary to protect the health of such
vices that are constructed in accord- employee. The employer shall provide
ance with one of the above consensus the respirators which are applicable
standards will be deemed to be in com- and suitable for the purpose intended.
pliance with the requirements of this The employer shall be responsible for
section. the establishment and maintenance of
a respiratory protection program,
[59 FR 16360, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1,
1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; which shall include the requirements
61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, outlined in paragraph (c) of this sec-
2009] tion. The program shall cover each em-
ployee required by this section to use a
§ 1910.134 Respiratory protection. respirator.
This section applies to General In- (b) Definitions. The following defini-
dustry (part 1910), Shipyards (part tions are important terms used in the
426
respiratory protection standard in this Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means
section. a negative pressure particulate res-
Air-purifying respirator means a respirator with a filter as an integral part
pirator with an air-purifying filter, of the facepiece or with the entire face-
cartridge, or canister that removes spe- piece composed of the filtering me-
cific air contaminants by passing am- dium.
bient air through the air-purifying ele- Fit factor means a quantitative esti-
ment. mate of the fit of a particular res-
Assigned protection factor (APF) means pirator to a specific individual, and
the workplace level of respiratory pro- typically estimates the ratio of the
tection that a respirator or class of res- concentration of a substance in ambi-
pirators is expected to provide to em- ent air to its concentration inside the
ployees when the employer implements respirator when worn.
a continuing, effective respiratory pro- Fit test means the use of a protocol to
tection program as specified by this qualitatively or quantitatively evalu-
section. ate the fit of a respirator on an indi-
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means vidual. (See also Qualitative fit test
a respirator that supplies the res- QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
pirator user with breathing air from a Helmet means a rigid respiratory
source independent of the ambient at- inlet covering that also provides head
mosphere, and includes supplied-air protection against impact and penetra-
respirators (SARs) and self-contained tion.
breathing apparatus (SCBA) units. High efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
Canister or cartridge means a con- filter means a filter that is at least
tainer with a filter, sorbent, or cata- 99.97% efficient in removing
lyst, or combination of these items, monodisperse particles of 0.3 microm-
which removes specific contaminants eters in diameter. The equivalent
from the air passed through the con- NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate filters are
tainer. the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
Demand respirator means an atmos- Hood means a respiratory inlet cov-
phere-supplying respirator that admits ering that completely covers the head
breathing air to the facepiece only and neck and may also cover portions
when a negative pressure is created in- of the shoulders and torso.
side the facepiece by inhalation. Immediately dangerous to life or health
Emergency situation means any occur- (IDLH) means an atmosphere that
rence such as, but not limited to, poses an immediate threat to life,
equipment failure, rupture of con- would cause irreversible adverse health
tainers, or failure of control equipment effects, or would impair an individual’s
that may or does result in an uncon- ability to escape from a dangerous at-
trolled significant release of an air- mosphere.
borne contaminant. Interior structural firefighting means
Employee exposure means exposure to the physical activity of fire suppres-
a concentration of an airborne con- sion, rescue or both, inside of buildings
taminant that would occur if the em- or enclosed structures which are in-
ployee were not using respiratory pro- volved in a fire situation beyond the
tection. incipient stage. (See 29 CFR 1910.155)
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) Loose-fitting facepiece means a res-
means a system that warns the respiratory inlet covering that is designed
pirator user of the approach of the end to form a partial seal with the face.
of adequate respiratory protection, for Maximum use concentration (MUC)
example, that the sorbent is approach- means the maximum atmospheric con-
ing saturation or is no longer effective. centration of a hazardous substance
Escape-only respirator means a res- from which an employee can be ex-
pirator intended to be used only for pected to be protected when wearing a
emergency exit. respirator, and is determined by the as-
Filter or air purifying element means a signed protection factor of the res-
component used in respirators to re- pirator or class of respirators and the
move solid or liquid aerosols from the exposure limit of the hazardous sub-
inspired air. stance. The MUC can be determined
427
mathematically by multiplying the as- suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with
signed protection factor specified for a nose clamp.
respirator by the required OSHA per- Self-contained breathing apparatus
missible exposure limit, short-term ex- (SCBA) means an atmosphere-sup-
posure limit, or ceiling limit. When no plying respirator for which the breath-
OSHA exposure limit is available for a ing air source is designed to be carried
hazardous substance, an employer by the user.
must determine an MUC on the basis of Service life means the period of time
relevant available information and in- that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or
formed professional judgment. other respiratory equipment provides
Negative pressure respirator (tight fit- adequate protection to the wearer.
ting) means a respirator in which the Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline
air pressure inside the facepiece is neg- respirator means an atmosphere-sup-
ative during inhalation with respect to plying respirator for which the source
the ambient air pressure outside the of breathing air is not designed to be
respirator. carried by the user.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an This section means this respiratory
atmosphere with an oxygen content protection standard.
below 19.5% by volume. Tight-fitting facepiece means a res-
Physician or other licensed health care piratory inlet covering that forms a
professional (PLHCP) means an indi- complete seal with the face.
vidual whose legally permitted scope of User seal check means an action con-
practice (i.e., license, registration, or ducted by the respirator user to deter-
certification) allows him or her to mine if the respirator is properly seat-
independently provide, or be delegated ed to the face.
the responsibility to provide, some or (c) Respiratory protection program.
all of the health care services required This paragraph requires the employer
by paragraph (e) of this section. to develop and implement a written
Positive pressure respirator means a respiratory protection program with
respirator in which the pressure inside required worksite-specific procedures
the respiratory inlet covering exceeds and elements for required respirator
the ambient air pressure outside the use. The program must be administered
respirator. by a suitably trained program adminis-
Powered air-purifying respirator trator. In addition, certain program
(PAPR) means an air-purifying res- elements may be required for vol-
pirator that uses a blower to force the untary use to prevent potential haz-
ambient air through air-purifying ele- ards associated with the use of the res-
ments to the inlet covering. pirator. The Small Entity Compliance
Pressure demand respirator means a Guide contains criteria for the selec-
positive pressure atmosphere-supplying tion of a program administrator and a
respirator that admits breathing air to sample program that meets the re-
the facepiece when the positive pres- quirements of this paragraph. Copies of
sure is reduced inside the facepiece by the Small Entity Compliance Guide
inhalation. will be available on or about April 8,
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a 1998 from the Occupational Safety and
pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy Health Administration’s Office of Pub-
of respirator fit that relies on the indi- lications, Room N 3101, 200 Constitu-
vidual’s response to the test agent. tion Avenue, NW, Washington, DC,
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an 20210 (202–219–4667).
assessment of the adequacy of res- (1) In any workplace where res-
pirator fit by numerically measuring pirators are necessary to protect the
the amount of leakage into the res- health of the employee or whenever
pirator. respirators are required by the em-
Respiratory inlet covering means that ployer, the employer shall establish
portion of a respirator that forms the and implement a written respiratory
protective barrier between the user’s protection program with worksite-spe-
respiratory tract and an air-purifying cific procedures. The program shall be
device or breathing air source, or both. updated as necessary to reflect those
It may be a facepiece, helmet, hood, changes in workplace conditions that
428
affect respirator use. The employer respiratory protection program those
shall include in the program the fol- employees whose only use of res-
lowing provisions of this section, as ap- pirators involves the voluntary use of
plicable: filtering facepieces (dust masks).
(i) Procedures for selecting res- (3) The employer shall designate a
pirators for use in the workplace; program administrator who is qualified
(ii) Medical evaluations of employees by appropriate training or experience
required to use respirators; that is commensurate with the com-
(iii) Fit testing procedures for tight- plexity of the program to administer or
fitting respirators; oversee the respiratory protection pro-
(iv) Procedures for proper use of res- gram and conduct the required evalua-
pirators in routine and reasonably fore- tions of program effectiveness.
seeable emergency situations; (4) The employer shall provide res-
(v) Procedures and schedules for pirators, training, and medical evalua-
cleaning, disinfecting, storing, inspect- tions at no cost to the employee.
ing, repairing, discarding, and other- (d) Selection of respirators. This para-
wise maintaining respirators; graph requires the employer to evalu-
(vi) Procedures to ensure adequate ate respiratory hazard(s) in the work-
air quality, quantity, and flow of place, identify relevant workplace and
breathing air for atmosphere-supplying user factors, and base respirator selec-
respirators; tion on these factors. The paragraph
(vii) Training of employees in the also specifies appropriately protective
respiratory hazards to which they are respirators for use in IDLH
potentially exposed during routine and atmospheres, and limits the selection
emergency situations; and use of air-purifying respirators.
(viii) Training of employees in the (1) General requirements. (i) The em-
proper use of respirators, including ployer shall select and provide an ap-
putting on and removing them, any propriate respirator based on the res-
limitations on their use, and their piratory hazard(s) to which the worker
maintenance; and is exposed and workplace and user fac-
(ix) Procedures for regularly evalu- tors that affect respirator performance
ating the effectiveness of the program. and reliability.
(2) Where respirator use is not re- (ii) The employer shall select a
quired: NIOSH-certified respirator. The res-
(i) An employer may provide respirator shall be used in compliance
pirators at the request of employees or with the conditions of its certification.
permit employees to use their own res- (iii) The employer shall identify and
pirators, if the employer determines evaluate the respiratory hazard(s) in
that such respirator use will not in the workplace; this evaluation shall in-
itself create a hazard. If the employer clude a reasonable estimate of em-
determines that any voluntary res- ployee exposures to respiratory haz-
pirator use is permissible, the em- ard(s) and an identification of the con-
ployer shall provide the respirator taminant’s chemical state and physical
users with the information contained form. Where the employer cannot iden-
in appendix D to this section (‘‘Infor- tify or reasonably estimate the em-
mation for Employees Using Res- ployee exposure, the employer shall
pirators When Not Required Under the consider the atmosphere to be IDLH.
Standard’’); and (iv) The employer shall select res-
(ii) In addition, the employer must pirators from a sufficient number of
establish and implement those ele- respirator models and sizes so that the
ments of a written respiratory protec- respirator is acceptable to, and cor-
tion program necessary to ensure that rectly fits, the user.
any employee using a respirator volun- (2) Respirators for IDLH atmospheres.
tarily is medically able to use that res- (i) The employer shall provide the fol-
pirator, and that the respirator is lowing respirators for employee use in
cleaned, stored, and maintained so that IDLH atmospheres:
its use does not present a health hazard (A) A full facepiece pressure demand
to the user. Exception: Employers are SCBA certified by NIOSH for a min-
not required to include in a written imum service life of thirty minutes, or
429
(B) A combination full facepiece pres- vide a respirator that is adequate to
sure demand supplied-air respirator protect the health of the employee and
(SAR) with auxiliary self-contained air ensure compliance with all other OSHA
supply. statutory and regulatory requirements,
(ii) Respirators provided only for es- under routine and reasonably foresee-
cape from IDLH atmospheres shall be able emergency situations.
NIOSH-certified for escape from the at- (A) Assigned Protection Factors (APFs).
mosphere in which they will be used. Employers must use the assigned pro-
(iii) All oxygen-deficient
tection factors listed in Table 1 to se-
atmospheres shall be considered IDLH.
Exception: If the employer dem- lect a respirator that meets or exceeds
onstrates that, under all foreseeable the required level of employee protec-
conditions, the oxygen concentration tion. When using a combination res-
can be maintained within the ranges pirator (e.g., airline respirators with an
specified in Table II of this section air-purifying filter), employers must
(i.e., for the altitudes set out in the ensure that the assigned protection
table), then any atmosphere-supplying factor is appropriate to the mode of op-
respirator may be used. eration in which the respirator is being
(3) Respirators for atmospheres that are used.
not IDLH. (i) The employer shall pro-
TABLE 1—ASSIGNED PROTECTION FACTORS 5
Quarter Full face- Helmet/ Loose-fitting
Type of respirator 1,2 Half mask
mask piece hood facepiece
1. Air-Purifying Respirator ............................................. 5 3 10 50 .................... ....................

2. Powered Air-Purifying Respirator (PAPR) ................ .................... 50 1,000 4 25/1,000 25
3. Supplied-Air Respirator (SAR) or Airline Respirator.
• Demand mode ............................................. .................... 10 50 .................... ....................
• Continuous flow mode ................................ .................... 50 1,000 4 25/1,000 25
• Pressure-demand or other positive-pres-
sure mode ................................................... .................... 50 1,000 .................... ....................
4. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA).
• Demand mode ............................................. .................... 10 50 50 ....................
• Pressure-demand or other positive-pres-
sure mode (e.g., open/closed circuit) ......... .................... .................... 10,000 10,000 ....................
Notes:
1 Employers may select respirators assigned for use in higher workplace concentrations of a hazardous substance for use at
lower concentrations of that substance, or when required respirator use is independent of concentration.
2 The assigned protection factors in Table 1 are only effective when the employer implements a continuing, effective respirator
program as required by this section (29 CFR 1910.134), including training, fit testing, maintenance, and use requirements.
3 This APF category includes filtering facepieces, and half masks with elastomeric facepieces.
4 The employer must have evidence provided by the respirator manufacturer that testing of these respirators demonstrates per-
formance at a level of protection of 1,000 or greater to receive an APF of 1,000. This level of performance can best be dem-
onstrated by performing a WPF or SWPF study or equivalent testing. Absent such testing, all other PAPRs and SARs with hel-
mets/hoods are to be treated as loose-fitting facepiece respirators, and receive an APF of 25.
5 These APFs do not apply to respirators used solely for escape. For escape respirators used in association with specific sub-
stances covered by 29 CFR 1910 subpart Z, employers must refer to the appropriate substance-specific standards in that sub-
part. Escape respirators for other IDLH atmospheres are specified by 29 CFR 1910.134 (d)(2)(ii).
(B) Maximum Use Concentration stance, or the performance limits of

(MUC). (1) The employer must select a the cartridge or canister, then employ-
respirator for employee use that main- ers must set the maximum MUC at
tains the employee’s exposure to the that lower limit.
hazardous substance, when measured (ii) The respirator selected shall be
outside the respirator, at or below the appropriate for the chemical state and
MUC. physical form of the contaminant.
(2) Employers must not apply MUCs (iii) For protection against gases and
to conditions that are immediately
vapors, the employer shall provide:
dangerous to life or health (IDLH); in-
(A) An atmosphere-supplying res-
stead, they must use respirators listed
for IDLH conditions in paragraph (d)(2) pirator, or
of this standard. (B) An air-purifying respirator, pro-
(3) When the calculated MUC exceeds vided that:
the IDLH level for a hazardous sub-
430
(1) The respirator is equipped with an quirements for medical evaluation that
end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) cer- employers must implement to deter-
tified by NIOSH for the contaminant; mine the employee’s ability to use a
or respirator.
(2) If there is no ESLI appropriate for (1) General. The employer shall pro-
conditions in the employer’s work- vide a medical evaluation to determine
place, the employer implements a the employee’s ability to use a res-
change schedule for canisters and car- pirator, before the employee is fit test-
tridges that is based on objective infor- ed or required to use the respirator in
mation or data that will ensure that the workplace. The employer may dis-
canisters and cartridges are changed continue an employee’s medical eval-
before the end of their service life. The uations when the employee is no longer
employer shall describe in the res- required to use a respirator.
pirator program the information and
(2) Medical evaluation procedures. (i)
data relied upon and the basis for the
The employer shall identify a physi-
canister and cartridge change schedule
cian or other licensed health care pro-
and the basis for reliance on the data.
fessional (PLHCP) to perform medical
(iv) For protection against particu-
lates, the employer shall provide: evaluations using a medical question-
(A) An atmosphere-supplying res- naire or an initial medical examination
pirator; or that obtains the same information as
(B) An air-purifying respirator the medical questionnaire.
equipped with a filter certified by (ii) The medical evaluation shall ob-
NIOSH under 30 CFR part 11 as a high tain the information requested by the
efficiency particulate air (HEPA) fil- questionnaire in Sections 1 and 2, part
ter, or an air-purifying respirator A of appendix C of this section.
equipped with a filter certified for par- (3) Follow-up medical examination. (i)
ticulates by NIOSH under 42 CFR part The employer shall ensure that a fol-
84; or low-up medical examination is pro-
(C) For contaminants consisting pri- vided for an employee who gives a posi-
marily of particles with mass median tive response to any question among
aerodynamic diameters (MMAD) of at questions 1 through 8 in Section 2, part
least 2 micrometers, an air-purifying A of appendix C or whose initial med-
respirator equipped with any filter cer- ical examination demonstrates the
tified for particulates by NIOSH. need for a follow-up medical examina-
tion.
TABLE I—ASSIGNED PROTECTION (ii) The follow-up medical examina-
FACTORS [RESERVED] tion shall include any medical tests,
consultations, or diagnostic procedures
TABLE II
that the PLHCP deems necessary to
Oxygen deficient make a final determination.
Atmospheres (% 02) for
Altitude (ft.) which the employer may rely (4) Administration of the medical ques-
on atmosphere-supplying res- tionnaire and examinations. (i) The med-
pirators
ical questionnaire and examinations
Less than 3,001 ..................... 16.0–19.5 shall be administered confidentially
3,001–4,000 ........................... 16.4–19.5 during the employee’s normal working
4,001–5,000 ........................... 17.1–19.5
5,001–6,000 ........................... 17.8–19.5 hours or at a time and place conven-
6,001–7,000 ........................... 18.5–19.5 ient to the employee. The medical
7,001–8,000 1 ......................... 19.3–19.5. questionnaire shall be administered in
1 Above 8,000 feet the exception does not apply. Oxygen- a manner that ensures that the em-
enriched breathing air must be supplied above 14,000 feet. ployee understands its content.
(e) Medical evaluation. Using a res- (ii) The employer shall provide the
pirator may place a physiological bur- employee with an opportunity to dis-
den on employees that varies with the cuss the questionnaire and examina-
type of respirator worn, the job and tion results with the PLHCP.
workplace conditions in which the res- (5) Supplemental information for the
pirator is used, and the medical status PLHCP. (i) The following information
of the employee. Accordingly, this must be provided to the PLHCP before
paragraph specifies the minimum re- the PLHCP makes a recommendation
431
concerning an employee’s ability to use the PLHCP’s medical evaluation finds
a respirator: that the employee can use such a res-
(A) The type and weight of the respirator; if a subsequent medical eval-
pirator to be used by the employee; uation finds that the employee is medi-
(B) The duration and frequency of cally able to use a negative pressure
respirator use (including use for rescue respirator, then the employer is no
and escape); longer required to provide a PAPR.
(C) The expected physical work ef- (7) Additional medical evaluations. At a
fort; minimum, the employer shall provide
(D) Additional protective clothing additional medical evaluations that
and equipment to be worn; and comply with the requirements of this
(E) Temperature and humidity ex- section if:
tremes that may be encountered. (i) An employee reports medical signs
(ii) Any supplemental information or symptoms that are related to ability
provided previously to the PLHCP re- to use a respirator;
garding an employee need not be pro- (ii) A PLHCP, supervisor, or the res-
vided for a subsequent medical evalua- pirator program administrator informs
tion if the information and the PLHCP the employer that an employee needs
remain the same. to be reevaluated;
(iii) The employer shall provide the (iii) Information from the respiratory
PLHCP with a copy of the written res- protection program, including observa-
piratory protection program and a tions made during fit testing and pro-
copy of this section. gram evaluation, indicates a need for
employee reevaluation; or
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e)(5)(iii): When the
employer replaces a PLHCP, the employer
(iv) A change occurs in workplace
must ensure that the new PLHCP obtains conditions (e.g., physical work effort,
this information, either by providing the protective clothing, temperature) that
documents directly to the PLHCP or having may result in a substantial increase in
the documents transferred from the former the physiological burden placed on an
PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However, OSHA employee.
does not expect employers to have employees (f) Fit testing. This paragraph requires
medically reevaluated solely because a new that, before an employee may be re-
PLHCP has been selected.
quired to use any respirator with a
(6) Medical determination. In deter- negative or positive pressure tight-fit-
mining the employee’s ability to use a ting facepiece, the employee must be
respirator, the employer shall: fit tested with the same make, model,
(i) Obtain a written recommendation style, and size of respirator that will be
regarding the employee’s ability to use used. This paragraph specifies the
the respirator from the PLHCP. The kinds of fit tests allowed, the proce-
recommendation shall provide only the dures for conducting them, and how
following information: the results of the fit tests must be
(A) Any limitations on respirator use used.
related to the medical condition of the (1) The employer shall ensure that
employee, or relating to the workplace employees using a tight-fitting face-
conditions in which the respirator will piece respirator pass an appropriate
be used, including whether or not the qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quan-
employee is medically able to use the titative fit test (QNFT) as stated in
respirator; this paragraph.
(B) The need, if any, for follow-up (2) The employer shall ensure that an
medical evaluations; and employee using a tight-fitting face-
(C) A statement that the PLHCP has piece respirator is fit tested prior to
provided the employee with a copy of initial use of the respirator, whenever
the PLHCP’s written recommendation. a different respirator facepiece (size,
(ii) If the respirator is a negative style, model or make) is used, and at
pressure respirator and the PLHCP least annually thereafter.
finds a medical condition that may (3) The employer shall conduct an ad-
place the employee’s health at in- ditional fit test whenever the employee
creased risk if the respirator is used, reports, or the employer, PLHCP, su-
the employer shall provide a PAPR if pervisor, or program administrator
432
makes visual observations of, changes stalling a permanent sampling probe
in the employee’s physical condition onto a surrogate facepiece, or by using
that could affect respirator fit. Such a sampling adapter designed to tempo-
conditions include, but are not limited rarily provide a means of sampling air
to, facial scarring, dental changes, cos- from inside the facepiece.
metic surgery, or an obvious change in (iii) Any modifications to the res-
body weight. pirator facepiece for fit testing shall be
(4) If after passing a QLFT or QNFT, completely removed, and the facepiece
the employee subsequently notifies the restored to NIOSH-approved configura-
employer, program administrator, su- tion, before that facepiece can be used
pervisor, or PLHCP that the fit of the in the workplace.
respirator is unacceptable, the em- (g) Use of respirators. This paragraph
ployee shall be given a reasonable op- requires employers to establish and im-
portunity to select a different res- plement procedures for the proper use
pirator facepiece and to be retested. of respirators. These requirements in-
(5) The fit test shall be administered clude prohibiting conditions that may
using an OSHA-accepted QLFT or result in facepiece seal leakage, pre-
QNFT protocol. The OSHA-accepted venting employees from removing res-
QLFT and QNFT protocols and proce- pirators in hazardous environments,
dures are contained in appendix A of taking actions to ensure continued ef-
this section. fective respirator operation throughout
(6) QLFT may only be used to fit test the work shift, and establishing proce-
negative pressure air-purifying res- dures for the use of respirators in IDLH
pirators that must achieve a fit factor atmospheres or in interior structural
of 100 or less. firefighting situations.
(7) If the fit factor, as determined
(1) Facepiece seal protection. (i) The
through an OSHA-accepted QNFT pro-
employer shall not permit respirators
tocol, is equal to or greater than 100 for
with tight-fitting facepieces to be worn
tight-fitting half facepieces, or equal
by employees who have:
to or greater than 500 for tight-fitting
full facepieces, the QNFT has been (A) Facial hair that comes between
passed with that respirator. the sealing surface of the facepiece and
(8) Fit testing of tight-fitting atmos- the face or that interferes with valve
phere-supplying respirators and tight- function; or
fitting powered air-purifying res- (B) Any condition that interferes
pirators shall be accomplished by per- with the face-to-facepiece seal or valve
forming quantitative or qualitative fit function.
testing in the negative pressure mode, (ii) If an employee wears corrective
regardless of the mode of operation glasses or goggles or other personal
(negative or positive pressure) that is protective equipment, the employer
used for respiratory protection. shall ensure that such equipment is
(i) Qualitative fit testing of these res- worn in a manner that does not inter-
pirators shall be accomplished by tem- fere with the seal of the facepiece to
porarily converting the respirator the face of the user.
user’s actual facepiece into a negative (iii) For all tight-fitting respirators,
pressure respirator with appropriate the employer shall ensure that employ-
filters, or by using an identical nega- ees perform a user seal check each
tive pressure air-purifying respirator time they put on the respirator using
facepiece with the same sealing sur- the procedures in appendix B–1 or pro-
faces as a surrogate for the atmos- cedures recommended by the respirator
phere-supplying or powered air-puri- manufacturer that the employer dem-
fying respirator facepiece. onstrates are as effective as those in
(ii) Quantitative fit testing of these appendix B–1 of this section.
respirators shall be accomplished by (2) Continuing respirator effectiveness.
modifying the facepiece to allow sam- (i) Appropriate surveillance shall be
pling inside the facepiece in the maintained of work area conditions
breathing zone of the user, midway be- and degree of employee exposure or
tween the nose and mouth. This re- stress. When there is a change in work
quirement shall be accomplished by in- area conditions or degree of employee
433
exposure or stress that may affect res- and would not increase the overall risk
pirator effectiveness, the employer resulting from entry; or
shall reevaluate the continued effec- (C) Equivalent means for rescue
tiveness of the respirator. where retrieval equipment is not re-
(ii) The employer shall ensure that quired under paragraph (g)(3)(vi)(B).
employees leave the respirator use (4) Procedures for interior structural
area: firefighting. In addition to the require-
(A) To wash their faces and res- ments set forth under paragraph (g)(3),
pirator facepieces as necessary to pre- in interior structural fires, the em-
vent eye or skin irritation associated ployer shall ensure that:
with respirator use; or (i) At least two employees enter the
(B) If they detect vapor or gas break- IDLH atmosphere and remain in visual
through, changes in breathing resist- or voice contact with one another at
ance, or leakage of the facepiece; or all times;
(ii) At least two employees are lo-
(C) To replace the respirator or the
cated outside the IDLH atmosphere;
filter, cartridge, or canister elements.
and
(iii) If the employee detects vapor or (iii) All employees engaged in inte-
gas breakthrough, changes in breath- rior structural firefighting use SCBAs.
ing resistance, or leakage of the face-
piece, the employer must replace or re- NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (g): One of the two
pair the respirator before allowing the individuals located outside the IDLH atmos-
phere may be assigned to an additional role,
employee to return to the work area. such as incident commander in charge of the
(3) Procedures for IDLH atmospheres. emergency or safety officer, so long as this
For all IDLH atmospheres, the em- individual is able to perform assistance or
ployer shall ensure that: rescue activities without jeopardizing the
(i) One employee or, when needed, safety or health of any firefighter working at
more than one employee is located out- the incident.
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (g): Nothing in this
side the IDLH atmosphere; section is meant to preclude firefighters
(ii) Visual, voice, or signal line com- from performing emergency rescue activities
munication is maintained between the before an entire team has assembled.
employee(s) in the IDLH atmosphere
(h) Maintenance and care of res-
and the employee(s) located outside
pirators. This paragraph requires the
the IDLH atmosphere;
employer to provide for the cleaning
(iii) The employee(s) located outside and disinfecting, storage, inspection,
the IDLH atmosphere are trained and and repair of respirators used by em-
equipped to provide effective emer- ployees.
gency rescue; (1) Cleaning and disinfecting. The em-
(iv) The employer or designee is noti- ployer shall provide each respirator
fied before the employee(s) located out- user with a respirator that is clean,
side the IDLH atmosphere enter the sanitary, and in good working order.
IDLH atmosphere to provide emer- The employer shall ensure that res-
gency rescue; pirators are cleaned and disinfected
(v) The employer or designee author- using the procedures in appendix B–2 of
ized to do so by the employer, once no- this section, or procedures rec-
tified, provides necessary assistance ommended by the respirator manufac-
appropriate to the situation; turer, provided that such procedures
(vi) Employee(s) located outside the are of equivalent effectiveness. The
IDLH atmospheres are equipped with: respirators shall be cleaned and dis-
(A) Pressure demand or other posi- infected at the following intervals:
tive pressure SCBAs, or a pressure de- (i) Respirators issued for the exclu-
mand or other positive pressure sup- sive use of an employee shall be
plied-air respirator with auxiliary cleaned and disinfected as often as nec-
SCBA; and either essary to be maintained in a sanitary
(B) Appropriate retrieval equipment condition;
for removing the employee(s) who (ii) Respirators issued to more than
enter(s) these hazardous atmospheres one employee shall be cleaned and dis-
where retrieval equipment would con- infected before being worn by different
tribute to the rescue of the employee(s) individuals;
434
(iii) Respirators maintained for falls to 90% of the manufacturer’s rec-
emergency use shall be cleaned and dis- ommended pressure level. The em-
infected after each use; and ployer shall determine that the regu-
(iv) Respirators used in fit testing lator and warning devices function
and training shall be cleaned and dis- properly.
infected after each use. (iv) For respirators maintained for
(2) Storage. The employer shall ensure emergency use, the employer shall:
that respirators are stored as follows: (A) Certify the respirator by docu-
(i) All respirators shall be stored to menting the date the inspection was
protect them from damage, contamina- performed, the name (or signature) of
tion, dust, sunlight, extreme tempera- the person who made the inspection,
tures, excessive moisture, and dam- the findings, required remedial action,
aging chemicals, and they shall be and a serial number or other means of
packed or stored to prevent deforma- identifying the inspected respirator;
tion of the facepiece and exhalation and
valve. (B) Provide this information on a tag
(ii) In addition to the requirements of or label that is attached to the storage
paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this section, compartment for the respirator, is kept
emergency respirators shall be: with the respirator, or is included in
(A) Kept accessible to the work area;
inspection reports stored as paper or
(B) Stored in compartments or in
electronic files. This information shall
covers that are clearly marked as con-
be maintained until replaced following
taining emergency respirators; and
a subsequent certification.
(C) Stored in accordance with any ap-
plicable manufacturer instructions. (4) Repairs. The employer shall ensure
(3) Inspection. (i) The employer shall that respirators that fail an inspection
ensure that respirators are inspected as or are otherwise found to be defective
follows: are removed from service, and are dis-
(A) All respirators used in routine carded or repaired or adjusted in ac-
situations shall be inspected before cordance with the following proce-
each use and during cleaning; dures:
(B) All respirators maintained for use (i) Repairs or adjustments to res-
in emergency situations shall be in- pirators are to be made only by persons
spected at least monthly and in accord- appropriately trained to perform such
ance with the manufacturer’s rec- operations and shall use only the res-
ommendations, and shall be checked pirator manufacturer’s NIOSH-ap-
for proper function before and after proved parts designed for the res-
each use; and pirator;
(C) Emergency escape-only res- (ii) Repairs shall be made according
pirators shall be inspected before being to the manufacturer’s recommenda-
carried into the workplace for use. tions and specifications for the type
(ii) The employer shall ensure that and extent of repairs to be performed;
respirator inspections include the fol- and
lowing: (iii) Reducing and admission valves,
(A) A check of respirator function, regulators, and alarms shall be ad-
tightness of connections, and the con- justed or repaired only by the manufac-
dition of the various parts including, turer or a technician trained by the
but not limited to, the facepiece, head manufacturer.
straps, valves, connecting tube, and (i) Breathing air quality and use. This
cartridges, canisters or filters; and paragraph requires the employer to
(B) A check of elastomeric parts for provide employees using atmosphere-
pliability and signs of deterioration. supplying respirators (supplied-air and
(iii) In addition to the requirements SCBA) with breathing gases of high pu-
of paragraphs (h)(3)(i) and (ii) of this rity.
section, self-contained breathing appa- (1) The employer shall ensure that
ratus shall be inspected monthly. Air compressed air, compressed oxygen,
and oxygen cylinders shall be main- liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for
tained in a fully charged state and respiration accords with the following
shall be recharged when the pressure specifications:
435
(i) Compressed and liquid oxygen ther ensure breathing air quality. Sor-
shall meet the United States Pharma- bent beds and filters shall be main-
copoeia requirements for medical or tained and replaced or refurbished peri-
breathing oxygen; and odically following the manufacturer’s
(ii) Compressed breathing air shall instructions.
meet at least the requirements for (iv) Have a tag containing the most
Grade D breathing air described in recent change date and the signature of
ANSI/Compressed Gas Association the person authorized by the employer
Commodity Specification for Air, G– to perform the change. The tag shall be
7.1–1989, to include: maintained at the compressor.
(A) Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5– (6) For compressors that are not oil-
23.5%; lubricated, the employer shall ensure
(B) Hydrocarbon (condensed) content that carbon monoxide levels in the
of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air breathing air do not exceed 10 ppm.
or less; (7) For oil-lubricated compressors,
(C) Carbon monoxide (CO) content of the employer shall use a high-tempera-
10 ppm or less; ture or carbon monoxide alarm, or
(D) Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 both, to monitor carbon monoxide lev-
ppm or less; and els. If only high-temperature alarms
(E) Lack of noticeable odor.
are used, the air supply shall be mon-
(2) The employer shall ensure that
itored at intervals sufficient to prevent
compressed oxygen is not used in at-
carbon monoxide in the breathing air
mosphere-supplying respirators that
from exceeding 10 ppm.
have previously used compressed air.
(3) The employer shall ensure that (8) The employer shall ensure that
oxygen concentrations greater than breathing air couplings are incompat-
23.5% are used only in equipment de- ible with outlets for nonrespirable
signed for oxygen service or distribu- worksite air or other gas systems. No
tion. asphyxiating substance shall be intro-
(4) The employer shall ensure that duced into breathing air lines.
cylinders used to supply breathing air (9) The employer shall use only the
to respirators meet the following re- respirator manufacturer’s NIOSH-ap-
quirements: proved breathing-gas containers,
(i) Cylinders are tested and main- marked and maintained in accordance
tained as prescribed in the Shipping with the Quality Assurance provisions
Container Specification Regulations of of the NIOSH approval for the SCBA as
the Department of Transportation (49 issued in accordance with the NIOSH
CFR part 180); respirator-certification standard at 42
(ii) Cylinders of purchased breathing CFR part 84.
air have a certificate of analysis from (j) Identification of filters, cartridges,
the supplier that the breathing air and canisters. The employer shall en-
meets the requirements for Grade D sure that all filters, cartridges and can-
breathing air; and isters used in the workplace are labeled
(iii) The moisture content in the cyl- and color coded with the NIOSH ap-
inder does not exceed a dew point of proval label and that the label is not
¥50 °F (¥45.6 °C) at 1 atmosphere pres- removed and remains legible.
sure. (k) Training and information. This
(5) The employer shall ensure that paragraph requires the employer to
compressors used to supply breathing provide effective training to employees
air to respirators are constructed and who are required to use respirators.
situated so as to: The training must be comprehensive,
(i) Prevent entry of contaminated air understandable, and recur annually,
into the air-supply system; and more often if necessary. This para-
(ii) Minimize moisture content so graph also requires the employer to
that the dew point at 1 atmosphere provide the basic information on res-
pressure is 10 degrees F (5.56 °C) below pirators in appendix D of this section
the ambient temperature; to employees who wear respirators
(iii) Have suitable in-line air-puri- when not required by this section or by
fying sorbent beds and filters to fur- the employer to do so.
436
(1) The employer shall ensure that (6) The basic advisory information on
each employee can demonstrate knowl- respirators, as presented in appendix D
edge of at least the following: of this section, shall be provided by the
(i) Why the respirator is necessary employer in any written or oral for-
and how improper fit, usage, or mainte- mat, to employees who wear res-
nance can compromise the protective pirators when such use is not required
effect of the respirator; by this section or by the employer.
(ii) What the limitations and capa- (l) Program evaluation. This section
bilities of the respirator are; requires the employer to conduct eval-
(iii) How to use the respirator effec- uations of the workplace to ensure that
tively in emergency situations, includ- the written respiratory protection pro-
ing situations in which the respirator gram is being properly implemented,
malfunctions; and to consult employees to ensure
(iv) How to inspect, put on and re- that they are using the respirators
move, use, and check the seals of the properly.
respirator; (1) The employer shall conduct eval-
(v) What the procedures are for main- uations of the workplace as necessary
tenance and storage of the respirator; to ensure that the provisions of the
(vi) How to recognize medical signs current written program are being ef-
and symptoms that may limit or pre- fectively implemented and that it con-
vent the effective use of respirators; tinues to be effective.
and (2) The employer shall regularly con-
(vii) The general requirements of this sult employees required to use res-
section. pirators to assess the employees’ views
(2) The training shall be conducted in on program effectiveness and to iden-
a manner that is understandable to the tify any problems. Any problems that
employee. are identified during this assessment
(3) The employer shall provide the shall be corrected. Factors to be as-
training prior to requiring the em- sessed include, but are not limited to:
ployee to use a respirator in the work- (i) Respirator fit (including the abil-
place. ity to use the respirator without inter-
(4) An employer who is able to dem- fering with effective workplace per-
onstrate that a new employee has re- formance);
ceived training within the last 12 (ii) Appropriate respirator selection
months that addresses the elements for the hazards to which the employee
specified in paragraph (k)(1)(i) through is exposed;
(vii) is not required to repeat such (iii) Proper respirator use under the
training provided that, as required by workplace conditions the employee en-
paragraph (k)(1), the employee can counters; and
demonstrate knowledge of those ele- (iv) Proper respirator maintenance.
ment(s). Previous training not repeated (m) Recordkeeping. This section re-
initially by the employer must be pro- quires the employer to establish and
vided no later than 12 months from the retain written information regarding
date of the previous training. medical evaluations, fit testing, and
(5) Retraining shall be administered the respirator program. This informa-
annually, and when the following situ- tion will facilitate employee involve-
ations occur: ment in the respirator program, assist
(i) Changes in the workplace or the the employer in auditing the adequacy
type of respirator render previous of the program, and provide a record
training obsolete; for compliance determinations by
(ii) Inadequacies in the employee’s OSHA.
knowledge or use of the respirator indi- (1) Medical evaluation. Records of
cate that the employee has not re- medical evaluations required by this
tained the requisite understanding or section must be retained and made
skill; or available in accordance with 29 CFR
(iii) Any other situation arises in 1910.1020.
which retraining appears necessary to (2) Fit testing. (i) The employer shall
ensure safe respirator use. establish a record of the qualitative
437
and quantitative fit tests administered that provides the most acceptable fit. Each
to an employee including: respirator represents a different size and
(A) The name or identification of the shape, and if fitted and used properly, will
provide adequate protection.
employee tested; 4. The test subject shall be instructed to
(B) Type of fit test performed; hold each chosen facepiece up to the face and
(C) Specific make, model, style, and eliminate those that obviously do not give
size of respirator tested; an acceptable fit.
(D) Date of test; and 5. The more acceptable facepieces are
(E) The pass/fail results for QLFTs or noted in case the one selected proves unac-
the fit factor and strip chart recording ceptable; the most comfortable mask is
or other recording of the test results donned and worn at least five minutes to as-
sess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort
for QNFTs. can be given by discussing the points in the
(ii) Fit test records shall be retained following item A.6. If the test subject is not
for respirator users until the next fit familiar with using a particular respirator,
test is administered. the test subject shall be directed to don the
(3) A written copy of the current res- mask several times and to adjust the straps
pirator program shall be retained by each time to become adept at setting proper
the employer. tension on the straps.
6. Assessment of comfort shall include a re-
(4) Written materials required to be
view of the following points with the test
retained under this paragraph shall be subject and allowing the test subject ade-
made available upon request to af- quate time to determine the comfort of the
fected employees and to the Assistant respirator:
Secretary or designee for examination (a) Position of the mask on the nose
and copying. (b) Room for eye protection
(n) Effective date. Paragraphs (c) Room to talk
(d)(3)(i)(A) and (d)(3)(i)(B) of this sec- (d) Position of mask on face and cheeks
7. The following criteria shall be used to
tion become effective November 22, help determine the adequacy of the res-
2006. pirator fit:
(o) Appendices. Compliance with Ap- (a) Chin properly placed;
pendix A, Appendix B–1, Appendix B–2, (b) Adequate strap tension, not overly
Appendix C, and Appendix D to this tightened;
section are mandatory. (c) Fit across nose bridge;
(d) Respirator of proper size to span dis-
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.134—FIT TESTING tance from nose to chin;
PROCEDURES (MANDATORY) (e) Tendency of respirator to slip;
(f) Self-observation in mirror to evaluate
PART I. OSHA-ACCEPTED FIT TEST fit and respirator position.
PROTOCOLS 8. The test subject shall conduct a user
seal check, either the negative and positive
A. Fit Testing Procedures—General
pressure seal checks described in appendix
Requirements
B–1 of this section or those recommended by
The employer shall conduct fit testing the respirator manufacturer which provide
using the following procedures. The require- equivalent protection to the procedures in
ments in this appendix apply to all OSHA-ac- appendix B–1. Before conducting the negative
cepted fit test methods, both QLFT and and positive pressure checks, the subject
QNFT. shall be told to seat the mask on the face by
1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick moving the head from side-to-side and up
the most acceptable respirator from a suffi- and down slowly while taking in a few slow
cient number of respirator models and sizes deep breaths. Another facepiece shall be se-
so that the respirator is acceptable to, and lected and retested if the test subject fails
correctly fits, the user. the user seal check tests.
2. Prior to the selection process, the test 9. The test shall not be conducted if there
subject shall be shown how to put on a resis any hair growth between the skin and the
pirator, how it should be positioned on the facepiece sealing surface, such as stubble
face, how to set strap tension and how to de- beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns
termine an acceptable fit. A mirror shall be which cross the respirator sealing surface.
available to assist the subject in evaluating Any type of apparel which interferes with a
the fit and positioning of the respirator. This satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed.
instruction may not constitute the subject’s 10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in
formal training on respirator use, because it breathing during the tests, she or he shall be
is only a review. referred to a physician or other licensed
3. The test subject shall be informed that health care professional, as appropriate, to
he/she is being asked to select the respirator determine whether the test subject can wear
438
a respirator while performing her or his du- into many beautiful colors. These take the
ties. shape of a long round arch, with its path
11. If the employee finds the fit of the res- high above, and its two ends apparently be-
pirator unacceptable, the test subject shall yond the horizon. There is, according to leg-
be given the opportunity to select a different end, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People
respirator and to be retested. look, but no one ever finds it. When a man
12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the com- looks for something beyond reach, his
mencement of the fit test, the test subject friends say he is looking for the pot of gold
shall be given a description of the fit test at the end of the rainbow.
and the test subject’s responsibilities during (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace
the test procedure. The description of the by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to
process shall include a description of the test QNFT testing; it is not performed for QLFT)
exercises that the subject will be performing. (7) Bending over. The test subject shall
The respirator to be tested shall be worn for bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch
at least 5 minutes before the start of the fit his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be sub-
test. stituted for this exercise in those test envi-
13. The fit test shall be performed while ronments such as shroud type QNFT or
the test subject is wearing any applicable QLFT units that do not permit bending over
safety equipment that may be worn during at the waist.
actual respirator use which could interfere (8) Normal breathing. Same as exercise (1).
with respirator fit. (b) Each test exercise shall be performed
14. Test Exercises. (a) Employers must per- for one minute except for the grimace exer-
form the following test exercises for all fit cise which shall be performed for 15 seconds.
testing methods prescribed in this appendix, The test subject shall be questioned by the
except for the CNP quantitative fit testing test conductor regarding the comfort of the
protocol and the CNP REDON quantitative respirator upon completion of the protocol.
fit testing protocol. For these two protocols, If it has become unacceptable, another
employers must ensure that the test subjects
model of respirator shall be tried. The res-
(i.e., employees) perform the exercise proce-
pirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test
dure specified in part I.C.4(b) of this appen-
exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the
dix for the CNP quantitative fit testing pro-
test, and the fit test must be repeated.
tocol, or the exercise procedure described in
part I.C.5(b) of this appendix for the CNP B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols
REDON quantitative fit-testing protocol.
For the remaining fit testing methods, em- 1. General
ployers must ensure that employees perform
the test exercises in the appropriate test en- (a) The employer shall ensure that persons
vironment in the following manner: administering QLFT are able to prepare test
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing solutions, calibrate equipment and perform
position, without talking, the subject shall tests properly, recognize invalid tests, and
breathe normally. ensure that test equipment is in proper
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing working order.
position, the subject shall breathe slowly (b) The employer shall ensure that QLFT
and deeply, taking caution so as not to equipment is kept clean and well maintained
hyperventilate. so as to operate within the parameters for
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in which it was designed.
place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her
2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol
head from side to side between the extreme
positions on each side. The head shall be held NOTE: This protocol is not appropriate to
at each extreme momentarily so the subject use for the fit testing of particulate res-
can inhale at each side. pirators. If used to fit test particulate res-
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in pirators, the respirator must be equipped
place, the subject shall slowly move his/her with an organic vapor filter.
head up and down. The subject shall be in- (a) Odor Threshold Screening
structed to inhale in the up position (i.e., Odor threshold screening, performed with-
when looking toward the ceiling). out wearing a respirator, is intended to de-
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud termine if the individual tested can detect
slowly and loud enough so as to be heard the odor of isoamyl acetate at low levels.
clearly by the test conductor. The subject (1) Three 1 liter glass jars with metal lids
can read from a prepared text such as the are required.
Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, (2) Odor-free water (e.g., distilled or spring
or recite a memorized poem or song. water) at approximately 25 °C (77 °F) shall be
used for the solutions.
Rainbow Passage
(3) The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the at isopentyl acetate) stock solution is pre-
air, they act like a prism and form a rain- pared by adding 1 ml of pure IAA to 800 ml
bow. The rainbow is a division of white light of odor-free water in a 1 liter jar, closing the
439
lid and shaking for 30 seconds. A new solu- shall be separate from the room used for
tion shall be prepared at least weekly. odor threshold screening and respirator se-
(4) The screening test shall be conducted in lection, and shall be well-ventilated, as by an
a room separate from the room used for ac- exhaust fan or lab hood, to prevent general
tual fit testing. The two rooms shall be well- room contamination.
ventilated to prevent the odor of IAA from (4) A copy of the test exercises and any
becoming evident in the general room air prepared text from which the subject is to
where testing takes place. read shall be taped to the inside of the test
(5) The odor test solution is prepared in a chamber.
second jar by placing 0.4 ml of the stock so- (5) Upon entering the test chamber, the
lution into 500 ml of odor-free water using a test subject shall be given a 6-inch by 5-inch
clean dropper or pipette. The solution shall piece of paper towel, or other porous, absorb-
be shaken for 30 seconds and allowed to ent, single-ply material, folded in half and
stand for two to three minutes so that the wetted with 0.75 ml of pure IAA. The test
IAA concentration above the liquid may subject shall hang the wet towel on the hook
reach equilibrium. This solution shall be at the top of the chamber. An IAA test swab
used for only one day. or ampule may be substituted for the IAA
(6) A test blank shall be prepared in a third wetted paper towel provided it has been dem-
jar by adding 500 cc of odor-free water. onstrated that the alternative IAA source
(7) The odor test and test blank jar lids will generate an IAA test atmosphere with a
shall be labeled (e.g., 1 and 2) for jar identi- concentration equivalent to that generated
fication. Labels shall be placed on the lids so by the paper towel method.
that they can be peeled off periodically and (6) Allow two minutes for the IAA test con-
switched to maintain the integrity of the centration to stabilize before starting the fit
test. test exercises. This would be an appropriate
(8) The following instruction shall be typed time to talk with the test subject; to explain
on a card and placed on the table in front of the fit test, the importance of his/her co-
the two test jars (i.e., 1 and 2): ‘‘The purpose operation, and the purpose for the test exer-
of this test is to determine if you can smell cises; or to demonstrate some of the exer-
banana oil at a low concentration. The two cises.
bottles in front of you contain water. One of (7) If at any time during the test, the sub-
these bottles also contains a small amount ject detects the banana-like odor of IAA, the
of banana oil. Be sure the covers are on test is failed. The subject shall quickly exit
tight, then shake each bottle for two sec- from the test chamber and leave the test
onds. Unscrew the lid of each bottle, one at area to avoid olfactory fatigue.
a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle. (8) If the test is failed, the subject shall re-
Indicate to the test conductor which bottle turn to the selection room and remove the
contains banana oil.’’ respirator. The test subject shall repeat the
(9) The mixtures used in the IAA odor de- odor sensitivity test, select and put on an-
tection test shall be prepared in an area sep- other respirator, return to the test area and
arate from where the test is performed, in again begin the fit test procedure described
order to prevent olfactory fatigue in the sub- in (b) (1) through (7) above. The process con-
ject. tinues until a respirator that fits well has
(10) If the test subject is unable to cor- been found. Should the odor sensitivity test
rectly identify the jar containing the odor be failed, the subject shall wait at least 5
test solution, the IAA qualitative fit test minutes before retesting. Odor sensitivity
shall not be performed. will usually have returned by this time.
(11) If the test subject correctly identifies (9) If the subject passes the test, the effi-
the jar containing the odor test solution, the ciency of the test procedure shall be dem-
test subject may proceed to respirator selec- onstrated by having the subject break the
tion and fit testing. respirator face seal and take a breath before
(b) Isoamyl Acetate Fit Test exiting the chamber.
(1) The fit test chamber shall be a clear 55- (10) When the test subject leaves the cham-
gallon drum liner suspended inverted over a ber, the subject shall remove the saturated
2-foot diameter frame so that the top of the towel and return it to the person conducting
chamber is about 6 inches above the test sub- the test, so that there is no significant IAA
ject’s head. If no drum liner is available, a concentration buildup in the chamber during
similar chamber shall be constructed using subsequent tests. The used towels shall be
plastic sheeting. The inside top center of the kept in a self-sealing plastic bag to keep the
chamber shall have a small hook attached. test area from being contaminated.
(2) Each respirator used for the fitting and
3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol
fit testing shall be equipped with organic
vapor cartridges or offer protection against The entire screening and testing procedure
organic vapors. shall be explained to the test subject prior to
(3) After selecting, donning, and properly the conduct of the screening test.
adjusting a respirator, the test subject shall (a) Taste threshold screening. The sac-
wear it to the fit testing room. This room charin taste threshold screening, performed
440
without wearing a respirator, is intended to (10) The test conductor will take note of
determine whether the individual being test- the number of squeezes required to solicit a
ed can detect the taste of saccharin. taste response.
(1) During threshold screening as well as (11) If the saccharin is not tasted after 30
during fit testing, subjects shall wear an en- squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable
closure about the head and shoulders that is to taste saccharin and may not perform the
approximately 12 inches in diameter by 14 saccharin fit test.
inches tall with at least the front portion
clear and that allows free movements of the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH 3(a): If the test subject
head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure eats or drinks something sweet before the
substantially similar to the 3M hood assem- screening test, he/she may be unable to taste
bly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is the weak saccharin solution.
adequate. (12) If a taste response is elicited, the test
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 3⁄4-inch subject shall be asked to take note of the
(1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject’s taste for reference in the fit test.
nose and mouth area to accommodate the (13) Correct use of the nebulizer means
nebulizer nozzle. that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at
(3) The test subject shall don the test en- a time in the nebulizer body.
closure. Throughout the threshold screening (14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly
test, the test subject shall breathe through rinsed in water, shaken dry, and refilled at
his/her slightly open mouth with tongue ex- least each morning and afternoon or at least
tended. The subject is instructed to report every four hours.
when he/she detects a sweet taste.
(b) Saccharin solution aerosol fit test pro-
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation
cedure.
Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test
(1) The test subject may not eat, drink (ex-
conductor shall spray the threshold check
cept plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15
solution into the enclosure. The nozzle is di-
rected away from the nose and mouth of the minutes before the test.
person. This nebulizer shall be clearly (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure de-
marked to distinguish it from the fit test so- scribed in 3. (a) above.
lution nebulizer. (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure
(5) The threshold check solution is pre- while wearing the respirator selected in sec-
pared by dissolving 0.83 gram of sodium sac- tion I. A. of this appendix. The respirator
charin USP in 100 ml of warm water. It can shall be properly adjusted and equipped with
be prepared by putting 1 ml of the fit test so- a particulate filter(s).
lution (see (b)(5) below) in 100 ml of distilled (4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation
water. Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer to spray the fit test solution into the enclo-
bulb is firmly squeezed so that it collapses sure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked
completely, then released and allowed to to distinguish it from the screening test so-
fully expand. lution nebulizer.
(7) Ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and (5) The fit test solution is prepared by add-
then the test subject is asked whether the ing 83 grams of sodium saccharin to 100 ml of
saccharin can be tasted. If the test subject warm water.
reports tasting the sweet taste during the (6) As before, the test subject shall breathe
ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. through the slightly open mouth with tongue
The taste threshold is noted as ten regard- extended, and report if he/she tastes the
less of the number of squeezes actually com- sweet taste of saccharin.
pleted. (7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole
(8) If the first response is negative, ten in the front of the enclosure and an initial
more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the concentration of saccharin fit test solution
test subject is again asked whether the sac- is sprayed into the enclosure using the same
charin is tasted. If the test subject reports number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeez-
tasting the sweet taste during the second ten es) based on the number of squeezes required
squeezes, the screening test is completed. to elicit a taste response as noted during the
The taste threshold is noted as twenty re- screening test. A minimum of 10 squeezes is
gardless of the number of squeezes actually required.
completed. (8) After generating the aerosol, the test
(9) If the second response is negative, ten subject shall be instructed to perform the ex-
more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the ercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
test subject is again asked whether the sac- (9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentra-
charin is tasted. If the test subject reports tion shall be replenished using one half the
tasting the sweet taste during the third set original number of squeezes used initially
of ten squeezes, the screening test is com- (e.g., 5, 10 or 15).
pleted. The taste threshold is noted as thirty (10) The test subject shall indicate to the
regardless of the number of squeezes actually test conductor if at any time during the fit
completed. test the taste of saccharin is detected. If the
441
test subject does not report tasting the sac- lapses completely, and is then released and
charin, the test is passed. allowed to fully expand.
(11) If the taste of saccharin is detected, (7) An initial ten squeezes are repeated rap-
the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test idly and then the test subject is asked
is failed. A different respirator shall be tried whether the Bitrex can be tasted. If the test
and the entire test procedure is repeated subject reports tasting the bitter taste dur-
(taste threshold screening and fit testing). ing the ten squeezes, the screening test is
(12) Since the nebulizer has a tendency to completed. The taste threshold is noted as
clog during use, the test operator must make ten regardless of the number of squeezes ac-
periodic checks of the nebulizer to ensure tually completed.
that it is not clogged. If clogging is found at (8) If the first response is negative, ten
the end of the test session, the test is in- more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
valid. test subject is again asked whether the
Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports
4. BitrexTM (Denatonium Benzoate) Solution
tasting the bitter taste during the second
Aerosol Qualitative Fit Test Protocol
ten squeezes, the screening test is completed.
The BitrexTM (Denatonium benzoate) solu- The taste threshold is noted as twenty re-
tion aerosol QLFT protocol uses the pub- gardless of the number of squeezes actually
lished saccharin test protocol because that completed.
protocol is widely accepted. Bitrex is rou- (9) If the second response is negative, ten
tinely used as a taste aversion agent in more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
household liquids which children should not test subject is again asked whether the
be drinking and is endorsed by the American Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports
Medical Association, the National Safety tasting the bitter taste during the third set
Council, and the American Association of of ten squeezes, the screening test is com-
Poison Control Centers. The entire screening pleted. The taste threshold is noted as thirty
and testing procedure shall be explained to regardless of the number of squeezes actually
the test subject prior to the conduct of the completed.
screening test. (10) The test conductor will take note of
(a) Taste Threshold Screening. the number of squeezes required to solicit a
The Bitrex taste threshold screening, per- taste response.
formed without wearing a respirator, is in- (11) If the Bitrex is not tasted after 30
tended to determine whether the individual squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable
being tested can detect the taste of Bitrex. to taste Bitrex and may not perform the
(1) During threshold screening as well as Bitrex fit test.
during fit testing, subjects shall wear an en-
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test
closure about the head and shoulders that is
subject shall be asked to take note of the
approximately 12 inches (30.5 cm) in diame-
taste for reference in the fit test.
ter by 14 inches (35.6 cm) tall. The front por-
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means
tion of the enclosure shall be clear from the
that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at
respirator and allow free movement of the
a time in the nebulizer body.
head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure
substantially similar to the 3M hood assem- (14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly
bly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is rinsed in water, shaken to dry, and refilled
adequate. at least each morning and afternoon or at
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 3⁄4 inch least every four hours.
(1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject’s (b) Bitrex Solution Aerosol Fit Test Proce-
nose and mouth area to accommodate the dure.
nebulizer nozzle. (1) The test subject may not eat, drink (ex-
(3) The test subject shall don the test en- cept plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15
closure. Throughout the threshold screening minutes before the test.
test, the test subject shall breathe through (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure as
his or her slightly open mouth with tongue that described in 4. (a) above.
extended. The subject is instructed to report (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure
when he/she detects a bitter taste. while wearing the respirator selected accord-
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation ing to section I. A. of this appendix. The res-
Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test pirator shall be properly adjusted and
conductor shall spray the Threshold Check equipped with any type particulate filter(s).
Solution into the enclosure. This Nebulizer (4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation
shall be clearly marked to distinguish it Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used
from the fit test solution nebulizer. to spray the fit test solution into the enclo-
(5) The Threshold Check Solution is pre- sure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked
pared by adding 13.5 milligrams of Bitrex to to distinguish it from the screening test so-
100 ml of 5% salt (NaCl) solution in distilled lution nebulizer.
water. (5) The fit test solution is prepared by add-
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer ing 337.5 mg of Bitrex to 200 ml of a 5% salt
bulb is firmly squeezed so that the bulb col- (NaCl) solution in warm water.
442
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe (1) The test operator shall break both ends
through his or her slightly open mouth with of a ventilation smoke tube containing
tongue extended, and be instructed to report stannic chloride, and attach one end of the
if he/she tastes the bitter taste of Bitrex. smoke tube to a low flow air pump set to de-
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole liver 200 milliliters per minute, or an aspi-
in the front of the enclosure and an initial rator squeeze bulb. The test operator shall
concentration of the fit test solution is cover the other end of the smoke tube with
sprayed into the enclosure using the same a short piece of tubing to prevent potential
number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeez- injury from the jagged end of the smoke
es) based on the number of squeezes required tube.
to elicit a taste response as noted during the (2) The test operator shall advise the test
screening test. subject that the smoke can be irritating to
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages and in-
subject shall be instructed to perform the ex- struct the subject to keep his/her eyes closed
ercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix. while the test is performed.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentra- (3) The test subject shall be allowed to
tion shall be replenished using one half the smell a weak concentration of the irritant
number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10 smoke before the respirator is donned to be-
or 15). come familiar with its irritating properties
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the and to determine if he/she can detect the ir-
test conductor if at any time during the fit ritating properties of the smoke. The test
test the taste of Bitrex is detected. If the operator shall carefully direct a small
test subject does not report tasting the amount of the irritant smoke in the test sub-
Bitrex, the test is passed. ject’s direction to determine that he/she can
(11) If the taste of Bitrex is detected, the detect it.
fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is (c) Irritant Smoke Fit Test Procedure
failed. A different respirator shall be tried (1) The person being fit tested shall don the
and the entire test procedure is repeated respirator without assistance, and perform
(taste threshold screening and fit testing). the required user seal check(s).
(2) The test subject shall be instructed to
5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) keep his/her eyes closed.
Protocol (3) The test operator shall direct the
This qualitative fit test uses a person’s re- stream of irritant smoke from the smoke
sponse to the irritating chemicals released tube toward the faceseal area of the test sub-
in the ‘‘smoke’’ produced by a stannic chlo- ject, using the low flow pump or the squeeze
ride ventilation smoke tube to detect leak- bulb. The test operator shall begin at least 12
age into the respirator. inches from the facepiece and move the
(a) General Requirements and Precautions smoke stream around the whole perimeter of
(1) The respirator to be tested shall be the mask. The operator shall gradually make
equipped with high efficiency particulate air two more passes around the perimeter of the
(HEPA) or P100 series filter(s). mask, moving to within six inches of the res-
(2) Only stannic chloride smoke tubes shall pirator.
be used for this protocol. (4) If the person being tested has not had
(3) No form of test enclosure or hood for an involuntary response and/or detected the
the test subject shall be used. irritant smoke, proceed with the test exer-
(4) The smoke can be irritating to the eyes, cises.
lungs, and nasal passages. The test con- (5) The exercises identified in section I.A.
ductor shall take precautions to minimize 14. of this appendix shall be performed by the
the test subject’s exposure to irritant smoke. test subject while the respirator seal is being
Sensitivity varies, and certain individuals continually challenged by the smoke, di-
may respond to a greater degree to irritant rected around the perimeter of the respirator
smoke. Care shall be taken when performing at a distance of six inches.
the sensitivity screening checks that deter- (6) If the person being fit tested reports de-
mine whether the test subject can detect ir- tecting the irritant smoke at any time, the
ritant smoke to use only the minimum test is failed. The person being retested must
amount of smoke necessary to elicit a re- repeat the entire sensitivity check and fit
sponse from the test subject. test procedure.
(5) The fit test shall be performed in an (7) Each test subject passing the irritant
area with adequate ventilation to prevent smoke test without evidence of a response
exposure of the person conducting the fit (involuntary cough, irritation) shall be given
test or the build-up of irritant smoke in the a second sensitivity screening check, with
general atmosphere. the smoke from the same smoke tube used
(b) Sensitivity Screening Check during the fit test, once the respirator has
The person to be tested must demonstrate been removed, to determine whether he/she
his or her ability to detect a weak con- still reacts to the smoke. Failure to evoke a
centration of the irritant smoke. response shall void the fit test.
443
(8) If a response is produced during this respirator for each exercise may be used pro-
second sensitivity check, then the fit test is vided a record of the readings is made.
passed. (5) The combination of substitute air-puri-
fying elements, test agent and test agent
C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols concentration shall be such that the test
The following quantitative fit testing pro- subject is not exposed in excess of an estab-
cedures have been demonstrated to be ac- lished exposure limit for the test agent at
ceptable: Quantitative fit testing using a any time during the testing process, based
non-hazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, upon the length of the exposure and the ex-
polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl posure limit duration.
hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium chloride) (6) The sampling port on the test specimen
generated in a test chamber, and employing respirator shall be placed and constructed so
instrumentation to quantify the fit of the that no leakage occurs around the port (e.g.,
respirator; Quantitative fit testing using am- where the respirator is probed), a free air
bient aerosol as the test agent and appro- flow is allowed into the sampling line at all
priate instrumentation (condensation nuclei times, and there is no interference with the
counter) to quantify the respirator fit; Quan- fit or performance of the respirator. The in-
titative fit testing using controlled negative mask sampling device (probe) shall be de-
pressure and appropriate instrumentation to signed and used so that the air sample is
measure the volumetric leak rate of a face- drawn from the breathing zone of the test
piece to quantify the respirator fit. subject, midway between the nose and mouth
and with the probe extending into the face-
1. General piece cavity at least 1⁄4 inch.
(7) The test setup shall permit the person
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering the test to observe the test
administering QNFT are able to calibrate subject inside the chamber during the test.
equipment and perform tests properly, recog- (8) The equipment generating the test at-
nize invalid tests, calculate fit factors prop- mosphere shall maintain the concentration
erly and ensure that test equipment is in of test agent constant to within a 10 percent
proper working order. variation for the duration of the test.
(b) The employer shall ensure that QNFT (9) The time lag (interval between an event
equipment is kept clean, and is maintained and the recording of the event on the strip
and calibrated according to the manufactur- chart or computer or integrator) shall be
er’s instructions so as to operate at the pa- kept to a minimum. There shall be a clear
rameters for which it was designed. association between the occurrence of an
2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit event and its being recorded.
(10) The sampling line tubing for the test
Testing Protocol
chamber atmosphere and for the respirator
(a) Apparatus. sampling port shall be of equal diameter and
(1) Instrumentation. Aerosol generation, of the same material. The length of the two
dilution, and measurement systems using lines shall be equal.
particulates (corn oil, polyethylene glycol (11) The exhaust flow from the test cham-
400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate ber shall pass through an appropriate filter
[DEHS] or sodium chloride) as test aerosols (i.e., high efficiency particulate filter) before
shall be used for quantitative fit testing. release.
(2) Test chamber. The test chamber shall (12) When sodium chloride aerosol is used,
be large enough to permit all test subjects to the relative humidity inside the test cham-
perform freely all required exercises without ber shall not exceed 50 percent.
disturbing the test agent concentration or (13) The limitations of instrument detec-
the measurement apparatus. The test cham- tion shall be taken into account when deter-
ber shall be equipped and constructed so that mining the fit factor.
the test agent is effectively isolated from (14) Test respirators shall be maintained in
the ambient air, yet uniform in concentra- proper working order and be inspected regu-
tion throughout the chamber. larly for deficiencies such as cracks or miss-
(3) When testing air-purifying respirators, ing valves and gaskets.
the normal filter or cartridge element shall (b) Procedural Requirements.
be replaced with a high efficiency particu- (1) When performing the initial user seal
late air (HEPA) or P100 series filter supplied check using a positive or negative pressure
by the same manufacturer. check, the sampling line shall be crimped
(4) The sampling instrument shall be se- closed in order to avoid air pressure leakage
lected so that a computer record or strip during either of these pressure checks.
chart record may be made of the test show- (2) The use of an abbreviated screening
ing the rise and fall of the test agent con- QLFT test is optional. Such a test may be
centration with each inspiration and expira- utilized in order to quickly identify poor fit-
tion at fit factors of at least 2,000. Integra- ting respirators that passed the positive and/
tors or computers that integrate the amount or negative pressure test and reduce the
of test agent penetration leakage into the amount of QNFT time. The use of the CNC
444
QNFT instrument in the count mode is an- erage of the concentration measured before
other optional method to obtain a quick esti- and after each test (i.e., 7 exercises) or the
mate of fit and eliminate poor fitting res- arithmetic average of the concentration
pirators before going on to perform a full measured before and after each exercise or
QNFT. the true average measured continuously dur-
(3) A reasonably stable test agent con- ing the respirator sample.
centration shall be measured in the test (iii) The concentration of the challenge
chamber prior to testing. For canopy or agent inside the respirator shall be deter-
shower curtain types of test units, the deter-
mined by one of the following methods:
mination of the test agent’s stability may be
established after the test subject has entered (A) Average peak penetration method
the test environment. means the method of determining test agent
(4) Immediately after the subject enters penetration into the respirator utilizing a
the test chamber, the test agent concentra- strip chart recorder, integrator, or com-
tion inside the respirator shall be measured puter. The agent penetration is determined
to ensure that the peak penetration does not by an average of the peak heights on the
exceed 5 percent for a half mask or 1 percent graph or by computer integration, for each
for a full facepiece respirator. exercise except the grimace exercise. Inte-
(5) A stable test agent concentration shall grators or computers that calculate the ac-
be obtained prior to the actual start of test- tual test agent penetration into the res-
ing. pirator for each exercise will also be consid-
(6) Respirator restraining straps shall not ered to meet the requirements of the average
be over-tightened for testing. The straps peak penetration method.
shall be adjusted by the wearer without as- (B) Maximum peak penetration method
sistance from other persons to give a reason- means the method of determining test agent
ably comfortable fit typical of normal use. penetration in the respirator as determined
The respirator shall not be adjusted once the by strip chart recordings of the test. The
fit test exercises begin. highest peak penetration for a given exercise
(7) The test shall be terminated whenever
is taken to be representative of average pen-
any single peak penetration exceeds 5 per-
etration into the respirator for that exercise.
cent for half masks and 1 percent for full
facepiece respirators. The test subject shall (C) Integration by calculation of the area
be refitted and retested. under the individual peak for each exercise
(8) Calculation of fit factors. except the grimace exercise. This includes
(i) The fit factor shall be determined for computerized integration.
the quantitative fit test by taking the ratio (D) The calculation of the overall fit factor
of the average chamber concentration to the using individual exercise fit factors involves
concentration measured inside the respirator first converting the exercise fit factors to
for each test exercise except the grimace ex- penetration values, determining the average,
ercise. and then converting that result back to a fit
(ii) The average test chamber concentra- factor. This procedure is described in the fol-
tion shall be calculated as the arithmetic av- lowing equation:
Number of exercises
Overall Fit Factor =
1 ff1 + 1 ff2 + 1 ff3 + 1 ff4 + 1 ff5 + 1 ff7 + 1 ff8
Where ff1, ff2, ff3, etc. are the fit factors for 3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei
exercises 1, 2, 3, etc. counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing pro-
(9) The test subject shall not be permitted tocol.
to wear a half mask or quarter facepiece res- The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei
pirator unless a minimum fit factor of 100 is counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing
obtained, or a full facepiece respirator unless (Portacount TM) protocol quantitatively fit
a minimum fit factor of 500 is obtained. tests respirators with the use of a probe. The
(10) Filters used for quantitative fit testing probed respirator is only used for quan-
shall be replaced whenever increased breath- titative fit tests. A probed respirator has a
ing resistance is encountered, or when the special sampling device, installed on the res-
pirator, that allows the probe to sample the
test agent has altered the integrity of the
air from inside the mask. A probed res-
filter media.
pirator is required for each make, style,
model, and size that the employer uses and
can be obtained from the respirator manu-
facturer or distributor. The CNC instrument
445
ER08JA98.006</GPH>
manufacturer, TSI Inc., also provides probe imum respirator performance in this Appen-
attachments (TSI sampling adapters) that dix.
permit fit testing in an employee’s own res- (3) A record of the test needs to be kept on
pirator. A minimum fit factor pass level of file, assuming the fit test was successful.
at least 100 is necessary for a half-mask res- The record must contain the test subject’s
pirator and a minimum fit factor pass level name; overall fit factor; make, model, style,
of at least 500 is required for a full facepiece and size of respirator used; and date tested.
negative pressure respirator. The entire
screening and testing procedure shall be ex- 4. Controlled negative pressure (CNP)
plained to the test subject prior to the con- quantitative fit testing protocol.
duct of the screening test. The CNP protocol provides an alternative
(a) Portacount Fit Test Requirements. (1) to aerosol fit test methods. The CNP fit test
Check the respirator to make sure the sam- method technology is based on exhausting
pling probe and line are properly attached to air from a temporarily sealed respirator
the facepiece and that the respirator is fitted facepiece to generate and then maintain a
with a particulate filter capable of pre- constant negative pressure inside the face-
venting significant penetration by the ambi- piece. The rate of air exhaust is controlled so
ent particles used for the fit test (e.g., that a constant negative pressure is main-
NIOSH 42 CFR 84 series 100, series 99, or se- tained in the respirator during the fit test.
ries 95 particulate filter) per manufacturer’s The level of pressure is selected to replicate
instruction. the mean inspiratory pressure that causes
(2) Instruct the person to be tested to don leakage into the respirator under normal use
the respirator for five minutes before the fit conditions. With pressure held constant, air
test starts. This purges the ambient par- flow out of the respirator is equal to air flow
ticles trapped inside the respirator and per- into the respirator. Therefore, measurement
mits the wearer to make certain the res- of the exhaust stream that is required to
pirator is comfortable. This individual shall hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed
already have been trained on how to wear respirator constant yields a direct measure
the respirator properly. of leakage air flow into the respirator. The
(3) Check the following conditions for the CNP fit test method measures leak rates
adequacy of the respirator fit: Chin properly through the facepiece as a method for deter-
placed; Adequate strap tension, not overly mining the facepiece fit for negative pres-
tightened; Fit across nose bridge; Respirator sure respirators. The CNP instrument manu-
of proper size to span distance from nose to facturer Occupational Health Dynamics of
chin; Tendency of the respirator to slip; Self- Birmingham, Alabama also provides attach-
observation in a mirror to evaluate fit and ments (sampling manifolds) that replace the
respirator position. filter cartridges to permit fit testing in an
(4) Have the person wearing the respirator employee’s own respirator. To perform the
do a user seal check. If leakage is detected, test, the test subject closes his or her mouth
determine the cause. If leakage is from a and holds his/her breath, after which an air
poorly fitting facepiece, try another size of pump removes air from the respirator face-
the same model respirator, or another model piece at a pre-selected constant pressure.
of respirator. The facepiece fit is expressed as the leak
(5) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions rate through the facepiece, expressed as mil-
for operating the Portacount and proceed liliters per minute. The quality and validity
with the test. of the CNP fit tests are determined by the
(6) The test subject shall be instructed to degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks
perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of the test pressure during the system measure-
this appendix. ment time of approximately five seconds. In-
(7) After the test exercises, the test subject stantaneous feedback in the form of a real-
shall be questioned by the test conductor re- time pressure trace of the in-mask pressure
garding the comfort of the respirator upon is provided and used to determine test valid-
completion of the protocol. If it has become ity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass
unacceptable, another model of respirator level of 100 is necessary for a half-mask res-
shall be tried. pirator and a minimum fit factor of at least
(b) Portacount Test Instrument. 500 is required for a full facepiece respirator.
(1) The Portacount will automatically stop The entire screening and testing procedure
and calculate the overall fit factor for the shall be explained to the test subject prior to
entire set of exercises. The overall fit factor the conduct of the screening test.
is what counts. The Pass or Fail message (a) CNP Fit Test Requirements.
will indicate whether or not the test was (1) The instrument shall have a non-adjust-
successful. If the test was a Pass, the fit test able test pressure of 15.0 mm water pressure.
is over. (2) The CNP system defaults selected for
(2) Since the pass or fail criterion of the test pressure shall be set at ¥15 mm of water
Portacount is user programmable, the test (-0.58 inches of water) and the modeled in-
operator shall ensure that the pass or fail spiratory flow rate shall be 53.8 liters per
criterion meet the requirements for min- minute for performing fit tests.
446
NOTE: CNP systems have built-in capa- subject shall hold his or her head full down
bility to conduct fit testing that is specific and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
to unique work rate, mask, and gender situa- ing test measurement.
tions that might apply in a specific work- (5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud
place. Use of system default values, which slowly and loud enough so as to be heard
were selected to represent respirator wear clearly by the test conductor. The subject
with medium cartridge resistance at a low- can read from a prepared text such as the
moderate work rate, will allow inter-test Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100,
comparison of the respirator fit.) or recite a memorized poem or song for 1
(3) The individual who conducts the CNP minute. After the talking exercise, the sub-
fit testing shall be thoroughly trained to ject shall hold his or her head straight ahead
perform the test. and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
(4) The respirator filter or cartridge needs ing the test measurement.
to be replaced with the CNP test manifold. (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace
The inhalation valve downstream from the by smiling or frowning for 15 seconds.
manifold either needs to be temporarily re- (7) Bending Over. The test subject shall
moved or propped open. bend at the waist as if he or she were to
(5) The employer must train the test sub- touch his or her toes for 1 minute. Jogging in
ject to hold his or her breath for at least 10 place shall be substituted for this exercise in
seconds. those test environments such as shroud-type
(6) The test subject must don the test res- QNFT units that prohibit bending at the
pirator without any assistance from the test waist. After the bending over exercise, the
administrator who is conducting the CNP fit subject shall hold his or her head straight
test. The respirator must not be adjusted ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 sec-
once the fit-test exercises begin. Any adjust- onds during the test measurement.
ment voids the test, and the test subject (8) Normal Breathing. The test subject
must repeat the fit test. shall remove and re-don the respirator with-
(7) The QNFT protocol shall be followed ac- in a one-minute period. Then, in a normal
cording to section I. C. 1. of this appendix standing position, without talking, the sub-
with an exception for the CNP test exercises. ject shall breathe normally for 1 minute.
(b) CNP Test Exercises. After the normal breathing exercise, the sub-
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing ject shall hold his or her head straight ahead
position, without talking, the subject shall and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
breathe normally for 1 minute. After the ing the test measurement. After the test ex-
normal breathing exercise, the subject needs ercises, the test subject shall be questioned
to hold head straight ahead and hold his or by the test conductor regarding the comfort
her breath for 10 seconds during the test of the respirator upon completion of the pro-
measurement. tocol. If it has become unacceptable, another
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing model of a respirator shall be tried.
position, the subject shall breathe slowly (c) CNP Test Instrument.
and deeply for 1 minute, being careful not to (1) The test instrument must have an effec-
hyperventilate. After the deep breathing ex- tive audio-warning device, or a visual-warn-
ercise, the subject shall hold his or her head ing device in the form of a screen tracing,
straight ahead and hold his or her breath for that indicates when the test subject fails to
10 seconds during test measurement. hold his or her breath during the test. The
(3)Turning head side to side. Standing in test must be terminated and restarted from
place, the subject shall slowly turn his or her the beginning when the test subject fails to
head from side to side between the extreme hold his or her breath during the test. The
positions on each side for 1 minute. The head test subject then may be refitted and re-
shall be held at each extreme momentarily tested.
so the subject can inhale at each side. After (2) A record of the test shall be kept on
the turning head side to side exercise, the file, assuming the fit test was successful.
subject needs to hold head full left and hold The record must contain the test subject’s
his or her breath for 10 seconds during test name; overall fit factor; make, model, style
measurement. Next, the subject needs to and size of respirator used; and date tested.
hold head full right and hold his or her 5. Controlled negative pressure (CNP)
breath for 10 seconds during test measure- REDON quantitative fit testing protocol.
ment. (a) When administering this protocol to
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in test subjects, employers must comply with
place, the subject shall slowly move his or the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)
her head up and down for 1 minute. The sub- and (c) of part I.C.4 of this appendix (‘‘Con-
ject shall be instructed to inhale in the up trolled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative
position (i.e., when looking toward the ceil- fit testing protocol’’), as well as use the test
ing). After the moving head up and down ex- exercises described below in paragraph (b) of
ercise, the subject shall hold his or her head this protocol instead of the test exercises
full up and hold his or her breath for 10 sec- specified in paragraph (b) of part I.C.4 of this
onds during test measurement. Next, the appendix.
447
(b) Employers must ensure that each test dures, including the order of administration,
subject being fit tested using this protocol described below in Table A–1 of this appen-
follows the exercise and measurement proce- dix.
TABLE A–1—CNP REDON QUANTITATIVE FIT TESTING PROTOCOL
Exercises 1 Exercise procedure Measurement procedure
Facing Forward ............................... Stand and breathe normally, without talking, for 30 Face forward, while holding breath
seconds. for 10 seconds.
Bending Over .................................. Bend at the waist, as if going to touch his or her Face parallel to the floor, while
toes, for 30 seconds. holding breath for 10 seconds
Head Shaking ................................. For about three seconds, shake head back and forth Face forward, while holding breath
vigorously several times while shouting. for 10 seconds
REDON 1 ........................................ Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece Face forward, while holding breath
straps, and then redon the respirator mask. for 10 seconds.
REDON 2 ........................................ Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece Face forward, while holding breath
straps, and then redon the respirator mask again. for 10 seconds.
1 Exercises are listed in the order in which they are to be administered.
(c) After completing the test exercises, the scribing the protocol and explaining how test
test administrator must question each test data support the protocol’s accuracy and re-
subject regarding the comfort of the res- liability.
pirator. When a test subject states that the C. If OSHA determines that additional in-
respirator is unacceptable, the employer formation is required before the Agency
must ensure that the test administrator re- commences a rulemaking proceeding under
peats the protocol using another respirator this section, OSHA will so notify the appli-
model. cant and afford the applicant the oppor-
(d) Employers must determine the overall tunity to submit the supplemental informa-
fit factor for each test subject by calculating tion. Initiation of a rulemaking proceeding
the harmonic mean of the fit testing exer- will be deferred until OSHA has received and
cises as follows: evaluated the supplemental information.
N APPENDIX B–1 TO § 1910.134: USER SEAL CHECK
Overall Fit Factor =
[1/FF1 + 1/FF2 + ... 1/FFN ] PROCEDURES (MANDATORY)
Where: The individual who uses a tight-fitting res-

pirator is to perform a user seal check to en-
N = The number of exercises;
sure that an adequate seal is achieved each
FF1 = The fit factor for the first exercise;
time the respirator is put on. Either the
FF2 = The fit factor for the second exercise;
positive and negative pressure checks listed
and
in this appendix, or the respirator manufac-
FFN = The fit factor for the nth exercise.
turer’s recommended user seal check method
PART II. NEW FIT TEST PROTOCOLS shall be used. User seal checks are not sub-
stitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit
A. Any person may submit to OSHA an ap- tests.
plication for approval of a new fit test pro-
tocol. If the application meets the following I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure
criteria, OSHA will initiate a rulemaking Checks
proceeding under section 6(b)(7) of the OSH
Act to determine whether to list the new A. Positive pressure check. Close off the ex-
protocol as an approved protocol in this ap- halation valve and exhale gently into the
pendix A. facepiece. The face fit is considered satisfac-
B. The application must include a detailed tory if a slight positive pressure can be built
description of the proposed new fit test pro- up inside the facepiece without any evidence
tocol. This application must be supported by of outward leakage of air at the seal. For
either: most respirators this method of leak testing
1. A test report prepared by an independent requires the wearer to first remove the exha-
government research laboratory (e.g., Law- lation valve cover before closing off the ex-
rence Livermore National Laboratory, Los halation valve and then carefully replacing
Alamos National Laboratory, the National it after the test.
Institute for Standards and Technology) B. Negative pressure check. Close off the
stating that the laboratory has tested the inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s)
protocol and had found it to be accurate and by covering with the palm of the hand(s) or
reliable; or by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently
2. An article that has been published in a so that the facepiece collapses slightly, and
peer-reviewed industrial hygiene journal de- hold the breath for ten seconds. The design
448
ER04AU04.001</MATH>
of the inlet opening of some cartridges can- 45% alcohol) to one liter of water at 43 °C
not be effectively covered with the palm of (110 °F); or,
the hand. The test can be performed by cov- 3. Other commercially available cleansers
ering the inlet opening of the cartridge with of equivalent disinfectant quality when used
a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the facepiece as directed, if their use is recommended or
remains in its slightly collapsed condition approved by the respirator manufacturer.
and no inward leakage of air is detected, the E. Rinse components thoroughly in clean,
tightness of the respirator is considered sat- warm (43 °C [110 °F] maximum), preferably
isfactory. running water. Drain. The importance of
thorough rinsing cannot be overemphasized.
II. Manufacturer’s Recommended User Seal Detergents or disinfectants that dry on
Check Procedures facepieces may result in dermatitis. In addi-
The respirator manufacturer’s rection, some disinfectants may cause deterio-
ommended procedures for performing a user ration of rubber or corrosion of metal parts
seal check may be used instead of the posi- if not completely removed.
tive and/or negative pressure check proce- F. Components should be hand-dried with a
dures provided that the employer dem- clean lint-free cloth or air-dried.
onstrates that the manufacturer’s proce- G. Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters,
dures are equally effective. cartridges, and canisters where necessary.
H. Test the respirator to ensure that all
APPENDIX B–2 TO § 1910.134: RESPIRATOR components work properly.
CLEANING PROCEDURES (MANDATORY)
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.134: OSHA RESPIRATOR
These procedures are provided for em- MEDICAL EVALUATION QUESTIONNAIRE (MAN-
ployer use when cleaning respirators. They DATORY)
are general in nature, and the employer as To the employer: Answers to questions in
an alternative may use the cleaning rec- Section 1, and to question 9 in Section 2 of
ommendations provided by the manufacturer part A, do not require a medical examina-
of the respirators used by their employees, tion.
provided such procedures are as effective as To the employee:
those listed here in appendix B–2. Equivalent Your employer must allow you to answer
effectiveness simply means that the proce- this questionnaire during normal working
dures used must accomplish the objectives hours, or at a time and place that is conven-
set forth in appendix B–2, i.e., must ensure ient to you. To maintain your confiden-
that the respirator is properly cleaned and tiality, your employer or supervisor must
disinfected in a manner that prevents dam- not look at or review your answers, and your
age to the respirator and does not cause employer must tell you how to deliver or
harm to the user. send this questionnaire to the health care
I. Procedures for Cleaning Respirators professional who will review it.
Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The fol-
A. Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters. lowing information must be provided by
Disassemble facepieces by removing speak- every employee who has been selected to use
ing diaphragms, demand and pressure-de- any type of respirator (please print).
mand valve assemblies, hoses, or any compo- 1. Today’s date: lllllllllllllll
nents recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Your name: llllllllllllllll
Discard or repair any defective parts.
B. Wash components in warm (43 °C [110 °F] 3. Your age (to nearest year): llllllll
maximum) water with a mild detergent or 4. Sex (circle one): Male/Female
with a cleaner recommended by the manu- 5. Your height: ll ft. ll in.
facturer. A stiff bristle (not wire) brush may
6. Your weight: ll lbs.
be used to facilitate the removal of dirt.
C. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, 7. Your job title: llllllllllllll
warm (43 °C [110 °F] maximum), preferably 8. A phone number where you can be reached
running water. Drain. by the health care professional who re-
D. When the cleaner used does not contain views this questionnaire (include the Area
a disinfecting agent, respirator components Code): lll
should be immersed for two minutes in one 9. The best time to phone you at this num-
of the following: ber: ll
1. Hypochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlo- 10. Has your employer told you how to con-
rine) made by adding approximately one mil- tact the health care professional who will
liliter of laundry bleach to one liter of water review this questionnaire (circle one): Yes/
at 43 °C (110 °F); or, No
2. Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm io- 11. Check the type of respirator you will use
dine) made by adding approximately 0.8 mil- (you can check more than one category):
liliters of tincture of iodine (6–8 grams am- a. ll N, R, or P disposable respirator (fil-
monium and/or potassium iodide/100 cc of ter-mask, non-cartridge type only).
449
b. ll Other type (for example, half- or m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply:
full-facepiece type, powered-air puri- Yes/No
fying, supplied-air, self-contained breath- n. Any other symptoms that you think
ing apparatus). may be related to lung problems: Yes/No
12. Have you worn a respirator (circle one): 5. Have you ever had any of the following car-
Yes/No diovascular or heart problems?
a. Heart attack: Yes/No
7 If ‘‘yes,’’ what type(s): llllllllll
b. Stroke: Yes/No
llllllllllllllllllllllll c. Angina: Yes/No
Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 d. Heart failure: Yes/No
through 9 below must be answered by every e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused
employee who has been selected to use any by walking): Yes/No
type of respirator (please circle ‘‘yes’’ or f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregu-
‘‘no’’). larly): Yes/No
1. Do you currently smoke tobacco, or have g. High blood pressure: Yes/No
you smoked tobacco in the last month: h. Any other heart problem that you’ve
Yes/No been told about: Yes/No
2. Have you ever had any of the following 6. Have you ever had any of the following car-
conditions? diovascular or heart symptoms?
a. Seizures: Yes/No a. Frequent pain or tightness in your
b. Diabetes (sugar disease): Yes/No chest: Yes/No
c. Allergic reactions that interfere with b. Pain or tightness in your chest during
your breathing: Yes/No physical activity: Yes/No
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places): c. Pain or tightness in your chest that
Yes/No interferes with your job: Yes/No
e. Trouble smelling odors: Yes/No d. In the past two years, have you noticed
3. Have you ever had any of the following pul- your heart skipping or missing a beat:
monary or lung problems? Yes/No
a. Asbestosis: Yes/No e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not re-
b. Asthma: Yes/No lated to eating: Yes/No
c. Chronic bronchitis: Yes/No f. Any other symptoms that you think may
d. Emphysema: Yes/No be related to heart or circulation prob-
e. Pneumonia: Yes/No lems: Yes/No
f. Tuberculosis: Yes/No 7. Do you currently take medication for any
g. Silicosis: Yes/No of the following problems?
h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung): Yes/No a. Breathing or lung problems: Yes/No
i. Lung cancer: Yes/No b. Heart trouble: Yes/No
j. Broken ribs: Yes/No c. Blood pressure: Yes/No
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries: Yes/No d. Seizures: Yes/No
l. Any other lung problem that you’ve been 8. If you’ve used a respirator, have you ever
told about: Yes/No had any of the following problems? (If
4. Do you currently have any of the following you’ve never used a respirator, check the
symptoms of pulmonary or lung illness? following space and go to question 9:)
a. Shortness of breath: Yes/No a. Eye irritation: Yes/No
b. Shortness of breath when walking fast b. Skin allergies or rashes: Yes/No
on level ground or walking up a slight c. Anxiety: Yes/No
hill or incline: Yes/No d. General weakness or fatigue: Yes/No
c. Shortness of breath when walking with e. Any other problem that interferes with
other people at an ordinary pace on level your use of a respirator: Yes/No
ground: Yes/No 9. Would you like to talk to the health care
d. Have to stop for breath when walking at professional who will review this ques-
your own pace on level ground: Yes/No tionnaire about your answers to this
e. Shortness of breath when washing or questionnaire: Yes/No
dressing yourself: Yes/No
f. Shortness of breath that interferes with Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered
your job: Yes/No by every employee who has been selected to
g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick use either a full-facepiece respirator or a
sputum): Yes/No self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA).
h. Coughing that wakes you early in the For employees who have been selected to use
morning: Yes/No other types of respirators, answering these
i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you questions is voluntary.
are lying down: Yes/No 10. Have you ever lost vision in either eye
j. Coughing up blood in the last month: (temporarily or permanently): Yes/No
Yes/No 11. Do you currently have any of the following
k. Wheezing: Yes/No vision problems?
l. Wheezing that interferes with your job: a. Wear contact lenses: Yes/No
Yes/No b. Wear glasses: Yes/No
450
c. Color blind: Yes/No If ‘‘yes,’’ describe these exposures: llll
d. Any other eye or vision problem: Yes/No llllllllllllllllllllllll
12. Have you ever had an injury to your ears,
4. List any second jobs or side businesses you
including a broken ear drum: Yes/No
have: lllllllllllllllllll
13. Do you currently have any of the following
hearing problems? llllllllllllllllllllllll
a. Difficulty hearing: Yes/No 5. List your previous occupations: lllll
b. Wear a hearing aid: Yes/No llllllllllllllllllllllll
c. Any other hearing or ear problem: Yes/
No 6. List your current and previous hobbies: l
14. Have you ever had a back injury: Yes/No llllllllllllllllllllllll
15. Do you currently have any of the following 7. Have you been in the military services?
musculoskeletal problems? Yes/No
a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, If ‘‘yes,’’ were you exposed to biological or
legs, or feet: Yes/No chemical agents (either in training or
b. Back pain: Yes/No combat): Yes/No
c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and 8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT
legs: Yes/No team? Yes/No
d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward 9. Other than medications for breathing and
or backward at the waist: Yes/No lung problems, heart trouble, blood pres-
e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or sure, and seizures mentioned earlier in
down: Yes/No this questionnaire, are you taking any
f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to other medications for any reason (includ-
side: Yes/No ing over-the-counter medications): Yes/
g. Difficulty bending at your knees: Yes/No No
h. Difficulty squatting to the ground: Yes/
If ‘‘yes,’’ name the medications if you
No
know them: llllllllllllllll
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder
carrying more than 25 lbs: Yes/No 10. Will you be using any of the following
j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem items with your respirator(s)?
that interferes with using a respirator: a. HEPA Filters: Yes/No
Yes/No b. Canisters (for example, gas masks): Yes/
No
Part B Any of the following questions,
c. Cartridges: Yes/No
and other questions not listed, may be added
11. How often are you expected to use the
to the questionnaire at the discretion of the
respirator(s) (circle ‘‘yes’’ or ‘‘no’’ for all
health care professional who will review the
answers that apply to you)?:
questionnaire.
a. Escape only (no rescue): Yes/No
1. In your present job, are you working at b. Emergency rescue only: Yes/No
high altitudes (over 5,000 feet) or in a c. Less than 5 hours per week: Yes/No
place that has lower than normal d. Less than 2 hours per day: Yes/No
amounts of oxygen: Yes/No e. 2 to 4 hours per day: Yes/No
If ‘‘yes,’’ do you have feelings of dizziness, f. Over 4 hours per day: Yes/No
shortness of breath, pounding in your 12. During the period you are using the res-
chest, or other symptoms when you’re pirator(s), is your work effort:
working under these conditions: Yes/No a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour): Yes/
2. At work or at home, have you ever been No
exposed to hazardous solvents, hazardous If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last dur-
airborne chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or ing the average
dust), or have you come into skin con- shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins.
tact with hazardous chemicals: Yes/No
Examples of a light work effort are sitting
If ‘‘yes,’’ name the chemicals if you know while writing, typing, drafting, or per-
them: lllllllllllllllllll forming light assembly work; or standing
3. Have you ever worked with any of the ma- while operating a drill press (1–3 lbs.) or con-
terials, or under any of the conditions, trolling machines.
listed below: b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour): Yes/
a. Asbestos: Yes/No No
b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting): Yes/No
c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or weld- If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last
ing this material): Yes/No during the average
d. Beryllium: Yes/No shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins.
e. Aluminum: Yes/No Examples of moderate work effort are sit-
f. Coal (for example, mining): Yes/No ting while nailing or filing; driving a truck or
g. Iron: Yes/No bus in urban traffic; standing while drilling,
h. Tin: Yes/No nailing, performing assembly work, or trans-
i. Dusty environments: Yes/No ferring a moderate load (about 35 lbs.) at
j. Any other hazardous exposures: Yes/No trunk level; walking on a level surface about
451
2 mph or down a 5-degree grade about 3 mph; that may affect the safety and well-being
or pushing a wheelbarrow with a heavy load of others (for example, rescue, security):
(about 100 lbs.) on a level surface. llllllllllllllllllllllll
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour): Yes/No
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.134 (MANDATORY) INFOR-
If ‘‘yes,’’ how long does this period last
MATION FOR EMPLOYEES USING RESPIRATORS
during the average
WHEN NOT REQUIRED UNDER THE STAND-
shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins.
ARD
Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy
load (about 50 lbs.) from the floor to your Respirators are an effective method of pro-
waist or shoulder; working on a loading dock; tection against designated hazards when
shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chip- properly selected and worn. Respirator use is
ping castings; walking up an 8-degree grade encouraged, even when exposures are below
about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy the exposure limit, to provide an additional
load (about 50 lbs.). level of comfort and protection for workers.
However, if a respirator is used improperly
13. Will you be wearing protective clothing or not kept clean, the respirator itself can
and/or equipment (other than the res- become a hazard to the worker. Sometimes,
pirator) when you’re using your res- workers may wear respirators to avoid expo-
pirator: Yes/No sures to hazards, even if the amount of haz-
If ‘‘yes,’’ describe this protective clothing ardous substance does not exceed the limits
and/or equipment: lllllllllllll set by OSHA standards. If your employer
llllllllllllllllllllllll provides respirators for your voluntary use,
14. Will you be working under hot conditions or if you provide your own respirator, you
(temperature exceeding 77 °F): Yes/No need to take certain precautions to be sure
15. Will you be working under humid condi- that the respirator itself does not present a
tions: Yes/No hazard.
16. Describe the work you’ll be doing while You should do the following:
you’re using your respirator(s): 1. Read and heed all instructions provided
by the manufacturer on use, maintenance,
llllllllllllllllllllllll
cleaning and care, and warnings regarding
llllllllllllllllllllllll the respirators limitations.
17. Describe any special or hazardous condi- 2. Choose respirators certified for use to
tions you might encounter when you’re protect against the contaminant of concern.
using your respirator(s) (for example, NIOSH, the National Institute for Occupa-
confined spaces, life-threatening gases): tional Safety and Health of the U.S. Depart-
llllllllllllllllllllllll ment of Health and Human Services, cer-
tifies respirators. A label or statement of
llllllllllllllllllllllll certification should appear on the respirator
18. Provide the following information, if you or respirator packaging. It will tell you what
know it, for each toxic substance that the respirator is designed for and how much
you’ll be exposed to when you’re using it will protect you.
your respirator(s): 3. Do not wear your respirator into
Name of the first toxic substance: llll atmospheres containing contaminants for
Estimated maximum exposure level per which your respirator is not designed to pro-
shift: lllllllllllllllllll tect against. For example, a respirator de-
signed to filter dust particles will not pro-
Duration of exposure per shift llllll tect you against gases, vapors, or very small
Name of the second toxic substance: lll solid particles of fumes or smoke.
Estimated maximum exposure level per 4. Keep track of your respirator so that
shift: lllllllllllllllllll you do not mistakenly use someone else’s
respirator.
Duration of exposure per shift: llllll
Name of the third toxic substance: llll [63 FR 1270, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20098, 20099,
Apr. 23, 1998, as amended at 69 FR 46993, Aug.
Estimated maximum exposure level per
4, 2004; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50187,
shift: lllllllllllllllllll
Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR
Duration of exposure per shift: llllll 33607, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 46949, Aug. 7, 2012]
The name of any other toxic substances
that you’ll be exposed to while using § 1910.135 Head protection.
your respirator:
(a) General requirements. (1) The em-
llllllllllllllllllllllll ployer shall ensure that each affected
llllllllllllllllllllllll employee wears a protective helmet
llllllllllllllllllllllll when working in areas where there is a
19. Describe any special responsibilities potential for injury to the head from
you’ll have while using your respirator(s) falling objects.
452
(2) The employer shall ensure that a tion—Protective Footwear,’’ which is
protective helmet designed to reduce incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; or
electrical shock hazard is worn by each (iii) ANSI Z41–1991, ‘‘American Na-
such affected employee when near ex- tional Standard for Personal Protec-
posed electrical conductors which tion—Protective Footwear,’’ which is
could contact the head. incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
(b) Criteria for head protection. (1) (2) Protective footwear that the em-
Head protection must comply with any ployer demonstrates is at least as ef-
of the following consensus standards: fective as protective footwear that is
(i) American National Standards In- constructed in accordance with one of
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, ‘‘American the above consensus standards will be
National Standard for Industrial Head deemed to be in compliance with the
Protection,’’ incorporated by reference requirements of this section.
in § 1910.6;
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1,
(ii) American National Standards In- 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996;
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, ‘‘American 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 61 FR 21228, May 9,
National Standard for Industrial Head 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009]
Protection,’’ incorporated by reference
in § 1910.6; or § 1910.137 Electrical protective equip-
(iii) American National Standards In- ment.
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, ‘‘American (a) Design requirements. Insulating
National Standard for Personnel Pro- blankets, matting, covers, line hose,
tection—Protective Headwear for In- gloves, and sleeves made of rubber
dustrial Workers—Requirements,’’ in- shall meet the following requirements:
corporated by reference in § 1910.6. (1) Manufacture and marking. (i) Blan-
(2) Head protection devices that the kets, gloves, and sleeves shall be pro-
employer demonstrates are at least as duced by a seamless process.
effective as head protection devices (ii) Each item shall be clearly
that are constructed in accordance marked as follows:
with one of the above consensus stand- (A) Class 0 equipment shall be
ards will be deemed to be in compli- marked Class 0.
ance with the requirements of this sec- (B) Class 1 equipment shall be
tion. marked Class 1.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 61 (C) Class 2 equipment shall be
FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; marked Class 2.
74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 37598, June 22, (D) Class 3 equipment shall be
2012] marked Class 3.
(E) Class 4 equipment shall be
§ 1910.136 Foot protection. marked Class 4.
(a) General requirements. The em- (F) Non-ozone-resistant equipment
ployer shall ensure that each affected other than matting shall be marked
employee uses protective footwear Type I.
when working in areas where there is a (G) Ozone-resistant equipment other
danger of foot injuries due to falling or than matting shall be marked Type II.
rolling objects, or objects piercing the (H) Other relevant markings, such as
sole, and where such employee’s feet the manufacturer’s identification and
are exposed to electrical hazards. the size of the equipment, may also be
(b) Criteria for protective footwear. (1) provided.
Protective footwear must comply with (iii) Markings shall be nonconducting
any of the following consensus stand- and shall be applied in such a manner
ards: as not to impair the insulating quali-
(i) ASTM F–2412–2005, ‘‘Standard Test ties of the equipment.
Methods for Foot Protection,’’ and (iv) Markings on gloves shall be con-
ASTM F–2413–2005, ‘‘Standard Speci- fined to the cuff portion of the glove.
fication for Performance Requirements (2) Electrical requirements. (i) Equip-
for Protective Footwear,’’ which are ment shall be capable of withstanding
incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; the a-c proof-test voltage specified in
(ii) ANSI Z41–1999, ‘‘American Na- Table I–2 or the d-c proof-test voltage
tional Standard for Personal Protec- specified in Table I–3.
453
(A) The proof test shall reliably indi- (ii) Surface irregularities that may
cate that the equipment can withstand be present on all rubber goods because
the voltage involved. of imperfections on forms or molds or
(B) The test voltage shall be applied because of inherent difficulties in the
continuously for 3 minutes for equip- manufacturing process and that may
ment other than matting and shall be appear as indentations, protuberances,
applied continuously for 1 minute for or imbedded foreign material are ac-
matting. ceptable under the following condi-
(C) Gloves shall also be capable of tions:
withstanding the a-c proof-test voltage (A) The indentation or protuberance
specified in Table I–2 after a 16-hour blends into a smooth slope when the
water soak. (See the note following material is stretched.
paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (B) Foreign material remains in
(ii) When the a-c proof test is used on place when the insulating material is
gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test current folded and stretches with the insu-
lating material surrounding it.
may not exceed the values specified in
Table I–2 at any time during the test NOTE: Rubber insulating equipment meet-
period. ing the following national consensus stand-
(A) If the a-c proof test is made at a ards is deemed to be in compliance with
paragraph (a) of this section:
frequency other than 60 hertz, the per-
missible proof-test current shall be American Society for Testing and Mate-
computed from the direct ratio of the rials (ASTM) D 120–87, Specification for Rub-
ber Insulating Gloves.
frequencies.
ASTM D 178–93 (or D 178–88) Specification
(B) For the test, gloves (right side for Rubber Insulating Matting.
out) shall be filled with tap water and ASTM D 1048–93 (or D 1048–88a) Specifica-
immersed in water to a depth that is in tion for Rubber Insulating Blankets.
accordance with Table I–4. Water shall ASTM D 1049–93 (or D 1049–88) Specification
be added to or removed from the glove, for Rubber Insulating Covers.
as necessary, so that the water level is ASTM D 1050–90, Specification for Rubber
Insulating Line Hose.
the same inside and outside the glove. ASTM D 1051–87, Specification for Rubber
(C) After the 16-hour water soak spec- Insulating Sleeves.
ified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this These standards contain specifications for
section, the 60-hertz proof-test current conducting the various tests required in
may exceed the values given in Table I– paragraph (a) of this section. For example,
2 by not more than 2 milliamperes. the a-c and d-c proof tests, the breakdown
test, the water soak procedure, and the
(iii) Equipment that has been sub- ozone test mentioned in this paragraph are
jected to a minimum breakdown volt- described in detail in the ASTM standards.
age test may not be used for electrical (b) In-service care and use. (1) Elec-
protection. (See the note following trical protective equipment shall be
paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) maintained in a safe, reliable condi-
(iv) Material used for Type II insu- tion.
lating equipment shall be capable of (2) The following specific require-
withstanding an ozone test, with no ments apply to insulating blankets,
visible effects. The ozone test shall re- covers, line hose, gloves, and sleeves
liably indicate that the material will made of rubber:
resist ozone exposure in actual use. (i) Maximum use voltages shall con-
Any visible signs of ozone deterioration form to those listed in Table I–5.
of the material, such as checking, (ii) Insulating equipment shall be in-
cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evi- spected for damage before each day’s
dence of failure to meet the require- use and immediately following any in-
ments for ozone-resistant material. cident that can reasonably be sus-
(See the note following paragraph pected of having caused damage. Insu-
(a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) lating gloves shall be given an air test,
(3) Workmanship and finish. (i) Equip- along with the inspection.
ment shall be free of harmful physical (iii) Insulating equipment with any
irregularities that can be detected by of the following defects may not be
the tests or inspections required under used:
this section. (A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut;
454
(B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking NOTE: Standard electrical test methods
(the cutting action produced by ozone considered as meeting this requirement are
on rubber under mechanical stress into given in the following national consensus
standards:
a series of interlacing cracks);
American Society for Testing and Mate-
(C) An embedded foreign object; rials (ASTM) D 120–87, Specification for Rub-
(D) Any of the following texture ber Insulating Gloves.
changes: swelling, softening, hard- ASTM D 1048–93, Specification for Rubber
ening, or becoming sticky or inelastic. Insulating Blankets.
(E) Any other defect that damages ASTM D 1049–93, Specification for Rubber
the insulating properties. Insulating Covers.
(iv) Insulating equipment found to ASTM D 1050–90, Specification for Rubber
Insulating Line Hose.
have other defects that might affect its
ASTM D 1051–87, Specification for Rubber
insulating properties shall be removed Insulating Sleeves.
from service and returned for testing ASTM F 478–92, Specification for In-Serv-
under paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and ice Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers.
(b)(2)(ix) of this section. ASTM F 479–93, Specification for In-Serv-
(v) Insulating equipment shall be ice Care of Insulating Blankets.
cleaned as needed to remove foreign ASTM F 496–93b Specification for In-Serv-
substances. ice Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves.
(vi) Insulating equipment shall be (x) Insulating equipment failing to
stored in such a location and in such a pass inspections or electrical tests may
manner as to protect it from light, not be used by employees, except as
temperature extremes, excessive hu- follows:
midity, ozone, and other injurious sub- (A) Rubber insulating line hose may
stances and conditions. be used in shorter lengths with the de-
(vii) Protector gloves shall be worn fective portion cut off.
over insulating gloves, except as fol- (B) Rubber insulating blankets may
lows: be repaired using a compatible patch
(A) Protector gloves need not be used that results in physical and electrical
with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use properties equal to those of the blan-
conditions, where small equipment and ket.
parts manipulation necessitate unusu- (C) Rubber insulating blankets may
ally high finger dexterity. be salvaged by severing the defective
NOTE: Extra care is needed in the visual ex- area from the undamaged portion of
amination of the glove and in the avoidance the blanket. The resulting undamaged
of handling sharp objects. area may not be smaller than 22 inches
(B) Any other class of glove may be by 22 inches (560 mm by 560 mm) for
used for similar work without pro- Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blankets.
tector gloves if the employer can dem- (D) Rubber insulating gloves and
onstrate that the possibility of phys- sleeves with minor physical defects,
ical damage to the gloves is small and such as small cuts, tears, or punctures,
if the class of glove is one class higher may be repaired by the application of a
than that required for the voltage incompatible patch. Also, rubber insu-
volved. Insulating gloves that have lating gloves and sleeves with minor
been used without protector gloves surface blemishes may be repaired with
may not be used at a higher voltage a compatible liquid compound. The
until they have been tested under the patched area shall have electrical and
provisions of paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and physical properties equal to those of
(b)(2)(ix) of this section. the surrounding material. Repairs to
(viii) Electrical protective equipment gloves are permitted only in the area
shall be subjected to periodic electrical between the wrist and the reinforced
tests. Test voltages and the maximum edge of the opening.
intervals between tests shall be in ac- (xi) Repaired insulating equipment
cordance with Table I–5 and Table I–6. shall be retested before it may be used
(ix) The test method used under para- by employees.
graphs (b)(2)(viii) and (b)(2)(ix) of this (xii) The employer shall certify that
section shall reliably indicate whether equipment has been tested in accord-
the insulating equipment can with- ance with the requirements of para-
stand the voltages involved. graphs (b)(2)(viii), (b)(2)(ix), and
455
(b)(2)(xi) of this section. The certifi- NOTE: Marking of equipment and entering
cation shall identify the equipment the results of the tests and the dates of test-
that passed the test and the date it was ing onto logs are two acceptable means of
tested. meeting this requirement.
TABLE I-2—A-C PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

Maximum proof-test current, mA (gloves only)
Proof-test
Class of equipment voltage 267-mm 356-mm 406-mm 457-mm
rms V (10.5-in) (14-in) (16-in) (18-in)
glove glove glove glove
0 .............................................................................................. 5,000 8 12 14 16
1 .............................................................................................. 10,000 .................. 14 16 18
2 .............................................................................................. 20,000 .................. 16 18 20
3 .............................................................................................. 30,000 .................. 18 20 22
4 .............................................................................................. 40,000 .................. .................. 22 24
TABLE I-3—D-C PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

Proof-test
Class of equipment
voltage
0 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20,000
1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 40,000
2 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 50,000
3 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 60,000
4 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 70,000
NOTE: The d-c voltages listed in this table can be safely used at the voltages listed in
are not appropriate for proof testing rubber Table I–4. See ASTM D 1050–90 and ASTM D
insulating line hose or covers. For this 1049–88 for further information on proof tests
equipment, d-c proof tests shall use a voltage for rubber insulating line hose and covers.
high enough to indicate that the equipment
TABLE I–4—GLOVE TESTS—WATER LEVEL 1,2
AC proof test DC proof test
Class of glove
mm. in. mm. in.
0 .................................................................................................................................................... 38 1.5 38 1.5

1 .................................................................................................................................................... 38 1.5 51 2.0
2 .................................................................................................................................................... 64 2.5 76 3.0
3 .................................................................................................................................................... 89 3.5 102 4.0
4 .................................................................................................................................................... 127 5.0 153 6.0
1 The water level is given as the clearance from the cuff of the glove to the water line, with a tolerance of ±13 mm. (±0.5 in.).
2 If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25
mm. (1 in.).
TABLE I–5—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS

Maximum use
Class of equipment voltage 1 a-c— Retest volt- Retest volt-
rms age 2 a-c—rms age 2 d-c—avg
0 ......................................................................................................................... 1,000 5,000 20,000

1 ......................................................................................................................... 7,500 10,000 40,000
2 ......................................................................................................................... 17,000 20,000 50,000
3 ......................................................................................................................... 26,500 30,000 60,000
4 ......................................................................................................................... 36,000 40,000 70,000
1 The maximum use voltage is the a-c voltage (rms) classification of the protective equipment that designates the maximum
nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal design voltage is equal to the phase-to-
phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage:
(1) If there is no multiphase exposure in a system area and if the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential,
or
(2) If the electrical equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded
wye circuit is removed.
2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes.
456
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B
TABLE I–6—RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT TEST INTERVALS
Type of equipment When to test
Rubber insulating line hose ......................................................... Upon indication that insulating value is suspect.
Rubber insulating covers ............................................................. Upon indication that insulating value is suspect.
Rubber insulating blankets .......................................................... Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter. 1
Rubber insulating gloves ............................................................. Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter. 1
Rubber insulating sleeves ........................................................... Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter. 1
1 If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not issued for service, it may not be placed into service unless it
has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.
[59 FR 4435, Jan. 31, 1994; 59 FR 33662, June 30, 1994]
§ 1910.138 Hand protection. 7. National Society to Prevent Blindness.

‘‘A Guide for Controlling Eye Injuries in In-
(a) General requirements. Employers dustry,’’ Chicago, Il: 1982.
shall select and require employees to
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994]
use appropriate hand protection when
employees’ hands are exposed to haz- APPENDIX B TO SUBPART I OF PART
ards such as those from skin absorp- 1910—NON-MANDATORY COMPLIANCE
tion of harmful substances; severe cuts GUIDELINES FOR HAZARD ASSESS-
or lacerations; severe abrasions; punc- MENT AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
tures; chemical burns; thermal burns; EQUIPMENT SELECTION
and harmful temperature extremes.
This appendix is intended to provide com-
(b) Selection. Employers shall base
pliance assistance for employers and employ-
the selection of the appropriate hand ees in implementing requirements for a haz-
protection on an evaluation of the per- ard assessment and the selection of personal
formance characteristics of the hand protective equipment.
protection relative to the task(s) to be 1. Controlling hazards. PPE devices alone
performed, conditions present, dura- should not be relied on to provide protection
tion of use, and the hazards and poten- against hazards, but should be used in con-
tial hazards identified. junction with guards, engineering controls,
and sound manufacturing practices.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 2. Assessment and selection. It is necessary
1994] to consider certain general guidelines for as-
sessing the foot, head, eye and face, and hand
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART I OF PART hazard situations that exist in an occupa-
1910—REFERENCES FOR FURTHER IN- tional or educational operation or process,
and to match the protective devices to the
FORMATION (NON-MANDATORY)
particular hazard. It should be the responsi-
The documents in appendix A provide in- bility of the safety officer to exercise com-
formation which may be helpful in under- mon sense and appropriate expertise to ac-
standing and implementing the standards in complish these tasks.
Subpart I. 3. Assessment guidelines. In order to assess
the need for PPE the following steps should
1. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac-
be taken:
cidents Involving Eye Injuries.’’ Report 597,
a. Survey. Conduct a walk-through survey
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
of the areas in question. The purpose of the
2. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac- survey is to identify sources of hazards to
cidents Involving Face Injuries.’’ Report 604, workers and co-workers. Consideration
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. should be given to the basic hazard cat-
3. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac- egories:
cidents Involving Head Injuries.’’ Report 605, (a) Impact
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. (b) Penetration
4. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Ac- (c) Compression (roll-over)
cidents Involving Foot Injuries.’’ Report 626, (d) Chemical
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1981. (e) Heat
5. National Safety Council. ‘‘Accident (f) Harmful dust
Facts’’, Annual edition, Chicago, IL: 1981. (g) Light (optical) radiation
6. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ‘‘Oc- b. Sources. During the walk-through survey
cupational Injuries and Illnesses in the the safety officer should observe: (a) sources
United States by Industry,’’ Annual edition, of motion; i.e., machinery or processes where
Washington, D.C.: BLS. any movement of tools, machine elements or
457
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
particles could exist, or movement of per- It is very important that end users be made
sonnel that could result in collision with sta- aware of all warning labels for and limita-
tionary objects; (b) sources of high tempera- tions of their PPE.
tures that could result in burns, eye injury 5. Fitting the device. Careful consideration
or ignition of protective equipment, etc.; (c) must be given to comfort and fit. PPE that
types of chemical exposures; (d) sources of fits poorly will not afford the necessary pro-
harmful dust; (e) sources of light radiation, tection. Continued wearing of the device is
i.e., welding, brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat more likely if it fits the wearer comfortably.
treating, high intensity lights, etc.; (f) Protective devices are generally available in
sources of falling objects or potential for a variety of sizes. Care should be taken to
dropping objects; (g) sources of sharp objects ensure that the right size is selected.
which might pierce the feet or cut the hands;
6. Devices with adjustable features. Adjust-
(h) sources of rolling or pinching objects
ments should be made on an individual basis
which could crush the feet; (i) layout of
for a comfortable fit that will maintain the
workplace and location of co-workers; and (j)
protective device in the proper position. Par-
any electrical hazards. In addition, injury/ac-
ticular care should be taken in fitting de-
cident data should be reviewed to help iden-
vices for eye protection against dust and
tify problem areas.
chemical splash to ensure that the devices
c. Organize data. Following the walk-
are sealed to the face. In addition, proper fit-
through survey, it is necessary to organize
the data and information for use in the as- ting of helmets is important to ensure that
sessment of hazards. The objective is to pre- it will not fall off during work operations. In
pare for an analysis of the hazards in the en- some cases a chin strap may be necessary to
vironment to enable proper selection of pro- keep the helmet on an employee’s head.
tective equipment. (Chin straps should break at a reasonably
d. Analyze data. Having gathered and orga- low force, however, so as to prevent a stran-
nized data on a workplace, an estimate of gulation hazard). Where manufacturer’s in-
the potential for injuries should be made. structions are available, they should be fol-
Each of the basic hazards (paragraph 3.a.) lowed carefully.
should be reviewed and a determination 7. Reassessment of hazards. It is the respon-
made as to the type, level of risk, and seri- sibility of the safety officer to reassess the
ousness of potential injury from each of the workplace hazard situation as necessary, by
hazards found in the area. The possibility of identifying and evaluating new equipment
exposure to several hazards simultaneously and processes, reviewing accident records,
should be considered. and reevaluating the suitability of pre-
4. Selection guidelines. After completion of viously selected PPE.
the procedures in paragraph 3, the general 8. Selection chart guidelines for eye and face
procedure for selection of protective equip- protection. Some occupations (not a complete
ment is to: a) Become familiar with the po- list) for which eye protection should be rou-
tential hazards and the type of protective tinely considered are: carpenters, elec-
equipment that is available, and what it can tricians, machinists, mechanics and repair-
do; i.e., splash protection, impact protection, ers, millwrights, plumbers and pipe fitters,
etc.; b) compare the hazards associated with sheet metal workers and tinsmiths, assem-
the environment; i.e., impact velocities, blers, sanders, grinding machine operators,
masses, projectile shape, radiation inten- lathe and milling machine operators, saw-
sities, with the capabilities of the available yers, welders, laborers, chemical process op-
protective equipment; c) select the protec- erators and handlers, and timber cutting and
tive equipment which ensures a level of pro- logging workers. The following chart pro-
tection greater than the minimum required vides general guidance for the proper selec-
to protect employees from the hazards; and tion of eye and face protection to protect
d) fit the user with the protective device and against hazards associated with the listed
give instructions on care and use of the PPE. hazard ‘‘source’’ operations.
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHART
Source Assessment of Hazard Protection
IMPACT—Chipping, grinding machining, masonry Flying fragments, objects, Spectacles with side protection, goggles,
work, woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, large chips, particles sand, face shields. See notes (1), (3), (5), (6),
powered fastening, riveting, and sanding. dirt, etc. (10). For severe exposure, use
faceshield.
HEAT—Furnace operations, pouring, casting, hot Hot sparks ............................... Faceshields, goggles, spectacles with side
dipping, and welding. protection. For severe exposure use
faceshield. See notes (1), (2), (3).
458
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHART—Continued
Source Assessment of Hazard Protection
Splash from molten metals ..... Faceshields worn over goggles. See notes
(1), (2), (3).
High temperature exposure .... Screen face shields, reflective face
shields. See notes (1), (2), (3).
CHEMICALS—Acid and chemicals handling, Splash ..................................... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. For se-
degreasing plating. vere exposure, use face shield. See
notes (3), (11).
Irritating mists .......................... Special-purpose goggles.
DUST—Woodworking, buffing, general dusty con- Nuisance dust ......................... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. See
ditions. note (8).
LIGHT and/or RADIATION—.
Welding: Electric arc Optical radiation ...................... Welding helmets or welding shields. Typ-
ical shades: 10-14. See notes (9), (12)
Welding: Gas Optical radiation ...................... Welding goggles or welding face shield.
Typical shades: gas welding 4-8, cutting
3-6, brazing 3-4. See note (9)
Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering Optical radiation ...................... Spectacles or welding face-shield. Typical
shades, 1.5-3. See notes (3), (9)
Glare Poor vision .............................. Spectacles with shaded or special-purpose
lenses, as suitable. See notes (9), (10).
Notes to Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart:
(1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate
protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective devices do not provide unlimited pro-
tection.
(2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As required by the standard, protection from both hazards must
be provided.
(3) Faceshields should only be worn over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
(4) As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet the requirements for shade designations in § 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted
and shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or identified as such.
(5) As required by the standard, persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective
devices fitted with prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear.
(6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face protection devices in a hazardous environment. It
should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to contact lens wearers.
(7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard areas.
(8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may be
necessary.
(9) Welding helmets or faceshields should be used only over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
(10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only, but are not acceptable eye protection for the sources
and operations listed for ‘‘impact.’’
(11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash entry. Eye and face protection should be designed and
used so that it provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash entry.
(12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens density. See note (4) . Select the darkest shade that allows
task performance.
9. Selection guidelines for head protection. All working around or under conveyor belts
head protection (helmets) is designed to pro- which are carrying parts or materials; work-
vide protection from impact and penetration ing below machinery or processes which
hazards caused by falling objects. Head pro- might cause material or objects to fall; and
tection is also available which provides pro- working on exposed energized conductors.
tection from electric shock and burn. When Some examples of occupations for which
selecting head protection, knowledge of po- head protection should be routinely consid-
tential electrical hazards is important. Class ered are: carpenters, electricians, linemen,
A helmets, in addition to impact and pene- mechanics and repairers, plumbers and pipe
tration resistance, provide electrical protec- fitters, assemblers, packers, wrappers, saw-
tion from low-voltage conductors (they are yers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, tim-
proof tested to 2,200 volts). Class B helmets, ber cutting and logging, stock handlers, and
in addition to impact and penetration resist- warehouse laborers.
ance, provide electrical protection from Beginning with the ANSI Z89.1–1997 stand-
high-voltage conductors (they are proof test- ard, ANSI updated the classification system
ed to 20,000 volts). Class C helmets provide for protective helmets. Prior revisions used
impact and penetration resistance (they are type classifications to distinguish between
usually made of aluminum which conducts caps and full brimmed hats. Beginning in
electricity), and should not be used around 1997, Type I designated helmets designed to
electrical hazards. reduce the force of impact resulting from a
Where falling object hazards are present, blow only to the top of the head, while Type
helmets must be worn. Some examples in- II designated helmets designed to reduce the
clude: working below other workers who are force of impact resulting from a blow to the
using tools and materials which could fall; top or sides of the head. Accordingly, if a
459
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
hazard assessment indicates that lateral im- how long it can be worn, and whether it can
pact to the head is foreseeable, employers be reused.
must select Type II helmets for their em- It is also important to know the perform-
ployees. To improve comprehension and use- ance characteristics of gloves relative to the
fulness, the 1997 revision also redesignated specific hazard anticipated; e.g., chemical
the electrical-protective classifications for hazards, cut hazards, flame hazards, etc.
helmets as follows: ‘‘Class G—General’’; hel- These performance characteristics should be
mets designed to reduce the danger of con- assessed by using standard test procedures.
tact with low-voltage conductors; ‘‘Class E—
Before purchasing gloves, the employer
Electrical’’; helmets designed to reduce the
should request documentation from the man-
danger of contact with conductors at higher
ufacturer that the gloves meet the appro-
voltage levels; and ‘‘Class C—Conductive’’;
helmets that provide no protection against priate test standard(s) for the hazard(s) an-
contact with electrical hazards. ticipated.
10. Selection guidelines for foot protection. Other factors to be considered for glove se-
Safety shoes and boots which meet the ANSI lection in general include:
Z41–1991 Standard provide both impact and (A) As long as the performance character-
compression protection. Where necessary, istics are acceptable, in certain cir-
safety shoes can be obtained which provide cumstances, it may be more cost effective to
puncture protection. In some work situa- regularly change cheaper gloves than to
tions, metatarsal protection should be pro- reuse more expensive types; and,
vided, and in other special situations elec- (B) The work activities of the employee
trical conductive or insulating safety shoes should be studied to determine the degree of
would be appropriate. dexterity required, the duration, frequency,
Safety shoes or boots with impact protec- and degree of exposure of the hazard, and the
tion would be required for carrying or han- physical stresses that will be applied.
dling materials such as packages, objects, With respect to selection of gloves for pro-
parts or heavy tools, which could be dropped; tection against chemical hazards:
and, for other activities where objects might
(A) The toxic properties of the chemical(s)
fall onto the feet. Safety shoes or boots with
must be determined; in particular, the abil-
compression protection would be required for
ity of the chemical to cause local effects on
work activities involving skid trucks (man-
ual material handling carts) around bulk the skin and /or to pass through the skin and
rolls (such as paper rolls) and around heavy cause systemic effects;
pipes, all of which could potentially roll over (B) Generally, any ‘‘chemical resistant’’
an employee’s feet. Safety shoes or boots glove can be used for dry powders;
with puncture protection would be required (C) For mixtures and formulated products
where sharp objects such as nails, wire, (unless specific test data are available), a
tacks, screws, large staples, scrap metal etc., glove should be selected on the basis of the
could be stepped on by employees causing a chemical component with the shortest
foot injury. breakthrough time, since it is possible for
Some occupations (not a complete list) for solvents to carry active ingredients through
which foot protection should be routinely polymeric materials; and,
considered are: shipping and receiving (D) Employees must be able to remove the
clerks, stock clerks, carpenters, electricians, gloves in such a manner as to prevent skin
machinists, mechanics and repairers, plumb- contamination.
ers and pipe fitters, structural metal work- 12. Cleaning and maintenance. It is impor-
ers, assemblers, drywall installers and lath-
tant that all PPE be kept clean and properly
ers, packers, wrappers, craters, punch and
maintained. Cleaning is particularly impor-
stamping press operators, sawyers, welders,
laborers, freight handlers, gardeners and tant for eye and face protection where dirty
grounds-keepers, timber cutting and logging or fogged lenses could impair vision.
workers, stock handlers and warehouse la- For the purposes of compliance with
borers. § 1910.132 (a) and (b), PPE should be in-
11. Selection guidelines for hand protection. spected, cleaned, and maintained at regular
Gloves are often relied upon to prevent cuts, intervals so that the PPE provides the req-
abrasions, burns, and skin contact with uisite protection.
chemicals that are capable of causing local It is also important to ensure that con-
or systemic effects following dermal expo- taminated PPE which cannot be decontami-
sure. OSHA is unaware of any gloves that nated is disposed of in a manner that pro-
provide protection against all potential hand tects employees from exposure to hazards.
hazards, and commonly available glove ma-
terials provide only limited protection [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 74
against many chemicals. Therefore, it is im- FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009]
portant to select the most appropriate glove
for a particular application and to determine
460
Subpart J—General Environmental of employment, containing toilet fa-

Controls cilities for use by employees.
Toxic material means a material in
concentration or amount which ex-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754),
ceeds the applicable limit established
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55– by a standard, such as §§ 1910.1000 and
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 1910.1001 or, in the absence of an appli-
5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), as cable standard, which is of such tox-
applicable. icity so as to constitute a recognized
Sections 1910.141, 1910.142, 1910.145, 1910.146, hazard that is causing or is likely to
and 1910.147 also issued under 29 CFR part cause death or serious physical harm.
1911.
Urinal means a toilet facility main-
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35566, June tained within a toilet room for the sole
13, 2013, the authority citation; was revised, purpose of urination.
effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the convenience
Water closet means a toilet facility
of the user, the revised text is set forth as
follows: maintained within a toilet room for
AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec- the purpose of both defecation and uri-
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), nation and which is flushed with water.
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 Wet process means any process or op-
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), eration in a workroom which normally
5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1– results in surfaces upon which employ-
2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. ees may walk or stand becoming wet.
Sections 1910.141, 1910.142, 1910.145, 1910.146,
and 1910.147 also issued under 29 CFR part (3) Housekeeping. (i) All places of em-
1911. ployment shall be kept clean to the ex-
tent that the nature of the work al-
§ 1910.141 Sanitation. lows.
(a) General—(1) Scope. This section (ii) The floor of every workroom shall
applies to permanent places of employ- be maintained, so far as practicable, in
ment. a dry condition. Where wet processes
(2) Definitions applicable to this section. are used, drainage shall be maintained
Nonwater carriage toilet facility, means and false floors, platforms, mats, or
a toilet facility not connected to a other dry standing places shall be pro-
sewer. vided, where practicable, or appro-
Number of employees means, unless priate waterproof footgear shall be pro-
otherwise specified, the maximum vided.
number of employees present at any (iii) To facilitate cleaning, every
one time on a regular shift. floor, working place, and passageway
Personal service room, means a room shall be kept free from protruding
used for activities not directly con- nails, splinters, loose boards, and un-
nected with the production or service necessary holes and openings.
function performed by the establish- (4) Waste disposal. (i) Any receptacle
ment. Such activities include, but are used for putrescible solid or liquid
not limited to, first-aid, medical serv- waste or refuse shall be so constructed
ices, dressing, showering, toilet use, that it does not leak and may be thor-
washing, and eating. oughly cleaned and maintained in a
Potable water means water that meets sanitary condition. Such a receptacle
the standards for drinking purposes of shall be equipped with a solid tight-fit-
the State or local authority having ju- ting cover, unless it can be maintained
risdiction, or water that meets the in a sanitary condition without a
quality standards prescribed by the cover. This requirement does not pro-
U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- hibit the use of receptacles which are
cy’s National Primary Drinking Water designed to permit the maintenance of
Regulations (40 CFR 141). a sanitary condition without regard to
Toilet facility, means a fixture main- the aforementioned requirements.
tained within a toilet room for the pur- (ii) All sweepings, solid or liquid
pose of defecation or urination, or wastes, refuse, and garbage shall be re-
both. moved in such a manner as to avoid
Toilet room, means a room maintained creating a menace to health and as
within or on the premises of any place often as necessary or appropriate to
461
maintain the place of employment in a does not contain concentrations of
sanitary condition. chemicals, fecal coliform, or other sub-
(5) Vermin control. Every enclosed stances which could create insanitary
workplace shall be so constructed, conditions or be harmful to employees.
equipped, and maintained, so far as (c) Toilet facilities—(1) General. (i) Ex-
reasonably practicable, as to prevent cept as otherwise indicated in this
the entrance or harborage of rodents, paragraph (c)(1)(i), toilet facilities, in
insects, and other vermin. A con- toilet rooms separate for each sex,
tinuing and effective extermination shall be provided in all places of em-
program shall be instituted where their ployment in accordance with table J–1
presence is detected. of this section. The number of facilities
(b) Water supply—(1) Potable water. (i) to be provided for each sex shall be
Potable water shall be provided in all based on the number of employees of
places of employment, for drinking, that sex for whom the facilities are fur-
washing of the person, cooking, wash- nished. Where toilet rooms will be oc-
ing of foods, washing of cooking or eat- cupied by no more than one person at a
ing utensils, washing of food prepara- time, can be locked from the inside,
tion or processing premises, and per- and contain at least one water closet,
sonal service rooms. separate toilet rooms for each sex need
(ii) [Reserved] not be provided. Where such single-oc-
(iii) Portable drinking water dis- cupancy rooms have more than one toi-
pensers shall be designed, constructed, let facility, only one such facility in
and serviced so that sanitary condi- each toilet room shall be counted for
tions are maintained, shall be capable the purpose of table J–1.
of being closed, and shall be equipped
with a tap. TABLE J–1
(iv) [Reserved]
Minimum
(v) Open containers such as barrels, number of
Number of employees
pails, or tanks for drinking water from water clos-
ets 1
which the water must be dipped or
poured, whether or not they are fitted 1 to 15 ................................................................. 1
with a cover, are prohibited. 16 to 35 ............................................................... 2
(vi) A common drinking cup and 36 to 55 ............................................................... 3
other common utensils are prohibited. 56 to 80 ............................................................... 4
81 to 110 ............................................................. 5.
(2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for 111 to 150 ........................................................... 6
nonpotable water, such as water for in- Over 150 .............................................................. (2)
dustrial or firefighting purposes, shall 1 Where toilet facilities will not be used by women, urinals
be posted or otherwise marked in a may be provided instead of water closets, except that the
manner that will indicate clearly that number of water closets in such cases shall not be reduced to
less than 2⁄3 of the minimum specified.
the water is unsafe and is not to be 2 1 additional fixture for each additional 40 employees.
used for drinking, washing of the per-

son, cooking, washing of food, washing (ii) The requirements of paragraph
of cooking or eating utensils, washing (c)(1)(i) of this section do not apply to
of food preparation or processing prem- mobile crews or to normally unat-
ises, or personal service rooms, or for tended work locations so long as em-
washing clothes. ployees working at these locations
(ii) Construction of nonpotable water have transportation immediately
systems or systems carrying any other available to nearby toilet facilities
nonpotable substance shall be such as which meet the other requirements of
to prevent backflow or backsiphonage this subparagraph.
into a potable water system. (iii) The sewage disposal method
(iii) Nonpotable water shall not be shall not endanger the health of em-
used for washing any portion of the ployees.
person, cooking or eating utensils, or (2) Construction of toilet rooms. (i)
clothing. Nonpotable water may be Each water closet shall occupy a sepa-
used for cleaning work premises, other rate compartment with a door and
than food processing and preparation walls or partitions between fixtures
premises and personal service rooms: sufficiently high to assure privacy.
Provided, That this nonpotable water (ii) [Reserved]
462
(d) Washing facilities—(1) General. paragraph shall apply only where em-
Washing facilities shall be maintained ployees are permitted to consume food
in a sanitary condition. or beverages, or both, on the premises.
(2) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be (2) Eating and drinking areas. No em-
made available in all places of employ- ployee shall be allowed to consume
ment. The requirements of this sub- food or beverages in a toilet room nor
division do not apply to mobile crews in any area exposed to a toxic mate-
or to normally unattended work loca- rial.
tions if employees working at these lo- (3) Waste disposal containers. Recep-
cations have transportation readily tacles constructed of smooth, corrosion
available to nearby washing facilities resistant, easily cleanable, or dispos-
which meet the other requirements of able materials, shall be provided and
this paragraph. used for the disposal of waste food. The
(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided number, size, and location of such re-
with hot and cold running water, or ceptacles shall encourage their use and
tepid running water. not result in overfilling. They shall be
(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing emptied not less frequently than once
agents shall be provided. each working day, unless unused, and
(iv) Individual hand towels or sec- shall be maintained in a clean and san-
tions thereof, of cloth or paper, air itary condition. Receptacles shall be
blowers or clean individual sections of provided with a solid tight-fitting
continuous cloth toweling, convenient cover unless sanitary conditions can be
to the lavatories, shall be provided. maintained without use of a cover.
(3) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are (4) Sanitary storage. No food or bev-
required by a particular standard, the erages shall be stored in toilet rooms
showers shall be provided in accord- or in an area exposed to a toxic mate-
ance with paragraphs (d)(3) (ii) through rial.
(v) of this section.
(h) Food handling. All employee food
(ii) One shower shall be provided for
service facilities and operations shall
each 10 employees of each sex, or nu-
be carried out in accordance with
merical fraction thereof, who are re-
sound hygienic principles. In all places
quired to shower during the same shift.
of employment where all or part of the
(iii) Body soap or other appropriate
food service is provided, the food dis-
cleansing agents convenient to the
pensed shall be wholesome, free from
showers shall be provided as specified
spoilage, and shall be processed, pre-
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section.
pared, handled, and stored in such a
(iv) Showers shall be provided with
manner as to be protected against con-
hot and cold water feeding a common
tamination.
discharge line.
(v) Employees who use showers shall [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
be provided with individual clean tow- FR 18446, April 28, 1975; 40 FR 23073, May 28,
els. 1975; 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 63 FR 33466,
(e) Change rooms. Whenever employ- June 18, 1998; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011]
ees are required by a particular stand-
ard to wear protective clothing because § 1910.142 Temporary labor camps.
of the possibility of contamination (a) Site. (1) All sites used for camps
with toxic materials, change rooms shall be adequately drained. They shall
equipped with storage facilities for not be subject to periodic flooding, nor
street clothes and separate storage fa- located within 200 feet of swamps,
cilities for the protective clothing pools, sink holes, or other surface col-
shall be provided. lections of water unless such quiescent
(f) Clothes drying facilities. Where water surfaces can be subjected to mos-
working clothes are provided by the quito control measures. The camp shall
employer and become wet or are be located so the drainage from and
washed between shifts, provision shall through the camp will not endanger
be made to insure that such clothing is any domestic or public water supply.
dry before reuse. All sites shall be graded, ditched, and
(g) Consumption of food and beverages rendered free from depressions in which
on the premises—(1) Application. This water may become a nuisance.
463
(2) All sites shall be adequate in size (8) All exterior openings shall be ef-
to prevent overcrowding of necessary fectively screened with 16–mesh mate-
structures. The principal camp area in rial. All screen doors shall be equipped
which food is prepared and served and with self-closing devices.
where sleeping quarters are located (9) In a room where workers cook,
shall be at least 500 feet from any area live, and sleep a minimum of 100 square
in which livestock is kept. feet per person shall be provided. Sani-
(3) The grounds and open areas sur- tary facilities shall be provided for
rounding the shelters shall be main- storing and preparing food.
tained in a clean and sanitary condi- (10) In camps where cooking facilities
tion free from rubbish, debris, waste are used in common, stoves (in ratio of
paper, garbage, or other refuse. one stove to 10 persons or one stove to
(b) Shelter. (1) Every shelter in the two families) shall be provided in an
camp shall be constructed in a manner enclosed and screened shelter. Sanitary
which will provide protection against facilities shall be provided for storing
the elements. and preparing food.
(2) Each room used for sleeping pur- (11) All heating, cooking, and water
poses shall contain at least 50 square heating equipment shall be installed in
feet of floor space for each occupant. accordance with State and local ordi-
nances, codes, and regulations gov-
At least a 7–foot ceiling shall be pro-
erning such installations. If a camp is
vided.
used during cold weather, adequate
(3) Beds, cots, or bunks, and suitable
heating equipment shall be provided.
storage facilities such as wall lockers (c) Water supply. (1) An adequate and
for clothing and personal articles shall convenient water supply, approved by
be provided in every room used for the appropriate health authority, shall
sleeping purposes. Such beds or similar be provided in each camp for drinking,
facilities shall be spaced not closer cooking, bathing, and laundry pur-
than 36 inches both laterally and end poses.
to end, and shall be elevated at least 12 (2) A water supply shall be deemed
inches from the floor. If double-deck adequate if it is capable of delivering 35
bunks are used, they shall be spaced gallons per person per day to the camp-
not less than 48 inches both laterally site at a peak rate of 21⁄2 times the av-
and end to end. The minimum clear erage hourly demand.
space between the lower and upper (3) The distribution lines shall be ca-
bunk shall be not less than 27 inches. pable of supplying water at normal op-
Triple-deck bunks are prohibited. erating pressures to all fixtures for si-
(4) The floors of each shelter shall be multaneous operation. Water outlets
constructed of wood, asphalt, or con- shall be distributed throughout the
crete. Wooden floors shall be of smooth camp in such a manner that no shelter
and tight construction. The floors shall is more than 100 feet from a yard hy-
be kept in good repair. drant if water is not piped to the shel-
(5) All wooden floors shall be ele- ters.
vated not less than 1 foot above the (4) Where water under pressure is
ground level at all points to prevent available, one or more drinking foun-
dampness and to permit free circula- tains shall be provided for each 100 oc-
tion of air beneath. cupants or fraction thereof. Common
(6) Nothing in this section shall be drinking cups are prohibited.
construed to prohibit ‘‘banking’’ with (d) Toilet facilities. (1) Toilet facilities
earth or other suitable material around adequate for the capacity of the camp
the outside walls in areas subject to ex- shall be provided.
treme low temperatures. (2) Each toilet room shall be located
(7) All living quarters shall be pro- so as to be accessible without any indi-
vided with windows the total of which vidual passing through any sleeping
shall be not less than one-tenth of the room. Toilet rooms shall have a win-
floor area. At least one-half of each dow not less than 6 square feet in area
window shall be so constructed that it opening directly to the outside area or
can be opened for purposes of ventila- otherwise be satisfactorily ventilated.
tion. All outside openings shall be screened
464
with 16–mesh material. No fixture, (10) Privies and toilet rooms shall be
water closet, chemical toilet, or urinal kept in a sanitary condition. They
shall be located in a room used for shall be cleaned at least daily.
other than toilet purposes. (e) Sewage disposal facilities. In camps
(3) A toilet room shall be located where public sewers are available, all
within 200 feet of the door of each sewer lines and floor drains from build-
sleeping room. No privy shall be closer ings shall be connected thereto.
than 100 feet to any sleeping room, din- (f) Laundry, handwashing, and bathing
ing room, lunch area, or kitchen. facilities. (1) Laundry, handwashing,
(4) Where the toilet rooms are shared, and bathing facilities shall be provided
such as in multifamily shelters and in in the following ratio:
barracks type facilities, separate toilet (i) Handwash basin per family shelter
rooms shall be provided for each sex. or per six persons in shared facilities.
These rooms shall be distinctly marked (ii) Shower head for every 10 persons.
‘‘for men’’ and ‘‘for women’’ by signs (iii) Laundry tray or tub for every 30
printed in English and in the native persons.
language of the persons occupying the (iv) Slop sink in each building used
camp, or marked with easily under- for laundry, hand washing, and bath-
stood pictures or symbols. If the facili- ing.
ties for each sex are in the same build- (2) Floors shall be of smooth finish
ing, they shall be separated by solid but not slippery materials; they shall
walls or partitions extending from the be impervious to moisture. Floor
floor to the roof or ceiling. drains shall be provided in all shower
(5) Where toilet facilities are shared, baths, shower rooms, or laundry rooms
the number of water closets or privy to remove waste water and facilitate
seats provided for each sex shall be cleaning. All junctions of the curbing
based on the maximum number of per- and the floor shall be coved. The walls
and partitions of shower rooms shall be
sons of that sex which the camp is de-
smooth and impervious to the height of
signed to house at any one time, in the
splash.
ratio of one such unit to each 15 per-
(3) An adequate supply of hot and
sons, with a minimum of two units for
cold running water shall be provided
any shared facility.
for bathing and laundry purposes. Fa-
(6) Urinals shall be provided on the cilities for heating water shall be pro-
basis of one unit or 2 linear feet of uri- vided.
nal trough for each 25 men. The floor
(4) Every service building shall be
from the wall and for a distance not provided with equipment capable of
less than 15 inches measured from the maintaining a temperature of at least
outward edge of the urinals shall be 70 °F. during cold weather.
constructed of materials impervious to
(5) Facilities for drying clothes shall
moisture. Where water under pressure be provided.
is available, urinals shall be provided
(6) All service buildings shall be kept
with an adequate water flush. Urinal
clean.
troughs in privies shall drain freely
(g) Lighting. Where electric service is
into the pit or vault and the construc-
available, each habitable room in a
tion of this drain shall be such as to ex-
camp shall be provided with at least
clude flies and rodents from the pit.
one ceiling-type light fixture and at
(7) Every water closet installed on or least one separate floor- or wall-type
after August 31, 1971, shall be located convenience outlet. Laundry and toilet
in a toilet room. rooms and rooms where people con-
(8) Each toilet room shall be lighted gregate shall contain at least one
naturally, or artificially by a safe type ceiling- or wall-type fixture. Light lev-
of lighting at all hours of the day and els in toilet and storage rooms shall be
night. at least 20 foot-candles 30 inches from
(9) An adequate supply of toilet paper the floor. Other rooms, including
shall be provided in each privy, water kitchens and living quarters, shall be
closet, or chemical toilet compart- at least 30 foot-candles 30 inches from
ment. the floor.
465
(h) Refuse disposal. (1) Fly-tight, ro- intendent to report immediately to the
dent-tight, impervious, cleanable or local health officer the name and ad-
single service containers, approved by dress of any individual in the camp
the appropriate health authority shall known to have or suspected of having a
be provided for the storage of garbage. communicable disease.
At least one such container shall be (2) Whenever there shall occur in any
provided for each family shelter and camp a case of suspected food poi-
shall be located within 100 feet of each soning or an unusual prevalence of any
shelter on a wooden, metal, or concrete illness in which fever, diarrhea, sore
stand. throat, vomiting, or jaundice is a
(2) Garbage containers shall be kept prominent symptom, it shall be the
clean. duty of the camp superintendent to re-
(3) Garbage containers shall be port immediately the existence of the
emptied when full, but not less than outbreak to the health authority by
twice a week. telegram, telephone, electronic mail or
(i) Construction and operation of kitch- any other method that is equally fast.
ens, dining hall, and feeding facilities. (1)
In all camps where central dining or FR 14696, Apr. 6, 1982; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30,
multiple family feeding operations are 1984; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466,
permitted or provided, the food han- June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 70 FR
dling facilities shall comply with the 53929, Sept. 13, 2005]
requirements of the ‘‘Food Service
Sanitation Ordinance and Code,’’ Part § 1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal
V of the ‘‘Food Service Sanitation systems. [Reserved]
Manual,’’ U.S. Public Health Service
Publication 934 (1965), which is incor- § 1910.144 Safety color code for mark-
ing physical hazards.
porated by reference as specified in
§ 1910.6. (a) Color identification—(1) Red. Red
(2) A properly constructed kitchen shall be the basic color for the identi-
and dining hall adequate in size, sepa- fication of:
rate from the sleeping quarters of any (i) Fire protection equipment and appa-
of the workers or their families, shall ratus. [Reserved]
be provided in connection with all food (ii) Danger. Safety cans or other port-
handling facilities. There shall be no able containers of flammable liquids
direct opening from living or sleeping having a flash point at or below 80 °F,
quarters into a kitchen or dining hall. table containers of flammable liquids
(3) No person with any communicable (open cup tester), excluding shipping
disease shall be employed or permitted containers, shall be painted red with
to work in the preparation, cooking, some additional clearly visible identi-
serving, or other handling of food, food- fication either in the form of a yellow
stuffs, or materials used therein, in band around the can or the name of the
any kitchen or dining room operated in contents conspicuously stenciled or
connection with a camp or regularly painted on the can in yellow. Red
used by persons living in a camp. lights shall be provided at barricades
(j) Insect and rodent control. Effective and at temporary obstructions. Danger
measures shall be taken to prevent in- signs shall be painted red.
festation by and harborage of animal (iii) Stop. Emergency stop bars on
or insect vectors or pests. hazardous machines such as rubber
(k) First aid. (1) Adequate first aid fa- mills, wire blocks, flat work ironers,
cilities approved by a health authority etc., shall be red. Stop buttons or elec-
shall be maintained and made available trical switches which letters or other
in every labor camp for the emergency markings appear, used for emergency
treatment of injured persons. stopping of machinery shall be red.
(2) Such facilities shall be in charge (2) [Reserved]
of a person trained to administer first (3) Yellow. Yellow shall be the basic
aid and shall be readily accessible for color for designating caution and for
use at all times. marking physical hazards such as:
(l) Reporting communicable disease. (1) Striking against, stumbling, falling,
It shall be the duty of the camp super- tripping, and ‘‘caught in between.’’
466
(b) [Reserved] (d) Sign design—(1) Design features. All
signs shall be furnished with rounded
FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
or blunt corners and shall be free from
1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. sharp edges, burrs, splinters, or other
14, 2007] sharp projections. The ends or heads of
bolts or other fastening devices shall
§ 1910.145 Specifications for accident be located in such a way that they do
prevention signs and tags. not constitute a hazard.
(a) Scope. (1) These specifications (2) Danger signs. The colors red,
apply to the design, application, and black, and white shall be those of
use of signs or symbols (as included in opaque glossy samples as specified in
paragraphs (c) through (e) of this sec- Table 1 of Fundamental Specification
tion) intended to indicate and, insofar of Safety Colors for CIE Standard
as possible, to define specific hazards of Source ‘‘C’’, American National Stand-
a nature such that failure to designate ard Z53.1–1967, which is incorporated by
them may lead to accidental injury to reference as specified in § 1910.6.
workers or the public, or both, or to (3) [Reserved]
property damage. These specifications (4) Caution signs. Standard color of
are intended to cover all safety signs the background shall be yellow; and
except those designed for streets, high- the panel, black with yellow letters.
ways, and railroads. These specifica- Any letters used against the yellow
tions do not apply to plant bulletin background shall be black. The colors
boards or to safety posters. shall be those of opaque glossy samples
as specified in Table 1 of American Na-
(2) All new signs and replacements of
tional Standard Z53.1–1967.
old signs shall be in accordance with
(5) [Reserved]
these specifications.
(6) Safety instruction signs. Standard
(b) Definitions. As used in this sec- color of the background shall be white;
tion, the word sign refers to a surface and the panel, green with white letters.
on prepared for the warning of, or safe- Any letters used against the white
ty instructions of, industrial workers background shall be black. The colors
or members of the public who may be shall be those of opaque glossy samples
exposed to hazards. Excluded from this as specified in Table 1 of American Na-
definition, however, are news releases, tional Standard, Z53.1–1967.
displays commonly known as safety (7)–(9) [Reserved]
posters, and bulletins used for em- (10) Slow-moving vehicle emblem. This
ployee education. emblem (see fig. J–7) consists of a fluo-
(c) Classification of signs according to rescent yellow-orange triangle with a
use—(1) Danger signs. (i) There shall be dark red reflective border. The yellow-
no variation in the type of design of orange fluorescent triangle is a highly
signs posted to warn of specific dangers visible color for daylight exposure. The
and radiation hazards. reflective border defines the shape of
(ii) All employees shall be instructed the fluorescent color in daylight and
that danger signs indicate immediate creates a hollow red triangle in the
danger and that special precautions are path of motor vehicle headlights at
necessary. night. The emblem is intended as a
(2) Caution signs. (i) Caution signs unique identification for, and it shall
shall be used only to warn against po- be used only on, vehicles which by de-
tential hazards or to caution against sign move slowly (25 m.p.h. or less) on
unsafe practices. the public roads. The emblem is not a
(ii) All employees shall be instructed clearance marker for wide machinery
that caution signs indicate a possible nor is it intended to replace required
hazard against which proper precaution lighting or marking of slow-moving ve-
should be taken. hicles. Neither the color film pattern
(3) Safety instruction signs. Safety in- and its dimensions nor the backing
struction signs shall be used where shall be altered to permit use of adver-
there is a need for general instructions tising or other markings. The material,
and suggestions relative to safety location, mounting, etc., of the em-
measures. blem shall be in accordance with the
467
American Society of Agricultural En- (2) Definitions. Biological hazard or
gineers Emblem for Identifying Slow- BIOHAZARD means those infectious
Moving Vehicles, ASAE R276, 1967, or agents presenting a risk of death, in-
ASAE S276.2 (ANSI B114.1–1971), which jury or illness to employees.
are incorporated by reference as speci- Major message means that portion of
fied in § 1910.6. a tag’s inscription that is more specific
than the signal word and that indicates
the specific hazardous condition or the
instruction to be communicated to the
employee. Examples include: ‘‘High
Voltage,’’ ‘‘Close Clearance,’’ ‘‘Do Not
Start,’’ or ‘‘Do Not Use’’ or a cor-
responding pictograph used with a
written text or alone.
Pictograph means a pictorial rep-
resentation used to identify a haz-
ardous condition or to convey a safety
instruction.
Signal word means that portion of a
tag’s inscription that contains the
word or words that are intended to cap-
ture the employee’s immediate atten-
tion.
Tag means a device usually made of
FIGURE J–7—SLOW-MOVING VEHICLE EMBLEM card, paper, pasteboard, plastic or
NOTE: All dimensions are in inches. other material used to identify a haz-
(e) Sign wordings. (1) [Reserved] ardous condition.
(2) Nature of wording. The wording of (3) Use. Tags shall be used as a means
any sign should be easily read and con- to prevent accidental injury or illness
cise. The sign should contain sufficient to employees who are exposed to haz-
information to be easily understood. ardous or potentially hazardous condi-
The wording should make a positive, tions, equipment or operations which
rather than negative suggestion and are out of the ordinary, unexpected or
should be accurate in fact. not readily apparent. Tags shall be
(3) [Reserved] used until such time as the identified
(4) Biological hazard signs. The biohazard is eliminated or the hazardous
logical hazard warning shall be used to operation is completed. Tags need not
signify the actual or potential presence be used where signs, guarding or other
of a biohazard and to identify equip- positive means of protection are being
ment, containers, rooms, materials, ex- used.
perimental animals, or combinations (4) General tag criteria. All required
thereof, which contain, or are contami- tags shall meet the following criteria:
nated with, viable hazardous agents. (i) Tags shall contain a signal word
For the purpose of this subparagraph and a major message.
the term ‘‘biological hazard,’’ or ‘‘bio- (A) The signal word shall be either
hazard,’’ shall include only those infec- ‘‘Danger,’’ ‘‘Caution,’’ or ‘‘Biological
tious agents presenting a risk or poten- Hazard,’’ ‘‘BIOHAZARD,’’ or the bio-
tial risk to the well-being of man. logical hazard symbol.
(f) Accident prevention tags—(1) Scope (B) The major message shall indicate
and application. (i) This paragraph (f) the specific hazardous condition or the
applies to all accident prevention tags instruction to be communicated to the
used to identify hazardous conditions employee.
and provide a message to employees (ii) The signal word shall be readable
with respect to hazardous conditions as at a minimum distance of five feet (1.52
set forth in paragraph (f)(3) of this sec- m) or such greater distance as war-
tion, or to meet the specific tagging re- ranted by the hazard.
quirements of other OSHA standards. (iii) The tag’s major message shall be
(ii) This paragraph (f) does not apply presented in either pictographs, writ-
to construction or agriculture. ten text or both.
468
EC27OC91.028
(iv) The signal word and the major
message shall be understandable to all
employees who may be exposed to the
identified hazard.
(v) All employees shall be informed
as to the meaning of the various tags
used throughout the workplace and
what special precautions are necessary.
(vi) Tags shall be affixed as close as
safely possible to their respective haz-
ards by a positive means such as
string, wire, or adhesive that prevents
their loss or unintentional removal.
(5) Danger tags. Danger tags shall be
used in major hazard situations where
an immediate hazard presents a threat
of death or serious injury to employ-
ees. Danger tags shall be used only in
these situations.
(6) Caution tags. Caution tags shall be
used in minor hazard situations where
a non-immediate or potential hazard or
unsafe practice presents a lesser threat
BIOLOGICAL HAZARD SYMBOL CONFIGURATION
of employee injury. Caution tags shall
(9) Other tags. Other tags may be used
be used only in these situations.
in addition to those required by this
(7) Warning tags. Warning tags may paragraph (f), or in other situations
be used to represent a hazard level be- where this paragraph (f) does not re-
tween ‘‘Caution’’ and ‘‘Danger,’’ in- quire tags, provided that they do not
stead of the required ‘‘Caution’’ tag, detract from the impact or visibility of
provided that they have a signal word the signal word and major message of
of ‘‘Warning,’’ an appropriate major any required tag.
message, and otherwise meet the gen-
eral tag criteria of paragraph (f)(4) of APPENDIXES TO § 1910.145(f), ACCIDENT
PREVENTION TAGS
this section.
(8) Biological hazard tags. (i) Biologi- APPENDIX A TO § 1910.145(f)—RECOMMENDED
cal hazard tags shall be used to iden- COLOR CODING
tify the actual or potential presence of While the standard does not specifically
a biological hazard and to identify mandate colors to be used on accident pre-
equipment, containers, rooms, experi- vention tags, the following color scheme is
mental animals, or combinations recommended by OSHA for meeting the re-
quirements of this section:
thereof, that contain or are contami-
‘‘DANGER’’—Red, or predominantly red,
nated with hazardous biological agents. with lettering or symbols in a contrasting
(ii) The symbol design for biological color.
hazard tags shall conform to the design ‘‘CAUTION’’—Yellow, or predominantly
shown below: yellow, with lettering or symbols in a con-
trasting color.
‘‘WARNING’’—Orange, or predominantly
orange, with lettering or symbols in a con-
trasting color.
‘‘BIOLOGICAL HAZARD’’—Fluorescent or-
ange or orange-red, or predominantly so,
with lettering or symbols in a contrasting
color.
APPENDIX B TO § (1910.145(f)—REFERENCES FOR

FURTHER INFORMATION
The following references provide informa-
tion which can be helpful in understanding
469
EC27OC91.086
the requirements contained in various sec- Standard Observer,’’ of ANSI Z535.1–
tions of the standard: 2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in
1. Bresnahan, Thomas F., and Bryk, Jo- § 1910.6.
seph, ‘‘The Hazard Association Values of Ac-
cident Prevention Signs’’, Journal of Amer- * * * * *
ican Society of Safety Engineers; January 1975.
2. Dreyfuss, H., Symbol Sourcebook, McGraw (4) Caution signs. The standard color of the
Hill; New York, NY, 1972. background shall be yellow; and the panel,
3. Glass, R.A. and others, Some Criteria for black with yellow letters. Any letters used
Colors and Signs in Workplaces, National Bu- against the yellow background shall be
reau of Standards, Washington DC, 1983. black. The colors shall be those of opaque
4. Graphic Symbols for Public Areas and Oc- glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of
cupational Environments, Treasury Board of ANSI Z53.1–1967 or Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1–
Canada, Ottawa, Canada, July 1980. 2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in
5. Howett, G.L., Size of Letters Required for § 1910.6.
Visibility as a Function of Viewing Distance
and Observer Acuity, National Bureau of * * * * *
Standards, Washington DC, July 1983.
6. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., The As- (6) Safety instruction signs. The standard
sessment of Safety Symbol Understandability by color of the background shall be white; and
Different Testing Methods, National Bureau of the panel, green with white letters. Any let-
Standards, Washington DC, 1980. ters used against the white background shall
7. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., Workplace be black. The colors shall be those of opaque
Safety Symbols, National Bureau of Stand- glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of
ards, Washington DC, 1980. ANSI Z53.1–1967 or in Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1–
8. Modley, R. and Meyers, W.R., Handbook 2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in
of Pictorial Symbols, Dover Publication, New § 1910.6.
York, NY, 1976.
9. Product Safety Signs and Labels, FMC Cor- * * * * *
poration, Santa Clara, CA, 1978.
10. Safety Color Coding for Marking Physical § 1910.146 Permit-required confined
Hazards, Z53.1, American National Standards spaces.
Institute, New York, NY, 1979.
11. Signs and Symbols for the Occupational (a) Scope and application. This section
Environment, Can. 3–Z–321–77, Canadian contains requirements for practices
Standards Association, Ottawa, September and procedures to protect employees in
1977. general industry from the hazards of
12. Symbols for Industrial Safety, National entry into permit-required confined
Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, April
1982.
spaces. This section does not apply to
13. Symbol Signs, U.S. Department of Trans- agriculture, to construction, or to ship-
portation, Washington DC, November 1974. yard employment (Parts 1928, 1926, and
1915 of this chapter, respectively).
FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7,
(b) Definitions.
1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 33260, Acceptable entry conditions means the
Sept. 19, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR conditions that must exist in a permit
24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 44265, July 25, 2011] space to allow entry and to ensure that
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35566, June
employees involved with a permit-re-
13, 2013, § 1910.145 was amended by revising quired confined space entry can safely
paragraphs (d)(2), (d)(4), and (d)(6), effective enter into and work within the space.
Sept. 11, 2013. For the convenience of the Attendant means an individual sta-
user, the revised text is set forth as follows: tioned outside one or more permit
spaces who monitors the authorized en-
§ 1910.145 Specifications for accident pre-
vention signs and tags. trants and who performs all attend-
ant’s duties assigned in the employer’s
permit space program.
* * * * *
Authorized entrant means an em-
(d) * * * ployee who is authorized by the em-
(2) Danger signs. The colors red, black, and ployer to enter a permit space.
white shall be those of opaque glossy sam-
ples as specified in Table 1, ‘‘Fundamental
Blanking or blinding means the abso-
Specification of Safety Colors for CIE Stand- lute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by
ard Source ‘C,’ ’’ of ANSI Z53.1–1967 or in the fastening of a solid plate (such as a
Table 1, ‘‘Specification of the Safety Colors spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that
for CIE Illuminate C and the CIE 1931, 2 completely covers the bore and that is
470
capable of withstanding the maximum as long as that person is trained and
pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with equipped as required by this section for each
no leakage beyond the plate. role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry
supervisor may be passed from one indi-
Confined space means a space that:
vidual to another during the course of an
(1) Is large enough and so configured entry operation.
that an employee can bodily enter and
perform assigned work; and Hazardous atmosphere means an at-
(2) Has limited or restricted means mosphere that may expose employees
for entry or exit (for example, tanks, to the risk of death, incapacitation,
vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, impairment of ability to self-rescue
vaults, and pits are spaces that may (that is, escape unaided from a permit
have limited means of entry.); and space), injury, or acute illness from one
(3) Is not designed for continuous em- or more of the following causes:
ployee occupancy. (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in
Double block and bleed means the clo- excess of 10 percent of its lower flam-
sure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing mable limit (LFL);
and locking or tagging two in-line (2) Airborne combustible dust at a
valves and by opening and locking or concentration that meets or exceeds its
tagging a drain or vent valve in the LFL;
line between the two closed valves.
NOTE: This concentration may be approxi-
Emergency means any occurrence (in-
mated as a condition in which the dust ob-
cluding any failure of hazard control or scures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m)
monitoring equipment) or event inter- or less.
nal or external to the permit space
that could endanger entrants. (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentra-
Engulfment means the surrounding tion below 19.5 percent or above 23.5
and effective capture of a person by a percent;
liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid (4) Atmospheric concentration of any
substance that can be aspirated to substance for which a dose or a permis-
cause death by filling or plugging the sible exposure limit is published in sub-
respiratory system or that can exert part G, Occupational Health and Envi-
enough force on the body to cause ronmental Control, or in subpart Z, Toxic
death by strangulation, constriction, and Hazardous Substances, of this part
or crushing. and which could result in employee ex-
Entry means the action by which a posure in excess of its dose or permis-
person passes through an opening into sible exposure limit;
a permit-required confined space. NOTE: An atmospheric concentration of
Entry includes ensuing work activities any substance that is not capable of causing
in that space and is considered to have death, incapacitation, impairment of ability
occurred as soon as any part of the en- to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to
trant’s body breaks the plane of an its health effects is not covered by this pro-
opening into the space. vision.
Entry permit (permit) means the writ- (5) Any other atmospheric condition
ten or printed document that is pro- that is immediately dangerous to life
vided by the employer to allow and or health.
control entry into a permit space and
that contains the information specified NOTE: For air contaminants for which
OSHA has not determined a dose or permis-
in paragraph (f) of this section.
sible exposure limit, other sources of infor-
Entry supervisor means the person mation, such as Material Safety Data Sheets
(such as the employer, foreman, or that comply with the Hazard Communica-
crew chief) responsible for determining tion Standard, § 1910.1200 of this part, pub-
if acceptable entry conditions are lished information, and internal documents
present at a permit space where entry can provide guidance in establishing accept-
is planned, for authorizing entry and able atmospheric conditions.
overseeing entry operations, and for Hot work permit means the employer’s
terminating entry as required by this written authorization to perform oper-
section. ations (for example, riveting, welding,
NOTE: An entry supervisor also may serve cutting, burning, and heating) capable
as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, of providing a source of ignition.
471
Immediately dangerous to life or health (1) Contains or has a potential to
(IDLH) means any condition that poses contain a hazardous atmosphere;
an immediate or delayed threat to life (2) Contains a material that has the
or that would cause irreversible ad- potential for engulfing an entrant;
verse health effects or that would (3) Has an internal configuration
interfere with an individual’s ability to such that an entrant could be trapped
escape unaided from a permit space. or asphyxiated by inwardly converging
NOTE: Some materials—hydrogen fluoride walls or by a floor which slopes down-
gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may ward and tapers to a smaller cross- sec-
produce immediate transient effects that, tion; or
even if severe, may pass without medical at- (4) Contains any other recognized se-
tention, but are followed by sudden, possibly
fatal collapse 12–72 hours after exposure. The
rious safety or health hazard.
victim ‘‘feels normal’’ from recovery from Permit-required confined space program
transient effects until collapse. Such mate- (permit space program) means the em-
rials in hazardous quantities are considered ployer’s overall program for control-
to be ‘‘immediately’’ dangerous to life or ling, and, where appropriate, for pro-
health. tecting employees from, permit space
Inerting means the displacement of hazards and for regulating employee
the atmosphere in a permit space by a entry into permit spaces.
noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen) Permit system means the employer’s
to such an extent that the resulting at- written procedure for preparing and
mosphere is noncombustible. issuing permits for entry and for re-
NOTE: This procedure produces an IDLH ox- turning the permit space to service fol-
ygen-deficient atmosphere. lowing termination of entry.
Prohibited condition means any condi-
Isolation means the process by which tion in a permit space that is not al-
a permit space is removed from service lowed by the permit during the period
and completely protected against the
when entry is authorized.
release of energy and material into the
Rescue service means the personnel
space by such means as: blanking or
blinding; misaligning or removing sec- designated to rescue employees from
tions of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double permit spaces.
block and bleed system; lockout or Retrieval system means the equipment
tagout of all sources of energy; or (including a retrieval line, chest or
blocking or disconnecting all mechan- full-body harness, wristlets, if appro-
ical linkages. priate, and a lifting device or anchor)
Line breaking means the intentional used for non-entry rescue of persons
opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is from permit spaces.
or has been carrying flammable, corro- Testing means the process by which
sive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or the hazards that may confront entrants
any fluid at a volume, pressure, or tem- of a permit space are identified and
perature capable of causing injury. evaluated. Testing includes specifying
Non-permit confined space means a the tests that are to be performed in
confined space that does not contain the permit space.
or, with respect to atmospheric haz-
NOTE: Testing enables employers both to
ards, have the potential to contain any
devise and implement adequate control
hazard capable of causing death or seri- measures for the protection of authorized en-
ous physical harm. trants and to determine if acceptable entry
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an conditions are present immediately prior to,
atmosphere containing less than 19.5 and during, entry.
percent oxygen by volume.
Oxygen enriched atmosphere means an (c) General requirements. (1) The em-
atmosphere containing more than 23.5 ployer shall evaluate the workplace to
percent oxygen by volume. determine if any spaces are permit- re-
Permit-required confined space (permit quired confined spaces.
space) means a confined space that has NOTE: Proper application of the decision
one or more of the following character- flow chart in appendix A to § 1910.146 would
istics: facilitate compliance with this requirement.
472
(2) If the workplace contains permit of this section are documented by the
spaces, the employer shall inform ex- employer and are made available to
posed employees, by posting danger each employee who enters the permit
signs or by any other equally effective space under the terms of paragraph
means, of the existence and location of (c)(5) of this section or to that employ-
and the danger posed by the permit ee’s authorized representative; and
spaces. (F) Entry into the permit space
NOTE: A sign reading ‘‘DANGER—PERMIT-
under the terms of paragraph (c)(5)(i)
REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT of this section is performed in accord-
ENTER’’ or using other similar language ance with the requirements of para-
would satisfy the requirement for a sign. graph (c)(5)(ii) of this section.
(3) If the employer decides that its NOTE: See paragraph (c)(7) of this section
employees will not enter permit for reclassification of a permit space after
spaces, the employer shall take effec- all hazards within the space have been elimi-
nated.
tive measures to prevent its employees
from entering the permit spaces and (ii) The following requirements apply
shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1), to entry into permit spaces that meet
(c)(2), (c)(6), and (c)(8) of this section. the conditions set forth in paragraph
(4) If the employer decides that its (c)(5)(i) of this section.
employees will enter permit spaces, the (A) Any conditions making it unsafe
employer shall develop and implement to remove an entrance cover shall be
a written permit space program that eliminated before the cover is removed.
complies with this section. The written (B) When entrance covers are re-
program shall be available for inspec- moved, the opening shall be promptly
tion by employees and their authorized guarded by a railing, temporary cover,
representatives. or other temporary barrier that will
(5) An employer may use the alter- prevent an accidental fall through the
nate procedures specified in paragraph opening and that will protect each em-
(c)(5)(ii) of this section for entering a ployee working in the space from for-
permit space under the conditions set eign objects entering the space.
forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this sec- (C) Before an employee enters the
tion. space, the internal atmosphere shall be
(i) An employer whose employees tested, with a calibrated direct-reading
enter a permit space need not comply instrument, for oxygen content, for
with paragraphs (d) through (f) and (h) flammable gases and vapors, and for
through (k) of this section, provided potential toxic air contaminants, in
that: that order. Any employee who enters
(A) The employer can demonstrate the space, or that employee’s author-
that the only hazard posed by the per- ized representative, shall be provided
mit space is an actual or potential haz- an opportunity to observe the pre-
ardous atmosphere; entry testing required by this para-
(B) The employer can demonstrate graph.
that continuous forced air ventilation (D) There may be no hazardous at-
alone is sufficient to maintain that mosphere within the space whenever
permit space safe for entry; any employee is inside the space.
(C) The employer develops moni- (E) Continuous forced air ventilation
toring and inspection data that sup- shall be used, as follows:
ports the demonstrations required by (1) An employee may not enter the
paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and (c)(5)(i)(B) of space until the forced air ventilation
this section; has eliminated any hazardous atmos-
(D) If an initial entry of the permit phere;
space is necessary to obtain the data (2) The forced air ventilation shall be
required by paragraph (c)(5)(i)(C) of so directed as to ventilate the imme-
this section, the entry is performed in diate areas where an employee is or
compliance with paragraphs (d) will be present within the space and
through (k) of this section; shall continue until all employees have
(E) The determinations and sup- left the space;
porting data required by paragraphs (3) The air supply for the forced air
(c)(5)(i)(A), (c)(5)(i)(B), and (c)(5)(i)(C) ventilation shall be from a clean
473
source and may not increase the haz- graphs (d) through (k) of this section.
ards in the space. If testing and inspection during that
(F) The atmosphere within the space entry demonstrate that the hazards
shall be periodically tested as nec- within the permit space have been
essary to ensure that the continuous eliminated, the permit space may be
forced air ventilation is preventing the reclassified as a non-permit confined
accumulation of a hazardous atmos- space for as long as the hazards remain
phere. Any employee who enters the eliminated.
space, or that employee’s authorized
representative, shall be provided with NOTE: Control of atmospheric hazards
an opportunity to observe the periodic through forced air ventilation does not con-
stitute elimination of the hazards. Para-
testing required by this paragraph.
graph (c)(5) covers permit space entry where
(G) If a hazardous atmosphere is de- the employer can demonstrate that forced
tected during entry: air ventilation alone will control all hazards
(1) Each employee shall leave the in the space.
space immediately;
(2) The space shall be evaluated to (iii) The employer shall document
determine how the hazardous atmos- the basis for determining that all haz-
phere developed; and ards in a permit space have been elimi-
(3) Measures shall be implemented to nated, through a certification that con-
protect employees from the hazardous tains the date, the location of the
atmosphere before any subsequent space, and the signature of the person
entry takes place. making the determination. The certifi-
(H) The employer shall verify that cation shall be made available to each
the space is safe for entry and that the employee entering the space or to that
pre-entry measures required by para- employee’s authorized representative.
graph (c)(5)(ii) of this section have been (iv) If hazards arise within a permit
taken, through a written certification space that has been declassified to a
that contains the date, the location of non-permit space under paragraph
the space, and the signature of the per- (c)(7) of this section, each employee in
son providing the certification. The the space shall exit the space. The em-
certification shall be made before ployer shall then reevaluate the space
entry and shall be made available to and determine whether it must be re-
each employee entering the space or to classified as a permit space, in accord-
that employee’s authorized representa- ance with other applicable provisions
tive . of this section.
(6) When there are changes in the use (8) When an employer (host em-
or configuration of a non-permit con- ployer) arranges to have employees of
fined space that might increase the another employer (contractor) perform
hazards to entrants, the employer shall work that involves permit space entry,
reevaluate that space and, if necessary, the host employer shall:
reclassify it as a permit-required con-
(i) Inform the contractor that the
fined space.
workplace contains permit spaces and
(7) A space classified by the employer
as a permit-required confined space that permit space entry is allowed only
may be reclassified as a non-permit through compliance with a permit
confined space under the following pro- space program meeting the require-
cedures: ments of this section;
(i) If the permit space poses no actual (ii) Apprise the contractor of the ele-
or potential atmospheric hazards and if ments, including the hazards identified
all hazards within the space are elimi- and the host employer’s experience
nated without entry into the space, the with the space, that make the space in
permit space may be reclassified as a question a permit space;
non-permit confined space for as long (iii) Apprise the contractor of any
as the non-atmospheric hazards remain precautions or procedures that the host
eliminated. employer has implemented for the pro-
(ii) If it is necessary to enter the per- tection of employees in or near permit
mit space to eliminate hazards, such spaces where contractor personnel will
entry shall be performed under para- be working;
474
(iv) Coordinate entry operations with essary to eliminate or control atmos-
the contractor, when both host em- pheric hazards;
ployer personnel and contractor per- (v) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or
sonnel will be working in or near per- other barriers as necessary to protect
mit spaces, as required by paragraph entrants from external hazards; and
(d)(11) of this section; and (vi) Verifying that conditions in the
(v) Debrief the contractor at the con- permit space are acceptable for entry
clusion of the entry operations regard- throughout the duration of an author-
ing the permit space program followed ized entry.
and regarding any hazards confronted (4) Provide the following equipment
or created in permit spaces during (specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i)
entry operations. through (d)(4)(ix) of this section) at no
(9) In addition to complying with the cost to employees, maintain that
permit space requirements that apply equipment properly, and ensure that
to all employers, each contractor who employees use that equipment prop-
is retained to perform permit space erly:
entry operations shall: (i) Testing and monitoring equipment
(i) Obtain any available information needed to comply with paragraph (d)(5)
regarding permit space hazards and of this section;
entry operations from the host em- (ii) Ventilating equipment needed to
ployer; obtain acceptable entry conditions;
(ii) Coordinate entry operations with (iii) Communications equipment nec-
the host employer, when both host em- essary for compliance with paragraphs
ployer personnel and contractor per- (h)(3) and (i)(5) of this section;
sonnel will be working in or near per- (iv) Personal protective equipment
mit spaces, as required by paragraph insofar as feasible engineering and
(d)(11) of this section; and work practice controls do not ade-
(iii) Inform the host employer of the quately protect employees;
permit space program that the con- (v) Lighting equipment needed to en-
tractor will follow and of any hazards able employees to see well enough to
confronted or created in permit spaces, work safely and to exit the space
either through a debriefing or during quickly in an emergency;
the entry operation. (vi) Barriers and shields as required
by paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this section.
(d) Permit-required confined space pro-
(vii) Equipment, such as ladders,
gram (permit space program). Under
needed for safe ingress and egress by
the permit space program required by
authorized entrants;
paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the em-
(viii) Rescue and emergency equip-
ployer shall:
ment needed to comply with paragraph
(1) Implement the measures nec-
(d)(9) of this section, except to the ex-
essary to prevent unauthorized entry;
tent that the equipment is provided by
(2) Identify and evaluate the hazards rescue services; and
of permit spaces before employees (ix) Any other equipment necessary
enter them; for safe entry into and rescue from per-
(3) Develop and implement the mit spaces.
means, procedures, and practices nec- (5) Evaluate permit space conditions
essary for safe permit space entry oper- as follows when entry operations are
ations, including, but not limited to, conducted:
the following: (i) Test conditions in the permit
(i) Specifying acceptable entry condi- space to determine if acceptable entry
tions; conditions exist before entry is author-
(ii) Providing each authorized en- ized to begin, except that, if isolation
trant or that employee’s authorized of the space is infeasible because the
representative with the opportunity to space is large or is part of a continuous
observe any monitoring or testing of system (such as a sewer), pre-entry
permit spaces; testing shall be performed to the ex-
(iii) Isolating the permit space; tent feasible before entry is authorized
(iv) Purging, inerting, flushing, or and, if entry is authorized, entry condi-
ventilating the permit space as nections shall be continuously monitored
475
in the areas where authorized entrants itored without distraction from the at-
are working; tendant’s responsibilities under para-
(ii) Test or monitor the permit space graph (i) of this section;
as necessary to determine if acceptable (8) Designate the persons who are to
entry conditions are being maintained have active roles (as, for example, au-
during the course of entry operations; thorized entrants, attendants, entry
and supervisors, or persons who test or
(iii) When testing for atmospheric monitor the atmosphere in a permit
hazards, test first for oxygen, then for space) in entry operations, identify the
combustible gases and vapors, and then duties of each such employee, and pro-
for toxic gases and vapors. vide each such employee with the
(iv) Provide each authorized entrant training required by paragraph (g) of
or that employee’s authorized rep- this section;
resentative an opportunity to observe (9) Develop and implement proce-
the pre-entry and any subsequent test- dures for summoning rescue and emer-
ing or monitoring of permit spaces; gency services, for rescuing entrants
(v) Reevaluate the permit space in from permit spaces, for providing nec-
the presence of any authorized entrant essary emergency services to rescued
or that employee’s authorized rep- employees, and for preventing unau-
resentative who requests that the em- thorized personnel from attempting a
ployer conduct such reevaluation be- rescue;
cause the entrant or representative has (10) Develop and implement a system
reason to believe that the evaluation of for the preparation, issuance, use, and
that space may not have been ade- cancellation of entry permits as re-
quate; quired by this section;
(vi) Immediately provide each au- (11) Develop and implement proce-
thorized entrant or that employee’s au- dures to coordinate entry operations
thorized representative with the re- when employees of more than one em-
sults of any testing conducted in ac- ployer are working simultaneously as
cord with paragraph (d) of this section. authorized entrants in a permit space,
so that employees of one employer do
NOTE: Atmospheric testing conducted in
accordance with appendix B to § 1910.146 not endanger the employees of any
would be considered as satisfying the re- other employer;
quirements of this paragraph. For permit (12) Develop and implement proce-
space operations in sewers, atmospheric test- dures (such as closing off a permit
ing conducted in accordance with appendix space and canceling the permit) nec-
B, as supplemented by appendix E to essary for concluding the entry after
§ 1910.146, would be considered as satisfying entry operations have been completed;
the requirements of this paragraph.
(13) Review entry operations when
(6) Provide at least one attendant the employer has reason to believe that
outside the permit space into which the measures taken under the permit
entry is authorized for the duration of space program may not protect em-
entry operations; ployees and revise the program to cor-
rect deficiencies found to exist before
NOTE: Attendants may be assigned to mon-
itor more than one permit space provided the subsequent entries are authorized; and
duties described in paragraph (i) of this sec- NOTE: Examples of circumstances requiring
tion can be effectively performed for each the review of the permit space program are:
permit space that is monitored. Likewise, at- any unauthorized entry of a permit space,
tendants may be stationed at any location the detection of a permit space hazard not
outside the permit space to be monitored as covered by the permit, the detection of a
long as the duties described in paragraph (i) condition prohibited by the permit, the oc-
of this section can be effectively performed currence of an injury or near-miss during
for each permit space that is monitored. entry, a change in the use or configuration
(7) If multiple spaces are to be mon- of a permit space, and employee complaints
about the effectiveness of the program.
itored by a single attendant, include in
the permit program the means and pro- (14) Review the permit space pro-
cedures to enable the attendant to re- gram, using the canceled permits re-
spond to an emergency affecting one or tained under paragraph (e)(6) of this
more of the permit spaces being mon- section within 1 year after each entry
476
and revise the program as necessary, to (f) Entry permit. The entry permit
ensure that employees participating in that documents compliance with this
entry operations are protected from section and authorizes entry to a per-
permit space hazards. mit space shall identify:
(1) The permit space to be entered;
NOTE: Employers may perform a single an-
nual review covering all entries performed (2) The purpose of the entry;
during a 12-month period. If no entry is per- (3) The date and the authorized dura-
formed during a 12-month period, no review tion of the entry permit;
is necessary. (4) The authorized entrants within
Appendix C to § 1910.146 presents examples of the permit space, by name or by such
permit space programs that are considered other means (for example, through the
to comply with the requirements of para- use of rosters or tracking systems) as
graph (d) of this section. will enable the attendant to determine
(e) Permit system. (1) Before entry is quickly and accurately, for the dura-
authorized, the employer shall docu- tion of the permit, which authorized
ment the completion of measures re- entrants are inside the permit space;
quired by paragraph (d)(3) of this sec- NOTE: This requirement may be met by in-
tion by preparing an entry permit. serting a reference on the entry permit as to
the means used, such as a roster or tracking
NOTE: Appendix D to § 1910.146 presents ex- system, to keep track of the authorized en-
amples of permits whose elements are con- trants within the permit space.
sidered to comply with the requirements of
this section. (5) The personnel, by name, currently
serving as attendants;
(2) Before entry begins, the entry su-
(6) The individual, by name, cur-
pervisor identified on the permit shall
rently serving as entry supervisor,
sign the entry permit to authorize
with a space for the signature or ini-
entry.
tials of the entry supervisor who origi-
(3) The completed permit shall be
nally authorized entry;
made available at the time of entry to
(7) The hazards of the permit space to
all authorized entrants or their author-
be entered;
ized representatives, by posting it at
(8) The measures used to isolate the
the entry portal or by any other equal-
permit space and to eliminate or con-
ly effective means, so that the entrants
trol permit space hazards before entry;
can confirm that pre-entry prepara-
tions have been completed. NOTE: Those measures can include the
(4) The duration of the permit may lockout or tagging of equipment and proce-
not exceed the time required to com- dures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and
plete the assigned task or job identi- flushing permit spaces.
fied on the permit in accordance with (9) The acceptable entry conditions;
paragraph (f)(2) of this section. (10) The results of initial and periodic
(5) The entry supervisor shall termi- tests performed under paragraph (d)(5)
nate entry and cancel the entry permit of this section, accompanied by the
when: names or initials of the testers and by
(i) The entry operations covered by an indication of when the tests were
the entry permit have been completed; performed;
or (11) The rescue and emergency serv-
(ii) A condition that is not allowed ices that can be summoned and the
under the entry permit arises in or means (such as the equipment to use
near the permit space. and the numbers to call) for sum-
(6) The employer shall retain each moning those services;
canceled entry permit for at least 1 (12) The communication procedures
year to facilitate the review of the per- used by authorized entrants and at-
mit-required confined space program tendants to maintain contact during
required by paragraph (d)(14) of this the entry;
section. Any problems encountered (13) Equipment, such as personal pro-
during an entry operation shall be tective equipment, testing equipment,
noted on the pertinent permit so that communications equipment, alarm sys-
appropriate revisions to the permit tems, and rescue equipment, to be pro-
space program can be made. vided for compliance with this section;
477
(14) Any other information whose in- (3) Communicate with the attendant
clusion is necessary, given the cir- as necessary to enable the attendant to
cumstances of the particular confined monitor entrant status and to enable
space, in order to ensure employee the attendant to alert entrants of the
safety; and need to evacuate the space as required
(15) Any additional permits, such as by paragraph (i)(6) of this section;
for hot work, that have been issued to (4) Alert the attendant whenever:
authorize work in the permit space. (i) The entrant recognizes any warn-
(g) Training. (1) The employer shall ing sign or symptom of exposure to a
provide training so that all employees dangerous situation, or
whose work is regulated by this section (ii) The entrant detects a prohibited
acquire the understanding, knowledge, condition; and
and skills necessary for the safe per- (5) Exit from the permit space as
formance of the duties assigned under quickly as possible whenever:
this section. (i) An order to evacuate is given by
(2) Training shall be provided to each the attendant or the entry supervisor,
affected employee: (ii) The entrant recognizes any warn-
(i) Before the employee is first as- ing sign or symptom of exposure to a
signed duties under this section; dangerous situation,
(ii) Before there is a change in as- (iii) The entrant detects a prohibited
signed duties; condition, or
(iii) Whenever there is a change in (iv) An evacuation alarm is acti-
permit space operations that presents a vated.
hazard about which an employee has (i) Duties of attendants. The employer
not previously been trained; shall ensure that each attendant:
(iv) Whenever the employer has rea- (1) Knows the hazards that may be
son to believe either that there are defaced during entry, including informa-
viations from the permit space entry tion on the mode, signs or symptoms,
procedures required by paragraph (d)(3) and consequences of the exposure;
of this section or that there are inad- (2) Is aware of possible behavioral ef-
equacies in the employee’s knowledge fects of hazard exposure in authorized
or use of these procedures. entrants;
(3) The training shall establish em- (3) Continuously maintains an accu-
ployee proficiency in the duties re- rate count of authorized entrants in
quired by this section and shall intro- the permit space and ensures that the
duce new or revised procedures, as nec- means used to identify authorized en-
essary, for compliance with this sec- trants under paragraph (f)(4) of this
tion. section accurately identifies who is in
(4) The employer shall certify that the permit space;
the training required by paragraphs (4) Remains outside the permit space
(g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section has during entry operations until relieved
been accomplished. The certification by another attendant;
shall contain each employee’s name,
NOTE: When the employer’s permit entry
the signatures or initials of the train- program allows attendant entry for rescue,
ers, and the dates of training. The cer- attendants may enter a permit space to at-
tification shall be available for inspec- tempt a rescue if they have been trained and
tion by employees and their authorized equipped for rescue operations as required by
representatives. paragraph (k)(1) of this section and if they
(h) Duties of authorized entrants. The have been relieved as required by paragraph
(i)(4) of this section.
employer shall ensure that all author-
ized entrants: (5) Communicates with authorized
(1) Know the hazards that may be entrants as necessary to monitor en-
faced during entry, including informa- trant status and to alert entrants of
tion on the mode, signs or symptoms, the need to evacuate the space under
and consequences of the exposure; paragraph (i)(6) of this section;
(2) Properly use equipment as re- (6) Monitors activities inside and out-
quired by paragraph (d)(4) of this sec- side the space to determine if it is safe
tion; for entrants to remain in the space and
478
orders the authorized entrants to evac- (3) Terminates the entry and cancels
uate the permit space immediately the permit as required by paragraph
under any of the following conditions; (e)(5) of this section;
(i) If the attendant detects a prohib- (4) Verifies that rescue services are
ited condition; available and that the means for sum-
(ii) If the attendant detects the be- moning them are operable;
havioral effects of hazard exposure in (5) Removes unauthorized individuals
an authorized entrant; who enter or who attempt to enter the
(iii) If the attendant detects a situa- permit space during entry operations;
tion outside the space that could en- and
danger the authorized entrants; or (6) Determines, whenever responsi-
bility for a permit space entry oper-
(iv) If the attendant cannot effec-
ation is transferred and at intervals
tively and safely perform all the duties
dictated by the hazards and operations
required under paragraph (i) of this
performed within the space, that entry
section; operations remain consistent with
(7) Summon rescue and other emer- terms of the entry permit and that ac-
gency services as soon as the attendant ceptable entry conditions are main-
determines that authorized entrants tained.
may need assistance to escape from (k) Rescue and emergency services. (1)
permit space hazards; An employer who designates rescue and
(8) Takes the following actions when emergency services, pursuant to para-
unauthorized persons approach or enter graph (d)(9) of this section, shall:
a permit space while entry is under- (i) Evaluate a prospective rescuer’s
way: ability to respond to a rescue summons
(i) Warn the unauthorized persons in a timely manner, considering the
that they must stay away from the per- hazard(s) identified;
mit space; NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (k)(1)(i): What will be
(ii) Advise the unauthorized persons considered timely will vary according to the
that they must exit immediately if specific hazards involved in each entry. For
they have entered the permit space; example, § 1910.134, Respiratory Protection,
and requires that employers provide a standby
person or persons capable of immediate ac-
(iii) Inform the authorized entrants
tion to rescue employee(s) wearing res-
and the entry supervisor if unauthor- piratory protection while in work areas de-
ized persons have entered the permit fined as IDLH atmospheres.
space;
(ii) Evaluate a prospective rescue
(9) Performs non-entry rescues as
service’s ability, in terms of pro-
specified by the employer’s rescue pro-
ficiency with rescue-related tasks and
cedure; and
equipment, to function appropriately
(10) Performs no duties that might while rescuing entrants from the par-
interfere with the attendant’s primary ticular permit space or types of permit
duty to monitor and protect the au- spaces identified;
thorized entrants. (iii) Select a rescue team or service
(j) Duties of entry supervisors. The em- from those evaluated that:
ployer shall ensure that each entry su- (A) Has the capability to reach the
pervisor: victim(s) within a time frame that is
(1) Knows the hazards that may be appropriate for the permit space haz-
faced during entry, including informa- ard(s) identified;
tion on the mode, signs or symptoms, (B) Is equipped for and proficient in
and consequences of the exposure; performing the needed rescue services;
(2) Verifies, by checking that the ap- (iv) Inform each rescue team or serv-
propriate entries have been made on ice of the hazards they may confront
the permit, that all tests specified by when called on to perform rescue at the
the permit have been conducted and site; and
that all procedures and equipment (v) Provide the rescue team or serv-
specified by the permit are in place be- ice selected with access to all permit
fore endorsing the permit and allowing spaces from which rescue may be nec-
entry to begin; essary so that the rescue service can
479
develop appropriate rescue plans and (i) Each authorized entrant shall use
practice rescue operations. a chest or full body harness, with a re-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (k)(1): Non-mandatory trieval line attached at the center of
appendix F contains examples of criteria the entrant’s back near shoulder level,
which employers can use in evaluating pro- above the entrant’s head, or at another
spective rescuers as required by paragraph point which the employer can establish
(k)(1) of this section. presents a profile small enough for the
(2) An employer whose employees successful removal of the entrant.
have been designated to provide permit Wristlets may be used in lieu of the
space rescue and emergency services chest or full body harness if the em-
shall take the following measures: ployer can demonstrate that the use of
(i) Provide affected employees with a chest or full body harness is infeasi-
the personal protective equipment ble or creates a greater hazard and that
(PPE) needed to conduct permit space the use of wristlets is the safest and
rescues safely and train affected em- most effective alternative.
ployees so they are proficient in the (ii) The other end of the retrieval line
use of that PPE, at no cost to those shall be attached to a mechanical de-
employees; vice or fixed point outside the permit
(ii) Train affected employees to per- space in such a manner that rescue can
form assigned rescue duties. The em- begin as soon as the rescuer becomes
ployer must ensure that such employ- aware that rescue is necessary. A me-
ees successfully complete the training chanical device shall be available to re-
required to establish proficiency as an trieve personnel from vertical type per-
authorized entrant, as provided by mit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 m)
paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section;
deep.
(iii) Train affected employees in
basic first-aid and cardiopulmonary re- (4) If an injured entrant is exposed to
suscitation (CPR). The employer shall a substance for which a Material Safe-
ensure that at least one member of the ty Data Sheet (MSDS) or other similar
rescue team or service holding a cur- written information is required to be
rent certification in first aid and CPR kept at the worksite, that MSDS or
is available; and written information shall be made
(iv) Ensure that affected employees available to the medical facility treat-
practice making permit space rescues ing the exposed entrant.
at least once every 12 months, by (l) Employee participation. (1) Employ-
means of simulated rescue operations ers shall consult with affected employ-
in which they remove dummies, mani- ees and their authorized representa-
kins, or actual persons from the actual tives on the development and imple-
permit spaces or from representative mentation of all aspects of the permit
permit spaces. Representative permit space program required by paragraph
spaces shall, with respect to opening (c) of this section.
size, configuration, and accessibility, (2) Employers shall make available
simulate the types of permit spaces to affected employees and their author-
from which rescue is to be performed. ized representatives all information re-
(3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, required to be developed by this section.
trieval systems or methods shall be
used whenever an authorized entrant APPENDIXES TO § 1910.146—PERMIT-REQUIRED
enters a permit space, unless the re- CONFINED SPACES
trieval equipment would increase the NOTE: Appendixes A through F serve to
overall risk of entry or would not con- provide information and non-mandatory
tribute to the rescue of the entrant. guidelines to assist employers and employees
Retrieval systems shall meet the fol- in complying with the appropriate require-
lowing requirements. ments of this section.
480
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.146—PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DECISION

FLOW CHART
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.146—PROCEDURES FOR of the permit space and verification that ac-
ATMOSPHERIC TESTING ceptable entry conditions for entry into that
space exist.
Atmospheric testing is required for two
distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards
481
EC27OC91.029</GPH>
(1) Evaluation testing. The atmosphere of a specific monitoring programs will be devel-
confined space should be analyzed using oped.
equipment of sufficient sensitivity and speci- Presence of explosive/flammable gases. Equal to
ficity to identify and evaluate any hazardous or greater than 10% of the lower flammable
atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that limit (LFL).
appropriate permit entry procedures can be
Oxygen Deficiency. A concentration of oxygen
developed and acceptable entry conditions
in the atmosphere equal to or less than 19.5%
stipulated for that space. Evaluation and in-
by volume.
terpretation of these data, and development
of the entry procedure, should be done by, or A. Entry Without Permit/Attendant
reviewed by, a technically qualified profes- Certification. Confined spaces may be entered
sional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or without the need for a written permit or at-
certified industrial hygienist, registered tendant provided that the space can be main-
safety engineer, certified safety professional, tained in a safe condition for entry by me-
certified marine chemist, etc.) based on eval- chanical ventilation alone, as provided in
uation of all serious hazards. § 1910.146(c)(5). All spaces shall be considered
(2) Verification testing. The atmosphere of a permit-required confined spaces until the
permit space which may contain a hazardous pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise.
atmosphere should be tested for residues of Any employee required or permitted to pre-
all contaminants identified by evaluation check or enter an enclosed/confined space
testing using permit specified equipment to shall have successfully completed, -as a min-
determine that residual concentrations at imum, the training as required by the fol-
the time of testing and entry are within the lowing sections of these procedures. A written
range of acceptable entry conditions. Results copy of operating and rescue procedures as re-
of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) quired by these procedures shall be at the work
should be recorded on the permit in the site for the duration of the job. The Confined
space provided adjacent to the stipulated ac- Space Pre-Entry Check List must be com-
ceptable entry condition. pleted by the LEAD WORKER before entry
(3) Duration of testing. Measurement of val- into a confined space. This list verifies com-
ues for each atmospheric parameter should pletion of items listed below. This check list
be made for at least the minimum response shall be kept at the job site for duration of
time of the test instrument specified by the the job. If circumstances dictate an interrup-
manufacturer. tion in the work, the permit space must be
(4) Testing stratified atmospheres. When re-evaluated and a new check list must be
monitoring for entries involving a descent completed.
into atmospheres that may be stratified, the Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
atmospheric envelope should be tested a dis- Pumps and Lines. All pumps and lines which
tance of approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the may reasonably cause contaminants to flow
direction of travel and to each side. If a sam- into the space shall be disconnected, blinded
pling probe is used, the entrant’s rate of and locked out, or effectively isolated by
progress should be slowed to accommodate other means to prevent development of dan-
the sampling speed and detector response. gerous air contamination or engulfment. Not
(5) Order of testing. A test for oxygen is per- all laterals to sewers or storm drains require
formed first because most combustible gas blocking. However, where experience or
meters are oxygen dependent and will not knowledge of industrial use indicates there
provide reliable readings in an oxygen defi- is a reasonable potential for contamination
cient atmosphere. Combustible gasses are of air or engulfment into an occupied sewer,
tested for next because the threat of fire or then all affected laterals shall be blocked. If
explosion is both more immediate and more blocking and/or isolation requires entry into
life threatening, in most cases, than expo- the space the provisions for entry into a
sure to toxic gasses and vapors. If tests for permit- required confined space must be im-
toxic gasses and vapors are necessary, they plemented.
are performed last. Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be
APPENDIX C TO § 1910.146—EXAMPLES OF surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting
PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE PROGRAMS vapors from the tanks, piping, or sewers.
Testing. The atmosphere within the space
Example 1. will be tested to determine whether dan-
Workplace. Sewer entry. gerous air contamination and/or oxygen defi-
ciency exists. Detector tubes, alarm only gas
Potential hazards. The employees could be ex-
monitors and explosion meters are examples
posed to the following:
of monitoring equipment that may be used
Engulfment. to test permit space atmospheres. Testing
Presence of toxic gases. Equal to or more than shall be performed by the LEAD WORKER
10 ppm hydrogen sulfide measured as an 8- who has successfully completed the Gas De-
hour time-weighted average. If the presence tector training for the monitor he will use.
of other toxic contaminants is suspected, The minimum parameters to be monitored
482
are oxygen deficiency, LFL, and hydrogen used. Testing shall be performed by the SU-
sulfide concentration. A written record of PERVISOR who has successfully completed
the pre-entry test results shall be made and the gas detector training for the monitor he
kept at the work site for the duration of the will use. The minimum parameters to be
job. The supervisor will certify in writing, monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL and
based upon the results of the pre-entry test- hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written
ing, that all hazards have been eliminated. record of the pre- entry test results shall be
Affected employees shall be able to review made and kept at the work site for the dura-
the testing results. The most hazardous con- tion of the job. Affected employees shall be
ditions shall govern when work is being per- able to review the testing results. The most
formed in two adjoining, connecting spaces. hazardous conditions shall govern when
Entry Procedures. If there are no non-atmos- work is being performed in two adjoining,
pheric hazards present and if the pre-entry connected spaces.
tests show there is no dangerous air con- Space Ventilation. Mechanical ventilation
tamination and/or oxygen deficiency within systems, where applicable, shall be set at
the space and there is no reason to believe 100% outside air. Where possible, open addi-
that any is likely to develop, entry into and tional manholes to increase air circulation.
work within may proceed. Continuous test- Use portable blowers to augment natural cir-
ing of the atmosphere in the immediate vi- culation if needed. After a suitable ven-
cinity of the workers within the space shall tilating period, repeat the testing. Entry
be accomplished. The workers will imme- may not begin until testing has dem-
diately leave the permit space when any of onstrated that the hazardous atmosphere has
the gas monitor alarm set points are reached been eliminated.
as defined. Workers will not return to the Entry Procedures. The following procedure
area until a SUPERVISOR who has com- shall be observed under any of the following
pleted the gas detector training has used a conditions: 1.) Testing demonstrates the ex-
direct reading gas detector to evaluate the istence of dangerous or deficient conditions
situation and has determined that it is safe and additional ventilation cannot reduce
to enter. concentrations to safe levels; 2.) The atmos-
Rescue. Arrangements for rescue services are phere tests as safe but unsafe conditions can
not required where there is no attendant. reasonably be expected to develop; 3.) It is
See the rescue portion of section B., below, not feasible to provide for ready exit from
for instructions regarding rescue planning spaces equipped with automatic fire suppres-
where an entry permit is required. sion systems and it is not practical or safe to
B. Entry Permit Required deactivate such systems; or 4.) An emer-
Permits. Confined Space Entry Permit. All gency exists and it is not feasible to wait for
spaces shall be considered permit-required pre-entry procedures to take effect.
confined spaces until the pre-entry proce- All personnel must be trained. A self con-
dures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee tained breathing apparatus shall be worn by
required or permitted to pre-check or enter a any person entering the space. At least one
permit-required confined space shall have worker shall stand by the outside of the
successfully completed, as a minimum, the space ready to give assistance in case of
training as required by the following sec- emergency. The standby worker shall have a
tions of these procedures. A written copy of self contained breathing apparatus available
operating and rescue procedures as required by for immediate use. There shall be at least
these procedures shall be at the work site for the one additional worker within sight or call of
duration of the job. The Confined Space Entry the standby worker. Continuous powered
Permit must be completed before approval communications shall be maintained be-
can be given to enter a permit-required con- tween the worker within the confined space
fined space. This permit verifies completion and standby personnel.
of items listed below. This permit shall be If at any time there is any questionable ac-
kept at the job site for the duration of the tion or non- movement by the worker inside,
job. If circumstances cause an interruption a verbal check will be made. If there is no re-
in the work or a change in the alarm condi- sponse, the worker will be moved imme-
tions for which entry was approved, a new diately. Exception: If the worker is disabled
Confined Space Entry Permit must be com- due to falling or impact, he/she shall not be
pleted. removed from the confined space unless
there is immediate danger to his/her life.
Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
Local fire department rescue personnel shall
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be be notified immediately. The standby worker
surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting may only enter the confined space in case of
vapors from tanks, piping or sewers. an emergency (wearing the self contained
Testing. The confined space atmosphere shall breathing apparatus) and only after being re-
be tested to determine whether dangerous lieved by another worker. Safety belt or har-
air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency ness with attached lifeline shall be used by
exists. A direct reading gas monitor shall be all workers entering the space with the free
483
end of the line secured outside the entry 6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cook-
opening. The standby worker shall attempt er/dryer;
to remove a disabled worker via his lifeline 7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment
before entering the space. taken into the cooker/dryer;
When practical, these spaces shall be en- 8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of
tered through side openings—those within combustion; or
31⁄2 feet (1.07 m) of the bottom. When entry 9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding
must be through a top opening, the safety or cutting done on grease covered surfaces.
belt shall be of the harness type that sus- Permits. The supervisor in this case is always
pends a person upright and a hoisting device present at the cooker/dryer or other permit
or similar apparatus shall be available for entry confined space when entry is made.
lifting workers out of the space. The supervisor must follow the pre-entry iso-
In any situation where their use may en- lation procedures described in the entry per-
danger the worker, use of a hoisting device mit in preparing for entry, and ensure that
or safety belt and attached lifeline may be the protective clothing, ventilating equip-
discontinued. ment and any other equipment required by
When dangerous air contamination is at- the permit are at the entry site.
tributable to flammable and/or explosive Control of hazards. Mechanical. Lock out
substances, lighting and electrical equip- main power switch to agitator motor at
ment shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated per main power panel. Affix tag to the lock to
National Electrical Code and no ignition inform others that a permit entry confined
sources shall be introduced into the area. space entry is in progress.
Continuous gas monitoring shall be per-
Engulfment. Close all valves in the raw mate-
formed during all confined space operations.
rial blow line. Secure each valve in its closed
If alarm conditions change adversely, entry
position using chain and lock. Attach a tag
personnel shall exit the confined space and a
to the valve and chain warning that a permit
new confined space permit issued.
entry confined space entry is in progress.
Rescue. Call the fire department services for The same procedure shall be used for secur-
rescue. Where immediate hazards to injured ing the fat recycle valve.
personnel are present, workers at the site Burns and heat stress. Close steam supply
shall implement emergency procedures to fit valves to jacket and secure with chains and
the situation. tags. Insert solid blank at flange in cooker
Example 2. vent line to condenser manifold duct system.
Vent cooker/dryer by opening access door at
Workplace. Meat and poultry rendering discharge end and top center door to allow
plants. natural ventilation throughout the entry. If
Cookers and dryers are either batch or con- faster cooling is needed, use a portable ven-
tinuous in their operation. Multiple batch tilation fan to increase ventilation. Cooling
cookers are operated in parallel. When one water may be circulated through the jacket
unit of a multiple set is shut down for re- to reduce both outer and inner surface tem-
pairs, means are available to isolate that peratures of cooker/dryers faster. Check air
unit from the others which remain in oper- and inner surface temperatures in cooker/
ation. dryer to assure they are within acceptable
Cookers and dryers are horizontal, cylin- limits before entering, or use proper protec-
drical vessels equipped with a center, rotat- tive clothing.
ing shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the Fire and fume hazards. Careful site prepara-
inner shell is jacketed, it is usually heated tion, such as cleaning the area within 4
with steam at pressures up to 150 psig (1034.25 inches (10.16 cm) of all welding or torch cut-
kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the ting operations, and proper ventilation are
continuous cooker or dryer is also steam the preferred controls. All welding and cut-
heated. ting operations shall be done in accordance
Potential Hazards. The recognized hazards as-
with the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910,
sociated with cookers and dryers are the risk
subpart Q, OSHA’s welding standard. Proper
that employees could be:
ventilation may be achieved by local exhaust
1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator; ventilation, or the use of portable ventila-
2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled tion fans, or a combination of the two prac-
fat; tices.
3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cook-
Electrical shock. Electrical equipment used in
er/dryer steam jacket or the condenser duct
cooker/dryers shall be in serviceable condi-
system if steam valves are not properly
tion.
closed and locked out;
4. Burned by contact with hot metal sur- Slips and falls. Remove residual grease before
faces, such as the agitator shaft assembly, or entering cooker/dryer.
inner shell of the cooker/dryer; Attendant. The supervisor shall be the at-
5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere tendant for employees entering cooker/dry-
inside cooker/dryer; ers.
484
Permit. The permit shall specify how isola- er, dry bulk trailer or truck, etc. meet per-
tion shall be done and any other prepara- mit requirements before authorizing entry.
tions needed before making entry. This is es- Attendant. The area supervisor shall des-
pecially important in parallel arrangements ignate an employee to maintain communica-
of cooker/dryers so that the entire operation tion by employer specified means with em-
need not be shut down to allow safe entry ployees working in tanks to ensure their
into one unit. safety. The attendant may not enter any
Rescue. When necessary, the attendant shall permit entry confined space to rescue an en-
call the fire department as previously ar- trant or for any other reason, unless author-
ranged. ized by the rescue procedure and, and even
then, only after calling the rescue team and
Example 3. being relieved by as attendant by another
Workplace. Workplaces where tank cars, worker.
trucks, and trailers, dry bulk tanks and Communications and observation. Communica-
trailers, railroad tank cars, and similar port- tions between attendant and entrant(s) shall
able tanks are fabricated or serviced. be maintained throughout entry. Methods of
A. During fabrication. These tanks and dry- communication that may be specified by the
bulk carriers are entered repeatedly permit include voice, voice powered radio,
throughout the fabrication process. These tapping or rapping codes on tank walls, sig-
products are not configured identically, but nalling tugs on a rope, and the attendant’s
the manufacturing processes by which they observation that work activities such as
are made are very similar. chipping, grinding, welding, spraying, etc.,
Sources of hazards. In addition to the me- which require deliberate operator control
chanical hazards arising from the risks that continue normally. These activities often
an entrant would be injured due to contact generate so much noise that the necessary
with components of the tank or the tools hearing protection makes communication by
being used, there is also the risk that a voice difficult.
worker could be injured by breathing fumes Rescue procedures. Acceptable rescue proce-
from welding materials or mists or vapors dures include entry by a team of employee-
from materials used to coat the tank inte- rescuers, use of public emergency services,
rior. In addition, many of these vapors and and procedures for breaching the tank. The
mists are flammable, so the failure to prop- area permit specifies which procedures are
erly ventilate a tank could lead to a fire or available, but the area supervisor makes the
explosion. final decision based on circumstances. (Cer-
Control of hazards. tain injuries may make it necessary to
Welding. Local exhaust ventilation shall be breach the tank to remove a person rather
used to remove welding fumes once the tank than risk additional injury by removal
or carrier is completed to the point that through an existing manhole. However, the
workers may enter and exit only through a supervisor must ensure that no breaching
manhole. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR procedure used for rescue would violate
1910, subpart Q, OSHA’s welding standard, at terms of the entry permit. For instance, if
all times.) Welding gas tanks may never be the tank must be breached by cutting with a
brought into a tank or carrier that is a per- torch, the tank surfaces to be cut must be
mit entry confined space. free of volatile or combustible coatings with-
Application of interior coatings/linings. At- in 4 inches (10.16 cm) of the cutting line and
mospheric hazards shall be controlled by the atmosphere within the tank must be
forced air ventilation sufficient to keep the below the LFL.
atmospheric concentration of flammable ma- Retrieval line and harnesses. The retrieval
terials below 10% of the lower flammable lines and harnesses generally required under
limit (LFL) (or lower explosive limit (LEL), this standard are usually impractical for use
whichever term is used locally). The appro- in tanks because the internal configuration
priate respirators are provided and shall be of the tanks and their interior baffles and
used in addition to providing forced ventila- other structures would prevent rescuers from
tion if the forced ventilation does not main- hauling out injured entrants. However, un-
tain acceptable respiratory conditions. less the rescue procedure calls for breaching
Permits. Because of the repetitive nature of the tank for rescue, the rescue team shall be
the entries in these operations, an ‘‘Area trained in the use of retrieval lines and har-
Entry Permit’’ will be issued for a 1 month nesses for removing injured employees
period to cover those production areas where through manholes.
tanks are fabricated to the point that entry B. Repair or service of ‘‘used’’ tanks and bulk
and exit are made using manholes. trailers.
Authorization. Only the area supervisor may Sources of hazards. In addition to facing the
authorize an employee to enter a tank with- potential hazards encountered in fabrication
in the permit area. The area supervisor must or manufacturing, tanks or trailers which
determine that conditions in the tank trail- have been in service may contain residues of
485
dangerous materials, whether left over from (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, sub-
the transportation of hazardous cargoes or part Q, OSHA’s welding standard, at all
generated by chemical or bacterial action on times.)
residues of non-hazardous cargoes. Permits. An entry permit valid for up to 1
Control of atmospheric hazards. A ‘‘used’’ tank year shall be issued prior to authorization of
shall be brought into areas where tank entry entry into used tank trailers, dry bulk trail-
is authorized only after the tank has been ers or trucks. In addition to the pre-entry
emptied, cleansed (without employee entry) cleaning requirement, this permit shall re-
of any residues, and purged of any potential quire the employee safeguards specified for
atmospheric hazards. new tank fabrication or construction permit
Welding. In addition to tank cleaning for areas.
control of atmospheric hazards, coating and Authorization. Only the area supervisor may
surface materials shall be removed 4 inches authorize an employee to enter a tank trail-
(10.16 cm) or more from any surface area er, dry bulk trailer or truck within the per-
where welding or other torch work will be mit area. The area supervisor must deter-
done and care taken that the atmosphere mine that the entry permit requirements
within the tank remains well below the LFL. have been met before authorizing entry.
486
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.146—SAMPLE PERMITS
487
EC27OC91.030</GPH>
APPENDIX E TO § 1910.146—SEWER SYSTEM exists any way to completely isolate the

ENTRY space (a section of a continuous system) to
be entered; second, because isolation is not
Sewer entry differs in three vital respects
complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and
from other permit entries; first, there rarely
488
EC27OC91.031</GPH>
unpredictably become lethally hazardous entry. Only the employer can decide, based
(toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes upon his or her knowledge of, and experience
beyond the control of the entrant or em- with permit spaces in sewer systems, what
ployer, and third, experienced sewer workers the best type of testing instrument may be
are especially knowledgeable in entry and for any specific entry operation.
work in their permit spaces because of their The selected testing instrument should be
frequent entries. Unlike other employments carried and used by the entrant in sewer line
where permit space entry is a rare and excep- work to monitor the atmosphere in the en-
tional event, sewer workers’ usual work entrant’s environment, and in advance of the
vironment is a permit space. entrant’s direction of movement, to warn the
(1) Adherence to procedure. The employer entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric
should designate as entrants only employees conditions. Where several entrants are work-
who are thoroughly trained in the employing together in the same immediate loca-
er’s sewer entry procedures and who dem- tion, one instrument, used by the lead en-
onstrate that they follow these entry proce- trant, is acceptable.
dures exactly as prescribed when performing (3) Surge flow and flooding. Sewer crews
sewer entries. should develop and maintain liaison, to the
(2) Atmospheric monitoring. Entrants should extent possible, with the local weather bu-
be trained in the use of, and be equipped reau and fire and emergency services in their
with, atmospheric monitoring equipment area so that sewer work may be delayed or
which sounds an audible alarm, in addition interrupted and entrants withdrawn when-
to its visual readout, whenever one of the ever sewer lines might be suddenly flooded
following conditions are encountered: Oxy- by rain or fire suppression activities, or
gen concentration less than 19.5 percent; whenever flammable or other hazardous ma-
flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more terials are released into sewers during emer-
of the lower flammable limit (LFL); or hy- gencies by industrial or transportation acci-
drogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or dents.
above 10 ppm or 35 ppm, respectively, meas- (4) Special Equipment. Entry into large bore
ured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. At- sewers may require the use of special equip-
mospheric monitoring equipment needs to be ment. Such equipment might include such
calibrated according to the manufacturer’s items as atmosphere monitoring devices
instructions. The oxygen sensor/broad range with automatic audible alarms, escape self-
sensor is best suited for initial use in situa- contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA) with
tions where the actual or potential contami- at least 10 minute air supply (or other
nants have not been identified, because NIOSH approved self-rescuer), and water-
broad range sensors, unlike substance-spe- proof flashlights, and may also include boats
cific sensors, enable employers to obtain an and rafts, radios and rope stand-offs for pull-
overall reading of the hydrocarbons ing around bends and corners as needed.
(flammables) present in the space. However,
such sensors only indicate that a hazardous APPENDIX F TO § 1910.146—RESCUE TEAM OR
threshold of a class of chemicals has been ex- RESCUE SERVICE EVALUATION CRITERIA
ceeded. They do not measure the levels of (NON-MANDATORY)
contamination of specific substances. There- (1) This appendix provides guidance to em-
fore, substance-specific devices, which meas- ployers in choosing an appropriate rescue
ure the actual levels of specific substances, service. It contains criteria that may be used
are best suited for use where actual and po- to evaluate the capabilities both of prospec-
tential contaminants have been identified. tive and current rescue teams. Before a res-
The measurements obtained with substance- cue team can be trained or chosen, however,
specific devices are of vital importance to a satisfactory permit program, including an
the employer when decisions are made con- analysis of all permit-required confined
cerning the measures necessary to protect spaces to identify all potential hazards in
entrants (such as ventilation or personal those spaces, must be completed. OSHA be-
protective equipment) and the setting and lieves that compliance with all the provi-
attainment of appropriate entry conditions. sions of § 1910.146 will enable employers to
However, the sewer environment may sud- conduct permit space operations without re-
denly and unpredictably change, and the sub- course to rescue services in nearly all cases.
stance-specific devices may not detect the However, experience indicates that cir-
potentially lethal atmospheric hazards cumstances will arise where entrants will
which may enter the sewer environment. need to be rescued from permit spaces. It is
Although OSHA considers the information therefore important for employers to select
and guidance provided above to be appro- rescue services or teams, either on-site or
priate and useful in most sewer entry situa- off-site, that are equipped and capable of
tions, the Agency emphasizes that each em- minimizing harm to both entrants and res-
ployer must consider the unique cir- cuers if the need arises.
cumstances, including the predictability of (2) For all rescue teams or services, the
the atmosphere, of the sewer permit spaces employer’s evaluation should consist of two
in the employer’s workplace in preparing for components: an initial evaluation, in which
489
employers decide whether a potential rescue potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion
service or team is adequately trained and that might be encountered in transit, the re-
equipped to perform permit space rescues of liability of the rescuer’s vehicles, and the
the kind needed at the facility and whether training and skill of its drivers.
such rescuers can respond in a timely man- 3. What is the availability of the rescue
ner, and a performance evaluation, in which service? Is it unavailable at certain times of
employers measure the performance of the the day or in certain situations? What is the
team or service during an actual or practice likelihood that key personnel of the rescue
rescue. For example, based on the initial service might be unavailable at times? If the
evaluation, an employer may determine that rescue service becomes unavailable while an
maintaining an on-site rescue team will be entry is underway, does it have the capa-
more expensive than obtaining the services bility of notifying the employer so that the
of an off-site team, without being signifi- employer can instruct the attendant to abort
cantly more effective, and decide to hire a the entry immediately?
rescue service. During a performance evalua- 4. Does the rescue service meet all the re-
tion, the employer could decide, after ob- quirements of paragraph (k)(2) of the stand-
serving the rescue service perform a practice ard? If not, has it developed a plan that will
rescue, that the service’s training or pre- enable it to meet those requirements in the
paredness was not adequate to effect a time- future? If so, how soon can the plan be imple-
ly or effective rescue at his or her facility mented?
and decide to select another rescue service, 5. For off-site services, is the service will-
or to form an internal rescue team. ing to perform rescues at the employer’s
workplace? (An employer may not rely on a
A. Initial Evaluation rescuer who declines, for whatever reason, to
I. The employer should meet with the pro- provide rescue services.)
spective rescue service to facilitate the eval- 6. Is an adequate method for communica-
uations required by § 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and tions between the attendant, employer and
§ 1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off- prospective rescuer available so that a res-
site rescue service is being considered, the cue request can be transmitted to the res-
employer must contact the service to plan cuer without delay? How soon after notifica-
and coordinate the evaluations required by tion can a prospective rescuer dispatch a res-
the standard. Merely posting the service’s cue team to the entry site?
number or planning to rely on the 911 emer- 7. For rescues into spaces that may pose
gency phone number to obtain these services significant atmospheric hazards and from
at the time of a permit space emergency which rescue entry, patient packaging and
would not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of retrieval cannot be safely accomplished in a
the standard. relatively short time (15–20 minutes), em-
II. The capabilities required of a rescue ployers should consider using airline res-
service vary with the type of permit spaces pirators (with escape bottles) for the res-
from which rescue may be necessary and the cuers and to supply rescue air to the patient.
hazards likely to be encountered in those If the employer decides to use SCBA, does
spaces. Answering the questions below will the prospective rescue service have an ample
assist employers in determining whether the supply of replacement cylinders and proce-
rescue service is capable of performing res- dures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be re-
cues in the permit spaces present at the em- trieved) well within the SCBA’s air supply
ployer’s workplace. limits?
1. What are the needs of the employer with 8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5
regard to response time (time for the rescue feet in depth, can the prospective rescue
service to receive notification, arrive at the service properly perform entry rescues? Does
scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? the service have the technical knowledge
For example, if entry is to be made into an and equipment to perform rope work or ele-
IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can vated rescue, if needed?
quickly develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ven- 9. Does the rescue service have the nec-
tilation fails or for other reasons), the rescue essary skills in medical evaluation, patient
team or service would need to be standing by packaging and emergency response?
at the permit space. On the other hand, if 10. Does the rescue service have the nec-
the danger to entrants is restricted to me- essary equipment to perform rescues, or
chanical hazards that would cause injuries must the equipment be provided by the em-
(e.g., broken bones, abrasions) a response ployer or another source?
time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate. B. Performance Evaluation
2. How quickly can the rescue team or
service get from its location to the permit Rescue services are required by paragraph
spaces from which rescue may be necessary? (k)(2)(iv) of the standard to practice rescues
Relevant factors to consider would include: at least once every 12 months, provided that
the location of the rescue team or service the team or service has not successfully per-
relative to the employer’s workplace, the formed a permit space rescue within that
quality of roads and highways to be traveled, time. As part of each practice session, the
490
service should perform a critique of the prac- that are ‘‘worst-case’’ or most restrictive
tice rescue, or have another qualified party with respect to internal configuration, ele-
perform the critique, so that deficiencies in vation, and portal size. The following charac-
procedures, equipment, training, or number teristics of a practice space should be consid-
of personnel can be identified and corrected. ered when deciding whether a space is truly
The results of the critique, and the correc- representative of an actual permit space:
tions made to respond to the deficiencies (1) Internal configuration.
identified, should be given to the employer (a) Open—there are no obstacles, barriers,
to enable it to determine whether the rescue or obstructions within the space. One exam-
service can quickly be upgraded to meet the ple is a water tank.
employer’s rescue needs or whether another (b) Obstructed—the permit space contains
service must be selected. The following ques- some type of obstruction that a rescuer
tions will assist employers and rescue teams would need to maneuver around. An example
and services evaluate their performance. would be a baffle or mixing blade. Large
1. Have all members of the service been equipment, such as a ladder or scaffold,
trained as permit space entrants, at a min- brought into a space for work purposes
imum, including training in the potential would be considered an obstruction if the po-
hazards of all permit spaces, or of represent- sitioning or size of the equipment would
ative permit spaces, from which rescue may make rescue more difficult.
be needed? Can team members recognize the (2) Elevation.
signs, symptoms, and consequences of expo- (a) Elevated—a permit space where the en-
sure to any hazardous atmospheres that may trance portal or opening is above grade by 4
be present in those permit spaces? feet or more. This type of space usually re-
2. Is every team member provided with, quires knowledge of high angle rescue proce-
and properly trained in, the use and need for dures because of the difficulty in packaging
PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, and transporting a patient to the ground
which may be required to perform permit from the portal.
space rescues in the facility? Is every team (b) Non-elevated—a permit space with the
member properly trained to perform his or entrance portal located less than 4 feet above
her functions and make rescues, and to use grade. This type of space will allow the res-
any rescue equipment, such as ropes and cue team to transport an injured employee
backboards, that may be needed in a rescue normally.
attempt? (3) Portal size.
3. Are team members trained in the first (a) Restricted—A portal of 24 inches or less
aid and medical skills needed to treat vicin the least dimension. Portals of this size
tims overcome or injured by the types of are too small to allow a rescuer to simply
hazards that may be encountered in the per- enter the space while using SCBA. The por-
mit spaces at the facility? tal size is also too small to allow normal spi-
4. Do all team members perform their func- nal immobilization of an injured employee.
tions safely and efficiently? Do rescue serv- (b) Unrestricted—A portal of greater than
ice personnel focus on their own safety be- 24 inches in the least dimension. These por-
fore considering the safety of the victim? tals allow relatively free movement into and
5. If necessary, can the rescue service prop- out of the permit space.
erly test the atmosphere to determine if it is (4) Space access.
IDLH? (a) Horizontal—The portal is located on
6. Can the rescue personnel identify infor- the side of the permit space. Use of retrieval
mation pertinent to the rescue from entry lines could be difficult.
permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs? (b) Vertical—The portal is located on the
7. Has the rescue service been informed of top of the permit space, so that rescuers
any hazards to personnel that may arise must climb down, or the bottom of the per-
from outside the space, such as those that mit space, so that rescuers must climb up to
may be caused by future work near the enter the space. Vertical portals may require
space? knowledge of rope techniques, or special pa-
8. If necessary, can the rescue service prop- tient packaging to safely retrieve a downed
erly package and retrieve victims from a entrant.
permit space that has a limited size opening [58 FR 4549, Jan. 14, 1993; 58 FR 34845, 34846,
(less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), June 29, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 26114, May
limited internal space, or internal obstacles 19, 1994; 63 FR 66038, 66039, Dec. 1, 1998; 76 FR
or hazards? 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]
9. If necessary, can the rescue service safe-
ly perform an elevated (high angle) rescue? § 1910.147 The control of hazardous
10. Does the rescue service have a plan for energy (lockout/tagout).
each of the kinds of permit space rescue op-
erations at the facility? Is the plan adequate (a) Scope, application, and purpose—(1)
for all types of rescue operations that may Scope.
be needed at the facility? Teams may prac- (i) This standard covers the servicing
tice in representative spaces, or in spaces and maintenance of machines and
491
equipment in which the unexpected (A) Work on cord and plug connected
energization or start up of the ma- electric equipment for which exposure
chines or equipment, or release of to the hazards of unexpected
stored energy could cause injury to em- energization or start up of the equip-
ployees. This standard establishes min- ment is controlled by the unplugging of
imum performance requirements for the equipment from the energy source
the control of such hazardous energy. and by the plug being under the exclu-
(ii) This standard does not cover the sive control of the employee per-
following: forming the servicing or maintenance.
(A) Construction and agriculture em- (B) Hot tap operations involving
ployment; transmission and distribution systems
(B) Employment covered by parts for substances such as gas, steam,
1915, 1917, and 1918 of this title; water or petroleum products when they
(C) Installations under the exclusive are performed on pressurized pipelines,
control of electric utilities for the pur- provided that the employer dem-
pose of power generation, transmission onstrates that (1) continuity of service
and distribution, including related is essential; (2) shutdown of the system
equipment for communication or me- is impractical; and (3) documented pro-
tering; cedures are followed, and special equip-
(D) Exposure to electrical hazards ment is used which will provide proven
from work on, near, or with conductors effective protection for employees.
or equipment in electric-utilization in- (3) Purpose. (i) This section requires
stallations, which is covered by sub- employers to establish a program and
part S of this part; and utilize procedures for affixing appro-
(E) Oil and gas well drilling and serv- priate lockout devices or tagout de-
icing. vices to energy isolating devices, and
(2) Application. (i) This standard ap- to otherwise disable machines or equip-
plies to the control of energy during ment to prevent unexpected
servicing and/or maintenance of ma- energization, start-up or release of
chines and equipment. stored energy in order to prevent in-
(ii) Normal production operations are jury to employees.
not covered by this standard (See sub- (ii) When other standards in this part
part 0 of this part). Servicing and/or require the use of lockout or tagout,
maintenance which takes place during they shall be used and supplemented by
normal production operations is cov- the procedural and training require-
ered by this standard only if;: ments of this section.
(A) An employee is required to re- (b) Definitions applicable to this sec-
move or bypass a guard or other safety tion.
device; or Affected employee. An employee whose
(B) An employee is required to place job requires him/her to operate or use a
any part of his or her body into an area machine or equipment on which serv-
on a machine or piece of equipment icing or maintenance is being per-
where work is actually performed upon formed under lockout or tagout, or
the material being processed (point of whose job requires him/her to work in
operation) or where an associated dan- an area in which such servicing or
ger zone exists during a machine oper- maintenance is being performed.
ating cycle. Authorized employee. A person who
locks out or tags out machines or
NOTE: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii):
Minor tool changes and adjustments, and
equipment in order to perform serv-
other minor servicing activities, which take icing or maintenance on that machine
place during normal production operations, or equipment. An affected employee be-
are not covered by this standard if they are comes an authorized employee when
routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of that employee’s duties include per-
the equipment for production, provided that forming servicing or maintenance cov-
the work is performed using alternative ered under this section.
measures which provide effective protection Capable of being locked out. An energy
(See subpart 0 of this part).
isolating device is capable of being
(iii) This standard does not apply to locked out if it has a hasp or other
the following. means of attachment to which, or
492
through which, a lock can be affixed, or perform its intended production func-
it has a locking mechanism built into tion.
it. Other energy isolating devices are Servicing and/or maintenance. Work-
capable of being locked out, if lockout place activities such as constructing,
can be achieved without the need to installing, setting up, adjusting, in-
dismantle, rebuild, or replace the en- specting, modifying, and maintaining
ergy isolating device or permanently and/or servicing machines or equip-
alter its energy control capability. ment. These activities include lubrica-
Energized. Connected to an energy tion, cleaning or unjamming of ma-
source or containing residual or stored chines or equipment and making ad-
energy. justments or tool changes, where the
Energy isolating device. A mechanical employee may be exposed to the unex-
device that physically prevents the pected energization or startup of the
transmission or release of energy, in- equipment or release of hazardous en-
cluding but not limited to the fol- ergy.
lowing: A manually operated electrical Setting up. Any work performed to
circuit breaker; a disconnect switch; a prepare a machine or equipment to per-
manually operated switch by which the form its normal production operation.
conductors of a circuit can be discon- Tagout. The placement of a tagout
nected from all ungrounded supply con- device on an energy isolating device, in
ductors, and, in addition, no pole can accordance with an established proce-
be operated independently; a line dure, to indicate that the energy iso-
valve; a block; and any similar device lating device and the equipment being
used to block or isolate energy. Push controlled may not be operated until
buttons, selector switches and other the tagout device is removed.
control circuit type devices are not en- Tagout device. A prominent warning
ergy isolating devices. device, such as a tag and a means of at-
tachment, which can be securely fas-
Energy source. Any source of elec-
tened to an energy isolating device in
trical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneu-
accordance with an established proce-
matic, chemical, thermal, or other en-
dure, to indicate that the energy iso-
ergy. lating device and the equipment being
Hot tap. A procedure used in the re- controlled may not be operated until
pair, maintenance and services activi- the tagout device is removed.
ties which involves welding on a piece (c) General—(1) Energy control pro-
of equipment (pipelines, vessels or gram. The employer shall establish a
tanks) under pressure, in order to in- program consisting of energy control
stall connections or appurtenances. It procedures, employee training and
is commonly used to replace or add periodic inspections to ensure that be-
sections of pipeline without the inter- fore any employee performs any serv-
ruption of service for air, gas, water, icing or maintenance on a machine or
steam, and petrochemical distribution equipment where the unexpected ener-
systems. gizing, start up or release of stored en-
Lockout. The placement of a lockout ergy could occur and cause injury, the
device on an energy isolating device, in machine or equipment shall be isolated
accordance with an established proce- from the energy source, and rendered
dure, ensuring that the energy iso- inoperative.
lating device and the equipment being (2) Lockout/tagout. (i) If an energy iso-
controlled cannot be operated until the lating device is not capable of being
lockout device is removed. locked out, the employer’s energy con-
Lockout device. A device that utilizes trol program under paragraph (c)(1) of
a positive means such as a lock, either this section shall utilize a tagout sys-
key or combination type, to hold an tem.
energy isolating device in a safe posi- (ii) If an energy isolating device is
tion and prevent the energizing of a capable of being locked out, the em-
machine or equipment. Included are ployer’s energy control program under
blank flanges and bolted slip blinds. paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall
Normal production operations. The uti- utilize lockout, unless the employer
lization of a machine or equipment to can demonstrate that the utilization of
493
a tagout system will provide full em- source will completely deenergize and de-
ployee protection as set forth in para- activate the machine or equipment; (4) the
graph (c)(3) of this section. machine or equipment is isolated from that
energy source and locked out during serv-
(iii) After January 2, 1990, whenever icing or maintenance; (5) a single lockout de-
replacement or major repair, renova- vice will achieve a locked-out condition; (6)
tion or modification of a machine or the lockout device is under the exclusive
equipment is performed, and whenever control of the authorized employee per-
new machines or equipment are informing the servicing or maintenance; (7)
stalled, energy isolating devices for the servicing or maintenance does not create
such machine or equipment shall be de- hazards for other employees; and (8) the em-
ployer, in utilizing this exception, has had
signed to accept a lockout device. no accidents involving the unexpected acti-
(3) Full employee protection. (i) When a vation or reenergization of the machine or
tagout device is used on an energy iso- equipment during servicing or maintenance.
lating device which is capable of being (ii) The procedures shall clearly and
locked out, the tagout device shall be specifically outline the scope, purpose,
attached at the same location that the authorization, rules, and techniques to
lockout device would have been at- be utilized for the control of hazardous
tached, and the employer shall dem- energy, and the means to enforce com-
onstrate that the tagout program will pliance including, but not limited to,
provide a level of safety equivalent to the following:
that obtained by using a lockout pro- (A) A specific statement of the in-
gram. tended use of the procedure;
(ii) In demonstrating that a level of (B) Specific procedural steps for
safety is achieved in the tagout pro- shutting down, isolating, blocking and
gram which is equivalent to the level securing machines or equipment to
of safety obtained by using a lockout control hazardous energy;
program, the employer shall dem- (C) Specific procedural steps for the
onstrate full compliance with all placement, removal and transfer of
tagout-related provisions of this stand- lockout devices or tagout devices and
ard together with such additional ele- the responsibility for them; and
ments as are necessary to provide the (D) Specific requirements for testing
equivalent safety available from the a machine or equipment to determine
use of a lockout device. Additional and verify the effectiveness of lockout
means to be considered as part of the devices, tagout devices, and other en-
demonstration of full employee protec- ergy control measures.
tion shall include the implementation (5) Protective materials and hardware.
of additional safety measures such as (i) Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key
the removal of an isolating circuit ele- blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fas-
ment, blocking of a controlling switch, teners, or other hardware shall be pro-
opening of an extra disconnecting de- vided by the employer for isolating, se-
vice, or the removal of a valve handle curing or blocking of machines or
to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent equipment from energy sources.
energization. (ii) Lockout devices and tagout de-
(4) Energy control procedure. (i) Proce- vices shall be singularly identified;
dures shall be developed, documented shall be the only devices(s) used for
and utilized for the control of poten- controlling energy; shall not be used
tially hazardous energy when employ- for other purposes; and shall meet the
ees are engaged in the activities cov- following requirements:
ered by this section. (A) Durable. (1) Lockout and tagout
NOTE: Exception: The employer need not devices shall be capable of with-
document the required procedure for a par- standing the environment to which
ticular machine or equipment, when all of they are exposed for the maximum pe-
the following elements exist: (1) The ma- riod of time that exposure is expected.
chine or equipment has no potential for (2) Tagout devices shall be con-
stored or residual energy or reaccumulation
structed and printed so that exposure
of stored energy after shut down which could
endanger employees; (2) the machine or to weather conditions or wet and damp
equipment has a single energy source which locations will not cause the tag to de-
can be readily identified and isolated; (3) the teriorate or the message on the tag to
isolation and locking out of that energy become illegible.
494
(3) Tags shall not deteriorate when energy control procedure being in-
used in corrosive environments such as spected.
areas where acid and alkali chemicals (D) Where tagout is used for energy
are handled and stored. control, the periodic inspection shall
(B) Standardized. Lockout and tagout include a review, between the inspector
devices shall be standardized within and each authorized and affected em-
the facility in at least one of the fol- ployee, of that employee’s responsibil-
lowing criteria: Color; shape; or size; ities under the energy control proce-
and additionally, in the case of tagout dure being inspected, and the elements
devices, print and format shall be set forth in paragraph (c)(7)(ii) of this
standardized.
section.
(C) Substantial—(1) Lockout devices.
Lockout devices shall be substantial (ii) The employer shall certify that
enough to prevent removal without the the periodic inspections have been per-
use of excessive force or unusual tech- formed. The certification shall identify
niques, such as with the use of bolt the machine or equipment on which
cutters or other metal cutting tools. the energy control procedure was being
(2) Tagout devices. Tagout devices, in- utilized, the date of the inspection, the
cluding and their means of attachment, employees included in the inspection,
shall be substantial enough to prevent and the person performing the inspec-
inadvertent or accidental removal. tion.
Tagout device attachment means shall (7) Training and communication. (i)
be of a non-reusable type, attachable The employer shall provide training to
by hand, self-locking, and non-releas- ensure that the purpose and function of
able with a minimum unlocking the energy control program are under-
strength of no less than 50 pounds and stood by employees and that the
having the general design and basic knowledge and skills required for the
characteristics of being at least equiv- safe application, usage, and removal of
alent to a one-piece, all-environment- the energy controls are acquired by
tolerant nylon cable tie. employees. The training shall include
(D) Identifiable. Lockout devices and the following:
tagout devices shall indicate the iden-
(A) Each authorized employee shall
tity of the employee applying the de-
receive training in the recognition of
vice(s).
(iii) Tagout devices shall warn applicable hazardous energy sources,
against hazardous conditions if the ma- the type and magnitude of the energy
chine or equipment is energized and available in the workplace, and the
shall include a legend such as the fol- methods and means necessary for en-
lowing: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do ergy isolation and control.
Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Oper- (B) Each affected employee shall be
ate. instructed in the purpose and use of
(6) Periodic inspection. (i) The em- the energy control procedure.
ployer shall conduct a periodic inspec- (C) All other employees whose work
tion of the energy control procedure at operations are or may be in an area
least annually to ensure that the pro- where energy control procedures may
cedure and the requirements of this be utilized, shall be instructed about
standard are being followed. the procedure, and about the prohibi-
(A) The periodic inspection shall be tion relating to attempts to restart or
perfomed by an authorized employee reenergize machines or equipment
other than the ones(s) utilizing the en- which are locked out or tagged out.
ergy control procedure being inspected. (ii) When tagout systems are used,
(B) The periodic inspection shall be
employees shall also be trained in the
conducted to correct any deviations or
following limitations of tags:
inadequacies identified.
(C) Where lockout is used for energy (A) Tags are essentially warning de-
control, the periodic inspection shall vices affixed to energy isolating de-
include a review, between the inspector vices, and do not provide the physical
and each authorized employee, of that restraint on those devices that is pro-
employee’s responsibilities under the vided by a lock.
495
(B) When a tag is attached to an en- applied, and after they are removed
ergy isolating means, it is not to be re- from the machine or equipment.
moved without authorization of the au- (d) Application of control. The estab-
thorized person responsible for it, and lished procedures for the application of
it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or energy control (the lockout or tagout
otherwise defeated. procedures) shall cover the following
(C) Tags must be legible and under- elements and actions and shall be done
standable by all authorized employees, in the following sequence:
affected employees, and all other em- (1) Preparation for shutdown. Before
ployees whose work operations are or an authorized or affected employee
may be in the area, in order to be effec- turns off a machine or equipment, the
tive. authorized employee shall have knowl-
(D) Tags and their means of attach- edge of the type and magnitude of the
ment must be made of materials which energy, the hazards of the energy to be
will withstand the environmental con- controlled, and the method or means to
ditions encountered in the workplace. control the energy.
(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of (2) Machine or equipment shutdown.
security, and their meaning needs to be The machine or equipment shall be
understood as part of the overall en- turned off or shut down using the pro-
ergy control program.
cedures established for the machine or
(F) Tags must be securely attached
equipment. An orderly shutdown must
to energy isolating devices so that they
be utilized to avoid any additional or
cannot be inadvertently or acciden-
increased hazard(s) to employees as a
tally detached during use.
result of the equipment stoppage.
(iii) Employee retraining.
(A) Retraining shall be provided for (3) Machine or equipment isolation. All
all authorized and affected employees energy isolating devices that are need-
whenever there is a change in their job ed to control the energy to the ma-
assignments, a change in machines, chine or equipment shall be physically
equipment or processes that present a located and operated in such a manner
new hazard, or when there is a change as to isolate the machine or equipment
in the energy control procedures. from the energy source(s).
(B) Additional retraining shall also (4) Lockout or tagout device applica-
be conducted whenever a periodic in- tion. (i) Lockout or tagout devices shall
spection under paragraph (c)(6) of this be affixed to each energy isolating de-
section reveals, or whenever the em- vice by authorized employees.
ployer has reason to believe, that there (ii) Lockout devices, where used,
are deviations from or inadequacies in shall be affixed in a manner to that
the employee’s knowledge or use of the will hold the energy isolating devices
energy control procedures. in a ‘‘safe’’ or ‘‘off’’ position.
(C) The retraining shall reestablish (iii) Tagout devices, where used, shall
employee proficiency and introduce be affixed in such a manner as will
new or revised control methods and clearly indicate that the operation or
procedures, as necessary. movement of energy isolating devices
(iv) The employer shall certify that from the ‘‘safe’’ or ‘‘off’’ position is
employee training has been accom- prohibited.
plished and is being kept up to date. (A) Where tagout devices are used
The certification shall contain each with energy isolating devices designed
employee’s name and dates of training. with the capability of being locked, the
(8) Energy isolation. Lockout or tag attachment shall be fastened at the
tagout shall be performed only bythe same point at which the lock would
authorized employees who are per- have been attached.
forming the servicing or maintenance. (B) Where a tag cannot be affixed di-
(9) Notification of employees. Affected rectly to the energy isolating device,
employees shall be notified by the em- the tag shall be located as close as
ployer or authorized employee of the safely possible to the device, in a posi-
application and removal of lockout de- tion that will be immediately obvious
vices or tagout devices. Notification to anyone attempting to operate the
shall be given before the controls are device.
496
(5) Stored energy. (i) Following the ap- safety to the removal of the device by
plication of lockout or tagout devices the authorized employee who applied
to energy isolating devices, all poten- it. The specific procedure shall include
tially hazardous stored or residual en- at least the following elements:
ergy shall be relieved, disconnected, re- (i) Verfication by the employer that
strained, and otherwise rendered safe. the authorized employee who applied
(ii) If there is a possibility of re- the device is not at the facility;
accumulation of stored energy to a (ii) Making all reasonable efforts to
hazardous level, verification of isola- contact the authorized employee to in-
tion shall be continued until the serv- form him/her that his/her lockout or
icing or maintenance is completed, or tagout device has been removed; and
until the possibility of such accumula- (iii) Ensuring that the authorized
tion no longer exists. employee has this knowledge before he/
(6) Verification of isolation. Prior to she resumes work at that facility.
starting work on machines or equip- (f) Additional requirements—(1) Testing
ment that have been locked out or or positioning of machines, equipment or
tagged out, the authorized employee components thereof. In situations in
shall verify that isolation and which lockout or tagout devices must
deenergization of the machine or be temporarily removed from the en-
equipment have been accomplished. ergy isolating device and the machine
(e) Release from lockout or tagout. Be- or equipment energized to test or posi-
fore lockout or tagout devices are re- tion the machine, equipment or compo-
moved and energy is restored to the nent thereof, the following sequence of
machine or equipment, procedures actions shall be followed:
shall be followed and actions taken by (i) Clear the machine or equipment of
the authorized employee(s) to ensure tools and materials in accordance with
the following: paragraph (e)(1) of this section;
(1) The machine or equipment. The (ii) Remove employees from the ma-
work area shall be inspected to ensure chine or equipment area in accordance
that nonessential items have been re- with paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
moved and to ensure that machine or (iii) Remove the lockout or tagout
equipment components are operation- devices as specified in paragraph (e)(3)
ally intact. of this section;
(2) Employees. (i) The work area shall (iv) Energize and proceed with test-
be checked to ensure that all employing or positioning;
ees have been safely positioned or re- (v) Deenergize all systems and re-
moved. apply energy control measures in ac-
(ii) After lockout or tagout devices cordance with paragraph (d) of this sec-
have been removed and before a mation to continue the servicing and/or
chine or equipment is started, affected maintenance.
employees shall be notified that the (2) Outside personnel (contractors, etc.).
lockout or tagout device(s) have been (i) Whenever outside servicing per-
removed. sonnel are to be engaged in activities
(3) Lockout or tagout devices removal. covered by the scope and application of
Each lockout or tagout device shall be this standard, the on-site employer and
removed from each energy isolating de- the outside employer shall inform each
vice by the employee who applied the other of their respective lockout or
device. Exception to paragraph (e)(3): tagout procedures.
When the authorized employee who ap- (ii) The on-site employer shall ensure
plied the lockout or tagout device is that his/her employees understand and
not available to remove it, that device comply with the restrictions and prohi-
may be removed under the direction of bitions of the outside employer’s en-
the employer, provided that specific ergy control program.
procedures and training for such re- (3) Group lockout or tagout. (i) When
moval have been developed, docu- servicing and/or maintenance is per-
mented and incorporated into the em- formed by a crew, craft, department or
ployer’s energy control program. The other group, they shall utilize a proce-
employer shall demonstrate that the dure which affords the employees a
specific procedure provides equivalent level of protection equivalent to that
497
provided by the implementation of a ments of this standard. When the energy iso-
personal lockout or tagout device. lating devices are not lockable, tagout may
(ii) Group lockout or tagout devices be used, provided the employer complies
with the provisions of the standard which re-
shall be used in accordance with the
quire additional training and more rigorous
procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) periodic inspections. When tagout is used
of this section including, but not nec- and the energy isolating devices are lock-
essarily limited to, the following spe- able, the employer must provide full em-
cific requirements: ployee protection (see paragraph (c)(3)) and
(A) Primary responsibility is vested additional training and more rigorous peri-
in an authorized employee for a set odic inspections are required. For more com-
number of employees working under plex systems, more comprehensive proce-
the protection of a group lockout or dures may need to be developed, documented
and utilized.
tagout device (such as an operations
lock); Lockout Procedure
(B) Provision for the authorized em-
Lockout procedure for
ployee to ascertain the exposure status
of individual group members with re-
gard to the lockout or tagout of the (Name of Company for single procedure or
identification of equipment if multiple pro-
machine or equipment and
cedures are used)
(C) When more than one crew, craft,
department, etc. is involved, assign- Purpose
ment of overall job-associated lockout This procedure establishes the minimum
or tagout control responsibility to an requirements for the lockout of energy iso-
authorized employee designated to co- lating devices whenever maintenance or
ordinate affected work forces and en- servicing is done on machines or equipment.
sure continuity of protection; and It shall be used to ensure that the machine
(D) Each authorized employee shall or equipment is stopped, isolated from all
affix a personal lockout or tagout de- potentially hazardous energy sources and
vice to the group lockout device, group locked out before employees perform any
servicing or maintenance where the unex-
lockbox, or comparable mechanism pected energization or start-up of the ma-
when he or she begins work, and shall chine or equipment or release of stored en-
remove those devices when he or she ergy could cause injury.
stops working on the machine or equip-
ment being serviced or maintained. Compliance With This Program
(4) Shift or personnel changes. Specific All employees are required to comply with
procedures shall be utilized during the restrictions and limitations imposed
shift or personnel changes to ensure upon them during the use of lockout. The au-
the continuity of lockout or tagout thorized employees are required to perform
protection, including provision for the the lockout in accordance with this proce-
dure. All employees, upon observing a ma-
orderly transfer of lockout or tagout chine or piece of equipment which is locked
device protection between off-going out to perform servicing or maintenance
and oncoming employees, to minimize shall not attempt to start, energize or use
exposure to hazards from the unex- that machine or equipment.
pected energization or start-up of the llllllllllllllllllllllll
machine or equipment, or the release Type of compliance enforcement to be taken
of stored energy. for violation of the above.
NOTE: The following appendix to § 1910.147
services as a non-mandatory guideline to as- Sequence of Lockout
sist employers and employees in complying (1) Notify all affected employees that serv-
with the requirements of this section, as well icing or maintenance is required on a ma-
as to provide other helpful information. chine or equipment and that the machine or
Nothing in the appendix adds to or detracts equipment must be shut down and locked out
from any of the requirements of this section. to perform the servicing or maintenance.
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.147—TYPICAL MINIMAL llllllllllllllllllllllll
LOCKOUT PROCEDURE Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees
and how to notify.
General
(2) The authorized employee shall refer to
The following simple lockout procedure is the company procedure to identify the type
provided to assist employers in developing and magnitude of the energy that the ma-
their procedures so they meet the require- chine or equipment utilizes, shall understand
498
the hazards of the energy, and shall know NOTE: The removal of some forms of block-
the methods to control the energy. ing may require reenergization of the ma-
llllllllllllllllllllllll chine before safe removal.
(5) Notify affected employees that the serv-
Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its haz-
icing or maintenance is completed and the
ards and the methods to control the energy.
machine or equipment is ready for use.
(3) If the machine or equipment is oper-
ating, shut it down by the normal stopping [54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54
procedure (depress stop button, open switch, FR 42498, Oct. 17, 1989; 55 FR 38685, 38686,
close valve, etc.). Sept. 20, 1990; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR
44265, July 25, 2011]
Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equip-
ment operating controls. Subpart K—Medical and First Aid
(4) De-activate the energy isolating de-
vice(s) so that the machine or equipment is AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
isolated from the energy source(s). pational Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29
llllllllllllllllllllllll U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor’s
Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
devices. 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
96 (62 FR 111), or 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), as ap-
(5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s)
plicable, and 29 CFR part 1911.
with assigned individual lock(s).
(6) Stored or residual energy (such as that
in capacitors, springs, elevated machine § 1910.151 Medical services and first
members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic sys- aid.
tems, and air, gas, steam, or water pressure, (a) The employer shall ensure the
etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by ready availability of medical personnel
methods such as grounding, repositioning,
for advice and consultation on matters
blocking, bleeding down, etc.
of plant health.
(b) In the absence of an infirmary,
Type(s) of stored energy—methods to dis- clinic, or hospital in near proximity to
sipate or restrain.
the workplace which is used for the
(7) Ensure that the equipment is discon- treatment of all injured employees, a
nected from the energy source(s) by first
person or persons shall be adequately
checking that no personnel are exposed, then
verify the isolation of the equipment by op- trained to render first aid. Adequate
erating the push button or other normal op- first aid supplies shall be readily avail-
erating control(s) or by testing to make cer- able.
tain the equipment will not operate. (c) Where the eyes or body of any per-
CAUTION: Return operating control(s) to son may be exposed to injurious corro-
neutral or ‘‘off’’ position after verifying the sive materials, suitable facilities for
isolation of the equipment. quick drenching or flushing of the eyes
llllllllllllllllllllllll and body shall be provided within the
Method of verifying the isolation of the work area for immediate emergency
equipment. use.
(8) The machine or equipment is now
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.151—FIRST AID KITS
locked out.
(NON-MANDATORY)
Restoring Equipment to Service. When the
servicing or maintenance is completed and First aid supplies are required to be readily
the machine or equipment is ready to return available under paragraph § 1910.151(b). An
to normal operating condition, the following example of the minimal contents of a generic
steps shall be taken. first aid kit is described in American Na-
(1) Check the machine or equipment and tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1998 ‘‘Min-
the immediate area around the machine or imum Requirements for Workplace First-aid
equipment to ensure that nonessential items Kits.’’ The contents of the kit listed in the
have been removed and that the machine or ANSI standard should be adequate for small
equipment components are operationally in- worksites. When larger operations or mul-
tact. tiple operations are being conducted at the
(2) Check the work area to ensure that all same location, employers should determine
employees have been safely positioned or re- the need for additional first aid kits at the
moved from the area. worksite, additional types of first aid equip-
(3) Verify that the controls are in neutral. ment and supplies and additional quantities
(4) Remove the lockout devices and reener- and types of supplies and equipment in the
gize the machine or equipment. first aid kits.
499
In a similar fashion, employers who have water to act as a temporary barrier to
unique or changing first-aid needs in their exclude air from mixing with the fuel
workplace may need to enhance their first- vapor by developing an aqueous film on
aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300
log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to iden-
the fuel surface of some hydrocarbons
tify these unique problems. Consultation which is capable of suppressing the
from the local fire/rescue department, appro- generation of fuel vapors.
priate medical professional, or local emer- (3) Approved means acceptable to the
gency room may be helpful to employers in Assistant Secretary under the fol-
these circumstances. By assessing the spe- lowing criteria:
cific needs of their workplace, employers can (i) If it is accepted, or certified, or
ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies
are available. Employers should assess the
listed, or labeled or otherwise deter-
specific needs of their worksite periodically mined to be safe by a nationally recog-
and augment the first aid kit appropriately. nized testing laboratory; or
If it is reasonably anticipated that employ- (ii) With respect to an installation or
ees will be exposed to blood or other poten- equipment of a kind which no nation-
tially infectious materials while using first ally recognized testing laboratory ac-
aid supplies, employers are required to pro- cepts, certifies, lists, labels, or deter-
vide appropriate personal protective equip-
ment (PPE) in compliance with the provi-
mines to be safe, if it is inspected or
sions of the Occupational Exposure to Blood tested by another Federal agency and
borne Pathogens standard, § 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 found in compliance with the provi-
FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate sions of the applicable National Fire
PPE for this type of exposure, such as Protection Association Fire Code; or
gloves, gowns, face shields, masks, and eye (iii) With respect to custom-made
protection. equipment or related installations
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 63 which are designed, fabricated for, and
FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, intended for use by its manufacturer
2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011] on the basis of test data which the em-
ployer keeps and makes available for
§ 1910.152 [Reserved]
inspection to the Assistant Secretary.
(iv) For the purposes of paragraph
Subpart L—Fire Protection (c)(3) of this section:
(A) Equipment is listed if it is of a
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- kind mentioned in a list which is pub-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 lished by a nationally recognized test-
U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor’s ing laboratory which makes periodic
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
inspections of the production of such
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 equipment and which states that such
FR 65008), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), as applica- equipment meets nationally recognized
ble, and 29 CFR part 1911. standards or has been tested and found
safe for use in a specified manner;
§ 1910.155 Scope, application and defi- (B) Equipment is labeled if there is
nitions applicable to this subpart. attached to it a label, symbol, or other
(a) Scope. This subpart contains re- identifying mark of a nationally recog-
quirements for fire brigades, and all nized testing laboratory which makes
portable and fixed fire suppression periodic inspections of the production
equipment, fire detection systems, and of such equipment, and whose labeling
fire or employee alarm systems in- indicates compliance with nationally
stalled to meet the fire protection re- recognized standards or tests to deter-
quirements of 29 CFR part 1910. mine safe use in a specified manner;
(b) Application. This subpart applies (C) Equipment is accepted if it has
to all employments except for mari- been inspected and found by a nation-
time, construction, and agriculture. ally recognized testing laboratory to
(c) Definitions applicable to this sub- conform to specified plans or to proce-
part—(1) After-flame means the time a dures of applicable codes; and
test specimen continues to flame after (D) Equipment is certified if it has
the flame source has been removed. been tested and found by a nationally
(2) Aqueous film forming foam (AFFF) recognized testing laboratory to meet
means a fluorinated surfactant with a nationally recognized standards or to
foam stabilizer which is diluted with be safe for use in a specified manner or
500
is of a kind whose production is peri- (13) Dry powder means a compound
odically inspected by a nationally rec- used to extinguish or control Class D
ognized testing laboratory, and if it fires.
bears a label, tag, or other record of (14) Education means the process of
certification. imparting knowledge or skill through
(E) Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of systematic instruction. It does not re-
nationally recognized testing labora- quire formal classroom instruction.
tory. (15) Enclosed structure means a struc-
(4) Assistant Secretary means the As- ture with a roof or ceiling and at least
sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- two walls which may present fire haz-
tional Safety and Health or designee. ards to employees, such as accumula-
(5) Automatic fire detection device tions of smoke, toxic gases and heat,
means a device designed to automati- similar to those found in buildings.
cally detect the presence of fire by (16) Extinguisher classification means
heat, flame, light, smoke or other prod- the letter classification given an extin-
ucts of combustion. guisher to designate the class or class-
es of fire on which an extinguisher will
(6) Buddy-breathing device means an
be effective.
accessory to self-contained breathing
(17) Extinguisher rating means the nu-
apparatus which permits a second per-
merical rating given to an extinguisher
son to share the same air supply as
which indicates the extinguishing po-
that of the wearer of the apparatus.
tential of the unit based on standard-
(7) Carbon dioxide means a colorless, ized tests developed by Underwriters’
odorless, electrically nonconductive Laboratories, Inc.
inert gas (chemical formula CO2) that (18) Fire brigade (private fire depart-
is a medium for extinguishing fires by ment, industrial fire department)
reducing the concentration of oxygen means an organized group of employees
or fuel vapor in the air to the point who are knowledgeable, trained, and
where conbustion is impossible. skilled in at least basic fire fighting
(8) Class A fire means a fire involving operations.
ordinary combustible materials such as (19) Fixed extinguishing system means
paper, wood, cloth, and some rubber a permanently installed system that
and plastic materials. either extinguishes or controls a fire at
(9) Class B fire means a fire involving the location of the system.
flammable or combustible liquids, (20) Flame resistance is the property of
flammable gases, greases and similar materials, or combinations of compo-
materials, and some rubber and plastic nent materials, to retard ignition and
materials. restrict the spread of flame.
(10) Class C fire means a fire involving (21) Foam means a stable aggregation
energized electrical equipment where of small bubbles which flow freely over
safety to the employee requires the use a burning liquid surface and form a co-
of electrically nonconductive extin- herent blanket which seals combus-
guishing media. tible vapors and thereby extinguishes
(11) Class D fire means a fire involving the fire.
combustible metals such as magne- (22) Gaseous agent is a fire extin-
sium, titanium, zirconium, sodium, guishing agent which is in the gaseous
lithium and potassium. state at normal room temperature and
(12) Dry chemical means an extin- pressure. It has low viscosity, can ex-
guishing agent composed of very small pand or contract with changes in pres-
particles of chemicals such as, but not sure and temperature, and has the abil-
limited to, sodium bicarbonate, potas- ity to diffuse readily and to distribute
sium bicarbonate, urea-based potas- itself uniformly throughout an enclo-
sium bicarbonate, potassium chloride, sure.
or monoammonium phosphate supple- (23) Halon 1211 means a colorless,
mented by special treatment to provide faintly sweet smelling, electrically
resistance to packing and moisture ab- nonconductive liquefied gas (chemical
sorption (caking) as well as to provide formula CBrC1F2) which is a medium
proper flow capabilities. Dry chemical for extinguishing fires by inhibiting
does not include dry powders. the chemical chain reaction of fuel and
501
oxygen. It is also known as (33) Outer shell is the exterior layer of
bromochlorodifluoromethane. material on the fire coat and protec-
(24) Halon 1301 means a colorless, tive trousers which forms the outer-
odorless, electrically nonconductive most barrier between the fire fighter
gas (chemical formula CBrF3) which is and the environment. It is attached to
a medium for extinguishing fires by in- the vapor barrier and liner and is usu-
hibiting the chemical chain reaction of ally constructed with a storm flap,
fuel and oxygen. It is also known as suitable closures, and pockets.
bromotrifluoromethane. (34) Positive-pressure breathing appa-
(25) Helmet is a head protective device ratus means self-contained breathing
consisting of a rigid shell, energy ab- apparatus in which the pressure in the
sorption system, and chin strap in- breathing zone is positive in relation to
tended to be worn to provide protection the immediate environment during in-
for the head or portions thereof, halation and exhalation.
against impact, flying or falling ob- (35) Pre-discharge employee alarm
jects, electric shock, penetration, heat means an alarm which will sound at a
and flame. set time prior to actual discharge of an
(26) Incipient stage fire means a fire extinguishing system so that employ-
which is in the initial or beginning ees may evacuate the discharge area
stage and which can be controlled or prior to system discharge.
extinguished by portable fire extin- (36) Quick disconnect valve means a
guishers, Class II standpipe or small device which starts the flow of air by
hose systems without the need for pro- inserting of the hose (which leads from
tective clothing or breathing appa- the facepiece) into the regulator of
ratus. self-contained breathing apparatus,
(27) Inspection means a visual check and stops the flow of air by disconnec-
of fire protection systems and equip- tion of the hose from the regulator.
ment to ensure that they are in place, (37) Sprinkler alarm means an ap-
charged, and ready for use in the event proved device installed so that any wa-
of a fire. terflow from a sprinkler system equal
(28) Interior structural fire fighting to or greater than that from single
means the physical activity of fire sup- automatic sprinkler will result in an
pression, rescue or both, inside of audible alarm signal on the premises.
buildings or enclosed structures which (38) Sprinkler system means a system
are involved in a fire situation beyond of piping designed in accordance with
the incipient stage. fire protection engineering standards
(29) Lining means a material perma- and installed to control or extinguish
nently attached to the inside of the fires. The system includes an adequate
outer shell of a garment for the pur- and reliable water supply, and a net-
pose of thermal protection and pad- work of specially sized piping and
ding. sprinklers which are interconnected.
(30) Local application system means a The system also includes a control
fixed fire suppression system which has valve and a device for actuating an
a supply of extinguishing agent, with alarm when the system is in operation.
nozzles arranged to automatically dis- (39) Standpipe systems. (i) Class I
charge extinguishing agent directly on standpipe system means a 21⁄2″ (6.3 cm)
the burning material to extinguish or hose connection for use by fire depart-
control a fire. ments and those trained in handling
(31) Maintenance means the perform- heavy fire streams.
ance of services on fire protection (ii) Class II standpipe system means a
equipment and systems to assure that 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) hose system which pro-
they will perform as expected in the vides a means for the control or extin-
event of a fire. Maintenance differs guishment of incipient stage fires.
from inspection in that maintenance (iii) Class III standpipe system means a
requires the checking of internal fit- combined system of hose which is for
tings, devices and agent supplies. the use of employees trained in the use
(32) Multipurpose dry chemical means a of hose operations and which is capable
dry chemical which is approved for use of furnishing effective water discharge
on Class A, Class B and Class C fires. during the more advanced stages of fire
502
(beyond the incipient stage) in the in- and the functions that the fire brigade
terior of workplaces. Hose outlets are is to perform at the workplace. The or-
available for both 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) and 21⁄2″ ganizational statement shall be avail-
(6.3 cm) hose. able for inspection by the Assistant
(iv) Small hose system means a system Secretary and by employees or their
of hose ranging in diameter from 5⁄8″ designated representatives.
(1.6 cm up to 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) which is for (2) Personnel. The employer shall as-
the use of employees and which pro- sure that employees who are expected
vides a means for the control and ex- to do interior structural fire fighting
tinguishment of incipient stage fires. are physically capable of performing
(40) Total flooding system means a duties which may be assigned to them
fixed suppression system which is ar- during emergencies. The employer
ranged to automatically discharge a shall not permit employees with known
predetermined concentration of agent
heart disease, epilepsy, or emphysema,
into an enclosed space for the purpose
to participate in fire brigade emer-
of fire extinguishment or control.
gency activities unless a physician’s
(41) Training means the process of
certificate of the employees’ fitness to
making proficient through instruction
and hands-on practice in the operation participate in such activities is pro-
of equipment, including respiratory vided. For employees assigned to fire
protection equipment, that is expected brigades before September 15, 1980, this
to be used and in the performance of paragraph is effective on September 15,
assigned duties. 1990. For employees assigned to fire
(42) Vapor barrier means that mate- brigades on or after September 15, 1980,
rial used to prevent or substantially in- this paragraph is effective December
hibit the transfer of water, corrosive 15, 1980.
liquids and steam or other hot vapors (c) Training and education. (1) The
from the outside of a garment to the employer shall provide training and
wearer’s body. education for all fire brigade members
commensurate with those duties and
[45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 53
FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988]
functions that fire brigade members
are expected to perform. Such training
§ 1910.156 Fire brigades. and education shall be provided to fire
brigade members before they perform
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope.
fire brigade emergency activities. Fire
This section contains requirements for
brigade leaders and training instruc-
the organization, training, and per-
sonal protective equipment of fire bri- tors shall be provided with training
gades whenever they are established by and education which is more com-
an employer. prehensive than that provided to the
(2) Application. The requirements of general membership of the fire brigade.
this section apply to fire brigades, in- (2) The employer shall assure that
dustrial fire departments and private training and education is conducted
or contractual type fire departments. frequently enough to assure that each
Personal protective equipment require- member of the fire brigade is able to
ments apply only to members of fire perform the member’s assigned duties
brigades performing interior structural and functions satisfactorily and in a
fire fighting. The requirements of this safe manner so as not to endanger fire
section do not apply to airport crash brigade members or other employees.
rescue or forest fire fighting oper- All fire brigade members shall be pro-
ations. vided with training at least annually.
(b) Organization—(1) Organizational In addition, fire brigade members who
statement. The employer shall prepare are expected to perform interior struc-
and maintain a statement or written tural fire fighting shall be provided
policy which establishes the existence with an education session or training
of a fire brigade; the basic organiza- at least quarterly.
tional structure; the type, amount, and (3) The quality of the training and
frequency of training to be provided to education program for fire brigade
fire brigade members; the expected members shall be similar to those con-
number of members in the fire brigade; ducted by such fire training schools as
503
the Maryland Fire and Rescue Insti- the requirements contained in this
tute; Iowa Fire Service Extension; paragraph. As the new equipment is
West Virginia Fire Service Extension; provided, the employer shall assure
Georgia Fire Academy, New York that all fire brigade members wear the
State Department, Fire Prevention and equipment when performing interior
Control; Louisiana State University structural fire fighting. After July 1,
Firemen Training Program, or Wash- 1985, the employer shall assure that all
ington State’s Fire Service Training fire brigade members wear protective
Commission for Vocational Education. clothing meeting the requirements of
(For example, for the oil refinery in- this paragraph when performing inte-
dustry, with its unique hazards, the rior structural fire fighting.
training and education program for (ii) The employer shall assure that
those fire brigade members shall be protective clothing protects the head,
similar to those conducted by Texas A body, and extremities, and consists of
& M University, Lamar University, at least the following components: foot
Reno Fire School, or the Delaware and leg protection; hand protection;
State Fire School.) body protection; eye, face and head
(4) The employer shall inform fire protection.
brigade members about special hazards (2) Foot and leg protection. (i) Foot
such as storage and use of flammable and leg protection shall meet the re-
liquids and gases, toxic chemicals, ra- quirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and
dioactive sources, and water reactive (e)(2)(iii) of this section, and may be
substances, to which they may be ex- achieved by either of the following
posed during fire and other emer- methods:
gencies. The fire brigade members shall
(A) Fully extended boots which pro-
also be advised of any changes that
vide protection for the legs; or
occur in relation to the special haz-
ards. The employer shall develop and (B) Protective shoes or boots worn in
make available for inspection by fire combination with protective trousers
brigade members, written procedures that meet the requirements of para-
that describe the actions to be taken in graph (e)(3) of this section.
situations involving the special haz- (ii) Protective footwear shall meet
ards and shall include these in the the requirements of § 1910.136 for Class
training and education program. 75 footwear. In addition, protective
(d) Fire fighting equipment. The em- footwear shall be water-resistant for at
ployer shall maintain and inspect, at least 5 inches (12.7 cm) above the bot-
least annually, fire fighting equipment tom of the heel and shall be equipped
to assure the safe operational condi- with slip-resistant outer soles.
tion of the equipment. Portable fire ex- (iii) Protective footwear shall be
tinguishers and respirators shall be in- tested in accordance with paragraph (1)
spected at least monthly. Fire fighting of appendix E, and shall provide protec-
equipment that is in damaged or un- tion against penetration of the midsole
serviceable condition shall be removed by a size 8D common nail when at least
from service and replaced. 300 pounds (1330 N) of static force is ap-
(e) Protective clothing. The following plied to the nail.
requirements apply to those employees (3) Body protection. (i) Body protec-
who perform interior structural fire tion shall be coordinated with foot and
fighting. The requirements do not leg protection to ensure full body pro-
apply to employees who use fire extin- tection for the wearer. This shall be
guishers or standpipe systems to con- achieved by one of the following meth-
trol or extinguish fires only in the in- ods:
cipient stage. (A) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat
(1) General. (i) The employer shall meeting the requirements of paragraph
provide at no cost to the employee and (e)(3)(ii) of this section in combination
assure the use of protective clothing with fully extended boots meeting the
which complies with the requirements requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii)
of this paragraph. The employer shall and (e)(2)(iii) of this section; or
assure that protective clothing ordered (B) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat in
or purchased after July 1, 1981, meets combination with protective trousers
504
both of which meet the requirements of (C) The temperature inside the palm
paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section. and gripping surface of the fingers of
(ii) The performance, construction, gloves shall not exceed 135 °F (57 °C)
and testing of fire-resistive coats and when gloves or glove system are ex-
protective trousers shall be at least posed to 932 °F (500 °C) for five seconds
equivalent to the requirements of the at 4 psi (28 kPa) pressure.
National Fire Protection Association (ii) Exterior materials of gloves shall
(NFPA) standard NFPA No. 1971–1975, be flame resistant and shall be tested
‘‘Protective Clothing for Structural in accordance with paragraph (3) of ap-
Fire Fighting,’’ which is incorporated pendix E. Maximum allowable
by reference as specified in § 1910.6, (See afterflame shall be 2.0 seconds, and the
appendix D to subpart L) with the fol- maximum char length shall be 4.0
lowing permissible variations from inches (10.2 cm).
those requirements: (iii) When design of the fire-resistive
(A) Tearing strength of the outer coat does not otherwise provide protec-
shell shall be a minimum of 8 pounds tion for the wrists, protective gloves
(35.6 N) in any direction when tested in shall have wristlets of at least 4.0
accordance with paragraph (2) of ap- inches (10.2 cm) in length to protect
pendix E; and the wrist area when the arms are ex-
(B) The outer shell may discolor but tended upward and outward from the
shall not separate or melt when placed body.
in a forced air laboratory oven at a (5) Head, eye and face protection. (i)
temperature of 500 °F (260 °C) for a pe- Head protection shall consist of a pro-
riod of five minutes. After cooling to tective head device with ear flaps and
ambient temperature and using the chin strap which meet the perform-
test method specified in paragraph (3) ance, construction, and testing require-
of appendix E, char length shall not ex- ments of the National Fire Safety and
ceed 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) and after- Research Office of the National Fire
flame shall not exceed 2.0 seconds. Prevention and Control Administra-
(4) Hand protection. (i) Hand protection, U.S. Department of Commerce
tion shall consist of protective gloves (now known as the U.S. Fire Adminis-
or glove system which will provide pro- tration), which are contained in
tection against cut, puncture, and heat ‘‘Model Performance Criteria for
penetration. Gloves or glove system Structural Firefighters’ Helmets’’ (Au-
shall be tested in accordance with the gust 1977) which is incorporated by ref-
test methods contained in the National erence as specified in § 1910.6, (See ap-
Institute for Occupational Safety and pendix D to subpart L).
Health (NIOSH) 1976 publication, ‘‘The (ii) Protective eye and face devices
Development of Criteria for Fire Fight- which comply with § 1910.133 shall be
er’s Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Meth- used by fire brigade members when per-
ods,’’ which is incorporated by ref- forming operations where the hazards
erence as specified in § 1910.6, (See ap- of flying or falling materials which
pendix D to subpart L) and shall meet may cause eye and face injuries are
the following criteria for cut, puncture, present. Protective eye and face de-
and heat penetration: vices provided as accessories to protec-
(A) Materials used for gloves shall re- tive head devices (face shields) are per-
sist surface cut by a blade with an edge mitted when such devices meet the re-
having a 60° included angle and a .001 quirements of § 1910.133.
inch (.0025 cm.) radius, under an ap- (iii) Full facepieces, helmets, or
plied force of 16 lbf (72N), and at a slic- hoods of breathing apparatus which
ing velocity of greater or equal to 60 in/ meet the requirements of § 1910.134 and
min (2.5 cm./sec); paragraph (f) of this section, shall be
(B) Materials used for the palm and acceptable as meeting the eye and face
palm side of the fingers shall resist protection requirements of paragraph
puncture by a penetrometer (simu- (e)(5)(ii) of this section.
lating a 4d lath nail), under an applied (f) Respiratory protection devices—(1)
force of 13.2 lbf (60N), and at a velocity General requirements. (i) The employer
greater or equal to 20 in/min (.85 cm./ must ensure that respirators are pro-
sec); and vided to, and used by, each fire brigade
505
member, and that the respirators meet type. Effective July 1, 1983, only pres-
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134 for sure-demand or other positive-pressure
each employee required by this section self-contained breathing apparatus
to use a respirator. shall be worn by fire brigade members
(ii) Approved self-contained breath- performing interior structural fire
ing apparatus with full-facepiece, or fighting.
with approved helmet or hood configu- (ii) This paragraph does not prohibit
ration, shall be provided to and worn the use of a self-contained breathing
by fire brigade members while working apparatus where the apparatus can be
inside buildings or confined spaces switched from a demand to a positive-
where toxic products of combustion or pressure mode. However, such appa-
an oxygen deficiency may be present. ratus shall be in the positive-pressure
Such apparatus shall also be worn dur- mode when fire brigade members are
ing emergency situations involving performing interior structural fire
toxic substances. fighting operations.
(iii) Approved self-contained breath-
ing apparatus may be equipped with ei- [45 FR 60706, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
1, 1981; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9239,
ther a ‘‘buddy-breathing’’ device or a
Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR
quick disconnect valve, even if these 33467, June 18, 1998; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008]
devices are not certified by NIOSH. If
these accessories are used, they shall PORTABLE FIRE SUPPRESSION
not cause damage to the apparatus, or EQUIPMENT
restrict the air flow of the apparatus,
or obstruct the normal operation of the § 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
apparatus.
(iv) Approved self-contained com- (a) Scope and application. The require-
pressed air breathing apparatus may be ments of this section apply to the
used with approved cylinders from placement, use, maintenance, and test-
other approved self-contained coming of portable fire extinguishers pro-
pressed air breathing apparatus provided for the use of employees. Para-
vided that such cylinders are of the graph (d) of this section does not apply
same capacity and pressure rating. All to extinguishers provided for employee
compressed air cylinders used with use on the outside of workplace build-
self-contained breathing apparatus ings or structures. Where extinguishers
shall meet DOT and NIOSH criteria. are provided but are not intended for
(v) Self-contained breathing employee use and the employer has an
apparatuses must have a minimum emergency action plan and a fire pre-
service-life rating of 30 minutes in ac- vention plan that meet the require-
cordance with the methods and re- ments of 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR
quirements specified by NIOSH under 1910.39 respectively, then only the re-
42 CFR part 84, except for escape self- quirements of paragraphs (e) and (f) of
contained breathing apparatus this section apply.
(ESCBAs) used only for emergency es- (b) Exemptions. (1) Where the em-
cape purposes. ployer has established and imple-
(vi) Self-contained breathing appa- mented a written fire safety policy
ratus shall be provided with an indi- which requires the immediate and total
cator which automatically sounds an evacuation of employees from the
audible alarm when the remaining workplace upon the sounding of a fire
service life of the apparatus is reduced alarm signal and which includes an
to within a range of 20 to 25 percent of emergency action plan and a fire pre-
its rated service time. vention plan which meet the require-
(2) Positive-pressure breathing appa- ments of 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR
ratus. (i) The employer shall assure 1910.39 respectively, and when extin-
that self-contained breathing appa- guishers are not available in the work-
ratus ordered or purchased after July 1, place, the employer is exempt from all
1981, for use by fire brigade members requirements of this section unless a
performing interior structural fire specific standard in part 1910 requires
fighting operations, are of the pres- that a portable fire extinguisher be
sure-demand or other positive-pressure provided.
506
(2) Where the employer has an emer- tems meet the respective requirements
gency action plan meeting the require- of § 1910.158 or § 1910.159, that they pro-
ments of § 1910.38 which designates cer- vide total coverage of the area to be
tain employees to be the only employ- protected, and that employees are
ees authorized to use the available trained at least annually in their use.
portable fire extinguishers, and which (4) The employer shall distribute
requires all other employees in the fire portable fire extinguishers for use by
area to immediately evacuate the af- employees on Class B fires so that the
fected work area upon the sounding of travel distance from the Class B hazard
the fire alarm, the employer is exempt area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2
from the distribution requirements in m) or less.
paragraph (d) of this section. (5) The employer shall distribute
(c) General requirements. (1) The em- portable fire extinguishers used for
ployer shall provide portable fire extin- Class C hazards on the basis of the ap-
guishers and shall mount, locate and propriate pattern for the existing Class
identify them so that they are readily A or Class B hazards.
accessible to employees without sub- (6) The employer shall distribute
jecting the employees to possible in- portable fire extinguishers or other
jury. containers of Class D extinguishing
(2) Only approved portable fire extin-
agent for use by employees so that the
guishers shall be used to meet the re-
travel distance from the combustible
quirements of this section.
metal working area to any extin-
(3) The employer shall not provide or
guishing agent is 75 feet (22.9 m) or
make available in the workplace port-
less. Portable fire extinguishers for
able fire extinguishers using carbon
Class D hazards are required in those
tetrachloride or chlorobromomethane
combustible metal working areas
extinguishing agents.
where combustible metal powders,
(4) The employer shall assure that
flakes, shavings, or similarly sized
portable fire extinguishers are main-
products are generated at least once
tained in a fully charged and operable
condition and kept in their designated every two weeks.
places at all times except during use. (e) Inspection, maintenance and testing.
(5) The employer shall remove from (1) The employer shall be responsible
service all soldered or riveted shell for the inspection, maintenance and
self-generating soda acid or self-gener- testing of all portable fire extin-
ating foam or gas cartridge water type guishers in the workplace.
portable fire extinguishers which are (2) Portable extinguishers or hose
operated by inverting the extinguisher used in lieu thereof under paragraph
to rupture the cartridge or to initiate (d)(3) of this section shall be visually
an uncontrollable pressure generating inspected monthly.
chemical reaction to expel the agent. (3) The employer shall assure that
(d) Selection and distribution. (1) Port- portable fire extinguishers are sub-
able fire extinguishers shall be projected to an annual maintenance
vided for employee use and selected check. Stored pressure extinguishers
and distributed based on the classes of do not require an internal examina-
anticipated workplace fires and on the tion. The employer shall record the an-
size and degree of hazard which would nual maintenance date and retain this
affect their use. record for one year after the last entry
(2) The employer shall distribute or the life of the shell, whichever is
portable fire extinguishers for use by less. The record shall be available to
employees on Class A fires so that the the Assistant Secretary upon request.
travel distance for employees to any (4) The employer shall assure that
extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less. stored pressure dry chemical extin-
(3) The employer may use uniformly guishers that require a 12-year hydro-
spaced standpipe systems or hose sta- static test are emptied and subjected
tions connected to a sprinkler system to applicable maintenance procedures
installed for emergency use by employ- every 6 years. Dry chemical extin-
ees instead of Class A portable fire ex- guishers having non-refillable dispos-
tinguishers, provided that such sys- able containers are exempt from this
507
requirement. When recharging or hy- TABLE L–1—Continued
drostatic testing is performed, the 6-
Test
year requirement begins from that inter-
Type of extinguishers
date. val
(years)
(5) The employer shall assure that al-
ternate equivalent protection is pro- Dry powder, cartridge or cylinder operated with mild
vided when portable fire extinguishers steel shells .............................................................. 12
are removed from service for mainte- 1 Extinguishershaving shells constructed of copper or brass
joined by soft solder or rivets shall not be hydrostatically test-
nance and recharging. ed and shall be removed from service by January 1, 1982.
(f) Hydrostatic testing. (1) The em- (Not permitted)
ployer shall assure that hydrostatic (4) The employer shall assure that
testing is performed by trained persons portable fire extinguishers are
with suitable testing equipment and fa- hydrostatically tested whenever they
cilities. show new evidence of corrosion or me-
(2) The employer shall assure that chanical injury, except under the con-
portable extinguishers are ditions listed in paragraphs (f)(2)(i)–(v)
hydrostatically tested at the intervals of this section.
listed in Table L–1 of this section, ex- (5) The employer shall assure that
cept under any of the following condi- hydrostatic tests are performed on ex-
tions: tinguisher hose assemblies which are
(i) When the unit has been repaired equipped with a shut-off nozzle at the
by soldering, welding, brazing, or use of discharge end of the hose. The test in-
patching compounds; terval shall be the same as specified for
(ii) When the cylinder or shell the extinguisher on which the hose is
threads are damaged; installed.
(iii) When there is corrosion that has (6) The employer shall assure that
caused pitting, including corrosion carbon dioxide hose assemblies with a
under removable name plate assem- shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically
blies; tested at 1,250 psi (8,620 kPa).
(iv) When the extinguisher has been (7) The employer shall assure that
burned in a fire; or dry chemical and dry powder hose as-
(v) When a calcium chloride extin- semblies with a shut-off nozzle are
guishing agent has been used in a hydrostatically tested at 300 psi (2,070
stainless steel shell. kPa).
(3) In addition to an external visual (8) Hose assemblies passing a hydro-
examination, the employer shall assure static test do not require any type of
that an internal examination of cyl- recording or stamping.
inders and shells to be tested is made (9) The employer shall assure that
prior to the hydrostatic tests. hose assemblies for carbon dioxide ex-
tinguishers that require a hydrostatic
TABLE L–1 test are tested within a protective cage
device.
Test (10) The employer shall assure that
inter-
Type of extinguishers val carbon dioxide extinguishers and nitro-
(years) gen or carbon dioxide cylinders used
Soda acid (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ........ (1) with wheeled extinguishers are tested
Soda acid (stainless steel shell) ................................ 5 every 5 years at 5/3 of the service pres-
Cartridge operated water and/or antifreeze ............... 5 sure as stamped into the cylinder. Ni-
Stored pressure water and/or antifreeze ................... 5
Wetting agent ............................................................. 5
trogen cylinders which comply with 49
Foam (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ............... (1) CFR 173.34(e)(15) may be
Foam (stainless steel shell) ....................................... 5 hydrostatically tested every 10 years.
Aqueous Film Forming foam (AFFF) ......................... 5 (11) The employer shall assure that
Loaded stream ........................................................... 5
Dry chemical with stainless steel ............................... 5
all stored pressure and Halon 1211 types
Carbon dioxide ........................................................... 5 of extinguishers are hydrostatically
Dry chemical, stored pressure, with mild steel, tested at the factory test pressure not
brazed brass or aluminum shells ........................... 12 to exceed two times the service pres-
Dry chemical, cartridge or cylinder operated, with
mild steel shells ...................................................... 12
sure.
Halon 1211 ................................................................. 12 (12) The employer shall assure that
Halon 1301 ................................................................. 12 acceptable self-generating type soda
508
acid and foam extinguishers are tested (2) The employer shall provide the
at 350 psi (2,410 kPa). education required in paragraph (g)(1)
(13) Air or gas pressure may not be of this section upon initial employ-
used for hydrostatic testing. ment and at least annually thereafter.
(14) Extinguisher shells, cylinders, or (3) The employer shall provide em-
cartridges which fail a hydrostatic ployees who have been designated to
pressure test, or which are not fit for use fire fighting equipment as part of
testing shall be removed from service an emergency action plan with train-
and from the workplace. ing in the use of the appropriate equip-
(15)(i) The equipment for testing ment.
compressed gas type cylinders shall be (4) The employer shall provide the
of the water jacket type. The equip- training required in paragraph (g)(3) of
ment shall be provided with an expan- this section upon initial assignment to
sion indicator which operates with an the designated group of employees and
accuracy within one percent of the at least annually thereafter.
total expansion or .1cc (.1mL) of liquid. [45 FR 60708, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
(ii) The equipment for testing non- 1, 1981, as amended at 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29,
compressed gas type cylinders shall 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964,
Nov. 7, 2002]
consist of the following:
(A) A hydrostatic test pump, hand or § 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
power operated, capable of producing
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope.
not less than 150 percent of the test
This section applies to all small hose,
pressure, which shall include appro-
Class II, and Class III standpipe sys-
priate check valves and fittings;
tems installed to meet the require-
(B) A flexible connection for attachments of a particular OSHA standard.
ment to fittings to test through the ex- (2) Exception. This section does not
tinguisher nozzle, test bonnet, or hose apply to Class I standpipe systems.
outlet, as is applicable; and (b) Protection of standpipes. The em-
(C) A protective cage or barrier for ployer shall assure that standpipes are
personal protection of the tester, de- located or otherwise protected against
signed to provide visual observation of mechanical damage. Damaged
the extinguisher under test. standpipes shall be repaired promptly.
(16) The employer shall maintain and (c) Equipment—(1) Reels and cabinets.
provide upon request to the Assistant Where reels or cabinets are provided to
Secretary evidence that the required contain fire hose, the employer shall
hydrostatic testing of fire extin- assure that they are designed to facili-
guishers has been performed at the tate prompt use of the hose valves, the
time intervals shown in Table L–1. hose, and other equipment at the time
Such evidence shall be in the form of a of a fire or other emergency. The em-
certification record which includes the ployer shall assure that the reels and
date of the test, the signature of the cabinets are conspicuously identified
person who performed the test and the and used only for fire equipment.
serial number, or other identifier, of (2) Hose outlets and connections. (i)
the fire extinguisher that was tested. The employer shall assure that hose
Such records shall be kept until the ex- outlets and connections are located
tinguisher is hydrostatically retested high enough above the floor to avoid
at the time interval specified in Table being obstructed and to be accessible
L–1 or until the extinguisher is taken to employees.
out of service, whichever comes first. (ii) The employer shall standardize
(g) Training and education. (1) Where screw threads or provide appropriate
the employer has provided portable fire adapters throughout the system and
extinguishers for employee use in the assure that the hose connections are
workplace, the employer shall also pro- compatible with those used on the sup-
vide an educational program to famil- porting fire equipment.
iarize employees with the general prin- (3) Hose. (i) The employer shall assure
ciples of fire extinguisher use and the that every 11⁄2″ (3.8 cm) or smaller hose
hazards involved with incipient stage outlet used to meet this standard is
fire fighting. equipped with hose connected and
509
ready for use. In extremely cold cli- sure that proper pressure is maintained
mates where such installation may re- at all times except during repairs.
sult in damaged equipment, the hose (ii) The employer shall assure that
may be stored in another location pro- valves in the main piping connections
vided it is readily available and can be to the automatic sources of water sup-
connected when needed. ply are kept fully open at all times ex-
(ii) Standpipe systems installed after cept during repair.
January 1, 1981, for use by employees, (iii) The employer shall assure that
shall be equipped with lined hose. Un- hose systems are inspected at least an-
lined hose may remain in use on exist- nually and after each use to assure
ing systems. However, after the effec- that all of the equipment and hose are
tive date of this standard, unlined hose in place, available for use, and in serv-
which becomes unserviceable shall be iceable condition.
replaced with lined hose. (iv) When the system or any portion
(iii) The employer shall provide hose thereof is found not to be serviceable,
of such length that friction loss result- the employer shall remove it from
ing from water flowing through the service immediately and replace it
hose will not decrease the pressure at with equivalent protection such as ex-
the nozzle below 30 psi (210 kPa). The tinguishers and fire watches.
dynamic pressure at the nozzle shall be (v) The employer shall assure that
within the range of 30 psi (210 kPa) to hemp or linen hose on existing systems
125 psi (860 kPa). is unracked, physically inspected for
deterioration, and reracked using a dif-
(4) Nozzles. The employer shall assure
ferent fold pattern at least annually.
that standpipe hose is equipped with
The employer shall assure that defec-
shut-off type nozzles.
tive hose is replaced in accordance
(d) Water supply. The minimum water with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section.
supply for standpipe and hose systems, (vi) The employer shall designate
which are provided for the use of em- trained persons to conduct all inspec-
ployees, shall be sufficient to provide tions required under this section.
100 gallons per minute (6.3 l/s) for a pe-
riod of at least thirty minutes. [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 61
FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
(e) Tests and maintenance—(1) Accept-
ance tests. (i) The employer shall assure FIXED FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
that the piping of Class II and Class III
systems installed after January 1, 1981, § 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler sys-
including yard piping, is tems.
hydrostatically tested for a period of at (a) Scope and application. (1) The re-
least 2 hours at not less than 200 psi quirements of this section apply to all
(1380 kPa), or at least 50 psi (340 kPa) automatic sprinkler systems installed
in excess of normal pressure when such to meet a particular OSHA standard.
pressure is greater than 150 psi (1030 (2) For automatic sprinkler systems
kPa). used to meet OSHA requirements and
(ii) The employer shall assure that installed prior to the effective date of
hose on all standpipe systems installed this standard, compliance with the Na-
after January 1, 1981, is hydrostatically tional Fire Protection Association
tested with couplings in place, at a (NFPA) or the National Board of Fire
pressure of not less than 200 psi (1380 Underwriters (NBFU) standard in effect
kPa), before it is placed in service. at the time of the system’s installation
This pressure shall be maintained for will be acceptable as compliance with
at least 15 seconds and not more than this section.
one minute during which time the hose (b) Exemptions. Automatic sprinkler
shall not leak nor shall any jacket systems installed in workplaces, but
thread break during the test. not required by OSHA, are exempt
(2) Maintenance. (i) The employer from the requirements of this section.
shall assure that water supply tanks (c) General requirements—(1) Design. (i)
are kept filled to the proper level ex- All automatic sprinkler designs used to
cept during repairs. When pressure comply with this standard shall pro-
tanks are used, the employer shall as- vide the necessary discharge patterns,
510
densities, and water flow characteris- (8) Sprinklers. (i) The employer shall
tics for complete coverage in a par- assure that only approved sprinklers
ticular workplace or zoned subdivision are used on systems.
of the workplace. (ii) The employer may not use older
(ii) The employer shall assure that style sprinklers to replace standard
only approved equipment and devices sprinklers without a complete engi-
are used in the design and installation neering review of the altered part of
of automatic sprinkler systems used to the system.
comply with this standard. (iii) The employer shall assure that
sprinklers are protected from mechan-
(2) Maintenance. The employer shall
ical damage.
properly maintain an automatic sprin-
(9) Sprinkler alarms. On all sprinkler
kler system installed to comply with
systems having more than twenty (20)
this section. The employer shall assure sprinklers, the employer shall assure
that a main drain flow test is per- that a local waterflow alarm is pro-
formed on each system annually. The vided which sounds an audible signal
inspector’s test valve shall be opened on the premises upon water flow
at least every two years to assure that through the system equal to the flow
the sprinkler system operates properly. from a single sprinkler.
(3) Acceptance tests. The employer (10) Sprinkler spacing. The employer
shall conduct proper acceptance tests shall assure that sprinklers are spaced
on sprinkler systems installed for em- to provide a maximum protection area
ployee protection after January 1, 1981, per sprinkler, a minimum of inter-
and record the dates of such tests. ference to the discharge pattern by
Proper acceptance tests include the building or structural members or
following: building contents and suitable sensi-
(i) Flushing of underground connec- tivity to possible fire hazards. The
tions; minimum vertical clearance between
(ii) Hydrostatic tests of piping in sys- sprinklers and material below shall be
tem; 18 inches (45.7 cm).
(iii) Air tests in dry-pipe systems; (11) Hydraulically designed systems.
(iv) Dry-pipe valve operation; and The employer shall assure that hydrau-
lically designed automatic sprinkler
(v) Test of drainage facilities.
systems or portions thereof are identi-
(4) Water supplies. The employer shall
fied and that the location, number of
assure that every automatic sprinkler sprinklers in the hydraulically de-
system is provided with at least one signed section, and the basis of the de-
automatic water supply capable of pro- sign is indicated. Central records may
viding design water flow for at least 30 be used in lieu of signs at sprinkler
minutes. An auxiliary water supply or valves provided the records are avail-
equivalent protection shall be provided able for inspection and copying by the
when the automatic water supply is Assistant Secretary.
out of service, except for systems of 20
or fewer sprinklers. [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
1, 1981]
(5) Hose connections for fire fighting
use. The employer may attach hose § 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing sys-
connections for fire fighting use to wet tems, general.
pipe sprinkler systems provided that (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec-
the water supply satisfies the combined tion applies to all fixed extinguishing
design demand for sprinklers and systems installed to meet a particular
standpipes. OSHA standard except for automatic
(6) Protection of piping. The employer sprinkler systems which are covered by
shall assure that automatic sprinkler § 1910.159.
system piping is protected against (2) This section also applies to fixed
freezing and exterior surface corrosion. systems not installed to meet a par-
(7) Drainage. The employer shall as- ticular OSHA standard, but which, by
sure that all dry sprinkler pipes and means of their operation, may expose
fittings are installed so that the sys- employees to possible injury, death, or
tem may be totally drained. adverse health consequences caused by
511
the extinguishing agent. Such systems than 10 percent, it shall be subjected to
are only subject to the requirements of maintenance.
paragraphs (b)(4) through (b)(7) and (c) (8) The employer shall assure that
of this section. factory charged nonrefillable con-
(3) Systems otherwise covered in tainers which have no means of pres-
paragraph (a)(2) of this section which sure indication are weighed at least
are installed in areas with no employee semi-annually. If a container shows a
exposure are exempted from the re- loss in net weight or more than 5 per-
quirements of this section. cent it shall be replaced.
(b) General requirements. (1) Fixed ex- (9) The employer shall assure that in-
tinguishing system components and spection and maintenance dates are re-
agents shall be designed and approved corded on the container, on a tag at-
for use on the specific fire hazards they tached to the container, or in a central
are expected to control or extinguish. location. A record of the last semi-an-
(2) If for any reason a fixed extin- nual check shall be maintained until
guishing system becomes inoperable, the container is checked again or for
the employer shall notify employees the life of the container, whichever is
and take the necessary temporary pre- less.
cautions to assure their safety until (10) The employer shall train employ-
the system is restored to operating ees designated to inspect, maintain, op-
order. Any defects or impairments erate, or repair fixed extinguishing sys-
shall be properly corrected by trained tems and annually review their train-
personnel. ing to keep them up-to-date in the
(3) The employer shall provide a dis- functions they are to perform.
tinctive alarm or signaling system (11) The employer shall not use
which complies with § 1910.165 and is ca- chlorobromomethane or carbon tetra-
pable of being perceived above ambient chloride as an extinguishing agent
noise or light levels, on all extin- where employees may be exposed.
guishing systems in those portions of (12) The employer shall assure that
the workplace covered by the extin- systems installed in the presence of
guishing system to indicate when the corrosive atmospheres are constructed
extinguishing system is discharging. of non-corrosive material or otherwise
Discharge alarms are not required on protected against corrosion.
systems where discharge is imme- (13) Automatic detection equipment
diately recognizable. shall be approved, installed and main-
(4) The employer shall provide effec- tained in accordance with § 1910.164.
tive safeguards to warn employees (14) The employer shall assure that
against entry into discharge areas all systems designed for and installed
where the atmosphere remains haz- in areas with climatic extremes shall
ardous to employee safety or health. operate effectively at the expected ex-
(5) The employer shall post hazard treme temperatures.
warning or caution signs at the en- (15) The employer shall assure that
trance to, and inside of, areas pro- at least one manual station is provided
tected by fixed extinguishing systems for discharge activation of each fixed
which use agents in concentrations extinguishing system.
known to be hazardous to employee (16) The employer shall assure that
safety and health. manual operating devices are identified
(6) The employer shall assure that as to the hazard against which they
fixed systems are inspected annually will provide protection.
by a person knowledgeable in the de- (17) The employer shall provide and
sign and function of the system to as- assure the use of the personal protec-
sure that the system is maintained in tive equipment needed for immediate
good operating condition. rescue of employees trapped in haz-
(7) The employer shall assure that ardous atmospheres created by an
the weight and pressure of refillable agent discharge.
containers is checked at least semi-an- (c) Total flooding systems with poten-
nually. If the container shows a loss in tial health and safety hazards to employ-
net content or weight of more than 5 ees. (1) The employer shall provide an
percent, or a loss in pressure of more emergency action plan in accordance
512
with § 1910.38 for each area within a (4) The employer shall sample the dry
workplace that is protected by a total chemical supply of all but stored pres-
flooding system which provides agent sure systems at least annually to as-
concentrations exceeding the max- sure that the dry chemical supply is
imum safe levels set forth in para- free of moisture which may cause the
graphs (b)(5) and (b)(6) of § 1910.162. supply to cake or form lumps.
(2) Systems installed in areas where (5) The employer shall assure that
employees cannot enter during or after the rate of application of dry chemicals
the system’s operation are exempt is such that the designed concentration
from the requirements of paragraph (c) of the system will be reached within 30
of this section. seconds of initial discharge.
(3) On all total flooding systems the [45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]
employer shall provide a pre-discharge
employee alarm which complies with § 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing sys-
§ 1910.165, and is capable of being per- tems, gaseous agent.
ceived above ambient light or noise (a) Scope and application—(1) Scope.
levels before the system discharges, This section applies to all fixed extin-
which will give employees time to safe- guishing systems, using a gas as the
ly exit from the discharge area prior to extinguishing agent, installed to meet
system discharge. a particular OSHA standard. These sys-
(4) The employer shall provide auto- tems shall also comply with § 1910.160.
matic actuation of total flooding sys- In some cases, the gas may be in a liq-
tems by means of an approved fire de- uid state during storage.
tection device installed and inter- (2) Application. The requirements of
connected with a pre-discharge em- paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(4) through
ployee alarm system to give employees (b)(6) shall apply only to total flooding
time to safely exit from the discharge systems.
area prior to system discharge. (b) Specific requirements. (1) Agents
used for initial supply and replenish-
[45 FR 60711, Sept. 12, 1980] ment shall be of the type approved for
the system’s application. Carbon diox-
§ 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing sys-
tems, dry chemical. ide obtained by dry ice conversion to
liquid is not acceptable unless it is
(a) Scope and application. This section processed to remove excess water and
applies to all fixed extinguishing sys- oil.
tems, using dry chemical as the extin- (2) Except during overhaul, the em-
guishing agent, installed to meet a par- ployer shall assure that the designed
ticular OSHA standard. These systems concentration of gaseous agents is
shall also comply with § 1910.160. maintained until the fire has been ex-
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The em- tinguished or is under control.
ployer shall assure that dry chemical (3) The employer shall assure that
agents are compatible with any foams employees are not exposed to toxic lev-
or wetting agents with which they are els of gaseous agent or its decomposi-
used. tion products.
(2) The employer may not mix to- (4) The employer shall assure that
gether dry chemical extinguishing the designed extinguishing concentra-
agents of different compositions. The tion is reached within 30 seconds of ini-
employer shall assure that dry chem- tial discharge except for Halon systems
ical systems are refilled with the which must achieve design concentra-
chemical stated on the approval name- tion within 10 seconds.
plate or an equivalent compatible ma- (5) The employer shall provide a dis-
terial. tinctive pre-discharge employee alarm
(3) When dry chemical discharge may capable of being perceived above ambi-
obscure vision, the employer shall pro- ent light or noise levels when agent de-
vide a pre-discharge employee alarm sign concentrations exceed the max-
which complies with § 1910.165 and imum safe level for employee exposure.
which will give employees time to safe- A pre-discharge employee alarm for
ly exit from the discharge area prior to alerting employees before system dis-
system discharge. charge shall be provided on Halon 1211
513
and carbon dioxide systems with a de- systems installed to meet the require-
sign concentration of 4 percent or ments of a particular OSHA standard.
greater and for Halon 1301 systems with (b) Installation and restoration. (1) The
a design concentration of 10 percent or employer shall assure that all devices
greater. The pre-discharge employee and equipment constructed and in-
alarm shall provide employees time to stalled to comply with this standard
safely exit the discharge area prior to are approved for the purpose for which
system discharge. they are intended.
(6)(i) Where egress from an area can- (2) The employer shall restore all fire
not be accomplished within one detection systems and components to
minute, the employer shall not use normal operating condition as prompt-
Halon 1301 in concentrations greater ly as possible after each test or alarm.
than 7 percent. Spare detection devices and compo-
(ii) Where egress takes greater than nents which are normally destroyed in
30 seconds but less than one minute, the process of detecting fires shall be
the employer shall not use Halon 1301 available on the premises or from a
in a concentration greater than 10 per- local supplier in sufficient quantities
cent. and locations for prompt restoration of
(iii) Halon 1301 concentrations great- the system.
er than 10 percent are only permitted (c) Maintenance and testing. (1) The
in areas not normally occupied by em- employer shall maintain all systems in
ployees provided that any employee in an operable condition except during re-
the area can escape within 30 seconds. pairs or maintenance.
The employer shall assure that no un- (2) The employer shall assure that
protected employees enter the area fire detectors and fire detection sys-
during agent discharge. tems are tested and adjusted as often
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May as needed to maintain proper reli-
1, 1981] ability and operating condition except
that factory calibrated detectors need
§ 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing sys- not be adjusted after installation.
tems, water spray and foam. (3) The employer shall assure that
(a) Scope and application. This section pneumatic and hydraulic operated de-
applies to all fixed extinguishing sys- tection systems installed after January
tems, using water or foam solution as 1, 1981, are equipped with supervised
the extinguishing agent, installed to systems.
meet a particular OSHA standard. (4) The employer shall assure that
These systems shall also comply with the servicing, maintenance and testing
§ 1910.160. This section does not apply to of fire detection systems, including
automatic sprinkler systems which are cleaning and necessary sensitivity ad-
covered under § 1910.159. justments are performed by a trained
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The em- person knowledgeable in the operations
ployer shall assure that foam and and functions of the system.
water spray systems are designed to be (5) The employer shall also assure
effective in at least controlling fire in that fire detectors that need to be
the protected area or on protected cleaned of dirt, dust, or other particu-
equipment. lates in order to be fully operational
(2) The employer shall assure that are cleaned at regular periodic inter-
drainage of water spray systems is di- vals.
rected away from areas where employ- (d) Protection of fire detectors. (1) The
ees are working and that no emergency employer shall assure that fire detec-
egress is permitted through the drain- tion equipment installed outdoors or in
age path. the presence of corrosive atmospheres
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980] be protected from corrosion. The em-
ployer shall provide a canopy, hood, or
OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS other suitable protection for detection
equipment requiring protection from
§ 1910.164 Fire detection systems. the weather.
(a) Scope and application. This section (2) The employer shall locate or oth-
applies to all automatic fire detection erwise protect detection equipment so
514
that it is protected from mechanical or (b) General requirements. (1) The em-
physical impact which might render it ployee alarm system shall provide
inoperable. warning for necessary emergency ac-
(3) The employer shall assure that de- tion as called for in the emergency ac-
tectors are supported independently of tion plan, or for reaction time for safe
their attachment to wires or tubing. escape of employees from the work-
(e) Response time. (1) The employer place or the immediate work area, or
shall assure that fire detection systems both.
installed for the purpose of actuating (2) The employee alarm shall be capa-
fire extinguishment or suppression sys- ble of being perceived above ambient
tems shall be designed to operate in noise or light levels by all employees
time to control or extinguish a fire. in the affected portions of the work-
(2) The employer shall assure that place. Tactile devices may be used to
fire detection systems installed for the alert those employees who would not
purpose of employee alarm and evacu- otherwise be able to recognize the audi-
ation be designed and installed to pro- ble or visual alarm.
vide a warning for emergency action (3) The employee alarm shall be dis-
and safe escape of employees. tinctive and recognizable as a signal to
(3) The employer shall not delay evacuate the work area or to perform
alarms or devices initiated by fire de- actions designated under the emer-
tector actuation for more than 30 sec- gency action plan.
onds unless such delay is necessary for (4) The employer shall explain to
the immediate safety of employees. each employee the preferred means of
When such delay is necessary, it shall reporting emergencies, such as manual
be addressed in an emergency action pull box alarms, public address sys-
plan meeting the requirements of tems, radio or telephones. The em-
§ 1910.38. ployer shall post emergency telephone
(f) Number, location and spacing of de- numbers near telephones, or employee
tecting devices. The employer shall as- notice boards, and other conspicuous
sure that the number, spacing and lo- locations when telephones serve as a
cation of fire detectors is based upon means of reporting emergencies. Where
design data obtained from field experi- a communication system also serves as
ence, or tests, engineering surveys, the the employee alarm system, all emer-
manufacturer’s recommendations, or a gency messages shall have priority
recognized testing laboratory listing. over all non-emergency messages.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] (5) The employer shall establish pro-
cedures for sounding emergency alarms
§ 1910.165 Employee alarm systems. in the workplace. For those employers
(a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- with 10 or fewer employees in a par-
tion applies to all emergency employee ticular workplace, direct voice commu-
alarms installed to meet a particular nication is an acceptable procedure for
OSHA standard. This section does not sounding the alarm provided all em-
apply to those discharge or supervisory ployees can hear the alarm. Such work-
alarms required on various fixed extin- places need not have a back-up system.
guishing systems or to supervisory (c) Installation and restoration. (1) The
alarms on fire suppression, alarm or employer shall assure that all devices,
detection systems unless they are in- components, combinations of devices
tended to be employee alarm systems. or systems constructed and installed to
(2) The requirements in this section comply with this standard are ap-
that pertain to maintenance, testing proved. Steam whistles, air horns,
and inspection shall apply to all local strobe lights or similar lighting de-
fire alarm signaling systems used for vices, or tactile devices meeting the re-
alerting employees regardless of the quirements of this section are consid-
other functions of the system. ered to meet this requirement for ap-
(3) All pre-discharge employee alarms proval.
installed to meet a particular OSHA (2) The employer shall assure that all
standard shall meet the requirements employee alarm systems are restored
of paragraphs (b)(1) through (4), (c), and to normal operating condition as
(d)(1) of this section. promptly as possible after each test or
515
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, Apps. Nt. 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
alarm. Spare alarm devices and compo- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L OF PART
nents subject to wear or destruction 1910—FIRE PROTECTION
shall be available in sufficient quan-
§ 1910.156 Fire brigades.
tities and locations for prompt restora- 1. Scope. This section does not require an
tion of the system. employer to organize a fire brigade. How-
(d) Maintenance and testing. (1) The ever, if an employer does decide to organize
employer shall assure that all em- a fire brigade, the requirements of this sec-
ployee alarm systems are maintained tion apply.
2. Pre-fire planning. It is suggested that pre-
in operating condition except when un- fire planning be conducted by the local fire
dergoing repairs or maintenance. department and/or the workplace fire bri-
(2) The employer shall assure that a gade in order for them to be familiar with
test of the reliability and adequacy of the workplace and process hazards. Involve-
non-supervised employee alarm sys- ment with the local fire department or fire
tems is made every two months. A dif- prevention bureau is encouraged to facilitate
coordination and cooperation between mem-
ferent actuation device shall be used in bers of the fire brigade and those who might
each test of a multi-actuation device be called upon for assistance during a fire
system so that no individual device is emergency.
used for two consecutive tests. 3. Organizational statement. In addition to
(3) The employer shall maintain or the information required in the organiza-
tional statement, paragraph 1910.156(b)(1), it
replace power supplies as often as is is suggested that the organizational state-
necessary to assure a fully operational ment also contain the following information:
condition. Back-up means of alarm, a description of the duties that the fire bri-
such as employee runners or tele- gade members are expected to perform; the
phones, shall be provided when systems line authority of each fire brigade officer;
are out of service. the number of the fire brigade officers and
number of training instructors; and a list
(4) The employer shall assure that and description of the types of awards or rec-
employee alarm circuitry installed ognition that brigade members may be eligi-
after January 1, 1981, which is capable ble to receive.
of being supervised is supervised and 4. Physical capability. The physical capa-
that it will provide positive notifica- bility requirement applies only to those fire
tion to assigned personnel whenever a brigade members who perform interior struc-
tural fire fighting. Employees who cannot
deficiency exists in the system. The meet the physical capability requirement
employer shall assure that all super- may still be members of the fire brigade as
vised employee alarm systems are test- long as such employees do not perform inte-
ed at least annually for reliability and rior structural fire fighting. It is suggested
adequacy. that fire brigade members who are unable to
perform interior structural fire fighting be
(5) The employer shall assure that
assigned less stressful and physically de-
the servicing, maintenance and testing manding fire brigade duties, e.g., certain
of employee alarms are done by persons types of training, recordkeeping, fire preven-
trained in the designed operation and tion inspection and maintenance, and fire
functions necessary for reliable and pump operations.
safe operation of the system. Physically capable can be defined as being
(e) Manual operation. The employer able to perform those duties specified in the
training requirements of section 1910.156(c).
shall assure that manually operated Physically capable can also be determined
actuation devices for use in conjunc- by physical performance tests or by a phys-
tion with employee alarms are unob- ical examination when the examining physi-
structed, conspicuous and readily ac- cian is aware of the duties that the fire bri-
cessible. gade member is expected to perform.
It is also recommended that fire brigade
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] members participate in a physical fitness
program. There are many benefits which can
APPENDICES TO SUBPART L OF PART be attributed to being physically fit. It is be-
1910—NOTE lieved that physical fitness may help to re-
duce the number of sprain and strain injuries
NOTE: The following appendices to subpart as well as contributing to the improvement
L, except appendix E, serve as nonmandatory of the cardiovascular system.
guidelines to assist employers in complying 5. Training and education. The paragraph on
with the appropriate requirements of subpart training and education does not contain spe-
L. cific training and education requirements
516
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. A
because the type, amount, and frequency of protection of other employees and the work-
training and education will be as varied as place.
are the purposes for which fire brigades are It is suggested that publications from the
organized. However, the paragraph does re- International Fire Service Training Associa-
quire that training and education be com- tion, the National Fire Protection Associa-
mensurate with those functions that the fire tion (NFPA–1041), the International Society
brigade is expected to perform; i.e., those of Fire Service Instructors and other fire
functions specified in the organizational training sources be consulted for rec-
statement. Such a performance requirement ommended qualifications of fire brigade
provides the necessary flexibility to design a training instructors.
training program which meets the needs of In order to be effective, fire brigades must
individual fire brigades. have competent leadership and supervision.
At a minimum, hands-on training is re- It is important for those who supervise the
quired to be conducted annually for all fire fire brigade during emergency situations,
brigade members. However, for those fire bri- e.g., fire brigade chiefs, leaders, etc., to re-
gade members who are expected to perform ceive the necessary training and education
interior structural fire fighting, some type of for supervising fire brigade activities during
training or education session must be pro- these hazardous and stressful situations.
vided at least quarterly. These fire brigade members with leadership
In addition to the required hands-on train- responsibilities should demonstrate skills in
ing, it is strongly recommended that fire bri- strategy and tactics, fire suppression and
gade members receive other types of training prevention techniques, leadership principles,
and education such as: classroom instruc- pre-fire planning, and safety practices. It is
tion, review of emergency action procedures, again suggested that fire service training
pre-fire planning, review of special hazards sources be consulted for determining the
in the workplace, and practice in the use of kinds of training and education which are
self-contained breathing apparatus. necessary for those with fire brigade leader-
It is not necessary for the employer to du- ship responsibilities.
plicate the same training or education that a It is further suggested that fire brigade
fire brigade member receives as a member of leaders and fire brigade instructors receive
a community volunteer fire department, res- more formalized training and education on a
cue squad, or similar organization. However, continuing basis by attending classes pro-
such training or education must have been vided by such training sources as univer-
provided to the fire brigade member within sities and university fire extension services.
the past year and it must be documented The following recommendations should not
that the fire brigade member has received be considered to be all of the necessary ele-
the training or education. For example: ments of a complete comprehensive training
there is no need for a fire brigade member to program, but the information may be helpful
receive another training class in the use of as a guide in developing a fire brigade train-
positive-pressure self-contained breathing ing program.
apparatus if the fire brigade member has re- All fire brigade members should be famil-
cently completed such training as a member iar with exit facilities and their location,
of a community fire department. Instead, the emergency escape routes for handicapped
fire brigade member should receive training workers, and the workplace ‘‘emergency ac-
or education covering other important equip- tion plan.’’
ment or duties of the fire brigade as they re- In addition, fire brigade members who are
late to the workplace hazards, facilities and expected to control and extinguish fires in
processes. the incipient stage should, at a minimum, be
It is generally recognized that the effec- trained in the use of fire extinguishers,
tiveness of fire brigade training and edu- standpipes, and other fire equipment they
cation depends upon the expertise of those are assigned to use. They should also be
providing the training and education as well aware of first aid medical procedures and
as the motivation of the fire brigade mem- procedures for dealing with special hazards
bers. Fire brigade training instructors must to which they may be exposed. Training and
receive a higher level of training and edu- education should include both classroom in-
cation than the fire brigade members they struction and actual operation of the equip-
will be teaching. This includes being more ment under simulated emergency conditions.
knowledgeable about the functions to be per- Hands-on type training must be conducted at
formed by the fire brigade and the hazards least annually but some functions should be
involved. The instructors should be qualified reviewed more often.
to train fire brigade members and dem- In addition to the above training, fire bri-
onstrate skills in communication, methods gade members who are expected to perform
of teaching, and motivation. It is important emergency rescue and interior structural fire
for instructors and fire brigade members fighting should, at a minimum, be familiar
alike to be motivated toward the goals of the with the proper techniques in rescue and fire
fire brigade and be aware of the importance suppression procedures. Training and edu-
of the service that they are providing for the cation should include fire protection courses,
517
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
classroom training, simulated fire situations protective clothing requirements only apply
including ‘‘wet drills’’ and, when feasible, ex- to those fire brigade members who perform
tinguishment of actual mock fires. Fre- interior structural fire fighting operations.
quency of training or education must be at Additionally, the protective clothing re-
least quarterly, but some drills or classroom quirements do not apply to the protective
training should be conducted as often as clothing worn during outside fire fighting
monthly or even weekly to maintain the pro- operations (brush and forest fires, crash crew
ficiency of fire brigade members. operations) or other special fire fighting ac-
There are many excellent sources of train- tivities. It is important that the protective
ing and education that the employer may clothing to be worn during these types of fire
want to use in developing a training program fighting operations reflect the hazards which
for the workplace fire brigade. These sources are expected to be encountered by fire bri-
include publications, seminars, and courses gade members.
offered by universities. (B) Foot and leg protection. Section 1910.156
There are also excellent fire school courses permits an option to achieve foot and leg
by such facilities as Texas A and M Univer- protection.
sity, Delaware State Fire School, Lamar The section recognizes the interdependence
University, and Reno Fire School, that deal of protective clothing to cover one or more
with those unique hazards which may be en- parts of the body. Therefore, an option is
countered by fire brigades in the oil and given so that fire brigade members may
chemical industry. These schools, and oth- meet the foot and leg requirements by either
ers, also offer excellent training courses wearing long fire-resistive coats in combina-
which would be beneficial to fire brigades in tion with fully extended boots, or by wearing
other types of industries. These courses shorter fire-resistive costs in combination
should be a continuing part of the training with protective trousers and protective shoes
program, and employers are strongly encour- or shorter boots.
aged to take advantage of these excellent re- (C) Body protection. Paragraph (e)(3) of
sources. § 1910.156 provides an option for fire brigade
It is also important that fire brigade mem- members to achieve body protection. Fire
bers be informed about special hazards to brigade members may wear a fire-resistive
which they may be exposed during fire and coat in combination with fully extended
other emergencies. Such hazards as storage boots, or they may wear a fire-resistive coat
and use areas of flammable liquids and gases, in combination with protective trousers.
toxic chemicals, water-reactive substances, Fire-resistive coats and protective trousers
etc., can pose difficult problems. There must meeting all of the requirements contained in
be written procedures developed that de- NFPA 1971–1975 ‘‘Protective Clothing for
scribe the actions to be taken in situations Structural Fire Fighters,’’ are acceptable as
involving special hazards. Fire brigade mem- meeting the requirements of this standard.
bers must be trained in handling these spe- The lining is required to be permanently
cial hazards as well as keeping abreast of attached to the outer shell. However, it is
any changes that occur in relation to these permissible to attach the lining to the outer
special hazards. shell material by stitching in one area such
6. Fire fighting equipment. It is important as at the neck. Fastener tape or snap fas-
that fire fighting equipment that is in dam- teners may be used to secure the rest of the
aged or unserviceable condition be removed lining to the outer shell to facilitate clean-
from service and replaced. This will prevent ing. Reference to permanent lining does not
fire brigade members from using unsafe refer to a winter liner which is a detachable
equipment by mistake. extra lining used to give added protection to
Fire fighting equipment, except portable the wearer against the effects of cold weath-
fire extinguishers and respirators, must be er and wind.
inspected at least annually. Portable fire ex- (D) Hand protection. The requirements of
tinguishers and respirators are required to the paragraph on hand protection may be
be inspected at least monthly. met by protective gloves or a glove system.
7. Protective clothing. (A) General. Para- A glove system consists of a combination of
graph (e) of § 1910.156 does not require all fire different gloves. The usual components of a
brigade members to wear protective cloth- glove system consist of a pair of gloves,
ing. It is not the intention of these standards which provide thermal insulation to the
to require employers to provide a full ensem- hands, worn in combination with a second
ble of protective clothing for every fire bri- pair of gloves which provide protection
gade member without consideration given to against flame, cut, and puncture.
the types of hazardous environments to It is suggested that protective gloves pro-
which the fire brigade member might be ex- vide dexterity and a sense of feel for objects.
posed. It is the intention of these standards Criteria and test methods for dexterity are
to require adequate protection for those fire contained in the NIOSH publications, ‘‘The
brigade members who might be exposed to Development of Criteria for Firefighters’
fires in an advanced stage, smoke, toxic Gloves; Vol. I: Glove Requirements’’ and
gases, and high temperatures. Therefore, the ‘‘Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test Methods.’’
518
These NIOSH publications also contain a same air supply with the wearer of the appa-
permissible modified version of Federal Test ratus for emergency escape purposes.
Method 191, Method 5903, (paragraph (3) of The employer is encouraged to provide fire
appendix E) for flame resistance when brigade members with an alternative means
gloves, rather than glove material, are test- of respiratory protection to be used only for
ed for flame resistance. emergency escape purposes if the self-con-
(E) Head, eye, and face protection. Head pro- tained breathing apparatus becomes inoper-
tective devices which meet the requirements ative. Such alternative means of respiratory
contained in NFPA No. 1972 are acceptable as protection may be either a buddy-breathing
meeting the requirements of this standard device or an escape self-contained breathing
for head protection. apparatus (ESCBA). The ESCBA is a short-
Head protective devices are required to be duration respiratory protective device which
provided with ear flaps so that the ear flaps is approved for only emergency escape pur-
will be available if needed. It is rec- poses. It is suggested that if ESCBA units
ommended that ear protection always be are used, that they be of at least 5 minutes
used while fighting interior structural fires. service life.
Many head protective devices are equipped Quick-disconnect valves are devices which
with face shields to protect the eyes and start the flow of air by insertion of the hose
face. These face shields are permissible as
(which leads to the facepiece) into the regu-
meeting the eye and face protection require-
lator of self-contained breathing apparatus,
ments of this paragraph as long as such face
and stop the flow of air by disconnecting the
shields meet the requirements of § 1910.133 of
hose from the regulator. These devices are
the General Industry Standards.
particularly useful for those positive-pres-
Additionally, full facepieces, helmets or
sure self-contained breathing apparatus
hoods of approved breathing apparatus which
which do not have the capability of being
meet the requirements of § 1910.134 and para-
switched from the demand to the positive-
graph (f) of § 1910.156 are also acceptable as
pressure mode.
meeting the eye and face protection require-
ments. The use of a self-contained breathing appa-
It is recommended that a flame resistant ratus where the apparatus can be switched
protective head covering such as a hood or from a demand to a positive-pressure mode is
snood, which will not adversely affect the acceptable as long as the apparatus is in the
seal of a respirator facepiece, be worn during positive-pressure mode when performing in-
interior structural fire fighting operations to terior structural fire fighting operations.
protect the sides of the face and hair. Also acceptable are approved respiratory
8. Respiratory protective devices. Respiratory protective devices which have been con-
protection is required to be worn by fire bri- verted to the positive-pressure type when
gade members while working inside build- such modification is accomplished by trained
ings or confined spaces where toxic products and experienced persons using kits or parts
of combustion or an oxygen deficiency is approved by NIOSH and provided by the
likely to be present; respirators are also to manufacturer and by following the manufac-
be worn during emergency situations involv- turer’s instructions.
ing toxic substances. When fire brigade There are situations which require the use
members respond to emergency situations, of respirators which have a duration of 2
they may be exposed to unknown contami- hours or more. Presently, there are no ap-
nants in unknown concentrations. Therefore, proved positive-pressure apparatus with a
it is imperative that fire brigade members rated service life of more than 2 hours. Con-
wear proper respiratory protective devices sequently, negative-pressure self-contained
during these situations. Additionally, there breathing apparatus with a rated service life
are many instances where toxic products of of more than 2 hours and which have a min-
combustion are still present during mop-up imum protection factor of 5,000 as deter-
and overhaul operations. Therefore, fire bri- mined by an acceptable quantitative fit test
gade members should continue to wear res- performed on each individual, will be accept-
pirators during these types of operations. able for use during situations which require
Self-contained breathing apparatus are not long duration apparatus. Long duration ap-
required to be equipped with either a buddy- paratus may be needed in such instances as
breathing device or a quick-disconnect valve. working in tunnels, subway systems, etc.
However, these accessories may be very use- Such negative-pressure breathing apparatus
ful and are acceptable as long as such acces- will continue to be acceptable for a max-
sories do not cause damage to the apparatus, imum of 18 months after a positive-pressure
restrict the air flow of the apparatus, or ob- apparatus with the same or longer rated
struct the normal operation of the appa- service life of more than 2 hours is certified
ratus. by NIOSH/MSHA. After this 18 month phase-
Buddy-breathing devices are useful for in period, all self-contained breathing appa-
emergency situations where a victim or an- ratus used for these long duration situations
other fire brigade member can share the will have to be of the positive-pressure type.
519
Protection factor (sometimes called fit fac- test should be conducted at least three
tor) is defined as the ratio of the contami- times. It is acceptable to conduct all three
nant concentrations outside of the respirator tests on the same day. However, there should
to the contaminant concentrations inside be at least one hour between tests to reflect
the facepiece of the respirator. the protection afforded by the apparatus dur-
ing different times of the day.
The above elements are not meant to be a
comprehensive, technical description of a
quantitative fit test protocol. However,
Protection factors are determined by quan- quantitative fit test procedures which in-
titative fit tests. An acceptable quantitative clude these elements are acceptable for de-
fit test should include the following ele- termining protection factors. Procedures for
ments: a quantitative fit test are required to be
1. A fire brigade member who is physically available for inspection by the Assistant
and medically capable of wearing res- Secretary or authorized representative.
pirators, and who is trained in the use of res- Organizations such as Los Alamos Sci-
pirators, dons a self-contained breathing ap- entific Laboratory, Lawrence Livermore
paratus equipped with a device that will Laboratory, NIOSH, and American National
monitor the concentration of a contaminant Standards Institute (ANSI) are excellent
inside the facepiece. sources for additional information con-
2. The fire brigade member then performs a cerning qualitative and quantitative fit test-
qualitative fit test to assure the best face to ing.
facepiece seal as possible. A qualitative fit
test can consist of a negative-pressure test, § 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
positive-pressure test, isoamyl acetate vapor
1. Scope and application. The scope and ap-
(banana oil) test, or an irritant smoke test.
plication of this section is written to apply
For more details on respirator fitting see the to three basic types of workplaces. First,
NIOSH booklet entitled ‘‘A Guide to Indus- there are those workplaces where the em-
trial Respiratory Protection’’ June, 1976, and ployer has chosen to evacuate all employees
HEW publication No. (NIOSH) 76–189. from the workplace at the time of a fire
3. The wearer should then perform physical emergency. Second, there are those work-
activity which reflects the level of work ac- places where the employer has chosen to per-
tivity which would be expected during fire mit certain employees to fight fires and to
fighting activities. The physical activity evacuate all other non-essential employees
should include simulated fire-ground work at the time of a fire emergency. Third, there
activity or physical exercise such as run- are those workplaces where the employer has
ning-in-place, a step test, etc. chosen to permit all employees in the work-
4. Without readjusting the apparatus, the place to use portable fire extinguishers to
wearer is placed in a test atmosphere con- fight fires.
taining a non-toxic contaminant with a The section also addresses two kinds of
known, constant, concentration. work areas. The entire workplace can be di-
The protection factor is then determined vided into outside (exterior) work areas and
by dividing the known concentration of the inside (interior) work areas. This division of
contaminant in the test atmosphere by the the workplace into two areas is done in rec-
concentration of the contaminant inside the ognition of the different types of hazards em-
facepiece when the following exercises are ployees may be exposed to during fire fight-
performed: ing operations. Fires in interior workplaces,
(a) Normal breathing with head motionless pose a greater hazard to employees; they can
for one minute; produce greater exposure to quantities of
(b) Deep breathing with head motionless smoke, toxic gases, and heat because of the
for 30 seconds; capability of a building or structure to con-
(c) Turning head slowly from side to side tain or entrap these products of combustion
while breathing normally, pausing for at until the building can be ventilated. Exterior
least two breaths before changing direction. work areas, normally open to the environ-
Continue for at least one minute; ment, are somewhat less hazardous, because
(d) Moving head slowly up and down while the products of combustion are generally
breathing normally, pausing for at least two carried away by the thermal column of the
breaths before changing direction. Continue fire. Employees also have a greater selection
for at least two minutes; of evacuation routes if it is necessary to
(e) Reading from a prepared text, slowly abandon fire fighting efforts.
and clearly, and loudly enough to be heard In recognition of the degree of hazard
and understood. Continue for one minute; present in the two types of work areas, the
and standards for exterior work areas are some-
(f) Normal breathing with head motionless what less restrictive in regards to extin-
for at least one minute. guisher distribution. Paragraph (a) explains
The protection factor which is determined this by specifying which paragraphs in the
must be at least 5,000. The quantitative fit section apply.
520
ER25SE06.011</MATH>
2. Portable fire extinguisher exemptions. In level where they could be struck by vehic-
recognition of the three options given to em- ular traffic. When needed, they can be low-
ployers in regard to the amount of employee ered quickly for use. This method of mount-
evacuation to be carried out, the standards ing can also reduce vandalism and unauthor-
permit certain exemptions based on the ized use of extinguishers. The extinguishers
number of employees expected to use fire ex- may also be mounted as outlined in the Na-
tinguishers. tional Fire Protection Association’s Stand-
Where the employer has chosen to totally ard No. 10, ‘‘Portable Fire Extinguishers.’’
evacuate the workplace at the time of a fire 4. Selection and distribution. The employer
emergency and when fire extinguishers are is responsible for the proper selection and
not provided, the requirements of this sec- distribution of fire extinguishers and the de-
tion do not apply to that workplace. termination of the necessary degree of pro-
Where the employer has chosen to par- tection. The selection and distribution of fire
tially evacuate the workplace or the effected extinguishers must reflect the type and class
area at the time of a fire emergency and has of fire hazards associated with a particular
permitted certain designated employees to workplace.
remain behind to operate critical plant oper- Extinguishers for protecting Class A haz-
ations or to fight fires with extinguishers, ards may be selected from the following
then the employer is exempt from the dis- types: water, foam, loaded stream, or multi-
tribution requirements of this section. Em- purpose dry chemical. Extinguishers for pro-
ployees who will be remaining behind to per- tecting Class B hazards may be selected from
form incipient fire fighting or members of a the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211,
fire brigade must be trained in their duties. carbon dioxide, dry chemicals, foam, or load-
The training must result in the employees ed stream. Extinguishers for Class C hazards
becoming familiar with the locations of fire may be selected from the following types:
extinguishers. Therefore, the employer must Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, or dry
locate the extinguishers in convenient loca- chemical.
tions where the employees know they can be Combustible metal (Class D hazards) fires
found. For example, they could be mounted pose a different type of fire problem in the
in the fire truck or cart that the fire brigade workplace. Extinguishers using water, gas,
uses when it responds to a fire emergency. or certain dry chemicals cannot extinguish
They can also be distributed as set forth in or control this type of fire. Therefore, cer-
the National Fire Protection Association’s tain metals have specific dry powder extin-
Standard No. 10, ‘‘Portable Fire Extin- guishing agents which can extinguish or con-
guishers.’’ trol this type of fire. Those agents which
Where the employer has decided to permit have been specifically approved for use on
all employees in the workforce to use fire ex- certain metal fires provide the best protec-
tinguishers, then the entire OSHA section tion; however, there are also some ‘‘uni-
applies. versal’’ type agents which can be used effec-
3. Portable fire extinguisher mounting. Pre- tively on a variety of combustible metal
vious standards for mounting fire extin- fires if necessary. The ‘‘universal’’ type
guishers have been criticized for requiring agents include: Foundry flux, Lith-X powder,
specific mounting locations. In recognition TMB liquid, pyromet powder, TEC powder,
of this criticism, the standard has been re- dry talc, dry graphite powder, dry sand, dry
written to permit as much flexibility in ex- sodium chloride, dry soda ash, lithium chlo-
tinguisher mounting as is acceptable to as- ride, zirconium silicate, and dry dolomite.
sure that fire extinguishers are available Water is not generally accepted as an ef-
when needed and that employees are not sub- fective extinguishing agent for metal fires.
jected to injury hazards when they try to ob- When applied to hot burning metal, water
tain an extinguisher. will break down into its basic atoms of oxy-
It is the intent of OSHA to permit the gen and hydrogen. This chemical breakdown
mounting of extinguishers in any location contributes to the combustion of the metal.
that is accessible to employees without the However, water is also a good universal cool-
use of portable devices such as a ladder. This ant and can be used on some combustible
limitation is necessary because portable de- metals, but only under proper conditions and
vices can be moved or taken from the place application, to reduce the temperature of the
where they are needed and, therefore, might burning metal below the ignition point. For
not be available at the time of an emer- example, automatic deluge systems in mag-
gency. nesium plants can discharge such large quan-
Employers are given as much flexibility as tities of water on burning magnesium that
possible to assure that employees can obtain the fire will be extinguished. The National
extinguishers as fast as possible. For exam- Fire Protection Association has specific
ple, an acceptable method of mounting ex- standards for this type of automatic sprin-
tinguishers in areas where fork lift trucks or kler system. Further information on the
tow-motors are used is to mount the units on control of metal fires with water can be
retractable boards which, by means of found in the National Fire Protection Asso-
counterweighting, can be raised above the ciation’s Fire Protection Handbook.
521
An excellent source of selection and dis- guisher shells fail violently under hydro-
tribution criteria is found in the National static pressure.
Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. Employers are encouraged to use contrac-
10. Other sources of information include the tors who can perform adequate and reliable
National Safety Council and the employer’s service. Firms which have been certified by
fire insurance carrier. the Materials Transportation Board (MTB)
5. Substitution of standpipe systems for port- of the U.S. Department of Transportation
able fire extinguishers. The employer is per- (DOT) or State licensed extinguisher serv-
mitted to substitute acceptable standpipe
icing firms or recognized by the National As-
systems for portable fire extinguishers under
sociation of Fire Equipment Distributors in
certain circumstances. It is necessary to as-
sure that any substitution will provide the Chicago, Illinois, are generally acceptable
same coverage that portable units provide. for performing this service.
This means that fire hoses, because of their 8. Training and education. This part of the
limited portability, must be spaced through- standard is of the utmost importance to em-
out the protected area so that they can reach ployers and employees if the risk of injury or
around obstructions such as columns, ma- death due to extinguisher use is to be re-
chinery, etc. and so that they can reach into duced. If an employer is going to permit an
closets and other enclosed areas. employee to fight a workplace fire of any
6. Inspection, maintenance and testing. The size, the employer must make sure that the
ultimate responsibility for the inspection, employee knows everything necessary to as-
maintenance and testing of portable fire ex- sure the employee’s safety.
tinguishers lies with the employer. The ac- Training and education can be obtained
tual inspection, maintenance, and testing through many channels. Often, local fire de-
may, however, be conducted by outside con- partments in larger cities have fire preven-
tractors with whom the employer has ar- tion bureaus or similar organizations which
ranged to do the work. When contracting for
can provide basic fire prevention training
such work, the employer should assure that
programs. Fire insurance companies will
the contractor is capable of performing the
work that is needed to comply with this have data and information available. The
standard. National Fire Protection Association and
If the employer should elect to perform the the National Safety Council will provide, at
inspection, maintenance, and testing re- a small cost, publications that can be used in
quirements of this section in-house, then the a fire prevention program.
employer must make sure that those persons Actual fire fighting training can be ob-
doing the work have been trained to do the tained from various sources in the country.
work and to recognize problem areas which The Texas A & M University, the University
could cause an extinguisher to be inoperable. of Maryland’s Fire and Rescue Institute,
The National Fire Protection Association West Virginia University’s Fire Service Ex-
provides excellent guidelines in its standard tension, Iowa State University’s Fire Service
for portable fire extinguishers. The employer Extension and other State training schools
may also check with the manufacturer of the and land grant colleges have fire fighting
unit that has been purchased and obtain programs directed to industrial applications.
guidelines on inspection, maintenance, and Some manufacturers of extinguishers, such
testing. Hydrostatic testing is a process that as the Ansul Company and Safety First, con-
should be left to contractors or individuals duct fire schools for customers in the proper
using suitable facilities and having the use of extinguishers. Several large corpora-
training necessary to perform the work. tions have taken time to develop their own
Anytime the employer has removed an ex-
on-site training programs which expose em-
tinguisher from service to be checked or re-
ployees to the actual ‘‘feeling’’ of fire fight-
paired, alternate equivalent protection must
ing. Simulated fires for training of employ-
be provided. Alternate equivalent protection
ees in the proper use of extinguishers are
could include replacing the extinguisher
with one or more units having equivalent or also an acceptable part of a training pro-
equal ratings, posting a fire watch, restrict- gram.
ing the unprotected area from employee ex- In meeting the requirements of this sec-
posure, or providing a hose system ready to tion, the employer may also provide edu-
operate. cational materials, without classroom in-
7. Hydrostatic testing. As stated before, the struction, through the use of employee no-
employer may contract for hydrostatic test- tice campaigns using instruction sheets or
ing. However, if the employer wishes to pro- flyers or similar types of informal programs.
vide the testing service, certain equipment The employer must make sure that employ-
and facilities must be available. Employees ees are trained and educated to recognize not
should be made aware of the hazards associ- only what type of fire is being fought and
ated with hydrostatic testing and the impor- how to fight it, but also when it is time to
tance of using proper guards and water pres- get away from it and leave fire suppression
sures. Severe injury can result if extin- to more experienced fire fighters.
522
§ 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems. 5. Hose. When the employer elects to pro-
vide small hose in lieu of portable fire extin-
1. Scope and application. This section has guishers, those hose stations being used for
been written to provide adequate coverage of the substitution must have hose attached
those standpipe and hose systems that an and ready for service. However, if more than
employer may install in the workplace to the necessary amount of small hose outlets
meet the requirements of a particular OSHA are provided, hose does not have to be at-
standard. For example, OSHA permits the tached to those outlets that would provide
substitution of hose systems for portable fire redundant coverage. Further, where the in-
extinguishers in § 1910.157. If an employer stallation of hose on outlets may expose the
chooses to provide hose systems instead of hose to extremely cold climates, the em-
portable Class A fire extinguishers, then ployer may store the hose in houses or simi-
those hose systems used for substitution lar protective areas and connect it to the
would have to meet the applicable require- outlet when needed.
ments of § 1910.157. All other standpipe and There is approved lined hose available that
hose systems not used as a substitute would can be used to replace unlined hose which is
be exempt from these requirements. stored on racks in cabinets. The lined hose is
The section specifically exempts Class I constructed so that it can be folded and
large hose systems. By large hose systems, placed in cabinets in the same manner as un-
OSHA means those 21⁄2″ (6.3 cm) hose lines lined hose.
that are usually associated with fire depart- Hose is considered to be unserviceable
ments of the size that provide their own when it deteriorates to the extent that it can
water supply through fire apparatus. When no longer carry water at the required pres-
the fire gets to the size that outside protec- sure and flow rates. Dry rotted linen or hemp
tion of that degree is necessary, OSHA be- hose, cross threaded couplings, and punc-
lieves that in most industries employees will tured hose are examples of unserviceable
have been evacuated from the fire area and hose.
the ‘‘professional’’ fire fighters will take 6. Nozzles. Variable stream nozzles can pro-
control. vide useful variations in water flow and
spray patterns during fire fighting oper-
2. Protection of standpipes. Employers must
ations and they are recommended for em-
make sure that standpipes are protected so
ployee use. It is recommended that 100 psi
that they can be relied upon during a fire (700kPa) nozzle pressure be used to provide
emergency. This means protecting the pipes good flow patterns for variable stream noz-
from mechanical and physical damage. There zles. The most desirable attribute for nozzles
are various means for protecting the equip- is the ability of the nozzle person to shut off
ment such as, but not limited to, enclosing the water flow at the nozzle when it is nec-
the supply piping in the construction of the essary. This can be accomplished in many
building, locating the standpipe in an area ways. For example, a shut-off nozzle with a
which is inaccessible to vehicles, or locating lever or rotation of the nozzle to stop flow
the standpipe in a stairwell. would be effective, but in other cases a sim-
3. Hose covers and cabinets. The employer ple globe valve placed between a straight
should keep fire protection hose equipment stream nozzle and the hose could serve the
in cabinets or inside protective covers which same purpose. For straight stream nozzles 50
will protect it from the weather elements, psi nozzle pressure is recommended. The in-
dirt or other damaging sources. The use of tent of this standard is to protect the em-
protective covers must be easily removed or ployee from ‘‘run-away’’ hoses if it becomes
opened to assure that hose and nozzle are ac- necessary to drop a pressurized hose line and
cessible. When the employer places hose in a retreat from the fire front and other related
cabinet, the employer must make sure that hazards.
the hose and nozzle are accessible to employ- 7. Design and installation. Standpipe and
ees without subjecting them to injury. In hose systems designed and installed in ac-
order to make sure that the equipment is cordance with NFPA Standard No. 14,
readily accessible, the employer must also ‘‘Standpipe and Hose Systems,’’ are consid-
make sure that the cabinets used to store ered to be in compliance with this standard.
equipment are kept free of obstructions and
other equipment which may interfere with § 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
the fast distribution of the fire hose stored 1. Scope and application. This section con-
in the cabinet. tains the minimum requirements for design,
4. Hose outlets and connections. The em- installation and maintenance of sprinkler
ployer must assure that employees who use systems that are needed for employee safety.
standpipe and hose systems can reach the The Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
hose rack and hose valve without the use of istration is aware of the fact that the Na-
portable equipment such as ladders. Hose tional Board of Fire Underwriters is no
reels are encouraged for use because one em- longer an active organization, however,
ployee can retrieve the hose, charge it, and sprinkler systems still exist that were de-
place it into service without much difficulty. signed and installed in accordance with that
523
organization’s standards. Therefore, OSHA the fire hazard. For example, if repairs or
will recognize sprinkler systems designed to, changes to the system are to be made, they
and maintained in accordance with, NBFU should be made during those hours when em-
and earlier NFPA standards. ployees are not working or are not occupying
2. Exemptions. In an effort to assure that that portion of the workplace protected by
employers will continue to use automatic the portion of the system which has been
sprinkler systems as the primary fire protec- shut down.
tion system in workplaces, OSHA is exempt- The procedures for performing a flow test
ing from coverage those systems not re- via a main drain test or by the use of an in-
quired by a particular OSHA standard and spector’s test valve can be obtained from the
which have been installed in workplaces employer’s fire insurance company or from
solely for the purpose of protecting property. the National Fire Protection Association’s
Many of these types of systems are installed Standard No. 13A, ‘‘Sprinkler System, Main-
in areas or buildings with little or no em- tenance.’’
ployee exposure. An example is those ware- 5. Water supplies. The water supply to a
houses where employees may enter occasion- sprinkler system is one of the most impor-
ally to take inventory or move stock. Some tant factors an employer should consider
employers may choose to shut down those when evaluationg a system. Obviously, if
systems which are not specifically required there is no water supply, the system is use-
by OSHA rather than upgrade them to com- less. Water supplies can be lost for various
ply with the standards. OSHA does not in- reasons such as improperly closed valves, ex-
tend to regulate such systems. OSHA only cessive demand, broken water mains, and
intends to regulate those systems which are broken fire pumps. The employer must be
installed to comply with a particular OSHA able to determine if or when this type of con-
standard. dition exists either by performing a main
3. Design. There are two basic types of drain test or visual inspection. Another
sprinkler system design. Pipe schedule de- problem may be an inadequate water supply.
signed systems are based on pipe schedule ta- For example, a light hazard occupancy may,
bles developed to protect hazards with stand- through rehabilitation or change in tenants,
ard sized pipe, number of sprinklers, and pipe become an ordinary or high hazard occu-
lengths. Hydraulic designed systems are pancy. In such cases, the existing water sup-
based on an engineered design of pipe size ply may not be able to provide the pressure
which will produce a given water density or or duration necessary for proper protection.
flow rate at any particular point in the sys- Employers must assure that proper design
tem. Either design can be used to comply and tests have been made to assure an ade-
with this standard. quate water supply. These tests can be ar-
The National Fire Protection Association’s ranged through the employer’s fire insurance
Standard No. 13, ‘‘Automatic Sprinkler Sys- carrier or through a local sprinkler mainte-
tems,’’ contains the tables needed to design nance company or through the local fire pre-
and install either type of system. Minimum vention organization.
water supplies, densities, and pipe sizes are Anytime the employer must shut down the
given for all types of occupancies. primary water supply for a sprinkler system,
The employer may check with a reputable the standard requires that equivalent protec-
fire protection engineering consultant or tion be provided. Equivalent protection may
sprinkler design company when evaluating include a fire watch with extinguishers or
existing systems or designing a new installa- hose lines in place and manned, or a sec-
tion. ondary water supply such as a tank truck
With the advent of new construction mate- and pump, or a tank or fire pond with fire
rials for the manufacuture of sprinkler pipe, pumps, to protect the areas where the pri-
materials, other than steel have been ap- mary water supply is limited or shut down.
proved for use as sprinkler pipe. Selection of The employer may also require evacuation of
pipe material should be made on the basis of the workplace and have an emergency action
the type of installation and the acceptability plan which specifies such action.
of the material to local fire and building offi- 6. Protection of piping. Piping which is ex-
cials where such systems may serve more posed to corrosive atmospheres, either chem-
than one purpose. ical or natural, can become defective to the
Before new sprinkler systems are placed extent that it is useless. Employers must as-
into service, an acceptance test is to be con- sure that piping is protected from corrosion
ducted. The employer should invite the in- by its material of construction, e.g., stain-
staller, designer, insurance representative, less steel, or by a protective coating, e.g.,
and a local fire official to witness the test. paint.
Problems found during the test are to be cor- 7. Sprinklers. When an employer finds it
rected before the system is placed into serv- necessary to replace sprinkler system com-
ice. ponents or otherwise change a sprinkler’s de-
4. Maintenance. It is important that any sign, employer should make a complete fire
sprinkler system maintenance be done only protection engineering survey of that part of
when there is minimal employee exposure to the system being changed. This review
524
should assure that the changes to the system can splatter when hit with the discharging
will not alter the effectiveness of the system agent. All of these hazards must be deter-
as it is presently designed. Water supplies, mined before the system is placed into oper-
densities and flow characteristics should be ation, and must be discussed with employees.
maintained. Based on the known toxicological effects of
8. Protection of sprinklers. All components of agents such as carbon tetrachloride and
the system must be protected from mechan- chlorobromomethane, OSHA is not permit-
ical impact damage. This can be achieved ting the use of these agents in areas where
with the use of mechanical guards or screens employees can be exposed to the agent or its
or by locating components in areas where side effects. However, chlorobromomethane
physical contact is impossible or limited. has been accepted and may be used as an ex-
9. Sprinkler alarms. The most recognized plosion suppression agent in unoccupied
sprinkler alarm is the water motor gong or spaces. OSHA is permitting the use of this
bell that sounds when water begins to flow agent only in areas where employees will not
through the system. This is not however, the be exposed.
only type of acceptable water flow alarm. 2. Distinctive alarm signals. A distinctive
Any alarm that gives an indication that alarm signal is required to indicate that a
water is flowing through the system is ac- fixed system is discharging. Such a signal is
ceptable. For example, a siren, a whistle, a necessary on those systems where it is not
flashing light, or similar alerting device immediately apparent that the system is dis-
which can transmit a signal to the necessary charging. For example, certain gaseous
persons would be acceptable. The purpose of
agents make a loud noise when they dis-
the alarm is to alert persons that the system
charge. In this case no alarm signal is nec-
is operating, and that some type of planned
essary. However, where systems are located
action is necessary.
in remote locations or away from the general
10. Sprinkler spacing. For a sprinkler sys-
work area and where it is possible that a sys-
tem to be effective there must be an ade-
tem could discharge without anyone know-
quate discharge of water spray from the
ing that it is doing so, then a distinctive
sprinkler head. Any obstructions which
alarm is necessary to warn employees of the
hinder the designed density or spray pattern
of the water may create unprotected areas hazards that may exist. The alarm can be a
which can cause fire to spread. There are bell, gong, whistle, horn, flashing light, or
some sprinklers that, because of the sys- any combination of signals as long as it is
tem’s design, are deflected to specific areas. identifiable as a discharge alarm.
This type of obstruction is acceptable if the 3. Maintenance. The employer is respon-
system’s design takes it into consideration sible for the maintenance of all fixed sys-
in providing adequate coverage. tems, but this responsibility does not pre-
clude the use of outside contractors to do
§ 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general. such work. New systems should be subjected
to an acceptance test before placed in serv-
1. Scope and application. This section con-
ice. The employer should invite the installer,
tains the general requirements that are ap-
designer, insurance representative and oth-
plicable to all fixed extinguishing systems
ers to witness the test. Problems found dur-
installed to meet OSHA standards. It also
applies to those fixed extinguishing systems, ing the test need to be corrected before the
generally total flooding, which are not re- system is considered operational.
quired by OSHA, but which, because of the 4. Manual discharge stations. There are in-
agent’s discharge, may expose employees to stances, such as for mechanical reasons and
hazardous concentrations of extinguishing others, where the standards call for a man-
agents or combustion by-products. Employ- ual back-up activation device. While the lo-
ees who work around fixed extinguishing sys- cation of this device is not specified in the
tems must be warned of the possible hazards standard, the employer should assume that
associated with the system and its agent. the device should be located where employ-
For example, fixed dry chemical extin- ees can easily reach it. It could, for example,
guishing systems may generate a large be located along the main means of egress
enough cloud of dry chemical particles that from the protected area so that employees
employees may become visually disoriented. could activate the system as they evacuate
Certain gaseous agents can expose employees the work area.
to hazardous by-products of combustion 5. Personal protective equipment. The em-
when the agent comes into contact with hot ployer is required to provide the necessary
metal or other hot surface. Some gaseous personal protective equipment to rescue em-
agents may be present in hazardous con- ployees who may be trapped in a totally
centrations when the system has totally dis- flooded environment which may be haz-
charged because an extra rich concentration ardous to their health. This equipment
is necessary to extinguish deep-seated fires. would normally include a positive-pressure
Certain local application systems may be de- self-contained breathing apparatus and any
signed to discharge onto the flaming surface necessary first aid equipment. In cases where
of a liquid, and it is possible that the liquid the employer can assure the prompt arrival
525
of the local fire department or plant emer- § 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water
gency personnel which can provide the equip- spray and foam.
ment, this can be considered as complying 1. Scope and application. This section ap-
with the standards. plies to those systems that use water spray
or foam. The requirements of § 1910.160 also
§ 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry
apply to this type of system.
chemical.
2. Characteristics of foams. When selecting
1. Scope and application. The requirements the type of foam for a specific hazard, the
of this section apply only to dry chemical employer should consider the following limi-
systems. These requirements are to be used tations of some foams.
in conjunction with the requirements of a. Some foams are not acceptable for use
§ 1910.160. on fires involving flammable gases and lique-
fied gases with boiling points below ambient
2. Maintenance. The employer is respon-
workplace temperatures. Other foams are
sible for assuring that dry chemical systems
not effective when used on fires involving
will operate effectively. To do this, periodic
polar solvent liquids.
maintenance is necessary. One test that b. Any agent using water as part of the
must be conducted during the maintenance mixture should not be used on fire involving
check is one which will determine if the combustible metals unless it is applied under
agent has remained free of moisture. If an proper conditions to reduce the temperature
agent absorbs any moisture, it may tend to of burning metal below the ignition tempera-
cake and thereby clog the system. An easy ture. The employer should use only those
test for acceptable moisture content is to foams that have been tested and accepted for
take a lump of dry chemical from the con- this application by a recognized independent
tainer and drop it from a height of four testing laboratory.
inches. If the lump crumbles into fine par- c. Certain types of foams may be incompat-
ticles, the agent is acceptable. ible and break down when they are mixed to-
gether.
§ 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous d. For fires involving water miscible sol-
agent. vents, employers should use only those
1. Scope and application. This section ap- foams tested and approved for such use. Reg-
plies only to those systems which use gas- ular protein foams may not be effective on
eous agents. The requirements of § 1910.160 such solvents.
Whenever employers provide a foam or
also apply to the gaseous agent systems cov-
water spray system, drainage facilities must
ered in this section.
be provided to carry contaminated water or
2. Design concentrations. Total flooding gas- foam overflow away from the employee work
eous systems are based on the volume of gas areas and egress routes. This drainage sys-
which must be discharged in order to tem should drain to a central impounding
produce a certain designed concentration of area where it can be collected and disposed
gas in an enclosed area. The concentration of properly. Other government agencies may
needed to extinguish a fire depends on sev- have regulations concerning environmental
eral factors including the type of fire hazard considerations.
and the amount of gas expected to leak away
from the area during discharge. At times it § 1910.164 Fire detection systems.
is necessary to ‘‘super-saturate’’ a work area 1. Installation and restoration. Fire detec-
to provide for expected leakage from the en- tion systems must be designed by knowl-
closed area. In such cases, employers must edgeable engineers or other professionals,
assure that the flooded area has been venti- with expertise in fire detection systems and
lated before employees are permitted to re- when the systems are installed, there should
enter the work area without protective be an acceptance test performed on the sys-
clothing and respirators. tem to insure it operates properly. The man-
3. Toxic decomposition. Certain halogenated ufacturer’s recommendations for system de-
hydrocarbons will break down or decompose sign should be consulted. While entire sys-
when they are combined with high tempera- tems may not be approved, each component
tures found in the fire environment. The used in the system is required to be ap-
products of the decomposition can include proved. Custom fire detection systems
toxic elements or compounds. For example, should be designed by knowledgeable fire
when Halon 1211 is placed into contact with protection or electrical engineers who are fa-
hot metal it will break down and form bro- miliar with the workplace hazards and condi-
mide or fluoride fumes. The employer must tions. Some systems may only have one or
find out which toxic products may result two individual detectors for a small work-
from decomposition of a particular agent place, but good design and installation is
from the manufacturer, and take the nec- still important. An acceptance test should be
essary precautions to prevent employee ex- performed on all systems, including these
posure to the hazard. smaller systems.
526
OSHA has a requirement that spare compo- ble alarm signals are acceptable methods for
nents used to replace those which may be de- giving alarms to employees. Flashing lights
stroyed during an alarm situation be avail- or vibrating devices can be used in areas
able in sufficient quantities and locations for where the employer has hired employees
prompt restoration of the system. This does with hearing or vision impairments. Vibrat-
not mean that the parts or components have ing devices, air fans, or other tactile devices
to be stored at the workplace. If the em- can be used where visually and hearing im-
ployer can assure that the supply of parts is paired employees work. Employers are cau-
available in the local community or the gen- tioned that certain frequencies of flashing
eral metropolitan area of the workplace, lights have been claimed to initiate epileptic
then the requirements for storage and avail- seizures in some employees and that this
ability have been met. The intent is to make fact should be considered when selecting an
sure that the alarm system is fully oper- alarm device. Two way radio communica-
ational when employees are occupying the tions would be most appropriate for trans-
workplace, and that when the system oper- mitting emergency alarms in such work-
ates it can be returned to full service the places which may be remote or where tele-
next day or sooner. phones may not be available.
2. Supervision. Fire detection systems 3. Reporting alarms. Employee alarms may
should be supervised. The object of super- require different means of reporting, depend-
vision is detection of any failure of the cir- ing on the workplace involved. For example,
cuitry, and the employer should use any in small workplaces, a simple shout through-
method that will assure that the system’s out the workplace may be sufficient to warn
circuits are operational. Electrically oper- employees of a fire or other emergency. In
ated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure, larger workplaces, more sophisticated equip-
or electrical circuits, can provide effective ment is necessary so that entire plants or
monitoring and are the typical types of su- high-rise buildings are not evacuated for one
pervision. small emergency. In remote areas, such as
3. Protection of fire detectors. Fire detectors pumping plants, radio communication with a
must be protected from corrosion either by central base station may be necessary. The
protective coatings, by being manufactured goal of this standard is to assure that all em-
from non-corrosive materials or by location. ployees who need to know that an emergency
Detectors must also be protected from me- exists can be notified of the emergency. The
chanical impact damage, either by suitable method of transmitting the alarm should re-
cages or metal guards where such hazards flect the situation found at the workplace.
are present, or by locating them above or out Personal radio transmitters, worn by an
of contact with materials or equipment individual, can be used where the individual
which may cause damage. may be working such as in a remote loca-
4. Number, location, and spacing of detectors. tion. Such personal radio transmitters shall
This information can be obtained from the send a distinct signal and should clearly in-
approval listing for detectors or NFPA dicate who is having an emergency, the loca-
standards. It can also be obtained from fire tion, and the nature of the emergency. All
protection engineers or consultants or manu- radio transmitters need a feedback system to
facturers of equipment who have access to assure that the emergency alarm is sent to
approval listings and design methods. the people who can provide assistance.
For multi-story buildings or single story
§ 1910.165 Employee alarm systems. buildings with interior walls for subdivi-
1. Scope and application. This section is in- sions, the more traditional alarm systems
tended to apply to employee alarm systems are recommended for these types of work-
used for all types of employee emergencies places. Supervised telephone or manual fire
except those which occur so quickly and at alarm or pull box stations with paging sys-
such a rapid rate (e.g., explosions) that any tems to transmit messages throughout the
action by the employee is extremely limited building is the recommended alarm system.
following detection. The alarm box stations should be available
In small workplaces with 10 or less employ- within a travel distance of 200 feet. Water
ees the alarm system can be by direct voice flow detection on a sprinkler system, fire de-
communication (shouting) where any one in- tection systems (guard’s supervisory station)
dividual can quickly alert all other employ- or tour signal (watchman’s service), or other
ees. Radio may be used to transmit alarms related systems may be part of the overall
from remote workplaces where telephone system. The paging system may be used for
service is not available, provided that radio nonemergency operations provided the emer-
messages will be monitored by emergency gency messages and uses will have prece-
services, such as fire, police or others, to in- dence over all other uses of the system.
sure alarms are transmitted and received. 4. Supervision. The requirements for super-
2. Alarm signal alternatives. In recognition vising the employee alarm system circuitry
of physically impaired individuals, OSHA is and power supply may be accomplished in a
accepting various methods of giving alarm variety of ways. Typically, electrically oper-
signals. For example, visual, tactile or audi- ated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure,
527
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
steam pressure, or electrical continuity of and to identify trouble in the system and
circuitry may be used to continuously mon- give a warning signal.
itor the system to assure it is operational [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
1, 1981]
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L OF PART 1910—NATIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS

The following table contains a cross-reference listing of those current national consensus
standards which contains information and guidelines that would be considered acceptable in
complying with requirements in the specific sections of subpart L.
Subpart L section National consensus standard
1910.156 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 1972; Structural Fire Fighter’s Helmets.

ANSI Z88.5 American National Standard, Practice for Respirator Protection for the Fire Service.
ANSI/NFPA No. 1971, Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighters.
NFPA No. 1041, Fire Service Instructor Professional Qualifications.
1910.157 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers.
1910.158 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents.
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
NFPA No. 21, Steam Fire Pumps.
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks.
NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection.
NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves.
NFPA No. 13E, Fire Department Operations in Properties Protected by Sprinkler, Standpipe Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 194, Fire Hose Connections.
NFPA No. 197, Initial Fire Attack, Training for.
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting.
1910.159 ...................... ANSI-NFPA No. 13, Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA No. 13A, Sprinkler Systems, Maintenance.
ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents.
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks.
NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems.
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting.
1910.160 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1301 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1211 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 16 Foam-Water Spray Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 69, Explosion Suppression Systems.
1910.161 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems.
1910.162 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1211 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1301 Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 69, Explosion Suppression Systems.
1910.163 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Fixed Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 16, Foam-Water Spray Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents.
1910.164 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72E, Automatic Fire Detectors.
ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code.
1910.165 ...................... ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72C, Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code.
Metric Conversion ........ ANSI/ASTM No. E380, American National Standard for Metric Practice.
NFPA standards are available from the National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
528
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. C
ANSI Standards are available from the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L OF PART tional Standards Institute, New York, NY

1910—FIRE PROTECTION REFERENCES 10018.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION 11. Testing Physical Fitness; Davis and
Santa Maria. Fire Command. April 1975.
I. Appendix general references. The following 12. Development of a Job-Related Physical
references provide information which can be Performance Examination for Fire Fighters;
helpful in understanding the requirements Dotson and Others. A summary report for
contained in all of the sections of subpart L: the National Fire Prevention and Control
A. Fire Protection Handbook, National Fire Administration. Washington, DC. March
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, 1977.
Quincy, MA 02269. 13. Proposed Sample Standards for Fire Fight-
B. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial ers’ Protective Clothing and Equipment; Inter-
Operations, National Safety Council; 425 national Association of Fire Fighters, Wash-
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611. ington, DC.
C. Various associations also publish infor- 14. A Study of Facepiece Leakage of Self-Con-
mation which may be useful in under- tained Breathing Apparatus by DOP Man Tests;
standing these standards. Examples of these Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Los Ala-
associations are: Fire Equipment Manufac- mos, NM.
turers Association (FEMA) of Arlington, VA 15. The Development of Criteria for Fire
22204 and the National Association of Fire Fighters’ Gloves; Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test
Equipment Distributors (NAFED) of Chi- Methods; National Institute for Occupational
cago, IL 60601. Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH. 1976.
II. Appendix references applicable to indi- 16. Model Performance Criteria for Structural
vidual sections. The following references are Fire Fighters’ Helmets; National Fire Preven-
grouped according to individual sections tion and Control Administration, Wash-
contained in subpart L. These references pro- ington, DC. 1977.
vide information which may be helpful in un- 17. Firefighters; Job Safety and Health Mag-
derstanding and implementing the standards
azine, Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
of each section of subpart L.
ministration, Washington, DC. June 1978.
A. § 1910.156. Fire brigades:
18. Eating Smoke—The Dispensable Diet;
1. Private Fire Brigades, NFPA 27; National
Utech, H.P. The Fire Independent, 1975.
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . 19. Project Monoxide—A Medical Study of an
2. Initial Fire Attack, Training Standard On, Occupational Hazard of Fire Fighters; Inter-
NFPA 197; National Fire Protection Associa- national Association of Fire Fighters, Wash-
tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . ington, DC.
3. Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, 20. Occupational Exposures to Carbon Mon-
NFPA 1001; National Fire Protection Asso- oxide in Baltimore Firefighters; Radford and
ciation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA Levine. Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
02269 . more, MD. Journal of Occupational Medi-
4. Organization for Fire Services, NFPA 1201; cine, September, 1976.
National Fire Protection Association, 21. Fire Brigades; National Safety Council,
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . Chicago, IL. 1966.
5. Organization of a Fire Department, NFPA 22. American National Standard, Practice for
1202; National Fire Protection Association, Respiratory Protection for the Fire Service;
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . ANSI Z88.5; American National Standards
6. Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Institute, New York, NY 10018.
Fighting, ANSI/NFPA 1971; . 23. Respirator Studies for the Nuclear Regu-
7. American National Standard for Men’s latory Commission; October 1, 1977—September
Safety-Toe Footwear, ANSI Z41.1; American 30, 1978. Evaluation and Performance of Open
National Standards Institute, New York, NY Circuit Breathing Apparatus. NU REG/CR–1235.
10018. Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory; Los Ala-
8. American National Standard for Occupa- mos, NM. 87545, January, 1980.
tional and Educational Eye and Face Protec- B. § 1910.157. Portable fire extinguishers:
tion, ANSI Z87.1; American National Stand- 1. Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers,
ards Institute, New York, NY 10018. ANSI/NFPA 10; National Fire Protection As-
9. American National Standard, Safety Re- sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
quirements for Industrial Head Protection, 02269
ANSI Z89.1; American National Standards 2. Methods for Hydrostatic Testing of Com-
Institute, New York, NY 10018. pressed Gas Cylinders, C–1; Compressed Gas
10. Specifications for Protective Headgear for Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway,
Vehicular Users, ANSI Z90.1; American Na- Arlington, VA 22202.
529
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
3. Recommendations for the Disposition of Un- Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
serviceable Compressed Gas Cylinders, C–2; MA 02269.
Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson E. § 1910.160. Fixed extinguishing systems—
Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202. general information:
4. Standard for Visual Inspection of Com- 1. Standard for Foam Extinguishing Systems,
pressed Gas Cylinders, C–6; Compressed Gas ANSI-NFPA 11; National Fire Protection As-
Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
Arlington, VA 22202. 02269 .
5. Portable Fire Extinguisher Selection Guide, 2. Standard for Hi-Expansion Foam Systems,
National Association of Fire Equipment Dis- ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protection
tributors; 111 East Wacker Drive, Chicago, IL Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
60601. MA 02269 .
C. § 1910.158. Standpipe and hose systems:
3. Standard on Synthetic Foam and Combined
1. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Agent Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11B; National
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13; National Fire Pro-
tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
2. Standard of the Installation of Standpipe
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Pro-
and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National
tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269 .
3. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal 5. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12A;
Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire National Fire Protection Association,
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Quincy, MA 02269. 6. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
4. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire National Fire Protection Association,
Protection, ANSI/NFPA 22; National Fire Pro- Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, 7. Standard for Water Spray Systems, ANSI/
Quincy, MA 02269. NFPA 15; National Fire Protection Associa-
5. Standard for Screw Threads and Gaskets tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
for Fire Hose Connections, ANSI/NFPA 194; 8. Standard for Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems
National Fire Protection Association, and Foam-Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . 16; National Fire Protection Association, Na-
6. Standard for Fire Hose, NFPA 196; Na- tional Fire Protection Association,
tional Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. 9. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing
7. Standard for the Care of Fire Hose, NFPA Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Pro-
198; National Fire Protection Association, tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. Quincy, MA 02269.
D. § 1910.159. Automatic sprinkler systems: F. § 1910.161. Fixed extinguishing systems—
1. Standard of the Installation of Sprinkler dry chemical:
Systems, ANSI-NFPA 13; National Fire Pro- 1. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Pro-
Quincy, MA 02269. tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
2. Standard for the Care and Maintenance of Quincy, MA 02269.
Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13A; National 2. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70;
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch National Fire Protection Association,
Park, Quincy, MA 02269. Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Standpipe
3. Standard for the Installation of Equipment
and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National
for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden
Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment,
NFPA 96; National Fire Protection Associa-
4. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal
tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, G. § 1910.162. Fixed extinguishing systems—
Quincy, MA 02269 . gaseous agents:
5. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire 1. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
Protection, ANSI-NFPA 22; National Fire Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Pro-
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269. Quincy, MA 02269 .
6. Standard for Indoor General Storage, 2. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
ANSI/NFPA 231; National Fire Protection National Fire Protection Association,
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
MA 02269. 3. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
7. Standard for Rack Storage of Materials, National Fire Protection Association,
ANSI/NFPA 231C; National Fire Protection Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
530
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. D
4. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems, tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
ANSI/NFPA 69; National Fire Protection As- Quincy, MA 02269.
sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 4. Standard for Auxiliary Protective Signaling
02269 . Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72B; National Fire Pro-
5. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269.
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . 5. Standard for Remote Station Protective Sig-
6. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, naling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72C; National
ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
MA 02269 . 6. Standard for Proprietary Protective Sig-
7. Determination of Halon 1301/1211 Threshold naling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72D; National
Extinguishing Concentrations Using the Cup Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Burner Method; Riley and Olson, Ansul Re- Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
port AL–530–A. 7. Vocal Emergency Alarms in Hospitals and
H. § 1910.163. Fixed extinguishing systems— Nursing Facilities: Practice and Potential. Na-
water spray and foam agents: tional Bureau of Standards. Washington,
1. Standard for Foam Extinguisher Systems, D.C., July 1977.
ANSI/NFPA 11; National Fire Protection As- 8. Fire Alarm and Communication Systems.
sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA National Bureau of Standards. Washington,
02269 . D.C., April 1978.
2. Standard for High Expansion Foam Sys-
tems, ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protec- [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin- FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
cy, MA 02269 .
3. Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L OF PART
Fire Protection, ANSI/NFPA 15; National Fire 1910—AVAILABILITY OF PUBLICA-
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, TIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
Quincy, MA 02269 . IN SECTION 1910.156 FIRE BRIGADES
4. Standard for the Installation of Foam-
Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray The final standard for fire brigades, section
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 16; National Fire Pro- 1910.156, contains provisions which incor-
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, porate certain publications by reference. The
Quincy, MA 02269 . publications provide criteria and test meth-
I. § 1910.164. Fire Detection systems: ods for protective clothing worn by those fire
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; brigade members who are expected to per-
National Fire Protection Association, form interior structural fire fighting. The
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . standard references the publications as the
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling Sys- chief sources of information for determining
tems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protec- if the protective clothing affords the re-
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin- quired level of protection.
cy, MA 02269 . It is appropriate to note that the final
3. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, standard does not require employers to pur-
ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection chase a copy of the referenced publications.
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Instead, employers can specify (in purchase
MA 02269 . orders to the manufacturers) that the pro-
J. § 1910.165. Employee alarm systems: tective clothing meet the criteria and test
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; methods contained in the referenced publica-
National Fire Protection Association, tions and can rely on the manufacturers’ as-
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . surances of compliance. Employers, however,
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling sys- may desire to obtain a copy of the referenced
tems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protec- publications for their own information.
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin- The paragraph designation of the standard
cy, MA 02269. where the referenced publications appear,
3. Standard for Local Protective Signaling the title of the publications, and the
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72A; National Fire Pro- availablity of the publications are as follows:
Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from
1910.156(e)(3)(ii) .................... ‘‘Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fight- National Fire Protection Association,
ing,’’ NFPA No. 1971 (1975). Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
1910.156(e)(4)(i) ..................... ‘‘Development of Criteria for Fire Fighter’s U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,
Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Methods’’ D.C. 20402. Stock No. for Vol. II is: 071–
(1976). 033–0201–1.
1910.156(e)(5)(i) ..................... ‘‘Model Performance Criteria for Structural U.S. Fire Administration, National Fire Safety
Firefighter’s Helmets’’ (1977). and Research Office, Washington, D.C.
20230.
531
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
The referenced publications (or a micro- A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a
fiche of the publications) are available for rectangle of cloth 3-inches by 6-inches (7.6
review at many universities and public li- cm by 15.2 cm). The long dimension shall be
braries throughout the country. These publi- parallel to the warp for warp tests and par-
cations may also be examined at the OSHA allel to the filling for filling tests. No two
Technical Data Center, Room N2439–Rear, specimens for warp tests shall contain the
United States Department of Labor, 200 Con- same warp yarns, nor shall any two speci-
stitution Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210 mens for filling tests contain the same fill-
(202–219–7500), or at any OSHA Regional Of- ing yarns. The specimen shall be taken no
fice (see telephone directories under United nearer the selvage than 1⁄10 the width of the
States Government-Labor Department). cloth. An isosceles trapezoid having an alti-
tude of 3-inches (7.6 cm) and bases of 1 inch
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 (2.5cm) and 4 inches (10.2 cm) in length, re-
FR 33509, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, spectively, shall be marked on each speci-
1996] men, preferably with the aid of a template. A
cut approximately 3⁄8-inch (1 cm) in length
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART shall then be made in the center of a perpen-
1910—TEST METHODS FOR PROTEC- dicular to the 1-inch (2.5 cm) edge.
TIVE CLOTHING B. Apparatus. (i) Six-ounce (.17 kg) weight
tension clamps shall be used so designed that
This appendix contains test methods which the six ounces (.17 kg) of weight are distrib-
must be used to determine if protective uted evenly across the complete width of the
clothing affords the required level of protec- sample.
tion as specified in § 1910.156, fire brigades. (ii) The machine shall consist of three
(1) Puncture resistance test method for foot main parts: Straining mechanism, clamps
protection. for holding specimen, and load and elon-
A. Apparatus. The puncture resistance test gation recording mechanisms.
shall be performed on a testing machine hav- (iii) A machine wherein the specimen is
ing a movable platform adjusted to travel at held between two clamps and strained by a
1⁄4-inch/min (0.1 cm/sec). Two blocks of hard-
uniform movement of the pulling clamp
wood, metal, or plastic shall be prepared as shall be used.
follows: the blocks shall be of such size and (iv) The machine shall be adjusted so that
thickness as to insure a suitable rigid test the pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed
ensemble and allow for at least one-inch of of 12 ±10.5 inches per minute (0.5 ±.02 cm/sec).
the pointed end of an 8D nail to be exposed (v) The machine shall have two clamps
for the penetration. One block shall have a with two jaws on each clamp. The design of
hole drilled to hold an 8D common nail firm- the two clamps shall be such that one grip-
ly at an angle of 98°. The second block shall ping surface or jaw may be an integral part
have a maximum 1⁄2-inch (1.3 cm) diameter of the rigid frame of the clamp or be fastened
hole drilled through it so that the hole will to allow a slight vertical movement, while
allow free passage of the nail after it pene- the other gripping surface or jaw shall be
trates the insole during the test. completely moveable. The dimension of the
B. Procedure. The test ensemble consisting immovable jaw of each clamp parallel to the
of the sample unit, the two prepared blocks, application of the load shall measure one-
a piece of leather outsole 10 to 11 irons thick, inch, and the dimension of the jaw perpen-
and a new 8D nail, shall be placed as follows: dicular to this direction shall measure three
the 8D nail in the hole, the sample of outsole inches or more. The face of the movable jaw
stock superimposed above the nail, the area of each clamp shall measure one-inch by
of the sole plate to be tested placed on the three inches.
outsole, and the second block with hole so Each jaw face shall have a flat smooth,
placed as to allow for free passage of the nail gripping surface. All edges which might
after it passes through the outsole stock and cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a
sole plate in that order. The machine shall radius of not over 1⁄64-inch (.04 cm). In cases
be started and the pressure, in pounds re- where a cloth tends to slip when being test-
quired for the nail to completely penetrate ed, the jaws may be faced with rubber or
the outsole and sole plate, recorded to the other material to prevent slippage. The dis-
nearest five pounds. Two determinations tance between the jaws (gage length) shall be
shall be made on each sole plate and the re- one-inch at the start of the test.
sults averaged. A new nail shall be used for (vi) Calibrated dial; scale or chart shall be
each determination. used to indicate applied load and elongation.
C. Source. These test requirements are con- The machine shall be adjusted or set, so that
tained in ‘‘Military Specification For Fire- the maximum load required to break the
man’s Boots,’’ MIL-B-2885D (1973 and amend- specimen will remain indicated on the cali-
ment dated 1975) and are reproduced for your brated dial or scale after the test specimen
convenience. has ruptured.
(2) Test method for determining the strength (vii) The machine shall be of such capacity
of cloth by tearing: Trapezoid Method. that the maximum load required to break
532
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. E
the specimen shall be not greater than 85 tire inside back wall of the cabinet shall be
percent or less than 15 percent of the rated painted black to facilitate the viewing of the
capacity. test specimen and pilot flame.
(viii) The error of the machine shall not (ii) Burner. The burner shall be equipped
exceed 2 percent up to and including a 50- with a variable orifice to adjust the flame
pound load (22.6 kg) and 1 percent over a 50- height, a barrel having a 3⁄8-inch (1 cm) inside
pound load (22.6 kg) at any reading within its diameter and a pilot light.
loading range. (a) The burner may be constructed by com-
(ix) All machine attachments for deter- bining a 3⁄8-inch (1 cm) inside diameter barrel
mining maximum loads shall be disengaged 3 ±1⁄4 inches (7.6 ±.6 cm) long from a fixed ori-
during this test. fice burner with a base from a variable ori-
C. Procedure. (i) The specimen shall be fice burner.
clamped in the machine along the nonpar- (b) The pilot light tube shall have a diame-
allel sides of the trapezoid so that these sides ter of approximately 1⁄16-inch (.2 cm) and
lie along the lower edge of the upper clamp shall be spaced 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm) away from the
and the upper edge of the lower clamp with burner edge with a pilot flame 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm)
the cut halfway between the clamps. The long.
short trapezoid base shall be held taut and (c) The necessary gas connections and the
the long trapezoid base shall lie in the folds. applicable plumbing shall be as specified in
(ii) The machine shall be started and the Figure L–4 except that a solenoid valve may
force necessary to tear the cloth shall be ob-
be used in lieu of the stopcock valve to
served by means of an autographic recording
which the burner is attached. The stopcock
device. The speed of the pulling clamp shall
valve or solenoid valve, whichever is used,
be 12 inches ±0.5 inch per minute (0.5 ±.02 cm/
shall be capable of being fully opened or
sec).
fully closed in 0.1-second.
(iii) If a specimen slips between the jaws,
breaks in or at the edges of the jaws, or if for (d) On the side of the barrel of the burner,
any reason attributable to faulty technique, opposite the pilot light there shall be a
an individual measurement falls markedly metal rod of approximately 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm)
below the average test results for the sample diameter spaced 1⁄2-inch (1.3 cm) from the
unit, such result shall be discarded and an- barrel and extending above the burner. The
other specimen shall be tested. rod shall have two 5⁄16-inch (.8 cm) prongs
(iv) The tearing strength of the specimen marking the distances of 3⁄4-inch (1.9 cm) and
shall be the average of the five highest peak 11⁄2 inches (3.8 cm) above the top of the burn-
loads of resistance registered for 3 inches (7.6 er.
cm) of separation of the tear. (e) The burner shall be fixed in a position
D. Report. (i) Five specimens in each of the so that the center of the barrel of the burner
warp and filling directions shall be tested is directly below the center of the specimen.
from each sample unit. (iii) There shall be a control valve system
(ii) The tearing strength of the sample unit with a delivery rate designed to furnish gas
shall be the average of the results obtained to the burner under a pressure of 21⁄2 ±1⁄4 (psi)
from the specimens tested in each of the (17.5 ±1.8 kPa) per square inch at the burner
warp and filling directions and shall be re- inlet (see (g)(3)(vi)(A)). The manufacturer’s
ported separately to the nearest 0.1-pound recommended delivery rate for the valve sys-
(.05 kg). tem shall be included in the required pres-
E. Source. These test requirements are con- sure.
tained in ‘‘Federal Test Method Standard (iv) A synthetic gas mixture shall be of the
191, Method 5136’’ and are reproduced for following composition within the following
your convenience. limits (analyzed at standard conditions): 55
(3) Test method for determining flame resist- ±3 percent hydrogen, 24 ±1 percent methane,
ance of cloth; vertical. 3 ±1 percent ethane, and 18 ±1 percent carbon
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a monoxide which will give a specific gravity
rectangle of cloth 23⁄4 inches (7.0 cm) by 12 of 0.365 ±0.018 (air = 1) and a B.T.U. content
inches (30.5 cm) with the long dimension par- of 540 ±20 per cubic foot (20.1 ±3.7 kJ/L)(dry
allel to either the warp or filling direction of basis) at 69.8 °F (21 °C).
the cloth. No two warp specimens shall con- (v) There shall be metal hooks and weights
tain the same warp yarns, and no two filling to produce a series of total loads to deter-
specimens shall contain the same filling mine length of char. The metal hooks shall
yarn. consist of No. 19 gage steel wire or equiva-
B. Number of determinations. Five specimens lent and shall be made from 3-inch (7.6 cm)
from each of the warp and filling directions lengths of wire and bent 1⁄2-inch (1.3 cm) from
shall be tested from each sample unit. one end to a 45 degree hook. One end of the
C. Apparatus. (i) Cabinet. A cabinet and ac- hook shall be fastened around the neck of
cessories shall be fabricated in accordance the weight to be used.
with the requirements specified in Figures (vi) There shall be a stop watch or other
L–1, L–2, and L–3. Galvanized sheet metal or device to measure the burning time to 0.2-
other suitable metal shall be used. The en- second.
533
(vii) There shall be a scale, graduated in 0.1 ter of the charred area as follows: The speci-
inch (.3 cm) to measure the length of char. men shall be folded lengthwise and creased
D. Procedure. (i) The material undergoing by hand along a line through the highest
test shall be evaluated for the characteris- peak of the charred area. The hook shall be
tics of after-flame time and char length on inserted in the specimen (or a hole, 1⁄4-inch
each specimen. (.6 cm) diameter or less, punched out for the
(ii) All specimens to be tested shall be at hook) at one side of the charred area 1⁄4-inch
moisture equilibrium under standard atmos- (.6 cm) from the adjacent outside edge and
pheric conditions in accordance with para- 1⁄4-inch (.6 cm) in from the lower end. A
graph (3)C of this appendix. Each specimen weight of sufficient size such that the weight
to be tested shall be exposed to the test and hook together shall equal the total tear-
flame within 20 seconds after removal from ing load required in Table L–2 of this section
the standard atmosphere. In case of dispute, shall be attached to the hook.
all testing will be conducted under Standard (viii) A tearing force shall be applied gent-
Atmospheric Conditions in accordance with ly to the specimen by grasping the corner of
paragraph (3)C of this appendix. the cloth at the opposite edge of the char
(iii) The specimen in its holder shall be from the load and raising the specimen and
suspended vertically in the cabinet in such a weight clear of the supporting surface. The
manner that the entire length of the speci- end of the tear shall be marked off on the
men is exposed and the lower end is 3⁄4-inch edge and the char length measurement made
(1.9 cm) above the top of the gas burner. The along the undamaged edge.
apparatus shall be set up in a draft free area.
Loads for determining char length applica-
(iv) Prior to inserting the specimen, the
ble to the weight of the test cloth shall be as
pilot flame shall be adjusted to approxi-
shown in Table L–2.
mately 1⁄8-inch (.3 cm) in height measured
from its lowest point to the tip.
The burner flame shall be adjusted by TABLE L–2 1
means of the needle valve in the base of the
Total tear-
burner to give a flame height of 11⁄2 inches ing weight
(3.8 cm) with the stopcock fully open and the Specified weight per square yard of cloth before for deter-
air supply to the burner shut off and taped. mining the
any fire retardant treatment or coating—ounces
charred
The 11⁄2-inch (3.8 cm) flame height is ob- length—
tained by adjusting the valve so that the up- pound
permost portion (tip) of the flame is level
with the tip of the metal prong (see Figure 2.0 to 6.0 ............................................................. 0.25
L–2) specified for adjustment of flame Over 6.0 to 15.0 .................................................. 0.50
height. It is an important aspect of the eval- Over 15.0 to 23.0 ................................................ 0.75
uation that the flame height be adjusted Over 23.0 ............................................................. 1.0
with the tip of the flame level with the tip of 1 To change into S.I. (System International) units, 1
the metal prong. After inserting the speci- ounce=28.35 grams, 1 pound=453 grams, 1 yard=.91 metre.
men, the stopcock shall be fully opened, and
the burner flame applied vertically at the (ix) The after-flame time of the specimen
middle of the lower edge of the specimen for shall be recorded to the nearest 0.2-second
12 seconds and the burner turned off. The and the char length to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3
cabinet door shall remain shut during test- cm).
ing. E. Report. (i) The after-flame time and char
(v) The after-flame shall be the time the length of the sample unit shall be the aver-
specimen continues to flame after the burner age of the results obtained from the indi-
flame is shut off. vidual specimens tested. All values obtained
(vi) After each specimen is removed, the from the individual specimens shall be re-
test cabinet shall be cleared of fumes and corded.
smoke prior to testing the next specimen. (ii) The after-flame time shall be reported
(vii) After both flaming and glowing have to the nearest 0.2-second and the char length
ceased, the char length shall be measured. to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3 cm).
The char length shall be the distance from F. Source. These test requirements are con-
the end of the specimen, which was exposed tained in ‘‘Federal Test Method Standard
to the flame, to the end of a tear (made 191, Method 5903 (1971)’’ and are reproduced
lengthwise) of the specimen through the cen- for your convenience.
534
535
EC27OC91.032</GPH>
536
EC27OC91.033</GPH>
537
EC27OC91.034</GPH>
§§ 1910.166–1910.168 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
Subpart M—Compressed Gas and pressed air as in tunnels and caissons.

Compressed Air Equipment This section is not intended to apply to
compressed air machinery and equip-
ment used on transportation vehicles
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- such as steam railroad cars, electric
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
railway cars, and automotive equip-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ment.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (2) New and existing equipment. (i) All
as applicable. new air receivers installed after the ef-
fective date of these regulations shall
§§ 1910.166–1910.168 [Reserved] be constructed in accordance with the
1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and
§ 1910.169 Air receivers. Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII,
(a) General requirements—(1) Applica- which is incorporated by reference as
tion. This section applies to compressed specified in § 1910.6.
air receivers, and other equipment used (ii) All safety valves used shall be
in providing and utilizing compressed constructed, installed, and maintained
air for performing operations such as in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler
cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip- and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII
ping. On the other hand, however, this Edition 1968.
section does not deal with the special (b) Installation and equipment require-
problems created by using compressed ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers
air to convey materials nor the prob- shall be so installed that all drains,
lems created when men work in com- handholes, and manholes therein are
538
EC27OC91.035</GPH>
easily accessible. Under no cir- § 1910.176 Handling materials—gen-
cumstances shall an air receiver be eral.
buried underground or located in an in- (a) Use of mechanical equipment.
accessible place. Where mechanical handling equipment
(2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and is used, sufficient safe clearances shall
valve shall be installed at the lowest be allowed for aisles, at loading docks,
point of every air receiver to provide through doorways and wherever turns
for the removal of accumulated oil and or passage must be made. Aisles and
water. Adequate automatic traps may passageways shall be kept clear and in
be installed in addition to drain valves. good repair, with no obstruction across
The drain valve on the air receiver or in aisles that could create a hazard.
shall be opened and the receiver com- Permanent aisles and passageways
pletely drained frequently and at such shall be appropriately marked.
intervals as to prevent the accumula- (b) Secure storage. Storage of material
tion of excessive amounts of liquid in shall not create a hazard. Bags, con-
the receiver. tainers, bundles, etc., stored in tiers
(3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re- shall be stacked, blocked, interlocked
and limited in height so that they are
ceiver shall be equipped with an indi-
stable and secure against sliding or col-
cating pressure gage (so located as to
lapse.
be readily visible) and with one or
(c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall
more spring-loaded safety valves. The
be kept free from accumulation of ma-
total relieving capacity of such safety terials that constitute hazards from
valves shall be such as to prevent pres- tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor-
sure in the receiver from exceeding the age. Vegetation control will be exer-
maximum allowable working pressure cised when necessary.
of the receiver by more than 10 per- (d) [Reserved]
cent. (e) Clearance limits. Clearance signs to
(ii) No valve of any type shall be warn of clearance limits shall be pro-
placed between the air receiver and its vided.
safety valve or valves. (f) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or
(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety bumper blocks shall be provided on
valves, indicating devices and control- spur railroad tracks where a rolling car
ling devices, shall be constructed, lo- could contact other cars being worked,
cated, and installed so that they can- enter a building, work or traffic area.
not be readily rendered inoperative by (g) Guarding. Covers and/or guardrails
any means, including the elements. shall be provided to protect personnel
(iv) All safety valves shall be tested from the hazards of open pits, tanks,
frequently and at regular intervals to vats, ditches, etc.
determine whether they are in good op- [39 FR 23052, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
erating condition. FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978]
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 § 1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and
FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] single piece rim wheels.
(a) Scope. (1) This section applies to
Subpart N—Materials Handling the servicing of multi-piece and single
and Storage piece rim wheels used on large vehicles
such as trucks, tractors, trailers, buses
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa- and off-road machines. It does not
tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 apply to the servicing of rim wheels
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s used on automobiles, or on pickup
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR trucks and vans utilizing automobile
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– tires or truck tires designated ‘‘LT’’.
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 (2) This section does not apply to em-
FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 4–2010 (75 ployers and places of employment reg-
FR 55355) as applicable. ulated under the Longshoring Stand-
Section 1910.177, also issued under 29 CFR ards, 29 CFR part 1918; Construction
part 1911. Safety Standards, 29 CFR part 1926; or
539
Agriculture Standards, 29 CFR part turer or other qualified organization
1928. for correct mounting, demounting,
(3) All provisions of this section maintenance, and safety precautions
apply to the servicing of both single peculiar to the type of wheel being
piece rim wheels and multi-piece rim serviced.
wheels unless designated otherwise. Rim wheel means an assemblage of
(b) Definitions. Barrier means a fence, tire, tube and liner (where appro-
wall or other structure or object placed priate), and wheel components.
between a single piece rim wheel and Service or servicing means the mount-
an employee during tire inflation, to ing and demounting of rim wheels, and
contain the rim wheel components in related activities such as inflating, de-
the event of the sudden release of the flating, installing, removing, and han-
contained air of the single piece rim dling.
wheel. Service area means that part of an
Charts means the U.S. Department of employer’s premises used for the serv-
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health icing of rim wheels, or any other place
Administration publications entitled where an employee services rim
‘‘Demounting and Mounting Proce- wheels.
dures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus
Single piece rim wheel means the as-
Tires,’’ ‘‘Demounting and Mounting
semblage of single piece rim wheel
Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus
with the tire and other components.
Tires,’’ and ‘‘Multi-Piece Rim Match-
ing Chart.’’ These charts may be in Single piece wheel means a vehicle
manual or poster form. OSHA also will wheel consisting of one part, designed
accept any other manual or poster that to hold the tire on the wheel when the
provides at least the same instructions, tire is inflated.
safety precautions, and other informa- Trajectory means any potential path
tion contained in these publications, or route that a rim wheel component
which is applicable to the types of may travel during an explosive separa-
wheels the employer is servicing. tion, or the sudden release of the pres-
Installing a rim wheel means the surized air, or an area at which an air-
transfer and attachment of an assem- blast from a single piece rim wheel
bled rim wheel onto a vehicle axle hub. may be released. The trajectory may
Removing means the opposite of install- deviate from paths which are perpen-
ing. dicular to the assembled position of the
Mounting a tire means the assembly rim wheel at the time of separation or
or putting together of the wheel and explosion. (See appendix A for exam-
tire components to form a rim wheel, ples of trajectories.)
including inflation. Demounting means Wheel means that portion of a rim
the opposite of mounting. wheel which provides the method of at-
Multi-piece rim wheel means the as- tachment of the assembly to the axle
semblage of a multi-piece wheel with of a vehicle and also provides the
the tire tube and other components. means to contain the inflated portion
Multi-piece wheel means a vehicle of the assembly (i.e., the tire and/or
wheel consisting of two or more parts, tube).
one of which is a side or locking ring (c) Employee training. (1) The em-
designed to hold the tire on the wheel ployer shall provide a program to train
by interlocking components when the all employees who service rim wheels
tire is inflated. in the hazards involved in servicing
Restraining device means an apparatus those rim wheels and the safety proce-
such as a cage, rack, assemblage of dures to be followed.
bars and other components that will (i) The employer shall assure that no
constrain all rim wheel components employee services any rim wheel un-
during an explosive separation of a less the employee has been trained and
multi-piece rim wheel, or during the instructed in correct procedures of
sudden release of the contained air of a servicing the type of wheel being serv-
single piece rim wheel. iced, and in the safe operating proce-
Rim manual means a publication con- dures described in paragraphs (f) and
taining instructions from the manufac- (g) of this section.
540
(ii) Information to be used in the (i) Each restraining device or barrier
training program shall include, at a shall have the capacity to withstand
minimum, the applicable data con- the maximum force that would be
tained in the charts (rim manuals) and transferred to it during a rim wheel
the contents of this standard. separation occurring at 150 percent of
(iii) Where an employer knows or has the maximum tire specification pres-
reason to believe that any of his em- sure for the type of rim wheel being
ployees is unable to read and under- serviced.
stand the charts or rim manual, the (ii) Restraining devices and barriers
employer shall assure that the em- shall be capable of preventing the rim
ployee is instructed concerning the wheel components from being thrown
contents of the charts and rim manual outside or beyond the device or barrier
in a manner which the employee is able for any rim wheel positioned within or
to understand. behind the device;
(2) The employer shall assure that (iii) Restraining devices and barriers
each employee demonstrates and main- shall be visually inspected prior to
tains the ability to service rim wheels each day’s use and after any separation
safely, including performance of the of the rim wheel components or sudden
following tasks: release of contained air. Any restrain-
(i) Demounting of tires (including de- ing device or barrier exhibiting damage
flation); such as the following defects shall be
(ii) Inspection and identification of immediately removed from service:
the rim wheel components; (A) Cracks at welds;
(iii) Mounting of tires (including in- (B) Cracked or broken components;
flation with a restraining device or (C) Bent or sprung components
other safeguard required by this sec- caused by mishandling, abuse, tire ex-
tion); plosion or rim wheel separation;
(iv) Use of the restraining device or
(D) Pitting of components due to cor-
barrier, and other equipment required
rosion; or
by this section;
(E) Other structural damage which
(v) Handling of rim wheels;
would decrease its effectiveness.
(vi) Inflation of the tire when a single
piece rim wheel is mounted on a vehi- (iv) Restraining devices or barriers
cle; removed from service shall not be re-
(vii) An understanding of the neces- turned to service until they are re-
sity of standing outside the trajectory paired and reinspected. Restraining de-
both during inflation of the tire and vices or barriers requiring structural
during inspection of the rim wheel fol- repair such as component replacement
lowing inflation; and or rewelding shall not be returned to
(viii) Installation and removal of rim service until they are certified by ei-
wheels. ther the manufacturer or a Registered
(3) The employer shall evaluate each Professional Engineer as meeting the
employee’s ability to perform these strength requirements of paragraph
tasks and to service rim wheels safely, (d)(3)(i) of this section.
and shall provide additional training as (4) The employer shall furnish and as-
necessary to assure that each employee sure that an air line assembly con-
maintains his or her proficiency. sisting of the following components be
(d) Tire servicing equipment. (1) The used for inflating tires:
employer shall furnish a restraining (i) A clip-on chuck;
device for inflating tires on multi-piece (ii) An in-line valve with a pressure
wheels. gauge or a presettable regulator; and
(2) The employer shall provide a re- (iii) A sufficient length of hose be-
straining device or barrier for inflating tween the clip-on chuck and the in-line
tires on single piece wheels unless the valve (if one is used) to allow the em-
rim wheel will be bolted onto a vehicle ployee to stand outside the trajectory.
during inflation. (5) Current charts or rim manuals
(3) Restraining devices and barriers containing instructions for the type of
shall comply with the following re- wheels being serviced shall be available
quirements: in the service area.
541
(6) The employer shall furnish and as- inflated while the rim wheel is on the
sure that only tools recommended in vehicle provided remote control infla-
the rim manual for the type of wheel tion equipment is used, and no employ-
being serviced are used to service rim ees remain in the trajectory during in-
wheels. flation.
(e) Wheel component acceptability. (1) (5) Tires shall be inflated outside a
Multi-piece wheel components shall restraining device only to a pressure
not be interchanged except as provided sufficient to force the tire bead onto
in the charts or in the applicable rim the rim ledge and create an airtight
manual. seal with the tire and bead.
(2) Multi-piece wheel components and (6) Whenever a rim wheel is in a re-
single piece wheels shall be inspected straining device the employee shall not
prior to assembly. Any wheel or wheel rest or lean any part of his body or
component which is bent out of shape, equipment on or against the restrain-
pitted from corrosion, broken, or ing device.
cracked shall not be used and shall be (7) After tire inflation, the tire and
marked or tagged unserviceable and re- wheel components shall be inspected
moved from the service area. Damaged while still within the restraining de-
or leaky valves shall be replaced. vice to make sure that they are prop-
(3) Rim flanges, rim gutters, rings, erly seated and locked. If further ad-
bead seating surfaces and the bead justment to the tire or wheel compo-
areas of tires shall be free of any dirt, nents is necessary, the tire shall be de-
surface rust, scale or loose or flaked flated by removal of the valve core be-
rubber build-up prior to mounting and fore the adjustment is made.
inflation. (8) No attempt shall be made to cor-
(4) The size (bead diameter and tire/ rect the seating of side and lock rings
wheel widths) and type of both the tire by hammering, striking or forcing the
and the wheel shall be checked for components while the tire is pressur-
compatibility prior to assembly of the ized.
rim wheel. (9) Cracked, broken, bent or other-
(f) Safe operating procedure—multi- wise damaged rim components shall
piece rim wheels. The employer shall es- not be reworked, welded, brazed, or
tablish a safe operating procedure for otherwise heated.
servicing multi-piece rim wheels and (10) Whenever multi-piece rim wheels
shall assure that employees are in- are being handled, employees shall stay
structed in and follow that procedure. out of the trajectory unless the em-
The procedure shall include at least ployer can demonstrate that perform-
the following elements: ance of the servicing makes the em-
(1) Tires shall be completely deflated ployee’s presence in the trajectory nec-
before demounting by removal of the essary.
valve core. (11) No heat shall be applied to a
(2) Tires shall be completely deflated multi-piece wheel or wheel component.
by removing the valve core before a (g) Safe operating procedure—single
rim wheel is removed from the axle in piece rim wheels. The employer shall es-
either of the following situations: tablish a safe operating procedure for
(i) When the tire has been driven servicing single piece rim wheels and
underinflated at 80% or less of its rec- shall assure that employees are in-
ommended pressure, or structed in and follow that procedure.
(ii) When there is obvious or sus- The procedure shall include at least
pected damage to the tire or wheel the following elements:
components. (1) Tires shall be completely deflated
(3) Rubber lubricant shall be applied by removal of the valve core before de-
to bead and rim mating surfaces during mounting.
assembly of the wheel and inflation of (2) Mounting and demounting of the
the tire, unless the tire or wheel manu- tire shall be done only from the narrow
facturer recommends against it. ledge side of the wheel. Care shall be
(4) If a tire on a vehicle is undertaken to avoid damaging the tire beads
inflated but has more than 80% of the while mounting tires on wheels. Tires
recommended pressure, the tire may be shall be mounted only on compatible
542
wheels of matching bead diameter and the vehicle with the lug nuts fully
width. tightened.
(3) Nonflammable rubber lubricant (7) Tires shall not be inflated when
shall be applied to bead and wheel mat- any flat, solid surface is in the trajec-
ing surfaces before assembly of the rim tory and within one foot of the side-
wheel, unless the tire or wheel manu- wall.
facturer recommends against the use of (8) Employees shall stay out of the
any rubber lubricant. trajectory when inflating a tire.
(9) Tires shall not be inflated to more
(4) If a tire changing machine is used,
than the inflation pressure stamped in
the tire shall be inflated only to the
the sidewall unless a higher pressure is
minimum pressure necessary to force
recommended by the manufacturer.
the tire bead onto the rim ledge while (10) Tires shall not be inflated above
on the tire changing machine. the maximum pressure recommended
(5) If a bead expander is used, it shall by the manufacturer to seat the tire
be removed before the valve core is in- bead firmly against the rim flange.
stalled and as soon as the rim wheel be- (11) No heat shall be applied to a sin-
comes airtight (the tire bead slips onto gle piece wheel.
the bead seat). (12) Cracked, broken, bent, or other-
(6) Tires may be inflated only when wise damaged wheels shall not be re-
contained within a restraining device, worked, welded, brazed, or otherwise
positioned behind a barrier or bolted on heated.
543
APPENDIX B TO § 1910.177—ORDERING containing the three charts, entitled ‘‘De-

INFORMATION FOR THE OSHA CHARTS mounting and Mounting Procedures for
Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,’’ ‘‘Demount-
The information on the OSHA charts is
ing and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type
available on three posters, or in a manual
544
EC27OC91.036</GPH>
Truck and Bus Tires,’’ and ‘‘Multi-piece Rim (4) Modifications and additions which
Matching Chart.’’ Interested parties can affect capacity and safe operation shall
download and print both the manuals and not be performed by the customer or
posters from OSHA’s Web site at http://
user without manufacturers prior writ-
www.osha.gov/publications (and type ‘‘tire
chart’’ in the search field). However, when
ten approval. Capacity, operation, and
used by the employer at a worksite to pro- maintenance instruction plates, tags,
vide information to employees, the printed or decals shall be changed accordingly.
posters must be, at a minimum, 2 feet wide (5) If the truck is equipped with
and 3 feet long. Copies of the manual also are front-end attachments other than fac-
available from the Occupational Safety and tory installed attachments, the user
Health Administration (OSHA Office of Pub- shall request that the truck be marked
lications, Room N–3101, U.S. Department of to identify the attachments and show
Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., Wash-
the approximate weight of the truck
ington, DC 20210; telephone: (202) 693–1888; or
fax: (202) 693–2498). and attachment combination at max-
imum elevation with load laterally
[49 FR 4350, Feb. 3, 1984, as amended at 52 FR centered.
36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 53 FR 34737, Sept. 8, 1988; (6) The user shall see that all name-
61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 24698, May 2,
plates and markings are in place and
2011; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]
are maintained in a legible condition.
§ 1910.178 Powered industrial trucks. (7) As used in this section, the term,
approved truck or approved industrial
(a) General requirements. (1) This sec- truck means a truck that is listed or
tion contains safety requirements reapproved for fire safety purposes for
lating to fire protection, design, main- the intended use by a nationally recog-
tenance, and use of fork trucks, trac- nized testing laboratory, using nation-
tors, platform lift trucks, motorized ally recognized testing standards.
hand trucks, and other specialized in- Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for defini-
dustrial trucks powered by electric motion of listed, and to § 1910.7 for defini-
tors or internal combustion engines. tion of nationally recognized testing
This section does not apply to com- laboratory.
pressed air or nonflammable com- (b) Designations. For the purpose of
pressed gas-operated industrial trucks, this standard there are eleven different
nor to farm vehicles, nor to vehicles in- designations of industrial trucks or
tended primarily for earth moving or tractors as follows: D, DS, DY, E, ES,
over-the-road hauling. EE, EX, G, GS, LP, and LPS.
(2) All new powered industrial trucks (1) The D designated units are units
acquired and used by an employer shall similar to the G units except that they
meet the design and construction re- are diesel engine powered instead of
quirements for powered industrial gasoline engine powered.
trucks established in the ‘‘American (2) The DS designated units are diesel
National Standard for Powered Indus- powered units that are provided with
trial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1–1969’’, additional safeguards to the exhaust,
which is incorporated by reference as fuel and electrical systems. They may
specified in § 1910.6, except for vehicles be used in some locations where a D
intended primarily for earth moving or unit may not be considered suitable.
over-the-road hauling. (3) The DY designated units are die-
(3) Approved trucks shall bear a label sel powered units that have all the
or some other identifying mark indi- safeguards of the DS units and in addi-
cating approval by the testing labora- tion do not have any electrical equip-
tory. See paragraph (a)(7) of this sec- ment including the ignition and are
tion and paragraph 405 of ‘‘American equipped with temperature limitation
National Standard for Powered Indus- features.
trial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1–1969’’, (4) The E designated units are elec-
which is incorporated by reference in trically powered units that have min-
paragraph (a)(2) of this section and imum acceptable safeguards against in-
which provides that if the powered inherent fire hazards.
dustrial truck is accepted by a nation- (5) The ES designated units are elec-
ally recognized testing laboratory it trically powered units that, in addition
should be so marked. to all of the requirements for the E
545
units, are provided with additional trucks having greater safeguards may
safeguards to the electrical system to be used if desired.
prevent emission of hazardous sparks (2) For specific areas of use, see Table
and to limit surface temperatures. N–1 which tabulates the information
They may be used in some locations contained in this section. References
where the use of an E unit may not be are to the corresponding classification
considered suitable. as used in subpart S of this part.
(6) The EE designated units are elec- (i) Power-operated industrial trucks
trically powered units that have, in ad- shall not be used in atmospheres con-
dition to all of the requirements for taining hazardous concentration of
the E and ES units, the electric motors acetylene, butadiene, ethylene oxide,
and all other electrical equipment hydrogen (or gases or vapors equiva-
completely enclosed. In certain loca- lent in hazard to hydrogen, such as
tions the EE unit may be used where manufactured gas), propylene oxide,
the use of an E and ES unit may not be acetaldehyde, cyclopropane, diethyl
considered suitable. ether, ethylene, isoprene, or unsym-
(7) The EX designated units are elec- metrical dimethyl hydrazine (UDMH).
trically powered units that differ from (ii)(a) Power-operated industrial
the E, ES, or EE units in that the elec- trucks shall not be used in
trical fittings and equipment are so de- atmospheres containing hazardous con-
signed, constructed and assembled that centrations of metal dust, including
the units may be used in certain aluminum, magnesium, and their com-
atmospheres containing flammable va- mercial alloys, other metals of simi-
pors or dusts. larly hazardous characteristics, or in
atmospheres containing carbon black,
(8) The G designated units are gaso-
coal or coke dust except approved
line powered units having minimum
power-operated industrial trucks des-
acceptable safeguards against inherent
ignated as EX may be used in such
fire hazards.
atmospheres.
(9) The GS designated units are gaso- (b) In atmospheres where dust of
line powered units that are provided magnesium, aluminum or aluminum
with additional safeguards to the ex- bronze may be present, fuses, switches,
haust, fuel, and electrical systems. motor controllers, and circuit breakers
They may be used in some locations of trucks shall have enclosures specifi-
where the use of a G unit may not be cally approved for such locations.
considered suitable. (iii) Only approved power-operated
(10) The LP designated unit is similar industrial trucks designated as EX
to the G unit except that liquefied pe- may be used in atmospheres containing
troleum gas is used for fuel instead of acetone, acrylonitrile, alcohol, ammo-
gasoline. nia, benzine, benzol, butane, ethylene
(11) The LPS designated units are liq- dichloride, gasoline, hexane, lacquer
uefied petroleum gas powered units solvent vapors, naphtha, natural gas,
that are provided with additional safe- propane, propylene, styrene, vinyl ace-
guards to the exhaust, fuel, and elec- tate, vinyl chloride, or xylenes in quan-
trical systems. They may be used in tities sufficient to produce explosive or
some locations where the use of an LP ignitable mixtures and where such con-
unit may not be considered suitable. centrations of these gases or vapors
(12) The atmosphere or location shall exist continuously, intermittently or
have been classified as to whether it is periodically under normal operating
hazardous or nonhazardous prior to the conditions or may exist frequently be-
consideration of industrial trucks cause of repair, maintenance oper-
being used therein and the type of in- ations, leakage, breakdown or faulty
dustrial truck required shall be as pro- operation of equipment.
vided in paragraph (d) of this section (iv) Power-operated industrial trucks
for such location. designated as DY, EE, or EX may be
(c) Designated locations. (1) The indus- used in locations where volatile flam-
trial trucks specified under subpara- mable liquids or flammable gases are
graph (2) of this paragraph are the min- handled, processed or used, but in
imum types required but industrial which the hazardous liquids, vapors or
546
gases will normally be confined within ure or abnormal operation of the ven-
closed containers or closed systems tilating equipment; or in locations
from which they can escape only in which are adjacent to Class I, Division
case of accidental rupture or break- 1 locations, and to which hazardous
down of such containers or systems, or concentrations of gases or vapors
in the case of abnormal operation of might occasionally be communicated
equipment; also in locations in which unless such communication is pre-
hazardous concentrations of gases or vented by adequate positive-pressure
vapors are normally prevented by posi- ventilation from a source of clear air,
tive mechanical ventilation but which and effective safeguards against ven-
might become hazardous through fail- tilation failure are provided.
547
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:18 Jul 22, 2013
§ 1910.178
TABLE N–1—SUMMARY TABLE ON USE OF INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS IN VARIOUS LOCATIONS
Classes Unclassified Class I locations Class II locations Class III locations
Jkt 229116
Description of classes Locations not possessing Locations in which flammable gases or vapors Locations which are hazardous because of the Locations where easily ignitible
atmospheres as de- are, or may be, present in the air in quantities presence of combustible dust. fibers or flyings are present
scribed in other columns. sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mix- but not likely to be in suspen-
tures. sion in quantities sufficient to
produce ignitible mixtures.
PO 00000
Groups in classes None A B C D E F G None
Examples of locations Piers and wharves inside Acetylene Hydrogen Ethyl ether Gasoline Metal dust Carbon Grain dust, flour dust, Baled waste, cocoa
or atmospheres in and outside general Naphtha black coal starch dust, organic fiber, cotton, excel-
classes and groups. storage, general indus- Alcohols dust, dust sior, hemp, istle,
Frm 00558
trial or commercial Acetone coke dust jute, kapok, oakum,

properties. Lacquer sisal, Spanish
solvent moss, synthetic fi-
Benzene bers, tow.
Fmt 8010
TABLE N–1—SUMMARY TABLE ON USE OF INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS IN VARIOUS LOCATIONS—CONTINUED

1 2 1 2 1 2
548
Sfmt 8002
Divisions (nature of None Above condition exists Above condition may Explosive mixture may Explosive mixture not Locations in which eas- Locations in which eas-
hazardous condi- continuously, inter- occur accidentally as be present under normally present, but ily ignitible fibers or ily ignitible fibers are
tions) mittently, or periodi- due to a puncture of normal operating where deposits of materials producing stored or handled
cally under normal a storage drum. conditions, or where dust may cause heat combustible flyings (except in the proc-
operating conditions. failure of equipment rise in electrical are handled, manu- ess of manufacture).
29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)

may cause the con- equipment, or where factured, or used.
Q:\29\29V5.TXT
dition to exist simul- such deposits may

taneously with arcing be ignited by arcs or
or sparking of elec- sparks from electrical
trical equipment, or equipment.
where dusts of an
electrically con-
ducting nature may
ofr150
be present.
Authorized uses of trucks by types in groups of classes and divisions

PsN: PC150
Groups in classes None A B C D A B C D E F G E F G None None
Type of truck author-

ized:
Diesel:
Type D ................. D** ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type DS ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DS .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DS .... ................. DS
Type DY ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DY .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DY .... DY ........... DY
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:18 Jul 22, 2013
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor

Electric:
Type E ................. E** ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ................. E
Type ES ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ES .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ES .... ................. ES
Type EE ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... EE .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... EE .... EE ........... EE
Jkt 229116
Type EX ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... EX .... .......... .......... .......... EX .... .......... EX .... EX .... .......... .......... EX .... EX ........... EX
Gasoline:
Type G ................. G** .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type GS .............. ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... GS .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... GS .... ................. GS
LP-Gas:
PO 00000
Type LP ............... LP** ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type LPS ............. ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... LPS .. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... LPS .. ................. LPS
Paragraph Ref. in No. 210.211 201 203 209 204 202 205 209 206 207(a) 208 (a)
505. (a) (a) (a) (a), (a) (a) (a) (a),
(b) (b)
Frm 00559
**Trucks conforming to these types may also be used—see subdivision (c)(2)(x) and (c)(2)(xii) of this section.
Fmt 8010
549
Sfmt 8002
Q:\29\29V5.TXT
ofr150
PsN: PC150
§ 1910.178
(v) In locations used for the storage plants, malting plants, hay grinding
of hazardous liquids in sealed con- plants, and other occupancies of simi-
tainers or liquefied or compressed lar nature; coal pulverizing plants (ex-
gases in containers, approved power-op- cept where the pulverizing equipment
erated industrial trucks designated as is essentially dust tight); all working
DS, ES, GS, or LPS may be used. This areas where metal dusts and powders
classification includes locations where are produced, processed, handled,
volatile flammable liquids or flam- packed, or stored (except in tight con-
mable gases or vapors are used, but tainers); and other similar locations
which, would become hazardous only in where combustible dust may, under
case of an accident or of some unusual normal operating conditions, be
operating condition. The quantity of present in the air in quantities suffi-
hazardous material that might escape cient to produce explosive or ignitable
in case of accident, the adequacy of mixtures.
ventilating equipment, the total area (vii) Only approved power-operated
involved, and the record of the indus- industrial trucks designated as DY,
try or business with respect to explo- EE, or EX shall be used in atmospheres
sions or fires are all factors that should in which combustible dust will not nor-
receive consideration in determining mally be in suspension in the air or
whether or not the DS or DY, ES, EE, will not be likely to be thrown into
GS, LPS designated truck possesses suspension by the normal operation of
sufficient safeguards for the location. equipment or apparatus in quantities
Piping without valves, checks, meters sufficient to produce explosive or ignit-
and similar devices would not ordi- able mixtures but where deposits or ac-
narily be deemed to introduce a haz- cumulations of such dust may be ig-
ardous condition even though used for nited by arcs or sparks originating in
hazardous liquids or gases. Locations the truck.
used for the storage of hazardous liq- (viii) Only approved power-operated
uids or of liquified or compressed gases industrial trucks designated as DY,
in sealed containers would not nor- EE, or EX shall be used in locations
mally be considered hazardous unless which are hazardous because of the
subject to other hazardous conditions presence of easily ignitable fibers or
also. flyings but in which such fibers or
(vi)(a) Only approved power operated flyings are not likely to be in suspen-
industrial trucks designated as EX sion in the air in quantities sufficient
shall be used in atmospheres in which to produce ignitable mixtures.
combustible dust is or may be in sus- (ix) Only approved power-operated in-
pension continuously, intermittently, dustrial trucks designated as DS, DY,
or periodically under normal operating ES, EE, EX, GS, or LPS shall be used
conditions, in quantities sufficient to in locations where easily ignitable fi-
produce explosive or ignitable mix- bers are stored or handled, including
tures, or where mechanical failure or outside storage, but are not being proc-
abnormal operation of machinery or essed or manufactured. Industrial
equipment might cause such mixtures trucks designated as E, which have
to be produced. been previously used in these locations
(b) The EX classification usually in- may be continued in use.
cludes the working areas of grain han- (x) On piers and wharves handling
dling and storage plants, room con- general cargo, any approved power-op-
taining grinders or pulverizers, clean- erated industrial truck designated as
ers, graders, scalpers, open conveyors Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or
or spouts, open bins or hoppers, mixers, trucks which conform to the require-
or blenders, automatic or hopper ments for these types may be used.
scales, packing machinery, elevator (xi) If storage warehouses and outside
heads and boots, stock distributors, storage locations are hazardous only
dust and stock collectors (except all- the approved power-operated industrial
metal collectors vented to the outside), truck specified for such locations in
and all similar dust producing machin- this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If
ery and equipment in grain processing not classified as hazardous, any ap-
plants, starch plants, sugar pulverizing proved power-operated industrial truck
550
designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may tilation for dispersal of fumes from
be used, or trucks which conform to gassing batteries.
the requirements for these types may (3) [Reserved]
be used. (4) A conveyor, overhead hoist, or
(xii) If general industrial or commer- equivalent material handling equip-
cial properties are hazardous, only ap- ment shall be provided for handling
proved power-operated industrial batteries.
trucks specified for such locations in (5) Reinstalled batteries shall be
this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If properly positioned and secured in the
not classified as hazardous, any ap- truck.
proved power-operated industrial truck (6) A carboy tilter or siphon shall be
designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may provided for handling electrolyte.
be used, or trucks which conform to (7) When charging batteries, acid
the requirements of these types may be shall be poured into water; water shall
used. not be poured into acid.
(d) Converted industrial trucks. Power- (8) Trucks shall be properly posi-
operated industrial trucks that have tioned and brake applied before at-
been originally approved for the use of tempting to change or charge bat-
gasoline for fuel, when converted to the teries.
use of liquefied petroleum gas fuel in (9) Care shall be taken to assure that
accordance with paragraph (q) of this vent caps are functioning. The battery
section, may be used in those locations (or compartment) cover(s) shall be
where G, GS or LP, and LPS des- open to dissipate heat.
ignated trucks have been specified in (10) Smoking shall be prohibited in
the preceding paragraphs. the charging area.
(e) Safety guards. (1) High Lift Rider (11) Precautions shall be taken to
trucks shall be fitted with an overhead prevent open flames, sparks, or electric
guard manufactured in accordance arcs in battery charging areas.
with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, (12) Tools and other metallic objects
unless operating conditions do not per- shall be kept away from the top of un-
mit. covered batteries.
(2) If the type of load presents a haz- (h) Lighting for operating areas. (1)
ard, the user shall equip fork trucks [Reserved]
with a vertical load backrest extension (2) Where general lighting is less
manufactured in accordance with para- than 2 lumens per square foot, auxil-
graph (a)(2) of this section. iary directional lighting shall be pro-
(f) Fuel handling and storage. (1) The vided on the truck.
storage and handling of liquid fuels (i) Control of noxious gases and fumes.
such as gasoline and diesel fuel shall be (1) Concentration levels of carbon mon-
in accordance with NFPA Flammable oxide gas created by powered industrial
and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA truck operations shall not exceed the
No. 30–1969), which is incorporated by levels specified in § 1910.1000.
reference as specified in § 1910.6. (j) Dockboards (bridge plates). See
(2) The storage and handling of lique- § 1910.30(a).
fied petroleum gas fuel shall be in ac- (k) Trucks and railroad cars. (1) The
cordance with NFPA Storage and Han- brakes of highway trucks shall be set
dling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases and wheel chocks placed under the rear
(NFPA No. 58–1969), which is incor- wheels to prevent the trucks from roll-
porated by reference as specified in ing while they are boarded with pow-
§ 1910.6. ered industrial trucks.
(g) Changing and charging storage bat- (2) Wheel stops or other recognized
teries. (1) Battery charging installa- positive protection shall be provided to
tions shall be located in areas des- prevent railroad cars from moving dur-
ignated for that purpose. ing loading or unloading operations.
(2) Facilities shall be provided for (3) Fixed jacks may be necessary to
flushing and neutralizing spilled elec- support a semitrailer and prevent up-
trolyte, for fire protection, for pro- ending during the loading or unloading
tecting charging apparatus from dam- when the trailer is not coupled to a
age by trucks, and for adequate ven- tractor.
551
(4) Positive protection shall be pro- (C) Truck controls and instrumenta-
vided to prevent railroad cars from tion: where they are located, what they
being moved while dockboards or do, and how they work;
bridge plates are in position. (D) Engine or motor operation;
(l) Operator training. (1) Safe oper- (E) Steering and maneuvering;
ation. (i) The employer shall ensure (F) Visibility (including restrictions
that each powered industrial truck op- due to loading);
erator is competent to operate a pow- (G) Fork and attachment adaptation,
ered industrial truck safely, as dem- operation, and use limitations;
onstrated by the successful completion (H) Vehicle capacity;
of the training and evaluation specified
(I) Vehicle stability;
in this paragraph (l).
(J) Any vehicle inspection and main-
(ii) Prior to permitting an employee
tenance that the operator will be re-
to operate a powered industrial truck
quired to perform;
(except for training purposes), the em-
ployer shall ensure that each operator (K) Refueling and/or charging and re-
has successfully completed the train- charging of batteries;
ing required by this paragraph (l), ex- (L) Operating limitations;
cept as permitted by paragraph (l)(5). (M) Any other operating instruc-
(2) Training program implementation. tions, warnings, or precautions listed
(i) Trainees may operate a powered in- in the operator’s manual for the types
dustrial truck only: of vehicle that the employee is being
(A) Under the direct supervision of trained to operate.
persons who have the knowledge, train- (ii) Workplace-related topics:
ing, and experience to train operators (A) Surface conditions where the ve-
and evaluate their competence; and hicle will be operated;
(B) Where such operation does not (B) Composition of loads to be car-
endanger the trainee or other employ- ried and load stability;
ees. (C) Load manipulation, stacking, and
(ii) Training shall consist of a com- unstacking;
bination of formal instruction (e.g., (D) Pedestrian traffic in areas where
lecture, discussion, interactive com- the vehicle will be operated;
puter learning, video tape, written ma- (E) Narrow aisles and other re-
terial), practical training (demonstra- stricted places where the vehicle will
tions performed by the trainer and be operated;
practical exercises performed by the (F) Hazardous (classified) locations
trainee), and evaluation of the opera- where the vehicle will be operated;
tor’s performance in the workplace. (G) Ramps and other sloped surfaces
(iii) All operator training and evalua- that could affect the vehicle’s sta-
tion shall be conducted by persons who bility;
have the knowledge, training, and ex- (H) Closed environments and other
perience to train powered industrial areas where insufficient ventilation or
truck operators and evaluate their poor vehicle maintenance could cause a
competence. buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel
(3) Training program content. Powered exhaust;
industrial truck operators shall receive (I) Other unique or potentially haz-
initial training in the following topics, ardous environmental conditions in the
except in topics which the employer workplace that could affect safe oper-
can demonstrate are not applicable to ation.
safe operation of the truck in the em- (iii) The requirements of this section.
ployer’s workplace. (4) Refresher training and evaluation.
(i) Truck-related topics: (i) Refresher training, including an
(A) Operating instructions, warnings, evaluation of the effectiveness of that
and precautions for the types of truck training, shall be conducted as required
the operator will be authorized to oper- by paragraph (l)(4)(ii) to ensure that
ate; the operator has the knowledge and
(B) Differences between the truck skills needed to operate the powered
and the automobile; industrial truck safely.
552
(ii) Refresher training in relevant training in a topic specified in para-
topics shall be provided to the operator graph (l)(3) of this section, and such
when: training is appropriate to the truck
(A) The operator has been observed and working conditions encountered,
to operate the vehicle in an unsafe additional training in that topic is not
manner; required if the operator has been evalu-
(B) The operator has been involved in ated and found competent to operate
an accident or near-miss incident; the truck safely.
(C) The operator has received an
(6) Certification. The employer shall
evaluation that reveals that the oper-
certify that each operator has been
ator is not operating the truck safely;
trained and evaluated as required by
(D) The operator is assigned to drive
a different type of truck; or this paragraph (l). The certification
(E) A condition in the workplace shall include the name of the operator,
changes in a manner that could affect the date of the training, the date of the
safe operation of the truck. evaluation, and the identity of the per-
(iii) An evaluation of each powered son(s) performing the training or eval-
industrial truck operator’s perform- uation.
ance shall be conducted at least once (7) Dates. The employer shall ensure
every three years. that operators of powered industrial
(5) Avoidance of duplicative training. If trucks are trained, as appropriate, by
an operator has previously received the dates shown in the following table.
If the employee was hired: The initial training and evaluation of that employee must be completed:
Before December 1, 1999 .......................... By December 1, 1999.

After December 1, 1999 ............................. Before the employee is assigned to operate a powered industrial truck.
(8) Appendix A to this section pro- more away from the vehicle which re-
vides non-mandatory guidance to assist mains in his view, or whenever the op-
employers in implementing this para- erator leaves the vehicle and it is not
graph (l). This appendix does not add in his view.
to, alter, or reduce the requirements of (iii) When the operator of an indus-
this section. trial truck is dismounted and within 25
(m) Truck operations. (1) Trucks shall ft. of the truck still in his view, the
not be driven up to anyone standing in load engaging means shall be fully low-
front of a bench or other fixed object. ered, controls neutralized, and the
(2) No person shall be allowed to brakes set to prevent movement.
stand or pass under the elevated por- (6) A safe distance shall be main-
tion of any truck, whether loaded or
tained from the edge of ramps or plat-
empty.
forms while on any elevated dock, or
(3) Unauthorized personnel shall not
platform or freight car. Trucks shall
be permitted to ride on powered indus-
not be used for opening or closing
trial trucks. A safe place to ride shall
be provided where riding of trucks is freight doors.
authorized. (7) Brakes shall be set and wheel
(4) The employer shall prohibit arms blocks shall be in place to prevent
or legs from being placed between the movement of trucks, trailers, or rail-
uprights of the mast or outside the road cars while loading or unloading.
running lines of the truck. Fixed jacks may be necessary to sup-
(5)(i) When a powered industrial port a semitrailer during loading or un-
truck is left unattended, load engaging loading when the trailer is not coupled
means shall be fully lowered, controls to a tractor. The flooring of trucks,
shall be neutralized, power shall be trailers, and railroad cars shall be
shut off, and brakes set. Wheels shall checked for breaks and weakness be-
be blocked if the truck is parked on an fore they are driven onto.
incline. (8) There shall be sufficient head-
(ii) A powered industrial truck is un- room under overhead installations,
attended when the operator is 25 ft. or lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc.
553
(9) An overhead guard shall be used will permit it to be brought to a stop in
as protection against falling objects. It a safe manner.
should be noted that an overhead guard (9) Stunt driving and horseplay shall
is intended to offer protection from the not be permitted.
impact of small packages, boxes, (10) The driver shall be required to
bagged material, etc., representative of slow down for wet and slippery floors.
the job application, but not to with- (11) Dockboard or bridgeplates, shall
stand the impact of a falling capacity be properly secured before they are
load. driven over. Dockboard or bridgeplates
(10) A load backrest extension shall shall be driven over carefully and slow-
be used whenever necessary to mini- ly and their rated capacity never ex-
mize the possibility of the load or part ceeded.
of it from falling rearward. (12) Elevators shall be approached
(11) Only approved industrial trucks slowly, and then entered squarely after
shall be used in hazardous locations. the elevator car is properly leveled.
(12)–(13) [Reserved] Once on the elevator, the controls shall
(14) Fire aisles, access to stairways, be neutralized, power shut off, and the
and fire equipment shall be kept clear. brakes set.
(n) Traveling. (1) All traffic regula- (13) Motorized hand trucks must
tions shall be observed, including au- enter elevator or other confined areas
thorized plant speed limits. A safe dis- with load end forward.
tance shall be maintained approxi-
(14) Running over loose objects on
mately three truck lengths from the
the roadway surface shall be avoided.
truck ahead, and the truck shall be
(15) While negotiating turns, speed
kept under control at all times.
shall be reduced to a safe level by
(2) The right of way shall be yielded
means of turning the hand steering
to ambulances, fire trucks, or other ve-
wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion.
hicles in emergency situations.
Except when maneuvering at a very
(3) Other trucks traveling in the
low speed, the hand steering wheel
same direction at intersections, blind
shall be turned at a moderate, even
spots, or other dangerous locations
rate.
shall not be passed.
(4) The driver shall be required to (o) Loading. (1) Only stable or safely
slow down and sound the horn at cross arranged loads shall be handled. Cau-
aisles and other locations where vision tion shall be exercised when handling
is obstructed. If the load being carried off-center loads which cannot be cen-
obstructs forward view, the driver shall tered.
be required to travel with the load (2) Only loads within the rated capac-
trailing. ity of the truck shall be handled.
(5) Railroad tracks shall be crossed (3) The long or high (including mul-
diagonally wherever possible. Parking tiple-tiered) loads which may affect ca-
closer than 8 feet from the center of pacity shall be adjusted.
railroad tracks is prohibited. (4) Trucks equipped with attach-
(6) The driver shall be required to ments shall be operated as partially
look in the direction of, and keep a loaded trucks when not handling a
clear view of the path of travel. load.
(7) Grades shall be ascended or de- (5) A load engaging means shall be
scended slowly. placed under the load as far as possible;
(i) When ascending or descending the mast shall be carefully tilted back-
grades in excess of 10 percent, loaded ward to stabilize the load.
trucks shall be driven with the load up- (6) Extreme care shall be used when
grade. tilting the load forward or backward,
(ii) [Reserved] particularly when high tiering. Tilting
(iii) On all grades the load and load forward with load engaging means ele-
engaging means shall be tilted back if vated shall be prohibited except to pick
applicable, and raised only as far as up a load. An elevated load shall not be
necessary to clear the road surface. tilted forward except when the load is
(8) Under all travel conditions the in a deposit position over a rack or
truck shall be operated at a speed that stack. When stacking or tiering, only
554
enough backward tilt to stabilize the shall not be placed in service if the ex-
load shall be used. amination shows any condition ad-
(p) Operation of the truck. (1) If at any versely affecting the safety of the vehi-
time a powered industrial truck is cle. Such examination shall be made at
found to be in need of repair, defective, least daily.
or in any way unsafe, the truck shall
be taken out of service until it has Where industrial trucks are used on a
been restored to safe operating condi- round-the-clock basis, they shall be ex-
tion. amined after each shift. Defects when
(2) Fuel tanks shall not be filled found shall be immediately reported
while the engine is running. Spillage and corrected.
shall be avoided. (8) Water mufflers shall be filled
(3) Spillage of oil or fuel shall be daily or as frequently as is necessary
carefully washed away or completely to prevent depletion of the supply of
evaporated and the fuel tank cap re- water below 75 percent of the filled ca-
placed before restarting engine. pacity. Vehicles with mufflers having
(4) No truck shall be operated with a screens or other parts that may be-
leak in the fuel system until the leak come clogged shall not be operated
has been corrected. while such screens or parts are clogged.
(5) Open flames shall not be used for Any vehicle that emits hazardous
checking electrolyte level in storage sparks or flames from the exhaust sys-
batteries or gasoline level in fuel tem shall immediately be removed
tanks. from service, and not returned to serv-
(q) Maintenance of industrial trucks. ice until the cause for the emission of
(1) Any power-operated industrial such sparks and flames has been elimi-
truck not in safe operating condition nated.
shall be removed from service. All re- (9) When the temperature of any part
pairs shall be made by authorized per- of any truck is found to be in excess of
sonnel. its normal operating temperature, thus
(2) No repairs shall be made in Class creating a hazardous condition, the ve-
I, II, and III locations. hicle shall be removed from service and
(3) Those repairs to the fuel and igni- not returned to service until the cause
tion systems of industrial trucks which for such overheating has been elimi-
involve fire hazards shall be conducted nated.
only in locations designated for such (10) Industrial trucks shall be kept in
repairs.
a clean condition, free of lint, excess
(4) Trucks in need of repairs to the
oil, and grease. Noncombustible agents
electrical system shall have the bat-
should be used for cleaning trucks. Low
tery disconnected prior to such repairs.
flash point (below 100 °F.) solvents
(5) All parts of any such industrial
shall not be used. High flash point (at
truck requiring replacement shall be
replaced only by parts equivalent as to or above 100 °F.) solvents may be used.
safety with those used in the original Precautions regarding toxicity, ven-
design. tilation, and fire hazard shall be con-
(6) Industrial trucks shall not be al- sonant with the agent or solvent used.
tered so that the relative positions of (11) [Reserved]
the various parts are different from (12) Industrial trucks originally ap-
what they were when originally re- proved for the use of gasoline for fuel
ceived from the manufacturer, nor may be converted to liquefied petro-
shall they be altered either by the ad- leum gas fuel provided the complete
dition of extra parts not provided by conversion results in a truck which
the manufacturer or by the elimination embodies the features specified for LP
of any parts, except as provided in or LPS designated trucks. Such con-
paragraph (q)(12) of this section. Addi- version equipment shall be approved.
tional counterweighting of fork trucks The description of the component parts
shall not be done unless approved by of this conversion system and the rec-
the truck manufacturer. ommended method of installation on
(7) Industrial trucks shall be exam- specific trucks are contained in the
ined before being placed in service, and ‘‘Listed by Report.’’
555
APPENDIX A TO § 1910.178—STABILITY OF POW- many factors that contribute to a vehicle’s
ERED INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS (NON-MANDATORY stability: the vehicle’s wheelbase, track, and
APPENDIX TO PARAGRAPH (L) OF THIS SEC- height; the load’s weight distribution; and
TION) the vehicle’s counterweight location (if the
vehicle is so equipped).
A–1. Definitions.
The following definitions help to explain A–2.2. The ‘‘stability triangle,’’ used in
the principle of stability: most stability discussions, demonstrates sta-
Center of gravity is the point on an object bility simply.
at which all of the object’s weight is con- A–3. Basic Principles.
centrated. For symmetrical loads, the center A–3.1. Whether an object is stable depends
of gravity is at the middle of the load. on the object’s moment at one end of a sys-
Counterweight is the weight that is built tem being greater than, equal to, or smaller
into the truck’s basic structure and is used than the object’s moment at the system’s
to offset the load’s weight and to maximize other end. This principle can be seen in the
the vehicle’s resistance to tipping over. way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is,
Fulcrum is the truck’s axis of rotation if the product of the load and distance from
when it tips over. the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the mo-
Grade is the slope of a surface, which is ment at the device’s other end, the device is
usually measured as the number of feet of balanced and it will not move. However, if
rise or fall over a hundred foot horizontal there is a greater moment at one end of the
distance (the slope is expressed as a percent). device, the device will try to move downward
Lateral stability is a truck’s resistance to at the end with the greater moment.
overturning sideways. A–3.2. The longitudinal stability of a
Line of action is an imaginary vertical line counterbalanced powered industrial truck
through an object’s center of gravity. depends on the vehicle’s moment and the
Load center is the horizontal distance from load’s moment. In other words, if the
the load’s edge (or the fork’s or other attach- mathematic product of the load moment (the
ment’s vertical face) to the line of action distance from the front wheels, the approxi-
through the load’s center of gravity. mate point at which the vehicle would tip
Longitudinal stability is the truck’s resist- forward) to the load’s center of gravity times
ance to overturning forward or rearward. the load’s weight is less than the vehicle’s
Moment is the product of the object’s moment, the system is balanced and will not
weight times the distance from a fixed point tip forward. However, if the load’s moment is
(usually the fulcrum). In the case of a pow- greater than the vehicle’s moment, the
ered industrial truck, the distance is meas- greater load-moment will force the truck to
ured from the point at which the truck will tip forward.
tip over to the object’s line of action. The A–4. The Stability Triangle.
distance is always measured perpendicular to A–4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered
the line of action. industrial trucks have a three-point suspen-
Track is the distance between the wheels sion system, that is, the vehicle is supported
on the same axle of the truck. at three points. This is true even if the vehi-
Wheelbase is the distance between the cen- cle has four wheels. The truck’s steer axle is
terline of the vehicle’s front and rear wheels. attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the
A–2. General. axle’s center. When the points are connected
A–2.1. Determining the stability of a pow- with imaginary lines, this three-point sup-
ered industrial truck is simple once a few port forms a triangle called the stability tri-
basic principles are understood. There are angle. Figure 1 depicts the stability triangle.
556
A–4.2. When the vehicle’s line of action, or tion or the vehicle/load combination falls
load center, falls within the stability tri- outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is
angle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.)
over. However, when the vehicle’s line of ac-
557
ER01DE98.002</GPH>
A–5. Longitudinal Stability. mally rates the truck at a maximum load at

A–5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck a given distance from the front face of the
tips forward is the front wheels’ points of forks. The specified distance from the front
contact with the pavement. When a powered face of the forks to the line of action of the
industrial truck tips forward, the truck will load is commonly called the load center. Be-
rotate about this line. When a truck is sta- cause larger trucks normally handle loads
ble, the vehicle-moment must exceed the that are physically larger, these vehicles
load-moment. As long as the vehicle-moment have greater load centers. Trucks with a ca-
is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the pacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally
vehicle will not tip over. On the other hand, rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load
if the load moment slightly exceeds the vehi- center. Trucks with a capacity greater than
cle-moment, the truck will begin to tip for- 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given
ward, thereby causing the rear to lose con- load weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center.
tact with the floor or ground and resulting in To safely operate the vehicle, the operator
loss of steering control. If the load-moment should always check the data plate to deter-
greatly exceeds the vehicle moment, the mine the maximum allowable weight at the
truck will tip forward. rated load center.
A–5.2. To determine the maximum safe A–5.3. Although the true load-moment dis-
load-moment, the truck manufacturer nor- tance is measured from the front wheels, this
558
ER01DE98.003</GPH>
distance is greater than the distance from precise rules can be formulated to cover all
the front face of the forks. Calculating the of these eventualities.
maximum allowable load-moment using the [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
load-center distance always provides a lower FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24,
load-moment than the truck was designed to 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122,
handle. When handling unusual loads, such Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR
as those that are larger than 48 inches long 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998; 68
(the center of gravity is greater than 24 FR 32638, June 2, 2003; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3,
inches) or that have an offset center of grav- 2006]
ity, etc., a maximum allowable load-moment
should be calculated and used to determine § 1910.179 Overhead and gantry
whether a load can be safely handled. For ex- cranes.
ample, if an operator is operating a 3000 (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
pound capacity truck (with a 24-inch load tion. (1) A crane is a machine for lifting
center), the maximum allowable load-mo- and lowering a load and moving it hori-
ment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If zontally, with the hoisting mechanism
a load is 60 inches long (30-inch load center),
an integral part of the machine. Cranes
then the maximum that this load can weigh
whether fixed or mobile are driven
is 2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30).
A–6. Lateral Stability.
manually or by power.
A–6.1. The vehicle’s lateral stability is de-
(2) An automatic crane is a crane
termined by the line of action’s position (a which when activated operates through
vertical line that passes through the com- a preset cycle or cycles.
bined vehicle’s and load’s center of gravity) (3) A cab-operated crane is a crane
relative to the stability triangle. When the controlled by an operator in a cab lo-
vehicle is not loaded, the truck’s center of cated on the bridge or trolley.
gravity location is the only factor to be con- (4) Cantilever gantry crane means a
sidered in determining the truck’s stability. gantry or semigantry crane in which
As long as the line of action of the combined the bridge girders or trusses extend
vehicle’s and load’s center of gravity falls transversely beyond the crane runway
within the stability triangle, the truck is on one or both sides.
stable and will not tip over. However, if the (5) Floor-operated crane means a crane
line of action falls outside the stability tri- which is pendant or nonconductive
angle, the truck is not stable and may tip rope controlled by an operator on the
over. Refer to Figure 2.
floor or an independent platform.
A–6.2. Factors that affect the vehicle’s lat-
(6) Gantry crane means a crane simi-
eral stability include the load’s placement
on the truck, the height of the load above
lar to an overhead crane except that
the surface on which the vehicle is oper- the bridge for carrying the trolley or
ating, and the vehicle’s degree of lean. trolleys is rigidly supported on two or
A–7. Dynamic Stability. more legs running on fixed rails or
A–7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a other runway.
powered industrial truck has been discussed (7) Hot metal handling crane means an
without considering the dynamic forces that overhead crane used for transporting or
result when the vehicle and load are put into pouring molten material.
motion. The weight’s transfer and the result- (8) Overhead crane means a crane
ant shift in the center of gravity due to the with a movable bridge carrying a mov-
dynamic forces created when the machine is able or fixed hoisting mechanism and
moving, braking, cornering, lifting, tilting, traveling on an overhead fixed runway
and lowering loads, etc., are important sta- structure.
bility considerations. (9) Power-operated crane means a
A–7.2. When determining whether a load crane whose mechanism is driven by
can be safely handled, the operator should electric, air, hydraulic, or internal
exercise extra caution when handling loads
combustion means.
that cause the vehicle to approach its max-
(10) A pulpit-operated crane is a crane
imum design characteristics. For example, if
an operator must handle a maximum load,
operated from a fixed operator station
the load should be carried at the lowest posi- not attached to the crane.
tion possible, the truck should be acceler- (11) A remote-operated crane is a crane
ated slowly and evenly, and the forks should controlled by an operator not in a pul-
be tilted forward cautiously. However, no pit or in the cab attached to the crane,
by any method other than pendant or
rope control.
559
(12) A semigantry crane is a gantry (27) Conductors, bridge are the elec-
crane with one end of the bridge rigidly trical conductors located along the
supported on one or more legs that run bridge structure of a crane to provide
on a fixed rail or runway, the other end power to the trolley.
of the bridge being supported by a (28) Conductors, runway (main) are
truck running on an elevated rail or the electrical conductors located along
runway. a crane runway to provide power to the
(13) Storage bridge crane means a gan- crane.
try type crane of long span usually (29) The control braking means is a
used for bulk storage of material; the method of controlling crane motor
bridge girders or trusses are rigidly or speed when in an overhauling condi-
nonrigidly supported on one or more tion.
legs. It may have one or more fixed or (30) Countertorque means a method of
hinged cantilever ends. control by which the power to the
(14) Wall crane means a crane having motor is reversed to develop torque in
a jib with or without trolley and sup- the opposite direction.
ported from a side wall or line of col- (31) Dynamic means a method of con-
umns of a building. It is a traveling trolling crane motor speeds when in
type and operates on a runway at- the overhauling condition to provide a
tached to the side wall or columns. retarding force.
(15) Appointed means assigned spe- (32) Regenerative means a form of dy-
cific responsibilities by the employer namic braking in which the electrical
or the employer’s representative. energy generated is fed back into the
(16) ANSI means the American Na- power system.
tional Standards Institute. (33) Mechanical means a method of
(17) An auxiliary hoist is a supple- control by friction.
mental hoisting unit of lighter capac- (34) Controller, spring return means a
ity and usually higher speed than pro- controller which when released will re-
vided for the main hoist. turn automatically to a neutral posi-
(18) A brake is a device used for re- tion.
tarding or stopping motion by friction (35) Designated means selected or as-
or power means. signed by the employer or the employ-
(19) A drag brake is a brake which er’s representative as being qualified to
provides retarding force without exter- perform specific duties.
nal control. (36) A drift point means a point on a
(20) A holding brake is a brake that travel motion controller which releases
automatically prevents motion when the brake while the motor is not ener-
power is off. gized. This allows for coasting before
(21) Bridge means that part of a crane the brake is set.
consisting of girders, trucks, end ties, (37) The drum is the cylindrical mem-
footwalks, and drive mechanism which ber around which the ropes are wound
carries the trolley or trolleys. for raising or lowering the load.
(22) Bridge travel means the crane (38) An equalizer is a device which
movement in a direction parallel to the compensates for unequal length or
crane runway. stretch of a rope.
(23) A bumper (buffer) is an energy ab- (39) Exposed means capable of being
sorbing device for reducing impact contacted inadvertently. Applied to
when a moving crane or trolley reaches hazardous objects not adequately
the end of its permitted travel; or when guarded or isolated.
two moving cranes or trolleys come in (40) Fail-safe means a provision de-
contact. signed to automatically stop or safely
(24) The cab is the operator’s com- control any motion in which a mal-
partment on a crane. function occurs.
(25) Clearance means the distance (41) Footwalk means the walkway
from any part of the crane to a point of with handrail, attached to the bridge
the nearest obstruction. or trolley for access purposes.
(26) Collectors current are contacting (42) A hoist is an apparatus which
devices for collecting current from run- may be a part of a crane, exerting a
way or bridge conductors. force for lifting or lowering.
560
(43) Hoist chain means the load bear- independently of the regular operating
ing chain in a hoist. controls.
(60) A limit switch is a switch which is
NOTE: Chain properties do not conform to
those shown in ANSI B30.9–1971, Safety Code operated by some part or motion of a
for Slings. power-driven machine or equipment to
alter the electric circuit associated
(44) Hoist motion means that motion with the machine or equipment.
of a crane which raises and lowers a (61) A main switch is a switch control-
load. ling the entire power supply to the
(45) Load means the total super- crane.
imposed weight on the load block or (62) A master switch is a switch which
hook. dominates the operation of contactors,
(46) The load block is the assembly of relays, or other remotely operated de-
hook or shackle, swivel, bearing, vices.
sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by (63) The trolley is the unit which trav-
the hoisting rope. els on the bridge rails and carries the
(47) Magnet means an electro- hoisting mechanism.
magnetic device carried on a crane (64) Trolley travel means the trolley
hook to pick up loads magnetically. movement at right angles to the crane
(48) Main hoist means the hoist mech- runway.
anism provided for lifting the max- (65) Truck means the unit consisting
imum rated load. of a frame, wheels, bearings, and axles
(49) A man trolley is a trolley having which supports the bridge girders or
an operator’s cab attached thereto. trolleys.
(50) Rated load means the maximum (b) General requirements—(1) Applica-
load for which a crane or individual tion. This section applies to overhead
hoist is designed and built by the man- and gantry cranes, including
ufacturer and shown on the equipment semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall
nameplate(s). cranes, storage bridge cranes, and oth-
(51) Rope refers to wire rope, unless ers having the same fundamental char-
otherwise specified. acteristics. These cranes are grouped
(52) Running sheave means a sheave because they all have trolleys and
which rotates as the load block is similar travel characteristics.
raised or lowered. (2) New and existing equipment. All
(53) Runway means an assembly of new overhead and gantry cranes con-
rails, beams, girders, brackets, and structed and installed on or after Au-
framework on which the crane or trol- gust 31, 1971, shall meet the design
ley travels. specifications of the American Na-
(54) Side pull means that portion of tional Standard Safety Code for Over-
the hoist pull acting horizontally when head and Gantry Cranes, ANSI B30.2.0–
the hoist lines are not operated 1967, which is incorporated by reference
vertically. as specified in § 1910.6.
(55) Span means the horizontal dis- (3) Modifications. Cranes may be
tance center to center of runway rails. modified and rerated provided such
(56) Standby crane means a crane modifications and the supporting
which is not in regular service but structure are checked thoroughly for
which is used occasionally or intermit- the new rated load by a qualified engi-
tently as required. neer or the equipment manufacturer.
(57) A stop is a device to limit travel The crane shall be tested in accordance
of a trolley or crane bridge. This device with paragraph (k)(2) of this section.
normally is attached to a fixed struc- New rated load shall be displayed in ac-
ture and normally does not have en- cordance with subparagraph (5) of this
ergy absorbing ability. paragraph.
(58) A switch is a device for making, (4) Wind indicators and rail clamps.
breaking, or for changing the connec- Outdoor storage bridges shall be pro-
tions in an electric circuit. vided with automatic rail clamps. A
(59) An emergency stop switch is a wind-indicating device shall be pro-
manually or automatically operated vided which will give a visible or audi-
electric switch to cut off electric power ble alarm to the bridge operator at a
561
predetermined wind velocity. If the 1956, which is incorporated by reference
clamps act on the rail heads, any beads as specified in § 1910.6.
or weld flash on the rail heads shall be (3) Fire extinguisher. Carbon tetra-
ground off. chloride extinguishers shall not be
(5) Rated load marking. The rated load used.
of the crane shall be plainly marked on (4) Lighting. Light in the cab shall be
each side of the crane, and if the crane sufficient to enable the operator to see
has more than one hoisting unit, each clearly enough to perform his work.
hoist shall have its rated load marked (d) Footwalks and ladders—(1) Location
on it or its load block and this marking of footwalks. (i) If sufficient headroom
shall be clearly legible from the ground is available on cab-operated cranes, a
or floor. footwalk shall be provided on the drive
(6) Clearance from obstruction. (i) Min- side along the entire length of the
imum clearance of 3 inches overhead bridge of all cranes having the trolley
and 2 inches laterally shall be provided running on the top of the girders.
and maintained between crane and ob- (ii) Where footwalks are located in no
structions in conformity with Crane case shall less than 48 inches of head-
Manufacturers Association of America, room be provided.
Inc., Specification No. 61, which is in- (2) Construction of footwalks. (i)
corporated by reference as specified in Footwalks shall be of rigid construc-
§ 1910.6 (formerly the Electric Overhead tion and designed to sustain a distrib-
Crane Institute, Inc). uted load of at least 50 pounds per
(ii) Where passageways or walkways square foot.
are provided obstructions shall not be (ii) Footwalks shall have a walking
placed so that safety of personnel will surface of antislip type.
be jeopardized by movements of the
NOTE: Wood will meet this requirement.
crane.
(7) Clearance between parallel cranes. If (iii) [Reserved]
the runways of two cranes are parallel, (iv) The inner edge shall extend at
and there are no intervening walls or least to the line of the outside edge of
structure, there shall be adequate the lower cover plate or flange of the
clearance provided and maintained be- girder.
tween the two bridges. (3) Toeboards and handrails for
(8) Designated personnel—Only des- footwalks. Toeboards and handrails
ignated personnel shall be permitted to shall be in compliance with section
operate a crane covered by this section. 1910.23 of this part.
(c) Cabs—(1) Cab location. (i) The gen- (4) Ladders and stairways. (i) Gantry
eral arrangement of the cab and the lo- cranes shall be provided with ladders or
cation of control and protective equip- stairways extending from the ground
ment shall be such that all operating to the footwalk or cab platform.
handles are within convenient reach of (ii) Stairways shall be equipped with
the operator when facing the area to be rigid and substantial metal handrails.
served by the load hook, or while fac- Walking surfaces shall be of an antislip
ing the direction of travel of the cab. type.
The arrangement shall allow the oper- (iii) Ladders shall be permanently
ator a full view of the load hook in all and securely fastened in place and shall
positions. be constructed in compliance with
(ii) The cab shall be located to afford § 1910.27.
a minimum of 3 inches clearance from (e) Stops, bumpers, rail sweeps, and
all fixed structures within its area of guards—(1) Trolley stops. (i) Stops shall
possible movement. be provided at the limits of travel of
(2) Access to crane. Access to the cab the trolley.
and/or bridge walkway shall be by a (ii) Stops shall be fastened to resist
conveniently placed fixed ladder, forces applied when contacted.
stairs, or platform requiring no step (iii) A stop engaging the tread of the
over any gap exceeding 12 inches. Fixed wheel shall be of a height at least equal
ladders shall be in conformance with to the radius of the wheel.
the American National Standard Safe- (2) Bridge bumpers—(i) A crane shall
ty Code for Fixed Ladders, ANSI A14.3– be provided with bumpers or other
562
automatic means providing equivalent (ii) A guard shall be provided to pre-
effect, unless the crane travels at a vent contact between bridge conduc-
slow rate of speed and has a faster de- tors and hoisting ropes if they could
celeration rate due to the use of sleeve come into contact.
bearings, or is not operated near the (6) Guards for moving parts. (i) Ex-
ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is posed moving parts such as gears, set
restricted to a limited distance by the screws, projecting keys, chains, chain
nature of the crane operation and there sprockets, and reciprocating compo-
is no hazard of striking any object in nents which might constitute a hazard
this limited distance, or is used in under normal operating conditions
similar operating conditions. The shall be guarded.
bumpers shall be capable of stopping (ii) Guards shall be securely fastened.
the crane (not including the lifted (iii) Each guard shall be capable of
load) at an average rate of deceleration supporting without permanent distor-
not to exceed 3 ft/s/s when traveling in tion the weight of a 200–pound person
either direction at 20 percent of the unless the guard is located where it is
rated load speed. impossible for a person to step on it.
(a) The bumpers shall have sufficient (f) Brakes—(1) Brakes for hoists. (i)
energy absorbing capacity to stop the Each independent hoisting unit of a
crane when traveling at a speed of at crane shall be equipped with at least
least 40 percent of rated load speed. one self-setting brake, hereafter re-
(b) The bumper shall be so mounted ferred to as a holding brake, applied di-
that there is no direct shear on bolts. rectly to the motor shaft or some part
(ii) Bumpers shall be so designed and of the gear train.
installed as to minimize parts falling (ii) Each independent hoisting unit of
from the crane in case of breakage. a crane, except worm-geared hoists, the
(3) Trolley bumpers—(i) A trolley shall angle of whose worm is such as to pre-
be provided with bumpers or other vent the load from accelerating in the
automatic means of equivalent effect, lowering direction shall, in addition to
unless the trolley travels at a slow rate a holding brake, be equipped with con-
of speed, or is not operated near the trol braking means to prevent over-
ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is speeding.
restricted to a limited distance of the
(2) Holding brakes. (i) Holding brakes
runway and there is no hazard of strik-
for hoist motors shall have not less
ing any object in this limited distance,
than the following percentage of the
or is used in similar operating condi-
full load hoisting torque at the point
tions. The bumpers shall be capable of
where the brake is applied.
stopping the trolley (not including the
(a) 125 percent when used with a con-
lifted load) at an average rate of decel-
trol braking means other than mechan-
eration not to exceed 4.7 ft/s/s when
ical.
traveling in either direction at one-
third of the rated load speed. (b) 100 percent when used in conjunc-
(ii) When more than one trolley is option with a mechanical control braking
erated on the same bridge, each shall means.
be equipped with bumpers or equiva- (c) 100 percent each if two holding
lent on their adjacent ends. brakes are provided.
(iii) Bumpers or equivalent shall be (ii) Holding brakes on hoists shall
designed and installed to minimize have ample thermal capacity for the
parts falling from the trolley in case of frequency of operation required by the
age. service.
(4) Rail sweeps. Bridge trucks shall be (iii) Holding brakes on hoists shall be
equipped with sweeps which extend applied automatically when power is
below the top of the rail and project in removed.
front of the truck wheels. (iv) Where necessary holding brakes
(5) Guards for hoisting ropes. (i) If shall be provided with adjustment
hoisting ropes run near enough to means to compensate for wear.
other parts to make fouling or chafing (v) The wearing surface of all hold-
possible, guards shall be installed to ing-brake drums or discs shall be
prevent this condition. smooth.
563
(vi) Each independent hoisting unit the bridge and to eliminate creep with
of a crane handling hot metal and hav- the power off.
ing power control braking means shall (6) Application of bridge brakes. (i) On
be equipped with at least two holding cab-operated cranes with cab on bridge,
brakes. a bridge brake is required as specified
(3) Control braking means. (i) A power under paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
control braking means such as regen- (ii) On cab-operated cranes with cab
erative, dynamic or countertorque on trolley, a bridge brake of the hold-
braking, or a mechanically controlled ing type shall be required.
braking means shall be capable of (iii) On all floor, remote and pulpit-
maintaining safe lowering speeds of operated crane bridge drives, a brake of
rated loads. noncoasting mechanical drive shall be
(ii) The control braking means shall provided.
have ample thermal capacity for the (g) Electric equipment—(1) General. (i)
frequency of operation required by Wiring and equipment shall comply
service. with subpart S of this part.
(4) Brakes for trolleys and bridges. (i) (ii) The control circuit voltage shall
Foot-operated brakes shall not require not exceed 600 volts for a.c. or d.c. cur-
an applied force of more than 70 pounds rent.
to develop manufacturer’s rated brake (iii) The voltage at pendant push-but-
torque. tons shall not exceed 150 volts for a.c.
(ii) Brakes may be applied by me- and 300 volts for d.c.
chanical, electrical, pneumatic, hy- (iv) Where multiple conductor cable
draulic, or gravity means. is used with a suspended pushbutton
(iii) Where necessary brakes shall be station, the station must be supported
provided with adjustment means to in some satisfactory manner that will
compensate for wear. protect the electrical conductors
(iv) The wearing surface of all brake- against strain.
drums or discs shall be smooth. (v) Pendant control boxes shall be
(v) All foot-brake pedals shall be con- constructed to prevent electrical shock
structed so that the operator’s foot and shall be clearly marked for identi-
will not easily slip off the pedal. fication of functions.
(vi) Foot-operated brakes shall be (2) Equipment. (i) Electrical equip-
equipped with automatic means for ment shall be so located or enclosed
positive release when pressure is re- that live parts will not be exposed to
leased from the pedal. accidental contact under normal oper-
(vii) Brakes for stopping the motion ating conditions.
of the trolley or bridge shall be of suffi- (ii) Electric equipment shall be pro-
cient size to stop the trolley or bridge tected from dirt, grease, oil, and mois-
within a distance in feet equal to 10 ture.
percent of full load speed in feet per (iii) Guards for live parts shall be
minute when traveling at full speed substantial and so located that they
with full load. cannot be accidently deformed so as to
(viii) If holding brakes are provided make contact with the live parts.
on the bridge or trolleys, they shall not (3) Controllers. (i) Cranes not equipped
prohibit the use of a drift point in the with spring-return controllers or mo-
control circuit. mentary contact pushbuttons shall be
(ix) Brakes on trolleys and bridges provided with a device which will dis-
shall have ample thermal capacity for connect all motors from the line on
the frequency of operation required by failure of power and will not permit
the service to prevent impairment of any motor to be restarted until the
functions from overheating. controller handle is brought to the
(5) Application of trolley brakes. (i) On ‘‘off’’ position, or a reset switch or but-
cab-operated cranes with cab on trol- ton is operated.
ley, a trolley brake shall be required as (ii) Lever operated controllers shall
specified under paragraph (f)(4) of this be provided with a notch or latch
section. which in the ‘‘off’’ position prevents
(ii) A drag brake may be applied to the handle from being inadvertently
hold the trolley in a desired position on moved to the ‘‘on’’ position. An ‘‘off’’
564
detent or spring return arrangement is closed type, with provision for locking
acceptable. in the open position, shall be provided
(iii) The controller operating handle in the leads from the runway conduc-
shall be located within convenient tors. This disconnect shall be mounted
reach of the operator. on the bridge or footwalk near the run-
(iv) As far as practicable, the move- way collectors. One of the following
ment of each controller handle shall be types of floor-operated disconnects
in the same general directions as the shall be provided:
resultant movements of the load. (a) Nonconductive rope attached to
(v) The control for the bridge and the main disconnect switch.
trolley travel shall be so located that (b) An undervoltage trip for the main
the operator can readily face the direc- circuit breaker operated by an emer-
tion of travel. gency stop button in the pendant push-
(vi) For floor-operated cranes, the button in the pendant pushbutton sta-
controller or controllers if rope oper- tion.
ated, shall automatically return to the (c) A main line contactor operated by
‘‘off’’ position when released by the op- a switch or pushbutton in the pendant
erator. pushbutton station.
(vii) Pushbuttons in pendant stations (iv) The hoisting motion of all elec-
shall return to the ‘‘off’’ position when tric traveling cranes shall be provided
pressure is released by the crane oper- with an overtravel limit switch in the
ator. hoisting direction.
(viii) Automatic cranes shall be so
(v) All cranes using a lifting magnet
designed that all motions shall fail-
shall have a magnet circuit switch of
safe if any malfunction of operation oc-
the enclosed type with provision for
curs.
locking in the open position. Means for
(ix) Remote-operated cranes shall
discharging the inductive load of the
function so that if the control signal
magnet shall be provided.
for any crane motion becomes ineffec-
tive the crane motion shall stop. (6) Runway conductors. Conductors of
(4) Resistors. (i) Enclosures for resis- the open type mounted on the crane
tors shall have openings to provide ade- runway beams or overhead shall be so
quate ventilation, and shall be in- located or so guarded that persons en-
stalled to prevent the accumulation of tering or leaving the cab or crane
combustible matter too near to hot footwalk normally could not come into
parts. contact with them.
(ii) Resistor units shall be supported (7) Extension lamps. If a service recep-
so as to be as free as possible from vi- tacle is provided in the cab or on the
bration. bridge of cab-operated cranes, it shall
(iii) Provision shall be made to pre- be a grounded three-prong type perma-
vent broken parts or molten metal fall- nent receptacle, not exceeding 300
ing upon the operator or from the volts.
crane. (h) Hoisting equipment—(1) Sheaves. (i)
(5) Switches. (i) The power supply to Sheave grooves shall be smooth and
the runway conductors shall be con- free from surface defects which could
trolled by a switch or circuit breaker cause rope damage.
located on a fixed structure, accessible (ii) Sheaves carrying ropes which can
from the floor, and arranged to be be momentarily unloaded shall be pro-
locked in the open position. vided with close-fitting guards or other
(ii) On cab-operated cranes a switch suitable devices to guide the rope back
or circuit breaker of the enclosed type, into the groove when the load is ap-
with provision for locking in the open plied again.
position, shall be provided in the leads (iii) The sheaves in the bottom block
from the runway conductors. A means shall be equipped with close-fitting
of opening this switch or circuit break- guards that will prevent ropes from be-
er shall be located within easy reach of coming fouled when the block is lying
the operator. on the ground with ropes loose.
(iii) On floor-operated cranes, a (iv) Pockets and flanges of sheaves
switch or circuit breaker of the en- used with hoist chains shall be of such
565
dimensions that the chain does not (i) Warning device. Except for floor-
catch or bind during operation. operated cranes a gong or other effec-
(v) All running sheaves shall be tive warning signal shall be provided
equipped with means for lubrication. for each crane equipped with a power
Permanently lubricated, sealed and/or traveling mechanism.
shielded bearings meet this require- (j) Inspection—(1) Inspection classifica-
ment. tion. (i) Initial inspection. Prior to ini-
(2) Ropes. (i) In using hoisting ropes, tial use all new and altered cranes
the crane manufacturer’s recommenda- shall be inspected to insure compliance
tion shall be followed. The rated load with the provisions of this section.
divided by the number of parts of rope (ii) Inspection procedure for cranes in
shall not exceed 20 percent of the nomi- regular service is divided into two gen-
nal breaking strength of the rope. eral classifications based upon the in-
(ii) Socketing shall be done in the tervals at which inspection should be
manner specified by the manufacturer performed. The intervals in turn are
of the assembly. dependent upon the nature of the crit-
(iii) Rope shall be secured to the ical components of the crane and the
drum as follows: degree of their exposure to wear, dete-
(a) No less than two wraps of rope rioration, or malfunction. The two gen-
shall remain on the drum when the eral classifications are herein des-
hook is in its extreme low position. ignated as ‘‘frequent’’ and ‘‘periodic’’
(b) Rope end shall be anchored by a with respective intervals between in-
clamp securely attached to the drum, spections as defined below:
or by a socket arrangement approved
(a) Frequent inspection—Daily to
by the crane or rope manufacturer.
monthly intervals.
(iv) Eye splices. [Reserved]
(v) Rope clips attached with U-bolts (b) Periodic inspection—1 to 12–
shall have the U-bolts on the dead or month intervals.
short end of the rope. Spacing and (2) Frequent inspection. The following
number of all types of clips shall be in items shall be inspected for defects at
accordance with the clip manufactur- intervals as defined in paragraph
er’s recommendation. Clips shall be (j)(1)(ii) of this section or as specifi-
drop-forged steel in all sizes manufac- cally indicated, including observation
tured commercially. When a newly in- during operation for any defects which
stalled rope has been in operation for might appear between regular inspec-
an hour, all nuts on the clip bolts shall tions. All deficiencies such as listed
be retightened. shall be carefully examined and deter-
(vi) Swaged or compressed fittings mination made as to whether they con-
shall be applied as recommended by the stitute a safety hazard:
rope or crane manufacturer. (i) All functional operating mecha-
(vii) Wherever exposed to tempera- nisms for maladjustment interfering
tures, at which fiber cores would be with proper operation. Daily.
damaged, rope having an independent (ii) Deterioration or leakage in lines,
wirerope or wire-strand core, or other tanks, valves, drain pumps, and other
temperature-damage resistant core parts of air or hydraulic systems.
shall be used. Daily.
(viii) Replacement rope shall be the (iii) Hooks with deformation or
same size, grade, and construction as cracks. Visual inspection daily; month-
the original rope furnished by the ly inspection with a certification
crane manufacturer, unless otherwise record which includes the date of in-
recommended by a wire rope manufac- spection, the signature of the person
turer due to actual working condition who performed the inspection and the
requirements. serial number, or other identifier, of
(3) Equalizers. If a load is supported the hook inspected. For hooks with
by more than one part of rope, the ten- cracks or having more than 15 percent
sion in the parts shall be equalized. in excess of normal throat opening or
(4) Hooks. Hooks shall meet the man- more than 10° twist from the plane of
ufacturer’s recommendations and shall the unbent hook refer to paragraph
not be overloaded. (l)(3)(iii)(a) of this section.
566
(iv) Hoist chains, including end con- conforming with requirements of para-
nections, for excessive wear, twist, dis- graph (j)(2) of this section and para-
torted links interfering with proper graph (m)(2) of this section before plac-
function, or stretch beyond manufac- ing in service.
turer’s recommendations. Visual in- (ii) A crane which has been idle for a
spection daily; monthly inspection period of over 6 months shall be given
with a certification record which in- a complete inspection conforming with
cludes the date of inspection, the sig- requirements of paragraphs (j) (2) and
nature of the person who performed the (3) of this section and paragraph (m)(2)
inspection and an identifier of the of this section before placing in serv-
chain which was inspected. ice.
(v) [Reserved] (iii) Standby cranes shall be in-
(vi) All functional operating mecha- spected at least semi-annually in ac-
nisms for excessive wear of compo- cordance with requirements of para-
nents. graph (j)(2) of this section and para-
(vii) Rope reeving for noncompliance graph (m)(2) of this section.
with manufacturer’s recommendations. (k) Testing—(1) Operational tests. (i)
(3) Periodic inspection. Complete in- Prior to initial use all new and altered
spections of the crane shall be per- cranes shall be tested to insure compli-
formed at intervals as generally de- ance with this section including the
fined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii)(b) of this following functions:
section, depending upon its activity, (a) Hoisting and lowering.
severity of service, and environment, (b) Trolley travel.
or as specifically indicated below.
(c) Bridge travel.
These inspections shall include the re-
(d) Limit switches, locking and safe-
quirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this
ty devices.
section and in addition, the following
items. Any deficiencies such as listed (ii) The trip setting of hoist limit
shall be carefully examined and deter- switches shall be determined by tests
mination made as to whether they con- with an empty hook traveling in in-
stitute a safety hazard: creasing speeds up to the maximum
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded speed. The actuating mechanism of the
members. limit switch shall be located so that it
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets. will trip the switch, under all condi-
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and tions, in sufficient time to prevent con-
drums. tact of the hook or hook block with
(iv) Worn, cracked or distorted parts any part of the trolley.
such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, (2) Rated load test. Test loads shall
rollers, locking and clamping devices. not be more than 125 percent of the
(v) Excessive wear on brake system rated load unless otherwise rec-
parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets. ommended by the manufacturer. The
(vi) Load, wind, and other indicators test reports shall be placed on file
over their full range, for any signifi- where readily available to appointed
cant inaccuracies. personnel.
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or (l) Maintenance—(1) Preventive mainte-
other powerplants for improper per- nance. A preventive maintenance pro-
formance or noncompliance with appli- gram based on the crane manufactur-
cable safety requirements. er’s recommendations shall be estab-
(viii) Excessive wear of chain drive lished.
sprockets and excessive chain stretch. (2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before
(ix) [Reserved] adjustments and repairs are started on
(x) Electrical apparatus, for signs of a crane the following precautions shall
pitting or any deterioration of con- be taken:
troller contactors, limit switches and (a) The crane to be repaired shall be
pushbutton stations. run to a location where it will cause
(4) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A the least interference with other
crane which has been idle for a period cranes and operations in the area.
of 1 month or more, but less than 6 (b) All controllers shall be at the off
months, shall be given an inspection position.
567
(c) The main or emergency switch month and a certification record which
shall be open and locked in the open includes the date of inspection, the sig-
position. nature of the person who performed the
(d) Warning or ‘‘out of order’’ signs inspection and an identifier for the
shall be placed on the crane, also on ropes which were inspected shall be
the floor beneath or on the hook where kept on file where readily available to
visible from the floor. appointed personnel. Any deteriora-
(e) Where other cranes are in oper- tion, resulting in appreciable loss of
ation on the same runway, rail stops or original strength, shall be carefully ob-
other suitable means shall be provided served and determination made as to
to prevent interference with the idle whether further use of the rope would
crane. constitute a safety hazard. Some of the
(ii) After adjustments and repairs conditions that could result in an ap-
have been made the crane shall not be preciable loss of strength are the fol-
operated until all guards have been re- lowing:
installed, safety devices reactivated (i) Reduction of rope diameter below
and maintenance equipment removed. nominal diameter due to loss of core
(3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any support, internal or external corrosion,
unsafe conditions disclosed by the in- or wear of outside wires.
spection requirements of paragraph (j) (ii) A number of broken outside wires
of this section shall be corrected before and the degree of distribution or con-
operation of the crane is resumed. Ad- centration of such broken wires.
justments and repairs shall be done (iii) Worn outside wires.
only by designated personnel. (iv) Corroded or broken wires at end
(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained connections.
to assure correct functioning of compo-
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or
nents. The following are examples:
improperly applied end connections.
(a) All functional operating mecha-
nisms. (vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut-
(b) Limit switches. ting, or unstranding.
(c) Control systems. (2) Other ropes. All rope which has
(d) Brakes. been idle for a period of a month or
(e) Power plants. more due to shutdown or storage of a
(iii) Repairs or replacements shall be crane on which it is installed shall be
provided promptly as needed for safe given a thorough inspection before it is
operation. The following are examples: used. This inspection shall be for all
(a) Crane hooks showing defects de- types of deterioration and shall be per-
scribed in paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this formed by an appointed person whose
section shall be discarded. Repairs by approval shall be required for further
welding or reshaping are not generally use of the rope. A certification record
recommended. If such repairs are at- shall be available for inspection which
tempted they shall only be done under includes the date of inspection, the sig-
competent supervision and the hook nature of the person who performed the
shall be tested to the load require- inspection and an identifier for the
ments of paragraph (k)(2) of this sec- rope which was inspected.
tion before further use. (n) Handling the load—(1) Size of load.
(b) Load attachment chains and rope The crane shall not be loaded beyond
slings showing defects described in its rated load except for test purposes
paragraph (j)(2) (iv) and (v) of this sec- as provided in paragraph (k) of this sec-
tion respectively. tion.
(c) All critical parts which are (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
cracked, broken, bent, or excessively chain or hoist rope shall be free from
worn. kinks or twists and shall not be
(d) Pendant control stations shall be wrapped around the load.
kept clean and function labels kept (ii) The load shall be attached to the
legible. load block hook by means of slings or
(m) Rope inspection—(1) Running other approved devices.
ropes. A thorough inspection of all (iii) Care shall be taken to make cer-
ropes shall be made at least once a tain that the sling clears all obstacles.
568
(3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall out under no load. Extreme care shall
be well secured and properly balanced be exercised; the block shall be
in the sling or lifting device before it is ‘‘inched’’ into the limit or run in at
lifted more than a few inches. slow speed. If the switch does not oper-
(ii) Before starting to hoist the fol- ate properly, the appointed person
lowing conditions shall be noted: shall be immediately notified.
(a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked. (ii) The hoist limit switch which con-
(b) Multiple part lines shall not be trols the upper limit of travel of the
twisted around each other. load block shall never be used as an op-
(c) The hook shall be brought over erating control.
the load in such a manner as to prevent (o) Other requirements, general—(1)
swinging. Ladders. (i) The employer shall insure
(iii) During hoisting care shall be that hands are free from encumbrances
taken that: while personnel are using ladders.
(a) There is no sudden acceleration or
(ii) Articles which are too large to be
deceleration of the moving load.
carried in pockets or belts shall be lift-
(b) The load does not contact any ob-
structions. ed and lowered by hand line.
(iv) Cranes shall not be used for side (2) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and
pulls except when specifically author- personal belongings shall be stored in
ized by a responsible person who has such a manner as not to interfere with
determined that the stability of the access or operation.
crane is not thereby endangered and (ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses,
that various parts of the crane will not and other necessary articles shall be
be overstressed. stored in the tool box, and shall not be
(v) While any employee is on the load permitted to lie loose in or about the
or hook, there shall be no hoisting, cab.
lowering, or traveling. (3) Fire extinguishers. The employer
(vi) The employer shall require that shall insure that operators are familiar
the operator avoid carrying loads over with the operation and care of fire ex-
people. tinguishers provided.
(vii) The operator shall test the
brakes each time a load approaching
FR 27400, June 27, 1975; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
the rated load is handled. The brakes 1984; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 55 FR 32015,
shall be tested by raising the load a few Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
inches and applying the brakes.
(viii) The load shall not be lowered § 1910.180 Crawler locomotive and
below the point where less than two truck cranes.
full wraps of rope remain on the hoist-
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
ing drum.
tion. (1) A crawler crane consists of a ro-
(ix) When two or more cranes are
used to lift a load one qualified respon- tating superstructure with power
sible person shall be in charge of the plant, operating machinery, and boom,
operation. He shall analyze the oper- mounted on a base, equipped with
ation and instruct all personnel in- crawler treads for travel. Its function
volved in the proper positioning, rig- is to hoist and swing loads at various
ging of the load, and the movements to radii.
be made. (2) A locomotive crane consists of a ro-
(x) The employer shall insure that tating superstructure with power-
the operator does not leave his position plant, operating machinery and boom,
at the controls while the load is sus- mounted on a base or car equipped for
pended. travel on railroad track. It may be self-
(xi) When starting the bridge and propelled or propelled by an outside
when the load or hook approaches near source. Its function is to hoist and
or over personnel, the warning signal swing loads at various radii.
shall be sounded. (3) A truck crane consists of a rotat-
(4) Hoist limit switch. (i) At the begin- ing superstructure with powerplant,
ning of each operator’s shift, the upper operating machinery and boom, mount-
limit switch of each hoist shall be tried ed on an automotive truck equipped
569
with a powerplant for travel. Its func- pin) centerline and boom point sheave
tion is to hoist and swing loads at var- pin centerline.
ious radii. (15) The boom hoist is a hoist drum
(4) A wheel mounted crane (wagon and rope reeving system used to raise
crane) consists of a rotating super- and lower the boom. The rope system
structure with powerplant, operating may be all live reeving or a combina-
machinery and boom, mounted on a tion of live reeving and pendants.
base or platform equipped with axles (16) The boom stop is a device used to
and rubber-tired wheels for travel. The limit the angle of the boom at the
base is usually propelled by the engine highest position.
in the superstructure, but it may be (17) A brake is a device used for re-
equipped with a separate engine con- tarding or stopping motion by friction
trolled from the superstructure. Its or power means.
function is to hoist and swing loads at (18) A cab is a housing which covers
various radii. the rotating superstructure machinery
(5) An accessory is a secondary part or and/or operator’s station. On truck-
assembly of parts which contributes to crane trucks a separate cab covers the
the overall function and usefulness of a driver’s station.
machine. (19) The clutch is a friction, electro-
(6) Appointed means assigned specific magnetic, hydraulic, pneumatic, or
responsibilities by the employer or the positive mechanical device for engage-
employer’s representative. ment or disengagement of power.
(7) ANSI means the American Na- (20) The counterweight is a weight
tional Standards Institute. used to supplement the weight of the
(8) An angle indicator (boom) is an ac- machine in providing stability for lift-
cessory which measures the angle of ing working loads.
the boom to the horizontal. (21) Designated means selected or as-
(9) The axis of rotation is the vertical signed by the employer or the employ-
axis around which the crane super- er’s representative as being qualified to
structure rotates. perform specific duties.
(10) Axle means the shaft or spindle (22) The drum is the cylindrical mem-
with which or about which a wheel ro- bers around which ropes are wound for
tates. On truck- and wheel-mounted raising and lowering the load or boom.
cranes it refers to an automotive type (23) Dynamic (loading) means loads
of axle assembly including housings, introduced into the machine or its
gearing, differential, bearings, and components by forces in motion.
mounting appurtenances. (24) The gantry (A-frame) is a struc-
(11) Axle (bogie) means two or more tural frame, extending above the super-
automotive-type axles mounted in tan- structure, to which the boom support
dem in a frame so as to divide the load ropes are reeved.
between the axles and permit vertical (25) A jib is an extension attached to
oscillation of the wheels. the boom point to provide added boom
(12) The base (mounting) is the trav- length for lifting specified loads. The
eling base or carrier on which the ro- jib may be in line with the boom or off-
tating superstructure is mounted such set to various angles.
as a car, truck, crawlers, or wheel plat- (26) Load (working) means the exter-
form. nal load, in pounds, applied to the
(13) The boom (crane) is a member crane, including the weight of load-at-
hinged to the front of the rotating su- taching equipment such as load blocks,
perstructure with the outer end sup- shackles, and slings.
ported by ropes leading to a gantry or (27) Load block (upper) means the as-
A-frame and used for supporting the sembly of hook or shackle, swivel,
hoisting tackle. sheaves, pins, and frame suspended
(14) The boom angle is the angle be- from the boom point.
tween the longitudinal centerline of (28) Load block (lower) means the as-
the boom and the horizontal. The boom sembly of hook or shackle, swivel,
longitudinal centerline is a straight sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by
line between the boom foot pin (heel the hoisting ropes.
570
(29) A load hoist is a hoist drum and (46) Wheelbase means the distance be-
rope reeving system used for hoisting tween centers of front and rear axles.
and lowering loads. For a multiple axle assembly the axle
(30) Load ratings are crane ratings in center for wheelbase measurement is
pounds established by the manufac- taken as the midpoint of the assembly.
turer in accordance with paragraph (c) (47) The whipline (auxiliary hoist) is a
of this section. separate hoist rope system of lighter
(31) Outriggers are extendable or fixed load capacity and higher speed than
metal arms, attached to the mounting provided by the main hoist.
base, which rest on supports at the (48) A winch head is a power driven
outer ends. spool for handling of loads by means of
(32) Rail clamp means a tong-like friction between fiber or wire rope and
metal device, mounted on a locomotive spool.
crane car, which can be connected to (b) General requirements—(1) Applica-
the track. tion. This section applies to crawler
(33) Reeving means a rope system in cranes, locomotive cranes, wheel
which the rope travels around drums mounted cranes of both truck and self-
and sheaves. propelled wheel type, and any vari-
(34) Rope refers to a wire rope unless ations thereof which retain the same
otherwise specified. fundamental characteristics. This sec-
(35) Side loading means a load applied tion includes only cranes of the above
at an angle to the vertical plane of the types, which are basically powered by
boom. internal combustion engines or electric
motors and which utilize drums and
(36) A standby crane is a crane which
ropes. Cranes designed for railway and
is not in regular service but which is
automobile wreck clearances are ex-
used occasionally or intermittently as
cepted. The requirements of this sec-
required.
tion are applicable only to machines
(37) A standing (guy) rope is a sup-
when used as lifting cranes.
porting rope which maintains a con-
(2) New and existing equipment. All
stant distance between the points of
new crawler, locomotive, and truck
attachment to the two components
cranes constructed and utilized on or
connected by the rope.
after August 31, 1971, shall meet the de-
(38) Structural competence means the sign specifications of the American Na-
ability of the machine and its compo- tional Standard Safety Code for Crawl-
nents to withstand the stresses im- er, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes,
posed by applied loads. ANSI B30.5–1968, which is incorporated
(39) Superstructure means the rotating by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
upper frame structure of the machine Crawler, locomotive, and truck cranes
and the operating machinery mounted constructed prior to August 31, 1971,
thereon. should be modified to conform to those
(40) Swing means the rotation of the design specifications by February 15,
superstructure for movement of loads 1972, unless it can be shown that the
in a horizontal direction about the axis crane cannot feasibly or economically
of rotation. be altered and that the crane substan-
(41) Swing mechanism means the ma- tially complies with the requirements
chinery involved in providing rotation of this section.
of the superstructure. (3) Designated personnel. Only des-
(42) Tackle is an assembly of ropes ignated personnel shall be permitted to
and sheaves arranged for hoisting and operate a crane covered by this section.
pulling. (c) Load ratings—(1) Load ratings—
(43) Transit means the moving or where stability governs lifting perform-
transporting of a crane from one job- ance. (i) The margin of stability for de-
site to another. termination of load ratings, with
(44) Travel means the function of the booms of stipulated lengths at stipu-
machine moving from one location to lated working radii for the various
another, on a jobsite. types of crane mountings, is estab-
(45) The travel mechanism is the ma- lished by taking a percentage of the
chinery involved in providing travel. loads which will produce a condition of
571
tipping or balance with the boom in enced by such additional factors as
the least stable direction, relative to freely suspended loads, track, wind, or
the mounting. The load ratings shall ground conditions, condition and infla-
not exceed the following percentages tion of rubber tires, boom lengths,
for cranes, with the indicated types of proper operating speeds for existing
mounting under conditions stipulated conditions, and, in general, careful and
in paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii) of this competent operation. All of these shall
section. be taken into account by the user.
(2) Load rating chart. A substantial
Maximum
load rat- and durable rating chart with clearly
Type of crane mounting ings (per- legible letters and figures shall be pro-
cent of tip-
ping loads) vided with each crane and securely
fixed to the crane cab in a location eas-
Locomotive, without outriggers: ily visible to the operator while seated
Booms 60 feet or less .................................. 1 85
Booms over 60 feet ...................................... 1 85 at his control station.

Locomotive, using outriggers fully extended ....... 80 (d) Inspection classification—(1) Initial
Crawler, without outriggers .................................. 75 inspection. Prior to initial use all new
Crawler, using outriggers fully extended ............. 85
Truck and wheel mounted without outriggers or and altered cranes shall be inspected to
using outriggers fully extended ........................ 85 insure compliance with provisions of
1 Unless this results in less than 30,000 pound-feet net sta- this section.
bilizing moment about the rail, which shall be minimum with (2) Regular inspection. Inspection pro-
such booms.
cedure for cranes in regular service is
(ii) The following stipulations shall divided into two general classifications
govern the application of the values in based upon the intervals at which in-
paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for lo- spection should be performed. The in-
comotive cranes: tervals in turn are dependent upon the
(a) Tipping with or without the use of nature of the critical components of
outriggers occurs when half of the the crane and the degree of their expo-
wheels farthest from the load leave the sure to wear, deterioration, or mal-
rail. function. The two general classifica-
(b) The crane shall be standing on tions are herein designated as ‘‘fre-
track which is level within 1 percent quent’’ and ‘‘periodic’’, with respective
grade. intervals between inspections as de-
(c) Radius of the load is the hori- fined below:
zontal distance from a projection of the (i) Frequent inspection: Daily to
axis of rotation to the rail support sur- monthly intervals.
face, before loading, to the center of (ii) Periodic inspection: 1- to 12-
vertical hoist line or tackle with load month intervals, or as specifically rec-
applied. ommended by the manufacturer.
(d) Tipping loads from which ratings (3) Frequent inspection. Items such as
are determined shall be applied under the following shall be inspected for de-
static conditions only, i.e., without dy- fects at intervals as defined in para-
namic effect of hoisting, lowering, or graph (d)(2)(i) of this section or as spe-
swinging. cifically indicated including observa-
(e) The weight of all auxiliary han- tion during operation for any defects
dling devices such as hoist blocks, which might appear between regular
hooks, and slings shall be considered a inspections. Any deficiencies such as
part of the load rating. listed shall be carefully examined and
(iii) Stipulations governing the appli- determination made as to whether they
cation of the values in paragraph constitute a safety hazard:
(c)(1)(i) of this section for crawler, (i) All control mechanisms for mal-
truck, and wheel-mounted cranes shall adjustment interfering with proper op-
be in accordance with Crane Load-Sta- eration: Daily.
bility Test Code, Society of Auto- (ii) All control mechanisms for exces-
motive Engineers (SAE) J765, which is sive wear of components and contami-
incorporated by reference as specified nation by lubricants or other foreign
in § 1910.6. matter.
(iv) The effectiveness of these pre- (iii) All safety devices for malfunc-
ceding stability factors will be influ- tion.
572
(iv) Deterioration or leakage in air or graph (g)(2)(ii) of this section before
hydraulic systems: Daily. placing in service.
(v) Crane hooks with deformations or (ii) A crane which has been idle for a
cracks. For hooks with cracks or hav- period of six months shall be given a
ing more than 15 percent in excess of complete inspection conforming with
normal throat opening or more than 10° requirements of paragraphs (d) (3) and
twist from the plane of the unbent (4) of this section and paragraph
hook. (g)(2)(ii) of this section before placing
(vi) Rope reeving for noncompliance in service.
with manufacturer’s recommendations. (iii) Standby cranes shall be in-
(vii) Electrical apparatus for mal- spected at least semiannually in ac-
functioning, signs of excessive deterio- cordance with requirements of para-
ration, dirt, and moisture accumula- graph (d)(3) of this section and para-
tion. graph (g)(2)(ii) of this section. Such
(4) Periodic inspection. Complete in- cranes which are exposed to adverse en-
spections of the crane shall be per- vironment should be inspected more
formed at intervals as generally de- frequently.
fined in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec- (6) Inspection records. Certification
tion depending upon its activity, sever- records which include the date of in-
ity of service, and environment, or as spection, the signature of the person
specifically indicated below. These in- who performed the inspection and the
spections shall include the require- serial number, or other identifier, of
ments of paragraph (d)(3) of this sec- the crane which was inspected shall be
tion and in addition, items such as the made monthly on critical items in use
following. Any deficiencies such as list- such as brakes, crane hooks, and ropes.
ed shall be carefully examined and de- This certification record shall be kept
termination made as to whether they readily available.
constitute a safety hazard: (e) Testing—(1) Operational tests. (i) In
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded addition to prototype tests and qual-
members in the crane structure and ity-control measures, each new produc-
boom. tion crane shall be tested by the manu-
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets. facturer to the extent necessary to in-
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and sure compliance with the operational
drums. requirements of this paragraph includ-
(iv) Worn, cracked, or distorted parts ing functions such as the following:
such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, (a) Load hoisting and lowering mech-
rollers and locking devices. anisms.
(v) Excessive wear on brake and (b) Boom hoisting and lower mecha-
clutch system parts, linings, pawls, and nisms.
ratchets. (c) Swinging mechanism.
(vi) Load, boom angle, and other indi- (d) Travel mechanism.
cators over their full range, for any (e) Safety devices.
significant inaccuracies. (ii) Where the complete production
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or crane is not supplied by one manufac-
other power plants for improper per- turer such tests shall be conducted at
formance or noncompliance with safety final assembly.
requirements. (iii) Certified production-crane test
(viii) Excessive wear of chain-drive results shall be made available.
sprockets and excessive chain stretch. (2) Rated load test. (i) Written reports
(ix) Travel steering, braking, and shall be available showing test proce-
locking devices, for malfunction. dures and confirming the adequacy of
(x) Excessively worn or damaged repairs or alterations.
tires. (ii) Test loads shall not exceed 110
(5) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A percent of the rated load at any se-
crane which has been idle for a period lected working radius.
of one month or more, but less than 6 (iii) Where rerating is necessary:
months, shall be given an inspection (a) Crawler, truck, and wheel-mount-
conforming with requirements of para- ed cranes shall be tested in accordance
graph (d)(3) of this section and para- with SAE Recommended Practice,
573
Crane Load Stability Test Code J765 (ii) All rope which has been idle for a
(April 1961). period of a month or more due to shut-
(b) Locomotive cranes shall be tested down or storage of a crane on which it
in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) (i) is installed shall be given a thorough
and (ii) of this section. inspection before it is used. This in-
(c) Rerating test report shall be read- spection shall be for all types of dete-
ily available. rioration and shall be performed by an
(iv) No cranes shall be rerated in ex- appointed or authorized person whose
cess of the original load ratings unless approval shall be required for further
such rating changes are approved by use of the rope. A certification record
the crane manufacturer or final assem- which includes the date of inspection,
bler. the signature of the person who per-
(f) Maintenance procedure—General. formed the inspection, and an identi-
After adjustments and repairs have fier for the rope which was inspected
been made the crane shall not be oper- shall be prepared and kept readily
ated until all guards have been re- available.
installed, safety devices reactivated, (iii) Particular care shall be taken in
and maintenance equipment removed. the inspection of nonrotating rope.
(g) Rope inspection—(1) Running ropes. (h) Handling the load—(1) Size of load.
A thorough inspection of all ropes in (i) No crane shall be loaded beyond the
use shall be made at least once a rated load, except for test purposes as
month and a certification record which provided in paragraph (e) of this sec-
includes the date of inspection, the sig- tion.
nature of the person who performed the (ii) When loads which are limited by
inspection and an identifier for the structural competence rather than by
ropes shall be prepared and kept on file stability are to be handled, it shall be
where readily available. All inspections ascertained that the weight of the load
shall be performed by an appointed or has been determined within plus or
authorized person. Any deterioration, minus 10 percent before it is lifted.
resulting in appreciable loss of original (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
strength shall be carefully observed rope shall not be wrapped around the
and detemination made as to whether load.
further use of the rope would con- (ii) The load shall be attached to the
stitute a safety hazard. Some of the hook by means of slings or other ap-
conditions that could result in an approved devices.
preciable loss of strength are the fol- (3) Moving the load. (i) The employer
lowing: shall assure that:
(a) The crane is level and where nec-
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below
essary blocked properly.
nominal diameter due to loss of core
(b) The load is well secured and prop-
support, internal or external corrosion,
erly balanced in the sling or lifting de-
or wear of outside wires.
vice before it is lifted more than a few
(ii) A number of broken outside wires inches.
and the degree of distribution of con- (ii) Before starting to hoist, the fol-
centration of such broken wires. lowing conditions shall be noted:
(iii) Worn outside wires. (a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end (b) Multiple part lines shall not be
connections. twisted around each other.
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or (c) The hook shall be brought over
improperly applied end connections. the load in such a manner as to prevent
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut- swinging.
ting, or unstranding. (iii) During hoisting care shall be
(2) Other ropes. (i) Heavy wear and/or taken that:
broken wires may occur in sections in (a) There is no sudden acceleration or
contact with equalizer sheaves or other deceleration of the moving load.
sheaves where rope travel is limited, or (b) The load does not contact any ob-
with saddles. Particular care shall be structions.
taken to inspect ropes at these loca- (iv) Side loading of booms shall be
tions. limited to freely suspended loads.
574
Cranes shall not be used for dragging (xiv) Before traveling a crane with
loads sideways. load, a designated person shall be re-
(v) No hoisting, lowering, swinging, sponsible for determining and control-
or traveling shall be done while anyone ling safety. Decisions such as position
is on the load or hook. of load, boom location, ground support,
(vi) The operator should avoid car- travel route, and speed of movement
rying loads over people. shall be in accord with his determina-
(vii) On truck-mounted cranes, no tions.
loads shall be lifted over the front area (xv) A crane with or without load
except as approved by the crane manu- shall not be traveled with the boom so
facturer. high that it may bounce back over the
(viii) The operator shall test the cab.
brakes each time a load approaching (xvi) When rotating the crane, sudden
the rated load is handled by raising it starts and stops shall be avoided. Rota-
a few inches and applying the brakes. tional speed shall be such that the load
(ix) Outriggers shall be used when the does not swing out beyond the radii at
load to be handled at that particular which it can be controlled. A tag or re-
radius exceeds the rated load without straint line shall be used when rotation
outriggers as given by the manufac- of the load is hazardous.
turer for that crane. Where floats are (xvii) When a crane is to be operated
used they shall be securely attached to at a fixed radius, the boom-hoist pawl
the outriggers. Wood blocks used to or other positive locking device shall
support outriggers shall: be engaged.
(a) Be strong enough to prevent (xviii) Ropes shall not be handled on
crushing. a winch head without the knowledge of
(b) Be free from defects. the operator.
(c) Be of sufficient width and length (xix) While a winch head is being
to prevent shifting or toppling under used, the operator shall be within con-
load. venient reach of the power unit control
(x) Neither the load nor the boom lever.
shall be lowered below the point where (4) Holding the load. (i) The operator
less than two full wraps of rope remain shall not be permitted to leave his po-
on their respective drums. sition at the controls while the load is
(xi) Before lifting loads with loco- suspended.
motive cranes without using out- (ii) No person should be permitted to
riggers, means shall be applied to pre- stand or pass under a load on the hook.
vent the load from being carried by the (iii) If the load must remain sus-
truck springs. pended for any considerable length of
(xii) When two or more cranes are time, the operator shall hold the drum
used to lift one load, one designated from rotating in the lowering direction
person shall be responsible for the op- by activating the positive controllable
eration. He shall be required to analyze means of the operator’s station.
the operation and instruct all per- (i) Other requirements—(1) Rail clamps.
sonnel involved in the proper posi- Rail clamps shall not be used as a
tioning, rigging of the load, and the means of restraining tipping of a loco-
movements to be made. motive crane.
(xiii) In transit the following addi- (2) Ballast or counterweight. Cranes
tional precautions shall be exercised: shall not be operated without the full
(a) The boom shall be carried in line amount of any ballast or counter-
with the direction of motion. weight in place as specified by the
(b) The superstructure shall be se- maker, but truck cranes that have
cured against rotation, except when ne- dropped the ballast or counterweight
gotiating turns when there is an oper- may be operated temporarily with spe-
ator in the cab or the boom is sup- cial care and only for light loads with-
ported on a dolly. out full ballast or counterweight in
(c) The empty hook shall be lashed or place. The ballast or counterweight in
otherwise restrained so that it cannot place specified by the manufacturer
swing freely. shall not be exceeded.
575
(3) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and
personal belongings shall be stored in
such a manner as to not interfere with
access or operation.
(ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses,
and other necessary articles shall be
stored in the tool box, and shall not be
permitted to lie loose in or about the
cab.
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with small
portable containers shall be done with
an approved safety type can equipped
with an automatic closing cap and
flame arrester. Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3)
for definition of approved.
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled (3) A basket derrick is a derrick with-
with the engine running. out a boom, similar to a gin pole, with
(5) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon di- its base supported by ropes attached to
oxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire corner posts or other parts of the
extinguisher shall be kept in the cab or structure. The base is at a lower ele-
vicinity of the crane. vation than its supports. The location
(ii) Operating and maintenance per- of the base of a basket derrick can be
sonnel shall be made familiar with the changed by varying the length of the
use and care of the fire extinguishers rope supports. The top of the pole is se-
provided. cured with multiple reeved guys to po-
(6) Swinging locomotive cranes. A loco- sition the top of the pole to the desired
motive crane shall not be swung into a location by varying the length of the
position where railway cars on an adja- upper guy lines. The load is raised and
cent track might strike it, until it has lowered by ropes through a sheave or
been ascertained that cars are not block secured to the top of the pole.
being moved on the adjacent track and
proper flag protection has been estab-
lished.
(j) Operations near overhead lines. For
operations near overhead electric lines,
see § 1910.333(c)(3).
FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29,
1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015,
Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
§ 1910.181 Derricks.
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
tion. (1) A derrick is an apparatus con-
sisting of a mast or equivalent member
held at the head by guys or braces,
with or without a boom, for use with a
hoisting mechanism and operating (4) Breast derrick means a derrick
ropes. without boom. The mast consists of
(2) A-frame derrick means a derrick in two side members spread farther apart
which the boom is hinged from a cross at the base than at the top and tied to-
member between the bottom ends of gether at top and bottom by rigid
two upright members spread apart at members. The mast is prevented from
the lower ends and joined at the top; tipping forward by guys connected to
the boom point secured to the junction its top. The load is raised and lowered
of the side members, and the side mem-
EC27OC91.038</GPH>
by ropes through a sheave or block se-

bers are braced or guyed from this
cured to the top crosspiece.
junction point.
576
EC27OC91.037</GPH>
(7) Guy derrick means a fixed derrick

(5) Chicago boom derrick means a consisting of a mast capable of being
boom which is attached to a structure, rotated, supported in a vertical posi-
an outside upright member of the tion by guys, and a boom whose bottom
structure serving as the mast, and the end is hinged or pivoted to move in a
boom being stepped in a fixed socket vertical plane with a reeved rope be-
clamped to the upright. The derrick is tween the head of the mast and the
complete with load, boom, and boom boom point for raising and lowering
point swing line falls. the boom, and a reeved rope from the
boom point for raising and lowering
the load.
(8) Shearleg derrick means a derrick

without a boom and similar to a breast
derrick. The mast, wide at the bottom
and narrow at the top, is hinged at the
(6) A gin pole derrick is a derrick with- bottom and has its top secured by a EC27OC91.042</GPH>
out a boom. Its guys are so arranged multiple reeved guy to permit handling
from its top as to permit leaning the loads at various radii by means of load
tackle suspended from the mast top.
mast in any direction. The load is
raised and lowered by ropes reeved (9) A stiffleg derrick is a derrick simi-
lar to a guy derrick except that the
EC27OC91.041</GPH>
through sheaves or blocks at the top of

mast is supported or held in place by
the mast.
two or more stiff members, called
stifflegs, which are capable of resisting
either tensile or compressive forces.
Sills are generally provided to connect
EC27OC91.040</GPH>
the lower ends of the stifflegs to the

foot of the mast.
577
EC27OC91.039</GPH>
plane held in place by the same cheek
plates.
(19) The foot bearing or foot block (sill
block) is the lower support on which
the mast rotates.
(20) A gudgeon pin is a pin connecting
the mast cap to the mast allowing ro-
tation of the mast.
(21) A guy is a rope used to steady or
secure the mast or other member in
the desired position.
(22) Load, working means the external
load, in pounds, applied to the derrick,
including the weight of load attaching
equipment such as load blocks, shack-
les, and slings.
(10) Appointed means assigned spe- (23) Load block, lower means the as-
cific responsibilities by the employer sembly of sheaves, pins, and frame sus-
or the employer’s representative. pended by the hoisting rope.
(11) ANSI means the American Na- (24) Load block, upper means the as-
tional Standards Institute. sembly of sheaves, pins, and frame sus-
(12) A boom is a timber or metal sec- pended from the boom.
tion or strut, pivoted or hinged at the (25) Mast means the upright member
heel (lower end) at a location fixed in of the derrick.
height on a frame or mast or vertical (26) Mast cap (spider) means the fit-
member, and with its point (upper end) ting at the top of the mast to which
supported by chains, ropes, or rods to the guys are connected.
the upper end of the frame, mast, or (27) Reeving means a rope system in
vertical member. A rope for raising and which the rope travels around drums
lowering the load is reeved through and sheaves.
sheaves or a block at the boom point. (28) Rope refers to wire rope unless
The length of the boom shall be taken otherwise specified.
as the straight line distance between (29) Safety Hook means a hook with a
the axis of the foot pin and the axis of latch to prevent slings or load from ac-
the boom point sheave pin, or where cidentally slipping off the hook.
used, the axis of the upper load block (30) Side loading is a load applied at
attachment pin. an angle to the vertical plane of the
(13) Boom harness means the block boom.
and sheave arrangement on the boom (31) The sill is a member connecting
point to which the topping lift cable is the foot block and stiffleg or a member
reeved for lowering and raising the connecting the lower ends of a double
boom. member mast.
(14) The boom point is the outward (32) A standby derrick is a derrick not
end of the top section of the boom. in regular service which is used occa-
(15) Derrick bullwheel means a hori- sionally or intermittently as required.
zontal ring or wheel, fastened to the (33) Stiffleg means a rigid member
foot of a derrick, for the purpose of supporting the mast at the head.
turning the derrick by means of ropes (34) Swing means rotation of the mast
leading from this wheel to a powered and/or boom for movements of loads in
drum. a horizontal direction about the axis of
(16) Designated means selected or as- rotation.
signed by the employer or employer’s (b) General requirements—(1) Applica-
representative as being qualified to tion. This section applies to guy,
perform specific duties. stiffleg, basket, breast, gin pole, Chi-
(17) Eye means a loop formed at the cago boom and A-frame derricks of the
end of a rope by securing the dead end stationary type, capable of handling
to the live end at the base of the loop. loads at variable reaches and powered
(18) A fiddle block is a block con- by hoists through systems of rope
sisting of two sheaves in the same reeving, used to perform lifting hook
578
EC27OC91.043</GPH>
work, single or multiple line bucket degree of their exposure to wear, dete-
work, grab, grapple, and magnet work. rioration, or malfunction. The two gen-
Derricks may be permanently installed eral classifications are herein des-
for temporary use as in construction ignated as frequent and periodic with
work. The requirements of this section respective intervals between inspec-
also apply to any modification of these tions as defined below:
types which retain their fundamental (a) Frequent inspection—Daily to
features, except for floating derricks. monthly intervals.
(2) New and existing equipment. All (b) Periodic inspection—1- to 12-
new derricks constructed and installed month intervals, or as specified by the
on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet manufacturer.
the design specifications of the Amer- (2) Frequent inspection. Items such as
ican National Standard Safety Code for the following shall be inspected for de-
Derricks, ANSI B30.6–1969, which is in- fects at intervals as defined in para-
corporated by reference as specified in graph (d)(1)(ii)(a) of this section or as
§ 1910.6. specifically indicated, including obser-
(3) Designated personnel. Only des- vation during operation for any defects
ignated personnel shall be permitted to which might appear between regular
operate a derrick covered by this sec- inspections. Deficiencies shall be care-
tion. fully examined for any safety hazard:
(c) Load ratings—(1) Rated load mark- (i) All control mechanisms: Inspect
ing. For permanently installed derricks daily for adjustment, wear, and lubri-
with fixed lengths of boom, guy, and cation.
mast, a substantial, durable, and clear- (ii) All chords and lacing: Inspect
ly legible rating chart shall be pro- daily, visually.
vided with each derrick and securely
(iii) Tension in guys: Daily.
affixed where it is visible to personnel
(iv) Plumb of the mast.
responsible for the safe operation of
the equipment. The chart shall include (v) Deterioration or leakage in air or
the following data: hydraulic systems: Daily.
(i) Manufacturer’s approved load rat- (vi) Derrick hooks for deformations
ings at corresponding ranges of boom or cracks; for hooks with cracks or
angle or operating radii. having more than 15 percent in excess
(ii) Specific lengths of components on of normal throat opening or more than
which the load ratings are based. 10° twist from the plane of the unbent
(iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. hook, refer to paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of
Size and construction of rope may be this section.
shown either on the rating chart or in (vii) Rope reeving; visual inspection
the operating manual. for noncompliance with derrick manu-
(2) Nonpermanent installations. For facturer’s recommendations.
nonpermanent installations, the manu- (viii) Hoist brakes, clutches, and op-
facturer shall provide sufficient infor- erating levers: check daily for proper
mation from which capacity charts can functioning before beginning oper-
be prepared for the particular installa- ations.
tion. The capacity charts shall be lo- (ix) Electrical apparatus for malfunc-
cated at the derricks or the jobsite of- tioning, signs of excessive deteriora-
fice. tion, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
(d) Inspection—(1) Inspection classifica- (3) Periodic inspection. (i) Complete in-
tion. (i) Prior to initial use all new and spections of the derrick shall be per-
altered derricks shall be inspected to formed at intervals as generally de-
insure compliance with the provisions fined in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(b) of this
of this section. section depending upon its activity, se-
(ii) Inspection procedure for derricks verity of service, and environment, or
in regular service is divided into two as specifically indicated below. These
general classifications based upon the inspections shall include the require-
intervals at which inspection should be ments of paragraph (d)(2) of this sec-
performed. The intervals in turn are tion and in addition, items such as the
dependent upon the nature of the crit- following. Deficiencies shall be care-
ical components of the derrick and the fully examined and a determination
579
made as to whether they constitute a (2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before
safety hazard: adjustments and repairs are started on
(a) Structural members for deforma- a derrick the following precautions
tions, cracks, and corrosion. shall be taken:
(b) Bolts or rivets for tightness. (a) The derrick to be repaired shall be
(c) Parts such as pins, bearings, arranged so it will cause the least in-
shafts, gears, sheaves, drums, rollers, terference with other equipment and
locking and clamping devices, for wear, operations in the area.
cracks, and distortion. (b) All hoist drum dogs shall be en-
(d) Gudgeon pin for cracks, wear, and gaged.
distortion each time the derrick is to (c) The main or emergency switch
be erected. shall be locked in the open position, if
(e) Powerplants for proper perform- an electric hoist is used.
ance and compliance with applicable (d) Warning or out of order signs
safety requirements. shall be placed on the derrick and
(f) Hooks. hoist.
(ii) Foundation or supports shall be (e) The repairs of booms of derricks
inspected for continued ability to sus- shall either be made when the booms
tain the imposed loads. are lowered and adequately supported
or safely tied off.
(4) Derricks not in regular use. (i) A
(f) A good communication system
derrick which has been idle for a period
shall be set up between the hoist oper-
of 1 month or more, but less than 6
ator and the appointed individual in
months, shall be given an inspection
charge of derrick operations before any
conforming with requirements of para-
work on the equipment is started.
graph (d)(2) of this section and para-
(ii) After adjustments and repairs
graph (g)(3) of this section before plac-
have been made the derrick shall not
ing in service.
be operated until all guards have been
(ii) A derrick which has been idle for
reinstalled, safety devices reactivated,
a period of over 6 months shall be given
and maintenance equipment removed.
a complete inspection conforming with
(3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any
requirements of paragraphs (d) (2) and
unsafe conditions disclosed by inspec-
(3) of this section and paragraph (g)(3)
tion shall be corrected before operation
of this section before placing in serv-
of the derrick is resumed.
ice.
(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained
(iii) Standby derricks shall be in- to assure correct functioning of compo-
spected at least semiannually in ac- nents.
cordance with requirements of para- (iii) Repairs or replacements shall be
graph (d)(2) of this section and para- provided promptly as needed for safe
graph (g)(3) of this section. operation. The following are examples
(e) Testing—(1) Operational tests. Prior of conditions requiring prompt repair
to initial use all new and altered der- or replacement:
ricks shall be tested to insure compli- (a) Hooks showing defects described
ance with this section including the in paragraph (d)(2)(vi) of this section
following functions: shall be discarded.
(i) Load hoisting and lowering. (b) All critical parts which are
(ii) Boom up and down. cracked, broken, bent, or excessively
(iii) Swing. worn.
(iv) Operation of clutches and brakes (c) [Reserved]
of hoist. (d) All replacement and repaired
(2) Anchorages. All anchorages shall parts shall have at least the original
be approved by the appointed person. safety factor.
Rock and hairpin anchorages may re- (g) Rope inspection—(1) Running ropes.
quire special testing. A thorough inspection of all ropes in
(f) Maintenance—(1) Preventive mainte- use shall be made at least once a
nance. A preventive maintenance pro- month and a certification record which
gram based on the derrick manufactur- includes the date of inspection, the sig-
er’s recommendations shall be estab- nature of the person who performed the
lished. inspection, and an identifier for the
580
ropes which were inspected shall be (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
prepared and kept on file where readily rope shall not be wrapped around the
available. Any deterioration, resulting load.
in appreciable loss of original strength (ii) The load shall be attached to the
shall be carefully observed and deter- hook by means of slings or other suit-
mination made as to whether further able devices.
use of the rope would constitute a safe- (3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall
ty hazard. Some of the conditions that be well secured and properly balanced
could result in an appreciable loss of in the sling or lifting device before it is
strength are the following: lifted more than a few inches.
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below (ii) Before starting to hoist, the fol-
nominal diameter due to loss of core lowing conditions shall be noted:
support, internal or external corrosion, (a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
or wear of outside wires. (b) Multiple part lines shall not be
(ii) A number of broken outside wires twisted around each other.
and the degree of distribution or con- (c) The hook shall be brought over
centration of such broken wires. the load in such a manner as to prevent
(iii) Worn outside wires. swinging.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end (iii) During hoisting, care shall be
connections. taken that:
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or (a) There is no sudden acceleration or
improperly applied end connections. deceleration of the moving load.
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut- (b) Load does not contact any ob-
ting, or unstranding. structions.
(2) Limited travel ropes. Heavy wear (iv) A derrick shall not be used for
and/or broken wires may occur in sec- side loading except when specifically
tions in contact with equalizer sheaves authorized by a responsible person who
or other sheaves where rope travel is has determined that the various struc-
limited, or with saddles. Particular tural components will not be over-
care shall be taken to inspect ropes at stressed.
these locations. (v) No hoisting, lowering, or swinging
(3) Idle ropes. All rope which has been shall be done while anyone is on the
idle for a period of a month or more load or hook.
due to shutdown or storage of a derrick (vi) The operator should avoid car-
on which it is installed shall be given a rying loads over people.
thorough inspection before it is used. (vii) The operator shall test the
This inspection shall be for all types of brakes each time a load approaching
deterioration. A certification record the rated load is handled by raising it
shall be prepared and kept readily a few inches and applying the brakes.
available which includes the date of in- (viii) Neither the load nor boom shall
spection, the signature of the person be lowered below the point where less
who performed the inspection, and an than two full wraps of rope remain on
identifier for the ropes which were in- their respective drums.
spected. (ix) When rotating a derrick, sudden
(4) Nonrotating ropes. Particular care starts and stops shall be avoided. Rota-
shall be taken in the inspection of non- tional speed shall be such that the load
rotating rope. does not swing out beyond the radius
(h) Operations of derricks. Derrick op- at which it can be controlled.
erations shall be directed only by the (x) Boom and hoisting rope systems
individual specifically designated for shall not be twisted.
that purpose. (4) Holding the load. (i) The operator
(i) Handling the load—(1) Size of load. shall not be allowed to leave his posi-
(i) No derrick shall be loaded beyond tion at the controls while the load is
the rated load. suspended.
(ii) When loads approach the max- (ii) People should not be permitted to
imum rating of the derrick, it shall be stand or pass under a load on the hook.
ascertained that the weight of the load (iii) If the load must remain sus-
has been determined within plus or pended for any considerable length of
minus 10 percent before it is lifted. time, a dog, or pawl and ratchet, or
581
other equivalent means, rather than ings shall be stored in such a manner
the brake alone, shall be used to hold as to not interfere with access or oper-
the load. ation.
(5) Use of winch heads. (i) Ropes shall (ii) Tools, oilcans, waste, extra fuses,
not be handled on a winch head with- and other necessary articles shall be
out the knowledge of the operator. stored in the toolbox, and shall not be
(ii) While a winch head is being used, permitted to lie loose in or about the
the operator shall be within convenient cab or operating enclosure.
reach of the power unit control lever. [37 FR 22102, Oct. 18, 1972, as amended at 38
(6) Securing boom. Dogs, pawls, or FR 14373, June 1, 1973; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24,
other positive holding mechanism on 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561,
the hoist shall be engaged. When not in Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR
use, the derrick boom shall: 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
(i) Be laid down;
(ii) Be secured to a stationary mem- § 1910.183 Helicopters.
ber, as nearly under the head as pos- (a) [Reserved]
sible, by attachment of a sling to the (b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper-
load block; or ation a briefing shall be conducted.
(iii) Be hoisted to a vertical position This briefing shall set forth the plan of
and secured to the mast. operation for the pilot and ground per-
(j) Other requirements—(1) Guards. (i) sonnel.
Exposed moving parts, such as gears, (c) Slings and tag lines. Loads shall be
ropes, setscrews, projecting keys, properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a
chains, chain sprockets, and recipro- length that will not permit their being
cating components, which constitute a drawn up into the rotors. Pressed
hazard under normal operating condi- sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent
tions shall be guarded. means shall be used for all freely sus-
(ii) Guards shall be securely fastened. pended loads to prevent hand splices
(iii) Each guard shall be capable of from spinning open or cable clamps
supporting without permanent distor- from loosening.
tion, the weight of a 200–pound person (d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper-
unless the guard is located where it is ated cargo hooks shall have the elec-
impossible for a person to step on it. trical activating device so designed and
(2) Hooks. (i) Hooks shall meet the installed as to prevent inadvertent op-
manufacturer’s recommendations and eration. In addition, these cargo hooks
shall not be overloaded. shall be equipped with an emergency
(ii) Safety latch type hooks shall be mechanical control for releasing the
used wherever possible. load. The employer shall ensure that
(3) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon di- the hooks are tested prior to each day’s
oxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire operation by a competent person to de-
extinguisher shall be kept in the imme- termine that the release functions
diate vicinity of the derrick. properly, both electrically and me-
(ii) Operating and maintenance per- chanically.
sonnel shall be familiar with the use (e) Personal protective equipment. (1)
and care of the fire extinguishers pro- Personal protective equipment shall be
vided. provided and the employer shall ensure
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with port- its use by employees receiving the
able containers shall be done with ap- load. Personal protective equipment
proved safety type containers equipped shall consist of complete eye protec-
with automatic closing cap and flame tion and hardhats secured by chin-
arrester. Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3) for def- straps.
inition of Approved. (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled flap in rotor downwash, and thus be
with the engine running. snagged on the hoist line, may not be
(5) Operations near overhead lines. For worn.
operations near overhead electric lines, (f) Loose gear and objects. The em-
see § 1910.333(c)(3). ployer shall take all necessary pre-
(6) Cab or operating enclosure. (i) Nec- cautions to protect employees from
essary clothing and personal belong- flying objects in the rotor downwash.
582
All loose gear within 100 feet of the cautions shall also be taken by the em-
place of lifting the load or depositing ployer to eliminate, as far as practical,
the load, or within all other areas sus- the dust or other conditions reducing
ceptible to rotor downwash, shall be se- the visibility.
cured or removed. (n) Signal systems. The employer shall
(g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping instruct the aircrew and ground per-
shall be maintained in all helicopter sonnel on the signal systems to be used
loading and unloading areas. and shall review the system with the
(h) Load safety. The size and weight employees in advance of hoisting the
of loads, and the manner in which loads load. This applies to both radio and
are connected to the helicopter shall be hand signal systems. Hand signals,
checked. A lift may not be made if the where used, shall be as shown in Figure
helicopter operator believes the lift N–1.
cannot be made safely. (o) Approach distance. No employee
(i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When shall be permitted to approach within
employees perform work under hov- 50 feet of the helicopter when the rotor
ering craft, a safe means of access shall blades are turning, unless his work du-
be provided for employees to reach the ties require his presence in that area.
hoist line hook and engage or dis-
(p) Approaching helicopter. The em-
engage cargo slings. Employees may
ployer shall instruct employees, and
not be permitted to perform work
shall ensure, that whenever approach-
under hovering craft except when nec-
ing or leaving a helicopter which has
essary to hook or unhook loads.
(j) Static charge. Static charge on the its blades rotating, all employees shall
suspended load shall be dissipated with remain in full view of the pilot and
a grounding device before ground per- keep in a crouched position. No em-
sonnel touch the suspended load, unless ployee shall be permitted to work in
protective rubber gloves are being worn the area from the cockpit or cabin
by all ground personnel who may be re- rearward while blades are rotating, un-
quired to touch the suspended load. less authorized by the helicopter oper-
(k) Weight limitation. The weight of an ator to work there.
external load shall not exceed the heli- (q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per-
copter manufacturer’s rating. sonnel shall be provided to ensure that
(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other helicopter loading and unloading oper-
gear, except for pulling lines or con- ations can be performed safely.
ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’ (r) Communications. There shall be
from a container or roll off a reel, shall constant reliable communication be-
not be attached to any fixed ground tween the pilot and a designated em-
structure, or allowed to foul on any ployee of the ground crew who acts as
fixed structure. a signalman during the period of load-
(m) Visibility. Ground personnel shall ing and unloading. The signalman shall
be instructed and the employer shall be clearly distinguishable from other
ensure that when visibility is reduced ground personnel.
by dust or other conditions, they shall (s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per-
exercise special caution to keep clear mitted in areas where they could be
of main and stabilizing rotors. Pre- spread by the rotor downwash.
583
[40 FR 13440, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998]
584
EC27OC91.044</GPH>
§ 1910.184 Slings. Coating is an elastomer or other suit-

(a) Scope. This section applies to able material applied to a sling or to a
slings used in conjunction with other sling component to impart desirable
material handling equipment for the properties.
movement of material by hoisting, in Cross rod is a wire used to join spirals
employments covered by this part. The of metal mesh to form a complete fab-
types of slings covered are those made ric. (See Fig. N–184–2.)
from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal Designated means selected or assigned
mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope by the employer or the employer’s rep-
(conventional three strand construc- resentative as being qualified to per-
tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly- form specific duties.
ester, and polypropylene). Equivalent entity is a person or orga-
(b) Definitions. Angle of loading is the nization (including an employer)
inclination of a leg or branch of a sling which, by possession of equipment,
measured from the horizontal or technical knowledge and skills, can
vertical plane as shown in Fig. N–184–5; perform with equal competence the
provided that an angle of loading of same repairs and tests as the person or
five degrees or less from the vertical organization with which it is equated.
may be considered a vertical angle of Fabric (metal mesh) is the flexible por-
loading.
tion of a metal mesh sling consisting of
Basket hitch is a sling configuration
a series of transverse coils and cross
whereby the sling is passed under the
rods.
load and has both ends, end attach-
ments, eyes or handles on the hook or Female handle (choker) is a handle
a single master link. with a handle eye and a slot of such di-
Braided wire rope is a wire rope mension as to permit passage of a male
formed by plaiting component wire handle thereby allowing the use of a
ropes. metal mesh sling in a choker hitch.
Bridle wire rope sling is a sling com- (See Fig. N–184–1.)
posed of multiple wire rope legs with Handle is a terminal fitting to which
the top ends gathered in a fitting that metal mesh fabric is attached. (See
goes over the lifting hook. Fig. N–184–1.)
Cable laid endless sling-mechanical Handle eye is an opening in a handle
joint is a wire rope sling made endless of a metal mesh sling shaped to accept
by joining the ends of a single length of a hook, shackle or other lifting device.
cable laid rope with one or more metal- (See Fig. N–184–1.)
lic fittings. Hitch is a sling configuration where-
Cable laid grommet-hand tucked is an by the sling is fastened to an object or
endless wire rope sling made from one load, either directly to it or around it.
length of rope wrapped six times Link is a single ring of a chain.
around a core formed by hand tucking
Male handle (triangle) is a handle with
the ends of the rope inside the six
a handle eye.
wraps.
Cable laid rope is a wire rope com- Master coupling link is an alloy steel
posed of six wire ropes wrapped around welded coupling link used as an inter-
a fiber or wire rope core. mediate link to join alloy steel chain
Cable laid rope sling-mechanical joint is to master links. (See Fig. N–184–3.)
a wire rope sling made from a cable Master link or gathering ring is a
laid rope with eyes fabricated by press- forged or welded steel link used to sup-
ing or swaging one or more metal port all members (legs) of an alloy
sleeves over the rope junction. steel chain sling or wire rope sling.
Choker hitch is a sling configuration (See Fig. N–184–3.)
with one end of the sling passing under Mechanical coupling link is a non-
the load and through an end attach- welded, mechanically closed steel link
ment, handle or eye on the other end of used to attach master links, hooks,
the sling. etc., to alloy steel chain.
585
586
EC27OC91.045</GPH>
587
EC27OC91.046</GPH>
Proof load is the load applied in per- Spiral is a single transverse coil that
formance of a proof test. is the basic element from which metal
Proof test is a nondestructive tension mesh is fabricated. (See Fig. N–184–2.)
test performed by the sling manufac- Strand laid endless sling-mechanical
turer or an equivalent entity to verify joint is a wire rope sling made endless
construction and workmanship of a from one length of rope with the ends
sling. joined by one or more metallic fittings.
Rated capacity or working load limit is Strand laid grommet-hand tucked is an
the maximum working load permitted endless wire rope sling made from one
by the provisions of this section. length of strand wrapped six times
Reach is the effective length of an around a core formed by hand tucking
alloy steel chain sling measured from the ends of the strand inside the six
the top bearing surface of the upper wraps.
terminal component to the bottom Strand laid rope is a wire rope made
bearing surface of the lower terminal with strands (usually six or eight)
component. wrapped around a fiber core, wire
Selvage edge is the finished edge of strand core, or independent wire rope
synthetic webbing designed to prevent core (IWRC).
unraveling. Vertical hitch is a method of sup-
Sling is an assembly which connects porting a load by a single, vertical part
the load to the material handling or leg of the sling. (See Fig. N–184–4.)
equipment. (c) Safe operating practices. Whenever
Sling manufacturer is a person or or- any sling is used, the following prac-
ganization that assembles sling compo- tices shall be observed:
nents into their final form for sale to (1) Slings that are damaged or defec-
users. tive shall not be used.
588
EC27OC91.047</GPH>
(2) Slings shall not be shortened with rated capacity of the weakest compo-
knots or bolts or other makeshift de- nent.
vices. (ii) Makeshift links or fasteners
(3) Sling legs shall not be kinked. formed from bolts or rods, or other
(4) Slings shall not be loaded in ex- such attachments, shall not be used.
cess of their rated capacities. (3) Inspections. (i) In addition to the
(5) Slings used in a basket hitch shall inspection required by paragraph (d) of
have the loads balanced to prevent slip- this section, a thorough periodic in-
page. spection of alloy steel chain slings in
(6) Slings shall be securely attached use shall be made on a regular basis, to
to their loads. be determined on the basis of (A) fre-
(7) Slings shall be padded or pro- quency of sling use; (B) severity of
tected from the sharp edges of their service conditions; (C) nature of lifts
loads. being made; and (D) experience gained
(8) Suspended loads shall be kept on the service life of slings used in
clear of all obstructions. similar circumstances. Such inspec-
(9) All employees shall be kept clear tions shall in no event be at intervals
of loads about to be lifted and of sus- greater than once every 12 months.
pended loads. (ii) The employer shall make and
(10) Hands or fingers shall not be maintain a record of the most recent
placed between the sling and its load month in which each alloy steel chain
while the sling is being tightened sling was thoroughly inspected, and
around the load. shall make such record available for
(11) Shock loading is prohibited. examination.
(12) A sling shall not be pulled from (iii) The thorough inspection of alloy
under a load when the load is resting steel chain slings shall be performed by
on the sling. a competent person designated by the
(13) Employers must not load a sling employer, and shall include a thorough
in excess of its recommended safe inspection for wear, defective welds,
working load as prescribed by the sling deformation and increase in length.
manufacturer on the identification Where such defects or deterioration are
markings permanently affixed to the present, the sling shall be immediately
sling. removed from service.
(14) Employers must not use slings (4) Proof testing. The employer shall
without affixed and legible identifica- ensure that before use, each new, re-
tion markings. paired, or reconditioned alloy steel
(d) Inspections. Each day before being chain sling, including all welded com-
used, the sling and all fastenings and ponents in the sling assembly, shall be
attachments shall be inspected for proof tested by the sling manufacturer
damage or defects by a competent per- or equivalent entity, in accordance
son designated by the employer. Addi- with paragraph 5.2 of the American So-
tional inspections shall be performed ciety of Testing and Materials Speci-
during sling use, where service condi- fication A391–65, which is incorporated
tions warrant. Damaged or defective by reference as specified in § 1910.6
slings shall be immediately removed (ANSI G61.1– 1968). The employer shall
from service. retain a certificate of the proof test
(e) Alloy steel chain slings—(1) Sling and shall make it available for exam-
identification. Alloy steel chain slings ination.
shall have permanently affixed durable (5) [Reserved]
identification stating size, grade, rated (6) Safe operating temperatures. Em-
capacity, and reach. ployers must permanently remove an
(2) Attachments. (i) Hooks, rings, ob- alloy steel-chain slings from service if
long links, pear shaped links, welded or it is heated above 1000 degrees F. When
mechanical coupling links or other at- exposed to service temperatures in ex-
tachments shall have a rated capacity cess of 600 degrees F, employers must
at least equal to that of the alloy steel reduce the maximum working-load
chain with which they are used or the limits permitted by the chain manufac-
sling shall not be used in excess of the turer in accordance with the chain or
589
sling manufacturer’s recommenda- times the component rope diameter be-
tions. tween splices, sleeves or end fittings.
(7) Repairing and reconditioning alloy (ii) Braided slings shall have a min-
steel chain slings. (i) Worn or damaged imum clear length of wire rope 40 times
alloy steel chain slings or attachments the component rope diameter between
shall not be used until repaired. When the loops or end fittings.
welding or heat testing is performed, (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid
slings shall not be used unless repaired, grommets and endless slings shall have
reconditioned and proof tested by the a minimum circumferential length of
sling manufacturer or an equivalent 96 times their body diameter.
entity. (3) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber
(ii) Mechanical coupling links or low core wire rope slings of all grades shall
carbon steel repair links shall not be be permanently removed from service
used to repair broken lengths of chain. if they are exposed to temperatures in
(8) Effect of wear. If the chain size at excess of 200 °F. When nonfiber core
any point of the link is less than that wire rope slings of any grade are used
stated in Table N–184–1, the employer at temperatures above 400 °F or below
must remove the chain from service. minus 60 °F, recommendations of the
(9) Deformed attachments. (i) Alloy sling manufacturer regarding use at
steel chain slings with cracked or de- that temperature shall be followed.
formed master links, coupling links or (4) End attachments. (i) Welding of end
other components shall be removed attachments, except covers to thim-
from service. bles, shall be performed prior to the as-
sembly of the sling.
TABLE N–184–1—MINIMUM ALLOWABLE CHAIN (ii) All welded end attachments shall
SIZE AT ANY POINT OF LINK not be used unless proof tested by the
Minimum allowable chain
manufacturer or equivalent entity at
Chain size, inches size, inches twice their rated capacity prior to ini-
tial use. The employer shall retain a
14⁄ ⁄
13 64
38⁄ ⁄
19 64 certificate of the proof test, and make
1⁄2 ⁄
25 64 it available for examination.
5⁄8
3⁄4
31⁄64
19⁄32
(5) Removal from service. Wire rope
7⁄8 45⁄64
slings shall be immediately removed
1 13⁄16 from service if any of the following
1 ⁄8
1 29⁄32
conditions are present:
1 ⁄4
1 1 (i) Ten randomly distributed broken
13⁄8 13⁄32
11⁄2 13⁄16 wires in one rope lay, or five broken
13⁄4 113⁄32 wires in one strand in one rope lay.
(ii) Wear or scraping of one-third the
(ii) Slings shall be removed from original diameter of outside individual
service if hooks are cracked, have been wires.
opened more than 15 percent of the nor- (iii) Kinking, crushing, bird caging or
mal throat opening measured at the any other damage resulting in distor-
narrowest point or twisted more than tion of the wire rope structure.
10 degrees from the plane of the unbent (iv) Evidence of heat damage.
hook. (v) End attachments that are
(f) Wire-rope slings—(1) Sling use. Em- cracked, deformed or worn.
ployers must use only wire-rope slings (vi) Hooks that have been opened
that have permanently affixed and leg- more than 15 percent of the normal
ible identification markings as pre- throat opening measured at the nar-
scribed by the manufacturer, and that rowest point or twisted more than 10
indicate the recommended safe work- degrees from the plane of the unbent
ing load for the type(s) of hitch(es) hook.
used, the angle upon which it is based, (vii) Corrosion of the rope or end at-
and the number of legs if more than tachments.
one. (g) Metal mesh slings—(1) Sling mark-
(2) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable ing. Each metal mesh sling shall have
laid and 6×19 and 6×37 slings shall have permanently affixed to it a durable
a minimum clear length of wire rope 10 marking that states the rated capacity
590
for vertical basket hitch and choker (ii) Reduction in wire diameter of 25
hitch loadings. per cent due to abrasion or 15 per cent
(2) Handles. Handles shall have a due to corrosion.
rated capacity at least equal to the (iii) Lack of flexibility due to distor-
metal fabric and exhibit no deformation of the fabric.
tion after proof testing. (iv) Distortion of the female handle
(3) Attachments of handles to fabric. so that the depth of the slot is in-
The fabric and handles shall be joined creased more than 10 per cent.
so that: (v) Distortion of either handle so
(i) The rated capacity of the sling is that the width of the eye is decreased
not reduced. more than 10 per cent.
(ii) The load is evenly distributed (vi) A 15 percent reduction of the
across the width of the fabric. original cross sectional area of metal
(iii) Sharp edges will not damage the at any point around the handle eye.
fabric. (vii) Distortion of either handle out
(4) Sling coatings. Coatings which di- of its plane.
minish the rated capacity of a sling (h) Natural and synthetic fiber-rope
shall not be applied. slings—(1) Sling use. Employers must
(5) Sling testing. All new and repaired use natural and synthetic fiber-rope
metal mesh slings, including handles, slings that have permanently affixed
shall not be used unless proof tested by and legible identification markings
the manufacturer or equivalent entity stating the rated capacity for the
at a minimum of 11⁄2 times their rated type(s) of hitch(es) used and the angle
capacity. Elastomer impregnated upon which it is based, type of fiber
slings shall be proof tested before coat- material, and the number of legs if
ing. more than one.
(6) [Reserved] (2) Safe operating temperatures. Nat-
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Metal ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex-
mesh slings which are not impregnated cept for wet frozen slings, may be used
with elastomers may be used in a tem- in a temperature range from minus 20
perature range from minus 20 °F to °F to plus 180 °F without decreasing the
plus 550 °F without decreasing the working load limit. For operations out-
working load limit. Metal mesh slings side this temperature range and for wet
impregnated with polyvinyl chloride or frozen slings, the sling manufacturer’s
neoprene may be used only in a tem- recommendations shall be followed.
perature range from zero degrees to (3) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings
plus 200 °F. For operations outside shall not be used unless they have been
these temperature ranges or for metal spliced in accordance with the fol-
mesh slings impregnated with other lowing minimum requirements and in
materials, the sling manufacturer’s accordance with any additional rec-
recommendations shall be followed. ommendations of the manufacturer:
(8) Repairs. (i) Metal mesh slings (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall
which are repaired shall not be used consist of at least three full tucks, and
unless repaired by a metal mesh sling short splices shall consist of at least
manufacturer or an equivalent entity. six full tucks, three on each side of the
(ii) Once repaired, each sling shall be splice center line.
permanently marked or tagged, or a (ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye
written record maintained, to indicate splices shall consist of at least four full
the date and nature of the repairs and tucks, and short splices shall consist of
the person or organization that per- at least eight full tucks, four on each
formed the repairs. Records of repairs side of the center line.
shall be made available for examina- (iii) Strand end tails shall not be
tion. trimmed flush with the surface of the
(9) Removal from service. Metal mesh rope immediately adjacent to the full
slings shall be immediately removed tucks. This applies to all types of fiber
from service if any of the following rope and both eye and short splices.
conditions are present: For fiber rope under one inch in diame-
(i) A broken weld or broken brazed ter, the tail shall project at least six
joint along the sling edge. rope diameters beyond the last full
591
tuck. For fiber rope one inch in diame- of repaired or reconditioned fiber rope
ter and larger, the tail shall project at slings is prohibited.
least six inches beyond the last full (i) Synthetic web slings—(1) Sling iden-
tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes tification. Each sling shall be marked or
with the use of the sling, the tail shall coded to show the rated capacities for
be tapered and spliced into the body of each type of hitch and type of syn-
the rope using at least two additional thetic web material.
tucks (which will require a tail length (2) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall
of approximately six rope diameters be of uniform thickness and width and
beyond the last full tuck). selvage edges shall not be split from
(iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a
the webbing’s width.
minimum clear length of rope between
eye splices equal to 10 times the rope (3) Fittings. Fittings shall be:
diameter. (i) Of a minimum breaking strength
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of equal to that of the sling; and
splices. (ii) Free of all sharp edges that could
(vi) Clamps not designed specifically in any way damage the webbing.
for fiber ropes shall not be used for (4) Attachment of end fittings to web-
splicing. bing and formation of eyes. Stitching
(vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall shall be the only method used to at-
be of such size to provide an included tach end fittings to webbing and to
angle of not greater than 60 degrees at form eyes. The thread shall be in an
the splice when the eye is placed over even pattern and contain a sufficient
the load or support. number of stitches to develop the full
(4) End attachments. Fiber rope slings breaking strength of the sling.
shall not be used if end attachments in (5) [Reserved]
contact with the rope have sharp edges (6) Environmental conditions. When
or projections. synthetic web slings are used, the fol-
(5) Removal from service. Natural and
lowing precautions shall be taken:
synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im-
mediately removed from service if any (i) Nylon web slings shall not be used
of the following conditions are present: where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or
(i) Abnormal wear. liquids of acids or phenolics are
(ii) Powdered fiber between strands. present.
(iii) Broken or cut fibers. (ii) Polyester and polypropylene web
(iv) Variations in the size or round- slings shall not be used where fumes,
ness of strands. vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
(v) Discoloration or rotting. caustics are present.
(vi) Distortion of hardware in the (iii) Web slings with aluminum fit-
sling. tings shall not be used where fumes,
(6) Repairs. Only fiber rope slings vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
made from new rope shall be used. Use caustics are present.
592
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn- web slings shall not be used at tem-
thetic web slings of polyester and peratures in excess of 200 °F.
nylon shall not be used at tempera- (8) Repairs. (i) Synthetic web slings
EC27OC91.051</GPH>
tures in excess of 180 °F. Polypropylene which are repaired shall not be used
593
EC27OC91.050</GPH>
unless repaired by a sling manufac- rear end, which is used for pushing
turer or an equivalent entity. short stock over revolving cutters.
(ii) Each repaired sling shall be proof (b) As used in § 1910.215 unless the
tested by the manufacturer or equiva- context clearly requires otherwise, the
lent entity to twice the rated capacity following abrasive wheel machinery
prior to its return to service. The em- terms shall have the meanings pre-
ployer shall retain a certificate of the scribed in this paragraph.
proof test and make it available for ex- (1) Type 1 straight wheels means
amination. wheels having diameter, thickness, and
(iii) Slings, including webbing and hole size dimensions, and they should
fittings, which have been repaired in a be used only on the periphery. Type 1
temporary manner shall not be used. wheels shall be mounted between
(9) Removal from service. Synthetic
flanges.
web slings shall be immediately re-
moved from service if any of the fol- LIMITATION: Hole dimension (H) should not
lowing conditions are present: be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter
(i) Acid or caustic burns; dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical,
(ii) Melting or charring of any part of centerless, or surface grinding applications.
the sling surface; Maximum hole size for all other applications
should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.
(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts;
(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or
(v) Distortion of fittings. FIGURE NO. 0–1—TYPE 1 STRAIGHT
WHEELS
FR 31598, July 28, 1975; 41 FR 13353, Mar. 30,
1976; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9240,
Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011]
Subpart O—Machinery and

Machine Guarding
TYPE 1—STRAIGHT WHEEL
retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), Peripheral grinding wheel having a
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 diameter, thickness and hole.
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017),
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), 4– (2) Type 2 cylinder wheels means
2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as wheels having diameter, wheel thick-
applicable; and 29 CFR 1911.
ness, and rim thickness dimensions.
Sections 1910.176, 1910.177, 1910.178, 1910.179,
1910.180, 1910.181, and 1910.184 also issued Grinding is performed on the rim face
under 29 CFR part 1911. only, dimension W. Cylinder wheels
may be plain, plate mounted, inserted
§ 1910.211 Definitions. nut, or of the projecting stud type.
(a) As used in §§ 1910.213 and 1910.214 LIMITATION: Rim height, T dimension, is
unless the context clearly requires oth- generally equal to or greater than rim thick-
erwise, the following woodworking ma- ness, W dimension.
chinery terms shall have the meaning
prescribed in this paragraph. FIGURE NO. 0–2—TYPE 2 CYLINDER
(1) Point of operations means that WHEELS
point at which cutting, shaping, bor-
ing, or forming is accomplished upon
the stock.
(2) Push stick means a narrow strip of
wood or other soft material with a
notch cut into one end and which is
used to push short pieces of material
through saws.
(3) Block means a short block of
wood, provided with a handle similar to
that of a plane and a shoulder at the TYPE 2—CYLINDER WHEEL
EC27OC91.053
594
EC27OC91.052
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thick- FIGURE NO. 0–4—TYPE 11 FLARING
ness and wall—wheel is mounted on the diame- CUP WHEELS
ter.
(3) Type 6 straight cup wheels means
wheels having diameter, thickness,
hole size, rim thickness, and back
thickness dimensions. Grinding is al-
ways performed on rim face, W dimen-
sion.
LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E
dimension, should not be less than one-
fourth T dimension. In addition, when
unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the in-
side flat, K dimension, must be large enough
to accommodate a suitable flange. TYPE 11—FLARING-CUP WHEEL
Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or ta-
FIGURE NO. 0–3—TYPE 6 STRAIGHT pered outward from the back. Wall thickness at
CUP WHEELS the back is normally greater than at the grind-
ing face (W).
(5) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (ter-
razzo) mean some type 6 and 11 cup
wheels used in the terrazzo trade hav-
ing tapered K dimensions to match a
special tapered flange furnished by the
machine builder.
LIMITATION: These wheels shall be mounted
only with a special tapered flange.
FIGURE NO. 0–5

TYPE 6—STRAIGHT-CUP WHEEL
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thick-
ness and hole with one side straight or flat and
the opposite side recessed. This type, however,
differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is per-
formed on the wall of the abrasive created by
the difference between the diameter of the recess
and the outside diameter of the wheel. There-
fore, the wall dimension ‘‘W’’ takes precedence TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF MODIFIED TYPES 6 AND
over the diameter of the recess as an essential 11 WHEELS (TERRAZZO) SHOWING TAPERED K
intermediate dimension to describe this shape DIMENSIONS.
type. (6) Types 27 and 28 depressed center
(4) Type 11 flaring cup wheels mean wheels mean wheels having diameter,
wheels having double diameter dimen- thickness, and hole size dimensions.
sions D and J, and in addition have Both types are reinforced, organic
thickness, hole size, rim and back bonded wheels having offset hubs which
thickness dimensions. Grinding is al- permit side and peripheral grinding op-
ways performed on rim face, W dimen- erations without interference with the
sion. Type 11 wheels are subject to all mounting. Type 27 wheels are manufac-
limitations of use and mounting listed tured with flat grinding rims permit-
for type 6 straight sided cup wheels def- ting notching and cutting operations.
inition. Type 28 wheels have saucer shaped
grinding rims.
LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E (i) Limitations: Special supporting,
fourth T dimension. In addition when
back adapter and inside flange nuts are
EC27OC91.056
unthreaded hole wheels are specified the in- required for the proper mounting of
side flat, K dimension, shall be large enough these types of wheels subject to limita-
to accommodate a suitable flange. tions of § 1910.215(c)(4) (i) and (ii).
EC27OC91.055
595
EC27OC91.054
(ii) Mounts which are affixed to the (i) Limitation: Cutting off wheels are
wheel by the manufacturer may not re- recommended only for use on specially
quire an inside nut and shall not be re- designed and fully guarded machines
used. and are subject to the following max-
(7) Type 27A depressed center, cutting- imum thickness and hole size limita-
off wheels mean wheels having diame- tions.
ter, thickness, and hole size dimen-
Max. thick-
sions. They are reinforced, organic Wheel diameter ness (inch)
bonded, offset hub type wheels, usually
16 inches diameter and larger, specially 6 inch and smaller ............................................... ⁄
3 18
Larger than 6 inches to 12 inches ...................... ⁄

14
designed for use on cutting-off ma-
Larger than 12 inches to 23 inches .................... ⁄
38
chines where mounting nut or outer Larger than 23 inches ......................................... 1⁄2
flange interference cannot be toler-

ated. (ii) Maximum hole size for cutting-off
LIMITATIONS: See § 1910.215(c)(1). wheels should not be larger than 1⁄4-
wheel diameter.
(8) Surface feet per minute (s.f.p.m.) (14) Abrasive wheel means a cutting
means the distance in feet any one ab- tool consisting of abrasive grains held
rasive grain on the peripheral surface together by organic or inorganic bonds.
of a grinding wheel travels in 1 minute. Diamond and reinforced wheels are in-
Surface Feet Per Minute= 3.1416×diameter in cluded.
inches×r.p.m.÷12 or .262×diameter in (15) Organic wheels means wheels
inches×r.p.m. which are bonded by means of an or-
Examples: (a) 24-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 ganic material such as resin, rubber,
revolutions per minute. Surface Feet per shellac, or other similar bonding agent.
minute .262×24×1,000=6,288 s.f.p.m. (16) Inorganic wheels means wheels
(b) 12-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolu- which are bonded by means of inor-
tions per minute. Surface Feet per minute ganic material such as clay, glass, por-
.262×12×1,000=3,144 s.f.p.m. celain, sodium silicate, magnesium
(9) Flanges means collars, discs or oxychloride, or metal. Wheels bonded
plates between which wheels are with clay, glass, porcelain or related
mounted and are referred to as adap- ceramic materials are characterized as
tor, sleeve, or back up type. See para- vitrified bonded wheels.
graph (c) of § 1910.215 for full descrip- (c) As used in § 1910.216, unless the
tion. context clearly requires otherwise, the
(10) Snagging means grinding which following mills and calenders in the
removes relatively large amounts of rubber and plastic industries terms
material without regard to close toler- shall have the meanings prescribed in
ances or surface finish requirements. this paragraph.
(11) Off-hand grinding means the (1) Bite means the nip point between
grinding of any material or part which any two inrunning rolls.
is held in the operator’s hand. (2) Calender means a machine
(12) Safety guard means an enclosure equipped with two or more metal rolls
designed to restrain the pieces of the revolving in opposite directions and
grinding wheel and furnish all possible used for continuously sheeting or ply-
protection in the event that the wheel ing up rubber and plastics compounds
is broken in operation. See paragraph and for frictioning or coating materials
(b) of § 1910.215. with rubber and plastics compounds.
(13) Cutting off wheels means wheels (3) Mill means a machine consisting
having diameter thickness and hole of two adjacent metal rolls, set hori-
size dimensions and are subject to all zontally, which revolve in opposite di-
limitations of mounting and use listed rections (i.e., toward each other as
for type 1 wheels, the definition in sub- viewed from above) used for the me-
paragraph (1) of this paragraph and chanical working of rubber and plastics
paragraph (d) of § 1910.215. They may be compounds.
steel centered, diamond abrasive or or- (d) As used in § 1910.217, unless the
ganic bonded abrasive of the plain or context clearly requires otherwise, the
reinforced type. following power press terms shall have
596
the meaning prescribed in this para- the weight of the connecting rods,
graph. slide, and slide attachments.
(1) Antirepeat means the part of the (11) Device means a press control or
clutch/brake control system designed attachment that:
to limit the press to a single stroke if (i) Restrains the operator from inad-
the tripping means is held operated. vertently reaching into the point of op-
Antirepeat requires release of all trip- eration, or
ping mechanisms before another stroke (ii) Prevents normal press operation
can be initiated. Antirepeat is also if the operator’s hands are inadvert-
called single stroke reset or reset cir- ently within the point of operation, or
cuit. (iii) Automatically withdraws the op-
(2) Brake means the mechanism used erator’s hands if the operator’s hands
on a mechanical power press to stop are inadvertently within the point of
and/or hold the crankshaft, either di- operation as the dies close, or
rectly or through a gear train, when (iv) Prevents the initiation of a
the clutch is disengaged. stroke, or stops of stroke in progress,
(3) Bolster plate means the plate at- when there is an intrusion through the
tached to the top of the bed of the sensing field by any part of the opera-
press having drilled holes or T-slots for tor’s body or by any other object.
attaching the lower die or die shoe. (12) Presence sensing device means a
(4) Clutch means the coupling mecha- device designed, constructed and ar-
nism used on a mechanical power press ranged to create a sensing field or area
to couple the flywheel to the crank- that signals the clutch/brake control to
shaft, either directly or through a gear deactivate the clutch and activate the
train. brake of the press when any part of the
(5) Full revolution clutch means a type operator’s body or a hand tool is within
of clutch that, when tripped, cannot be such field or area.
disengaged until the crankshaft has (13) Gate or movable barrier device
completed a full revolution and the means a movable barrier arranged to
press slide a full stroke. enclose the point of operation before
(6) Part revolution clutch means a type the press stroke can be started.
of clutch that can be disengaged at any (14) Holdout or restraint device means a
point before the crankshaft has com- mechanism, including attachments for
pleted a full revolution and the press operator’s hands, that when anchored
slide a full stroke. and adjusted prevent the operator’s
(7) Direct drive means the type of hands from entering the point of oper-
driving arrangement wherein no clutch ation.
is used; coupling and decoupling of the (15) Pull-out device means a mecha-
driving torque is accomplished by nism attached to the operator’s hands
energization and deenergization of a and connected to the upper die or slide
motor. Even though not employing a of the press, that is designed, when
clutch, direct drives match the oper- properly adjusted, to withdraw the op-
ational characteristics of ‘‘part revolu- erator’s hands as the dies close, if the
tion clutches’’ because the driving operator’s hands are inadvertently
power may be disengaged during the within the point of operation.
stroke of the press. (16) Sweep device means a single or
(8) Concurrent means acting in con- double arm (rod) attached to the upper
junction, and is used to describe a situ- die or slide of the press and designed to
ation wherein two or more controls move the operator’s hands to a safe po-
exist in an operated condition at the sition as the dies close, if the opera-
same time. tor’s hands are inadvertently within
(9) Continuous means uninterrupted the point of operation.
multiple strokes of the slide without (17) Two hand control device means a
intervening stops (or other clutch con- two hand trip that further requires
trol action) at the end of individual concurrent pressure from both hands of
strokes. the operator during a substantial part
(10) Counterbalance means the mecha- of the die-closing portion of the stroke
nism that is used to balance or support of the press.
597
(18) Die means the tooling used in a (31) Foot pedal means the foot oper-
press for cutting or forming material. ated lever designed to operate the me-
An upper and a lower die make a com- chanical linkage that trips a full revo-
plete set. lution clutch.
(19) Die builder means any person who (32) Guard means a barrier that pre-
builds dies for power presses. vents entry of the operator’s hands or
(20) Die set means a tool holder held fingers into the point of operation.
in alignment by guide posts and bush- (33) Die enclosure guard means an en-
ings and consisting of a lower shoe, an closure attached to the die shoe or
upper shoe or punch holder, and guide stripper, or both, in a fixed position.
posts and bushings. (34) Fixed barrier guard means a die
(21) Die setter means an individual space barrier attached to the press
who places or removes dies in or from frame.
mechanical power presses, and who, as (35) Interlocked press barrier guard
a part of his duties, makes the nec- means a barrier attached to the press
essary adjustments to cause the tool- frame and interlocked so that the press
ing to function properly and safely. stroke cannot be started normally un-
(22) Die setting means the process of less the guard itself, or its hinged or
placing or removing dies in or from a movable sections, enclose the point of
mechanical power press, and the proc- operation.
ess of adjusting the dies, other tooling (36) Adjustable barrier guard means a
and safeguarding means to cause them barrier requiring adjustment for each
to function properly and safely. job or die setup.
(23) Die shoe means a plate or block (37) Guide post means the pin at-
upon which a die holder is mounted. A tached to the upper or lower die shoe
die shoe functions primarily as a base operating within the bushing on the
for the complete die assembly, and, opposing die shoe, to maintain the
when used, is bolted or clamped to the alignment of the upper and lower dies.
bolster plate or the face of slide. (38) Hand feeding tool means any hand
(24) Ejector means a mechanism for held tool designed for placing or re-
removing work or material from be- moving material or parts to be proc-
tween the dies. essed within or from the point of oper-
(25) Face of slide means the bottom ation.
surface of the slide to which the punch (39) Inch means an intermittent mo-
or upper die is generally attached. tion imparted to the slide (on machines
(26) Feeding means the process of using part revolution clutches) by mo-
placing or removing material within or mentary operation of the Inch oper-
from the point of operation. ating means. Operation of the Inch op-
(27) Automatic feeding means feeding erating means engages the driving
wherein the material or part being clutch so that a small portion of one
processed is placed within or removed stroke or indefinite stroking can occur,
from the point of operation by a meth- depending upon the length of time the
od or means not requiring action by an Inch operating means is held operated.
operator on each stroke of the press. Inch is a function used by the die setter
(28) Semiautomatic feeding means feed- for setup of dies and tooling, but is not
ing wherein the material or part being intended for use during production op-
processed is placed within or removed erations by the operator.
from the point of operation by an aux- (40) Jog means an intermittent mo-
iliary means controlled by operator on tion imparted to the slide by momen-
each stroke of the press. tary operation of the drive motor, after
(29) Manual feeding means feeding the clutch is engaged with the flywheel
wherein the material or part being at rest.
processed is handled by the operator on (41) Knockout means a mechanism for
each stroke of the press. releasing material from either die.
(30) Foot control means the foot oper- (42) Liftout means the mechanism
ated control mechanism designed to be also known as knockout.
used with a clutch or clutch/brake con- (43) Operator’s station means the com-
trol system. plete complement of controls used by
598
or available to an operator on a given mines the type of stroking when the
operation for stroking the press. operating means is actuated. The
(44) Pinch point means any point stroking selector generally includes
other than the point of operation at positions for ‘‘Off’’ (Clutch Control),
which it is possible for a part of the ‘‘Inch,’’ ‘‘Single Stroke,’’ and ‘‘Contin-
body to be caught between the moving uous’’ (when Continuous is furnished).
parts of a press or auxiliary equipment, (55) Trip or (tripping) means activa-
or between moving and stationary tion of the clutch to ‘‘run’’ the press.
parts of a press or auxiliary equipment (56) Turnover bar means a bar used in
or between the material and moving die setting to manually turn the crank-
part or parts of the press or auxiliary shaft of the press.
equipment. (57) Two-hand trip means a clutch ac-
(45) Point of operation means the area tuating means requiring the concur-
of the press where material is actually rent use of both hands of the operator
positioned and work is being performed to trip the press.
during any process such as shearing, (58) Unitized tooling means a type of
punching, forming, or assembling. die in which the upper and lower mem-
(46) Press means a mechanically pow- bers are incorporated into a
ered machine that shears, punches, selfcontained unit so arranged as to
forms or assembles metal or other ma- hold the die members in alignment.
terial by means of cutting, shaping, or (59) Control system means sensors,
combination dies attached to slides. A manual input and mode selection ele-
press consists of a stationary bed or ments, interlocking and decision-mak-
anvil, and a slide (or slides) having a ing circuitry, and output elements to
controlled reciprocating motion to- the press operating mechanism.
ward and away from the bed surface, (60) Brake monitor means a sensor de-
the slide being guided in a definite signed, constructed, and arranged to
path by the frame of the press. monitor the effectiveness of the press
(47) Repeat means an unintended or braking system.
unexpected successive stroke of the (61) Presence sensing device initiation
press resulting from a malfunction. means an operating mode of indirect
(48) Safety block means a prop that, manual initiation of a single stroke by
when inserted between the upper and a presence sensing device when it
lower dies or between the bolster plate senses that work motions of the oper-
and the face of the slide, prevents the ator, related to feeding and/or remov-
slide from falling of its own dead- ing parts, are completed and all parts
weight. of the operator’s body or hand tools are
(49) Single stroke means one complete safely clear of the point of operation.
stroke of the slide, usually initiated (62) Safety system means the inte-
from a full open (or up) position, fol- grated total system, including the per-
lowed by closing (or down), and then a tinent elements of the press, the con-
return to the full open position. trols, the safeguarding and any re-
(50) Single stroke mechanism means an quired supplemental safeguarding, and
arrangement used on a full revolution their interfaces with the operator, and
clutch to limit the travel of the slide the environment, designed, constructed
to one complete stroke at each engage- and arranged to operate together as a
ment of the clutch. unit, such that a single failure or sin-
(51) Slide means the main recipro- gle operating error will not cause in-
cating press member. A slide is also jury to personnel due to point of oper-
called a ram, plunger, or platen. ation hazards.
(52) Stop control means an operator (63) Authorized person means one to
control designed to immediately de- whom the authority and responsibility
activate the clutch control and acti- to perform a specific assignment has
vate the brake to stop slide motion. been given by the employer.
(53) Stripper means a mechanism or (64) Certification or certify means, in
die part for removing the parts or ma- the case of design certification/valida-
terial from the punch. tion, that the manufacturer has re-
(54) Stroking selector means the part of viewed and tested the design and man-
the clutch/brake control that deter- ufacture, and in the case of installation
599
certification/validation and annual re- metals are made more plastic for forg-
certification/revalidation, that the em- ing by heating.
ployer has reviewed and tested the in- (2) Open framehammers (or blacksmith
stallation, and concludes in both cases hammers) mean hammers used pri-
that the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) marily for the shaping of forgings by
through (h) and appendix A have been means of impact with flat dies. Open
met. The certifications are made to the frame hammers generally are so con-
validation organization. structed that the anvil assembly is sep-
(65) Validation or validate means for arate from the operating mechanism
PSDI safety systems that an OSHA and machine supports; it rests on its
recognized third-party validation orga- own independent foundation. Certain
nization: exceptions are forging hammers made
(i) For design certification/validation with frame mounted on the anvil; e.g.,
has reviewed the manufacturer’s cer- the smaller, single-frame hammers are
tification that the PSDI safety system usually made with the anvil and frame
meets the requirements of § 1910.217 (a) in one piece.
through (h) and appendix A and the un- (3) Steam hammers mean a type of
derlying tests and analyses performed drop hammer where the ram is raised
by the manufacturer, has performed for each stroke by a double-action
additional tests and analyses which steam cylinder and the energy deliv-
may be required by § 1910.217 (a) ered to the workpiece is supplied by
through (h) and appendix A, and con- the velocity and weight of the ram and
cludes that the requirements of attached upper die driven downward by
§ 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A steam pressure. Energy delivered dur-
have been met; and ing each stroke may be varied.
(4) Gravity hammers mean a class of
(ii) For installation certification/val-
forging hammer wherein energy for
idation and annual recertification/re-
forging is obtained by the mass and ve-
validation has reviewed the employer’s
locity of a freely falling ram and the
certification that the PSDI safety sys-
attached upper die. Examples: board
tem meets the requirements of
hammers and air-lift hammers.
§ 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A (5) Forging presses mean a class of
and the underlying tests performed by forging equipment wherein the shaping
the employer, has performed additional of metal between dies is performed by
tests and analyses which may be re- mechanical or hydraulic pressure, and
quired by § 1910.217 (a) through (h) and usually is accomplished with a single
appendix A, and concludes that the re- workstroke of the press for each die
quirements of § 1910.217 (a) through (h) station.
and appendix A have been met. (6) Trimming presses mean a class of
(66) Certification/validation and certify/ auxiliary forging equipment which re-
validate means the combined process of moves flash or excess metal from a
certification and validation. forging. This trimming operation can
(e) As used in § 1910.218, unless the also be done cold, as can coining, a
context clearly requires otherwise, the product sizing operation.
following forging and hot metal terms (7) High-energy-rate forging machines
shall have the meaning prescribed in mean a class of forging equipment
this paragraph. wherein high ram velocities resulting
(1) Forging means the product of work from the sudden release of a com-
on metal formed to a desired shape by pressed gas against a free piston im-
impact or pressure in hammers, forging part impact to the workpiece.
machines (upsetters), presses, rolls, (8) Forging rolls mean a class of auxil-
and related forming equipment. Forg- iary forging equipment wherein stock
ing hammers, counterblow equipment is shaped between power driven rolls
and high-energy-rate forging machines bearing contoured dies. Usually used
impart impact to the workpiece, while for preforming, roll forging is often
most other types of forging equipment employed to reduce thickness and in-
impart squeeze pressure in shaping the crease length of stock.
stock. Some metals can be forged at (9) Ring rolls mean a class for forging
room temperature, but the majority of equipment used for shaping weldless
600
rings from pierced discs or thick- (8) Point of operation means that
walled, ring-shaped blanks between point at which cutting, shaping, or
rolls which control wall thickness, ring forming is accomplished upon the
diameter, height and contour. stock and shall include such other
(10) Bolt-headers mean the same as an points as may offer a hazard to the op-
upsetter or forging machine except erator in inserting or manipulating the
that the diameter of stock fed into the stock in the operation of the machine.
machine is much smaller, i.e., com- (9) Prime movers include steam, gas,
monly three-fourths inch or less. oil, and air engines, motors, steam and
(11) Rivet making machines mean the hydraulic turbines, and other equip-
same as upsetters and boltheaders ment used as a source of power.
when producing rivets with stock di- (10) Sheaves mean grooved pulleys,
ameter of 1-inch or more. Rivet making and shall be so classified unless used as
with less than 1-inch diameter is usu- flywheels.
ally a cold forging operation, and [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39
therefore not included in this subpart. FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 53 FR 8353, Mar. 14,
(12) Upsetters (or forging machines, 1988]
or headers) type of forging equipment,
related to the mechanical press, in § 1910.212 General requirements for all
which the main forming energy is ap- machines.
plied horizontally to the workpiece (a) Machine guarding—(1) Types of
which is gripped and held by prior ac- guarding. One or more methods of ma-
tion of the dies. chine guarding shall be provided to
(f) As used in § 1910.219, unless the protect the operator and other employ-
context clearly requires otherwise, the ees in the machine area from hazards
following mechanical power-trans- such as those created by point of oper-
mission guarding terms shall have the ation, ingoing nip points, rotating
meaning prescribed in this paragraph. parts, flying chips and sparks. Exam-
(1) Belts include all power trans- ples of guarding methods are—barrier
mission belts, such as flat belts, round guards, two-hand tripping devices, elec-
belts, V-belts, etc., unless otherwise tronic safety devices, etc.
specified. (2) General requirements for machine
(2) Belt shifter means a device for me- guards. Guards shall be affixed to the
chanically shifting belts from tight to machine where possible and secured
loose pulleys or vice versa, or for shift- elsewhere if for any reason attachment
ing belts on cones of speed pulleys. to the machine is not possible. The
(3) Belt pole (sometimes called a belt guard shall be such that it does not
shipper or shipper pole,) means a device offer an accident hazard in itself.
used in shifting belts on and off fixed (3) Point of operation guarding. (i)
pulleys on line or countershaft where Point of operation is the area on a ma-
there are no loose pulleys. chine where work is actually performed
(4) Exposed to contact means that the upon the material being processed.
location of an object is such that a per- (ii) The point of operation of ma-
son is likely to come into contact with chines whose operation exposes an em-
it and be injured. ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The
(5) Flywheels include flywheels, bal- guarding device shall be in conformity
ance wheels, and flywheel pulleys with any appropriate standards there-
mounted and revolving on crankshaft for, or, in the absence of applicable spe-
of engine or other shafting. cific standards, shall be so designed
(6) Maintenance runway means any and constructed as to prevent the oper-
permanent runway or platform used for ator from having any part of his body
oiling, maintenance, running adjust- in the danger zone during the operating
ment, or repair work, but not for pas- cycle.
sageway. (iii) Special handtools for placing and
(7) Nip-point belt and pulley guard removing material shall be such as to
means a device which encloses the pul- permit easy handling of material with-
ley and is provided with rounded or out the operator placing a hand in the
rolled edge slots through which the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in
belt passes. lieu of other guarding required by this
601
section, but can only be used to supple- tilting arbors the fence shall be so con-
ment protection provided. structed that it will remain in a line
(iv) The following are some of the parallel with the saw, regardless of the
machines which usually require point angle of the saw with the table.
of operation guarding: (7) Circular saw gages shall be so con-
(a) Guillotine cutters. structed as to slide in grooves or
(b) Shears. tracks that are accurately machined,
(c) Alligator shears. to insure exact alignment with the saw
(d) Power presses. for all positions of the guide.
(e) Milling machines. (8) Hinged saw tables shall be so con-
(f) Power saws. structed that the table can be firmly
(g) Jointers. secured in any position and in true
(h) Portable power tools. alignment with the saw.
(i) Forming rolls and calenders. (9) All belts, pulleys, gears, shafts,
(4) Barrels, containers, and drums. Re- and moving parts shall be guarded in
volving drums, barrels, and containers accordance with the specific require-
shall be guarded by an enclosure which ments of § 1910.219.
is interlocked with the drive mecha-
(10) It is recommended that each
nism, so that the barrel, drum, or con-
power-driven woodworking machine be
tainer cannot revolve unless the guard
provided with a disconnect switch that
enclosure is in place.
can be locked in the off position.
(5) Exposure of blades. When the pe-
riphery of the blades of a fan is less (11) The frames and all exposed, non-
than seven (7) feet above the floor or current-carrying metal parts of port-
working level, the blades shall be able electric woodworking machinery
guarded. The guard shall have openings operated at more than 90 volts to
no larger than one-half (1⁄2) inch. ground shall be grounded and other
(b) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma- portable motors driving electric tools
chines designed for a fixed location which are held in the hand while being
shall be securely anchored to prevent operated shall be grounded if they op-
walking or moving. erate at more than 90 volts to ground.
The ground shall be provided through
§ 1910.213 Woodworking machinery reuse of a separate ground wire and po-
quirements. larized plug and receptacle.
(a) Machine construction general. (1) (12) For all circular saws where con-
Each machine shall be so constructed ditions are such that there is a possi-
as to be free from sensible vibration bility of contact with the portion of
when the largest size tool is mounted the saw either beneath or behind the
and run idle at full speed. table, that portion of the saw shall be
(2) Arbors and mandrels shall be con- covered with an exhaust hood, or, if no
structed so as to have firm and secure exhaust system is required, with a
bearing and be free from play. guard that shall be so arranged as to
(3) [Reserved] prevent accidental contact with the
(4) Any automatic cutoff saw that saw.
strokes continuously without the oper- (13) Revolving double arbor saws
ator being able to control each stroke shall be fully guarded in accordance
shall not be used. with all the requirements for circular
(5) Saw frames or tables shall be con- crosscut saws or with all the require-
structed with lugs cast on the frame or ments for circular ripsaws, according
with an equivalent means to limit the to the kind of saws mounted on the ar-
size of the saw blade that can be bors.
mounted, so as to avoid overspeed (14) No saw, cutter head, or tool col-
caused by mounting a saw larger than lar shall be placed or mounted on a ma-
intended. chine arbor unless the tool has been ac-
(6) Circular saw fences shall be so curately machined to size and shape to
constructed that they can be firmly se- fit the arbor.
cured to the table or table assembly (15) Combs (featherboards) or suitable
without changing their alignment with jigs shall be provided at the workplace
the saw. For saws with tilting tables or for use when a standard guard cannot
602
be used, as in dadoing, grooving, joint- teeth. It shall be made of material that
ing, moulding, and rabbeting. is soft enough so that it will be un-
(b) Machine controls and equipment. (1) likely to cause tooth breakage. The
A mechanical or electrical power con- hood shall be so mounted as to insure
trol shall be provided on each machine that its operation will be positive, reli-
to make it possible for the operator to able, and in true alignment with the
cut off the power from each machine saw; and the mounting shall be ade-
without leaving his position at the quate in strength to resist any reason-
point of operation. able side thrust or other force tending
(2) On machines driven by belts and to throw it out of line.
shafting, a locking-type belt shifter or (2) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw
an equivalent positive device shall be shall be furnished with a spreader to
used. prevent material from squeezing the
(3) On applications where injury to saw or being thrown back on the oper-
the operator might result if motors ator. The spreader shall be made of
were to restart after power failures, hard tempered steel, or its equivalent,
provision shall be made to prevent ma- and shall be thinner than the saw kerf.
chines from automatically restarting It shall be of sufficient width to pro-
upon restoration of power. vide adequate stiffness or rigidity to
(4) Power controls and operating con- resist any reasonable side thrust or
trols should be located within easy blow tending to bend or throw it out of
reach of the operator while he is at his position. The spreader shall be at-
regular work location, making it un- tached so that it will remain in true
necessary for him to reach over the alignment with the saw even when ei-
cutter to make adjustments. This does ther the saw or table is tilted. The pro-
not apply to constant pressure controls vision of a spreader in connection with
used only for setup purposes. grooving, dadoing, or rabbeting is not
(5) On each machine operated by elec- required. On the completion of such op-
tric motors, positive means shall be erations, the spreader shall be imme-
provided for rendering such controls or diately replaced.
devices inoperative while repairs or ad- (3) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw
justments are being made to the ma- shall be provided with nonkickback
chines they control. fingers or dogs so located as to oppose
(6) Each operating treadle shall be the thrust or tendency of the saw to
protected against unexpected or acci- pick up the material or to throw it
dental tripping. back toward the operator. They shall
(7) Feeder attachments shall have the be designed to provide adequate hold-
feed rolls or other moving parts so cov- ing power for all the thicknesses of ma-
ered or guarded as to protect the oper- terials being cut.
ator from hazardous points. (d) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1)
(c) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular Each circular crosscut table saw shall
hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a be guarded by a hood which shall meet
hood which shall completely enclose all the requirements of paragraph (c)(1)
that portion of the saw above the table of this section for hoods for circular
and that portion of the saw above the ripsaws.
material being cut. The hood and (2) [Reserved]
mounting shall be arranged so that the (e) Circular resaws. (1) Each circular
hood will automatically adjust itself to resaw shall be guarded by a hood or
the thickness of and remain in contact shield of metal above the saw. This
with the material being cut but it shall hood or shield shall be so designed as
not offer any considerable resistance to to guard against danger from flying
insertion of material to saw or to pas- splinters or broken saw teeth.
sage of the material being sawed. The (2) Each circular resaw (other than
hood shall be made of adequate self-feed saws with a roller or wheel at
strength to resist blows and strains in- back of the saw) shall be provided with
cidental to reasonable operation, ad- a spreader fastened securely behind the
justing, and handling, and shall be so saw. The spreader shall be slightly
designed as to protect the operator thinner than the saw kerf and slightly
from flying splinters and broken saw thicker than the saw disk.
603
(f) Self-feed circular saws. (1) Feed bolt put through the extreme end of
rolls and saws shall be protected by a the bar, or, where the counterweight
hood or guard to prevent the hands of does not encircle the bar, a safety
the operator from coming in contact chain attached to it.
with the in-running rolls at any point. (3) Limit chains or other equally ef-
The guard shall be constructed of fective devices shall be provided to pre-
heavy material, preferably metal, and vent the saw from swinging beyond the
the bottom of the guard shall come front or back edges of the table, or be-
down to within three-eighths inch of yond a forward position where the gul-
the plane formed by the bottom or lets of the lowest saw teeth will rise
working surfaces of the feed rolls. This above the table top.
distance (three-eighths inch) may be (4) Inverted swing cutoff saws shall
increased to three-fourths inch, probe provided with a hood that will cover
vided the lead edge of the hood is ex- the part of the saw that protrudes
tended to be not less than 51⁄2 inches in above the top of the table or above the
front of the nip point between the front material being cut. It shall automati-
roll and the work. cally adjust itself to the thickness of
(2) Each self-feed circular ripsaw and remain in contact with the mate-
shall be provided with sectional non- rial being cut.
kickback fingers for the full width of (h) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood
the feed rolls. They shall be located in shall completely enclose the upper por-
front of the saw and so arranged as to tion of the blade down to a point that
be in continual contact with the wood will include the end of the saw arbor.
being fed. The upper hood shall be constructed in
(g) Swing cutoff saws. The require- such a manner and of such material
ments of this paragraph are also appli- that it will protect the operator from
cable to sliding cutoff saws mounted flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc.,
above the table. and will deflect sawdust away from the
(1) Each swing cutoff saw shall be operator. The sides of the lower ex-
provided with a hood that will composed portion of the blade shall be
pletely enclose the upper half of the guarded to the full diameter of the
saw, the arbor end, and the point of op- blade by a device that will automati-
eration at all positions of the saw. The cally adjust itself to the thickness of
hood shall be constructed in such a the stock and remain in contact with
manner and of such material that it stock being cut to give maximum pro-
will protect the operator from flying tection possible for the operation being
splinters and broken saw teeth. Its performed.
hood shall be so designed that it will (2) Each radial saw used for ripping
automatically cover the lower portion shall be provided with nonkickback
of the blade, so that when the saw is fingers or dogs located on both sides of
returned to the back of the table the the saw so as to oppose the thrust or
hood will rise on top of the fence, and tendency of the saw to pick up the ma-
when the saw is moved forward the terial or to throw it back toward the
hood will drop on top of and remain in operator. They shall be designed to
contact with the table or material provide adequate holding power for all
being cut. the thicknesses of material being cut.
(2) Each swing cutoff saw shall be (3) An adjustable stop shall be pro-
provided with an effective device to re- vided to prevent the forward travel of
turn the saw automatically to the back the blade beyond the position nec-
of the table when released at any point essary to complete the cut in repetitive
of its travel. Such a device shall not operations.
depend for its proper functioning upon (4) Installation shall be in such a
any rope, cord, or spring. If there is a manner that the front end of the unit
counterweight, the bolts supporting will be slightly higher than the rear, so
the bar and counterweight shall be pro- as to cause the cutting head to return
vided with cotter pins; and the coun- gently to the starting position when
terweight shall be prevented from drop- released by the operator.
ping by either a bolt passing through (5) Ripping and ploughing shall be
both the bar and counterweight, or a against the direction in which the saw
604
turns. The direction of the saw rota- ance between the edge of the rear table
tion shall be conspicuously marked on and the cutter head shall be not more
the hood. In addition, a permanent than one-eighth inch. The table throat
label not less than 11⁄2 inches by 3⁄4 inch opening shall be not more than 21⁄2
shall be affixed to the rear of the guard inches when tables are set or aligned
at approximately the level of the arbor, with each other for zero cut.
reading as follows: ‘‘Danger: Do Not (3) Each hand-fed jointer with a hori-
Rip or Plough From This End’’. zontal cutting head shall have an auto-
(i) Bandsaws and band resaws. (1) All matic guard which will cover all the
portions of the saw blade shall be en- section of the head on the working side
closed or guarded, except for the work- of the fence or gage. The guard shall ef-
ing portion of the blade between the fectively keep the operator’s hand from
bottom of the guide rolls and the table. coming in contact with the revolving
Bandsaw wheels shall be fully encased. knives. The guard shall automatically
The outside periphery of the enclosure adjust itself to cover the unused por-
shall be solid. The front and back of tion of the head and shall remain in
the band wheels shall be either en- contact with the material at all times.
closed by solid material or by wire (4) Each hand-fed jointer with hori-
mesh or perforated metal. Such mesh zontal cutting head shall have a guard
or perforated metal shall be not less which will cover the section of the
than 0.037 inch (U.S. Gage No. 20), and head back of the gage or fence.
the openings shall be not greater than
(5) Each wood jointer with vertical
three-eighths inch. Solid material used
head shall have either an exhaust hood
for this purpose shall be of an equiva-
or other guard so arranged as to en-
lent strength and firmness. The guard
close completely the revolving head,
for the portion of the blade between
except for a slot of such width as may
the sliding guide and the upper-saw-
be necessary and convenient for the ap-
wheel guard shall protect the saw blade
plication of the material to be jointed.
at the front and outer side. This por-
tion of the guard shall be self-adjusting (k) Tenoning machines. (1) Feed chains
to raise and lower with the guide. The and sprockets of all double end
upper-wheel guard shall be made to tenoning machines shall be completely
conform to the travel of the saw on the enclosed, except for that portion of
wheel. chain used for conveying the stock.
(2) Each bandsaw machine shall be (2) At the rear ends of frames over
provided with a tension control device which feed conveyors run, sprockets
to indicate a proper tension for the and chains shall be guarded at the sides
standard saws used on the machine, in by plates projecting beyond the periph-
order to assist in the elimination of ery of sprockets and the ends of lugs.
saw breakage due to improper tension. (3) Each tenoning machine shall have
(3) Feed rolls of band resaws shall be all cutting heads, and saws if used, cov-
protected with a suitable guard to pre- ered by metal guards. These guards
vent the hands of the operator from shall cover at least the unused part of
coming in contact with the in-running the periphery of the cutting head. If
rolls at any point. The guard shall be such a guard is constructed of sheet
constructed of heavy material, pref- metal, the material used shall be not
erably metal, and the edge of the guard less than one-sixteenth inch in thick-
shall come to within three-eighths inch ness, and if cast iron is used, it shall be
of the plane formed by the inside face not less than three-sixteenths inch in
of the feed roll in contact with the thickness.
stock being cut. (4) Where an exhaust system is used,
(j) Jointers. (1) Each hand-fed planer the guard shall form part or all of the
and jointer with horizontal head shall exhaust hood and shall be constructed
be equipped with a cylindrical cutting of metal of a thickness not less than
head, the knife projection of which that specified in subparagraph (3) of
shall not exceed one-eighth inch be- this paragraph.
yond the cylindrical body of the head. (l) Boring and mortising machines. (1)
(2) The opening in the table shall be Safety-bit chucks with no projecting
kept as small as possible. The clear- set screws shall be used.
605
(2) Boring bits should be provided (2) Where an exhaust system is used,
with a guard that will enclose all por- the guards shall form part or all of the
tions of the bit and chuck above the exhaust hood and shall be constructed
material being worked. of metal of a thickness not less than
(3) The top of the cutting chain and that specified in paragraph (h)(1) of
driving mechanism shall be enclosed. this section.
(4) If there is a counterweight, one of (3) Feed rolls shall be guarded by a
the following or equivalent means shall hood or suitable guard to prevent the
be used to prevent its dropping: hands of the operator from coming in
(i) It shall be bolted to the bar by contact with the in-running rolls at
means of a bolt passing through both any point. The guard shall be fastened
bar and counterweight; to the frame carrying the rolls so as to
(ii) A bolt shall be put through the remain in adjustment for any thick-
extreme end of the bar; ness of stock.
(iii) Where the counterweight does (4) Surfacers or planers used in
not encircle the bar, a safety chain thicknessing multiple pieces of mate-
shall be attached to it; rial simultaneously shall be provided
(iv) Other types of counterweights with sectional infeed rolls having suffi-
shall be suspended by chain or wire cient yield in the construction of the
rope and shall travel in a pipe or other sections to provide feeding contact
suitable enclosure wherever they might pressure on the stock, over the permis-
fall and cause injury. sible range of variation in stock thick-
(5) Universal joints on spindles of ness specified or for which the machine
boring machines shall be completely is designed. In lieu of such yielding sec-
enclosed in such a way as to prevent tional rolls, suitable section kickback
accidental contact by the operator. finger devices shall be provided at the
(6) Each operating treadle shall be infeed end.
covered by an inverted U-shaped metal (o) Profile and swing-head lathes and
guard, fastened to the floor, and of ade- wood heel turning machine. (1) Each pro-
quate size to prevent accidental trip- file and swing-head lathe shall have all
ping. cutting heads covered by a metal
(m) Wood shapers and similar equip- guard. If such a guard is constructed of
ment. (1) The cutting heads of each sheet metal, the material used shall be
wood shaper, hand-fed panel raiser, or not less than one-sixteenth inch in
other similar machine not automati- thickness; and if cast iron is used, it
cally fed, shall be enclosed with a cage shall not be less than three-sixteenths
or adjustable guard so designed as to inch in thickness.
keep the operator’s hand away from (2) Cutting heads on wood-turning
the cutting edge. The diameter of cir- lathes, whether rotating or not, shall
cular shaper guards shall be not less be covered as completely as possible by
than the greatest diameter of the cut- hoods or shields.
ter. In no case shall a warning device of (3) Shoe last and spoke lathes,
leather or other material attached to doweling machines, wood heel turning
the spindle be acceptable. machines, and other automatic wood-
(2) [Reserved] turning lathes of the rotating knife
(3) All double-spindle shapers shall be type shall be equipped with hoods en-
provided with a spindle starting and closing the cutter blades completely
stopping device for each spindle. except at the contact points while the
(n) Planing, molding, sticking, and stock is being cut.
matching machines. (1) Each planing, (4) Lathes used for turning long
molding, sticking, and matching ma- pieces of wood stock held only between
chine shall have all cutting heads, and the two centers shall be equipped with
saws if used, covered by a metal guard. long curved guards extending over the
If such guard is constructed of sheet tops of the lathes in order to prevent
metal, the material used shall be not the work pieces from being thrown out
less than 1⁄16 inch in thickness, and if of the machines if they should become
cast iron is used, it shall be not less loose.
than three-sixteenths inch in thick- (5) Where an exhaust system is used,
ness. the guard shall form part or all of the
606
exhaust hood and shall be constructed shall be provided with rods or plates or
of metal of a thickness not less than other satisfactory means, so arranged
that specified in subparagraph (1) of on the feeding side that the hands can-
this paragraph. not reach the cutting edge of the knife
(p) Sanding machines. (1) Feed rolls of while feeding or holding the stock in
self-feed sanding machines shall be pro- place.
tected with a semicylindrical guard to (5) Power-driven guillotine veneer
prevent the hands of the operator from cutters, except continuous feed trim-
coming in contact with the in-running mers, shall be equipped with:
rolls at any point. The guard shall be (i) Starting devices which require the
constructed of heavy material, pref- simultaneous action of both hands to
erably metal, and firmly secured to the start the cutting motion and of at least
frame carrying the rolls so as to re- one hand on a control during the com-
main in adjustment for any thickness plete stroke of the knife; or
of stock. The bottom of the guard (ii) An automatic guard which will
should come down to within three- remove the hands of the operator from
eighths inch of a plane formed by the the danger zone at every descent of the
bottom or contact face of the feed roll blade, used in conjunction with one-
where it touches the stock. hand starting devices which require
(2) Each drum sanding machine shall
two distinct movements of the device
have an exhaust hood, or other guard if
to start the cutting motion, and so de-
no exhaust system is required, so ar-
signed as to return positively to the
ranged as to enclose the revolving
nonstarting position after each com-
drum, except for that portion of the
plete cycle of the knife.
drum above the table, if a table is used,
which may be necessary and conven- (6) Where two or more workers are
ient for the application of the material employed at the same time on the
to be finished. same power-driven guillotine veneer
(3) Each disk sanding machine shall cutter equipped with two-hand control,
have the exhaust hood, or other guard the device shall be so arranged that
if no exhaust system is required, so ar- each worker shall be required to use
ranged as to enclose the revolving disk, both hands simultaneously on the con-
except for that portion of the disk trols to start the cutting motion, and
above the table, if a table is used, at least one hand on a control to com-
which may be necessary for the appli- plete the cut.
cation of the material to be finished. (7) Power-driven guillotine veneer
(4) Belt sanding machines shall be cutters, other than continuous trim-
provided with guards at each nip point mers, shall be provided, in addition to
where the sanding belt runs on to a the brake or other stopping mecha-
pulley. These guards shall effectively nism, with an emergency device which
prevent the hands or fingers of the op- will prevent the machine from oper-
erator from coming in contact with the ating in the event of failure of the
nip points. The unused run of the sand- brake when the starting mechanism is
ing belt shall be guarded against acci- in the nonstarting position.
dental contact. (r) Miscellaneous woodworking ma-
(q) Veneer cutters and wringers. (1) Ve- chines. (1) The feed rolls of roll type
neer slicer knives shall be guarded to glue spreaders shall be guarded by a
prevent accidental contact with knife semicylindrical guard. The bottom of
edge, at both front and rear. the guard shall come to within three-
(2) Veneer clippers shall have auto- eighths inch of a plane formed by bot-
matic feed or shall be provided with a tom or contact face of the feed roll
guard which will make it impossible to where it touches the stock.
place a finger or fingers under the (2) Drag saws shall be so located as to
knife while feeding or removing the give at least a 4-foot clearance for pas-
stock. sage when the saw is at the extreme
(3) Sprockets on chain or slat-belt end of the stroke; or if such clearance
conveyors shall be enclosed. is not obtainable, the saw and its driv-
(4) Where practicable, hand and ing mechanism shall be provided with a
footpower guillotine veneer cutters standard enclosure.
607
(3) For combination or universal does not protrude more than one-
woodworking machines each point of eighth inch beyond the cylindrical
operation of any tool shall be guarded body of the head. Push sticks or push
as required for such a tool in a separate blocks shall be provided at the work
machine. place in the several sizes and types
(4) The mention of specific machines suitable for the work to be done.
in paragraphs (a) thru (q) and this (13) Whenever veneer slicers or rotary
paragraph (r) of this section, inclusive, veneer-cutting machines have been
is not intended to exclude other wood- shutdown for the purpose of inserting
working machines from the require- logs or to make adjustments, operators
ment that suitable guards and exhaust shall make sure that machine is clear
hoods be provided to reduce to a min- and other workmen are not in a haz-
imum the hazard due to the point of ardous position before starting the ma-
operation of such machines. chine.
(s) Inspection and maintenance of (14) Operators shall not ride the car-
woodworking machinery. (1) Dull, badly riage of a veneer slicer.
set, improperly filed, or improperly [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
tensioned saws shall be immediately FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10,
removed from service, before they 1984]
begin to cause the material to stick,
jam, or kick back when it is fed to the § 1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Re-
saw at normal speed. Saws to which served]
gum has adhered on the sides shall be
immediately cleaned. § 1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery.
(2) All knives and cutting heads of (a) General requirements—(1) Machine
woodworking machines shall be kept guarding. Abrasive wheels shall be used
sharp, properly adjusted, and firmly se- only on machines provided with safety
cured. Where two or more knives are guards as defined in the following para-
used in one head, they shall be properly graphs of this section, except:
balanced. (i) Wheels used for internal work
(3) Bearings shall be kept free from while within the work being ground;
lost motion and shall be well lubri- (ii) Mounted wheels, used in portable
cated. operations, 2 inches and smaller in di-
(4) Arbors of all circular saws shall be ameter; and
free from play. (iii) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19
(5) Sharpening or tensioning of saw cones, plugs, and threaded hole pot
blades or cutters shall be done only by balls where the work offers protection.
persons of demonstrated skill in this (2) Guard design. The safety guard
kind of work. shall cover the spindle end, nut, and
(6) Emphasis is placed upon the im- flange projections. The safety guard
portance of maintaining cleanliness shall be mounted so as to maintain
around woodworking machinery, par- proper alignment with the wheel, and
ticularly as regards the effective func- the strength of the fastenings shall ex-
tioning of guards and the prevention of ceed the strength of the guard, except:
fire hazards in switch enclosures, bear- (i) Safety guards on all operations
ings, and motors. where the work provides a suitable
(7) All cracked saws shall be removed measure of protection to the operator,
from service. may be so constructed that the spindle
(8) The practice of inserting wedges end, nut, and outer flange are exposed;
between the saw disk and the collar to and where the nature of the work is
form what is commonly known as a such as to entirely cover the side of the
‘‘wobble saw’’ shall not be permitted. wheel, the side covers of the guard may
(9) Push sticks or push blocks shall be omitted; and
be provided at the work place in the (ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer
several sizes and types suitable for the flange may be exposed on machines de-
work to be done. signed as portable saws.
(10)–(11) [Reserved] (3) Flanges. Grinding machines shall
(12) The knife blade of jointers shall be equipped with flanges in accordance
be so installed and adjusted that it with paragraph (c) of this section.
608
(4) Work rests. On offhand grinding
machines, work rests shall be used to
support the work. They shall be of
rigid construction and designed to be
adjustable to compensate for wheel
wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted
closely to the wheel with a maximum
opening of one-eighth inch to prevent
the work from being jammed between
the wheel and the rest, which may
cause wheel breakage. The work rest FIGURE NO. O–6 FIGURE NO. O–7
shall be securely clamped after each Wherever the nature of the work re-
adjustment. The adjustment shall not quires contact with the wheel below
be made with the wheel in motion. the horizontal plane of the spindle, the
(5) Excluded machinery. Natural sand- exposure shall not exceed 125°. (See
stone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, Figures O–8 and O–9.)
or paper discs, having a layer of abra-
sive on the surface are not covered by
this section.
(b) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin-
ery—(1) Cup wheels. Cup wheels (Types
6 and 11) shall be protected by:
(i) Safety guards as specified in para-
graphs (b) (1) through (10) of this sec-
tion;
(ii) Band type guards as specified in
paragraph (b)(11) of this section; and FIGURE NO. O–8 FIGURE NO. O–9
(iii) Special ‘‘Revolving Cup Guards’’ (4) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum
which mount behind the wheel and angular exposure of the grinding wheel
turn with it. They shall be made of periphery and sides for safety guards
steel or other material with adequate used on cylindrical grinding machines
strength and shall enclose the wheel shall not exceed 180°. This exposure
sides upward from the back for one-
shall begin at a point not more than 65°
third of the wheel thickness. The
above the horizontal plane of the wheel
mounting features shall conform with
spindle. (See Figures O–10 and O–11 and
all requirements of this section. It is
necessary to maintain clearance be- subparagraph (9) of this paragraph.)
tween the wheel side and the guard.
This clearance shall not exceed one-
sixteenth inch.
(2) Guard exposure angles. The max-
imum exposure angles specified in
paragraphs (b) (3) through (8) of this
section shall not be exceeded. Visors or
other accessory equipment shall not be
included as a part of the guard when
measuring the guard opening, unless
FIGURE NO. O–10 FIGURE NO. O–11
such equipment has strength equal to
that of the guard. (5) Surface grinders and cutting-off ma-
(3) Bench and floor stands. The angu- chines. The maximum angular exposure
lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- of the grinding wheel periphery and
riphery and sides for safety guards used sides for safety guards used on cutting-
on machines known as bench and floor off machines and on surface grinding
stands should not exceed 90° or one- machines which employ the wheel pe-
fourth of the periphery. This exposure riphery shall not exceed 150°. This ex-
shall begin at a point not more than 65° posure shall begin at a point not less
EC27OC91.059
above the horizontal plane of the wheel than 15° below the horizontal plane of
spindle. (See Figures O–6 and O–7 and the wheel spindle. (See Figures O–12
paragraph (b)(9) of this section.) and O–13)
EC27OC91.058
609
EC27OC91.057
shall be constructed so that the periph-

eral protecting member can be ad-
justed to the constantly decreasing di-
ameter of the wheel. The maximum an-
gular exposure above the horizontal
plane of the wheel spindle as specified
in paragraphs (b) (3) and (4) of this sec-
tion shall never be exceeded, and the
distance between the wheel periphery
FIGURE NO. O–12 FIGURE NO. O–13 and the adjustable tongue or the end of
(6) Swing frame grinders. The max- the peripheral member at the top shall
imum angular exposure of the grinding never exceed one-fourth inch. (See Fig-
wheel periphery and sides for safety ures O–18, O–19, O–20, O–21, O–22, and O–
guards used on machines known as 23.)
swing frame grinding machines shall (10) Material requirements and min-
not exceed 180°, and the top half of the imum dimensions. (i) See Figures O–36
wheel shall be enclosed at all times. and O–37 and Table O–9 for minimum
(See Figures O–14 and O–15.) basic thickness of peripheral and side
members for various types of safety
guards and classes of service.
(ii) If operating speed does not exceed
8,000 surface feet per minute cast iron
safety guards, malleable iron guards or
other guards as described in paragraph
(b)(10)(iii) of this section shall be used.
(iii) Cast steel, or structural steel,
safety guards as specified in Figures O–
FIGURE NO. O–14 FIGURE NO. O–15 36 and O–37 and Table O–9 shall be used
(7) Automatic snagging machines. The where operating speeds of wheels are
maximum angular exposure of the faster than 8,000 surface feet per
grinding wheel periphery and sides for minute up to a maximum of 16,000 sur-
safety guards used on grinders known face feet per minute.
as automatic snagging machines shall (iv) For cutting-off wheels 16 inches
not exceed 180° and the top half of the diameter and smaller and where speed
wheel shall be enclosed at all times. does not exceed 16,000 surface feet per
(See Figures O–14 and O–15.) minute, cast iron or malleable iron
(8) Top grinding. Where the work is safety guards as specified in Figures O–
applied to the wheel above the hori- 36 and O–37, and in Table O–9 shall be
zontal centerline, the exposure of the
used.
grinding wheel periphery shall be as
small as possible and shall not exceed
60°. (See Figures O–16 and O–17.)
CORRECT
EC27OC91.063
Showing adjustable tongue giving re-

quired angular protection for all sizes of
(9) Exposure adjustment. Safety guards
wheel used.
EC27OC91.062
of the types described in subparagraphs

(3) and (4) of this paragraph, where the
operator stands in front of the opening,
EC27OC91.061
610
EC27OC91.060
that at no time will the wheel protrude
beyond the edge of the band a distance
greater than that indicated in Figure
O–29 and in Table O–2 or the wall thick-
ness (W), whichever is smaller.
(12) Guard design specifications. Abra-
sive wheel machinery guards shall
meet the design specifications of the
FIGURE NO. O–20 FIGURE NO. O–21 American National Standard Safety
Code for the Use, Care, and Protection
CORRECT of Abrasive Wheels, ANSI B7.1–1970,
which is incorporated by reference as
Showing movable guard with opening specified in § 1910.6. This requirement
small enough to give required protection shall not apply to natural sandstone
for smallest size wheel used. wheels or metal, wooden, cloth, or
paper discs, having a layer of abrasive
on the surface.
(c) Flanges—(1) General requirements.
All abrasive wheels shall be mounted
between flanges which shall not be less
than one-third the diameter of the
wheel.
(i) Exceptions:
(a) Mounted wheels.
FIGURE NO. O–22 FIGURE NO. O–23 (b) Portable wheels with threaded in-
serts or projecting studs.
INCORRECT
(c) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, in-
Showing movable guard with size of open- serted washer and projecting stud
ing correct for full size wheel but too type).
large for smaller wheels. (d) Plate mounted wheels.
(v) For cutting-off wheels larger than (e) Cylinders, cup, or segmental
16 inches diameter and where speed wheels that are mounted in chucks.
does not exceed 14,200 surface feet per (f) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
minute, safety guards as specified in (g) Certain internal wheels.
Figures O–27 and O–28, and in Table O– (h) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels
1 shall be used. (terrazzo).
(vi) For thread grinding wheels not (i) Cutting-off wheels, Types 1 and
exceeding 1 inch in thickness cast iron 27A (see paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii)
or malleable iron safety guards as spec- of this section).
ified in Figures O–36 and O–37, and in (ii) Type 1 cutting-off wheels are to
Table O–9 shall be used. be mounted between properly relieved
(11) Band type guards—general speci- flanges which have matching bearing
fications. Band type guards shall con- surfaces. Such flanges shall be at least
form to the following general specifica- one-fourth the wheel diameter.
tions: (iii) Type 27A cutting-off wheels are
(i) The bands shall be of steel plate or designed to be mounted by means of
other material of equal or greater flat, not relieved, flanges having
strength. They shall be continuous, the matching bearing surfaces and which
ends being either riveted, bolted, or may be less than one-third but shall
welded together in such a manner as to not be less than one-fourth the wheel
leave the inside free from projections. diameter. (See Figure O–24 for one such
(ii) The inside diameter of the band type of mounting.)
shall not be more than 1 inch larger (iv) There are three general types of
than the outside diameter of the wheel, flanges:
and shall be mounted as nearly concen- (a) Straight relieved flanges (see Fig-
tric with the wheel as practicable. ure O–32);
(iii) The band shall be of sufficient (b) Straight unrelieved flanges (see
width and its position kept so adjusted Figure O–30);
EC27OC91.065
611
EC27OC91.064
(c) Adaptor flanges (see Figures O–33 bonded wheels. Mounts which are af-
and O–34); fixed to the wheel by the manufacturer
(v) Regardless of flange type used, shall not be reused. Type 27 and Type
the wheel shall always be guarded. 28 wheels shall be used only with a
Blotters shall be used in accordance safety guard located between wheel and
with paragraph (c)(6) of this section. operator during use. (See Figure O–24–
A.)
FIGURE NO. O–24–A

Types 27 and 28 wheels, because of their
FIGURE NO. O–24 shape, require specially designed adap-
The Type 27 A Wheel is mounted between tors.
flat non-relieved flanges of equal bear- (iii) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels
ing surfaces. (terrazzo) with tapered K dimension.
(2) [Reserved] (5) Recess and undercut. (i) Straight
(3) Finish and balance. Flanges shall relieved flanges made according to
be dimensionally accurate and in good Table O–6 and Figure O–32 shall be re-
balance. There shall be no rough sur- cessed at least one-sixteenth inch on
faces or sharp edges. the side next to the wheel for a dis-
(4) Uniformity of diameter. (i) Both tance as specified in Table O–6.
flanges, of any type, between which a (ii) Straight flanges of the adaptor or
wheel is mounted, shall be of the same sleeve type (Table O–7 and Figures O–33
diameter and have equal bearing sur- and O–34) shall be undercut so that
face. Exceptions are set forth in the re- there will be no bearing on the sides of
maining subdivisions of this subpara- the wheel within one-eighth inch of the
graph. arbor hole.
(ii) Type 27 and Type 28 wheels, be- (6) Blotters. (i) Blotters (compressible
cause of their shape and usage, require washers) shall always be used between
specially designed adaptors. The back flanges and abrasive wheel surfaces to
flange shall extend beyond the central insure uniform distribution of flange
hub or raised portion and contact the pressure. (See paragraph (d)(5) of this
wheel to counteract the side pressure section.)
on the wheel in use. The adaptor nut (ii) Exception:
which is less than the minimum one- (a) Mounted wheels.
third diameter of wheel fits in the de- (b) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, in-
pressed side of wheel to prevent inter- serted washer, and projecting stud
ference in side grinding and serves to type).
drive the wheel by its clamping force (c) Plate mounted wheels.
against the depressed portion of the (d) Cylinders, cups, or segmental
back flange. The variance in flange di- wheels that are mounted in chucks.
ameters, the adaptor nut being less (e) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
than one-third wheel diameter, and the (f) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cut-
use of side pressure in wheel operation ting-off wheels.
limits the use to reinforced organic (g) Certain internal wheels.
EC27OC91.067
612
EC27OC91.066
(h) Type 4 tapered wheels. shall be closely inspected and sounded
(i) Diamond wheels, except certain by the user (ring test) to make sure
vitrified diamond wheels. they have not been damaged in transit,
(j) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheel (ter- storage, or otherwise. The spindle
razzo)—blotters applied flat side of speed of the machine shall be checked
wheel only. before mounting of the wheel to be cer-
(7) Driving flange. The driving flange tain that it does not exceed the max-
shall be securely fastened to the spin- imum operating speed marked on the
dle and the bearing surface shall run wheel. Wheels should be tapped gently
true. When more than one wheel is with a light nonmetallic implement,
mounted between a single set of such as the handle of a screwdriver for
flanges, wheels may be cemented to- light wheels, or a wooden mallet for
gether or separated by specially de- heavier wheels. If they sound cracked
signed spacers. Spacers shall be equal (dead), they shall not be used. This is
in diameter to the mounting flanges known as the ‘‘Ring Test’’.
and have equal bearing surfaces. (See (i) Wheels must be dry and free from
paragraph (d)(6) of this section.) sawdust when applying the ring test,
(8) Dimensions. (i) Tables O–4 and O–6 otherwise the sound will be deadened.
and Figures O–30 and O–32 show min- It should also be noted that organic
imum dimensions for straight relieved bonded wheels do not emit the same
and unrelieved flanges for use with clear metallic ring as do vitrified and
wheels with small holes that fit di- silicate wheels.
rectly on the machine spindle. Dimen-
sions of such flanges shall never be less
than indicated.
(ii) Table O–5, and Table O–7 and Fig-
ures O–31, O–33, O–34 show minimum di-
mensions for straight adaptor flanges
for use with wheels having holes larger
than the spindle. Dimensions of such
adaptor flanges shall never be less than
indicated.
(iii) Table O–8 and Figure O–35 show
minimum dimensions for straight
flanges that are an integral part of
wheel sleeves which are frequently
used on precision grinding machines.
Dimensions of such flanges shall never
be less than indicated. FIGURE NO. O–25 FIGURE NO. O–26
(9) Repairs and maintenance. All (ii) ‘‘Tap’’ wheels about 45° each side
flanges shall be maintained in good of the vertical centerline and about 1
condition. When the bearing surfaces or 2 inches from the periphery as indi-
become worn, warped, sprung, or dam- cated by the spots in Figure O–25 and
aged they should be trued or refaced. Figure O–26. Then rotate the wheel 45°
When refacing or truing, care shall be and repeat the test. A sound and
exercised to make sure that proper re- undamaged wheel will give a clear me-
lief and rigidity is maintained as speci- tallic tone. If cracked, there will be a
fied in paragraphs (c) (2) and (5) of this dead sound and not a clear ‘‘ring.’’
section and they shall be replaced when (2) Arbor size. Grinding wheels shall
they do not conform to these subpara- fit freely on the spindle and remain
graphs and Table O–4, Figure O–30, free under all grinding conditions. A
Table O–5, Figure O–31, Table O–6, Fig- controlled clearance between the wheel
ure O–32, and Table O–8, Figure O–35. hole and the machine spindle (or wheel
Failure to observe these rules might sleeves or adaptors) is essential to
cause excessive flange pressure around avoid excessive pressure from mount-
the hole of the wheel. This is especially ing and spindle expansion. To accom-
true of wheel-sleeve or adaptor flanges. plish this, the machine spindle shall be
(d) Mounting—(1) Inspection. Imme- made to nominal (standard) size plus
diately before mounting, all wheels zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel
613
EC27OC91.068
hole shall be made suitably oversize to (iv) Cylinders, cups, or segmental
assure safety clearance under the con- wheels that are mounted in chucks.
ditions of operating heat and pressure. (v) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
(3) Surface condition. All contact sur- (vi) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cut-
faces of wheels, blotters and flanges ting-off wheels.
shall be flat and free of foreign matter. (vii) Certain internal wheels.
(4) Bushing. When a bushing is used (viii) Type 4 tapered wheels.
in the wheel hole it shall not exceed (ix) Diamond wheels, except certain
the width of the wheel and shall not vitrified diamond wheels.
contact the flanges. (6) Multiple wheel mounting. When
more than one wheel is mounted be-
(5) Blotters. When blotters or flange
tween a single set of flanges, wheels
facings of compressible material are re-
may be cemented together or separated
quired, they shall cover entire contact by specially designed spacers. Spacers
area of wheel flanges. Blotters need not shall be equal in diameter to the
be used with the following types of mounting flanges and have equal bear-
wheels: ing surfaces. When mounting wheels
(i) Mounted wheels. which have not been cemented to-
(ii) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, in- gether, or ones which do not utilize
serted washer, and projecting-stud separating spacers, care must be exer-
type). cised to use wheels specially manufac-
(iii) Plate mounted wheels. tured for that purpose.
TABLE O–1—MINIMUM BASIC THICKNESS FOR PERIPHERAL AND SIDE MEMBERS FOR SAFETY
GUARDS USED WITH CUTTING-OFF WHEELS
Cutting off wheel diameters
Material used in Maximum thick- Speed not to 6 to 11 Over 11 to Over 20 to Over 30 to Over 48 to
construction of ness of cutting exceed inches 20 inches 30 inches 48 inches 72 inches
guard off wheel
A B A B A B A B A B
Structural steel ⁄ inch or less

12 14,200 SFPM .. ⁄
1 16 1 16⁄ ⁄
3 32 ⁄
3 32 18 ⁄ 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄
(min. tensile
strength
60,000 p.s.i.).
⁄ inch or less
12 16,000 SFPM .. ⁄
3 32 18 ⁄ 18 ⁄ 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 16 18 ⁄ 14 ⁄ ⁄
3 16 ⁄
5 16 14 ⁄
614
EC27OC91.069</GPH>
TABLE O–3—GUIDE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF BAND TYPE GUARDS

[Maximum Wheel Speed 7,000 SFPM]
Maximum
Minimum Minimum distance
Minimum material specifications Diameter of wheel thickness diameter of between
of band A rivets centers of
rivets
Inches
Hot rolled steel SAE 1008 .......................... Under 8 ...................................................... ⁄

1 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
34
8 to 24 ........................................................ 18 ⁄ 14 ⁄ 1
Over 24 to 30 ............................................. 14 ⁄ 38 ⁄ 1 ⁄
14
TABLE O–5—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT ADAPTOR FLANGE—FOR ORGANIC BONDED

WHEELS OVER 11⁄4 INCHES THICK 1
[In inches]
D— E—Min-
B—Min- Minimun imum F 1—(D-E)
Wheel hole imum thickness
Wheel diameter diameter flange di- thickness of flange at minimum
ameter of flange at edge of thickness
bore
undercut
12 to 14 ................................................................................... 4 6 ⁄
78 ⁄
38 ⁄
12
5 7 ⁄
78 ⁄
38 ⁄
12
6 8 ⁄
78 ⁄
38 ⁄
12
Larger than 14 to 18 ............................................................... 4 6 7⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄2
5 7 7⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄2
6 8 7⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄2
7 9 7⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄2
8 10 7⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄2

EC27OC91.071</GPH>
Larger than 18 to 24 ............................................................... 6 8 1 1⁄2 1⁄2
7 9 1 1⁄2 1⁄2
615
EC27OC91.070</GPH>
TABLE O–5—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT ADAPTOR FLANGE—FOR ORGANIC BONDED
WHEELS OVER 11⁄4 INCHES THICK 1—Continued
[In inches]
D— E—Min-
B—Min- imum
Wheel hole imum Minimun thickness F 1—(D-E)
Wheel diameter diameter flange di- thickness of flange at
minimum
of flange at thickness
ameter bore edge of
undercut
8 10 1 ⁄
12 ⁄
12
10 12 1 ⁄
12 ⁄
12
12 14 1 1⁄2 ⁄
12
Larger than 24 to 30 ............................................................... 12 15 1 1⁄2 1⁄2
Larger than 30 to 36 ............................................................... 12 15 13⁄8 7⁄8 1⁄2
1 For wheels under 11⁄4 inches thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness.
TABLE O–6—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT RELIEVED FLANGES 1

[In inches]
C—Radial width of bear- E—Min-

B—Min- ing surface D—Min- imum
imum out- imum
thickness
A—Diameter of wheel side di- thickness of flange at
ameter of of flange at
Minimum Maximum edge of re-
flanges bore cess
1 .............................................................................................. ⁄
38 ⁄
1 16 1⁄8 ⁄
1 16 ⁄
1 16
2 .............................................................................................. ⁄
34 18⁄ ⁄
3 16 18 ⁄ ⁄
3 32
3 .............................................................................................. 1 18⁄ ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 32
4 .............................................................................................. 1 ⁄8
3 1⁄8 3⁄16 ⁄
3 16 18 ⁄
5 .............................................................................................. 1 ⁄4
3 3⁄16 1⁄4 ⁄
14 18 ⁄
6 .............................................................................................. 2 1⁄4 1⁄2 3⁄8 ⁄
3 16
7 .............................................................................................. 21⁄2 1⁄4 1⁄2 3⁄8 ⁄

3 16
8 .............................................................................................. 3 1⁄4 1⁄2 3⁄8 ⁄

3 16
10 ............................................................................................ 31⁄2 5⁄16 5⁄8 3⁄8 1⁄4
12 ............................................................................................ 4 5⁄16 5⁄8 1⁄2 ⁄

5 16
14 ............................................................................................ 41⁄2 3⁄8 3⁄4 1⁄2 5⁄16
16 ............................................................................................ 51⁄2 1⁄2 1 1⁄2 5⁄16
18 ............................................................................................ 6 1⁄2 1 5⁄8 3⁄8
20 ............................................................................................ 7 5⁄8 11⁄4 5⁄8 3⁄8
22 ............................................................................................ 71⁄2 5⁄8 11⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄16
24 ............................................................................................ 8 3⁄4 11⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄16
26 ............................................................................................ 81⁄2 3⁄4 11⁄4 5⁄8 1⁄2
28 ............................................................................................ 10 7⁄8 11⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
30 ............................................................................................ 10 7⁄8 11⁄2 3⁄4 5⁄8
36 ............................................................................................ 12 1 2 7⁄8 3⁄4
42 ............................................................................................ 14 1 2 7⁄8 3⁄4
48 ............................................................................................ 16 11⁄4 2 11⁄8 1

60 ............................................................................................ 20 1 ⁄4
1 2 11⁄4 1 ⁄8
1
72 ............................................................................................ 24 11⁄2 21⁄2 13⁄8 1 ⁄4

1
1 Flanges for wheels under 2 inches diameter may be unrelieved and shall be maintained flat and true.
616
EC27OC91.072</GPH>
TABLE O–7—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT FLANGES—FOR MECHANICAL GRINDERS 12,500

S.F.P.M. TO 16,5 S.F.P.M. 1
D—Minimum thick- E—Minimum thick-
Wheel diameter Wheel hole diame- B—Minimum flange ness of flange at ness of flange at F 2—(D-E) min-
ter diameter imum thickness
bore edge of undercut
20 6 8 1 12 ⁄ ⁄
12
20 8 10 11⁄2 34 ⁄ ⁄
34
24 12 15 2 1 1
30 12 15 2 1 1
36 12 15 2 1
1 Flanges shall be of steel, quality SAE 1040 or equivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to R. 25–30.
2 For wheels under 11⁄4 inch thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness.
TABLE O–8—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT FLANGES USED AS WHEEL SLEEVES FOR
PRECISION GRINDING ONLY
[In inches]
E—Min-
B—Min- D—Min- imum
Wheel hole imum out- imum thickness
Wheel diameter side di- thickness
diameter ameter of of flange at of flange at
flange bore edge of
undercut
12 to 14 ......................................................................................................... 5 7 ⁄
12 ⁄
7 16
Larger than 14 to 20 ..................................................................................... 5 7 ⁄

58 ⁄
7 16
6 8 5⁄8 7⁄16
8 10 5⁄8 7⁄16
10 11 ⁄2
1 5⁄8 7⁄16
12 131⁄2 5⁄8 7⁄16
Larger than 20 to 30 ..................................................................................... 8 10 3⁄4 1⁄2
10 111⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
12 131⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
16 171⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
Larger than 30 to 42 ..................................................................................... 12 131⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
16 171⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
18 191⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
20 211⁄2 3⁄4 1⁄2
Larger than 42 to 60 ..................................................................................... 16 20 1 3⁄4
20 24 1 3⁄4
24 29 11⁄8 7⁄8
EC27OC91.074</GPH>
NOTE: These flanges may be clamped together by means of a central nut, or by a series of bolts or some other equivalent
means of fastening. For hole sizes smaller than shown in this table, use table 12.
617
EC27OC91.073</GPH>
618
EC27OC91.075</GPH>
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:18 Jul 22, 2013
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor

TABLE O–9—MINIMUM BASIC THICKNESSES OF PERIPHERAL AND SIDE MEMBERS FOR SAFETY GUARDS
[In inches]
Max- Grinding wheel diameters

Jkt 229116
imum
thick- Over 6 to 12 Over 12 to 16 Over 16 to 20 Over 20 to 24 Over 24 to 30 Over 30 to 48
Material used in construction of guard ness of 3 to 6 inches inches inches inches inches inches inches
grind-
ing
wheel A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
PO 00000
Material 2 14 ⁄ 14⁄ ⁄
38 ⁄
5 16 ⁄12 ⁄
38 ⁄58 ⁄12 ⁄
78 ⁄ 58 1 ⁄
34 11⁄4 1
satis- 4 5 16⁄ ⁄
5 16 ⁄
38 ⁄
5 16 ⁄12 ⁄
38 ⁄34 ⁄58 1 ⁄58 11⁄8 ⁄
34 13⁄8 1
factory 1 6 38 ⁄ 5⁄16 1⁄2 7⁄16 5⁄8 1⁄2 1 5⁄8 11⁄8 3⁄4 11⁄4 7⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄8
for 8 5⁄8 9⁄16 7⁄8 3⁄4 1 3⁄4 1 ⁄8
1 3⁄4 11⁄4 7⁄8 11⁄2 1 ⁄8
1
speeds 10 3⁄4 11⁄16 7⁄8 3⁄4 1 3⁄4 11⁄8 3⁄4 11⁄4 7⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄8
Frm 00629
up to 16 11⁄8 1 11⁄4 1 15⁄16 1 17⁄16 11⁄16 13⁄4 13⁄8

8,000 20 13⁄8 1 ⁄8
1 13⁄8 1 ⁄8
1 11⁄2 13⁄8 2 15⁄8
SFPM.
Cast iron (min. tensile strength 20,000 p.s.i.) Class 20.
Fmt 8010
Material 2 14 ⁄ 14⁄ ⁄
38 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
12 ⁄
38 ⁄
58 ⁄
12 ⁄
34 ⁄
58 ⁄78 ⁄
34 1 ⁄78
satis- 4 5 16⁄ ⁄
5 16 ⁄
38 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
12 ⁄
38 ⁄
58 ⁄
12 ⁄
34 ⁄
58 ⁄78 ⁄
34 11⁄8 ⁄78
factory 1 6 38 ⁄ 5⁄16 1⁄2 7⁄16 5⁄8 1⁄2 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8 5⁄8 1 3⁄4 11⁄4 ⁄78
for 8 1⁄2 7⁄16 5⁄8 1⁄2 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8 5⁄8 1 3⁄4 11⁄4 7⁄8
619
speeds 10 1⁄2 7⁄16 5⁄8 1⁄2 3⁄4 5⁄8 7⁄8 5⁄8 1 3⁄4 11⁄4 7⁄8
Sfmt 8002
up to 16 13⁄16 11⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 3⁄4 11⁄8 7⁄8 13⁄8 1

9,000 20 7⁄8 3⁄4 1 3⁄4 11⁄8 7⁄8 11⁄2 11⁄8
SFPM.
Malleable iron (min. tensile strength 50,000 p.s.i.) Grade
32510.
Q:\29\29V5.TXT
Materials 2 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄ 5 16⁄ ⁄
5 16 ⁄38 ⁄ 38 12 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 58 ⁄ 12 ⁄ 3⁄4 ⁄
58 7⁄8 34 ⁄
satis- 4 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄ ⁄
12 ⁄
12 ⁄12 ⁄ 12 ⁄
9 16 ⁄ 12 58 ⁄ 12 ⁄ 34⁄ 58⁄ 1 34 ⁄
factory 1 6 38 ⁄ 14 ⁄ ⁄
34 ⁄
58 ⁄34 ⁄ 58 ⁄34 ⁄ 58 ⁄
13 16 ⁄
11 16 ⁄
13 16 ⁄
11 16 11⁄8 34 ⁄
for 8 7⁄8 3⁄4 7⁄8 3⁄4 7⁄8 3⁄4 7⁄8 34 ⁄ 15⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄8 1
speeds 10 1 7⁄8 1 7⁄8 1 7⁄8 11⁄8 ⁄
15 16 11⁄8 1 17⁄16 11⁄16
up to 16 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄4 1 ⁄ 18 11⁄4 11⁄8 113⁄16 17⁄16
16,000 20 13⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄4 17⁄16 15⁄16 21⁄16 111⁄16
SFPM.
ofr150
Steel castings (min. tensile strength 60,000 p.s.i.) Grade

V60–30.
Structural 2 18 ⁄ 1 16⁄ 5 16⁄ 14 ⁄ ⁄

5 16 14 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 14 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 14 ⁄ 38 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 ⁄
12 38 ⁄
PsN: PC150
steel 4 18 ⁄ 1 16⁄ ⁄
38 ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
5 16 ⁄
12 38 ⁄
§ 1910.215
(min. 6 3 16⁄ 1 16⁄ ⁄
12 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
7 16 38 ⁄ ⁄
34 12 ⁄
tensile 8 1⁄2 38 ⁄ ⁄
9 16 ⁄
7 16 ⁄
9 16 ⁄
7 16 9
strength 10 9 16⁄ 7 16⁄ 5⁄8 12 ⁄ ⁄
58 12 ⁄ ⁄
58 ⁄
12 ⁄
58 ⁄
12 78 ⁄ 58 ⁄
60,000 16 5⁄8 ⁄
9 16 3⁄4 5⁄8 3⁄4 5⁄8 ⁄
13 16 ⁄
11 16 11⁄16 ⁄
13 16
p.s.i.) 20 13⁄16 11⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 78 ⁄ 34 ⁄ 13⁄16 ⁄

15 16
1 The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.
TABLE O–2—EXPOSURE VERSUS WHEEL having a 46-inch roll height or over.
THICKNESS These bars shall operate readily by
[In inches] pressure of the mill operator’s body.
(ii) Safety triprod. Installed in the
Maximum
exposure front and in the back of each mill and
Overall thickness of wheel (T)
of wheel located within 2 inches of a vertical
(C)
plane tangent to the front and rear
⁄ .........................................................................
12 ⁄
14 rolls. The top rods shall be not more
1 ........................................................................... ⁄
12
than 72 inches above the level on which
2 ........................................................................... ⁄
34
3 ........................................................................... 1 the operator stands. The triprods shall

4 ........................................................................... 11⁄2 be accessible and shall operate readily
5 and over ........................................................... 2 whether the rods are pushed or pulled.
(iii) Safety tripwire cable or wire center
TABLE O–4—MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR cord. Installed in the front and in the
STRAIGHT UNRELIEVED FLANGES FOR WHEELS back of each mill and located within 2
WITH THREADED INSERTS OR PROJECTING inches of a vertical plane tangent to
STUDS the front and rear rolls. The cables
shall not be more than 72 inches above
B 1—Minimum out-
A—Diameter of
side diameter of
T—Minimum thick- the level on which the operator stands.
wheel ness of flange
flange The tripwire cable or wire center cord
1 ⁄
58 18 ⁄
shall operate readily whether cable or
2 1 18 ⁄ cord is pushed or pulled.
3 1 ⁄
3 16
(2) [Reserved]
4 13⁄8 ⁄
3 16
5 13⁄4 14 ⁄
(3) Auxiliary equipment. All auxiliary
6 2 38 ⁄ equipment such as mill divider, support
1 NOTE: Must be large enough to extend beyond the bush- bars, spray pipes, feed conveyors, strip
ing. Where prong anchor or cupback bushing are used, this knives, etc., shall be located in such a
footnote does not apply.
manner as to avoid interference with
access to and operation of safety de-
FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, vices.
1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996] (c) Calender safety controls—(1) Safety
trip, face. A safety triprod, cable, or
§ 1910.216 Mills and calenders in the wire center cord shall be provided
rubber and plastics industries. across each pair of in-running rolls ex-
(a) General requirements— tending the length of the face of the
(1)–(2) [Reserved] rolls. It shall be readily accessible and
(3) Auxiliary equipment. Mechanical operate whether pushed or pulled. The
and electrical equipment and auxil- safety tripping devices shall be located
iaries shall be installed in accordance within reach of the operator and the
with this section and subpart S of this bite.
part. (2) Safety trip, side. On both sides of
(4) Mill roll heights. All new mill in- the calender and near each end of the
stallations shall be installed so that face of the roll, there shall be a cable
the top of the operating rolls is not less or wire center cord connected to the
than 50 inches above the level on which safety trip. They shall operate readily
the operator stands, irrespective of the when pushed or pulled.
size of the mill. This distance shall (d) Protection by location—(1) Mills.
apply to the actual working level, Where a mill is so installed that per-
whether it be at the general floor level, sons cannot normally reach through,
in a pit, or on a platform. over, under, or around to come in con-
(b) Mill safety controls—(1) Safety trip tact with the roll bite or be caught be-
control. A safety trip control shall be tween a roll and an adjacent object,
provided in front and in back of each then, provided such elements are made
mill. It shall be accessible and shall op- a fixed part of a mill, safety control de-
erate readily on contact. The safety vices listed in paragraph (b) of this sec-
trip control shall be one of the fol- tion shall not apply.
lowing types or a combination thereof: (2) Calenders. Where a calender is so
(i) Pressure-sensitive body bars. In- installed that persons cannot normally
stalled at front and back of each mill reach through, over, under, or around
620
to come in contact with the roll bite or mers, riveting machines and similar
be caught between a roll and an adja- types of fastener applicators are ex-
cent object, then, provided such ele- cluded from the requirements of this
ments are made a fixed part of a cal- section.
ender, safety control devices listed in (b) Mechanical power press guarding
paragraph (c) of this section shall not and construction, general—(1) Hazards to
apply. personnel associated with broken or fall-
(e) Trip and emergency switches. All ing machine components. Machine com-
trip and emergency switches shall not ponents shall be designed, secured, or
be of the automatically resetting type,
covered to minimize hazards caused by
but shall require manual resetting.
breakage, or loosening and falling or
(f) Stopping limits—(1) Determination of
release of mechanical energy (i.e. bro-
distance of travel. All measurements on
mills and calenders shall be taken with ken springs).
the rolls running empty at maximum (2) Brakes. Friction brakes provided
operating speed. Stopping distances for stopping or holding a slide move-
shall be expressed in inches of surface ment shall be inherently self-engaging
travel of the roll from the instant the by requiring power or force from an ex-
emergency stopping device is actuated. ternal source to cause disengagement.
(2) Stopping limits for mills. All mills Brake capacity shall be sufficient to
irrespective of the size of the rolls or stop the motion of the slide quickly
their arrangement (individually or and capable of holding the slide and its
group-driven) shall be stopped within a attachments at any point in its travel.
distance, as measured in inches of sur- (3) Machines using full revolution posi-
face travel, not greater than 11⁄2 per- tive clutches. (i) Machines using full
cent of the peripheral no-load surface revolution clutches shall incorporate a
speeds of the respective rolls as deter- single-stroke mechanism.
mined in feet per minute. (ii) If the single-stroke mechanism is
(3) Stopping limits for calenders. (i) All dependent upon spring action, the
calenders, irrespective of size of the spring(s) shall be of the compression
rolls or their configuration, shall be type, operating on a rod or guided
stopped within a distance, as measured within a hole or tube, and designed to
in inches of surface travel, not greater prevent interleaving of the spring coils
than 13⁄4 percent of the peripheral no- in event of breakage.
load surface speeds of the respective
(4) Foot pedals (treadle). (i) The pedal
calender rolls as determined in feet per
mechanism shall be protected to pre-
minute.
vent unintended operation from falling
(ii) Where speeds above 250 feet per
or moving objects or by accidental
minute as measured on the surface of
the drive roll are used, stopping dis- stepping onto the pedal.
tances of more than 13⁄4 percent are (ii) A pad with a nonslip contact area
permissible. Such stopping distances shall be firmly attached to the pedal.
shall be subject to engineering deter- (iii) The pedal return spring(s) shall
mination. be of the compression type, operating
on a rod or guided within a hole or
tube, or designed to prevent inter-
FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
leaving of spring coils in event of
§ 1910.217 Mechanical power presses. breakage.
(a) General requirements. (1)–(3) [Re- (iv) If pedal counterweights are pro-
served] vided, the path of the travel of the
(4) Reconstruction and modification. It weight shall be enclosed.
shall be the responsibility of any per- (5) Hand operated levers. (i) Hand-
son reconstructing, or modifying a me- lever-operated power presses shall be
chanical power press to do so in accord- equipped with a spring latch on the op-
ance with paragraph (b) of this section. erating lever to prevent premature or
(5) Excluded machines. Press brakes, accidental tripping.
hydraulic and pneumatic power press- (ii) The operating levers on hand-
es, bulldozers, hot bending and hot tripped presses having more than one
metal presses, forging presses and ham- operating station shall be interlocked
621
to prevent the tripping of the press ex- (a) Each hand control shall be pro-
cept by the ‘‘concurrent’’ use of all le- tected against unintended operation
vers. and arranged by design, construction,
(6) Two-hand trip. (i) A two-hand trip and/or separation so that the concur-
shall have the individual operator’s rent use of both hands is required to
hand controls protected against unin- trip the press.
tentional operation and have the indi- (b) The control system shall be de-
vidual operator’s hand controls ar- signed to permit an adjustment which
ranged by design and construction and/ will require concurrent pressure from
or separation to require the use of both both hands during the die closing por-
hands to trip the press and use a con- tion of the stroke.
trol arrangement requiring concurrent (c) The control system shall incor-
operation of the individual operator’s porate an antirepeat feature.
hand controls. (d) The control systems shall be de-
(ii) Two-hand trip systems on full signed to require release of all opera-
revolution clutch machines shall incor- tors’ hand controls before an inter-
porate an antirepeat feature. rupted stroke can be resumed. This re-
(iii) If two-hand trip systems are used quirement pertains only to those sin-
on multiple operator presses, each op- gle-stroke, two-hand controls manufac-
erator shall have a separate set of con- tured and installed on or after August
trols. 31, 1971.
(7) Machines using part revolution (vi) [Reserved]
clutches. (i) The clutch shall release (vii) Controls for more than one oper-
and the brake shall be applied when the ating station shall be designed to be
external clutch engaging means is reactivated and deactivated in complete
moved, deactivated, or deenergized. sets of two operator’s hand controls per
(ii) A red color stop control shall be operating station by means capable of
provided with the clutch/brake control being supervised by the employer. The
system. Momentary operation of the clutch/brake control system shall be
stop control shall immediately deacti- designed and constructed to prevent
vate the clutch and apply the brake. actuation of the clutch if all operating
The stop control shall override any stations are bypassed.
other control, and reactuation of the (viii) Those clutch/brake control sys-
clutch shall require use of the oper- tems which contain both single and
ating (tripping) means which has been continuous functions shall be designed
selected. so that completion of continuous cir-
(iii) A means of selecting Off, ‘‘Inch,’’ cuits may be supervised by the em-
Single Stroke, and Continuous (when ployer. The initiation of continuous
the continuous function is furnished) run shall require a prior action or deci-
shall be supplied with the clutch/brake sion by the operator in addition to the
control to select type of operation of selection of Continuous on the stroking
the press. Fixing of selection shall be selector, before actuation of the oper-
by means capable of supervision by the ating means will result in continuous
employer. stroking.
(iv) The ‘‘Inch’’ operating means (ix) If foot control is provided, the se-
shall be designed to prevent exposure lection method between hand and foot
of the workers hands within the point control shall be separate from the
of operation by: stroking selector and shall be designed
(a) Requiring the concurrent use of so that the selection may be supervised
both hands to actuate the clutch, or by the employer.
(b) Being a single control protected (x) Foot operated tripping controls, if
against accidental actuation and so lo- used, shall be protected so as to pre-
cated that the worker cannot reach vent operation from falling or moving
into the point of operation while oper- objects, or from unintended operation
ating the single control. by accidental stepping onto the foot
(v) Two-hand controls for single control.
stroke shall conform to the following (xi) The control of air-clutch ma-
requirements: chines shall be designed to prevent a
622
significant increase in the normal stop- with an isolated secondary. Higher
ping time due to a failure within the voltages that may be necessary for op-
operating value mechanism, and to in- eration of machine or control mecha-
hibit further operation if such failure nisms shall be isolated from any con-
does occur. This requirement shall trol mechanism handled by the oper-
apply only to those clutch/brake air- ator, but motor starters with integral
valve controls manufactured and in- Start-Stop buttons may utilize line
stalled on or after August 31, 1971, but voltage control. All d.c. control cir-
shall not apply to machines intended cuits shall be powered by not more
only for continuous, automatic feeding than a nominal 240-volt d.c. supply iso-
applications. lated from any higher voltages.
(xii) The clutch/brake control shall (v) All clutch/brake control electrical
incorporate an automatic means to circuits shall be protected against the
prevent initiation or continued activa- possibility of an accidental ground in
tion of the Single Stroke or Contin- the control circuit causing false oper-
uous functions unless the press drive ation of the press.
motor is energized and in the forward (vi) Electrical clutch/brake control
direction. circuits shall incorporate features to
(xiii) The clutch/brake control shall minimize the possibility of an unin-
automatically deactivate in event of tended stroke in the event of the fail-
failure of the power or pressure supply ure of a control component to function
for the clutch engaging means. Reac- properly, including relays, limit
tivation of the clutch shall require res- switches, and static output circuits.
toration of normal supply and the use (9) Slide counterbalance systems. (i)
of the tripping mechanism(s). Spring counterbalance systems when
(xiv) The clutch/brake control shall used shall incorporate means to retain
automatically deactivate in event of system parts in event of breakage.
failure of the counterbalance(s) air (ii) Spring counterbalances when
supply. Reactivation of the clutch shall used shall have the capability to hold
require restoration of normal air sup- the slide and its attachments at
ply and use of the tripping mecha- midstroke, without brake applied.
nism(s). (iii) Air counterbalance cylinders
(xv) Selection of bar operation shall shall incorporate means to retain the
be by means capable of being super- piston and rod in case of breakage or
vised by the employer. A separate loosening.
pushbutton shall be employed to acti- (iv) Air counterbalance cylinders
vate the clutch, and the clutch shall be shall have adequate capability to hold
activated only if the driver motor is the slide and its attachments at any
deenergized. point in stroke, without brake applied.
(8) Electrical. (i) A main power dis- (v) Air counterbalance cylinders shall
connect switch capable of being locked incorporate means to prevent failure of
only in the Off position shall be pro- capability (sudden loss of pressure) in
vided with every power press control event of air supply failure.
system. (10) Air controlling equipment. Air con-
(ii) The motor start button shall be trolling equipment shall be protected
protected against accidental operation. against foreign material and water en-
(iii) All mechanical power press con- tering the pneumatic system of the
trols shall incorporate a type of drive press. A means of air lubrication shall
motor starter that will disconnect the be provided when needed.
drive motor from the power source in (11) Hydraulic equipment. The max-
event of control voltage or power imum anticipated working pressures in
source failure, and require operation of any hydraulic system on a mechanical
the motor start button to restart the power press shall not exceed the safe
motor when voltage conditions are re- working pressure rating of any compo-
stored to normal. nent used in that system.
(iv) All a.c. control circuits and sole- (12) Pressure vessels. All pressure ves-
noid value coils shall be powered by sels used in conjunction with power
not more than a nominal 120-volt a.c. presses shall conform to the American
supply obtained from a transformer Society of Mechanical Engineers Code
623
for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Edition, following design, construction, applica-
which is incorporated by reference as tion, and adjustment requirements:
specified in § 1910.6. (a) It shall prevent entry of hands or
(13) Control reliability. When required fingers into the point of operation by
by paragraph (c)(5) of this section, the reaching through, over, under or
control system shall be constructed so around the guard;
that a failure within the system does (b) It shall conform to the maximum
not prevent the normal stopping action permissible openings of Table O–10;
from being applied to the press when (c) It shall, in itself, create no pinch
required, but does prevent initiation of point between the guard and moving
a successive stroke until the failure is machine parts;
corrected. The failure shall be detect- (d) It shall utilize fasteners not read-
able by a simple test, or indicated by ily removable by operator, so as to
the control system. This requirement minimize the possibility of misuse or
does not apply to those elements of the removal of essential parts;
control system which have no effect on (e) It shall facilitate its inspection,
the protection against point of oper- and
ation injuries. (f) It shall offer maximum visibility
(14) Brake system monitoring. When re- of the point of operation consistent
quired by paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- with the other requirements.
tion, the brake monitor shall meet the (ii) A die enclosure guard shall be at-
following requirements: tached to the die shoe or stripper in a
(i) Be so constructed as to automati- fixed position.
cally prevent the activation of a suc- (iii) A fixed barrier guard shall be at-
cessive stroke if the stopping time or tached securely to the frame of the
braking distance deteriorates to a press or to the bolster plate.
point where the safety distance being (iv) An interlocked press barrier
utilized does not meet the require- guard shall be attached to the press
ments set forth in paragraph frame or bolster and shall be
(c)(3)(iii)(e) or (c)(3)(vii)(c) of this sec- interlocked with the press clutch con-
tion. The brake monitor used with the trol so that the clutch cannot be acti-
Type B gate or movable barrier device vated unless the guard itself, or the
shall be installed in a manner to detect hinged or movable sections of the
slide top-stop overrun beyond the nor- guard are in position to conform to the
mal limit reasonably established by requirements of Table O–10.
the employer. (v) The hinged or movable sections of
(ii) Be installed on a press such that an interlocked press barrier guard shall
it indicates when the performance of not be used for manual feeding. The
the braking system has deteriorated to guard shall prevent opening of the
the extent described in paragraph interlocked section and reaching into
(b)(14)(i) of this section; and the point of operation prior to die clo-
(iii) Be constructed and installed in a sure or prior to the cessation of slide
manner to monitor brake system per- motion. See paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this
formance on each stroke. section regarding manual feeding
(c) Safeguarding the point of oper- through interlocked press barrier de-
ation—(1) General requirements. (i) It vices.
shall be the responsibility of the em- (vi) The adjustable barrier guard
ployer to provide and insure the usage shall be securely attached to the press
of ‘‘point of operation guards’’ or prop- bed, bolster plate, or die shoe, and shall
erly applied and adjusted point of oper- be adjusted and operated in conformity
ation devices on every operation per- with Table O–10 and the requirements
formed on a mechanical power press. of this subparagraph. Adjustments
See Table O–10. shall be made only by authorized per-
(ii) The requirement of paragraph sonnel whose qualifications include a
(c)(1)(i) of this section shall not apply knowledge of the provisions of Table O–
when the point of operation opening is 10 and this subparagraph.
one-fourth inch or less. See Table O–10. (vii) A point of operation enclosure
(2) Point of operation guards. (i) Every which does not meet the requirements
point of operation guard shall meet the of this subparagraph and Table O–10
624
shall be used only in conjunction with (a) The device may not be used on
point of operation devices. machines using full revolution clutch-
(3) Point of operation devices. (i) Point es.
of operation devices shall protect the (b) The device may not be used as a
operator by: tripping means to initiate slide mo-
(a) Preventing and/or stopping nor- tion, except when used in total con-
mal stroking of the press if the opera- formance with paragraph (h) of this
tor’s hands are inadvertently placed in section.
the point of operation; or (c) The device shall be constructed so
that a failure within the system does
(b) Preventing the operator from in-
not prevent the normal stopping action
advertently reaching into the point of from being applied to the press when
operation, or withdrawing his hands if required, but does prevent the initi-
they are inadvertently located in the ation of a successive stroke until the
point of operation, as the dies close; or failure is corrected. The failure shall
(c) Preventing the operator from in- be indicated by the system.
advertently reaching into the point of (d) Muting (bypassing of the protec-
operation at all times; or tive function) of such device, during
(d) [Reserved] the upstroke of the press slide, is per-
(e) Requiring application of both of mitted for the purpose of parts ejec-
the operator’s hands to machine oper- tion, circuit checking, and feeding.
ating controls and locating such con- (e) The safety distance (Ds) from the
trols at such a safety distance from the sensing field to the point of operation
point of operation that the slide com- shall be greater than the distance de-
pletes the downward travel or stops be- termined by the following formula:
fore the operator can reach into the Ds = 63 inches/second × Ts
point of operation with his hands; or where:
(f) Enclosing the point of operation Ds = minimum safety distance (inches); 63
before a press stroke can be initiated, inches/second=hand speed constant;
and maintaining this closed condition and
until the motion of the slide had Ts = stopping time of the press measured at
ceased; or approximately 90° position of crankshaft
rotation (seconds).
(g) Enclosing the point of operation
before a press stroke can be initiated, (f) Guards shall be used to protect all
so as to prevent an operator from areas of entry to the point of operation
reaching into the point of operation not protected by the presence sensing
prior to die closure or prior to ces- device.
sation of slide motion during the down- (iv) The pull-out device shall protect
ward stroke. the operator as specified in paragraph
(ii) A gate or movable barrier device (c)(3)(i)(b) of this section, and shall in-
shall protect the operator as follows: clude attachments for each of the oper-
ator’s hands.
(a) A Type A gate or movable barrier
(a) Attachments shall be connected
device shall protect the operator in the
to and operated only by the press slide
manner specified in paragraph
or upper die.
(c)(3)(i)(f) of this section, and (b) Attachments shall be adjusted to
(b) A Type B gate or movable barrier prevent the operator from reaching
device shall protect the operator in the into the point of operation or to with-
manner specified in paragraph draw the operator’s hands from the
(c)(3)(i)(g) of this section. point of operation before the dies close.
(iii) A presence sensing point of oper- (c) A separate pull-out device shall be
ation device shall protect the operator provided for each operator if more than
as provided in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(a) of one operator is used on a press.
this section, and shall be interlocked (d) Each pull-out device in use shall
into the control circuit to prevent or be visually inspected and checked for
stop slide motion if the operator’s hand proper adjustment at the start of each
or other part of his body is within the operator shift, following a new die set-
sensing field of the device during the up, and when operators are changed.
downstroke of the press slide. Necessary maintenance or repair or
625
both shall be performed and completed to require concurrent application of all
before the press is operated. Records of operators’ to activate the slide.
inspections and maintenance shall be (b) Each two hand trip shall meet the
kept in accordance with paragraph (e) construction requirements of para-
of this section. graph (b)(6) of this section.
(v) The sweep device may not be used (c) The safety distance (Dm) between
for point of operation safeguarding. the two hand trip and the point of op-
(vi) A holdout or a restraint device eration shall be greater than the dis-
shall protect the operator as specified tance determined by the following for-
in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(c) of this section mula:
and shall include attachments for each
Dm = 63 inches/second×Tm;
of the operator’s hands. Such attach-
ments shall be securely anchored and where:
adjusted in such a way that the oper- Dm = minimum safety distance (inches); 63
ator is restrained from reaching into inches/second=hand speed constant;
the point of operation. A separate set and
of restraints shall be provided for each Tm = the maximum time the press takes for
the die closure after it has been tripped
operator if more than one operator is (seconds). For full revolution clutch
required on a press. presses with only one engaging point Tm
(vii) The two hand control device is equal to the time necessary for one
shall protect the operator as specified and one-half revolutions of the crank-
in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(e) of this section. shaft. For full revolution clutch presses
(a) When used in press operations re- with more than one engaging point, Tm
quiring more than one operator, sepa- shall be calculated as follows:
rate two hand controls shall be pro- Tm = [1⁄2 + (1 ÷ Number of engaging points per
revolution)] × time necessary to com-
vided for each operator, and shall be
plete one revolution of the crankshaft
designed to require concurrent applica- (seconds).
tion of all operators’ controls to acti-
vate the slide. The removal of a hand (d) Two hand trips shall be fixed in
from any control button shall cause position so that only a supervisor or
the slide to stop. safety engineer is capable of relocating
(b) Each two hand control shall meet the controls.
the construction requirements of para- (4) Hand feeding tools. Hand feeding
graph (b)(7)(v) of this section. tools are intended for placing and re-
(c) The safety distance (Ds) between moving materials in and from the
each two hand control device and the press. Hand feeding tools are not a
point of operation shall be greater than point of operation guard or protection
the distance determined by the fol- device and shall not be used in lieu of
lowing formula: the ‘‘guards’’ or devices required in
this section.
Ds = 63 inches/second × Ts; (5) Additional requirements for safe-
where: guarding. Where the operator feeds or
Ds = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 removes parts by placing one or both
inches/second=hand speed constant; hands in the point of operation, and a
and two hand control, presence sensing de-
Ts = stopping time of the press measured at vice, Type B gate or movable barrier
approximately 90° position of crankshaft (on a part revolution clutch) is used for
rotation (seconds). safeguarding:
(d) Two hand controls shall be fixed (i) The employer shall use a control
in position so that only a supervisor or system and a brake monitor which
safety engineer is capable of relocating comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14)
the controls. of this section;
(viii) The two hand trip device shall (ii) The exception in paragraph
protect the operator as specified in (b)(7)(v)(d) of this section for two hand
paragraph (c)(3)(i)(e) of this section. controls manufactured and installed
(a) When used in press operations re- before August 31, 1971 is not applicable
quiring more than one operator, sepa- under this paragraph (c)(5);
rate two hand trips shall be provided (iii) The control of air clutch ma-
for each operator, and shall be designed chines shall be designed to prevent a
626
significant increase in the normal stop- (7) Die fastening. Provision shall be
ping time due to a failure within the made in both the upper and lower shoes
operating valve mechanism, and to infor securely mounting the die to the
hibit further operation if such failure bolster and slide. Where clamp caps or
does occur, where a part revolution setscrews are used in conjunction with
clutch is employed. The exception in punch stems, additional means of se-
paragraph (b)(7)(xi) of this section for curing the upper shoe to the slide shall
controls manufactured and installed be used.
before August 31, 1971, is not applicable (8) Die handling. Handling equipment
under this paragraph (c)(5). attach points shall be provided on all
(d) Design, construction, setting and dies requiring mechanical handling.
feeding of dies—(1) General requirements. (9) Diesetting. (i) The employer shall
The employer shall: (i) Use dies and op- establish a diesetting procedure that
erating methods designed to control or will insure compliance with paragraph
eliminate hazards to operating per- (c) of this section.
sonnel, and (ii) furnish and enforce the (ii) The employer shall provide spring
use of hand tools for freeing and re- loaded turnover bars, for presses de-
moving stuck work or scrap pieces signed to accept such turnover bars.
from the die, so that no employee need (iii) The employer shall provide die
reach into the point of operation for stops or other means to prevent losing
such purposes. control of the die while setting or re-
(2) [Reserved] moving dies in presses which are in-
clined.
(3) Scrap handling. The employer
(iv) The employer shall provide and
shall provide means for handling scrap
enforce the use of safety blocks for use
from roll feed or random length stock
whenever dies are being adjusted or re-
operations. Scrap cutters used in con-
paired in the press.
junction with scrap handling systems
(v) The employer shall provide brush-
shall be safeguarded in accordance with
es, swabs, lubricating rolls, and auto-
paragraph (c) of this section and with
matic or manual pressure guns so that
§ 1910.219.
operators and diesetters shall not be
(4) Guide post hazard. The hazard cre- required to reach into the point of op-
ated by a guide post (when it is located eration or other hazard areas to lubri-
in the immediate vicinity of the oper- cate material, punches or dies.
ator) when separated from its bushing (e) Inspection, maintenance, and modi-
by more than one-fourth inch shall be fication of presses—(1) Inspection and
considered as a point of operation haz- maintenance records. (i) It shall be the
ard and be protected in accordance responsibility of the employer to estab-
with paragraph (c) of this section. lish and follow a program of periodic
(5) Unitized tooling. If unitized tooling and regular inspections of his power
is used, the opening between the top of presses to ensure that all their parts,
the punch holder and the face of the auxiliary equipment, and safeguards
slide, or striking pad, shall be safe- are in a safe operating condition and
guarded in accordance with the re- adjustment. The employer shall main-
quirements of paragraph (c) of this sec- tain a certification record of inspec-
tion. tions which includes the date of inspec-
(6) Tonnage, stroke, and weight des- tion, the signature of the person who
ignation. All dies shall be: performed the inspection and the serial
(i) Stamped with the tonnage and number, or other identifier, of the
stroke requirements, or have these power press that was inspected.
characteristics recorded if these (ii) Each press shall be inspected and
records are readily available to the die tested no less than weekly to deter-
setter; mine the condition of the clutch/brake
(ii) Stamped to indicate upper die mechanism, antirepeat feature and sin-
weight when necessary for air counter- gle stroke mechanism. Necessary
balance pressure adjustment; and maintenance or repair or both shall be
(iii) Stamped to indicate complete performed and completed before the
die weight when handling equipment press is operated. These requirements
may become overloaded. do not apply to those presses which
627
comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14) (f) Operation of power presses—(1) [Re-
of this section. The employer shall served]
maintain a certification record of in- (2) Instruction to operators. The em-
spections, tests and maintenance work ployer shall train and instruct the op-
which includes the date of the inspec- erator in the safe method of work be-
tion, test or maintenance; the signa- fore starting work on any operation
ture of the person who performed the covered by this section. The employer
inspection, test, or maintenance; and shall insure by adequate supervision
the serial number or other identifier of that correct operating procedures are
the press that was inspected, tested or being followed.
(3) Work area. The employer shall
maintained.
provide clearance between machines so
(2) Modification. It shall be the re-
that movement of one operator will not
sponsibility of any person modifying a interfere with the work of another.
power press to furnish instructions Ample room for cleaning machines,
with the modification to establish new handling material, work pieces, and
or changed guidelines for use and care scrap shall also be provided. All sur-
of the power press so modified. rounding floors shall be kept in good
(3) Training of maintenance personnel. condition and free from obstructions,
It shall be the responsibility of the em- grease, oil, and water.
ployer to insure the original and con- (4) Overloading. The employer shall
tinuing competence of personnel caring operate his presses within the tonnage
for, inspecting, and maintaining power and attachment weight ratings speci-
presses. fied by the manufacturer.
Explanation of above diagram: The various openings are such that for av-
This diagram shows the accepted safe erage size hands an operator’s fingers won’t
openings between the bottom edge of a guard reach the point of operation.
and feed table at various distances from the After installation of point of operation
danger line (point of operation). guards and before a job is released for oper-
The clearance line marks the distance re- ation a check should be made to verify that
quired to prevent contact between guard and the guard will prevent the operator’s hands
moving parts. from reaching the point of operation.
The minimum guarding line is the distance
between the infeed side of the guard and the
danger line which is one-half inch from the
danger line.
628
EC27OC91.076</GPH>
TABLE O–10 (viii) Number of operators required
[In inches] for the operation and the number of op-
erators provided with controls and
Maximum
Distance of opening from point of operation haz-
width of safeguards.
ard opening (h) Presence sensing device initiation
⁄ to 11⁄2 ..............................................................
12 14⁄
(PSDI)—(1) General. (i) The require-
11⁄2 to 21⁄2 ............................................................ 38⁄ ments of paragraph (h) shall apply to
21⁄2 to 31⁄2 ............................................................ 12⁄ all part revolution mechanical power
31⁄2 to 51⁄2 ............................................................ 5⁄8
presses used in the PSDI mode of oper-
51⁄2 to 61⁄2 ............................................................ 3⁄4
ation.
61⁄2 to 71⁄2 ............................................................ 7⁄8
71⁄2 to 121⁄2 .......................................................... 1 ⁄4

1 (ii) The relevant requirements of
121⁄2 to 151⁄2 ........................................................ 11⁄2 paragraphs (a) through (g) of this sec-
151⁄2 to 171⁄2 ........................................................ 17⁄8 tion also shall apply to all presses used
171⁄2 to 311⁄2 ........................................................ 21⁄8 in the PSDI mode of operation, wheth-
er or not cross referenced in this para-
This table shows the distances that guards
shall be positioned from the danger line in
graph (h). Such cross-referencing of
accordance with the required openings. specific requirements from paragraphs
(a) through (g) of this section is in-
(g) Reports of injuries to employees op- tended only to enhance convenience
erating mechanical power presses. (1) The and understanding in relating to the
employer shall report, within 30 days of new provisions to the existing stand-
the occurrence, all point-of-operation ard, and is not to be construed as lim-
injuries to operators or other employ- iting the applicability of other provi-
ees to either the Director of the Direc- sions in paragraphs (a) through (g) of
torate of Standards and Guidance at this section.
OSHA, U.S. Department of Labor, (iii) Full revolution mechanical
Washington, DC 20210 or electronically power presses shall not be used in the
at http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/me- PSDI mode of operation.
chanical.html; or to the State Agency (iv) Mechanical power presses with a
administering a plan approved by the configuration which would allow a per-
Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occu- son to enter, pass through, and become
pational Safety and Health. clear of the sensing field into the haz-
(2) The report shall include the fol- ardous portion of the press shall not be
lowing information: used in the PSDI mode of operation.
(i) Employer’s name, address and lo- (v) The PSDI mode of operation shall
cation of the workplace (establish- be used only for normal production op-
ment). erations. Die-setting and maintenance
(ii) Employee’s name, injury sus- procedures shall comply with para-
tained, and the task being performed graphs (a) through (g) of this section,
(operation, set-up, maintenance, or and shall not be done in the PSDI
other). mode.
(iii) Type of clutch used on the press (2) Brake and clutch requirements. (i)
(full revolution, part revolution, or di- Presses with flexible steel band brakes
rect drive). or with mechanical linkage actuated
(iv) Type of safeguard(s) being used brakes or clutches shall not be used in
(two hand control, two hand trip, pull- the PSDI mode.
outs, sweeps, or other). If the safeguard (ii) Brake systems on presses used in
is not described in this section, give a the PSDI mode shall have sufficient
complete description. torque so that each average value of
(v) Cause of the accident (repeat of stopping times (Ts) for stops initiated
press, safeguard failure, removing at approximately 45 degrees, 60 degrees,
stuck part or scrap, no safeguard pro- and 90 degrees, respectively, of crank-
vided, no safeguard in use, or other). shaft angular position, shall not be
(vi) Type of feeding (manual with more than 125 percent of the average
hands in dies or with hands out of dies, value of the stopping time at the top
semiautomatic, automatic, or other). crankshaft position. Compliance with
(vii) Means used to actuate press this requirement shall be determined
stroke (foot trip, foot control, hand by using the heaviest upper die to be
trip, hand control, or other). used on the press, and operating at the
629
fastest press speed if there is speed se- (b)(13) and (b)(14) of this section. In ad-
lection. dition, the brake monitor shall be ad-
(iii) Where brake engagement and justed during installation certification
clutch release is effected by spring ac- to prevent successive stroking of the
tion, such spring(s) shall operate in press if increases in stopping time
compression on a rod or within a hole cause an increase in the safety distance
or tube, and shall be of non-inter- above that required by paragraph
leaving design. (h)(9)(v) of this section.
(3) Pneumatic systems. (i) Air valve (ii) Once the PSDI safety system has
and air pressure supply/control. been certified/validated, adjustment of
(A) The requirements of paragraphs the brake monitor shall not be done
(b)(7)(xiii), (b)(7)(xiv), (b)(10), (b)(12) without prior approval of the valida-
and (c)(5)(iii) of this section apply to tion organization for both the brake
the pneumatic systems of machines monitor adjustment and the cor-
used in the PSDI mode. responding adjustment of the safety
(B) The air supply for pneumatic distance. The validation organization
clutch/brake control valves shall incor- shall in its installation validation,
porate a filter, an air regulator, and, state that in what circumstances, if
when necessary for proper operation, a any, the employer has advance ap-
lubricator. proval for adjustment, when prior oral
(C) The air pressure supply for approval is appropriate and when prior
clutch/brake valves on machines used approval must be in writing. The ad-
in the PSDI mode shall be regulated to justment shall be done under the super-
pressures less than or equal to the air vision of an authorized person whose
pressure used when making the stop qualifications include knowledge of
time measurements required by para- safety distance requirements and expe-
graph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. rience with the brake system and its
(ii) Air counterbalance systems. adjustment. When brake wear or other
(A) Where presses that have slide factors extend press stopping time be-
counterbalance systems are used in the yond the limit permitted by the brake
PSDI mode, the counterbalance system monitor, adjustment, repair, or main-
shall also meet the requirements of tenance shall be performed on the
paragraph (b)(9) of this section. brake or other press system element
(B) Counterbalances shall be adjusted that extends the stopping time.
in accordance with the press manufac- (iii) The brake monitor setting shall
turer’s recommendations to assure cor- allow an increase of no more than 10
rect counterbalancing of the slide at- percent of the longest stopping time
tachment (upper die) weight for all op- for the press, or 10 milliseconds, which-
erations performed on presses used in ever is longer, measured at the top of
the PSDI mode. The adjustments shall the stroke.
be made before performing the stop- (6) Cycle control and control systems. (i)
ping time measurements required by The control system on presses used in
paragraphs (h)(2)(ii), (h)(5)(iii), and the PSDI mode shall meet the applica-
(h)(9)(v) of this section. ble requirements of paragraphs (b)(7),
(4) Flywheels and bearings. Presses (b)(8), (b)(13), and (c)(5) of this section.
whose designs incorporate flywheels (ii) The control system shall incor-
running on journals on the crankshaft porate a means of dynamically moni-
or back shaft, or bull gears running on toring for decoupling of the rotary po-
journals mounted on the crankshaft, sition indicating mechanism drive
shall be inspected, lubricated, and from the crankshaft. This monitor
maintained as provided in paragraph shall stop slide motion and prevent
(h)(10) of this section to reduce the pos- successive press strokes if decoupling
sibility of unintended and uncontrolled occurs, or if the monitor itself fails.
press strokes caused by bearing sei- (iii) The mode selection means of
zure. paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section
(5) Brake monitoring. (i) Presses oper- shall have at least one position for se-
ated in the PSDI mode shall be lection of the PSDI mode. Where more
equipped with a brake monitor that than one interruption of the light sens-
meets the requirements of paragraphs ing field is used in the initiation of a
630
stroke, either the mode selection (x) All components and subsystems of
means must have one position for each the control system shall be designed to
function, or a separate selection means operate together to provide total con-
shall be provided which becomes oper- trol system compliance with the re-
able when the PSDI mode is selected. quirements of this section.
Selection of PSDI mode and the num- (xi) Where there is more than one op-
ber of interruptions/withdrawals of the erator of a press used for PSDI, each
light sensing field required to initiate operator shall be protected by a sepa-
a press cycle shall be by means capable rate, independently functioning, pres-
of supervision by the employer. ence sensing device. The control sys-
(iv) A PSDI set-up/reset means shall tem shall require that each sensing
be provided which requires an overt ac- field be interrupted the selected num-
tion by the operator, in addition to ber of times prior to initiating a
PSDI mode selection, before operation stroke. Further, each operator shall be
of the press by means of PSDI can be provided with a set-up/reset means that
started. meets the requirements of paragraph
(v) An indicator visible to the oper- (h)(6) of this section, and which must
ator and readily seen by the employer be actuated to initiate operation of the
shall be provided which shall clearly press in the PSDI mode.
indicate that the system is set-up for (xii) [Reserved]
cycling in the PSDI mode.
(xiii) The Control system shall incor-
(vi) The control system shall incorporate interlocks for supplemental
porate a timer to deactivate PSDI guards, if used, which will prevent
when the press does not stroke within
stroke initiation or will stop a stroke
the period of time set by the timer.
in progress if any supplemental guard
The timer shall be manually adjust-
fails or is deactivated.
able, to a maximum time of 30 seconds.
For any timer setting greater than 15 (xiv) The control system shall per-
seconds, the adjustment shall be made form checks for proper operation of all
by the use of a special tool available cycle control logic element switches
only to authorized persons. Following a and contacts at least once each cycle.
deactivation of PSDI by the timer, the Control elements shall be checked for
system shall make it necessary to reset correct status after power ‘‘on’’ and be-
the set-up/reset means in order to reac- fore the initial PSDI stroke.
tivate the PSDI mode. (xv) The control system shall have
(vii) Reactivation of PSDI operation provisions for an ‘‘inch’’ operating
following deactivation of the PSDI means meeting the requirements of
mode from any other cause, such as ac- paragraph (b)(7)(iv) of this section. Die-
tivation of the red color stop control setting shall not be done in the PSDI
required by paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this mode. Production shall not be done in
section, interruption of the presence the ‘‘inch’’ mode.
sensing field, opening of an interlock, (xvi) The control system shall permit
or reselection of the number of sensing only a single stroke per initiation com-
field interruptions/withdrawals re- mand.
quired to cycle the press, shall require (xvii) Controls with internally stored
resetting of the set-up/reset means. programs (e.g., mechanical, electro-me-
(viii) The control system shall incor- chanical, or electronic) shall meet the
porate an automatic means to prevent requirements of paragraph (b)(13) of
initiation or continued operation in this section, and shall default to a pre-
the PSDI mode unless the press drive determined safe condition in the event
motor is energized in the forward direc- of any single failure within the system.
tion of crankshaft rotation. Programmable controllers which meet
(ix) The control design shall preclude the requirements for controls with in-
any movement of the slide caused by ternally stored programs stated above
operation of power on, power off, or se- shall be permitted only if all logic ele-
lector switches, or from checks for ments affecting the safety system and
proper operations as required by para- point of operation safety are internally
graph (h)(6)(xiv) of this section. stored and protected in such a manner
631
that they cannot be altered or manipu- into the entire safety system as pro-
lated by the user to an unsafe condi- vided for in this section. Prior to use,
tion. both the employer and manufacturer
(7) Environmental requirements. Con- must certify that these requirements
trol components shall be selected, con- and all the other applicable require-
structed, and connected together in ments of this section are met and these
such a way as to withstand expected certifications must be validated by an
operational and environmental OSHA-recognized third-party valida-
stresses, at least including those out- tion organization to meet these addi-
lined in appendix A. Such stresses shall tional requirements and all the other
not so affect the control system as to applicable requirements of paragraphs
cause unsafe operation. (a) through (h) and appendix A of this
(8) Safety system. (i) Mechanical section. Three months prior to the op-
power presses used in the PSDI mode eration of any alternative system, the
shall be operated under the control of a employer must notify the OSHA Direc-
safety system which, in addition to torate of Safety Standards Programs of
meeting the applicable requirements of the name of the system to be installed,
paragraphs (b)(13) and (c)(5) and other the manufacturer and the OSHA-recog-
applicable provisions of this section, nized third-party validation organiza-
shall function such that a single failure tion immediately. Upon request, the
or single operating error shall not employer must make available to that
cause injury to personnel from point of office all tests and analyses for OSHA
operation hazards. review.
(ii) The safety system shall be de- (iii) Individual sensing fields of pres-
signed, constructed, and arranged as an ence sensing devices used to initiate
integral total system, including all ele- strokes in the PSDI mode shall cover
ments of the press, the controls, the only one side of the press.
safeguarding and any required supple- (iv) Light curtains used for PSDI op-
mental safeguarding, and their inter- eration shall have minimum object
faces with the operator and that part sensitivity not to exceed one and one-
of the environment which has effect on fourth inches (31.75 mm). Where light
the protection against point of oper- curtain object sensitivity is user-ad-
ation hazards. justable, either discretely or continu-
(9) Safeguarding the point of operation. ously, design features shall limit the
(i) The point of operation of presses op- minimum object sensitivity adjust-
erated in the PSDI mode shall be safe- ment not to exceed one and one-fourth
guarded in accordance with the re- inches (31.75 mm). Blanking of the
quirements of paragraph (c) of this sec- sensing field is not permitted.
tion, except that the safety distance (v) The safety distance (Ds) from the
requirements of paragraph (h)(9)(v) of sensing field of the presence sensing
this section shall be used for PSDI op- device to the point of operation shall
eration. be greater than or equal to the dis-
(ii)(A) PSDI shall be implemented tance determined by the formula:
only by use of light curtain (photo-
electric) presence sensing devices Ds = Hs×(Ts+Tp+Tr+2Tm)+Dp
which meet the requirements of para- Where:
graph (c)(3)(iii)(c) of this section unless Ds = Minimum safety distance.
the requirements of the following para- Hs = Hand speed constant of 63 inches per
graph have been met. second (1.6 m/s).
(B) Alternatives to photo-electric Ts = Longest press stopping time, in seconds,
light curtains may be used for PSDI computed by taking averages of multiple
when the employer can demonstrate, measurements at each of three positions
through tests and analysis by the em- (45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees) of
ployer or the manufacturer, that the crankshaft angular position; the longest
of the three averages is the stopping
alternative is as safe as the photo-elec-
time to use. (Ts is defined as the sum of
tric light curtain, that the alternative the kinetic energy dissipation time plus
meets the conditions of this section, the pneumatic/magnetic/hydraulic reac-
has the same long term reliability as tion time of the clutch/brake operating
light curtains and can be integrated mechanism(s).)
632
Tp = Longest presence sensing device re- longest press stopping time measured at
sponse time, in seconds. the top of the stroke, or 10 milliseconds,
Tr = Longest response time, in seconds, of all whichever is longer.
interposing control elements between the Dp = Penetration depth factor, required to
presence sensing device and the clutch/ provide for possible penetration through
brake operating mechanism(s). the presence sensing field by fingers or
Tm = Increase in the press stopping time at hand before detection occurs. The pene-
the top of the stroke, in seconds, allowed
tration depth factor shall be determined
by the brake monitor for brake wear.
from Graph h–1 using the minimum ob-
The time increase allowed shall be lim-
ited to no more than 10 percent of the ject sensitivity size.
633
(vi) The presence sensing device loca- in location to provide a safety distance
tion shall either be set at each tool greater than or equal to the minimum
change and set-up to provide at least safety distance for all tooling set-ups
the minimum safety distance, or fixed which are to be used on that press.
634
EC27OC91.077</GPH>
(vii) Where presence sensing device the presence sensing device(s) used to
location is adjustable, adjustment shall initiate press strokes; or
require the use of a special tool avail- (B) The length of the hand tool shall
able only to authorized persons. be such as to ensure that the operator’s
(viii) Supplemental safeguarding hand will be detected for any safety
shall be used to protect all areas of ac- distance required by the press set-ups.
cess to the point of operation which are (10) Inspection and maintenance. (i)
unprotected by the PSDI presence sens- Any press equipped with presence sens-
ing device. Such supplemental safe- ing devices for use in PSDI, or for sup-
guarding shall consist of either addi- plemental safeguarding on presses used
tional light curtain (photo-electric) in the PSDI mode, shall be equipped
presence sensing devices or other types with a test rod of diameter specified by
of guards which meet the requirements the presence sensing device manufac-
of paragraphs (c) and (h) of this sec- turer to represent the minimum object
tion. sensitivity of the sensing field. Instruc-
(A) Presence sensing devices used as tions for use of the test rod shall be
supplemental safeguarding shall not noted on a label affixed to the presence
initiate a press stroke, and shall con- sensing device.
form to the requirements of paragraph (ii) The following checks shall be
(c)(3)(iii) and other applicable provi- made at the beginning of each shift and
sions of this section, except that the whenever a die change is made.
safety distance shall comply with para- (A) A check shall be performed using
graph (h)(9)(v) of this section. the test rod according to the presence
(B) Guards used as supplemental safe- sensing device manufacturer’s instruc-
guarding shall conform to the design, tions to determine that the presence
construction and application require- sensing device used for PSDI is oper-
ments of paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- ational.
tion, and shall be interlocked with the (B) The safety distance shall be
press control to prevent press PSDI op- checked for compliance with (h)(9)(v) of
eration if the guard fails, is removed, this section.
or is out of position. (C) A check shall be made to deter-
(ix) Barriers shall be fixed to the mine that all supplemental safe-
press frame or bolster to prevent per- guarding is in place. Where presence
sonnel from passing completely sensing devices are used for supple-
through the sensing field, where safety mental safeguarding, a check for prop-
distance or press configuration is such er operation shall be performed using
that personnel could pass through the the test rod according to the presence
PSDI presence sensing field and assume sensing device manufacturer’s instruc-
a position where the point of operation tions.
could be accessed without detection by (D) A check shall be made to assure
the PSDI presence sensing device. As that the barriers and/or supplemental
an alternative, supplemental presence presence sensing devices required by
sensing devices used only in the safe- paragraph (h)(9)(ix) of this section are
guard mode may be provided. If used, operating properly.
these devices shall be located so as to (E) A system or visual check shall be
detect all operator locations and posi- made to verify correct counterbalance
tions not detected by the PSDI sensing adjustment for die weight according to
field, and shall prevent stroking or the press manufacturer’s instructions,
stop a stroke in process when any sup- when a press is equipped with a slide
plemental sensing field(s) are inter- counterbalance system.
rupted. (iii) When presses used in the PSDI
(x) Hand tools. Where tools are used mode have flywheel or bullgear run-
for feeding, removal of scrap, lubrica- ning on crankshaft mounted journals
tion of parts, or removal of parts that and bearings, or a flywheel mounted on
stick on the die in PSDI operations: back shaft journals and bearings, peri-
(A) The minimum diameter of the odic inspections following the press
tool handle extension shall be greater manufacturer’s recommendations shall
than the minimum object sensitivity of be made to ascertain that bearings are
635
in good working order, and that auto- recertified by the employer and revali-
matic lubrication systems for these dated by an OSHA-recognized third-
bearings (if automatic lubrication is party validation organization to meet
provided) are supplying proper lubrica- all applicable requirements of para-
tion. On presses with provision for graphs (a) through (h) and appendix A
manual lubrication of flywheel or of this section. Any press whose safety
bullgear bearings, lubrication shall be system has not been recertified and re-
provided according to the press manu- validated within the preceding 12
facturer’s recommendations. months shall be removed from service
(iv) Periodic inspections of clutch in the PSDI mode until the safety sys-
and brake mechanisms shall be per- tem is recertified and revalidated.
formed to assure they are in proper op- (iii) A label shall be affixed to the
erating condition. The press manufac- press as part of each installation cer-
turer’s recommendations shall be fol- tification/validation and the most re-
lowed. cent recertification/revalidation. The
(v) When any check of the press, in- label shall indicate the press serial
cluding those performed in accordance number, the minimum safety distance
with the requirements of paragraphs (Ds) required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of
(h)(10)(ii), (iii) or (iv) of this section, this section, the fulfillment of design
reveals a condition of noncompliance, certification/validation, the employer’s
improper adjustment, or failure, the signed certification, the identification
press shall not be operated until the
of the OSHA-recognized third-party
condition has been corrected by adjust-
validation organization, its signed vali-
ment, replacement, or repair.
dation, and the date the certification/
(vi) It shall be the responsibility of
validation and recertification/revalida-
the employer to ensure the competence
tion are issued.
of personnel caring for, inspecting, and
maintaining power presses equipped for (iv) Records of the installation cer-
PSDI operation, through initial and tification and validation and the most
periodic training. recent recertification and revalidation
(11) Safety system certification/valida- shall be maintained for each safety sys-
tion. (i) Prior to the initial use of any tem equipped press by the employer as
mechanical press in the PSDI mode, long as the press is in use. The records
two sets of certification and validation shall include the manufacture and
are required: model number of each component and
(A) The design of the safety system subsystem, the calculations of the safe-
required for the use of a press in the ty distance as required by paragraph
PSDI mode shall be certified and vali- (h)(9)(v) of this section, and the stop-
dated prior to installation. The manu- ping time measurements required by
facturer’s certification shall be vali- paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. The
dated by an OSHA-recognized third- most recent records shall be made
party validation organization to meet available to OSHA upon request.
all applicable requirements of para- (v) The employer shall notify the
graphs (a) through (h) and appendix A OSHA-recognized third-party valida-
of this section. tion organization within five days
(B) After a press has been equipped whenever a component or a subsystem
with a safety system whose design has of the safety system fails or modifica-
been certified and validated in accord- tions are made which may affect the
ance with paragraph (h)(11)(i) of this safety of the system. The failure of a
section, the safety system installation critical component shall necessitate
shall be certified by the employer, and the removal of the safety system from
then shall be validated by an OSHA- service until it is recertified and re-
recognized third-party validation orga- validated, except recertification by the
nization to meet all applicable require- employer without revalidation is per-
ments of paragraphs (a) through (h) mitted when a non-critical component
and appendix A of this section. or subsystem is replaced by one of the
(ii) At least annually thereafter, the same manufacture and design as the
safety system on a mechanical power original, or determined by the third-
press used in the PSDI mode shall be party validation organization to be
636
equivalent by similarity analysis, as (D) The requirements for hand tools
set forth in appendix A. that may be used in the PSDI mode.
(vi) The employer shall notify the (E) The severe consequences that can
OSHA-recognized third-party valida- result if he or she attempts to cir-
tion organization within five days of cumvent or by-pass any of the safe-
the occurrence of any point of oper- guard or operating functions of the
ation injury while a press is used in the PSDI system.
PSDI mode. This is in addition to the (ii) The employer shall certify that
report of injury required by paragraph employees have been trained by pre-
(g) of this section; however, a copy of paring a certification record which in-
that report may be used for this pur- cludes the identity of the person
pose. trained, the signature of the employer
(12) Die setting and work set-up. (i) Die or the person who conducted the train-
ing, and the date the training was com-
setting on presses used in the PSDI
pleted. The certification record shall
mode shall be performed in accordance
be prepared at the completion of train-
with paragraphs (d) and (h) of this sec-
ing and shall be maintained on file for
tion.
the duration of the employee’s employ-
(ii) The PSDI mode shall not be used ment. The certification record shall be
for die setting or set-up. An alternative made available upon request to the As-
manual cycle initiation and control sistant Secretary for Occupational
means shall be supplied for use in die Safety and Health.
setting which meets the requirements
of paragraph (b)(7) of this section. APPENDIX A TO § 1910.217—MANDATORY RE-
QUIREMENTS FOR CERTIFICATION/VALIDATION
(iii) Following a die change, the safe-
OF SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR PRESENCE SENSING
ty distance, the proper application of DEVICE INITIATION OF MECHANICAL POWER
supplemental safeguarding, and the PRESSES
slide counterbalance adjustment (if the
press is equipped with a counter- Purpose
balance) shall be checked and main- The purpose of the certification/validation
tained by authorized persons whose of safety systems for presence sensing device
qualifications include knowledge of the initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power press-
safety distance, supplemental safe- es is to ensure that the safety systems are
designed, installed, and maintained in ac-
guarding requirements, and the manu- cordance with all applicable requirements of
facturer’s specifications for counter- 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this ap-
balance adjustment. Adjustment of the pendix A.
location of the PSDI presence sensing
device shall require use of a special General
tool available only to the authorized The certification/validation process shall
persons. utilize an independent third-party validation
(13) Operator training. (i) The operator organization recognized by OSHA in accord-
ance with the requirements specified in ap-
training required by paragraph (f)(2) of pendix C of this section.
this section shall be provided to the While the employer is responsible for as-
employee before the employee initially suring that the certification/validation re-
operates the press and as needed to quirements in § 1910.217(h)(11) are fulfilled,
maintain competence, but not less the design certification of PSDI safety sys-
than annually thereafter. It shall in- tems may be initiated by manufacturers, em-
clude instruction relative to the fol- ployers, and/or their representatives. The
lowing items for presses used in the term manufacturers refers to the manufac-
turer of any of the components of the safety
PSDI mode. system. An employer who assembles a PSDI
(A) The manufacturer’s rec- safety system would be a manufacturer as
ommended test procedures for check- well as employer for purposes of this stand-
ing operation of the presence sensing ard and appendix.
device. This shall include the use of the The certification/validation process in-
test rod required by paragraph (h)(10)(i) cludes two stages. For design certification,
of this section. in the first stage, the manufacturer (which
can be an employer) certifies that the PSDI
(B) The safety distance required. safety system meets the requirements of 29
(C) The operation, function and per- CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appen-
formance of the PSDI mode. dix A, based on appropriate design criteria
637
and tests. In the second stage, the OSHA-rec- B. Installation Certification/Validation
ognized third-party validation organization
1. The employer shall certify that the
validates that the PSDI safety system meets PSDI safety system has been design certified
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) and validated, that the installation meets
through (h) and this appendix A and the the operational and environmental require-
manufacturer’s certification by reviewing ments specified by the manufacturer, that
the manufacturer’s design and test data and the installation drawings are accurate, and
performing any additional reviews required that the installation meets the requirements
by this standard or which it believes appro- of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this ap-
priate. pendix A. (The operational and installation
For installation certification/validation requirements of the PSDI safety system may
and annual recertification/revalidation, in vary for different applications.)
the first stage the employer certifies or re- 2. The third-party validation organization
certifies that the employer is installing or shall validate the employer’s certifications
utilizing a PSDI safety system validated as that the PSDI safety system is design cer-
meeting the design requirements of 29 CFR tified and validated, that the installation
1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A meets the installation and environmental re-
by an OSHA-recognized third-party valida- quirements specified by the manufacturer,
tion organization and that the installation, and that the installation meets the require-
operation and maintenance meet the re- ments of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and
quirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) this appendix A.
and this appendix A. In the second stage, the
C. Recertification/Revalidation
OSHA-recognized third-party validation or-
ganization validates or revalidates that the 1. The PSDI safety system shall remain
PSDI safety system installation meets the under certification/validation for the shorter
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through of one year or until the system hardware is
(h) and this appendix A and the employer’s changed, modified or refurbished, or oper-
certification, by reviewing that the PSDI ating conditions are changed (including envi-
safety system has been certified; the employ- ronmental, application or facility changes),
er’s certification, designs and tests, if any; or a failure of a critical component has oc-
the installation, operation, maintenance and curred.
training; and by performing any additional 2. Annually, or after a change specified in
tests and reviews which the validation orga- paragraph 1., the employer shall inspect and
nization believes is necessary. recertify the installation as meeting the re-
quirements set forth under B., Installation
Summary Certification/Validation.
3. The third-party validation organization,
The certification/validation of safety sys- annually or after a change specified in para-
tems for PSDI shall consider the press, con- graph 1., shall validate the employer’s cer-
trols, safeguards, operator, and environment tification that the requirements of para-
as an integrated system which shall comply graph B., Installation Certification/Valida-
with all of the requirements in 29 CFR tion have been met.
1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. (NOTE: Such changes in operational condi-
The certification/validation process shall tions as die changes or press relocations not
verify that the safety system complies with involving disassembly or revision to the
the OSHA safety requirements as follows: safety system would not require recertifi-
cation/revalidation.)
A. Design Certification/Validation
Certification/Validation Requirements
1. The major parts, components and sub-
systems used shall be defined by part number A. General Design Certification/Validation
or serial number, as appropriate, and by Requirements
manufacturer to establish the configuration
1. Certification/Validation Program Require-
of the system.
ments. The manufacturer shall certify and
2. The identified parts, components and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation
subsystems shall be certified by the manu- organization shall validate that:
facturer to be able to withstand the func- (a) The design of components, subsystems,
tional and operational environments of the software and assemblies meets OSHA per-
PSDI safety system. formance requirements and are ready for the
3. The total system design shall be cer- intended use; and
tified by the manufacturer as complying (b) The performance of combined sub-
with all requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) systems meets OSHA’s operational require-
through (h) and this appendix A. ments.
4. The third-party validation organization 2. Certification/Validation Program Level of
shall validate the manufacturer’s certifi- Risk Evaluation Requirements. The manufac-
cation under paragraphs 2 and 3. turer shall evaluate and certify, and the
638
OSHA-recognized third-party validation or- Substantial modifications would require
ganization shall validate, the design and op- testing as a new safety system, as deemed
eration of the safety system by determining necessary by the validation organization.
conformance with the following:
a. The safety system shall have the ability B. Additional Detailed Design Certification/
to sustain a single failure or a single oper- Validation Requirements
ating error and not cause injury to personnel 1. General. The manufacturer or the manu-
from point of operation hazards. Acceptable facturer’s representative shall certify to and
design features shall demonstrate, in the fol- submit to an OSHA-recognized third-party
lowing order or precedence, that: validation organization the documentation
(1) No single failure points may cause in- necessary to demonstrate that the PSDI
jury; or safety system design is in full compliance
(2) Redundancy, and comparison and/or di- with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a)–
agnostic checking, exist for the critical (h) and this appendix A, as applicable, by
items that may cause injury, and the elec- means of analysis, tests, or combination of
trical, electronic, electromechanical and me- both, establishing that the following addi-
chanical parts and components are selected tional certification/validation requirements
so that they can withstand operational and are fulfilled.
external environments. The safety factor 2. Reaction Times. For the purpose of dem-
and/or derated percentage shall be specifi- onstrating compliance with the reaction
cally noted and complied with. time required by § 1910.217(h), the tests shall
b. The manufacturer shall design, evaluate, use the following definitions and require-
test and certify, and the third-party valida- ments:
tion organization shall evaluate and vali- a. Reaction time means the time, in seconds,
date, that the PSDI safety system meets ap- it takes the signal, required to activate/de-
propriate requirements in the following activate the system, to travel through the
areas. system, measured from the time of signal
(1) Environmental Limits initiation to the time the function being
(a) Temperature measured is completed.
(b) Relative humidity b. Full stop or No movement of the slide or
(c) Vibration ram means when the crankshaft rotation has
(d) Fluid compatability with other mate- slowed to two or less revolutions per minute,
rials just before stopping completely.
c. Function completion means for, electrical,
(2) Design Limits
electromechanical and electronic devices,
(a) Power requirements
when the circuit produces a change of state
(b) Power transient tolerances
in the output element of the device.
(c) Compatability of materials used
d. When the change of state is motion, the
(d) Material stress tolerances and limits measurement shall be made at the comple-
(e) Stability to long term power fluctua- tion of the motion.
tions e. The generation of the test signal intro-
(f) Sensitivity to signal acquisition duced into the system for measuring reac-
(g) Repeatability of measured parameter tion time shall be such that the initiation
without inadvertent initiation of a press time can be established with an error of less
stroke than 0.5 percent of the reaction time meas-
(h) Operational life of components in cy- ured.
cles, hours, or both f. The instrument used to measure reaction
(i) Electromagnetic tolerance to: time shall be calibrated to be accurate to
(1) Specific operational wave lengths; and within 0.001 second.
(2) Externally generated wave lengths 3. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(2)(ii). For
(3) New Design Certification/Validation. De- compliance with these requirements, the av-
sign certification/validation for a new safety erage value of the stopping time, Ts, shall be
system, i.e., a new design or new integration the arithmetic mean of at least 25 stops for
of specifically identified components and each stop angle initiation measured with the
subsystems, would entail a single certifi- brake and/or clutch unused, 50 percent worn,
cation/validation which would be applicable and 90 percent worn. The recommendations
to all identical safety systems. It would not of the brake system manufacturer shall be
be necessary to repeat the tests on indi- used to simulate or estimate the brake wear.
vidual safety systems of the same manufac- The manufacturer’s recommended minimum
ture or design. Nor would it be necessary to lining depth shall be identified and docu-
repeat these tests in the case of modifica- mented, and an evaluation made that the
tions where determined by the manufacturer minimum depth will not be exceeded before
and validated by the third-party validation the next (annual) recertification/revalida-
organization to be equivalent by similarity tion. A correlation of the brake and/or clutch
analysis. Minor modifications not affecting degradation based on the above tests and/or
the safety of the system may be made by the estimates shall be made and documented.
manufacturer without revalidation. The results shall document the conditions
639
under which the brake and/or clutch will and (2) Ambient relative humidity of 99 per-
will not comply with the requirement. Based cent.
upon this determination, a scale shall be de- (3) Vibration of 45G for one millisecond per
veloped to indicate the allowable 10 percent stroke when the item is to be mounted on
of the stopping time at the top of the stroke the press frame.
for slide or ram overtravel due to brake (4) Electromagnetic interference at the
wear. The scale shall be marked to indicate same wavelengths used for the radiation
that brake adjustment and/or replacement is sensing field, at the power line frequency
required. The explanation and use of the fundamental and harmonics, and also from
scale shall be documented. outogenous radiation due to system switch-
The test specification and procedure shall ing.
be submitted to the validation organization (5) Electrical power supply variations of
for review and validation prior to the test. ±15 percent.
The validation organization representative c. The manufacturer shall specify the test
shall witness at least one set of tests. requirements and procedures from existing
4. Compliance with §§ 1910.217(h)(5)(iii) and consensus tests in compliance with the pro-
(h)(9)(v). Each reaction time required to cal- visions of the National Electrical Code.
culate the Safety Distance, including the d. Tests designed by the manufacturer
brake monitor setting, shall be documented shall be made available upon request to the
in separate reaction time tests. These tests validation organization. The validation orga-
shall specify the acceptable tolerance band nization representative shall witness at least
sufficient to assure that tolerance build-up one set of each of these tests.
will not render the safety distance unsafe. 7. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(9)(iv). a. The
a. Integrated test of the press fully manufacturer shall design a test to dem-
equipped to operate in the PSDI mode shall onstrate that the prescribed minimum object
be conducted to establish the total system sensitivity of the presence sensing device is
reaction time. met.
b. Brakes which are the adjustable type b. The test specifications and procedures
shall be adjusted properly before the test. shall be made available upon request to the
5. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(2)(iii). a. validation organization.
Prior to conducting the brake system test 8. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(9)(x). a. The
required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii), a visual manufacturer shall design a test(s) to estab-
check shall be made of the springs. The vis- lish the hand tool extension diameters al-
ual check shall include a determination that lowed for variations in minimum object sen-
the spring housing or rod does not show dam- sitivity response.
age sufficient to degrade the structural in- b. The test(s) shall document the range of
tegrity of the unit, and the spring does not object diameter sizes which will produce
show any tendency to interleave. both single and double break conditions.
b. Any detected broken or unserviceable c. The test(s) specifications and procedures
springs shall be replaced before the test is shall be made available upon request to the
conducted. The test shall be considered suc- validation organization.
cessful if the stopping time remains within 9. Integrated Tests Certification/Validation. a.
that which is determined by paragraph The manufacturer shall design a set of inte-
(h)(9)(v) for the safety distance setting. If the grated tests to demonstrate compliance with
increase in press stopping time exceeds the the following requirements:
brake monitor setting limit defined in para- Sections 1910.217(h)(6) (ii); (iii); (iv); (v);
graph (h)(5)(iii), the test shall be considered (vi); (vii); (viii); (ix); (xi); (xii); (xiii); (xiv);
unsuccessful, and the cause of the excessive (xv); and (xvii).
stopping time shall be investigated. It shall b. The integrated test specifications and
be ascertained that the springs have not procedures shall be made available to the
been broken and that they are functioning validation organization.
properly. 10. Analysis. a. The manufacturer shall sub-
6. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(7). a. Tests mit to the validation organization the tech-
which are conducted by the manufacturers of nical analysis such as Hazard Analysis, Fail-
electrical components to establish stress, ure Mode and Effect Analysis, Stress Anal-
life, temperature and loading limits must be ysis, Component and Material Selection
tests which are in compliance with the provi- Analysis, Fluid Compatability, and/or other
sions of the National Electrical Code. analyses which may be necessary to dem-
b. Electrical and/or electronic cards or onstrate, compliance with the following re-
boards assembled with discreet components quirements:
shall be considered a subsystem and shall re- Sections 1910.217(h)(8) (i) and (ii); (h)(2) (ii)
quire separate testing that the subsystems and (iii); (h)(3)(i) (A) and (C), and (ii); (h)(5)
do not degrade in any of the following condi- (i), (ii) and (iii); (h)(6) (i), (iii), (iv), (vi), (vii),
tions: (viii), (ix), (x), (xi), (xiii), (xiv), (xv), (xvi),
(1) Ambient temperature variation from and (xvii); (h)(7) (i) and (ii); (h)(9) (iv), (v),
¥20 °C to +50 °C. (viii), (ix) and (x); (h)(10) (i) and (ii).
640
11. Types of Tests Acceptable for Certification/ 2. Conduct or recertification/revalidation. The
Validation. a. Test results obtained from de- employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI
velopment testing may be used to certify/ safety system installation, shall submit to
validate the design. the OSHA-recognized third-party validation
b. The test results shall provide the engi- organization the necessary supporting docu-
neering data necessary to establish con- mentation, and shall recertify that the re-
fidence that the hardware and software will quirements of § 1910.217(a) through (h) and
meet specifications, the manufacturing proc- this appendix are being met. The documenta-
ess has adequate quality control and the tion shall include, but not be limited to, the
data acquired was used to establish proc- following items:
esses, procedures, and test levels supporting a. Demonstration of a thorough inspection
subsequent hardware design, production, in- of the entire press and PSDI safety system
stallation and maintenance. to ascertain that the installation, compo-
12. Validation for Design Certification/Valida- nents and safeguarding have not been
tion. If, after review of all documentation, changed, modified or tampered with since
tests, analyses, manufacturer’s certifi- the installation certification/validation or
cations, and any additional tests which the last recertification/revalidation was made.
third-party validation organization believes b. Demonstrations that such adjustments
are necessary, the third-party validation or- as may be needed (such as to the brake mon-
ganization determines that the PSDI safety itor setting) have been accomplished with
system is in full compliance with the appli- proper changes made in the records and on
cable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) such notices as are located on the press and
through (h) and this appendix A, it shall safety system.
validate the manufacturer’s certification c. Demonstration that review has been
that it so meets the stated requirements. made of the reports covering the design cer-
tification/validation, the installation certifi-
C. Installation Certification/Validation cation/validation, and all recertification/re-
Requirements validations, in order to detect any degrada-
tion to an unsafe condition, and that nec-
1. The employer shall evaluate and test the essary changes have been made to restore
PSDI system installation, shall submit to the safety system to previous certification/
the OSHA-recognized third-party validation validation levels.
organization the necessary supporting docu- 3. The OSHA-recognized third-party valida-
mentation, and shall certify that the re- tion organization shall conduct tests, and/or
quirements of § 1910.217(a) through (h) and review and evaluate the employer’s installa-
this appendix A have been met and that the tion, tests, documentation and representa-
installation is proper. tions. If it so determines, it shall revalidate
2. The OSHA-recognized third-party valida- the employer’s recertification that the PSDI
tion organization shall conduct tests, and/or system is in full conformance with all re-
review and evaluate the employer’s installa- quirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h)
tion tests, documentation and representa- and this appendix A.
tions. If it so determines, it shall validate
the employer’s certification that the PSDI APPENDIX B TO § 1910.217—NONMANDATORY
safety system is in full conformance with all GUIDELINES FOR CERTIFICATION/VALIDATION
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through OF SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR PRESENCE SENSING
(h) and this appendix A. DEVICE INITIATION OF MECHANICAL POWER
PRESSES
D. Recertification/Revalidation
Requirements Objectives
1. A PSDI safety system which has re- This appendix provides employers, manu-
ceived installation certification/validation facturers, and their representatives, with
shall undergo recertification/revalidation nonmandatory guidelines for use in devel-
the earlier of: oping certification documents. Employers
a. Each time the systems hardware is sig- and manufacturers are encouraged to rec-
nificantly changed, modified, or refurbished; ommend other approaches if there is a poten-
b. Each time the operational conditions tial for improving safety and reducing cost.
are significantly changed (including environ- The guidelines apply to certification/valida-
mental, application or facility changes, but tion activity from design evaluation through
excluding such changes as die changes or the completion of the installation test and
press relocations not involving revision to the annual recertification/revalidation tests.
the safety system);
General Guidelines
c. When a failure of a significant compo-
nent has occurred or a change has been made A. The certification/validation process
which may affect safety; or should confirm that hazards identified by
d. When one year has elapsed since the in- hazard analysis, (HA), failure mode effect
stallation certification/validation or the last analysis (FMEA), and other system analyses
recertification/revalidation. have been eliminated by design or reduced to
641
an acceptable level through the use of appro- the item. Similarity analysis should not be
priate design features, safety devices, warn- accepted when the internal and external
ing devices, or special procedures. The cer- stresses on the item being certified/validated
tification/validation process should also con- are not defined.
firm that residual hazards identified by oper- Usage experience should also include fail-
ational analysis are addressed by warning, ure data supporting adequacy of the design.
labeling safety instructions or other appro-
priate means. APPENDIX C TO § 1910.217—MANDATORY RE-
B. The objective of the certification/valida- QUIREMENTS FOR OSHA RECOGNITION OF
tion program is to demonstrate and docu- THIRD-PARTY VALIDATION ORGANIZATIONS
ment that the system satisfies specification FOR THE PSDI STANDARD
and operational requirements for safe oper- This appendix prescribes mandatory re-
ations. quirements and procedures for OSHA rec-
Quality Control ognition of third-party validation organiza-
tions to validate employer and manufacturer
The safety attributes of a certified/vali- certifications that their equipment and prac-
dated PSDI safety system are more likely to tices meet the requirements of the PSDI
be maintained if the quality of the system standard. The scope of the appendix includes
and its parts, components and subsystem is the three categories of certification/valida-
consistently controlled. Each manufacturer tion required by the PSDI standard: Design
supplying parts, components, subsystems, Certification/Validation, Installation Certifi-
and assemblies needs to maintain the quality cation/Validation, and Annual Recertifi-
of the product, and each employer needs to cation/Revalidation.
maintain the system in a non-degraded con- If further detailing of these provisions will
dition. assist the validation organization or OSHA
in this activity, this detailing will be done
Analysis Guidelines
through appropriate OSHA Program Direc-
A. Certification/validation of hardware de- tives.
sign below the system level should be accom-
plished by test and/or analysis. I. Procedure for OSHA Recognition of
B. Analytical methods may be used in lieu Validation Organizations
of, in combination with, or in support of
tests to satisfy specification requirements. A. Applications
C. Analyses may be used for certification/ 1. Eligibility. a. Any person or organization
validation when existing data are available considering itself capable of conducting a
or when test is not feasible. PSDI-related third-party validation function
D. Similarity analysis may be used in lieu may apply for OSHA recognition.
of tests where it can be shown that the arti- b. However, in determining eligibility for a
cle is similar in design, manufacturing proc- foreign-based third-party validation organi-
ess, and quality control to another article zation, OSHA shall take into consideration
that was previously certified/validated in ac- whether there is reciprocity of treatment by
cordance with equivalent or more stringent the foreign government after consultation
criteria. If previous design, history and ap- with relevant U.S. government agencies.
plication are considered to be similar, but 2. Content of application. a. The application
not equal to or more exacting than earlier shall identify the scope of the validation ac-
experiences, the additional or partial certifi- tivity for which the applicant wishes to be
cation/validation tests should concentrate on recognized, based on one of the following al-
the areas of changed or increased require- ternatives:
ments. (1) Design Certification/Validation, Instal-
lation Certification/Validation, and Annual
Analysis Reports
Recertification/Revalidation;
The analysis reports should identify: (1) (2) Design Certification/Validation only; or
The basis for the analysis; (2) the hardware (3) Installation/Certification/Validation
or software items analyzed; (3) conclusions; and Annual Recertification/Revalidation.
(4) safety factors; and (5) limit of the anal- b. The application shall provide informa-
ysis. The assumptions made during the anal- tion demonstrating that it and any vali-
ysis should be clearly stated and a descrip- dating laboratory utilized meet the quali-
tion of the effects of these assumptions on fications set forth in section II of this appen-
the conclusions and limits should be in- dix.
cluded. c. The applicant shall provide information
Certification/validation by similarity anal- demonstrating that it and any validating
ysis reports should identify, in addition to laboratory utilized meet the program re-
the above, application of the part, compo- quirements set forth in section III of this ap-
nent or subsystem for which certification/ pendix.
validation is being sought as well as data d. The applicant shall identify the test
from previous usage establishing adequacy of methods it or the validating laboratory will
642
use to test or judge the components and op- applicant in writing, listing the specific re-
erations of the PSDI safety system required quirements of this appendix which the appli-
to be tested by the PSDI standard and appen- cant has not met, and the reasons.
dix A, and shall specify the reasons the test 5. Revision of application. After receipt of a
methods are appropriate. notification of preliminary disapproval, the
e. The applicant may include whatever en- applicant may submit a revised application
closures, attachments, or exhibits the appli- for further review by OSHA pursuant to sub-
cant deems appropriate. The application section I.B. of this appendix or may request
need not be submitted on a Federal form. that the original application be submitted to
f. The applicant shall certify that the in- the Assistant Secretary with a statement of
formation submitted is accurate. reasons supplied by the applicant as to why
3. Filing office location. The application the application should be approved.
shall be filed with: PSDI Certification/Vali- 6. Preliminary decision by Assistant Secretary.
dation Program, Office of Variance Deter- a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special des-
mination, Occupational Safety and Health ignee for this purpose, will make a prelimi-
Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, nary decision whether the applicant has met
Room N3653, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., the requirements for recognition based on
Washington, DC 20210. the completed application file and the writ-
4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An appli- ten staff recommendation, as well as the
cation may be revised by an applicant at any statement of reasons by the applicant if
time prior to the completion of the final there is a recommendation of disapproval.
staff recommendation. b. This preliminary decision will be sent to
b. An application may be withdrawn by an the applicant and subsequently published in
applicant, without prejudice, at any time the FEDERAL REGISTER.
prior to the final decision by the Assistant 7. Public review and comment period. a. The
Secretary in paragraph I.B.8.b.(4) of this ap- FEDERAL REGISTER notice of preliminary de-
pendix. cision will provide a period of not less than
60 calendar days for the written comments
B. Review and Decision Process on the applicant’s fulfillment of the require-
1. Acceptance and field inspection. All appli- ments for recognition. The application, sup-
cations submitted will be accepted by OSHA, porting documents, staff recommendation,
and their receipt acknowledged in writing. statement of applicant’s reasons, and any
After receipt of an application, OSHA may comments received, will be available for pub-
request additional information if it believes lic inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.
information relevant to the requirements for b. If the preliminary decision is in favor of
recognition have been omitted. OSHA may recognition, a member of the public, or if the
inspect the facilities of the third-party vali- preliminary decision is against recognition,
dation organization and any validating lab- the applicant may request a public hearing
oratory, and while there shall review any ad- by the close of the comment period, if it sup-
ditional documentation underlying the applies detailed reasons and evidence chal-
plication. A report shall be made of each lenging the basis of the Assistant Sec-
field inspection. retary’s preliminary decision and justifying
2. Requirements for recognition. The require- the need for a public hearing to bring out
ments for OSHA recognition of a third-party evidence which could not be effectively sup-
validation organization for the PSDI stand- plied through written submissions.
ard are that the program has fulfilled the re- 8. Final decision by Assistant Secretary—a.
quirements of section II of this appendix for Without hearing. If there are no valid re-
qualifications and of section III of this ap- quests for a hearing, based on the applica-
pendix for program requirements, and the tion, supporting documents, staff rec-
program has identified appropriate test and ommendation, evidence and public comment,
analysis methods to meet the requirements the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final
of the PSDI standard and appendix A. decision (including reasons) of the Depart-
3. Preliminary approval. If, after review of ment of Labor on whether the applicant has
the application, any additional information, demonstrated by a preponderance of the evi-
and the inspection report, the applicant and dence that it meets the requirements for rec-
any validating laboratory appear to have ognition.
met the requirements for recognition, a writ- b. After hearing. If there is a valid request
ten recommendation shall be submitted by for a hearing pursuant to paragraph I.B.7.b.
the responsible OSHA personnel to the As- of this appendix, the following procedures
sistant Secretary to approve the application will be used:
with a supporting explanation. (1) The Assistant Secretary will issue a no-
4. Preliminary disapproval. If, after review of tice of hearing before an administrative law
the application, additional information, and judge of the Department of Labor pursuant
inspection report, the applicant does not ap- to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905,
pear to have met the requirements for rec- subpart C.
ognition, the Director of the PSDI certifi- (2) After the hearing, pursuant to subpart
cation/validation program shall notify the C, the administrative law judge shall issue a
643
decision (including reasons) based on the ap- current recognition will not expire until a
plication, the supporting documentation, the final decision has been made on the request.
staff recommendation, the public comments The renewal request will be processed in ac-
and the evidence submitted during the hear- cordance with subsection I.B. of this appen-
ing (the record), stating whether it has been dix, above, except that a reinspection is not
demonstrated, based on a preponderance of required but may be performed by OSHA. A
evidence, that the applicant meets the re- hearing will be granted to an objecting mem-
quirements for recognition. If no exceptions ber of the public if evidence of failure to
are filed, this is the final decision of the De- meet the requirements of this appendix is
partment of Labor.
supplied to OSHA.
(3) Upon issuance of the decision, any
party to the hearing may file exceptions 4. A recognized validation organization
within 20 days pursuant to subpart C. If ex- may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its
ceptions are filed, the administrative law current recognition to cover other categories
judge shall forward the decision, exceptions of PSDI certification/validation in addition
and record to the Assistant Secretary for the to those included in the current recognition.
final decision on the application. The application for expansion will be acted
(4) The Assistant Secretary shall review upon and processed by OSHA in accordance
the record, the decision by the administra- with subsection I.B. of this appendix, subject
tive law judge, and the exceptions. Based on to the possible reinspection exception. If the
this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the validation organization has been recognized
final decision (including reasons) of the De- for more than one year, meets the require-
partment of Labor stating whether the appli- ments for expansion of recognition, and
cant has demonstrated by a preponderance of there is no evidence that the recognized vali-
evidence that it meets the requirements for dation organization has not been following
recognition. the requirements of this appendix and the
b. Publication. A notification of the final letter of recognition, an expansion will nor-
decision shall be published in the FEDERAL mally be granted. A hearing will be granted
REGISTER.
to an objecting member of the public only if
C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition, evidence of failure to meet the requirements
Renewal and Revocation of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.
5. A recognized validation organization
1. The following terms and conditions shall
may voluntarily terminate its recognition,
be part of every recognition:
a. The recognition of any validation orga- either in its entirety or with respect to any
nization will be evidenced by a letter of rec- area covered in its recognition, by giving
ognition from OSHA. The letter will provide written notice to OSHA at any time. The
the specific details of the scope of the OSHA written notice shall indicate the termination
recognition as well as any conditions im- date. A validation organization may not ter-
posed by OSHA, including any Federal moni- minate its installation certification and re-
toring requirements. certification validation functions earlier
b. The recognition of each validation orga- than either one year from the date of the
nization will be valid for five years, unless written notice, or the date on which another
terminated before or renewed after the expi- recognized validation organization is able to
ration of the period. The dates of the period perform the validation of installation certifi-
of recognition will be stated in the recogni- cation and recertification.
tion letter. 6.a. OSHA may revoke its recognition of a
c. The recognized validation organization validation organization if its program either
shall continue to satisfy all the require- has failed to continue to satisfy the require-
ments of this appendix and the letter of rec- ments of this appendix or its letter of rec-
ognition during the period of recognition. ognition, has not been performing the valida-
2. A recognized validation organization tion functions required by the PSDI standard
may change a test method of the PSDI safe-
and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself
ty system certification/validation program
in its applications. Before proposing to re-
by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the
voke recognition, the Agency will notify the
change, certifying that the revised method
will be at least as effective as the prior recognized validation organization of the
method, and providing the supporting data basis of the proposed revocation and will
upon which its conclusions are based. allow rebuttal or correction of the alleged
3. A recognized validation organization deficiencies. If the deficiencies are not cor-
may renew its recognition by filing a re- rected, OSHA may revoke recognition, effec-
newal request at the address in paragraph tive in 60 days, unless the validation organi-
I.A.3. of this appendix, above, not less than zation requests a hearing within that time.
180 calendar days, nor more than one year, b. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held
before the expiration date of its current rec- before an administrative law judge of the De-
ognition. When a recognized validation orga- partment of Labor pursuant to the rules
nization has filed such a renewal request, its specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
644
c. The parties shall be OSHA and the rec- a. It is financially capable to conduct the
ognized validation organization. The deci- work;
sion shall be made pursuant to the proce- b. It is free of direct influence or control
dures specified in paragraphs I.B.8.b.(2) by manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, rep-
through (4) of this appendix except that the resentatives of employers and employees,
burden of proof shall be on OSHA to dem- and employer or employee organizations; and
onstrate by a preponderance of the evidence c. Its employees are secure from discharge
that the recognition should be revoked be- resulting from pressures from manufactur-
cause the validation organization either is ers, suppliers, vendors, employers or em-
not meeting the requirements for recogni- ployee representatives.
tion, has not been performing the validation 2. A validation organization may be consid-
functions required by the PSDI standard and ered independent even if it has ties with
appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in manufacturers, employers or employee rep-
its applications. resentatives if these ties are with at least
two of these three groups; it has a board of
D. Provisions of OSHA Recognition directors (or equivalent leadership respon-
Each recognized third-party validation or- sible for the certification/validation activi-
ganization and its validating laboratories ties) which includes representatives of the
shall: three groups; and it has a binding commit-
1. Allow OSHA to conduct unscheduled re- ment of funding for a period of three years or
views or on-site audits of it or the validating more.
laboratories on matters relevant to PSDI,
and cooperate in the conduct of these re- C. Validating Laboratory
views and audits; The validation organization’s laboratory
2. Agree to terms and conditions estab- (which organizationally may be a part of the
lished by OSHA in the grant of recognition third-party validation organization):
on matters such as exchange of data, submis- 1. Shall have legal authority to perform
sion of accident reports, and assistance in the validation of certification;
studies for improving PSDI or the certifi- 2. Shall be free of operational control and
cation/validation process. influence of manufacturers, suppliers, ven-
dors, employers, or employee representatives
II. Qualifications that would impair its integrity of perform-
The third-party validation organization, ance; and
the validating laboratory, and the employees 3. Shall not engage in the design, manufac-
of each shall meet the requirements set forth ture, sale, promotion, or use of the certified
in this section of this appendix. equipment.
A. Experience of Validation Organization D. Facilities and Equipment

1. The third-party validation organization The validation organization’s validating
shall have legal authority to perform certifi- laboratory shall have available all testing
cation/validation activities. facilities and necessary test and inspection
2. The validation organization shall dem- equipment relevant to the validation of the
onstrate competence and experience in ei- certification of PSDI safety systems, instal-
ther power press design, manufacture or use, lations and operations.
or testing, quality control or certification/
validation of equipment comparable to E. Personnel
power presses and associated control sys- The validation organization and the vali-
tems. dating laboratory shall be adequately staffed
3. The validation organization shall dem- by personnel who are qualified by technical
onstrate a capability for selecting, review- training and/or experience to conduct the
ing, and/or validating appropriate standards validation of the certification of PSDI safety
and test methods to be used for validating systems.
the certification of PSDI safety systems, as 1. The validation organization shall assign
well as for reviewing judgements on the safe- overall responsibility for the validation of
ty of PSDI safety systems and their con- PSDI certification to an Administrative Di-
formance with the requirements of this sec- rector. Minimum requirements for this posi-
tion. tion are a Bachelor’s degree and five years
4. The validating organization may utilize professional experience, at least one of which
the competence, experience, and capability shall have been in responsible charge of a
of its employees to demonstrate this com- function in the areas of power press design or
petence, experience and capability. manufacture or a broad range of power press
use, or in the areas of testing, quality con-
B. Independence of Validation Organization
trol, or certification/validation of equipment
1. The validation organization shall dem- comparable to power presses or their associ-
onstrate that: ated control systems.
645
2. The validating laboratory, if a separate b. Identification and description of test
organization from the validation organiza- methods or procedures used. (This may be
tion, shall assign technical responsibility for through reference to published sources which
the validation of PSDI certification to a describe the test methods or procedures
Technical Director. Minimum requirements used.)
for this position are a Bachelor’s degree in a c. Results of all tests performed.
technical field and five years of professional d. All safety distance calculations.
experience, at least one of which shall have 3. A copy of the test report shall be main-
been in responsible charge of a function in tained on file at the validation organization
the area of testing, quality control or certifi- and/or validating laboratory, and shall be
cation/validation of equipment comparable available to OSHA upon request.
to power presses or their associated control
systems. C. Certification/Validation Reports
3. If the validation organization and the 1. A certification/validation report shall be
validating laboratory are the same organiza- prepared for each PSDI safety system for
tion, the administrative and technical re- which the certification is validated. The cer-
sponsibilities may be combined in a single tification/validation report shall be signed
position, with minimum requirements as de- by the Administrative Director and the
scribed in E.1. and 2. for the combined posi- Technical Director.
tion. 2. The certification/validation report shall
4. The validation organization and vali- include the following:
dating laboratory shall have adequate ad-
a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or
ministrative and technical staffs to conduct
model number of each subsystem or major
the validation of the certification of PSDI
component.
safety systems.
b. Results of all tests which serve as the
F. Certification/Validation Mark or Logo basis for the certification.
c. All safety distance calculations.
1. The validation organization or the vali- d. Statement that the safety system con-
dating laboratory shall own a registered cer- forms with all requirements of the PSDI
tification/validation mark or logo. standard and appendix A.
2. The mark or logo shall be suitable for in- 3. A copy of the certification/validation re-
corporation into the label required by para- port shall be maintained on file at the vali-
graph (h)(11)(iii) of this section. dation organization and/or validating labora-
III. Program Requirements tory, and shall be available to the public
upon request.
A. Test and Certification/Validation 4. A copy of the certification/validation re-
Procedures port shall be submitted to OSHA within 30
days of its completion.
1. The validation organization and/or vali-
dating laboratory shall have established D. Publications System
written procedures for test and certification/
validation of PSDI safety systems. The pro- The validation organization shall make
cedures shall be based on pertinent OSHA available upon request a list of PSDI safety
standards and test methods, or other pub- systems which have been certified/validated
licly available standards and test methods by the program.
generally recognized as appropriate in the E. Follow-up Activities
field, such as national consensus standards
or published standards of professional soci- 1. The validation organization or vali-
eties or trade associations. dating laboratory shall have a follow-up sys-
2. The written procedures for test and cer- tem for inspecting or testing manufacturer’s
tification/validation of PSDI systems, and production of design certified/validated PSDI
the standards and test methods on which safety system components and subassemblies
they are based, shall be reproducible and be where deemed appropriate by the validation
available to OSHA and to the public upon re- organization.
quest. 2. The validation organization shall notify
the appropriate product manufacturer(s) of
B. Test Reports any reports from employers of point of oper-
1. A test report shall be prepared for each ation injuries which occur while a press is
PSDI safety system that is tested. The test operated in a PSDI mode.
report shall be signed by a technical staff
F. Records
representative and the Technical Director.
2. The test report shall include the fol- The validation organization or validating
lowing: laboratory shall maintain a record of each
a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or certification/validation of a PSDI safety sys-
model number of each subsystem or major tem, including manufacturer and/or em-
component. ployer certification documentation, test and
646
working data, test report, certification/vali- of significantly increased stopping time if a
dation report, any follow-up inspections or spring breaks.
testing, and reports of equipment failures, As an added precaution to the require-
any reports of accidents involving the equipments in paragraph (h)(2)(iii), brake adjust-
ment, and any other pertinent information. ment locking means should be secured.
These records shall be available for inspec- Where brake springs are externally acces-
tion by OSHA and OSHA State Plan offices. sible, lock nuts or other means may be pro-
vided to reduce the possibility of backing off
G. Dispute Resolution Procedures of the compression nut which holds the
1. The validation organization shall have a springs in place.
reasonable written procedure for acknowl-
edging and processing appeals or complaints 3. Pneumatic Systems
from program participants (manufacturers, Elevated clutch/brake air pressure results
producers, suppliers, vendors and employers) in longer stopping time. The requirement in
as well as other interested parties (employ- paragraph (h)(3)(i)(C) is intended to prevent
ees or their representatives, safety per- degradation in stoping speed from higher air
sonnel, government agencies, etc.), con- pressure. Higher pressures may be permitted,
cerning certification or validation. however, to increase clutch torque to free
2. The validation organization may charge ‘‘jammed’’ dies, provided positive measures
any complainant the reasonable charge for are provided to prevent the higher pressure
repeating tests needed for the resolution of at other times.
disputes.
4. Flywheels and Bearings
APPENDIX D TO § 1910.217—NONMANDATORY
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION Lubrication of bearings is considered the
single greatest deterrent to their failure.
This appendix provides nonmandatory sup-
The manufacturer’s recommended proce-
plementary information and guidelines to
assist in the understanding and use of 29 CFR dures for maintenance and inspection should
1910.217(h) to allow presence sensing device be closely followed.
initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power press- 5. Brake Monitoring
es. Although this appendix as such is not
mandatory, it references sections and re- The approval of brake monitor adjust-
quirements which are made mandatory by ments, as required in paragraph (h)(5)(ii), is
other parts of the PSDI standard and appen- not considered a recertification, and does not
dices. necessarily involve an on-site inspection by
a representative of the validation organiza-
1. General tion. It is expected that the brake monitor
OSHA intends that PSDI continue to be adjustment normally could be evaluated on
prohibited where present state-of-the-art the basis of the effect on the safety system
technology will not allow it to be done safe- certification/validation documentation re-
ly. Only part revolution type mechanical tained by the validation organization.
power presses are approved for PSDI. Simi- Use of a brake monitor does not eliminate
larly, only presses with a configuration such the need for periodic brake inspection and
that a person’s body cannot completely enter maintenance to reduce the possibility of cat-
the bed area are approved for PSDI. astrophic failures.
2. Brake and Clutch 6. Cycle Control and Control Systems

Flexible steel band brakes do not possess a The PSDI set-up/reset means required by
long-term reliability against structural fail- paragraph (h)(6)(iv) may be initiated by the
ure as compared to other types of brakes, actuation of a special momentary push-
and therefore are not acceptable on presses button or by the actuation of a special mo-
used in the PSDI mode of operation. mentary pushbutton and the initiation of a
Fast and consistent stopping times are im- first stroke with two hand controls.
portant to safety for the PSDI mode of oper- It would normally be preferable to limit
ation. Consistency of braking action is en- the adjustment of the time required in para-
hanced by high brake torque. The require- graph (h)(6)(vi) to a maximum of 15 seconds.
ment in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) defines a high However, where an operator must do many
torque capability which should ensure fast operations outside the press, such as lubri-
and consistent stopping times. cating, trimming, deburring, etc., a longer
Brake design parameters important to interval up to 30 seconds is permitted.
PSDI are high torque, low moment of iner- When a press is equipped for PSDI oper-
tia, low air volume (if pneumatic) mecha- ation, it is recommended that the presence
nisms, non-interleaving engagement springs, sensing device be active as a guarding device
and structural integrity which is enhanced in other production modes. This should en-
by over-design. The requirement in hance the reliability of the device and ensure
paragrpah (h)(2)(iii) reduces the possibility that it remains operable.
647
An acceptable method for interlocking tion in the sensing field. A minimum object
supplemental guards as required by para- sensitivity of one and one-fourth inches
graph (h)(6)(xiii) would be to incorporate the (31.75 mm) means that a one and one-fourth
supplemental guard and the PSDI presence inch (31.75 mm) diameter object will be con-
sensing device into a hinged arrangement in tinuously detected at all locations in the
which the alignment of the presence sensing sensing field.
device serves, in effect, as the interlock. If In deriving the safety distance required in
the supplemental guards are moved, the paragraph (h)(9)(v), all stopping time meas-
presence sensing device would become mis- urements should be made with clutch/brake
aligned and the press control would be de- air pressure regulated to the press manufac-
activated. No extra microswitches or inter- turer’s recommended value for full clutch
locking sensors would be required. torque capability. The stopping time meas-
Paragraph (h)(6)(xv) of the standard re- urements should be made with the heaviest
quires that the control system have provi- upper die that is planned for use in the press.
sions for an ‘‘inch’’ operating means; that If the press has a slide counterbalance sys-
die-setting not be done in the PSDI mode; tem, it is important that the counterbalance
and that production not be done in the be adjusted correctly for upper die weight ac-
‘‘inch’’ mode. It should be noted that the cording to the manufacturer’s instructions.
sensing device would be by-passed in the While the brake monitor setting is based on
‘‘inch’’ mode. For that reason, the prohibi- the stopping time it actually measures, i.e.,
tions against die-setting in the PSDI mode, the normal stopping time at the top of the
and against production in the ‘‘inch’’ mode stroke, it is important that the safety dis-
are cited to emphasize that ‘‘inch’’ operation tance be computed from the longest stopping
is of reduced safety and is not compatible time measured at any of the indicated three
with PSDI or other production modes. downstroke stopping positions listed in the
explanation of Ts. The use in the formula of
7. Environmental Requirements
twice the stopping time increase, Tm, al-
It is the intent of paragraph (h)(7) that lowed by the brake monitor for brake wear
control components be provided with inher- allows for greater increases in the down-
ent design protection against operating stroke stopping time than occur in normal
stresses and environmental factors affecting stopping time at the top of the stroke.
safety and reliability.
10. Inspection and Maintenance. [Reserved]
8. Safety system
11. Safety System Certification/Validation
The safety system provision continues the
concept of paragraph (b)(13) that the prob- Mandatory requirements for certification/
ability of two independent failures in the validation of the PSDI safety system are
length of time required to make one press provided in appendix A and appendix C to
cycle is so remote as to be a negligible risk this standard. Nonmandatory supplementary
factor in the total array of equipment and information and guidelines relating to cer-
human factors. The emphasis is on an inte- tification/validation of the PSDI safety sys-
grated total system including all elements tem are provided to appendix B to this stand-
affecting point of operation safety. ard.
It should be noted that this does not re- [39 FR 32502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39
quire redundancy for press components such FR 41846, Dec. 23, 1974; 40 FR 3982, Jan. 27,
as structural elements, clutch/brake mecha- 1975; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 8594,
nisms, plates, etc., for which adequate reli- Feb. 8, 1980; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 51 FR
ability may be achieved by proper design, 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 8353, 8358 Mar. 14,
maintenance, and inspection. 1988; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9240,
9. Safeguarding the Point of Operation Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 76 FR
80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 46949, Aug. 7, 2012]
The intent of paragraph (h)(9)(iii) is to pro-
hibit use of mirrors to ‘‘bend’’ a single light § 1910.218 Forging machines.
curtain sensing field around corners to cover
more than one side of a press. This prohibi- (a) General requirements—(1) Use of
tion is needed to increase the reliability of lead. The safety requirements of this
the presence sensing device in initiating a subparagraph apply to lead casts or
stroke only when the desired work motion other use of lead in the forge shop or
has been completed. die shop.
Object sensitivity describes the capability of (i) Thermostatic control of heating
a presence sensing device to detect an object
elements shall be provided to maintain
in the sensing field, expressed as the linear
measurement of the smallest interruption proper melting temperature and pre-
which can be detected at any point in the vent overheating.
field. Minimum object sensitivity describes (ii) Fixed or permanent lead pot in-
the largest acceptable size of the interrup- stallations shall be exhausted.
648
(iii) Portable units shall be used only ation protection devices at frequent
in areas where good, general room ven- and regular intervals. Recording of in-
tilation is provided. spections shall be in the form of a cer-
(iv) Personal protective equipment tification record which includes the
(gloves, goggles, aprons, and other date the inspection was performed, the
items) shall be worn. signature of the person who performed
(v) A covered container shall be pro- the inspection and the serial number,
vided to store dross skimmings. or other identifier, of the equipment
(vi) Equipment shall be kept clean, inspected.
particularly from accumulations of (iii) Training personnel for the proper
yellow lead oxide. inspection and maintenance of forging
(2) Inspection and maintenance. It machinery and equipment.
shall be the responsibility of the em- (iv) All overhead parts shall be fas-
ployer to maintain all forge shop tened or protected in such a manner
equipment in a condition which will in- that they will not fly off or fall in
sure continued safe operation. This re- event of failure.
sponsibility includes: (3) Hammers and presses. (i) All ham-
(i) Establishing periodic and regular mers shall be positioned or installed in
maintenance safety checks and keep- such a manner that they remain on or
ing certification records of these in- are anchored to foundations sufficient
spections which include the date of in- to support them according to applica-
spection, the signature of the person ble engineering standards.
who performed the inspection and the (ii) All presses shall be installed in
serial number, or other identifier, for such a manner that they remain where
the forging machine which was in- they are positioned or they are an-
spected. chored to foundations sufficient to sup-
(ii) Scheduling and recording the in- port them according to applicable engi-
spection of guards and point of oper- neering standards.
TABLE O–11—STRENGTH AND DIMENSIONS FOR WOOD RAM PROPS
Maximum al-
Square Minimum allowable Maximum static load Maximum rec- lowable
Size of tim- inches in crushing strength ommended weight of
within short column Safety factor length of
ber, inches 1 cross sec- parallel to grain, range 3 forging hammer for timber,
tion p.s.i. 2 timber used
inches
4×4 16 5,000 80,000 10 8,000 44

6×6 36 5,000 180,000 10 18,000 66
8×8 64 5,000 320,000 10 32,000 88
10×10 100 5,000 500,000 10 50,000 100
12×12 144 5,000 720,000 10 72,000 132
1 Actual dimension.
2 Adapted from U.S. Department of Agriculture Technical Bulletin 479. Hardwoods recommended are those whose ultimate
crushing strengths in compression parallel to grain are 5,000 p.s.i. (pounds per square inch) or greater.
3 Slenderness ratio formula for short columns is L/d=11, where L=length of timber in inches and d=least dimension in inches;
this ratio should not exceed 11.
(iii) Means shall be provided for dis- of kickback, and shall not have sharp
connecting the power to the machine handle ends.
and for locking out or rendering cy- (vi) Oil swabs, or scale removers, or
cling controls inoperable. other devices to remove scale shall be
(iv) The ram shall be blocked when provided. These devices shall be long
dies are being changed or other work is enough to enable a man to reach the
being done on the hammer. Blocks or full length of the die without placing
wedges shall be made of material the his hand or arm between the dies.
strength and construction of which (vii) Material handling equipment
should meet or exceed the specifica- shall be of adequate strength, size, and
tions and dimensions shown in Table dimension to handle diesetting oper-
O–11. ations safely.
(v) Tongs shall be of sufficient length (viii) A scale guard of substantial
to clear the body of the worker in case construction shall be provided at the
649
back of every hammer, so arranged as porated by reference as specified in
to stop flying scale. § 1910.6.
(ix) A scale guard of substantial con- (2) Board drophammers. (i) A suitable
struction shall be provided at the back enclosure shall be provided to prevent
of every press, so arranged as to stop damaged or detached boards from fall-
flying scale. ing. The board enclosure shall be se-
(b) Hammers, general—(1) Keys. Die curely fastened to the hammer.
keys and shims shall be made from a (ii) All major assemblies and fittings
grade of material that will not unduly which can loosen and fall shall be prop-
crack or splinter. erly secured in place.
(2) Foot operated devices. All foot oper- (f) Forging presses—(1) Mechanical
ated devices (i.e., treadles, pedals, bars, forging presses. When dies are being
valves, and switches) shall be substan- changed or maintenance is being per-
tially and effectively protected from formed on the press, the following shall
unintended operation. be accomplished:
(c) Presses. All manually operated (i) The power to the press shall be
valves and switches shall be clearly locked out.
identified and readily accessible. (ii) The flywheel shall be at rest.
(d) Power-driven hammers—(1) Safety (iii) The ram shall be blocked with a
cylinder head. Every steam or air- material the strength of which shall
hammer shall have a safety cylinder meet or exceed the specifications or di-
head to act as a cushion if the rod mensions shown in Table O–11.
should break or pullout of the ram. (2) Hydraulic forging presses. When
dies are being changed or maintenance
(2) Shutoff valve. Steam hammers
is being performed on the press, the fol-
shall be provided with a quick closing
lowing shall be accomplished:
emergency valve in the admission pipe-
(i) The hydraulic pumps and power
line at a convenient location. This
apparatus shall be locked out.
valve shall be closed and locked in the
(ii) The ram shall be blocked with a
off position while the hammer is being
material the strength of which shall
adjusted, repaired, or serviced, or when
meet or exceed the specifications or di-
the dies are being changed.
mensions shown in Table O–11.
(3) Cylinder draining. Steam hammers (g) Trimming presses—(1) Hot trimming
shall be provided with a means of cyl- presses. The requirements of paragraph
inder draining, such as a self-draining (f)(1) of this section shall also apply to
arrangement or a quick-acting drain hot trimming presses.
cock. (2) Cold trimming presses. Cold trim-
(4) Pressure pipes. Steam or air piping ming presses shall be safeguarded in
shall conform to the specifications of accordance with § 1910.217(c).
American National Standard ANSI (h) Upsetters—(1) General requirements.
B31.1.0–1967, Power Piping with Ad- All upsetters shall be installed so that
denda issued before April 28, 1971, they remain on their supporting foun-
which is incorporated by reference as dations.
specified in § 1910.6. (2) Lockouts. Upsetters shall be pro-
(e) Gravity hammers—(1) Air-lift ham- vided with a means for locking out the
mers. (i) Air-lift hammers shall have a power at its entry point to the machine
safety cylinder head as required in and rendering its cycling controls inop-
paragraph (d)(1) of this section. erable.
(ii) Air-lift hammers shall have an (3) Manually operated controls. All
air shutoff valve as required in para- manually operated valves and switches
graph (d)(2) of this section. shall be clearly identified and readily
(iii) Air-lift hammers shall be pro- accessible.
vided with two drain cocks: one on (4) Tongs. Tongs shall be of sufficient
main head cylinder, and one on clamp length to clear the body of the worker
cylinder. in case of kickback, and shall not have
(iv) Air piping shall conform to the sharp handle ends.
specifications of the ANSI B31.1.0–1967, (5) Changing dies. When dies are being
Power Piping with Addenda issued be- changed, maintenance performed, or
fore April 28, 1971, which is incor- any work done on the machine, the
650
power to the upsetter shall be locked less than one thousand (1,000) feet per
out, and the flywheel shall be at rest. minute, and if free from metal lacings
(i) Other forging equipment—(1) or fastenings may be guarded with a
Boltheading. The provisions of para- nip-point belt and pulley guard.
graph (h) of this section shall apply to (3) For the Textile Industry, because
boltheading. of the presence of excessive deposits of
(2) Rivet making. The provisions of lint, which constitute a serious fire
paragraph (h) of this section shall hazard, the sides and face sections only
apply to rivet making. of nip-point belt and pulley guards are
(j) Other forge facility equipment—(1) required, provided the guard shall ex-
Billet shears. A positive-type lockout
tend at least six (6) inches beyond the
device for disconnecting the power to
rim of the pulley on the in-running and
the shear shall be provided.
off-running sides of the belt and at
(2) Saws. Every saw shall be provided
with a guard of not less than one- least two (2) inches away from the rim
eighth inch sheet metal positioned to and face of the pulley in all other di-
stop flying sparks. rections.
(3) Conveyors. Conveyor power trans- (4) This section covers the principal
mission equipment shall be guarded in features with which power trans-
accordance with ANSI B20.1–1957, Safe- mission safeguards shall comply.
ty Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and (b) Prime-mover guards—(1) Flywheels.
Related Equipment, which is incor- Flywheels located so that any part is
porated by reference as specified in seven (7) feet or less above floor or
§ 1910.6. platform shall be guarded in accord-
(4) Shot blast. The cleaning chamber ance with the requirements of this sub-
shall have doors or guards to protect paragraph:
operators. (i) With an enclosure of sheet, per-
(5) Grinding. Personal protective forated, or expanded metal, or woven
equipment shall be used in grinding op- wire;
erations, and equipment shall be used (ii) With guard rails placed not less
and maintained in accordance with than fifteen (15) inches nor more than
ANSI B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the twenty (20) inches from rim. When
Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive
flywheel extends into pit or is within 12
Wheels, which is incorporated by ref-
inches of floor, a standard toeboard
erence as specified in § 1910.6, and with
shall also be provided;
§ 1910.215.
(iii) When the upper rim of flywheel
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 protrudes through a working floor, it
FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, shall be entirely enclosed or sur-
1986; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
rounded by a guardrail and toeboard.
§ 1910.219 Mechanical power-trans- (iv) For flywheels with smooth rims
mission apparatus. five (5) feet or less in diameter, where
(a) General requirements. (1) This sec- the preceding methods cannot be ap-
tion covers all types and shapes of plied, the following may be used: A
power-transmission belts, except the disk attached to the flywheel in such
following when operating at two hun- manner as to cover the spokes of the
dred and fifty (250) feet per minute or wheel on the exposed side and present a
less: (i) Flat belts one (1) inch or less in smooth surface and edge, at the same
width, (ii) flat belts two (2) inches or time providing means for periodic in-
less in width which are free from metal spection. An open space, not exceeding
lacings or fasteners, (iii) round belts four (4) inches in width, may be left be-
one-half (1⁄2) inch or less in diameter; tween the outside edge of the disk and
and (iv) single strand V-belts, the the rim of the wheel if desired, to fa-
width of which is thirteen thirty-sec- cilitate turning the wheel over. Where
onds (13⁄32) inch or less. a disk is used, the keys or other dan-
(2) Vertical and inclined belts (para- gerous projections not covered by disk
graphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if shall be cut off or covered. This sub-
not more than two and one-half (21⁄2) division does not apply to flywheels
inches wide and running at a speed of with solid web centers.
651
(v) Adjustable guard to be used for a stationary casing in accordance with
starting engine or for running adjust- requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o)
ment may be provided at the flywheel of this section.
of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for (4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting
jack bar will be permitted. shaft ends shall present a smooth edge
(vi) Wherever flywheels are above and end and shall not project more
working areas, guards shall be in- than one-half the diameter of the shaft
stalled having sufficient strength to unless guarded by nonrotating caps or
hold the weight of the flywheel in the safety sleeves.
event of a shaft or wheel mounting fail- (ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up
ure. or covered.
(2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks (5) Power-transmission apparatus lo-
and connecting rods, when exposed to cated in basements. All mechanical
contact, shall be guarded in accordance power transmission apparatus located
with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this sec- in basements, towers, and rooms used
tion, or by a guardrail as described in exclusively for power transmission
paragraph (o)(5) of this section. equipment shall be guarded in accord-
(3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. ance with this section, except that the
Tail rods or extension piston rods shall requirements for safeguarding belts,
be guarded in accordance with para- pulleys, and shafting need not be com-
graphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by plied with when the following require-
a guardrail on sides and end, with a ments are met:
clearance of not less than fifteen (15) (i) The basement, tower, or room oc-
nor more than twenty (20) inches when cupied by transmission equipment is
rod is fully extended. locked against unauthorized entrance.
(c) Shafting—(1) Installation. (i) Each (ii) The vertical clearance in passage-
continuous line of shafting shall be se- ways between the floor and power
cured in position against excessive end- transmission beams, ceiling, or any
wise movement. other objects, is not less than five feet
(ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, par- six inches (5 ft. 6 in.).
ticularly inclined idler shafts, shall be (iii) The intensity of illumination
securely held in position against end- conforms to the requirements of ANSI
wise thrust. A11.1–1965 (R–1970), which is incor-
(2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All porated by reference as specified in
exposed parts of horizontal shafting § 1910.6.
seven (7) feet or less from floor or (iv) [Reserved]
working platform, excepting runways (v) The route followed by the oiler is
used exclusively for oiling, or running protected in such manner as to prevent
adjustments, shall be protected by a accident.
stationary casing enclosing shafting (d) Pulleys—(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any
completely or by a trough enclosing parts of which are seven (7) feet or less
sides and top or sides and bottom of from the floor or working platform,
shafting as location requires. shall be guarded in accordance with the
(ii) Shafting under bench machines standards specified in paragraphs (m)
shall be enclosed by a stationary cas- and (o) of this section. Pulleys serving
ing, or by a trough at sides and top or as balance wheels (e.g., punch presses)
sides and bottom, as location requires. on which the point of contact between
The sides of the trough shall come belt and pulley is more than six feet six
within at least six (6) inches of the un- inches (6 ft. 6 in.) from the floor or
derside of table, or if shafting is lo- platform may be guarded with a disk
cated near floor within six (6) inches of covering the spokes.
floor. In every case the sides of trough (2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the
shall extend at least two (2) inches be- distance to the nearest fixed pulley,
yond the shafting or protuberance. clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of
(3) Guarding vertical and inclined the belt used, a guide shall be provided
shafting. Vertical and inclined shafting to prevent the belt from leaving the
seven (7) feet or less from floor or pulley on the side where insufficient
working platform, excepting mainte- clearance exists.
nance runways, shall be enclosed with (ii) [Reserved]
652
(3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with (iv) Overhead chain and link belt
cracks, or pieces broken out of rims, drives are governed by the same rules
shall not be used. as overhead horizontal belts and shall
(4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to be guarded in the same manner as
operate at rim speed in excess of manu- belts.
facturers normal recommendations (3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i)
shall be specially designed and care- Vertical and inclined belts shall be en-
fully balanced for the speed at which closed by a guard conforming to stand-
they are to operate. ards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this
(e) Belt, rope, and chain drives—(1) section.
Horizontal belts and ropes. (i) Where (ii) All guards for inclined belts shall
both runs of horizontal belts are seven be arranged in such a manner that a
(7) feet or less from the floor level, the minimum clearance of seven (7) feet is
guard shall extend to at least fifteen maintained between belt and floor at
(15) inches above the belt or to a stand- any point outside of guard.
ard height except that where both runs (4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts run-
of a horizontal belt are 42 inches or less ning over a lower pulley more than
from the floor, the belt shall be fully seven (7) feet above floor or platform
enclosed in accordance with paragraphs shall be guarded at the bottom in the
(m) and (o) of this section. same manner as horizontal overhead
(ii) In powerplants or power-develop- belts, if conditions are as stated in
ment rooms, a guardrail may be used paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this
in lieu of the guard required by subsection.
division (i) of this subparagraph. (5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt
(2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Over- and pulley shall be equipped with a belt
head horizontal belts, with lower parts shifter so constructed as to adequately
seven (7) feet or less from the floor or guard the nip point of the belt and pul-
platform, shall be guarded on sides and ley. If the frame of the belt shifter does
bottom in accordance with paragraph not adequately guard the nip point of
(o)(3) of this section. the belt and pulley, the nip point shall
(ii) Horizontal overhead belts more be further protected by means of a
than seven (7) feet above floor or plat- vertical guard placed in front of the
form shall be guarded for their entire pulley and extending at least to the top
length under the following conditions: of the largest step of the cone.
(a) If located over passageways or (ii) If the belt is of the endless type
work places and traveling 1,800 feet or or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt
more per minute. shifter is not desired, the belt will be
(b) If center to center distance be- considered guarded if the nip point of
tween pulleys is ten (10) feet or more. the belt and pulley is protected by a
(c) If belt is eight (8) inches or more nip point guard located in front of the
in width. cone extending at least to the top of
(iii) Where the upper and lower runs the largest step of the cone, and formed
of horizontal belts are so located that to show the contour of the cone in
passage of persons between them would order to give the nip point of the belt
be possible, the passage shall be either: and pulley the maximum protection.
(a) Completely barred by a guardrail (iii) If the cone is located less than 3
or other barrier in accordance with feet from the floor or working plat-
paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; form, the cone pulley and belt shall be
or guarded to a height of 3 feet regardless
(b) Where passage is regarded as nec- of whether the belt is endless or laced
essary, there shall be a platform over with rawhide.
the lower run guarded on either side by (6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended
a railing completely filled in with wire counterbalanced tighteners and all
mesh or other filler, or by a solid bar- parts thereof shall be of substantial
rier. The upper run shall be so guarded construction and securely fastened; the
as to prevent contact therewith either bearings shall be securely capped.
by the worker or by objects carried by Means must be provided to prevent
him. In powerplants only the lower run tightener from falling, in case the belt
of the belt need be guarded. breaks.
653
(ii) Where suspended counterweights guarded by metal cover. This subpara-
are used and not guarded by location, graph does not apply to keys or
they shall be so encased as to prevent setscrews within gear or sprocket cas-
accident. ings or other enclosures, nor to keys,
(f) Gears, sprockets, and chains—(1) setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys
Gears. Gears shall be guarded in accord- less than twenty (20) inches in diame-
ance with one of the following meth- ter where they are within the plane of
ods: the rim of the pulley.
(i) By a complete enclosure; or (2) It is recommended, however, that
(ii) By a standard guard as described no projecting setscrews or oilcups be
in paragraph (o) of this section, at used in any revolving pulley or part of
least seven (7) feet high extending six machinery.
(6) inches above the mesh point of the (i) Collars and couplings—(1) Collars.
gears; or All revolving collars, including split
(iii) By a band guard covering the collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws
face of gear and having flanges ex- or bolts used in collars shall not
tended inward beyond the root of the project beyond the largest periphery of
teeth on the exposed side or sides. the collar.
Where any portion of the train of gears (2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be
guarded by a band guard is less than so constructed as to present no hazard
six (6) feet from the floor a disk guard from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolv-
or a complete enclosure to the height ing surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews
of six (6) feet shall be required. will, however, be permitted where they
(2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph are covered with safety sleeves or
(f)(1) of this section does not apply to where they are used parallel with the
hand-operated gears used only to ad- shafting and are countersunk or else do
just machine parts and which do not not extend beyond the flange of the
continue to move after hand power is coupling.
removed. However, the guarding of (j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All
these gears is highly recommended. drip cups and pans shall be securely
(3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket fastened.
wheels and chains shall be enclosed un- (k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff cou-
less they are more than seven (7) feet plings, and clutch pulleys—(1) Guards.
above the floor or platform. Where the Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch
drive extends over other machine or pulleys having projecting parts, where
working areas, protection against fall- such clutches are located seven (7) feet
ing shall be provided. This subpara- or less above the floor or working plat-
graph does not apply to manually oper- form, shall be enclosed by a stationary
ated sprockets. guard constructed in accordance with
(4) Openings for oiling. When frequent this section. A ‘‘U’’ type guard is per-
oiling must be done, openings with missible.
hinged or sliding self-closing covers (2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a
shall be provided. All points not read- guardrail, preferably with toeboard,
ily accessible shall have oil feed tubes may be used instead of the guard re-
if lubricant is to be added while ma- quired by paragraph (k)(1) of this sec-
chinery is in motion. tion, provided such a room is occupied
(g) Guarding friction drives. The driv- only by engine room attendants.
ing point of all friction drives when ex- (l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers,
posed to contact shall be guarded, all poles, perches, and fasteners—(1) Belt
arm or spoke friction drives and all shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on
web friction drives with holes in the all new installations made on or after
web shall be entirely enclosed, and all August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with
projecting belts on friction drives a permanent belt shifter provided with
where exposed to contact shall be mechanical means to prevent belt from
guarded. creeping from loose to tight pulley. It
(h) Keys, setscrews, and other projec- is recommended that old installations
tions. (1) All projecting keys, setscrews, be changed to conform to this rule.
and other projections in revolving (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles
parts shall be removed or made flush or shall be rounded and be located as far
654
as possible from danger of accidental ical industries, in industries where the
contact, but within easy reach of the presence of fumes or where manufac-
operator. Where belt shifters are not turing conditions would cause the
directly located over a machine or rapid deterioration of metal guards;
bench, the handles shall be cut off six also in construction work and in loca-
feet six inches (6 ft. 6 in.) above floor tions outdoors where extreme cold or
level. extreme heat make metal guards and
(2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The railings undesirable. In all other indus-
use of belt poles as substitutes for me- tries, wood guards shall not be used.
chanical shifters is not recommended. (ii) [Reserved]
(3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys (3) Guards for horizontal overhead
or idlers are not practicable, belt belts. (i) Guards for horizontal overhead
perches in form of brackets, rollers, belts shall run the entire length of the
etc., shall be used to keep idle belts belt and follow the line of the pulley to
away from the shafts. the ceiling or be carried to the nearest
(4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of ne- wall, thus enclosing the belt effec-
cessity must be shifted by hand and tively. Where belts are so located as to
belts within seven (7) feet of the floor make it impracticable to carry the
or working platform which are not guard to wall or ceiling, construction
guarded in accordance with this sec- of guard shall be such as to enclose
tion shall not be fastened with metal in completely the top and bottom runs of
any case, nor with any other fastening belt and the face of pulleys.
which by construction or wear will (ii) [Reserved]
constitute an accident hazard. (iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be
(m) Standard guards—general require- provided for the ceiling rafters or over-
ments—(1) Materials. (i) Standard condi- head floor beams, where such is nec-
tions shall be secured by the use of the essary, to sustain safely the weight and
following materials. Expanded metal, stress likely to be imposed by the
perforated or solid sheet metal, wire guard. The interior surface of all
mesh on a frame of angle iron, or iron guards, by which is meant the surface
pipe securely fastened to floor or to of the guard with which a belt will
frame of machine. come in contact, shall be smooth and
(ii) All metal should be free from free from all projections of any char-
burrs and sharp edges. acter, except where construction de-
(2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Ex- mands it; protruding shallow round-
panded metal, sheet or perforated head rivets may be used. Overhead belt
metal, and wire mesh shall be securely guards shall be at least one-quarter
fastened to frame. wider than belt which they protect, ex-
(ii) [Reserved] cept that this clearance need not in
(n) [Reserved] any case exceed six (6) inches on each
(o) Approved materials—(1) Minimum side. Overhead rope drive and block and
requirements. The materials and dimen- roller-chain-drive guards shall be not
sions specified in this paragraph shall less than six (6) inches wider than the
apply to all guards, except horizontal drive on each side. In overhead silent
overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain chain-drive guards where the chain is
guards more than seven (7) feet above held from lateral displacement on the
floor, or platform. sprockets, the side clearances required
(i) [Reserved] on drives of twenty (20) inch centers or
(a) All guards shall be rigidly braced under shall be not less than one-fourth
every three (3) feet or fractional part of inch from the nearest moving chain
their height to some fixed part of ma- part, and on drives of over twenty (20)
chinery or building structure. Where inch centers a minimum of one-half
guard is exposed to contact with mov- inch from the nearest moving chain
ing equipment additional strength may part.
be necessary. (4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope
(b) [Reserved] and chain drives. Overhead-rope and
(ii) [Reserved] chain-drive guard construction shall
(2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may conform to the rules for overhead-belt
be used in the woodworking and chem- guard.
655
(5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guard- (ii) Inspection shall be made of belts,
rail shall be forty-two (42) inches in lacings, and fasteners and such equip-
height, with midrail between top rail ment kept in good repair.
and floor. (7) Lubrication. The regular oilers
(ii) Posts shall be not more than shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Ma-
eight (8) feet apart; they are to be per- chinery shall be oiled when not in mo-
manent and substantial, smooth, and tion, wherever possible.
free from protruding nails, bolts, and [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760; Nov. 7,
be one and one-fourth (11⁄4) inches in- 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar.
side diameter, or larger. If made of 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004]
metal shapes or bars, their section
shall be equal in strength to that of Subpart P—Hand and Portable
one and one-half (11⁄2) by one and one- Powered Tools and Other
half (11⁄2) by three-sixteenths (3⁄16) inch
angle iron. If made of wood, the posts
Hand-Held Equipment
shall be two by four (2 × 4) inches or
larger. The upper rail shall be two by AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
four (2 × 4) inches, or two one by four pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
(1 × 4) strips, one at the top and one at Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
the side of posts. The midrail may be 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or
one by four (1 × 4) inches or more. 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), as applicable; 29 CFR
Where panels are fitted with expanded part 1911.
metal or wire mesh the middle rails Section 1910.243 also issued under 29 CFR
may be omitted. Where guard is ex- part 1910.
posed to contact with moving equip-
ment, additional strength may be nec- § 1910.241 Definitions.
essary. As used in this subpart:
(iii) Toeboards shall be four (4) inches (a) Explosive-actuated fastening tool
or more in height, of wood, metal, or of terms—(1) Hammer-operated piston tool—
metal grill not exceeding one (1) inch low-velocity type. A tool which, by
mesh. means of a heavy mass hammer supple-
(p) Care of equipment—(1) General. All mented by a load, moves a piston de-
power-transmission equipment shall be signed to be captive to drive a stud,
inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 pin, or fastener into a work surface, al-
days and be kept in good working con- ways starting the fastener at rest and
dition at all times. in contact with the work surface. It
(2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept shall be so designed that when used
in alignment, free from rust and excess with any load that accurately cham-
oil or grease. bers in it and that is commercially
(ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, available at the time the tool is sub-
mitted for approval, it will not cause
flammable vapors or flammable liquids
such stud, pin, or fastener to have a
exist, the hazard of static sparks from
mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per
shafting shall be carefully considered.
second when measured 6.5 feet from the
(3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in muzzle end of the barrel.
alignment and properly adjusted.
(2) High-velocity tool. A tool or ma-
(4) Hangers. Hangers shall be in- chine which, when used with a load,
spected to make certain that all sup- propels or discharges a stud, pin, or
porting bolts and screws are tight and fastener, at velocities in excess of 300
that supports of hanger boxes are ad- feet per second when measured 6.5 feet
justed properly. from the muzzle end of the barrel, for
(5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in the purpose of impinging it upon,
proper alignment to prevent belts from affixing it to, or penetrating another
running off. object or material.
(ii) [Reserved] (3) Low-velocity piston tool. A tool
(6) Care of belts. that utilizes a piston designed to be
(i) [Reserved] captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener
656
into a work surface. It shall be so de- (6) Safety guard. A safety guard is an
signed that when used with any load enclosure designed to restrain the
that accurately chambers in it and pieces of the grinding wheel and fur-
that is commercially available at the nish all possible protection in the
time the tool is submitted for approval, event that the wheel is broken in oper-
it will not cause such stud, pin, or fas- ation.
tener to have a mean velocity in excess (7) Reinforced wheels. The term rein-
of 300 feet per second when measured forced as applied to grinding wheels
6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the bar- shall define a class of organic wheels
rel. which contain strengthening fabric or
(4) Stud, pin, or fastener. A fastening filament. The term reinforced does not
device specifically designed and manu- cover wheels using such mechanical ad-
factured for use in explosive-actuated ditions as steel rings, steel cup backs
fastening tools. or wire or tape winding.
(5) To chamber. To fit properly with- (8) Type 11 flaring cup wheels. Type 11
out the use of excess force, the case flaring cup wheels have double diame-
being duly supported. ter dimensions D and J, and in addition
(6) Explosive powerload, also known as have thickness, hole size, rim and back
load. Any substance in any form capa- thickness dimensions. Grinding is al-
ble of producing a propellant force. ways performed on rim face, W dimen-
(7) Tool. An explosive-actuated fas- sion. Type 11 wheels are subject to all
tening tool, unless otherwise indicated, limitations of use and mounting listed
and all accessories pertaining thereto. for Type 6 straight sided cup wheels
(8) Protective shield or guard. A device definition in subparagraph (9) of this
or guard attached to the muzzle end of paragraph.
the tool, which is designed to confine
flying particles.
TYPE 11 FLARING CUP WHEELS
(b) Abrasive wheel terms—(1) Mounted
wheels. Mounted wheels, usually 2-inch
diameter or smaller, and of various
shapes, may be either organic or inor-
ganic bonded abrasive wheels. They are
secured to plain or threaded steel
mandrels.
(2) Tuck pointing. Removal, by grind-
ing, of cement, mortar, or other non-
metallic jointing material.
(3) Tuck pointing wheels. Tuck point-
ing wheels, usually Type 1, reinforced
organic bonded wheels have diameter,
FIGURE P–1
thickness and hole size dimension.
They are subject to the same limita- Type 11—Flaring-cup Wheel
tions of use and mounting as Type 1
Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or ta-
wheels defined in subparagraph (10) of
pered outward from the back. Wall thickness
this paragraph. at the back is normally greater than at the
LIMITATION: Wheels used for tuck pointing grinding face (W).
should be reinforced, organic bonded. (See LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E
§ 1910.243(c)(1)(ii)(c.)) dimension, should not be less than one-
(4) Portable grinding. A grinding oper- fourth T dimension. In addition when
ation where the grinding machine is unthreaded hole wheels are specified the in-
side flat, K dimension, shall be large enough
designed to be hand held and may be
to accommodate a suitable flange.
easily moved from one location to an-
other. (9) Type 6 straight cup wheels. Type 6
(5) Organic bonded wheels. Organic cup wheels have diameter, thickness,
wheels are wheels which are bonded by hole size, rim thickness, and back
means of an organic material such as thickness dimensions. Grinding is al-
resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar ways performed on rim face, W dimen-
bonding agent. sion.
657
EC27OC91.078
LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E Type 1—Straight Wheel
fourth T dimension. In addition, when Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter,
unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the in- thickness and hole.
side flat, K dimension, must be large enough
(c) [Reserved]
to accommodate a suitable flange.
(d) Jack terms—(1) Jack. A jack is an
appliance for lifting and lowering or
TYPE 6 STRAIGHT CUP WHEELS moving horizontally a load by applica-
tion of a pushing force.
NOTE: Jacks may be of the following types:
Lever and ratchet, screw and hydraulic.
(2) Rating. The rating of a jack is the
maximum working load for which it is
designed to lift safely that load
throughout its specified amount of
travel.
NOTE: To raise the rated load of a jack, the
point of application of the load, the applied
force, and the length of lever arm should be
those designated by the manufacturer for the
FIGURE P–2 particular jack considered.
Type 6—Straight Cup Wheel [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978]
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thick-
ness and hole with one side straight or flat § 1910.242 Hand and portable powered
and the opposite side recessed. This type, tools and equipment, general.
however, differs from Type 5 in that the
grinding is performed on the wall of the abra- (a) General requirements. Each em-
sive created by the difference between the di- ployer shall be responsible for the safe
ameter of the recess and the outside diameter condition of tools and equipment used
of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension by employees, including tools and
‘‘W’’ takes precedence over the diameter of the equipment which may be furnished by
recess as an essential intermediate dimension employees.
to describe this shape type. (b) Compressed air used for cleaning.
Compressed air shall not be used for
(10) Type 1 straight wheels. Type 1
cleaning purposes except where re-
straight wheels have diameter, thick-
duced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then
ness, and hole size dimensions and only with effective chip guarding and
should be used only on the periphery. personal protective equipment.
Type 1 wheels shall be mounted be-
tween flanges. § 1910.243 Guarding of portable pow-
ered tools.
LIMITATION: Hole dimension (H) should not
be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter (a) Portable powered tool—(1) Portable
dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, circular saws. (i) All portable, power-
centerless, or surface grinding applications. driven circular saws having a blade di-
Maximum hole size for all other applications ameter greater than 2 in. shall be
should not exceed one-half wheel diameter. equipped with guards above and below
the base plate or shoe. The upper guard
TYPE 1 STRAIGHT WHEELS shall cover the saw to the depth of the
teeth, except for the minimum arc re-
quired to permit the base to be tilted
for bevel cuts. The lower guard shall
cover the saw to the depth of the teeth,
except for the minimum arc required
to allow proper retraction and contact
with the work. When the tool is with-
drawn from the work, the lower guard
FIGURE P–3 shall automatically and instantly re-
turn to covering position.
EC27OC91.080
658
EC27OC91.079
(ii) Paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section (iv) The operating control on hand-
does not apply to circular saws used in held power tools shall be so located as
the meat industry for meat cutting to minimize the possibility of its acci-
purposes. dental operation, if such accidental op-
(2) Switches and controls. (i) All hand- eration would constitute a hazard to
held powered circular saws having a employees.
blade diameter greater than 2 inches, (v) This subparagraph does not apply
electric, hydraulic or pneumatic chain to concrete vibrators, concrete break-
saws, and percussion tools without ers, powered tampers, jack hammers,
positive accessory holding means shall rock drills, garden appliances, house-
be equipped with a constant pressure hold and kitchen appliances, personal
switch or control that will shut off the care appliances, medical or dental
power when the pressure is released. equipment, or to fixed machinery.
All hand-held gasoline powered chain (3) Portable belt sanding machines. Belt
saws shall be equipped with a constant sanding machines shall be provided
pressure throttle control that will shut with guards at each nip point where
off the power to the saw chain when the sanding belt runs onto a pulley.
the pressure is released. These guards shall effectively prevent
(ii) All hand-held powered drills, tap- the hands or fingers of the operator
pers, fastener drivers, horizontal, from coming in contact with the nip
vertical, and angle grinders with points. The unused run of the sanding
wheels greater than 2 inches in diame- belt shall be guarded against acci-
ter, disc sanders with discs greater dental contact.
than 2 inches in diameter, belt sanders, (4) Cracked saws. All cracked saws
reciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and shall be removed from service.
jig saws with blade shanks greater (5) Grounding. Portable electric pow-
than a nominal one-fourth inch, and ered tools shall meet the electrical re-
other similarly operating powered quirements of subpart S of this part.
tools shall be equipped with a constant (b) Pneumatic powered tools and hose—
pressure switch or control, and may (1) Tool retainer. A tool retainer shall
have a lock-on control provided that be installed on each piece of utilization
turnoff can be accomplished by a single equipment which, without such a re-
motion of the same finger or fingers tainer, may eject the tool.
that turn it on. (2) Airhose. Hose and hose connec-
(iii)(a) All other hand-held powered tions used for conducting compressed
tools, such as, but not limited to, plat- air to utilization equipment shall be
en sanders, grinders with wheels 2 designed for the pressure and service to
inches in diameter or less, disc sanders which they are subjected.
with discs 2 inches in diameter or less, (c) Portable abrasive wheels—(1) Gen-
routers, planers, laminate trimmers, eral requirements. Abrasive wheels shall
nibblers, shears, saber, scroll, and jig be used only on machine provided with
saws with blade shanks a nominal one- safety guards as defined in paragraph
fourth of an inch wide or less, may be (c) (1) through (4) of this section.
equipped with either a positive ‘‘on- (i) Exceptions. The requirements of
off’’ control, or other controls as de- this paragraph (c)(1) shall not apply to
scribed by paragraph (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of the following classes of wheels and con-
this section. ditions.
(b) Saber, scroll, and jig saws with (a) Wheels used for internal work
nonstandard blade holders may use while within the work being ground;
blades with shanks which are nonuni- (b) Mounted wheels used in portable
form in width, provided the narrowest operations 2 inches and smaller in di-
portion of the blade shank is an inte- ameter; (see definition § 1910.241(b)(1));
gral part in mounting the blade. and
(c) Blade shank width shall be meas- (c) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones,
ured at the narrowest portion of the and plugs, and threaded hole pot balls
blade shank when saber, scroll, and jig where the work offers protection.
saws have nonstandard blade holders. (ii)(a) A safety guard shall cover the
(d) Nominal in this subparagraph spindle end, nut and flange projections.
means ±0.05 inch. The safety guard shall be mounted so
659
as to maintain proper alignment with
the wheel, and the strength of the fas-
tenings shall exceed the strength of the
guard.
(b) Exception. Safety guards on all op-
erations where the work provides a
suitable measure of protection to the
operator may be so constructed that
the spindle end, nut and outer flange
are exposed. Where the nature of the
work is such as to entirely cover the
side of the wheel, the side covers of the
guard may be omitted.
(c) Exception. The spindle end, nut,
and outer flange may be exposed on
portable machines designed for, and
used with, type 6, 11, 27, and 28 abrasive FIGURE NO. P–4
wheels, cutting off wheels, and tuck (4) Other portable grinders. The max-
pointing wheels. imum angular exposure of the grinding
wheel periphery and sides for safety
(2) Cup wheels. Cup wheels (Types 6
guards used on other portable grinding
and 11) shall be protected by:
machines shall not exceed 180° and the
(i) Safety guards as specified in para- top half of the wheel shall be enclosed
graph (c)(1) of this section; or, at all times. (See Figures P–5 and P–6.)
(ii) Special ‘‘revolving cup guards’’
which mount behind the wheel and
turn with it. They shall be made of
steel or other material with adequate
strength and shall enclose the wheel
sides upward from the back for one-
third of the wheel thickness. The
mounting features shall conform with
all regulations. (See paragraph (c)(5) of
this section.) It is necessary to main-
tain clearance between the wheel side
and the guard. The clearance shall not
FIGURE NO. P–5
exceed one-sixteenth inch; or,
(iii) Some other form of guard that
will insure as good protection as that
which would be provided by the guards
specified in paragraph (c)(1) (i) or (ii) of
this subparagraph.
(3) Vertical portable grinders. Safety
guards used on machines known as
right angle head or vertical portable
grinders shall have a maximum expo-
sure angle of 180°, and the guard shall
be so located so as to be between the
operator and the wheel during use. Ad- FIGURE NO. P–6
justment of guard shall be such that (5) Mounting and inspection of abrasive
wheels. (i) Immediately before mount-
pieces of an accidentally broken wheel
ing, all wheels shall be closely in-
will be deflected away from the oper-
spected and sounded by the user (ring
ator. (See Figure P–4.) test, see subpart O, § 1910.215(d)(1)) to
make sure they have not been damaged
EC27OC91.083
in transit, storage, or otherwise. The

spindle speed of the machine shall be
checked before mounting of the wheel
EC27OC91.082
660
EC27OC91.081
to be certain that it does not exceed (a) The muzzle end of the tool shall
the maximum operating speed marked have a protective shield or guard at
on the wheel. least 31⁄2 inches in diameter, mounted
(ii) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on perpendicular to and concentric with
the spindle and remain free under all the barrel, and designed to confine any
grinding conditions. A controlled clear- flying fragments or particles that
ance between the wheel hole and the might otherwise create a hazard at the
machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or time of firing.
adaptors) is essential to avoid exces- (b) Where a standard shield or guard
sive pressure from mounting and spin- cannot be used, or where it does not
dle expansion. To accomplish this, the cover all apparent avenues through
machine spindle shall be made to nomi- which flying particles might escape, a
nal (standard) size plus zero minus .002 special shield, guard, fixture, or jig de-
inch, and the wheel hole shall be made signed and built by the manufacturer
suitably oversize to assure safety clear- of the tool being used, which provides
ance under the conditions of operating this degree of protection, shall be used
heat and pressure. as a substitute.
(iii) All contact surfaces of wheels, (c) The tool shall be so designed that
blotters, and flangers shall be flat and it cannot be fired unless it is equipped
free of foreign matter. with a standard protective shield or
(iv) When a bushing is used in the guard, or a special shield, guard, fix-
wheel hole it shall not exceed the ture, or jig.
width of the wheel and shall not con- (d)(1) The firing mechanism shall be
tact the flanges. so designed that the tool cannot fire
(v) Requirements for the use of during loading or preparation to fire,
flanges and blotters, see subpart O, or if the tool should be dropped while
§ 1910.215(c). loaded.
(6) Excluded machinery. Natural sand- (2) Firing of the tool shall be depend-
stone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, ent upon at least two separate and dis-
or paper discs, having a layer of abra- tinct operations of the operator, with
sive on the surface are not covered by the final firing movement being sepa-
this paragraph. rate from the operation of bringing the
(d) Explosive actuated fastening tools— tool into the firing position.
(1) General requirements. (i) Explosive- (e) The tool shall be so designed as
actuated fastening tools that are actu- not to be operable other than against a
ated by explosives or any similar work surface, and unless the operator
means, and propel a stud, pin, fastener, is holding the tool against the work
or other object for the purpose of surface with a force at least 5 pounds
affixing it by penetration to any other greater than the total weight of the
object shall meet the design require- tool.
ments specified by paragraph (d)(2) of (f) The tool shall be so designed that
this section. This requirement does not it will not operate when equipped with
apply to devices designed for attaching the standard guard indexed to the cen-
objects to soft construction materials, ter position if any bearing surface of
such as wood, plaster, tar, dry wall- the guard is tilted more than 8° from
board, and the like, or to stud-welding contact with the work surface.
equipment. (g) The tool shall be so designed that
(ii) Operators and assistants using positive means of varying the power
tools shall be safeguarded by means of are available or can be made available
eye protection. Head and face protec- to the operator as part of the tool, or
tion shall be used, as required by work- as an auxiliary, in order to make it
ing conditions, as set forth in subpart possible for the operator to select a
I. power level adequate to perform the
(2) Inspection, maintenance, and tool desired work without excessive force.
handling—(i) High-velocity tools. Tools (h) The tool shall be so designed that
of this type shall have the characteris- all breeching parts will be reasonably
tics outlined in (a) through (h) of this visible to allow a check for any foreign
section. matter that may be present.
661
(ii) Tools of the low-velocity-piston (b) The tool shall be so designed that
type shall have the characteristics out- it shall not in ordinary usage propel or
lined in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) (a) discharge a stud, pin, or fastener while
through (e) of this section and any ad- loading, or during preparation to fire,
ditional safety features he may wish to or if the tool should be dropped while
incorporate. loaded.
(a) The muzzle end of the tool shall (c) Firing of the tool shall be depend-
be designed so that suitable protective ent upon at least two separate and dis-
shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, de- tinct operations of the operator, with
signed and built by the manufacturer the final firing movement being sepa-
of the tool being used, can be mounted rate from the operation of bringing the
perpendicular to the barrel. A standard tool into the firing position.
spall shield shall be supplied with each (d) The tool shall be so designed that
tool. positive means of varying the power
(b)(1) The tool shall be designed so are available or can be made available
that it shall not in ordinary usage pro- to the operator as part of the tool, or
pel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener as an auxiliary, in order to make it
while loading or during preparation to possible for the operator to select a
fire, or if the tool should be dropped power level adequate to perform the
while loaded. desired work without excessive force.
(2) Firing of the tool shall be depend- (e) The tool shall be so designed that
ent upon at least two separate and dis- all breeching parts will be reasonably
tinct operations of the operator, with visible to allow a check for any foreign
the final firing movement being sepa- matter that may be present.
rate from the operation of bringing the (3) Requirements for loads and fas-
tool into the firing position. teners. (i) There shall be a standard
(c) The tool shall be so designed as means of identifying the power levels
not to be operable other than against a of loads used in tools.
work surface, and unless the operator (ii) [Reserved]
is holding the tool against the work (iii) No load (cased or caseless) shall
surface with a force at least 5 pounds be used if it will accurately chamber in
greater than the total weight of the any existing approved commercially
tool. available low-velocity piston tool or
(d) The tool shall be so designed that hammer operated piston tool—low-ve-
positive means of varying the power locity type and will cause a fastener to
are available or can be made available have a mean velocity in excess of 300
to the operator as part of the tool, or feet per second when measured 6.5 feet
as an auxiliary, in order to make it from the muzzle end of the barrel. No
possible for the operator to select a individual test firing of a series shall
power level adequate to perform the exceed 300 feet per second by more than
desired work without excessive force. 8 percent.
(e) The tool shall be so designed that (iv) Fasteners used in tools shall be
all breeching parts will be reasonably only those specifically manufactured
visible to allow a check for any foreign for use in such tools.
matter that may be present. (4) Operating requirements. (i) Before
(iii) Tools of the hammer-operated using a tool, the operator shall inspect
piston tools—low-velocity type shall it to determine to his satisfaction that
have the characteristics outlined in it is clean, that all moving parts oper-
paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) (a) through (e) of ate freely, and that the barrel is free
this section. from obstructions.
(a) The muzzle end of the tool shall (ii) When a tool develops a defect
be so designed that suitable protective during use, the operator shall imme-
shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, de- diately cease to use it, until it is prop-
signed and built by the manufacturer erly repaired.
of the tool being used, can be mounted (iii) Tools shall not be loaded until
perpendicular to the barrel. A standard just prior to the intended firing time.
spall shield shall be supplied with each Neither loaded nor empty tools are to
tool. be pointed at any workmen.
662
(iv) No tools shall be loaded unless (xiv) Any tool found not in proper
being prepared for immediate use, nor working order shall be immediately re-
shall an unattended tool be left loaded. moved from service. The tool shall be
(v) In case of a misfire, the operator inspected at regular intervals and shall
shall hold the tool in the operating po- be repaired in accordance with the
sition for at least 30 seconds. He shall manufacturer’s specifications.
then try to operate the tool a second (e) Power lawnmowers—(1) General re-
time. He shall wait another 30 seconds, quirements. (i) Power lawnmowers of
holding the tool in the operating posi- the walk-behind, riding-rotary, and
tion; then he shall proceed to remove reel power lawnmowers shall be guard-
the explosive load in strict accordance ed in accordance with the machine
with the manufacturer’s instructions. guarding requirements in 29 CFR
(vi) A tool shall never be left unat- 1910.212, General requirements for all
tended in a place where it would be machines.
available to unauthorized persons. (ii) All power-driven chains, belts,
(vii) Fasteners shall not be driven and gears shall be so positioned or oth-
into very hard or brittle materials in- erwise guarded to prevent the opera-
cluding, but not limited to, cast iron, tor’s accidental contact therewith, dur-
glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, ing normal starting, mounting, and op-
glass block, live rock, face brick, or eration of the machine.
hollow tile. (iii) A shutoff device shall be pro-
(viii) Driving into materials easily vided to stop operation of the motor or
penetrated shall be avoided unless such engine. This device shall require man-
materials are backed by a substance ual and intentional reactivation to re-
that will prevent the pin or fastener start the motor or engine.
from passing completely through and (iv) All positions of the operating
creating a flying-missile hazard on the controls shall be clearly identified.
other side. (v) The words, ‘‘Caution. Be sure the
(ix)(a) Fasteners shall not be driven operating control(s) is in neutral before
directly into materials such as brick or starting the engine,’’ or similar word-
concrete closer than 3 inches from the ing shall be clearly visible at an engine
unsupported edge or corner, or into starting control point on self-propelled
steel surfaces closer than one-half inch mowers.
from the unsupported edge or corner, (2) Walk-behind and riding rotary mow-
unless a special guard, fixture, or jig is ers. (i) The mower blade shall be en-
used. (Exception: Low-velocity tools closed except on the bottom and the
may drive no closer than 2 inches from enclosure shall extend to or below the
an edge in concrete or one-fourth inch lowest cutting point of the blade in the
in steel.) lowest blade position.
(b) When fastening other materials, (ii) Guards which must be removed to
such as a 2- by 4-inch wood section to install a catcher assembly shall com-
a concrete surface, it is permissible to ply with the following:
drive a fastener of no greater than 7⁄32- (a) Warning instructions shall be af-
inch shank diameter not closer than 2 fixed to the mower near the opening
inches from the unsupported edge or stating that the mower shall not be
corner of the work surface. used without either the catcher assem-
(x) Fasteners shall not be driven bly or the guard in place.
through existing holes unless a positive (b) The catcher assembly or the
guide is used to secure accurate align- guard shall be shipped and sold as part
ment. of the mower.
(xi) No fastener shall be driven into a (c) The instruction manual shall
spalled area caused by an unsatisfac- state that the mower shall not be used
tory fastening. without either the catcher assembly or
(xii) Tools shall not be used in an ex- the guard in place.
plosive or flammable atmosphere. (d) The catcher assembly, when prop-
(xiii) All tools shall be used with the erly and completely installed, shall not
correct shield, guard, or attachment create a condition which violates the
recommended by the manufacturer. limits given for the guarded opening.
663
(iii) Openings in the blade enclosure, inches above the lowest cutting point
intended for the discharge of grass, of the blade in the lowest blade posi-
shall be limited to a maximum vertical tion. Mowers with a swingover handle
angle of the opening of 30°. Measure- are to be considered as having no front
ments shall be taken from the lowest in the blade enclosure and therefore
blade position. shall comply with paragraph (e)(2)(i) of
(iv) The total effective opening area this section.
of the grass discharge opening(s) shall (iv) The mower handle shall be fas-
not exceed 1,000 square degrees on units tened to the mower so as to prevent
having a width of cut less than 271⁄2 loss of control by unintentional uncou-
inches, or 2,000 square degrees on units pling while in operation.
having a width of cut 271⁄2 inches or (v) A positive upstop or latch shall be
over. provided for the mower handle in the
(v) The word ‘‘Caution.’’ or stronger normal operating position(s). The
wording, shall be placed on the mower upstop shall not be subject to uninten-
at or near each discharge opening. tional disengagement during normal
(vi) [Reserved] operation of the mower. The upstop or
(vii) Blade(s) shall stop rotating from latch shall not allow the center or the
the manufacturer’s specified maximum handle grips to come closer than 17
speed within 15 seconds after declutch- inches horizontally behind the closest
ing, or shutting off power. path of the mower blade(s) unless
(viii) In a multipiece blade, the manually disengaged.
means of fastening the cutting mem- (vi) A swing-over handle, which com-
bers to the body of the blade or disc plies with the above requirements, will
shall be so designed that they will not be permitted.
become worn to a hazardous condition (vii) Wheel drive disengaging con-
before the cutting members themselves trols, except deadman controls, shall
are worn beyond use. move opposite to the direction of the
(ix) The maximum tip speed of any vehicle motion in order to disengage
blade shall be 19,000 feet per minute. the drive. Deadman controls shall
(3) Walk-behind rotary mowers. (i) The automatically interrupt power to a
horizontal angle of the opening(s) in drive when the operator’s actuating
the blade enclosure, intended for the force is removed, and may operate in
discharge of grass, shall not contact any direction to disengage the drive.
the operator area. (4) Riding rotary mowers. (i) The high-
(ii) There shall be one of the fol- est point(s) of all openings in the blade
lowing at all openings in the blade en- enclosure, front shall be limited by a
closure intended for the discharge of vertical angle of opening of 15° and a
grass: maximum distance of 11⁄4 inches above
(a) A minimum unobstructed hori- the lowest cutting point of the blade in
zontal distance of 3 inches from the end the lowest blade position.
of the discharge chute to the blade tip (ii) Opening(s) shall be placed so that
circle. grass or debris will not discharge di-
(b) A rigid bar fastened across the rectly toward any part of an operator
discharge opening, secured to prevent seated in a normal operator position.
removal without the use of tools. The (iii) There shall be one of the fol-
bottom of the bar shall be no higher lowing at all openings in the blade en-
than the bottom edge of the blade enclosure intended for the discharge of
closure. grass:
(iii) The highest point(s) of the front (a) A minimum unobstructed hori-
of the blade enclosure, except dis- zontal distance of 6 inches from the end
charge openings, shall be such that any of the discharge chute to the blade tip
line extending a maximum of 15° down- circle.
ward from the horizontal toward the (b) A rigid bar fastened across the
blade shaft axis (axes) shall not inter- discharge opening, secured to prevent
sect the horizontal plane within the removal without the use of tools. The
blade tip circle. The highest point(s) on bottom of the bar shall be no higher
the blade enclosure front, except dis- than the bottom edge of the blade en-
charge-openings, shall not exceed 11⁄4 closure.
664
(iv) Mowers shall be provided with (b) For jacks sent out of shop for spe-
stops to prevent jackknifing or locking cial work, when sent out and when re-
of the steering mechanism. turned,
(v) Vehicle stopping means shall be (c) For a jack subjected to abnormal
provided. load or shock, immediately before and
(vi) Hand-operated wheel drive dis- immediately thereafter.
engaging controls shall move opposite (vii) Repair or replacement parts
to the direction of vehicle motion in shall be examined for possible defects.
order to disengage the drive. Foot-op- (viii) Jacks which are out of order
erated wheel drive disengaging controls shall be tagged accordingly, and shall
shall be depressed to disengage the not be used until repairs are made.
drive. Deadman controls, both hand (b) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. The
and foot operated, shall automatically blast cleaning nozzles shall be equipped
interrupt power to a drive when the op- with an operating valve which must be
erator’s actuating force is removed, held open manually. A support shall be
and may operate in any direction to provided on which the nozzle may be
disengage the drive. mounted when it is not in use.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49
FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984]
1984; 50 FR 4649, Feb. 1, 1985; 61 FR 9240, Mar.
7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 72 FR 71070,
Dec. 14, 2007] Subpart Q—Welding, Cutting and
Brazing
§ 1910.244 Other portable tools and
equipment. AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
(a) Jacks—(1) Loading and marking. (i) pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
The operator shall make sure that the U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor’s
jack used has a rating sufficient to lift Orders Nos. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
and sustain the load.
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5–2007
(ii) The rated load shall be legibly (72 FR 31159), as applicable; and 29 CFR part
and permanently marked in a promi- 1911.
nent location on the jack by casting,
SOURCE: 55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, unless
stamping, or other suitable means.
otherwise noted.
(2) Operation and maintenance. (i) In
the absence of a firm foundation, the § 1910.251 Definitions.
base of the jack shall be blocked. If
there is a possibility of slippage of the As used in this subpart:
cap, a block shall be placed in between (a) Welder and welding operator mean
the cap and the load. any operator of electric or gas welding
(ii) The operator shall watch the stop and cutting equipment.
indicator, which shall be kept clean, in (b) Approved means listed or approved
order to determine the limit of travel. by a nationally recognized testing lab-
The indicated limit shall not be over- oratory. Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3) for defi-
run. nitions of listed and approved, and
(iii) After the load has been raised, it § 1910.7 for nationally recognized test-
shall be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise ing laboratory.
secured at once. [55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61
(iv) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freez- FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14,
ing temperatures shall be supplied with 2007]
an adequate antifreeze liquid.
(v) All jacks shall be properly lubri- § 1910.252 General requirements.
cated at regular intervals. (a) Fire prevention and protection—(1)
(vi) Each jack shall be thoroughly in- Basic precautions. For elaboration of
spected at times which depend upon these basic precautions and of the spe-
the service conditions. Inspections cial precautions of paragraph (a)(2) of
shall be not less frequent than the fol- this section as well as a delineation of
lowing: the fire protection and prevention re-
(a) For constant or intermittent use sponsibilities of welders and cutters,
at one locality, once every 6 months, their supervisors (including outside
665
contractors) and those in management (2) Appreciable combustibles are
on whose property cutting and welding more than 35 feet (10.7 m) away but are
is to be performed, see Standard for easily ignited by sparks.
Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and (3) Wall or floor openings within a 35-
Welding Processes, NFPA Standard foot (10.7 m) radius expose combustible
51B, 1962, which is incorporated by ref- material in adjacent areas including
erence as specified in § 1910.6. The basic concealed spaces in walls or floors.
precautions for fire prevention in weld- (4) Combustible materials are adja-
ing or cutting work are: cent to the opposite side of metal par-
(i) Fire hazards. If the object to be titions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are
welded or cut cannot readily be moved, likely to be ignited by conduction or
all movable fire hazards in the vicinity radiation.
shall be taken to a safe place. (B) Fire watchers shall have fire ex-
(ii) Guards. If the object to be welded tinguishing equipment readily avail-
or cut cannot be moved and if all the able and be trained in its use. They
fire hazards cannot be removed, then shall be familiar with facilities for
guards shall be used to confine the sounding an alarm in the event of a
heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect fire. They shall watch for fires in all
the immovable fire hazards. exposed areas, try to extinguish them
(iii) Restrictions. If the requirements only when obviously within the capac-
ity of the equipment available, or oth-
stated in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and
erwise sound the alarm. A fire watch
(a)(1)(ii) of this section cannot be fol-
shall be maintained for at least a half
lowed then welding and cutting shall
hour after completion of welding or
not be performed.
cutting operations to detect and extin-
(2) Special precautions. When the na- guish possible smoldering fires.
ture of the work to be performed falls (iv) Authorization. Before cutting or
within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) welding is permitted, the area shall be
of this section certain additional pre- inspected by the individual responsible
cautions may be necessary: for authorizing cutting and welding op-
(i) Combustible material. Wherever erations. He shall designate pre-
there are floor openings or cracks in cautions to be followed in granting au-
the flooring that cannot be closed, pre- thorization to proceed preferably in the
cautions shall be taken so that no form of a written permit.
readily combustible materials on the (v) Floors. Where combustible mate-
floor below will be exposed to sparks rials such as paper clippings, wood
which might drop through the floor. shavings, or textile fibers are on the
The same precautions shall be observed floor, the floor shall be swept clean for
with regard to cracks or holes in walls, a radius of 35 feet (10.7 m). Combustible
open doorways and open or broken win- floors shall be kept wet, covered with
dows. damp sand, or protected by fire-resist-
(ii) Fire extinquishers. Suitable fire ant shields. Where floors have been wet
extinguishing equipment shall be down, personnel operating arc welding
maintained in a state of readiness for or cutting equipment shall be pro-
instant use. Such equipment may con- tected from possible shock.
sist of pails of water, buckets of sand, (vi) Prohibited areas. Cutting or weld-
hose or portable extinguishers depending shall not be permitted in the fol-
ing upon the nature and quantity of lowing situations:
the combustible material exposed. (A) In areas not authorized by man-
(iii) Fire watch. (A) Fire watchers agement.
shall be required whenever welding or (B) In sprinklered buildings while
cutting is performed in locations where such protection is impaired.
other than a minor fire might develop, (C) In the presence of explosive
or any of the following conditions atmospheres (mixtures of flammable
exist: gases, vapors, liquids, or dusts with
(1) Appreciable combustible material, air), or explosive atmospheres that
in building construction or contents, may develop inside uncleaned or im-
closer than 35 feet (10.7 m) to the point properly prepared tanks or equipment
of operation. which have previously contained such
666
materials, or that may develop in areas (C) Insist that cutters or welders and
with an accumulation of combustible their supervisors are suitably trained
dusts. in the safe operation of their equip-
(D) In areas near the storage of large ment and the safe use of the process.
quantities of exposed, readily ignitible (D) Advise all contractors about
materials such as bulk sulfur, baled flammable materials or hazardous con-
paper, or cotton. ditions of which they may not be
(vii) Relocation of combustibles. Where aware.
practicable, all combustibles shall be (xiv) Supervisor. The Supervisor:
relocated at least 35 feet (10.7 m) from (A) Shall be responsible for the safe
the work site. Where relocation is im- handling of the cutting or welding
practicable, combustibles shall be pro- equipment and the safe use of the cut-
tected with flameproofed covers or oth-
ting or welding process.
erwise shielded with metal or asbestos
(B) Shall determine the combustible
guards or curtains.
(viii) Ducts. Ducts and conveyor sys- materials and hazardous areas present
tems that might carry sparks to dis- or likely to be present in the work lo-
tant combustibles shall be suitably cation.
protected or shut down. (C) Shall protect combustibles from
(ix) Combustible walls. Where cutting ignition by the following:
or welding is done near walls, parti- (1) Have the work moved to a loca-
tions, ceiling or roof of combustible tion free from dangerous combustibles.
construction, fire-resistant shields or (2) If the work cannot be moved, have
guards shall be provided to prevent ig- the combustibles moved to a safe dis-
nition. tance from the work or have the com-
(x) Noncombustible walls. If welding is bustibles properly shielded against ig-
to be done on a metal wall, partition, nition.
ceiling or roof, precautions shall be (3) See that cutting and welding are
taken to prevent ignition of combusti- so scheduled that plant operations that
bles on the other side, due to conduc- might expose combustibles to ignition
tion or radiation, preferably by relo- are not started during cutting or weld-
cating combustibles. Where combusti- ing.
bles are not relocated, a fire watch on (D) Shall secure authorization for the
the opposite side from the work shall cutting or welding operations from the
be provided. designated management representa-
(xi) Combustible cover. Welding shall tive.
not be attempted on a metal partition, (E) Shall determine that the cutter
wall, ceiling or roof having a combus-
or welder secures his approval that
tible covering nor on walls or parti-
conditions are safe before going ahead.
tions of combustible sandwich-type
panel construction. (F) Shall determine that fire protec-
(xii) Pipes. Cutting or welding on tion and extinguishing equipment are
pipes or other metal in contact with properly located at the site.
combustible walls, partitions, ceilings (G) Where fire watches are required,
or roofs shall not be undertaken if the he shall see that they are available at
work is close enough to cause ignition the site.
by conduction. (xv) Fire prevention precautions. Cut-
(xiii) Management. Management shall ting or welding shall be permitted only
recognize its responsibility for the safe in areas that are or have been made
usage of cutting and welding equip- fire safe. When work cannot be moved
ment on its property and: practically, as in most construction
(A) Based on fire potentials of plant work, the area shall be made safe by
facilities, establish areas for cutting removing combustibles or protecting
and welding, and establish procedures combustibles from ignition sources.
for cutting and welding, in other areas. (3) Welding or cutting containers—(i)
(B) Designate an individual respon- Used containers. No welding, cutting, or
sible for authorizing cutting and weld- other hot work shall be performed on
ing operations in areas not specifically used drums, barrels, tanks or other
designed for such processes. containers until they have been
667
cleaned so thoroughly as to make abso- suitable filter lenses are permitted for
lutely certain that there are no flam- use during gas welding operations on
mable materials present or any sub- light work, for torch brazing or for in-
stances such as greases, tars, acids, or spection.
other materials which when subjected (C) All operators and attendants of
to heat, might produce flammable or resistance welding or resistance braz-
toxic vapors. Any pipe lines or connec- ing equipment shall use transparent
tions to the drum or vessel shall be dis- face shields or goggles, depending on
connected or blanked. the particular job, to protect their
(ii) Venting and purging. All hollow faces or eyes, as required.
spaces, cavities or containers shall be (D) Eye protection in the form of
vented to permit the escape of air or suitable goggles shall be provided
gases before preheating, cutting or where needed for brazing operations
welding. Purging with inert gas is rec- not covered in paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A)
ommended. through (b)(2)(i)(C) of this section.
(4) Confined spaces—(i) Accidental con- (ii) Specifications for protectors. (A)
tact. When arc welding is to be sus- Helmets and hand shields shall be made
pended for any substantial period of of a material which is an insulator for
time, such as during lunch or over- heat and electricity. Helmets, shields
night, all electrodes shall be removed and goggles shall be not readily flam-
from the holders and the holders care- mable and shall be capable of with-
fully located so that accidental contact standing sterilization.
cannot occur and the machine be dis- (B) Helmets and hand shields shall be
connected from the power source. arranged to protect the face, neck and
(ii) Torch valve. In order to eliminate ears from direct radiant energy from
the possibility of gas escaping through the arc.
leaks or improperly closed valves, (C) Helmets shall be provided with
when gas welding or cutting, the torch filter plates and cover plates designed
valves shall be closed and the gas sup- for easy removal.
ply to the torch positively shut off at (D) All parts shall be constructed of a
some point outside the confined area material which will not readily corrode
whenever the torch is not to be used or discolor the skin.
for a substantial period of time, such (E) Goggles shall be ventilated to
as during lunch hour or overnight. prevent fogging of the lenses as much
Where practicable, the torch and hose as practicable.
shall also be removed from the con- (F) All glass for lenses shall be tem-
fined space. pered, substantially free from striae,
(b) Protection of personnel—(1) Gen- air bubbles, waves and other flaws. Ex-
eral—(i) Railing. A welder or helper cept when a lens is ground to provide
working on platforms, scaffolds, or proper optical correction for defective
runways shall be protected against fall- vision, the front and rear surfaces of
ing. This may be accomplished by the lenses and windows shall be smooth
use of railings, safety belts, life lines, and parallel.
or some other equally effective safe- (G) Lenses shall bear some perma-
guards. nent distinctive marking by which the
(ii) Welding cable. Welders shall place source and shade may be readily identi-
welding cable and other equipment so fied.
that it is clear of passageways, ladders, (H) The following is a guide for the
and stairways. selection of the proper shade numbers.
(2) Eye protection—(i) Selection. (A) These recommendations may be varied
Helmets or hand shields shall be used to suit the individual’s needs.
during all arc welding or arc cutting
operations, excluding submerged arc Welding operation
Shade
No.
welding. Helpers or attendants shall be
provided with proper eye protection. Shielded metal-arc welding—1⁄16-, 3⁄32-, 1⁄8-, 5⁄32-
(B) Goggles or other suitable eye pro- inch electrodes ....................................................... 10
Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous)—1⁄16-, 3⁄32-,
tection shall be used during all gas 1⁄8-, 5⁄32-inch electrodes ......................................... 11
welding or oxygen cutting operations. Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous)—1⁄16-, 3⁄32-, 1⁄8-,
Spectacles without side shields, with 5⁄32-inch electrodes ................................................ 12
668
Welding operation
Shade formed in any confined spaces the gas
No. cylinders and welding machines shall
Shielded metal-arc welding: be left on the outside. Before oper-
3⁄16-, 7⁄32-, 1⁄4-inch electrodes ...................... 12 ations are started, heavy portable
5⁄16-, 3⁄8-inch electrodes .............................. 14 equipment mounted on wheels shall be
Atomic hydrogen welding .......................................... 10–14
Carbon arc welding ................................................... 14 securely blocked to prevent accidental
Soldering .................................................................... 2 movement.
Torch brazing ............................................................. 3 or 4 (iv) Lifelines. Where a welder must
Light cutting, up to 1 inch .......................................... 3 or 4
Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches ........................... 4 or 5 enter a confined space through a man-
Heavy cutting, 6 inches and over .............................. 5 or 6 hole or other small opening, means
Gas welding (light) up to 1⁄8 inch .............................. 4 or 5 shall be provided for quickly removing
Gas welding (medium) 1⁄8 inch to 1⁄2 inch ................. 5 or 6
Gas welding (heavy) 1⁄2 inch and over ..................... 6 or 8
him in case of emergency. When safety
belts and lifelines are used for this pur-
Note: In gas welding or oxygen cutting where the torch pro-
duces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter or lens pose they shall be so attached to the
that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of welder’s body that his body cannot be
the operation.
jammed in a small exit opening. An at-
(I) Filter lenses must meet the test tendant with a preplanned rescue pro-
for transmission of radiant energy pre- cedure shall be stationed outside to ob-
scribed by any of the consensus stand- serve the welder at all times and be ca-
ards listed in 29 CFR 1910.133(b)(1). pable of putting rescue operations into
(iii) Protection from arc welding rays. effect.
Where the work permits, the welder (v) Electrode removal. When arc weld-
should be enclosed in an individual ing is to be suspended for any substan-
booth painted with a finish of low re- tial period of time, such as during
flectivity such as zinc oxide (an impor- lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall
tant factor for absorbing ultraviolet be removed from the holders and the
radiations) and lamp black, or shall be holders carefully located so that acci-
enclosed with noncombustible screens dental contact cannot occur and the
similarly painted. Booths and screens machine disconnected from the power
shall permit circulation of air at floor source.
level. Workers or other persons adja- (vi) Gas cylinder shutoff. In order to
cent to the welding areas shall be pro- eliminate the possibility of gas escap-
tected from the rays by noncombus- ing through leaks of improperly closed
tible or flameproof screens or shields valves, when gas welding or cutting,
or shall be required to wear appro- the torch valves shall be closed and the
priate goggles. fuel-gas and oxygen supply to the torch
(3) Protective clothing—General require- positively shut off at some point out-
ments. Employees exposed to the haz- side the confined area whenever the
ards created by welding, cutting, or torch is not to be used for a substantial
brazing operations shall be protected period of time, such as during lunch
by personal protective equipment in hour or overnight. Where practicable
accordance with the requirements of the torch and hose shall also be re-
§ 1910.132 of this part. Appropriate pro- moved from the confined space.
tective clothing required for any weld- (vii) Warning sign. After welding op-
ing operation will vary with the size, erations are completed, the welder
nature and location of the work to be shall mark the hot metal or provide
performed. some other means of warning other
(4) Work in confined spaces—(i) Gen- workers.
eral. As used herein confined space is (c) Health protection and ventilation—
intended to mean a relatively small or (1) General—(i) Contamination. The re-
restricted space such as a tank, boiler, quirements in this paragraph have been
pressure vessel, or small compartment established on the basis of the fol-
of a ship. lowing three factors in arc and gas
(ii) Ventilation. Ventilation is a pre- welding which govern the amount of
requisite to work in confined spaces. contamination to which welders may
For ventilation requirements see para- be exposed:
graph (c) of this section. (A) Dimensions of space in which
(iii) Securing cylinders and machinery. welding is to be done (with special re-
When welding or cutting is being per- gard to height of ceiling).
669
(B) Number of welders. esses published by the American Weld-
(C) Possible evolution of hazardous ing Society.
fumes, gases, or dust according to the (C) Where brazing (welding) filler
metals involved. metals contain cadmium in significant
(ii) Screens. When welding must be amounts, the labels shall indicate the
performed in a space entirely screened hazards associated with cadmium in-
on all sides, the screens shall be so ar- cluding cancer, lung and kidney ef-
ranged that no serious restriction of fects, and acute toxicity effects.
ventilation exists. It is desirable to (D) Where brazing and gas welding
have the screens so mounted that they fluxes contain fluorine compounds, the
are about 2 feet (0.61 m) above the floor labels shall indicate the hazards associ-
unless the work is performed at so low ated with fluorine compounds includ-
a level that the screen must be ex- ing eye and respiratory tract effects.
tended nearer to the floor to protect (vi) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers
nearby workers from the glare of weld- may include the following information
ing. on labels in lieu of the labeling require-
(iii) Maximum allowable concentration. ments in paragraph (c)(1)(v) of this sec-
Local exhaust or general ventilating tion:
systems shall be provided and arranged (A) All filler metals and fusible
to keep the amount of toxic fumes, granular materials shall carry the fol-
gases, or dusts below the maximum allowing notice, as a minimum, on tags,
lowable concentration as specified in boxes, or other containers:
§ 1910.1000 of this part. CAUTION
(iv) Hazard communication. The em-
ployer shall include the potentially Welding may produce fumes and
hazardous materials employed in gases hazardous to health. Avoid
fluxes, coatings, coverings, and filler breathing these fumes and gases. Use
metals, all of which are potentially adequate ventilation. See ANSI Z49.1–
used in welding and cutting, or are re- 1967 Safety in Welding and Cutting
leased to the atmosphere during weld- published by the American Welding So-
ciety.
ing and cutting, in the program estab-
lished to comply with the Hazard Com- (B) Brazing (welding) filler metals
munication Standard (HCS) containing cadmium in significant
(§ 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure amounts shall carry the following no-
tice on tags, boxes, or other containers:
that each employee has access to labels
on containers of such materials and WARNING
safety data sheets, and is trained in ac- CONTAINS CADMIUM—POISONOUS
cordance with the provisions of FUMES MAY BE FORMED ON HEATING
§ 1910.1200. Potentially hazardous mate- Do not breathe fumes. Use only with
rials shall include but not be limited to adequate ventilation such as fume col-
the materials itemized in paragraphs lectors, exhaust ventilators, or air-sup-
(c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section. plied respirators. See ANSI Z49.1–1967.
(v) Additional considerations for hazard If chest pain, cough, or fever develops
communication in welding, cutting, and after use call physician immediately.
brazing. (A) The suppliers shall deter- (C) Brazing and gas welding fluxes
mine and shall label in accordance containing fluorine compounds shall
with § 1910.1200 any hazards associated have a cautionary wording to indicate
with the use of their materials in weld- that they contain fluorine compounds.
ing, cutting, and brazing. One such cautionary wording rec-
(B) In addition to any requirements ommended by the American Welding
imposed by § 1910.1200, all filler metals Society for brazing and gas welding
and fusible granular materials shall fluxes reads as follows:
carry the following notice, as a min-
imum, on tags, boxes, or other con- CAUTION
CONTAINS FLUORIDES
tainers:
Do not use in areas without adequate This flux when heated gives off fumes
ventilation. See ANSI Z49.1–1967 Safety that may irritate eyes, nose and
in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Proc- throat.
670
1. Avoid fumes—use only in well-ven- Minimum air Duct diame-
Welding zone flow 1 cubic
tilated spaces. feet/minute ter, inches 2
2. Avoid contact of flux with eyes or
skin. 4 to 6 inches from arc or torch 150 3
6 to 8 inches from arc or torch 275 31⁄2
3. Do not take internally. 8 to 10 inches from arc or torch 425 41⁄2
(2) Ventilation for general welding and 10 to 12 inches from arc or
cutting—(i) General. Mechanical ven- torch ....................................... 600 51⁄2
tilation shall be provided when welding 1 When brazing with cadmium bearing materials or when
or cutting is done on metals not cov- cutting on such materials increased rates of ventilation may
be required.
ered in paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) 2 Nearest half-inch duct diameter based on 4,000 feet per
minute velocity in pipe.
of this section. (For specific materials,
see the ventilation requirements of (ii) Fixed enclosure. A fixed enclosure
paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this with a top and not less than two sides
section.) which surround the welding or cutting
(A) In a space of less than 10,000 cubic operations and with a rate of airflow
feet (284 m 3) per welder. sufficient to maintain a velocity away
(B) In a room having a ceiling height from the welder of not less than 100 lin-
of less than 16 feet (5 m). ear feet (30 m) per minute.
(C) In confined spaces or where the (4) Ventilation in confined spaces—(i)
welding space contains partitions, bal- Air replacement. All welding and cutting
conies, or other structural barriers to operations carried on in confined
the extent that they significantly ob- spaces shall be adequately ventilated
to prevent the accumulation of toxic
struct cross ventilation.
materials or possible oxygen defi-
(ii) Minimum rate. Such ventilation
ciency. This applies not only to the
shall be at the minimum rate of 2,000 welder but also to helpers and other
cubic feet (57 m3) per minute per weld- personnel in the immediate vicinity.
er, except where local exhaust hoods All air replacing that withdrawn shall
and booths as per paragraph (c)(3) of be clean and respirable.
this section, or airline respirators ap- (ii) Airline respirators. In cir-
proved by the Mine Safety and Health cumstances for which it is impossible
Administration and the National Insti- to provide such ventilation, airline res-
tute for Occupational Safety and pirators or hose masks approved for
Health, pursuant to the provisions of 30 this purpose by the National Institute
CFR part 11, are provided. Natural ven- for Occupational Safety and Health
tilation is considered sufficient for (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 must be
welding or cutting operations where used.
the restrictions in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of (iii) Self-contained units. In areas im-
this section are not present. mediately hazardous to life, a full-face-
(3) Local exhaust hoods and booths. piece, pressure-demand, self-contained
Mechanical local exhaust ventilation breathing apparatus or a combination
may be by means of either of the fol- full-facepiece, pressure-demand sup-
lowing: plied-air respirator with an auxiliary,
(i) Hoods. Freely movable hoods in- self-contained air supply approved by
tended to be placed by the welder as NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 must be
used.
near as practicable to the work being
welded and provided with a rate of air- (iv) Outside helper. Where welding op-
erations are carried on in confined
flow sufficient to maintain a velocity
spaces and where welders and helpers
in the direction of the hood of 100 lin-
are provided with hose masks, hose
ear feet (30 m) per minute in the zone masks with blowers or self-contained
of welding when the hood is at its most breathing equipment approved by the
remote distance from the point of Mine Safety and Health Administra-
welding. The rates of ventilation re- tion and the National Institute for Oc-
quired to accomplish this control ve- cupational Safety and Health, a worker
locity using a 3-inch (7.6 cm) wide shall be stationed on the outside of
flanged suction opening are shown in such confined spaces to insure the safe-
the following table: ty of those working within.
671
(v) Oxygen for ventilation. Oxygen protected by local exhaust ventilation
shall never be used for ventilation. or airline respirators.
(5) Fluorine compounds—(i) General. In (8) Beryllium. Welding or cutting in-
confined spaces, welding or cutting indoors, outdoors, or in confined spaces
volving fluxes, coverings, or other ma- involving beryllium-containing base or
terials which contain fluorine com- filler metals shall be done using local
pounds shall be done in accordance exhaust ventilation and airline res-
with paragraph (c)(4) of this section. A pirators unless atmospheric tests under
fluorine compound is one that contains the most adverse conditions have es-
fluorine, as an element in chemical tablished that the workers’ exposure is
combination, not as a free gas. within the acceptable concentrations
(ii) Maximum allowable concentration. defined by § 1910.1000 of this part. In all
The need for local exhaust ventilation cases, workers in the immediate vicin-
or airline respirators for welding or ity of the welding or cutting operations
cutting in other than confined spaces shall be protected as necessary by local
will depend upon the individual cir- exhaust ventilation or airline res-
cumstances. However, experience has pirators.
shown such protection to be desirable (9) Cadmium—(i) General. In confined
for fixed-location production welding spaces or indoors, welding or cutting
and for all production welding on stain- operations involving cadmium-bearing
less steels. Where air samples taken at or cadmium-coated base metals must
the welding location indicate that the be done using local exhaust ventilation
fluorides liberated are below the max- or airline respirators unless atmos-
imum allowable concentration, such pheric tests under the most adverse
protection is not necessary. conditions show that employee expo-
(6) Zinc—(i) Confined spaces. In con- sure is within the acceptable con-
fined spaces welding or cutting involv- centrations specified by 29 CFR
ing zinc-bearing base or filler metals or 1910.1000. Such operations, when done
metals coated with zinc-bearing mate- outdoors, must be done using res-
rials shall be done in accordance with pirators, such as fume respirators, ap-
paragraph (c)(4) of this section. proved for this purpose by NIOSH
(ii) Indoors. Indoors, welding or cut- under 42 CFR part 84.
ting involving zinc-bearing base or (ii) Confined space. Welding (brazing)
filler metals coated with zinc-bearing involving cadmium-bearing filler met-
materials shall be done in accordance als shall be done using ventilation as
with paragraph (c)(3) of this section. prescribed in paragraph (c)(3) or (c)(4)
(7) Lead—(i) Confined spaces. In con- of this section if the work is to be done
fined spaces, welding involving lead- in a confined space.
base metals (erroneously called lead- (10) Mercury. In confined spaces or in-
burning) shall be done in accordance doors, welding or cutting operations in-
with paragraph (c)(4) of this section. volving metals coated with mercury-
(ii) Indoors. Indoors, welding involv- bearing materials, including paint,
ing lead-base metals shall be done in must be done using local exhaust ven-
accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this tilation or airline respirators unless at-
section. mospheric tests under the most adverse
(iii) Local ventilation. In confined conditions show that employee expo-
spaces or indoors, welding or cutting sure is within the acceptable con-
operations involving metals containing centrations specified by 29 CFR
lead, other than as an impurity, or 1910.1000. Such operations, when done
metals coated with lead-bearing mate- outdoors, must be done using res-
rials, including paint, must be done pirators approved for this purpose by
using local exhaust ventilation or air- NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84.
line respirators. Such operations, when (11) Cleaning compounds—(i) Manufac-
done outdoors, must be done using res- turer’s instructions. In the use of clean-
pirators approved for this purpose by ing materials, because of their possible
NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84. In all toxicity or flammability, appropriate
cases, workers in the immediate vicin- precautions such as manufacturers in-
ity of the cutting operation must be structions shall be followed.
672
(ii) Degreasing. Degreasing and other stances shall be performed in accord-
cleaning operations involving ance with Welding or Hot Tapping on
chlorinated hydrocarbons shall be so Equipment Containing Flammables,
located that no vapors from these oper- API Std. PSD No. 2201—1963, which is
ations will reach or be drawn into the incorporated by reference as specified
atmosphere surrounding any welding in § 1910.6.
operation. In addition, trichloro- (vii) X-ray inspection. The use of X-
ethylene and perchlorethylene should rays and radioactive isotopes for the
be kept out of atmospheres penetrated inspection of welded pipeline joints
by the ultraviolet radiation of gas- shall be carried out in conformance
shielded welding operations. with the American National Standard
(12) Cutting of stainless steels. Oxygen Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray
cutting, using either a chemical flux or and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI
iron powder or gas-shielded arc cutting Z54.1—1963, which is incorporated by
of stainless steel, shall be done using reference as specified in § 1910.6.
mechanical ventilation adequate to re- (2) Mechanical piping systems—(i) Gen-
move the fumes generated. eral. The requirements of paragraphs
(13) First-aid equipment. First-aid (a), (b), and (c) of this section and
equipment shall be available at all §§ 1910.253 and 1910.254 of this part shall
times. All injuries shall be reported as be observed.
soon as possible for medical attention.
(ii) X-ray inspection. The use of X-
First aid shall be rendered until med-
rays and radioactive isotopes for the
ical attention can be provided.
inspection of welded piping joints shall
(d) Industrial applications—(1) Trans-
be in conformance with the American
mission pipeline—(i) General. The re-
National Standard Safety Standard for
quirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of
Non-Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-
this section and § 1910.254 of this part
Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1—1963.
shall be observed.
(ii) Field shop operations. Where field [55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61
shop operations are involved for fab- FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998;
rication of fittings, river crossings, 74 FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26,
road crossings, and pumping and com- 2012]
pressor stations the requirements of
paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this sec- § 1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding
and cutting.
tion and §§ 1910.253 and 1910.254 of this
part shall be observed. (a) General requirements—(1) Flam-
(iii) Electric shock. When arc welding mable mixture. Mixtures of fuel gases
is performed in wet conditions, or and air or oxygen may be explosive and
under conditions of high humidity, spe- shall be guarded against. No device or
cial protection against electric shock attachment facilitating or permitting
shall be supplied. mixtures of air or oxygen with flam-
(iv) Pressure testing. In pressure test- mable gases prior to consumption, ex-
ing of pipelines, the workers and the cept at the burner or in a standard
public shall be protected against injury torch, shall be allowed unless approved
by the blowing out of closures or other for the purpose.
pressure restraining devices. Also, pro- (2) Maximum pressure. Under no condi-
tection shall be provided against expul- tion shall acetylene be generated,
sion of loose dirt that may have be- piped (except in approved cylinder
come trapped in the pipe. manifolds) or utilized at a pressure in
(v) Construction standards. The welded excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pres-
construction of transmission pipelines sure) or 30 psia (206 kPa absolute). The
shall be conducted in accordance with 30 psia (206 kPa absolute) limit is in-
the Standard for Welding Pipe Lines tended to prevent unsafe use of acety-
and Related Facilities, API Std. 1104— lene in pressurized chambers such as
1968, which is incorporated by reference caissons, underground excavations or
as specified in § 1910.6. tunnel construction.) This requirement
(vi) Flammable substance lines. The is not intended to apply to storage of
connection, by welding, of branches to acetylene dissolved in a suitable sol-
pipelines carrying flammable sub- vent in cylinders manufactured and
673
maintained according to U.S. Depart- materials such as oil or excelsior. Cyl-
ment of Transportation requirements, inders should be stored in definitely as-
or to acetylene for chemical use. The signed places away from elevators,
use of liquid acetylene shall be prohib- stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage
ited. spaces shall be located where cylinders
(3) Apparatus. Only approved appa- will not be knocked over or damaged
ratus such as torches, regulators or by passing or falling objects, or subject
pressure-reducing valves, acetylene to tampering by unauthorized persons.
generators, and manifolds shall be Cylinders shall not be kept in
used. unventilated enclosures such as lockers
(4) Personnel. Workmen in charge of and cupboards.
the oxygen or fuel-gas supply equip- (iii) Empty cylinders shall have their
ment, including generators, and oxygen valves closed.
or fuel-gas distribution piping systems (iv) Valve protection caps, where cyl-
shall be instructed and judged com- inder is designed to accept a cap, shall
petent by their employers for this im- always be in place, hand-tight, except
portant work before being left in when cylinders are in use or connected
charge. Rules and instructions cov- for use.
ering the operation and maintenance of (3) Fuel-gas cylinder storage. Inside a
oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment
building, cylinders, except those in ac-
including generators, and oxygen or
tual use or attached ready for use,
fuel-gas distribution piping systems
shall be limited to a total gas capacity
shall be readily available.
of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m3) or 300 pounds
(b) Cylinders and containers—(1) Ap-
(135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas.
proval and marking. (i) All portable cyl-
inders used for the storage and ship- (i) For storage in excess of 2,000 cubic
ment of compressed gases shall be con- feet (56 m3) total gas capacity of cyl-
structed and maintained in accordance inders or 300 (135.9 kg) pounds of lique-
with the regulations of the U.S. De- fied petroleum gas, a separate room or
partment of Transportation, 49 CFR compartment conforming to the re-
parts 171–179. quirements specified in paragraphs
(ii) Compressed gas cylinders shall be (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section
legibly marked, for the purpose of iden- shall be provided, or cylinders shall be
tifying the gas content, with either the kept outside or in a special building.
chemical or the trade name of the gas. Special buildings, rooms or compart-
Such marking shall be by means of ments shall have no open flame for
stenciling, stamping, or labeling, and heating or lighting and shall be well
shall not be readily removable. When- ventilated. They may also be used for
ever practical, the marking shall be lo- storage of calcium carbide in quan-
cated on the shoulder of the cylinder. tities not to exceed 600 (271.8 kg)
(iii) Compressed gas cylinders shall pounds, when contained in metal con-
be equipped with connections com- tainers complying with paragraphs
plying with the American National (g)(1)(i) and (g)(1)(ii) of this section.
Standard Compressed Gas Cylinder (ii) Acetylene cylinders shall be
Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, stored valve end up.
ANSI B57.1—1965, which is incorporated (4) Oxygen storage. (i) Oxygen cyl-
by reference as specified in § 1910.6. inders shall not be stored near highly
(iv) All cylinders with a water weight combustible material, especially oil
capacity of over 30 pounds (13.6 kg) and grease; or near reserve stocks of
shall be equipped with means of con- carbide and acetylene or other fuel-gas
necting a valve protection cap or with cylinders, or near any other substance
a collar or recess to protect the valve. likely to cause or accelerate fire; or in
(2) Storage of cylinders—general. (i) an acetylene generator compartment.
Cylinders shall be kept away from radi- (ii) Oxygen cylinders stored in out-
ators and other sources of heat. side generator houses shall be sepa-
(ii) Inside of buildings, cylinders rated from the generator or carbide
shall be stored in a well-protected, storage rooms by a noncombustible
well-ventilated, dry location, at least partition having a fire-resistance rat-
20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible ing of at least 1 hour. This partition
674
shall be without openings and shall be moved and valve-protection caps, when
gastight. provided for, shall be put in place be-
(iii) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall fore cylinders are moved.
be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or (E) Cylinders not having fixed hand
combustible materials (especially oil wheels shall have keys, handles, or
or grease), a minimum distance of 20 nonadjustable wrenches on valve stems
feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible bar- while these cylinders are in service. In
rier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having multiple cylinder installations only
a fire-resistance rating of at least one- one key or handle is required for each
half hour. manifold.
(iv) Where a liquid oxygen system is (F) Cylinder valves shall be closed be-
to be used to supply gaseous oxygen for fore moving cylinders.
welding or cutting and the system has (G) Cylinder valves shall be closed
a storage capacity of more than 13,000 when work is finished.
cubic feet (364 m3) of oxygen (measured (H) Valves of empty cylinders shall
at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 °F (21.1 be closed.
°C)), connected in service or ready for (I) Cylinders shall be kept far enough
service, or more than 25,000 cubic feet away from the actual welding or cut-
(700 m3) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 ting operation so that sparks, hot slag,
psia (101 kPa) and 70 °F (21.1 °C)), in- or flame will not reach them, or fire-
cluding unconnected reserves on hand resistant shields shall be provided.
at the site, it shall comply with the (J) Cylinders shall not be placed
provisions of the Standard for Bulk Ox- where they might become part of an
ygen Systems at Consumer Sites, electric circuit. Contacts with third
NFPA No. 566—1965, which is incor- rails, trolley wires, etc., shall be avoid-
porated by reference as specified in ed. Cylinders shall be kept away from
§ 1910.6. radiators, piping systems, layout ta-
(5) Operating procedures. (i) Cylinders, bles, etc., that may be used for ground-
cylinder valves, couplings, regulators, ing electric circuits such as for arc
hose, and apparatus shall be kept free welding machines. Any practice such
from oily or greasy substances. Oxygen as the tapping of an electrode against a
cylinders or apparatus shall not be cylinder to strike an arc shall be pro-
handled with oily hands or gloves. A hibited.
jet of oxygen must never be permitted (K) Cylinders shall never be used as
to strike an oily surface, greasy rollers or supports, whether full or
clothes, or enter a fuel oil or other empty.
storage tank. (L) The numbers and markings
(ii)(A) When transporting cylinders stamped into cylinders shall not be
by a crane or derrick, a cradle, boat, or tampered with.
suitable platform shall be used. Slings (M) No person, other than the gas
or electric magnets shall not be used supplier, shall attempt to mix gases in
for this purpose. Valve-protection caps, a cylinder. No one, except the owner of
where cylinder is designed to accept a the cylinder or person authorized by
cap, shall always be in place. him, shall refill a cylinder.
(B) Cylinders shall not be dropped or (N) No one shall tamper with safety
struck or permitted to strike each devices in cylinders or valves.
other violently. (O) Cylinders shall not be dropped or
(C) Valve-protection caps shall not be otherwise roughly handled.
used for lifting cylinders from one (P) Unless connected to a manifold,
vertical position to another. Bars shall oxygen from a cylinder shall not be
not be used under valves or valve-pro- used without first attaching an oxygen
tection caps to pry cylinders loose regulator to the cylinder valve. Before
when frozen to the ground or otherwise connecting the regulator to the cyl-
fixed; the use of warm (not boiling) inder valve, the valve shall be opened
water is recommended. Valve-protec- slightly for an instant and then closed.
tion caps are designed to protect cyl- Always stand to one side of the outlet
inder valves from damage. when opening the cylinder valve.
(D) Unless cylinders are secured on a (Q) A hammer or wrench shall not be
special truck, regulators shall be reused to open cylinder valves. If valves
675
cannot be opened by hand, the supplier (I) Fuel-gas shall never be used from
shall be notified. cylinders through torches or other de-
(R)(1) Cylinder valves shall not be vices equipped with shutoff valves
tampered with nor should any attempt without reducing the pressure through
be made to repair them. If trouble is a suitable regulator attached to the
experienced, the supplier should be cylinder valve or manifold.
sent a report promptly indicating the (J) The cylinder valve shall always be
character of the trouble and the cyl- opened slowly.
inder’s serial number. Supplier’s in- (K) An acetylene cylinder valve shall
structions as to its disposition shall be not be opened more than one and one-
followed. half turns of the spindle, and pref-
(2) Complete removal of the stem erably no more than three-fourths of a
from a diaphragm-type cylinder valve turn.
shall be avoided. (L) Where a special wrench is re-
(iii)(A) Fuel-gas cylinders shall be quired it shall be left in position on the
placed with valve end up whenever stem of the valve while the cylinder is
they are in use. Liquefied gases shall in use so that the fuel-gas flow can be
be stored and shipped with the valve quickly turned off in case of emer-
end up. gency. In the case of manifolded or
(B) Cylinders shall be handled care- coupled cylinders at least one such
fully. Rough handling, knocks, or falls wrench shall always be available for
are liable to damage the cylinder, immediate use.
valve or safety devices and cause leak- (c) Manifolding of cylinders—(1) Fuel-
age. gas manifolds. (i) Manifolds shall be ap-
(C) Before connecting a regulator to proved either separately for each com-
a cylinder valve, the valve shall be ponent part or as an assembled unit.
opened slightly and closed imme- (ii) Except as provided in paragraph
diately. The valve shall be opened (c)(1)(iii) of this section fuel-gas cyl-
while standing to one side of the out- inders connected to one manifold in-
let; never in front of it. Never crack a side a building shall be limited to a
fuel-gas cylinder valve near other weld- total capacity not exceeding 300 pounds
ing work or near sparks, flame, or (135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas or
other possible sources of ignition. 3,000 cubic feet (84 m 3) of other fuel-
(D) Before a regulator is removed gas. More than one such manifold with
from a cylinder valve, the cylinder connected cylinders may be located in
valve shall be closed and the gas re- the same room provided the manifolds
leased from the regulator. are at least 50 feet (15 m) apart or sepa-
(E) Nothing shall be placed on top of rated by a noncombustible barrier at
an acetylene cylinder when in use least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-
which may damage the safety device or resistance rating of at least one-half
interfere with the quick closing of the hour.
valve. (iii) Fuel-gas cylinders connected to
(F) If cylinders are found to have one manifold having an aggregate ca-
leaky valves or fittings which cannot pacity exceeding 300 pounds (135.9 kg)
be stopped by closing of the valve, the of liquefied petroleum gas or 3,000
cylinders shall be taken outdoors away cubic feet (84 m 3) of other fuel-gas
from sources of ignition and slowly shall be located outdoors, or in a sepa-
emptied. rate building or room constructed in
(G) A warning should be placed near accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H)
cylinders having leaking fuse plugs or and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section.
other leaking safety devices not to ap- (iv) Separate manifold buildings or
proach them with a lighted cigarette or rooms may also be used for the storage
other source of ignition. Such cylinders of drums of calcium carbide and cyl-
should be plainly tagged; the supplier inders containing fuel gases as pro-
should be promptly notified and his in- vided in paragraph (b)(3) of this sec-
structions followed as to their return. tion. Such buildings or rooms shall
(H) Safety devices shall not be tam- have no open flames for heating or
pered with. lighting and shall be well-ventilated.
676
(v) High-pressure fuel-gas manifolds (vi) High-pressure oxygen manifolds
shall be provided with approved pres- shall be provided with approved pres-
sure regulating devices. sure-regulating devices.
(2) High-pressure oxygen manifolds (for (3) Low-pressure oxygen manifolds (for
use with cylinders having a Department use with cylinders having a Department
of Transportation service pressure above of Transportation service pressure not ex-
200 psig (1.36 MPa)). (i) Manifolds shall ceeding 200 psig (1.36 MPa)). (i) Mani-
be approved either separately for each folds shall be of substantial construc-
component part or as an assembled tion suitable for use with oxygen at a
unit. pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa). They
(ii) Oxygen manifolds shall not be lo- shall have a minimum bursting pres-
cated in an acetylene generator room. sure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa) and shall be
Oxygen manifolds shall be separated protected by a safety relief device
from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible which will relieve at a maximum pres-
materials (especially oil or grease), a sure of 500 psig (3.4 MPa). DOT–4L200
minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or cylinders have safety devices which re-
by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 lieve at a maximum pressure of 250 psig
feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resist- (1.7 MPa) (or 235 psig (1.6 MPa) if vacu-
ance rating of at least one-half hour. um insulation is used).
(iii) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Hose and hose connections sub-
ject to cylinder pressure shall comply
(c)(2)(iv) of this section, oxygen cyl-
with paragraph (e)(5) of this section.
inders connected to one manifold shall
Hose shall have a minimum bursting
be limited to a total gas capacity of
pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa).
6,000 cubic feet (168 m 3). More than one
(iii) The assembled manifold includ-
such manifold with connected cylinders
ing leads shall be tested and proven
may be located in the same room pro-
gas-tight at a pressure of 300 psig (2.04
vided the manifolds are at least 50 feet
MPa). The fluid used for testing oxygen
(15 m) apart or separated by a non-
manifolds shall be oil-free and not
combustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5
combustible.
m) high having a fire-resistance rating
(iv) The location of manifolds shall
of at least one-half hour. comply with paragraphs (c)(2)(ii),
(iv) An oxygen manifold, to which (c)(2)(iii), (c)(2)(iv), and (c)(2)(v) of this
cylinders having an aggregate capacity section.
of more than 6,000 cubic feet (168 m 3) of (v) The following sign shall be con-
oxygen are connected, should be lo- spicuously posted at each manifold:
cated outdoors or in a separate non-
combustible building. Such a manifold, Low-Pressure Manifold
if located inside a building having Do Not Connect High-Pressure Cylinders
other occupancy, shall be located in a
separate room of noncombustible con- Maximum Pressure—250 psig (1.7 MPa)
struction having a fire-resistance rat- (4) Portable outlet headers. (i) Portable
ing of at least one-half hour or in an outlet headers shall not be used in-
area with no combustible material doors except for temporary service
within 20 feet (6.1 m) of the manifold. where the conditions preclude a direct
(v) An oxygen manifold or oxygen supply from outlets located on the
bulk supply system which has storage service piping system.
capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet (ii) Each outlet on the service piping
(364 m 3) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 from which oxygen or fuel-gas is with-
psia (101 kPa) and 70 °F (21.1 °C)), con- drawn to supply a portable outlet head-
nected in service or ready for service, er shall be equipped with a readily ac-
or more than 25,000 cubic feet (700 m 3) cessible shutoff valve.
of oxygen (measured at 14.7 psia (101 (iii) Hose and hose connections used
kPa) and 70 °F (21.1 °C)), including for connecting the portable outlet
unconnected reserves on hand at the header to the service piping shall com-
site, shall comply with the provisions ply with paragraph (e)(5) of this sec-
of the Standard for Bulk Oxygen Sys- tion.
tems at Consumer Sites, NFPA No. 566– (iv) Master shutoff valves for both
1965. oxygen and fuel-gas shall be provided
677
at the entry end of the portable outlet (d) Service piping systems—(1) Materials
header. and design. (i)(A) Piping and fittings
(v) Portable outlet headers for fuel- shall comply with section 2, Industrial
gas service shall be provided with an Gas and Air Piping Systems, of the
approved hydraulic back-pressure valve American National Standard Code for
installed at the inlet and preceding the Pressure Piping ANSI B31.1, 1967, which
service outlets, unless an approved is incorporated by reference as speci-
pressure-reducing regulator, an ap- fied in § 1910.6, insofar as it does not
proved back-flow check valve, or an ap- conflict with paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A)(1)
proved hydraulic back-pressure valve is and (d)(1)(i)(A)(2) of this section:
installed at each outlet. Outlets pro- (1) Pipe shall be at least Schedule 40
vided on headers for oxygen service and fittings shall be at least standard
may be fitted for use with pressure-re- weight in sizes up to and including 6-
ducing regulators or for direct hose inch nominal.
connection. (2) Copper tubing shall be Types K or
(vi) Each service outlet on portable L in accordance with the Standard
outlet headers shall be provided with a Specification for Seamless Copper
valve assembly that includes a detach- Water Tube, ASTM B88–66a, which is
able outlet seal cap, chained or other- incorporated by reference as specified
wise attached to the body of the valve. in § 1910.6.
(vii) Materials and fabrication proce-
(B) Piping shall be steel, wrought
dures for portable outlet headers shall
iron, brass or copper pipe, or seamless
comply with paragraphs (d)(1), (d)(2),
copper, brass or stainless steel tubing,
and (d)(5) of this section.
except as provided in paragraphs
(viii) Portable outlet headers shall be
(d)(1)(ii) and (d)(1)(iii) of this section.
provided with frames which will sup-
(ii)(A) Oxygen piping and fittings at
port the equipment securely in the cor-
pressures in excess of 700 psi (4.8 MPa),
rect operating position and protect
shall be stainless steel or copper alloys.
them from damage during handling and
operation. (B) Hose connections and hose com-
(5) Manifold operation procedures. (i) plying with paragraph (e)(5) of this sec-
Cylinder manifolds shall be installed tion may be used to connect the outlet
under the supervision of someone fa- of a manifold pressure regulator to pip-
miliar with the proper practices with ing providing the working pressure of
reference to their construction and use. the piping is 250 psi (1.7 MPa) or less
(ii) All manifolds and parts used in and the length of the hose does not ex-
methods of manifolding shall be used ceed 5 feet (1.5 m). Hose shall have a
only for the gas or gases for which they minimum bursting pressure of 1,000
are approved. psig (6.8 MPa).
(iii) When acetylene cylinders are (C) When oxygen is supplied to a
coupled, approved flash arresters shall service piping system from a low-pres-
be installed between each cylinder and sure oxygen manifold without an inter-
the coupler block. For outdoor use vening pressure regulating device, the
only, and when the number of cylinders piping system shall have a minimum
coupled does not exceed three, one design pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa). A
flash arrester installed between the pressure regulating device shall be used
coupler block and regulator is accept- at each station outlet when the con-
able. nected equipment is for use at pres-
(iv) The aggregate capacity of fuel- sures less than 250 psig (1.7 MPa).
gas cylinders connected to a portable (iii)(A) Piping for acetylene or acety-
manifold inside a building shall not ex- lenic compounds shall be steel or
ceed 3,000 cubic feet (84 m 3) of gas. wrought iron.
(v) Acetylene and liquefied fuel-gas (B) Unalloyed copper shall not be
cylinders shall be manifolded in a used for acetylene or acetylenic com-
vertical position. pounds except in listed equipment.
(vi) The pressure in the gas cylinders (2) Piping joints. (i) Joints in steel or
connected to and discharged simulta- wrought iron piping shall be welded,
neously through a common manifold threaded or flanged. Fittings, such as
shall be approximately equal. ells, tees, couplings, and unions, may
678
be rolled, forged or cast steel, malle- (v) Gas cocks or valves shall be pro-
able iron or nodular iron. Gray or vided for all buildings at points where
white cast iron fittings are prohibited. they will be readily accessible for shut-
(ii) Joints in brass or copper pipe ting off the gas supply to these build-
shall be welded, brazed, threaded, or ings in any emergency. There shall also
flanged. If of the socket type, they be provided a shutoff valve in the dis-
shall be brazed with silver-brazing charge line from the generator, gas
alloy or similar high melting point holder, manifold or other source of sup-
(not less than 800 °F (427 °C)) filler ply.
metal. (vi) Shutoff valves shall not be in-
(iii) Joints in seamless copper, brass, stalled in safety relief lines in such a
or stainless steel tubing shall be ap- manner that the safety relief device
proved gas tubing fittings or the joints can be rendered ineffective.
shall be brazed. If of the socket type, (vii) Fittings and lengths of pipe
they shall be brazed with silver-brazing shall be examined internally before as-
alloy or similar high melting point sembly and, if necessary freed from
(not less than 800 °F (427 °C)) filler scale or dirt. Oxygen piping and fit-
metal. tings shall be washed out with a suit-
(3) Installation. (i) Distribution lines able solution which will effectively re-
shall be installed and maintained in a move grease and dirt but will not react
safe operating condition. with oxygen. Hot water solutions of
(ii) All piping shall be run as directly caustic soda or trisodium phosphate
as practicable, protected against phys- are effective cleaning agents for this
ical damage, proper allowance being purpose.
made for expansion and contraction, (viii) Piping shall be thoroughly
jarring and vibration. Pipe laid under- blown out after assembly to remove
ground in earth shall be located below foreign materials. For oxygen piping,
the frost line and protected against oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free
corrosion. After assembly, piping shall carbon dioxide shall be used. For other
be thoroughly blown out with air, ni- piping, air or inert gas may be used.
trogen, or carbon dioxide to remove (ix) When flammable gas lines or
foreign materials. For oxygen piping, other parts of equipment are being
only oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or purged of air or gas, open lights or
oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used. other sources of ignition shall not be
(iii) Only piping which has been weld- permitted near uncapped openings.
ed or brazed shall be installed in tun- (x) No welding or cutting shall be
nels, trenches or ducts. Shutoff valves performed on an acetylene or oxygen
shall be located outside such conduits. pipeline, including the attachment of
Oxygen piping may be placed in the hangers or supports, until the line has
same tunnel, trench or duct with fuel- been purged. Only oil-free air, oil-free
gas pipelines, provided there is good nitrogen, or oil-free carbon dioxide
natural or forced ventilation. shall be used to purge oxygen lines.
(iv) Low points in piping carrying (4) Painting and signs. (i) Underground
moist gas shall be drained into drip pipe and tubing and outdoor ferrous
pots constructed so as to permit pump- pipe and tubing shall be covered or
ing or draining out the condensate at painted with a suitable material for
necessary intervals. Drain valves shall protection against corrosion.
be installed for this purpose having (ii) Aboveground piping systems shall
outlets normally closed with screw be marked in accordance with the
caps or plugs. No open end valves or American National Standard Scheme
petcocks shall be used, except that in for the Identification of Piping Sys-
drips located out of doors, under- tems, ANSI A13.1¥1956, which is incor-
ground, and not readily accessible, porated by reference as specified in
valves may be used at such points if § 1910.6.
they are equipped with means to secure (iii) Station outlets shall be marked
them in the closed position. Pipes lead- to indicate the name of the gas.
ing to the surface of the ground shall (5) Testing. (i) Piping systems shall be
be cased or jacketed where necessary tested and proved gastight at 11⁄2 times
to prevent loosening or breaking. the maximum operating pressure, and
679
shall be thoroughly purged of air before (2) Pressure relief devices. Service pip-
being placed in service. The material ing systems shall be protected by pres-
used for testing oxygen lines shall be sure relief devices set to function at
oil free and noncombustible. Flames not more than the design pressure of
shall not be used to detect leaks. the systems and discharging upwards
(ii) When flammable gas lines or to a safe location.
other parts of equipment are being (3) Piping protective equipment. (i) The
purged of air or gas, sources of ignition fuel-gas and oxygen piping systems, in-
shall not be permitted near uncapped cluding portable outlet headers shall
openings. incorporate the protective equipment
(e) Protective equipment, hose, and reg- shown in Figures Q–1, Q–2, and Q–3.
ulators—(1) General. Equipment shall be When only a portion of a fuel-gas sys-
installed and used only in the service tem is to be used with oxygen, only
for which it is approved and as rec- that portion need comply with this
ommended by the manufacturer. paragraph (e)(3)(i).
(ii) Approved protective equipment (B) Passage of a flash back into the
(designated PF in Figures Q–1, Q–2, and fuel-gas supply system; and
Q–3) shall be installed in fuel-gas pip- (C) Excessive back pressure of oxygen
ing to prevent: in the fuel-gas supply system. The
(A) Backflow of oxygen into the fuel-
gas supply system;
680
EC27OC91.084</GPH>
three functions of the protective equip- in Figures Q–1, Q–2, and Q–3 and des-
ment may be combined in one device or ignated as SF and SO.
may be provided by separate devices. (ii) When approved pipeline protec-
(1) The protective equipment shall be tive equipment (designated PF) is lo-
located in the main supply line, as in cated at the station outlet as in Figure
Figure Q–1 or at the head of each Q–3, no additional check valve, pres-
branch line, as in Figure Q–2 or at each sure regulator, or hydraulic seal is re-
location where fuel-gas is withdrawn, quired.
as in Figure Q–3. Where branch lines (iii) A shutoff valve (designated VF
are of 2-inch pipe size or larger or of and VO) shall be installed at each sta-
substantial length, protective equip- tion outlet and shall be located on the
ment (designated as PF) shall be lo- upstream side of other station outlet
cated as shown in either Q–2 and Q–3. equipment.
(2) Backflow protection shall be pro- (iv) If the station outlet is equipped
vided by an approved device that will with a detachable regulator, the outlet
prevent oxygen from flowing into the shall terminate in a union connection
fuel-gas system or fuel from flowing that complies with the Regulator Con-
into the oxygen system (see SF, Figures nection Standards, 1958, Compressed
Q–1 and Q–2). Gas Association, which is incorporated
(3) Flash-back protection shall be
by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
provided by an approved device that
(v) If the station outlet is connected
will prevent flame from passing into
directly to a hose, the outlet shall ter-
the fuel-gas system.
(4) Back-pressure protection shall be minate in a union connection com-
provided by an approved pressure-relief plying with the Standard Hose Connec-
device set at a pressure not greater tion Specifications, 1957, Compressed
than the pressure rating of the back- Gas Association, which is incorporated
flow or the flashback protection de- by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
vice, whichever is lower. The pressure- (vi) Station outlets may terminate in
relief device shall be located on the pipe threads to which permanent con-
downstream side of the backflow and nections are to be made, such as to a
flashback protection devices. The vent machine.
from the pressure-relief device shall be (vii) Station outlets shall be
at least as large as the relief device equipped with a detachable outlet seal
inlet and shall be installed without low cap secured in place. This cap shall be
points that may collect moisture. If used to seal the outlet except when a
low points are unavoidable, drip pots hose, a regulator, or piping is attached.
with drains closed with screw plugs or (viii) Where station outlets are
caps shall be installed at the low equipped with approved backflow and
points. The vent terminus shall not en- flashback protective devices, as many
danger personnel or property through as four torches may be supplied from
gas discharge; shall be located away one station outlet through rigid piping,
from ignition sources; and shall termi- provided each outlet from such piping
nate in a hood or bend. is equipped with a shutoff valve and
(iii) If pipeline protective equipment provided the fuel-gas capacity of any
incorporates a liquid, the liquid level one torch does not exceed 15 cubic feet
shall be maintained, and a suitable (0.42 m3) per hour. This paragraph
antifreeze may be used to prevent (e)(4)(viii) does not apply to machines.
freezing. (5) Hose and hose connections. (i) Hose
(iv) Fuel gas for use with equipment for oxy-fuel gas service shall comply
not requiring oxygen shall be with- with the Specification for Rubber
drawn upstream of the piping protec- Welding Hose, 1958, Compressed Gas As-
tive devices. sociation and Rubber Manufacturers
(4) Station outlet protective equipment. Association, which is incorporated by
(i) A check valve, pressure regulator, reference as specified in § 1910.6.
hydraulic seal, or combination of these (ii) When parallel lengths of oxygen
devices shall be provided at each sta- and acetylene hose are taped together
tion outlet, including those on portable for convenience and to prevent tan-
headers, to prevent backflow, as shown gling, not more than 4 inches (10.2 cm)
681
out of 12 inches (30.5 cm) shall be cov- (ii) Relief valves shall be regularly
ered by tape. operated to insure proper functioning.
(iii) Hose connections shall comply Relief valves for generating chambers
with the Standard Hose Connection shall be set to open at a pressure not in
Specifications, 1957, Compressed Gas excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pres-
Association. sure). Relief valves for hydraulic back
(iv) Hose connections shall be pressure valves shall be set to open at
clamped or otherwise securely fastened a pressure not in excess of 20 psig (137
in a manner that will withstand, with- kPa gauge pressure).
out leakage, twice the pressure to (iii) Nonautomatic generators shall
which they are normally subjected in not be used for generating acetylene at
service, but in no case less than a pres- pressures exceeding l psig (7 kPa gauge
sure of 300 psi (2.04 MPa). Oil-free air or pressure), and all water overflows shall
an oil-free inert gas shall be used for be visible.
the test. (3) Location. The space around the
(v) Hose showing leaks, burns, worn generator shall be ample for free, unob-
places, or other defects rendering it structed operation and maintenance
unfit for service shall be repaired or re- and shall permit ready adjustment and
placed. charging.
(6) Pressure-reducing regulators. (i) (4) Stationary acetylene generators
Pressure-reducing regulators shall be
(automatic and nonautomatic). (i)(A) The
used only for the gas and pressures for
foundation shall be so arranged that
which they are intended. The regulator
the generator will be level and so that
inlet connections shall comply with
no excessive strain will be placed on
Regulator Connection Standards, 1958,
the generator or its connections. Acet-
Compressed Gas Association.
ylene generators shall be grounded.
(ii) When regulators or parts of regu-
lators, including gages, need repair, the (B) Generators shall be placed where
work shall be performed by skilled me- water will not freeze. The use of com-
chanics who have been properly in- mon salt (sodium chloride) or other
structed. corrosive chemicals for protection
(iii) Gages on oxygen regulators shall against freezing is not permitted. (For
be marked ‘‘USE NO OIL.’’ heating systems see paragraph
(iv) Union nuts and connections on (f)(6)(iii) of this section.)
regulators shall be inspected before use (C) Except when generators are pre-
to detect faulty seats which may cause pared in accordance with paragraph
leakage of gas when the regulators are (f)(7)(v) of this section, sources of igni-
attached to the cylinder valves. tion shall be prohibited in outside gen-
(f) Acetylene generators—(1) Approval erator houses or inside generator
and marking. (i) Generators shall be of rooms.
approved construction and shall be (D) Water shall not be supplied
plainly marked with the maximum through a continuous connection to
rate of acetylene in cubic feet per hour the generator except when the gener-
for which they are designed; the weight ator is provided with an adequate open
and size of carbide necessary for a sin- overflow or automatic water shutoff
gle charge; the manufacturer’s name which will effectively prevent over-
and address; and the name or number filling of the generator. Where a non-
of the type of generator. continuous connection is used, the sup-
(ii) Carbide shall be of the size ply line shall terminate at a point not
marked on the generator nameplate. less than 2 inches (5 cm) above the reg-
(2) Rating and pressure limitations. (i) ularly provided opening for filling so
The total hourly output of a generator that the water can be observed as it en-
shall not exceed the rate for which it is ters the generator.
approved and marked. Unless specifi- (E) Unless otherwise specifically ap-
cally approved for higher ratings, car- proved, generators shall not be fitted
bide-feed generators shall be rated at 1 with continuous drain connections
cubic foot (0.028 m3) per hour per pound leading to sewers, but shall discharge
of carbide required for a single com- through an open connection into a
plete charge. suitably vented outdoor receptacle or
682
residue pit which may have such con- shall be provided at a point 12 inches
nections. An open connection for the (0.3 m) or more above the landing point
sludge drawoff is desirable to enable of the bell. When the gas holder is lo-
the generator operator to observe leak- cated indoors, the room shall be venti-
age of generating water from the drain lated in accordance with paragraph
valve or sludge cock. (f)(6)(ii) of this section and heated and
(ii)(A) Each generator shall be pro- lighted in accordance with paragraphs
vided with a vent pipe. (f)(6)(iii) and (f)(6)(iv) of this section.
(B) The escape or relief pipe shall be (C) When the gas holder is not lo-
rigidly installed without traps and so cated within a heated building, gas
that any condensation will drain back holder seals shall be protected against
to the generator. freezing.
(C) The escape or relief pipe shall be (D) Means shall be provided to stop
carried full size to a suitable point out- the generator-feeding mechanism be-
side the building. It shall terminate in fore the gas holder reaches the upper
a hood or bend located at least 12 feet limit of its travel.
(3.7 m) above the ground, preferably (E) When the gas holder is connected
above the roof, and as far away as prac- to only one generator, the gas capacity
ticable from windows or other openings of the holder shall be not less than one-
into buildings and as far away as prac- third of the hourly rating of the gener-
ticable from sources of ignition such as ator.
flues or chimneys and tracks used by (F) If acetylene is used from the gas
locomotives. Generating chamber relief holder without increase in pressure at
pipes shall not be inter-connected but some points but with increase in pres-
shall be separately led to the outside sure by a compressor or booster pump
air. The hood or bend shall be so con- at other points, approved piping pro-
structed that it will not be obstructed tective devices shall be installed in
by rain, snow, ice, insects, or birds. each supply line. The low-pressure pro-
The outlet shall be at least 3 feet (0.9 tective device shall be located between
m) from combustible construction. the gas holder and the shop piping, and
(iii)(A) Gas holders shall be con- the medium-pressure protective device
structed on the gasometer principle, shall be located between the com-
the bell being suitably guided. The gas pressor or booster pump and the shop
bell shall move freely without tend- piping (see Figure Q–4). Approved pro-
ency to bind and shall have a clearance tective equipment (designated PF) is
of at least 2 inches (5 cm) from the used to prevent: Backflow of oxygen
shell. into the fuel-gas supply system; pas-
(B) The gas holder may be located in sage of a flashback into the fuel-gas
the generator room, in a separate room supply system; and excessive back
or out of doors. In order to prevent col- pressure of oxygen in the fuel-gas sup-
lapse of the gas bell or infiltration of ply system. The three functions of the
air due to a vacuum caused by the com- protective equipment may be combined
pressor or booster pump or cooling of in one device or may be provided by
the gas, a compressor or booster cutoff separate devices.
683
(iv)(A) The compressor or booster (C) Portable generators shall not be

system shall be of an approved type. used in rooms of total volume less than
(B) Wiring and electric equipment in 35 times the total gas-generating ca-
compressor or booster pump rooms or pacity per charge of all generators in
enclosures shall conform to the provi- the room. Generators shall not be used
sions of subpart S of this part for Class in rooms having a ceiling height of less
I, Division 2 locations. than 10 feet (3 m). (To obtain the gas-
(C) Compressors and booster pump generating capacity in cubic feet per
equipment shall be located in well-ven- charge, multiply the pounds of carbide
tilated areas away from open flames, per charge by 4.5.)
electrical or mechanical sparks, or (D) Portable generators shall be pro-
other ignition sources. tected against freezing. The use of salt
(D) Compressor or booster pumps or other corrosive chemical to prevent
shall be provided with pressure relief freezing is prohibited.
valves which will relieve pressure ex- (ii)(A) Portable generators shall be
ceeding 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure) cleaned and recharged and the air mix-
to a safe outdoor location as provided ture blown off outside buildings.
in paragraph (f)(4)(ii) of this section, or (B) When charged with carbide, port-
by returning the gas to the inlet side able generators shall not be moved by
or to the gas supply source. crane or derrick.
(E) Compressor or booster pump dis- (C) When not in use, portable genera-
charge outlets shall be provided with tors shall not be stored in rooms in
approved protective equipment. (See which open flames are used unless the
paragraph (e) of this section.) generators contain no carbide and have
(5) Portable acetylene generators. (i)(A) been thoroughly purged of acetylene.
All portable generators shall be of a Storage rooms shall be well ventilated.
type approved for portable use. (D) When portable acetylene genera-
(B) Portable generators shall not be tors are to be transported and operated
used within 10 feet (3 m) of combustible on vehicles, they shall be securely an-
material other than the floor. chored to the vehicles. If transported
684
EC27OC91.085</GPH>
by truck, the motor shall be turned off top floor of a building exceeding such
during charging, cleaning, and gener- height.
ating periods. (G) Generators installed inside build-
(E) Portable generators shall be lo- ings shall be enclosed in a separate
cated at a safe distance from the weld- room.
ing position so that they will not be ex- (H) The walls, partitions, floors, and
posed to sparks, slag, or misdirection ceilings of inside generator rooms shall
of the torch flame or overheating from be of noncombustible construction hav-
hot materials or processes. ing a fire-resistance rating of at least 1
(6) Outside generator houses and inside hour. The walls or partitions shall be
generator rooms for stationary acetylene continuous from floor to ceiling and
generators. (i)(A) No opening in any shall be securely anchored. At least
outside generator house shall be lo- one wall of the room shall be an exte-
cated within 5 feet (1.5 m) of any open- rior wall.
ing in another building. (I) Openings from an inside generator
(B) Walls, floors, and roofs of outside room to other parts of the building
generator houses shall be of non- shall be protected by a swinging type,
combustible construction. self-closing fire door for a Class B
opening and having a rating of at least
(C) When a part of the generator
1 hour. Windows in partitions shall be
house is to be used for the storage or
wired glass and approved metal frames
manifolding of oxygen cylinders, the
with fixed sash. Installation shall be in
space to be so occupied shall be sepa-
accordance with the Standard for the
rated from the generator or carbide Installation of Fire Doors and Win-
storage section by partition walls con- dows, NFPA 80–1970, which is incor-
tinuous from floor to roof or ceiling, of porated by reference as specified in
the type of construction stated in para- § 1910.6.
graph (f)(6)(i)(H) of this section. Such (ii) Inside generator rooms or outside
separation walls shall be without open- generator houses shall be well venti-
ings and shall be joined to the floor, lated with vents located at floor and
other walls and ceiling or roof in a ceiling levels.
manner to effect a permanent gas-tight (iii) Heating shall be by steam, hot
joint. water, enclosed electrically heated ele-
(D) Exit doors shall be located so as ments or other indirect means. Heating
to be readily accessible in case of emer- by flames or fires shall be prohibited in
gency. outside generator houses or inside gen-
(E) Explosion venting for outside erator rooms, or in any enclosure com-
generator houses and inside generator municating with them.
rooms shall be provided in exterior (iv)(A) Generator houses or rooms
walls or roofs. The venting areas shall shall have natural light during day-
be equal to not less than 1 square foot light hours. Where artificial lighting is
(0.09 m2) per 50 cubic feet (1.4 m3) of necessary it shall be restricted to elec-
room volume and may consist of any tric lamps installed in a fixed position.
one or any combination of the fol- Unless specifically approved for use in
lowing: Walls of light, noncombustible atmospheres containing acetylene,
material preferably single-thickness, such lamps shall be provided with en-
single-strength glass; lightly fastened closures of glass or other noncombus-
hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging tible material so designed and con-
doors in exterior walls opening out- structed as to prevent gas vapors from
ward; lightly fastened walls or roof de- reaching the lamp or socket and to re-
signed to relieve at a maximum pres- sist breakage. Rigid conduit with
sure of 25 pounds per square foot (0.001 threaded connections shall be used.
MPa). (B) Lamps installed outside of wired-
(F) The installation of acetylene gen- glass panels set in gas-tight frames in
erators within buildings shall be re- the exterior walls or roof of the gener-
stricted to buildings not exceeding one ator house or room are acceptable.
story in height; provided, however, that (v) Electric switches, telephones, and
this will not be construed as prohib- all other electrical apparatus which
iting such installations on the roof or may cause a spark, unless specifically
685
approved for use inside acetylene gen- (v) Previous to making repairs in-
erator rooms, shall be located outside volving welding, soldering, or other hot
the generator house or in a room or work or other operations which
space separated from the generator produce a source of ignition, the car-
room by a gas-tight partition, except bide charge and feed mechanism shall
that where the generator system is de- be completely removed. All acetylene
signed so that no carbide fill opening shall be expelled by completely flood-
or other part of the generator is open ing the generator shell with water and
to the generator house or room during the generator shall be disconnected
the operation of the generator, and so from the piping system. The generator
that residue is carried in closed piping shall be kept filled with water, if pos-
from the residue discharge valve to a sible, or positioned to hold as much
point outside the generator house or water as possible.
room, electrical equipment in the gen- (vi) Hot repairs shall not be made in
erator house or room shall conform to a room where there are other genera-
the provisions of subpart S of this part tors unless all the generators and pip-
for Class I, Division 2 locations. ing have been purged of acetylene.
(7) Maintenance and operation. (i) Un- (g) Calcium carbide storage—(1) Pack-
authorized persons shall not be per- aging. (i) Calcium carbide shall be con-
mitted in outside generator houses or tained in metal packages of sufficient
inside generator rooms. strength to prevent rupture. The pack-
(A) Operating instructions shall be ages shall be provided with a screw top
posted in a conspicuous place near the or equivalent. These packages shall be
generator or kept in a suitable place constructed water- and air-tight. Sol-
available for ready reference. der shall not be used in such a manner
that the package would fail if exposed
(B) When recharging generators the
to fire.
order of operations specified in the in-
(ii) Packages containing calcium car-
structions supplied by the manufac-
bide shall be conspicuously marked
turer shall be followed.
‘‘Calcium Carbide—Dangerous If Not
(C) In the case of batch-type genera- Kept Dry’’ or with equivalent warning.
tors, when the charge of carbide is ex- (iii) Caution: Metal tools, even the
hausted and before additional carbide so-called spark resistant type may
is added, the generating chamber shall cause ignition of an acetylene and air
always be flushed out with water, re- mixture when opening carbide con-
newing the water supply in accordance tainers.
with the instruction card furnished by (iv) Sprinkler systems shall not be
the manufacturer. installed in carbide storage rooms.
(D) The water-carbide residue mix- (2) Storage indoors. (i) Calcium car-
ture drained from the generator shall bide in quantities not to exceed 600
not be discharged into sewer pipes or pounds (272.2 kg) may be stored indoors
stored in areas near open flames. Clear in dry, waterproof, and well-ventilated
water from residue settling pits may be locations.
discharged into sewer pipes. (A) Calcium carbide not exceeding 600
(ii) The carbide added each time the pounds (272.2 kg) may be stored indoors
generator is recharged shall be suffi- in the same room with fuel-gas cyl-
cient to refill the space provided for inders.
carbide without ramming the charge. (B) Packages of calcium carbide, ex-
Steel or other ferrous tools shall not be cept for one of each size, shall be kept
used in distributing the charge. sealed. The seals shall not be broken
(iii) Generator water chambers shall when there is carbide in excess of 1
be kept filled to proper level at all pound (0.5 kg) in any other unsealed
times except while draining during the package of the same size of carbide in
recharging operation. the room.
(iv) Whenever repairs are to be made (ii) Calcium carbide exceeding 600
or the generator is to be charged or pounds (272.2 kg) but not exceeding
carbide is to be removed, the water 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) shall be stored:
chamber shall be filled to the proper (A) In accordance with paragraph
level. (g)(2)(iii) of this section;
686
(B) In an inside generator room or as specified in paragraph (b) of this sec-
outside generator house; or tion.
(C) In a separate room in a one-story (2) Installation. Welding equipment
building which may contain other oc- shall be installed safely as specified by
cupancies, but without cellar or base- paragraph (c) of this section.
ment beneath the carbide storage sec- (3) Instruction. Workmen designated
tion. Such rooms shall be constructed to operate arc welding equipment shall
in accordance with paragraphs have been properly instructed and
(f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section qualified to operate such equipment as
and ventilated in accordance with specified in paragraph (d) of this sec-
paragraph (f)(6)(ii) of this section. tion.
These rooms shall be used for no other (b) Application of arc welding equip-
purpose. ment—(1) General. Assurance of consid-
(iii) Calcium carbide in excess of 5,000 eration of safety in design is obtainable
pounds (2,268 kg) shall be stored in one- by choosing apparatus complying with
story buildings without cellar or base- the Requirements for Electric Arc-
ment and used for no other purpose, or Welding Apparatus, NEMA EW–1–1962,
in outside generator houses. If the stor- National Electrical Manufacturers As-
age building is of noncombustible con- sociation or the Safety Standard for
struction, it may adjoin other one- Transformer-Type Arc-Welding Ma-
story buildings if separated therefrom chines, ANSI C33.2—1956, Underwriters’
by unpierced firewalls; if it is detached Laboratories, both of which are incor-
less than 10 feet (3 m) from such build- porated by reference as specified in
ing or buildings, there shall be no open- § 1910.6.
ing in any of the mutually exposing (2) Environmental conditions. (i)
sides of such buildings within 10 feet (3 Standard machines for arc welding
m). If the storage building is of com- service shall be designed and con-
bustible construction, it shall be at structed to carry their rated load with
least 20 feet (6.1 m) from any other one- rated temperature rises where the tem-
or two-story building, and at least 30 perature of the cooling air does not ex-
feet (9.1 m) from any other building exceed 40 °C (104 °F) and where the alti-
ceeding two stories. tude does not exceed 3,300 feet (1,005.8
(3) Storage outdoors. (i) Calcium car- m), and shall be suitable for operation
bide in unopened metal containers may in atmospheres containing gases, dust,
be stored outdoors. and light rays produced by the welding
(ii) Carbide containers to be stored arc.
outdoors shall be examined to make (ii) Unusual service conditions may
sure that they are in good condition. exist, and in such circumstances ma-
Periodic reexaminations shall be made chines shall be especially designed to
for rusting or other damage to a con- safely meet the requirements of the
tainer that might affect its water or service. Chief among these conditions
air tightness. are:
(iii) The bottom tier of each row (A) Exposure to unusually corrosive
shall be placed on wooden planking or fumes.
equivalent, so that the containers will (B) Exposure to steam or excessive
not come in contact with the ground or humidity.
ground water. (C) Exposure to excessive oil vapor.
(iv) Containers of carbide which have (D) Exposure to flammable gases.
been in storage the longest shall be (E) Exposure to abnormal vibration
used first. or shock.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 55 (F) Exposure to excessive dust.
FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46053, Nov. 1, (G) Exposure to weather.
1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. (H) Exposure to unusual seacoast or
14, 2007] shipboard conditions.
(3) Voltage. The following limits shall
§ 1910.254 Arc welding and cutting. not be exceeded:
(a) General—(1) Equipment selection. (i) Alternating-current machines
Welding equipment shall be chosen for (A) Manual arc welding and cutting—
safe application to the work to be done 80 volts.
687
(B) Automatic (machine or mecha- shall be marked to indicate that it is
nized) arc welding and cutting—100 grounded.
volts. (v) No connections for portable con-
(ii) Direct-current machines trol devices such as push buttons to be
(A) Manual arc welding and cutting— carried by the operator shall be con-
100 volts. nected to an a.c. circuit of higher than
(B) Automatic (machine or mecha- 120 volts. Exposed metal parts of port-
nized) arc welding and cutting-100 able control devices operating on cir-
volts. cuits above 50 volts shall be grounded
(iii) When special welding and cut- by a grounding conductor in the con-
ting processes require values of open trol cable.
circuit voltages higher than the above, (vi) Auto transformers or a.c. reac-
means shall be provided to prevent the tors shall not be used to draw welding
operator from making accidental concurrent directly from any a.c. power
tact with the high voltage by adequate source having a voltage exceeding 80
insulation or other means. volts.
(iv) For a.c. welding under wet condi- (c) Installation of arc welding equip-
tions or warm surroundings where per- ment—(1) General. Installation includ-
spiration is a factor, the use of reliable ing power supply shall be in accordance
automatic controls for reducing no with the requirements of subpart S of
load voltage is recommended to reduce this part.
the shock hazard. (2) Grounding. (i) The frame or case of
(4) Design. (i) A controller integrally the welding machine (except engine-
mounted in an electric motor driven driven machines) shall be grounded
welder shall have capacity for carrying under the conditions and according to
rated motor current, shall be capable the methods prescribed in subpart S of
of making and interrupting stalled this part.
rotor current of the motor, and may (ii) Conduits containing electrical
serve as the running overcurrent device conductors shall not be used for com-
if provided with the number of overcur- pleting a work-lead circuit. Pipelines
rent units as specified by subpart S of shall not be used as a permanent part
this part. of a work-lead circuit, but may be used
(ii) On all types of arc welding ma- during construction, extension or re-
chines, control apparatus shall be en- pair providing current is not carried
closed except for the operating wheels, through threaded joints, flanged bolted
levers, or handles. joints, or caulked joints and that spe-
(iii) Input power terminals, tap cial precautions are used to avoid
change devices and live metal parts sparking at connection of the work-
connected to input circuits shall be lead cable.
completely enclosed and accessible
(iii) Chains, wire ropes, cranes,
only by means of tools.
hoists, and elevators shall not be used
(iv) Terminals for welding leads
to carry welding current.
should be protected from accidental
(iv) Where a structure, conveyor, or
electrical contact by personnel or by
metal objects, i.e., vehicles, crane fixture is regularly employed as a
hooks, etc. Protection may be obtained welding current return circuit, joints
by use of: Dead-front receptacles for shall be bonded or provided with ade-
plug connections; recessed openings quate current collecting devices.
with nonremovable hinged covers; (v) All ground connections shall be
heavy insulating sleeving or taping or checked to determine that they are
other equivalent electrical and me- mechanically strong and electrically
chanical protection. If a welding lead adequate for the required current.
terminal which is intended to be used (3) Supply connections and conductors.
exclusively for connection to the work (i) A disconnecting switch or controller
is connected to the grounded enclosure, shall be provided at or near each weld-
it must be done by a conductor at least ing machine which is not equipped with
two AWG sizes smaller than the such a switch or controller mounted as
grounding conductor and the terminal an integral part of the machine. The
688
switch shall be in accordance with sub- from adherent metal particles of spat-
part S of this part. Overcurrent protec- ter on contact surfaces. Coiled welding
tion shall be provided as specified in cable shall be spread out before use to
subpart S of this part. A disconnect avoid serious overheating and damage
switch with overload protection or to insulation.
equivalent disconnect and protection (3) Grounding. Grounding of the weld-
means, permitted by subpart S of this ing machine frame shall be checked.
part, shall be provided for each outlet Special attention shall be given to
intended for connection to a portable safety ground connections of portable
welding machine. machines.
(ii) For individual welding machines, (4) Leaks. There shall be no leaks of
the rated current-carrying capacity of cooling water, shielding gas or engine
the supply conductors shall be not less fuel.
than the rated primary current of the (5) Switches. It shall be determined
welding machines. that proper switching equipment for
(iii) For groups of welding machines, shutting down the machine is provided.
the rated current-carrying capacity of (6) Manufacturers’ instructions. Print-
conductors may be less than the sum of ed rules and instructions covering op-
the rated primary currents of the weld- eration of equipment supplied by the
ing machines supplied. The conductor manufacturers shall be strictly fol-
rating shall be determined in each case lowed.
according to the machine loading based (7) Electrode holders. Electrode hold-
on the use to be made of each welding ers when not in use shall be so placed
machine and the allowance permissible that they cannot make electrical con-
in the event that all the welding ma- tact with persons, conducting objects,
chines supplied by the conductors will fuel or compressed gas tanks.
not be in use at the same time. (8) Electric shock. Cables with splices
(iv) In operations involving several within 10 feet (3 m) of the holder shall
welders on one structure, d.c. welding not be used. The welder should not coil
process requirements may require the or loop welding electrode cable around
use of both polarities; or supply circuit parts of his body.
limitations for a.c. welding may re- (9) Maintenance. (i) The operator
quire distribution of machines among should report any equipment defect or
the phases of the supply circuit. In safety hazard to his supervisor and the
such cases no load voltages between use of the equipment shall be discon-
electrode holders will be 2 times nor- tinued until its safety has been as-
mal in d.c. or 1, 1.41, 1.73, or 2 times sured. Repairs shall be made only by
normal on a.c. machines. Similar volt- qualified personnel.
age differences will exist if both a.c. (ii) Machines which have become wet
and d.c. welding are done on the same shall be thoroughly dried and tested
structure. before being used.
(A) All d.c. machines shall be con- (iii) Cables with damaged insulation
nected with the same polarity. or exposed bare conductors shall be re-
(B) All a.c. machines shall be con- placed. Joining lengths of work and
nected to the same phase of the supply electrode cables shall be done by the
circuit and with the same instanta- use of connecting means specifically
neous polarity. intended for the purpose. The con-
(d) Operation and maintenance—(1) necting means shall have insulation
General. Workers assigned to operate or adequate for the service conditions.
maintain arc welding equipment shall [55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61
be acquainted with the requirements of FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13,
this section and with 1910.252 (a), (b), 2005]
and (c) of this part.
(2) Machine hook up. Before starting § 1910.255 Resistance welding.
operations all connections to the ma- (a) General—(1) Installation. All equip-
chine shall be checked to make certain ment shall be installed by a qualified
they are properly made. The work lead electrician in conformance with sub-
shall be firmly attached to the work; part S of this part. There shall be a
magnetic work clamps shall be freed safety-type disconnecting switch or a
689
circuit breaker or circuit interrupter part. All chains, gears, operating bus
to open each power circuit to the ma- linkage, and belts shall be protected by
chine, conveniently located at or near adequate guards, in accordance with
the machine, so that the power can be § 1910.219 of this part.
shut off when the machine or its con- (5) Shields. The hazard of flying
trols are to be serviced. sparks shall be, wherever practical,
(2) Thermal protection. Ignitron tubes eliminated by installing a shield guard
used in resistance welding equipment of safety glass or suitable fire-resistant
shall be equipped with a thermal pro- plastic at the point of operation. Addi-
tection switch. tional shields or curtains shall be in-
(3) Personnel. Workmen designated to stalled as necessary to protect passing
operate resistance welding equipment persons from flying sparks. (See
shall have been properly instructed and § 1910.252(b)(2)(i)(C) of this part.)
judged competent to operate such (6) Foot switches. All foot switches
equipment. shall be guarded to prevent accidental
(4) Guarding. Controls of all auto- operation of the machine.
matic or air and hydraulic clamps shall (7) Stop buttons. Two or more safety
be arranged or guarded to prevent the emergency stop buttons shall be pro-
operator from accidentally activating vided on all special multispot welding
them. machines, including 2-post and 4-post
(b) Spot and seam welding machines weld presses.
(nonportable)—(1) Voltage. All external (8) Safety pins. On large machines,
weld initiating control circuits shall four safety pins with plugs and recep-
operate on low voltage, not over 120 tacles (one in each corner) shall be pro-
volts, for the safety of the operators. vided so that when safety pins are re-
(2) Capacitor welding. Stored energy moved and inserted in the ram or plat-
or capacitor discharge type of resist- en, the press becomes inoperative.
ance welding equipment and control (9) Grounding. Where technically
panels involving high voltage (over 550 practical, the secondary of all welding
volts) shall be suitably insulated and transformers used in multispot, projec-
protected by complete enclosures, all tion and seam welding machines shall
doors of which shall be provided with be grounded. This may be done by per-
suitable interlocks and contacts wired manently grounding one side of the
into the control circuit (similar to ele- welding secondary current circuit.
vator interlocks). Such interlocks or Where not technically practical, a cen-
contacts shall be so designed as to ef- ter tapped grounding reactor connected
fectively interrupt power and short cir- across the secondary or the use of a
cuit all capacitors when the door or safety disconnect switch in conjunc-
panel is open. A manually operated tion with the welding control are ac-
switch or suitable positive device shall ceptable alternates. Safety disconnect
be installed, in addition to the mechan- shall be arranged to open both sides of
ical interlocks or contacts, as an added the line when welding current is not
safety measure assuring absolute dis- present.
charge of all capacitors. (c) Portable welding machines—(1)
(3) Interlocks. All doors and access Counterbalance. All portable welding
panels of all resistance welding ma- guns shall have suitable counterbal-
chines and control panels shall be kept anced devices for supporting the guns,
locked and interlocked to prevent ac- including cables, unless the design of
cess, by unauthorized persons, to live the gun or fixture makes counterbal-
portions of the equipment. ancing impractical or unnecessary.
(4) Guarding. All press welding ma- (2) Safety chains. All portable welding
chine operations, where there is a pos- guns, transformers and related equip-
sibility of the operator’s fingers being ment that is suspended from overhead
under the point of operation, shall be structures, eye beams, trolleys, etc.,
effectively guarded by the use of a de- shall be equipped with safety chains or
vice such as an electronic eye safety cables. Safety chains or cables shall be
circuit, two hand controls or protec- capable of supporting the total shock
tion similar to that prescribed for load in the event of failure of any com-
punch press operation, § 1910.217 of this ponent of the supporting system.
690
(3) Clevis. Each clevis shall be capable Subpart R—Special Industries
of supporting the total shock load of
the suspended equipment in the event AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
of trolley failure. pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
(4) Switch guards. All initiating U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
switches, including retraction and dual Order Nos. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
schedule switches, located on the port- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), as ap-
able welding gun shall be equipped with plicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
suitable guards capable of preventing
accidental initiation through contact EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35566, June
13, 2013, the authority citation; was revised,
with fixturing, operator’s clothing, etc. effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the convenience
Initiating switch voltage shall not ex- of the user, the revised text is set forth as
ceed 24 volts. follows:
(5) Moving holder. The movable hold- AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Sec-
er, where it enters the gun frame, shall retary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754),
8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55
have sufficient clearance to prevent
FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72 FR
the shearing of fingers carelessly 31159)), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR
placed on the operating movable hold- 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
er.
(6) Grounding. The secondary and § 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paper-
case of all portable welding trans- board mills.
formers shall be grounded. Secondary (a) General requirements—(1) Applica-
grounding may be by center tapped section. This section applies to establish-
ondary or by a center tapped grounding ments where pulp, paper, and paper-
reactor connected across the sec- board are manufactured and converted.
ondary. This section does not apply to logging
(d) Flash welding equipment—(1) Ven- and the transportation of logs to pulp,
tilation and flash guard. Flash welding paper, and paperboard mills.
machines shall be equipped with a hood (2) Standards incorporated by reference.
Standards covering issues of occupa-
to control flying flash. In cases of high
tional safety and health which have
production, where materials may con-
general application without regard to
tain a film of oil and where toxic ele- any specific industry are incorporated
ments and metal fumes are given off, by reference in paragraphs (b) through
ventilation shall be provided in accord- (m) of this section and in subpara-
ance with § 1910.252(c) of this part. graphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph and
(2) Fire curtains. For the protection of made applicable under this section.
the operators of nearby equipment, Such standards shall be construed ac-
fire-resistant curtains or suitable cording to the rules set forth in § 1910.5.
shields shall be set up around the ma- (3) General incorporation of standards.
chine and in such a manner that the Establishments subject to this section
operators movements are not ham- shall comply with the following stand-
pered. ards of the American National Stand-
(e) Maintenance. Periodic inspection ards Institute, which are incorporated
shall be made by qualified maintenance by reference as specified in § 1910.6:
personnel, and a certification record (i) Practice for Industrial Lighting,
maintained. The certification record A11.1—1965 (R–1970).
shall include the date of inspection, the (ii) Scheme for the Identification of
signature of the person who performed Piping Systems, A13.1—1956.
the inspection and the serial number, (iii) Safety Code for Elevators,
Dumbwaiters, and Moving Walks,
or other identifier, for the equipment
A17.1—1965, including Supplements
inspected. The operator shall be in-
A17.1a—1967, A17.1b—1968, A17.1c—1969,
structed to report any equipment de-
and A17.1d—1970.
fects to his supervisor and the use of (iv) Practice for the Inspection of
the equipment shall be discontinued Elevators (Inspector’s Manual), A17.2—
until safety repairs have been com- 1960, including Suppelements A17.2a—
pleted. 1965 and A17.2b—1967.
691
(v) Safety Code for Conveyors, are used in the yard, the operator’s en-
Cableways, and Related Equipment, closed cab shall be provided with an es-
B20.1—1957. cape hatch, whenever the hydraulic
(vi) Power Piping, B31.1.0—1967 and arm blocks escape through the side
addenda B31.10a—1969. Fuel Gas Piping, doors.
B31.2—1968. (2) Handling pulpwood with cranes or
(vii) Identification of Gas-Mask Can- stackers. (i) Where locomotive cranes
isters, K13.1—1967. are used for loading or unloading pulp-
(viii) Prevention of Sulfur Fires and wood, the pulpwood shall be piled so as
Explosions, Z12.12—1968. to allow a clearance of not less than 24
(ix) Installation of Blower and Ex- inches between the pile and the end of
haust Systems for Dust, Stock, and the cab of any locomotive crane in use,
Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1— when the cab is turned in any working
1961. position.
(4) Other standards. The following (ii) The minimum distance of the
standards, which are incorporated by pulpwood pile from the centerline of a
reference as specified in § 1910.6, shall standard-gage track shall be main-
be considered standards under this sec- tained at not less than 81⁄2 feet.
tion: (iii) Logs shall be piled in an orderly
(i) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel and stable manner, with no projection
Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure into walkways or roadways.
Vessels, including addenda 1969. (iv) Railroad cars shall not be spotted
(ii) Building Exits Code for Life Safe- on tracks adjacent to the locomotive
ty from Fire, NFPA 101—1970. cranes unless a 24-inch clearance is
(iii) Safety in the Handling and Use maintained, as required in paragraph
of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No. 17, (c)(2)(i) of this section.
July 1960, Institute of Makers of Explo- (v) The handling and storage of other
sives. materials shall conform to paragraphs
(b) Safe practices—(1) Lockouts. De- (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section with re-
vices such as padlocks shall be pro- spect to clearance.
vided for locking out the source of (vi) No person shall be permitted to
power at the main disconnect switch. walk beneath a suspended load, bucket,
Before any maintenance, inspection, or hook.
cleaning, adjusting, or servicing of (3) Handling pulpwood from ships.
equipment (electrical, mechanical, or (i) [Reserved]
other) that requires entrance into or (ii) The hatch tender shall be re-
close contact with the machinery or quired to signal the hoisting engineer
equipment, the main power disconnect to move the load only after the men
switch or valve, or both, controlling its working in the hold are in the clear.
source of power or flow of material, (iii) The air in the ship’s hold, tanks,
shall be locked out or blocked off with or closed vessels shall be tested for ox-
padlock, blank flange, or similar de- ygen deficiency and for both toxic and
vice. explosive gases and vapors.
(2) Emergency lighting. Emergency (4) Handling pulpwood from flatcars
lighting shall be provided wherever it and all other railway cars. (i) Railroad
is necessary for employees to remain at flatcars for the conveyance of pulp-
their machines or stations to shut wood loaded parallel to the length of
down equipment in case of power fail- the car shall be equipped with safety-
ure. Emergency lighting shall be pro- stake pockets.
vided at stairways and passageways or (ii) Where pulpwood is loaded cross-
aisleways used by employees for emer- wise on a flatcar sufficient stakes of
gency exit in case of power failure. sizes not smaller than 4 by 4 inches
Emergency lighting shall be provided shall be used to prevent the load from
in all plant first aid and medical facili- shifting.
ties. (iii) When it is necessary to cut
(c) Handling and storage of pulpwood stakes, those on the unloading side
and pulp chips—(1) Handling pulpwood should be partially cut through first,
with forklift trucks. Where large forklift and then the binder wires cut on the
trucks, or lift trucks with clam-jaws, opposite side. Wire cutters equipped
692
with long extension handles shall be a point 6 feet down the boom towards
used. No person shall be permitted the cab.
along the dumping side of the car after (iv) Standard signals for the oper-
the stakes have been cut. ation of cranes shall be established for
(iv) When steel straps without stakes all movements of the crane, in accord-
are used, the steel straps shall be cut ance with American National Stand-
from a safe area to prevent employees ards B30.2—1943 (reaffirmed 1968) and
from being struck by the falling logs. B30.2.0—1967.
(v) Flatcars and all other cars shall (v) Only one member of the crew
be chocked during unloading. Where shall be authorized to give signals to
equipment is not provided with hand the crane operator.
brakes, rail clamping chocks shall be (vi) All cranes shall be equipped with
used. a suitable warning device such as a
(vi) A derail shall be used to prevent horn or whistle.
movement of other rail equipment into (vii) A sheave guard shall be provided
cars where persons are working. beneath the head sheave of the boom.
(5) Handling pulpwood from trucks. (i) (9) Traffic warning signs or signals. (i)
Cutting of stakes and binder wires A flagman shall direct the movement
shall be done in accordance with para- of cranes or locomotives being moved
graph (c)4(iii) of this section. across railroad tracks or roads, and at
(ii) Where binder chain and steel any points where the vision of the op-
stakes are used, the binder chains shall erator is restricted. The flagman must
be released and the stakes tripped from always remain in sight of the operator
the opposite side of the load spillage. when the crane or locomotive is in mo-
(iii) Where binder chains and crane tion. The blue flag policy shall be used
slings are used, the crane slings shall to mark stationary cars day and night.
be attached and taut before the binder This policy shall include marking the
chains are released. The hooker shall track in advance of the spotted cars
see that the helper is clear before sig- (flag for daytime, light for darkness).
naling for the movement of the load. (ii) After cars are spotted for loading
(6) Handling pulp chips from railway or unloading, warning flags or signs
cars. All cars shall be securely fastened shall be placed in the center of the
in place and all employees in the clear track at least 50 feet away from the
before dumping is started. cars and a derail set to protect work-
(7) Handling pulp chips from trucks and men in the car.
trailers. All trucks and trailers shall be (10) Illumination. Artificial illumina-
securely fastened in place and all em- tion shall be provided when loading or
ployees in the clear before dumping is unloading is performed after dark, in
started. accordance with American National
(8) Cranes. Standard A11.1—1965 (R—1970).
(i) [Reserved] (11) [Reserved]
(ii) A safety device such as a heavy (12) Barking devices. When barking
chain or cable at least equal in drums are employed in the yard, the
strength to the lifting cables shall be requirements of paragraph (e)(12) of
fastened to the boom and to the frame this section shall apply.
of the boom crane (if it is other than (13) Hand tools. Handles of wood
locomotive) at the base. Alternatively, hooks shall be locked to the shank to
a telescoping safety device shall be fas- prevent them from rotating.
tened to the boom and to the cab (14) Removal of pulpwood. (i) The ends
frame, so as to prevent the boom from of a woodpile shall be properly sloped
snapping back over the cab in the and cross-tiered into the pile. Upright
event of lifting cable breakage. poles shall not be used at the ends of
(iii) A crane shall not be operated woodpiles. To knock down wood from
where any part thereof may come with- the woodpile, mechanical equipment
in 10 feet of overhead powerlines (or shall be used to permit employees to
other overhead obstructions) unless the keep in the clear of loosened wood.
powerlines have been deenergized. The (ii) If dynamite is used to loosen the
boom shall be painted bright yellow pile, only authorized personnel shall be
from and including the head sheave to permitted to handle and discharge the
693
explosive. An electric detonator is pref- platforms, an aisle clearance at least 3
erable for firing; if a fuse is used, it feet greater than the widest truck in
shall be an approved safety fuse with a use shall be provided.
burning rate of not less than 120 sec- (ii) Baled paper and rags stored inside
onds per yard and a minimum length of a building shall not be piled closer than
3 feet, in accordance with Safety in the 18 inches to walls, partitions, or sprin-
Handling and Use of Explosives, IME kler heads.
Pamphlet No. 17, July 1960. (3) Piling and unpiling pulp. (i) Piles
(15) Belt conveyors. (i) The sides of the of wet lap pulp (unless palletized) shall
conveyor shall be constructed so that be stepped back one-half the width of
the wood will not fall off. the sheet for each 8 feet of pile height.
(ii) Where conveyors cross passage- Sheets of pulp shall be interlapped to
ways or roadways, a horizontal plat- make the pile secure. Pulp shall not be
form shall be provided under the con- piled over pipelines to jeopardize pipes,
veyor extending out from the sides of or so as to cause overloading of floors,
the conveyor a distance equal to 1.5 or to within 18 inches below sprinkler
times the length of the wood handled. heads.
The platform shall extend the width of (ii) Piles of pulp shall not be under-
the road plus 2 feet on each side, and mined when being unpiled.
shall be kept free of wood and rubbish. (iii) Floor capacities shall be clearly
The edges of the platform shall be pro- marked on all floors.
vided with toeboards or other protec- (4)(i) [Reserved]
tion to prevent wood from falling, in
(ii) Where rolls are pyramided two or
accordance with § 1910.23.
more high, chocks shall be installed be-
(iii) All conveyors for pulpwood shall
tween each roll on the floor and at
have the inrunning nips between chain
every row. Where pulp and paper rolls
and sprockets guarded; also, turning
are stored on smooth floors in proc-
drums shall be guarded.
essing areas, rubber chocks with wood-
(iv) Every belt conveyor shall have
en core shall be used.
an emergency stop cable extending the
length of the conveyor so that it may (iii) When rolls are decked two or
be stopped from any location along the more high, the bottom rolls shall be
line, or conveniently located stop but- chocked on each side to prevent shift-
tons within 10 feet of each work sta- ing in either direction.
tion, in accordance with American Na- (e) Preparing pulpwood—(1) Gang and
tional Standard B20.1—1957. slasher saws. A guard shall be provided
(16) Signs. Where conveyors cross in front of all gang and slasher saws to
walkways or roadways in the yards, protect workers from wood thrown by
signs reading ‘‘Danger—Overhead Con- saws. A guard shall be placed over tail
veyor’’ or an equivalent warning shall sprockets.
be erected, in accordance with Amer- (2) Slasher tables. Saws shall be
ican National Standard Z35.1—1968. stopped and power switches shall be
(d) Handling and storage of raw mate- locked out and tagged whenever it is
rials other than pulpwood or pulp chips— necessary for any person to be on the
(1) Personal protective equipment. When- slasher table.
ever possible, all dust, fumes, and gases (3) [Reserved]
incident to handling materials shall be (4) Runway to the jack ladder. The
controlled at the source, in accordance runway from the pond or unloading
with American National Standard dock to the table shall be protected
Z9.2—1960. Where control at the source with standard handrails and toeboards.
is not possible, respirators with goggles Inclined portions shall have cleats or
or protective masks shall be provided, equivalent nonslip surfacing in accord-
and employees shall wear them when ance with § 1910.23. Protective equip-
handling alum, clay, soda ash, lime, ment shall be provided for persons
bleach powder, sulfur, chlorine, and working over water.
similar materials, and when opening (5) Guards below table. Where not pro-
rag bales. tected by the frame of the machine, the
(2) Clearance. (i) When materials are underside of the slasher saws shall be
being piled inside a building and upon enclosed with guards.
694
(6) Conveyors. The requirements of have a corrugated surface or other
paragraph (c)(15)(iv) of this section means provided that the wood will not
shall apply. slip. Wood to be split, and also the
(7) [Reserved] splitting block, shall be free of ice,
(8) Barker feed. Each barker shall be snow, or chips. The operator shall be
equipped with a feed and turnover de- provided with eye and foot protection.
vice which will make it unnecessary A clear and unobstructed view shall be
for the operator to hold a bolt or log by maintained between equipment and
hand during the barking operation. workers around the block and the
Eye, ear, and head protection shall be workers’ help area.
provided for the operator, in accord- (16) Power control. Power for the oper-
ance with paragraph (b)(2) of this sec- ation of the splitter shall be controlled
tion. by a clutch or equivalent device.
(9) [Reserved] (17) Knot cleaners. The operators of
(10) Stops. All control devices shall be knot cleaners of the woodpecker type
locked out and tagged when knives are shall wear eye protection equipment.
being changed. (18) Chipper spout. The feed system to
(11) Speed governor. Water wheels, the chipper spout shall be arranged in
when directly connected to barker such a way that the operator does not
disks or grinders, shall be provided
stand in a direct line with the chipper
with speed governors, if operated with
spout. All chipper spouts shall be en-
gate wide open.
closed to a height of at least 42 inches
(12) Continuous barking drums. (i)
from the floor or operator’s platform.
When platforms or floors allow access
When other protection is not sufficient,
to the sides of the drums, a standard
the operator shall wear a safety belt
railing shall be constructed around the
line. The safety belt line shall be fas-
drums. When two or more drums are
tened in such a manner as to make it
arranged side by side, proper walkways
impossible for the operator to fall into
with standard handrails shall be pro-
the throat of the chipper. Ear protec-
vided between each set, in accordance
with the requirements of 29 CFR tion equipment shall be worn by the
1910.23, Guarding floor and wall open- operator and others in the immediate
ings and holes. area if there is any possibility that the
(ii) Sprockets and chains, gears, and noise level may be harmful (see
trunnions shall have standard guards, § 1910.95).
in accordance with the requirements of (19) Carriers for knives. Carriers shall
29 CFR 1910.219, Mechanical power- be provided and used for transportation
transmission apparatus. of knives.
(iii) Whenever it becomes necessary (f) Rag and old paper preparation—(1)
for a workman to go within a drum, Ripping and trimming tools. (i) Hand
the driving mechanism shall be locked knives and scissors shall have blunt
and tagged, at the main disconnect points, shall be fastened to the table
switch, in accordance with paragraph with chain or thong, and shall not be
(b)(1) of this section. carried on the person but placed safely
(13) Intermittent barking drums. In ad- in racks or sheaths when not in use.
dition to motor switch, clutch, belt (ii) Hand knives and sharpening
shifter, or other power disconnecting steels shall be provided with guards at
device, intermittent barking drums the junction of the handle and the
shall be equipped with a device which blade.
may be locked to prevent the drum (2) Shredders, cutters, and dusters. (i)
from moving while it is being emptied Rotating heads or cylinders shall be
or filled. completely enclosed except for an
(14) Hydraulic barkers. Hydraulic opening at the feed side sufficient to
barkers shall be enclosed with strong permit only the entry of stock. The en-
baffles at the inlet and the outlet. The closure shall extend over the top of the
operator shall be protected by at least feed rolls. It shall be constructed either
five-ply laminated glass. of solid material or with mesh or open-
(15) Splitter block. The block upon or ings not exceeding one-half inch and
against which the wood is rested shall substantial enough to contain flying
695
particles and prevent accidental con- (g) Chemical processes of making pulp—
tact with moving parts. The enclosure (1) Sulfur burners. (i) Sulfur-burner
shall be bolted or locked into place. houses shall be safely and adequately
(ii) A smooth-pivoted idler roll rest- ventilated, and every precaution shall
ing on the stock or feed table shall be be taken to guard against dust explo-
provided in front of feed rolls except sion hazards and fires, in accordance
when arrangements prevent the oper- with American National Standards
ator from standing closer than 36 Z9.2—1960 and Z12.12—1968.
inches to any part of the feed rolls. (ii) Nonsparking tools and equipment
(iii) Any manually fed cutter, shred- shall be used in handling dry sulfur.
der, or duster shall be provided with an (iii) Sulfur storage bins shall be kept
idler roll as per subdivision (ii) of this free of sulfur dust accumulation, in ac-
subparagraph or the operator shall use cordance with American National
special hand-feeding tools. Standard Z9.2—1960.
(iv) Hoods of cutters, shredders, and (iv) Sulfur-melting equipment shall
dusters shall have exhaust ventilation, not be located in the burner room.
in accordance with American National (2) Protection for employees (acid
Standard Z9.2—1960. plants). (i) Supplied air respirators
(3) Blowers. (i) Blowers used for trans- shall be strategically located for emer-
porting rags shall be provided with feed gency and rescue use.
hoppers having outer edges located not (ii) During inspection, repairs, or
less than 48 inches from the fan. maintenance of acid towers, the work-
(ii) The arrangement of the blower man shall be provided with eye protec-
discharge outlets and work areas shall tion, a supplied air respirator, a safety
be such as to prevent material from belt, and an attached lifeline. The line
falling on workers. shall be extended to an attendant sta-
(4) Conveyors. Conveyors and con- tioned outside the tower opening.
veyor drive belts and pulleys shall be (3) Acid tower structure. Outside ele-
fully enclosed or, if open and within 7 vators shall be inspected daily during
feet of the floor, shall be constructed winter months when ice materially af-
and guarded in accordance with para- fects safety. Elevators, runways, stairs,
graph (c)(15) of this section and Amer- etc., for the acid tower shall be in-
ican National Standards B15.1—1953 spected monthly for defects that may
(Reaffirmed 1958) and B20.1—1957. occur because of exposure to acid or
(5) Dust. Measures for the control of corrosive gases.
dust shall be provided, in accordance (4) Tanks (acid). (i) Tanks shall be
with American National Standards free of acid and shall be washed out
Z33.1—1961, Z87.1—1968, and Z88.2—1969. with water, and fresh air shall be blown
(6) Rag cookers. (i) When cleaning, in- into them before allowing men to
spection, or other work requires that enter. Men entering the tanks shall be
persons enter rag cookers, all steam provided with supplied air respirators,
and water valves, or other control de- lifebelts, and attached lifelines.
vices, shall be locked and tagged in the (ii) A man shall be stationed outside
closed or ‘‘off’’ position. Blank flanging to summon assistance if necessary. All
of pipelines is acceptable in place of intake valves to a tank shall be
closed and locked valves. blanked off or disconnected.
(ii) When cleaning, inspection, or (5) Clothing. Where lime slaking
other work requires that persons must takes place, employees shall be pro-
enter the cooker, one person shall be vided with rubber boots, rubber gloves,
stationed outside in a position to ob- protective aprons, and eye protection.
serve and assist in case of emergency, A deluge shower and eye fountain shall
in accordance with paragraph (b)(5) of be provided to flush the skin and eyes
this section. to counteract lime or acid burns.
(iii) [Reserved] (6) Lead burning. When lead burning
(iv) Rag cookers shall be provided is being done within tanks, fresh air
with safety valves in accordance with shall be forced into the tanks so that
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel fresh air will reach the face of the
Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure worker first and the direction of the
Vessels—1968, with Addenda. current will never be from the source
696
of the fumes toward the face of the blow pit cannot be closed when the lad-
workers. Supplied air respirators (con- der is in place; other means shall be
stant-flow type) shall be provided. provided to prevent the closing of the
(7) Hoops for acid storage tanks. Hoops pit door when anyone is in the pit.
of tanks shall be made of rods rather (iii) A signaling device shall be in-
than flat strips and shall be safely stalled in the digester and blow-pit
maintained by scheduled inspections. rooms and chip bins to be operated as
(8) Chip and sawdust bins. Steam or a warning before and while digesters
compressed-air lances, or other facili- are being blown.
ties, shall be used for breaking down (iv) Blow-pit hoops shall be main-
the arches caused by jamming in chip tained in a safe condition.
lofts. No worker shall be permitted to (14) Blowing digester. (i) Blowoff
enter a bin unless provided with a safe- valves shall be opened slowly.
ty belt, with line attached, and an at-
(ii) After the digester has started to
tendant stationed at the bin to sum-
be blown, the blowoff valve shall be left
mon assistance.
open, and the hand plate shall not be
(9) Exits (digester building). At least
removed until the digester cook signals
one unobstructed exit at each end of
the blow-pit man that the blow is com-
the room shall be provided on each
pleted. Whenever it becomes necessary
floor of a digester building.
to remove the hand plate to clear
(10) Gas masks (digester building). Gas
stock, operators shall wear eye protec-
masks must be available, and they
tion equipment and protective clothing
must furnish adequate protection
to guard against burns from hot stock.
against sulfurous acid and chlorine
gases and be inspected and repaired in (iii) Means shall be provided whereby
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134. the digester cook shall signal the man
(11) Elevators. (i) Elevators shall be in the chip bin before starting to load
constructed in accordance with Amer- the digester.
ican National Standard A17.1—1965. (15) Inspecting and repairing digester.
(ii) Elevators shall be equipped with (i) Valves controlling lines leading into
gas masks for the maximum number of a digester shall be locked out and
passengers. tagged. The keys to the locks shall be
(iii) Elevators shall be equipped with in the possession of a person or persons
an alarm system to advise of failure. doing the inspecting or making repairs.
(12) Blowoff valves and piping. (i) The (ii) Fresh air shall be blown into the
blowoff valve of a digester shall be ar- digester constantly while workmen are
ranged so as to be operated from an- inside. Supplied air respirators shall be
other room, remote from safety valves. available in the event the fresh air sup-
(ii) Through bolts instead of cap bolts ply fails or is inadequate.
shall be used on all digester pipings. (iii) No inspector shall enter a di-
(iii) Heavy duty pipe, valves, and fit- gester unless a lifeline is securely fas-
tings shall be used between the di- tened to his body by means of a safety
gester and blow pit. These valves, fit- belt and at least one other experienced
tings, and pipes shall be inspected at employee is stationed outside the di-
least semiannually to determine the gester to handle the line and to sum-
degree of deterioration. mon assistance. All ladders and life-
(iv) Digester blow valves shall be lines shall be inspected before each use.
pinned or locked in closed position (iv) All employees entering digesters
throughout the entire cooking period. for inspection or repair work shall be
(13) Blow pits and blow tanks. (i) provided with protective headgear. Eye
Blowpit openings shall be preferably on protection and dust masks shall be pro-
the side of the pit instead of on top. vided to workmen while the old brick
When located on top, openings shall be lining is being removed, in accordance
as small as possible and shall be pro- with American National Standards,
vided with railings in accordance with Z87.1—1968, Z88.2—1969, and Z99.1—1969.
§ 1910.23. (16) Pressure tanks-accumulators (acid).
(ii) A specially constructed ladder (i) Safety regulations governing inspec-
shall be used for access to blow pits, to tion and repairing of pressure tanks-ac-
be constructed so that the door of the cumulators (acid) shall be the same as
697
those specified in subparagraph (15) of (iii) When blow lines from more than
this paragraph. one digester lead into one pipe, the
(ii) The pressure tanks-accumulators cock or valve of the blow line from the
shall be inspected twice annually. (See tank being inspected or repaired shall
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel be locked or tagged out, or the line
Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure shall be disconnected and blocked off.
Vessels—1968, with Addenda.) (20) Furnace room. Exhaust ventila-
(17) Pressure vessels (safety devices). (i) tion shall be provided where niter cake
A safety valve shall be installed in a is fed into a rotary furnace and shall be
separate line from each pressure vessel; so designed and maintained as to keep
no hand valve shall be installed be- the concentration of hydrogen sulfide
tween this safety valve and the pres- gas below the parts per million listed
sure vessel. Safety valves shall be in § 1910.1000.
checked between each cook to be sure (21) Inspection and repair of tanks. All
they have not become plugged or cor- piping leading to tanks shall be
roded to the point of being inoperative. blanked off or valved and locked or
(See the ASME Boiler and Pressure tagged. Any lines to sewers shall be
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired blanked off to protect workers from air
Pressure Vessels—1968, with Addenda.) contaminants.
(ii) All safety devices shall conform (22) Welding. Welding on blow tanks,
to Paragraph U–2 in the ASME Boiler accumulator tanks, or any other ves-
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, sels where turpentine vapor or other
Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, with combustible vapor could gather shall
Addenda. be done only after the vessel has been
(18) Miscellaneous. Insofar as the proc- completely purged of fumes. Fresh air
esses of the sulfate and soda operations shall be supplied workers inside of ves-
are similar to those of the sulfite proc- sels.
esses, the standard of paragraphs (g) (1) (23) Turpentine systems and storage
through (17) of this section shall apply. tanks. Nonsparking tools and ground
(i) Quick operating showers, bub- hose shall be used when pumping out
blers, etc., shall be available for emer- the tank. The tank shall be surrounded
gency use in case of caustic soda burns. by a berm or moat.
(ii) Rotary tenders, smelter opera- (h) Bleaching—(1) Bleaching engines.
tors, and those cleaning smelt spouts Bleaching engines, except the Bellmer
shall be provided with eye protection type, shall be completely covered on
equipment (fitted with lenses that fil- the top, with the exception of one
ter out the harmful rays emanating small opening large enough to allow
from the light source) when actively filling, but too small to admit a person.
engaged in their duties, in accordance Platforms leading from one engine to
with American National Standard another shall have standard guardrails
Z87.1—1968. in accordance with § 1910.23.
(iii) Heavy-duty pipe, valves, and fit- (2) Bleach mixing rooms. (i) The room
tings shall be used between digester in which the bleach powder is mixed
and blow pit. These shall be inspected shall be provided with adequate ex-
at least semiannually to determine the haust ventilation, located at the floor
degree of deterioration and repaired or level, in accordance with American Na-
replaced when necessary, in accordance tional Standard Z9.1—1951.
with American National Standards (ii) Chlorine gas shall be carried
B31.1—1955, B31.1a—1963, B31.1.0—1967, away from the work place and breath-
and B31.2—1968. ing area by an exhaust system. The gas
(iv) Smelt-dissolving tanks shall be shall be rendered neutral or harmless
covered and the cover kept closed, ex- before being discharged into the atmos-
cept when samples are being taken. phere. The requirements of American
(v) Smelt tanks shall be provided National Standard Z9.2—1960 shall
with vent stacks and explosion doors, apply to this subdivision.
in accordance with American National (iii) For emergency and rescue oper-
Standard Z9.1—1951. ations, the employer must provide em-
(19) Blow lines. ployees with self-contained breathing
(i)–(ii) [Reserved] apparatuses or supplied-air respirators,
698
and ensure that employees use these (4) Personal protection. Persons ex-
respirators, in accordance with the re- posed to falling material shall wear
quirements of 29 CFR 1910.134. eye, head, foot, and shin protection
(3) Liquid chlorine. (i) Tanks of liquid equipment, in accordance with Amer-
chlorine shall be stored in an ade- ican National Standards Z87.1—1968,
quately ventilated unoccupied room, Z88.2—1969, Z89.1—1969, and Z41.1—1967.
where their possible leakage cannot af- (j) Stock preparation—(1) Pulp shred-
fect workers. ders. (i) Cutting heads shall be com-
(ii) Gas masks capable of absorbing pletely enclosed except for an opening
chlorine shall be supplied, conven- at the feed side sufficient to permit
iently placed, and regularly inspected, only entry of stock. The enclosure
and workers who may be exposed to shall be bolted or locked in place. The
chlorine gas shall be instructed in their enclosure shall be of solid material or
use. with mesh or other openings not ex-
(iii) For emergency and rescue work, ceeding one-half inch.
independent self-contained oxygen- (ii) Either a slanting feed table with
type masks or supplied air equipment its outer edge not less than 36 inches
shall be provided. from the cutting head or an automatic
(iv) At least two exits, remote from feeding device shall be provided.
each other, shall be provided for all (iii) Repairs for cleaning of blockage
rooms in which chlorine is stored. shall be done only when the shredder is
(v) Spur tracks upon which tank cars shutdown and control devices locked.
containing chlorine and caustic are (2) Pulp conveyors. Pulp conveyors
spotted and connected to pipelines and conveyor drive belts and pulleys
shall be protected by means of a derail shall be fully enclosed, or if open and
in front of the cars. within 7 feet of the floor, shall be con-
(vi) All chlorine, caustic, and acid structed and guarded in accordance
lines shall be marked for positive iden- with American National Standard
tification, in accordance with Amer- B20.1—1957.
ican National Standard A13.1—1967.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Bagged or drummed chemicals.
Bagged or drummed chemicals require (4) Beaters. (i) Beater rolls shall be
efficient handling to prevent damage provided with covers.
and spillage. Certain oxidizing chemi- (ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or
cals used in bleaching pulp and also in other work requires that persons enter
some sanitizing work require added the beaters, all control devices shall be
precautions for safety in storage and locked or tagged out, in accordance
handling. In storage, these chemicals with paragraph (b)(4) of this section.
must be isolated from combustible ma- (iii) When beaters are fed from a floor
terials and other chemicals with which above, the chute opening, if less than
they will react such as acids. They 42 inches from the floor, shall be pro-
must also be kept dry, clean and vided with a complete rail or other en-
uncontaminated. closure. Openings for manual feeding
(i) Mechanical pulp process—(1) Pulp shall be sufficient only for entry of
grinders. (i) Water wheels directly con- stock, and shall be provided with at
nected to pulp grinders shall be pro- least two permanently secured
vided with speed governors limiting the crossrails in accordance with § 1910.23.
peripheral speed of the grinder to that (iv) [Reserved]
recommended by the manufacturer. (v) Floors around beaters shall be
(ii) Doors of pocket grinders shall be provided with sufficient drainage to re-
arranged so as to keep them from clos- move wastes.
ing accidentally. (5) Pulpers. (i) All pulpers having the
(2) Butting saws. Hood guards shall be top or any other opening of a vessel
provided on butting saws, in accord- less than 42 inches from the floor or
ance with American National Standard work platform shall have such open-
O1.1—1954 (reaffirmed 1961). ings guarded by railed or other enclo-
(3) Floors and platforms. The require- sures. For manual charging, openings
ments of paragraph (b)(3) of this sec- shall be sufficient to permit the entry
tion shall apply. of stock, and shall be provided with at
699
least two permanently secured vided for workmen handling acids in
crossrails in accordance with § 1910.23. accordance with paragraphs (b)(2) and
(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or (d)(1) of this section.
other work requires that persons enter (4)–(5) [Reserved]
the pulpers, they shall be equipped (6) Steps. Steps of uniform rise and
with safety belt and lifeline, and one tread with nonslip surfaces shall be
person shall be stationed outside at a provided at each press in accordance
position to observe and assist in case of with § 1910.23.
emergency.
(7) Plank walkways. A removable
(iii) When cleaning, inspecting, or
plank shall be provided along each
other work requires that persons enter
pulpers, all steam, water, or other con- press, with standard guardrails in-
trol devices shall be locked or tagged stalled. The planks shall have nonslip
out. Blank flanging and tagging of pipe surfaces in accordance with paragraph
lines is acceptable in place of closed (b)(3) of this section.
and locked or tagged valves. Blank (8) Dryer lubrication. If a gear bearing
flanging of steam and water lines shall must be oiled while the machine is in
be acceptable in place of valve locks. operation, an automatic oiling device
(6) Stock chests. (i) All control devices to protect the oiler shall be provided,
shall be locked or tagged out when per- or oil cups and grease fittings shall be
sons enter stock chests, in accordance placed along the walkways out of reach
with paragraph (b)(4) of this section. of hot pipes and dryer gears.
(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or (9) Levers. All levers carrying weights
other work requires that persons enter shall be constructed so that weights
stock chests, they shall be provided will not slip or fall off.
with a low-voltage extension light. (10) First dryer. Either a permanent
(k) Machine room—(1) Emergency stops. guardrail or apron guard or both shall
Paper machines shall be equipped with be installed in front of the first dryer
devices that will stop the machine
in each section in accordance with
quickly in an emergency. The devices
paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
shall consist of push buttons for elec-
tric motive power (or electrically oper- (11) Steam and hot-water pipes. All ex-
ated engine stops), pull cords con- posed steam and hot-water pipes within
nected directly to the prime mover, 7 feet of the floor or working platform
control clutches, or other devices, or within 15 inches measured hori-
interlocked with adequate braking ac- zontally from stairways, ramps, or
tion. The devices shall be tested peri- fixed ladders shall be covered with an
odically by making use of them when insulating material, or guarded in such
stopping the machine and shall be so manner as to prevent contact.
located that any person working on the (12) Dryer gears. Dryer gears shall be
machine can quickly disconnect the guarded excepting where the oilers’
machine from the source of power in walkway is removed out of reach of the
case of emergency. gears’ nips and spokes and hot pipes in
(2) Drives. (i) All drives shall be pro- accordance with American National
vided with lockout devices at the Standard B15.1—1953 (reaffirmed 1958).
power switch which interrupts the flow (i) A guardrail shall be provided at
of current to the unit. broke holes in accordance with
(ii) All ends of rotating shafts includ- § 1910.23.
ing dryer drum shafts shall be com-
(13) Broke hole. (i) A guardrail shall
pletely guarded.
be provided at broke holes in accord-
(iii) All accessible disengaged doctor
blades should be covered. ance with § 1910.23.
(iv) All exposed shafts shall be guard- (ii) Where pulpers are located di-
ed. Crossovers shall be provided. rectly below the broke hole on a paper
(v) Oil cups and grease fittings shall machine and where the broke hole
be placed in a safe area remote from opening is large enough to permit a
nip and heat hazards. worker to fall through, any employee
(3) Protective equipment. Face shields, pushing broke down the hole shall wear
aprons, and rubber gloves shall be pro- a safety belt attached to a safety belt
700
line. The safety belt line shall be fas- winders is on the operator’s side, it
tened in such a manner that it is im- shall be guarded by barrier guards
possible for the person to fall into the interlocked with the drive mechanism.
pulper. (ii) [Reserved]
(iii) An alarm bell or a flashing light (27) Core collars. Set screws for secur-
shall be actuated before dropping ma- ing core collars to winding and
terial through the broke hole. unwinding shafts shall not protrude
(14) Feeder belt. A feeder belt or other above the face of the collar. All edges
effective device shall be provided for of the collar with which an operator’s
starting paper through the calender hand comes in contact shall be beveled
stack. to remove all sharp corners.
(15) Steps. Steps or ladders of uniform (28) Slitter knives. Slitter knives shall
rise and tread with nonslip surfaces be guarded so as to prevent accidental
shall be provided at each calendar contact. Carriers shall be provided and
stack. Handrails and hand grips shall used for transportation of slitter
be provided at each calendar stack in knives.
accordance with § 1910.23. (29) Winder shaft. The winder shall
(16) [Reserved] have a guide rail to align the shaft for
(17) Sole plates. All exposed sole plates easy entrance into the opened rewind
between dryers, calenders, reels, and shaft bearing housings.
rewinders shall have a nonskid surface. (30) Core shaft. When the core shaft
(18) Nip points. The hazard of the nip weighs in excess of the safe standard, a
points on all calender rolls shall be mechanical device such as a dolly shall
eliminated or minimized by means of be provided for carrying all or part of
an effective barrier device, or by feed- the weight when it is being removed
ing the paper into the rolls by means of from the set of paper and placed in the
a rope carrier, air jets, or hand feeding dressing brackets on the winder.
devices. (31) Winder area. A nonskid surface
(19) Platforms. [Reserved] shall be provided in the front vicinity
(20) Scrapers. Alloy steel scrapers of the winder to prevent accidental
with pullthrough blades approximately slipping.
3 by 5 inches in size shall be used to re- (32) Radiation. Special standards re-
move ‘‘scabs’’ from calender rolls. garding the use of radiation equipment
(21) Illumination. Permanent lighting shall be posted and followed as required
shall be installed in all areas where by § 1910.96.
employees are required to make ma- (l) Finishing room—(1) Cleaning rolls.
chine adjustments and sheet transfers Rolls shall be cleaned only on the
in accordance with the American Na- outrunning side.
tional Standard A11.1—1965 (R 1970). (2) Emergency stops. Electrically or
(22) Control panels. All control panel manually operated quick power dis-
handles and buttons shall be protected connecting devices, interlocked with
from accidental contact. braking action, shall be provided on all
(23) [Reserved] operating sides of the machine within
(24) Lifting reels. (i) The reels shall easy reach of all employees. These de-
stop rotating before being lifted from vices shall be tested by making use of
bearings. them when stopping the machine.
(ii) All lifting equipment (clamps, ca- (3) Core collars. The requirements of
bles, and slings) shall be maintained in paragraph (k)(27) of this section and
a safe condition and inspected regu- the American National Standard
larly. B15.1—1953 (reaffirmed 1958) shall
(iii) Reel shafts with square block apply.
ends shall be guarded. (4) Elevators. These shall be in accord-
(25) Feeder belts. Feeder belts, carrier ance with American National Standard
ropes, air carriage, or other equally ef- A17.1—1965.
fective means shall be provided for (5) Control panels. The requirements
starting paper into the nip or drum- of paragraph (k)(22) of this section
type reels. shall apply.
(26) Inrunning nip. (i) Where the nip- (6) Guillotine-type cutters. (i) Each
ping points of all drum winders and re- guillotine-type cutter shall be equipped
701
with a control which requires the oper- (iii) Mechanical lifting devices shall
ator and his helper, if any, to use both be provided for placing and removing
hands to engage the clutch. rolls from the machine.
(ii) Each guillotine-type cutter shall (10) Control panels. The requirements
be equipped with a nonrepeat device. of paragraph (k)(22) of this section
(iii) Carriers shall be provided and shall apply.
used for transportation of guillotine- (11) Roll-type embosser. The nipping
type cutter knives. point located on the operator’s side
(7) Rotary cutter. (i) On single-knife shall be guarded by either automatic or
machines a guard shall be provided at a manually operated barrier guards
point of contact to the knife. interlocked with the drive.
(ii) On duplex cutters the protection (12) Sorting and counting tables. (i) Ta-
required for single-knife machines bles shall be smooth and free from
shall be provided for the first knife, splinters, with edges and corners
and a hood shall be provided for the rounded.
second knife. (ii) Paddles shall be smooth and free
(iii) Safe access shall be provided to from splinters.
the knives of a rotary cutter by means (13) Roll splitters. The nip point and
of catwalks with nonslip surfaces, rail- cutter knife shall be guarded by either
ings, and toeboards in accordance with automatic or manually operated bar-
paragraph (b)(3) of this section. rier guards.
(m) Materials handling—(1) Hand
(iv) A guard shall be provided for the
trucks. No person shall be permitted to
spreader or squeeze roll at the nip side
ride on a powered hand truck unless it
on sheet cutters.
is so designed by the manufacturer. A
(v) Electrically or manually operated limit switch shall be on operating han-
quick power disconnecting devices with dle—30 degrees each way from a 45-de-
adequate braking action shall be pro- gree angle up and down.
vided on all operating sides of the ma- (2) [Reserved]
chine within easy reach of all opera- (3) Cartons. The carton-stitching ma-
tors. chine shall be guarded to prevent the
(vi) The outside slitters shall be operator from coming in contact with
guarded. the stitching head.
(8) Platers. (i) A guard shall be ar- (4) [Reserved]
ranged across the face of the rolls to (5) Unloading cars. Flag signals, de-
serve as a warning that the operator’s rails, or other protective devices shall
hand is approaching the danger zone. be used to protect men during switch-
(ii) A quick power disconnecting de- ing operations. The blue flag policy
vice shall be installed on each machine shall be invoked according to para-
within easy reach of the operator. graph (c)(9)(i) of this section.
(9) Finishing room rewinders. (i) The
nipping points of all drum winders and FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24,
rewinders located on the operator’s 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015,
side shall be guarded by either auto- Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR
matic or manually operated barrier 1285, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 72
guards of sufficient height to protect FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27,
fully anyone working around them. 2011]
The barrier guard shall be interlocked EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35566, June
with the drive mechanism to prevent 13, 2013, § 1910.261 was amended by revising
operating above jog speed without the paragraph (c)(16), effective Sept. 11, 2013. For
guard in place. the convenience of the user, the revised text
is set forth as follows:
A zero speed switch should be installed
to prevent the guard from being raised § 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard
while the roll is turning. mills.
(ii) A nonskid surface shall be pro-
vided in front of the rewinder to pre- * * * * *
vent an employee from slipping in ac- (c) * * *
cordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this (16) Signs. When conveyors cross walkways
section. or roadways in the yards, the employer must
702
erect signs reading ‘‘Danger—Overhead Con- bon-like form which may be removed
veyor’’ or an equivalent warning, in accord- by dusting or shaking.
ance with ANSI Z35.1–1968 or ANSI Z535.2–
(7) Card. A card machine consists of
2011, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
cylinders of various sizes—and in cer-
tain cases flats—covered with card
* * * * * clothing and set in relation to each
§ 1910.262 Textiles. other so that fibers in staple form may
be separated into individual relation-
(a) Application requirements—(1) Appli- ship. The speed of the cylinders and
cation. The requirements of this sub- their direction of rotation varies. The
part for textile safety apply to the de- finished product is delivered as a sliv-
sign, installation, processes, operation, er. Cards of different types are: The re-
and maintenance of textile machinery, volving flat card, the roller-and-clearer
equipment, and other plant facilities in card, etc.
all plants engaged in the manufacture (8) Card clothing. Card clothing is the
and processing of textiles, except those material with which many of the sur-
processes used exclusively in the manu- faces of a card are covered; e.g., the
facture of synthetic fibers. cylinder, doffer, etc. It consists of a
(2) Standards incorporated by reference. thick foundation material, usually
Standards covering issues of occupa- made of textile fabrics, through which
tional safety and health which are of
are pressed many fine, closely spaced,
general application without regard to
specially bent wires.
any specific industry are incorporated
(9) Comber. A comber is a machine for
by reference in paragraphs of this sec-
tion and made applicable to textiles. combing fibers of cotton, wool, etc. The
All such standards shall be construed essential parts are a device for feeding
according to the rules of construction forward a fringe of fibers at regular in-
set out in § 1910.5. tervals and an arrangement of combs
(b) Definitions applicable to this sec- or pins which, at the right time, pass
tion—(1) Belt shifter. A belt shifter is a through the fringe. All tangled fibers,
device for mechanically shifting a belt short fibers, and neps are removed and
from one pulley to another. the long fibers are laid parallel.
(2) Belt shifter lock. A belt shifter lock (10) Combing machinery. Combing ma-
is a device for positively locking the chinery is a general classification, in-
belt shifter in position while the ma- cluding combers, sliver lap machines,
chine is stopped and the belt is idling ribbon lap machines, and gill boxes,
on the loose pulleys. but excluding cards.
(3) Calender. A calender in essence (11) Cutter (rotary staple). A rotary
consists of a set of heavy rollers staple cutter is a machine consisting of
mounted on vertical side frames and one or more rotary blades used for the
arranged to pass cloth between them. purpose of cutting textile fibers into
Calenders may have two to ten rollers, staple lengths.
or bowls, some of which can be heated. (12) Exposed to contact. Exposed to con-
(4) Embossing calender. An embossing tact shall mean that the location of an
calender is a calender with two or more object, material, nip point, or point of
rolls, one of which is engraved for pro- operation is such that a person is liable
ducing figured effects of various kinds to come in contact with it in his nor-
on a fabric. mal course of employment.
(5) Cans (drying). Drying cans are hol- (13) Garnett machine. A Garnett ma-
low cylindrical drums mounted in a chine means any of a number of types
frame so they can rotate. They are of machines for opening hard twisted
heated with steam and are used to dry waste of wool, cotton, silk, etc. Essen-
fabrics or yarn as it passes around the tially, such machines consist of a
perimeter of the can. lickerin; one or more cylinders, each
(6) Carbonizing. Carbonizing means the having a complement worker and strip-
removing of vegetable matter such as per rolls; and a fancy roll and doffer.
burns, straws, etc., from wool by treat- The action of such machines is some-
ment with acid, followed by heat. The what like that of a wool card, but it is
undesired matter is reduced to a car- much more severe in that the various
703
rolls are covered with garnett wire in- be used in other ways during the fin-
stead of card clothing. ishing of various fabrics.
(14) Gill box. A gill box is a machine (23) Mule. A mule is a type of spinning
used in the worsted system of manufac- frame having a head stock and a car-
turing yarns. Its function is to arrange riage as its two main sections. The
the fibers in parallel order. Essentially, head stock is stationary. The carriage
it consists of a pair of feed rolls and a is movable and it carries the spindles
series of followers where the followers which draft and spin the roving into
move at a faster surface speed and per- the yarn. The carriage extends over the
form a combing action. whole width of the machine and moves
(15) Interlock. An interlock is a device slowly toward and away from the head
that operates to prevent the operation stock during the spinning operation.
of machine while the cover or door of (24) Nip. Nip shall mean the point of
the machine is open or unlocked, and contact between two in-running rolls.
which will also hold the cover or door (25) Openers and pickers. Openers and
closed and locked while the machine is pickers means a general classification
in motion. which includes breaker pickers, inter-
(16) Jig (dye). A dye jig is a machine mediate pickers, finisher pickers, sin-
for dyeing piece goods. The cloth, at gle process pickers, multiple process
full width, passes from a roller through pickers, willow machines, card and
picker waste cleaners, thread extrac-
the dye liquor in an open vat and is
tors, shredding machines, roving waste
then wound on another roller. The op-
openers, shoddy pickers, bale breakers,
eration is repeated until the desired
feeders, vertical openers, lattice clean-
shade is obtained.
ers, horizontal cleaners, and any simi-
(17) Kier. A kier is a large metal vat,
lar machinery equipped with either
usually a pressure type, in which fab-
cylinders, screen section, calender sec-
rics may be boiled out, bleached, etc.
tion, rolls, or beaters used for the prep-
(18) Lapper (ribbon). A ribbon lapper is aration of stock for further processing.
a machine used to prepare laps for (26) Paddler. A paddler consists of a
feeding a cotton comb; its purpose is to trough for a solution and two or more
provide a uniform lap in which the fi- squeeze rolls between which cloth
bers have been straightened as much as passes after being passed through a
possible. mordant or dye bath.
(19) Lapper (sliver). A sliver lapper is a (27) Point of operation. Point of oper-
machine in which a number of parallel ation shall mean that part of the ma-
card slivers are drafted slightly, laid chine where the work of cutting, shear-
side by side in a compact sheet, and ing, squeezing, drawing, or manipu-
wound into a cylindrical package. lating the stock in any other way is
(20) Loom. A loom is a machine for ef- done.
fecting the interlacing of two series of (28) Printing machine (roller type). A
yarns crossing one another at right an- roller printing machine is a machine con-
gles. The warp yarns are wound on a sisting of a large central cylinder, or
warp beam and pass through heddles pressure bowl, around the lower part of
and reed. The filling is shot across in a the perimeter of which is placed a se-
shuttle and settled in place by reed and ries of engraved color rollers (each hav-
lay, and the fabric is wound on a cloth ing a color trough), a furnisher roller,
beam. doctor blades, etc. The machine is used
(21) Mangle (starch). A starch mangle is for printing fabrics.
a mangle that is used specifically for (29) Ranges (bleaching continuous).
starching cotton goods. It commonly Continuous bleaching ranges are of sev-
consists of two large rolls and a shal- eral types and may be made for cloth
low open vat with several immersion in rope or open-width form. The goods,
rolls. The vat contains the starch solu- after wetting out, pass through a
tion. squeeze roll into a saturator con-
(22) Mangle (water). A water mangle is taining a solution of caustic soda and
a calender having two or more rolls then to an enclosed J-box. A V-shaped
used for squeezing water from fabrics arrangement is attached to the front
before drying. Water mangles also may part of the J-box for uniform and rapid
704
saturation of the cloth with steam be- box, one or more cylindrical dryers or
fore it is packed down in the J-box. The an enclosed hot air dryer, and a beam-
cloth, in a single strand rope form, ing end for finding the yarn on the
passes over a guide roll down the first loom beams.
arm of the ‘‘V’’ and up the second. (35) Solvent (industrial organic). Indus-
Steam is injected into the ‘‘V’’ at the trial organic solvent means any organic
upper end of the second arm so that the volatile liquid or compound, or any
cloth is rapidly saturated with steam combination of these substances which
at this point. The J-box capacity is are used to dissolve or suspend a non-
such that cloth will remain hot for a volatile or slightly volatile substance
sufficient time to complete the scour- for industrial utilization. It shall also
ing action. It then passes a series of apply to such substances when used as
washers with a squeeze roll in between. detergents or cleansing agents. It shall
The cloth then passes through a second not apply to petroleum products when
set of saturator, J-box, and washer, such products are used as fuel.
where it is treated with the peroxide (36) Tenter frame. A tenter frame is a
solution. By slight modification of the machine for drying cloth under ten-
form of the unit, the same process can sion. It essentially consists of a pair of
be applied to open-width cloth. endless traveling chains fitted with
(30) Range (mercerizing). A mercerizing clips of fine pins and carried on tracks.
range consists generally of a 3-bowl The cloth is firmly held at the selvages
mangle, a tenter frame, and a number by the two chains which diverge as
of boxes for washing and scouring. The they move forward so that the cloth is
whole setup is in a straight line and all brought to the desired width.
parts operate continuously. The com- (37) Warper. A warper is any machine
bination is used to saturate the cloth for preparing and arranging the yarns
with sodium hydroxide, stretch it while intended for the warp of a fabric, spe-
saturated, and washing out most of the cifically, a beam warper.
caustic before releasing tension. (c) General safety requirements—(1)
(31) Sanforizing machine. A sanforizing Means of stopping machines. Every tex-
machine is a machine consisting of a tile machine shall be provided with in-
large steam-heated cylinder, an end- dividual mechanical or electrical
less, thick, woolen felt blanket which means for stopping such machines. On
is in close contact with the cylinder for machines driven by belts and shafting,
most of its perimeter, and an elec- a locking-type shifter or an equivalent
trically heated shoe which presses the positive device shall be used. On oper-
cloth against the blanket while the lat- ations where injury to the operator
ter is in a stretched condition as it might result if motors were to restart
curves around feed-in roll. after power failures, provision shall be
(32) Shearing machine. A shearing ma- made to prevent machines from auto-
chine is a machine used in shearing matically restarting upon restoration
cloth. Cutting action is provided by a of power.
number of steel blades spirally mount- (2) Handles. Stopping and starting
ed on a roller. The roller rotates in handles shall be designed to the proper
close contact with a fixed ledger blade. length to prevent the worker’s hand or
There may be from one to six such roll- fingers from striking against any re-
ers on a machine. volving part, gear guard, or any other
(33) Singeing machine. A singeing ma- part of the machine.
chine is a machine used particularly (3)–(4) [Reserved]
with cotton; it comprises of a heated (5) Inspection and maintenance. All
roller, plate, or an open gas flame. The guards and other safety devices, includ-
material is rapidly passed over the ing starting and stopping devices, shall
roller or the plate or through the open be properly maintained.
gas flame to remove, fuzz or hairiness (6) Lighting. Lighting shall conform
on yarn or cloth by burning. to American National Standard A11.1—
(34) Slasher. A slasher is a machine 1965, which is incorporated by reference
used for applying a size mixture to as specified in § 1910.6.
warp yarns. Essentially, it consists of a (7) Identification of piping systems.
stand for holding section beams, a size Identification of piping systems shall
705
conform to American National Stand- are in motion, a long-handled brush or
ard A13.1—1956, which is incorporated dust mop shall be used.
by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (f) Garnett machines—(1) Lickerin. Gar-
(8) Identification of physical hazards. nett lickerins shall be enclosed.
Identification of physical hazards shall (2) Fancy rolls. Garnett fancy rolls
be in accordance with the requirements shall be enclosed by covers. These shall
of § 1910.144. be installed in a way that keeps worker
(9) Steam pipes. All pipes carrying rolls reasonably accessible for removal
steam or hot water for process or serv- or adjustment.
icing machinery, when exposed to con- (3) Underside of machine. The under-
tact and located within seven feet of side of the garnett shall be guarded by
the floor or working platform shall be a screen mesh or other form of enclo-
covered with a heat-insulating mate- sure to prevent access.
rial, or otherwise properly guarded. (g) Spinning mules—A substantial
(d) Openers and pickers—(1) Beater fender of metal or hardwood shall be
guards. When any opening or picker installed in front of the carriage
machinery is equipped with a beater, wheels, the fender to extend to within
such beater shall be provided with one-fourth inch of the rail.
metal covers which will prevent con- (h) Slashers—(1) Cylinder dryers—(i)
tact with the beater. Such covers shall Reducing valves, safety valves, and pres-
be provided with an interlock which sure gages. Reducing valves, safety
will prevent the cover from being valves, and pressure gages shall con-
raised while the machine is in motion form to the ASME Pressure Vessel
and prevent the operation of the ma- Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure
chine while the cover is open. Vessels, 1968, which is incorporated by
(2) Cleanout holes. Cleanout holes reference as specified in § 1910.6.
within reaching distance of the fan or (ii) Vacuum relief valves. Vacuum re-
picker beater shall have their covers lief valves shall conform to the ASME
securely fastened and they shall not be Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII,
opened while the machine is in motion. Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968.
(3) Feed rolls. The feed rolls on all (iii) Lever control. When slashers are
opening and picking machinery shall operated by control levers, these levers
be covered with a guard designed to shall be connected to a horizontal bar
prevent the operator from reaching the or treadle located not more than 69
nip while the machinery is in oper- inches above the floor to control the
ation. operation from any point.
(4) Removal of foreign ferrous material. (iv) Pushbutton control. Slashers oper-
All textile opener lines shall be ated by pushbutton control shall have
equipped with magnetic separators, stop and start buttons located at each
tramp iron separators, or other means end of the machine, and additional but-
for the removal of foreign ferrous ma- tons located on both sides of the ma-
terial. chine, at the size box and the delivery
(e) Cotton cards—(1) Enclosures. Cyl- end. If calender rolls are used, addi-
inder and lickerins shall be completely tional buttons shall be provided at
protected and the doffers should be en- both sides of the machine at points
closed. near the nips, except when slashers are
(2) Enclosure fastenings. The enclo- equipped with an enclosed dryer.
sures or covers shall be kept in place (v) Nip guards. All nip guards shall
while the machine is in operation, ex- comply with the requirements of para-
cept when stripping or grinding. graph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
(3) Stripping rolls. On operations call- (vi) Cylinder enclosure. When enclo-
ing for flat strippings which are al- sures or hoods are used over cylinder
lowed to fall on the doffer cover, where drying rolls, such enclosures or hoods
such strippings are removed by hand, shall be provided with an exhaust sys-
the doffer cover shall be kept closed tem which will effectively prevent wet
and securely fastened to prevent the air and steam from escaping into the
opening of the cover while the machine workroom.
is in operation. When it becomes nec- (vii) Expansion chambers. Slasher ket-
essary to clean the cards while they tles and cookers shall be provided with
706
expansion chambers in the covers, or (2) Closed position. Closed position
drains, to prevent surging over. Steam- shall mean that the top bar of the gate
control valves shall be so located that shall be at least 42 inches from the
they can be operated without exposing floor or working platform; and the
the worker to moving parts, hot sur- lower bar shall be at least 21 inches
faces, or steam. from the floor or working platform;
(2) Enclosed hot air dryer—(i) Lever and the gate shall be located 15 inches
control. When slashers are operated by from the vertical tangent to the beam
control levers, these levers shall be head.
connected to a horizontal bar or trea- (j) Drawing frames, slubbers, roving
dle located not more than 69 inches parts, cotton combers, ring spinning
above the floor to control the oper- frames, twisters. Gear housing covers on
ation from any point. all installations of drawing frames,
(ii) Push-button control. Slashers op- slubbers, roving frames, cotton comb-
erated by push-button control shall ers, ring spinning frames, and twisters
have one start button at each end of shall be equipped with interlocks.
the machine and stop buttons shall be (k) Gill boxes—(1) Pin guard. A guard
located on both sides of the machines shall be placed ahead of the feed end
at intervals spaced not more than 6 and shall be so designed that it will
feet on centers. Inching buttons should prevent the worker’s fingers from being
be installed. caught in the pins of the intersecting
(iii) Dryer enclosure. The dryer enclo- fallers.
sure shall be provided with an exhaust (2) Nip guards. All nip guards shall
system which will effectively prevent comply with the requirements of para-
wet air and steam from escaping into graph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
the workroom. (l) Heavy draw boxes, finishers, and
(iv) Nip guards. All nip guards shall speeders used in worsted drawing—(1)
comply with Table R–1. Band pulley covers. Covers for band pul-
TABLE R–1—GUARD OPENINGS leys shall be closed when the machine
[Openings in the guard or between the guard and working
is in motion.
surface shall not be greater than the following] (2) Benches or working platforms.
Branches or working platforms ap-
Maximum
Distance of opening from nip point width of proximately 10 inches in height and 8
opening inches in width should be installed
along the entire running length of the
0 to 11⁄2 ................................................................ ⁄
14
11⁄2 to 21⁄2 ............................................................ 38⁄ machine for the worker to stand on

21⁄2 to 31⁄2 ............................................................ 12⁄ while creeling the machine. Such
31⁄2 to 51⁄2 ............................................................ 5⁄8
benches or platforms shall be covered
51⁄2 to 61⁄2 ............................................................ 3⁄4
with an abrasive or nonslip material.
61⁄2 to 71⁄2 ............................................................ 7⁄8
71⁄2 to 81⁄2 ............................................................ 1 ⁄4

1 (m) Sliver and ribbon lappers (cotton).
Cover guard. An interlocking cover
The measurements in Table R–1 are all in inches.
guard shall be installed over the large
(v) Expansion chambers. Slasher ket- calender drums and the lap spool, de-
tles and cookers shall be provided with signed to prevent the operator from
expansion chambers in the covers, or coming in contact with the nip.
drains, to prevent surging over. Steam (n) Looms—(1) Shuttle guard. Each
control valves shall be so located that loom shall be equipped with a guard de-
they can be operated without exposing signed to minimize the danger of the
the worker to moving parts, hot sur- shuttle flying out of the shed.
faces, or steam. (2) Protection for loom fixer. Provisions
(i) Warpers—(1) Swiveled double-bar shall be made so that every loom fixer
gates. Swiveled double-bar gates shall can prevent the loom from being start-
be installed on all warpers operating in ed while he is at work on the loom.
excess of 450 yards per minute. These This may be accomplished by means of
gates shall be so interlocked that the a lock, the key to which is retained in
machine cannot be operated until the the possession of the loom fixer, or by
gate is in the ‘‘closed position,’’ except some other effective means to prevent
for the purpose of inching or jogging. starting the loom.
707
(o) Shearing machines. All revolving (3) Mangle and washers. The nip at
blades on shearing machines shall be the in-running rolls shall conform to
guarded so that the opening between § 1910.264.
the cloth surface and the bottom of the (t) Tenter frames—(1) Stopping devices.
guard will not exceed three-eighths A stopping device shall be provided at
inch. each end of the machine.
(p) Continuous bleach range (cotton (2) Frame ends. A guard shall be in-
and rayon)—(1) J-box protection. Each stalled at each end of the frame at the
valve controlling the flow of steam, in- in-running chain and clip opener.
jurious gases, or liquids into a J-box (3) Oil cups. Oil cups shall be safely
shall be equipped with a chain, lock, located to permit easy access.
and key, so that any worker who enters (u) Dyeing jigs—(1) Stopping devices.
the J-box can lock the valve and retain Each dye jig shall be equipped with in-
the key in his possession. Any other dividual mechanical or electrical
method which will prevent steam, inju- means for stopping the machine.
rious gases, or liquids from entering (2) Roll arms. Roll arms on jigs shall
the J-box while the worker is in it will be built to allow for extra large
be acceptable. batches, and to prevent the center bar
(2) Open-width bleaching. The nip of from being forced off, causing the
all in-running rolls on open-width batch to fall.
bleaching machine rolls shall be pro- (v) Padders—Nip guards. All nip
tected with a guard to prevent the guards shall comply with the require-
worker from being caught at the nip. ments of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this
The guard shall extend across the en- section.
tire length of the nip. (w) Drying cans—(1) Pressure reducing
(q) Kiers—(1) Reducing valves, safety valves and pressure gages. Pressure re-
valves, and pressure gages. Reducing ducing valves and pressure gages shall
valves, safety valves, and pressure conform to the ASME Code for Pres-
gages shall conform to the ASME Code sure Vessels, Section VIII, 1968, Unfired
for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section Pressure Vessels.
VIII, Unfired/Pressure Vessels, 1968. (2) Vacuum collapse. If cans are not
(2) Kier valve protection. Each valve designed to prevent vacuum collapse,
controlling the flow of steam, injurious each can shall be equipped with one or
gases, or liquids into a kier shall be more vacuum relief valves with open-
equipped with a chain, lock, and key, ings of sufficient size to prevent the
so that any worker who enters the kier collapse of the can if vacuum occurs.
can lock the valve and retain the key (x) Flat-work ironer—(1) Feed rolls.
in his possession. Any other method The feed rolls shall be guarded to con-
which will prevent steam, injurious form to § 1910.264.
gases, or liquids from entering the kier (2) Pressure rolls. Pressure rolls shall
while the worker is in it will be accept- be covered or guarded to conform to
able. § 1910.264.
(r) Gray and white bins. On new in- (y) Extractors—(1) Centrifugal extrac-
stallations guard rails conforming to tor—(i) Cover. Each extractor shall be
§ 1910.23 shall be provided where work- equipped with a metal cover.
ers are required to plait by hand from (ii) Interlocking device. Each extractor
the top of the bin so as to protect the shall be equipped with an interlocking
worker from falling to a lower level. device that will prevent the cover from
(s) Mercerizing range (piece goods)—(1) being opened while the basket is in mo-
Stopping devices. A stopping device tion, and also prevent the power oper-
shall be provided at each end of the ation of the basket while the cover is
machine. open.
(2) Frame ends. A guard shall be in- (iii) Brakes. Each extractor shall be
stalled at each end of the frame be- equipped with a mechanically or elec-
tween the in-running chain and the clip trically operated brake to quickly stop
opener, to prevent the worker’s fingers the basket when the power driving the
from being caught. basket is shut off.
708
(iv) Maximum allowable speed. Each power operation of the inside cylinder
centrifugal extractor shall be effec- when the outer door on the case or
tively secured in position on the floor shell is open, and which will also pre-
or foundation so as to eliminate unnec- vent the outer door on the case or shell
essary vibration, and should not be op- from being opened without shutting off
erated at a speed greater than the man- the power.
ufacturer’s rating, which shall be (2) Means of holding covers or doors in
stamped where easily visible in letters open position. Each enclosed barrel
not less than one-quarter inch in shall also be equipped with adequate
height. The maximum allowable speed means for holding open the doors or
shall be given in revolutions per covers of the inner and outer cylinders
minute (rpm). or shells while it is being loaded or un-
(2) Engine drum extractor—Over-speed loaded.
governor. Each engine individually
(dd) Printing machine (roller type)—(1)
driving an extractor shall be provided
Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply
with an approved engine stop and speed
with the requirements of paragraph
limit governor.
(3) Squeezer or wringer extractor—Nip (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
guards. All nip guards shall comply (2) Crown wheel and roller gear nip pro-
with the requirements of paragraph tection. The engraved roller gears and
(h)(2)(iv) of this section. the large crown wheel shall be provided
(z) Nip guards. All nip guards for with a protective disc which will en-
water mangle, starch mangle, back- close the nips of the in-running gears.
washer (worsted yarn) crabbing ma- Individual discs for each nip will be ac-
chines, decating machines, shall com- ceptable.
ply with the requirements of paragraph (ee) Calenders. The nip at the in-run-
(h)(2)(iv). ning side of the rolls shall be provided
(aa) Sanforizing and palmer machine. A with a guard extending across the en-
safety trip rod, cable, or wire center tire length of the nip and arranged to
cord shall be provided across the front prevent the fingers of the workers from
and back of all palmer cylinders ex- being pulled in between the rolls or be-
tending the length of the face of the tween the guard and the rolls, and con-
cylinder. It shall operate readily structed so that the cloth can be fed
whether pushed or pulled. This safety into the rolls safely.
trip shall be not more than 72 inches (ff) Rotary staple cutters. A guard shall
above the level on which the operator be installed completely enclosing the
stands and shall be readily accessible. cutters to prevent the hands of the op-
(bb) Rope washers—(1) Splash guard. erator from reaching the cutting zone.
Splash guards shall be installed on all (gg) [Reserved]
rope washers unless the machine is so (hh) Hand bailing machine. An angle-
designed as to prevent the water or liq- iron-handle stop guard shall be in-
uid from splashing the operator, the stalled at the right angle to the frame
floor, or working surface.
of the machine. The stop guard shall be
(2) Safety stop bar. A safety trip rod,
so designed and so located that it will
cable or wire center cord shall be pro-
prevent the handle from traveling be-
vided across the front and back of all
yond the vertical position should the
rope washers extending the length of
handle slip from the operator’s hand
the face of the washer. It shall operate
readily whether pushed or pulled. This when the pawl has been released from
safety trip shall be not more than 72 the teeth of the takeup gear.
inches above the level on which the op- (ii) Roll bench. Cleats shall be in-
erator stands and shall be readily ac- stalled on the ends of roll benches.
cessible. (jj) Cuttle or swing folder (overhead
(cc) Laundry washer tumbler or shak- type). The bottom of the overhead fold-
er—(1) Interlocking device. Each drying ers shall be located not less than 7 feet
tumbler, each double cylinder shaker from the floor or working surface.
or clothes tumbler, and each washing (kk) Color-mixing room. Floors in
machine shall be equipped with an color-mixing rooms shall be con-
interlock device which will prevent the structed to drain easily.
709
(ll) Open tanks and vats for mixing and located within 8 feet 6 inches from the
storage of hot or corrosive liquids—Shut- floor shall be completely enclosed.
off valves. Boiling tanks, caustic tanks, (4) [Reserved]
and hot liquid containers, so located (5) Lubrication. Where machinery
that the operator cannot see the con- must be lubricated while in motion,
tents from the floor or working area, stationary lubrication fittings inside a
shall have emergency shutoff valves machine shall be provided with exten-
controlled from a point not subject to sion piping to a point of safety so that
danger of splash. Valves shall conform the employee will not have to reach
to the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, sec- into any dangerous part of the machine
tion VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, when lubricating.
1968. (6)–(7) [Reserved]
(mm) Dye kettles and vats—Pipes or (8) Hot pipes. Exposed hot water and
drains of sufficient capacity to carry steam pipes shall be covered with insu-
the contents safely away from the lating material wherever necessary to
working area shall be installed where protect employee from contact.
there are dye kettles and vats which (d) Flour-handling equipment—(1) Gen-
may at any time contain hot or corro- eral requirements for flour handling. (i)
sive liquids. These shall not empty di- Wherever any of the various pieces of
rectly onto the floor. apparatus comprising a flour-handling
(nn) Acid carboys. Carboys shall be system are run in electrical unity with
provided with inclinators, or the acid one another the following safeguards
shall be withdrawn from the carboys by shall apply:
means of pumping without pressure in (a) [Reserved]
the carboy, or by means of hand oper- (b) Wherever a flour-handling system
ated siphons. is of such size that the beginning of its
(oo) Handling caustic soda and caustic operation is far remote from its final
potash. Means shall be provided for delivery end, all electric motors oper-
handling and emptying caustic soda ating each apparatus comprising this
and caustic potash containers to pre- system shall be controlled at each of
vent workers from coming in contact two points, one located at each remote
with the caustic (see paragraph (qq) of end, either of which will stop all mo-
this section). tors.
(pp) First aid. Wherever acids or (c) [Reserved]
caustics are used, provision shall be (d) Control circuits for magnetic con-
made for a copious and flowing supply trollers shall be so arranged that the
of fresh, clean water. opening of any one of several limit
switches, which may be on an indi-
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 vidual unit, will serve to de-energize
FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 49 FR 5324, Feb. 10, all of the motors of that unit.
1984; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467,
(ii) [Reserved]
June 18, 1998]
(2) Bag chutes and bag lifts (bag-arm
§ 1910.263 Bakery equipment. elevators). (i) Bag chutes (gravity
chutes for handling flour bags) shall be
(a) General requirements—(1) Applica- so designed so as to keep to a minimum
tion. The requirements of this section the speed of flour bags. If the chute in-
shall apply to the design, installation, clines more than 30° from the hori-
operation and maintenance of machin- zontal, there shall be an upturn at the
ery and equipment used within a bak- lower end of the chute to slow down
ery. the bags.
(2) [Reserved] (ii) Bag-arm elevators with manual
(b) [Reserved] takeoff shall be designed to operate at
(c) General machine guarding. (1) [Re- a capacity not exceeding seven bags per
served] minute. The arms on the conveyor
(2) Gears. All gears shall be com- chain shall be so spaced as to obtain
pletely enclosed regardless of location. the full capacity of the elevator with
(3) Sprockets and V-belt drives. Sprock- the lowest possible chain speed. There
ets and V-belt drives located within shall be an electric limit switch at the
reach from platforms or pasageways or unloading end of the bag-arm elevator
710
so installed as to automatically stop tionary clamps located at proper inter-
the conveyor chain if any bag fails to vals keeping all covers dust-tight.
clear the conveyor arms. Where drop or hinged bottom sections
(iii) [Reserved] are provided this provision shall not
(iv) Man lifts shall be prohibited in apply.
bakeries. Bag or barrel lifts shall not (8) Sifters. (i) Enclosures of all types
be used as man lifts. of flour sifters shall be so constructed
(3) Dumpbin and blender. that they are dust-tight but readily ac-
(i)–(iv) [Reserved] cessible for interior inspection.
(v) All dumpbin and blender hoods (ii) [Reserved]
shall be of sufficient capacity to pre- (9) Flour scales.
vent circulation of flour dust outside (i)–(ii) [Reserved]
the hoods. (iii) Traveling or track-type flour
(vi) All dumpbins shall be of a suit- scales shall be equipped with bar han-
able height from floor to enable the op- dles for moving same. The bar should
erator to dump flour from bags, with- be at least 1 inch in diameter and well
out causing undue strain or fatigue. away from trolley track wheels.
Where the edge of any bin is more than
(e) Mixers—(1) Horizontal dough mix-
24 inches above the flour, a bag rest
ers. (i) Mixers with external power ap-
step shall be provided.
plication shall have all belts, chains,
(vii) A control device for stopping the
gears, pulleys, sprockets, clutches, and
dumpbin and blender shall be provided
other moving parts completely en-
close to the normal location of the op-
closed.
erator.
(ii) [Reserved]
(4)–(5) [Reserved]
(6) Storage bins. (iii) Each mixer shall be equipped
(i) [Reserved] with an individual motor and control,
(ii) Storage bins shall be provided and with a conveniently located man-
with gaskets and locks or latches to ual switch to prevent the mixer from
keep the cover closed, or other equiva- being started in the usual manner
lent devices in order to insure the dust while the machine is being serviced
tightness of the cover. Covers at open- and cleaned.
ings where an employee may enter the (iv) All electrical control stations
bin shall also be provided with a hasp shall be so located that the operator
and a lock, so located that the em- must be in full view of the bowl in its
ployee may lock the cover in the open open position. No duplication of such
position whenever it is necessary to controls other than a stop switch shall
enter the bin. be permitted.
(iii) Storage bins where the side is (v) All mixers with power and manual
more than 5 feet in depth shall be pro- dumping arrangements shall be
vided with standard stationary safety equipped with safety devices which
ladders, both inside and outside, to shall:
reach from floor level to top of bin and (a) Engage both hands of the oper-
from top of bin to inside bottom, keep- ator, when the agitator is in motion
ing the ladder end away from the mov- under power, and while the bowl is
ing screw conveyor. opened more than one-fifth of its total
(iv)–(v) [Reserved] opening.
(vi) The main entrance cover of large (b) Prevent the agitator from being
storage bins located at the interior exit started, while the bowl is more than
ladder shall be provided with an elec- one-fifth open, without engaging both
tric interlock for motors operating hands of the operator;
both feed and unloading screw, so that (vi)–(vii) [Reserved]
these motors cannot operate while the (viii) Every mixer shall be equipped
cover is open. with a full enclosure over the bowl
(7) Screw conveyors. which is closed at all times while the
(i)–(ii) [Reserved] agitator is in motion. Only minor open-
(iii) The covers of all screw con- ings in this enclosure, such as ingre-
veyors shall be made removable in con- dient doors, flour inlets, etc., each rep-
venient sections, held on with sta- resenting less than 11⁄2 square feet in
711
area, shall be capable of being opened (3) Stopping devices. There shall be a
while the mixer is in operation. stopping device within easy reach of
(ix) [Reserved] the operator who feeds the moulder and
(x) Overhead covers or doors which another stopping device within the
are subject to accidental closure shall reach of the employee taking the
be counterbalanced to remain in an dough away from the moulder.
open position or provided with means (h) Manually fed dough brakes—(1)
to hold them open until positively re- Top-roll protection. The top roll shall be
leased by the operator. protected by a heavy gage metal shield
(xi)–(xvii) [Reserved] extending over the roll to go within 6
(xviii) Valves and controls to regu- inches of the hopper bottom board. The
late the coolant in mixer jackets shall shield may be perforated to permit ob-
be located so as to permit access by the servation of the dough entering the
operator without jeopardizing his safe- rolls.
ty. (2) Emergency stop bar—An emergency
(2) Vertical mixers. (i) Vertical mixers stop bar shall be provided, and so lo-
shall comply with paragraphs (e)(1) (i), cated that the body of the operator will
(iii), (ix) and (x), of this section. press against the bar if the operator
(ii) [Reserved] slips and falls toward the rolls, or if
(iii) Bowl locking devices shall be of the operator gets his hand caught in
a positive type which require the at- the rolls. The bar shall apply the body
tention of the operator for unlocking. pressure to open positively a circuit
(iv) Devices shall be made available that will deenergize the drive motor. In
for moving bowls weighing more than addition, a brake which is inherently
80 pounds, with contents, into and out self-engaging by requiring power or
of the mixing position on the machine. force from an external source to cause
(f) Dividers. (1)–(2) [Reserved] disengagement shall be activated at
(3) Rear of divider. The back of the di- the same time causing the rolls to stop
vider shall have a complete cover to instantly. The emergency stop bar
enclose all of the moving parts, or each shall be checked for proper operation
individual part shall be enclosed or every 30 days.
guarded to remove the separate haz- (i) Miscellaneous equipment—(1) Proof
ards. The rear cover shall be provided boxes. All door locks shall be operable
with a limit switch in order that the both from within and outside the box.
machine cannot operate when this Guide rails shall be installed to center
cover is open. The guard on the back the rack as it enters, passes through,
shall be hinged so that it cannot be and leaves the proof box.
completely removed and if a catch or (2) Fermentation room. Fermentation
brace is provided for holding the cover room doors shall have nonshatterable
open, it shall be designed so that it will wire glass or plastic panels for vision
not release due to vibrations or minor through doors.
bumping whereby the cover may drop (3) Troughs. Troughs shall be mount-
on an employee. ed on antifriction bearing casters thus
(g) Moulders—(1) Hoppers. Mechanical making it possible for the operator to
feed moulders shall be provided with move and direct the motion of the
hoppers so designed and connected to trough with a minimum of effort.
the proofer that an employee’s hands (4) Hand trucks. (i) Casters shall be
cannot get into the hopper where they set back from corners to be out of the
will come in contact with the in-runway of toes and heels, but not far
ning rolls. enough back to cause the truck to be
(2) Hand-fed moulders. Hand-fed unstable.
moulders shall be provided with a belt- (ii) A lock or other device shall be
feed device or the hopper shall be ex- provided to hold the handle in vertical
tended high enough so that the hands position when the truck is not in use.
of the operator cannot get into the feed (5) Lift trucks. A lock or other device
rolls. The top edge of such a hopper shall be provided to hold the handle in
shall be well rounded to prevent injury vertical position when the truck is not
when it is struck or bumped by the em- in use.
ployee’s hand. (6) Racks.
712
(i) [Reserved] all door locks shall be operable from
(ii) Racks shall be equipped with han- both inside and outside.
dles so located with reference to the (15) Pan washing tanks.
frame of the rack that no part of the (i) [Reserved]
operator’s hands extends beyond the (ii) The surface of the floor of the
outer edge of the frame when holding working platform shall be maintained
onto the handles. in nonslip condition.
(iii) Antifriction bearing casters (iii)–(iv) [Reserved]
shall be used to give the operator bet- (v) Power ventilated exhaust hoods
ter control of the rack. shall be provided over the tanks.
(7) Conveyors. (i) Wherever a conveyor (16)–(19) [Reserved]
passes over a main aisleway, regularly (20) Bread coolers, rack type.
occupied work area, or passageway, the (i) [Reserved]
underside of the conveyor shall be com- (ii) All door locks shall be operable
pletely enclosed to prevent broken from both within and outside the cool-
chains or other material from falling er.
in the passageway. (21) [Reserved]
(ii) Stop bumpers shall be installed (22) Doughnut machines. Separate
on all delivery ends of conveyors, wher- flues shall be provided, (i) for venting
ever manual removal of the product vapors from the frying section, and (ii)
carried is practiced. for venting products of combustion
(iii) Where hazard of getting caught from the combustion chamber used to
exists a sufficient number of stop but- heat the fat.
tons shall be provided to enable quick (23) Open fat kettles. (i) The floor
stopping of the conveyor. around kettles shall be maintained in
(8)–(10) [Reserved] nonslip condition.
(11) Ingredient premixers, emulsifiers, (ii)–(iii) [Reserved]
etc. (i) All top openings shall be pro- (iv) The top of the kettle shall be not
vided with covers attached to the ma- less than 36 inches above floor or work-
chines. These covers should be so ar- ing level.
ranged and interlocked that power will (24) Steam kettles. (i) Positive locking
be shut off whenever the cover is devices shall be provided to hold ket-
opened to a point where the operator’s tles in the desired position.
fingers might come in contact with the (ii) Kettles with steam jackets shall
beaters. be provided with safety valves in ac-
(ii) [Reserved] cordance with the ASME Pressure Ves-
(12) Chain tackle. (i) All chain tackle sel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pres-
shall be marked prominently, perma- sure Vessels, 1968, which is incor-
nently, and legibly with maximum load porated by reference as specified in
capacity. § 1910.6.
(ii) All chain tackle shall be marked (j) Slicers and wrappers—(1) Slicers.
permanently and legibly with min- (i)–(ii) [Reserved]
imum support specification. (iii) The cover over the knife head of
(iii) Safety hooks shall be used. reciprocating-blade slicers shall be pro-
(13) Trough hoists, etc. (i) All hoists vided with an interlocking arrange-
shall be marked prominently, perma- ment so that the machine cannot oper-
nently, and legibly with maximum load ate unless the cover is in place.
capacity. (iv) On slicers with endless band
(ii) All hoists shall be marked perma- knives, each motor shall be equipped
nently and legibly with minimum sup- with a magnet brake which operates
port specifications. whenever the motor is not energized.
(iii) Safety catches shall be provided Each door, panel, or other point of ac-
for the chain so that the chain will cess to the cutting blades shall be ar-
hold the load in any position. ranged by means of mechanical or elec-
(iv) Safety hooks shall be used. tric interlocks so that the motor will
(14) Air-conditioning units. be deenergized if all such access doors,
(i) [Reserved] panels, or access points are not closed.
(ii) On large units with doors to (v) When it is necessary to sharpen
chambers large enough to be entered, slicer blades on the machine, a barrier
713
shall be provided leaving only suffi- (ii) Magnetic separators shall be pro-
cient opening for the sharpening stone vided to reduce fire and explosion haz-
to reach the knife blades. ards.
(vi) [Reserved] (3) Cheese, fruit, and food cutters.
(vii) Slicer wrapper conditions. These machines shall be protected in
(a)–(b) [Reserved] accordance with the requirements of
(c) Mechanical control levers for paragraph (k)(1) of this section.
starting and stopping both slicing ma- (4) [Reserved]
chine conveyors and wrapping ma- (5) Reversible dough brakes. Reversible
chines shall be extended or so located brakes shall be provided with a guard
that an operator in one location can or tripping mechanism on each side of
control both machines. Such levers the rolls. These guards shall be so ar-
should be provided wherever necessary, ranged as to stop the machine or re-
but these should be so arranged that verse the direction of the rolls so that
there is only one station capable of they are outrunning if the guard is
starting the wrapping machine and moved by contact of the operator.
conveyor assembly, and this starting (6) Cross-roll brakes. Cross-roll brakes
station should be so arranged or guard- shall be provided with guards that are
ed as to prevent accidental starting. similar in number and equal in effec-
The electric control station for start- tiveness to guards on hand-fed brakes.
ing and stopping the electric motor (7) Box- and roll-type dough sheeters.
driving the wrapping machine and con- (i) [Reserved]
veyor should be located near the clutch (ii) Hoppers for sheeters shall have an
starting lever. automatic stop bar or automatic stop-
(2) Wrappers. ping device along the back edge of the
(i)–(ii) [Reserved] hopper. If construction does not permit
(iii) Electrical heaters on wrappers location at the back edge, the auto-
shall be protected by a cover plate matic stop bar or automatic stopping
properly separated or insulated from device shall be located where it will be
the heaters in order that accidental most effective to accomplish the de-
contact with this cover plate will not sired protection.
cause a burn to the operator. (8) [Reserved]
(k) Biscuit and cracker equipment—(1) (9) Rotary, die machines, pretzel rolling,
Meal, peanut, and fig grinders. (i) If the and pretzel-stick extruding machines.
hopper is removable it shall be pro- Dough hoppers shall have the entire
vided with an electric interlock so that opening protected with substantial
the machine cannot be put in operation grid-type guards to prevent the em-
when the hopper is removed. ployee from getting his hands caught
(ii) Where grid guards cannot be used, in moving parts, or the hopper shall be
feed conveyors to hoppers, or baffle- extended high enough so that the oper-
type hoppers, shall be provided. Hop- ator’s hands cannot get into moving
pers in such cases shall be enclosed and parts.
provided with hinged covers, and (10)–(11) [Reserved]
equipped with electric interlock to pre- (12) Pan cooling towers. (i) Where pan
vent operation of the machine with the cooling towers extend to two or more
cover open. floors, a lockout switch shall be pro-
(2) Sugar and spice pulverizers. (i) All vided on each floor in order that me-
drive belts used in connection with chanics working on the tower may
sugar and spice pulverizers shall be positively lock the mechanism against
grounded by means of metal combs or starting. Only one start switch shall be
other effective means of removing stat- used in the motor control circuit.
ic electricity. All pulverizing of sugar (ii) [Reserved]
or spice grinding shall be done in ac- (13) Chocolate melting, refining, and
cordance with NFPA 62—1967 (Standard mixing kettles. Each kettle shall be pro-
for Dust Hazards of Sugar and Cocoa) vided with a cover to enclose the top of
and NFPA 656—1959 (Standard for Dust the kettle. The bottom outlet of each
Hazards in Spice Grinding Plants), kettle shall be of such size and shape
which are incorporated by reference as that the operator cannot reach in to
specified in § 1910.6. touch the revolving paddle or come in
714
contact with the shear point between burner and where the pilot flame can-
the paddle and the side of the kettle. not contact the flame electrode with-
(14)–(16) [Reserved] out being in the path of the main flame
(17) Peanut cooling trucks. Mechani- of the burner. Failure of any gas pilot
cally operated peanut cooling trucks shall automatically shut off the fuel
shall have a grid-type cover over the supply to the burner.
entire top. (b) Ovens with multiple burners shall
(l) Ovens—(1) General location. be equipped with individual atmos-
(i)–(vi) [Reserved] pheric pilot lights where there is suffi-
(vii) Ovens shall be located so that cient secondary air in the baking
possible fire or explosion will not ex- chamber and where gas is available; or
pose groups of persons to possible in- else each burner shall be equipped with
jury. For this reason ovens shall not an electric spark-type ignition device.
adjoin lockers, lunch or sales rooms, (iv) Burners of a capacity exceeding
main passageways, or exits. 150,000 B.t.u. per hour equipped with
(2) [Reserved] electric ignition shall be protected in
(3) Safeguards of mechanical parts. (i) addition by quick-acting combustion
Emergency stop buttons shall be pro- safeguards.
vided on mechanical ovens near the (a) The high-tension current for any
point where operators are stationed. electric spark-type ignition device
(ii) All piping at ovens shall be tested shall originate in a power supply line
to be gastight. which is interlocked with the fuel sup-
(iii) Main shutoff valves, operable ply for the oven in such a way that in
separately from any automatic valve, case of current failure both the source
shall be provided to permit turning off of electricity to the high-tension cir-
the fuel or steam in case of an emer- cuits and the fuel supply shall be
gency. turned off simultaneously.
(a) Main shutoff valves shall be lo- (b) [Reserved]
cated so that explosions, fires, etc. will
(c) Combustion safeguards used in
not prevent access to these valves.
connection with electric ignition sys-
(b) Main shutoff valves shall be
tems on ovens shall be so designed as
locked in the closed position when men
to prevent an explosive mixture from
must enter the oven or when the oven
accumulating inside the oven before ig-
is not in service.
nition has taken place.
(4)–(7) [Reserved]
(8) Electrical heating equipment. (v) When fuel is supplied and used at
(i)–(ii) [Reserved] line pressure, safety shutoff valves
(iii) A main disconnect switch or cir- shall be provided in the fuel line lead-
cuit breaker shall be provided. This ing to the burner.
switch or circuit breaker shall be so lo- (a) When fuel is supplied in excess of
cated that it can be reached quickly line pressure, safety shutoff valves
and safely. The main switch or circuit shall be provided in the fuel line lead-
breaker shall have provisions for locking to the burners, unless the fuel sup-
ing it in the open position if any work ply lines are equipped with other auto-
on the electrical equipment or inside matic valves which will prevent the
the oven must be performed. flow of fuel when the compressing
(9) General requirements. (i) Protecting equipment is stopped.
devices shall be properly maintained (b) The safety shutoff valve shall be
and kept in working order. positively tight and shall be tested at
(ii) All safety devices on ovens shall least twice monthly.
be inspected at intervals of not less (c)–(d) [Reserved]
than twice a month by an especially (e) A safety shutoff valve shall re-
appointed, properly instructed bakery quire manual operation for reopening
employee, and not less than once a after it has closed, or the electric cir-
year by representatives of the oven cuit shall be so arranged that it will re-
manufacturers. quire a manual operation for reopening
(iii)(a) Protection of gas pilot lights the safety shutoff valve.
shall be provided when it is impracti- (f) Manual reset-type safety shutoff
cable to protect the main flame of the valves shall be so arranged that they
715
cannot be locked in an open position by (xi) Where the gas supply pressure is
external means. substantially higher than that at
(g) Where blowers are used for sup- which the burners of an oven are de-
plying the air for combustion the safe- signed to operate, a gas pressure regu-
ty shutoff valve shall be interlocked so lator shall be employed.
that it will close in case of air failure. (a)–(c) [Reserved]
(h) Where gas or electric ignition is (d) A relief valve shall be placed on
used, the safety shutoff valve shall the outlet side of gas pressure regu-
close in case of ignition failure. On lators where gas is supplied at high
burners equipped with combustion safe- pressure. The discharge from this valve
guards, the valve shall close in case of shall be piped to the outside of the
burner flame failure. building.
(vi) One main, manually operated, (10) Direct-fired ovens. (i) Direct-fired
fuel shutoff valve shall be provided on ovens shall be safeguarded against fail-
each oven, and shall be located ahead ure of fuel, air, or ignition.
of all other valves in the system. (ii) To prevent the possible accumu-
(vii) All individual gas or oil burners lation of explosive gases from being ig-
with a heating capacity over 150,000 nited after a shutdown, all direct-fired
B.t.u. per hour shall be protected by a ovens with a heating capacity over
safeguard which is actuated by the 150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be venti-
flame and which will react to flame lated before the ignition system, com-
failure in a time interval not to exceed bustion air blower, and the fuel can be
2 seconds. All safeguards, once having turned on. The preventilation shall in-
shut down a gas or oil burner, shall re- sure at least four complete changes of
quire manual resetting and starting of atmosphere in the baking chamber by
the burner or burners. discharging the oven atmosphere to the
(viii) Any space in an oven (except di- outside of the building and entraining
rect fired ovens) which could be filled fresh air into it. The preventilation
with an explosive mixture shall be pro- shall be repeated whenever the heating
tected by explosion vents. Explosion equipment is shut down by a safety de-
vents shall be made of minimum vice.
weight consistent with adequate insu- (11) Direct recirculating ovens. (i) Each
lation. circulating fan in direct recirculating
(a) Explosion doors which have a sub- ovens shall be interconnected with the
stantial weight shall be attached by burner in such a manner that the fuel
chains or similar means to prevent fly- is shut off by a safety valve when the
ing parts from injuring the personnel fan is not running.
in case of an explosion. (ii) The flame of the burner or burn-
(b) Where explosion vents are so lo- ers in direct recirculating ovens shall
cated that flying parts or gases might be protected by a quick-acting flame-
endanger the personnel working on or sensitive safeguard which will auto-
near the oven, internal or external pro- matically shut off the fuel supply in
tecting means shall be provided in the case of burner failure.
form of heavily constructed shields or (12)–(14) [Reserved]
deflectors made from noncombustible (15) Indirect recirculating ovens.
material. (i)–(ii) [Reserved]
(c) Specifically exempted from the (iii) Duct systems (in ovens) oper-
provisions of paragraph paragraph ating under pressure shall be tested for
(l)(8)(viii) of this section are heating tightness in the initial starting of the
systems on ovens in which the fuel is oven and also at intervals not farther
admitted only to enclosed spaces which apart than 6 months.
shall have been tested to prove that [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
their construction will resist repeated FR 49765, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7,
explosions without deformation are ex- 1978; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996]
empt from the requirements of para-
graph (l)(8)(viii) (a) and (b) of this sec- § 1910.264 Laundry machinery and op-
tion. erations.
(ix)–(x) [Reserved] (a) [Reserved]
716
(b) General requirements. This section quirements for full initial pressure.
applies to moving parts of equipment The relief or safety valve shall be lo-
used in laundries and to conditions pe- cated adjacent to, or as close as pos-
culiar to this industry, with special sible to, the reducing valve. Proper
reference to the point of operation of protection shall be provided to prevent
laundry machines. This section does injury or damage caused by fluid escap-
not apply to dry-cleaning operations. ing from relief or safety valves if vent-
(c) Point-of-operation guards—(1) ed to the atmosphere. The vents shall
Washroom machines. be of ample size and as short and direct
(i) [Reserved] as possible. The combined discharge ca-
(ii) Washing machine. pacity of the relief valves shall be such
(a) [Reserved] that the pressure rating of the lower-
(b) Each washing machine shall be pressure piping and equipment will not
provided with means for holding open be exceeded if the reducing valve sticks
the doors or covers of inner and outer or fails to open.
cylinders or shells while being loaded (d) Operating rules—(1) General.
or unloaded. (i)–(ii) [Reserved]
(2) Starching and drying machines. (iii) Markers. Markers and others
(i)–(ii) [Reserved] handling soiled clothes shall be warned
(iii) Drying tumbler. against touching the eyes, mouth, or
(a) [Reserved] any part of the body on which the skin
(b) Each drying tumbler shall be pro- has been broken by a scratch or abra-
vided with means for holding open the sion; and they shall be cautioned not to
doors or covers of inner and outer cyl- touch or eat food until their hands
inders or shells while being loaded or have been thoroughly washed.
unloaded. (iv) [Reserved]
(iv) Shaker (clothes tumbler). (v) Instruction of employees. Employ-
(a) through (b)(1) [Reserved] ees shall be properly instructed as to
(2) Each shaker or clothes tumbler of the hazards of their work and be in-
the double-cylinder type shall be pro- structed in safe practices, by bulletins,
vided with means for holding open the printed rules, and verbal instructions.
doors or covers of inner and outer cyl- (2) Mechanical—(i) Safety guards. (a)
inders or shells while being loaded or No safeguard, safety appliance, or de-
unloaded. vice attached to, or forming an inte-
(v) Exception. Provisions of paragraph gral part of any machinery shall be re-
(c)(2) (iii), (iv)(a)(1), and (iv)(b) of this moved or made ineffective except for
section shall not apply to shakeout or the purpose of making immediate re-
conditioning tumblers where the pairs or adjustments. Any such safe-
clothes are loaded into the open end of guard, safety appliance, or device re-
the revolving cylinder and are auto- moved or made ineffective during the
matically discharged out of the oppo- repair or adjustment of such machin-
site end. ery shall be replaced immediately upon
(3) [Reserved] the completion of such repairs or ad-
(4) Miscellaneous machines and equip- justments.
ment. (b) [Reserved]
(i)–(ii) [Reserved] [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
(iii) Steam pipes. (a) All steam pipes FR 49767, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7,
that are within 7 feet of the floor or 1978]
working platform, and with which the
worker may come into contact, shall § 1910.265 Sawmills.
be insulated or covered with a heat-re- (a) General requirements—Application.
sistive material or shall be otherwise This section includes safety require-
properly guarded. ments for sawmill operations includ-
(b) Where pressure-reducing valves ing, but not limited to, log and lumber
are used, one or more relief or safety handling, sawing, trimming, and
valves shall be provided on the low- planing; waste disposal; operation of
pressure side of the reducing valve, in dry kilns; finishing; shipping; storage;
case the piping or equipment on the yard and yard equipment; and for
low-pressure side does not meet the re- power tools and affiliated equipment
717
used in connection with such oper- knee to hold log firmly in place on car-
ations, but excluding the manufacture riage.
of plywood, cooperage, and veneer. (15) Drag saw. The term drag saw
(b) Definitions applicable to this sec- means a power-driven, reciprocating
tion—(1) A-frame. The term A-frame crosscut saw mounted on suitable
means a structure made of two inde- frame and used for bucking logs.
pendent columns fastened together at (16) Head block. The term head block
the top and separated at the bottom for means that part of a carriage which
stability. holds the log and upon which it rests.
(2) Annealing. The term annealing It generally consists of base, knee,
means heating then cooling to soften taper set, and mechanism.
and render less brittle. (17) Head rig. The term head rig
(3) Binder. The term binder means a means a combination of head saw and
chain, cable, rope, or other approved log carriage used for the initial break-
material used for binding loads. down of logs into timbers, cants, and
(4) Boom. The term boom means logs boards.
or timbers fastened together end to end (18) Hog. The term hog means a ma-
and used to contain floating logs. The chine for cutting or grinding slabs and
term includes enclosed logs. other coarse residue from the mill.
(5) Brow log. The term brow log means (19) Husk. The term husk means a
a log placed parallel to a roadway at a head saw framework on a circular mill.
landing or dump to protect vehicles (20) Industrial truck. The term indus-
while loading or unloading. trial truck means a mobile powerdriven
truck or tractor.
(6) Bunk. The term bunk means a
(21) Kiln tender. The term kiln tender
cross support for a load.
means the operator of a kiln.
(7) Cant. The term cant means a log
(22) Lift truck. The term lift truck
slabbed on one or more sides.
means an industrial truck used for lat-
(8) Carriage (log carriage). The term eral transportation and equipped with
carriage means a framework mounted a power-operated lifting device, usually
on wheels which runs on tracks or in in the form of forks, for piling or
grooves in a direction parallel to the unpiling lumber units or packages.
face of the saw, and which contains ap- (23) Live rolls. The term live rolls
paratus to hold a log securely and ad- means cylinders of wood or metal
vance it towards the saw. mounted on horizontal axes and ro-
(9) Carrier. The term carrier means an tated by power, which are used to con-
industrial truck so designed and convey slabs, lumber, and other wood
structed that it straddles the load to be products.
transported with mechanisms to pick (24) Loading boom. The term loading
up the load and support it during trans- boom means any structure projecting
portation. from a pivot point to guide a log when
(10) Chipper. The term chipper means lifted.
a machine which cuts material into (25) Log deck. The term Log deck
chips. means a platform in the sawmill on
(11) Chock (bunk block) (cheese block). which the logs remain until needed for
The terms chock, bunk block, and cheese sawing.
block mean a wedge that prevents logs (26) Lumber hauling truck. The term
or loads from moving. lumber hauling truck means an indus-
(12) Cold deck. The term cold deck trial truck, other than a lift truck or a
means a pile of logs stored for future carrier, used for the transport of lum-
removal. ber.
(13) Crotch lines. The term crotch lines (27) Log haul. The term log haul
means two short lines attached to a means a conveyor for transferring logs
hoisting line by a ring or shackle, the to mill.
lower ends being attached to loading (28) Package. The term package means
hooks. a unit of lumber.
(14) Dog (carriage dog). The term dog (29) Peavy. The term peavy means a
means a steel tooth, one or more of stout wooden handle fitted with a spike
which are attached to each carriage and hook and used for rolling logs.
718
(30) Pike pole. The term pike pole (46) Trestle. The term trestle means a
means a long pole whose end is shod braced framework of timbers, piles or
with a sharp pointed spike. steelwork for carrying a road or rail-
(31) Pitman rod. The term pitman rod road over a depression.
means connecting rod. (c) Building facilities, and isolated
(32) Resaw. The term resaw means equipment—(1) Safety factor. All build-
band, circular, or sash gang saws used ings, docks, tramways, walkways, log
to break down slabs, cants, or flitches dumps, and other structures shall be
into lumber. designed, constructed and maintained
(33) Running line. The term running so as to support the imposed load in ac-
line means any moving rope as distin- cordance with a safety factor.
guished from a stationary rope such as (2) Work areas. Work areas under
a guyline. mills shall be as evenly surfaced as
(34) Safety factor. The term safety fac- local conditions permit. They shall be
tor means a calculated reduction factor free from unnecessary obstructions and
which may be applied to laboratory provided with lighting facilities in ac-
test values to obtain safe working cordance with American National
stresses for wooden beams and other Standard for Industrial Lighting
mechanical members; ratio of breaking A11.1—1965, which is incorporated by
load to safe load. reference as specified in § 1910.6.
(35) Saw guide. The term saw guide (3) Floors. Flooring in buildings and
means a device for steadying a circular on ramps and walkways shall be con-
or bandsaw. structed and installed in accordance
(36) Setwork. The term setwork means with established principles of mechan-
a mechanism on a sawmill carriage ics and sound engineering practices.
which enables an operator to move the They shall be of adequate strength to
log into position for another cut. support the estimated or actual dead
and live loads acting on them with the
(37) Sorting gaps. The term sorting
resultant stress not exceeding the al-
gaps means the areas on a log pond en-
lowable stress for the material being
closed by boom sticks into which logs
used.
are sorted.
(i) [Reserved]
(38) Spreader wheel. The term spreader
(ii) Areas beneath floor openings. Areas
wheel means a metal wheel that sepa-
under floor openings shall, where prac-
rates the board from the log in back of
tical, be fenced off. When this is not
circular saws to prevent binding.
practical, they shall be plainly marked
(39) Splitter. The term splitter means a and telltales shall be installed to hang
knife-type, nonrotating spreader. over these areas.
(40) Sticker. The term sticker means a (iii) Floor maintenance. The flooring
strip of wood or other material used to of buildings, docks, and passageways
separate layers of lumber. shall be kept in good repair. When a
(41) Stiff boom. The term stiff boom hazardous condition develops that can-
means the anchored, stationary boom not be immediately repaired, the area
sticks which are tied together and on shall be guarded until adequate repairs
which boom men work. are made.
(42) Swifter. The term swifter is a (iv) Nonslip floors. Floors, footwalks,
means of tying boom sticks together to and passageways in the work area
prevent them from spreading while around machines or other places where
being towed. a person is required to stand or walk
(43) Telltale. The term telltale means a shall be provided with effective means
device used to serve as a warning for to minimize slipping.
overhead objects. (4) Walkways, docks, and platforms—(i)
(44) Top saw. The term top saw means Width. Walkways, docks, and platforms
the upper of two circular saws on a shall be of sufficient width to provide
head rig, both being on the same husk. adequate passage and working areas.
(45) Tramway. The term tramway (ii) Maintenance. Walkways shall be
means a way for trams, usually con- evenly floored and kept in good repair.
sisting of parallel tracks laid on wood- (iii) Docks. Docks and runways used
en beams. for the operation of lift trucks and
719
other vehicles shall have a substantial (v) Barriers and warning signs. Where
guard or shear timber except where a doorway opens upon a railroad track
loading and unloading are being per- or upon a tramway or dock over which
formed. vehicles travel, a barrier or other
(iv) Elevated walks. All elevated warning device shall be placed to pre-
walks, runways, or platforms, if 4 feet vent workmen from stepping into mov-
or more from the floor level, shall be ing traffic.
provided with a standard railing except (7) Air requirements. Ventilation shall
on loading or unloading sides of plat- be provided to supply adequate fresh
forms. If height exceeds 6 feet, a stand- healthful air to rooms, buildings, and
ard toe board also shall be provided to work areas.
prevent material from rolling or falling (8) Vats and tanks. All open vats and
off. tanks into which workmen could fall
(v) Elevated platforms. Where elevated shall be guarded.
platforms are used routinely on a daily (9) Lighting—(i) Adequacy. Illumina-
basis they shall be equipped with stair- tion shall be provided and designed to
ways or fixed ladders in accordance supply adequate general and local
with § 1910.27. lighting to rooms, buildings, and work
(vi) Hazardous locations. Where re- areas during the time of use.
quired, walkways and stairways with (ii) Effectiveness. Factors upon which
standard handrails shall be provided in the adequacy and effectiveness of illu-
elevated and hazardous locations. mination will be judged, include the
Where such passageways are over walk- following:
ways or work areas, standard toe (a) The quantity of light in foot-can-
boards shall be provided. dle intensity shall be sufficient for the
(5) Stairways—(i) Construction. Stair- work being done.
ways shall be constructed in accord- (b) The quality of the light shall be
ance with § 1910.24. such that it is free from glare, and has
(ii) Handrails. Stairways shall be pro- correct direction, diffusion, and dis-
vided with a standard handrail on at tribution.
least one side or on any open side.
(c) Shadows and extreme contrasts
Where stairs are more than four feet
shall be avoided or kept to a minimum.
wide there shall be a standard handrail
(10) [Reserved]
at each side, and where more than
eight feet wide, a third standard hand- (11) Hazard marking. Physical hazard
rail shall be erected in the center of marking shall be as specified in
the stairway. § 1910.144 of this part.
(iii) Lighting. All stairways shall be (12) [Reserved]
adequately lighted as prescribed in (13) Hydraulic systems. Means shall be
paragraph (c)(9) of this section. provided to block, chain, or otherwise
(6) Emergency exits including doors and secure equipment normally supported
fire escapes—(i) Opening. Doors shall by hydraulic pressure so as to provide
not open directly on or block a flight of for safe maintenance.
stairs, and shall swing in the direction (14) [Reserved]
of exit travel. (15) Gas piping and appliances. All gas
(ii) Identification. Exits shall be lo- piping and appliances shall be installed
cated and identified in a manner that in accordance with the American Na-
affords ready exit from all work areas. tional Standard Requirements for the
(iii) Swinging doors. All swinging Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas
doors shall be provided with windows; Piping Z21.30—1964, which is incor-
with one window for each section of porated by reference as specified in
double swinging doors. Such windows § 1910.6.
shall be of shatterproof or safety glass (16)–(17) [Reserved]
unless otherwise protected against (18) Conveyors—(i) Standards. Con-
breakage. struction, operation, and maintenance
(iv) Sliding doors. Where sliding doors of conveyors shall be in accordance
are used as exits, an inner door shall be with American National Standard
cut inside each of the main doors and B20.1—1957, which is incorporated by
arranged to open outward. reference as specified in § 1910.6.
720
(ii) Guarding. Spiked live rolls shall ation and immediate vicinities of ma-
be guarded. chines and work areas.
(19) Stationary tramways and trestles— (iii) Exhaust or conveyor systems. Each
(i) Foundations and walkways. Tram- woodworking machine that creates
ways and trestles shall have substan- dust, shavings, chips, or slivers shall be
tial mud sills or foundations which equipped with an exhaust or conveyor
shall be frequently inspected and kept system located and adjusted to remove
in repair. When vehicles are operated the maximum amount of refuse from
on tramways and trestles which are the point of operation and immediate
used for foot passage, traffic shall be vicinity.
controlled or a walkway with standard (iv) [Reserved]
handrails at the outer edge and shear (v) Dust chambers. Exhaust pipes shall
timber on the inner edge shall be pro- not discharge into an unconfined out-
vided. This walkway shall be wide side pile if uncontrolled fire or explo-
enough to allow adequate clearance to sion hazards are created. They may
vehicles. When walkways cross over empty into settling or dust chambers,
other thoroughfares, they shall be sol- designed to prevent the dust or refuse
idly fenced at the outer edge to a from entering any work area. Such
height of 42 inches over such thorough- chambers shall be constructed and op-
fares. erated to minimize the danger of fire
(ii) Clearance. Stationary tramways or dust explosion.
(vi) Hand removal of refuse. Provision
and trestles shall have a vertical clear-
for the daily removal of refuse shall be
ance of 22 feet over railroad rails. When
made in all operations not required to
constructed over carrier docks or
have an exhaust system or having
roads, they shall have a clearance of 6
refuse too heavy, bulky, or otherwise
feet above the driver’s foot rest on the
unsuitable to be handled by the ex-
carrier, and in no event shall this
haust system.
clearance be less than 12 feet from the
(21) Chippers—(i) Whole-log chippers.
roadway. In existing operations where
The feed system to the chipper shall be
it is impractical to obtain such clear-
arranged so the operator does not
ance, telltales, electric signals, signs
stand in direct line with the chipper
or other precautionary measures shall spout (hopper). The chipper spout shall
be installed. be enclosed to a height of not less than
(20) Blower, collecting, and exhaust sys- 36 inches from the floor or the opera-
tems—(i) Design, construction, and main- tor’s platform. A safety belt and life-
tenance. Blower collecting, and exhaust line shall be worn by workmen when
systems should be designed, con- working at or near the spout unless the
structed, and maintained in accordance spout is guarded. The lifeline shall be
with American National Standards short enough to prevent workers from
Z33.1—1961 (For the Installation of falling into the chipper.
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, (ii) Hogs. (a) Hog mills shall be so de-
Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con- signed and arranged that from no posi-
veying) and Z12.2—1962 (R1969) (Code tion on the rim of the chute shall the
for the Prevention of Dust Explosion in distance to the cutter knives be less
Woodworking and Wood Flour Manu- than 40 inches.
facturing Plants), which are incor- (b) Hog feed chutes shall be provided
porated by reference as specified in with suitable and approved baffles,
§ 1910.6. which shall minimize material from
(ii) Collecting systems. All mills con- being thrown from the mill.
taining one or more machines that cre- (c) Employees feeding hog mills shall
ate dust, shavings, chips, or slivers be provided with safety belts and lines
during a period of time equal to or unless guarded.
greater than one-fourth of the working (22) [Reserved]
day, shall be equipped with a collecting (23) Bins, bunkers, hoppers, and fuel
system. It may be either continuous or houses—(i) Guarding. Open bins, bunk-
automatic, and shall be of sufficient ers, and hoppers whose upper edges ex-
strength and capacity to enable it to tend less than 3 feet above working
remove such refuse from points of oper- level shall be equipped with standard
721
handrails and toe boards, or have their when 4 percent of the total number of
tops covered by a substantial grill or wires composing such rope are found to
grating with openings small enough to be broken in one lay.
prevent a man from falling through. (b) Wire rope removed from service
(ii) Use of wheeled equipment to load due to defects shall be plainly marked
bins. Where automotive or other or identified as being unfit for further
wheeled equipment is used to move ma- use on cranes, hoists, and other load-
terials into bins, bunkers, and hoppers, carrying devices.
adequate guard rails shall be installed (c) The ratio between the rope diame-
along each side of the runway, and a ter and the drum, block, sheave, or pul-
substantial bumper stop provided when ley tread diameter shall be such that
necessary. the rope will adjust itself to the bend
(iii) Exits, lighting, and safety devices. without excessive wear, deformation,
Fuel houses and bins shall have ade- or injury. In no case shall the safe
quate exits and lighting, and all nec- value of drums, blocks, sheaves, or pul-
essary safety devices shall be provided leys be reduced when replacing such
and shall be used by persons entering items unless compensating changes are
these structures. made for rope used and for safe loading
(iv) Walkways. Where needed, fuel limits.
houses and bins shall have a standard
(vi) Drums, sheaves, and pulleys.
railed platform or walkway near the
Drums, sheaves, and pulleys shall be
top.
smooth and free from surface defects
(24) Ropes, cables, slings, and chains—
liable to injure rope. Drums, sheaves,
(i) Safe usage. Ropes, cables, slings, and
or pulleys having eccentric bores or
chains shall be used in accordance with
cracked hubs, spokes, or flanges shall
safe use practices recommended by the
be removed from service.
manufacturer or within safe limits rec-
ommended by the equipment manufac- (vii) Connections. Connections, fit-
turer when used in conjunction with it. tings, fastenings, and other parts used
(ii) Hooks. No open hook shall be used in connection with ropes and cables
in rigging to lift any load where there shall be of good quality and of proper
is hazard from relieving the tension on size and strength, and shall be installed
the hook from the load or hook catch- in accordance with the manufacturer’s
ing or fouling. recommendations.
(iii) Work by qualified persons. Instal- (viii) Socketing, splicing, and seizing.
lation, inspection, maintenance, re- (a) Socketing, splicing, and seizing of
pair, and testing of ropes, cables, cables shall be performed only by
slings, and chains shall be done only by qualified persons.
persons qualified to do such work. (b) All eye splices shall be made in an
(iv) Slings. Proper storage shall be approved manner and wire rope thim-
provided for slings while not in use. bles of proper size shall be fitted in the
(v) Ropes or cables. (a) Wire rope or eye, except that in slings the use of
cable shall be inspected when installed thimbles shall be optional.
and once each week thereafter, when in (c) Wire rope clips attached with U-
use. It shall be removed from hoisting bolts shall have these bolts on the dead
or load-carrying service when kinked or short end of the rope. The U-bolt
or when one of the following conditions nuts shall be retightened immediately
exists: after initial load carrying use and at
(1) When three broken wires are frequent intervals thereafter.
found in one lay of 6 by 6 wire rope. (d) When a wedge socket-type fas-
(2) When six broken wires are found tening is used, the dead or short end of
in one lay of 6 by 19 wire rope. the cable shall be clipped with a U-bolt
(3) When nine broken wires are found or otherwise made secure against loos-
in one lay of 6 by 37 wire rope. ening.
(4) When eight broken wires are (e) Fittings. Hooks, shackles, rings,
found in one lay of 8 by 19 wire rope. pad eyes, and other fittings that show
(5) When marked corrosion appears. excessive wear or that have been bent,
(6) Wire rope of a type not described twisted, or otherwise damaged shall be
herein shall be removed from service removed from service.
722
(f) Running lines. Running lines of (iii) Blocking hoisting platform. Means
hoisting equipment located within 6 shall be provided to positively block
feet 6 inches of the ground or working the hoisting platform when employees
level shall be boxed off or otherwise must go beneath the stacker or
guarded, or the operating area shall be unstacker hoist.
restricted. (iv) Identifying controls. Every manu-
(g) Number of wraps on drum. There ally operated control switch shall be
shall be not less than two full wraps of properly identified and so located as to
hoisting cable on the drum of cranes be readily accessible to the operator.
and hoists at all times of operation. (v) Locking main control switches.
(h) Drum flanges. Drums shall have a Main control switches shall be so de-
flange at each end to prevent the cable signed that they can be locked in the
from slipping off. open position.
(i) Sheave guards. Bottom sheaves (vi) Guarding side openings. The
shall be protected by close fitting hoistway side openings at the top level
guards to prevent cable from jumping of the stacker and unstacker shall be
the sheave. protected by enclosures of standard
(j) Preventing abrasion. The reeving of railings.
a rope shall be so arranged as to mini- (vii) Guarding hoistway openings.
mize chafing or abrading while in use. When the hoist platform or top of the
(ix) Chains. (a) Chains used in load load is below the working platform, the
carrying service shall be inspected be- hoistway openings shall be guarded.
fore initial use and weekly thereafter. (viii) Guarding lower landing area. The
(b) Chain shall be normalized or an- lower landing area of stackers and
nealed periodically as recommended by unstackers shall be guarded by enclo-
the manufacturer. sures that prevent entrance to the area
or pit below the hoist platform. En-
(c) If at any time any 3-foot length of
trances should be protected by elec-
chain is found to have stretched one-
trically interlocked gates which, when
third the length of a link it shall be
open, will disconnect the power and set
discarded.
the hoist brakes. When the interlock is
(d) Bolts or nails shall not be placed
not installed, other positive means of
between two links to shorten or join
protecting the entrance shall be pro-
chains.
vided.
(e) Broken chains shall not be spliced (ix) Inspection. Every stacker and
by inserting a bolt between two links unstacker shall be inspected at fre-
with the head of the bolt and nut sus- quent intervals and all defective parts
taining the load, or by passing one link shall be immediately repaired or re-
through another and inserting a bolt or placed.
nail to hold it. (x) Cleaning pits. Safe means of en-
(x) Fiber rope. (a) Frozen fiber rope trance and exit shall be provided to
shall not be used in load carrying serv- permit cleaning of pits.
ice. (xi) Preventing entry to hazardous
(b) Fiber rope that has been subjected area. Where the return of trucks from
to acid or excessive heat shall not be unstacker to stacker is by mechanical
used for load carrying purposes. power or gravity, adequate signs, warn-
(c) Fiber rope shall be protected from ing devices, or barriers shall be erected
abrasion by padding where it is fas- to prevent entry into the hazardous
tened or drawn over square corners or area.
sharp or rough surfaces. (27) Lumber piling and storage—(i) Pile
(25) [Reserved] foundations. In stacking units of lum-
(26) Mechanical stackers and ber, pile foundations shall be designed
unstackers. and arranged to support maximum
(i) [Reserved] loads without sinking, sagging, or per-
(ii) Lumber lifting devices. Lumber lift- mitting the piles to topple. In unit
ing devices on all stackers shall be de- package piles, substantial bolsters or
signed and arranged so as to minimize unit separators shall be placed between
the possibility of lumber falling from each package directly over the stick-
such devices. ers.
723
(ii) Stacking dissimilar unit packages. Powered Industrial Trucks, B56.1—1969,
Long units of lumber shall not be which is incorporated by reference as
stacked upon shorter packages except specified in § 1910.6.
where a stable pile can be made with (v) Platform guard. Where the oper-
the use of package separators. ator is exposed to hazard from backing
(iii) Unstable piles. Piles of lumber the vehicle into objects, an approved
which have become unstable shall be platform guard shall be provided and so
immediately made safe, or the area arranged as to not impede exit of driv-
into which they might fall shall be er from vehicle.
fenced or barricaded and employees (vi) [Reserved]
prohibited from entering it. (vii) Operation in buildings. Vehicles
(iv) Stickers. Unit packages of lumber powered by internal combustion en-
shall be provided with stickers as nec- gines shall not operate in buildings un-
essary to insure stability under ordi- less the buildings are adequately venti-
nary operating conditions. lated.
(v) Sticker alignment. Stickers shall (viii) Load limits. No vehicle shall be
extend the full width of the package, operated with loads exceeding its safe
shall be uniformly spaced, and shall be load capacity.
aligned one above the other. Stickers (ix) Brakes. All vehicles shall be
may be lapped with a minimum over- equipped with brakes capable of hold-
lapping of 12 inches. Stickers shall not ing and controlling the vehicle and ca-
protrude more than 2 inches beyond pacity load upon any incline or grade
the sides of the package. over which they may be operated.
(vi) Pile height. The height of unit (x) [Reserved]
package piles shall be dependent on the (xi) Carriers. (a) Carriers shall be so
dimensions of the packages and shall designed and constructed that the op-
be such as to provide stability under erator’s field of vision shall not be un-
normal operating conditions. Adjacent necessarily restricted.
lumber piles may be tied together with (b) Carriers shall be provided with an
separators to increase stability. access ladder or equivalent.
(28) Lumber loading. Loads shall be (xii) Lumber hauling trucks. (a) On
built and secured to insure stability in trucks where movement of load on
transit. stopping would endanger the operator,
(29) Burners—(i) Guying. If the burner a substantial bulkhead shall be in-
stack is not self-supporting, it shall be stalled behind the operator’s seat. This
guyed or otherwise supported. shall extend to the top of the opera-
(ii) Runway. The conveyor runway to tor’s compartment.
the burner shall be equipped with a (b) Stakes, stake pockets, racks,
standard handrail. If the runway tighteners, and binders shall provide
crosses a roadway or thoroughfare, adequate means to secure the load
standard toe boards shall be provided against any movement during transit.
in addition. (c) Where rollers are used, at least
(30) Vehicles—(i) Scope. Vehicles shall two shall be equipped with locks which
include all mobile equipment normally shall be locked when supporting loads
used in sawmill, planing mill, storage, during transit.
shipping, and yard operations. (31) Traffic control and flow—(i) Haz-
(ii) Warning signals and spark arres- ardous crossings. Railroad tracks and
tors. All vehicles shall be equipped with other hazardous crossings shall be
audible warning signals and where plainly posted.
practicable shall have spark arrestors. (ii) Restricted overhead clearance. All
(iii) Lights. All vehicles operated in areas of restricted side or overhead
the dark or in poorly lighted areas clearance shall be plainly marked.
shall be equipped with head and tail (iii) Pickup and unloading points.
lights. Pickup and unloading points and paths
(iv) Overhead guard. All vehicles op- for lumber packages on conveyors and
erated in areas where overhead hazards transfers and other areas where accu-
exist shall be equipped with an ap- rate spotting is required, shall be
proved overhead guard. See American plainly marked and wheel stops pro-
National Standard Safety Code for vided where necessary.
724
(iv) Aisles, passageways, and roadways. (g) All mobile log handling machines
Aisles, passageways, and roadways shall be equipped with headlights and
shall be sufficiently wide to provide backup lights.
safe side clearance. One-way aisles may (h) Unloading devices shall be
be used for two-way traffic if suitable equipped with a horn or other plainly
turnouts are provided. audible signaling device.
(d) Log handling, sorting, and storage— (i) Movement of unloading equipment
(1) Log unloading methods, equipment, shall be coordinated by audible or hand
and facilities—(i) Unloading methods. (a) signals when operator’s vision is im-
Stakes and chocks which trip shall be paired or operating in the vicinity of
constructed in such manner that the other employees.
tripping mechanism that releases the (j) Wood pike poles shall be made of
stake or chocks is activated at the op- straight-grained, select material.
posite side of the load being tripped. Metal or conductive pike poles shall
(b) Binders on logs shall not be re- not be used around exposed energized
leased prior to securing with unloading electrical conductors. Defective, blunt,
lines or other unloading device. or dull pike poles shall not be used.
(c) Binders shall be released only (2) Log unloading and storage areas—
from the side on which the unloader (i) General. (a) Log dumps, booms,
operates, except when released by re- ponds, or storage areas used at night
mote control devices or except when shall be illuminated in accordance with
person making release is protected by the requirements of American National
racks or stanchions or other equivalent Standard A11.1–1965 (R–1970) Standard
means. Practice for Industrial Lighting, which
(d) Loads on which a binder is fouled is incorporated by reference as speci-
by the unloading machine shall have fied in § 1910.6.
an extra binder or metal band of equal
(b) Log unloading areas shall be ar-
strength placed around the load, or the
ranged and maintained to provide a
load shall be otherwise secured so the
safe working area.
fouled binder can be safely removed.
(ii) Unloading equipment and facilities. (c) Where skids are used, space ade-
(a) Machines used for hoisting, unload- quate to clear a man’s body shall be
ing, or lowering logs shall be equipped maintained between the top of the
with brakes capable of controlling or skids and the ground.
holding the maximum load in midair. (d) Signs prohibiting unauthorized
(b) The lifting cylinders of all hy- foot or vehicle traffic in log unloading
draulically operated log handling ma- and storage areas shall be posted.
chines shall be equipped with a positive (ii) Water log dumps. (a) Ungrounded
device for preventing the uncontrolled electrically powered hoists using
lowering of the load or forks in case of handheld remote control in grounded
a failure in the hydraulic system. locations, such as log dumps or mill log
(c) A limit switch shall be installed lifts, shall be actuated by circuits oper-
on powered log handling machines to ating at less than 50 volts to ground.
prevent the lift arms from traveling (b) Roadbeds at log dumps shall be of
too far in the event the control switch sufficient width and evenness to insure
is not released in time. safe operation of equipment.
(d) When forklift-type machines are (c) An adequate brow log or skid tim-
used to load trailers, a means of secur- bers or the equivalent shall be provided
ing the loading attachment to the fork where necessary. Railroad-type dumps,
shall be installed and used. when located where logs are dumped di-
(e) A-frames and similar log unload- rectly into water or where entire loads
ing devices shall have adequate height are lifted from vehicle, may be exempt-
to provide safe clearance for swinging ed providing such practice does not cre-
loads and to provide for adequate ate a hazardous exposure of personnel
crotch lines and spreader bar devices. or equipment.
(f) Log handling machines used to (d) Unloading lines shall be arranged
stack logs or lift loads above operator’s so that it is not necessary for the em-
head shall be equipped with adequate ployees to attach them from the pond
overhead protection. or dump side of the load except when
725
entire loads are lifted from the log- (j) Floating donkeys or other power-
transporting vehicle. driven machinery used on booms shall
(e) Unloading lines, crotch lines, or be placed on a raft or float with enough
equally effective means shall be ar- buoyancy to keep the deck well above
ranged and used in a manner to mini- water.
mize the possibility of any log from (k) All sorting gaps shall have a sub-
swinging or rolling back. stantial stiff boom on each side.
(f) When logs are unloaded with (iv) Pond boats and rafts. The applica-
peavys or similar manual methods, ble provisions of the Standard for Fire
means shall be provided and used that Protection for Motorcraft, NFPA No.
will minimize the danger from rolling 302—1968, which is incorporated by ref-
or swinging logs. erence as specified in § 1910.6, shall be
(g) Guardrails, walkways, and stand- complied with.
ard handrails shall be installed (a) Decks of pond boats shall be cov-
(h) Approved life rings (see: 46 CFR ered with nonslip material.
160.099 and 46 CFR 160.050) with line at- (b) Powered pond boats or rafts shall
tached and maintained to retain buoy- be provided with at least one approved
ancy shall be provided. fire extinguisher, and one lifering with
(iii) Log booms and ponds. (a) Walk- line attached.
ways and floats shall be installed and (c) Boat fuel shall be transported and
securely anchored to provide adequate stored in approved safety containers.
passageway for employees. Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of
approved.
(b) All regular boom sticks and foot
(d) Inspection, maintenance, and ven-
logs shall be reasonably straight, with
tilation of the bilge area shall be pro-
no protruding knots and bark, and
vided to prevent accumulation of high-
shall be capable of supporting, above
ly combustible materials.
the water line at either end, the weight
(e) Adequate ventilation shall be pro-
of an employee and equipment.
vided for the cabin area on enclosed
(c) Permanent cable swifters shall be
cabin-type boats to prevent accumula-
so arranged that it will not be nec-
tion of harmful gases or vapors.
essary to roll boom sticks in order to
(v) Dry deck storage. (a) Dry deck
attach or detach them.
storage areas shall be kept orderly and
(d) Periodic inspection of cable or shall be maintained in a condition
dogging lines shall be made to deter- which is conducive to safe operation of
mine when repair or removal from mobile equipment.
service is necessary. (b) Logs shall be stored in a safe and
(e) The banks of the log pond in the orderly manner, and roadways and
vicinity of the log haul shall be rein- traffic lanes shall be maintained at a
forced to prevent caving in. width adequate for safe travel of log
(f) Artificial log ponds shall be handling equipment.
drained, cleaned, and refilled when (c) Logs shall be arranged to mini-
unhealthy stagnation or pollution oc- mize the chance of accidentally rolling
curs. from the deck.
(g) Employees whose duties require (vi) Log hauls and slips. (a) Walkways
them to work from boats, floating logs, along log hauls shall have a standard
boom sticks, or walkways along or on handrail on the outer edge, and cleats
water shall be provided with and shall or other means to assure adequate
wear appropriate buoyant devices while footing and enable employees to walk
performing such duties. clear of the log chute.
(h) Stiff booms shall be two float logs (b) Log haul bull chains or cable shall
wide secured by boom chains or other be designed, installed, and maintained
connecting devices, and of a width ade- to provide adequate safety for the work
quate for the working needs. Walking need.
surfaces shall be free of loose material (c) Log haul gear and bull chain drive
and maintained in good repair. mechanism shall be guarded.
(i) Boom sticks shall be fastened to- (d) Substantial troughs for the return
gether with adequate crossties or cou- strand of log haul chains shall be pro-
plings. vided over passageways.
726
(e) Log haul controls shall be located (ii) Elevating ramp. If an elevating
and identified to operate from a posi- ramp or gate is used, it shall be pro-
tion where the operator will, at all vided with a safety chain, hook, or
times, be in the clear of logs, machin- other means of suspension while em-
ery, lines, and rigging. In operations ployees are underneath.
where control is by lever exposed to in- (iii) Area around barkers. The haz-
coming logs, the lever shall be ar- ardous area around ring barkers and
ranged to operate the log haul only their conveyors shall be fenced off or
when moved toward the log slip or to- posted as a prohibited area for unau-
ward the log pond. thorized persons.
(f) A positive stop shall be installed (iv) Enclosing hydraulic barkers. Hy-
on all log hauls to prevent logs from draulic barkers shall be enclosed with
traveling too far ahead in the mill. strong baffles at the inlet and outlet.
(g) Overhead protection shall be pro- The operator shall be protected by ade-
vided for employees working below logs quate safety glass or equivalent.
being moved to the log deck. (v) Holddown rolls. Holddown rolls
(h) Log wells shall be provided with shall be installed at the infeed and
safeguards to minimize the possibility outfeed sections of mechanical ring
of logs rolling back into well from log barkers to control the movement of
deck. logs.
(3) Log decks—(i) Access. Safe access (e) Log breakdown and related machin-
to the head rig shall be provided. ery and facilities—(1) Log carriages and
(ii) Stops. Log decks shall be provided carriage runways—(i) Bumpers. A sub-
with adequate stops, chains, or other stantial stop or bumper with adequate
safeguards to prevent logs from rolling shock-absorptive qualities shall be in-
down the deck onto the carriage or its stalled at each end of the carriage run-
runway. way.
(iii) Barricade. A barricade or other (ii) Footing. Rider-type carriages
positive stop of sufficient strength to shall be floored to provide secure foot-
stop any log shall be erected between ing and a firm working platform for
the sawyer’s stand and the log deck. the block setter.
(iv) Loose chains. Loose chains from (iii) Sheave housing. Sheaves on rope-
overhead canting devices or other driven carriages shall be guarded at
equipment shall not be allowed to hang floor line with substantial housings.
over the log deck in such manner as to (iv) Carriage control. A positive means
strike employees. shall be provided to prevent unintended
(v) Swing saws. Swing saws on log movement of the carriage. This may
decks shall be equipped with a barri- involve a control locking device, a car-
cade and stops for protection of em- riage tie-down, or both.
ployees who may be on the opposite (v) Barriers and warning signs. A bar-
side of the log haul chute. rier shall be provided to prevent em-
(vi) Drag saws. Where reciprocating ployees from entering the space nec-
log cutoff saws (drag saws) are pro- essary for travel of the carriage, with
vided, they shall not project into walk- headblocks fully receded, for the full
way or aisle. length and extreme ends of carriage
(vii) Circular cutoff saws. Circular log runways. Warning signs shall be posted
bucking or cutoff saws shall be so lo- at possible entry points to this area.
cated and guarded as to allow safe en- (vi) Overhead clearance. For a rider-
trance to and exit from the building. type carriage adequate overhead clear
(viii) Entrance doorway. Where the space above the carriage deck shall be
cutoff saw partially blocks the en- provided for the full carriage runway
trance from the log haul runway, the length.
entrance shall be guarded. (vii) Sweeping devices. Carriage track
(4) Mechanical barkers—(i) Rotary sweeping devices shall be used to keep
barkers. Rotary barking devices shall track rails clear of debris.
be so guarded as to protect employees (viii) Dogs. Dogging devices shall be
from flying chips, bark, or other extra- adequate to secure logs, cants, or
neous material. boards, during sawing operations.
727
(2) Head saws—(i) Band head saws. (a) suitable device shall be placed so as to
Band head saws shall not be operated protect the sawyer from flying par-
at speeds in excess of those rec- ticles.
ommended by the manufacturer (d) All circular sawmills where live
(b) Band head saws shall be thor- rolls are not used behind the head saw
oughly inspected for cracks, splits, bro- shall be equipped with a spreader wheel
ken teeth, and other defects. A band- or splitter.
saw with a crack greater than one- (iv) Twin circular head saws. Twin cir-
tenth the width of the saw shall not be cular head saws rigs such as scrag saws
placed in service until width of saw is shall meet the specifications for single
reduced to eliminate crack, until circular head saws in paragraph
cracked section is removed, or crack (e)(2)(iii) of this section where applica-
development is stopped. ble.
(c) Provisions shall be made for alert- (v) Whole-log sash gang saws (Swedish
ing and warning employees before gangs). (a) Cranks, pitman rods, and
starting band head saws, and measures other moving parts shall be adequately
shall be taken to insure that all per- guarded.
sons are in the clear. (b) Feed rolls shall be enclosed by a
(ii) Bandsaw wheels. (a) No bandsaw cover over the top, front, and open ends
wheel shall be run at a peripheral speed except where guarded by location.
in excess of that recommended by the Drive mechanism to feed rolls shall be
manufacturer. The manufacturer’s rec- enclosed.
ommended maximum speed shall be (c) Carriage cradles of whole-log sash
stamped in plainly legible figures on gang saws (Swedish gangs), shall be of
some portion of the wheel. adequate height to prevent logs from
(b) Band head saw wheels shall be kicking out while being loaded.
subjected to monthly inspections. (3) Resaws—(i) Band resaws. Band
Hubs, spokes, rims, bolts, and rivets resaws shall meet the specifications for
shall be thoroughly examined in the band head saws as required by para-
course of such inspections. A loose or graph (e)(2)(i) of this section.
damaged hub, a rim crack, or loose (ii) Circular gang resaws. (a) Banks of
spokes shall make the wheel unfit for circular gang resaws shall be guarded
service. by a hood.
(c) Band wheels shall be completely (b) Circular gang resaws shall be pro-
encased or guarded, except for a por- vided with safety fingers or other
tion of the upper wheel immediately antikickback devices.
around the point where the blade (c) Circular gang resaws shall not be
leaves the wheel, to permit operator to operated at speeds exceeding those rec-
observe movement of equipment. Nec- ommended by the manufacturer.
essary ventilating and observation (d) [Reserved]
ports may be permitted. Substantial (e) Feed rolls shall be guarded.
doors or gates are allowed for repair, (f) Each circular gang resaw, except
lubrication, and saw changes; such self-feed saws with a live roll or wheel
doors or gates shall be closed securely at back of saw, shall be provided with
during operation. Band head rigs shall spreaders.
be equipped with a saw catcher or (iii) Sash gang resaws. Sash gang
guard of substantial construction. resaws shall meet the safety specifica-
(iii) Single circular head saws. (a) Cir- tions of whole-log sash gang saws in ac-
cular head saws shall not be operated cordance with the requirements of
at speeds in excess of those specified by paragraph (e)(2)(v) of this section.
the manufacturer. Maximum speed (4) Trimmer saws—(i) Maximum speed.
shall be etched on the saw. Trimmer saws shall not be run at pe-
(b) Circular head saws shall be ripheral speeds in excess of those rec-
equipped with safety guides which can ommended by the manufacturer.
be readily adjusted without use of hand (ii) Guards. (a) Trimmer saws shall be
tools. guarded in front by adequate baffles to
(c) The upper saw of a double circular protect against flying debris and they
mill shall be provided with a substan- shall be securely bolted to a substan-
tial hood or guard. A screen or other tial frame. These guards for a series of
728
saws shall be set as close to the top of structed upon solid foundations to pre-
the trimmer table as is practical. vent tracks from sagging
(b) The end saws on trimmer shall be (2) Passageways. A passageway shall
guarded. be provided to give adequate clearance
(c) The rear of trimmer saws shall on at least one side or in the center of
have a guard the full width of the saws end-piled kilns and on two sides of
and as much wider as practical. cross-piled kilns.
(iii) Safety stops. Automatic trimmer (3) Doors—(i) Main kiln doors. (a) Main
saws shall be provided with safety kiln doors shall be provided with a
stops or hangers to prevent saws from method of holding them open while
dropping on table. kiln is being loaded.
(5) Edgers—(i) Location. (a) Where (b) Counterweights on vertical lift
vertical arbor edger saws are located doors shall be boxed or otherwise
ahead of the main saw, they shall be so guarded.
(c) Adequate means shall be provided
guarded that an employee cannot con-
to firmly secure main doors, when they
tact any part of the edger saw from his
are disengaged from carriers and hang-
normal position.
ers, to prevent toppling.
(b) Edgers shall not be located in the (ii) Escape doors. (a) If operating pro-
main roll case behind the head saws. cedures require access to kilns, kilns
(ii) Guards. (a) The top and the open- shall be provided with escape doors
ings in end and side frames of edgers that operate easily from the inside,
shall be adequately guarded and gears swing in the direction of exit, and are
and chains shall be fully housed. located in or near the main door at the
Guards may be hinged or otherwise ar- end of the passageway.
ranged to permit oiling and the re- (b) Escape doors shall be of adequate
moval of saws. height and width to accommodate an
(b) All edgers shall be equipped with average size man.
pressure feed rolls. (4) Pits. Pits shall be well ventilated,
(c) Pressure feed rolls on edgers shall drained, and lighted, and shall be large
be guarded against accidental contact. enough to safely accommodate the kiln
(iii) Antikickback devices. (a) Edgers operator together with operating de-
shall be provided with safety fingers or vices such as valves, dampers, damper
other approved methods of preventing rods, and traps.
kickbacks or guarding against them. A (5) Steam mains. All high-pressure
barricade in line with the edger, if steam mains located in or adjacent to
properly fenced off, may be used if safe- an operating pit shall be covered with
ty fingers are not feasible to install. heat-insulating material.
(b) A controlling device shall be in- (6) Ladders. A fixed ladder, in accord-
stalled and located so that the operator ance with the requirements of § 1910.27
can stop the feed mechanism without or other adequate means shall be pro-
releasing the tension of the pressure vided to permit access to the roof.
rolls. Where controls and machinery are
(iv) Operating speed of live rolls. Live mounted on the roof, a permanent
rolls and tailing devices in back of stairway with standard handrail shall
edger shall operate at a speed not less be installed in accordance with the re-
than the speed of the edger feed rolls. quirements of § 1910.24.
(6) Planers—(i) Guards. (a) All cutting (7) Chocks. A means shall be provided
heads shall be guarded. for chocking or blocking cars.
(8) Kiln tender room. A warm room
(b) Side head hoods shall be of suffi-
shall be provided for kiln employees to
cient height to safeguard the head set-
stay in during cold weather after leav-
screw.
ing a hot kiln.
(c) Pressure feed rolls and ‘‘pine-
apples’’ shall be guarded. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
(d) Levers or controls shall be so ar- FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24,
1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 53 FR 12123,
ranged or guarded as to reduce the pos- Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR
sibility of accidental operation. 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998;
(f) Dry kilns and facilities—(1) Kiln 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec.
foundations. Dry kilns shall be con- 27, 2011]
729
§ 1910.266 Logging operations. tion are covered by other applicable

sections of part 1910.
(a) Table of contents. This paragraph
(c) Definitions applicable to this sec-
contains the list of paragraphs and ap-
tion.
pendices contained in this section.
Arch. An open-framed trailer or built-
a. Table of contents up framework used to suspend the lead-
b. Scope and application ing ends of trees or logs when they are
c. Definitions skidded.
d. General requirements
Backcut (felling cut). The final cut in
1. Personal protective equipment
2. First-aid kits
a felling operation.
3. Seat belts Ballistic nylon. A nylon fabric of high
4. Fire extinguishers tensile properties designed to provide
5. Environmental conditions protection from lacerations.
6. Work areas Buck. To cut a felled tree into logs.
7. Signaling and signal equipment Butt. The bottom of the felled part of
8. Overhead electric lines a tree.
9. Flammable and combustible liquids Cable yarding. The movement of
10. Explosives and blasting agents
felled trees or logs from the area where
e. Hand and portable powered tools
1. General requirements
they are felled to the landing on a sys-
2. Chain saws tem composed of a cable suspended
f. Machines from spars and/or towers. The trees or
1. General requirements logs may be either dragged across the
2. Machine operation ground on the cable or carried while
3. Protective structures suspended from the cable.
4. Overhead guards Chock. A block, often wedge shaped,
5. Machine access which is used to prevent movement;
6. Exhaust systems
7. Brakes
e.g., a log from rolling, a wheel from
8. Guarding turning.
g. Vehicles Choker. A sling used to encircle the
h. Tree harvesting end of a log for yarding. One end is
1. General requirements passed around the load, then through a
2. Manual felling loop eye, end fitting or other device at
3. Bucking and limbing the other end of the sling. The end that
4. Chipping passed through the end fitting or other
5. Yarding
6. Loading and unloading
device is then hooked to the lifting or
7. Transport pulling machine.
8. Storage Danger tree. A standing tree that pre-
i. Training sents a hazard to employees due to con-
j. Appendices ditions such as, but not limited to, de-
APPENDIX A—MINIMUM FIRST-AID SUPPLIES terioration or physical damage to the
APPENDIX B—MINIMUM FIRST-AID TRAINING root system, trunk, stem or limbs, and
APPENDIX C—CORRESPONDING ISO AGREE- the direction and lean of the tree.
MENTS
Debark. To remove bark from trees or
(b) Scope and application. (1) This logs.
standard establishes safety practices, Deck. A stack of trees or logs.
means, methods and operations for all Designated person. An employee who
types of logging, regardless of the end has the requisite knowledge, training
use of the wood. These types of logging and experience to perform specific du-
include, but are not limited to, pulp- ties.
wood and timber harvesting and the Domino felling. The partial cutting of
logging of sawlogs, veneer bolts, poles, multiple trees which are left standing
pilings and other forest products. This and then pushed over with a pusher
standard does not cover the construc- tree.
tion or use of cable yarding systems. Fell (fall). To cut down trees.
(2) This standard applies to all log- Feller (faller). An employee who fells
ging operations as defined by this sec- trees.
tion. Grounded. The placement of a compo-
(3) Hazards and working conditions nent of a machine on the ground or on
not specifically addressed by this sec- a device where it is firmly supported.
730
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, Slope (grade). The increase or de-
enclosed, or otherwise protected by crease in altitude over a horizontal dis-
means of suitable enclosures, covers, tance expressed as a percentage. For
casings, shields, troughs, railings, example, a change of altitude of 20 feet
screens, mats, or platforms, or by loca- (6 m) over a horizontal distance of 100
tion, to prevent injury. feet (30 m) is expressed as a 20 percent
Health care provider. A health care slope.
practitioner operating with the scope Snag. Any standing dead tree or por-
of his/her license, certificate, registration thereof.
tion or legally authorized practice. Spring pole. A tree, segment of a tree,
Landing. Any place where logs are limb, or sapling which is under stress
laid after being yarded, and before or tension due to the pressure or
transport from the work site. weight of another object.
Limbing. To cut branches off felled Tie down. Chain, cable, steel strips or
trees. fiber webbing and binders attached to a
Lodged tree (hung tree). A tree leaning truck, trailer or other conveyance as a
against another tree or object which means to secure loads and to prevent
prevents it from falling to the ground. them from shifting or moving when
they are being transported.
Log. A segment sawed or split from a
Undercut. A notch cut in a tree to
felled tree, such as, but not limited to,
guide the direction of the tree fall and
a section, bolt, or tree length.
to prevent splitting or kickback.
Logging operations. Operations associ- Vehicle. A car, bus, truck, trailer or
ated with felling and moving trees and semi-trailer owned, leased or rented by
logs from the stump to the point of de- the employer that is used for transpor-
livery, such as, but not limited to, tation of employees or movement of
marking danger trees and trees/logs to material.
be cut to length, felling, limbing, buck- Winching. The winding of cable or
ing, debarking, chipping, yarding, load- rope onto a spool or drum.
ing, unloading, storing, and trans- Yarding. The movement of logs from
porting machines, equipment and per- the place they are felled to a landing.
sonnel to, from and between logging (d) General requirements—(1) Personal
sites. protective equipment. (i) The employer
Machine. A piece of stationary or mo- shall assure that personal protective
bile equipment having a self-contained equipment, including any personal pro-
powerplant, that is operated off-road tective equipment provided by an em-
and used for the movement of material. ployee, is maintained in a serviceable
Machines include, but are not limited condition.
to, tractors, skidders, front-end load- (ii) The employer shall assure that
ers, scrapers, graders, bulldozers, swing personal protective equipment, includ-
yarde

CFR 2013 Title29 Vol5 Part1910 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

CFR 2013 Title29 Vol5 Part1910 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt.

PART 1910—OCCUPATIONAL Subpart F—Powered Platforms, Manlifts,

1910.122 Table of contents. OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

1910.251 Definitions. Subpart T—Commercial Diving Operations

Subpart R—Special Industries PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS

Subpart A—General § 1910.2 Definitions.

Milestones/ b. However, in determining eligibility for a

FIGURE D–1—SUGGESTED DESIGN FOR RUNGS

MINIMUM LADDER CLEARANCES

FIGURE D–4—LADDER FAR FROM WALL

than 4 inches, or portion of cage oppo-

FIGURE D–6—RELATIONSHIP OF FIXED LADDER

FIGURE D–8—CLEARANCE DIAGRAM FOR FIXED LADDER IN WELL

(3) Ladder extensions. The side rails of

FIGURE D–9—CAGES—SPECIAL APPLICATIONS.

Material involving the use of corrosive sub-

Uniformly distributed load ................................................ Not to exceed 25 pounds per

Guardrail .......................................................................... 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.

Uniformly distributed load ................................................ Not to exceed 25 pounds per

Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):

[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002] 1. Emergency action plan elements. The

§ 1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating above. Aerial equipment may be made

Dia D. inches Exhaust E Volume

Wheel dimension, inches

Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood

Wheel dimension, inches Volume of

Dia D, inches Volume ex-

Disc dia. inches Exhaust E Volume

Exhaust (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-

TABLE G–10—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS

150 small booth .................... 125–175

200 small booth .................... 150–250

(c) Hearing conservation program. (1)

107 ......................................................................... 90.5 590 ......................................................................... 102.8

TABLE D–1—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OCTAVE- Reference

This appendix is Mandatory

Age 32 .................. 6 5 7 10 14 Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)

Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from—

FIGURE G–11—RADIO-FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD WARNING SYMBOL

§ 1910.101 Compressed gases (general

Less than 3,000 CF In excess

1. Building or structure ............................... Wood frame construction 1 ........................ 10 25 50

Outdoors ................................................................. I ......................... I ......................... I ......................... I.

Square feet CFH Square feet CFH Square feet CFH

20 21,100 200 211,000 1,000 524,000

Glass or approved plastic ..................................................... 1 pt ................ 1 qt ................ 1 gal ............... 1 gal.

(vi) Flammable liquid warehouses or materials handing equipment shall be

(ii) Maximum storage. A maximum of rounded by a curb at least 6 inches

Tank vehicle and tank car: 1

mula, Flow Rate-CFM Air=53.632 A0.82. ASME Code; Par. U–200, U–

petroleum gas. These can be converted to DOT—As prescribed in 49 CFR

vided in paragraph (b)(19)(v) of this sec-

(c) Busy thoroughfares; not authorized after July 1, 1961.

TABLE H–33 (3) Container valves and accessories. (i)

Flow rate Flow rate

150 ....................................................................... 1,350 2,300 .................................................................... 12,630

CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ** CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**

Isopropylamine .................................... 75–31–0 5000 Perchloric Acid (concentration >60%

APPENDIX B TO § 1910.119—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

APPENDIX C TO § 1910.119—COMPLIANCE GUIDE- ment program requires a systematic ap-

Foot- 20 or fewer ............................. One.

Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy

Gas metal arc welding and less than 60 ............... 7